Lucent Technologies Computer Hardware R5Si Users Manual DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Maintenance And For R5vs/si

PDF DEFINITY ECS R5 Maintenance and for R5vs-si T E X T F I L E S

Definity ECS R5 Maintenance and for R5vs-si Definity ECS R5 Maintenance and for R5vs-si

R5SI to the manual 9dfe4cef-efc3-449e-af1c-937cc60d7a6c

: Lucent-Technologies Lucent-Technologies-Lucent-Technologies-Computer-Hardware-R5Si-Users-Manual-436271 lucent-technologies-lucent-technologies-computer-hardware-r5si-users-manual-436271 lucent-technologies pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 2643

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

DEFINITY®
Enterprise Communications Server
Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

555-230-123
Comcode 107959140
Issue 1
April 1997

Copyright  1997, Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was
complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is
subject to change.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system
by an unauthorized party, for example, persons other than your company’s employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your
company’s behalf. Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated
with your telecommunications system and, if toll fraud occurs, it can
result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications
services.
You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your
system, such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use. The system manager is also responsible for
reading all installation, instruction, and system administration documents provided with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken
to reduce that risk. Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this
product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through
or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any
charges that result from such unauthorized use.
Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention
If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need
technical support or assistance, call Technical Service Center Toll
Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643-2353.
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15: Class A Statement. This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Part 68: Network Registration Number. This equipment is registered
with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. It is identified by FCC registration number AS593M-13283-MF-E.
Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to
be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 Rules. This equipment returns
answer-supervision signals to the public switched network when:
• Answered by the called station
• Answered by the attendant
• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by
the CPE user
This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all DID calls
forwarded back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible
exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered
• A busy tone is received
• A reorder tone is received

Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio
noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Le Présent Appareil Nomérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la class
A préscrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté
par le ministére des Communications du Canada.
Trademarks
See the preface of this document.
Ordering Information
Call:
Lucent Technologies Publications Center
Voice 1 800 457-1235 International Voice 317 361-5353
Fax 1 800 457-1764
International Fax 317 361-5355
Write:
Lucent Technologies Publications Center
P.O. Box 4100
Crawfordsville, IN 47933
Order:
Document No. 555-230-123
Comcode 107959140
Issue 1, April 1997
For additional documents, refer to the section in “About This Document” entitled “Related Resources.”
You can be placed on a standing order list for this and other documents
you may need. Standing order will enable you to automatically receive
updated versions of individual documents or document sets, billed to
account information that you provide. For more information on standing orders, or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this document, contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center.
European Union Declaration of Conformity
The “CE” mark affixed to the DEFINITY® equipment described in
this book indicates that the equipment conforms to the following European Union (EU) Directives:
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC)
• Low Voltage (73/23/EEC)
• Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (TTE) i-CTR3 BRI
and i-CTR4 PRI
For more information on standards compliance, contact your local distributor.
Comments
To comment on this document offer, select the Comments button on
the main screen.
Acknowledgment
This document was prepared by Product Documentation Development,
Lucent Technologies, Denver, CO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page iii

Contents

1

2

3

4

Contents

iii

About This Book

xvii

■

General

xvii

■

Conventions Used in This Document

xviii

■

Organization

xix

■

Safety Precautions

xx

■

Security Issues

xxi

■

Standards Compliance

xxi

■

Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards

xxii

■

Trademarks and Service Marks

xxiii

■

Related Documents

xxiv

■

Federal Communications Commission Statement

xxv

Maintenance Architecture

1-1

■

Maintenance Objects

1-1

■

Alarm and Error Reporting

1-2

■

Maintenance Testing

1-2

■

Protocols

1-3

■

Service Codes

1-17

■

Facility Interface Codes

1-18

■

Multimedia Interface (MMI)

1-19

Circuit Packs and Power

2-1

■

Circuit Packs

2-1

■

Power

2-6

Management Terminals

3-1

■

General

3-1

■

Management Terminals

3-1

■

System Login Procedure

3-3

■

Switch-Based Bulletin Board

3-25

■

System Logoff Procedure

3-27

■

DEC VT220 Terminal

3-28

Initialization and Recovery

4-1

■

Reset System 1 (System Warm Start)

4-2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page iv

Reset System 2 (System Cold Start
Without Translations Loading)

4-2

Reset System 3 (System Cold Start
With Translations Loading)

4-3

■

Reset System 4 (System Reboot)

4-4

■

Reset System 5 (System Reboot and
Run All 24-Hour Tests)

4-5

Reset System Interchange (High or
Critical Reliability Systems Only)

4-7

■

Procedure for SPE-Down Mode

4-8

■

Procedure for Duplication Interface —
Processing Element Communication Down

4-11

■

■

■

5

6

Routine Maintenance Procedures

5-1

■

Suppress Alarm Origination [y]

5-1

■

Handling Control Circuit Packs

5-1

■

TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory)

5-4

■

Removing Power

5-4

■

Restoring Power

5-6

■

Troubleshooting Control Cabinet Power Units

5-9

■

Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later)

5-10

■

System Backup

5-14

■

Software Upgrade

5-19

■

Preventive Maintenance Procedures

5-36

■

System Features

5-37

■

Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems

5-62

■

Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

5-62

■

Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

5-69

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid

6-1

■

General

6-1

■

Reliability Options

6-2

■

Duplicated Hardware

6-4

■

Duplication Concepts

6-8

■

System Technician Commands for
High and Critical Reliability Systems

6-13

■

Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies

6-16

■

Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

6-18

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page v
■

■

7

8

Procedure for Installing/Replacing the
Inter-Cabinet Cable

6-31

Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance
Activities for System Testing

6-32

LED Interpretation

7-1

■

General

7-1

■

Processor and Maintenance Circuit
Pack LEDs

7-1

■

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs

7-3

■

Attendant Console LEDs

7-5

■

Cabinet Power Unit LEDs

7-5

■

Power Distribution Unit LEDs

7-5

■

Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs

7-5

Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids

8-1

■

busyout access-endpoint

8-1

■

busyout board

8-4

■

busyout cdr-link

8-8

■

busyout data-module

8-10

■

busyout journal-printer

8-13

■

busyout link

8-16

■

busyout mis

8-18

■

busyout modem-pool

8-20

■

busyout packet-control

8-23

■

busyout pms-link

8-25

■

busyout port

8-28

■

busyout pri-endpoint

8-31

■

busyout sp-link

8-33

■

busyout spe-standby

8-35

■

busyout station

8-38

■

busyout tdm

8-40

■

busyout tone-clock

8-43

■

busyout trunk

8-45

■

cancel hardware-group

8-48

■

change circuit-packs

8-50

■

change synchronization

8-55

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page vi
■

change system-parameters maintenance

8-59

■

clear audits

8-72

■

clear errors

8-74

■

clear interface

8-75

■

clear isdn-testcall

8-77

■

clear link

8-80

■

clear mst

8-81

■

clear pkt

8-82

■

clear port

8-84

■

copy update-file

8-85

■

disable administered-connection

8-87

■

disable mst

8-89

■

disable suspend-alm-orig

8-91

■

disable synchronization-switch

8-92

■

disable test-number

8-94

■

display alarms

8-95

■

display cabinet

8-105

■

display communication-interface

8-107

■

display disabled-tests

8-112

■

display errors

8-112

■

display events

8-124

■

display initcauses

8-126

■

display memory-configuration

8-132

■

display port

8-135

■

display synchronization

8-137

■

display system-parameters maintenance

8-140

■

display time

8-152

■

download update-file

8-154

■

enable administered-connection

8-160

■

enable mst

8-162

■

enable suspend-alm-orig

8-163

■

enable synchronization-switch

8-165

■

enable test-number

8-167

■

format card-mem

8-168

■

get vector

8-170

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page vii
■

list configuration

8-173

■

list config software-version

8-176

■

list disabled-mos

8-183

■

list history

8-185

■

list isdn-testcall

8-188

■

list marked-ports

8-191

■

list measurements

8-193

■

list mst

8-197

■

list suspend-alm-orig

8-230

■

list testcalls

8-231

■

mark port

8-238

■

monitor bcms

8-240

■

monitor health

8-246

■

monitor security-violations

8-250

■

monitor system

8-252

■

monitor traffic

8-260

■

monitor trunk

8-263

■

recycle carrier

8-266

■

refresh spe-standby

8-268

■

release access-endpoint

8-271

■

release board

8-274

■

release cdr-link

8-276

■

release data-module

8-279

■

release journal-printer

8-281

■

release link

8-284

■

release mis

8-286

■

release modem-pool

8-287

■

release packet-control

8-290

■

release pms-link

8-293

■

release port

8-295

■

release pri-endpoint

8-298

■

release sp-link

8-300

■

release spe-standby

8-302

■

release station

8-304

■

release tdm

8-307

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page viii
■

release tone-clock

8-310

■

release trunk

8-312

■

reset board

8-315

■

reset interface

8-318

■

reset maintenance

8-321

■

reset spe-standby

8-323

■

reset system

8-325

■

restore announcements

8-330

■

resume hardware-group

8-333

■

save announcements

8-336

■

save translation

8-340

■

set expansion-link

8-343

■

set options

8-345

■

set signaling-group

8-353

■

set synchronization

8-355

■

set tdm

8-357

■

set time

8-360

■

set tone-clock

8-364

■

set vector

8-367

■

status access-endpoint

8-372

■

status administered-connection

8-375

■

status attendant

8-378

■

status audits

8-380

■

status bri-port

8-390

■

status card-mem

8-402

■

status cdr-link

8-407

■

status cleared-alarm-notif

8-409

■

status conference

8-410

■

status data-module

8-451

■

status hardware-group

8-454

■

status health

8-456

■

status interface

8-460

■

status isdn-testcall

8-463

■

status journal-link

8-467

■

status link

8-469

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page ix
■

status logins

8-478

■

status mst

8-481

■

status packet-control

8-483

■

status periodic-scheduled

8-486

■

status pms-link

8-489

■

status pri-endpoint

8-491

■

status processor-channel

8-495

■

status signaling-group

8-498

■

status sp-link

8-502

■

status station

8-504

■

status synchronization

8-507

■

status system

8-509

■

status trunk

8-523

■

status tsc-administered

8-527

■

status tti

8-530

■

test access-endpoint

8-532

■

test alarms

8-535

■

test analog-testcall

8-545

■

test board

8-550

■

test card-mem

8-554

■

test cdr-link

8-559

■

test customer-alarm

8-562

■

test data-module

8-564

■

test ds1-loop

8-568

■

test duplication-interface

8-573

■

test eda-external-device-alrm

8-576

■

test environment

8-580

■

test hardware-group

8-584

■

test inads-link

8-595

■

test interface

8-597

■

test isdn-testcall

8-601

■

test journal-printer

8-605

■

test led

8-608

■

test link

8-610

■

test maintenance

8-613

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page x

9

■

test memory

8-616

■

test modem-pool

8-621

■

test network-control

8-624

■

test packet-control

8-628

■

test pkt

8-632

■

test pms-link

8-636

■

test port

8-640

■

test pri-endpoint

8-643

■

test processor

8-646

■

test shadow-link

8-650

■

test signaling-group

8-654

■

test sp-link

8-657

■

test spe-standby

8-659

■

test station

8-663

■

test synchronization

8-667

■

test tdm

8-670

■

test tone-clock

8-674

■

test trunk

8-677

■

test tsc-administered

8-681

■

upgrade software

8-684

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction

9-1

■

General

9-1

■

Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance

9-2

■

Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction

9-3

■

Packet Bus

9-3

■

Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus

9-5

■

Maintenance of the Packet Bus

9-7

■

The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

9-10

■

Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

9-19

■

Packet Bus Fault Correction

9-24

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures

10-1

■

Escalation Procedures

10-1

■

Cabling Precautions

10-1

■

12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)

10-3

■

ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

10-7

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page xi
■

AC-POWER

10-8

■

ADM-CONN (Administered Connection)

10-16

■

ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)

10-20

■

ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

10-21

■

ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit Pack)

10-28

■

ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)

10-29

■

ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

10-30

■

ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

10-37

■

ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT)

10-44

■

ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

10-45

■

ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack)

10-64

■

ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line),
ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

10-65

■

ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

10-86

■

ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

10-107

■

ANNOUNCE (Announce)

10-122

■

ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board)

10-127

■

ASAI-EPT

10-129

■

ASAI-PT

10-137

■

ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot)

10-147

■

BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

10-148

■

BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI)

10-157

■

BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port),
ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

10-158

■

BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

10-186

■

CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

10-224

■

CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity)

10-240

■

CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

10-243

■

CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit)
for AC-Powered Systems

10-262

CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit)
for DC-Powered Systems

10-281

■

CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack)

10-298

■

CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

10-299

■

CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack)

10-306

■

CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

10-307

■

CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

10-328

■

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page xii
■

CONFIG (System Configuration)

10-361

■

CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)

10-374

■

DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

10-377

■

DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

10-382

■

DATA-CON (Network Control Driver)

10-412

■

DAT-LINE (Data Line)

10-414

■

DC-POWER

10-422

■

DETR-BD

10-426

■

DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack)

10-427

■

DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

10-428

■

DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

10-443

■

DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack)

10-465

■

DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

10-466

■

DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

10-498

■

DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD
(DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE]

10-512

■

DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

10-513

■

DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY)

10-527

■

DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

10-528

■

DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack)

10-600

■

DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

10-601

■

DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

10-607

■

E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board)

10-624

■

E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot)

10-626

■

E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

10-627

■

EMG-XFER

10-637

■

EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit)

10-641

■

ERR-LOG (Error Log)

10-643

■

ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

10-645

■

EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

10-652

■

EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link)

10-706

■

EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

10-708

■

EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

10-713

■

FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

10-718

■

GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone
Detector Port (CPTR)]

10-734

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page xiii
■

HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack)

10-735

■

HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

10-736

■

INADS (INADS Link)

10-768

■

ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

10-772

■

ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

10-779

■

ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

10-788

■

ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

10-818

■

LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation)

10-845

■

JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link)

10-848

■

LGATE-AJ

10-849

■

LGATE-BD

10-849

■

LGATE-PT

10-849

■

MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

10-850

■

MEM-BD (Memory)

10-868

■

MEMORY

10-874

■

MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack)

10-875

■

MET-LINE (MET Line)

10-876

■

MIS (Management Information System)

10-906

■

MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit Pack)

10-907

■

MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

10-908

■

MMI-BD

10-929

■

MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level)

10-938

■

MMI-PT

10-941

■

MMI-SYNC

10-947

■

M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

10-949

■

M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack)

10-962

■

M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital
Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

10-963

■

M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)

10-978

■

OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

10-983

■

PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

10-1001

■

PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

10-1025

■

PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

10-1044

■

PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

10-1051

■

PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)

10-1068

■

PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

10-1073

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page xiv
■

PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

10-1081

■

PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

10-1092

■

PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

10-1107

■

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)

10-1116

■

POWER (Battery & Battery Charger)
for AC-Powered Systems

10-1122

POWER (Battery & Battery Charger
for DC-Powered Systems

10-1134

PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor
[TN790 RISC Systems])

10-1138

■

PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

10-1153

■

PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

10-1165

■

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

10-1174

■

PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits)

10-1181

■

PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

10-1182

■

PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

10-1189

■

RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

10-1197

■

S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack)

10-1208

■

S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

10-1209

■

SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link Maintenance)

10-1226

■

SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

10-1227

■

SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

10-1234

■

SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)

10-1251

■

STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

10-1255

■

STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

10-1294

■

SVC-SLOT (Service Slot)

10-1308

■

SW-CTL (Switch Control)

10-1310

■

SYNC (Synchronization)

10-1324

■

SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

10-1337

■

SYSTEM (System)

10-1343

■

TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

10-1345

■

TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)

10-1377

■

TDMODULE (Trunk Data Module)

10-1388

■

TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

10-1389

■

TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

10-1410

■

TIE-BD (Tie Trunk Circuit Pack)

10-1424

■

■

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Contents

Page xv

IN

■

TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

10-1425

■

TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

10-1448

■

TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

10-1480

■

TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

10-1501

■

TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary
Signaling Connections)

10-1514

■

TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

10-1522

■

UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

10-1527

■

VC-BD

10-1636

■

VC-DSPPT

10-1640

■

VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner
DSP Port Level)

10-1649

■

VC-SUMPT

10-1652

■

WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

10-1657

■

XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

10-1666

Index

IN-1

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
General

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xvii

About This Book

General
This book has the information needed to monitor, test, and maintain DEFINITY®
Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Systems and covers many of the
faults and troubles that can occur in the system. Most maintenance requirements
are simple procedures due to the modular, self-testing nature of the system.
This document covers information related to DEFINITY ECS Release 5, and
includes all incremental releases up to and including Release 5.4. For details
about changes for Release 5.4, refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications
Server Release 5.4.0, Change Description, 555-230-471.
Simple, traditional troubleshooting methods are sometimes sufficient to locate
and clear faults. The traditional methods include terminal substitution, visual
inspections, continuity checks, and clarification of operating procedures with
users.
The information in this book is intended for use by:
■

A maintenance technician dispatched to a DEFINITY System site in
response to a trouble alarm or a user trouble report,

■

A maintenance technician located at a remote maintenance facility, or

■

The user’s assigned maintenance technician. The technician is expected
to have a knowledge of telecommunications fundamentals and of the
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Systems to the
extent that the procedures in this book can be performed, in most cases,
without assistance.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Conventions Used in This Document

Page xviii

Each DEFINITY System has a user-designated System Manager who is
responsible for administration of the system. This person’s duties and
capabilities are covered in the following books:
■

DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 System
Management, 555-230-500

■

DEFINITY Communications System Release 5 Traffic Reports

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration
and Feature Description

The maintenance technician should work closely with the user’s System
Manager.
This book is not intended to solve all levels of troubles. It is limited to troubles that
can be solved by using the Alarm Log, Error Log, trouble-clearing procedures,
maintenance tests, and traditional troubleshooting methods. If the trouble still has
not been resolved, it the responsibility of the maintenance technician to escalate
the problem to a higher level of technical support. Escalation should conform to
the procedures in the Technical and Administration Escalation Plan.
When features, screen displays, equipment, or operations differ between system
types, for example, Generic 3 V4, Release 5si, or Release 5si + memory, these
differences are clearly identified by use of the following indicators: “[G3V4]”,
“[R5si]”, or “[R5 si + memory].”

Conventions Used in This Document
The following conventions are used in this document:
■

DEFINITY Systems are called G3V4, Release 5; Release 5vs, Release 5si,
and Release 5si + memory.

■

All occurrences of G3siV4, G3siV4+m, Release 5si, and Release 5 si +
memory are called Release 5si unless a specific configuration is required
to differentiate among product offerings.

■

All occurrences of R5 without a suffix following the “5” refer to Release 5si,
and Release 5si + memory.

■

A component of a DEFINITY System, such as a circuit pack, occurring
without a reference to any specific system, is part of G3V4 or Release 5.

■

The term “ASAI” is synonymous with the newer CallVisor ASAI.

■

All physical dimensions in this book are in English (Foot Pound Second)
(FPS) followed by the metric Centimeter Grams Second (CGS) in
parenthesis. Wire gauge measurements are in AWG followed by the
diameter in millimeters in parenthesis.

■

Admonishments used in this book are as follows:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
Organization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xix

! CAUTION:
This sign is used to indicate possible harm to software, possible loss
of data, or possible service interuptions.

!

WARNING:
This sign is used where there is possible harm to hardware or
equipment.

! DANGER:
This sign is used to indicate possible harm or injury to people.

Organization
This book is organized into two volumes: volume 1 contains Chapters 1 through
9, and volume 2 contains Chapter 10.
■

Chapter 1, ‘‘Maintenance Architecture’’ describes the system’s design
and maintenance strategy.

■

Chapter 2, ‘‘Circuit Packs and Power’’ describes DEFINITY circuit
packs. It also explains how power is supplied to the system.

■

Chapter 3, ‘‘Management Terminals’’ describes the various
management terminals that can be used on the system and how to set up
the terminals.

■

Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’ describes the various reset
and reboot processes, and discusses how these processes are used to
perform maintenance and to recover systems or subsystems that are out
of service.

■

Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ discusses common
maintenance tasks, including: removing and installing circuit packs,
removing and restoring power, performing system backups, upgrading
software, and various testing and troubleshooting procedures.

■

Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ provides detailed
hardware and functional descriptions as well as additional repair strategy
(in addition to the procedures provided in this document) for Standard,
High, and Critical Reliability systems.

■

Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’ is a quick reference to interpreting
circuit pack LEDs.

■

Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ has
the maintenance commands, and explains how to use these commands
using the management terminal. Specific command syntax plus typical
forms and display output are also given in the chapter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
Safety Precautions

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xx

■

Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ describes
Pack Bus maintenance and the interactions of the bus with Packet circuit
packs. The chapter also discusses how Packet Bus faults are isolated and
corrected.

■

Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ has specific
troubleshooting and repair instructions for every component in the system.
The chapter contains repair procedures for system-alarmed and userreported troubles. For each MO, a table lists the alarm level, hardware
error associated with the MO, and the associated test that caused the
error. The test sequences and the specific command line entry required to
run the tests are given and a brief description of each test. Explanations of
error codes associated with each test are given, as are specific
maintenance procedures to be used to resolve each problem.

Each MO is described in a separate section of Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’. The individual sections are labeled with the name of the MO
exactly as the name appears in the Alarm Log; for example, MAINT (for
Maintenance circuit pack). The only exception is the MO name for Common Port
Circuit Pack maintenance which is XXX-BD. The XXX-BD section contains a set of
common tests used by certain circuit packs listed in the section. The common
portion of these circuit packs is the generic hardware that interfaces with the
Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus.
Lucent Technologies listens carefully to its readers. The organization of this book
is a direct result of user feedback. Your feedback is important. Use the feedback
form at the back of this book to send your comments to Lucent Technologies.

Safety Precautions
When performing maintenance or translation procedures on the system, users
must observe certain precautions. Observe all caution, warning, and danger
statements to prevent loss of service, possible equipment damage, and possible
personal injury. In addition, the following precautions regarding electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and static electricity must be observed:
Electromagnetic Interference: This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. Electromagnetic fields radiating from the switch
may cause noise in the customer’s equipment. If the equipment is not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction book, radio interference may result.

! WARNING:
To maintain the EMI integrity of the system, maintenance personnel must
ensure that all cabinet panels, covers, and so forth, are firmly secured
before leaving the customer’s premises.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
Security Issues

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xxi

Static Electricity: To prevent or reduce electrostatic discharge (ESD),
maintenance personnel must always attach wrist grounding straps before
working on switch components or handling circuit packs.

! CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge can damage or destroy circuit packs containing
integrated circuits (ICs).
The ESD wrist strap, cable assembly, and spare fuses are packed in a plastic
bag and placed in the top of the system cabinet. Use the ESD wrist strap when
troubleshooting, performing maintenance, or handling any circuit packs
associated with the system.

Class 1 Laser Device
The DEFINITY ECS contains a Class 1 Laser device if single-mode fiber optic
cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network (EPN). The LASER
device operates within the following parameters:
Power Output: -5 dBm
Wavelength: 1310 nm
Mode Field Diameter: 8.8 microns

! DANGER:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Contact your Lucent Technolgies representative for more information.

Security Issues
A number of matters concerning maintenance are affected by security issues.
For details, be sure to consult the GBCS Products Security Handbook,
555-025-600.

! CAUTION:
Login security is an attribute of the DEFINITY® Enterprise Communications
Server (ECS) Release 5 software.

Standards Compliance
The equipment presented in this document complies with the following (as
appropriate):
■

ITU-T (Formerly CCITT)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards
■

ECMA

■

ETSI

■

IPNS

■

DPNSS

■

National ISDN-1

■

National ISDN-2

■

ISO-9000

■

ANSI

■

FCC Part 15 and Part 68

■

EN55022

■

EN50081

■

EN50082

■

CISPR22

■

Australia AS3548 (AS/NZ3548)

■

Australia AS3260

■

IEC 825

■

IEC950

■

UL 1459

■

UL1950

■

CSA C222 Number 225

■

TS001

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xxii

Electromagnetic Compatibility
Standards
This product complies with and conforms to the following:
■

Limits and Methods of Measurements of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment, EN55022
(CISPR22), 1993

■

EN50082-1, European Generic Immunity Standard

■

FCC Parts 15 and 68

■

Australia AS3548
NOTE:
The system conforms to Class A (industrial) equipment. Voice
terminals meet Class B requirements.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Trademarks and Service Marks

Page xxiii

■

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2

■

Radiated radio frequency field IEC 1000-4-3

■

Electrical Fast Transient IEC 1000-4-4

■

Lightning effects IEC 1000-4-5

■

Conducted radio frequency IEC 1000-4-6

■

Mains frequency magnetic field IEC 1000-4-8

■

Low frequency mains disturbance

The system conforms to the following:
■

Electromagnetic compatibility General Immunity Standard, part 1;
residential, commercial, light industry, EN50082-1, CENELEC, 1991

■

Issue 1 (1984) and Issue 2 (1992), Electrostatic discharge immunity
requirements (EN55024, Part 2) IEC 1000-4-2

■

Radiated radio frequency field immunity requirements IEC 1000-4-3

■

Electrical fast transient/burst immunity requirements IEC 1000-4-4

European Union Standards
Lucent Technologies Business Communications Systems declares that the
DEFINITY equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” mark conforms
to the European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives.
The “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark indicates conformance to the European
Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC) Low Voltage
Directive (73/23/EEC) and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment (TTE)
Directive (91/263/EEC) and with i-CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and i-CTR4
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) as applicable.
The “CE” mark is applied to the following Release 5 products:
■

Global AC powered Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC)

■

DC powered Multi-Carrier Cabinet (MCC) with 25-Hz ring generator

■

AC powered Single-Carrier Cabinet (SCC) with 25-Hz ring generator

■

AC powered Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet (CSCC) with 25-Hz ring
generator

■

Enhanced DC Power System

Trademarks and Service Marks
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies:
■

5ESS™, 4ESS™

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Related Documents

Page xxiv

■

AUDIX®

■

Callvisor®

■

Callmaster®

■

CentreVu™

■
■

CONVERSANT®
DEFINITY®

■

DIMENSION®
MERLIN®

■

VOICE POWER®

■

The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of AT&T:
■
ACCUNET®
■
■
■
■

DATAPHONE®
MEGACOM®
MULTIQUEST®
TELESEER®

The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies:
■
Ascend® (registered trademark of Ascend, Inc.)
■
■

Audichron® (registered trademark of the Audichron Company)
MS-DOS® (registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation)

■

MicroChannel® (registered trademark of IBM Systems)
MULTIQUEST® (registered trademark of Telecommunications Service)
PagePac® (trademark of the Dracon Division of the Harris Corporation)

■

UNIX® (trademark of the Novell Corporation)

■
■

Related Documents
The following books are useful for system-related information:
■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 System
Description Pocket Reference, 555-230-207

■

DEFINITY Wireless Business System Users Guide, 555-232-105

■

DEFINITY Wireless Business System Installation and Test Guide,
555-232-102

■

DEFINITY Wireless Business Systems System Interface, 555-232-108

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
About This Book
Federal Communications Commission Statement

Issue 1
April 1997
Page xxv

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Installation and
Test for Multi-Carrier Cabinets, 555-230-112

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Installation and
Test for Single-Carrier Cabinets, 555-230-894

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration
and Feature Desription, 555-230-522

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Upgrades and
Additions for R5vs/si, 555-230-120

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Upgrades and
Additions for R5r, 555-230-121

■

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Installation for
Adjuncts and Peripherals, 555-230-125

■

AT&T Network and Data Connectivity Reference, 555-025-201

■

BCS Products Security Handbook, 555-025-600

Federal Communications Commission
Statement
Part 68: Statement
Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling. Allowing this equipment to be operated in
a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in
violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals to
the public switched network when:
■

Answered by the called station

■

Answered by the attendant

■

Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE
user

This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded
back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are:
■

A call is unanswered

■

A busy tone is received

■

A reorder tone is received

This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of
operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this
equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the
Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Federal Communications Commission Statement

Page xxvi

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration
number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested,
this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to
the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of
RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company.
NOTE:
REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities.

Means of Connection
Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following
table.
Manufacturer’s Port
Identifier

FIC Code

SOC/REN/
A.S. Code

Network Jacks

Off/On Premises Station

OL13C

9.0F

RJ2GX, RJ21X,
RJ11C

DID Trunk

02RV2-T

0.0B

RJ2GX, RJ21X

CO Trunk

02GS2

0.3A

RJ21X

CO Trunk

02LS2

0.3A

RJ21X

Tie Trunk

TL31M

9.0F

RJ2GX

1.544 Digital Interface

04DU9-B,C

6.0P

RJ48C, RJ48M

1.544 Digital Interface

04DU9-BN,KN

6.0P

RJ48C, RJ48M

120A2 Channel Service Unit

04DU9-DN

6.0P

RJ48C

If the terminal equipment (DEFINITY® System) causes harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is
necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this
happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Federal Communications Commission Statement

Page xxvii

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information,
please contact the Technical Service Center at 1-800-248-1234. If the equipment
is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request
that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
It is recommended that repairs be performed by Lucent Technologies certified
technicians.
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the
telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs.
Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or
corporation commission for information.
This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

About This Book
Federal Communications Commission Statement

Page xxviii

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

1

Maintenance Architecture
Maintenance Objects

Maintenance Architecture

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-1

1

The maintenance subsystem is a part of the software that initializes and
maintains the system. The software continuously monitors system health, and
keeps a record of errors detected in the system. The maintenance subsystem
also provides a user interface for on-demand testing.
This chapter provides a brief description of the Release 5 maintenance strategy
and the background information on the system’s overall functions. For detailed
descriptions of components and subsystems, refer to related topics in Chapter
10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.

Maintenance Objects
The system is partitioned into separate entities called Maintenance Objects
(MOs). Each MO is referred to by an upper-case, mnemonic-like name that
serves as an abbreviation for the MO. For example, “CO-TRK” stands for “Central
Office TRunK”. Each MO is monitored by the system and has its own
maintenance strategy. Most MOs are individual circuit packs. Some MOs are
hardware components that reside on part of a circuit pack. For example, the
TDM bus Clock circuits reside on the Tone/Clock circuit pack. Other MOs, such
as cabinet environmental sensors, represent larger subsystems or sets of
monitors. Finally, some MOs, such as SYNChronization, represent processes or a
combination of processes and hardware.
“Maintenance names” are recorded in the error and alarm logs. Individual copies
of an MO are assigned an address that defines the MO’s physical location in the
system. These locations display as the “PORT” field in the alarm and error logs
and as output of various commands such as test board, busy tdm-bus, and so
forth.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Architecture
Alarm and Error Reporting

Page 1-2

Alarm and Error Reporting
During normal operations, software or firmware may detect error conditions
relevant to specific MOs. The system attempts to fix or circumvent these
problems automatically. However, if a hardware component incurs too many
errors, an alarm is raised. Errors are detected in two ways:
■

For “in-line” errors, firmware on the component detects the
occurrence of an error during ongoing operations.

■

For other types of errors, a “periodic test” or a “scheduled test”
started by the software detects the error. The technician can run
these tests on demand by using the maintenance commands
described in Chapter 8, ‘‘busyout journal-printer’’, and Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.

Software puts the error in the error log, and increments the error counter for that
error. When an error counter is “active,” (greater than zero), there is a
maintenance record for the MO.
Alarms are classified as MAJOR, MINOR, or WARNING, depending on the effect
on system operation. They are also classified as ON-BOARD or OFF-BOARD.
— MAJOR alarms identify failures that cause a critical degradation of
service. These alarms require immediate attention.
— MINOR alarms identify failures that cause some service degradation but
that do not render a crucial portion of the system inoperable. MINOR
alarms require attention. However, typically a MINOR alarm affects only a
few trunks or stations or a single feature.
— WARNING alarms identify failures that cause no significant degradation of
service or equipment failures external to the switch. These failures are not
reported to INADS or to the attendant console.
— ON-BOARD problems originate in the circuitry on the alarmed circuit
pack.
— OFF-BOARD problems originate in a process or component that is
external to the circuit pack.
Alarms are discussed further in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair
Procedures’’.

Maintenance Testing
Most troubles are reduced to the circuit pack level and can be identified by LEDs
on the circuit packs and software reports generated by the system. The
maintenance tests in the system are divided into three groups:
■

Periodic

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Page 1-3

Background tests are performed by software maintenance, usually on an
hourly basis. These tests are nondestructive and can be run during high
traffic periods without interfering with calls.
■

Scheduled
Background tests performed by software maintenance, usually on a daily
basis, are generally more thorough than periodic testing. The tests are
considered destructive and are run only during off-hours so as not to
interfere with calls.

■

Fixed interval
Background tests performed by software maintenance at regular time
intervals (these intervals cannot be administered). These tests run
concurrently with periodic maintenance. The following table lists the MOs
that run fixed interval testing.

Maintenance Object

Interval
(minutes)

POWER

60

SPE-SELEC

60

STBY-SPE

120

TDM-BUS

10

TONE-PT

10

Demand tests are also run by the system when it detects a need or by
maintenance personnel in trouble-clearing activities. Demand tests include
periodic tests plus other tests required only when trouble occurs. Some
nonperiodic demand tests may disrupt system operation. In this book,
destructive (service-disrupting) tests are identified in boldface type.
Maintenance personnel can use the management terminal to initiate the same
tests that the system initiates. The terminal screen displays the test results.

Protocols
This section describes the protocols handled by the system and the points where
these protocols change. Figure 1-1 is a pictorial guide through datatransmission state changes. Figure 1-1 illustrates the flow of data from DTE
equipment, like a terminal or host, through DCE equipment, like a modem or data
module, into a communications port on the system. The data flow is shown by
solid lines. Below these lines are the protocols used at particular points in the
data stream.
Not shown in the Figure 1-1 is the treatment of D-channels in ISDN-PRI and
ISDN-BRI transmissions. PRI and BRI D-channels transport information elements

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-4

that contain call-signaling and caller information. These elements conform to
ISDN level-3 protocol. In the case of BRI, the elements are created by the
terminal or data module; for the PRI, the elements are created by the system,
which inserts them into the D-channel at the DS1 port.
For ISDN transmissions, therefore, BRI terminals and data modules, and DS1
ports insert, interpret, and strip both layer-2 DCE information and layer-3
elements. Also, the DS1 port passes layer-3 elements to the system for
processing.

Layers
The Open System Interconnect (OSI) model for data communications contains
seven layers, each with a specific function. Communications to and through the
system concern themselves only with layers 1 and 2 of the model.
Layer 1, or the physical layer, covers the physical interface between devices and
the rules by which bits are passed. Among the physical layer protocols are
RS-232, RS-449, X.21, DCP, DS1, and others.
Layer 2, or the data-link layer, refers to code created and interpreted by the DCE.
The originating equipment can send blocks of data with the necessary codes for
synchronization, error control, or flow control. With these codes, the destination
equipment checks the physical-link reliability, corrects any transmission errors,
and maintains the link. When a transmission reaches the destination equipment,
it strips any layer-2 information the originating equipment may have inserted. The
destination equipment only passes to the destination DTE equipment the
information sent by the originating DTE equipment. The originating DTE
equipment can also add layer-2 code to be analyzed by the destination DTE
equipment. The DCE equipment treats this layer as data and passes it along to
the destination DTE equipment as it would any other binary bits.
Layers 3 to 7 (and the DTE-created layer 2) are embedded in the transmission
stream and are meaningful only at the destination DTE equipment. Therefore,
they are shown in the figure as ‘‘user-defined,’’ with no state changes until the
transmission stream reaches its destination.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Page 1-5

ORIGINATING
DCE

DTE

DATA
MODULE

DTE

DATA
MODULE

1

RS232C

2

ASCII

SYSTEM

DCP

DESTINATION
DCE

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

P
O
R
T

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

P
O
R
T

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

P
O
R
T

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

P
O
R
T

RAW BITS

DATA
MODULE

DATA
MODULE
DCP

DTE

RS232C

DMI

ASCII

USER DEFINED

3-7

A
N
A
L
O
G

P
O
R
T

MODEM

MODEM

POOLING
CABLE

PCM

MODEM

DTE

1

RS232C

2

ASCII

ANALOG

A
N
A
L
O
G

L
I
N
E

P
O
R
T
PCM

E P
I O
A R
T

ADU

RS232C

ADU PROT

ASYNCH ASCII

DTE

RS232C
ASCII

E P
I O
A R
T

ADU

ADU PROT

DMI

DTE

RS232C

ASYNCH ASCII

USER DEFINED

DATA
MODULE

DTE

2

MODEM

ANALOG

RAW BITS

3-7

1

P
O
R
T

USER DEFINED

DTE

2

T
R
U
N
K

VOICE GRADE DATA

3-7

1

A
N
A
L
O
G

RS232C
ASCII

3-7

DCP

D
I
G
I
T
A
L

P
O
R
T

P
D
O
S
R
1
T
RAW BITS
DMI
USER DEFINED

Figure 1-1.

Data Transmission States

DS1
PORT

DS1 FORMAT

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-6

Usage
The following is a list of the protocols when data is transmitted to and through the
system. The list is organized by protocol layers. Refer to Figure 1-1.

Layer-1 Protocols
Layer-1 protocols are used between the terminal or host DTE and the DCE, used
between the DCE equipment and the system port, and used inside the system.
The following layer-1 protocols are used between the DTE equipment and the
DCE equipment. DCE equipment can be data modules, modems, or Data
Service Units (DSUs). A DSU is a device that transmits digital data to a particular
digital endpoint over the public network without processing the data through any
intervening private network switches.
■

■

■

RS-232 — A common physical interface used to connect DTE to DCE.
This protocol is typically used for communicating up to 19.2 kbps
RS-449 — Designed to overcome the RS-232 distance and speed
restrictions and lack of modem control
V.35 — A physical interface used to connect DTE to a DCE. This protocol
is typically used for transmissions at 56 or 64 kbps

The following protocols are used at layer 1 to govern communication between the
DCE equipment and the port. These protocols consist of codes inserted at the
originating DCE and stripped at the port. The DS1 protocol can be inserted at the
originating, outgoing trunk port and stripped at the destination port.
■

■

■

Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) — A standard for a 3-channel
link. This protocol sends digitized voice and digital data in frames at 160
kbps. The channel structure consists of two information (I) channels and
one signaling (S) channel. Each I-channel provides 64 kbps of voice
and/or data communication and the S-channel provides 8 kbps of
signaling communication between the system and DTE equipment. DCP is
similar to ISDN-BRI
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) — An ISDN standard for a 3-channel link,
consisting of two 64-kbps bearer (B) channels and one 16-kbps signaling
(D) channel. For the implementation of this standard, see DEFINITY
Communications System and System 75 and System 85 ISDN BRI
Reference, 555-025-103
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) — An ISDN standard that sends digitized
voice and digital data in T1 frames at 1.544-Mbps or, for countries outside
the United States, in E1 frames at 2.048-Mbps. Layer 1 (physical), layer 2
(link), and layer 3 (network) ISDN PRI protocols are defined in AT&T
System 75 and 85 — DS1/DMI/ISDN-PRI — Reference Manual,
555-025-101. At 1.544 Mbps, each frame consists of 24 64-kbps channels
plus 8 kbps for framing. This represents 23 B-channels plus 1 D-channel.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-7

The maximum user rate is 64 kbps for voice and data. The maximum
distances are based on T1 limitations. At 2.048 Mbps, each E1 frame
consists of 32 64-kbps channels
■
■

■

■

Analog — A modulated voice-frequency carrier signal
ADU Proprietary — A signal generated by an ADU. The signal is for
communication over limited distances and can be understood only by a
destination ADU or destination system port with a built-in ADU
Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) — A protocol defining the line coding,
signaling, and framing used on a 24-channel line. Many types of trunk
protocols (for example, PRI and 24th-channel signaling) use DS1 protocol
at layer 1
European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications rate 1 (CEPT1)
— A protocol defining the line coding, signaling, and framing used on a
32-channel line. Countries outside the United States use CEPT1 protocol

Inside the system, data transmission appears in one of two forms:
1. Raw digital data, where the physical layer protocols, like DCP, are
stripped at the incoming port and reinserted at the outgoing port.
2. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-encoded analog signals (analog
transmission by a modem), the signal having been digitized by an
analog-to-digital coder/decoder (CODEC) at the incoming port.

Layer-2 Protocols
Layer-2 protocols are given below:
■

■

■

8-bit character code — Between the DTE equipment and the DCE
equipment. Depending on the type of equipment used, the code can be
any proprietary code set.
Digital multiplexed interface proprietary — Family of protocols between
the originating DCE and the destination DCE for digital transmission. See
DEFINITY Communications System and System 75 and System 85
DS1/DMI/ISDN PRI Reference, 555-025-101; and Digital Multiplexed
Interface [DMI] Technical Specification, 555-025-204
Voice-grade data — Between the originating DCE and the destination
DCE for analog transmission

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Page 1-8

Protocol States
Table 1-1 summarizes the protocols used at various points in the data
transmission stream. See Figure 1-1.
Table 1-1.

Protocol States for Data Communication

Transmission Type
Analog

Incoming
DTE to
DCE

OSI
Layer

Protocols DTE to
DCE

Modem

1

RS-232, RS-449,
or V.35

analog

PCM

2

8- or 10-bit code

voice-grade data

voice-grade data

1

RS-232

ADU proprietary

raw bits

2

asynchronous
8-bit code

asynchronous
8-bit code

DMI

1

RS-232, RS-449,
or V.35

DCP or BRI

raw bits

2

8-bit code

DMI

DMI

1

any

DS1

PCM or raw bits

2

8-bit code

DMI or voicegrade data

DMI or voice- grade
data

ADU

Digital

Data
Module

Digital
Signal
Level 1
(DS1)

DCE to System
Port

Inside System

NOTE:
OSI means Open Systems Interconnect
PCM means Pulse Code Modulated
DMI means Digital Multiplexed Interface

Both the physical-layer protocol and the Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI) mode
used in the connection are dependent upon the type of 8-bit code used at layer 2
between the DTE equipment and DCE equipment, as listed in Table 1-2 and
Table 1-3.
Table 1-2.

Physical-Layer Protocol Versus Character Code

Protocol

Code

RS-232

Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and synchronous

RS-449

Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and synchronous

V.35

Synchronous

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Table 1-3.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-9

Digital Multiplexed Interface (DMI) Mode Versus
Character Code

DMI Mode

Code

0

Synchronous (64 kbps)

1

Synchronous (56 kbps)

2

Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII (up to 19.2 kbps), and
synchronous

3

Asynchronous 8-bit ASCII, and private proprietary

Connectivity Rules
Figure 1-1 implies the following connectivity rules:
■

Only the DS1 port and the analog trunk port are trunking facilities (all other
ports are line ports). For communication over these facilities, the
destination DCE equipment can be a hemisphere away from the system,
and the signal can traverse any number of intervening switching systems
before reaching the destination equipment.

■

Data originating at any type of digital device, whether DCP or BRI, can exit
the system at any type of digital port — BRI, digital-line, PRI, DS1, and
others; as long as the call destination is equipped with a data module
using the same DMI mode used at the call origin. This is because once the
data enters the system through a digital port, its representation is uniform
(raw bits at layer 1, and DMI at level 2), regardless of where it originated.

■

Although data entering the system through an EIA port has not been
processed through a data module, the port itself has a built-in data
module. Inside the system, port data is identical to digital line data. Data
entering the system at a DCP line port can exit at an EIA port. Conversely,
data entering the system at an EIA port can exit at any DCP line port. The
destination data module must be set for Mode-2 DMI communication.

■

Voice-grade data can be carried over a DS1 facility as long as the
destination equipment is a modem compatible with the originating modem

■

If a mismatch exists between the types of signals used by the endpoints in
a connection (for example, the equipment at one end is an analog
modem, and the equipment at the other end is a digital data module), a
modem-pool member must be inserted in the circuit. When the endpoints
are on different switches, it is recommended that the modem-pool
member be put on the origination or destination system. A modem-pool

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-10

member is always inserted automatically for calls to off-premises sites via
analog or voice-grade trunking. For internal calls, however, the systems
are capable of automatically inserting a modem-pool member.
■

Data cannot be carried over analog facilities unless inside the system it is
represented as a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)-encoded analog signal.
To do this for data originating at a digital terminal, the signal enters the
system at a digital port and exits the system at a digital port. The signal
then reenters the system through a modem-pool connection (data-module
to modem to analog-port) and exits the system again at an analog port.

■

Although DS1 is commonly called a trunk speed, here it names the
protocol used at layer 1 for digital trunks. Some trunks use different
signaling methods but use DS1 protocol at layer 1 (for example, PRI and
24th-channel signaling trunks).

Disconnect Supervision
Disconnect supervision means the CO has the ability to release a trunk when the
party at the CO disconnects, and the system is able to recognize the release
signal. In general, a CO in the United States provides disconnect supervision for
incoming calls but not for outgoing calls. Many other countries do not provide
disconnect supervision on either incoming or outgoing calls.
The system must provide the assurance that at least one party on the call can
control the dropping of the call. This avoids locking up circuits on a call where no
party is able to send a disconnect signal to the system. Internal operations must
check to be sure one party can provide disconnect supervision. An incoming
trunk that does not provide disconnect supervision is not allowed to terminate to
an outgoing trunk that does not provide disconnect supervision.
In a DCS environment, an incoming trunk without disconnect supervision can
terminate to an outgoing DCS trunk connecting two nodes. The incoming trunk is
restricted from being transferred to a party without disconnect supervision on the
terminating node.
This is because, through messaging, the terminating node knows the originating
node cannot provide disconnect supervision. This messaging is not possible with
non-DCS tie trunks, and the direct call is denied.
Some two-wire loop start trunks outside the United States provide busy tone
disconnect in place of line signals. For these trunks, an adjunct can be attached
to the trunk to listen for busy or other disconnect tone. When a tone is detected,
the adjunct sends line signals for disconnect to the system.
Administration is provided for each trunk group to indicate whether it provides
disconnect supervision for incoming calls and for outgoing calls.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-11

Transfer on Ringing
A station or attendant may conference in a ringing station or transfer a party to a
ringing station. When a station conferences in a ringing station and then drops
the call, the ringing station is treated like a party without disconnect supervision.
However, when a station transfers a party to a ringing station, the ringing station
party is treated like a party with disconnect supervision. Two timers (Attendant
Return Call Timer and Wait Answer Supervision Timer) are provided to ensure the
call is not locked to a ringing station.

Conference, Transfer, and Call-Forwarding
Denial
If a station or attendant attempts to connect parties without disconnect
supervision together, the following is possible:
■

Digital Station or Local Attendant Transfer: if a digital station attempts to
transfer the two parties together, the call appearance lamp flutters,
indicating a denial. If transferring to a DCS trunk, the denial may drop the
call since the transfer is allowed and the other system is queried for
disconnect supervision.

■

Analog Station Transfer: if an analog station attempts to transfer two
parties together by going on-hook, the analog station is no longer on the
call and the transfer cannot be denied.

■

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) Attendant Transfer: if a CAS attempts
to transfer two parties together by pressing the release key, the release
link trunk is released and the branch attempts a transfer by going on-hook

■

Station Conference/Dropout: if a station conferences all parties, the
conference is allowed since the station has disconnect supervision. When
the station is dropped from the call, the call is dropped since the other
parties do not have disconnect supervision.

■

Station Call Forwarding: if a station is call forwarded off-premise to a trunk
without disconnect supervision, the calling party without disconnect
supervision is routed to the attendant

Table 1-4 lists the various protocols, with applications and maximum limitations.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Table 1-4.

Page 1-12

Protocols Used in DEFINITY
Maximum
Data Rate

Protocol

Applications

DCP

Digital switch to data
endpoints

64 kbps

5000 feet (1524 m) for data
3000 feet (915 m) for voice

RS-232

System to administration
terminal. Data module to
host computer

19.2 kbps

50 feet (15.2 m)

Data module to printer

64 kbps

17 feet (5.9 m)

Data module for
downloading and
high-speed data transfer

64 kbps

17 feet (5.9 m)

19.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
0.3 kbps

2000 feet (610 m)
5000 feet (1524 m)
7000 feet (2130 m)
12,000 feet (3654 m)
20,000 feet (6100 m)
40,000 feet (12200 m)

EIA interface
(Data line to ADU)

Maximum Distance

RS-449

Processor Interface to
Processor Interface

19.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps

200 feet (61 m)
400 feet (122 m)
800 feet (244 m)
1600 feet (488 m)

SSI

715 BCS-2 to Processor
Interface
500 series printers to
Processor Interface

56 kbps

5000 feet (1524 m)

BISYNC

Processor Interface line
controller to host
computer for terminal
emulation (9.6 kbps)

2.4 kbps
4.8 kbps
9.6 kbps

BX.25

Communication interface
to MSA, DCS, ISDN, or
AUDIX

9.6 kbps

SDCPI

Data module to Processor
Interface

64 kbps

17 feet (5.9 m)

RS-366

Host computer to ACU
Data module to ACU

64 kbps

50 feet (15.2 m)
17 feet (5.9 m)

56 kbps

50 feet (15.2 m)

V.35

Data module to data
endpoints

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Table 1-4.

Page 1-13

Protocols Used in DEFINITY — Continued
Maximum
Data Rate

Maximum Distance

Data modules to terminals
or cluster controller

64 kbps

500 feet (152 m)

Data module in ASCII
emulation mode

9.6 kbps

Communication interface
to ISDN-BRI S/T

64 kbps

655 feet (199.3 m) to network
interface or repeater
1310 feet (399.3 m) system to
system

ISDN-BRI U

160 kbps

18,000 feet (5486.4 m) from
system to network interface,
and then ~2000 feet to phone

Communication interface
to ISDN-PRI

64 kbps

655 feet (199.3 m) to network
interface or repeater
1310 feet (399.3 m) system to
system

Protocol

Applications

Category
A

ISDN-BRI

ISDN-PRI

Continued on next page

NOTE:
ADU means Asynchronous Data Unit
BCS means Business Communications System
MSA means Message Servicing Adjunct
ACU means Automatic Call Unit

Transmission Characteristics
The system transmission characteristics comply with the American National
Standards Institute/Electronic Industries Association (ANSI/EIA) standard
RS-464A (SP-1378A). The following tables list some general switch transmission
characteristics.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Page 1-14

Frequency Response
Table 1-5 lists the analog-to-analog frequency response for station-to-station or
station-to-CO trunk, relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United States.
Table 1-5.

Analog-to-Analog Frequency Response

Frequency (Hz)

Maximum Loss (dB)

Minimum Loss (dB)

60

—

20

200

5

0

300 to
3000

1

-0.5

3200

1.5

-0.5

3400

3

0

Table 1-6 lists the analog-to-digital frequency response of the system for station
or CO-trunk-to-digital interface (DS0), relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United
States.
Table 1-6.

Analog-to-Digital Frequency Response

Frequency (Hz)

Maximum Loss (dB)

Minimum Loss (dB)

60

—

20

200

3

0

300 to
3000

0.5

-0.25

3200

0.75

-0.25

3400

1.5

0

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-15

Insertion Loss for Port-to-Port; Analog or Digital
Table 1-7 lists the insertion loss in the system for different connection types for
the United States. Table 1-8 shows the overload and cross-talk characteristics.
Table 1-7.

Insertion Loss for the United States

Typical Connections

Nominal Loss
(dB) at 1 kHz

On-premises to on-premises station

6

On-premises to off-premises station

3

Off-premises to off-premises station

0

On-premises station to 4-wire trunk

3

Off-premises station to 4-wire trunk

2

Station-to-trunk

0

Trunk-to-trunk

0

Table 1-8.

Overload and Crosstalk

Overload level

+3 dBm0

Crosstalk loss

>70 dB

Intermodulation Distortion
Table 1-9 lists the intermodulation distortion in the system for analog-to-analog
and analog-to-digital, up to 9.6 kbps data
Table 1-9.

Intermodulation Distortion

Four-Tone Method

Distortion

Second-order tone products

>46 dB

Third-order tone products

>56 dB

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Protocols

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-16

Quantization Distortion Loss
Table 1-10 lists the quantization distortion loss in the system for analog port to
analog port.
Table 1-10.

Quantization Distortion Loss

Analog Port-to-Analog Port
Signal Level

Distortion Loss

0 to -30 dBm0

>33 dB

-40 dBm0

>27 dB

-45 dBm0

>22 dB

Table 1-11 lists the quantization distortion loss in the system for analog port to
digital port and digital port to analog port.
Table 1-11.

Quantization Distortion Loss

Analog Port-to-Digital Port or
Digital Port-to-Analog Port
Signal Level

Distortion Loss

0 to -30 dBm0

>35 dB

-40 dBm0

>29 dB

-45 dBm0

>25 dB

Terminating Impedance: 600 Ohms nominal
Trunk balance impedance (selectable): 600 Ohms nominal or complex Z [350 Ohms + (1
k Ohms in parallel with 0.215uF)]

Impulse Noise
On 95% or more of all connections, the impulse noise is 0 count (hits) in five
minutes at +55 dBrnC (decibels above reference noise with C-filter) during the
busy hour.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Service Codes

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-17

ERL and SFRL Talking State
Echo-Return Loss (ERL) and Single-Frequency Return Loss (SFRL) performance
is usually dominated by termination and/or loop input impedances. The system
provides an acceptable level of echo performance if the ERL and SFRL are met.

Station-to-station

ERL should meet or exceed 18 dB
SFRL should meet or exceed 12 dB

Station to 4-wire trunk
connection

ERL should meet or exceed 24 dB
SFRL should meet or exceed 14 dB

Station to 2-wire trunk
connection

ERL should meet or exceed 18 dB
SFRL should meet or exceed 12 dB

4-wire to 4-wire trunk
connection

ERL should meet or exceed 27 dB
SFRL should meet or exceed 20 dB

Peak Noise Level
Analog to analog — 20 dBrnC (decibels above reference noise with C-filter)
Analog to digital — 19 dBrnC
Digital to analog — 13 dBrnC

Echo Path Delay
Analog port to analog port — < 3 ms
Digital interface port to digital interface port — < 2 ms

Service Codes
Service codes (for the United States only) are issued by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) to equipment manufacturers and
registrants. These codes denote the type of registered terminal equipment and
the protective characteristics of the premises wiring of the terminal equipment
ports.
Private line service codes are as follows:
■

7.0Y — Totally protected private communications (microwave) systems

■

7.0Z — Partially protected private communications (microwave) systems

■

8.0X — Port for ancillary equipment

■

9.0F — Fully protected terminal equipment

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Facility Interface Codes
■

9.0P — Partially protected terminal equipment

■

9.0N — Unprotected terminal equipment

■

9.0Y — Totally protected terminal equipment

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 1-18

The product line service code is 9.0F indicating it is terminal equipment with fully
protected premises wire at the private line ports.

Facility Interface Codes
A Facility Interface Code (FIC) is a five-character code (United States only) that
provides the technical information needed to order a specific port circuit pack for
analog private lines, digital lines, MTS lines, and WATS lines.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Multimedia Interface (MMI)

Page 1-19

Table 1-12 through Table 1-14 list the FICs. Included are service order codes,
Ringer Equivalency Numbers (RENs), and types of network jacks that connect a
line to a rear panel connector on a carrier.
Table 1-12.

Analog Private Line and Trunk Port Circuit Packs

Circuit Pack

FIC

Service
Order Code

Network
Jack

TN742 and TN747B Off-Premises
Station Port, and TN746B Off-Premises
Station Port or On-Premises Station port

0L13C

9.0F

RJ21X

TN760/B/C/D Tie Trunk

TL31M

9.0F

RJ2GX

Table 1-13.

Digital Trunk Port Circuit Packs

Circuit Pack

FIC

Service
Order Code

Network
Jack

TN1654 and TN574 DS1 Converter; TN722B
DS1 Tie trunk; and TN767 and TN464 DS1
Interface

04DU9B,C

6.0P

RJ48C
and
RJ48M

Table 1-14.

MTS and WATS Port Circuit Packs

Circuit Pack

FIC

Ringer
Equivalency
Number (REN)

TN742 and TN746B Analog Line

02LS2

None

RJ21 and
RJ11C

TN747B Central Office Trunk

02GS2

1.0A

RJ21X

TN753 DID Trunk

02RV2-T

0,0B

RJ21X

TN790 Processor

02LS2

1.0A

RJ21X

TN1648 System Access and
Maintenance

02LS2

0.5A

RJ21X

Multimedia Interface (MMI)
The Multimedia Interface handles the following protocols:

Network
Jack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

1

Maintenance Architecture
Multimedia Interface (MMI)
■

Page 1-20

International Telecommunications Union (ITU) H.221 — Includes H.230,
H.242, H.231, and H.243 protocol

— Includes H.230,

■

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) H.221
H.242, H.231, and H.243 protocol

■

BONDING (Bandwidth On Demand INoperability Group) Mode 1

■

ESM HLP HDLC Rate Adaptation

The Vistium Personal Conferencing System is supported either through the
8510T BRI terminal or directly through the Vistium TMBRI PC board.
Using the World Class Core (WCC) BRI interface, most desktop multimedia
applications are supported through the Personal Computer’s BRI interface.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Circuit Packs

Circuit Packs and Power

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 2-1

2

This chapter discusses the hardware configurations contained within and
supported by the DEFINITY Systems. Where appropriate, detailed information
down to the circuit pack level is provided. This chapter also discusses the power
sources required to enable the various components within the system.

Circuit Packs
The following table list all circuit packs supported by DEFINITY Release 5
systems. For information concerning vintages and current versions, see
Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices which is
published periodically as a special edition of the AT&T Technical Monthly.
For more information concerning which circuit packs are needed for different
environments and locales, see the Application Notes section of DEFINITY
Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature
Description.
Table 2-1 lists circuit packs by Apparatus Code, Name, and Type. See the
Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices for circuit packs
that pertain to your system.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Circuit Packs

Table 2-1.

Page 2-2

Circuit packs and modules
supported by DEFINITY

Apparatus
Code

Name

Type

631DA1

AC Power Unit

Power

631DB1

AC Power Unit

Power

644A1

DC Power Unit

Power

645B1

DC Power Unit

Power

649A

DC Power Unit

Power

676B

DC Power Supply

Power

982LS

Current Limiter

Power

CFY1B

Current Limiter

Power

CPP1

Memory Expansion

Control

ED-1E546
(TN2169)
(TN2170)
(TN566)
(TN567)

DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System

Port Assembly

ED-1E546
(TN2208)
(TN2170)

Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY (LAN) Gateway R1

Port Assembly

J58890MAP
(TN800)

CallVisor over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R2

Port Assembly

TN417

Auxiliary Trunk

Port

TN419B

Tone-Clock

Control

TN420B/C

Tone Detector

Service

TN429

Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) Trunk

Port

TN433

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN436B

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN437

Tie Trunk

Port

TN438B

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN439

Tie Trunk

Port

TN447

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN457

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN458

Tie Trunk

Port

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Circuit Packs
Table 2-1.

Page 2-3

Circuit packs and modules
supported by DEFINITY — Continued

Apparatus
Code

Name

Type

TN459B

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN464C/D/E/F

DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel - E1, 32 Channel

Port

TN465/B/C

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN467

Analog Line

Port

TN468B

Analog Line

Port

TN479

Analog Line

Port

TN497

Tie Trunk

Port

TN553

Packet Data Line

Port

TN556/B

ISDN-BRI 4-Wire S/T-NT Line (A-Law)

Port

TN570/B/C

Expansion Interface

Port

TN572

Switch Node Clock

Control

TN573/B

Switch Node Interface

Control

TN574

DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel

Port

TN577

Packet Gateway

Port

TN722B

DS1 Tie Trunk

Port

TN725B

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN726/B

Data Line

Port

TN735

MET Line

Port

TN742

Analog Line

Port

TN744/B

Call Classifier

Service

TN744/C/D

Call Classifier - Detector

Service

TN746/B

Analog Line

Port

TN747B

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN748/B/C/D

Tone Detector

Service

TN750/B/C

Announcement

Service

TN753

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN754/B

Digital Line 4-Wire DCP

Port

TN755B

Neon Power Unit

Power

TN756

Tone Detector

Service

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Circuit Packs
Table 2-1.

Page 2-4

Circuit packs and modules
supported by DEFINITY — Continued

Apparatus
Code

Name

Type

TN758

Pooled Modem

Port

TN760B/C/D

Tie Trunk

Port

TN762B

Hybrid Line

Port

TN763B/C/D

Auxiliary Trunk

Port

TN765

Processor Interface

Control

TN767B/C/D/E

DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel

Port

TN768

Tone-Clock

Control

TN769

Analog Line

Port

TN771D

Maintenance/Test

Service

TN772

Duplication Interface

Control

TN773

Processor

Control

TN775/B

Maintenance

Service

TN776

Expansion Interface

Port

TN777/B

Network Control

Control

TN778

Packet Control

Control

TN780

Tone-Clock

Control

TN786

Processor

Control

TN786B

Processor

Control

TN787F/G

Multimedia Interface

Service

TN788B

Multimedia Voice Conditioner

Service

TN789

Radio Controller

Control

TN790

Processor

Control

TN793

Analog Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire

Port

TN796B

Processor

Control

TNPRI/BRI

PRI to BRI Converter

Port

TN1648

System Access/Maintenance

Control

TN1650B

Memory

Control

TN1654

DS1 Converter - T1, 24 Channel/E1, 32 Channel

Port

TN1655

Packet Interface

Control

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Circuit Packs
Table 2-1.

Page 2-5

Circuit packs and modules
supported by DEFINITY — Continued

Apparatus
Code

Name

Type

TN1656

Tape Drive

Control

TN1657

Disk Drive

Control

TN2135

Analog Line

Port

TN2136

Digital Line 2-Wire DCP

Port

TN2138

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2139

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN2140/B

Tie Trunk

Port

TN2144

Analog Line

Port

TN2146

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN2147/C

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2149

Analog Line

Port

TN2180

Analog Line

Port

TN2181

Digital Line 2-Wire DCP

Port

TN2182/B

Tone-Clock -Tone Detector and Call Classifier

Control

TN2183

Analog Line

Port

TN2184

DIOD Trunk

Port

TN2198

ISDN-BRI 2-Wire U Interface

Port

TN2199

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2202

Ring Generator

Power

TN2224

Digital Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP

Port

UN330B

Duplication Interface

Control

UN331B

Processor

Control

UN332

Mass Storage/Network Control

Control

WP-90510

AC Power Supply (Compact Single-Carrier Cabinet)

Power

WP-91153

AC Power Supply (Single-Carrier Cabinet)

Power

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Power

Page 2-6

Power
There are two basic powering options available with the Release 5si systems.
These options include AC and DC. The cabinets and their associated power
supplies can be powered by 120/208 volts AC either directly or from a Universal
Power Supply (UPS) system. Alternatively, the cabinets and their power supplies
may be powered by -48 volts DC from a battery power plant.
The Release 5vs system requires between 80 and 264 or between 90 and 132
volts AC. The system can be powered directly or from the WP-90510 power
supply. The DC power option is not available with this system.
Except for the Release 5vs system, each control cabinet in an AC-powered
system has an internal battery that provides a short term holdover to protect the
system against short power interruptions. This method is known as the Nominal
Power Holdover Strategy. The battery is connected so that it automatically
provides power if the AC service fails. The time and extent of the holdover varies
according to the type of cabinet and to whether or not the system has a
duplicated control complex.
Table 2-2 summarizes the response to the interruption of power service in
systems without an internal holdover battery.
Table 2-2.

Response to Power Service Interruption (without Internal
Holdover Battery)

Cabinet Power
Interruption

Less Than Power
Supply Decay

-48 volt DC external power
or multicarrier cabinet with
UPS, no internal battery.

None on system, some
impact on 48-volt
powered circuits.

Greater Than Power
Supply Decay
All calls dropped,
system reloads.

The next two tables indicate various responses to the interruption of power
service in DEFINITY Systems equipped with an internal holdover battery.
Table 2-3 provides a summary of holdover times. Table 2-4 indicates the types of
cabinet power interruption based on power holdover durations.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Circuit Packs and Power
Power

2

Table 2-3.

Page 2-7

Response to Power Service Interruption with an Internal Holdover Battery

System and
Configuration

Cabinet

Holdover for
Entire Cabinet
(in seconds)

Holdover for
Entire Control
Carrier (in minutes)

Standard

PPNMCC

10

10

High, Critical

PPNMCC

10

5

Standard/High, Critical

PPN SCC/ESCC

1/4

2

Standard/High, Critical1

EPN MCC

15

none

Standard/High, Critical

EPN SCC/ESCC

1/4

none

1.

The holdover times listed are in effect if the EPN contains a TN775 maintenance circuit pack.
However, if the EPN contains a TN775B maintenance circuit pack, the holdover time for the entire
cabinet is 10 seconds, and the holdover time for the control carrier is 10 minutes.

Table 2-4.

Types of Cabinet Power Interruption

Shorter Holdover
Than Entire
Cabinet

Longer Holdover than
Entire Cabinet, Shorter
Holdover than Control
Carrier

PPN SCC

No calls dropped

All calls dropped

System reloads

EPN SCC

No calls dropped

All calls dropped

System reloads

System and
Cabinet

Longer Holdover
Than Control
Carrier

NOTE:
When EPN power is interrupted for greater than the cabinet holdover but
less than the control carrier holdover, calls in the control carrier are held for
the duration of the interruption but are dropped when power is restored.

Single-Carrier Cabinets
In single-carrier cabinets, there is no internal AC wiring or distribution and no
software interaction with the power system. The power supplies themselves take
about 250 milliseconds for the voltages to drop below limits.
The control cabinet that houses the Switch Processing Element (SPE) is the only
cabinet that has an internal battery reserve. All other control cabinets and port
cabinets have the 250 millisecond power supply decay delay, after which all
connections and links associated with the cabinets are dropped.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

2

Circuit Packs and Power
Power

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 2-8

The SPE control cabinet has a battery that furnishes power to the processor
memory complex for a minimum of two minutes if the battery is fully charged. This
battery is recharged after power is restored, but the charging process is not
monitored by the system. The cabinet is not able to detect AC power loss, and it
notices only a DC power output failure as the power supply output decays.
The memory contents are preserved, and the processor continues operating
during the two minute period. However, the tone-clock circuit pack is not held
over, and as a result, no connections are possible. The battery does not supply
all the voltages necessary for the internal modem circuit on the processor circuit
pack. As a result, no call is originated to INADS, and the switch cannot answer
any calls. Thus, the switch cannot report any internal or external alarms during
this period. After two minutes (depending on the condition of the battery), the
processor and memory are lost, and the system is totally inactive.
If power is restored in less than 250 milliseconds, no calls are dropped. If power
is restored between 250 milliseconds and two minutes, all calls are dropped, and
memory is maintained. However, since the tone-clock was lost, the system
undergoes a reset once the AC restoral process clears all calls and the alarm log
(in which errors are retained). The switch keeps a record of the restart in the error
log, but it might not detect a power error if the outage is between 1/4 of a second
and one minute, during which time only a loss of clock and not a loss of the
power failure that caused the loss of clock is logged. After one minute, a power
error is logged. If the outage exceeds the battery holdover interval, the error logs
and alarm logs are lost (since they cannot be saved to tape). Depending on the
size of the system, it can take up to one minute to restore service to the ports.
After a power outage of two minutes following the restoral of AC power, the
system re-initializes from the tape. It takes about 10 minutes to restore service.
Again, if the customer has frequent power outages or critical service needs, an
external UPS or DC power system should be considered.
NOTE:
For more power control information, refer to AC-POWER, DC-POWER, and
POWER maintenance objects.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

3

Management Terminals
General

Management Terminals

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-1

3

General
Maintenance personnel can use the management terminal to initiate the same
tests that the system initiates. Test results display on the terminal screen. This
chapter illustrates these terminals, explains how to use them, and identifies the
typical maintenance tasks that can be performed from them.

Management Terminals
The maintenance interface for the system technician is the management terminal.
These terminals may be referred to as an administration terminal.
The following terminals are supported as administration terminals:
■

715 BCS

■

2900/715 BCS

■

715 BCS-2

In a standard reliability system, the terminal connects to the Processor circuit
pack. In the PPN of a high or critical reliability system , the administration terminal
connects to the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the PPN. In the EPN of a
standard reliability system or of a high or critical reliability system, the
administration terminal connects to the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN.
Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls and monitors the same environment
leads as the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN system without high or
critical reliability. Duplication Interface circuit pack A also supports the serial
channel to the terminal in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system. The
terminal connects to Duplication Interface circuit pack A via a connector, labeled

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
Management Terminals

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-2

DOT (Duplication Option Terminal), on the back of cabinet A. At any time, the
terminal may be disconnected from the Duplication Interface circuit pack A and
connected directly to the active processor circuit pack by attaching the terminal
to the connector labeled TERM. This connection should be made only if the
terminal fails to function, since a problem with the Duplication Interface circuit
pack A may be present.
Typical tasks that can be performed at the terminal are shown below.
■

Display Error and Alarm logs

■

Test circuit packs

■

Test system functions

■

Busyout and release system equipment

■

Reset the system

■

Monitor the system

■

Check status of maintenance objects

■

Check system translations

Most maintenance functions performed at the local administration terminal can
also be done remotely at the INADS (Initialization and Administration System).

Terminal Keyboard
The keyboard is equipped with cursor keys, editing keys, and transaction keys.
The three types of keys are described here.

Cursor Keys: Cursor keys are used to move the cursor between fields and
pages on a screen form. The cursor must be positioned on a field before the user
can add or change information in that field.
Editing Keys: Two editing keys, BACKSPACE and Clear, are provided. BACKSPACE is
used to erase the character at the current cursor position. The cursor moves one
position to the left each time the key is pressed. If the cursor is at the first position
of the data entry field, it erases the character at the first position. Clear when
pressed simultaneously with the Shift is used to clear all data in a field on a screen
form. The cursor must be positioned at the field the user wants to clear before
Clear is pressed.
Transaction Keys: Three transaction keys, Cancel, Enter, and Help, are provided.
CANCEL is used to erase a form or command. Once the key is pressed, the
system returns the user to the command (tasks request) level and asks for a new
command. Enter is used to store the data entered on a screen form in the
system’s memory. Help displays information on the type of data that can be
entered into the field associated with the current cursor position. The system
displays all the permissible entries the user can input for that field. This key can
be pressed at the ”enter command” level to obtain a list of all commands.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-3

System Login Procedure
Forced Password Aging and Administrable
Logins
Release 5 and later releases provide enhanced login/password security by
adding a security feature that allows users to define their own logins/passwords
and to specify a set of commands for each login. The system allows up to 11
customer logins. Each login name can be customized and must be made up of
from 3 to 6 alphabetic/numeric characters, or a combination of both. A password
must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1
numeric symbol. Password aging is an optional feature that the super-user
administering the logins can activate.
NOTE:
If several users are logging in and out at the same time, a user may see the
message “Transient command conflict detected; please try later”. After the
“users” have completed logging in or out, the terminal is available for use.
The password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password
was created, or changed, and continuing for a specified number of days (1 to
99). The user is notified at the login prompt, 7 days before the password
expiration date, that the password is about to expire. When the password expires
the user is required to enter a new password into the system before logging in. If
a login is added or removed, the “Security Measurement” reports are not
updated until the next hourly poll, or a clear measurements security-violations
command is entered. Once a non-super-user has changed the password, the
user must wait 24 hours to change the password again.
Security is enhanced by providing a logoff notification screen to a system
administrator at log off while either the facility test call or remote access features
are still administered. The administrator can be required to acknowledge the
notification before completing the logoff process. Logoff notification is
administered on the Login Administration screen.
Release 5 and later releases are delivered to the customer with one customer
“super-user” login/password defined. The customer is required to administer
additional login/passwords as needed. The super-user login has full customer
permissions and can customize any login created.
Login permissions for a specified login can be set by the super-user to block any
object that may compromise switch security. Up to 40 administration or
maintenance objects commands can be blocked for a specified login in.
Release 5 and later releases commands are grouped into three command
categories. Each of the three command categories has a group of command
subcategories listed under them, and each command subcategory has a list of
command objects that the commands acts on. A super-user can set a users

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-4

permissions to restrict or block access to any command in these categories. The
three main categories are:
■

Common Commands
— Display Admin. and Maint. Data
— System Measurements

■

Administration Commands
— Administer Stations
— Administer Trunks
— Additional Restrictions
— Administer Features
— Administer Permissions

■

Maintenance Commands
— Maintain Stations
— Maintain Trunks
— Maintain Systems
— Maintain Switch Circuit Packs
— Maintain Process Circuit Packs

These categories are displayed on the Command Permissions Categories form.

To Log In
1. Enter your login name and password on the login and password screen.
If your password has expired, you see the message:
Your password has expired, enter a new one.
Reenter current password:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Issue 1
April 1997

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Page 3-5

Login: telmgr
Password:
Your Password has expired, enter a new one.
Reenter Current Password:
New Password:
Reenter New Password:

Figure 3-1.

Password Expiration Screen
The Password Expiration screen displays when you log in. See Figure 3-1. If your
password is expired, you are prompted to enter a new password. If your
password is within 7 days of the expiration date, you see:

WARNING: Your password will expire in X days

To Logoff
To logoff, enter “logoff” at the command prompt. You will receive a logoff screen
if any of the following is true. If either a or b (see below) is true and an
acknowledgment is required, or if any of c, d, or e is true, you need to respond to
the “Proceed with Logoff?” prompt on the logoff screen. See Figure 3-2. The
response is defaulted to “n”; you will need to enter “y” to override the default.
a. If Facility Test Call Notification has been enabled for your login (see
Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial Passwords).
b. If Remote Access Notification has been enabled for your login (see
Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial Passwords).
c. If Alarm Origination is disabled.
d. If any active major or minor alarm is active.
e. If any resource is busied out.

! CAUTION:
To leave the Facility Test Call administered after you logoff poses a
significant security risk.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Issue 1
April 1997

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Page 3-6

! CAUTION:
To leave the Remote Access feature administered after logging off poses a
significant security risk if you are using the feature in conjunction with the
Facility Test Call feature.

! CAUTION:
No alarms report through the INADS interface if Alarm Origination is
disabled.

! CAUTION:
A busied out resource is one that is out of service. Be sure to verify if a
busied resource needs to be released or if the resource should remain
busied out.

Facility Test Call Administered
Remote Access Administered
Alarm Origination is currently disabled.
Active major or minor alarm detected; be sure to resolve it.
*** Busied out resource detected; verify if release is needed! ****
Proceed With Logoff: [n]

Figure 3-2.

Logoff Screen

To Display a Login
1. Enter the command display login [login name] and press Enter.
The system displays the requested login’s:
■

Name

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure
■

Login type

■

Service level

■

Disable following a security violation value

■

Access to Inads Port value

■

Password aging cycle length

■

Facility test call notification and acknowledgment

■

Remote access notification and acknowledgment

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-7

To List Logins
1. Enter the command list logins.
The system displays the following information for all current logins:
■

Name

■

Service level

■

Status (active, inactive, disabled, svn-disabled, void)

■

Password aging cycle length

The system displays only those logins with the same, or lower, service
level as the requestor.

To Remove a Login
1. Enter the command remove login [login name].
The system displays the Login Administration form.
2. Press the ENTER key to remove the login, or press Cancel to exit the
remove login procedure without making a change.

To Test a Login
1. Enter your login name at the login prompt.
2. After the user enters the correct login name and password and the login is
administered correctly, the system displays the command line interface.

Administering Customer Logins and Forced
Password Aging
Adding Customer Logins and Assigning Initial
Password
To add a customer login you must be a super-user, have administrative
permissions, and:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-8

1. Enter the add login [name] command to access the Login Administration
form.
2. Enter your super-user password in the Password of Login Making Change
field on the Login Administration form.
The 3- to 6-character login name (characters 0-9, a-z, A-Z) entered with
the add login [name] command is displayed in the Login’s Name field.
3. Enter “customer” in the Login Type field. The system default for the Login
Type field is “customer.” The maximum number of customer logins of all
types is 11.
4. Enter super-user or non-super-user in the Service Level field. Default is
none-super-user.
■

“super-user” gives access to the add, change, display, list, and
remove commands for all customer logins and passwords. The
super-user can administer any mix of super-user/non-super-user
logins up to a total of ten additional system logins.

■

“non-super-user” permissions are limited by restrictions specified
by the super-user when administering the non-super-user login. A
non-super-user can change his/her password with permission set
by the super-user, however once a password has been changed
the non-super-user must wait 24 hours before changing the
password again. A non-super-user cannot change other user
passwords, login characteristics, or permissions.

5. Enter “y” in the Disable Following a Security Violation field to disable a
login following a login security threshold violation,. This field is a dynamic
field and only appears on the Login Administration form when the SVN
Login Violation Notification feature is enabled. The system default for the
Disable Following a Security Violation field is “y.”
6. Enter “y” in the Access to INADS Port? field to allow access to the remote
administration port,. This field only displays if Acct. has first enabled
customer super-user access to the INADS Remote Administration Port.
Default is “n”.
7. Enter a password for the new login in the Login’s Password field. A
password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1
alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol. Valid characters include numbers,
and!&*?;’^(),.:- (the system will not echo the password to the screen as
you type).
8. Re-enter the password in the Login’s Password field. The system will not
echo the password to the screen as you type.
9. Enter the number of days (1 to 99) from the current day, that you want the
password to expire, in the Password Aging Cycle Length field. If a you
enter a blank in this field, password aging does not apply to the login.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-9

10. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Facility Test
Call Notification? field. If “y” is selected, the user receives notification at
logoff that the facility test call feature access code is administered. If you
do not want the notification to appear, set the field to “n”.

! CAUTION:
Leaving The facility Test Call administered after logging off poses a
significant security risk.
11. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Facility Test
Call Notification Acknowledgment Required field. If “y” is selected, the
user is required to acknowledge that they wish to logoff while Facility Test
Call is still administered. If you do not want to force the user to
acknowledge, set the field to “n”. This field appears only if the Facility Test
Call Notification field is set to 'y”
12. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Remote
Access Notification? field. If “y” is selected, the user receives notification
at logoff that remote access is still administered. If you do not want the
notification to appear, set the field to “n”.

! CAUTION:
To Leave Remote Access feature administered after logging off
poses a significant security risk if you are using the feature in
conjunction with the Facility Test Call feature.
13. Decide whether or not to leave the default of yes (“y”) in the Remote
Access Acknowledgment Required? field. If “y” is selected, the user is
required to acknowledge that they wish to logoff while remote access is
still administered. If you do not want to force the user to acknowledge, set
the field to “n”. This field appears only if the Facility Test Call Notification
field is set to 'y”.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Page 3-10

LOGIN ADMINISTRATION
Password of Login Making Change:
LOGIN BEING ADMINISTERED
Login’s Name:xxxxxxx
Login Type:
Service Level:
Disable Following a Security Violation?
Access to INADS Port?
LOGIN’S PASSWORD INFORMATION
Login’s Password:
Reenter Login’s Password:
Password Aging Cycle Length:
LOGOFF NOTIFICATION
Facility Test Call Notification? y
Remote Access Notification? y

Screen 3-1.

Login Administration

Acknowledgment Required? y
Acknowledgment Required? y

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-11

Changing a Login’s Attributes
To change a customer login’s attributes you must be a super-user, have
administrative permissions (specifically, the Administration Permission field must
be set to “y” for the super-user), and:
1. Enter the change login [name] command to access the Login
Administration form.
2. Enter your super-user password in the Password of Login Making Change
field on the Login Administration form. The 3- to 6-character login name
(characters 0-9, a-z, A-Z) entered with the change login [name]
command is displayed in the Login’s Name field.
3. Enter “customer” in the Login Type field.
4. Enter “super-user” or “non-super-user” in the Service Level field.
NOTE:
You cannot change your own service level.
5. To disable a login following a login security threshold violation, enter “y” in
the Disable Following a Security Violation field. This field is a dynamic field
and only appears on the Login Administration form when the SVN Login
Violation Notification feature is enabled.
6. To allow access to the remote administration port, enter “y” in the Access
to INADS Port? field. This field will only display if Lucent Technologies has
first enabled customer super-user access to the INADS Remote
Administration Port.
7. Enter a password for the new login in the Login’s Password field. A
password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1
alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol. Valid characters include numbers,
and!&*?;’^(),.:- (the system will not echo the password to the screen as
you type).
8. Re-enter the password in the Login’s Password field. The system will not
echo the password to the screen as you type.
9. Enter the number of days (1 to 99) from the current day, when you wish the
password to expire, in the Password Aging Cycle Length field. If a blank is
entered in this field, password aging does not apply to the login.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-12

Administering Login Command Permissions
Users with super-user permissions can set the permissions of the logins they
create. The Command Permissions Categories form displays fields to which a
user with super-user permissions can give or limit access. These commands are
divided into three categories:
■

Common Command

■

Administration Commands

■

Optional Maintenance Commands

Each of the three main categories have subcategories listed under them that
when set to a “y” give permission to use the command sets associated with that
category. When the Command Permissions Categories form is displayed for a
login, the subcategories fields appear with the fields set to give the login full
permissions for that login type. The super-user administering login permissions
can set any of these field to deny access to a command category for the
specified login. If the super-user making the assignments has full super-user
permissions and would like to limit permissions for a category, the super-user
can do so by entering “y” in the Additional Restrictions field located under the
Administration Category section of the Command Permissions Categories form.
Refer to the Command Permissions Form Entries Tables at the end of this section
for a list of command Objects and Actions by:
■

Display Administration and Maintenance

■

Administer Features

■

Administer Permissions

■

Administer Stations

■

Administer Trunks

The information is the tables will help you to establish command permissions for
user logins.
To administer command permissions, log in as super-user and:
1. Access the Command Permissions Categories form by entering change
permissions login [login name]. When the form is displayed for a login,
the default permissions for that “login type” are shown. The super-user
administering the login can change a “y” to “n” for each subcategory field.
2. Select a category for the login and enter “y” in each field where
permission to perform an administrative or maintenance action is needed.
The command object you select must be within the permissions for the
login type you are administering.
If the Maintenance option is set to “y” on the Customer Options form, the
super-user can enter “y” in the Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? or Maintain
Process Circuit Packs fields.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Page 3-13

3. A super-user with full super-user permissions (super-user administering
the login cannot have the Additional Restrictions field set to “y” for his/her
own login) can restrict additional administrative or maintenance actions for
a specified login by entering “y” in the Additional Restrictions field on the
Command Permission Categories form. Enter the additional restrictions for
a login in the Restricted object list fields on the Command Permission
Categories Restricted Object List form. You can enter up to 40 command
names (object names) to block actions associated with a command
category for a specified login.

Page 1 of 3
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
Login Name: Sup3ru
COMMON COMMANDS
Display Admin. and Maint. Data? y
System Measurements? _*
ADMINISTRATION COMMANDS
Administer Stations? y
Administer Trunks? y
Additional Restrictions? n

Administer Features? y
Administer Permissions? y

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Maintain Stations? n
Maintain Trunks? n
Maintain Systems? n

Maintain Switch Circuit Packs? n
Maintain Process Circuit Packs? n

Screen 3-2.

Command Permission Categories (Page 1 of 3)

*This field only displays on Release 5vs and Release 5si + memory systems.

Page 2 of 3
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________

Screen 3-3.

Command Permissions Categories (Page 2 of 3)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Page 3-14

Page 3 of 3
COMMAND PERMISSION CATEGORIES
RESTRICTED OBJECT LIST
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________
_______________________
______________________

Screen 3-4.

Table 3-1.

Command Permissions Categories (Page 3 of 3)

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance
Action
Object
Change

Status

Tes
t

X

X

X

X

Display

List

aar analysis

X

X

aar digit-conversion

X

X

aar route-chosen

Monitor

Remove

X

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

X

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

X

abbreviated-dialing group

X

X

abbreviated-dialing personal

X

X

abbreviated-dialing system

X

aca-parameters

X

access-endpoint

X

adjunct-names

X

adjunct-controlled-agents

X

administered-connection

X

X

agent-loginID

X

X

alarms

X

alias-station

X

alphanumeric-dial-table

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-1.

Page 3-15

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

alternate-frl

Display

List

Monitor

Remove

Status

X

analog -testcall

X

announcements

X

ars analysis

X

ars analysis
ars digit-conversion

Tes
t

X
X

X

ars digit-conversion

X

ars route-chosen

X

ars-toll

X

attendant

X

X

bcms agent

X

bcms loginIDs

X

bcms split

X

bcms trunk

X

bcms vdn

X

board

X

bri-port

X

bridged-extensions

X

bulletin-board

X

button-location-aca

X

cabinet

X

call-forwarding

X
X

call-screening

X

capacity

X

card-mem (MIPS Only)

X

X

cdr-link

X

X

circuit-packs

X

cleared-alarm-notif

X

communication-interface hop-channels

X

communication-interface links

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-1.

Page 3-16

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

communication-interface proc-channels

Display

List

X
X

configuration board

X

configuration carrier

X

configuration control

X

configuration network

X

configuration software

X

configuration station

X

configuration trunk

X
X

cor

X

cos

X

coverage answer-group

X

coverage groups

X

coverage path

X

Remove

Status

Tes
t

X

configuration all

console-parameters

Monitor

X

X

X

customer-alarm

X

data-module

X

dialplan

X

digit-absorption

X

display-format

X

X

X

do-not-disturb station

X
X

dsp-msg-auto-wakeup

X

dsp-msg-call-identifier

X

dsp-msg-date-time

X

dsp-msg-lwc

X

dsp-msg-mct

X

dsp-msg-miscellaneous

X

dsp-msg-property-mgmt

X

X

X

do-not-disturb group

ds1

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-1.

Page 3-17

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

Display

dsp-msg-softkey-label

X

dsp-msg-tod-routing

X

emergency
enp-number-plan

List

Monitor

Remove

Status

Tes
t

X
X

environment

X

errors

X

events

X

external-device-alarm
extension-type

X

external-device-alarming

X

feature-access-code

X

fiber-link (MIPS Only)

X

groups-of-extensions

X
X

hardware-group

X

health

X

history
hunt-group

X

X
X

X

inads-link

X

integrated-annc-boards

X

X

intercom-group

X

X

interface (MIPS Only)

X

intra-switch-cdr

X

isdn cpn-prefix

X

isdn network-facilities

X

X

X

isdn-testcall

X

isdn tsc-gateway

X

ixc-codes

X

journal-printer

X

led

X

link

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-1.

Page 3-18

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

listed-directory-numbers

Display

List

Monitor

Remove

Status

Tes
t

X

login

X

login (MIPS Only)

X

login-ids

X

maintenance

X

marked-port

X

mct-group-extensions

X

mct-history

X

meas-selection coverage

X

meas-selection principal

X

meas-selection route-pattern

X

meas-selection trunk-group

X

meas-selection wideband-trunk-grp

X

measurements security-violations detail

X

measurements security-violations
summary

X

memory

X

MO

X

modem-pool

X

multi-frequency signaling

X

X

X

network-control

X

node-routing

X

X

packet-control (MIPS Only)

X

packet-interface (MIPS Only)

X

paging code-calling-ids

X

paging-loudspeaker

X

password

X

X

X

periodic-scheduled

X

permissions

X

personal-CO-line

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-1.

Page 3-19

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

Display

List

pgate

X

X

pickup-group

X

X

Monitor

Remove

Status

pkt

X

pms

X

pms-down

X

pms-link

X

pms-log

X

pnc

X

port

X

station

X

svn-button-location

X

suspend-alm-orig
synchronization

Tes
t

X
X

X

X
X

sys-link

X
X

system

X

X
X

system 1st-cabinet

X

system 2nd-cabinet

X

system 3rd-cabinet

X

system all-cabinets

X

system conn

X

system customer-options

X

system features

X

system-maintenance

X

system-parameters cdr

X

system-parameters country-options

X

system-parameters hospitality

X

system-parameters security

X

tdm

X

term-ext-group

X

terminal-parameters 603/302B1

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

3

Table 3-1.

Page 3-20

Command Permissions Form Entries — Display Administration and
Maintenance — Continued
Action
Object
Change

Display

terminal-parameters 8400

X

test-schedule

X

time

X

time-of-day

X

toll

X

List

Monitor

Remove

Status

X

toll all

X

toll restricted-call

X

toll-list

X

toll unrestricted-call

X

tone-clock

X

trunk
trunk-group

X
X

X

trunk-group-history

X

trunk-group-members

X

X

X

tti

X
X

X

unstaffed-agents

X

usage button-type hunt-ns

X

usage button-type trunk-ns

X

usage button-type night-service

X

usage-extensions

X

usage-hunt

X

vdn

X

X

vector

X

X

wakeup incomplete

X

wakeup requests

X

wakeup station

X

wakeup-log

X

X

tsc-administered

udp

Tes
t

X

X

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-2.

Page 3-21

Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Permissions
Action

Object
login

Add

Change

Display

Enable

Remove

X

X

X

X

X

permissions

Table 3-3.

X

Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Stations
Object

Action
Add

Change

abbreviated-dialing 7103A-buttons

X

X

X

abbreviated-dialing enhanced

X

X

X

abbreviated-dialing group

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

abbreviated-dialing personal
abbreviated-dialing system

X

alias-station
attendant

Duplicate

Remove

X
X

X

data-module

X

X

routing-table

X

X

station

X

X

X

console-parameters

terminal-parameters 603/302B1

X

terminal-parameters 8400

X

vdn
vector

X

X
X

X

X
X

X

X

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Table 3-4.

Page 3-22

Command Permissions Form Entries — Administer Trunks
Object

Action
Add

Change

aar analysis

X

aar digit-conversion

X

access-endpoint

X

Display

X

announcements

X

ars analysis

X

ars digit-conversion

X

ars toll

X

digit-absorption

X

meas-selection route-pattern

X

meas-selection trunk-group

X

meas-selection wideband-trunk-grp

X

Duplicate

Remove

X

X

modem-pool

X

X

X

personal-CO-line

X

X

X

pri-endpoint

X

X

remote-access

X

rhnpa

X

route-pattern

X

time-of-day

X

toll

X

trunk-group

X

X

Testing a Login
1. Enter your login name at the login prompt.

Login: telmgr
Password:

Screen 3-5.

Login Prompt Form

X

X

X

X

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-23

After the user enters the correct login name and password and the login is
administered correctly, the system displays the command line interface.
To log into the system, do the following:
1. Turn on the administration terminal. Verify that the screen displays:
login:
2. Enter your login name, then press Enter. Verify that the screen displays:
password:
3. Enter your password, then press Enter.
For security reasons, the password is not displayed as you type it. The
system verifies that a valid login and password name were entered. If an
invalid login or password name was entered, the screen displays:
login incorrect:, and you must repeat the procedure.
If the system recognizes the login and password name, verify that the
screen displays the software version.
4. For your terminal type, complete one of the following:

Terminal Type (Enter 513, 715, VT220, 4410, or 4425): [513]
a. If the terminal is a 513 BCT, press Enter. The 513 in brackets [513] is
the system default terminal.
b. If the terminal is a 610 BCT or a 615 MT that has a 513 emulation
cartridge, press Enter.
c. If the terminal is a 610 BCT or a 615 MT that does not have a 513
emulation cartridge, enter 4410 and press Enter.
d. If the terminal is any other of the types listed, enter the terminal type
and press Enter.
5. You can deactivate INADS alarm origination whenever you log in as craft.
After you supply the terminal type information requested, the system
displays the following if alarm origination is activated on the Maintenance
System-Parameters screen:
NOTE:
Unless you are in a special situation, please reduce unnecessary
trouble tickets by always answering “y” to the following prompt to
suppress Alarm Origination.
Suppress Alarm Origination: [y]
The default answer is yes. If you do NOT wish to suppress alarm
origination, enter no. Any other entry defaults to yes. The test inads-link
command works regardless of whether you have overridden INADS alarm
origination.
6. Verify that the screen displays: enter command:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Login Procedure

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-24

You may enter the desired command, such as display station xxxx or
press Help to obtain the list of permissible commands.

Command Line Details
After a successful login, the administration terminal displays enter command:
and waits for entry of a command.
A command is made up of multiple words that are typed on the keyboard and
that instruct the system to perform a particular task. The system’s command
structure follows the format: Action, Object, and Qualifier.
The first word entered is the Action. It specifies the operation to be done (for
example, test, display, or reset).
The second word entered is the Object. It specifies the object to receive the
action (for example, station, trunk group, or hunt group).
The third word(s) entered is/are the Qualifier. The Qualifier is one or more words
or digits used to further identify or complete the Object. Depending on the Object
used, a Qualifier may or may not be used.
An example of a command line used to do a short test twice on a station with the
extension number 1212 is: test station 1212 short r 2. In this example, test is the
Action, station is the Object, and 1212 short r 2 is the Qualifier.
Spaces separate the Action, Object, and Qualifier on the command line.
NOTE:
Command line words do not have to be completely spelled out. All that is
required is to type enough letters to make the word unique.

Screen Forms
After the user completes a command line, the terminal displays the appropriate
screen form(s). Screen forms are system-generated forms that are formatted to
allow easy entry of translation data.
Screen forms enable the user to change the translations of the system by typing
parameters on the keyboard. Screen forms also allow system technician to
display errors and alarms. Each screen form consists of a title, page number,
body area, and a help and error message line. Specific screen forms exist for
each type of administrable function.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and
Feature Description contains detailed information and examples of the screen
forms generated by the system.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
Switch-Based Bulletin Board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-25

Switch-Based Bulletin Board
This feature will allow a user to leave messages in the system in order to
communicate with other system users.
NOTE:
This feature is not intended as a substitute for the existing procedures for
escalating problems, but only as an aid to the existing process.

Description
The bulletin board service provides an easy interface for the customer and
Lucent Technologies to leave messages on the system.
The bulletin board feature makes it easy for the customer to communicate with
Lucent Technologies (and vise-versa). For example, when a new load is installed
on a switch in the customer’s system, Lucent Technologies can leave the
customer messages which describe new functionality. This feature also allows
Lucent Technologies to keep the customer informed on the progress of trouble
items. In addition, the feature can be used by the customer to provide additional
information concerning problems that have already been escalated.

Accessing the Bulletin Board
Any user with the appropriate permissions can log into the system and have
access to the bulletin board. User’s who have “Maintain System” or “Administer
Features” permissions can enter, change, display, print, or schedule to print a
message. Users who have “Display Admen” and “Maintain Data” permission can
display the bulletin board. Any user who has “Display” permission can display,
print, and schedule to print the contents of the bulletin board.
When logging onto the system, users will be notified of any messages on the
bulletin board. The notification message will indicate the last time the bulletin
board was updated, if any “High-Priority” message exists, and if the bulletin
board is 80% or more full. If a “High-Priority” message exists, the command
prompt will change to the following message:
■

High-Priority Bulletin Board Messages Entered:

After the next command is entered, the default command prompt returns to the
screen.

User Considerations
■

Only one user at a time may edit a message on the bulletin board.

■

The user must have the proper permissions to access the bulletin board.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
Switch-Based Bulletin Board
■

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 3-26

The user must maintain the information stored on the bulletin board. It is
the user’s responsibility to delete old messages. If the bulletin board is full,
any new messages overwrite old messages.

System Considerations
The Bulletin Board feature provides up to 3 pages of text for each message.
Each page is limited to 20 lines of text, and each line of text is limited to 40
characters per line. The first 10 lines of text on page 1 is reserved for Lucent
Technologies Service’s High-Priority messages.

System Bulletin Board Commands
The system commands “change bulletin board,” “display bulletin board,” and
existing commands in the user interface are provided for use in the Switch Based
Bulletin Board.

Editing a Bulletin Board Message
1. Log into the system with “Maintain System” or “Administer Features”
permissions.
2. Enter the command “change bulletin-board.”
3. Follow system prompts.
To display messages on the Switch Based Bulletin Board the user must:
1. Log into the system with “Maintain System”, “Display Admin”, or “Maint
Data” permissions.
2. Enter the command “display bulletin board.”
3. Follow system prompts.

Editing a Switch-Based Bulletin Board Message
A message may contain up to three pages of information. Message lines 1
through 10 on page 1 are reserved for Lucent Technologies Services
High-Priority messages (the “init” and “inads” logins can edit the first 10 lines on
page one). Pages 2 and 3 will allow up to 20 lines of text, and each line of text
may be up to 40 characters per line. Each line of text has an associated date
field that is populated automatically by the system each time the line is modified.
The control keys used to edit existing feature forms must be used to edit a
message in the Switch Based Bulletin Board. The following characters are
allowed for use in the text field:
■

Uppercase/Lowercase letters, spaces, numerals, and !@#$%^&*()_
-+=[]{};’”<>./?.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
System Logoff Procedure

Page 3-27

NOTE:
Tab characters are not allowed. The existing command line interface will
cause the cursor to move to the next field if a Tab character is entered.
If a user changes any lines that cause two or more consecutive blank lines, then
the bulletin board will be automatically reorganized (upon submittal). Two or
more blank lines will be consolidated into a single blank line. If a blank line is at
the top of a form, it will also be deleted. This function will help prevent holes in the
bulletin board screens as old entries are deleted.
To save a message entered into the bulletin board text field, the user must
execute the save translation command.
G3V3 software is required for the bulletin board feature. The bulletin board
feature, as described in this document is available in G3V4. The G3V3/G3V4
feature on the systems-parameters customers-options form need not be
enabled.
The following screen is an example of bulletin board messages between Lucent
Technologies and a customer who is having trouble with trunk group translations:

display bulletin-board

Page 1 of 3

Messages (* indicates high-priority)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

AT&T is in the process of
investigating your trunk lockup problem.
The Bulletin Board will be updated as
information is found.
We have identified the problem.
The trunk you added does not provide
disconnect supervision, however your trunk
group was administered as such.
Please call for details.

Date
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95
02/02/95

We recently added a new trunk group (14)
02/03/95
and have had trunk group members locking up. 02/03/95
We see the error - Thanks for checking.
02/03/95

System Logoff Procedure
The system logoff procedure should be done any time the terminal is not being
used. This assures that system translations are not accidentally corrupted. The
monitor system command, when canceled, automatically causes a terminal
user to be logged off and, thus, prevents unauthorized use of the terminal. Use
the following procedure to log off the system:
1. Verify that the screen displays: enter command:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

3

Management Terminals
DEC VT220 Terminal

Page 3-28

2. Enter logoff and press Enter. The screen displays: login:
If after either logging on as system technician or issuing a system technician
command no additional command is issued for 30 minutes, an automatic
time-out and logoff occurs. At that time, any alarms in the system previously
unreported to INADS are reported. If you are logged in at two separate
administration terminals, the system waits until the second terminal times out or
until you log off before reporting such alarms to INADS.

Logoff Notification alerts system administrators if features that present a
significant security risk are enabled. A message displays on the system
administration/maintenance interface. Additionally, the user can be required to
acknowledge the notification before the logoff is completed.

DEC VT220 Terminal
The system supports use of the DEC VT220 connected to the system and used in
the same way as the other terminals. When logging in, at the terminal-type
prompt the user should enter ”VT220” to initialize the correct parameters.
Keyboard definitions shown in Table 3-5 are in effect:
Table 3-5.

Keyboard Definitions for the DEC VT220 Terminal

FUNCTION

VT220 KEY

ESCAPE
SEQUENCE

Help

Help

ESC[28~

Previous Page

Previous Screen

ESC[5~

Next Page

Next Screen

ESC[6~

Cancel

Remove

ESC[3~

Execute

Do

ESC[29~

Previous Field

F17

ESC[31~

Next Field

F18

ESC[32~

Clear Field

F19

ESC[33~

Refresh

F20

ESC[34~

Next Form

Select

ESC[4~

Up Arrow

Up_Arrow

ESC[A

Down Arrow

Down_Arrow

ESC[B

Right Arrow

Right_Arrow

ESC[C

Left Arrow

Left_Arrow

ESC[D

Update Form

Find

ESC[1~

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Issue 1
April 1997

Initialization and Recovery

Page 4-1

4

Initialization and Recovery

4

When the system is powered up, or when it experiences a catastrophic fault that
interrupts its basic functions, the system undergoes a reboot. Besides “reboot,”
there are several less severe resets available to the system that allow it to recover
from disrupting errors. The user can initiate these resets by using the reset
system commands. These commands are used to manually restart the system at
various levels, depending on the required test activity. The reset system
commands are discussed in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.
A system is reset due to a loss of power, or via one of the following:
■

Reset commands at the administration terminal.

■

Maintenance software, from which the system can reset itself. (This
process starts when certain software and hardware errors are detected by
the software.)

■

“Interchange,” which is a type of reset that can be scheduled as part of
daily maintenance in High or Critical Reliability systems.

!

WARNING:
When the system is rebooted or reset at level 2, 3, 4, or 5, all voice
terminal and attendant console features are adversely affected.
Users should be advised of services that are lost and that, as a
result, must be reactivated. See “Removing Power” in Chapter 5,
‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.

The administration terminal display and circuit pack LEDs indicate the progress
of the recovery process. LEDs are discussed in Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System 1 (System Warm Start)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 4-2

The sections that follow discuss successful system resets. For each level of
reset, a typical administration terminal display is provided. Note that any
hexadecimal numbers shown in parentheses, such as”(=8B89),” are only
examples and are subject to change. Subsequent sections discuss the recovery
process following an SPE-Down Mode and for "duplication interface-processing
element communication down."
NOTE:
If any of the diagnostic tests fail, the system may or may not function
properly, and the LMM may or may not proceed with the restart. If the LMM
does not proceed with the restart, the system goes into SPE-Down Mode. In
failure cases, the appropriate part (for example, the Processor circuit pack)
should be replaced.
NOTE:
Use and check the results of the set/get vector command found in the "Set
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, to determine how much time should be added for
the recovery levels. Also, if an update file is applied on a system reset, add
from 30 seconds to one minute to the recovery time for that reset.

Reset System 1 (System Warm Start)
This recovery takes about 30 seconds. All stable phone calls remain up.
In-progress calls are dropped. No new calls can be made during this time.
In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth.) is
reset.
Typical Display
RESET 1 (WARM) PERFORMED

Reset System 2 (System Cold Start
Without Translations Loading)
All Port circuit packs are reset. All telephone sessions are dropped. Telephones
begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system,
reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes.
In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth) is
reset. In addition, the TDM Bus and all port circuit packs are reset. Typical
displays in a Release 5vs/si system follow:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System 3 (System Cold Start With Translations Loading)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 4-3

Typical Display Release 5vs/si and Later Systems
INTERNAL REGISTER TEST

PASSED

LOCAL BUS TEST

PASSED

ROM CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

CONTROL STATUS TEST

PASSED

DCACHE TEST

PASSED

ICACHE TEST

PASSED

WRITE BUFFER TEST

PASSED

BTO TEST

PASSED

TIMER TEST

PASSED

RESET 2 (COLD_2) PERFORMED

Reset System 3 (System Cold Start
With Translations Loading)
Emergency Transfer is invoked. Translations reload from translation card.
Depending on the translations, the reloading process could take from five to 30
seconds. Thereafter, all port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions
drop. Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large
system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes.
In this restart, all software (Oryx/Pecos, drivers, maintenance, and so forth) is
reset. After the software is reset, all translations load from translation card. In
addition, the TDM Bus and all port circuit packs are reset. Typical displays in a
Release 5 vs/si system follow:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System 4 (System Reboot)

Page 4-4

Typical Display (TN790 Release 5vs/si and Later
Systems)
INTERNAL REGISTER TEST

PASSED

LOCAL BUS TEST

PASSED

ROM CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

CONTROL STATUS TEST

PASSED

DCACHE TEST

PASSED

ICACHE TEST

PASSED

WRITE BUFFER TEST

PASSED

BTO TEST

PASSED

TIMER TEST

PASSED

RESET 3 (COLD_1) PERFORMED

Reset System 4 (System Reboot)
Emergency Transfer is invoked. The boot image is already in the flash ROM
memory. The system reboots immediately after the LMM performs a series of
diagnostics on the processor and memory. Translations reload from the
translation card. Depending on the translation, the reloading process takes from
five to 30 seconds.
Thereafter, all port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions drop.
Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large
system, reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes. Typical
displays in a Release 5 system follow:

Typical Display (TN790 Release 5 and Later)
INTERNAL REGISTER TEST

PASSED

LOCAL BUS TEST

PASSED

ROM CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

CONTROL STATUS TEST

PASSED

DCACHE TEST

PASSED

ICACHE TEST

PASSED

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests)

WRITE BUFFER TEST

PASSED

BTO TEST

PASSED

MEM CONFIG TEST

PASSED

MEMORY FUNCTIONAL TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A BURST TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B BURST TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C BURST TEST

PASSED

VIRTUAL MEMORY TEST

PASSED

EXECEPTION TEST

PASSED

TIMER TEST

PASSED

MTP TEST

PASSED

SANITY TIMER TEST

PASSED

ADDRESS MATCHER TEST

PASSED

FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

DECOMPRESSING IDATA

in_cnt = 455532,
out_cnt = 1802240

RAM DATA CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

Page 4-5

RESET 4 (EXT REBOOT) PEFORMED

Continued on next page

Reset System 5 (System Reboot and
Run All 24-Hour Tests)
Emergency Transfer is invoked. The LMM performs a series of diagnostics on the
processor, on memory, and on memory card. Some diagnostics perform twice.
This takes less than three minutes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System 5 (System Reboot and Run All 24-Hour Tests)

Page 4-6

The boot image is already in the flash ROM memory. The system reboots
immediately after the LMM performs a series of diagnostics on the processor and
memory. Translations reload from the translation card. Depending on the
translation, the reloading process takes from five to 30 seconds. Thereafter, all
port circuit packs are reset, and all telephone sessions drop. Telephones begin
to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds. In a large system, reconnection of
all telephones may take up to five minutes. Finally, scheduled maintenance is
initiated. Typical displays in a Release 5vs/si system follow:

Typical Display (TN790 Release 5 and Later)
INTERNAL REGISTER TEST

PASSED

LOCAL BUS TEST

PASSED

ROM CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

CONTROL STATUS TEST

PASSED

DCACHE TEST

PASSED

ICACHE TEST

PASSED

WRITE BUFFER TEST

PASSED

BTO TEST

PASSED

MEM CONFIG TEST

PASSED

MEMORY FUNCTIONAL TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A BURST TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE A COUPLE TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B BURST TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE B COUPLE TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C STUCK BIT TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C PARITY TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C BURST TEST

PASSED

MEMORY MODULE C COUPLE TEST

PASSED

VIRTUAL MEMORY TEST

PASSED

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems Only)

EXECEPTION TEST

PASSED

TIMER TEST

PASSED

MTP TEST

PASSED

SANITY TIMER TEST

PASSED

ADDRESS MATCHER TEST

PASSED

FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

DECOMPRESSING IDATA

in_cnt = 455532,
out_cnt = 1802240

RAM DATA CHECKSUM TEST

PASSED

Page 4-7

RESET 5 (EXT REBOOT ) PEFORMED

Continued on next page

Reset System Interchange (High or
Critical Reliability Systems Only)
SPE-interchange (system hot start) is denoted by an "i" in the initcauses log. This
restart is used to transfer control from the Active SPE to the Standby SPE in the
least disruptive manner. Interchange (i) is the most transparent of all levels of
restart and causes no disruption of service to telephone users. This restart takes
fewer than two seconds.
NOTE:
The administration terminal is logged off. No diagnostics are performed,
and only the login prompt displays.
An interchange (i) can be performed in one of the following three ways:
a. System Technician-Demanded: using the reset system interchange
command
b. Scheduled Maintenance
c. Software-Requested: The software requests the interchange when it
determines that the Standby SPE is healthier than the current Active SPE
NOTE:
For most SPE alarms, interchange to the standby SPE is achieved using the
hot restart (i). However, there may be other alarms for which another restart
level (1 through 4) must be used to achieve a transition to the Standby SPE.
See Table 6-1, “Software-Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm
Conditions” in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’, for a
complete list of alarms and restart levels.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Procedure for SPE-Down Mode

Page 4-8

Procedure for SPE-Down Mode
Due to fatal hardware and software problems, it is possible for a system to go
into SPE-Down Mode. In this mode, the system invokes emergency transfer and
does not provide any other service. Moreover, while in this mode, the software
does not (or cannot) run at all. In a high or critical reliability system the system
goes into SPE-Down mode only when both SPEs go into SPE-Down mode.
There is an interface to the system by maintenance. The Processor circuit pack,
is responsible for maintenance in a standard reliability system. In a high or
critical reliability system, the maintenance is provided by the A-carrier
Duplication Interface (DUPINT-A) TN772 circuit pack with help from the
processor.
The administration terminal, which connects directly to the processor in a
standard reliability system and to DUPINT-A in a high or critical reliability system,
provides a very limited interface to the system. Technicians can display alarms or
restart the system. Only a subset of control complex alarms displays.
The following are sample displays for SPE-Down mode and the alarms
displayed.

Display for SPE-Down in a Standard Reliability system:
**************SPE DOWN MODE*************
You can display alarms and reset system(4).
SPE_DOWN->
Screen 4-1 and Screen 4-2 show all possible SPE-Down alarms in a standard
reliability system and in a high or critical reliability system, respectively.

DISPLAY ALARMS:
Physical
Name

Logical
Name

On
Board?

Alternate
Name

Alarm
Type

Date
Alarmed

Date
Resolved

------------------------------------

PROC_BD
MEM_BD_0
M_BUS
MAINT*
NETCON_BD
TAPE_UNIT
NO_TAPE

y
y
y
y
y
-----------

-----------------------------

MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR
MAJOR

------------------------------------

------------------------------------

Screen 4-1.

Display Alarms Command

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Procedure for SPE-Down Mode

Page 4-9

* The “MAINT” designation is used for PR-MAINT.

Display for SPE-Down in a High or Critical Reliability System:
**************SPE DOWN MODE************
You can display alarms [a|b] and reset system(4) [a|b].
SPE_DOWN->
Screen 4-2 shows only one SPE-Down alarm in a high or critical reliability system
after entering the display b command:

DISPLAY ALARMS B:
Physical
Name
------

Screen 4-2.

Logical
Name
PROC_BD

On
Board?

Alternate
Name

y

-----

Alarm
Type
MAJOR

Date
Alarmed

Date
Resolved

------

------

Display Alarms (one SPE-Down)
NOTE:
A standard reliability system tries to restart itself every 20 minutes. A high or
critical system tries to restart itself every 10 minutes.

The first step is to determine the location of the problem. It is possible for two or
more circuit packs to have failed. It is also possible for a fatal problem with one
circuit pack to affect another circuit pack. This is especially true for the Processor
and Memory circuit packs, where a failure in one affects the other. All three of the
following methods should be employed to determine where the fatal fault lies.
1. Use display alarms command:
Issuing the display alarms [a | b] command at the administration terminal
shows where maintenance thinks the problem lies. The alarms are a good
indication of why the system went down. They should be used with the
following two methods.
2. Observe red LEDs:
Observe the red LEDs on the circuit pack to determine where software or
processor firmware (LMM) had a problem.
3. Use the reset command:
In 286 system, issuing the reset command (Standard Reliability system) or
the reset [a | b ] command (High or Critical Reliability system) causes the
system to attempt a reset system 4. Observe all the diagnostics on the
screen, and note if the LMM has a problem with any of the diagnostics, as
this information should give a good indication of where the problem lies.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Procedure for SPE-Down Mode

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 4-10

The procedure to get a system out of SPE-Down mode follows.
NOTE:
This is important! If you cannot complete the first step or have problems
with the maintenance interface, then the first step should be to replace the
Processor circuit pack. In a high or critical reliability system the DUPINT-A
circuit pack can also cause SPE-Down.
1. If the alarms indicate a tape failure, replace the tape or tape drive and go
to Step 3. Otherwise, verify that there is a good tape in the tape drive. If a
tape is not present or if either the tape or tape drive is defective, then
restarting the system using the reset command causes the system to go
down again.
2. In a High or Critical Reliability system, select a carrier to repair first.
When it is possible to accurately determine the location of the problem,
use the display alarms [a | b ] command to display alarms for both SPEs
and check the red LEDs on the processor complex circuit packs. Select
the carrier where the red LEDs indicate the circuit pack alarmed. Bring up
the system on that carrier and then refer to Standby SPE Maintenance
documentation to repair the Standby SPE.
In a Standard Reliability system or after a carrier is chosen in a High or
Critical Reliability system, determine which circuit pack is defective by
displaying alarms and observing the red LEDs (as discussed previously).
Depending on the alarms, use Table 4-1 to replace the circuit packs
indicated, one by one, in the order shown.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down

Table 4-1.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 4-11

Order of Circuit Pack Replacement

Alarm

Suggested Circuit Packs
To Replace

PROC_BD

1) Processor
2) Network Control

MEM_BUS

1) Processor
2) Network Control

PROC_MEM

1) Processor

OFFBD_MEM

1) Processor
2) Network Control

INVALID_ERR

1) Processor
2) Network Control

MAINT_BD

1) Processor
2) Network Control

NETCON_ABSENT

1) Network Control
2) Processor

NO_CARTRIDGE

1) Memory Card
2) Network Control
3) Processor

Procedure for Duplication Interface —
Processing Element Communication
Down
In a High or Critical Reliability system, it is possible for both SPEs to stop
communicating with the A-carrier TN772 Duplication Interface (DUPINT-A) circuit
pack. Thus, the DUPINT-A, which is in charge of maintenance, prints the
following message on the administration terminal:
Duplication Interface-Processing Element Communication down
The system may continue to function on one of the SPEs. However, the system is
not able to provide any interface to the administration terminal.
If the system is still providing service, connect the administration terminal to the
Active SPE (check the amber LED on the Processor circuit pack). Then, if

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

4

Initialization and Recovery
Procedure for Duplication Interface — Processing Element Communication Down

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 4-12

software provides a login on the administration terminal, you can determine the
problems via the display alarms command.
If the system is not providing service, there is a problem with the Processor
circuit packs and/or DUPINT-A. Replace these circuit packs, one by one, until
the system starts functioning normally.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Suppress Alarm Origination [y]

Routine Maintenance Procedures

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-1

5

The following general purpose maintenance procedures may be used with other
repair strategies to clear system-alarmed and user-reported troubles.

Suppress Alarm Origination [y]
When logged in as “craft”, no alarms are reported to INADS. After logging off,
INADS automatically reactivates, and any unresolved alarms are reported to
INADS.
Also, when logged in as “craft,” an automatic logoff of the terminal occurs after
30 minutes of non-use. At that time, any unresolved alarms are reported to
INADS. If you are logged in as “craft” at 2 different terminals, the logoff occurs
when the second terminal remains unused for 30 minutes.
NOTE:
The test inads-link command functions even if INADS Alarm Origination is
overridden.

Handling Control Circuit Packs
PPN Control Circuit Packs

! WARNING:
It is NOT recommended that you reseat circuit packs unless the
documentation specifically instructs you to do so. If it is required to reseat a

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Handling Control Circuit Packs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-2

circuit pack, follow the instructions below which explain how to unseat,
reseat, and replace circuit packs.
The procedures for unseating, reseating, and replacing control circuit packs vary
depending on the system configuration. Therefore, before performing these
maintenance activities, refer to the appropriate procedure below.

Procedure for a Standard Reliability Cabinet
To unseat a control circuit pack:
1. Remove power from the PPN using the procedure provided in ‘‘Removing
Power’’.
2. Slide the latch pin upward to unlock the locking lever.
3. Pull down on the locking lever until the circuit pack disconnects from its
socket.
4. Pull the circuit pack just enough to break contact with the backplane
connector, but do not remove it from the cabinet.
To reseat a circuit pack:
1. Push the unseated circuit pack back into the backplane connector.
2. Lift the locking lever until the pin engages.
3. Restore power to the PPN using the procedure provided in ‘‘Restoring
Power’’
To replace Control circuit packs:
1. Remove power from the PPN using the procedure in the ‘‘Removing
Power’’
1. Unseat the circuit pack.
2. Slide the circuit pack out of the slot.
3. Replace the circuit pack as per the following procedure:
NOTE:
If a new circuit pack does not correct the problem, install the original
circuit pack.
NOTE:
If you are replacing a TN790 circuit pack, refer to ‘‘TN790 Processor
Circuit Pack (Memory)’’ in this chapter.
To install a new circuit pack or return the original one to service:
1. Carefully insert the circuit pack and push it all the way into its mounting
slot.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Handling Control Circuit Packs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-3

2. Lift the locking lever until the latch pin engages.
3. Restore power to the PPN using the procedure in ‘‘Restoring Power’’.
4. Verify that the circuit pack LED indications are correct.
5. Test the replaced control circuit pack by issuing the system technician
commands after power has been restored.

Network Control Circuit Pack

! WARNING:
When a TN777B Network Control circuit pack is reseated or replaced, the
correct date and time setting must be manually entered and verified.
The TN777B Network Control Pack holds a translation card. Before this circuit
pack is handled, remove the translation card.
1. Check that the "card in use" LED is not lighted. Otherwise, removing the
memory card may damage the data recorded on it.
2. Carefully pull the translation card from the card slot.
To insert the card into the slot:
1. Take the translation card and hold it in front of you so that the card’s label
is facing to your left.
2. With the card in this position, insert the shorter edge of the card into the
mounting slot. Then, gently push the card forward until you feel some
resistance at the opposite edge of the card. Once you feel this resistance,
the card is inserted. About 3/4 of an inch of a fully inserted card should
appear outside of the card slot.

!

WARNING:
Remember, assuming you are directly facing the circuit pack, the
card label should be facing to your left. If this is not the case, remove
the card and start again.

3. Test the inserted card by issuing the test card-mem system technician
command.

EPN Control Circuit Packs
Control circuit packs are unseated, reseated, replaced, and tested in the same
way as Port circuit packs. Refer to the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’ section in
this chapter. Note the special precautions required when handling the TN776
and TN570 Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit packs and the EPN TN768
and TN780 Tone-Clock circuit packs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
TN790 Processor Circuit Pack (Memory)

Page 5-4

EPN Expansion Interface Circuit Packs
If the system has high or critical reliability, verify that the Expansion Interface to
be unseated or replaced is NOT a part of the Active Expansion Interface Link.
Issue the status system command. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is
shown to be a part of the Active Expansion Interface Link, use the set
expansion-link PCSS command to make the current Standby link the Active
one.

EPN Tone-Clock Circuit Packs
If the EPN has redundant Tone-Clock circuit packs, make sure the Tone-Clock to
be unseated or replaced is the Standby circuit pack. Issue the status system
command. If the Tone-Clock is shown as Active, use the set tone-clock PC
command to make the current Standby Tone-Clock the Active one.

TN790 Processor Circuit Pack
(Memory)
Unless upgrading memory, the TN790 must have the same number of SIMMs as
the replaced circuit pack.

! CAUTION:
Be sure to use a Lucent Technologies-provided SIMM. Other brands may
have incompatible edge connectors and could produce unpredictable
results.

Removing Power
When power is removed, the following features deactivate:
■

Attendant Trunk Group Control

■

Automatic Callback

■

Call Park

■

Make Busy for Direct Department Calling (DDC) and Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)

The procedures for removing power vary depending on the system configuration.
Before performing these activities, refer to the following appropriate procedure.

! WARNING:
Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX
circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging
the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Removing Power

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-5

‘‘DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures’’ below, on the circuit pack,
and in DEFINITY AUDIX documentation.

DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures
Manually Power Down AUDIX System
A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to shut
down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the system.
1. Using a pointed object, such as a paper clip or pen (do not use a pencil),
press the Boot/shutdown button. The button is located at the top right
portion of the front panel.
2. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the LCD display flashes the
message MSHUT.
3. Release the Boot/Shutdown button.
NOTE:
The DEFINITY AUDIX System takes about five minutes to shut down.
The “heartbeat” indication on the display continues to flash.

Procedure for a Single-Carrier Cabinet PPN
This procedure applies to a single-carrier cabinet PPN with or with high or critical
reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either an AC or a DC power source.

! WARNING:
If a translation card alarm is present, or if a translation card problem is
suspected, do not save translations of the translation card that is provided
with the system.

! CAUTION:
Check that the translation card is present in the system or check that the
translation card is in the TN777B Network Control circuit pack.
4. At the administration terminal, enter the save translation command.
5. In a standard reliability system on the Processor circuit pack in the PPN,
and on the Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN, set the Emergency
Transfer switch to "ON."

! CAUTION:
When removing power, Error Log information is lost. If the data is to
be retained, enter the reset system 4 command. This command

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Restoring Power

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-6

restarts the system and may take several minutes. Wait for the login
prompt before proceeding.
6. To remove power from the cabinet:
■

In an AC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the carrier
behind the WP-91153 Power Unit.

■

In a DC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the
cabinet, behind the 676B Power Unit.

Procedure for a Single-Carrier Cabinet EPN
This procedure applies to a single-carrier EPN with or without high or critical
reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either an AC or a DC power source.
Power may be removed from the EPN without affecting the PPN.
NOTE:
In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an
individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not
contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active
Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion
Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system
command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display
synchronization command.
1. To remove power from the cabinet:
■

In an AC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the cabinet
behind the WP-91153 Power Unit.

■

In a DC-Powered system, turn off the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the rear of the cabinet
behind the 676B Power Unit.

Restoring Power
The procedures you need to restore power depend on the system configuration.
Before performing these activities, refer to the following appropriate procedure.
NOTE:
If the AUDIX unit has been powered down, refer to ‘‘Power Up the AUDIX
System’’ on page 5-8.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Restoring Power

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-7

Procedure for Single Carrier Cabinet PPN
This procedure applies to single-carrier cabinet PPNs with or without high or
critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either AC or DC power.
NOTE:
In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an
individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not
contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active
Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion
Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system
command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display
synchronization command.
1. Restore power as follows:
NOTE:
If the cabinet is powered by a 676B Power Unit, the 676B must have
been powered off for at least 10 seconds before being powered on.
If not, the 676B Power Unit does not restart.
■

In an AC-Powered system, turn on the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the
cabinet behind the WP-91153 Power Unit.

■

In a DC-Powered system, turn on the power in each cabinet
individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the back of the
cabinet behind the 676B Power Unit.

2. Make sure that the translation card is properly inserted into the slot.
3. The system now goes through the rebooting process.The translations are
loaded from the translation card, and rebooting takes about three minutes.
4. When system power is restored, the appropriate display is shown on the
administration terminal.
The display is the same as a reset system 4 that is described in ‘‘Reset
System 4 (System Reboot)’’ in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’.
5. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared, return the
EMER XFER (Emergency Transfer) switch(es) to AUTO. This restores the
system to the normal operating mode.
6. Reset the time using the set time command. Use display time command
to verify.

Procedure for Single-Carrier Cabinet EPN
Power may be restored to the EPN without affecting the PPN.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Restoring Power

Page 5-8

This procedure applies to single-carrier cabinet EPNs with or without high or
critical reliability, where the cabinet is powered by either AC or DC power.
NOTE:
In a high or critical reliability system, if power is to be removed from an
individual cabinet only, make sure that the affected cabinet does not
contain an Expansion Interface circuit pack that is part of the Active
Expansion Link or an Active Tone-Clock. To determine which Expansion
Interface Link and Tone-Clock are active, issue the status system
command. To determine the synchronization reference, use the display
synchronization command.
1. To restore power to the cabinet:
NOTE:
If the cabinet is powered by a 676B Power Unit, the 676B must have
been powered off for at least 10 seconds before being powered on.
If not, the 676B Power Unit does not restart.
■

In an AC-Powered single-carrier cabinet system, turn on the power
in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the
back of the cabinet behind the WP-91153 Power Unit.

■

In a DC-Powered single-carrier cabinet system, turn on the power
in each cabinet individually. The ON/OFF switch is located at the
back of the cabinet behind the 676B Power Unit.

2. The EPN circuit packs is inserted and the EPN is available for call
processing.
3. After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared, return the
Emergency Transfer switch to AUTO. This restores the system to the
normal operating mode.

Power Up the AUDIX System
1. Using a pointed object such as a paper clip or a pen (do not use a pencil),
press the Boot/Shutdown button.
2. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the display indicates the message,
BTEST, steady on.
3. Release the Boot/Shutdown button. the DEFINITY AUDIX system takes
approximately 5 minutes to power up.
■

The display has the following sequence of steady on messages:
— OSINIT
— OS
— AINIT
— ADX

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Control Cabinet Power Units
■

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-9

The DEFINITY AUDIX System is now powered up. When the system
is in the active state, the display indicates ADX, and the red LED is
off.
NOTE:
When powering up, the DEFINITY ADUXI System automatically
reboots. This sequence may show an MD or MJ ADX alarm in the
display until the system how powered up. When the system has
completed its power up sequence, the display reads: ADX.

Troubleshooting Control Cabinet
Power Units
1. Check that the translation card is in the TN777B circuit pack and enter the
save translation command.
2. On the Processor circuit pack in the PPN, set the EMER XFER (Emergency
Transfer) switch to ON. This locks the system in the Transfer Mode until
the trouble is cleared.

!

WARNING:
Electrostatic discharge can destroy or severely damage integrated
circuits or circuit packs. Always wear the electrostatic discharge
(ESD) wrist grounding strap when handling circuit packs. Connect
the wrist strap to one of the metal tabs located on the lower left or
right side of one of the carriers.

3. Unlatch the locking lever and unseat the power unit.
4. Unseat all the control circuit packs.
5. Reseat the power unit. If the yellow LED on the suspect power unit lights
immediately, the control circuit packs can be presumed to be healthy. If
the yellow LED on the suspect power unit does not light immediately,
continue with the next step.
6. Reseat the circuit packs one at a time while observing the LED on the
power unit.
a. If the yellow LED on the power unit lights when a specific circuit
pack is reseated, unseat and reseat the same circuit pack again to
rule out a transient problem. If the yellow LED lights again, the
problem is with the circuit pack, and the power unit is functioning
properly. Replace the defective circuit pack.
b. If the yellow LED on the suspect power unit does not light during
the reseating of the control circuit packs, continue with the next
step.
7. Unseat all port circuit packs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-10

8. Reseat the port circuit packs one at a time following the same steps
outlined above for control circuit packs.
9. If none of the control or port circuit packs appears to be defective, replace
the power unit.
10. When the system reboot has completed, return the EMER XFER
(Emergency Transfer) switch to AUTO. This restores the system to the
normal operating mode.

Replacing Components (Release 5vs
or Later)
Components within the Release 5vs can be replaced while the unit is attached to
the wall. Also, if the wires and cables at the back of the cabinet are neatly
bundled, these wires and cables need not be disconnected.
Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 provide views of the power supply sub-assembly.
Figure 5-3 provides a view of the fan sub-assembly. The sections following the
figures discuss how to disassemble the unit and then replace the power supply
or fans within the unit.

! CAUTION:
When replacing either the power supply or the fans within a Release 5vs
unit that is already attached to the wall, you should disconnect the entire fan
panel from the unit. Otherwise, if the fan panel is left to dangle, the cable
assemblies leading out from the fans (which are connected to the fan
panel) and into the backplane might become damaged or disconnected
from the backplane.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later)

Page 5-11

Cable
Retainer
Power
Panel

Screw

Term
DCE Connector
Connector
PI
Connector
Ground
Block
Power Cord
Receptacle
On/Off

Figure 5-1.

Power Supply Sub-Assembly (Outside View)

Power Supply
1. Remove the four screws on the top of the cabinet.
2. Remove the four screws from the fan panel at the rear of the unit. Then
remove the fan panel.
3. If the unit is attached to the wall, disconnect the entire fan panel.
4. Extending out from the power supply is a cord consisting of numerous
individual wires. This cord plugs into the backplane. A Burndy connector
is at the end of the cord. Squeeze the sides of the connector to release the
latch. Then pull the connector off of the backplane.
5. Remove the power supply from the unit. Once the power supply is
removed, disconnect the AC power cord.
6. Reconnect the AC power cord, insert the new power supply, reconnect
the Burndy connector and the cord, reinsert (if removed) the reconnected
fan panel, screw the fan panel back onto the unit, and reinsert the screws
on the top of the unit.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later)

Page 5-12

P/O
(Plug to
Power Supply)

Circuit
Breaker
Wire
Assembly
(Green)

To Backplane

P/O
(Blue)
P/O
(Brown)

Wire
Assembly
(Blue)
Wire
Assembly
(Brown)
Screw
Screw

Circuit Module
(Green-Yellow
Wire Attaches to
Ground Block Screw)
P/O, PI Cable,
TY Wrap
t A
bl

Figure 5-2.

Power Supply Sub-Assembly (Inside View)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Replacing Components (Release 5vs or Later)

Page 5-13

Hex Nut

Flow
Direction
Fan

Fan
Guard

Screw
Fan
Panel

Figure 5-3.

Fan Sub-Assembly

Fans
1. At the back of the unit, remove the four screws from the fan panel. Then
remove the panel.
2. If the unit is attached to the wall, disconnect the entire fan panel.

! CAUTION:
The power cord for each fan extends from a plug on the backplane.
Do not tug on any of these cords. Otherwise, the corresponding plug
on the backplane might come off.
3. Each fan has a power cord. At the end of each power cord is a plug and
receptacle. Disconnect the plug for each fan that is to be replaced. Then
remove the appropriate fan(s).
4. Install the new fan(s), reconnect the fan plug(s), reconnect the fan panel (if
disconnected), and screw the fan panel back onto the back of the unit.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Backup

Page 5-14

System Backup
System translations can be restored by using the data on the system or on the
backup translation card if the length of power failure is appropriate for the
corresponding system. Table 5-1 lists the requirements:
Table 5-1.

Requirements for System Backup

Minimum Length
of Power Failure
(in Minutes)

System

2

Single-Carrier Cabinet Standard System

2

Single-Carrier Cabinet High or Critical Reliability System

Save Translation
To ensure that the translation card contains the most recent copy of the
translation data, the system can automatically save the translation data onto the
translation card every 24 hours. Automatic daily backup of the system translation
data is controlled by an entry in the system parameters that defaults to "daily".
If many translation data changes are made, it is recommended that you save the
translation data using the save translation command. This action saves the new
changes to the translation card without having to wait for the next automatic daily
translation backup.
NOTE:
The save translation command blocks all maintenance commands except
some list, display, monitor, and status commands.
The system blocks the execution of any commands that change translations or
trigger a maintenance action (for example, test board, busyout port, and so
forth). The status card-mem command is blocked during the save translation
operation.
In a high or critical reliability system, if the save translation command is entered
without a qualifier, an attempt is made to save the translations on both the Active
and Standby SPE. If the command is qualified with either "spe-active" or
"spe-standby," the translations are saved only on the specified SPE. For example,
if, when the save translation command was issued, the translations were
successfully saved on the active SPE’s translation card, but were not
successfully saved on the standby SPE’s translation card, issue the save
translation spe-standby command to save the translations on the standby SPE
as well.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Backup

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-15

The system blocks the execution of any commands that change the translation,
access a translation card, or trigger a maintenance action.

! CAUTION:
It is recommended that "save translation" be performed after business
hours so that dial tone delays are not encountered.

! CAUTION:
Do not issue the "save translation" command when alarm conditions are
present.

Save Recorded Announcements
In a high or critical reliability system, if the save announcements command is
entered without a qualifier, an attempt is made to save the integrated
announcements on both the Active and Standby SPE. If the command is qualified
with either "spe-active" or "spe-standby," the integrated announcements are
saved only on the specified SPE. For example, if, when the save
announcements command was issued, the integrated announcements were
successfully saved on the Active SPE’s translation card, but were not
successfully saved on the Standby SPE’s translation card, then you would issue
the save announcements spe-standby command to save the announcements
on the Standby SPE as well.

! WARNING:
The "save announcements" commands should only be used after business
hours or when the system is operating during a low usage period. The
system takes about 45 minutes to one hour to transfer the recorded
announcements from the Announcement circuit pack to the system tape.
During this interval, use of the administration terminal is blocked for other
activities until the command completes.

Translation Card Backup
In case of a power failure, the system translations can be restored using the
translation card. Translation data can be saved during the daily scheduled
maintenance. However, if the translation data changes frequently, translations
should be saved frequently to ensure that the most up-to-date information is kept.
Note that only one translation card is provided with the system. It is
recommended that the customer purchase additional translation cards to serve
as backup or replacement. Translation cards should be alternated periodically.
It is also recommended that backup copies of the translation data be made
weekly, or after many changes have been made to the translation data. This

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Backup

Page 5-16

minimizes the loss of recent translation data changes if the translation card in the
system becomes damaged.
Enter the save announcements command to save the recorded announcements
in the system on the translation card.
NOTE:
A 10 MByte or larger translation card is required to save and restore
announcements.
The system takes about 10 minutes to complete this task. Because the terminal is
unavailable during this time, it is recommended that this command be used after
business hours. During this time period, the terminal cannot be used to
administer the system until the transfer is complete; however, all other terminals
(if provided) are allowed to perform administration procedures.
Enter the restore announcements command to restore the recorded
announcements from the translation card back into system memory. The system
takes about 22 minutes to complete this task. After completing the task, the
system performs an audit to make sure that the announcements on the
announcement circuit pack match the announcements administered in the
system.
The working copy of the announcements is stored on the announcement circuit
pack. A backup copy should be made on a 10 Mb or larger translation card. The
following procedure is used to make a backup Memory Card:
1. Remove the translation card from the Netcon circuit pack.
2. Insert the backup translation card into the Netcon circuit pack.
3. Enter the save translation command and press Enter. This instructs the
system to take all translation information in memory and transfer it into the
translation card. The following display appears:

save translation

SPE A
SAVE TRANSLATION

Processor

Command Completion Status

SPE_A

Success

Command successfully completely

enter command:

Screen 5-1.

Save Translation — SPEA

Error Code
0

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Backup

Page 5-17

4. Verify that the command successfully completes. If not, an error message
appears. In such a case, refer to the “Translation Card Errors” section.
5. If the system is equipped with a TN750 Announcement circuit pack, the
recorded announcements can be saved using the save announcement
commands. Enter the command and press Enter. The following display
appears:

save announcements
SAVE ANNOUNCEMENTS

Processor

Command Completion Status

SPE_A

Success

Error Code
0

Command successfully completely

enter command:

Screen 5-2.

Save Announcements Screen — SPEA
6. Verify that the command successfully completes. If not, an error message
appears. In such a case, refer to the “Translation Card Errors” section.
7. Remove the backup translation card and insert the original translation
card.
8. Label the backup translation card with the date and time it was updated. A
special notation on the card clearly distinguishes it from other cards.
9. Store the backup translation card in a secure place.

Translation Card Errors
Translation card-related failures may occur for two reasons: the card is at fault, or
the Netcon circuit pack is at fault. The following is a list of the error messages
and recommended responses to each.
1. Cannot access file storage area—Implies that the wrong
translation card may be installed.

Response: Check to see which translation card is installed. If the correct
one is installed, test it.
2. Cannot turn on 12 volt power supply—Implies that something
may be wrong with the Netcon circuit pack, which contains the power
supply.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Backup

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-18

Response: Test the 12-volt power supply by entering the test card-mem
command from the terminal. Executing this command causes the system
to run Test 701 (12 Volt Power Supply Test). If the power supply test fails,
replace the Netcon circuit pack. Then repeat whichever command failed.
3. Invalid directory on Card-Mem — The translation card needs
refreshing. Run test card-mem and be sure all tests pass.
4. Card-Mem is unusable — Something is wrong with the translation
card. Replace the translation card.
5. Could not write to Card-Mem — Something is wrong with the
translation card. Test the translation card.
6. Cannot access mass storage system now; try again later
— The storage system is in use. Try again later.
7. Request is incompatible with currently running
operations — The storage system is in use. Try again later.
8. Card-Mem is not inserted in the system — Insert the translation
card.
9. Cannot access file; wrong type of Card-Mem is inserted
— The correct translation card for the desired operation has not been
inserted. Load the appropriate translation card.
10. File size exceeded — There is no more file space. Call your Lucent
Technologies representative.
11. Upgrade Memory Card inserted — The system upgrade translation
card may have been inserted instead of the translations card. Insert the
translation card.
12. Card-Mem is write-protected — The switch on the top side of the
translation card is incorrectly set. Move the switch to the down position.
13. Transmission problem; please try later — There is a problem
communicating with the announcement circuit pack. Check to see that the
announcement circuit pack has been correctly administered. Use the
change data  command. Verify that the
announcement circuit pack is in the correct slot in the processor. If so,
wait and retry.
14. Command has been aborted; please try later — The command
was pre-empted. Try again later.
15. Saved copy of translations is unusable — The copy of the
translations on your translation card is faulty. Re-enter the save
translation command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-19

Software Upgrade
The software upgrade feature permits a DEFINITY System to upgrade its
software to include new features and to fix software problems.Performing an
upgrade on a system without high or critical reliability requires a reset system 4
(reboot) and thus causes a service disruption. Performing an upgrade on a
system equipped with high or critical reliability requires only a reset system 2
(Cold-2) restart that is less disruptive.

! WARNING:
No administration changes should be entered during the following software
upgrade procedure. There can be substantial time gaps between steps
and, since the system cannot prevent administration changes, it is up to the
system technician to make sure that none are attempted during the entire
software upgrade process.
NOTE:
This section does not apply to processor hardware upgrades such as
upgrading a 386 system to a Release 5vs/si or later system. See “Upgrades
and Additions/Software Upgrades”.

Procedure on a System using Translation Cards
The software in a Release 5vs/si or later system can be upgraded to include new
features and to fix software problems. Performing an upgrade on a standard
reliability system requires a Reset System 4 (reboot) and thus causes a service
disruption. Performing an upgrade on a high or critical reliability system requires
only a Reset System 2 (Cold-2) restart, which is less disruptive.

! CAUTION:
Do not enter any administration changes during the following software
upgrade procedure. There can be substantial time gaps between steps
and, since the system cannot prevent administration changes, it is up to the
system technician to make sure that none are attempted during the entire
software upgrade process. This includes making sure that no one
(including the customer) is making administration changes through
connections other than through the local administration terminal.

Standard Reliability (Simplex) Systems
The software upgrade for a standard reliability system can take up to 130
minutes, during which time service is interrupted for about 15 minutes. Upgrade
software cannot be done remotely, and it must be performed at the local
terminal. Ensure that the following items are available before proceeding:
■

Generic program card with the software release running currently in the
system

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Page 5-20

■

Generic program card containing the new software to which the upgrade
is to be done

■

Translation card on which the system translations are to be saved (the
card should already be in the system)

■

Software patch (if it exists) that is currently applied to the system (this
patch is downloaded if a software backout is required)

■

Software release label to be applied to the processor circuit pack after a
successful upgrade.

The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time
allotment for the upgrade procedure.

Process

Time
(minutes)

save translation

10

save announcement

45

upgrade software

10

save translation

10

save announcements

45

miscellaneous

10

Total Time

130

Figure 5-4 illustrates the output that appears on the terminal during the upgrade
procedure.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

).4%2.!, 2%')34%2 4%34
,//0 $!4! 4%34
$5!24 4%34
2/- #(%#+35- 4%34
#/.42/, 34!453 4%34
$#!#(% 4%34
)#!#(% 4%34
72)4% "5&&%2 4%34
"4/ 4%34
-%- #/.&)' 4%34
-%-/29 &5.#4)/.!, 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% ! 345#+ ")4 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% ! 0!2)49 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% ! "5234 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% " 345#+ ")4 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% " 0!2)49 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% " "5234 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% # 345#+ ")4 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% # 0!2)49 4%34
-%-/29 -/$5,% # "5234 4%34
6)245!, -%-/29 4%34
%8#%04)/. 4%34
4)-%2 4%34
-40 4%34
3!.)49 4)-%2 4%34
!$$2%33 -!4#(%2 4%34
&,!3( 4%84 #(%#+35- 4%34
2!- $!4! #(%#+35- 4%34
2%3%4  2%"//4 0%2&/2-%$	

Figure 5-4.

Page 5-21

0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$
0!33%$

Typical Start-up Messages (TN790)

Save Current Translations to Original Translation
Card
1. Set the write switch on the original translation card down to record. Insert
the card into the slot on the TN777B faceplate.
2. Enter save translation and press Enter to get translations onto the
translation card. This takes about 10 minutes. The yellow LED on the
TN777B is on. If the translations were corrupted, the following error
message displays when logging in:

! WARNING:
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor
immediately.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-22

NOTE:
The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption
message appears.

Disable TTI
Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use Page 2 of the
form to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the value to n.

List Configuration Software Version
Issue the list configuration software-versions command to determine if any
patches have been applied.
NOTE:
If the system must be restored to the old software, download the correct
patches.

Disable Scheduled Maintenance
Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use this form
to prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the update or
upgrade.
NOTE:
If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the value of the “Stop Time” field
to 1 minute after the current time. If scheduled maintenance has not yet
begun, change the value of the “Start Time” field to a time after the upgrade
is finished.

Disable Alarm Origination to INADS
1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.
2. Enter n in the Alarm Origination field and press Enter.
3. For some releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification
and Restart Notification before submitting the form.

! CAUTION:
Disabling alarm origination prevents the system from generating
alarms, thus preventing unnecessary trouble tickets.

Save Announcements
1. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack,
enter display announcements, and press Enter. If administered recorded
announcements are listed, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-23

press Enter. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for
EPN), C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of
the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21).
NOTE:
If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the
slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only
one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper
location.
NOTE:
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack has on-board non-volatile
storage and does not need to be saved to the translation card.

Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and
allow the disk to completely spin down.

! CAUTION:
Save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system.

! CAUTION:
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN
Gateway disk.
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 555-230-223, for the
procedure to log on.
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.

Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the control cabinet to be
upgraded, shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to
completely spin down.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

!

Page 5-24

WARNING:
Neglecting to shut down AUDIX before powering down the system
cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.

2. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors in the carrier.

Power Down Basic Control Cabinet

! CAUTION:
Powering down the PPN cabinet causes important system data, such as
BCMS data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup request, and
Do Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise
Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si for
information about preparing the system for a power down.
1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF.

Replace Circuit Packs
1. At the basic control cabinet, remove the combined TN786B/CPP1
Processor/Memory circuit pack.
2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot
labeled “PROCR.”

Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors.

Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System
Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors.

Reboot the System
1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON.
2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading
translations from the translation card. This takes 8 to 11 minutes.
3. Peel the paper backing from the TN790 Processor circuit pack position
label (designation strip) and affix it to the front of the control cabinet.
4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1.
5. Log in as “craft” at the login: prompt on the terminal.
6. Enter set time, and press Enter to set the time and ensure that the system
is booted properly.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-25

7. Enter list configuration software-version, and press Enter to compare the
version number of the Release 5.4 software program (displayed on the
terminal) with the TN790 version number (written on a label on the TN790’s
faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the version
number on the TN790 label so that they agree.
8. Perform a sanity check on the system running the new software by
executing the following commands in this order:
a. status system 1 (to check out unusual status in the system)
b. list station (to ensure that the translation is read in properly)
c. display alarm (to ensure no alarm is raised in the system)
d. list trunk-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly)
e. list hunt-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly)
This ensures there is no translation corruption and the translations can be
saved with the new software.
NOTE:
If the new load must be returned to the previous software load,
re-install the TN786B/CPP1 circuit packs and reboot with the
previous version’s translation card.
9. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to
request an “init” login. Once logged in as “init,” the CSA should assign the
Release 5.4 option, which automatically sets the 24-hour password aging
for the upgraded system’s customer logins.
NOTE:
Certain forms have changed for DEFINITY ECS R5. Upgraded
translations may appear on a different form, fields may shift within a
form, and the name assignments to particular fields may change.
10. Notify the switch administrator that any previous login names and
passwords still exist, but that the passwords expire in 24 hours. The new
login names and passwords must conform to the requirements below.
NOTE:
A password must have from 4 to 11 alphanumeric characters
including at least 1 alphabetic character and 1 numeric character. A
login name must have from 3 to 6 alphanumeric characters.
11. Since an R1V3.0 G3-MA cannot notify users about expiring passwords,
disable password aging for any login name used with an R1V3.0 G3-MA.

Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-26

3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.

Save Upgraded Translations onto New
Translation Card
1. Enter status system 1, and press Enter to verify the system is in “active”
mode.
2. If the system contains a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack, check for
completion of an automatic restore of announcements before removing
the original translation card. If the system has been running for at least 45
minutes since power on, this operation should be complete. Check the
yellow LED on the TN750/B which is lit during the download. If the restore
did not start within 15 minutes of power on, enter restore
announcements, and press Enter.
3. At this point, all telephones should be working properly.
4. Insert the new Release 5.4 translation card. Verify the write switch is down.
5. The original translation card can be reformatted and reused. Enter format
card-mem announcements and press Enter. This formats the original
translation card into Release 5.4 format (even if no announcement circuit
packs are installed).
6. Enter save translation, and press Enter. This instructs the system to write
all translation information from memory onto the translation card.
7. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack and
announcements were restored in the above step, enter save
announcements [‘from’ cabinet(1-X). carrier (A-D), slot (0-20)] and
press Enter. Where cabinet/carrier/slot is the location of the TN750/B.
NOTE:
If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the
slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only
one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper
location.

Enable TTI
If TTI was optioned prior to the software upgrade:
1. Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter.
2. Use page 2 of the form to change the TTI field back to y.

Enable Scheduled Maintenance
Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Enable the
scheduled daily maintenance.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-27

Enable Customer Options
1. Enter change system-parameters customer-options.
2. Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set.
NOTE:
In the Basic Call Setup field, if ISDN-PRI? was set to y before the
upgrade, be sure to set the field back to y.

Resolve Alarms
Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY
Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si.

Verify Alarm Origination to INADS
Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS
Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center (TSC). Verify that INADS
can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS. As part of the
system registration process, the INADS Database Administrator enables Alarm
Origination.

Return Equipment
Return the replaced equipment (including the old Translation Card) to Lucent
Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following documents:

BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns

High and Critical Reliability (Duplex) Systems
The upgrade procedure for high and critical reliability systems takes up to two
hours. Service is interrupted for about five minutes. The procedure cannot be
done remotely, and it must be performed at the PPN (local) terminal.
Ensure that the following items are available before proceeding:
1. Generic software card with the software release currently running in the
system
2. Generic software card containing the new software to which upgrades are
to be made
3. Translation cards on which to save system translations (these cards
should already be in the system)
4. Software patch (if it exists) that is currently applied to the system (this
patch is downloaded if a software backout is required)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Page 5-28

5. Software release label to be applied to the processor circuit pack after a
successful upgrade
The following table indicates the processes and their corresponding time
allotment for the upgrade procedure.

Process

Time
(minutes)

save translation

9

save announcement

45

upgrade software

15

save translation

9

miscellaneous

11

Total Time

90

Figure 5-5 presents output that appears on the terminal during this procedure.

TN786 CLMM Release X.X.X
INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE
MEM-CARD CHECKSUM
REPROGRAMMING MTP
ERASING MEMORY
REPROGRAMMING SPE

PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED

REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD ON B WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD
UPGRADE COMPLETE
REPLACE TRANSLATION MEM-CARD ON A WITH SOFTWARE MEM-CARD
TN786 CLMM Release X.X.X
INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE
MEM-CARD CHECKSUM
REPROGRAMMING MTP
ERASING MEMORY
REPROGRAMMING SPE

PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED

REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD ON A WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD
UPGRADE COMPLETE

Figure 5-5.

Terminal Display for a Duplex System Software Upgrade

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-29

Save Current Translations to Original Translation
Card
1. Set the write switch on the original translation card down to record. Insert
the card into the slot on the TN777B faceplate.
2. Enter save translation and press Enter to get translations onto the
translation card. This takes about 5 minutes. The yellow LED on the
TN777B is on. If the translations were corrupted, the following error
message displays when logging in:

! WARNING:
Translation corruption detected; call Lucent Technologies distributor
immediately.
NOTE:
The save translation command cannot function if the translation corruption
message appears.

Disable TTI
Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter. Use Page 2 of the
form to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) by changing the value to n.

List Configuration Software Version
Issue the list configuration software-versions command to determine whether
any patches have been applied.
NOTE:
If the system must be restored to the old software, download the correct
patches back onto the system.

Disable Scheduled Maintenance
1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use
this form to prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the
update or upgrade.
NOTE:
If scheduled maintenance has begun, set the value of the “Stop
Time” field to one minute after the current time. If scheduled
maintenance has not yet begun, change the value of the “Start Time”
field to a time after the upgrade is finished.

Disable Alarm Origination to INADS
1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-30

2. Enter n in the Alarm Origination field and press Enter.
3. For some releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm Notification
and Restart Notification before submitting the form.

! CAUTION:
Disabling alarm origination prevents the system from generating
alarms, thus preventing unnecessary trouble tickets.

Save Announcements
1. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack,
enter display announcements, and press Enter. If administered recorded
announcements are listed, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and
press Enter. Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for
EPN), C is the carrier designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of
the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21).
NOTE:
If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the
slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only
one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper
location.
NOTE:
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack contains on-board
non-volatile memory. It is not necessary to back up a TN750C.

Shut Down DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
If a DEFINITY LAN Gateway system resides in the control cabinet to be
upgraded, prepare to shut down the DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly and
allow the disk to completely spin down.

! CAUTION:
Save the system parameters if you plan to reuse the current system.

! WARNING:
Neglecting to shut down a DEFINITY LAN Gateway assembly before
powering down the system cabinet where it resides can damage the LAN
Gateway disk.
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway. See the DEFINITY Communications
System Generic 3 Installation, Administration and Maintenance of
CallVisor ASAI over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 555-230-223, for the
procedure to log on.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-31

2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.
4. Select Shutdown from the Reset System menu.
5. Unseat the LAN Gateway assembly from its backplane connectors.

Shut Down DEFINITY AUDIX System
1. If a DEFINITY AUDIX System resides in the control cabinet to be
upgraded, shut down the AUDIX assembly and allow the disk to
completely spin down.

!

WARNING:
Neglecting to shut down AUDIX before powering down the system
cabinet where it resides can damage the AUDIX disk.

2. Manually Power Down AUDIX System
A yellow caution sticker on the system’s power unit notifies technicians to
shut down the DEFINITY AUDIX System prior to powering down the
system.
a. Using a pointed object, such as a paper clip or pen (do not use a
pencil), press the Boot/shutdown button. The button is located at
the top right portion of the front panel.
b. Hold the boot/Shutdown button in until the LCD display flashes the
message MSHUT.
c. Release the Boot/Shutdown button.
NOTE:
The DEFINITY AUDIX System takes about five minutes to shut
down. The “heartbeat” indication on the display continues to
flash.
3. Unseat the AUDIX assembly from its backplane connectors in the carrier.

Power Down Basic Control Cabinet

! CAUTION:
Do not power down the entire system. This defeats the purpose of high or
critical reliability configurations.

! CAUTION:
Powering down the control cabinet causes important system data, such as
BCMS data, records of queued ACD calls, Automatic Wakeup request, and
Do Not Disturb requests to be lost. Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Page 5-32

Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si for
information about preparing the system for a power down.
Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF.

Replace Circuit Packs
1. Remove the combined TN786B/CPP1 Processor/Memory circuit pack
from the basic control cabinet.
2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot
labeled “PROCR.”

Reboot the System
1. Set the basic control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON.
2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading
translations from the translation card. This takes 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Peel the paper backing from the new circuit pack position label
(designation strip) and affix it to the front of the basic control cabinet.
4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1.

Power Down Duplicated Control Cabinet

! CAUTION:
Do not power down the entire system. This defeats the purpose of high or
critical reliability configurations.
Set the duplicated control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to OFF.

Replace Circuit Packs
1. Remove the combined TN786B/CPP1 Processor/Memory circuit pack
from the duplicated control cabinet.
2. Install the TN790 Processor circuit pack into the control cabinet slot
labeled “PROCR.”

Reseat DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
Reseat the LAN Gateway assembly into its backplane connectors in the carrier.

Reseat DEFINITY AUDIX System
Reseat the AUDIX assembly into its backplane connectors.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-33

Reboot the System
1. Set the duplicated control cabinet power supply circuit breaker to ON.
2. The system performs the reset level 4 rebooting process by loading
translations from the translation card. This takes 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Peel the paper backing from the new circuit pack position label
(designation strip) and affix it to the front of the duplicated control cabinet.
4. Install a circuit pack blank into the slot previously occupied by the CPP1.
5. Log in as “craft” at the login: prompt on the management terminal.
6. Enter set time, and press Enter to set the time and ensure that the system
is booted properly.
7. Enter list configuration software-version, and press Enter to compare the
version number of the Release 5.4 software program (displayed on the
terminal) with the TN790 version number (written on a label on the TN790’s
faceplate). If the version numbers are not the same, change the version
number on the TN790 label so that they agree.
8. Perform a sanity check on the system running the new software by
executing the following commands in this order:
a. status system 1 (to check out unusual status in the system)
b. list station (to ensure that the translation is read in properly)
c. display alarm (to ensure no alarm is raised in the system)
d. list trunk-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly)
e. list hunt-group (to ensure the translation is read in properly)
This ensures there is no translation corruption and the translations can be
saved with the new software.
NOTE:
If the new load must be returned to the previous software load,
re-install the TN786B/CPP1 circuit packs and reboot with the
previous version’s translation card.
9. Get the DOSS order number of the upgrade, and call the regional CSA to
request an “init” login. Once logged in as “init,” the CSA should assign the
DEFINITY ECS R5 option, which automatically sets the 24-hour password
aging for the upgraded system’s customer logins.
NOTE:
Certain forms have changed for DEFINITY ECS R5. Upgraded
translations may appear on a different form, fields may shift within a
form, and the name assignments to particular fields may change.
10. Notify the switch administrator that any previous login names and
passwords still exist, but that the passwords expire in 24 hours. The new
login names and passwords must conform to the requirements below.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-34

NOTE:
A password must have from 4 to 11 alphanumeric characters
including at least 1 alphabetic character and 1 numeric character. A
login name must have from 3 to 6 alphanumeric characters.
11. Since an R1V3.0 G3-MA cannot notify users about expiring passwords,
disable password aging for any login name used with an R1V3.0 G3-MA.

Restart DEFINITY LAN Gateway System
1. Log onto the DEFINITY LAN Gateway.
2. When the main menu appears, select Maintenance.
3. Select Reset System from the Maintenance menu.
4. Select Restart System from the Reset System menu.

Save Upgraded Translations onto New
Translation Card
1. Enter status system 1, and press Enter to verify that the system is in the
“active/standby” mode.
NOTE:
At this point, all telephones should be working properly.
2. Insert the new Release 5.4 translation card. Verify the write switch is down.
3. The original translation card can be reformatted and reused. Enter format
card-mem announcements and press Enter. This formats the original
translation card into Release 5.4 format (even if no announcement circuit
packs are installed).
4. Enter save translation, and press Enter. This instructs the system to write
all translation information from memory onto both translation cards.
5. If the system is equipped with a TN750/B Announcement circuit pack and
announcements were saved above, enter restore announcements, and
press Enter. Once the administered recorded announcements are
restored, enter save announcements [from PCSS] and press Enter. Where
P is the port network number (1 for PPN, and 2-4 for EPN), C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, or D), and SS is the number of the slot in which the
circuit pack resides (01 to 21).
NOTE:
If multiple TN750/B circuit packs are present, you must specify the
slot location for the save announcements command. If there is only
one announcement circuit pack, the system defaults to the proper
location.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Software Upgrade

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-35

NOTE:
The TN750C Announcement circuit pack has on-board non-volatile
storage and does not need to be saved to the translation card.

Enable TTI
If TTI was enabled prior to the software upgrade:
1. Enter change system-parameters features and press Enter.
2. Use page 2 of the form to change the TTI field back to y (if necessary).

Enable Scheduled Maintenance
Enter change system-parameters maintenance, and press Enter. Use this form
to enable scheduled daily maintenance.

Enable Customer Options
1. Enter change system-parameters customer-options and press Enter.
2. Use these forms to verify the customer options are properly set.
NOTE:
In the Basic Call Setup field, if ISDN-PRI? was set to y before the
upgrade, be sure to set the field back to y.

Resolve Alarms
Examine the alarm log. Resolve any alarms that may exist using DEFINITY
Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Maintenance for R5vs/si.

Verify Alarm Origination to INADS
Be sure the system is part of the existing INADS database by calling the INADS
Database Administrator at the Technical Service Center (TSC). Verify that INADS
can dial into the system and that the system can dial out to INADS.
As part of the system registration process, the INADS Database Administrator
enables Alarm Origination.

Return Equipment
Return the replaced equipment (including the old Translation Card) to Lucent
Technologies according to the requirements outlined in the following documents:

BCS/Material Logistics, MSL/Attended Stocking Locations
Methods and Procedures for Basic Material Returns

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Preventive Maintenance Procedures

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-36

Preventive Maintenance Procedures
The following preventive maintenance procedures should be followed when you
are visiting customer sites:

Air Filters
Air filters should be inspected annually. If a filter is dirty or clogged, first tap it on
the ground. If the filter is still dirty or clogged, then wash it with warm water and a
mild detergent. A vacuum cleaner can be used if one is available. If there is no
facility for washing or vacuuming the air filter, then replace the filter. Refer to
“CABINET” maintenance object for more information on air filters and fans.

Tape Head/Capstan
The tape drive head (also called the tape head) should be cleaned at least once
a year. Moreover, it should be cleaned as part of the preventive maintenance
strategy. It is recommended that you inspect the tape head during each
maintenance visit and that you clean the tape head several times a year. In
addition, a dated label should be placed on the tape drive unit after the tape
head is cleaned. New tapes leave more abrasive particles on the tape head.
The tape head can be accessed for cleaning from the front of the drive by
opening the tape access door with your finger. Refer to TAPE Maintenance
documentation for more details on cleaning the tape head.

Batteries
The batteries should be replaced every four years or whenever a POWER alarm
occurs in the system.

Preventive Maintenance Log
Figure 5-6 shows a sample of the AT&T Preventive Maintenance Log. Whenever
you complete any of the preventive maintenance procedures described in this
section, be sure to fill in the requested information on the log form before you
leave the customer’s premises.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-37



SYSTEM 75/DEFINITY GENERIC 3
SCHED.
AIR FILTERS1
Inspect Annually
Clean or replace
System 75XE
403-302-159

System 75/G1 (Lg. & Med)
403-326-820

TAPE HEAD / CAPSTAN2
Clean annually*

Replace when an
alarm is received,

COMPL.

SCHED.

COMPL.

COMPL.

DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________






______________________________





______________________________








______________________________







______________________________







______________________________



______________________________







______________________________






______________________________




SCHED.
COMPL.
COMPL. 

DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________



______________________________





DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________



______________________________





SCHED.
BATTERY PACKS3

COMPL.

DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________






______________________________





______________________________








______________________________







______________________________







______________________________



______________________________







______________________________






______________________________




SCHED.
COMPL.
COMPL. 

COMPL.

COMPL.

DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________




______________________________




SCHED.

COMPL.

COMPL.

DATE
DATE
BY
______________________________
______________________________







______________________________




______________________________




or every 4 years **
System 75/G1 (Lg. & Med.)
403-302-912
System 75XE 403-289-422 * It is recommended that the tape head/capstan be inspected several times per year and cleaned if
necessary.
** Battery packs should also be replaced whenever a POWER alarm occurs.

Notes: Refer to CABINET Maintenance documentation Refer to TAPE Maintenance documentation Refer to
POWER (for AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance documentation
NOTE: This form is to be posted with the equipment.

Figure 5-6.

DATE SYSTEM
INSTALLED____________

Preventive Maintenance Log

System Features
In addition to the various maintenance and test commands (described in
Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’) that are
available, the following system features may also be useful in troubleshooting
certain system resources:
■

Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA)

■

Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks

■

Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant

■

Trunk Identification by Attendant

■

Facility Test Calls

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features
■

Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing

■

Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing

■

Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems

■

Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems

■

Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Calls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-38

Complete descriptions of each feature are provided in the DEFINITY Enterprise
Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration and Feature Description.
Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 — Console
Operations, 555-230-700, and DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and
Generic 3 Voice Terminal Operations as required for detailed operating
procedures (does not include Facility Test Calls, Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back
Testing, Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing, Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI
Problems, Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Calls, or Troubleshooting ISDN-BRI
Problems described in this chapter.)

Automatic Circuit Assurance
Requires the use of a display-equipped voice terminal (may be nondisplay type if
the Voice Message Retrieval feature is provided) or an attendant console. An
"ACA activate/deactivate" button (one per system) is required on the voice
terminal or attendant console.
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA) assists users in identifying possible trunk
malfunctions. The system maintains a record of the performance of individual
trunks relative to short and long holding time calls. The system automatically
initiates a referral call to an attendant console or display-equipped voice terminal
when a possible failure is detected.
Holding time is the elapsed time from when a trunk is accessed to the time a
trunk is released. When ACA is enabled via administration, the system measures
the holding time of each call.
A short holding time limit and a long holding time limit are preset by the System
Manager for each trunk group. The short holding time limit can be from 0 to 160
seconds. The long holding time limit can be from 0 to 10 hours. The measured
holding time for each call is compared to the preset limits for the trunk group
being used.
Measurements are not made on personal CO lines, out-of-service trunks, or
trunks undergoing maintenance testing.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-39

Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks
Requires the use of a multi-appearance voice terminal or attendant console
equipped with a "verify" button.
Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks allows a user at a voice terminal or
attendant console to make test calls to trunks, voice terminals, and hunt groups
(DDC/UCD). These test calls check the status of an apparently busy resource.
This provides an easy method to distinguish between a voice terminal or
resource that is truly busy and one that only appears busy because of a trouble
condition.

Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to
Attendant
Requires the use of an attendant console.
Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant provides the console user
with a visual indication of the trunk group status for each trunk group associated
with the 12 Trunk Group Select buttons located on the console. Trunk groups
with busy indications during nonbusy periods should be checked to ensure that
the trunks are busy and not out-of-service. Use the Busy Verification of Terminals
and Trunks feature to test the suspected faulty trunks.

Trunk Identification by Attendant
Requires the use of a display-equipped voice terminal or an attendant console
equipped with a "trunk id" button.
Trunk Identification by Attendant allows a voice terminal or attendant console
user to identify a specific trunk being used on a call. This is useful when a user
experiences noise or poor transmission on a trunk call. The trunk identification
(access code and group number) is displayed when the "trunk id" button is
pressed while on a trunk call. Use of this feature is denied if there are more than
two trunks on a call. If the call is trunk-to-trunk, the identification displayed is of
the last trunk added to the call.

Facility Test Calls
The Facility Test Calls feature provides a voice terminal user the capability of
placing test calls to access specific trunks, touch-tone (DTMF) receivers, time
slots, and system tones. The test call can be made by a local voice terminal user
by dialing an access code.
NOTE:
For the ISDN-PRI Test Call feature, see ‘‘Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test
Call Problems’’ later in this chapter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-40

NOTE:
The following test call descriptions are for voice terminal users:

Trunk Test Call
The trunk test call accesses specific Tie or CO trunks. DID trunks cannot be
accessed.
To place a call:
1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see
Note), and listen for dial tone.
NOTE:
The Facility Test Call Access Code (FAC) is administered on the
Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an
example. For more information on FAC, refer to DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 3 Implementation, 555-230-653.
2. Dial the 6-digit port number "PCSSpp"
P

=

Port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN)

C

=

Carrier number (A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5)

SS

=

Slot number (01—20)

pp

=

Port number

The channels on a DS1 trunk are addressed by using the channel number
for the port number.
3. Listen for one of the following tones:
■

Dial Tone or Silence—trunk is connected. Go to Step 4. If you hear
a dial tone, it is coming from the far end. If the far end has been
disabled, you do not hear dial tone. However, depending on
far-end administration, you may still be able to dial digits. All digits
dialed after the port number are transmitted using end-to-end
DTMF signaling; therefore, if the trunk being tested is a rotary trunk,
it is not possible to break dial tone.

■

Reorder Tone—trunk is busy or maintenance busy.

■

Intercept Tone— a trunk or touch-tone (DTMF) receiver has not
been accessed.

4. Place a call. Even if you do not hear a dial tone, you may still be able to
dial digits, depending on the administration of the far-end switch.
All digits dialed after the port number are transmitted using end-to-end
DTMF signaling; therefore, if the trunk being tested is a rotary trunk, it will
not be possible to break dial tone.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-41

If the call does not go through (that is, no ringing), determine if the trunk
circuit pack has been removed.

Touch-tone (DTMF) Receiver Test Call
The touch-tone (DTMF) receiver call accesses and tests the four touch-tone
(DTMF) receivers located on the Tone Detector circuit pack. To place the call:
1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see
Note), and listen for dial tone.
NOTE:
The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature
Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example.
2. Dial the 6-digit port number "PCSSpp":
P

=

Part network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN)

C

=

Carrier number (A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4, E=5)

SS

=

Slot number (01—20)

pp

=

Touch-tone (DTMF) Receiver Port number (01, 02, 05,
or 06))

3. Listen for one of the following tones:
■

Confirmation Tone—touch-tone (DTMF) receiver is connected. Go
to Step 4.

■

Reorder Tone—touch-tone (DTMF) receiver is busy.

■

Intercept Tone—a touch-tone (DTMF) receiver or trunk has not
been accessed.

4. Dial 1234567890*# and listen for Confirmation tone (test passed) or
intercept tone (test failed). The test fails if the touch-tone (DTMF) receiver
does not recognize all the touch-tone (DTMF) signals.
5. To test another touch-tone (DTMF) receiver, repeat Steps 2 through 4.
6. To terminate the test call, hang up the station set used for testing.

Time Slot Test Call
The time slot test call connects the voice terminal user to a specific time slot
located on the TDM Buses (A or B) or out-of-service time slots. Specific Time
Slots To place the call:
1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for example, 197, see
Note), and listen for dial tone.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-42

NOTE:
The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature
Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example.
2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then press # and
the 3-digit time slot number "xxx," where:
xxx

=

Time slot number (000 through 255 on Bus A and 256
through 511 on Bus B)

3. Listen for one of the following tones:
■

Confirmation Tone—time slot is idle or maintenance busy

■

Reorder Tone—time slot is busy

■

Dedicated Tone—One of the following tones is heard (see Table
5-2)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-2.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-43

TDM Bus Time Slot Numbers

TDM Bus A
time slot

TDM Bus B
time slot

000

256

Reorder

001

257

Reorder

002

258

Reorder

003

259

Reorder

004

260

Reorder

005

261

Touch Tone 1 - 697Hz

006

262

Touch Tone 2 - 770 Hz

007

263

Touch Tone 3 - 852Hz

008

264

Touch Tone 4 - 941 Hz

009

265

Touch Tone 5 - 1209 Hz

010

266

Touch Tone 6 - 1336Hz

011

267

Touch Tone 7 - 1447 Hz

012

268

Touch Tone 8 - 1633 Hz

013

269

Dial Tone

014

270

Reorder Tone

015

271

Alert Tone

016

272

Busy Tone

017

273

Ringback Tone

018

274

Special Ringback Tone

019

275

2225 Hz Tone

020

276

Music

021

277

Tone on Hold

022-253

278-509

254

510

Reorder

255

511

Confirmation

Tone Heard

Confirmation (used for calls)

Out-of-Service Time Slots To place the call:
1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for instance, 197, see
Note), and listen for dial tone.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-44

NOTE:
The Feature Access Code (FAC) is administered on the Feature
Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an example.
2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then dial ** and
listen for the following tones:
■

Confirmation Tone—Connection is made. Go to Step 3.

■

Reorder Tone—No time slots are out-of-service.

3. Repeat from Step 1 to alternate between out-of-service time slots on TDM
Bus A and B.

System Tone Test Call
The system tone test call connects the voice terminal user to a specific system
tone. To place the call:
1. Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code (for instance, 197, see
Note), and listen for dial tone.
NOTE:
The Facility Test Call Access Code (FAC) is administered on the
Feature Access Codes Form. The 197 FAC code used here is an
example.
2. Dial port network number (1 for PPN or 2 or 3 for EPN), then dial * followed
by the two-digit tone identification number listed in Table 5-3.
3. Listen for the tone that was specified.
NOTE:
For a definition of Call Progress Tones see DEFINITY Enterprise
Communications Server Release 5.4 System Descriptions and
Specifications.
Table 5-3.

System Tone Identification Numbers

Number

Description

00

Null tone

01

Dial tone

02

Reorder tone

03

Alert tone

04

Busy tone

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-3.

Page 5-45

System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued

Number

Description

05

Recall dial tone

06

Confirmation tone

07

Internal call waiting tone

08

Ringback tone

09

Special ringback tone

10

Dedicated ringback tone

11

Dedicated special ringback tone

12

Touch tone 1

13

Touch tone 2

14

Touch tone 3

15

Touch tone 4

16

Touch tone 5

17

Touch tone 6

18

Touch tone 7

19

Touch tone 8

20

Chime

21

350 Hz

22

440 Hz

23

480 Hz

24

620 Hz

25

2025 Hz

26

2225 Hz

27

Counter

28

External call waiting

29

Priority call waiting

30

Busy verification

31

Executive override/intrusion tone

32

Incoming call identification

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-3.

Page 5-46

System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued

Number

Description

33

Dial zero

34

Attendant transfer

35

Test calls

36

Recall on don’t answer

37

Audible ring

38

Camp-on recall

39

Camp-on confirmation

40

Hold recall

41

Hold confirmation

42

Zip tone

43

2804 Hz

44

1004 Hz (-16db)

45

1004 Hz (0 db)

46

404 Hz

47

Transmission test sequence 105

48

Redirect tone

49

Voice signaling tone

50

Digital milliwatt

51

440 Hz + 480 Hz

52

Music

53

Transmission test sequence 100

54

Transmission test sequence 102

55

Laboratory test tone 1

56

Laboratory test tone 2

57

Disable echo supervision dial tone

58

7 seconds of answer tone

59

4 seconds of answer tone

60

Restore music (or silence)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-3.

Page 5-47

System Tone Identification Numbers — Continued

Number

Description

61

Warning tone

62

Forced music tone

63

Zip tone (first of 2 sent)

64

Incoming call ID (first of 2 sent)

65

Tone on hold

66

CO dial tone

67

Repetitive confirmation tone

68

Conference/bridging tone

Continued on next page

Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing
The TN760B circuit pack can be configured for back-to-back testing (also known
as connectivity testing) by making translation and cross-connect changes. This
testing configuration allows for the connection of Tie Trunks back-to-back in the
same switch to verify the operation of Tie Trunk ports. The tests can be
performed in either the E & M or simplex modes.

E & M Mode Test Procedure
The procedures to perform the Analog Tie Trunk port test in the E & M mode are
as follows:
1. At the administration terminal, enter list configuration trunks command
to determine which ports are assigned on the Tie Trunk circuit pack.
2. Enter display dialplan command to determine the Trunk Access Code
(TAC) format.
3. Enter display port xx command for all ports defined in Step 1. This action
displays the trunk groups to which the ports belong (that is, of which the
ports are members).
NOTE:
See the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’ section in this chapter for
details on how to remove and replace port circuit packs.
4. Insert the circuit pack back into the slot.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-48

5. Enter display trunk xx p command for each trunk group identified in Step
3. This command displays the specified trunk group on the administration
terminal screen and prints a hard copy on the printer. Save this data for
later use.
6. Remove all members defined by these ports from the trunk group(s) using
the ch trunk xx command.
7. Remove the Tie Trunk circuit pack from the carrier slot.
8. Set the dip (option) switches for each of the two ports to be tested on the
Tie Trunk circuit pack to "E & M mode" and "unprotected."
9. Enter add trunk n command to add a new (test) trunk group. Then enter
the following information:
■

Group Type — tie

■

TAC — (use trunk access code obtained from dial plan)

■

Trunk Type (in/out) — wink/wink

■

Port — assign two of the ports from the tie trunk

■

Mode — E & M

■

Type — specify one port as t1 standard and other port as t1
compatible

Examples of the Trunk Group forms are shown in Screen 5-3 and Screen
5-4..
display trunk-group 10

Page

1 of

5

TRUNK GROUP
Group Number:
Group Name:
Direction:
MIS Measured?
Dial Access?
Queue Length:
Comm Type:

10
tr 10
two-way
n
y
0
voice

Group Type: tie
COR: 1
Outgoing Display? n
Busy Threshold: 60
Internal Alert? n
Auth Code? n

CDR Reports? y
TAC: 110
Data Restriction? n
Night Service:
Incoming Destination:

TRUNK PARAMETERS
Trunk Type (in/out): wink/wink
Outgoing Dial Type: tone

Incoming Rotary Timeout(sec): 5
Incoming Dial Type: tone
Disconnect Timing(msec): 500
Digits:

Digit Treatment:
Used for DCS? n
ACA Assignment? n
Baud Rate: 1200
Incoming Dial Tone? y
Answer Supervision Timeout:

Screen 5-3.

Synchronization: async
Duplex: full
Maintenance Tests? y
Suppress # Outpulsing? n

Trunk Group Form (Page 1 of 2)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-49

Page

2 of

5

TRUNK GROUP

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS

Port

Name

1: B1901
2: B1902
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Screen 5-4.

Mode

Type

Answer Delay

E & M
E & M

t1 stan
t1 comp

Trunk Group Form — E & M Mode (Page 2 of 2)
10. Locate the Tie Trunk port terminal connections at the cross-connect field.
See Table 5-4.
11. At the cross-connect field, disconnect outside trunk facilities from the Tie
Trunk ports and mark the disconnected wires for later reconnecting the
Tie Trunk ports back to normal operation. The D Impact Tool (AT-8762) is
required to perform this step.
12. Use jumper wires (DT 24M-Y/BL/R/G and DT 24P-W/BRN) and the D
Impact Tool to connect wiring between the two ports assigned in Step 9 at
the cross-connect field. For example, if the two ports on the Analog Tie
Trunk circuit pack are port 1 and 2, connect the wirings as shown below:

Port

1

T1
R1
T11
R11
E1
M1
t1 stan
E&M

Port

2
T12
R12
T2
R2
M2
E2

t1 comp
E&M

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-50

13. Check all wirings to verify good connections between the two test ports.
14. Place a call from one voice terminal to another voice terminal using the Tie
Trunk ports assigned. Dial TAC and extension. For example, if TAC of Tie
Trunk group is 110 and station number is 5012, then dial 110 5012. If the
call cannot be made, either one of these ports could be defective. There
are four ports on TN760B (port 1, 2, 3, and 4), try different combinations to
determine defective ports.
15. If there is a defective port on the circuit pack, try to switch to an unused
port. However, if all ports are normally used, then replace the circuit pack.
16. Disconnect the jumpers between two ports. Then use administration
terminal and trunk printouts to restore all trunk group changes to normal
values.
Table 5-4.

Carrier Lead Appearances at
110 Cross-Connect Field

110 Connecting
Block Terminals

CO Trunk TN747B

Tie Trunk TN760B

1

T1

T1

2

R1

R1

3

T11

4

R11

5

E1

6

M1

7

T2

T2

8

R2

R2

9

T12

10

R12

11

E2

12

M2

13

T3

T3

14

R3

R3

15

T13

16

R13

17

E3

18

M3

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-4.

Page 5-51

Carrier Lead Appearances at
110 Cross-Connect Field

110 Connecting
Block Terminals

CO Trunk TN747B

Tie Trunk TN760B

19

T4

T4

20

R4

R4

21

T14

22

R14

23

E4

24

M4

25

T5

26

R5

27
28
29
30
31

T6

32

R6

32
33
34
36
37

T7

38

R7

39
40
41
42
43

T8

44

R8

45

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Table 5-4.

Page 5-52

Carrier Lead Appearances at
110 Cross-Connect Field

110 Connecting
Block Terminals

CO Trunk TN747B

Tie Trunk TN760B

46
47
48
49
50

Continued on next page

Simplex Mode Test Procedure
The procedures to perform the Analog Tie Trunk Port Test in the simplex mode
are as follows:
1. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 of the E & M Mode Test Procedure.
2. Set the dip (option) switches for each of the two ports to be tested on the
Tie Trunk circuit pack to simplex mode.
3. Enter add trunk n command to add a new (test) trunk group. Then enter
the following information:
■

Group Type — tie

■

TAC — (use trunk access code obtained from dial plan)

■

Trunk Type (in/out) — wink/wink

■

Port — assign two of the ports from the tie trunk

■

Mode — simplex

■

Type — type 5

An example of the Trunk Group Form Page 2 is shown in Screen 5-5.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-53

.

Page

2 of

5

TRUNK GROUP

GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS

Port

Name

1: B1901
2: B1902
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Screen 5-5.

Mode

Type

Answer Delay

simplex
simplex

type 5
type 5

Trunk Group Form — Simplex Mode (Page 2 of 5)
4. Locate the Tie Trunk port terminal connections at the cross-connect field.
See Table 5-4.
5. At the cross-connect field, disconnect outside trunk facilities from the
Analog Tie Trunk ports and mark the disconnected wires for later when the
Tie Trunk ports are placed back into normal operation. The D Impact Tool
(AT-8762) is required to perform this step.
6. Use jumper wires (DT 24M-Y/BL/R/G) and the D Impact Tool to connect
wiring between the two ports assigned in Step 4 at the cross-connect field.
For example, if the two ports on the Analog Tie Trunk circuit pack are ports
1 and 2, connect the wirings as shown below:
Port

1

T1
R1
T11
R11
type 5
simplex

Port

2
T12
R12
T2
R2

type 5
simplex

7. Repeat Steps 13 through 16 of the E & M Mode Test Procedure.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-54

Terminating Trunk Transmission Testing
The Terminating Trunk Transmission (TTT) (noninteractive) feature provides for
extension number access to three tone sequences that can be used for trunk
transmission testing from the far end of the trunks.
The three test types should have extension numbers assigned on the
Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
Test Type 100:_____

Test Type 102:_____

Test Type 105:_____

Test Type 100 provides:
1. 5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB
2. Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute
Test Type 102 provides:
1. 9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB
2. 1 second of quiet
3. This cycle is repeated until disconnect; disconnect is forced after 24
hours.
Test Type 105 provides:
1. nine seconds of 1004 Hz at -16dB
2. one second of quiet
3. nine seconds of 404 Hz at -16dB
4. one second of quiet
5. nine seconds of 2804 Hz at -16dB
6. 30 seconds of quiet
7. one half second of Test Progress Tone (2225 Hz)
8. approximately five seconds of quiet
9. forced disconnect

Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems
The following flowchart, Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8, defines a layered approach
when troubleshooting ISDN-PRI problems. Since a problem at a lower layer
affects upper layers, layers are investigated from low to high. In the flowchart, the
DS1 facility is layer 1, the TN765 Processor Interface is layer 2, and the ISDN
trunks are layer 3. Transient problems are diagnosed on Page 2 of the flowchart,
Figure 5-8.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-55

START

ARE THERE
ALARMS OR

DETERMINE PRESENT
YES

STATUS OF DS-1 FACILITY

ERRORS AGAINST

VIA DS1-BD MO SECTION.

DS1-BD

FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURES

NO
IF MULITPLE ALARMS EXIST,
INVESTIGATE IN FOLLOWING
ARE THERE

ORDER:

ALARMS OR

PI-BD
YES

ERRORS AGAINST
PI-BD, PI-PT, PI-SCI,

PI-PT
PI-SCI

PI-LINK, OR

PI-LINK

ISDN-LINK

ISDN-LINK
FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE
FOR APPROPRIATE MO

NO

ARE THERE
ALARMS OR
ERRORS AGAINST

YES

FOLLOW REPAIR
PROCEDURE FOR ISDN-TRK

ISDN-TRK

NO
END
TO
PAGE

A

2

Figure 5-7.

Processing of ISDN-PRI Problems (Page 1 of 2)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-56

COMPARE INDICATED
FROM
PAGE

FACILITY TO RECORD

A

OF PREVIOUS PROBLEMS

PERFORM AN IN-DEPTH

1

ANALYSIS OF T1
FACILITY INCLUDING:
TRANSMISSION FACILITY,

ARE
TRANSIENT

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

ARE BIT

THERE

ERRORS OCCURRING

NO

PROBLEMS MAKING

MORE FREQUENTLY

ISDN-PRI

THAN PREVIOUS

CALLS

HISTORY
END

(DACS, CSUs, ETC.,)
AND ANY OTHER

YES

NOISE-PRODUCING
EQUIPMENT.
REFER TO AT&T PRACTICE
855-351-101 ISSUE 8,

YES
NO

JANUARY 1987. THIS
DESCRIBES T1 CABLING TO
CSUs, ETC, IN DETAIL

ARE
THERE BIT
ERRORS OVER

YES

RECORD INDICATED

THE TI FACILITY?

FACILITY AND, IF THIS

USE LIST

CONTINUES TO OCCUR,

MEASUREMENTS

CONTACT FACILITY OR

COMMAND

END

EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
PROVIDER. THEN ESCALATE
NO

HAS A

SEE DS1-BD MO FOR

SYNCHRONIZATION
SOURCE BEEN
UNSTABLE?

REPAIR PROCEDURES IF
YES

SYNC PROBLEM IS DUE
TO SLIPS. OTHERWISE,

SYSTEM SWITCHING

FOLLOW REPAIR

AWAY FROM IT?

PROCEDURES FOR

SEE SYNC MO

SYNC MO

NO

IF PROBLEMS
STILL EXIST,
THEN ESCALATE

Figure 5-8.

Processing of ISDN-PRI Problems (Page 2 of 2)

Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems
The following flowchart, Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10, defines a layered approach
when troubleshooting PRI endpoint problems. Since a problem at a lower layer
affects upper layers, layers are investigated from low to high. In the flowchart, the
DS1 facility is layer 1, the TN765 Processor Interface is layer 2, and the ISDN
trunks are layer 3.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-57

The troubleshooting procedure described here diagnoses faults between the
switch and the line-side PRI terminal adapter/ISDN-PRI endpoint equipment.
Problems encountered on the network-side of a wideband connection or
problems with end-to-end equipment compatibility are out of the scope of this
section.

START

Are there
alarms or
errors against
DS1-BD?

YES

FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE
IN THE DS1-BD MO SECTION

NO

Are there
alarms or
errors against
PI-BD, PI-PT,
PI-SCI, PI-LINK,
ISDN-SGR, or
ISDNLNK?

YES

IF MULTIPLE ALARMS EXIST,
INVESTIGATE IN THE
FOLLOWING ORDER: PI-BD,
PI-PT, PI-SCI, PI-LINK,
ISDN-LNK, AND ISDN-SGR.
FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE
FOR APPROPRIATE MO.

NO
YES
Are there
alarms or
errors against
PE-BCHL?

FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE
IN THE PE-BCHL MO SECTION

NO

Does
the
PRI Terminal
Adapter or the
ISDN endpoint
equipment
indicate alarms or
errors? Check the
endpoint equipment
for status - not
the
SAT

YES

FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE
RECOMMENDED BY THE PRI
TERMINAL ADAPTER
VENDOR
OR ISDN ENDPOINT
EQUIPMENT VENDOR

NO

Is the
administration
between the endpoint
equipment and the
switch consistent?
(for example, port
boundary,
width, etc.)

NO
FIX ADMINISTRATION
MISMATCH

YES
TO
PAGE 2

Figure 5-9.

A

Processing of PRI Endpoint Problems (Page 1 of 2)

END

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-58

FROM
PAGE 1

TRANSIENT FAILURES

Are there
bit errors
over the DS1
interface between the
switch and the PRI
Terminal Adapter or
the ISDN endpoint
equipment. Use
‘‘list measurement’’
command.

YES

A

Does
every
call fail or
are the
failings
transient?

Perform an in-depth
analysis of DS1
interface between the
switch and the
endpoint equipment,
including the premise
distribution wiring,
endpoint equipment,
and any other noiseproducing equipment.

ALWAYS FAIL

CHECK THE HEALTH OF THE
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
(FOR EXAMPLE, VIDEO CODEC)
AND THE HEALTH OF THE
DEFINITY NETWORK

IF THE PROBLEM STILL EXISTS,
THEN ESCALATE

NO

END
Has a
synchronization
source been unstable?
System switching away
from it? Check
for alarms and
errors against
SYNC.

YES

FOLLOW REPAIR
PROCEDURE FOR
SYNC MO

NO

IF PROBLEM STILL
EXISTS, THEN
ESCALATE

Figure 5-10.

Processing of PRI Endpoint Problems (Page 2 of 2)

Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Call Problems
An ISDN-PRI test call is a call of a diagnostic nature that is placed across an
ISDN-PRI user-network interface to a previously designated number. An
ISDN-PRI test call is also a maintenance procedure concerned with the
identification and verification ISDN-PRI user-network interface problems. The
ISDN-PRI test call can access ISDN-PRI trunks only.

Placing an Outgoing ISDN-PRI Test Call
NOTE:
An ISDN-PRI test call can be placed only if the circuit translates to an
ISDN-PRI trunk.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-59

An ISDN-PRI test call can be originated via either the synchronous or the
asynchronous method. Each method is described below.

Synchronous Method
One command is used in this method to start, stop and query an ISDN-PRI test
call. In the synchronous method, an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call may be part of a
system technician-demanded long test sequence to test a circuit pack, port, or
trunk. Therefore, the command line entry can be any of the following:
test trunk / long [repeat #]
test port PCSSpp long [repeat #]
test board PCSS long [repeat #]
The "long" qualifier must be entered in the above commands in order for the ISDN
test call to run. The repeat number (#) can be any number from 1 through 99
(default = 1).
The following information is displayed in response to the above commands:
■

Port: The port address (PCSSpp) is the port network number, carrier
designation, slot, and circuit of the maintenance object under test.

■

Maintenance Name: The type of maintenance object tested.

■

Test Number: The actual test that was run.

■

Test Results: Indicates whether the test passes, fails, or aborts.

■

Error Code: Additional information about the results of the test. (See the
ISDN Trunk Maintenance documentation for details.)

Asynchronous Method
NOTE:
The asynchronous method requires a Maintenance/Test circuit pack to be
physically present in the system.
In this method, four commands are used to start, stop, query, and list an
outgoing ISDN-PRI test call. These commands are as follows:
clear isdn-testcall / (stop)
list isdn-testcall (list)
status isdn-testcall / (query)
test isdn-testcall / [minutes] (start)
NOTE:
Before placing an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call, verify that the FAC on the
System Features Form has been administered as well as the Far End Test
Line No and TestCall Bearer Capability Class (BCC) on the Trunk Group
Administration Form. Furthermore, if the ISDN-PRI trunk is of the "cbc" (call

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Page 5-60

by call) service type, then the Testcall Service field on Trunk Group
Administration Form must have been administered also.
To initiate an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call in the asynchronous method, issue the
following command:
test isdn-testcall / [minutes]
This command enables you to specify a specific the trunk on which to originate
the ISDN-PRI test call.
NOTE:
The optional qualifier can also be used that specifies in minutes the
duration of the test call. If no duration is specified, the default duration is
used which is 8.4 or 9.6 seconds. The qualifier "minutes" accepts the
numeric values one through 120 (that is, two hours = 120 minutes).
Screen 5-6 shows a typical response to the test isdn-testcall command:

test isdn-testcall

Port

Maintenance Name

1B1501

ISDN-TRK

Screen 5-6.

Test Number
258

Test Result

Error Code

PASS

Typical Response to Test ISDN-Testcall Command

The meaning of the information displayed in response to the above command is
described in the following list.
■

Port: The port address (PCSSpp) is the port network number, carrier
designation, slot, and circuit of the maintenance object under test.

■

Maintenance Name: The type of maintenance object tested.

■

Test Number: The actual test that was run.

■

Test Results: Indicates whether the test passes, fails, or aborts.

■

Error Code: Additional information about the results of the test. (See the
ISDN Trunk Maintenance documentation for details.)

The functions of the clear, list, and status commands associated with the ISDN
Testcall are summarized in the following list. For more detailed information, refer
to the appropriate sections as directed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
System Features

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-61

■

Clear isdn-testcall / enables you to cancel an in-progress
ISDN-PRI test call and allow another test call to start. For details on this
command, refer to the clear isdn-testcall command description in the
"Clear Commands" section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.

■

List isdn-testcall / enables you to list all the ISDN-PRI trunks
in use for an ISDN-PRI test call in the system. For details on this command,
refer to the list isdn-testcall command description in the "List Commands"
section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing
Aids’’.

■

Status isdn-testcall / [minutes] enables you to check on
the progress of an outgoing test call. When an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call
completes in a specific port network, another ISDN-PRI trunk from the
same port network is available for testing (regardless of whether the
status information has been displayed). For details on this command,
refer to the status isdn-testcall command description in the "Status
Commands" section of Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.

Troubleshooting the Outgoing ISDN-Testcall
Command
If the TestCall BCC field appears on the Trunk Group Administration Form, make
sure the TestCall BCC field indicates the correct BCC for the service provisioned
on the ISDN-PRI trunk. The TestCall BCC values are defined as follows:
■

0—Voice

■

1—Digital Communications Protocol Mode 1

■

2—Mode 2 Asynchronous

■

3—Mode 3 Circuit

■

4—Digital Communications Protocol Mode 0 (which is usually the default).
NOTE:
If the ISDN-PRI trunk is of type "cbc," make sure the TestCall Service field
on the Trunk Group Administration Form indicates the correct service so
that a network facility message can be sent across the ISDN-PRI network

If the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call keeps aborting, please make sure that the
far-end device can handle DCP Mode 0 or DCP Mode 1.
NOTE:
Before attempting to make an ISDN-PRI test call to the public network (that
is, the network is the far-end), make sure that test call service is provisioned
by the network. The user must subscribe to Test Type 108 service and have
the correct far-end test call number administered on the trunk group form
for the call to be allowed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-62

Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage
Problems
The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack is a test tool that allows easy access to
the backplane pins that provide various voltages to control and port slots. Probes
from a voltmeter can be plugged into the access point for the desired voltage
and a ground access point to measure the voltage. This circuit pack itself has
instructions for use printed on the side as well as a listing of the voltage tolerance
range for each voltage on the front panel. The voltages and tolerances are as
follows:
ringing voltage: 75 -> 115 VAC
+12 VDC: 11.4 -> 12.6 VDC
+5 VDC: 4.95 -> 5.35 VDC
-5 VDC: -4.95 -> -5.35 VDC
-48 VDC: -43 -> -53 VDC
neon message waiting voltage: -80 VDC -> -165 VDC
The type of cabinet determines where the circuit is placed to measure the
voltages. For single-carrier cabinets, all voltages except +12 VDC and +5 VDC
can be measured from any port slot. However, the neon message waiting voltage
requires that the system have a TN752 or TN755 Power Unit circuit pack. The
Tape Drive slot is used to measure +12 VDC.
NOTE:
All control circuit packs should be removed from the backplane before this
measurement is made.
The +5 VDC measurement must be made in two separate cabinet locations since
the power unit has two independent +5 VDC outputs [+5 VDC and +5(B) VDC].
Each output supplies a different section of the cabinet with power. For the control
cabinet, make one measurement in the processor slot and another in any port
slot. For an EPN control cabinet, make one measurement in any port slot from 1
to 4 and another in any port slot from 5 to 16. For a port cabinet, make 1
measurement in any port slot from 1 to 6 and another in any port slot from 7 to 18.

Troubleshooting Multimedia Call
Handling (MMCH)
Before troubleshooting any problems associated with the DEFINITY MMCH,
always be sure that the endpoint is operating correctly (audio, video, and data)
by making point-to-point test calls. If possible, make the test calls over the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-63

5

network to test the connectivity and routing of network calls from the endpoint.
This eliminates problems such as disconnected audio or video cables and
network troubles.

64 Kbps Calls Terminate but Far End Receives
56 Kbps Indication
Description
Some 2x64 Kbps conferences on the DEFINITY MMCH do not establish because
of framing, audio, or video problems.
For calls that are routed in the network through a Lucent Technologies/LEC
interface, the originating equipment may launch a 64 Kbps call attempt, and the
far end receives either a 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps indication. If the far end receives a
64 Kbps indication, the call may have used 56 Kbps facilities. If so, the call may
exhibit any of the following conditions:
■

No handshaking in one direction or both (call disconnects after timeouts)

■

Call connects, but audio or video is corrupted (audio noise or no video)

■

Call succeeds without disruption (this is the least likely since one endpoint
must be aware that the call is really 56 Kbps to connect)

If any of the above conditions occur, then 64 Kbps calls from the site are
blocked.

Solution
Administer the conference for connection at 56 Kbps.

Calls Terminate with No Audio
Description
To support endpoints that do not support Multipoint Command Conference
(MCC), the DEFINITY MMCH changes its capability set and initiates a capability
set exchange with the endpoint when the Selected Communications Mode (SCM)
changes. If the endpoint does not follow the SCM audio mode, the MCU may
include the endpoint as a secondary (audio only) endpoint. If the endpoint sends
an unknown or unsupported audio mode, then the TN788B decoder port mutes
the endpoint from the conference. The user may hear the conference but may not
be heard by other parties in the conference.

Solution
1. Use the Status Conference x form and check the Audio Mode field for the
current operating mode of the conference.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-64

5

2. Another indication of the audio modes is in the “Incoming Mode
Commands from Endpoint and Outgoing Commands from MMI” on page
3 of the Status Conference x Endpoint y form. Check the Audio fields
under the Mode Commands/Communication Modes section of the form.

Some Parties Cannot Be Heard by Others (Audio
Subsetting)
Description
Problems where varying subsets of the conference hear different things may
have problems with the various summing resources/groups that are in use.
Traditionally theses faults are caused by the SPE not cleaning up the
connections properly. Isolation and diagnosis should focus on the VC resources
in use by that conference.

Solution
1. Use the status conference command to list the VC resources in use by
this conference. Try a hot replacement of any VC boards in use, which
refreshes the VC translations and move all of the audio connections to
different VC ports.
2. If the problem still exists, try dropping the conference and then bringing
the conference back up again. Not only does this refresh VC translations,
but uses different timeslots as well.
3. If the problem still exists, suspect a hardware problem. If practical, wait for
the DEFINITY MMCH to be idle (no active conferences), and then check
the circuit packs for active (yellow) LEDs. If any of these are unexpected,
such as on a VC board, try replacing the board and then bringing the
conference up again.

Calls Terminate with No Video
Description
Generally, loss of video can be divided into 2 types. The first occurs when the
DEFINITY MMCH switches to the endpoint, but nobody sees them. The receivers
see either “black” video or a frozen image of the previous speaker depending on
the codec of the manufacturer. The type occurs when the DEFINITY MMCH does
not switch to an endpoint.

Solution
In the first type described above, wiring problems, power to the camera, or video
encoder circuit pack problems in the codec are typical causes.
In the second type, no video from an endpoint typically occurs because it is not a
valid video source. This can be checked by looking at page 1 of the Status

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-65

5

Conference x Endpoint y Vid form under the Capability section. In this section, a
“y” or “c” suggests that the endpoint has video. An “e” means ept has not
declared any video capability in cap set, “n” is audio only, and “blank” means
audio add-on.
Also check page 1 of the Status Conference x Endpoint y Vs form for indication of
the video state for the endpoint values.

Calls Terminate Correctly but Are Unstable
Description
A number of conditions will lead to some or all endpoints having stability
problems during the course of a conference. A lack of stability from an endpoint
is noticeable by a lack of a video switching while the party is the only talker or
excessive disconnects from that endpoint.

Synchronization
Generally, the most common problem is a mismatch in synchronization sources
between the endpoint and the DEFINITY MMCH. This typically causes low-level
(Px64) handshake problems that can trigger the endpoint/MMCH to disconnect
the call. The MCCH’s timers are set to sufficiently high values so that, normally,
the endpoint will timeout and disconnect first. If installed in a customer network, it
is a good idea to perform an audit of the path synchronization is being supplied.
If there are different clock sources between endpoints and the DEFINITY MMCH,
some problems are sure to occur. The severity of these problems can range from
a handshake failure every few seconds to one per day. Depending on the type of
endpoint, this can cause the endpoint to disconnect or just freeze video until the
main problem is resolved.
Specifically, PictureTel System 4000 endpoints seem to be the most sensitive to
instability. The Lucent Technologies Vistium also disconnects fairly infrequently.
Last, the CLI Rembrandt II VP freezes video and waits for framing to be
recovered.

Network Configuration Concerns with
Synchronization
When auditing a network for synchronization, avoid unnecessary hops. Thus, a
switch providing star-configuration synchronization is preferred over a
daisy-chain configuration. Additionally, if there are DEFINITY PBXs that have
EPNs, synchronization should be provided to sub nodes from the same port
network through which the PBX receives its synchronization. Passing
synchronization through the PBX Expansion Interface adds an unnecessary hop
to the path and creates another potential point of failure.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-66

5

Expansion Interface Duplication
If a customer’s network uses PBX EPNs with duplicated Expansion Interfaces,
scheduled switching of the Expansion Interface links should be disabled on the
PBX via change system-parameters maintenance. When scheduled
maintenance runs and switches the links, there is a brief corruption of the data
path. If endpoints have active calls when the switch occurs, this corruption of the
data path causes Px64 handshake problems, which lead to the endpoints losing
video source status, and sometimes disconnecting as described above.
Disabling the EI switching is in the customer’s best interest to prevent the
disruption of the Px64 data stream. The customer will get the same level of alarm
indications and maintenance on the EI links, regardless of the status of
scheduled switching.

PRI D-Channel Backup
A somewhat unlikely source of call stability problems occur where the
translations for PRI D-channel Backup between two non-MCU switches were
incorrect. As an example, on switch A, DS1 1A10 was designated as the primary
source, and on switch B, the corresponding DS1 was designated as the
secondary source. When scheduled maintenance was run on the switch that had
an active standby D-channel, an audit disconnected some calls using the link.
The problem was corrected when the the D-channel primary/secondary
assignments matched.

Processor Duplication on the PBX
Do not enable the PI link switch on scheduled maintenance. This can cause link
stability problems on the Accunet Bandwidth Controller (ABC).

Voice-Activated Switching Problems
Voice-activated switching on the DEFINITY MMCH does not follow the loudest
talker. The MMCH queues all speaking parties and selects a new video
broadcaster (the second-oldest speaking party) when the oldest speaking party
has stopped talking. The new broadcaster will see the last speaker as its video.
The system can also “learn” about the noise coming from an endpoint to help
prevent false switches, adapting both to noise level and repetitive sounds such
as a fan. This adaptation occurs over approximately 10 seconds.

No Switching, Full Motion Video
If a room is excessively noisy, the DEFINITY MMCH may receive sufficient audio
signal to conclude that there is a speaker present. Use the Status Conference x
form to determine if the MMCH thinks an endpoint is talking. The MMCH sets the
Ts field to t for each endpoint if there is voice energy detected. This endpoint
may have to mute when nobody at the site is speaking to allow the conference to
proceed normally. Remind the customer that it may be necessary to mute if a
side conversation is going on in the background, just as one would do in an

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-67

5

audio conference. If the system does not switch broadcasters even after the
current broadcaster has muted, check the conference administration using the
display conference X command to ensure that the conference is in
voice-activated mode. Also verify that parties who were speaking are valid video
sources as described in the “Calls Terminate with No Video” section above.
The See-Me feature (MCV) can also cause VAS to “lock-up.” An endpoint can
activate MCV to force their site to become the broadcaster. If they do not disable
the feature when finished, the system remains in this mode indefinitely.
Beginning with Release 3.0, the status conference X command shows that MCV
is in effect by displaying av in the Video Status (Vs) column. Page 3 of the Status
Conference X Endpoint Y form also has a Broadcaster field that indicates MCV
is in effect with (SEE-ME) as the broadcaster. The same scenario can occur in a
CHAIR or UCC-controlled conference with a designated broadcaster. In this
situation the CHAIR/UCC has not released the designated broadcaster and
returned to VAS mode. If there is a UCC-designated broadcaster, status
conference X indicates a Video Status of u. Also, for UCC rollcall the return
video may appear to be stuck. Check the Video Status for an “R,” indicating
rollcall.
If none of the examples above appears to be the cause, and if the room was
quiet, all speakers are valid video sources, the conference is voice-activated,
and the speaker can be heard, then escalate the problem.

Video Never Switches to a Particular Party
Description
Verify that the endpoint is a valid video source as described in the “Calls
Terminate with No Video” section above. If it is, then the audio from the endpoint
may not have sufficient voice signal for the hardware to determine the parties at
the endpoint are speaking. Check the Talk field on page three of the Status
Conference X Endpoint Y form to see if the talking bit is y. Next, check the
audio by standing adjacent to the microphone and speaking at a normal level.

Solution
If the audio is not muffled:
1. Use the status conference command to determine which port on the
TN788B (VC board) is connected to this endpoint.
2. Check the VC (TN788B) board using the test board xxyy long command.
3. Drop the call.
4. Find another available port, then:
a. Busyout the port to which the endpoint was connected.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)

Page 5-68

5

b. Make another call to the same conference. If the problem corrects
itself, then the previous port may be bad. If there are other VC
boards with sufficient available ports to replace calls on the current
VC, then pull the board that has the bad endpoint on it (the status
conference command displays the encoder port associated with
the call). The system will automatically reestablish the VC
connections without dropping the call. If this fixes the problem, then
replace the board, as it has at least one bad port. Reseating the
board may temporarily fix the problem due to the hard reset done to
the board.

Audio Echo
Echo in conference calls, particularly those with large delay characteristics, is
totally disruptive. When Voice Activated Switching is taken into account, the
effects are disastrous. Various arrangements of the microphone(s) and room
speaker(s) may be needed.
For some Lucent Technologies Vistium endpoints, if an external speaker is
attached or was attached when the system was last rebooted, this endpoint will
cause audio echo throughout the conference. First, isolate the offending
endpoint by asking each endpoint to mute, one at a time, until the echo
disappears.
If the input from an endpoint is located too close to the speakers of an endpoint,
then acoustic echo is created. The microphone must be moved away from the
speakers.
Normally, if any microphone in the room is moved relative to the speakers, that
site will cause echo until the echo canceller in the codec retrains itself, some will
require a manual reset. If a PictureTel keypad is configured with external
microphones connected to the keypad, then the internal microphone and
external microphone(s) “sing” to each other if the “ext mic” bat switch is set to
“int mic” on the back of the keypad. In this configuration, VAS locked on that site,
and the acoustic “singing” was inaudible.

Rate Adaptation
Because of a lack of a clear explanation in standards, sometimes endpoints do
not work well with each other and the DEFINITY MMCH. The MMCH will only
allow a conference to downgrade from 64kbps to 56 kbps operation on
conferences that have the Rate Adaptation flag set to y.
When a downgrade does occur, information on the Status Conference form
indicates the success or failure of the 64kbps-endpoints that are participants to
properly rate adapt to 56kbps. As a general indication that the conference has
rate adapted, the Conference Transfer Rate and Effective Transfer
Rate fields show initial and current transfer rates, respectively. For each 64-kbps

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-69

endpoint the column that indicates Rate Adapt shows an n if the endpoint did
not follow the procedures as specified by the H.221. If an endpoint shows y, it
did successfully rate adapt. If an endpoint shows c, it joined the conference at
56kbps.
Once the conference rate adapts, the endpoints that do not properly follow suit,
will become audio-only endpoints. A conference will not rate adapt from 56 kbps
back to 64 kbps until all endpoints disconnect from the conference and it idles.
The PictureTel 1000 Release 1.1C, PictureTel 6.01 software, and the Vistium 2.0
software successfully rate adapt with the MCU. External rate adaptation
techniques used by VTEL and CLI are known to cause problems with the
endpoint when used with this feature.

Endpoint or I-MUX in Loopback Mode
Some endpoints have a loopback enable feature. This makes DEFINITY MMCH
data loopback at the MMCH when a connection is in progress. The loopback can
be enabled prior to or during a connection.
The MMCH does not detect the loop and continues to VAS. In most scenarios,
the switch occurs, but within a few seconds, the broadcaster’s return video
becomes its own image. Once the broadcaster stops speaking, the system
“false” switches to an apparently random port that was not speaking.

Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1
Only)
Using the DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (apparatus code 700A, comcode
107988867), a technician can test the DS1 span between the system and the
network interface point. The loopback jack is required when DC power appears
at the interface to the ICSU. The loopback jack isolates the ICSU from the DC
power and properly loops the DC span power.
NOTE:
The loopback jack operates with any vintage of TN767E (or later) or
TN464F (or later) DS1 circuit packs and with G3V3 EDI release 3 (or later)
software. The loopback jack operates with the 120A2 (or later) Integrated
Channel Service Unit (ICSU) only; not the 31xx series of Channel Service
Units or other external CSUs or earlier ICSUs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-70

Loopback Jack Installation
Configurations Using a Smart Jack
The preferred location of the loopback jack is at the interface to the Smart Jack.
This provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote tests are run using
the loopback jack. If the Smart Jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack at
the extended demarcation point.
1. If there is no extended demarcation point, install the loopback jack directly
at the network interface point as shown in Figure 5-11.
2. If there is an extended demarcation point and the Smart Jack is not
accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 5-12.
3. If there is an extended demarcation point, but the Smart Jack is
accessible, install the loopback jack as shown in Figure 5-13.

Configurations Without a Smart Jack
1. Install the loopback jack at the point where the cabling from the ICSU
plugs into the “dumb” block. If there is more than one “dumb” block,
choose the one that is closest to the Interface Termination feed or the fiber
MUX. This provides maximum coverage for loopback jack tests. Refer to
Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15.

Installation
1. To install the loopback jack, simply disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide)
connector (typically an H600-383 cable) at the appropriate interface point
and connect the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span. See Figure
5-11 through Figure 5-15.
2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the ICSU into the female connector on the
loopback jack.
3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network
interface point.
NOTE:
Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test
tool and should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span.

Administration
1. At the management terminal, enter change ds1 . The
“location” is the DS1 interface circuit pack for which the loopback jack
was installed.
2. Be sure the “near-end CSU type” is set to integrated.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-71

3. On page 2 of the form, change the supply CPE loopback jack
power field to y.
NOTE:
Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is
present on the facility. This allows a technician to determine that the
facility is available for remote testing.
4. Enter save translation to save the new information.

DS1 Span Test
This test should only be performed after the DS1 circuit pack and the 120A2 (or
later) ICSU have been successfully tested using appropriate maintenance
procedures. The DS1 span test consists of 2 sequential parts. Each part provides
a result indicating if there is a problem in the CPE wiring. CPE wiring may be
considered problem-free only if the results of both parts are successful.
The first part of the span test powers-up the loopback jack and attempts to send
a simple code from the DS1 board, through the wiring and loopback jack, and
back to the DS1 board. Maintenance software waits about 10 seconds for the
loopback jack to loop, sends the indication of the test results to the management
terminal, and proceeds to the second part of the test.
The second part of the test sends the standard DS1 3-in-24 stress testing pattern
from the DS1 board, through the loopback jack, and back to a bit error detector
and counter on the DS1 board. The bit error rate counter may be examined at will
via the management terminal, and provides the results of the second part of the
test. The test remains in this state until it is terminated so that the CPE wiring may
be bit error rate tested for as long as desired.
1. Busy out the DS1 circuit pack by entering busyout board UUCCSS
(where UUCCSS is the cabinet, carrier, and slot number of the DS1
board).
2. At the management terminal, enter change ds1  and verify the
near-end csu type is set to integrated.
3. Change to page 2 of the DS1 administration form and confirm that the TX
LBO field is 0dB. If not, record the current value and change it to 0dB for
testing. Press Enter to implement the changes or press Cancel to change
nothing.
4. Enter test ds1-loop  cpe-loopback-jack. This turns on simplex
power to the loopback jack and waits about 20 seconds for any active
DS1 facility alarms to clear. A “PASS” or “FAIL” displays on the terminal.
This is the first of the 2 results. A “FAIL” indicates a fault is present in the
wiring between the ICSU and the loopback jack. The loopback jack may
also be faulty. A “PASS” only indicates that the loopback jack looped
successfully, not that the test data contains no errors. If a “PASS” is
obtained, continue with the following steps.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Page 5-72

NOTE:
The loss of signal (LOS) alarm (demand test #138) is not processed
during this test while the 3-in-24 pattern is active.
5. Enter clear meas ds1 loop  to clear the bit error count.
6. Enter clear meas ds1 log  to clear the performance
measurement counts.
7. Enter clear meas ds1 esf  to clear the ESF error count.
8. Enter list meas ds1 sum  to display the bit error count. Refer
to Table 5-5 for troubleshooting information.
Table 5-5.

DS1 Span Troubleshooting

Displayed
Field

Function

Indication

Test: cpeloopback-jack

Pattern 3-in-24

The loopback jack test is active.

Synchronized

Y or N

If “y” displays, the DS1 circuit pack has
synchronized to the looped 3-in-24 pattern and is
accumulating a count of the bit errors detected in
the pattern until the test has ended. If “n” displays,
retry the test 5 times by ending the test per Step 11
and re-starting the test per Step 4. If the circuit
pack never synchronizes, substantial bit errors in
the 3-in-24 pattern are likely. This could be
intermittent connections or a broken wire in a
receive or transmit pair in the CPE wiring.

Bit Error Count

Cumulative
count of
detected errors

If there are no wiring problems, the counter
remains at 0.
A count that pegs at 65535 or continues to
increment by several hundred to several thousand
on each list meas command execution indicates
intermittent or corroded connections, severe
crosstalk, or impedance imbalances between the
two conductors of the receive pair or the transmit
pair. Wiring may need replacement.
Note that “ESF error events” counter and the ESF
performance counter summaries (“errored
seconds”, “bursty errored seconds”, and so forth)
will also increment. These counters are not used
with the loopback jack tests. However, they will
increment if errors are occurring. Counters should
be cleared following the test.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-73

9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as desired to observe bit error rate
characteristics. Also, wait 1 to 10 minutes between Steps 5 through 7. One
minute without errors translates to better than a 1 in 10 to the eighth error
rate. Ten minutes without errors translates to better than a 1 in 10 to the
ninth error rate.
10. If the test runs for 1 minute with an error count of 0, confirm that the 3-in-24
pattern error detector is operating properly by entering test ds1-loop
 inject-single-bit-error. This causes the 3-in-24 pattern
generator on the DS1 circuit pack to inject a single-bit error into the
transmit pattern. A subsequent list meas ds1 summary 
command displays the bit error count. If a count greater than 1 is
displayed, replace the ICSU and retest. If the problem continues, replace
the DS1 circuit pack.
11. Terminate the test by entering test ds1-loop  end
cpe-loopback-jack-test. Wait about 30 seconds for the DS1 to re-frame
on the incoming signal and clear DS1 facility alarms.
Loopback termination fails under the following conditions:
a. The span is still looped somewhere. This could be at the loopback
jack, at the ICSU, or somewhere in the network. This state is
indicated by a fail code of 1313. If the red LED on the loopback
jack is on, replace the ICSU. Re-run the test and verify that the
loopback test terminates properly. If not, replace the DS1 circuit
pack and repeat the test.
b. The DS1 cannot frame on the incoming span’s signal after the
loopback jack is powered down. This means that there is
something wrong with the receive signal into the loopback jack
from the “dumb” block or the Smart Jack. If the service provider
successfully looped and tested the span, up to the Smart Jack, this
condition isolates the problem to the wiring between the loopback
jack and the Smart Jack. Refer to “Loopback Jack Fault Isolation
Procedures” for information on how to proceed in this case. The
test cannot be successfully terminated until a good signal is
received. To properly terminate the test before a good receive
signal is available, enter reset board .
12. Restore the “TX LBO” field to the original value recorded in Step 2.
13. Release the DS1 circuit pack using the release board UUCCSSpp
command.
14. Leave the loopback jack connected to the DS1 span.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-74

Loopback Jack Fault Isolation Procedures
This section describes the possible DS1 configurations in which the loopback
jack may be used. These configurations are: when the DS1 provider includes a
Smart Jack, when no Smart Jack is provided at all, and when sites use fiber
multiplexers. These configurations are separated into “Configurations Using a
Smart Jack” and “Configurations Without a Smart Jack.”

Configurations Using a Smart Jack
The addition of the loopback jack and the presence of a Smart Jack divides the
DS1 span into 3 separate sections for fault isolation. These sections are shown in
Figure 5-11 through Figure 5-13 for the different span configurations. They are:
Section 1: Between the 120A2 (or later) ICSU and the loopback jack.
Section 2: Between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack (network interface
point).
Section 3: From the Smart Jack to the CO. It is necessary to contact the DS1
provider to run this test.
A problem can exist in 1 or more of the 3 sections. The field technician is
responsible for finding and correcting problems in the first 2 sections. The DS1
service provider is responsible for finding and correcting problems in the third
section. Testing is divided into 3 steps.
■

Test customer premises wiring (section 1 in the following 3 figures) from
the ICSU to the loopback jack as described in “DS1 Span Test.”

■

Test the CO-to-network interface wiring (section 3 in Figure 5-11) using the
Smart Jack loopback (CO responsibility). Coordinate this test with the DS1
provider.

■

Test the short length of customer premises wiring (section 2 in the
following 3 figures) between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack. This
can be done using a loopback that “overlaps” section 2 of the cable. Any
of the following loopbacks can do this:
a. The local ICSUs line loopback, which is typically activated, tested,
and then deactivated by the DS1 service provider at the CO end.
b. The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback, activated and tested
by the DS1 service provider at the CO end.
c. The far-end ICSU’s line loopback. This test is activated at the
management terminal by entering test ds1-loop 
far-csu-loopback-test-begin. The test is terminated by entering
test ds1-loop  end-loopback/span-test. Bit error
counts are examined as described in “DS1 Span Test.” This test
method is the least preferable because it covers wiring that is not in
the local portion of the span. This test only isolates problems to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-75

section 2 wiring if there are no problems in the wiring between the
far-end CO and the far-end ICSU. Coordinate this test with the DS1
service provider.
If any of the above tests (a, b, or c) fail, a problem is indicated in section 2
as long as the tests for section 1 and section 3 pass. Since section 2
includes the network interface point, it is necessary to work with the
service provider to isolate the fault to the loopback jack cable, the “dumb”
block, or the Smart Jack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-76

Figure Notes:
1. Span Section 1
2. Span Section 2
3. Span Section 3
4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated
Channel Service Unit (ICSU)

5. RJ-48 to Network Interface (Up to 1000
Feet) (305 m)
6. Loopback Jack
7. Network Interface Smart Jack
8. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX
9. Central Office

Figure 5-11.

Network Interface at Smart Jack

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-77

Figure Notes:
1. Span Section 1

6. Loopback Jack

2. Span Section 2

7. “Dumb” Block (Extended Demarcation)

3. Span Section 3

8. Network Interface Smart Jack

4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated
Channel Service Unit (ICSU)

9. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX

5. RJ-48 to Network Interface
(Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m)

Figure 5-12.

10. Central Office

Network Interface at Extended Demarcation Point (Smart Jack
Inaccessible)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-78

Figure Notes:
1. Span Section 1

6. “Dumb” Block (Extended Demarcation)

2. Span Section 2

7. Loopback Jack

3. Span Section 3

8. Network Interface Smart Jack

4. 120A2 (or later) Integrated
Channel Service Unit (ICSU)

9. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX
10. Central Office

5. RJ-48 to Network Interface
(Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m)

Figure 5-13.

11. “Dumb” Block to Smart Jack RJ-48

Network Interface at Extended Demarcation Point (Smart Jack
Accessible)

Configurations Without a Smart Jack
When the loopback jack is added to a span that does not contain a Smart Jack,
the span is divided into 2 sections. See Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15.
1. ICSU to the loopback jack.
2. Loopback jack to the Central Office (CO).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-79

Figure Notes:
1. Span Section 1

5. Loopback Jack

2. Span Section 2

6. “Dumb” Block (Demarcation Point)

3. 120A2 (or later) Integrated
7. Interface Termination or Fiber MUX
Channel Service Unit (ICSU)
8. Central Office
4. RJ-48 to Network Interface
(Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m)

Figure 5-14.

Network Interface at “Dumb” Block

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-80

Figure Notes:
1. Span Section 1

5. Loopback Jack

2. Span Section 2

6. “Dumb” Block (Demarcation Point)

3. 120A2 (or later) Integrated
7. Repeater
Channel Service Unit (ICSU)
8. Fiber MUX
4. RJ-48 to Network Interface
9. Central Office
(Up to 1000 Feet) (305 m)

Figure 5-15.

Network Interface at “Dumb” Block with Repeater Line to Fiber
MUX

Section 2 includes the short cable from the loopback jack to the “dumb” block
demarcation point (part of the loopback jack). This is the only portion o f section
2 that is part of customer premises wiring but is not covered in the loopback
jack’s loopback path.
A problem can exist in 1 or both of the 2 sections. The field technician is
responsible for finding and correcting problems in section 1 and the loopback
cable portion of section 2. The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-81

and correcting problems in the majority of section 2. Testing is divided into 2
steps.
1. Test customer premises wiring (section 1 in Figure 5-14) from the ICSU to
the loopback jack as described in the “DS1 Span Test” section.
2. Test the loopback jack-to-”dumb” block and ”dumb” block-to-CO wiring
(section 2 in Figure 5-14). This can be done using a loopback that
“overlaps” the section of the span. Any of the following loopbacks can do
this:
a. The local ICSUs line loopback, which is typically activated, tested,
and then deactivated by the DS1 service provider at the CO end.
b. The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback, activated and tested
by the DS1 service provider at the CO end.
c. The far-end ICSU’s line loopback. This test is activated at the
management terminal by entering test ds1-loop 
far-csu-loopback-test-begin. The test is terminated by entering
test ds1-loop  end-loopback/span-test. Bit error
counts are examined as described in the “DS1 Span Test” section.
This test only isolates problems to section 2 wiring if there are no
problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end
ICSU. Coordinate this test with the DS1 service provider.
If any of the above tests (a, b, or c) fail, a problem is indicated in
section 2. This could mean bad loopback jack -to-”dumb” block
cabling, but is more likely to indicate a problem somewhere
between the “dumb” block and the CO. This is the responsibility of
the DS1 service provider. If the DS1 Span Test confirms that there
are no problems in section 1, the technician should proceed as
follows to avoid unnecessary dispatch.
■

Identify and contact the DS1 service provider

■

Inform the DS1 provider that loopback tests of the CPE
wiring to the “dumb” block (section 1) showed no problems

■

If the far-end ICSU line loopback test failed, inform the DS1
provider

■

Request that the DS1 provider perform a loopback test of
their portion of the section 2 wiring by sending someone out
to loop section 2 back to the CO at the “dumb” block.
If this test fails, the problem is in the service provider’s
wiring.
If the test passes, the problem is in the cable between the
loopback jack and the “dumb” block. Replace the loopback
jack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

5

Routine Maintenance Procedures
Install DS1 CPE Loopback Jack (T1 Only)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 5-82

Configurations Using Fiber Multiplexers
Use the loopback jack when customer premises DS1 wiring connects to an
on-site fiber multiplexer (MUX) and allows wiring to the network interface point on
the MUX to be remotely tested. This requires that ICSUs be used on DS1 wiring
to the MUX.
Fiber MUXes can take the place of Interface termination feeds as shown in Figure
5-11 , Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, and Figure 5-14. Test these spans using the
same procedures as metallic spans. Note the following points:
1. Fiber MUXes may have loopback capabilities that can be activated by the
service provider from the CO end. These may loop the signal back to the
CO or back to the DS1 board. If the MUX provides the equivalent of a line
loopback on the “problem” DS1 facility, this may be activated following a
successful loopback jack test and used to isolate problems to the wiring
between the loopback jack and the MUX.
2. Be aware that there are installations that use repeatered metallic lines
between the MUX and the “dumb” block. Theses lines require DC power
for the repeaters and this DC power is present at the “dumb” block
interface to the CPE equipment. A loopback jack is required in this
configuration to properly isolate and terminate the DC power.
To check for the presence of DC, make the following 4 measurements at the
network interface jack:
1. From Transmit Tip (T, Pin 5) to Receive Tip (T1, Pin 2)
2. From Transmit Ring (R, Pin 4) to Receive Ring (R1, Pin 4)
3. From Transmit Tip (T, Pin 5) to Transmit Ring (R, Pin 4)
4. From Receive Tip (T1, Pin 2) to Receive Ring (R1, Pin 4)
All measurements should read 0 (zero) volts DC. For pin numbers and pin
designations, refer to Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) Installation and
Operation, 555-230-193.

Operating Charasteristics
If a TN464F or TN767E and a 120A2 were installed in a system running pre-G3V3
software and the software is later upgraded to G3V3 Release 3 or later, reseat
the DS1 circuit pack so that the ICSU administration fields will appear on the DS1
administration form.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
General

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid

6

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-1

6

General
A high or critical reliability system provides highly-available call processing
because single points-of-failure in the system that result in loss of call processing
are minimized. Such a system uses the existing duplicated TDM buses, provides
the SPE, translation card, and Tone-Clock circuit pack duplication, and it uses
packet bus redundancy. These components are each single points of failure in a
standard reliability system.
The SPE is fully duplicated. The two SPEs are mounted in separate carriers and
powered by different carrier power supplies. As a result, a high or critical
reliability system has two control carriers: the A control cabinet and the B control
cabinet.
Since the circuit packs in the two SPEs are the same, the SPEs have identical
capabilities. Either SPE can act as the active SPE. However, only one of the SPEs
can be the active SPE at any given time. The active SPE performs the same
operations that the single SPE performs in a standard system; that is, all call
processing, administration, and maintenance activities being performed by the
switch. All memory writes performed on the active SPE are copied to the other
SPE. The other SPE is known as the standby SPE. Its role is to take over as the
active SPE if the current active SPE fails. If the active SPE (or a component of the
active SPE) fails, the system automatically switches to the standby SPE.
Under normal conditions, the system operates using both TDM Buses. If the
system detects transmission problems on one of the buses, it takes that bus
out-of-service and operates with only one bus. This action results in a reduction
in capacity. However, if the system detects a problem with one of the Tone-Clock
circuit packs, it is able to take that circuit pack out-of-service without any impact
on system capacity or performance.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Reliability Options

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-2

The Packet Bus is NOT duplicated in the same way that the TDM Bus is
duplicated (that is, there is one Packet Bus, while there are two TDM Buses).
However, there are several spare leads on the Packet Bus itself that are not
normally used. In a High or Critical Reliability system, the TN771
Maintenance/Test circuit pack is provided. This circuit pack has ability to detect
faulty Packet Bus leads and to instruct all Packet circuit packs (for example
ISDN-BRI, Packet Control, TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs) to use up to
three spare leads in place of defective ones.
The rest of this chapter provides a detailed description of the High and Critical
Reliability systems that are available in as well as of the Standard system that is
available across the board. The chapter explains the duplicated hardware and
includes a description of the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack. It provides
a look at the following concepts relevant to high and critical reliability systems:
memory shadowing, SPE modes, and SPE-interchanges.
In addition, this chapter contains technical descriptions important to the general
maintenance of High and Critical Reliability systems, such as a list of the
appropriate system technician commands, SPE circuit pack LED strategies,
installation and replacement procedures for SPE Control Carrier circuit packs,
and for the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC).
This chapter uses the term “Standard Reliability system” or “Standard system” to
denote a system without duplication.

Reliability Options
The Release 5 systems are available in three different reliability options:
standard, high and critical reliability. An increased level of reliability is
implemented by duplicating various components so that standby components
can take over (interchange) when a failure occurs on an active component. Most
interchanges take place with no disruption of current service, and they allow for
repairs to be made without disruption. Furthermore, duplication allows for the
upgrading and maintenance of duplicated components and software without
service disruption. The following sections describe which components are
duplicated with each option.

Standard Reliability
On standard reliability systems, the 512-time-slot TDM bus is divided into two
duplicate 256-time-slot buses, A and B. Call traffic is shared between the two
buses. The first five time slots on each bus are reserved for the control channel,
which is active on only one of the two buses at a time. Likewise, the next 17 time
slots are reserved for carrying system tones. The tone time slots are not
necessarily on the same bus (A or B) as the control channel. If any failure that
affects the ability of the active control channel or the tone time slots to function
takes place, the other bus becomes active for those time slots. For more

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Reliability Options

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-3

information, see TDM-BUS Maintenance section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance
Object Repair Procedures’’, and the set tdm command in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.

High Reliability
High reliability systems duplicate components that are critical to the viability of
the system as a whole to prevent a single failure from dropping all service. These
components include the following:
■

PPN control carrier and carrier power units (OLSs)

■

All SPE circuit packs, including the Processor, Memory, Network
Controller, Processor Interface, Packet Controller, and Duplication
Interface circuit packs

■

PPN Tone Clock circuit pack (EPN Tone-Clocks are not duplicated)

■

TDM buses (described in the previous section)

The duplicated SPEs operate in active/standby fashion. Operation of this
duplication is described in the STBY-SPE and DUPINT MO sections in Chapter
10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Interchanges of the SPE and of
PPN Tone-Clocks operate independently unless induced by use of the
SPE-select switches.

Critical Reliability
Critical reliability systems include all of the features of the High Reliability option
described in the previous section. Additionally, these systems duplicate
components of Port Network Connectivity (PNC) and of other components that
are critical to the viability of each EPN. These components include the following:
■

PPN and EPN Tone-Clock circuit packs

■

PPN and EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs

■

Inter-PN cabling

The entire direct-connected fiber connectivity is duplicated between each pair of
port networks. Each duplicated fiber pair operates in an active/standby manner
with all inter-PN calls set up on both fibers so that the active SPE can assume
control without disruption of service. Each fiber pair between a pair of port
networks operates independently of the other fiber pairs with respect to the
active/standby operation (that is, the A-carrier fiber can be active between the
PPN and EPN 1, and the B-carrier fiber can be active between the PPN and EPN
2).
The Tone-Clocks in each EPN operate in an active/standby manner
independently from other duplication strategies.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplicated Hardware

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-4

Duplicated Hardware
A description of the hardware components used in a high or critical reliability
system follows.

SPE Duplication
Each SPE in a high or critical reliability system consists of the following circuit
packs:
■

Processor Circuit Pack (TN790)

■

Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777B)

■

Packet Control Circuit Pack (TN778)
NOTE:
There may be zero or one Packet Control circuit pack. However,
both SPEs must have an equal number of circuit packs.

■

Processor Interface Circuit Pack(s) (TN765)
NOTE:
There may be zero, one, or two Processor Interface circuit pack.
However, both SPEs must have an equal number of Processor
Interface circuit packs.

■

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (TN772)

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
The Duplication Interface circuit pack is required to support SPE duplication.
Duplication Interface A is part of the SPE in the A control carrier, and Duplication
Interface B is part of the SPE in the B control carrier.
The Duplication Interface circuit packs provide a broad range of functionality.
Alone, Duplication Interface A provides control of the following components: the
duplicated Processor circuit packs, the duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs, the
environmental maintenance monitoring and control, and G3MT terminal
connection. Together, Duplication Interface A and Duplication Interface B
provide memory shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory
and communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE.
Duplication Interface A controls a lead that indicates to the duplicated Processor
and Network Control circuit packs, respectively, which SPE is currently the Active
SPE. This lead is known as the SPE Select lead. Duplication Interface A controls
another set of leads that indicate to the duplicated TN768 and TN780 8

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplicated Hardware

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-5

Tone-Clock circuit packs which of the two is currently the active one. These leads
are known as the Tone-Clock Select leads. System software can request that the
SPE Select lead and/or the Tone-Clock Select leads be changed. Duplication
Interface A controls and monitors in the PPN of a High or Critical Reliability
system the same set of environmental leads that the EPN TN775 or TN775B
Maintenance circuit pack controls and monitors in an EPN.
The Duplication Interface circuit packs communicate with one another over the
Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC). In a multicarrier cabinet, the ICC physically consists of
two 25-pin connector cables known as ICC-A and ICC-B. In a single-carrier
cabinet, the ICC physically consists of three 25-pin connector cables known as
ICC-A, ICC-B, and ICC-C. The ICC connects the Duplication Interface circuit
packs via pin fields on the backplane. The pin fields where ICC-A and ICC-B
(and ICC-C in a single-carrier cabinet) are connected are labeled on the
backplane near the pin fields for the Duplication Interface circuit packs. The ICC
carries leads related to maintaining a High or Critical Reliability system.
Furthermore, without the ICC properly attached, the system cannot function as
either a High or Critical Reliability system or as a Standard system.
The Duplication Interface circuit packs support serial links that provide for G3 MT
connection, memory shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE
Memory, and communication between software on the Active SPE and the
Standby SPE. Four serial links are supported:
1. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the G3 MT.
2. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the Maintenance/Tape
Processor in carrier A.
3. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to the Maintenance/Tape
Processor in carrier B.
4. The serial link from Duplication Interface A to Duplication Interface B.
NOTE:
The Duplication Interface B circuit pack does not communicate directly with
either Maintenance/Tape Processor or with the G3MT.
Duplication Interface A supports the serial channel to the G3MT that is
connected to the Duplication Interface A circuit pack by a connector on the back
of carrier A labeled “DOT” (Duplication Option Terminal). If the Duplication
Interface A circuit pack becomes defective, and the B carrier becomes the
Active SPE, the terminal can be connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor
in carrier B by connecting the terminal to the connector labeled "TERM" on the
back of carrier B. If the Duplication Interface A circuit pack becomes defective
and carrier A becomes the Active SPE, the terminal can be connected to the
Maintenance/Tape Processor in carrier A by connecting the terminal to the
connector labeled "TERM" on the back of carrier A.
Communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE is
conducted via a message flow between the two Processors. The flow of
messages from the Processor in carrier A to the Processor in carrier B is as

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplicated Hardware

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-6

follows: Processor A to Maintenance/Tape Processor A over the serial link to
Duplication Interface A over the serial link to Maintenance/Tape Processor B to
Processor B. The flow in the reverse direction is exactly opposite.
The serial link between Duplication Interface A and Duplication Interface B is
involved only in memory shadowing from the Active SPE to the Standby SPE as
described in the ‘‘Memory Shadowing’’ section.

SPE Select Switches
The SPE-SELEC (SPE Select) switches are located on the TN772 Duplication
Interface circuit packs and are used to hard-select the Active SPE in a high or
critical reliability system. “Hard-select” means that the SPE Select switches can
be moved from the AUTO position to force the current Active SPE to remain the
Active SPE or to force the current Standby SPE to become the Active SPE. Hard
selection of the Active SPE using the SPE Select switches overrides any attempts
by the system software to switch to the Standby SPE to make it become the
Active SPE.
Each switch has three positions:
■

SPE-A (the left position)

■

AUTO (the middle position)

■

SPE-B (the right position)

To hard-select SPE A as the Active SPE, both SPE Select switches must be
moved one at a time to the SPE-A position. To hard-select SPE-B as the Active
SPE, both SPE Select switches must be moved to the SPE-B position. Any other
combination of SPE Select switches leave control of the Active SPE to the system
software.

Inter-Cabinet Cable
As described previously, the ICC connects the two TN772 Duplication Interface
circuit packs and is a basis of support for the Duplication Interface circuit pack
functionality described previously.
The ICC carries leads related to maintaining a High or Critical Reliability system.
The SPE Select lead indicates which SPE is the Active SPE. The Tone-Clock
Select leads indicate which Tone-Clock circuit pack is active. SPE Select switch
state leads indicate the position of the SPE Select switches. Emergency Transfer
leads indicate whether Emergency Transfer is on or off in the PPN cabinet. Other
leads “combine” the INADS, CDR, and the Customer-Provided Alarming device
channels from the two Maintenance/Tape Processors.
The ICC also carries an indication of whether memory shadowing is enabled or
disabled. Information to be shadowed is sent over the serial link between

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplicated Hardware

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-7

Duplication Interface B and Duplication Interface A; this serial link is carried over
the ICC.
Communication between software on the Active SPE and the Standby SPE is sent
over the serial link between Duplication Interface A and the Maintenance/Tape
Processor in carrier B. This serial link is also carried over the ICC.
The presence of the ICC also causes ID pins on the backplane to indicate that
the system is a high or critical reliability system rather than a standard reliability
system.
The ICC is difficult to connect, and its proper connection is critical to the
operation of the system. Refer to the ‘‘Procedure for Installing/Replacing the
Inter-Cabinet Cable’’ section for details on how to properly connect the ICC.

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Duplication
For more information about the Tone-Clock circuit packs see TONE-BD
Maintenance Object in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.
The TONE-BD (Tone-Clock) MO functionality is made up of the TONE-PT (Tone
Generator) and the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock). The Tone Generator provides all
tones required by the system; the TDM Bus Clock provides synchronization for
the TDM Bus and aids in monitoring and selection of SYNC (Synchronization)
references.
Each High or Critical Reliability system provides two Tone-Clock circuit packs. In
this configuration, a failed Tone-Clock circuit pack is switched off-line and an
operational circuit pack is put on-line. Duplication Interface A selects the Active
Tone-Clock circuit pack by driving the Tone-Clock Select lead. The selection of
the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack is independent of the selection of the Active
SPE.

Time Division Multiplexing Bus Duplication
The TDM Bus is composed of two separate, independent buses called bus A
and bus B. The first five time slots of both buses are reserved for communication
between the SPE and port circuit packs. These time slots are known as the
control channel. The control channel is a vital component and must be
operational for the system to provide meaningful customer voice and data
services. In addition to the control channel time slots, several other time slots are
reserved for system use. These additional time slots are for the standard tones.
The standard tones include the dial tone and the touch tones.
The ability to move the control channel and tones from a defective TDM Bus to an
operational TDM Bus is a key component of a highly-available system. The
system can detect transmission errors on the control channel, errors can be
diagnosed, and corrective actions can be taken when necessary. If a bus is
found to be defective, it is taken out-of-service. All existing calls on the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplication Concepts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-8

out-of-service bus are maintained, but no new calls are assigned to the
out-of-service bus.
In addition to the system software’s ability to detect a defective bus and perform
a TDM Bus switch, the user also has the ability to specify if and when a
scheduled control channel switch is to be performed.

Packet Bus Redundancy
The Packet Bus is used to provide ISDN-BRI signaling via the TN778 Packet
Control circuit pack. The Packet Bus is not physically duplicated in the same way
that the TDM Bus is duplicated. However, there are several spare leads on the
Packet Bus itself that are not normally used. In a High or Critical Reliability
system that is using the Packet Bus, a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is
provided for each port network. The Maintenance/Test circuit pack has the ability
to test the Packet Bus and discover shorted or open leads on the Packet Bus.
When such a fault is discovered, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack sends a
message to each circuit pack that uses the Packet Bus, instructing that circuit
pack to use one of the spare leads in place of the defective lead.
The Maintenance/Test circuit pack can recover up to three Packet Bus lead
failures by this mechanism. This provides high availability by decreasing the
chance of a blocking Packet Bus fault by two orders of magnitude.
The Maintenance/Test circuit pack has other capabilities, primarily with respect
to ISDN-PRI Test Call features. Because of these other capabilities, the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack is available as an option in Standard Reliability
systems or in High and Critical Reliability systems that are not using the Packet
Bus. In such systems, the Packet Bus redundancy capabilities of the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack are NOT enabled.

Duplication Concepts
High and critical reliability systems employ several concepts of duplication.
These are described in the following sections.

Memory Shadowing
Most of the time the Standby SPE is in a mode known as Standby Mode (see
‘‘SPE Modes’’ section) in which it is ready to assume the role of the Active SPE.
To be ready to assume the role of the Active SPE. PR-MEM Release 5vs/si and
later must be an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. This is
accomplished by the memory shadowing mechanism.
The SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuitry) on the Active SPE TN772 DUPINT
(Duplication Interface) detects all memory writes that the Active SPE PROCR
(Processor) makes to Active SPE Memory. The Active SPE Common Shadow

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplication Concepts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-9

Circuitry sends this information to the Common Shadow Circuitry on the Standby
SPE Duplication Interface via the ICC. The Common Shadow Circuitry on the
Standby SPE Duplication Interface then writes the data to Standby SPE Memory.
This logical connection between Active SPE Memory and Standby SPE Memory
is known as the SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link).
Although most of the components making up the Memory Shadowing Link (that
is, Active SPE Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuitry, and Standby
SPE Memory) are tested and maintained individually, the integrity of the entire
logical connection is also tested and maintained to make sure that the
shadowing mechanism is functional and that Standby SPE Memory is the same
as Active SPE Memory. Therefore, this testing is done under the guise of the
Memory Shadowing Link.

SPE Modes
As described earlier, the Active SPE is the SPE that is currently responsible for all
call processing, administration, and maintenance activities being performed by
the switch. The Active SPE is always in Active Mode.
The role of the Standby SPE is to be ready to take over as the Active SPE in the
event that the current Active SPE fails. The Standby SPE does not perform Call
Processing or Administration activities. It does perform Maintenance activity, but
this is carried out completely under the direction of the Active SPE in order to
monitor and maintain the health of the Standby SPE.
The Standby SPE is always in one of three modes: Standby, Maintenance,
Busyout, or Down. Usually the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode. In this mode, the
SW-CTL (Switch Control) on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit pack is
isolated from the TDM Bus so that it does not attempt to control the bus and
interfere with the Switch Control on the Active SPE Network Control circuit pack.
Similarly, the Standby SPE Packet Control circuit pack is isolated from the Packet
Bus so that it does not attempt to control the Packet bus, and thus interfere with
the Active SPE Packet Control circuit pack. The Standby SPE PROCR
(Processor) is held in a reset state so that it does not run software. Finally,
Standby SPE is being shadowed into from Active SPE Memory—meaning that
Standby SPE Memory is updated to reflect every change in Active SPE Memory
(for example, calls and administration changes). In Standby Mode, the Standby
SPE is available to assume the role of the Active SPE.
In certain circumstances, the Standby SPE is put into Maintenance Mode by the
Active SPE. In this mode, the Standby SPE is still isolated from the TDM and
Packet Buses, but is no longer having its Memory shadowed into; its Processor is
no longer held in a reset state. In Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE accepts
maintenance activity requests from the Active SPE to perform testing on Standby
SPE components. For many of the requested activities, system software on the
Standby SPE is brought up to conduct the activity. Translation saves and
announcement saves may be performed on the Standby SPE when it is in
Maintenance Mode. While in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE is not as

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplication Concepts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-10

readily available to assume the role of the Active SPE, but may do so depending
on the severity of the Active SPE fault(s).
In Busyout Mode, the Standby SPE is busied out by the busyout SPE-standby
command. Only system technician-requested activities are carried out on the
Standby SPE until a release SPE-standby command is executed. Refer to the
status system command in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for information concerning Standby Modes. Whenever
the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode from Maintenance Mode, its
Memory is refreshed.
NOTE:
Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist and
the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the status system
1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle mode with no standby
alarms, use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE into the
standby mode. Verify the results by using the status system 1 command.
For more information about the status system command see Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.
NOTE:
The system software automatically returns the Standby SPE from
Maintenance Mode to Standby Mode at the completion of any maintenance
activity. However, it is also possible to force the Standby SPE to return to
Standby Mode by issuing the refresh spe-standby command from the
G3MT terminal. The refresh spe-standby command preempts Standby
SPE Maintenance Mode except that of entering maintenance mode. See
the ‘‘System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability
Systems’’ section for a description of the refresh spe-standby command.
This means that all of Active SPE DRAM Memory is shadowed over into Standby
SPE Memory. The refresh is necessary because, while in Maintenance Mode,
memory shadowing to the Standby SPE is disabled, and Standby SPE Memory is
not updated to reflect changes in Active SPE Memory. After the refresh, Standby
SPE Memory is again an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory.
The Standby SPE goes into Down Mode when certain error conditions are
detected. These error conditions are described in detail in the "Hardware Error
Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" section of STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair
Procedures’’. Once the error condition(s) that caused the Standby SPE to go into
Down Mode is (are) corrected, the Standby SPE is first put into Maintenance
Mode to conduct testing on Standby SPE components and is then returned to
Standby Mode.
The current mode of the Standby SPE can be determined by issuing the status
system command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplication Concepts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-11

SPE-Interchanges
The process by which the Standby SPE takes over for the Active SPE is referred
to as an SPE-interchange. There are six conditions under which an
SPE-interchange is initiated:
■

Upgrade Software
Issuing the upgrade software command to upgrade the software on a
High or Critical Reliability system reboots the Standby SPE from the
standby translation card and then invokes an SPE-interchange so that the
system is now running on the new software.

■

System Technician Command
Issuing the reset system interchange command on the G3MT terminal
causes an SPE-interchange to be initiated.

■

Alarm Condition
If a Major or Minor alarm is activated on any circuit pack, an
SPE-interchange is initiated, provided the health of the Standby SPE is
better than that of the Active SPE. Table 6-1 lists the MOs, the alarm levels,
the level of SPE-interchange initiated, and the severity given to the alarm
for all MOs that can cause software requested SPE-interchanges. The
health of an SPE is based upon the single most severe alarm active within
that SPE. The higher the severity level, the more severe the problem. The
restart level of the interchange also depends on the single most severe
alarm within the active SPE. Hot Restarts occur only when the Standby
SPE is in standby mode. For example, the active SPE has a MAJOR
SHDW-CIR and a MINOR DATA-BD alarm, and the standby SPE has a
MAJOR TAPE alarm. In this case, the severity level of the active is 60, the
severity level of the standby is 65, and no SPE-interchange would occur.

■

SPE Select Switches
An SPE-interchange can be initiated by moving both SPE Select Switches,
one at a time, to the position that selects the Standby SPE for Active
Mode. The SPE Select Switches were described earlier in this chapter.

■

Scheduled Maintenance
An SPE-interchange can be requested as a part of scheduled
maintenance. This mechanism is used to exercise both SPEs. An
SPE-interchange can be requested as part of scheduled maintenance by
issuing the change system-parameters maintenance command and
updating the form.

■

Processor Insanity
Duplication Interface A (DUPINT, TN772) periodically audits the sanity of
each of the Processor circuit packs. If the Active SPE does not respond to
the sanity audit, Duplication Interface A initiates an SPE-interchange.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Duplication Concepts

6

Table 6-1.

Page 6-12

Software-Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm Conditions

Maintenance
Object

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Fault Severity
Level

Restart Level

STBY-SPE

WARNING

OFF

120

None

MEM-BD

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

110

Hot or Warm1

MEMORY

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

110

Hot or Warm1

STBY-SPE

MAJOR

ON

100

None

PROCR

MAJOR

ON

70

Hot or Warm1

SW-CTL

MAJOR

ON

65

Cold 2

MEM-CARD

MAJOR

OFF

65

Cold 1

12V-PWR

MINOR

ON

65

Hot

DUPINT

MAJOR

ON

61

Hot

CARR-POW

MAJOR

ON

61

Cold 2

SHDW-CIR

MAJOR

ON or OFF

60

Warm

SHDW-LINK

MAJOR

ON

60

Warm

SW-CTL

MINOR

ON

40

Hot

PR-MAINT

MINOR

ON

30

Hot

PI-BD

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

20

Hot

PKT-CTRL

MAJOR

ON or OFF

20

Hot

PKT-CTRL

MINOR

ON or OFF

15

Hot

PI-PT

MAJOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-CHL

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-CON

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-BD

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

CARD-MEM

MINOR

ON or OFF

10

Hot

PR-MAINT

MINOR

OFF

8

Hot

1.

If the Standby SPE is in Standby mode when the alarm occurs, a Hot SPE-Interchange occurs. If
the Standby is in Maintenance mode when the alarm occurs, however, a Warm SPE-Interchange
rather than a Hot SPE-Interchange occurs.

Regardless of the condition that initiates an SPE-interchange, the G3MT is
always logged off as a result of the SPE-interchange. The G3MT is available to
log into after the SPE-interchange is complete and the “login” prompt is
displayed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-13

System Technician Commands for
High and Critical Reliability Systems
The following system technician commands support high and critical reliability
systems. Complete descriptions of these commands are found in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.

Commands for SPE Duplication
■

The busyout SPE-standby command stops all background maintenance
activities on the Standby SPE, and it doubles memory shadowing.

■

The release SPE-standby command refreshes the Standby SPE, and it
allows all background standby maintenance activities to continue.

■

The status system command displays the status of the Active SPE and
the Standby SPE (among other information).
NOTE:
Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist
and the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the
status system 1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle
mode with no standby alarms, use the standby refresh command to
put the standby SPE into the standby mode. Verify the results by
using the status system 1 command. For more information about
the status system command see Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.

■

The status mem-card [1] a|b command displays the status of the Active
SPE Memory Card or the status of the Standby SPE Memory Card.

■

The test processor [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified
Processor circuit pack.

■

The test memory [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the specified
on-circuit pack memory with an optional Memory Expansion circuit pack.

■

The test card-mem [1] a | b [short | long] command tests either the
Active SPE Memory Card or the Standby SPE Memory Card.

■

The test network-control [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the
specified TN777B Network Control circuit pack and the Memory Card.

■

The test packet-control [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the
specified TN778 Packet Control circuit pack.

■

The test interface [1] a1 | b1 [short | long] command tests the specified
first TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack.

■

The test interface [1] a2 | b2 [short | long] command tests the specified
second TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-14

■

The test duplication-interface [1] a | b [short | long] command tests the
specified TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack.

■

The test shadow-link command tests the SHDW-LINK (Memory
Shadowing Link). Refer to “MEM-BD” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’ for a detailed description of this command.

■

The set vector  [spe-active | spe-standby | spe-maint] command
requests that a core dump be taken when a system restart of level 
occurs.

■

The reset system interchange command requests an SPE-interchange.

■

The test spe-standby [short | long] command tests the Processor,
Memory, Network Control, Processor Interface, Duplication Interface, and
translation card circuit packs in the control carrier containing the Standby
SPE. Refer to “STBY-SPE” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair
Procedures’’ for a detailed description of this command.

■

The refresh spe-standby puts the Standby SPE into Standby mode.

! CAUTION:
Because of the power of the “refresh spe-standby” command, its full impact
is described here so that it is clearly understood.
The refresh spe-standby command is used to immediately put the Standby SPE
into Standby Mode. The command conducts the same activities regardless of
whether the Standby SPE is already in Standby Mode or whether it is in
Maintenance Mode. When this command is issued, most Standby SPE
maintenance activity that is currently in progress is preempted, the Standby SPE
Processor is held reset, and the Standby SPE Memory is refreshed (that is, all of
Active SPE DRAM Memory is shadowed to Standby SPE Memory). Recall that the
refresh is necessary because, while the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode,
memory shadowing is disabled. When the Standby SPE is returned to Standby
Mode, its Memory must be brought up-to-date with Active SPE Memory. If the
system was trying to enter Maintenance Mode, the refresh spe-standby
command aborts with the message, “Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while
entering maintenance mode; please try later.”

! WARNING:
Because of its power to preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, the
“refresh spe-standby” command should be used judiciously. If the Standby
SPE is in Maintenance Mode when the “refresh spe-standby” command is
issued, the maintenance activity that is being conducted by the Standby
SPE is immediately terminated.
The following side-effects may occur:
■

Testing of the Standby SPE components that are the target of the
maintenance activity may not have completed. Depending on the
maintenance activity and the point at which it is terminated, tests that

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-15

detect faults and/or lack of faults on those Standby SPE components may
not have had the opportunity to run. Accordingly, alarms are not raised or
retired on the components.
■

If the maintenance activity is scheduled maintenance, and if the refresh
spe-standby command is issued before a scheduled translation save is
performed, the translation save is not done, and the translation data on
both the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes or memory cards do not
reflect changes made since the last translation save.

In general, after a refresh spe-standby command has been used and the user
has finished working with the system, the test spe-standby long command
should be issued if the refresh spe-standby command preempted a Standby
SPE maintenance activity.
Additionally, if the refresh spe-standby command was used in the time frame in
which scheduled maintenance with a translation save was to have been
conducted, the save translation command should be issued to ensure that the
current translation data has been written to the Active SPE and Standby SPE
tapes or Memory Cards. When using the refresh spe-standby command to
preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, it may be necessary to issue the
refresh spe-standby command multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE
maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully
completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on
the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the
command completes with the G3MT terminal message “Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors” or “Cannot interrupt Standby
SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later.” Issue the refresh
spe-standby command once more.

Commands for TDM Bus Duplication
■

The status system command displays the bus on which the control
channel and tones currently reside (among other information).

■

The test tdm port-network [1 | 2 | 3] [short | long] command tests both
TDM Buses.

■

The set tdm port-network [1 | 2 | 3] a | b [override] command moves the
control channel and dedicated tones to the specified TDM Bus.

■

The busyout tdm port-network [1 | 2 3] bus a | b command places the
specified bus in a maintenance busy state.

■

The release tdm port-network [1 | 2 3] bus a | b command places a
busied-out bus back in service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies

Page 6-16

Commands for Packet Bus Redundancy
■

The status system command displays the status of the Packet Bus, and
the number of faulty and open leads that the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack has found.

■

The test pkt port-network [1 | 2 | 3] command tests the Packet Bus.

Commands for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Duplication
■

The status system command displays the Tone-Clock circuit pack that is
currently supplying tones and clocks (among other information).

■

The test tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b [short | long] command tests the
specified TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack.

■

The set tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b [override] command makes the
specified Tone-Clock circuit pack active.

■

The busyout tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b command places the specified
Tone-Clock circuit pack in the maintenance busy state.
NOTE:
This cannot be the one that is currently active.

■

The release tone-clock [1 | 2 |3 ] a | b command removes the specified
Tone-Clock circuit pack from the maintenance busy state.

Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED
Strategies
The LEDs on the circuit packs in the two SPEs have the following meanings:
■

Processor Circuit Pack

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

Off

-

Active mode

On

On

-

Active mode: Maintenance running

Off

On

-

Maintenance mode; Memory not refreshed

Off

Off

-

Maintenance mode; Memory refreshed

-

-

On

Meaning

Fault on Processor circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies

Page 6-17

NOTE:
In addition to the standard LEDs, the Processor circuit pack has the
red major and minor alarm LEDs, an amber warning LED, a green
ack LED, and a red Emergency Transfer LED.
■

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (PICP)(B carrier) (TN772)::

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

-

-

SPC in active mode

On

-

Maintenance running on PICP

-

On

■

Meaning

Fault on PICP

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack (DICP)(A carrier) (TN772):

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

-

-

SPC in active mode, or A carrier
Tone-Clock circuit pack active

On

-

Maintenance running on DICP

-

On

-

Meaning

Fault on DICP

Each Duplication Interface circuit pack has another red LED associated
with the SPE Select Switch. The purpose of the red switch LED is to serve
as a reminder that an SPE is being forced to be the Active SPE and,
therefore, the system is not duplicated. Both SPE Select Switch LEDs (one
on each Duplication Interface circuit pack) are on when an SPE is being
forced to be the Active SPE by the consistent positions of the two SPE
Select Switches. Both LEDs are extinguished when the SPE Select Switch
positions are inconsistent or when both SPE Select Switches are in the
position. In the latter two cases, the Active SPE is automatically selected
by the system software.
■

Processor Interface Circuit Pack (TN765):

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

-

-

Link terminated at PICP

On

-

Maintenance running on PICP

-

On

-

Meaning

Fault on PICP

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability
■

Page 6-18

Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777B):

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

-

-

Link terminated at NCCP

On

-

Maintenance running on NCCP

-

On

-

Meaning

Fault on NCCP

There is also an yellow LED (below Memory Card slot). When ON, the
Memory Card is in use.
■

Packet Control Circuit Pack(PCCP)(TN778)

Yello
w

Green

Red

On

-

-

Link terminated at PCCP

On

-

Maintenance running on PCCP

-

On

■

Meaning

Fault on PCCP

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:
NOTE:
For information on the standard amber/green/red LEDs see
TONE-BD Maintenance Object in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’.

Repair Procedures for High and
Critical Reliability
This section describes the procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE
circuit packs. These circuit packs are:
■

Processor Circuit Pack (TN790)

■

Memory Expansion Board (CPP1)

■

Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777[B])

■

Packet Control circuit pack (TN778)

■

Processor Interface circuit pack(s) (TN765)

■

Duplication Interface circuit pack (TN772).

This procedure does not apply to the TN768 or TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack.
Refer to ‘TONE-BD”, “TONE-PT”, or “TDM-CLK” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-19

Object Repair Procedures’’ for the procedure to replace the Tone-Clock circuit
pack.

! CAUTION:
When circuit packs in the Active SPE are to be replaced, this section
provides procedures for performing an SPE-interchange to place the circuit
packs in the Standby SPE mode. SPE circuit packs should never be
replaced while they are located in the Active SPE.
Use this section when:
1. Defective (that is, alarmed) Active or Standby SPE circuit packs are to be
replaced. The procedure begins at the ‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit
Packs’’ section. Ignore the ‘‘Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs’’ section, as it
does not apply to replacing defective Standby SPE circuit packs.
2. Healthy Standby SPE circuit packs are to be upgraded. The procedure
begins at the ‘‘Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs’’ section. Ignore the
‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ as it does not apply to
upgrading Standby SPE circuit packs.
The ‘‘Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure’’ and ‘‘Additional Tests for Replaced
DATA-CHL, PKT-CTRL, and PROCR Circuit Packs’’ sections apply to both
situations but should be referred to only after reading the appropriate sections
as instructed previously.

Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs
Determine that software is running by looking at the G3MT and verifying that it
does not have either the “SPE DOWN MODE” or the “Duplication Interface Processing Element Communication Down” message displayed.

Software Not Running
If system software is not running or if it stops running at any point during this
procedure, the suggested order of Processor Complex circuit packs to replace
in an attempt to fix the SPE down problem is:
■

Processor Circuit Pack (TN790)

■

Network Control Circuit Pack (TN777[B])

■

Packet Control circuit pack (TN778)

■

Duplication Interface circuit pack (TN772)

■

Processor Interface circuit pack (TN765)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-20

Software Running
If system software is running, determine which SPE is the Standby SPE by
issuing the status system command from the G3MT terminal. Look at the SPE
and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form to determine which SPE (A or
B) is the Active SPE; it is labeled as ”active.” The other SPE is the Standby SPE
and is labeled as either “standby,” “maint,” or “down.”
Follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” described later for each
Standby SPE circuit pack to be replaced. Continue with this procedure as follows.
1. If alarms are against the Active SHDW-CIR, Active DUPINT, or
SHDW-LNK, replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack. Proceed to the
‘‘Handling SHDW-CIR and SHDW-LNK Alarms in the Active SPE’’ or
‘‘Handling DUPINT Alarms in the Active SPE’’ sections as applicable.
2. If these sections do not need to be referenced, proceed to the ‘‘Circuit
Pack Replacement Procedure’’ section.
The rest of this section describes how the system behaves when there are faulty
circuit packs in the SPEs and is meant to be informative rather than part of the
general procedure of replacing SPE circuit packs.
NOTE:
When circuit packs other than the Duplication Interface circuit pack in
the Active SPE are defective, the SPE containing the more severely
defective circuit packs is usually in the Standby SPE.

Handling SHDW-CIR and SHDW-LNK Alarms
in the Active SPE
Check for the existence of SHDW-CIR alarms against the Active SPE Duplication
Interface circuit pack or SHDW-LNK alarms. If there are Active SPE SHDW-CIR or
SHDW-LNK alarms, inform the customer that a COLD 2 restart of the system is
needed and determine a time at which to restart may be. At that time, complete
the following steps:
1. Make sure that the tape (memory card) in the Active SPE tape unit
(memory card slot) has the most current translations. If it does not, issue
the save translations spe-active command to put the most current
translations on it.
2. Exchange the tapes (memory cards) in the Active SPE and Standby SPE
so that the Standby SPE tape unit (memory card slot) contains the tape
(memory card) from the previous step.
3. For a 386 system, if the Standby SPE is not in standby mode, issue the
refresh spe-standby command to put it into standby mode if possible
(see the previous Note). If the Standby SPE was successfully put into
standby mode, then issue the reset system interchange command to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-21

cause a PEI. If the refresh or system interchange are unsuccessful, then
use the SPE select switches to hard select the Standby SPE (this will result
in a COLD 2 restart of the system).
4. If the upgrade software (reset system interchange) command is
successful, an SPE-interchange results in the new Active SPE performing
a COLD 2 (HOT) restart. Follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure”
described later. If the upgrade software command failed, determine why
the failure occurred, resolve the problem, and repeat this entire
procedure.

Handling DUPINT Alarms in the Active SPE
Check for the existence of DUPINT alarms against the Active SPE Duplication
Interface circuit pack. If there are Active SPE DUPINT alarms, inform the
customer that a reboot of the system may be required and determine a time at
which a reboot may be done. At that time, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the translation card in the Active SPE has the most current
translations. If it does not, issue save translations spe-active to put the
most current translations on it.
2. Exchange the translation cards in the Active SPE and Standby SPE so that
the Standby SPE contains the card with the most current translations.
3. Throw the SPE Select Switches on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit
packs to force an SPE-interchange so that the current Standby SPE
becomes the new Active SPE. If SPE B is currently the Standby SPE, throw
both SPE Select Switches to the right. If SPE A is currently the Standby
SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the left.
If the Duplication Interface circuit pack actually severed the Memory
Shadowing Link resulting in corruption of Standby SPE Memory, the
SPE-interchange results in the new Active SPE performing a Reboot.
However, if the defect in the Duplication Interface circuit pack did not
sever the Memory Shadowing Link, the SPE-interchange results in the new
Active SPE performing a Warm Start instead.
4. After the SPE-interchange is complete, log into the terminal. Follow the
“Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” described later for each circuit
pack to be replaced in the new Standby SPE.

Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs
Determine which SPE is the Standby SPE by issuing the status system
command. Look at the SPE and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form.
The Active SPE; it is labeled as “active.” The other SPE is the Standby SPE and is
labeled as either “standby,” “maint,” or “down.”
Follow the ‘‘Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure’’ described later for each
Standby SPE circuit pack to be upgraded.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-22

When all Standby SPE circuit packs have been upgraded, force the Active SPE
to become the Standby SPE as follows:
1. Issue the status system command from the terminal. Look at the SPE and
MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form to determine the status of
the Standby SPE. Recall that the Standby SPE is labeled as either
“standby,” “maint,” or “down.”
2. If the Standby SPE is labeled as “maint,” continue issuing the refresh
spe-standby command followed by the status system command until the
Standby SPE is labeled “standby.”
NOTE:
It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command
multiple times to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If
the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five
times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled “standby” on the
status system form, wait 20 minutes. Issue the refresh spe-standby
command once more.
3. If the Standby SPE is labeled “standby,” issue the reset system
interchange command from the G3MT. After the SPE-interchange is
complete, log into the terminal, issue the status system command, and
verify that the SPEs have reversed roles.
4. Then, follow the “Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure” for each circuit
pack to be upgraded in the new Standby SPE.

Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure
This procedure does not apply to the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack. Please
refer to “TONE-BD”, “TONE-PT”, or “TDM-CLK” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance
Object Repair Procedures’’ for the procedure to replace the Tone-Clock circuit
pack.
NOTE:
See the flowchart of the procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE
Circuit Packs In Duplication Option Systems at the end of this section, for
use as a circuit pack replacement maintenance aid.
The following procedure involves throwing the SPE Select Switches to
hard-select the current Active SPE. After completing the circuit pack
replacement procedure, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been returned
to the AUTO position both by noting their position and by noting that the SPE
Select Switch LEDs on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs are not on.
1. Throw the SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to force selection of the
current Active SPE. If SPE B is currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE
Select Switches, one at a time, to the right. If SPE A is currently the Active
SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches, one at a time, to the left. Throwing
the SPE Select Switches automatically disables shadowing.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-23

NOTE:
Do not remove power before proceeding with step 2. All PPN Control
Carriers used in High or Critical Reliability Systems (A slot for the
Duplication Interface circuit pack identifies these carriers.) have
staggered pins to support the hot plug-in of circuit packs.
2. Unseat the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack. (It is not necessary to
entirely remove the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack from its slot.)
3. If the circuit pack to be replaced is the TN772 Duplication Interface in the
A carrier, continue with this step. Otherwise, proceed to Step 4.
Issue the status system command from the terminal, and check the
status of the Tone-Clock in the 1B carrier:
a. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock
is “in” (that is, in service) and the SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM
TONES fields indicate that it is “active,” proceed to Step 4.
b. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock
is “in” (that is, in service) but the SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM
TONES fields indicate that it is “standby,” then check the Error Log
for an active Error Type 3329 against the 1B TONE-BD by issuing
the display error command. If this error exists, proceed to Step 4.
NOTE:
Error Type 3329 implies that the Tone-Clock circuit pack
probably cannot provide system clocks and an attempt to set
the system clocks to this circuit pack would result in a reset
system 2 of the system. When the 1A Duplication Interface
circuit pack is replaced, however, the system experiences a
loss of clock, and a reset system 2 occurs.
If an active Error Type 3329 is not logged against the 1B TONE-BD,
issue the set tone-clock 1B command from the G3MT terminal to
make the 1B carrier Tone-Clock active. Verify that the switch occurs
by issuing the status system command and checking that the
SERVICE STATE, SYSTEM CLOCK and SYSTEM TONES fields are
now “in” and “active.” Proceed to Step 4.
NOTE:
If the 1B Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective the switch may
have failed and a reset system 2 may have occurred. In this
case, proceed to Step 4. However, the system experiences a
loss of clock and another reset system 2 when the 1A
Duplication Interface circuit pack is replaced.
c. If the SERVICE STATE field indicates that the 1B carrier Tone-Clock
is “out” (that is, out-of-service), refer to the TONE-BD (Tone-Clock
circuit pack), TONE-PT (Tone Generator), and TDM-CLK (TDM Bus
Clock) Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-24

Object Repair Procedures’’, to restore it to service. Proceed to Step
4 regardless of whether or not the attempt to restore the 1B
Tone-Clock to service was successful.
NOTE:
If the 1B Tone-Clock was not successfully restored to service,
the system experiences a loss of clock, and a reset system 2
when the 1A Duplication Interface circuit pack is replaced.
4. If the circuit pack to be replaced is the TN772 Duplication Interface, throw
the SPE Select Switch of the replacement Duplication Interface circuit
pack to the same position as the SPE Select Switch on the Duplication
Interface circuit pack that was removed.
If the Standby Processor is not being replaced Install the replacement
circuit pack and reinsert the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack.
a. If the circuit pack that was replaced was the TN772 Duplication
Interface in the A carrier, the G3MT terminal is logged off. Log in to
the Manager I terminal and proceed to Step 7.
5. If the circuit pack to be replaced is a TN790 Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack loaded with the same software as loaded in the Active
Processor or is a TN770 Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, install the
circuit pack and proceed to Step 7.
6. If the circuit pack to be replaced is a TN790 Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack and the software is being loaded from the generic program
card, continue with the following steps:
NOTE:
The TN790 must have the same number of SIMMs as the replaced circuit
pack.
a. Insert the generic program card into the Active SPE. Issue the list
configuration software-versions command. If the software
matches and the UPDATE FILE Identifier displays none, continue
with this procedure. Replace the translation card in the Active SPE.
b. Insert the generic program card into the Standby SPE.
c. Install the TN790 Standby Processor circuit pack. When the
Standby Processor starts to initialize and detects the program card,
it does a software upgrade and displays the progress of this
upgrade on the terminal.
d. When prompted, replace the program card in the Standby SPE with
the translation card. The Standby SPE boots up with the translation.
NOTE:
Perform this operation within two minutes. Otherwise the
Standby SPE will boot up without translations. However, it will

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-25

recover the translations when the Active SPE enables memory
shadowing to the Standby SPE.
e. At the prompt REPLACE TRANSLATION MEM-CARD ON
 WITH SOFTWARE MEM-CARD, wait 3 minutes for
the Standby SPE to initialize before proceeding to next step.
f. Issue the list configuration software-versions long command to
ensure that both SPEs are running identical software. Use the next
step if the this command does not display the software versions,
otherwise skip the next step.
g. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release
spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to
accept the list configuration software-versions long command.
Wait 5 minutes for the Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status
system 1st-cabinet command. The Standby SPE failed to initialize
if the Standby SPE Mode is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is
maint/init or maint/entering, execute the busyout spe-standby
and release spe-standby command up to 2 more times. If this step
does not succeed, try this procedure again.
7. Issue the status system 1st-cabinet command. The status system form
indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR alarms on both SPEs. If
SPE alarm counts are displayed, run component tests to resolve these
alarms. Allowed tests include test spe-standby, test duplicationinterface, and test shadow-link. Use the next step if the allowed test
commands are not accepted, otherwise skip the next step.

! CAUTION:
If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is being tested, Test #278
fails because the SPE Select Switches are thrown.
8. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release
spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to accept
the test commands attempted in the previous step. Wait 5 minutes for the
Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status system 1st-cabinet
command. If the Standby SPE failed to initialize if the Standby SPE Mode
is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is maint/init or maint/entering,
execute the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command
up to 2 more times. If this step does not succeed, try this procedure again.
9. If other Standby SPE circuit packs are to be replaced, return to Step 2.
10. Move each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position. If any of the
TN777B Network Control or the Processor circuit packs were replaced,
please refer to the ‘‘Additional Tests for Replaced DATA-CHL, PKT-CTRL,
and PROCR Circuit Packs’’ section.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

!

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-26

WARNING:
Move only one SPE Select Switch at a time. DO NOT move both
switches at the same time.

!

WARNING:
If the Active SPE has alarms in it, an SPE-interchange may occur
after moving each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position.

Maintenance activity is performed automatically on the Standby SPE after the
SPE Select Switches are returned to their AUTO positions in Step 10. This can be
verified by issuing the status system command and noting that the Standby SPE
is labeled as “maint.” It may take up to 5 minutes for this activity to begin. The
maintenance activity itself takes from 10 to 30 minutes to complete.
NOTE:
The time required for the maintenance activity to finish depends on the
number of TN765 Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of
administered ports on the Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of
administered data channels on the TN777B Network Control circuit pack,
and the current load on the system.
Verify the completion of the maintenance activity by issuing the status system 1
command and noting whether the Standby SPE is labeled as “standby.”
Although not recommended at this stage of the procedure, the maintenance
activity on the Standby SPE can be preempted using the refresh spe-standby
command. To preempt the maintenance activity, continue issuing the refresh
spe-standby command followed by status system 1 command until the status
system form shows that the Standby SPE is labeled “standby.”
It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times
to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby
command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming
labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. Issue the refresh
spe-standby command once more.
If the status system 1 command continues to show SPE alarms, issue the
appropriate command(s) from the G3MT terminal to test these alarmed MOs.
After Step 10, if the Active SPE contains more severely defective circuit packs
than the Standby SPE, an SPE-interchange may occur. The presence of alarms in
the Active and Standby SPE can be verified by issuing the status system
command. The status system form indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR
alarms on both SPEs. If the Active SPE has alarms in it, an SPE-interchange may
occur. The occurrence of the SPE-interchange can be verified by issuing the
status system command to determine which SPE is now the Active SPE.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-27

Additional Tests for Replaced DATA-CHL,
PKT-CTRL, and PROCR Circuit Packs
After all affected circuit packs have been replaced, if the replaced circuit packs
include the TN777B Network Control circuit pack(s), the TN778 Packet Control
circuit pack(s), or the Processor circuit pack(s), additional testing is required to
ensure that the new circuit packs are healthy. This testing must be done on these
circuit packs when they are located in the Active SPE. Issue the status system
command to determine which SPE is currently the Active SPE and determine the
SPE, Active or Standby, in which each replaced Network Control, Packet Control,
and/or Processor circuit pack resides.
If any of the replaced circuit packs are located in the Active SPE, test it by
issuing the test network-control [a | b], test packet-control [a | b], or test
processor [a | b] command, as appropriate. If any tests fail or abort, refer to the
SW-CTL (Switch Control), DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel),
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack, DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit
Pack), or PROCR, and PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, as
appropriate.
If any of these circuit packs are located in the Standby SPE, force the Standby
SPE to become the Active SPE as described in "Upgrading SPE Circuit Packs."
However, before the Standby SPE is made to become the Active SPE, the
replaced circuit pack should first be tested while on the Standby SPE. Then, test
these circuit packs (that are now located in the Active SPE) by issuing the test
network-control [a | b], test packet-control [a | b], or test processor [a | b]
command, as appropriate. If any tests fail or abort, refer to the SW-CTL (Switch
Control), DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel), DATA-BD (Network Control
Circuit Pack), PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack), or PROCR, and
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance documentation in
Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, as appropriate.

! WARNING:
Before leaving the system, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been
returned to their proper position. The switches should be in the AUTO
position and the SPE Select Switch LEDs should be off on both the TN772
Duplication Interface circuit packs.
See the following flowchart, Figure 6-1, Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3, for the
procedure for installing or replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs in Duplication
Option System.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

YES

Issue the
"save translations
spe-active" command

Page 6-28

Are there
SHDW-CIR
alarms in the active
SPE or are there
SHDW-LNK
alarms?

NO

Are there
DUPINT alarms
in the active
SPE carrier?

Exchange the
active SPE
and STANDBY
SPE memory
cards or tapes

Issue the
"save translations
spe-active" command

YES

NO

Exchange the
active SPE
and STANDBY
SPE memory
cards or tapes

Issue the
"upgrade software"
command

Was the
"upgrade software"
successful?

YES

Throw the SPE select
switches to force an
SPE interchange

Throw the SPE select
switches to
hard-select the active
SPE

B

NO
Throw the SPE select
switches to
hard-select the
standby SPE and
allow the standby
SPE time to become
active

Is
processor
being replaced
and a software
card being
used?

YES

C

NO

Unseat the standby
SPE processor circuit
pack

A

Figure 6-1.

Page 1 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Page 6-29

A

YES

Is the
1B CARRIER
TONE CLOCK
"in" service and
"active"?

NO

Is the
1B CARRIER
TONE CLOCK
"in" service and
"standby"?

NO

Restore the 1B
TONE CLOCK to "in"
service (Refer to the
TONE-BD section of
the maintenance
manual,
555-204-105)

Is the
defective circuit
pack the carrier A
DUPINT?

NO
YES

YES

Issue the "set tone
1b" command to
make it "active"

Is the
defective circuit
pack either of the
DUPINTs?

YES

Throw new DUPINTs
SPE select switch to
hard-select the
active SPE

NO

D

Figure 6-2.

Page 2 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability

Page 6-30

D

C

In sta ll n ew circ u it
p a ck

Inser t softw are
m em ory card into the
active SP E . U se the
"lis t config soft"
com m and to verify
yo u h ave th e c o rre c t
vers io n. If the
softw are does n ot
m atch or the update
file contains data
es calate.

R e -in se r t th e sta n d by
S P E p ro c e sso r circ u it
p a ck

E
R eplace the
trans lation m em or y
ca rd in th e a c tive
SP E

Is su e th e "te st"
co m m a n d s o n th e
N E W circ u it p a ck to
re so lve a la rm s

In s e rt s o ftw a re
m em ory card into
stand by S PE
If "list" o r "te st"
co m m a n d s a re
blo cke d a fte r
re p e a te d trie s, u se
th e "b u syo u t
sp e -s ta n d b y" a n d
"re le a s e sp e -sta n d by"
co m m a n d s a n d try
a g a in

A re
th e re o th e r
d e fe ctive circu it
p a cks to b e
re p la c e d ?

R eplace proc essor
circ uit pack (do not
rem ove S P E pow er)

R epla ce s oftw are
m em ory card w ith
trans lation m em or y
card w hen prom pted
from S AT
YES

B

IG N O R E prom pt from
S AT to repla ce ac tive
trans lation m em or y
card. W ait 3 m inutes.

NO
Th row th e SP E se le ct
sw itch e s to th e
n o rm a l p o s itio n , o n e
a t a tim e

W a it fo r b a ck gro u n d
S P E te stin g to fin is h
"sta tu s sys te m 1 "

Figure 6-3.

"lis t configuration
softw are-vers ions
long" to verify
identic al active a nd
standby softw are

E

Page 3 Procedure for Replacing Standby SPE Circuit Packs

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Procedure for Installing/Replacing the Inter-Cabinet Cable

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-31

Procedure for Installing/Replacing the
Inter-Cabinet Cable
The Inter-Cabinet Cables (ICCs) are physically located on the back of the
cabinet behind the panels and between the A control cabinet and the B control
cabinet. The panels must first be opened to see the ICCs.

! WARNING:
Damage can be done to the Inter-Cabinet Cables during removal or
installation. Follow the guidelines listed below to minimize the possibility of
damage to the cables and later need of replacement.
To remove ICC-A, ICC-B, or ICC-C:
1. Remove power from the system. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
2. Grasp the cable connector, not the cable itself. Attempting to remove a
cable by pulling on the cable itself can damage the cable-to-connector
interface.
3. Pull the cable straight out. Pulling the connector from the backplane at an
angle can bend the backplane pins.
4. Push the ICC connector onto the insulated sleeves.

! CAUTION:
The pins should not show through the back of this connector. If they
do, they ICC may be shorted out.
The only way to check the connector-cable-connector integrity is with a
continuity test.
To re-install ICC-A, ICC-B, or ICC-C:
1. Verify that the backplane pins are not bent. If any are bent, they must be
straightened or replaced before continuing.
2. Align the ICC connector with the backplane pins and push partially into
place.
3. Use a dental mirror and light to view the back sides of the connector.
Determine that all 50 backplane pins are seated correctly in the ICC
connector.
4. Push the ICC connectors fully onto the insulated sleeves. The pins should
not show through the back of the connectors. If the pins show through, the
ICC may be shorted out.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-32

Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance
Activities for System Testing
Sometimes it is necessary to block Standby SPE maintenance activities so that
system technician commands that test Standby SPE components can be
conducted without being blocked with the G3MT terminal message line “Standby
SPE busy with another task; for information use ‘status system’.” To block
Standby SPE maintenance activities, perform the steps listed below.

! WARNING:
The following procedure involves throwing the SPE Select Switches to
hard-select the current Active SPE. After completing the circuit pack
replacement procedure, verify that the SPE Select Switches have been
returned to the AUTO position both by noting their position and by noting
that the SPE Select Switch LEDs on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit
packs are not on.
1. Throw the SPE Select Switches (on the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit
packs) to force selection of the current Active SPE. If SPE-B is currently
the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the right. If SPE-A is
currently the Active SPE, throw both SPE Select Switches to the left.
2. Issue the status system 1st-cabinet command from the G3MT terminal.
The status system form indicates the presence of MAJOR and MINOR
alarms on both SPEs. If SPE alarm counts are displayed, run component
tests to resolve these alarms. Allowed tests include test spe-standby, test
duplication-interface, and test shadow-link. Use the next step if the
allowed test commands are not accepted, otherwise skip the next step.

! CAUTION:
If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is being tested, Test #278
fails because the SPE Select Switches are thrown.
3. Issue the busyout spe-standby command followed by the release
spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE into a mode to accept
the test commands attempted in the previous step. Wait 5 minutes for the
Standby SPE to initialize and issue the status system 1st-cabinet
command. If the Standby SPE failed to initialize if the Standby SPE Mode
is down. If the Standby SPE Mode is maint/init or maint/entering, execute
the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command up to 2 more
times. If this step does not succeed, try this procedure again.
4. Move each SPE Select Switch back to the AUTO position.

!

WARNING:
Move only one SPE Select Switch at a time. DO NOT move both
switches at the same time.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-33

Maintenance activity is performed automatically on the Standby SPE after the
SPE Select Switches are returned to their AUTO positions in Step 4. This can be
verified by issuing the status system command and noting that the Standby SPE
is labeled as “maint.” The maintenance activity takes from 10 to 30 minutes to
complete. (The time required for the maintenance activity to complete depends
upon the number of TN765 Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of
administered ports on the Processor Interface circuit packs, the number of
administered data channels on the TN777B Network Control circuit pack, and the
current load on the system.) The completion of the maintenance activity can be
verified by issuing the status system command and noting whether the Standby
SPE is labeled as ”standby.”
Although not recommended at this stage of the procedure, the maintenance
activity on the Standby SPE can be preempted using the refresh spe-standby
command. To preempt the maintenance activity, continue issuing the refresh
spe-standby command followed by status system command until the status
system form shows that the Standby SPE is labeled ”standby.”
It may be necessary to issue the refresh spe-standby command multiple times
to preempt all Standby SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby
command successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming
labeled “standby” on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not
include cases where the command completes with the G3MT terminal message
line errors “Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE
errors” or “Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later.”
Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

6

Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid
Blocking Standby SPE Maintenance Activities for System Testing

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 6-34

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

7

Issue 1
April 1997

LED Interpretation
General

LED Interpretation

Page 7-1

7

General
The lighting and unlighting of LEDs indicates to the system user the status of
various maintenance components in the system. LEDS are located on the
attendant console, on all circuit packs in the switch cabinets and, optionally, on
customer-designated voice terminals. The following LEDS are included in the
system:
■

Processor circuit pack and maintenance circuit pack LEDs

■

Duplication interface circuit pack LEDs

■

Attendant console LEDs

■

Carrier power unit LEDs

■

Power distribution unit LEDs

■

Control and port circuit pack status LEDs

Processor and Maintenance Circuit
Pack LEDs
The front panels of the Processor circuit pack and the Maintenance circuit pack
are identical. Each has two groups of LEDs. One group indicates the status of the
pack, and the other group (which includes the Major, Minor, and Warning alarms
described previously) reflects maintenance conditions in the entire system (that
is, the PPN and EPN cabinets). See Figure 7-1.
■

Red (alarm)—the system has detected a fault in this circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Processor and Maintenance Circuit Pack LEDs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 7-2

NOTE:
Alarms on the PROCR, PR-MAINT, MEMORY, and PR-MEM MOs are
indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack.
■

Green (test)—the system is running tests on this circuit pack.
NOTE:
On the Standby Processor circuit pack, green means that the
Standby Switch Processing Element (SPE) is not refreshed (that is, it
is in Maintenance or Down Mode).
NOTE:
On the Maintenance circuit pack, the green LED may blink very
faintly once per second. This is the normal operating state of the
Maintenance circuit pack. The faint blink is due to a
once-per-second self-test executed by the Maintenance circuit
pack.

■

Yellow (busy)—this circuit pack is in use. In a high or critical reliability
system, the yellow LED is always off for the Standby Processor and
Memory circuit packs even when in Maint mode.

■

MAJOR ALARMS (red)

■

MINOR ALARMS (red)

■

WRNG (warning) ALARMS (yellow)

■

■

ACK (acknowledgment) (green)—indicates Major or Minor alarms have
been reported to INADS
EMERGENCY TRANSFER (red)—indicates emergency transfer has been
invoked
NOTE:
If the AC power cord is unplugged from the control cabinet, the
emergency transfer feature invokes, however the EMERGENCY
TRANSFER LED (red) is not lit due to loss of AC power.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 7-3

ALARM LED (RED)
TEST LED (GREEN)
BUSY LED (AMBER)
ALARMS
MAJOR
MINOR

MAJOR ALARM LED (RED)
MINOR ALARM LED (RED)
WARNING ALARM LED (AMBER)

WRNG
ACK
EMERGENCY
TRANSFER

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT LED (GREEN)

OFF

CONTROL SWITCH

ON

EMERGENCY TRANSFER

AUTO

EMERGENCY TRANSFER LED (RED)

Figure 7-1.

Indicators on Maintenance and Processor Circuit Packs

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
LEDs
In a High or Critical Reliability system, there are two Duplication Interface circuit
packs. One is located in carrier A and one in carrier B of the PPN. Each circuit
pack has two groups of LEDs. The top three have the traditional function of
indicating the status of the pack. The LED located at the bottom of the faceplate
directly beneath the SPE AUTO switch is labeled OVERRIDE. Under normal
operating conditions, the SPE AUTO switch is in the AUTO (center) position (see
Figure 7-2). This means that the system controls which SPE is active. However,
there will be times (during maintenance activity, for example) when you, the
technician, may choose to manually override the SPE selection function. To
override system selection of the Active processor, move the SPE Select switches
one at a time on both Duplication Interface circuit packs from the AUTO position

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack LEDs

Page 7-4

to either the ‘‘A’’ position or the ‘‘B’’ position. Thus, when both SPE Select
switches have been moved to either ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘B,’’ the OVERRIDE LED turns red
and lights steadily.
NOTE:
Failure to move both SPE Select switches to the same position causes the
system to retain control of processor selection.
To return control of the SPE selection to the system, return the SPE Select
switches on both Duplication Interface circuit packs to the AUTO position (one at
a time to avoid accidentally selecting the other SPE). The OVERRIDE LED goes
dark.

ALARM LED (RED)
TEST LED (GREEN)
BUSY LED (AMBER)

SPE
AUTO
SPE SELECT SWITCH
A B
OVERRIDE
SPE SELECT LED (RED)

Figure 7-2.

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Indicators

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Attendant Console LEDs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 7-5

Attendant Console LEDs
The console has two red LEDs, labeled ALM and ACK, on the left side of the dial.
The left LED lights steadily when there is a Major or Minor alarm at the switch
cabinet. The right LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully reported
to INADS. If the system is unable to report the alarm to INADS, the LED flashes;
signaling the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm.

Cabinet Power Unit LEDs
For a description of Cabinet Power Unit LEDs, refer to “AC-POWER” for
AC-Powered Systems and “DC-POWER” for DC-Powered Systems in Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.

Power Distribution Unit LEDs
For a description of Power Distribution LEDs, refer to “AC-POWER” for
AC-Powered Systems and “DC-POWER” for DC-Powered Systems in Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.

Control and Port Circuit Pack Status
LEDs
Each circuit pack has three LEDs on the front panel visible at the front of the
carrier. On all circuit packs, except the TN736 Power Unit, the LEDs indicate:
1. Red (alarm) — If the circuit pack is communicating with the system, the
system has detected a fault in this circuit pack. An on-board alarm for this
circuit pack is displayed in the Alarm Log.
The circuit pack also lights this LED when either the circuit pack has not
yet initialized communication with the system or when the circuit pack
loses contact with the system and stops functioning (circuit pack is said to
be ‘‘in reset’’). In these cases, there may not be an alarm in the Alarm Log.
To determine if the red LED is lit because the circuit pack is not in contact
with the system, issue the list configuration board PCSS command,
where PCSS refers to the slot containing this circuit pack. If the system
does not detect the circuit pack, this command returns ‘‘Identifier not
assigned’’ or ‘‘no board.’’
If the circuit pack has just been inserted, the system may still be initializing
the circuit pack. If, after 5 minutes, the circuit pack still has not initialized
communications with the system, check the MO for any special
instructions (for example, EPN Maintenance circuit pack can stop
EXP-INTF circuit pack from initializing). If the MO does not provide the
needed information, perform the following steps:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 7-6

■

Check the Error Log for TONE-BD and TDM-BUS errors. Enter test
tdm P where P is the port network containing the relevant slot.
Refer to” Restarting Nonfunctioning Port Circuit Packs” in Chapter
10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’ in the general
description of the “TDM-BUS”. Enter test tone-clock PC, where P
is the network containing the relevant slot, and C is the carrier
containing the relevant slot. Follow appropriate sections for any
“TONE-BD” and “TDM-BUS” errors.

■

Reseat the suspect circuit pack.

!

WARNING:
Reseating some circuit packs may be very destructive (for example,
Control Carrier circuit packs.)
Wait 5 minutes. Then issue the list configuration board PCSS
command. If the result indicates that the system still has not
registered the circuit pack, go to next step.
■

Try to insert the circuit pack into a different slot and try to insert a
different circuit pack into the suspect slot (provided the
maintenance documentation for this circuit pack does not warn
against either of these actions).

■

If the system seems to be functioning correctly, but the circuit pack
does not start communicating with the system, replace the circuit
pack.

2. Green (test)—the system is running tests on this circuit pack.
3. Yellow (busy)—indicates that the circuit pack is in use.
NOTE:
A port circuit pack also lights its red LED when it performs
initialization tests (for example, when the circuit pack is initially
inserted into the system). If all initialization tests pass, the red LED is
turned off. If any initialization tests fail, the red LED remains lighted
and the circuit pack is not placed into service.
Packet circuit packs such as the TN556 ISDN BRI-Line and TN570
Expansion Interface perform extensive initialization tests and light both the
red and green LEDs during that testing.
During the various states of operation (start-up testing, normal operation,
circuit failure, and so forth) circuit pack status LED indications appear as
shown in Table 7-1.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs

Table 7-1.

Page 7-7

Circuit Pack Status LEDs

Equipment Type
Port Circuit
Packs

LED

Description

Red

On briefly during power up, circuit pack reseating, resetting,
and system reset. Steadily on if circuit pack fails start-up test
or fails while in use. Off during normal operation.

Green

Briefly on during circuit pack testing following power up,
circuit pack reseating, and system reset. On during periodic,
scheduled, and system technician demanded testing. Off
during normal operation.

Yellow

On when any port in the circuit pack is in use, otherwise, off.
The yellow LED on the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack
may blink. This has special meaning for systems using Packet
Bus. Refer to “Packet Bus” for more information.

Control Circuit
Packs

Red

On briefly during power up and system reset. Steadily on if
circuit pack fails start-up test or fails while in use. Off during
normal operation.

Control Circuit
Packs (continued)

Green

On briefly during board testing following power up and
system reset. Also on during periodic, scheduled, and system
technician-demanded testing. Off during normal operation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

7

LED Interpretation
Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs

Table 7-1.

Page 7-8

Circuit Pack Status LEDs — Continued

Equipment Type

LED
Yellow

Description
Network Control
■

Lit when one of the data channels is in use

■

On the TN777B Network Control circuit pack, a fourth
yellow LED with the label ‘‘Card in use’’ is lit when the
translation card is in use.

Processor
■

Lit during processor initialization. Lit steady on the Active
SPE and off during normal operation on the Standby SPE.
Memory.

■

Lit during system initialization (stays lit until Emergency
Transfer is turned off). Lit steady on the Active SPE and off
during normal operation on the Standby SPE.

Packet Control
■

Lit when at least one Packet Control is in use. Packet
Control LEDs do not light up (not even for the test led
command) if the packet feature is not enabled on the
Systems-Parameters Maintenance screen.

Tone Detector/Generator
■

Slow blinking when clock is in use. Otherwise, off.

Processor Interface
■

Lit when one (or more) channels (links) is in use.
Otherwise, off.

Duplication Interface
■

Lit steady on the Active SPE and dark during normal
operation on the Standby SPE. Exception: Duplication
Interface Circuit Pack A has the yellow LED lit steady if
Tone/Clock Circuit Pack 1B is active, regardless of which
SPE is active and which is standby.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout access-endpoint

Page 8-1

8

Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids

8

8

For Maintenance Objects and Maintenance Commands for the DEFINITY
Wireless Business System (DWBS), refer to the appropriate maintenance
documentation that accompanies the DWBS.
This chapter provides additional trouble-clearing information for resolving both
system-alarmed and user-reported troubles. This chapter supplements the
information found in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. The
information consists of using the maintenance commands as trouble-clearing
aids. The maintenance commands are used to control, test, and obtain
information associated with maintenance objects (MOs). The commands require
the use of the administration terminal or remote Initialization and Administration
System (INADS) interface (a valid login and password to perform maintenance
are required).
In this chapter, the commands are first identified and organized into categories.
Thereafter, each command is described individually.

busyout access-endpoint
This command will busyout a specified access endpoint.

Synopsis
busyout access-endpoint extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout access-endpoint

Page 8-2

8

Examples
busyout access-endpoint 25012
busyout access-endpoint 77868

Description
The busyout access-endpoint command will put all the ports associated with the
specified access endpoint in a maintenance busy (system technician busy)
state. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out
access endpoint ports until they are released. When the access endpoint ports
are maintenance busy (system technician busy) then the access endpoint is
removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call processing activity may
include the busied objects). Warning alarms are generated on each busied out
port in the access endpoint. The release access-endpoint command will return
all the ports associated with the specified access endpoint to operation.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
Extension

An extension number associated with the desired access
endpoint. The number of digits in an extension is
determined by the dial-plan.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout access-endpoint

Page 8-3

8

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "busyout access-endpoint," the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the EPN on which the access endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not an access endpoint,
the following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than access-endpoint

If the board that contains the access endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout board

Page 8-4

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. For
wideband access endpoint the maintenance name for each port
is "WAE-PORT.” For single port access endpoint the maintenance
name is "TIE-DS1."

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the extension number of the access endpoint.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object is successfully busied out.
The possible values are: PASS, FAIL and ABORT.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, the command "busyout access-endpoint
22502" was entered. Assume that the access endpoint ports for extension 22502
are in cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6.

busyout access-endpoint 22502

SPE A

COMMAND RESULTS
Port
Maintenance Name
01C1101
WAE-PORT
01C1102
WAE-PORT
01C1103
WAE-PORT
01C1104
WAE-PORT
01C1105
WAE-PORT
01C1106
WAE-PORT

Alt. Name
22502
22502
22502
22502
22502
22502

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
If there is an active call on the specified access endpoint, the busyout command
will cause the call to drop. This command is destructive.

busyout board
This command will busyout each maintenance object on the specified board.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout board

Page 8-5

8

Synopsis
busyout board location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout board 01c11
busyout board 02c15

Description
The busyout board command will put every administered maintenance object on
the circuit pack at the specified location in a maintenance busy state. There will
be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out objects until they
are released. The ports on the board may not be used for call processing (i.e.,
terminals on the administered ports will not receive dial-tone, etc.). Warning
alarms are generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so
that INADS can access the state of the objects. The release board command will
return every administered maintenance object on the circuit pack at the specified
location to operation.

! WARNING:
This command is service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout board

Page 8-6

8

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the board to be busied
out and is entered as "UUcSS" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, and "SS" represents the slot
position.
A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be marked
and is entered as "PCSSpp" where P is the port network number (1 for
PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.),
and "pp" represents the circuit (port). A single digit cabinet (1 - 3) may
be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout board," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter 5 character board number

Error Messages
If the format of the board location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid

If the EPN on which the board resides is not available, the following message will
be displayed:
EPN is not available

If a board is not inserted in the specified location, the following message will be
displayed:
Board not assigned

If the specified board does not have any maintenance objects associated with it,
the following message will be displayed:
No MO in this board

If the specified board is part of the DCS link, the board cannot be busied out
unless the link itself is busied out first. If the DCS link is not busied out, the
following message will be displayed:
Must first busyout SCI link

If the specified board is an EI board and it is part of the active link, the following
message will be displayed:
Illegal Command for active object; use ’set’ to switch to standby

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout board

Page 8-7

8

If a busyout is attempted on an invalid board in the service slot, the following
message is displayed:
Board invalid

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out. The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the board in cabinet 1, carrier c,
slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. The command that was
entered is "busyout board 1c07."

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout cdr-link

Page 8-8

8

busyout board 01C07

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C07
ANL-BD
01C0702
ANL-LINE
01C0701
ANL-LINE
01C0703
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name

51001

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout cdr-link
This command will busyout a maintenance object associated with the specified
call detail recording (cdr)-link.

Synopsis
busyout cdr-link link-id

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
busyout cdr-link primary
busyout cdr-link secondary

Description
The busyout cdr-link command will put the maintenance object associated with a
specified call detail recording (cdr)-link in a maintenance busy state. There will
be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out maintenance
object until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy then the object is
removed from active service on the switch (no call processing activity may
include the busied out object) and the link will be dropped. Warning alarms are

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout cdr-link

Page 8-9

8

generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS
can access the state of the objects. The release cdr-link command will return the
object to operation.
A link is made up of several components. It involves a far end data module, a
simulated data channel on a PKTINT board, a manager that initiates and
maintains the link, and a controller/protocol that services the link. A
controller/protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link
is up. A link is considered up if a physical connection is established. A link can
be considered to be up while no useful work can be performed over it, in this
case the link is insane and should be torn down. These links provide
asynchronous data connections from the switch to peripherals.
For information on what a CDR link is and does, see the second paragraph in the
Description section of the "status cdr-link" manual pages.

Defaults
Primary.

Parameters
link-id

The link identifier is either "primary" or "secondary."

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout cdr-link," the
following message will be displayed:
primary

secondary

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout data-module

Page 8-10

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out. With this maintenance object a
port address of 1 represents the primary link, while a 2 port
address is associated with the secondary link.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout cdr-link primary."

busyout cdr-link primary

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
1

Maintenance Name
CDR-LNK

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout data-module
This command will busyout a system technician specified data module or data
channel.

Synopsis
busyout data-module extension

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout data-module

Page 8-11

8

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms.

Examples
busyout data-module 31300

Description
The busyout data module command will put the specified data module in a
maintenance busy state, even those data modules that are not installed. There
will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out data module
or data channel until it is released. Also no call processing may be executed on
the data modules or over the data channels. Warning alarms are generated (error
type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can access the
state of the objects. The release data module command will return the specified
data module (or data channel) to operation.
On a system with the duplication option, a busyout of a Network Control Data
Channel, DATA-CHL, or a Processor Interface Port Data Channels, PI-PT, will be
preserved across SPE interchanges. The data channel extension must be
released before the data channel can be brought back into service.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired data module or data
channel. The number of digits in an extension is determined by a
dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout data-module," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned extension

Error Messages
If the length or format of the extension is incorrect, the following error message
will be displayed:
Extension invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout data-module

Page 8-12

8

If the specified extension is not administered, then the following message will be
displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the specified extension is not a data module or a data channel, then the
following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

If the EPN that contains the data module port is not available, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the board containing the data module port is part of the SCI link, the following
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout journal-printer

Page 8-13

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out, or the number of the data
channel.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout data-module 300."

busyout data-module 300

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C1103
DIG-LINE

Alt. Name
300

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout journal-printer
This command will busyout a maintenance object associated with the system
technician specified pms-log or wakeup-log.

Synopsis
busyout journal-printer [ pms-log | wakeup-log ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout journal-printer

Page 8-14

8

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
busyout journal-printer pms-log
busyout journal-printer wakeup-log

Description
The busyout journal-printer command will put the maintenance object associated
with a specified pms-log or wakeup-log link in a maintenance busy state. There
will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out maintenance
object until it is released. Also, no activity will occur over the links (i.e. no data will
be transferred to the printer) and the link will be dropped. Warning alarms are
generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS
can access the state of the objects. The release journal-printer command will
return the object to operation.
A link is comprised of several components. It involves a far end data module, a
simulated data channel on a PKTINT board, a manager that initiates and
maintains the link, and a controller/protocol that services the link. A
controller/protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link
is up. A link is considered up if a physical connection is established. A link can
be considered to be up while no useful work can be performed over it, in this
case the link is insane and should be torn down. These links provide
asynchronous data connections from the switch to peripherals.
For general information on journal printer links, see the second paragraph in the
Description section of the ‘‘busyout pms-link’’ manual pages.
For information on what a journal printer is and does, see the second paragraph
in the Description section of the "status journal-link" manual pages.

Defaults
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout journal-printer

Page 8-15

8

Parameters
pms-log

This will busyout the link to the pms printer. In the output the port name
for the pms link is 1.

wakeup-log

This will busyout the link to the wakeup logging facility. In the output the
port name for this object is 0.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout journal-printer," the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
pms-log

wakeup-log

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Error Message
Link not administered not enabled

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out. In this case, the physical object
port address will be a 0 for wakeup log and a 1 for the pms log.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout journal-printer wakeup-log."

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout link

Page 8-16

8

busyout journal-printer wakeup-log

SPE A

COMMAND RESULTS
Port
0

Maintenance Name
JRNL-LINK

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link will sometimes interfere with
the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a
busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may
delay the recover of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a
component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the
technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The
busyout command is used to do this, and will not cause the link to be torn down.
If the link is already down, the busyout command will stop periodic re-setup trys
on the link.

busyout link
This command will busyout the system technician specified link.

Synopsis
busyout link link-id

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout link 1

Description
The busyout link command will put the maintenance objects associated with a
specified link in a maintenance busy state. There will be no periodic or
scheduled tests performed on the busied out maintenance objects until they are

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout link

Page 8-17

8

released. Also the link will be marked out of service and inaccessible to call
processing for use. Warning alarms are generated (error type 18) on each
maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can access the state of the
objects. The release link command will return the objects to operation.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
link-id

The link-id is a number associated with each link between 1-8.
Link 1 through 4 reside on Processor Interface circuit pack
"1a1" or "1b1" and 5 through 8 reside on Processor Interface
circuit pack "1a2" or "1b2."

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout link," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 1 character link number

Error Messages
If the link identifier is not valid, the following error message is displayed:
Link out of range, please press HELP

If the link is not administered, the following error message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout mis

Page 8-18

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out. With this command the Port
address represents the link-id.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout link 1."

busyout link 1

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C0301
PI-LINK

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout mis
This will busyout a specified management information system.

Synopsis
busyout mis

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, cust, rcust.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout mis

Page 8-19

8

Examples
busyout mis

Description
The busyout mis command will put a management information system in the
maintenance busy state. There will be no periodic or scheduled maintenance
performed on the busied out mis until it is released. When the object is busied
out no call processing activity may be performed over the link. A warning alarm is
generated (error type 18) on the mis that has been busied out, so that INADS can
access the state of it. The release mis command will return the busied out mis to
operation.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout mis" the following
message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout modem-pool

Page 8-20

8

Output
Port

Not applicable

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. For this
command the field is always MIS.

Alt. Name

Not applicable

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out. PASS or ABORT will typically be here.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed or was
aborted. 1010 - already busied out

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout mis."

busyout mis

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name
MIS

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout modem-pool
This command will allow all members of a modem pool group to be busied out.

Synopsis
busyout modem-pool group/member

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout modem-pool

Page 8-21

8

Examples
busyout modem-pool 1
busyout modem-pool 4/3

Description
The "busyout modem-pool" command will put the specified modem pool group or
group member in the maintenance busy state, even those groups that are not
installed. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied
out modem pool groups or group members until they are released. When the
object is maintenance busy then the object is removed from active service on the
switch (i.e., no call processing activity may include the busied object). A single
group member can be busied out by specifying the group number, a "/," and the
member number. All members in a modem pool group can be busied out by
specifying the modem pool group number only. Warning alarms are generated
(error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can
access the state of the objects. The "release modem-pool" command will return
the specified modem pool group or group member to operation.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
group number

The group number is assigned from administration. The group
number may be any administered group from 1-5.

member number

The member number is assigned from administration. A member is a
pair of analog and digital line ports (or two pair for the Integrated
modem-pool case). The member number may be any administered
group member from 1-32.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout modem-pool" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned group number between 1-5
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

Error Messages
If the "busyout modem-pool" command is entered from a login for which the
command is not valid, then the following message will be displayed:
"busyout" is an invalid entry; please press HELP

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout modem-pool

Page 8-22

8

If the group or member numbers entered are not in a valid format, the following
message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the group number entered is not within the range of groups or the member
number is not within the member range, then the following message will be
displayed:
Boards not assigned

If the specific group or member are not administered, then the following
message will be displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member

If a software fault is encountered while the command is executing, the following
message will be displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
When each modem pool member has been busied out, the following information
will be displayed:
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object which is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. This is
always MODEM-PT.

Alt. Name

This field is not applicable to this command.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout packet-control

Page 8-23

8

In the following output example, the command "busyout modem-pool 1" was
entered.

busyout modem-pool 1

SPE B
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name

01C0701
01C0703

Alt. Name

MODEM-PT
MODEM-PT

Result

Error Code

PASS
PASS

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout packet-control
This command will busyout the specified packet-control.

Synopsis
busyout packet-control location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init

Examples
busyout packet-control 1A
busyout packet-control 1B

Description
The busyout packet-control command will put the packet-control circuit pack in a
maintenance busy state, and tear-down each point-to-point signaling link that is
terminated on this packet-control. There will be no periodic or scheduled test
performed on the busied out packet-control until it is released. A warning alarm is
generated (error type 18) on the busied out packet-control so that INADS can

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout packet-control

Page 8-24

8

access the state of the object. The release packet-control command will return
the board to a normal operation state and initiate recovery on all point-to-point
signaling links terminated on this packet-control.

Defaults
For simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1, carrier A.
For duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1, but there is no default
for the carrier.

Parameters
location

The location only applies to duplicated configurations. If the
configuration is a simplex, the location parameter is not used and thus
is not valid. For duplicated configurations, a "location" represents the
carrier that the packet-control resides on in the system. Valid locations
are either 1A or 1B.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout packet-control," the
following message is displayed:
Enter Packet Control location: [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B)

Error Messages
If this command is entered for a packet-control that resides on the stand-by
control complex of a duplicated system, the following message is displayed:
Command only applies to the active Packet Control

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout pms-link

Page 8-25

8

Output
Port

This field represents the Cabinet-Carrier in which the
Packet-Control resides.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out ( which in
this case is always PKT-CTRL).

Alt. Name

This field is not used in this output display.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied out
( "PASS," "ABORT," or "FAIL").

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes is present in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, the command busyout packet-control 1A was
entered.

busyout packet-control 1A

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
1A

Maintenance Name

Alt. Name

PKT-CTRL

Result

Error Code

PASS

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
In a duplicated system, an attempt to busyout the packet-control that resides in
the standby processor complex will be disallowed.
When the packet-control in the active control complex is busied out, all
connectivity across the Packet Bus will be severed. Thus, all ISDN-BRI
point-to-point signaling links that have been established via the active
packet-control will be torn down by the busyout packet-control command. The
release packet-control command will reestablish all Packet Bus connectivity.

busyout pms-link
This command will busyout a specified property management system link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout pms-link

Page 8-26

8

Synopsis
busyout pms-link

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout pms-link

Description
The busyout pms-link command will put all maintenance objects associated with
a property management system link in the maintenance busy state. There will be
no periodic or scheduled maintenance performed on the busied out
maintenance objects until they are released. When the object is maintenance
busy then the object is removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call
processing activity may include the busied object) and the link will be dropped.
Warning alarms are generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object
busied out, so that INADS can access the state of the objects. The release pms
link command will return the busied out objects on the link to operation.
A link is made up of several components. It involves a far end data module, a
simulated data channel on a NETCON board, a manager that initiates and
maintains the link, and a controller/protocol that services the link. A
controller/protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link
is up. A link is considered up if a physical connection is established. A link can
be considered to be up while no useful work can be performed over it, in this
case the link is insane and should be torn down. These links provide
asynchronous data connections from the switch to peripherals.
For information on what a PMS is and does, see the second paragraph in the
Description section of the "status pms-link" manual pages.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout pms-link

Page 8-27

8

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout pms-link" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

With this maintenance object the port field is left blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out (always
PMS-LINK).

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout pms-link."

busyout pms-link

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name
PMS-LINK

Alt. Name

Command Successfully Completed

Result
PASS

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout port

Page 8-28

8

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link will sometimes interfere with
the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a
busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may
delay the recover of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a
component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the
technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The
busyout command is used to do this, and will not cause the link to be torn down.
If the link is already down, the busyout command will stop periodic re-setup trys
on the link.

busyout port
This command will busyout a specified port on a circuit pack.

Synopsis
busyout port location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout port 01c1101
busyout port 02c1501

Description
The busyout port command will put the specified port on a circuit pack in a
maintenance busy state. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed
on the busied out port until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy
then the object is removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call
processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms are
generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS
can access the state of the objects. The release port command will return the
administered port on a circuit pack at a specified location to operation.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout port

Page 8-29

8

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be
busied out and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents
the cabinet number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, "SS"
represents the slot position, and "pp" represents the circuit
(port).
A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be
marked and is entered as "PCSSpp" where P is the port network
number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN); C is
the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is
the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is
located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.), and "pp" represents the
circuit (port). A single digit cabinet (1 - 3) may be entered with
or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout port," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 7 character port number

Error Messages
If the format of the port location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid

If the EPN on which the port resides is unavailable, the following message will be
displayed:
EPN is not available

If the board on which the port resides is not administered, the following error
message will be displayed:
Port not assigned

If the board on which the port resides is part of the SCI link, the following error
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link

If the port is translated within a Wideband Access Endpoint, the following error
message will be displayed:
Port within wideband access endpt; Use busyout access-endpoint  instead

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout port

Page 8-30

8

’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot
7, circuit 1 is an analog port. The command that was entered is "busyout port
1c0701."

busyout port 01C0701

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C0701
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Result
PASS

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout pri-endpoint

Page 8-31

8

busyout pri-endpoint
This command will busyout a specified PRI endpoint.

Synopsis
busyout pri-endpoint extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
busyout pri-endpoint 25012
busyout pri-endpoint 77868

Description
The busyout pri-endpoint command will put all PRI endpoint ports (B-channels)
associated with the specified PRI endpoint in a maintenance busy (system
technician busy) state. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on
the busied out PRI endpoint ports until they are released. When the PRI endpoint
port is maintenance busy (system technician busy) then the port is removed from
active service on the switch (i.e., no call processing activity may include the
busied object). Warning alarms are generated on each busied out port. The
release pri-endpoint command will return all ports (B-channels) associated with
the specified PRI endpoint extension to operation. When released, the switch will
attempt to negotiate with the far-end PRI terminal adapter to put each PRI
endpoint port (B-channel) into in-service state.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired PRI endpoint. The
number of digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "busyout pri-endpoint," the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout pri-endpoint

Page 8-32

8

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the EPN on which the PRI endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not a PRI endpoint, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than pri-endpoint

If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout sp-link

Page 8-33

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. The
name for PRI endpoint port is "PE-BCHL."

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the extension number of the PRI endpoint.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object is successfully busied out.
The possible values are: PASS, FAIL or ABORT.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, the command "busyout pri-endpoint 22501"
was entered. Assume that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in
cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 6.

busyout pri-endpoint 22501

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01B2001
PE-BCHL
01B2002
PE-BCHL
01B2003
PE-BCHL
01B2004
PE-BCHL
01B2005
PE-BCHL
01B2006
PE-BCHL

Alt. Name
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
If there is an active call on the specified PRI endpoint, the busyout command will
cause the call to drop. This command is destructive.
Once the PRI endpoint is in the maintenance busy (system technician busy)
state, all call attempts from the far-end PRI terminal adapter will be denied with a
cause value 17 (User Busy).

busyout sp-link
This command will busyout the system printer link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout sp-link

Page 8-34

8

Synopsis
busyout sp-link

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout sp-link

Description
The busyout sp-link command will put the system printer link into a maintenance
busy state. There will be no periodic or scheduled maintenance performed on
the busied out system printer link until it is released. Warning alarms are
generated (error type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS
can access the state of the object. Placing the system printer link in a busyout
state will prevent access to the system printer. The release sp-link command will
return the system printer link to operation.
The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer over which
jobs can be printed. This link is created by administering the system printer
extension and setting up a call to the system printer.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout sp-link," the
following is displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the system printer link is not administered, the following message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout spe-standby

Page 8-35

8

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out will
always be SYS-PRNT.

Alt. Name

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Result

The result of the busyout - "PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example the command entered was "busyout sp-link."

busyout sp-link

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name
SYS-PRNT

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout spe-standby
This command allows the technician to busyout the standby Switch Processing
Element (SPE)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout spe-standby

Page 8-36

8

Synopsis
busyout spe-standby

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout spe-standby

Description
The busyout spe-standby command raises the Fault Severity Level of the
Standby SPE (see reference 5) of the standby Switch Processing Element (SPE)
by raising a Warning Off-board alarm against STBY-SPE. Because a Warning
Off-board STBY-SPE alarm is defined to have the highest Fault Severity of all
alarms the affect the health of an SPE (refer to the Reset System MUS), the
chance that an SPE interchange will occur is diminished, but does not guarantee
that an SPE interchange will not occur. Once the standby SPE is busied out, an
SPE interchange will only occur if the standby SPE is hard selected via the SPE
Select switches or the active SPE goes into SPE down mode. This command will
also stop any activity currently executing on the standby SPE and will disable
memory shadowing to the standby SPE. Periodic and scheduled testing will be
prevented from starting on the standby SPE while it is busied out. The busyout
state of the standby SPE and the STBY-SPE Warning alarm will be maintained
across a reset system 1 (Warm restart) and a reset system 2 (Cold 2 restart) but
will be removed after all other levels of restart.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout spe-standby" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout spe-standby

Page 8-37

8

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If this command is issued while an upgrade software command is active the
following message will be displayed:
Standby SPE upgrade in progress, command denied

Output
Port

The port address displays the cabinet and carrier location of the
standby SPE. The standby SPE port address is always 01A or
01B.

Maintenance Name

"STBY-SPE" for the standby SPE maintenance object.

Alt. Name

Always blank for this command.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the standby SPE is located in
carrier "B." The command that was entered is "busyout spe-standby."

busyout spe-standby

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
01B

Maintenance Name
STBY-SPE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
When a busyout of the standby SPE is performed, the fault severity level of the
standby SPE is set to the highest possible value and memory shadowing is
turned off. This is done to lessen the probability that the system will switch to the
standby SPE. However, in some cases a "spontaneous" (hard) interchange of the
SPEs may still occur.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout station

Page 8-38

8

This command can be used as a mechanism to turn off memory shadowing of
the standby SPE.
If the standby SPE is in poor health (less than optimum), memory shadowing can
not be disabled, or communication to the standby is impossible a busyout of the
standby SPE will still be successful.

busyout station
This command will busyout a specified station.

Synopsis
busyout station extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout station 10020
busyout station 32770

Description
The busyout station command will put the specified administered voice terminal
extension (station) in a maintenance busy state, even those stations that are not
installed. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied
out station until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy then the
object is removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call processing
activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms are generated (error
type 18) on each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can access the
state of the objects. The release station command will return the specified voice
terminal extension to operation.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout station

Page 8-39

8

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired voice terminal. The
number of digits in an extension is determined by a dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout station," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter extension for an assigned station

Error Messages
If the format of the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the specified extension is not administered, then the following message will be
displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the specified extension does not belong to a station or attendant console, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

If the station port resides on an EPN that is unavailable, the following message
will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the station port resides on a board that is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not assigned

If the station port resides on a board that is part of the SCI link, the following
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout tdm

Page 8-40

8

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension.

Result

The results of trying to busyout the station - "PASS," "FAIL,"
"ABORT."

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command aborted or failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout station 1002."

busyout station 1002

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C1102
DIG-LINE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout tdm
This command will busyout a TDM bus on the PPN or any EPN. The TDM bus with
system tones can not be busied out.

Synopsis
busyout tdm pn number bus

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout tdm

Page 8-41

8

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout tdm 1a

Description
The busyout tdm command will put the specified tdm bus in a maintenance busy
state. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out
bus until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy then the object is
removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call processing activity may
include the busied object). Warning alarms are generated (error type 18) on
each tdm bus busied out, so that INADS can access the state of the objects. The
release tdm command will return the specified tdm bus to operation.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
pn number

The PN number specifies the Port Network number of the TDM bus to
be busied out.

bus

The TDM bus ("a" or "b") specifies which half of the TDM bus is desired.
Each 512 time slot TDM bus is configured as two duplicate 256 time
slot buses. This division allows for duplication of control channels and
dedicated tone time slots. The default control bus (carrying the control
channel) is the "a" bus, while the default tone bus (carrying dedicated
tones) is the "b" bus. A port-network number (1 - 3) may be entered with
or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout tdm," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter TDM bus location: [network(1-3)];carrier(A-B)

Error Messages
If the technician does not enter a port network number followed by bus, the
following message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout tdm

Page 8-42

8

If the port network on which the desired TDM bus resides is unavailable, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address is displayed as PN followed by the port network
number and bus (A or B) associated with the TDM bus.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out. In this
case it is always TDM-BUS.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout tdm port-network 1 bus a."

busyout tdm port-network 1 bus a

SPE A

COMMAND RESULTS
Port
PN 01A

Maintenance Name
TDM-BUS

Alt. Name

Command successfully completed

Result
PASS

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout tone-clock

Page 8-43

8

Feature Interactions
If a bus is busied out, no calls will be torn down. However, no new calls will be set
up on the busied out bus.
Dedicated tone time slots must be moved to another bus (the other half of the
duplicated bus) before a busyout of a particular bus will be allowed.

busyout tone-clock
This command will busyout a tone/clock circuit pack.

Synopsis
busyout tone-clock location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout tone-clock 01c
busyout tone-clock 03d

Description
The busyout tone-clock command will put the specified tone/clock in a
maintenance busy state. There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed
on the busied out object until it is released. When the object is maintenance busy
then the object is removed from active service on the switch (i.e., no call
processing activity may include the busied object). Warning alarms are
generated (error type 18) on each tone clock circuit pack busied out, so that
INADS can access the state of the objects. The release tone-clock command will
return the specified tone/clock to operation.

Defaults
The cabinet number will default to 1 (one).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout tone-clock

Page 8-44

8

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the tone/clock to be
busied out and is entered as "UUc" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, and "c" represents the carrier. A cabinet number (1 - 3) may
be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout tone-clock," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter tone/clock location: [cabinet(1-3];(carrier(A-E))

Error Messages
If an identifier greater than 3 (three) characters is entered, or the cabinet entered
is not a digit (number), the following message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If the cabinet entered is not within the valid range of cabinets or the cabinet is not
administered, the following message will be displayed:
Cabinet number not assigned

If there is no tone/clock board at the specified location, one of the following
messages will be displayed:
Board not inserted
Board not assigned

If the specified cabinet carrier location is that of a switch node, the following
message will be displayed:
Switch Node carrier specified; invalid command for SN carrier

If the cabinet carrier location entered is that of an EPN that is not available, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the tone/clock is active and the specified action is busyout, the following
message will be displayed:
Illegal Command for active object; use ’set’ to switch to standby

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout trunk

Page 8-45

8

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The tone clock maintenance object will only display the cabinet
and carrier of the desired tone/clock board.

Maintenance Name

The type of tone clock circuit pack that is being busied out which
is TONE-PT, TDM-CLK and TONE-BD.

Alt. name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the busyout -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout tone-clock 1a."

busyout tone-clock 1a

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
TONE-PT
TDM-CLK
TONE-BD

Alt. Name

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

busyout trunk
This command will busyout a specified trunk group or trunk group member.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout trunk

Page 8-46

8

Synopsis
busyout trunk group/member

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
busyout trunk 78
busyout trunk 78/1

Description
The busyout trunk command will put the specified trunk group or trunk group
member in a maintenance busy state, even trunk groups that are not installed.
There will be no periodic or scheduled tests performed on the busied out trunk
groups or trunk group members until they are released. When the object is
maintenance busy then the object is removed from active service on the switch
(i.e., no call processing activity may include the busied object). A single group
member can be busied out by specifying the group number, a "/," and the
member number. All members in a trunk group can be busied out by specifying
the trunk group number only. Warning alarms are generated (error type 18) on
each maintenance object busied out, so that INADS can access the state of the
objects. The release trunk command will return the specified trunk group or
group member to operation.
NOTE:
While not recommended, if the user enters "busyout trunk /," the lowest port-location in the group will be busied out.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
busyout trunk

Page 8-47

8

Parameters
group

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99.

member

The member number is an administered number identifying a particular
trunk within a trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "busyout trunk," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter assigned trunk group number [or group/member]

Error Messages
If the format of the identifier is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Format invalid

If the range of the trunk group is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members, the following
message will be displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member

If the specified member is not administered, the following message will be
displayed:
Group member not assigned

If the specified trunk group is part of the SCI link, the following message will be
displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
cancel hardware-group

Page 8-48

8

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

The result of the busyout - "PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the busyout failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Error Codes" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"busyout trunk 78/1."

busyout trunk 78/1

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
Maintenance Name
01C1505
CO-TRK

Alt. Name
78/01

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

cancel hardware-group
This command allows a user to cancel an active "test hardware-group" command
executing in the background or foreground mode.

Synopsis
cancel hardware-group

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
cancel hardware-group

Page 8-49

8

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
cancel hardware-group

Description
A system technician, in the course of the execution of a "test hardware-group"
command may find the need to stop the testing either temporarily or
permanently. This can be accomplished by entering the "cancel
hardware-group" command on the SAT. This command may be restarted where it
left off with the "resume hardware-group" command or another "test
hardware-group" may be entered.
In addition to the "cancel hardware-group" command, the ’cancel’ key on the SAT
cancels a hardware-group command executing in the foreground.
The status of a canceled "test hardware-group" command will show up as
’canceled’ on the "status hardware-group" screen.
When a "test hardware-group" command is executing in the foreground with the
’continuously’ option and the ’cancel’ key on the SAT is pressed or the "cancel
hardware-group" command is entered, then the hardware-group command is
canceled and for security reasons, the SAT running the "test hardware-group"
command will be logged off. However, after logging back on the system, the user
still maintains the capability to restart the canceled "test hardware-group"
command with the "resume hardware-group" command.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "cancel hardware-group" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change circuit-packs

Page 8-50

8

Error Messages
If there is no "test hardware-group" command currently active to be canceled, the
following message will be displayed:
Command aborted - no hardware-group test in progress

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
If a "test hardware-group" command executing in the background is successfully
canceled with the "cancel hardware-group" command, the following response
will be displayed:
Hardware-group command successfully canceled

If a "test hardware-group" command executing in the foreground is successfully
canceled with a "cancel hardware-group" command from another SAT terminal,
the following response will be displayed on the SAT terminal where the
hardware-group command was executing:
Hardware-group command aborted with cancel command entered from another SAT

Feature Interactions
Scheduled and Periodic Maintenance
When a "test hardware-group" is entered, all activity related to scheduled
background maintenance, periodic background maintenance, and data audits is
suspended for the duration of the execution of the "test hardware-group"
command. All activity related to scheduled background maintenance, periodic
background maintenance, and data audits will restart if the "test hardware-group"
command is canceled.

Status Hardware-group
The state of a canceled "test hardware-group" command can be displayed by
means of the "status hardware-group" command and the state will show up as
’canceled’.

change circuit-packs
This command allows the user to add, change, or remove circuit packs which are
administered.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change circuit-packs

Page 8-51

8

Synopsis
change circuit-packs cabinet number

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
change circuit-packs 1
change circuit-packs 2

Description
This command allows the user to administer the circuit packs that are to be
inserted into the system port, expansion control, and switch node carriers. It is
used to configure the system when the circuit packs have not yet been physically
inserted.

Defaults
If no cabinet number is entered, this value defaults to "1."

Parameters
cabinet number

The number of the cabinet containing the circuit packs that the user
wishes to modify.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "change circuit-packs" the
following message is displayed:
Enter number between [1-3]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change circuit-packs

Page 8-52

8

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If an invalid cabinet number is entered on the command line the following
message will be displayed:
"n" Identifier not assigned

Output
Cabinet

The administered number of the cabinet.

Cabinet Layout

Type of cabinet (single-carrier).

Carrier

Each page of this form reports the information for a specific carrier,
this field tells the user which carrier of the cabinet that this page refers
to.

Carrier Type

For each carrier - A, B, C, or D, what its function is (port, processor, or
expansion control).

Slot

Lists the slot numbers from 0 - 21 depending on the type of carrier.

Code

The circuit pack code (TN number). This number identifies the circuit
pack type to the system. The proper format are the letters "TN"
followed by a three digit number.

Sfx

For suffix, lists the suffix if the particular circuit pack has one.

Name

This field contains the alphanumeric name for the circuit pack. It is
provided to aid the user in entering the circuit pack codes.
For the following output example, the command entered is "change circuit-packs
1" which is a n single-carrier cabinet. All five pages are shown here.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change circuit-packs

Page 8-53

8

change circuit-packs 1

Page

CIRCUIT PACKS
Cabinet: 1
Cabinet Layout: single-carrier
Slot Code Sfx Name
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:

TN570
TN767

B

TN556
TN754
TN769

EXPANSION INTF
DS1 INTERFACE

1 of

5

Carrier: A
Carrier Type: processor
Slot Code Sfx Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

BRI LINE
DIGITAL LINE
ANALOG LINE

’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.

change circuit-packs 1

Page

2 of

5

CIRCUIT PACKS
Cabinet: 1
Cabinet Layout:
Slot Code Sfx
00:
01: TN754
02: TN754
03: TN754
04: TN754
05: TN754
06: TN754
07: TN754
08: TN754
09: TN754
10: TN754

single-carrier
Name
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL

LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE

’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.

Carrier: B
Carrier Type: port
Slot Code Sfx Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change circuit-packs

Page 8-54

8

change circuit-packs 1

Page

3 of

5

CIRCUIT PACKS
Cabinet: 1
Cabinet Layout:
Slot Code Sfx
00:
01: TN748 C
02:
03:
04: TN771 C
05: TN748 B
06: TN767
07: TN742
08: TN762 B
09: TN742
10:

single-carrier
Name
TONE DETECTOR

MAINTENANCE/TEST
TONE DETECTOR
DS1 INTERFACE
ANALOG LINE
HYBRID LINE
ANALOG LINE

Carrier: C
Carrier Type: port
Slot Code Sfx Name
11: TN754
DIGITAL LINE
12: TN753
DID TRUNK
13: TN742
ANALOG LINE
14: TN760 C
TIE TRUNK
15: TN747 B
CO TRUNK
16: TN742
ANALOG LINE
17: TN556
BRI LINE
18: TN742
ANALOG LINE
19:
20: TN754
DIGITAL LINE

’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.

change circuit-packs 1
Page
4 of
5
CIRCUIT PACKS
Cabinet: 1
Carrier: D
Cabinet Layout: single-carrier
Carrier Type: port
Slot Code Sfx Name
Slot Code Sfx Name
00:
11:
01:
12: TN722 B
DS1 TIE TRUNK
02:
13: TN760 C
TIE TRUNK
03: TN750 B
ANNOUNCEMENT
14:
04:
15: TN754
DIGITAL LINE
05:
16:
06:
17: TN742
ANALOG LINE
07: TN747 B
CO TRUNK
18:
08: TN753
DID TRUNK
19:
09: TN742
ANALOG LINE
20:
10:
’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change synchronization

Page 8-55

8

change circuit-packs 1

Page

5 of

5

CIRCUIT PACKS
Cabinet: 1
Cabinet Layout: single-carrier
Slot Code Sfx Name
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:

TN570
TN747
TN747
TN747
TN747
TN747

B
B
B
B
B

EXPANSION INTF
CO TRUNK
CO TRUNK
CO TRUNK
CO TRUNK
CO TRUNK

Carrier: E
Carrier Type: port
Slot Code Sfx Name
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

’#’ indicates circuit pack conflict.

Feature Interactions
None.

change synchronization
This command changes/updates the translation data associated with the existing
synchronization hierarchy.

Synopsis
change synchronization

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: system technician, cust, inads,
init, rcust, bcms.

Examples
change synchronization
change synch

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change synchronization

Page 8-56

8

Description
A hierarchy of sources exists within each system that are used for timing
synchronization. For stratum 3 synchronization, this hierarchy is reflected by the
DS1 inputs to the external stratum 3 clock. For stratum 4 synchronization, this
hierarchy is reflected in the primary and secondary fields. If all fields are blank,
then the tone clock board within each PN provides timing for that PN.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "change synchronization" the following
message is displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change synchronization

Page 8-57

8

Output/INPUT

Stratum:

This field specifies the synchronization stratum that will be used. The
only entries that are acceptable are "3" and "4." If "4" is entered in this
field, the message

Primary:

This field designates the first choice system synchronization source. A
blank entry means no synchronization. This field is valid only if stratum
4 synchronization is specified.
— FIELD HELP:
Enter 5 character board number;
cabinet(1-3):carrier(A-E):slot(0-21)

— FIELD ERROR(S):
— "entry" Board location invalid
— "entry" Circuit Pack must be a DS1 or a UDS1 board
— "entry" Circuit pack must be installed first
— Cannot administer synchronization sources on a port network
remoted via DS1C
Secondary:

This field designates the second choice system synchronization
source. A blank entry means no synchronization. This field is valid only
if stratum 4 synchronization is specified.
— FIELD HELP:
Enter 5 character board number; cabinet(1-3):carrier(A-E):
slot(0-21)

— FIELD ERROR(S):
— "entry" Board location invalid
— "entry" Circuit Pack must be a DS1 or a UDS1 board
— "entry" Circuit pack must be installed first
— Secondary source requires primary synchronization source
— Duplicate entry
— Synchronization sources must be in same port network
Location:

The circuit pack location (port network, carrier and board slot) of all
administered DS1 circuit packs are listed here.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change synchronization

Page 8-58

8

Name:

If a user defined name is administered for the DS1 circuit pack, it will
be displayed here. Blank means no user defined name was given to
this DS1 circuit pack.

Slip:

If the DS1 circuit pack has slip alarm, this field will show ’y’. Otherwise
it will show ’n’.

Port Network:

This field is only valid for stratum 3 synchronization. The field is a
display only field and specifies the port network that supplies
synchronization via the tone clock circuit pack.

For the following example, the command that was entered is "change
synchronization" and "4" was entered in the stratum field.

change synchronization

Page

1 of

1

SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN
SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (DS1 circuit pack location)
Stratum: 4
Primary: _____
Secondary: _____
Location Name
Slip
Location Name
Slip
NOTE: TN722B DS1 source will result in stratum 4, type II synchronization

For the following example, the command that was entered is "change
synchronization" and "3" was entered in the stratum field.

change synchronization

Page

1 of

1

SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN
SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (DS1 circuit pack location)
Stratum: 3
Port Network: 1

Feature Interactions
A DS1 interface or a UDS1 board that has been selected as either a primary or
secondary synchronization source cannot be removed on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form or the regular circuit pack administration form.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-59

8

change system-parameters
maintenance
change system-parameters maintenance
The maintenance-related system parameters form specifies and displays
scheduled maintenance operations and maintenance support functions.
This form activates and deactivates INADS alarm origination when performing
repairs. To deactivate alarm origination:
1. Make a note of the current entries in the Alarm Origination and CPE Alarm
fields so you can restore them when you are done.
2. Change the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field to “neither.”
3. Change the CPE Alarm Activation Level field to “none.”
4. If daily scheduled maintenance must be prevented from starting during a
maintenance procedure, set the Start Time field to a time after the
session will end. If daily Scheduled Maintenance is already running and
needs to be shut off, set the Stop Time field to one minute after the
current time.
5. Press Enter and verify that the screen displays the message:
Command successfully completed
NOTE:
For earlier releases of system software, disable Cleared Alarm
Notification and Restart Notification before submitting the form.
NOTE:
When finished working on the switch be sure to return all fields to
their original settings.

Examples
change system-parameters maintenance

Output
An input form displays with the following fields. Defaults for data entry fields are
listed in parentheses.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-60

8

Operations Support Parameters
Product
Identification

This is a 10-digit number starting with 1 that identifies the switch to an
Operations Support System (OSS), for example, INADS.

First OSS
Telephone
Number

The first telephone number that the switch uses to report alarms to, for
example, INADS or Trouble Tracker. The number must be obtained
from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. # and *
are not allowed in the telephone number.

Abbrev Alarm
Report

Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS. (yes)

Second OSS
Telephone
Number

The second telephone number that the switch uses to report alarms to,
for example, INADS or DEFINITY SNMP. The number must be obtained
from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or the TSC. # and *
are not allowed in the telephone number.

Abbrev Alarm
Report

Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the second OSS. (no)

Alarm
Origination to
OSS Numbers

Indicates one of four options for alarm origination (neither):
■

If this field is set to “both,” all Major and Minor alarms result in an
automatic call to both OSS telephone numbers. Both OSS
telephone numbers must be administered.

■

If this field is set to “first-only,” all Major and Minor alarms result in
an automatic call to the first OSS number only. The switch does not
call the second OSS telephone number even if the number is
administered. The first OSS telephone number must be
administered

■

If this field is set to “neither,” alarm origination does not take place.
Warning alarms are not reported to either numbers.

■

If this field is set to “second-as-backup,” all Major and Minor alarms
result in an automatic call to the first OSS telephone number. If
calling the first OSS telephone number fails four attempts, the
switch starts to call the second OSS telephone number as a
backup until calling the first OSS telephone number becomes
successful. Both OSS telephone numbers must be administered.

Before Release 5, the name of this field is “Alarm Origination
Activated.” If Alarm Origination is deactivated, both Cleared Alarm
Notification and Restart Notification are disabled, even though they
may still be activated in the administration.
Cleared
Alarm
Notification

Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and send an alarm
resolution message whenever all previously reported Major and Minor
alarms are resolved. Alarm Origination must be activated in order for
Cleared Alarm Notification to work. (no)

Restart
Notification

Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and report any system
restarts caused by problems with the switch. Activate Alarm Origination
for Restart Notification to operate.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-61

8

Suspension
Threshold

The threshold for suspending Cleared Alarm Notification. Some
problems may cause alarms to be generated and then resolved
repeatedly. To detect these problems (by not sending additional
Cleared Alarm notifications to indicate a problem- free system), the
switch suspends Cleared Alarm Notification when it has reported this
administrable number of Cleared Alarm notifications in a 24 hour
period. A suspended Cleared Alarm Notification is only enabled again
with a successfully completed “logoff” command, a system reset, or
when the threshold is changed. This field is irrelevant if Cleared Alarm
Notification or Alarm Origination is disabled. The possible range of
threshold values is between one and fifteen.

Test Remote
Access Port

Specifies whether testing of the remote access port on the SYSAM
circuit pack is enabled. This field should be set to "yes" whenever there
is an INADS line connected to the switch and there is a maintenance
contract in effect so that alarm origination capability is maintained.
If no equipment is connected to the remote access port, or if a trunk for
remote access and alarm origination is not provided, running tests on
the remote access port on the SYSAM results in test failures. This
causes unnecessary maintenance alarms and allows potentially
destructive tests to be run. Setting this field to "no" prevents this.

CPE Alarm
Activation
Level

Indicates the minimum level (Major, Minor or Warning) at which the
Customer-Provided Equipment (CPE) alarm is activated. If the level is
‘‘none,’’ the CPE does is not activated for any alarm. (none)
NOTE:
The CPE alarm is always activated when the switch goes into
Emergency Transfer, regardless of the CPE Alarm Activation
Level setting.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-62

8

Packet Bus
Activated

Enables the system Packet Bus.
If this field is set to ‘‘yes'', then maintenance software assumes that
there is a Packet Control circuit pack installed in the system. The
packet endpoints (for example, ASAI, and/or BRI) may be
administered, and maintenance testing runs on both the Packet
Control circuit pack and on the Packet Bus (This field should be set to
“yes” after a packet control circuit pack is installed.). If a Packet
Control circuit pack is not installed in the system, then a major alarm
is raised against the PKT-CTRL MO.
This field can only be changed from ‘‘yes'' to ‘‘no'' if there are no
packet endpoints administered, thus ensuring that there can be no
packet endpoints administered if the packet bus is not activated.
This field should be set to “yes” after a Packet Control circuit pack is
installed.
If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, then this field should
be set to ‘‘no'' (the only exception is when setting up translations for a
system for which not all of the required hardware is available). (no)

Customer
Access to
INADS Port

Provides the capability to prohibit access to system administration and
maintenance interface, via the INADS port when using customer login
ID’s. This field can only be activated by Lucent Technologies services
through system-parameters maintenance administration.(no)

Repeat Dial
Interval
(MMS)

Indicates the number of minutes that the system must wait before
attempting another call origination to an OSS. This timer is triggered by
the lack of a far-end acknowledgment.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-63

8

Scheduled Maintenance
A series of maintenance tests and operations runs automatically every day
according to the schedule and settings specified in the following fields
Table 8-1.

Scheduled Maintenance Settings

Start Time

The hour and minute in 24-hour notation at which daily scheduled
maintenance will begin running. (22:00)

Stop Time

The hour and minute when scheduled daily maintenance will stop
running. If any daily maintenance operations are not completed by this
time, the system will note where in the sequence it stopped and
perform those operations during the next scheduled daily
maintenance.

Daily
Maintenance

This display-only field simply represents the series of tests that are
always run by maintenance software as part of daily maintenance.

Save
Translation

This field indicates on which days translation data in memory will
automatically be saved to the Mass Storage System disk and/or tape
devices during scheduled maintenance. The save operation is first
made to disk, followed by a disk backup to tape. On systems with
duplicated SPEs, translation data is saved on both SPEs. Valid entries
are daily, days of the week, or no. "No" specifies that no automatic
saves are to be executed.

Control
Channel
Interchange

Each port network has a pair of TDM busses called A and B, each of
which has a set of time slots dedicated to use by the control channel.
At any one time, the control channel in each PN is carried on only one
of the two busses. This field indicates on which days the control
channel in each port network will be switched from one of the paired
TDM busses to the other. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or
no. "No" specifies that no interchange be executed. (no)

System
Clocks
Interchange

On High and Critical Reliability systems, this option causes a
Tone-Clock interchange in each port network with duplicated
Tone-Clock circuit packs. Each port network interchanges into the
standby Tone-Clock for 20 seconds and then back to the Tone-Clock
that was originally active. This field indicates on which days the
interchanges are to take place. Valid entries are daily, days of the
week, or no. "No" specifies that interchanges be executed. (no)
The system performs a Tone-Clock interchange, making the stand by
Tone-Clock active. The newly active Tone-Clock circuit pack is tested
and, while active, provides system clocks for the port network in which
it resides. The system then interchanges back to the originally active
Tone-Clock circuit pack.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-64

8

Table 8-1.

Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued

SPE
Interchange

On systems with duplicated SPEs, this field indicates on which days an
SPE interchange will be executed during scheduled maintenance.
Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. "No" specifies no
scheduled interchanges. (no)

EXP-LINK
Interchange

This field indicates whether or not the expansion links between
port-networks are interchanged as part of scheduled maintenance.
The value ‘‘daily'' means that EXP-LINK interchange occurs
automatically everyday. The value ‘‘no'' means that EXP-LINK
interchange is not done automatically as part of scheduled
maintenance. Values represented by the days of the week mean that
EXP-LINK interchange occurs automatically on the specified day
only. Since EXP-LINK interchange only applies to duplicated
systems, simplex systems do not display this field. (no)

Minimum
Threshold for
TTRs

When the number of touch tone receivers (TTRs) in service falls below
this number (4 to 200), a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV.
These are also known as dual-tone multifrequency receivers (DTMRs).
There are 4 TTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up to
50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a TTR being
taken out of service, set this field to 4 times the number of TN748s. If
this number is set to more than three less than the total number of
TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its TTRs
before this alarm is raised.

Minimum
Threshold for
CPTRs

When the number of call progress tone receivers in service falls below
this number (2 to 100), a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV.
These are also known as general purpose tone detectors (GPTDs).
There are 2 CPTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack, and up
to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first occurrence of a CPTR
being taken out of service, set this field to 2 times the number of
TN748s. If this number is set to more than one less than the total
number of TTRs, a port network with only one TN748 could lose all of its
CPTRs before this alarm is raised.

Minimum
Threshold for
Call
Classifier
Ports

When the number of call classifier ports (CLSFY-PTs) in service falls
below this number, a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. Valid
entries are 1 to 200. There are 8 ports on each TN744 Call Classifier
circuit pack, and up to 25 TN744s in a system. To alarm the first
occurrence of a CLSFY-PT being taken out of service, set this field to 8
times the number of TN744s. If this number is set to more than 7 less
than the total number of CSLFY-PTs in the system, a port network with
only one TN744 could lose all of its CLSFY-PTS before the alarm is
raised. If there are no TN744s in the system, leave this field blank.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-65

8

Table 8-1.
Test Type
100, Test
Type 102,
Test Type
105

Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued
An extension assigned to receive tie-trunk calls from other switches
with test line origination capability. The system responds by sending a
sequence of test tones. Test Type 100 tests far end to near end loss
and C-message by sending:
■

5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB

■

Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute

Test Type 102 tests far end to near end loss by sending:
■

9 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB

■

1 second of quiet

■

This cycle is repeated until disconnect; disconnect is forced after
24 hours.

Test Type 105 tests 2-way loss, gain slope, and C-message and
C-notch noise by sending:

ISDN-PRI
Test Call
Extension

■

nine seconds of 1004 Hz at -16dB

■

one second of quiet

■

nine seconds of 404 Hz at -16dB

■

one second of quiet

■

nine seconds of 2804 Hz at -16dB

■

30 seconds of quiet

■

one half second of Test Progress Tone (2225 Hz)

■

approximately five seconds of quiet

■

forced disconnect

The extension used by a far-end ISDN node to place a call to the
system to test the ISDN-PRI trunks between the far-end and the
system.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-66

8

Scheduled Maintenance Settings — Continued

Table 8-1.

ISDN-BRI
Service SPID

This field shows whether or not the link is associated with the Service
SPID. If the link is associated with the Service SPID, the field contains a
number from “0 to 99999’’ this number is the test spid (under BRI-SET
MO) otherwise, this field is blank. Service SPID is a feature used by the
system technician to check building wiring between the switch and the
BRI endpoint.

DSO
Loop-Around
Test Call
Extension

The extension used by the network service provider to set up a DSO
loop around connection for testing non-ISDN DS1 trunks
The DSO Loop-Around Test Call feature is used primarily for testing
DSO channels associated with non ISDN-PRI trunks. The loop-around
is activated by dialing the test extension number. Multiple DSO
Loop-Around connections can be set up by placing multiple calls to
the loop-around extension.
For more information see "Facility Test Calls" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’.

Loss Plan

Use only when extra loss is required to maintain quality of transmission
on conference calls. Leave this field blank if no extra loss is required. If
extra loss is required, enter digits as shown below.

Continued on next page

No. Of Parties To
Be Conferenced

Enter Digit

3

2

4

3

5

4

6

5

7

6

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-67

8

SPE Optional
Boards:

These fields indicate whether a Disk circuit pack is present in the
system, and which Packet Interface slots are administered. If a Packet
Interface circuit pack is physically present, the corresponding Packet
Interface field is set to y when the system boots, and no change to that
field is allowed. If the system is equipped with duplicated SPEs, a
Packet Interface field is set to y when either SPE carrier contains a
Packet Interface circuit pack in the corresponding position. If a Packet
Interface circuit pack is not present, then the value for the Packet
Interface field is read from translation data stored on disk or tape. If the
field is set to n, a Packet Interface circuit pack may be administered by
changing the corresponding Packet Interface field to y.

Modem Connection
On page 3 of the example forms shown below, there are 11 fields that are hidden
when the “Modem Connection?” field is set to internal. In this example the
“Modem Connection” field is set to “external” and these additional 11 fields are
visible.
The first 2 fields on page 3 help setup the data format for the serial data from the
switch to the modem. The field names are, “Data Bits:”, and “Parity?”. There are
only two valid combinations for these 2 fields:
■

Data Bits = 8, Parity = None

■

Data Bits = 7, Parity =(odd, even, mark, or space)

The remaining fields are listed below:

Modem Connection

The only valid entries for this field are “internal” or “external”.
The default is set to internal. (internal)

Modem Name

This field is 20 characters long and will permit alpha-numeric
characters to provide a unique qualifier for a given modem. The
field is called “Modem Name: ”. ( )

RTS/CTS Enabled

This field will inform the modem that communication with the
data source UART will be driven with RTS/CTS flow control. This
field is 6 characters long with a default of “\Q3”. This field is
case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper case.
(\Q3)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-68

8

Asynchronous Data
Mode

This field will configure the modem as an asynchronous communications device. This field is 8 characters long with a default of
“&M0&Q0”.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in
upper case. (&M0&Q0)

DTE Auto-Data Speed

This option will adjust the speed of the data source (DTE) UART
to the outgoing (modem-to-modem) data rate. So, at maximum
this speed would be 9600 baud.
This field is 6 characters long with a blank as default.
This field is case in-sensitive. ( )

Disable Data
Compression

This field will turn off the default data compression algorithms
that are in use by most consumer modems. This field is 6 characters long with blank as the default. The AT commands that
control this capability are supported by similar commands; however, these commands do not operate in the same manner.
The Intel modems require the use of “H%C0” to disable V.42bis
& MNP Class 5 data compression algorithms; however, the
Paradyne products only use “%C0” to disable both algorithms.
This field is case in-sensitive; with blank as the default. ( )

Enable Error Control

This field will turn on the V.42 LAPM and MNP error control protocols, if available on the modem. This field is 6 characters long
with “blank” as the default.
This V.42/MNP/Buffer mode first attempts to negotiate V.42 error
control with the remote modem. If this fails, then the modem
transitions to MNP, and if this fails then no error control is used.
This field is case in-sensitive. ( )

Misc. Init. Param

This field is 20 characters long with blank as the default. This
field supports any initialization parameters that are not already
specified. The AT commands specified in this free-form field will
be always the last initialization parameters to be sent to the
external modem.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in
upper case. ( )

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-69

8

Auto-Answer Ring
Count

This field controls the number of rings required before the
modem will automatically answer an incoming call. This field is 6
characters long with “S0=10” as the default. Typically, the maximum permissible value for this register is 255. The values 1-255
denote the number of incoming ring cycles.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in
upper case. (S0=10)

Dial Type

This field controls the type of inter-register signaling to be used
between the modem and the Central Office. The field name is
“Dial Type: ” with a default of ”T “ for tone dialing. Pulse dialing
is indicated by “P”. The field length should be 3 characters long.
This field will be concatenated with the dial string. This field will
be case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper case.
(T)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-70

8

Adjustable
Make/Break Ratio

This field can be of particular importance when using a modem
that may be transferable from country to country. The intent of
this field is to control the make/break ratios of pulses and DTMF
dialing. The Intel product information has support for the different make/break options for pulse dialing only.
Intel uses the option “&P0” to select a ratio of 39% make and
61% break for communication within the U.S. and Canada. The
option “&P1” sets a ration of 33% make and 67% break for the
U.K. and Hong Kong.
This field is 5 characters long with blank as the default.
This field will be case in-sensitive. ( )

Dial Command

This field is 3 characters long with “D” as the default.. This field
simply denotes the dialing command of the modem. This is a
fairly standard command.
This field will be case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in
upper case. (D)

No Answer Time-Out

Most off-the-shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data call after a predetermined interval.
Some modems provide for this timer to be disabled, thus allowing an outbound call to ring indefinitely. AT&T Paradyne does
not provide this capability with their modem line, because it is
generally undesirable to have an outbound call attempt ring
indefinitely.
The internal modem must have this parameter disabled or set to
at least 255 seconds.
This is a non-administrable parameter. For the external modem
connection, this parameter will be the first initialization string to
be transmitted to the external modem. This field will be visible
on the administration form in display mode only.
This hardcoded constant can be overriden for type approval
applications, specifically in the U.K and other Western European nations, by the use of the “Misc. Init. Param:” field.
(S7=255)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
change system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-71

8

The following display shows a typical result when change system-parameters
maintenance is entered

change system-parameters maintenance
MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS
Product Identification:
First OSS Telephone Number:
Second OSS Telephone Number:
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers:
Cleared Alarm Notification?
Restart Notification?
Test Remote Access Port?
CPE Alarm Activation Level:
Packet Bus Activated?
Customer Access to INADS Port?
Repeat Dial Interval (mins):
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Start Time:
Daily Maintenance:
Control Channel Interchange:
SPE Interchange:

1000000000
5551212
5551213
both
y
y
n
none
n
n
7

22: 00
daily
no
no

Page

1 of 3

Abbrev Alarm Report? y
Abbrev Alarm Report? n
Suspension Threshold: 5_

Stop Time: 04: 00
Save Translation: daily
System Clocks Interchange: no
EXP-LINK Interchange: no

change system-parameters maintenance

Page 2 of 3

MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification )
Minimum Threshold for TTRs: 4
Minimum Threshold for CPTRs: 1
Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports: _
TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension)
Test Type 100:
Test Type 102:
Test Type 105:
ISDN MAINTENANCE
ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: _____

ISDN BRI Service SPID: _____

DS1 MAINTENANCE
DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension: _____
LOSS PLAN (Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required)
Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss: _____
SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS
Disk? y
Packet Intf1? y

Packet Intf2? n

Packet Intf3? n

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear audits

Page 8-72

8

change system-parameters maintenance

Page 3 of 3

MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Modem Connection: external
Data Bits: 8
Parity: none
Modem Name: intel
RTS/CTS Enabled:
Asynchronous Data Mode:
DTE Auto-Data Speed:
Disable Data Compression:
Enable Error Control:
Misc. Init. Param:

\Q3
Auto Answer Ring Count (rings):
&M0&Q0
Dial Type:
\J1
Adjustable Make/Break Ratio:
H0%C0
Dial Command:
\N3
No Answer Time-out:
____________________

S0=10
T
&P0
D
S7=255

Help/Error Message Line
Command Line

clear audits
This command is used to clear the cumulative and/or peak hour’s data that has
been collected about the status of each data relation audit.

Synopsis
clear audits [cumulative | peak-hour]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
clear audits cumulative
clear audits peak-hour

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear audits

Page 8-73

8

Description
This command is used to clear the cumulative and/or peak hour’s data that has
been collected for each data relation audit. The purpose of this command is to
clear old data so that when the "status audits" command is used only data
collected since the last "clear audits" command is displayed. With this command,
the user can clear the peak hour’s data that has been collected or both the peak
hour and cumulative data (refer to the "status audits" manual page for more
information).

Defaults
None

Parameters
cumulative

This option will cause the data collected since the last reboot or "clear
audits cumulative" command and the data collected about the peak
hour to be cleared.

peak-hour

This option will cause the data collected about the peak hour to be
cleared.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "clear audits" the following message
will be displayed:
peak-hour

cumulative

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear audits command is successful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the clear audits command is unsuccessful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear errors

Page 8-74

8

Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
The data cleared by the "clear audits" command is displayed using the "status
audits" command. After the "clear audits" command is executed successfully the
"display audits cumulative" and/or "display audits peak-hour" commands will only
display information collected since the "clear audits" command was executed.
The start date displayed on the status audits screen will reflect the time that the
"clear audits" command was executed.

clear errors
This command moves errors and resolved alarms to the cleared-error list. alarms
from the error log.

Synopsis
clear errors

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
clear errors

Description
The clear errors command moves all errors and resolved alarms to the
cleared-error list, thereby making room for new incoming error messages which
might otherwise be dropped. This command will not clear active alarms from the
alarm log. This command should be used with care because the information
cleared may be lost if these entries are overwritten.
Cleared error entries will be the first entries overwritten when additional entries
are needed to log new errors.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear interface

Page 8-75

8

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "clear errors," the following
message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear errors command is successful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the clear errors command is unsuccessful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
Cleared errors can be displayed using the "display errors" command.

clear interface
This command clears all values of counters maintained by the processor
interface.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear interface

Page 8-76

8

Synopsis
clear interface location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
clear interface 01a1
clear interface 01a2
clear interface a2

Description
The clear interface command causes all counter values maintained by the
Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack to be reinitialized. These counters display
via the status interface command which is for use in the development
environment only. The PI circuit pack is a front end processor implementing the
packet layer and link layer of the BX.25 protocol, and the ISDN procedure-D
protocol.

Defaults
None

Parameters
location

The location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface. The
position determines which processor interface circuit pack will be
cleared. A position of 1 is the first processor interface in the carrier,
while a position of 2 is the second processor interface in the carrier.

Help Messages
If HELP is pressed after entering "clear interface," the following message is
displayed:
Enter location: [cabinet(1)], carrier(A-B), pos(1-2)

Error Messages
If the specified carrier is not the active PE, the following message is displayed:
Command must be executed from active SPE

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear isdn-testcall

Page 8-77

8

If the cabinet and carrier is invalid for a PPN, the following message is displayed:
Invalid port-network specified

If the carrier is not a valid carrier, the following message is displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If the technician-entered carrier is not active, the following message is displayed:
Board invalid

If there is not a PI circuit pack administered for the specified position, but the
specified carrier is active, the following error message is displayed:
Processor Interface (TN765) not started or is being started

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If, during the execution of a command, a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear interface command is successful, the following message is displayed
on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the clear interface command is unsuccessful, the following message is
displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

clear isdn-testcall
This command cancels a ISDN-PRI test call already in progress.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear isdn-testcall

Page 8-78

8

Synopsis
clear isdn-testcall group number/member number

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init

Examples
clear isdn-testcall 80/1
clear isdn-testcall 78/2

Description
The clear isdn-testcall command cancels an ISDN-PRI test call if one is currently
in progress. Once a running test call is cleared, another test call is allowed to
run.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
group number

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group.

member
number

The member number is an administered number identifying a particular
trunk within a trunk group.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "clear isdn-testcall," the
following is displayed:
Enter group #/member #

Error Messages
If the specified format of the trunk location is incorrect, this message displays:
Format invalid

If the specified trunk group or member range is invalid, this message displays:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear isdn-testcall

Page 8-79

8

If a trunk group and member is not specified, this message displays:
Must specify group/member pair

If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members administered,
this message displays:
Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member

If the specified trunk group member is not administered, this message displays:
Group member not assigned

If the board on which the port resides is not administered, this message displays:
Port not assigned

If a test call is currently not in progress when the command is entered, this
message displays:
Test Call not in progress

If the specified trunk is not an ISDN-PRI trunk, this message displays:
Invalid non ISDN-PRI trunk specified

If the test call has already completed, the following message is displayed:
Test Call already terminated

If, during the execution of a command, a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, this message displays:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all available maintenance resources are in use, this message displays:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear isdn-testcall command is successful, this message displays:
Command successfully completed

If the clear isdn-testcall command is unsuccessful, this message displays:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear link

Page 8-80

8

clear link
This command will clear a link by performing a reset.

Synopsis
clear link link-id

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
clear link 1
clear link 8

Description
The clear link command will clear the hardware error counters associated with
the ports on the Processor Interface circuit pack (displayed via the status link
command).

Defaults
None.

Parameters
link-id

The link-id is a number associated with each link (1-8). The link number
is assigned via the communication-interface links form.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "clear link," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 1 character link number

Error Messages
If the link identifier is not within the valid range, the following error message is
displayed:
Link out of range, please press HELP

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear mst

Page 8-81

8

If the link is not administered, the following error message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear link command is successful, the following message is displayed on
the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the clear link command is unsuccessful, the following message is displayed on
the SAT:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

clear mst
This command will clear the trace buffer.

Synopsis
clear mst

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear pkt

Page 8-82

8

Examples
clear mst

Description
This command is usually used before enabling the trace. It may be used while
the trace is enabled to clear unwanted data.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If HELP is pressed after entering "clear mst," the following message is displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. A conflict could occur if another user was executing an
enable, disable or clear message sequence trace command at the same time.
The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
After the user has entered the command the following message appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

clear pkt
This command forces a packet bus ’clear stimuli’ to be sent over the packet bus.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear pkt

Page 8-83

8

Synopsis
clear pkt port-network location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: cust, inads, init.

Examples
clear pkt port-network 1

Description
This command helps resolve problems with the packet bus.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the packet bus that is forced to
send a ’clear stimuli’ to all boards connected to it. Enter a digit (1 - 3).

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "clear pkt," this message displays:
Enter port-network; port network number (1-3)

Error Messages
If the packet bus is not administered, this message displays:
Packet Bus is not activated, check system-parameters maintenance form

If all available maintenance resources are in use, this message displays:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear pkt command is successful, this message displays:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None. For additional information, refer to EDD document 23154.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
clear port

Page 8-84

8

clear port
This command removes the maintenance mark from a port.

Synopsis
clear port location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: cust, inads, init, nms.

Examples
clear port 01c1102

Description
This command is used in conjunction with the "mark port" command. This
command will remove the mark from the port and allow it to be usable.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be busied
out and is entered as "UUcSSrr" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot position,
and "rr" represents the circuit (port). A single digit cabinet (1 - 9) may
be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "clear port," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 7 character port number

Error Messages
If the port is not administered, the following error message will be displayed:
Port not marked

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
copy update-file

Page 8-85

8

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the clear port command is successful, the following message will be displayed
on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the clear port command is unsuccessful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, cannot complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

copy update-file
This command provides a mechanism for copying a field update file from the
active SPE to the standby SPE.

Synopsis
copy update-file override

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads and init.

Examples
copy update-file
copy update-file override

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
copy update-file

Page 8-86

8

Description
In a Duplex system only, the copy update-file will copy a field update file from the
active SPE to the standby SPE. This command is intended to permit the user to
recover from situations whereby the standby SPE was not available when a field
update ("patch") file was downloaded to the switch. All validation checks are
made on the standby as it receives the file. If there is a newer, valid update file on
the standby, the override option must be used to force the copy.

Parameters
override

The override parameter allows the user to copy the update file
from the active SPE to the standby SPE regardless of the dates.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "copy update-file" on a
duplex SPE system the following message is displayed:
[’override’]

Error Messages
If the standby SPE contains a newer patch file than the active SPE and the
override option was NOT used, the following message is displayed:
Active SPE’s update file is older than standby’s

If the vintage of the standby SPE doesn’t match the vintage of the active SPE, the
following message is displayed:
Update file vintage does not match standby SPE core vintage

If there is no update file on active processor, the following message is displayed:
No update file on tape

If the standby SPE is NOT in standby mode, the following message is displayed:
is displayed:
Cannot access the standby SPE at this time

If the active SPE cannot establish a communication path to the standby SPE, the
following message is displayed:
Could not establish netcon data call between SPE’s

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable administered-connection

Page 8-87

8

If the update file is too large to fit on device, the following message is displayed:
Update file is too large to fit on device

If the checksum of the files is not correct, the following message is displayed:
Update file checksum failed

If the update is successful the following message is displayed:
Command completed successfully

Output
None.

Feature Interactions
The form displayed for the list configuration software-vintage command has been
modified to reflect the changes imposed by the flash architecture. The "list
configuration software" command should allow INADS to determine, with one
query, the hardware configuration, software vintage and patch identifier.
There is no interaction with routine periodic or scheduled maintenance because
patches are only applied on restarts before the system is in normal operation.
The flash checksum test acts as a backup check to make sure the entire field
update file was applied correctly. It can fail because of a bad checksum update
from a poorly constructed update file or because the patching operation has
aborted. When the flash Checksum Test fails, a MAJOR on-board alarm is raised
on the processor/memory circuit pack. Maintenance runs a data consistency test
on a daily basis to check that copies of translations, announcements and
software files are consistent across both processors in a High or Critical
Reliability System. If the test detects a difference, a minor, off-board alarm is
generated.
When checking the software, the test compares the memory resident software
version and patch identifier. It also checks for the presence of a field update file
and, if found, compares the old and new patch identifiers to make sure the same
patch file id loaded on each processor. If the software or update files are
inconsistent, the "list configuration software" command can be used to display
the status of the patch file.

disable administered-connection
This command stops periodic and scheduled maintenance from being
performed on a single administered connection or all administered connections.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable administered-connection

Page 8-88

8

Synopsis
disable administered-connection [ac number | all]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init, system
technician, cust, rcust, mis.

Examples
disable administered-connection all
disable administered-connection 1
disable administered-connection 128

Description
The disable administered connection command inhibits scheduled and periodic
testing from being performed on all or a single administered connection(s). This
command stops the processing of in-line errors for all or the selected
administered connection(s).

Defaults
None.

Parameters
ac number

The number of the administered connection being disabled.

all

If "all" is entered then all administered connections are disabled.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "disable administered-connection," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned administered connection number(1-128) or ’all’

Error Messages
If the administered connection number entered is not "all" and is non numeric, the
following message is displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the administered connection number entered is not within the valid range of
connections, the following message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable mst

Page 8-89

8

Entry out of range

If the connection number entered is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Identifier not assigned

If the administered connection number entered is already disabled, the following
message is displayed:
Administered connection already disabled

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

Output
After the user has entered the command and the command is successful, the
following message appears at the bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

disable mst
This command will allow the user to disable the mst.

Synopsis
disable mst

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable mst

Page 8-90

8

Examples
disable mst

Description
The disable mst command will disable the message trace. If the trace was not
already disabled for some other reason, a GAP marker will be inserted into the
trace. The contents are then frozen, and can be viewed via the "list mst"
command.
The command should be executed when done using the trace facility. If left
enabled, the trace will continue to use CPU time until the run time limit expires.
Executing a disable mst command when the trace is already disabled will have
no effect, and will indicate that it worked.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "disable mst," the following message
displays:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
After the user has entered the command the following message appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable suspend-alm-orig

Page 8-91

8

Feature Interactions
None.

disable suspend-alm-orig
This command disables one or more active Suspend Alarm Origination entries.

Synopsis
disable suspend-alm-orig (board location).

Examples
disable suspend-alm-orig 1C03
disable suspend-alm-orig 1E07

Description
This command disables one or more active Suspend Alarm Origination entries
from the Suspend Alarm Origination table. This command disables all entries
(boards and ports) matching the specified physical board location.
NOTE:
A port entry cannot be disabled with this command. Allowing for different
ways to disable one or more entries greatly increases the complexity of
updating and displaying the Suspend Alarm Origination table.

Defaults
None.

Parameter
board
location

This parameter specifies the physical board location of the hardware
component that has been replaced or corrected. A port location is not
supported because of it complexities.

Help Messages
N is the maximum number of cabinets in the switch:
Enter board location:[cabinet(1-N)];
carrier(A-E);slot(0-20)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable synchronization-switch

Page 8-92

8

Output
The command returns one of the following messages:
1. If the board specifier is not valid:
Board invalid
2. If no entries can be disabled in the Suspend Alarm Origination table:
Entry not found; no entries disabled

Feature Interactions
None.

disable synchronization-switch
This command disables automatic clock switching.

Synopsis
disable synchronization-switch

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
disable synchronization-switch

Description
The disable synchronization command stops the automatic clock switching
capability of the maintenance subsystem. Clock refers to the oscillator on a
tone/clock or DS1 interface.
The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication
between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The
subsystem is made up of system components involved in synchronization: TDM
bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in
the SPE.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable synchronization-switch

Page 8-93

8

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "disable synchronization" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear,and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the disable synchronization command is successful, the following message will
be displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the disable synchronization command is unsuccessful, the following message
will be displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the disable command is run and synchronization is currently disabled, the
following message will be displayed on the SAT:
Synchronization-switch already disabled

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
disable test-number

Page 8-94

8

disable test-number
This command stops a specified test number from being performed during
demand and periodic or scheduled maintenance.

Synopsis
disable test-number number [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
disable test-number 710
disable test-number 710 print
disable test-number 510 schedule

Description
The disable test-number command makes the user specified test number
unavailable for any maintenance testing. An enable test-number must be issued
to make the test number available.

Parameters
number

The number of the test that is to be maintenance disabled.

print

If specified, this parameter will cause the information displayed by this
command to be sent to the printer attached to the terminal as well as to
the screen.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "disable test-number," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter test number

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-95

8

Error Messages
If the test-number entered is not a valid system test number, the following error
message will be displayed:
Test number invalid

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the disable test-number command is successful, the following message is
displayed:
Command successfully completed

If the disable test-number command is unsuccessful, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

display alarms
This command will display an options form which allows the technician to choose
which alarms are to be displayed.

Synopsis
display alarms [ print | schedule ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-96

8

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
display alarms
display alarms print
display alarms schedule

Description
The display alarms command brings up a hardware alarm report. This screen
allows the technician various different options to select which alarms will be
displayed on the alarm report. There are no parameters entered on the command
line, parameters are selected on the hardware alarm report form instead.
An alarm can occur for any hardware object when it has been determined by the
maintenance subsystem that a problem definitely exists. The impact of the
problem is indicated by the alarm type:
Warning alarm—A problem which has been deemed important enough to log, or
may be external to the system, but not severe enough to cause a noticeable
degradation of service.
Minor alarm—A problem which could disable a local area of the system and so
noticeably degrade the system.
Major alarm—A problem which widely degrades the system and seriously
impairs service. This would cause a call to be placed to INADS.
A resolved alarm is a problem which has been corrected, and the alarmed
component of the system is functioning correctly again. The alarm will be
stamped with a resolved date and time, indicating that it is no longer a concern
(any errors associated with the alarms will also be considered "resolved").

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-97

8

System Reboots and the Error and Alarm Logs
The system attempts to save the error and alarm logs to the memory card, on the
active SPE when any of the following events take place:
— The save translation command is executed.
— Translations are saved as part of scheduled maintenance (as
administered on the maintenance-related system parameters form).
— A demand or software-escalated system reboot takes place.
— The PPN is about to lose all power after having been on battery backup.
Conditions such as unavailability of the MSS can prevent this attempt from
succeeding.
Whenever the system reboots, the error log is restored from the disk on the SPE
that becomes active with the reboot. Since the logs are saved to the disk on the
SPE that was active before the reboot, the versions restored at reboot time may
not be current. This occurs when either:
— The attempt to save at reboot did not succeed.
— The SPE that is active coming out of the reboot is not the same one to
which the logs were last saved.
In such a case, the logs will not show the errors and alarms that have been
logged since the last time a save was made to the SPE that became active with
the reboot. When looking at errors that precede the last reboot, look for
indications preceding the reboot to determine whether the logs restored at
reboot are complete.
System resets less severe than a reboot rarely affect the error and alarm logs.
NOTE:
If there are SYSTEM errors in the Error Log, use display initcauses to
obtain additional information. Information that could not be logged during a
system reset may be found here.

Defaults
All alarms will be displayed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-98

8

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [4] for more details.
There are no parameters entered on the command line, parameters
are selected on the hardware alarm report form instead.

Backward Paging of the Alarm/Error Log
The user can display the next and previous pages of the alarm/error log. When
the user executes the display alarm/error command to view the alarm/error log.
If more than one page of alarms/errors is stored by the system, the user may use
the NEXT PAGE key or the PREV PAGE key (513 or 715 terminals only use F8 orF7 for
all other terminals) to toggle between pages (up to a maximum of two pages). If
the system has storied one or less than one page of alarms/errors the command
will display the alarms/errors and echo Command successfully completed and
exit. Help messages/Key actions:

Next Page—The command will display the next page. If the user is not viewing
the first page of alarms/errors, is not viewing a page as a result of depressing the
Prev Page key, and there are more entries to display, the help message will be:
press CANCEL to abort, NEXT PAGE to complete, or PREV PAGE for previous
page.
Prev Page—Press previous page key to return to the previous page. The system
will display the help message:
press CANCEL to abort or NEXT PAGE for next page If the user is not viewing the
first page of alarms/errors, is not currently viewing a page as a result of pressing
the prev Page key, and there are no remaining entries to display, the help
message will be:
press CANCEL to abort, NEXT PAGE to complete, or PREV PAGE for previous
page.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "display alarms" the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-99

8

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

FORM INPUT
After entering the command "display alarms," the system technician will be
presented with an options form.
Alarm Types

The type of alarm to be displayed is specified by placing a ’y’ or ’n’ in
the alarm type fields. The technician can choose a combination of
active alarms, major, minor, warning, or resolved alarms.

Interval

Display alarm records for the last (m)onth, last (h)our, last (d)ay, last
(w)eek, or (a)ll. The default is all.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-100

From

Display alarm records from the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm,
where mm is the month, dd is the day, hh is the hour and mm is the
minute. If no "from" date is entered, then no checking is done. This
will give the user all the alarms active since a month prior to the
current time.

To

Display alarm record to the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm, where
mm is the month, dd is the day, hh is the hour and mm is the minute.
If no "to" date is entered, any alarm which is active after the from date
will be selected.

Equipment Type

The technician can choose between seven different equipment
types. If there is no input to any of these fields, the system will default
to all the equipment. The user can select one of the following fields:
■

Cabinet: This allows the technician to display all alarms
associated with a particular cabinet. Alarms for a cabinet are
referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3 which is assigned
during cabinet administration.

■

Port Network: This allows the technician to display all alarms
associated with a particular port network. Alarms for a port
network are referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3.

■

Board Number: This allows the technician to choose all alarms
associated with a particular circuit pack for display. Alarms for a
(cabinet-carrier-slot). If the cabinet number is omitted, the
system will default to 1.

■

Port: This allows the technician to choose all alarms associated
with a particular port on a circuit pack for display. Alarms for a
port circuit are referenced by port location
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). If the cabinet number is omitted, the
system will default to 1.

■

Category: Alarms for a particular equipment category.

■

Extension: Alarms associated with an extension number.

■

Trunk (group/member): The technician can choose to view all
alarms associated with a particular trunk group or trunk group
member. The group identifier should be entered to view all
alarms associated with a trunk group XXX/___. The group
identifier and member identifier should both be entered to view
all alarms associated with a specific trunk group member
XXX/XXX.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

display alarms

Page 8-101

Page 1 of 1
ALARM REPORTS

The following options control which alarms will be displayed.
ALARM TYPES
Active? y_
Resolved? n_
Major? y_
Minor? y_
Warning? y_
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: m_
From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__
EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following )
Cabinet: ____
Port Network: __
Board Number: _______
Port: ________
Category: ________
Extension: _____
Trunk ( group/member ): ___/___

Field Help
Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon
tabbing to the specified field and pressing the HELP key.
Active?

"n(o) y(es)"

Resolved?

"n(o) y(es)"

Major?

"n(o) y(es)"

Minor?

"n(o) y(es)"

Warning?

"n(o) y(es)"

Interval:

The interval field help is a list of objects. This list includes
m(onth), h(our), d(ay), w(eek), a(ll).
"From (month) "Enter month between 1-12"

From (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

From (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

From (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

To (month)

"Enter month between 1-12"

To (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

To (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

To (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

Cabinet:

"Enter cabinet number (1-3)"

Port Network:

"Enter port network number (1-3)"

Board Number:

"Enter 5 character board number;
cabinet(01-3):carrier(A-E):slot(00-20)"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Port:

"Enter port number;
[cabinet(1-3)]:carrier(A-E):slot(0-20):circuit(01-31)"

Category:

The category field help is a list of objects. This list
includes the following: adm-conn, announce, bri/asai,
card-mem, cdr, data-mod, detector, dup-spe, environ,
exp-intf, ext-dev, generatr, inads-link, infc, maint, mbus,
memory, misc, mnt-test, modem, netcon, pkt, pkt-ctrl
pms/jrnl, procr, quick-st s-syn, stabd, stacrk, stations,
sys-prnt, tape, tdm, tone, trkbd, trkcrk, trunk, wideband.
For a table describing the category entries in greater
detail, see the ‘‘display errors’’ command.

Extension:

"Enter assigned extension"

Trunk (group)

"Enter group number between 1-99"

Trunk (member)

"Enter group member between 1-99, or blank"

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-102

Field Error Messages
Following are the error messages that will be displayed on the screen. The
messages are displayed when the system technician tabs out of a field and the
validation routines are executed. In the following messages, an "x" represents the
character that was entered by the user.
Active?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Resolved?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Major?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Minor?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Warning?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Interval:

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

From (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (day)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (day)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"

Cabinet:

"Entry invalid"

Port Network:

"Entry invalid"

Board Number:

"Board invalid"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Port:

"Port invalid"

Category:

""xxxxxxxx" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Extension:

"Entry must be all digits"

Trunk (group)

"Entry must be all digits"

Trunk (member)

"Entry must be all digits"

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-103

FORM Output
After valid options are entered by the technician, an alarm report is displayed.
The data displayed on this form will be:
Port

The location of the alarmed object. For installed circuit packs, the
location is displayed as "cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit]." For Port
Network-related objects, the location is displayed as "PN UUB,"
where "UU" is the Port Network number and B is the bus (A or B).
For Fiber Link-related objects, the location is displayed as "x
a-PNC" where "x" is the Fiber Link number and "a" is the PNC side
(A or B). This is the same identifier as used by the alarm log.

Maintenance Name

The logical name of the maintenance object which has been
alarmed.

On Brd

Whether the fault detected is on the associated circuit pack, or an
off board element connected to the circuit pack.

Alt Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Alarm Type

"MAJOR," "MINOR," or "WARNING." This is an indicator to the
seriousness of the alarm raised.

Service State

"RDY" (ready for service), "OUT" (out of service), or "IN" (in
service). This is the current service state of the station and trunk
ports shown. If a blank is displayed in this field it means that no
service state is associated with the MO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display alarms

Page 8-104

Ack?

The columns under the “1” and “2” headings denote if the alarm
has been acknowledged by the first and second OSS telephone
numbers, respectively. A "y" in this field means that the alarm has
been acknowledged. A "n" means that the alarm has not been
acknowledged. A "c" means that the alarm resolved and cleared
and the alarm notification was acknowledged. A blank means that
there will be no attempt to report the alarm.

Date Alarmed

Day, hour, and minute of alarm.

Date Resolved

Day, hour, and minute of resolution. For active alarms this field will
be zero (0).

For the following output example, the ENTER key was pressed immediately after
entering the display alarms command.

display alarms
ALARM REPORT
Port

Maintenance
Name

On
Brd?

02A
01C07
01C0702
01C0701
01C0703
01C1505
01C1505
02A0201
02A
PN 02B

TONE-BD
ANL-BD
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
CO-TRK
CO-TRK
TONE-PT
TDM-CLK
TDM-BUS

y
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

Alt
Name

311
1051
1053
78/01
78/01

Alarm
Type
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING

Svc
Ack?
State 1 2
y n
n n
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT

Date
Alarmed
05/22/20:34
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:26
05/22/20:34
05/23/13:43
05/23/14:53

Date
Resolved
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00
00/00/00:00

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
If the alarm origination is disabled via "change system-parameters maintenance,"
the "Ack?" field displays blanks no matter what the true acknowledge state is for
the alarm.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display cabinet

Page 8-105

display cabinet
display cabinet UU [print | schedule]
The display cabinet command displays the port network number, type, layout,
room, floor, building, and carriers for the specified cabinet.Output
CABINET Description
Cabinet

The administered number of the cabinet.

Cabinet
Layout

Type of cabinet (five-carrier or single-carrier-stack).

Cabinet Type

The type of port network housed in the cabinet (processor or
expansion).

Number of
Port networks

The number of port networks in the cabinet (1 or 2).

Room

Room where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form.

Floor

Floor where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form.

Building

Building where cabinet is located, if administered on the cabinet form.

CARRIER
Description
Carrier

Letter designation of the carrier.

Carrier Type

Port, processor, switch-node, fan or not-used.

Number

The administered port network number or switch node number.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display cabinet

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-106

The following display shows a typical result when display cabinet 1 is entered.
display cabinet 1
CABINET
CABINET Description
Cabinet:
Cabinet Layout:
Cabinet Type:
Number of Portnetworks:
Room:
Floor:
Building:

1
five-carrier
processor
1
30n46
first
main

CARRIER Description
Carrier
Carrier Type
C
B
A
X
D
E

port
not-used
processor
Fan
not-used
switch-node

Number
PN
PN
PN

01
01
01

PN
SN

01
01

Command Successfully Completed

The following display shows a typical result when display cabinet 3 is entered
and cabinet is a stack of single-carrier-cabinets.

display cabinet 3
CABINET
CABINET Description
Cabinet:
Cabinet Layout:
Cabinet Type:
Number of Portnetworks:
Room:
Floor:
Building:

3
single-carrier-stack
expansion-portnetwork
1
30n46
first
main

CARRIER Description
Carrier
Carrier Type
D
D
B
A

not-used
not-used
port
expansion-control

Number
PN
PN
PN
PN

03
03
03
03

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display communication-interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-107

display communication-interface
display communication-interface
hop-channels | links | processor-channels
[print | schedule]
The display communication-interface command displays three different forms
depending on the object specified by the user. See also status link for more
details.
The hop-channels object displays translation data for hop channels. A hop
channel is a bi-directional network channel between two interface links for DCS
message hopping. A hop channel is used to tandem DCS messages from one
interface link to another interface link.
The processor-channels object displays translation information for each of the
local processor channels. A processor channel is one several data streams
which are multiplexed by the X.25 protocol onto a single data link. The system
has 128 total processor channels; up to 64 can be assigned to a single link.
The links object displays translation information for each communication
interface link. A link is an electronic communication channel transmitted over the
Packet Bus for carrying packet-switched data. There are 16 links which terminate
at one end on the Packet Interface circuit pack in the SPE. At the physical and
link layers, the link terminates at the other end on a port on the PBX’s switching
matrix. At a higher level, the link continues over a transmission facility to another
endpoint, such as a DCS node or AUDIX. The link carries application messages
between the SPE and other switches or adjuncts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display communication-interface

Page 8-108

Output for Hop-channels qualifier
Link/Channel A

Identifies the first of the two link/channels joined by the hop
channel. Links range from 1 to 16, channels from 1 to 64. The
link/channel must not be assigned to a local processor channel,
and the link must not be assigned to a PRI local processor
channel.

Link/Channel B

Identifies the second of the two link/channels joined by the hop
channel. Links range from 1 to 16, channels from 1 to 64. The
link/channel pair must not be assigned to a local processor
channel, and the link must not be assigned to a PRI local
processor channel.

The number of the local processor channel used to hop the interface link
channels is not shown. The following display shows a typical result when display
comm hop is entered.
display communication-interface hop-channels

Page

1 of

4

HOP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Link/Channel A
3

Link/Channel B

1

4

Link/Channel A

Link/Channel B

12

Output for Links Object
Link

The physical link number.

Enabled

"Yes" indicates the link is enabled for normal operation. ”No,” the
default, indicates that message flow over the link is suppressed.
The link can only be enabled if the corresponding data module
has been administered.

X.25 Extension

The extension of the TN577 Packet Gateway port through which
the link is routed.

Destination Number

"External" indicates the link goes to equipment connected
locally to an external port on a Packet Gateway circuit pack.
Such ports must show a "y" in the Establish Connection field.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display communication-interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-109

Establish Connection

This field indicates whether the local switch is responsible for
any part of call set-up with the far-end data module. If the
physical link is through a pair of data modules, each switch
terminating the link must set up a connection to its PDM/TDM. If
the physical link is over a DS-1 interface, it is possible for one
switch to set up the entire connection without any initiation by
the other end. However, ISDN signaling links must be set to "y"
at both ends of the interface.

Connected Data
Module

The extension of a PDM/MPDM directly connected to a PGATE
port cable or to a a cable to an adjunct in an administered
connection arrangement.

Identification

This field records the type and identification number of the
machine connected to this link. This field is for informational
purposes only.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display communication-interface

Page 8-110

The following display shows a typical result when display
communication-interface links is entered.

display communication-interface links

SPE A

INTERFACE LINKS

Link
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Enabled
y
n
y
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n

X.25
Extension
5464
5461
5466

Destination
Number
external
external
external

Establish
Connection
y
y
y

Connected
Data Module

5460

Identification
AUDIX ID1
AUDIX-ADM-CONN1
CMS-ADM-CONN-2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display communication-interface

Page 8-111

Output for Processor-Channel Object
Proc Chan

The Processor Channel denotes one of the processor channels
on the processor link. With this link/logical channel pair and the
one specified in the interface link and interface channel field, a
network channel to a remote machine is specified. The valid
range for link is 1 to 16, specifying one of the 16 interface links.
Each interface link corresponds to a port on a PGATE board.
The Processor channel is not administrable.

Application

This field specifies the type of application that connects to this
processor channel. The following lists the valid entries:

Interface Link

The interface link to which the processor channel is connected.

Interface Chan

The channel on the interface link to which the processor
channel is connected.

Local Port

The switch application port used by the local session.

Remote Port

The application port used by the remote session.

Adjunct Name

The name of the adjunct connected to this processor channel.
These are defined in the Adjunct Name Form. Only AUDIX and
MSA channels (AUDIX, MSAAMWL, MSAHLWC, MSALLWC,
and MSAMCS) require entries in this field.

Machine-ID

This is the network machine ID for the remote machine. Machine
IDs are required only for the AUDIX adjunct and DCS
connections.

The following display shows a typical result for display comm proc.

display communication-interface processor-channels

Page

1 of 8

PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Proc
Chan
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

Application
dcs
audix
audix
gateway
gateway

Interface
Link
Chan
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
10
1
9

Local
Port
1
59
59
59
59

Remote
Port
1
11
11
10
9

Adjunct
Name
AUDIX1
audix2

Machine-ID
13
1
2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display disabled-tests

Page 8-112

display disabled-tests
display disabled-tests [print | schedule]
The display disabled-tests command displays the numbers off all maintenance
tests that have been disabled by INADS. These tests will not be available for
background or demand testing.

Output

Test Number

The numbers of the disabled tests

The following display shows a typical result when display disabled-tests is
entered.

display disabled-tests

SPE A

DISABLED TEST INFORMATION
Test Number
710

Command successfully completed

display errors
This command will display an options form that allows the technician to choose
which errors are to be displayed.

Synopsis
display errors high-resolution [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms, browse.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-113

Examples
display errors
display errors print
display errors schedule
display errors high-resolution print

Description
The display errors command brings up an error report. This screen allows the
technician various different options to select which errors will be displayed on the
hardware error report. There are no query parameters entered on the command
line. Those type of parameters are selected on the error report form instead.
Errors can result from in-line firmware errors, periodic tests, failures detected
while executing a test command, software inconsistency, or a data audit
discrepancy.

System Reboots and the Error and Alarm Logs
The system attempts to save the error and alarm logs to the memory card, on the
active SPE when any of the following events take place:
— The save translation command is executed.
— Translations are saved as part of scheduled maintenance (as
administered on the maintenance-related system parameters form).
— A demand or software-escalated system reboot takes place.
— The PPN is about to lose all power after having been on battery backup.
Conditions such as unavailability of the MSS can prevent this attempt from
succeeding.
Whenever the system reboots, the error log is restored from the disk on the SPE
that becomes active with the reboot. Since the logs are saved to the disk on the
SPE that was active before the reboot, the versions restored at reboot time may
not be current. This occurs when either:
— The attempt to save at reboot did not succeed.
— The SPE that is active coming out of the reboot is not the same one to
which the logs were last saved.
In such a case, the logs will not show the errors and alarms that have been
logged since the last time a save was made to the SPE that became active with
the reboot. When looking at errors that precede the last reboot, look for
indications preceding the reboot to determine whether the logs restored at
reboot are complete.
System resets less severe than a reboot rarely affect the error and alarm logs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-114

NOTE:
If there are SYSTEM errors in the Error Log, use display initcauses to
obtain additional information. Information that could not be logged during a
system reset may be found here.

Defaults
All errors will be displayed.

Parameters
high-resolution

This option specifies that the error report should be displayed with
high resolution time stamps for the first occurrence and last
occurrence of the error. This high resolution time stamp includes
seconds and a sequence count within a second. The sequence count
starts over for each second.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Backward Paging of the Alarm/Error Log
The user can display the next and previous pages of the alarm/error log. When
the user executes the display alarm/error command to view the alarm/error log.
If more than one page of alarms/errors is stored by the system, the user may use
the NEXT PAGE key or the PREV KEY key (513 or 715 terminals only use F8 orF7 for
all other terminals) to toggle between pages (up to a maximum of two pages). If
the system has storied one or less than one page of alarms/errors the command
will display the alarms/errors and echo Command successfully completed and
exit. Help messages/Key actions:

Next Page—The command will display the next page. If the user is not viewing
the first page of alarms/errors, is not viewing a page as a result of depressing the
PREV PAGE key, and there are more entries to display, the help message will be:
press CANCEL to abort, NEXT PAGE to complete, or PREV PAGE for previous
page.
Prev Page—Press previous page key to return to the previous page. The system
will display the help message:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-115

press CANCEL to abort or NEXT PAGE for next page If the user is not viewing the
first page of alarms/errors, is not currently viewing a page as a result of pressing
the PREV PAGE key, and there are no remaining entries to display, the help
message will be:
press CANCEL to abort, NEXT PAGE to complete, or PREV PAGE for previous
page.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "display errors" the following
message will be displayed:
[’high-resolution’], [’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

FORM INPUT
After entering the command "display errors," the system technician will be
presented with an options form.
Error Type

The type of error to be displayed is specified by choosing an error
type. This field defaults to display all errors.

Error List

The user may select which error list the error entries will be selected
from by entering ’active-alarms’, ’errors’, or ’cleared-errors’. This
field defaults to the ’active-alarms’ error list. The error list selected
will affect the Report Title on the output form.

Report Period

The technician can specify a starting and stopping time from which
errors should be reported.

Interval

Display only error records for the last hour, last day, last week or all.
The default is the last day.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-116

From

Display only error records from the time specified by dd/hh/mm,
where dd is the day, hh is the hour and mm is the minute. The
default is the earliest time of the existing error records in the log.

To

Display only error records to the time specified by dd/hh/mm, where
dd is the day, hh is the hour and mm is the minute. The default is the
current time.

Equipment Type

The technician can choose between seven different equipment
types:
Cabinet: This allows the technician to display all errors associated
with a particular cabinet. Errors for a cabinet are referenced by a
number ranging from 1 to 3 which is assigned during cabinet
administration.
Port Network Number: This allows the technician to display all errors
associated with a particular port network number. Errors for a port
network are referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3.
Board Number: This allows the technician to choose all errors
associated with a particular circuit pack for display. Errors for a
circuit pack are referenced by circuit pack location
(cabinet-carrier-slot).
Port: This allows the technician to choose all errors associated with a
particular port on a circuit pack for display. Errors for a port circuit
are referenced by port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).
Category: Errors for a particular equipment category.
Extension: Errors associated with an extension number.
Trunk (group/member): The technician can choose to view all errors
associated with a particular trunk group or trunk group member. The
group identifier should be entered to view all errors associated with
a trunk group XXX/___. The group identifier and member identifier
should both be entered to view all errors associated with a specific
trunk group member XXX/XXX.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-117

display errors

Page
1 of
ERROR REPORT
The following options control which errors will be displayed.
ERROR TYPES
Error Type: _____
Error List: active-alarms
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: _
From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__
EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following )
Cabinet: __
Port Network: __
Board Number: ____
Port: ______
Category: ________
Extension: _____
Trunk ( group/member ): ___/___

Field Help
Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon
tabbing to the specified field and pressing the HELP key.
Error Type:

"Enter error type"

Error List:

The Error List field help provides the following help list: active-alarms,
errors, cleared-errors.

Interval:

The interval field help provides the following help list: h(our), d(ay),
w(eek), m(onth), a(ll).

From (month)

"Enter month between 1-12"

From (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

From (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

From (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

To (month)

"Enter month between 1-12"

To (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

To (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

To (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

Cabinet:

"Enter cabinet number (1-3)"

Port Network:

"Enter port network number (1-3)"

1

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-118

Board
Number:

"Enter 5 character board number; cabinet(1-3):carrier(A-E):slot(0-20)"

Port:

"Enter port number; [cabinet(1-3)]:carrier(A-E):slot(0-20):circuit(01-31)"

Category:

The category field help is a list of objects. This list includes the
following: adm-conn, announce, bri/asai, cdr, data-mod, detector,
dup-spe, environ, exp-intf, ext-dev, generatr, inads-link, infc, maint,
mbus, memory, misc, mnt-test, modem, netcon, pkt, pkt-ctrl pms/jrnl,
procr, quick-st s-syn, stabd, stacrk, stations, sys-prnt, tape, tdm, tone,
trkbd, trkcrk, trunks. This list pertains only to help messages.

Category

Maintenance Objects

adm-conn

ADM-CONN

announce

ANN-PT, ANN-BD

bri/asai

BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ

card-mem

CARD-MEM, 12V_PWR, CAP-MEM, FL-DATA

cdr

CDR-LNK

data-mod

PDMODULE, TDMODULE, DT-LN-BD, DAT-LINE, DDP-PDM, DDP-TDM,
BRI-DAT

detector

DTMR-PT, GPTD-PT, DETR-BD, TONE-BD

dup-spe

DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, SHDW-LINK, SPE-SELEC, STBY-SPE, TAPE, PROCR,
MEM-BD, SW-CTL, CARR-POW, PR-MAINT, PI-BD, DATA-CHL,
DATA-CON, DATA-BD, PKT-CTRL, CAP-MEM, PI-PT

environ

POWER, AC-POWER, CARR-POW, EMG-XFER, CABINET, DC-POWER,
EXT-DEV, RING-GEN

exp-intf

TDM-CLK, TONE-BD, TONE-BD, SYNC, EXP-INTF, EXP-INTF, EXP-LINK,
CARR-POW, AC-POWER, DC-POWER, MAINT, DUPINT, EPN-SNTY

ext-dev

CUST-ALM, EXT-DEV

generatr

TONE-PT, TONE-BD, TONE-BD, TDM-CLK, SYNC, STRAT-3

inads-link

INADS

infc

PI-LINK, PI-SCI, PI-BD, PI-PT, EXP-INTF, EXP-INTF, EXP-LINK, ISDN-LNK,
PKT-CTRL, IDSN-SGRP, PGATE-BD, X25-PT

maint

MAINT, PR_MAINT

mbus

PROCR, MEM_BD, PR_MAINT, TAPE, DATA-BD, SW-CTL, DUPINT, PI-BD,
PKT-CTRL

memory

MEM_BD

misc

TIME-DAY, ERR-LOG, MIS, PROC-SAN, SYSTEM, CONFIG

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Category

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-119

Maintenance Objects

mnt-test

M/T-DIG, M/T-PKT, M/T-BD

modem

MODEM-PT, MODEM-BD

netcon

SW-CTL, DATA-CHL, DATA-BD, DATA-CON

pkt

PKT-BUS, PKT-CTRL M/T-PKT

pkt-ctrl

PKT-CTRL

pms/jrnl

PMS-LINK, JRNL-LNK

procr

PROCR, PR_MAINT

quick-st

MO_AN_STA, MO_DIG_STA, MO_SCS_STA, MO_MET_STA, MO_PD_
MODULE, MO_TD_MODULE, MO_51D_TRM, MO_DTDM, MO_DL_PT,
MO_16_PT, MO_AN2_STA, MO_ANN_PT, MO_PDT_PT, MO_PDG_STA,
MO_BRI_PT, MO_BRI_EPT, MO_BRI_VUSR, MO_BRI_DUSR, MO_ASAI,
MO_DS_CO, MO_CO_TRK, MO_DS_DID, MO_DID_TRK, MO_DS_TIE, MO_
TIE_TRK, MO_DSPRI_TRK, MO_DS_OPS, MO_ANNOUNCE, MO_SN_PT,
MO_TDMCLK, MO_LPRI, MO_ABRI_PT, MO_ASAI_EPT, MO_ADX_PT,
MO_X25_PT, MO_AUX_TRK, MO_TT_DET, MO_CPT_DET, MO_TGEN_BD,
MO_PMOD, MO_CLAS_PT, MO_TGEN_BD, MO_LPMS, MO_LJOURNAL,
MO_LCDR, MO_PMSPRNT, MO_JNLPRNT, MO_PRICDR, MO_SECCDR,
MO_LSP, MO_EI_BD, MO_TDMBUS, MO_EPN_MB, MO_PACKET, MO_
EPN_SANITY, MO_PROCESSOR, MO_MEMORY, MO_SYSAM, MO_
ARCHA, MO_MSSNET, MO_TAPE, MO_DISK, MO_SYSTEM, MO_TTR_LEV,
MO_SYS_CONFIG, MO_CTONE_BD, MO_PNI_BD, MO_PACCON, MO_
EAA, MO_LINK

s-syn

S-SYN-PT, S-SYN-BD

stabd

ANL-LINE, ANL-NE-LINE, DIG-LINE, AUDIX-PT, DDP-D-PT, HYB-LINE,
MET-LINE, ANL-16-LINE, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, DDP-B-PT, DDP-A-PT,
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, DDP-BSET, DDP-ASAI, ANL-BD, ANL-BD, DIG-BD,
AUDIX-BD, NMI-BD, HYB-BD, MET-BD, ANL-BD, BRI-BD

stacrk

ANL-LINE, ANL-NE-LINE, DIG-LINE, AUDIX-PT, DDP-D-PT, HYB-LINE,
MET-LINE, ANL-16-LINE, OPS-LINE

stations

ANL-LINE, ANL-NE-LINE, DIG-LINE, AUDIX-PT, DDP-D-PT, HYB-LINE,
MET-LINE, ANL-16-LINE, OPS-LINE, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, DDP-B-PT,
DDP-A-PT, BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, DDP-BSET, DDP-ASAI

sys-prnt

SYS-PRNT

tape

TAPE, TAPE-DATA, PR-MAINT

tdm

SW-CTL, TDM-BUS

tone

TONE-PT, TONE-BD, TDM-CLK, SYNC, STRAT-3, TONE-BD, DTMR-PT,
GPTD-PT, DETR-BD, TTR-LEV, CLSFY-BD, CLSFY-PT

trkbd

CO-TRK, DID-TRK, AUX-TRK, TIE-TRK, TIE-DS1, CO-DS1, DID-DS1,
ISDN-TRK, CO-BD, DID-BD, AUX-BD, TIE-BD, DS1-BD, DS1-BD, UDS1-BD

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Category

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-120

Maintenance Objects

trkcrk

CO-TRK, DID-TRK, AUX-TRK, TIE-TRK, TIE-DS1, CO-DS1, DID-DS1,
IDSN-TRK, ISDN-LNK

trunks

CO-TRK, DID-TRK, AUX-TRK, TIE-TRK, TIE-DS1, CO-DS1, DID-DS1,
ISDN-TRK, ISDN-LNK, PE-BCHL, WAE-PORT

wide-band

PE-BCHL, WAE-PORT

Extension:

"Enter assigned extension"

Trunk (group)

"Enter group number between 1-99"

Trunk (member)

"Enter group member between 1-99, or blank"

Field Error Messages
Following are the error messages that will be displayed on the screen. The
messages are displayed when the system technician tabs out of a field and the
validation routines are executed. In the following messages, an "x" or "xxxxxxxx"
represents the characters that were entered by the user.
Interval:

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP key"

Error Type:

"Entry must be all digits"

From (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (day)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (day)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"

Cabinet

"Cabinet invalid"

Port Network Number:

"Port Network invalid"

Board Number:

"Board invalid"

Port:

"Port invalid"

Category:

""xxxxxxxx" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Extension:

"Entry must be all digits"

Trunk (group)

"Entry must be all digits"

Trunk (member)

"Entry must be all digits"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-121

FORM Output
After valid options are entered by the technician, a hardware error report is
displayed. The data displayed on this form will be:
Port

The location of the maintenance object. For installed circuit
packs, the location is displayed as
"cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit]." For Port Network-related objects,
the location is displayed as "PN xx," where "xx" is the Port
Network number.

Maintenance Name

The logical name of the maintenance object which has had an
error logged against it.

Alt Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xx
when the object is a private CO line, where xx is the private CO
line group number.

Error Type

A code identifying the type of problem encountered for this
maintenance object. Because the error code is generally specific
to the individual maintenance object and the total number of error
codes may be extensive, only the error number is displayed. The
technician must use this error number in conjunction with the
logical name information to determine the exact nature of the
error.

Aux Data

Additional information concerning the maintenance object error
condition which may be useful to the technician. Like the error
type, this data will be specific to the maintenance object type.
However, unlike the error code, only the most recent value of the
auxiliary data will be retained for each error record.

First Occur

The month, day, hour, and minute (and second if the
high-resolution command line option is used) that the error was
first recorded.

Seq Cnt

Sequence Count - This number indicates the order of errors
logged within a second for the time stamps associated with the
first occurrence and last occurrence of an error. This information
is displayed only if the "high-resolution" command line option is
entered. There may be gaps for the sequence numbers within a
given second since the last occurrence of an error may replace
an existing entry that had been assigned the missing sequence
number, and since sequence counts are also used with software
event information not shown in the hardware error log.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-122

Last Occur

The month, day, hour, and minute (and second if the
high-resolution command line option is used) of the most recent
error. Note: if the system is unable to retrieve the time of day
when the error occurred, a ‘dummy’ date will be stamped in the
log so as to distinguish it from reliable data. It would appear as
"00/00/01:07".

Err Cnt

Error Count - The total number of times that the error type has
occurred for this maintenance object. Should this field exceed
the display space allowed on the terminal screen (three
characters), the numbers will be replaced by ‘256’ This should
inform the technician that a larger number was encountered, but
could not be displayed correctly.

Err Rt

Error Rate - The average rate at which the errors have occurred
from the first occurrence to the present. Should this field exceed
the display space allowed on the terminal screen (three
characters), the numbers will be replaced by ‘256’ This should
inform the technician that a larger number was encountered, but
could not be displayed correctly.

Rt/Hr

Rate per Hour - An approximation of the rate that this error
occurred in the last hour. Should this field exceed the display
space allowed on the terminal screen (three characters), the
numbers will be replaced by ‘256’ This should inform the
technician that a larger number was encountered, but could not
be displayed correctly.

Al St

Alarm Status - A character indicating the status of this MO in the
error and alarm logs. The allowed values are:
■

a  Active alarm entry

■

r

■

 Resolved alarm entry
c  Resolved alarm entry as a result of the long “clear”
option of the test command.

■

s  Resolved alarm entry as a result of a software requested
(non-demand) system restart.

■

t  Resolved alarm entry as a result of a technician
requested system restart.

n  Not alarmed.
Ac

Active? - A flag indicating whether or not the maintenance object
is still under active consideration by the maintenance subsystem.
If set to ‘no’, maintenance no longer considers that this error
report indicates a problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display errors

Page 8-123

Example of Error Log Display without the
High-Resolution Command Line Option
For the following output example, the Enter key was pressed immediately after
entering the display errors command without the "high-resolution" command line
option. Only those errors associated with alarms display since the "Error List" field
on the options form defaults to ’active_alarms’.

display errors

Page

1

SPE A

HARDWARE ERROR REPORT - ACTIVE ALARMS
Port
01C0702
01C0701
01C0703
01A
01C1505
01C1505
02A0201
PN 02B

Mtce
Name
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
TDM-CLK
CO-TRK
CO-TRK
TONE-PT
TDM-BUS

Alt
Name
311
1051
1053

Err
Aux
Type Data
257
257
257
0
0
078/001 3329 57408
078/001 1537
0
18
0

First
Occur
01/31/09:20
01/31/20:26
01/31/20:26
01/31/20:34
01/31/20:26
01/31/20:26
01/31/20:34
01/31/14:53

Last
Err Err Rt/ Al Ac
Occur
Cnt Rt Hr St
01/31/20:26 255 256 255 a y
01/31/20:26 4
0
4
a y
01/31/20:26 4
0
4
a y
01/31/20:34 1
0
1
a n
01/31/20:27 5
300 5
a y
01/31/20:28 5
150 5
a y
01/31/20:34 1
0
1
a y
01/31/21:12 1
0
1
a n

Command successfully completed

Example of Error Log Display with the
High-Resolution Command Line Option
For the following output example, the ENTER key was pressed immediately after
entering the display errors command with the "high-resolution" command line
option. Only those errors associated with alarms are displayed since the "Error
List" field on the options form defaults to ’active_alarms’.

display errors high-resolution

Page

1

SPE A

HIGH RESOLUTION HARDWARE ERROR REPORT - ACTIVE ALARMS
Port
01C0702
01C0701
01C0703
01A
01C1505
01C1505
02A0201
PN 02B

Mtce
Name
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
TDM-CLK
CO-TRK
CO-TRK
TONE-PT
TDM-BUS

Alt
Name
311
1051
1053

Err
Aux
First
Seq
Last
Seq Err Al
Type Data
Occur
Cnt
Occur
Cnt Cnt St
257
01/31/09:20:21 1 01/31/20:26:05 1 255 a
257
01/31/20:26:18 1 01/31/20:26:18 7 4
a
257
01/31/20:26:18 2 01/31/20:26:18 8 4
a
0
0
01/31/20:34:35 1 01/31/20:34:35 1 1
a
078/001 3329 57408 01/31/20:26:07 1 01/31/20:27:28 1 5
a
078/001 1537
01/31/20:26:52 1 01/31/20:28:41 1 5
a
0
01/31/20:34:28 1 01/31/20:34:28 1 1
a
18
0
01/31/14:53:03 1 01/31/21:12:22 1 1
a

Command successfully completed

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display events

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-124

Feature Interactions
None.

display events
display events [print]
A vector event is the occurrence of something unexpected during a
vector-routed call due to resource exhaustion or faulty vector programming. (For
example, route-step failures are typically due to the programming of an invalid
extension.) These types of failures are not due to faulty hardware or system
software error and do not constitute incorrect feature operation. This command
allows you to diagnose and correct vectoring problems due to the
above-mentioned causes. See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Call
Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide, 555-230-520, for information
on how to interpret this report.

Input Form
The following entry form is displayed to allow limiting the report to events of a
certain type or from a certain time period. Enter the desired parameters and
press ENTER.

Category

‘‘Vector’’ specifies the type of event report to display and is the only
valid entry.

Report Period

The fields in this section allow you to view only those vector events that
occurred within a specific time period. If these are left blank, all vector
events recorded are displayed.

Interval:

This field specifies a display of all events within the last time period of
the type Enter the first letter of one of the following selections: all,
month, day, hour, minute.

Start/Stop
Time

The starting and ending times, in 24-hour notation, of the interval to be
reported.

Vector
Number

The number of the vector (1-256) for which events will be reported. If
this field is left blank, events for all vectors will be reported.

Event Type

Specific types of vector events are associated with numbers from
50000 to 50999. Entering one of these numbers will limit the report to
events of this type. If this field is left blank, events for all types of
vectors will be reported.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display events

Page 8-125

Output
See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Call Vectoring and Expert
Agent Selection (EAS) Guide, 555-230-520, for more information on how to
interpret this report. In particular, the Event Data 2 field will be associated with
possible causes and repair strategies for the event.
Event Type

A number from 50000 to 50999 that identifies what type of vector event
occurred.

Event
Description

A text string describing the event.

Event Data 1

If in the format number/number such as ‘‘200/10’’, this indicates the
vector number and step number associated with the event. If in the
format ‘‘Split number’’ such as ‘‘Split 2’’, this indicates the split number.

Event Data 2

Additional data concerning the event encoded as a hex number.

First Occur

The date and time when the vector event first occurred.

Last Occur

The date and time when the vector event last occurred.

Evnt Cnt

The total number of times, up to 255, that vector events of this type
have occurred.
The following example shows the input form for display events:

display events

Page

1 of

1

SPE B

EVENT REPORT
The following options control which events will be displayed.
EVENT CATEGORY
Category: vector
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: _a_

From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__

SEARCH OPTIONS
Vector Number: ___
Event Type: _____

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Page 8-126

The following example shows a typical vector event report.

display events

Page

1

SPE B

EVENTS REPORT
Event Event
Type Description

Event
Data 1

50020 Call not queued
50541 Not a messaging split

256/5
Split 89

Event
Data 2

B
4C

First
Occur

Last
Occur

Evnt
Cnt

09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43
09/28/13:43 09/28/13:43

1
1

display initcauses
This command records and displays a history of restarts performed by the
system.

Synopsis
display initcauses [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
display initcauses
display initcauses print
display initcauses schedule

Description
The display initcauses command displays a history of recovery steps taken by
the system. This command displays information for restarts of the active
processor only. Each time the system performs some type of recovery (due to
user request or a hardware or software problem), the recovery information is
stored. The software error log also contains information pertaining to restarts. If a
reset 4 (reboot) occurs, the software error log will also be stored on tape.
Information in the software error log should be used in conjunction with
information in the initcauses log.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-127

The history of the last 16 restarts performed by the system will be recorded to the
initcauses buffer in chronological order. This buffer will fill an entire screen with
information if it is completely full. Power failures in the processor complex wipe
out the entire initcauses buffer which is stored by the software. In duplex
systems, both processors have to lose power before the information will be lost.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "display initcauses" the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-128

Output
Cause

The cause field indicates the reason for the restart.
■

Active Down: (high or critical reliability system only) The Active SPE
went into SPE Down mode. The Duplication Interface initiated an
SPE-interchange to the Standby SPE. If this initcause triggers an SPE
interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the
previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that
occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of
display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a high or critical
reliability system does a PEI with a warm start, the system software
often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after
the warm start has occurred.

■

Bad Handshake: (High or Critical Reliability system only) The
Duplication Interface received inconsistent handshakes from the
Active SPE. Thus, the Duplication Interface initiated an
SPE-interchange to the Standby SPE. If this initcause triggers an SPE
interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the
previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that
occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of
display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical
Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software
often requests a COLD 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after
the warm start has occurred.

■

Bad Memory: A defective memory circuit pack generating too many
errors caused a restart.

■

System Technician Request: The restart was performed because of
system technician demand. A system technician-requested reset
system 4 command entry should always precede an upgrade
software command entry.

■

Failed Interchange: A "hot-start" interchange (system
technician-demanded, scheduled, or software-requested) failed
because shadowing was disabled.

■

From Monitor (mon): (For Development Environment only)

■

Initialized: This is always the first entry in the history and is present
until more than 15 restarts have been performed. It indicates
power-up and also occurs if the Maintenance/Tape Processor is reset
during initialization.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-129

■

LMM Request: A sanity time-out was requested by the LMM
firmware. The three processor circuit pack LEDs blink until the sanity
timer goes off. The LMM requests a restart like this when it gets into
trouble, usually with memory.

■

Maintenance Reset: The Maintenance/Tape Processor or
Duplication Interface reset the system. This refers to resets of the SPE
by maintenance in SPE Down mode in which maintenance
periodically tries to awaken the SPE.

■

No Handshake: (High or Critical Reliability System only) The
Duplication Interface lost handshaking with the active SPE. Thus, the
Duplication Interface initiated an SPE-interchange to the Standby
SPE. A defective tape drive may cause the Active SPE to miss
handshakes with the Duplication Interface which, in turn, could result
in an initialization cause of "No Handshake." Check the Hardware
Error Log for TAPE-related error types and alarms and follow the
recommended repair procedures in the TAPE Maintenance
documentation. If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the
Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log
may actually represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE.
See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete
explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a
warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to
recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred.

■

Oryx Request: A sanity time-out was requested by the Oryx
operating system. The three processor circuit pack LEDs blink until
the sanity timer goes off. Oryx requests a restart like this when it gets
into trouble, usually with software.

■

Sanity Timer Reset: The sanity timer on the processor timed out and
reset the system. This event usually indicates a software fault.

■

Scheduled Interchange: A scheduled SPE-interchange occurred.

■

Software Request: Software requested the system restart. In a
system equipped with High or Critical Reliability, software can also
request SPE-interchanges when it detects problems. See the
Software Requested Interchanges Caused by Alarm Conditions table
(Table 6-1) in the "SPE-Interchanges" section of Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. If this initcause triggers an SPE
interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the
previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that
occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of
display initcauses for a complete explanation.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-130

■

SPE-Select Lead Change: (High or Critical Reliability System only)
The system could not determine why the SPE changed its status from
Active or Standby. However, this change usually indicates a transition
from Active to Standby. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a
PEI with a warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2
restart to recover properly only minutes after the warm start has
occurred.

■

SPE-Select Switch: (High or Critical Reliability System only) The
SPE-Select switches on the Duplication Interface circuit packs were
thrown to select the Standby SPE, which became the Active SPE,
using the restart level shown. It is also possible to get an initialization
cause of SPE-Select Switch when SPE B is active and power to carrier
B is lost. In this case, an SPE switch to SPE A occurs and the
initialization cause can show either SPE-Select Switch or SPE Down. If
this initcause triggers an SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT
in Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually
represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the
preceding description of display initcauses for a complete
explanation.

■

Stby-SPE Core Dump: (High or Critical Reliability System only) The
Standby SPE had finished a core dump when an interchange took
place that made the Standby SPE the Active SPE. If this initcause
triggers an SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT in
Maintenance mode, the previous entry in the log may actually
represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE. See the
preceding description of display initcauses for a complete
explanation. If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a
warm start, the system software often requests a Cold 2 restart to
recover properly only minutes after the warm start has occurred.

■

Stby-SPE Tests: (high or critical reliability system only) The Standby
SPE was in the process of running tests at the request of the Active
SPE when an interchange occurred. If this initcause triggers an
SPE-interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode, the
previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that
occurred on the Standby SPE. See the preceding description of
display initcauses for a complete explanation. If a High or Critical
Reliability System does a PEI with a warm start, the system software
often requests a Cold 2 restart to recover properly only minutes after
the warm start has occurred.

■

Unknown: A restart that could not be classified. The Software Error
Log may contain more information about the restart.

■

Upgrade Software: (High or Critical Reliability System only) This
indicates that the system was upgraded to a new software generic
using the Standby SPE to load the new software via the upgrade
software command. A system technician-requested reset system 4
command should be the previous entry.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display initcauses

Action

Escalated

Page 8-131

■

LMM Put Fail: This initcause occurs when the LMM has failed to
place the request for initcause message in the DPR. This could occur
if the MTP does not respond to the DPR handshake. Level of Restart:
Warm (escalation turned on).

■

LMM Get Fail: This initcause occurs when the LMM does not receive
a response to the request for initcause message from the MTP. This
could occur if the MTP is not taking messages out of the DPR. Level of
Restart: Warm (escalation turned on).

■

Dupint Unknown: This initcause occurs when the LMM receives an
UNKNOWN initcause from the Dupint. This could occur in a High or
Critical Reliability System where the MTP thinks a PEI has occurred
but the dupint disagrees. Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned
on).

■

MTP Reset Unknown: This initcause occurs when the LMM has reset
the MTP during the process of trying to get initcause from the MTP.
Level of Restart: Warm (escalation turned on).

■

S-vintage Mismatch: This initcause occurs when a mismatch in the
duplication super vintage is detected by the LMM. Level of Restart:
Reboot (no escalation).

■

Monitor Reset: (For Development Environment Only) This initcause
occurs when "ini 1" is executed from the Flash Monitor. This initcause
can occur only in systems with SBB. Level of Restart: Reboot (no
escalation).

■

Bad GDT: (For Development Environment Only) This initcause occurs
when the LMM fails to transfer control to Oryx/Pecos because of
absence of entry in GDT to point at O/P. This usually occurs in a
system with no Idata. Again, this should only occur in systems with
SBB.

The level of recovery performed by the system. The recovery levels
follow:
■

Reset system 1 (Warm)

■

Reset system 2 (Cold-2)

■

Reset system 3 (Cold-1)

■

Reset system 4 (Reboot)

■

Reset system 5 (Extended Reboot)

■

Reset system interchange (High or Critical Reliability System only hot restart interchange)

Whether the restart was escalated to a higher level to clear the problem.
There is a software escalation strategy which can cause a higher level of
restart than the one previously performed to be executed if the need
arises.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display memory-configuration

Page 8-132

Carrier

The "carrier" statement indicates the carrier on which the recovery was
performed (possible values are 1A and 1B). In most cases, this "carrier" is
the Active SPE carrier when the restart occurs. However, it is possible in a
High or Critical Reliability System that this carrier was the Standby carrier.
See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete
explanation.

Time

The date (month and day) and time of the restart.
For the following output example, the command display initcauses was entered.

display initcauses
INITIALIZATION CAUSES
Cause
Action
Initialized
4
System Technician Request
i
System Technician Request
i
Sanity Timer Reset
1
Sanity Timer Reset
1
Sanity Timer Reset
2
Scheduled Interchange
i
Bad Handshake
1
Software Request
2
System Technician Request
1
System Technician Request
4
Upgrade Software
2
Software Request
i
System Technician Request
2
Software Request
1
No Handshake
1

Escalated
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no

Carrier
1B
1A
1B
1B
1B
1B
1A
1B
1B
1B
1A
1A
1B
1B
1A
1A

Time
08/01
08/01
08/01
08/02
08/02
08/02
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/05
08/05
08/05
08/06
08/06
08/09
08/09

1:14
2:14
2:18
6:03
6:08
6:14
2:33
2:34
8:22
8:23
9:15
9:29
7:00
7:09
2:34
2:36

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

display memory-configuration
This command displays the active and standby processor Flash Read-Only
Memory and Dynamic Random Access Memory configurations.

Synopsis
display memory-configuration [ long]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display memory-configuration

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-133

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: browse, system
technician, cust, inads, init.

Examples
display memory-configuration
display memory-configuration long

Description
The maintenance command, display memory-configuration, will indicate the total
memory available for the active, and if present the standby, processor(s). This
command is a single page display with hidden fields for the standby-processor;
these hidden fields will only be visible if a standby processor is available in the
system.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

long

The “long” command parameter is required to display the standby SPE
Flash ROM and DRAM configuration.

print

If specified, this parameter will cause the information displayed by this
command to be sent to the printer attached to the terminal as well as to
the screen.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "display
memory-configuration" the following message will be displayed:
Enter [‘long’] [‘print’ or ‘schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display memory-configuration

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-134

Error Messages
If “display memory-configuration” is executed, the following error message will
appear on the SAT status line:
“memory-configuration” is an invalid entry; please press HELP
If ““display memory-configuration long” is executed on a simplex system, the
following error message will appear on the SAT status line:
”long” is an invalid identifier; please press HELP
If “display memory-configuration long” is executed when the standby processor
is not available, the following message will appear on the SAT status line:
Cannot access the standby SPE at this time

Output
The following output example is for the display memory long command.

display memory-configuration long
PROCESSOR MEMORY-CONFIGURATION
(M bytes)

SPE_A
Flash ROM:

16

16

Total DRAM:

12

12

SIMM A:
SIMM B:
SIMM C:

4
4
4

4
4
4

Command successfully completed
Command:

SPE_B

SP_A

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-135

The following output example is for the display memory command.

display memory-configuration
PROCESSOR MEMORY-CONFIGURATION
(M bytes)

SPE_A
Flash ROM:

16

Total DRAM:

12

SIMM A:
SIMM B:
SIMM C:

4
4
4

SP_A

SPE_B

Command successfully completed
Command:

Feature Interactions
None

display port
This command displays information for a specified port.

Synopsis
display port location [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: browse, system
technician, cust, inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-136

Examples
display port 1c0801
display port 1c0802 print
display port 2c1504 schedule

Description
The display port command displays the port location, the equipment connected
to the port, and the means by which the port can be identified (e.g. an extension
number, the trunk group and member, etc.).

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

llocation

the location represents the physical position of the port to be
displayed and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the
cabinet number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the
slot position, and "pp" represents the circuit. A single digit cabinet (1 9) may be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

print

If specified, this parameter will cause the information displayed by this
command to be sent to the printer attached to the terminal as well as
to the screen.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "display port" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter assigned port, [’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the port location is incorrect, the following message is displayed:
Identifier invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display synchronization

Page 8-137

If the port location is not administered, the following message is displayed:
Identifier not assigned

If the specified port location is out of range, the following message is displayed:
Port/Board location invalid

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

Output

Port:

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the specified user
specified port.

Equipment Type:

The hardware that is physically connected to the user specified port.

Identification:

This depends on the hardware that is physically connected to the
port. If a station is connected to the port the station extension is
displayed, if a trunk is connected to the port a trunk group and
member is displayed, If a modem pool is connected to the port, the
modem pool group is displayed, etc.

For the following output example the command "display port 1c0801" was
entered.

display port 1c0801

SPE A
PORT INFORMATION

Port: 01C0801
Equipment Type: Station
Identification: 1021

Feature Interactions
None

display synchronization
This command displays the system synchronization administration such as
stratum level (3,4), primary and secondary synchronization reference sources
and DS1 boards.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display synchronization

Page 8-138

Synopsis
display synchronization [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
display synchronization
display synchronization print
display synchronization schedule

Description
The display synchronization command will bring up the synchronization form.
The administered synchronization stratum and reference sources will be
displayed on this form. This command does not allow for any changes to be
made to the system synchronization.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and then
a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command
queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by
the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "display time" the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display synchronization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-139

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Stratum:

This field specifies the synchronization stratum that is used. The only
possible entries are "3" and "4."

Primary:

This field designate the first choice system synchronization source. A
blank entry means no synchronization. This field is valid only if stratum 4
synchronization is specified.

Secondary:

This field designate the second choice system synchronization source.
A blank entry means no synchronization. This field is valid only if stratum
4 synchronization is specified.

Location:

The circuit pack location (cabinet-carrier-slot) of all administered DS1
circuit packs are listed here.

Name:

If a user defined name is administered for the DS1 circuit pack, it will be
displayed here. Blank means no user defined name was given to this
DS1 circuit pack.

Slip:

If the DS1 circuit pack has slip alarm, this field will show ’y’. Otherwise it
will show ’n’.

Port Network:

This field is only valid for stratum 3 synchronization. The field specifies
the port network that supplies synchronization via the tone clock circuit
pack.

For the following output example, the command display synchronization was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

display synchronization

Page 8-140

Page

1 of

2

SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE (DS1 circuit pack location)
Stratum: 4
Primary:

Secondary:
DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS

Location
02B10 D92D1
02B11 d92D1
01C10 D92D1
01C11 D92D1

Name
Slip
ds1 2b10
n
ds1 2b11
n
ds1 1c10
n
ds1 1c11
n

Location

Name

Slip

NOTE: TN722B DS1 sources result in stratum 4, type II synchronization

display synchronization

Page

2 of

2

SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN
DS1 CIRCUIT PACKS
Location

Name

Slip

Location

Name

Slip

Feature Interactions
A DS1 interface or a UDS1 board that has been selected as either a primary or
secondary synchronization source cannot be removed on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form or the regular circuit pack administration form.

display system-parameters
maintenance
This command displays existing maintenance-related system parameters.

Synopsis
display system-parameters maintenance [print | schedule]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-141

Permissions
Logins with the following service levels may execute this command: craft, inads,
init, super-user, or logins with Maintain Switch Circuit Packs permissions
enabled.

Examples
display system-parameters maintenance
display system-parameters maintenance print
display system-parameters maintenance schedule

Description
The “display system-parameters maintenance” command displays the
translation data for maintenance related system parameters.

Parameters
Print

This option will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the
SAT.

Schedule

When the schedule option is specified, the command is validated and a
schedule form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command at a specified time. The information
displayed by the command will be sent to the system printer instead of
the screen.
For more information see "Command Groups" at the beginning of this chapter.

Help Messages
The following help message will be displayed when the system technician
presses the help key after entering the display system-parameters
maintenance command:
[‘Print’ or ‘schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-142

Output
An input form is displayed with the following fields. Defaults for data entry fields
are listed in parentheses.
Product Identification

This is a 10-digit number starting with 1 that identifies the switch
to an Operations Support System (OSS), for example, INADS.

First OSS Telephone
Number

The first telephone number that the switch uses to report alarms
to, for example, INADS or Trouble Tracker. The number must be
obtained from the National Customer Support Center (NCSC) or
the TSC. # and * are not allowed in the telephone number.

Abbrev Alarm Report

Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS.
(yes)

Second OSS
Telephone Number

The second telephone number that the switch uses to report
alarms to, for example, INADS or Definity SNMP. The number
must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center
(NCSC) or the TSC. # and * are not allowed in the telephone
number.

Abbrev Alarm Report

Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the second
OSS. (no)

Alarm Origination to
OSS Numbers

Indicates one of four options for alarm origination (neither):
■

If “both,” all Major and Minor alarms result in an automatic
call to both OSS telephone numbers. Both OSS telephone
numbers must be administered.

■

If “first-only,” all Major and Minor alarms result in an
automatic call to the first OSS number only. The switch does
not call the second OSS telephone number even if the
number is administered. The first OSS telephone number
must be administered

■

If “neither,” alarm origination does not take place. Warning
alarms are not reported to either numbers.

■

If “second-as-backup,” all Major and Minor alarms result in
an automatic call to the first OSS telephone number. If
calling the first OSS telephone number fails four attempts,
the switch starts to call the second OSS telephone number
as a backup until calling the first OSS telephone number
becomes successful. Both OSS telephone numbers must be
administered.

Before Release 5, the name of this field is “Alarm Origination
Activated.” If Alarm Origination is deactivated, both Cleared
Alarm Notification and Restart Notification are disabled, even
though they may still be activated in the administration.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-143

Cleared Alarm
Notification

Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and send an
alarm resolution message whenever all previously reported
Major and Minor alarms are resolved. Alarm Origination must be
activated in order for Cleared Alarm Notification to work. (no)

Restart Notification

Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and report any
system restarts caused by problems with the switch.

Suspension
Threshold

The threshold for suspending Cleared Alarm Notification. Some
problems may cause alarms to be generated and then resolved
repeatedly. To detect these problems (by not sending additional
Cleared Alarm notifications to indicate a problem- free system),
the switch suspends Cleared Alarm Notification when it has
reported this administrable number of Cleared Alarm
notifications in a 24 hour period. A suspended Cleared Alarm
Notification is only enabled again with a successfully completed
“logoff” command, a system reset, or when the threshold is
changed. This field is irrelevant if Cleared Alarm Notification or
Alarm Origination is disabled. The possible range of threshold
values is between 1 and 15.

Test Remote Access
Port

Specifies whether testing of the remote access port on the
SYSAM circuit pack is enabled. This field should be set to "yes"
whenever there is an INADS line connected to the switch and
there is a maintenance contract in effect so that alarm
origination capability is maintained.

CPE Alarm Activation
Level

Indicates the minimum level (Major, Minor or Warning) at which
the Customer-Provided Equipment (CPE) alarm is activated. If
the level is "none," the CPE does is not activated for any alarm.
(none)
NOTE:
The CPE alarm is always activated when the switch goes
into Emergency Transfer, regardless of the CPE Alarm
Activation Level setting.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Packet Bus Activated

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-144

Enables the system Packet Bus.
If this field is set to ‘‘yes'', then maintenance software assumes
that there is a Packet Control circuit pack installed in the
system. The packet endpoints (for example, ASAI, and/or BRI)
may be administered, and maintenance testing runs on both
the Packet Control circuit pack and on the Packet Bus (This
field should be set to “yes” after a packet control circuit pack is
installed.). If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed in the
system, then a major alarm is raised against the PKT-CTRL MO.
This field can only be changed from ‘‘yes'' to ‘‘no'' if there are
no packet endpoints administered, thus ensuring that there
can be no packet endpoints administered if the packet bus is
not activated.
This field should be set to “yes” after a Packet Control circuit
pack is installed.
If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, then this field
should be set to ‘‘no'' (the only exception is when setting up
translations for a system for which not all of the required
hardware is available). (no)

Customer Access to
INADS Port

Provides the capability to prohibit access to system
administration and maintenance interface, via the INADS port
when using customer login ID’s. This field can only be activated
by Lucent services through system-parameters maintenance
administration.(no)

Repeat Dial Interval
(MMS)

Indicates the number of minutes that the system must wait
before attempting another call origination to an OSS. This timer
is triggered by the lack of a far-end acknowledgment. (7)

Scheduled Maintenance
A series of maintenance tests and operations runs automatically every day
according to the schedule and settings specified in the following fields.
Start Time

The hour and minute in 24-hour notation at which daily scheduled
maintenance will begin running. (22:00)

Stop Time

The hour and minute when scheduled daily maintenance will stop
running. If any daily maintenance operations are not completed by
this time, the system will note where in the sequence it stopped and
perform those operations during the next scheduled daily
maintenance.

Daily
Maintenance

This display-only field simply represents the series of tests that are
always run by maintenance software as part of daily maintenance.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-145

Save Translation

This field indicates on which days translation data in memory will
automatically be saved to the Mass Storage System disk and/or
tape devices during scheduled maintenance. The save operation is
first made to disk, followed by a disk backup to tape. On systems
with duplicated SPEs, translation data is saved on both SPEs. Valid
entries are daily, days of the week, or no. "No" specifies that no
automatic saves are to be executed. (daily)

Control Channel
Interchange

Each port network has a pair of TDM busses called A and B, each
of which has a set of time slots dedicated to use by the control
channel. At any one time, the control channel in each PN is carried
on only one of the two busses. This field indicates on which days
the control channel in each port network will be switched from one
of the paired TDM busses to the other. Valid entries are daily, days
of the week, or no. "No" specifies that no interchange be executed.
(no)

System Clocks
Interchange

On High and Critical Reliability systems, this option causes a
Tone-Clock interchange in each port network with duplicated
Tone-Clock circuit packs. Each port network interchanges into the
standby Tone-Clock for 20 seconds and then back to the
Tone-Clock that was originally active. This field indicates on which
days the interchanges are to take place. Valid entries are daily,
days of the week, or no. "No" specifies that interchanges be
executed. (no)

SPE Interchange

On systems with duplicated SPEs, this field indicates on which
days an SPE interchange will be executed during scheduled
maintenance. Valid entries are daily, days of the week, or no. "No"
specifies no scheduled interchanges. (no)

EXP-LINK
Interchange

This field indicates whether or not the expansion links between
port-networks are interchanged as part of scheduled
maintenance. The value ‘‘daily'' means that EXP-LINK interchange
occurs automatically everyday. The value ‘‘no'' means that
EXP-LINK interchange is not done automatically as part of
scheduled maintenance. Values represented by the days of the
week mean that EXP-LINK interchange occurs automatically on
the specified day only. Since EXP-LINK interchange only applies
to duplicated systems, simplex systems do not display this field.
(no)

Minimum
Threshold for
TTRs

When the number of touch tone receivers (TTRs) in service falls
below this number (4 to 200), a WARNING alarm is raised against
TTR-LEV. These are also known as dual-tone multifrequency
receivers (DTMRs). There are 4 TTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector
circuit pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first
occurrence of a TTR being taken out of service, set this field to 4
times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than three
less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one
TN748 could lose all of its TTRs before this alarm is raised.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-146

Minimum
Threshold for
CPTRs

When the number of call progress tone receivers in service falls
below this number (2 to 100), a WARNING alarm is raised against
TTR-LEV. These are also known as general purpose tone detectors
(GPTDs). There are 2 CPTRs on each TN748 Tone Detector circuit
pack, and up to 50 TN748s in a system. To alarm the first
occurrence of a CPTR being taken out of service, set this field to 2
times the number of TN748s. If this number is set to more than one
less than the total number of TTRs, a port network with only one
TN748 could lose all of its CPTRs before this alarm is raised.

Minimum
Threshold for Call
Classifier Ports

When the number of call classifier ports (CLSFY-PTs) in service falls
below this number, a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR-LEV.
Valid entries are 1 to 200. There are 8 ports on each TN744 Call
Classifier circuit pack, and up to 25 TN744s in a system. To alarm
the first occurrence of a CLSFY-PT being taken out of service, set
this field to 8 times the number of TN744s. If this number is set to
more than 7 less than the total number of CSLFY-PTs in the system,
a port network with only one TN744 could lose all of its CLSFY-PTS
before the alarm is raised. If there are no TN744s in the system,
leave this field blank.

Test Type 100,
Test Type 102,
Test Type 105

An extension assigned to receive tie-trunk calls from other switches
with test line origination capability. The system responds by
sending a sequence of test tones. Test Type 100 tests far-end to
near-end loss and C-message by sending:
■

5.5 seconds of 1004 Hz tone at 0dB

■

Quiet until disconnect; disconnect is forced after one minute

ISDN-PRI Test
Call Extension

The extension used by a far-end ISDN node to place a call to the
system to test the ISDN-PRI trunks between the far-end and the
system.

ISDN-BRI Service
SPID

This field shows whether or not the link is associated with the
Service SPID. If the link is associated with the Service SPID, this
field contains a "yes" and the extension field is blank; otherwise, this
field is blank. Service SPID is a feature used by the system
technician to check building wiring between the switch and the BRI
endpoint.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

DSO
Loop-Around
Test Call
Extension

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-147

This field contains the extension number for the test call extension
number. This test extension number will be used to establish a
loop-around connection on the selected trunk.
The DSO Loop-Around Test Call feature is used primarily for testing
DSO channels associated with non-ISDN-PRI trunks. The
loop-around is activated by dialing the test extension number.
Multiple DSO Loop-Around connections can be set up by placing
multiple calls to the loop-around extension.
The DS0 Loop Around feature provides a loop around connection
for incoming non-ISDN DS1 trunk data calls. This feature is similar
to the far-end loop around connection provided for the ISDN Test
Call feature. This DS0 loop around is provided primarily to allow a
network service provider to perform facility testing at the DS0 level
before video teleconferencing terminals are installed at the PBX.
The feature is activated on a call-by-call basis by dialing a test call
extension specified on the second page of the System Parameters
Maintenance form. No special hardware is required. When the test
call extension is received by the PBX, a non-inverting, 64 kbps
connection is set up on the PBX’s Time Division Multiplexed bus.
More than one loop around call can be active at the same time.
For calls routed over the public network using the ACCUNET
Switched Digital Service (SDS) or Software Defined Data Network
(SDDN), the data transmission rate is 56 Kbps, since robbed bit
signaling is used. For calls established over a private network using
common channel signaling, the full 64 kbps data rate is available.
When the incoming trunk group is used only for data calls (SDS),
the Communications Type on the associated Trunk Group form
should be set to "data." When the incoming trunk group is used for
robbed bit alternate voice and/or data (SDN/SDDN), the
Communications Type on the Trunk Group form should be set to
"rbavd" (robbed bit alternate voice data). For private network trunks
using common channel signaling, the Communications Type on the
associated Trunk Group form can be set to "avd."

Loss Plan

Use only when extra loss is required to maintain quality of
transmission on conference calls. Leave this field blank if no extra
loss is required. If extra loss is required, enter digits as shown
below.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

SPE Optional
Boards:

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-148

No. of Parties to Be
Conferenced

Enter Digit

3

2

4

3

5

4

6

5

7

6

These fields indicate whether a Disk circuit pack is present in the
system, and which Packet Interface slots are administered. If a
Packet Interface circuit pack is physically present, the
corresponding Packet Interface field is set to y when the system
boots, and no change to that field is allowed. If the system is
equipped with duplicated SPEs, a Packet Interface field is set to y
when either SPE carrier contains a Packet Interface circuit pack in
the corresponding position. If a Packet Interface circuit pack is not
present, then the value for the Packet Interface field is read from
translation data stored on disk or tape. If the field is set to n, a
Packet Interface circuit pack may be administered by changing the
corresponding Packet Interface field to y.

Modem Connection
On page 3 of the example forms shown below, there are 11 fields that are hidden
when the “Modem Connection?” field is set to internal. In this example the
“Modem Connection” field is set to “external” and these additional 11 fields are
visible.
The first 2 fields on page 3 help setup the data format for the serial data from the
switch to the modem. The field names are, “Data Bits:”, and “Parity?”. There are
only two valid combinations for these 2 fields:
■

Data Bits = 8, Parity = None

■

Data Bits = 7, Parity =(odd , even, mark, or space)

The remaining fields are listed below:

Modem
Connection

The only valid entries for this field are “internal” or “external”. The
default is set to internal. (internal)

Modem Name

This field is 20 characters long and will permit alpha-numeric characters to provide a unique qualifier for a given modem. The field is
called “Modem Name: ”. ( )

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-149

RTS/CTS Enabled

This field will inform the modem that communication with the data
source UART will be driven with RTS/CTS flow control. This field is 6
characters long with a default of “\Q3”. This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper case. (\Q3)

Asynchronous
Data Mode

This field will configure the modem as an asynchronous communications device. This field is 8 characters long with a default of
“&M0&Q0”.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper
case. (&M0&Q0)

DTE Auto-Data
Speed

This option will adjust the speed of the data source (DTE) UART to
the outgoing (modem-to-modem) data rate. So, at maximum this
speed would be 9600 baud.
This field is 6 characters long with a blank as default .
This field is case in-sensitive. ( )

Disable Data
Compression

This field will turn off the default data compression algorithms that
are in use by most consumer modems. This field is 6 characters
long with blank as the default. The AT commands that control this
capability are supported by similar commands; however, these
commands do not operate in the same manner.
The Intel modems require the use of “H%C0” to disable V.42bis &
MNP Class 5 data compression algorithms; however, the Paradyne
products only use “%C0” to disable both algorithms.
This field is case in-sensitive; with blank as the default. ( )

Enable Error
Control

This field will turn on the V.42 LAPM and MNP error control protocols, if available on the modem. This field is 6 characters long with
blank as the default.
This V.42/MNP/Buffer mode first attempts to negotiate V.42 error
control with the remote modem. If this fails, then the modem transitions to MNP, and if this fails then no error control is used.
This field is case in-sensitive. ( )

Misc. Init. Param

This field is 20 characters long with blank as the default. This field
supports any initialization parameters that are not already specified.
The AT commands specified in this free-form field will be always the
last initialization parameters to be sent to the external modem.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper
case. ( )

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

Auto-Answer
Ring Count

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-150

This field controls the number of rings required before the modem
will automatically answer an incoming call. This field is 6 characters
long with “S0=10” as the default. Typically, the maximum permissible value for this register is 255. The values 1-255 denote the number of incoming ring cycles.
This field is case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper
case. (S0=10)

Dial Type

This field controls the type of inter-register signaling to be used
between the modem and the Central Office. The field name is “Dial
Type: ” with a default of “T” for tone dialing. Pulse dialing is
indicated by “P”. The field length should be 3 characters long. This
field will be concatenated with the dial string. This field will be case
in-sensitive; however, the default will be in upper case. (T)

Adjustable
Make/Break Ratio

This field can be of particular importance when using a modem that
may be transferable from country to country. The intent of this field
is to control the make/break ratios of pulses and DTMF dialing. The
Intel product information has support for the different make/break
options for pulse dialing only.
Intel uses the option “&P0” to select a ratio of 39% make and 61%
break for communication within the U.S. and Canada. The option
“&P1” sets a ration of 33% make and 67% break for the U.K. and
Hong Kong.
This field is 5 characters long with blank as the default.
This field will be case in-sensitive.

Dial Command

This field is 3 characters long with “D” as the default.. This field simply denotes the dialing command of the modem. This is a fairly standard command.
This field will be case in-sensitive; however, the default will be in
upper case. (D)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display system-parameters maintenance

No Answer
Time-Out

Page 8-151

Most off-the-shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons
any outbound data call after a predetermined interval. Some
modems provide for this timer to be disabled, thus allowing an outbound call to ring indefinitely. AT&T Paradyne does not provide this
capability with their modem line, because it is generally undesirable
to have an outbound call attempt ring indefinitely.
The internal modem must have this parameter disabled or set to at
least 255 seconds.
This is a non-administrable parameter. For the external modem connection, this parameter will be the first initialization string to be
transmitted to the external modem. This field will be visible on the
administration form in display mode only.
This hardcoded constant can be overriden for type approval applications, specifically in the U.K and other Western European nations,
by the use of the “Misc. Init. Param:” field. (S7=255)

The following display shows a typical result when display system-parameters
maintenance is entered.

display system-parameters maintenance
MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS
Product Identification:
First OSS Telephone Number:
Second OSS Telephone Number:
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers:
Cleared Alarm Notification?
Restart Notification?
Test Remote Access Port?
CPE Alarm Activation Level:
Packet Bus Activated?
Customer Access to INADS Port?
Repeat Dial Interval (mins):
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Start Time:
Daily Maintenance:
Control Channel Interchange:
SPE Interchange:

22: 00
daily
no
no

1000000000
5551212
5551213
both
y
y
n
none
n
n
7

Page

1 of 3

Abbrev Alarm Report? y
Abbrev Alarm Report? n

Stop Time: 04: 00
Save Translation: daily
System Clocks Interchange: no
EXP-LINK Interchange: no

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display time

display system-parameters maintenance

Page 8-152

Page 2 of 3

MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification )
Minimum Threshold for TTRs: 4
Minimum Threshold for CPTRs: 1
Minimum Threshold for Call Classifier Ports: _
TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST (Extension)
Test Type 100:
Test Type 102:
Test Type 105:
ISDN MAINTENANCE
ISDN-PRI TEST CALL Extension: _____

ISDN BRI Service SPID: _____

DS1 MAINTENANCE
DSO Loop-Around Test Call Extension: 1001
LOSS PLAN (Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required)
Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss: _____
SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS
Disk? y
Packet Intf1? y

Packet Intf2? n

change system-parameters maintenance

Packet Intf3? n

Page 3 of 3

MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Modem Connection: external
Data Bits: 8
Parity: none
Modem Name: intel
RTS/CTS Enabled:
Asynchronous Data Mode:
DTE Auto-Data Speed:
Disable Data Compression:
Enable Error Control:
Misc. Init. Param:

\Q3
Auto Answer Ring Count (rings):
&M0&Q0
Dial Type:
\J1
Adjustable Make/Break Ratio:
H0%C0
Dial Command:
\N3
No Answer Time-out:
____________________

Help/Error Message Line
Command Line

display time
This command displays the system time.

S0=10
T
&P0
D
S7=255

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
display time

Page 8-153

Synopsis
display time [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse.

Examples
display time
display time print
display time schedule

Description
The display time command will bring up the time form. The system time will be
displayed on this form. This command does not allow for any changes to be
made to the system time.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and then
a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule execution
of the command. The command is then placed in the command queue and
is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by the
command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen. Refer to the
Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification [2] for more
details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "display time" the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Page 8-154

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Day of the Week

The day of the week that the system has stored.

Day of the Month

The numerical day of the month.

Month

The month of the year stored by the system.

Year

The current year stored by the system.

Hour

The hour of the current day.

Minute

The number of minutes into the hour.

Second

The number of seconds into the minute stored by the system.
For the following output example, the command display time was entered.

display time
DATE AND TIME
DATE
Day of the Week: Sunday
Day of the Month: 1

Month: January
Year: 1990

TIME
Hour: 6
Minute: 8

Second: 20

Feature Interactions
The date and time are generally used by the switch.

download update-file
This command provides a mechanism for downloading a field update file from
INADS or a personal computer using the XMODEM protocol.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Page 8-155

Synopsis
download update-file

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads and init.

Examples
download update-file

Description
The update file is transferred to the switch asynchronously from either an INADS
host or a personnel computer (PC) using the XMODEM protocol. The switch is
called asynchronously (either using the "call" command from an INADS host, or
by dialing the switch directly with a modem. Once the connection has been
established, the user logs into the switch as a remote system access terminal
(SAT), using the inads login.
Only the INADS and INIT logins have the necessary permission to send an
update file to the switch.
The command "download update-file" is entered at the SAT to initiate the
download of the update file and, when this command is entered, the switch will
respond with "Please wait ...". After some initialization at the switch has
completed, the command displays: "Please start file transmission now...". At this
point, an XMODEM session should be started up on the remote end and the
update file should be sent. If an INADS host is being used, enter ~dload  to start the file transmission. If a PC is being used, follow the instructions
in the emulator’s manual for invoking an XMODEM session to send the update
file.
As each block is received by the switch, it is written to tape or flash. Error
detection and retransmission are provided by the link level of XMODEM.
Additional protection is provided within the application level. After the entire file
has been written to tape or flash it is read back and each update file block is
validated. The file checksum is also checked. If the file appears to be sound, the
status word in the header block is then changed to indicate that there is a valid
update file.
There may be a delay (of up to 5 minutes on a duplex system) between the end
of the file transmission and command completion. This delay is caused by the
patch application of any immediate sub-patches and, if on a duplex system, the
automatic copy of the update file to the standby SPE which take place as a result
of the reception of a valid update file.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Page 8-156

In a High or Critical Reliability System, the connection to the INADS host
computer may be dropped (by the INADS side) but the process of copying the
patch file to the standby processor continues. The standby is placed in
maintenance mode and a call placed between active and standby via the data
channels. The file is transmitted in the same way for both tape and flash based
systems. The same checks are made on the receiving side as were made during
and after the original download. If no errors are found, the file is marked valid.
There is no feedback to the user on the status of the standby copy. If an error is
encountered during the copy or validation process on the standby, an error is
logged in the software error log. The data consistency audit will discover that the
two patch files are inconsistent and the user must manually copy the valid file on
the active processor to the standby processor.
The software does not indicate when the copy has completed, so scripts run by
the TSC must not issue an immediate reset on High or Critical Reliability Systems.
This will interrupt the copy and guarantee that the field update files on the two
processors are inconsistent. This problem can be avoided by using one of the
following techniques:
■

Use two scripts: the first to apply the patch and a second, to be run later,
to issue the reset that applies the patch. This requires two calls to each
duplicated switch.

■

Put a delay into the scripts which causes the scripts to wait a period of
time after downloading the file and before issuing the reset. This requires
only one call, but the amount of delay time required is not well defined as it
depends on system load.

■

Use a manual means of detecting when the copy has completed: either a
"PASS" on the data consistency audit or a match on the "list configuration
software" form. This requires only one call and introduces less delay in
requesting the reset.

Help Messages
There is no associated help message as the command has no options.

Error Messages
If the vintage of the standby SPE doesn’t match the vintage of the active SPE, the
following message is displayed:
Update file vintage does not match standby SPE core vintage

If the patch identifier in the update file does not match the patch identifier in
memory, the following message is displayed:
Update file patch identifier does not match SPE patch identifier

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Page 8-157

If an update file which is created for a different system (i.e.,. a patch file is
created for a tape system and downloaded to a flash system), the following
message is displayed:
Update file designed for a different configuration, file will not be used

If the update file is too large to fit in the remaining space, the following message
is displayed:
Update file is too large to fit on device

If the calculated file checksum is incorrect, the following message will be
displayed:
File checksum failed; file will not be used

If an invalid update file block was found, the following message will be displayed:
Found a bad file block; file will not be used

If the total number of blocks listed in the header block of the update file did not
match the number of blocks received by the SPE, the following message is
displayed:
Received an invalid number of blocks; file will be ignored

The total number of subpatches listed in the header of the update file did not
match the number of subpatches received by the switch
Received wrong number of subpatches for update file

Output
None

Feature Interactions
The form displayed for the list configuration software-vintage command has been
modified to reflect the changes imposed by the flash architecture. The list
configuration software command should allow INADS to determine, with one
query, the hardware configuration, software vintage and patch identifier.
There is no interaction with routine periodic or scheduled maintenance because
patches are only applied on restarts before the system is in normal operation.
The flash checksum test acts as a backup check to make sure the entire field
update file was applied correctly. It can fail because of a bad checksum update
from a poorly constructed update file or because the patching operation has
aborted. When the flash Checksum Test fails, a MAJOR on-board alarm is raised
on the processor/memory circuit pack. Maintenance runs a data consistency test
on a daily basis to check that copies of translations, announcements and
software files are consistent across both processors in a High or Critical

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-158

Reliability System. If the test detects a difference, a minor, off-board alarm is
generated.
When checking the software, the test compares the memory resident software
version and patch identifier. It also checks for the presence of a field update file
and, if found, compares the old and new patch identifiers to make sure the same
patch file id loaded on each processor. If the software or update files are
inconsistent, the "list configuration software" command can be used to display
the status of the patch file.

RECOVERY PROCEDURES
This sections describes the procedures to be followed to recover from failures
encountered during the download and application of the update file. The
instructions apply to both simplex and duplex switches; additional detail is given
when needed.

Error on the Transmission of the Download
If the error displayed on the terminal indicates that the download step in the
process failed, there are several culprits:
1. The transmission line could have been noisy. Retry after making all the
following checks. Failed attempts take up room in the hard patch file and
may require a warm start to clear the file.
2. The user may have downloaded the tape/MIPS version of the patch
instead of the flash version.
3. The vintage of the update file may not match the vintage of software
currently running in the system. Check the customer’s vintage using "list
config software" and patch vintage provided in the documentation.
4. The switch may have had difficulty in writing to the hard patch file. Check
the hardware error log for processor/memory board failures.
5. The hard patch file may be full. Issue a "reset system 1". This should cause
valid files to be applied and invalid ones to be erased.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
download update-file

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-159

Error on Application of the Patch
A patch may not have been applied for the following reasons:
1. The memory card was write-protected. Remove this protection and issue a
reset system x command
2. The patch identifiers were inconsistent. Run list configuration software
and compare the old_patch identifier with the values in the update file.
3. The LMM encountered a problem with the patch file. This is unlikely
because the same checks, and more, were performed when the file was
downloaded, prior to marking the file valid. This implies that the memory
which stored the update file was corrupted. Apply the back out file
immediately to back out the changes. Run the flash checksum test to
make sure the system is back to its prepatch state. Check the validity of
the file again with the development community and then try redownloading
and applying the patch immediately.
4. The LMM reports a hard error. The symptoms of this is an entry in the
hardware error log for the processor/memory board, if you’re lucky, or
extremely odd switch behavior followed by SPE down mode if you’re not.
The problem is that the LMM couldn’t complete the programming of
memory with the result that memory is in a corrupted state. The only
recovery is to visit the site armed with new software and processor/
memory circuit packs.
In a High or Critical Reliability System, the failure causes a switch to the
standby processor. The hardware on the standby must be repaired and
the patch redownloaded. (There was nothing wrong with the patch)

Good Application - Bad Patch
This error is caused, not by a failure in the download or application, but by a fault
in the patch file itself. To recover from this type of problem, the back out file
which backs out the patch should be downloaded and applied. Clearly, this
requires that the system be sane enough to receive the file correctly and be able
to apply it.
In a High or Critical Reliability System, the user has about eight minutes to
recognize that a problem exists and force an interchange to the standby
processor. If this can be done, the file on the newly active processor can be
invalidated using a file containing a destroy tuple or the wp byte command. The
standby can be restored to a normal state using the back out file.

Inconsistent Software Versions on a Duplicated
Switch
Inconsistent software, as indicated by a failure in the data consistency test, can
be caused by problems copying the update file to the standby or validation test
failures on the standby. Unlike the tape or MIPS systems which revert to the same
version of software as a result of a refresh, a flash system remains inconsistent

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable administered-connection

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-160

until manually initiated steps are taken. Use the list config software command to
determine the status of the vintages, patch identifiers and patch file data on both
the active and standby processor.
1. If one processor looks as if it has been patched (updated patch identifier
and no update file) and the other looks as if the patch file is still present
(no patch identifier and valid update file), the application of the patch can
be forced by making that processor active and requesting the system
restart indicated in the accompanying documentation.
2. If one processor has a copy of the update file and the other doesn’t
(neither has been patched), the file can be copied using the command
copy update-file.
3. If patch identifiers disagree but neither side has a valid update file, the
missing patch should be redownloaded to the system. During the
download process the file will pass the vintage test and be copied to the
standby processor. Validation tests will then be run on both machines. On
the next restart, the patch will be applied to memory. This procedure is
less disruptive to the customer if the unpatched processor is the standby
at the time of the restart.

enable administered-connection
This command restarts scheduled and periodic maintenance for a single
administered connection or all administered connections.

Synopsis
enable administered-connection [ ac number | all ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init, system
technician, cust, rcust, mis.

Examples
enable administered-connection all
enable administered-connection 1
enable administered-connection 128

Description
The enable administered connection command causes scheduled and periodic
maintenance to function normally for all or single administered connection(s).
This command can be used to track the maintenance processing of

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable administered-connection

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-161

administered connections without interference from other maintenance
processing. This commands restarts the processing of in-line errors for all or the
selected administered connection.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
ac number

The number of the administered connection being enabled.

all

IF "all" is entered then all administered connections are enabled.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "enable administered-connection", the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned administered connection number(1-128) or ’all’

Error Messages
If the administered connection number entered is not "all" and is non numeric, the
following message is displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the administered connection number entered is not within the valid range of
connections, the following message is displayed:
Entry out of range

If the connection number entered is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Identifier not assigned

If the administered connection number entered is already enabled, the following
message is displayed:
Administered connection already enabled

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-162

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit

Output
After the user has entered the command and the command is successful, the
following message appears at the bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

enable mst
This command allows the user to enable the trace buffer.

Synopsis
enable mst

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
enable mst

Description
Enables the message trace. The trace is controlled according to the parameters
on the "change mst" screen. If executed while the trace is enabled, it has no
effect and indicates that it worked.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable suspend-alm-orig

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-163

Help Messages
If you press Help after entering "enable mst", the following message displays:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command conflicts with another currently executing command, a message
displays the login ID of the conflicting user and the conflicting command.
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
After you enter the command the following message displays:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

enable suspend-alm-orig
This command suspends Alarm Origination for alarms generated from a
specified hardware component over a time-out duration.

Synopsis
enable suspend-alm-orig (board or port location) [off-board-only]
expires-in-hrs(1-72).

Examples
enable suspend-alm-orig 1C03 expires-in-hrs 3
enable suspend-alm-orig 1E0701 expires-in-hrs 72
enable suspend-alm-orig 1E07 off-board-only expires-in-hrs 24

Description
This command enables Suspend Alarm Origination for a board (which also
includes all ports and endpoints on the board) or for a port (which includes all
endpoints on the port), and either for both on- and off-board alarms or for
off-board alarms only. Many control circuit packs do not have a board location,
so this command cannot support all circuit packs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable suspend-alm-orig

Page 8-164

On the command line, specify a time-out duration between one and 72 hours.
The “off-board-only” keyword is optional; if the keyword is not specified, the entry
suspends Alarm Origination for both on-and off-board alarms. Each enable
command becomes a new entry or replaces an existing entry in the Suspend
Alarm Origination table. A new entry that matches both the physical location and
off-only/on- and off-board specifications of an active entry replaces the active
entry in the Suspend Alarm Origination table.
This command may be particularly useful for improving control over situations
such as the following:
■

Improved control over customer requests. For example, to suspend
off-board DS1 alarms temporarily for customers that periodically
disconnect DS1 trunks for testing or other business related purposes.

■

Improved control over external (non-Lucent) problems. For example, to
suspend off-board DS1 alarms before a customer resolves facility
problems (such as working with the vendor of a T1 trunk that has
developed an off-board condition).

■

Improved control over internal (Lucent) problems that we cannot resolve
right away. For example, to suspend Alarm Origination for a bad circuit
pack detected late Friday night and we cannot dispatch personnel to
replace the circuit pack until well into Monday.

■

Improved control over chronic problems that we have not yet found a
solution to.
NOTE:
Also see other Suspend Alarm Origination related commands, including
“disable suspend-alm-orig” and “list suspend-alm-orig”.

Defaults
This command enables Suspend Alarm Origination for both on- and off-board
alarms if the “off-board-only” keyword is not specified.

Parameter
board or port
location

This parameter specifies the physical location of the hardware
component for suspending Alarm Origination.

off-board-only

This option enables Suspend Alarm Origination for off-board alarms
only.

expires-in-hrs

This parameter specifies the time-out duration for a Suspend Alarm
Origination entry. Expired entries are removed automatically.

Help Messages
Enter board or port location,
[‘off-board-only’], expires-in-hrs(1-72)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable synchronization-switch

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-165

Output
The command returns one of the following messages:
1. If the time-out duration is not between one and 72:
XX is an invalid identifier; please press HELP
2. If the port or board specifier is not valid:
Port/Board invalid
3. If the Suspend Alarm Origination table is full:
Table full; cannot enable a new entry

Feature Interactions
None.

enable synchronization-switch
This command re-enables automatic clock switching.

Synopsis
enable synchronization-switch

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
enable synchronization-switch

Description
The enable synchronization-switch command puts the automatic clock switching
capability of the maintenance subsystem back into a normal state. Clock refers to
the oscillator on a tone/clock or DS1 interface.
The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication
between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The
subsystem is made up of system components involved in synchronization: TDM
bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in
the SPE.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable synchronization-switch

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-166

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "enable
synchronization-switch" the following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the enable synchronization-switch command is successful, the following
message will be displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the enable synchronization-switch command is unsuccessful, the following
message will be displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the enable command is run and synchronization-switch is currently enabled,
the following message will be displayed on the SAT:
Synchronization-switch already enabled

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
enable test-number

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-167

enable test-number
This command enables a previously disabled test number.

Synopsis
enable test-number number

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
enable test-number 102

Description
This command will re-enable the specified test number that was previously
disabled. This will cause that the test number be allowed to run on the next
request by maintenance or the technician.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
number

This is the specific test number to re-enable.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "enable test-number" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter test number

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
format card-mem

Page 8-168

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy

Output
If the enable test-number command is successful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

If the enable test-number command is unsuccessful, the following message will
be displayed on the SAT:
Error encountered, cannot complete request

Feature Interactions
The display disabled-tests command gives a list of all disabled tests.

format card-mem
This command formats the active processor Flash Read-Only Memory.

Synopsis
format card-mem [translation] [announcements] [coredump] [firmware]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: browse, system
technician, cust, inads, init.

Examples
format card-mem
format card-mem
format card-mem
format card-mem

translation
announcements
coredump
firmware

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
format card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-169

Description
The maintenance command, “format card-mem” will erase and format the memory card for
translations announcements, coredump, and firmware.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
translation

If specified, this parameter will erase and format the memory card
for translations only.

announcements

If specified, this parameter erase and format the memory card for
translations and announcements.

coredump

If specified, this parameter will erase and format the memory card
for translations, announcements and coredump

firmware

If specified, this parameter erase and format the memory card for
translations, announcements and firmware

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "format card-mem" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter ‘translation’ or ‘announcements’ or ‘coredump’ or ‘firmware’
‘translation’ option formats for translation only
‘announcements’ option formats for translation and announcements
‘coredump’ option formats for translation, announcements, and code-dump
‘firmware’ option formats for translation, announcements, and firmware
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

Error Messages
If the format memory [translation] [announcements] [coredump] [firmware]
maintenance command is executed and errors occur, one of the following error
messages will be displayed:
Memory card is not inserted in the system
Cannot turn on 12 volt power supply
Memory card is write-protected
Unknown type of memory card
Could not write to memory card
Could not erase memory card
Memory card too large for operation requested
Memory card too small for operation requested
Error encountered, memory card unusable

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
get vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-170

Output
The following output example is for the format card-mem command.

FORMAT FLASH MEMORY CARD
Processor
SPE-A

Command Completion Status
SUCCESS

------------------------------------------------------------------------------Command successfully completed
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Command: format card-mem translation

Feature Interactions
None

get vector
This command displays the conditions and the Switch Processing Element (SPE)
associated with a core dump of memory to tape or memory card.

Synopsis
get vector long print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
get vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-171

Examples
get vector
get vector print
get vector long
get vector long print

Description
The get vector command displays the vector and the Switch Processing Element
(SPE) used for a core dump of memory to tape or memory card. The dump
occurs on the tape or disk of the previously active SPE (or the SPE previously
specified using the "set vector" command in systems with duplicated SPEs).
The vector is cleared when a system restart of the proper level is performed
regardless of whether the core is actually dumped.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

long

This causes timestamps for the core dump to be printed. If SPEs are duplicated,
timestamps are printed for both SPEs (or a message stating why the timestamp
cannot be printed is displayed).

print

This causes the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "get vector" the following
message will be displayed:
[’long’], [’print’]

Error Messages
If a list configuration command is still executing while the "get vector" command
is entered, the following message will be displayed:
Still clearing previously canceled command; please try later

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
get vector

Page 8-172

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, the following
message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Core Dump Vector

The condition(s) which cause(s) a core dump to a tape drive or
memory card are represented by a hexadecimal value. The
hexadecimal value is a bit map of the four reset conditions which
cause the dump. These conditions from least to most significant bit
are: warm start, cold 2 restart, cold 1 restart, and reboot. A core
dump vector of 0 signifies that the vector is cleared or not set.
Vector-Condition Mapping
value

warm-start

cold-2

cold-1

reboot

0

n

n

n

n

1

y

n

n

n

2

n

y

n

n

3

y

y

n

n

4

n

n

y

n

5

y

n

y

n

6

n

y

y

n

7

y

y

y

n

8

n

n

n

y

9

y

n

n

y

a

n

y

n

y

b

y

y

n

y

c

n

n

y

y

d

y

n

y

y

e

n

y

y

y

f

y

y

y

y

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list configuration

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-173

Set Vector
Command Option

The user specified SPE prior to the core dump. For simplex SPE
systems this field will always be "spe-active" unless the vector is
cleared or not set. For duplex SPE systems the field will be either
"spe-active" or "spe-standby" unless the vector is cleared or not
set. If the vector is cleared or not set in either a duplex or simplex
SPE system, this field will display blanks.

Core Dump Time

The time that the core dump was taken. This field displays
timestamps for both "SPE_A" and "SPE_B." If the system has a
simplex SPE, a timestamp will be displayed for "SPE_A" (or the
active SPE) and "non duplicated SPE" will be displayed for "SPE_
B." If the core dump cannot be accessed a message of "can’t
access" will be displayed for the corresponding SPE (e.g. in a
High or Critical Reliability System where SPE B is not refreshed,
"SPE_B" displays "can’t access" instead of a timestamp). If the
MSS device storing the core dump timestamp is busy for any
reason a "device busy" message is displayed.

For the following output example, the command get vector was entered on a
duplex SPE system after a core dump occurred when the vector bit was set.
Assume SPE B was the active processor prior to the core dump, but SPE A is the
current active processor.

get vector
GET RESULTS
Core Dump Vector
0

Set Vector Command Option
spe-active

Core Dump Time
SPE_A
SPE_B
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

list configuration
list configuration hardware-group [print | schedule]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list configuration

Page 8-174

NOTE:
The list configuration software-version command is discussed
separately under its own heading.
Hardware configuration reports list, for each circuit pack in the group specified,
the type, code, suffix, and vintage of the requested circuit packs as installed in
the switch, and all ports assigned to the circuit pack.

Parameters
Enter one of the following hardware groups.
■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

carriers all— Specifies the display of all circuit packs administered
and/or physically inserted in port, switch node and control carriers on the
entire system.
board PCSS— Specifies the display of all assigned ports on the circuit
pack specified by cabinet, carrier and slot.
carrier c— Specifies the display of all circuit packs and assigned ports
on a specified carrier.
control— Specifies the display of all circuit packs located in the control
complex.
ds1— Specifies the display of all the DS1 (TN722, TN767 and TN464)
circuit packs administered and/or physically inserted in port carriers on
the entire system.
port-network pn#— Specifies the display of all circuit packs located in a
specified port network. List cabinet gives the port network number(s)
associated with a particular cabinet. Circuit packs on switch node carriers
are not displayed when the port-network qualifier is entered. To display
SN circuit packs, use the all, carrier or board qualifiers.
stations—Specifies the display of all circuit packs that can be assigned
stations (including DS1 circuit packs for remote stations). All assigned
ports are displayed.
trunks—Specifies the display of all circuit packs that can be used for
administering trunks. All assigned ports are displayed.

Examples
list configuration carrier 2c schedule
list configuration port-network 5
list configuration stations print

Output
Assigned Ports:
■

Board Number— The functional name of the circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list configuration
■
■

■
■

■

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-175

Code — The TN or UN code and suffix of the circuit packs are displayed.
Vintage 00000000-065535 KKKKKK— The vintage number of the circuit
pack.
no board — The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed.
conflict — The circuit pack administered to the slot differs from the circuit
pack that is physically installed.
no link — The T1 link is down to a DS1 circuit pack.

Field definitions:
■

■

■

Signaling —This field is displayed only when "list configuration ds1"
option is selected. The contents of the field are the same as the signaling
mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack (via add/change ds1
command) or "none" if the circuit pack is not administered.
Name — This field is displayed only when "list configuration ds1" option is
selected. The contents of the field are the same as the name administered
for the ds1 circuit pack (via add/change ds1 command) or "blank" if the
circuit pack is not administered.
CSU MOD — This field is displayed only when "list configuration ds1"
option is selected. The field contains the identification number of the
Integrated CSU module present on the ds1 circuit pack (TN767E or later /
TN464F or later) or "none". If the circuit pack is a TN464E or TN767D,
"unknown" will be displayed. If the circuit pack is a TN464D or TN767C or
earlier suffix DS1 board, then "n/a" will be displayed.

Assigned Ports
Each port on the circuit pack is represented by a position corresponding to its
circuit number in ascending order from left to right. The assigned ports are not
displayed for "list configuration ds1". Two rows are required for circuit packs with
more then 8 ports. The position displays one of the following values depending
on its administered status:
■

01-16 — The circuit number of an assigned port.

■

u — The port corresponding to this position exists but is unassigned.

■

t — The port is not currently assigned and is supported by the Terminal
Translation Initialization feature. Ports in this state can be activated by the
TTI association sequence.

Each port on a TN556 ISDN-BRI circuit pack can have two BRI endpoints. BRI
ports are displayed once when assigned only one endpoint and twice when fully
configured with two endpoints.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Page 8-176

The following display shows a typical result when list configuration all is
entered.
.

list configuration all

Page

1

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Board
Number

Board Type

Code

01C00
01C01
01C02
01C03
01C05
01C06

MAINTENANCE/TEST
AUXILIARY TRUNK
EXPANSION INTRFC
PGATE BOARD
TONE DETECTOR
DS1 INTERFACE

TN771C
TN748C

01C07
01C08
01C09
01C11
01C12
01C13

ANALOG LINE
HYBRID LINE
ANALOG LINE
DIGITAL LINE
DID TRUNK
ANALOG LINE

TN577
TN748B
TN767

TN742
TN762B
TN742
TN754
TN753
TN742

press CANCEL to quit --

Vintage

Assigned Ports
u=unassigned t=tti

000003
conflict
no board
000003
000002
01
000011
u
u
u
000010
u
000004
u
000010
u
000004
u
000006
u
000010
u

u
u

02 03 04
u u u

u
02
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u

u u u
03 u 05 06 07
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u
u u u u u

press NEXT PAGE to continue

The following display shows a typical result when list configuration ds1 is
entered.

list configuration ds1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - DS1 Circuit Packs
Location

Code

Vintage

Signaling

01B05
01B06
01B10
01B11
01B12
01C06
01C13
01C16
01C18

TN464F
TN464D
TN767C
TN767E
TN767E

000002
000002
000003
000003
conflict
no board
000003
000024
000002

isdn-pri
isdn-pri
none
robbed-bit
none
none
common-channel
robbed-bit
isdn-pri

TN464E
TN767D
TN464F

Name

list config software-version
list configuration software-version [memory-resident | long]
[print | schedule]
This command displays

CSU MOD
120A1
n/a
n/a
120A1


unknown
unkonwn
none

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-177

■

Software version numbers and compatibility indexes of the software load
modules stored in system memory (RAM) and on the Mass Storage
System devices (tape).

■

The dates and times when translation and announcement data were last
saved to the MSS.

■

Information about any software update files that have been applied to the
system. See "Software Upgrade" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’ for an explanation of software versions and compatibility
indexes.

Parameters
long

Specifies display of data for both SPEs in a high or critical reliability
If not used, only data for the active SPE is shown.

memory-resident

Specifies display of RAM-resident files only. Fields for tape data will
contain n/a

Output
If the tape or memory card contains a core dump file, fields for tape or memory
card data display coredump. When a core dump is present, all other files on the
device are marked invalid.
If the memory card cannot be read at the time the command is entered, the
relevant fields display no tape or memory card. (This does not indicate that
the system does not recognize the presence of the device.)
Fields in the SPE-B column are blank for standard reliability systems. On high
and critical reliability systems, only fields for the active SPE are displayed unless
the long option is specified.

UPDATE FILE Section
The top half of page 1 of the form displays information pertaining to software
field-update files (‘‘patches’’).
Creation (GMT)
Tape and
(GMT) Disk

When the update file was originally created, in Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT). Note that this is not the time at which the update file
was written to the MSS device.

Old-Version
Tape and Disk

The software version for which the update was created.

Old-Identifier
Tape and Disk

Which previous update file this update file expected to find stored in
the MSS when it was applied.

New-Identifier
Tape and Disk

Uniquely identifies the current update file.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Page 8-178

SOFTWARE VERSION Section
This section at the bottom of page 1 of the output form displays information
related to the current software-load module stored in memory and in the MSS.
Memory
Resident

Version number of the RAM-resident load module.

Mem Card
Resident

Version of memory card resident load module. If a memory card is
not installed, this field will display “no card”.

Update-identifier
(Patch
Identifier)

This uniquely identifies the update file, if any, that has been applied
to memory.

Update-state
(Patch State)

The status of the software field-update (‘‘patch’’) file id is displayed.

TRANSLATION DATE Section
This section displays information related to the translation files as stored in
memory and the MSS.
Memory
Resident

Date and time marked on the tape or disk when translation data was last
read from the MSS into memory. This is stored in SPE memory and is not
modified by changes to translation data. A save translation will update
this date. If "Date invalid" is displayed, the timestamp does not contain
the expected information.

Mem Card
Resident

The last date and time that translation data was saved to the memory
card. This date is read from the memory card at command execution. If
a memory card is not installed, this field will display “no card”.

PI FW VERSION Section
This section displays information related to the Processor Interface (PI) circuit
pack firmware. Information is displayed for the PI circuit pack resident copy as
well as the corresponding tape file..
PI 1 Resident

The version of firmware in the first PI circuit pack in the control carrier.

PI 2 Resident

The version of firmware in the second PI circuit pack in the control
carrier.

Flash Resident

The version of PI firmware residing on the system flash memory.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-179

ANNOUNCEMENT DATE Section
This section displays information related to the announcement files. Information is
displayed for the memory resident copy as well as the corresponding MSS file.
Mem Card
Resident

The last date and time that announcement data was
saved to the memory card. If the memory card is not
installed, this field will display “no card”..

PKT-CTRL FW VERSION Section
This section displays information related to the Packet Control firmware.
Information is displayed for the Packet Control circuit pack resident copy as well
as the corresponding tape file..
Pkt-ctrl Resident

The version of firmware in the Packet Control circuit pack.

Flash Resident

The version of the Packet Control circuit pack residing on the system
flash memory.

Some things to note when using the list configuration software-version
command are:
1. For simplex systems, the fields under column “SPE_B are always blank
and the optional Long qualifier is not part of the command line.
2. For a High or Critical Reliability System, the fields under the column of the
standby SPE are blank if the optional long modifier is not given.
3. If the tape or memory card contains a core dump file system, fields for the
tape or memory card will contain coredump. This is because in a
coredump file system all files other than the coredump file are marked as
invalid.
4. If for any reason, MSS can not be read when the command is issued the
string no tape or none for no memory card will be placed in the
appropriate fields on the screen. This does not mean that the system
thinks there is no tape, only that the software was unable to read the
appropriate information when requested.
5. If the command is issued using the memory-resident option, the fields on
the form associated with the tape will contain the string n/a.
6. When the status of the update field is displayed, the following strings will
be used (For more information refer to step 3 of this list):

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Page 8-180

1. none in memory

No update has been applied to memory.

2. immediate partially
applied

An error condition that is valid only when an
update that is in the process of being
applied fails. Check the validity of the
update file that was sent, and then check the
hardware error log for tape errors, and follow
standard maintenance procedures.

3. all immediate
applied deferred
pending

A valid update file was received by the
switch, and all the immediate sub-patches
were applied. This state indicates that there
are deferred sub-patches in the update file,
and a system reset of the proper level has
not occurred since the update file was
received.

4. deferred partially
applied

An error condition that is valid only when a
update that is in the process of being
applied fails. Check the validity of the
update file that was sent, and then check the
hardware error log for tape errors, and follow
standard maintenance procedures.

5. entirely applied to
memory

The update associated with the
memory-resident identifier has been
completely applied to memory.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Page 8-181

The following display shows a typical result when list configuration
software-version is entered.

list configuration software-version

Page

1

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
SPE-A
UPDATE FILE
Creation (GMT) Date:
Old Version Tape:
Old Identifier Tape:
New Identifier Tape:
Update State:

SPE-B

none
none
none
none
none in memory

SOFTWARE VERSION
Memory Resident: G3V4i.03.0.049.0
Mem Card Resident: none
Update Identifier: none
TRANSLATION DATE
Memory Resident:
Mem Card Resident:

1:00 am MON FEB 26, 1992
1:00 am MON FEB 26, 1992

press CANCEL to quit --

press NEXT PAGE to continue

list configuration software-version

Page

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
SPE-A
PI FW VERSION
PI 1 Resident: 000162
PI 2 Resident: none
Flash Resident: 000162

ANNOUNCEMENT DATE
Mem Card Resident: none
PKT-CTRL FW VERSION
Pkt-Ctrl Resident: 000021
Flash Resident: 000021

SPE-B

2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list config software-version

Page 8-182

list configuration software-version

Page

1

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
SPE-A
UPDATE FILE
Creation (GMT) Date:
Old Version Tape:
Old Identifier Tape:
New Identifier Tape:
Update State:

SPE-B

4:17 pm FRI NOV 3,1995
G3V4i.03.0.044.0
none
000010
new update ready to be
applied

SOFTWARE VERSION
Memory Resident: G3V4i.03.0.044.0
Mem Card Resident: none
Update Identifier: none

4:17 pm FRI NOV 3, 1995
G3V4i .03.0.044.0
none
000010
entirely applied
to memory

G3V4i .03.0.044.0
none
000010

TRANSLATION DATE
Memory Resident: 1:01 pm THU NOV 2, 1995
Mem Card Resident: 1:01 pm THU NOV 2, 1995
list config log applied patch to standby
press CANCEL to quit --

press NEXT PAGE to continue

list configuration software-version

Page

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
SPE-A
PI FW VERSION
PI 1 Resident: 000162
PI 2 Resident: none
Flash Resident: 000162

SPE-B
PI FW VERSION
PI 1 Resident: 000162
PI 2 Resident: none
Flash Resident: 000162

PI 1 Resident: 000162
PI 2 Resident: none
Flash Resident: 000162

PI 1 Resident: 000162
PI 2 Resident: none
Flash Resident: 000162

ANNOUNCEMENT DATE
Mem Card Resident: none

ANNOUNCEMENT DATE
Mem Card Resident: none

PKT-CTRL FW VERSION
Pkt-Ctrl Resident: 000021
Flash Resident: 000021

PKT-CTRL FW VERSION
Pkt-Ctrl Resident: 000021
Flash Resident: 000021

2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list disabled-mos

Page 8-183

list disabled-mos

SOFTWARE VERSIONS
SPE-A

SPE-B

COMPATIBILITY INDEX
Memory Resident: 8.3
Tape Resident: 8.3
Disk Resident: 8.3

This command displays all the MOs that have been maintenance disabled in the
system.

Synopsis
list disabled-MOs [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
list disabled-MOs
list disabled-MOs print
list disabled-MOs schedule

Description
This command will display a list of the specific MOs that have been disabled with
the disable MO, disable MO-all, or disable all commands.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list disabled-mos

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-184

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "list disabled-MOs" the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy, try again later

Output

Maintenance
Name

The type of maintenance object or group of maintenance objects that
have been disabled. "ALL" is also valid.

Location

The physical location of the maintenance object that has been
disabled. This field displays blanks if all maintenance objects have
been disabled (disable all) or all MOs of a specific type have been
disabled (disable MO-all).

Status

Whether the maintenance object or group of maintenance objects is
"Enabled" or "Disabled."

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list history

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-185

list disabled-MOs
DISABLED MAINTENANCE OBJECT INFORMATION
Maintenance Name
ALL
DIG-LINE

Location
02A1203

Status
Enabled
Disabled

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

list history
This command generates a log listing of the most recent "data affecting"
administration and maintenance commands.

Synopsis
list history [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: browse, system technician,
cust, inads, init, nms.

Examples
list history
list history print
list history schedule

Description
The list history command generates a log listing of the most recent "data
affecting" administration and maintenance commands successfully completed.
Data commands are those administration and maintenance commands that
change the data state associated with any object and qualifier in the system.
Administration data commands affect translation data while maintenance data

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list history

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-186

commands affect state information. For example, "change station" would be
classed as a data command, whereas "display station" would not.
All information in the transaction log is saved on tape as translation data when
the "save translation" command is performed (LIFO order). When the switch
COLD I starts or reboots, the saved translation, and thus the transaction log, will
be loaded from tape. In this way, the translation data and the data in the
transaction log will remain compatible.

Defaults
None.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [2] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list history", the following
message is displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
None.

Output

Date

The date the command was issued. Format "mm/dd" where "mm" is the
month and "dd" is the day.

Time

The time the command was issued. Format "hh:mm" where "hh" is the
hour and "mm" is the minute.

Port

The port field indicates the port type to which the user was connected
when the command was issued.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list history

Port
Number

Board

Page 8-187

List History
Display

0 - 30

EPN Maintenance Board Port

MAINT

31 - 40

System Access Port

SYS-PORT

41

Maintenance Board Port

SYSAM-LCL

42

Remote Maintenance Board Port

SYSAM-RMT

Login

The login of the user performing the data command; for example
"system technician."

Actn

The first word (verb) of the command, specifying the operation to be
performed. This field is truncated after four characters to allow enough
space for objects and qualifiers. Four characters is enough to uniquely
identify each action.

Object

The second phrase of the command specifying the particular thing
being acted upon by the command. Note: Where the object is multiple
words in length, only the first word will be displayed in the object field.
All succeeding words will be treated as qualifiers. This field is
truncated after twelve characters to allow enough space for qualifiers.
Twelve characters is enough to uniquely identify each object.

Qualifier

One or more qualifiers which specify the characteristics of the
action/object pair. This field is truncated after 31 characters to keep
information for a command on a single line.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list isdn-testcall

Page 8-188

The following output is for the list history command.

list history

Page

1

SPE A

HISTORY
Date of Loaded Translation: 11:34am Mon Apr 20, 1992
Date
4/20
4/20
4/20
4/20
4/20
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18
4/18

Time
17:23
11:34
11:25
11:25
11:25
17:59
17:59
17:58
17:58
17:58
17:58
17:57
17:57
17:57

Port
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL
SYSAM-LCL

press CANCEL to quit --

Login
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init
init

Actn
go
cha
add
cha
add
clea
test
clea
enab
cha
disa
test
clea
test

Object
Qualifier
tcm
trunk-group 100
trunk-group 100
circuit-pack 9
cabinet
9
mst
board
2e01
mst
mst
mst
mst
board
2e01
mst
board
2e01

press NEXT PAGE to continue

Feature Interactions
The translation log is written to the memory card as translation data when the
save translation command is executed. The translation data is time stamped
when saved. This time stamp is noted when translation is loaded from the
memory card and included in all recent change history reports.
When a user requests a recent change history report, there could be other users
concurrently issuing data commands and altering the contents of the transaction
log. Therefore, if the user pages the entire way through the report, the oldest
entries in the transaction log may have been overwritten by data commands
issued by these other users. Should this occur, the final entries of the report will
show the data commands which have been issued by these other users since
the recent change history report was originally requested.
Use of the maintenance command "set time" to alter the system clock could make
it look as if the recent change history report is not in true LIFO order.
A maximum of 250 commands are stored in the transaction log.

list isdn-testcall
This command displays the ISDN-PRI trunks in use for ISDN-PRI test calls.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list isdn-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-189

Synopsis
list isdn-testcall [ schedule | print ]

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: system technician, inads, init.

Examples
list isdn-testcall
list isdn-testcall print
list isdn-testcall schedule

Description
The list isdn-testcall command lists all of the ISDN-PRI trunks that are currently in
use for ISDN-PRI test calls in the system. This command is useful to determine
which trunk is in use for an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and then
a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command
queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by
the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen. Refer to
the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification [1] for more
details.

print

This parameter will cause the output to be printed by a printer at the SAT.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list isdn-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-190

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "list isdn-testcall" the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request.

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy

Output

B-Channel

This field displays the trunk in use for the ISDN-PRI test call (trunk
group number/ member number).

Start Time

The time the test call started (DD/HH:MM).

Duration

The expected duration of the test call.

M/T Port

The TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack’s digital port
address(cabinet/carrier/slot/circuit) in use for the outgoing
asynchronous ISDN-PRI test call.

list isdn-testcall

B-Channel
078/001

ISDN-PRI TESTCALLS
Start Time
Duration
25/12:36
120

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

M/T Port
1B1102

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list marked-ports

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-191

list marked-ports
This command lists all the ports that have been marked unusable.

Synopsis
list marked-ports [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: bcms, browse, system
technician, cust, inads, init, rcust.

Examples
list marked-ports
list marked-ports print
list marked-ports schedule

Description
The list marked-ports command displays all of the ports that have been marked
unusable via the mark port command. For more information on the mark port
command, refer to the ‘‘mark port’’ command description in this chapter.
A maximum of fifteen marked ports are displayed per page.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

If specified, this parameter will cause the information displayed by this
command to be sent to the printer attached to the terminal as well as to
the screen.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list marked-ports

Page 8-192

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "list marked-ports" the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy, try again later

Output

Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the marked port.

Board-Type

The type of circuit pack containing the marked port. If this circuit pack
information is no longer available because the circuit pack was
removed after the port was marked, the Board-Type field will be blank.

For the following output example, the command entered was "list marked-ports."

list marked-ports

Port
1C0101
1C0601
1C0702

MARKED-PORT INFORMATION
Board-Type
DIG-BD
DIG-BD

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list measurements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-193

list measurements
This command lists reports summarizing measurements associated with DS1
board. The list measurements command has many more options than those
that are documented here. Only those options dealing with DS1 board are
documented below.

Synopsis
list measurements ds1 [ log | summary ] ds1_location [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: browse, system technician,
cust, inads, init, nms, bcms, rcust.

Examples
list measurements ds1 log 2a18
list measurements ds1 summary 2a18 print
list measurements ds1 summary 2a18 schedule

Description
The "list measurements ds1" command provides performance measurements on
a DS-1 link. The "ds1 summary" option provides a summary report while the "ds1
log" option provides a detailed report.
The performance measurements of a DS-1 link indicate the quality of the DS-1
physical interface between the system and a far end system.

Defaults
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list measurements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-194

Parameters

ds1_location

The physical location of a DS1 circuit pack entered as
cabinet-carrier-slot.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the MGR1
terminal.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [2] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list measurements ds1", the
following list of options is displayed:
log

summary

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list measurements ds1 log"
or "list measurements ds1 summary", the following message is displayed:
Enter board location: [cabinet(1-3)];carrier(A-E);slot(00-20),
[’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the user enters an invalid format for a board location when entering a "list
measurements ds1 log" or "list measurements ds1 summary" command, the
following error message is displayed:
"entered value" Invalid slot address for DS1 board

If the user enters a board location that is not a DS1 board location or the location
of an unadministered DS1 when entering a "list measurements ds1 log" or "list
measurements ds1 summary" command, the following error message is
displayed:
DS1 board has not been administered

If the user enters anything other than "log" or "summary" following "list
measurements ds1", the following error message is displayed:
"entered value" is an invalid entry; please press HELP

If the system time has not been set correctly, after entering "list measurements
ds1 log ds1_location" or "list measurements ds1 summary ds1_location" the
following error message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list measurements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-195

Cannot get time from system clock

Output
The following field descriptions pertain to the summary reports accessed by the
"list measurements ds1 summary" command.
Counted
Since:

The start time and date when the associated measurement counters
were cleared or the DS1 circuit pack was administered.

Number of
Seconds
Elapsed Into
Current
15-min
Interval:

The number of seconds from the beginning of the current 15-minute
interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900.

Total of Valid
15-min
Intervals in
Past 24-hr
Period:

The total number of 15-minute intervals in the past 24-hour period that
contain valid data. This field has a value from 0 to 96.

Category

The four categories correspond to four measurement error counters.
The four categories are "Errored Seconds," "Bursty Err Secs," "Severely
Err Secs," and "Failed Seconds". The meanings of each category
follow:
■

The value of the errored seconds counter for the specified
15-minute interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the
data for the 15-minute interval is invalid.

■

The value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified
15-minute interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the
data for the 15-minute interval is invalid.

■

The value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified
15-minute interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the
data for the 15-minute interval is invalid.

■

The value of the failed seconds counter for the specified 15-minute
interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the data for
the 15-minute interval is invalid.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list measurements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-196

Worst_
15-Min_
Interval

The date(Date), end time(Time), and error count (Count; from 0 to 900
in increments of four) of the 15-minute interval in the previous 24-hour
period that contains the maximum value for each of the four error
categories (errored seconds, bursty errored seconds, severely errored
seconds, and failed seconds).

Total of
24-Hour
Count

The sum of all valid 15-minute counts for the previous 24-hour period
for each of the four error categories. This field has a value from 0 to
65535.

Current
15-Minute
Interval

The error count for the current (incomplete) 15-minute interval for each
of the four error categories. This field has a value from 0 to 899 or N/A
if the data for the current 15-minute interval is invalid.
The following field descriptions pertain to the detailed reports accessed by the
"list measurements ds1 log" command.

Counted
Since:

The start time and date when the associated measurement counters
were cleared or the DS1 circuit pack was administered.

DATE

The date of the 15-minute interval.

TIME

The time of the 15-minute interval.

ERRORED
SECONDS

The value of the errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute
interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the data for the
15-minute interval is invalid.

BURSTY ERR
SECS

The value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified
15-minute interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the data
for the 15-minute interval is invalid.

SEVERELY
ERR SECS

The value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified
15-minute interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the data
for the 15-minute interval is invalid.

FAILED
SECONDS

The value of the failed seconds counter for the specified 15-minute
interval. This field has a value from 0 to 900 or N/A if the data for the
15-minute interval is invalid.

VALID
INTERVAL

This field indicates whether the data for the specified 15-minute interval
is valid. Data is considered valid when a count for that 15-minute
interval. If the field has a value of "y", the data for the four error
categories is valid; otherwise, the data is invalid. Data is considered
valid when a count for that 15-minute interval is retrieved and none of
the following invalid conditions occur. Data is invalid if a system warm
start or a system cold start occurred during the interval, if the DS1
circuit pack was not inserted during the interval, if the system time was
changed during the interval, or if the system was too busy to respond
to a poll request for the interval.
The following output examples show all of the four different DS1 reports.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Page 8-197

list measurements ds1 summary 2a19
Switch Name:

Date: 1:25 pm

SPE A
THU APR 16, 1992

DS-1 Link Performance Measurements Summary Report
Counted Since: 1:20 pm THU APR 16, 1992
Number of Seconds Elapsed Into Current 15-min Interval: 323
Total of Valid 15-min Intervals in Past 24-hr Period:
0
Total of Current
Worst_15-Min_Interval
24-hr
15-Min Interval
Category
Date
Time
Count
Count
Count
Errored Seconds
4/16
13:20
0
0
4
Bursty Err Secs
4/16
13:20
0
0
4
Severely Err Secs 4/16
13:20
0
0
0
Failed Seconds
4/16
13:20
0
0
0
Command successfully completed

list measurements ds1 log 2a19
Switch Name:

SPE A
Date: 1:26 pm

THU APR 16, 1992

DS-1 Link Performance Measurements Detailed Log Report
Counted Since: 1:20 pm THU APR 16, 1992
ERRORED BURSTY
SEVERELY
FAILED
VALID
DATE TIME SECOND ERR SECS ERR SECS
SECONDS
INTERVAL
4/16
13:05
0
0
0
0
y
4/16
13:20
0
0
0
0
y
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

list mst
This command will allow the user to display messages in the MST buffer.

Synopsis
list mst from message number count number [ continuous | LIFO | FIFO ]
auto-page
[ schedule | print ]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Page 8-198

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
list mst continuous
list mst continuous auto-page
list mst LIFO
list mst from 222 count 7

Description
This command is used to display the messages in the trace buffer. It can be
used when the trace is disabled or active, but if active, older messages may be
sporadically omitted if wraparound is selected and the message rate is high. This
command can be used repeatedly without destroying the integrity of the buffer.

Defaults
The default for the command is to display all messages in FIFO order, i.e., until
the displayed message momentarily catches up with the newest message, and
not "auto-page".

Parameters
from message number

The message number to start the display may be entered. If
the message number specified is not in the buffer, then that
will be indicated on the display, and no additional messages
will be displayed. If this clause is omitted, then the messages
will be displayed starting with the oldest in the buffer for FIFO
and for "continuous". For LIFO, the display will start with the
newest message in the buffer.

continuous

The display will be updated as new messages enter the trace
buffer. The messages will be displayed in FIFO order. This
option is most useful in conjunction with "auto-page". The list
continuous command will terminate only when canceled by
the user.

count

The count of messages to display may be used to limit the
trace

LIFO

The messages will be displayed with the current newest
message first.

FIFO

The messages will be displayed in the order received.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-199

auto-page

The screen will automatically page when full. When used in
combination with "continuous" this provides a nice way to
"watch" the trace as messages arrive.

schedule

This parameter will allow access to the system printer feature.
The "continuous" option may not be combined with this
option.

print

This parameter will cause the output to be printed by a printer
at the SAT.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "list mst" the following message will be
displayed:
Enter [ ’from’ 0-32767 ] [ ’count’ 1-9998 ]
[ ’fifo’ or ’lifo’ or ’continuous’ ]
[ ’auto-page’ ] [ ’print’ or ’schedule’ ]

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a message by message basis with one or
more lines of data displayed for each message traced.

Number

The sequence number for the message.

Date/Time

The Date/Time.

Type

MST message type, ex. 60 == ISDN uplink, 62 == ISDN downlink,
6C == ISDN level 2 primitive.

Message

Message text in hexadecimal (ISDN or X.25).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Page 8-200

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "list mst", and that timestamps were enabled via the "change mst" command.

list mst
MST DATA
Number Date/Time
1
12/21/90
14:30:21.220

Type
62

2
3
4
5

14:30:22.420
14:30:23.420
14:30:25.420
14:30:25.820

60
60
60
60

6
7
8

14:30:28.020
14:50:25.820
14:52:26.020

62
71
56

9

14:52:26.020

57

Message
00
03
6f
00
00
00
00
74
00
01
00
01
00
01

00
a1
6e
00
00
00
00
69
00

74
83
20
74
74
74
74
6f
74

17
86
35
17
17
17
17
6e
17

08
70
31
08
08
08
08
20
08

02
01
30
02
02
02
02
35
02

00
80
30
80
80
80
80
31
00

11
96
31
11
11
11
11
30
11

05 04 03 80 90 a2 18
28 0d 73 74 61 74 69

00
03
00
03

70
02
70
30

00
01
00
05

08
c4
08
02

01
40
01
01

04
08
84
c4

64
96
64
40

96 1c 13 91 a1 10 02
49 05 83 31 30 30 b4
96 1c 0d 91 a2 0a 02
00

02
03
01
07
30
0f

18 03 a9 83 86
1e 02 81 81
96 28 0d 73 74 61
34

Command Successfully Completed

Interpretation of Output
Summary of MST Message Types
Table 8-2.

Summary of MST Message Types

Message
Type
Encode

Description

0x10

Vector Trace message

0x11

Vector Event message

0x21

IMT proc_errs

0x22

IMT crec

0x23

IMT miscellaneous hooks (dbug)

0x24

Hardware error log

0x25

PREC message

0x26

CMS outgoing (individual)

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Table 8-2.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-201

Summary of MST Message Types — Continued

Message
Type
Encode

Description

0x27

CMS incoming (individual)

0x30

CCMS uplink message

0x31

CCMS downlink message

0x32

Packet uplink message

0x33

Packet downlink message

0x40

IMT internal-message trace for call_p, conn_m, grp_m, serv_d, suser_m

0x50

ASAI level 2 primitive uplink

0x51

ASAI level 2 primitive downlink

0x52

ASAI maintenance uplink

0x53

ASAI maintenance downlink

0x54

ASAI unrecognized uplink

0x55

ASAI unrecognized downlink

0x56

ASAI association uplink

0x57

ASAI association downlink

0x58

ASAI error uplink

0x60

ISDNPRI uplink

0x62

ISDNPRI downlink

0x64

ISDNBRI uplink

0x66

ISDNBRI downlink

0x68

ISDNBRI level 2 primitive uplink

0x6A

ISDNBRI level 2 primitive downlink

0x6C

ISDNPRI level 2 primitive uplink

0x6D

ISDNPRI level 2 primitive downlink

0x6E

ISDNPRI unrecognized message

0x6F

ISDNBRI unrecognized message

0x71

GAP marker

0x72

Time changed while trace enabled

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Page 8-202

Summary of MST Message Types — Continued

Table 8-2.
Message
Type
Encode

Description

0xA0

X.25 Outgoing application data message

0xA1

X.25 Incoming application data message

0xA2

X.25 Application error message

0xB0

X.25 Outgoing session layer control message

0xB1

X.25 Incoming session layer control message

0xCF

X.25 Message confirmation

0xD0

X.25 Outgoing processor channel control message

0xD1

X.25 Incoming processor channel control message

0xD2

X.25 Link control message

0xD3

X.25 Link status message

0xE2

X.25 Session Timer Expirations

0xF0

X.25 Error Message (Outgoing Message Lost)

0xF1

X.25 Unrecognized Messages

0xF2

X.25 Error Message (DIP ICOM Record Aborted) (R2 Only)

0xF9

Snapper instrumentation message

0xFA

Snapper continuation message (for large msgs)

Continued on next page

Detailed description of Messages**
Note that the X.25 messages discussed below really follow the BX.25 Message
Protocol.
** The R2 message set will be defined in the document, OSS Interface
Requirement for the Definity Generic 2.2 ISDN-PRI/DCIU Message Sequence
Tracer, COMPAS ID 7459DR.
The terminology Message[n] used below refers to the byte at offset n in the
message being displayed.
MST message types contain a version number. Whenever the structure of the
MST message changes, the version field in the MST buffer will be changed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Page 8-203

Version 1 ( default) displays a blank in the version field which is immediately after
the MST message type field. Subsequent versions display the version number
after the MST message type field and are connected with a ’-’. For example:
Version 2 of the X.25 Application error/notification message has added the text of
the pm state table stimulus which was ignored.
Version 1 of MST message type 0xA2 would appear on the ’list mst’ output:
Number
1

Date/Time
11:41:22:425

Type

Message

A2

17 10

Version 2of MST message type 0xA2 would appear on the ’list mst’ output:
Number
90

Date/Time

Type

Message

12:41:14:112

A2-02

17 10 21 03 32 05 01 80

Vector Trace
Message type: 0x10
Message format:
Message[1-4]

= call identifier (CID) (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/capro.h)

Message[5-6]

= vector number (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h)

Message[7]

= step number (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/callr.h)

Message[8]

= step type (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h)

Message[9]

= step state (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/dpm_calls.h)

Message[10-12]

= VDN

Message[13]

= port network number

Message[14]

= endpoint number

Message[15]

= angel number

Message[16]

= circuit number

Message[17-20]

= trunk number

Message[21+]

= auxiliary data (based on step type)

Vector Event Trace (D92 Only)
Message type:
0x11

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-204

Message format:
Message[1-4]

= cid (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/capro.h)

Message[5-6]

= event

Message[7+]

= auxiliary data (based on event)

Events are defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/evnt_defs.h. Events based on the call_p will
have the following auxiliary data:
Message[7-8]

= vector number

Message[9-10]

= step number

Events based on the grp_m will have the following auxiliary data:
Message[7-10]

= hunt group number

IMT (D92)
The messages described in this section cannot be controlled directly through
any of the MST screens. They are enabled/disabled through TCM but their output
goes to the MST buffer. See [IMT] for details on these messages.
A read-only field in the "change mst" screen, "Other Tracing?", alerts the user that
one or more of these types of messages is enabled.

0x21 - IMT proc_errs
Message format:
Message[1-4]

= process number(lname)

Message[5-8]

= sequence number (defined in *.p/hdrs/main_err.h, for
example: $BASEPJ/gmtce.ss/hmm.p/hdrs/main_err.h)

Message[9-12]

= data 1

Message[13-17]

= data 2

0x22 - IMT crec
Message format:
Message[1+]

= call record (defined as CALLR typedef in
$BASEPJ/hdrs/callr.h)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-205

0x23 - MT_IMT (miscellaneous IMT hooks)
This message type is for miscellaneous IMT hooks. The only sub-type currently
available is for a debug button (dbut). The button number is provided in the
debug button MST message so that more than one button can be administered
(through IMT) to convey different meanings. For example, depression of button N
could signify the start of the problem symptoms, while depression of button N + X
could signify the end of the problem symptoms. Note that the button number
being logged represents the position of a button on a particular set type, and will
be different depending on set type and module type (feature, coverage, display,
...), etc. The mapping of the button number stored in the IMT_BUT_DEBUG MST
message to a position on the set is not trivial, however, the debug buttons can be
administered through TCM, debug button filtering enabled through TCM and
MST enabled using the ‘enable mst’ command and the resultant messages sent
to MST when each button is depressed can be examined for the button data and
noted.
Message format:
Message[1]

= 0x01 (debug button sub-type, IMT_BUT_DEBUG)

Message[2-3]

= button number

Message[4-7]

= user id

0x40 - internal message tracing of call_p, conn_m,
grp_m, serv_d, suser_m
Message formats: conn_m, grp_m, and suser_m:
Message[1-4]

= user identifier

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7+]

= standard message (depends on hook type)

serv_d (map-type messages):
Message[1-4]

= user identifier

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7]

= STIM type

Message[8-11]

= service identifier

Message[12]

= port network number

Message[13]

= endpoint number

Message[14]

= angel number

Message[15]

= circuit number

Message[16+]

= message

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-206

serv_d (other serv_d messages):
Message[1-4]

= user identifier

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7]

= STIM type

Message[8-11]

= service identifier

Message[12-13]

= interpreted STIM

Message[14-17]

= aux data 0

Message[18-21]

= aux data 1

Message[22-25]

= aux data 2

Message[26-29]

= aux data 3

Message[30]

= hwtype field

Message[31]

= hwdata field

call_p:
Message[1-4]

= call identifier

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7]

= supervisor

Message[8]

= digit prep

Message[9+]

= message

CCMS
Message types:
0x30 uplink
0x31 downlink
Message format:
Message[1]

= port network number

Message[2]

= endpoint number

Message[3]

= angel number

Message[4]

= circuit number

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Message[7]

= message length

Message[8]

= angel id

Message[9+]

= standard CCMS message

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-207

Packet (D92)
Message type:
0x32 uplink
Message format:
Message[1-4]

= user identifier

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7-10]

= link identifier

Message[11-12]

= message type (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/pcd_calls.h)

Message[13+]

= standard packet message

Message type:
0x33 downlink
Message format:
Message[1]

= port network number

Message[2]

= endpoint number

Message[3]

= angel number

Message[4]

= circuit number

Message[5-6]

= hook identifier (defined in $BASEPJ/hdrs/mstencode.h)

Message[7-10]

= link identifier

Message[11+]

= standard packet message

ASAI
ASAI messages listed on the MST screen consist of a 4 octet header and a
variable length body. The header contains the ASAI port address encoded with 8
hexadecimal digits. This same encoding is also used for BRI and PRI.
In message types other than 50 and 51 (Level 2 Primitives), following the port
address is a one octet field called the qualifier. The meaning of the qualifier
varies according to the type (as specified by the MST encode) of ASAI message

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-208

traced. The body which is a real ASAI message (except for Level 2 Primitives)
follows the qualifier.
When the display is administered for abbreviated format, the body contains only
the initial part of the ASAI message (all information in beginning of message up to
and including the Q.931 IE tag) plus the cause IE (if present).

0x50 - ASAI level 2 uplink primitive
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Message[9]

= Uplink encode
0x01 - ASAI Link State
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[10]

= R1/R3 Link States:
0x00 - the link has gone down
0x01 - the link has come up
0x02 - the link id has changed
0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive
0x04 - the link has recovered
0x05 - the audit recovery stim
0x06 - the link has been reset
0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs) disconnect
0x08 - broadcast link audit
= R1/R3 TEI Management Message
0x01 - Identity request
0x05 - Identity Check Response
0x07 - Identity Verify Request
= R1/R3 XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

Message[11]

= Uplink encode
0x01 - ASAI Link State
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[12]

= ASAI Link State:
0x00 - the link has gone down
0x01 - the link has come up
0x02 - the link id has changed
0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive
0x04 - the link has recovered
0x05 - the audit recovery stim
0x06 - the link has been reset
0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs)
disconnect
0x08 - broadcast link audit
= TEI Management Message
0x01 - Identity request
0x05 - Identity Check Response
0x07 - Identity Verify Request
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

0x51 - ASAI level 2 downlink primitive
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-209

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-210

NOTE:
The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link
ID field will contain 0xff 0x.ff
Message[9]

= Downlink encode
0x01 - ASAI Link Events
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[10]

= ASAI Link Events:
0x02 - link release request
0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by the lower
level
= TEI Management Message
0x02 - Identity Assigned
0x04 - Identity Check Request
0x06 - Identity Remove
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

Message[11]

= 0xCA - Cancel Byte

NOTE:
The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not
be sent.
R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-211

NOTE:
The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link
ID field will contain 0xff 0xff 0xff 0x.ff
Message[11]

= Downlink encode
0x01 - ASAI Link Events
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[12]

= ASAI Link Events:
0x02 - link release request
0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by
the lower level
= TEI Management Message
0x02 - Identity Assigned
0x04 - Identity Check Request
0x06 - Identity Remove
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

Message[13]

= 0xCA - Cancel Byte

NOTE:
The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not
be sent.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

0x52 - ASAI maintenance uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

=0

Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

0x53 - ASAI maintenance downlink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI 3 ort

Message[5]

=0

Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

0x54 - ASAI unrecognized uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= failure cause

Failure causes
0x2a (42.) - Overload Controls in Effect
0x32 (50.) - Requested Feature Not Administered
0x45 (69.) - Requested Feature Not Implemented
0x51 (81.) - Invalid CRV
0x5f (95.) - Invalid Message
0x60 (96.) - Mandatory Information Element Missing
0x61 (97.) - Message Non-Existent/Not Implemented
0x63 (99.) - Information Element non-existent
0x64 (100.) - Invalid Information Element Contents
0x6f (111.) - Protocol Error

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-212

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Message[6+]

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-213

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format
NOTE:
An unrecognized message displayed in abbreviated format may be
missing information (such as cause) because the message was not able to
be parsed.

0x55 - ASAI unrecognized downlink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= failure reason

Failure reasons
1 - link flow controlled
2 - internal software error - see software error log
3 - packet interface problem - see error log
Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

0x56 - ASAI association uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= association type

Association Type
0 - unknown
1 - call control
2 - domain control
3 - notification
4 - adjunct routing
5 - set value

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

6 - value query
7 - request feature
Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

0x57 - ASAI Association downlink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= association type

Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

0x58 - ASAI error uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of ASAI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of ASAI port

Message[4]

= Port number of ASAI port

Message[5]

= failure cause

Failure causes
1 - 127 are code standard zero cause values
128 - 255 are code standard three cause values (+ 128)
Message[6+]

= standard or abbreviated ASAI message format

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-214

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-215

ISDN
0x60 - ISDN PRI uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of D-channel port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of D-channel port

Message[4]

= Port number of D-channel port

Message[5+]

= standard ISDNPRI format
NOTE:
In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if
present) and the channel id Information Element (IE) (if present) are the
only IEs present.

0x62 - ISDN PRI downlink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of D-channel port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of D-channel port

Message[4]

= Port number of D-channel port

Message[5+]

= standard ISDNPRI format
NOTE:
In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if
present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-216

0x64 - ISDN BRI uplink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of BRI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of BRI port

Message[4]

= Port number of BRI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Message[9+]

= standard ISDNBRI format

R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

Message[11+]

= standard ISDNBRI format
NOTE:
In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if
present) and the channel id Information Element (IE) (if present) are the
only IEs present.

0x66 - ISDN BRI downlink
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of BRI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of BRI port

Message[4]

= Port number of BRI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Message[9+]

= standard ISDNBRI format

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-217

R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

Message[11+]

= standard ISDNBRI format
NOTE:
In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if
present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present.
An additional cancel byte (0xCA) may be present after the standard
ISDNBRI formatted message if the message was not sent. The cancel byte
will not be appended if the abbreviated format is selected.

0x68 - ISDN BRI level 2 uplink primitive
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of BRI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of BRI port

Message[4]

= Port number of BRI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Message[9]

= Uplink encode
0x01 - BRI Link State
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Message[10]

= R1/R3 Link States:
0x00 - the link has gone down
0x01 - the link has come up
0x02 - the link id has changed
0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive
0x04 - the link has recovered
0x05 - the audit recovery stim
0x06 - the link has been reset
0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs)
disconnect
0x08 - broadcast link audit
= R1/R3 TEI Management Message
0x01 - Identity request
0x05 - Identity Check Response
0x07 - Identity Verify Request
= R1/R3 XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

Message[11]

= Uplink encode
0x01 - BRI Link State
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[12]

= BRI Link State:
0x00 - the link has gone down
0x01 - the link has come up
0x02 - the link id has changed
0x03 - the link has gone hyperactive
0x04 - the link has recovered
0x05 - the audit recovery stim
0x06 - the link has been reset
0x07 - link state hyper (too many SABMEs)
disconnect
0x08 - broadcast link audit
= TEI Management Message
0x01 - Identity request
0x05 - Identity Check Response
0x07 - Identity Verify Request
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-218

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-219

0x6A - ISDN BRI level 2 downlink primitive
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of BRI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of BRI port

Message[4]

= Port number of BRI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID
NOTE:
The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link
ID field will contain 0xff 0xff

Message[9]

= Downlink encode
0x01 - BRI Link Events
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[10]

= BRI Link Events:
0x02 - link release request
0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by
the lower level
= TEI Management Message
0x02 - Identity Assigned
0x04 - Identity Check Request
0x06 - Identity Remove
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

Message[11]

= 0xCA - Cancel Byte

NOTE:
The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not
be sent.
R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-220

NOTE:
The Link ID has no meaning for the link establish request, therefore the Link
ID field will contain 0xff 0xff 0xff 0x.ff
Message[11]

= Downlink encode
0x01 - BRI Link Events
0x02 - TEI Management Message
0x03 - XID Message

Message[12]

= BRI Link Events:
0x02 - link release request
0x0f - link establish request sent to and received by
the lower level
= TEI Management Message
0x02 - Identity Assigned
0x04 - Identity Check Request
0x06 - Identity Remove
= XID Messages
0x01 - XID Request
0x02 - XID Response

Message[13]

= 0xCA - Cancel Byte

NOTE:
The cancel byte will only be present if the message was built, but could not
be sent.

0x6C - ISDN PRI level 2 uplink primitive
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of D-channel port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of D-channel port

Message[4]

= Port number of D-channel port

Message[5]

= change type

R1/R3 change types:
0x01 - session up notification
0x02 - Session down notification
0x6D - ISDN PRI level 2 downlink primitive (not implemented)
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of D-channel port

Message[2]

= Reserved

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of D-channel port

Message[4]

= Port number of D-channel port

Message[5]

= change type

R1/R3 change types:
0x01 - link establish request
0x02 - link release request

0x6E - ISDN PRI Unrecognized Messages
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of D-channel port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of D-channel port

Message[4]

= Port number of D-channel port

Message[5]

= type of failure

Types of failure:
0x01 - outgoing ISDNPRI
0x02 - incoming ISDNPRI
Message[6+]

= standard ISDN format

0x6F - ISDN BRI Unrecognized Messages
Message[1]

= Port Network Number of BRI port

Message[2]

= Reserved

Message[3]

= Carrier Address of BRI port

Message[4]

= Port number of BRI port

Message[5]

= SAPI

Message[6]

= TEI

R1:
Message[7,8]

= Link ID

Message[9]

= type of failure

Types of failure:

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-221

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-222

0x01 - outgoing ISDN
0x02 - incoming ISDN
Message[10+]

= standard ISDNBRI format

R3:
Message[7-10]

= Link ID

Message[11]

= type of failure

Types of failure:
0x01 - outgoing ISDN
0x02 - incoming ISDN
NOTE:
In abbreviated format, the header of the Q.931 message, the cause IE (if
present) and the channel id IE (if present) are the only IEs present.
An additional cancel byte (0xCA) may be present after the standard
ISDNBRI formatted message if the message was not sent. The cancel byte
will not be appended if the abbreviated format is selected.

General
0x71 - GAP marker
Message[1]

= GAP reason

Message[2]

= GAP count (since last clear - high byte)

Message[3]

= GAP count (since last clear - low byte)

GAP reasons:
0x01 - disabled, disable mst command executed
0x02 - disabled, mst timer expired
0x03 - disabled, buffer full on no-wrap
0x04 - disabled, restart occurred
0x05 - disabled, by stop trigger or count
0x06 - disabled, audit error
0x07 - not disabled, stopped by stop trigger or count

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

8

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-223

0x72 - Time changed while trace enabled
Message[1]

= 0x00

Message[2]

= timestamp indication

timestamp indication:
0x00 - MST timestamp is old time
0x01 - MST timestamp is new time

X.25 Application Data
The processor channel number is the R1/R3 term, and R2 calls it the port
number. The processor channel number is equal to the Application port number
in R1. In R3, the processor channel admin screen should be inspected to
determine the mapping.

0xA0 - X.25 outgoing application message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= sequence number

Message[3]

= buffer id

Message[4]

= 0x00

Message[5+]

= application message1

1.

Application messages will contain the session
layer data headers and the data.

In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved.

0xA1 - X.25 incoming application message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= sequence number

Message[3+]

= application message

In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-224

Application Control
0xA2 - X.25 application error or notification
NOTE:
The ’X.25 application error message’ category contains notifications as well
as errors.
0xA2, 0xF0 and 0xF2 messages will be turned on by responding ’y’ to the
’Application Errors?’ field.
Version 1:
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= application error/notification

Version 2:
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= application error/notification

Message[3+]

= pm stimulus ignored (For message[2] == 0x10 only)

Errors/Notifications:
R1/R3:
0x01
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11

- no outgoing buffer available
- pvc session down
- pvc session up
- pvc session connect
- pvc session restart
- message buffer overload uplink
- message buffer overload downlink
- message buffer exhaustion
- max # of outgoing msgs allowed
- bad msg type in message buffer routine
- no message buffers available
- message buffer pointer error
- pm state table stimulus ignored
- bad session connect message

Session Layer Control
NOTE:
The session layer header is considered part of the session layer message.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

0xB0 - X.25 outgoing session layer control
message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= session layer message type

Message[3]

= buffer id

Message[4]

=0

Message[5+]

= session layer message

session layer message type:
0x00 - session connect
0x01 - session accept
0x02 - session reject
0x03 - session disconnect
0x04 - reserved
0x05 - reserved
0x06 - resynch
0x07 - reserved
0x08 - resynch acknowledge
In abbreviated mode, the session layer message is not saved.

0xB1 - X.25 incoming session layer control
message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= session message type

Message[3+]

= session message

session message type:
0x00 - session connect
0x01 - session accept
0x02 - session reject
0x03 - session disconnect
0x04 - reserved
0x05 - reserved
0x06 - resynch
0x07 - reserved
0x08 - reserved
In abbreviated mode, the session layer message is not saved.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-225

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

8

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-226

0xCF - message confirmation
This confirmation is X.25 far end confirmation.
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= internal buffer id

Message[3]

= count of outgoing buffers confirmed

Processor Channel Control
0xD0 - outgoing control message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= message event

Message events for R1:
0x00
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x0A
0x0B

- Request Reset of Logical Channel
- Ack. Reset of Logical Channel
- Flow Control Uplink
- Release Uplink Flow Control
- Flow Control Downlink
- Release Downlink Flow Control

Message events for R3:
0x00 - Request Reset of Logical Channel
0x08 - Connect Processor Channel
0x09 - Disconnect Processor Channel
0xD1 - X.25 incoming control message
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= message event

R1 Message events:
0x01 - Performed Requested Reset of Logical Channel
0x06 - Resetting Logical Channel
0x0A - Level 3 Restart1
R3 Message events:

1.

If this event occurs, one restart for each logical channel will be written into the MST trace.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

0x01 - Performed Requested Reset of Logical Channel
0x06 - Resetting Logical Channel
0x08 - processor channel connected
0x09 - processor channel disconnected

Link Control
0xD2 - link control
Message[1]

= interface link number

Message[2]

= message event

R1 Message events:
0x00 - Busy Out Link
0x01 - Release Busied Out Link
0x0A - Level 3 Restarting
R3 Message events:
0x00 - Stop Link
0x01 - Start Link
0x0A - Level 3 Restarting

0xD3 - link status (R3 Only)
Message[1]

= interface link number

Message[2]

= message event

R3 Message events:
0x02 - Session Down
0x03 - Session Up

Session Sanity
0xE2 - X.25 Session Timer Expirations
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= timer

Timers:

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-227

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

0x00 - ST2(session connect)
0x01 - ST3(retransmission)
Message[3]

= countdown from A1

0x02 - ST4(resynchronization)
No count
0x03 - ABT1(abort session 1)
Message[3]

= protocol machine state where timeout occurred

0x04 - ABT2(abort session 2)
Message[3]

= protocol machine state where timeout occurred

0x05 - State Timer
Message[3]

= protocol machine state where timeout occurred

0x06 - Message Timer
Message[3]

not used

Protocol Machine States:
BAD_STATE

0x00 /* 0 is very common, don’t use as a state */

PT_UNALLOC

0x01 /* port is un-allocated */

QUIESCENT

0x02 /* quiescent - allocated but not used */

ENTER_wSA

0x03 /* entering wSA - reset issued, not ABT/CON */

W_ACCEPT

0x04 /* Waiting for Session Accept*/

DATA_XFER

0x05 /* Data Transfer State*/

DATA_RESYNC

0x06 /* Resynchronization state */

PRI_ALLOC

0x07 /* pri port allocated but not yet used */

PRI_CONN

0x08 /* pri port connected */

HIGH_STATE

0x08 /* Highest value a port state can be*/

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-228

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-229

X.25 Errors
0xF0 - X.25 Error Message (Outgoing Message
Lost)
Note that 0xA2, 0xF0 and 0xF2 messages will be turned on by responding ’y’ to
the ’Application Errors?’ field.
Version 1:
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= sequence number

Message[3+]

= message

Version 2:
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= sequence number

Message[3]

= reason code

Message[4+]

= message

Reason Codes:
0x00

/* message lost */
/* 1 reserved */

0x02

/* message ignored, sequence number is within window but less
* than expected
*/

0x03

/* message ignored, bad sequence number */

0x04

/* message ignored, other port has sent a disconnect message */

0x05

/* message ignored, send request is rejected*/

0x06

/* message ignored, from ig_l3 */

0x07

/* message ignored, from l3_err */

0x08

/* sequence number is within window but less
* than expected (resync)
*/

0x09

/* bad sequence number (resync) */
In abbreviated mode, the application message is not saved.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list suspend-alm-orig

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-230

0xF1 - Unrecognized X.25 Messages
Message[1]

= processor channel number

Message[2]

= Failure type

Message[3+]

= session message

Failure types:
0x00 - Reserved
0x01 - Unknown session layer message type
0x02 - unrecognized control message

0xF2 - BX.25 Error Message (DIP ICOM Record
Aborted)
R2 only

Feature Interactions
See documentation on the system printer feature.

list suspend-alm-orig
This command lists entries in the Suspend Alarm Origination table.

Synopsis
list suspend-alm-orig [print | schedule].

Examples
list suspend-alm-orig
list suspend-alm-orig print
list suspend-alm-orig schedule

Description
This command lists active entries in the Suspend Alarm Origination table. Even
though this command only lists active entries, an entry that expires during the list
process still appears in the output. If the Suspend Alarm Origination table is
empty, the output would only contain the title and field headings.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-231

Parameters
Print

This option causes the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Schedule

When the schedule option is specified, the command validates and a
schedule form displays to allow the technician to schedule execution of
the command at a specified time. The information displayed by the
command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen.

Help Messages
[‘print’ or ‘help’]

Output

list suspend-alm-orig
Suspend Alarm Origination Entries
Physical

Board

Expires At

01C03
01E0407
01E0406

off-only
on-and-off
on-and-off

06/11/15:06
06/11/17:26
06/12/45:34

Feature Interactions
None.

list testcalls
This command generates an Automatic Transmission Measurement System
(ATMS) measurement report.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-232

Synopsis
list testcalls detail [ grp group number to-grp group number mem member
number to-mem member number | port location ] [ result result identifier |
not-result result identifier ] count count number [ print | schedule ]
list testcalls summary grp group number to-grp group number count count
number [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: browse, system technician,
cust, inads, init, nms.

Examples
list testcalls detail
list testcalls detail print
list testcalls detail grp 78
list testcalls detail grp 78 result marg count 3 schedule
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 print
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 not-result pass
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 count 2 schedule
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5 count 3 print
list testcalls detail grp 78 to-grp 80 mem 1 to-mem 5 count 3 result pass
list testcalls detail mem 1 count 3 result pass
list testcalls detail to-grp 78 to-mem 4 count 3 result pass
list testcalls detail to-mem 3 result pass
list testcalls detail port 1c1504
list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 schedule
list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 not-result marg print
list testcalls summary
list testcalls summary grp 78
list testcalls summary grp 78 print
list testcalls summary grp 78 count 5
list testcalls summary grp 78 count 5 schedule
list testcalls summary grp 78 to-grp 80
list testcalls summary grp 78 to-grp 80 count 3
list testcalls summary to-grp 78
list testcalls summary to-grp 78 count 7 schedule

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-233

Description
The list testcalls command is used to examine ATMS trunk measurements. The
ATMS is a feature which allows the voice and data trunk facilities to be measured
for satisfactory transmission performance. The performance of the trunks are
evaluated according to measurements produced by a series of analog tests and
are compared against user defined threshold values. The list testcalls command
is a reporting mechanism designed to display the measurements produced by
these tests.
The measurement report contains data on trunk signal loss, noise, singing return
loss, and echo return loss. The purpose of the report is to provide measurement
data to help determine the quality of trunk lines.
The measurements are produced by a set of analog trunk tests. The tests are
initiated by a maintenance demand test or by a set of scheduled tests. The
largest portion of these measurements are generated through scheduled testing
during system quiet hours (hours where the traffic volume is low). Each trunk test
performed by the system stores the results in a database. The trunk
measurements in this database reflect the state of each trunk at the time of its
last test.

Defaults
None.

Parameters

detail

This option specifies that a detailed measurement report is displayed
(See example of the screen).

summary

This option specifies that a summary measurement report is displayed
(See example of the screen).

grp group
number

This option is used to specify that measurements for a specific trunk
group are displayed. When used with the "to-grp" option, this option is
the starting trunk group in a range of user specified trunk groups.

to-grp group
number

This option is used to specify that measurements for all trunk groups
from 1 to the specified "to-grp" trunk group are displayed. When used
with the "grp" option, this option is the ending trunk group in a range of
user specified trunk groups.

mem
member
number

This option is used to specify that measurements for a specific trunk
group member are displayed. When used with the "to-mem" option,
this option is the starting trunk group member in a range of user
specified trunk group members.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Page 8-234

to-mem
member
number

This option is used to specify that measurements for all trunk group
members from 1 to the specified "to-mem" trunk group member are
displayed. When used with the "mem" option, this option is the ending
trunk group member in a range of user specified trunk group
members.

port location

This option is used to specify that measurements for a specific trunk
circuit (port) are displayed.

result result
identifier

This option is used to filter out all measurement results that do not
match the user specified result (i.e. only measurement results that
match the user specified result are displayed). Examples of results are
pass, marg, fail, etc.

not-result
result
identifier

This option is used to filter out all measurement results that do match
the user specified result (i.e. only measurement results that do not
match the user specified result are displayed). Examples of results are
pass, marg, fail, etc.

count count
number

This option is used to specify (limit) the number of records displayed.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list testcalls", the following
message is displayed:
Please enter one of the following object command words:
detail
summary
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list testcalls detail", the
following message is displayed:
Enter [[’grp’ x],[’to-grp’ x],[’mem’ x],[’to-mem’ x] or [’port’ x]],
[[’result’ x] or [’not-result’ x]],[’count’ x],[’print’ or ’schedule’]

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "list testcalls summary", the
following message is displayed:
Enter [[’grp’ x],[’to-grp’ x],[[’count’ x],
[’print’] or [’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-235

Error Messages
If there are no records in the measurements database, the following message is
displayed:
No data in the system to list

If an invalid identifier is entered, the following message is displayed:
"identifier" is an invalid entry; please press HELP

If an invalid count identifier is entered, the following message is displayed:
"identifier" is an invalid identifier; press RETURN to execute modified
command

If an invalid port location or unadministered port location is entered, the following
message is displayed:
"identifier" Identifier invalid

If the user entered trunk group number or the trunk group member number is not
within a valid range, the following message is displayed:
Entry out of range

If the user entered trunk group number or the trunk group member number is not
administered, or the user entered result is not found, the following message is
displayed:
No records match the specified query options

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-236

DETAIL REPORT Output
Group

The trunk group number selected.

Type

The trunk group type.

Vendor

The vendor of this trunk group.

TTL Type

The kind of test line for this trunk group.

Threshold Values

The list of marginal and unacceptable threshold values defined
on the trunk group form.
The following fields appear on the lower section of the form. Many
of the column headings contain the abbreviations "FE" for far end
and "NE" for near end. These abbreviations define which end took
the measurements.

Trk Mem

The trunk member within the trunk group.

Test Date

The month and day this trunk was tested.

Test Time

The time of day this trunk was tested.

Tst Rslt

This field describes the results of the trunk transmission test.

1004Hz-loss Min

Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss from
low-level tone.

1004Hz-loss Max

Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss at 0
dBm.

Loss dev at 404Hz

Transmission tests at low frequency. These tests measure a
maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from
the 1004-Hz loss measurements.

Loss dev at 2804Hz

Transmission tests at high frequency. These tests measure a
maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from
the 1004-Hz loss measurements.

C-msg Noise

Maximum noise interference (in dBrnC: decibels above reference
noise, which is B(EQ)10 sup -12E(EQ) watts) terminating on a
voice terminal within the voice-band frequency range (500 to
2500 Hz) between 15 and 55 dBrnC.

C-ntch Noise

Maximum signal-dependent noise interference on a line between
34 and 74 dBrnC.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
list testcalls

Page 8-237

SRL-LO

Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit
(repeater) gains and the sum of the circuit losses. SRL-LO occurs
most often in the frequency range of 200 to 500 Hz.

SRL-HI

Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit
(repeater) gains on a circuit and the sum of the circuit losses.
SRL-HI occurs most often in the frequency range of 2500 to 3200
Hz.

ERL

Echo return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the level of signal
strength transmitted and the level of signal strength reflected.
ERL occurs most often in the frequency range of 500 to 2500 Hz.
For the following example, the command that was entered is "list testcalls detail
grp 80."

list testcalls detail grp 80

Page

1

SPE A

ATMS MEASUREMENT REPORT
Group: 80

Type: co

THRESHOLD VALUES

Vendor:

TTL Type: 105-w-rl

Loss dev at

1004Hz-loss 404Hz 2804Hz C-msg C-ntch
Min
Max
- + - +
Noise Noise
Marginal
-2
21
9 9 9 9
55
74
Unacceptable
-2
21
9 9 9 9
55
74
Trk Test Test Test -16dBm 0dBm
Mem Date Time Rslt NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE NE FE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
press CANCEL to quit -- press NEXT PAGE to continue

SRL
LO
0
0

SRL
HI
0
0

ERL
0
0

NE FE NE FE

NE FE

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
mark port

Page 8-238

SUMMARY REPORT Output
Trk Grp Num

The trunk group number which is being summarized. Only outgoing or
two-way analog trunks will be listed.

Num Of Trks

The total number of members per trunk group.

Last Test Date

The date of the oldest measurement in the trunk group.

Last Test
Time

The time of the oldest measurement in the trunk group.

Trunks
Passed
Transm Test

The number of trunks that have passed the trunk transmission tests.

Trunks Failed
Marginal
Threshld

The number of trunks that failed a marginal threshold, but not an
unacceptable threshold according to the threshold values defined on
the trunk group form.

Trunks Failed
Unaccept
Threshld

This is taken from the unacceptable threshold administered on the
Trunk group form.

Trks In-Use

The number of trunks that were in-use at the time of testing.

Trks Not Test

The number of trunks that were not tested due to error conditions.

Busied Out
Trunks

The number of trunks that were busied out at the time. This could be
due to hardware problems, incorrect threshold values, etc.

For the following example, the command that was entered is "list testcalls
summary grp 80."

list testcalls summary grp 80

SPE A

ATMS MEASUREMENT SUMMARY REPORT

Trk
Grp
Num

Num
Of
Trks

80

19

Last
Test
Date

Last
Test
Time

Trunks
Passed
Transm
Test
0

Trunks
Failed
Marginal
Threshld
0

Trunks
Failed
Unaccept
Threshld
0

Command successfully completed

mark port
This command marks a port as unusable.

Trks Trks
In- Not
Use Test
0

19

Busied
Out
Trunks
19

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
mark port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-239

Synopsis
mark port location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
mark port 1c0208
mark port 2a1001

Description
The mark port command is used to mark a faulty port as defective to prevent the
use of the port in other administrative operations (for example, adding a
data-module or station). Ports on any type of circuit pack may be marked except
for circuit packs that are administered automatically (for example, Tone Detector,
Tone Generator, Announcement, Speech Synthesizer, Call Classifier and
Maintenance/Test circuit packs) when the circuit pack is installed. When the
mark port command is entered, the specified port is marked. If the port can be
administered manually, and if the port is not assigned, then the port is marked as
faulty. The port can be restored to service by using the clear port command. All
marked ports can be displayed in a list format via the list marked-ports
command. All marked port information is saved as part of translations.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be marked
and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot position,
and "pp" represents the circuit (port). A single digit cabinet (1 - 3) may
be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses help after entering "mark port" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 7 character port number

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-240

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy, try again later

Output
If the mark port command is successful the following message will be displayed
on the SAT:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

monitor bcms
This command displays real-time status reports for agents and splits
summarizing BCMS (basic call management systems).

Synopsis
monitor bcms [ split split number | system system number | skill skill number ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician, cust, rcust, bcms, browse.

Examples
monitor bcms split 1
monitor bcms system 1 5 7 8 9
monitor bcms system 1-15
monitor bcms skill 1

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Page 8-241

Description
The monitor bcms command displays output for agents and splits summarizing
the bcms condition. This on-line status report is automatically updated every 30
seconds (or by pressing the UPDATE key) until the command is canceled by
pressing the CANCEL key. Three display options are available: skill, split, and
system.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
split

This specifies that the command display status information for a
specified split number (an ACD hunt group).

split number

The split’s identity to the switch and BCMS; an ACD hunt group
number (split number). This parameter is entered only when the "split"
parameter is entered.

system

This specifies that the command display split queue status as well as
cumulative split information for all the BCMS measured splits.

system
number

ACD hunt group numbers (split numbers) separated by spaces and/or
split number ranges separated by a hyphen ("-").

skill

This specifies that the command display status information for a
specified skill number.

skill number

The skill’s identity to the switch and BCMS; an ACD hunt group
number (skill number). This parameter is entered only when the "skill"
parameter is entered.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor bcms", the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
Please enter one of the following object command words:
skill
split
system
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor bcms system" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [measured split numbers separated by one space
and/or split range in the format xx-xx], [’print’]
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

If the system technician presses HELP after entering command "monitor bcms
split" or "monitor bcms skill" the following message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Page 8-242

Enter a measured split or skill number(1-99), [’print’]
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

Error Messages
If the split or skill number entered is non numeric, not administered, or invalid in
any other way, the following message is displayed:
Invalid split number

If the split or skill number entered is not measured by BCMS or only measured
externally, the following message is displayed:
Split is not measured by Basic Call Management System (BCMS)

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The following output fields are for the "monitor bcms system" command

Date:

The current date and time which is updated every 30 seconds or
when the UPDATE key is pressed.

SPLIT

The name of the split being reported, if no name is administered
then the split extension is displayed in the form "EXTxxxxx". Splits
are displayed in split number order. This field is translation data.

CALLS WAIT

The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. If any
of these calls are Direct Agent Calls, the field will be preceded
by an asterisk. This field is real-time status data.

OLDEST CALL

The amount of time that the oldest call has waited in queue. This
field is real-time status data.

AVG ANSW SPEED

The average speed of answer for this split during the current
period. This includes time in queue and time ringing at the
agent’s voice terminal. Calls that intraflow (calls that overflow
from one ACD split to another split) will not have queue time from
previous splits included in the average. The calculation is Total
Answer Time/Total Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Calls. This
field is measurement data and includes only those calls that have
completed (terminated).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Page 8-243

AVAIL AGENT

The number of agents in this split currently available to receive
an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call from this split. This field
is real-time status data.

# ABAND

The number of calls that have abandoned during the current
period. This field is measurement data.

AVG ABAND TIME

The average time abandoned calls waited in queue before
abandoning during the current period. The calculation is Total
Abandon Time/Total Calls Abandoned. This field is measurement
data and includes only those calls that have completed
(terminated).

# ACD

The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled
by this split during the current period. This includes calls that
intraflow into the split. This field is measurement data.

AVG TALK

The average talk time for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls
handled by this split during the current period. This does not
include ring time at the agents’ voice terminal. The calculation is
Total ACD Talk Time/Number of ACD Calls. This field is
measurement data and includes only those calls that have
completed (terminated).

AVG AFTER CALL

The average After Call Work (ACW) time for Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current
period. ACD calls with no ACW time are included in the average.
Time spent on direct incoming or outgoing calls while in ACW will
not be included in the average. The calculation is (Total ACW
Time - Total ACW Incoming Time - Total ACW Outgoing
Time)/Total ACD Calls. This field is measurement data and
includes only those calls that have completed (terminated).

The following display was produced by entering the "monitor bcms system"
command.

monitor bcms system

Page

1 of

1

BCMS SYSTEM STATUS
Date:

SPLIT
Service
Sales

CALLS
WAIT
3
5

OLDEST
CALL
1:03
:33

AVG
ANSW
SPEED
:45
:15

14:02 THU OCT 17 1991

AVAIL
AGENT
0
0

#
ABAND
3
11

AVG
ABAND
TIME
:30
:45

#
ACD
20
36

AVG
AVG
AFTER
TALK
CALL
2:30 1:25
1:32
:35

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Page 8-244

The following output fields are for the "monitor bcms split" command:
Split:

The number of the split requested. This field is translation data.

Split Name:

The name of the split requested. If no name exists the split
extension is displayed in the form "EXT xxxxx". This field is
translation data.

Date:

The current date and time which is updated every 30 seconds or
when the UPDATE key is pressed.

Calls Waiting:

The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. If any of
these calls are Direct Agent Calls, the field will be preceded by an
asterisk. This field is real-time status data.

Oldest Call:

The time in minutes:seconds that the current oldest call has
waited in this split’s queue. This field is real-time status data.

Staffed

The number of agents currently logged into this split. This field is
real-time status data.

Avail

The number of agents currently available to receive an Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) call in this split. Agents are in either the
Auto-in or Manual-in work modes and are not currently on a call. If
the agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for
another split, this agent is not considered available and will not be
recorded here. This field is real-time status data.

ACD

The number of agents in this split currently on an Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) call for this split. This includes ACD calls that
are being handled by this split that arrive as coverage from
another split. This field also includes outbound calls (Outgoing
Call Manager) that are distributed through the ACD. Note that if
an agent puts an ACD call on hold, but does not enter another
state (for example, the agent does not enter the AVAIL state), the
agent will still be seen as in the ACD state. This field is real-time
status data.

ACW

The number of agents in this split currently in After Call Work
(ACW) for this split. This field is real-time status data.

AUX

The number of agents in this split currently in AUX work for this
split. If an agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work
(ACW) for another split, this agent is not considered in AUX work
and will not be recorded here. This field is real-time status data.

Extn

The number of agents in this split currently on non-ACD
(Automatic Call Distribution) calls, either incoming or outgoing
directly to or from their extensions. If the agents are also in After
Call Work (ACW) or AUX they will be recorded as Extn rather than
ACW or AUX. This field is real-time status data.

OtherSplit

The number of agents in this split on another split’s call or in After
Call Work (ACW) for another split. Only used if agents belong to
multiple splits. This field is real-time status data.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor bcms

Page 8-245

AGENT

The name of the agent associated with the extension. If no name
exists this field will be left blank. This field is translation data.

EXT

The extension of the agent. This field is translation data.

STATE

The current state of the agent for this split. This possible states
are Avail, ACD, ACW, AUX, Extn In, Extn Out, OtherSplit, and
Unstaff. If an agent is staffed, the agent must also be in one of the
above states. This field is real-time status data.

TIME

The clock time that the agent entered the current state in
hours:minutes. This field is real-time status data.

ACD CALLS

The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls (inbound
and outbound), that the agent has completed for this split during
the current period (half hour or hour). The maximum number of
calls is 255, and if this maximum is exceeded, 255 is displayed.
This field is measurement data.

EXTN IN CALLS

The number of non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls that
the agent has received (incoming) and completed during the
current period. The maximum number of calls is 255, and if this
maximum is exceeded, 255 is displayed. This field is
measurement data.

EXTN OUT CALLS

The number of non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls that
the agent has made (outgoing) and completed during the current
period. The maximum number of calls is 255, and if this maximum
is exceeded, 255 is displayed. This field is measurement data.

The following display was produced by entering "monitor bcms split 1".

monitor bcms split 1

Page

1 of

1

SPE A

BCMS SPLIT (AGENT) STATUS
Split: 1
Split Name: hunt group 1
Date:
9:02 TUE OCT 22 1991
Calls Waiting: 0
Oldest Call: 0:00
0=Staffed
0=Avail
0=ACD
0=ACW
0=AUX
0=Extn
0=OtherSplit
AGENT
EXT
STATE
TIME
ACD
EXTN IN EXTN OUT
CALLS
CALLS
CALLS

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-246

monitor health
This command displays one screen page of output summarizing the overall
condition of the system.

Synopsis
monitor health

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms, browse.

Examples
monitor health

Description
The monitor health command displays the current system alarm summary,
maintenance busy summary, user summary, critical system status, and cabinet
status, all of which is updated every minute.
The user is logged off of the system after this command is terminated.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor health" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-247

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Major

The number of logged major alarms is displayed as a number ranging
from 0 to 200. Up to 200 major alarms can be reported in the alarm
log; therefore, this is the maximum which can be displayed.

Minor

The number of logged minor alarms is displayed as a number ranging
from 0 to 200. Up to 200 minor alarms can be reported in the alarm
log; therefore, this is the maximum which can be displayed.

Warning

The number of warnings logged in the alarm file is displayed as a
value between 0 and 200, which is the maximum number of warnings
permitted.

Trunks

The number of maintenance busied out trunks is shown.

Stations

The number of maintenance busied out stations is displayed.

Others

The combined number of maintenance busied out objects excluding
trunks and stations is displayed.

Static

Static indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated
to high priority items (e.g. the operating system). This percentage is
rounded to the nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that
the occupancy is less than one half of a percent (e.g. an occupancy of
89.6% would be displayed as 90%).

SM

SM indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated to
system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance.
Therefore, if there is a large amount of periodic or scheduled
maintenance testing being performed, this occupancy percentage
can be high without affecting service. This percentage is rounded to
the nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that the
occupancy is less than one half of a percent (e.g. an occupancy of
89.6% would be displayed as 90%).

CP

CP indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated to
call processing. This occupancy has priority over SM and IDLE
occupancy categories and if needed, will take processor time away
from these occupancy categories. This percentage is rounded to the
nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that the occupancy
is less than one half of a percent (e.g. an occupancy of 89.6% would
be displayed as 90%).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-248

Idle

Idle indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently available for
use. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore a
percentage of 0 means that the occupancy is less than one half of a
percent (e.g. an occupancy of 89.6% would be displayed as 90%).

Active SPE

A or B is displayed to indicate the currently active processor complex.
When the active processor complex is locked on-line via lock
switching on DUPINT, the "lock" option will be displayed; otherwise,
"auto" will be shown.

Duplicated?

The duplication status of the SPE component is indicated. "y" indicates
duplication and "n" indicates no duplication.

SPE Power

The current source of power for the processor complex is indicated.
The normal state is "commercial". When commercial power is not
available, battery backup is in use and will be indicated by "backup".

Time Source

The current timing source is displayed. The display values for this field
vary according to the timing source selected. If the site has
administered the optional Stratum-3 hardware, "external" will be
displayed under normal operating conditions and "internal" will be
displayed when an internal source, such as a tone clock, is used.
Primary and secondary timing sources must be administered when
using the Stratum-4 option. "primary" is displayed when the primary
administered source is in use, and "secondary" is displayed when the
administered secondary source is in use. When neither the primary or
secondary sources are in use, "local" will be displayed.

# Logins

The number of current users is displayed.

Cab

The assigned cabinet number, ranging from 1 to the highest cabinet
number in the system, is displayed on the screen.

Emerg Trans

The current setting of the emergency transfer switch on the
maintenance board is indicated for each cabinet. Five options are
available: auto-on ("auto+" or "a+"), auto-off ("auto-" or "a-"), "on", "off",
and "n.a.". Normally, the "auto+" or "auto-" option is enabled. In this
state, emergency transfer will be activated automatically upon cabinet
failure (The "+" indicates that emergency transfer is currently activated,
while the "-" indicates that emergency transfer is currently not
activated). When "on" is displayed, emergency transfer is automatically
activated. The "off" option shows that the cabinet is prevented from
activating emergency transfer. In a system equipped with duplicated
SPEs, the switch settings for both processors of the PPN (cabinet 1)
will be displayed. In this case, "auto+" will be abbreviated "a+", "auto-"
will be abbreviated "a-", and "off" will be abbreviated as "of". "on" will
not be changed. If "n.a." is displayed, the emergency transfer switch
setting is not available.

Mj

The individual number of major alarms associated with the cabinet is
indicated. An asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds
99.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123
Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor health

8

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-249

Mn

The individual number of minor alarms associated with the cabinet is
indicated. An asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds
99.

Wn

The individual number of associated with the cabinet is indicated. An
asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds 99.

PNC

Current Port Network Connectivity (PNC) status for each of the port
networks within a cabinet is displayed. When multiple port networks
exist within a cabinet, Carriers A, B, and C are listed first and
separated from Carriers D and E by a slash (e.g. up/up). PNC status of
a port network is determined on the basis of availability of the
Expansion Archangel Link (EAL). An "up" denotes that the EAL is
available. When the EAL is not available, then a "dn" (down) is
displayed.

Time of Day

The current time of day acquired from the system is displayed.

The following display was produced by entering "monitor system health".

status health
ALARM SUMMARY
Major: 0
Minor: 9
Warning: 4

CABINET STATUS
Emerg Alarms
Cab Trans Mj Mn Wn
1
off
0| 7| 0
2
off
0| 0| 4
3
n.a. 0| 2| 0
4
off
0| 0| 0

PNC
up
up
up
up/up

BUSY-OUT SUMMARY
Trunks: 0
Stations: 0
Others: 0
PROCESSOR OCCUPANCY STATUS
Static:
3%
SM:
6%
CP: 10%
Idle: 81%
CRITICAL SYSTEM STATUS
Active SPE: A/auto
Duplicated? SPE:n
SPE Power: commercial
Time Source: external
9:33 TUE JAN 29 1991
# Logins: 2
- Press CANCEL to quit -

Feature Interactions
In a High or Critical Reliability System, if the standby SPE Emergency Transfer
Select Switch is changed and handshake is down, the displayed Emerg Trans
field will be incorrect until handshake comes up again.
The user is logged off of the system when the monitor health command is
terminated.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor security-violations

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-250

monitor security-violations
This command provides an audit trail of security infractions

Synopsis
monitor security-violations print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician, cust, rcust, bcms, browse.

Examples
monitor security-violations
monitor security-violations print

Description
The monitor security-violations command displays information about failed
attempts to access the system. The time of the violation, the login entered, and
the port accessed during the failed login attempt are logged. Also, the trunk
group number, member, and extension will be logged for remote access
violations. Remote and local invalid access attempts are logged with a total of 16
entries maintained for each access type. This on-line status report is
automatically updated every 30 seconds until the command is canceled by
pressing the CANCEL key.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor security-violations",
the following message is displayed:
[’print’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor security-violations

Page 8-251

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The following output fields are for the "monitor security-violations" command
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT VIOLATIONS

Date:

The current date and time.

Date

The date of the logged security violation given as MM/DD where MM is
the month and DD is the day of the invalid access attempt.

Time

The time of the logged security violation given as HH:MM where HH is
the hour and MM is the minute of the invalid access attempt.

Login

This is the login ID that was entered as part of the login violation
attempt.

Port

This is the type of port from which the login violation was attempted.
The following is a table of the valid port types:

Ext

Port Type

Description

MGR1

This represents a connection to one of the system SAT ports. This can
be accomplished either by a hard-wired EIA connection or by a dial-up
connection.

The extension assigned to the data module the failed "logging in"
session was attempted on. If a data module was not used as, for
example, in the case of dedicated EIA connections, then this field will
be blank.
REMOTE ACCESS VIOLATIONS

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Page 8-252

Date

The date of the logged security violation given as MM/DD where MM is
the month and DD is the day of the invalid access attempt.

Time

The time of the logged security violation given as HH:MM where HH is
the hour and MM is the minute of the invalid access attempt.

TG No.

The trunk group number associated with the trunk from which the
remote access attempt terminated (remote access violations only).

Mbr

The trunk group member number associated with the trunk from which
the remote access attempt terminated (remote access violations only).

Ext

The extension used to interface with the remote access feature
(remote access violations only).
The following display was produced by entering "monitor security-violations".

monitor security-violations

SPE A

SECURITY VIOLATIONS STATUS
Date:

9:12 MON DEC 30 1991

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT VIOLATIONS
Date
12/30
12/30
12/30

Time
09:12
09:12
09:12

Login
init
init
init

Port
MGR1
MGR1
MGR1

Ext

REMOTE ACCESS VIOLATIONS
Date
12/30

Time
12:42

TG No.
80

Mbr
1

Ext
1111

Feature Interactions
None.

monitor system
This command with the view1 or view2 option displays one screen page of output
summarizing the overall condition of the system. With the connection option, the
command displays the real-time status for time slots and buses. Additionally,
there are other miscellaneous parameters displayed that show call rates,
intervals, etc.

Synopsis
monitor system [ view1 | view2 | conn [ pnn pnn number 1 pnn number 2 pnn
number 3 ] ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-253

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms, browse.

Examples
monitor system
monitor system
monitor system
monitor system

view1
view2
conn
conn pnn 1 5 7

Description
The monitor system view1 and view2 commands display a page of output
summarizing the condition of the system. This on-line status report is
automatically updated until the command is canceled by pressing the CANCEL
key. Two display options are available: view1 and view2.
The current overall system status is available with either of the view options.
"View1" displays attendant, maintenance, and traffic status. Attendant and
maintenance status are updated every minute and traffic status is updated on an
hourly basis. When the command is canceled, the technician will be
automatically logged off for security reasons. The "view2" report contains
everything the "view1" report does, except the hunt group measurements are
omitted from the traffic status portion of the "view2" report. These forms contain
simplified high-level information from which a basic picture of the system’s health
can be drawn. The monitor system conn command displays output that shows
the status of connections in the connection manager process. Data is collected
frequently in the connection manager for certain key information items. It is from
this database that this report is drawn. This on-line status report is automatically
updated every minute (or by pressing the UPDATE key) until the command is
canceled by pressing the CANCEL key. Pressing the CANCEL keys forces a
logout of the current login id.
There is one option to the command line entry, monitor system conn. That
parameter is pnn. On the gaz target, there are only 3 possible pnns. The
command line parameter pnn is used to indicate which 3 pnns the user wishes to
see.

Defaults
No defaults.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Page 8-254

Parameters

view1

This specifies a form that will include the attendant status, the
maintenance status, the last hour’s measurement of trunk groups, hunt
groups, and the attendant group, and finally, the time of day.

view2

This specifies a form that will display a subset of the view1 form entries.
This form will include all of the view1 form except the last hour’s hunt
group measurements.

conn

This option will bring up the connection monitor output for key
information.

entering no
options

Omitting the "pnn # # #" argument on the command line will cause the
default configuration of Pnn’s 1, 2 and 3 to be displayed.

pnn # # #

Entering "pnn # # #", where "#" is replaced by a pnn number from 1 to 3,
will cause data for the specified pnns to be displayed.

entering no options

Omitting the "pnn # # #" argument on the command line will cause
the default configuration of Pnn’s 1, 2 and 3 to be displayed.

pnn # # #

Entering "pnn # # #", where "#" is replaced by a pnn number from
1 to 3, will cause data for the specified pnns to be displayed.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor system", the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
conn

view1
scr

view2

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor system conn" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter 3 port network numbers(xx-xx) [’pnn’ x x x]

Error Messages
If the pnn number entered is non numeric, not administered, or invalid in any
other way, one of following messages will be displayed:
Object command word omitted; please press HELP
"xx" is an invalid identifier; press RETURN to execute modified command

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-255

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The following output fields are for the "monitor system view1" and "monitor system
view2" commands.

Console #

A list of console numbers that are either activated or deactivated.

Activated:

The attendant console is in service. An attendant console is
considered activated if its handset/headset is plugged in, it is not
busied out, and the system is in day service and the console is a day
or day/night or principle console, or the system is in night service and
the console is a night or day/night console.

Deactivated:

The attendant console is not in service. The attendant console is
considered deactivated if it does not meet the previous activated
conditions.

# of alarms for
trunks

The total number of existing minor and major alarms on trunk ports.

# of alarms for
other
resources

The total number of existing minor and major alarms on all
maintainable objects in the system except trunks and stations.

First OSS
number has
been
informed?

Have all the alarms been reported and acknowledged by the first OSS
telephone number. If the "Alarm Origination" is not enable or there are
no active alarm, the field will be "n".

Measurement
Hour

The starting time of the period for which the measurement was taken.
For example, if the measurement hour is shown as 1800, it means the
traffic status data displayed is for the time period from 6 PM to 7 PM
(The measurement is taken on an hourly basis).

Grp no

A number between 1 and the maximum trunk group number or
maximum hunt group number in the system.

Grp dir

Group direction: incoming, outgoing or two way.

Calls qued

Total calls that arrived and were placed in the queue for trunk groups.

Calls aban

Total calls that were abandoned by the caller.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Page 8-256

%Out blkg:

The ratio of outgoing calls that are not carried (due to overload
conditions) on a trunk group to the outgoing calls offered.

% Time ATB:

The percentage of time within the polling interval that all trunks in the
trunk group were unavailable for use.

Time of day

The current time of day acquired from the system.

For the following output example, the command monitor system view1 was
entered.

monitor system view1
ATTENDANT STATUS
Console no.
Activated: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Deactivated: 7 8

MAINTENANCE STATUS
# of alarms for trunks:
# of alarms for stations:
# of alarms for other res:
First OSS number has been informed?

4
2
1
n

TRAFFIC STATUS
Measurement Hour: 1800
Trunk Group Measurement
Hunt groups Measurement
(4 grps with highest %time ATB)
(4 grps with highest # of qued calls)
Grp no: 78
Grp no: 16
Grp dir:
Calls qued: 2
Calls qued: 1
Calls aban: 1
%Out blkg:
Attendant Group Measurement
%Time ATB:
Calls qued: 1
Calls aban: 0
16:06 WED MAR 6 1996
- press CANCEL to quit -

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Page 8-257

For the following output example, the command monitor system view2 was
entered.

monitor system view2
ATTENDANT STATUS
Console no.
Activated: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Deactivated: 7 8

MAINTENANCE STATUS
# of alarms for trunks:
# of alarms for stations:
# of alarms for other res:
First OSS number has been informed?

4
2
1
n

TRAFFIC STATUS Measurement Hour: 1800
Trunk Group Measurement
(4 grps with highest %time ATB)
Grp no: 78
Grp dir:
Calls qued: 1
%Out blkg:
%Time ATB:
Attendant Group Measurement
Calls qued: 1
Calls aban: 0
16:08 WED MAR 6 1996
- press CANCEL to quit -

Output
The following output fields are for the "monitor system conn" command.

Time Slot
Status

There are 4 numbers associated with the time slot status for each
specified pnn; for each of the two buses (0 and 1) there is a
maintenance and a normal state. The first row is the pnn, the second
specifies the bus while the third specifies the bus’s state while the last
column represents the number of idle counts. These fields represent
real-time status data.

Bus Status

For the bus status fields, there are two numbers associated with each
of the two buses for each pnn. Shown are the pnn number; the bus
associated with it, i.e., 0 or 1; and the state of the bus, i.e., "avail" or
"unavail". These fields represent real-time status data.

Callrate

The callrate field represents the call rate being experienced currently
on the switch. This is a counter which is bumped each time a call
attempt is made. This field represents real-time status data.

Interval

This field is related to the above field in that it represents the interval
being applied with which the call rate is applicable. It is normally set to
a 36 second time period. This field represents a constant status data.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-258

Max_callrate

This field represents the maximum call rate which has been hit during
the time since the last hour has passed. If, for example, at 20 minutes
past 12:00 this command is executed, this field will represent the
maximum call rate obtained during the past 20 minutes. This field
represents real-time status data.

Next_hour

This field will contain a value of 0 or 1 depending upon if the
measurements being taken are for this hour or the next. It is related to
the previous field in that the maximum call rate is reflected for this hour.
When this flag is set, then statistics begin to accumulate for the next
hour and shortly thereafter, the maximum call rate will become zero and
accumulations will begin anew.

tot_ts_req

This field holds the total time slots in use during the time period elapsed
since the top of the last hour. Data is internally collected every 100
seconds. When the timer fires and the data collection occurs, a check
is made as to how many time slots are currently in use. That’s where the
total comes from. There are three numbers displayed for this field on
the form; one for each of the pnns requested. This field represents
real-time status data.

ts_denied

This field holds the total time slots requests that were denied during the
time period elapsed since the top of the last hour. Data is internally
collected every 100 seconds. There are three numbers displayed for
this field on the form; one for each of the pnns requested. This field
represents real-time status data.

tot_fts_req

This field represents the total fiber time slots that have been requested.
This field is incremented each time a fiber time slots that have been
allocated since the last top of the hour measurements polling. There
are three values shown on the form; one for each of the requested
pnns. This field represents real-time status data.

ts_count

This field indicates how many time slots are in use during the last 100
second poling period. An internal timer causing polling to occur every
100 seconds. The value in this field represents the requests for time
slots during that 100 second interim. There are three numbers
displayed for this field on the form; one for each of the pnns requested.
This field represents real-time status data.

ts_total

This field gets it’s value from the time slots count field discussed above
every 100 seconds. It represents the total number of time slots
requested since the top of the last hour and is real-time status data.

fts_count

This field indicates how many fiber time slots are in use during the last
100 second poling period. An internal timer causing polling to occur
every 100 seconds. The value in this field represents the requests for
fiber time slots during that 100 second interim. There are three
numbers displayed for this field on the form; one for each of the pnns
requested. This field represents real-time status data.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor system

Page 8-259

fts_total

This field indicates the total number of fiber time slots. This field gets it’s
value from the fiber time slots count field discussed above every 100
seconds. It represents the total number of fiber time slots requested
since the top of the last hour and is real-time status data.

Requests-TN7
48 TTRs

The total number of touch tone receivers requested is reflected in this
field. It is a running count of currently active requests. It is
decremented when a tone receiver is freed and incremented when they
are requested. Note that this field applies strictly to the TN748 board.
This field represents real-time status data.

Requests-TN7
48 CPTRs

The total number of call progress tone receivers requested is reflected
in this field. It is a running count of currently active requests. It is
decremented when a call progress tone receiver is freed and
incremented when they are requested. Note that this field applies
strictly to the TN748 board. This field represents real-time status data.

Requests-TN7
44 CPTRs

The total number of call progress tone receivers requested is reflected
in this field. It is a running count of currently active requests. It is
decremented when a call progress tone receiver is freed and
incremented when they are requested. Note that this field applies
strictly to the TN744 board. This field represents real-time status data.

Requests-TN7
44 TTRs

The total number of touch tone receivers requested is reflected in this
field. It is a running count of currently active requests. It is
decremented when a tone receiver is freed and incremented when they
are requested. Note that this field applies strictly to the TN744 board.
This field represents real-time status data.

Requests-TN7
44 MFC

The total number of multi-frequency receivers requested is reflected in
this field. It is a running count of currently active requests. It is
decremented when a multi-frequency receiver is freed and
incremented when they are requested. Note that this field applies
strictly to the TN744 board. This field represents real-time status data.

The following display was produced by entering "monitor system conn".

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor traffic

Time Slot Status
Bus Status
Pnn
Bus
State *Idle Count
Pnn Bus State
10
0
Maint
0
10
0 Avail
10
1
Normal
233
10
1 Avail
10
0
Maint
0
22
0 Avail
10
1
Normal
233
22
1 Avail
22
0
Maint
0
1
0 Avail
22
1
Normal
233
1
1 Avail
22
0
Maint
0
22
1
Normal
233
*Callrate: 20
1
0
Maint
0
*Interval: 60
1
1
Normal
233
*Max_callrate:45
1
0
Maint
0
*Next_hour: 70
1
1
Normal
233
tot_ts_req :0F24 0000 3CE2 ts_count :0010 0920 0200 Requests-TN748
ts_denied :0E46 3CE2 0000 ts_total :0000 0090 0028 Requests-TN748
tot_fts_req:0000 53D2 2231 fts_count:02E0 0910 0784 Requests-TN744
fts_total:0320 0192 7048 Requests-TN744
Requests-TN744 MFCs :0082
Note: * Denotes Base 10, All Other Figures are in Base 16

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-260

TTRs :0014
CPTRs:0041
CPTRs:0082
TTRs :0082

Feature Interactions
None.

monitor traffic
This command monitors the traffic load for trunk or hunt groups.

Synopsis
monitor traffic [ trunk-groups number | hunt-groups ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician, cust, rcust, bcms, browse.

Examples
monitor traffic trunk-groups
monitor traffic trunk-groups 4
monitor traffic hunt-groups

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor traffic

Page 8-261

Description
The monitor traffic command gives an instant picture of the load on various trunk
and hunt groups in terms of number of calls waiting to be serviced, and the time
the oldest call in the group has been awaiting service.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
trunk-groups

The trunk group report displays the number of calls in the queue
waiting to be serviced, for each trunk group. The number of the
members in the group and the number of members which are active on
calls in the group are also displayed for comparative analysis. Only the
administered trunk groups are displayed, up to a maximum of 60
groups. The user may specify the starting trunk group. For example, if
the user entered 5, then the trunks displayed would be from group 5
and up, 1-4 would not be displayed.

hunt-groups

The hunt-group report has a similar format as the trunk-group report. In
addition to the trunk-group information, this report displays the time the
oldest call has been waiting in the queue for each hunt group. The data
on the screen is updated every minute, only the fields whose values
have changed are refreshed. All the hunt groups, whether
administered or not, are displayed. The hunt groups that are not
administered have blank values.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor traffic", the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
hunt-groups

trunk-groups

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor traffic

Page 8-262

Output

#

Group number for the trunk or hunt group.

S

The size (number of members administered) of each trunk or hunt group.

A

The number of members in a group that are active on a call. This does not
include members which have been busied out.

Q

The length of the queue administered for a group.

W

The number of calls waiting in the group queue to be serviced.

LCIQ

The longest call in queue (LCIQ) indicates the time in seconds the oldest call in
the hunt group queue has been waiting to be serviced.
For the following output example, the command "monitor traffic hunt-groups" was
entered.

monitor traffic hunt-groups

#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

S
15

(#: Group;

A
10

HUNT GROUP STATUS
Q
W
LCIQ
10 0
20

S: Grp Size;

22:49 SAT DEC 31 1988
#
S A
Q
W LCIQ
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 10
5
0
0
10
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

A: Active Members;

Q: Q Length;

W: Calls Waiting)

(LCIQ: Longest Call In Queue in seconds)

For the following output example, the command monitor traffic trunk-groups was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor trunk

Page 8-263

monitor traffic trunk-groups

#
1
2
9
65
99

S
15
22
31
5
12

A
10
21
12
5
0

Q
0
10
20
10
0

(#: Group;

TRUNK GROUP STATUS
22:49 SAT DEC 311988
W # S A Q W # S A Q W # S A Q
0
10
0
8
0

S: Grp Size;

A: Active Members;

Q: Q Length;

W

W: Calls Waiting)

Feature Interactions
None.

monitor trunk
This command monitors the status of an individual trunk group member.

Synopsis
monitor trunk group/member

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
monitor trunk 78
monitor trunk 80/
monitor trunk 78/1
monitor trunk 80/2

Description
The monitor trunk command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the trunk is
communicating.
If a trunk group number is entered without a member number, with or without the
"/", it is assumed to be the member 1. If a trunk group number and member
number are both entered, status for the specified member is displayed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor trunk

Page 8-264

Defaults
The member number defaults to 1 if a group is specified without a member.

Parameters

group

The group number is an administered number associated with each trunk
group. The valid range is 1 - 99. If a group number is entered without a
member number, member number defaults to 1.

member

The member number is an administered number identifying a particular
member within a trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99. If a member
number is entered, status for that member is displayed.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "monitor trunk", the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned trunk group(1-99) or [group/member(1-99)]

Error Messages
If the format of the trunk identifier is incorrect, the following error message is
displayed:
Format invalid

If the trunk identifier is not in the valid range, the following error message is
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

If the trunk group member is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Group member not assigned

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
monitor trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-265

Output

Trunk
Group/Member

The trunk group number and group member number. Valid
identifiers are 1-99/1-99.

Port

The port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the trunk.

Signaling Group
ID

If the trunk is of type ISDN, then this field contains the number of the
ISDN Signaling Group to which this group belongs. Otherwise, this
field is blank.

Connected
Ports

Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk.

Service State

Whether the trunk is in service or out of service. One of the following
states is displayed: in-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service,
out-of-service-NE (Near End), out-of-service-FE (Far End),
maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, maint-FE/idle,
pending-in-service, pending-maint, or disconnected. NE (Near End)
and FE (Far End) refer to which "end" of the trunk has placed the
facility in the state that it is in.

Maintenance
Busy

Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed upon the
trunk.

CA-TSC State

The state of the temporary signaling connection. A temporary
signaling connection is a connection set up to pass call information
over PRI signaling links.

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "monitor
trunk 78/1".

monitor trunk 78/1
TRUNK STATUS
Trunk Group/Member: 078/001
Port: 01C1505
Signaling Group ID:
Connected Ports:

Feature Interactions
None.

Service State: in-service/idle
Maintenance Busy? no
CA-TSC State:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
recycle carrier

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-266

recycle carrier
This command recycles power on a carrier.

Synopsis
recycle carrier location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
recycle carrier c
recycle carrier 01c
recycle carrier 2b
recycle carrier 3d

Description
The recycle carrier command recycles power on a specific carrier. When a
power unit is replaced in a carrier, this command must be entered to recycle the
power on that carrier. The processor carrier and its duplicate if present as
well as any EPN control carrier or an SCC carrier cannot be recycled. If a
port carrier is recycled, service is interrupted for that port carrier. If a carrier
containing an active EI is recycled, communications with that cabinet will be
disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled, all
ports in port network will have service disrupted. For more details on
recycling and trouble shooting power units, refer to "Troubleshooting Control
Carrier Power Units" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.

Defaults
The default cabinet is cabinet 1. There is no default carrier.

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical location of the desired carrier.
The location consists of the cabinet number and a carrier letter. The
cabinet number is one or two digits from 1 to 3 with leading zeros
allowed. Cabinet 1 is the PPN with 2-3 referring to some optional EPN
cabinet. The carrier letter may be "b" through "e". The "b" carrier may
not be specified for SPE duplex PPNs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
recycle carrier

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-267

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "recycle carrier" on a
simplex SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1-3)];carrier(B-E)

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "recycle carrier" on a duplex
SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
For cabinet 1 enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(C-E)
For cabinet 2-3 enter cabinet (2-3);carrier(B-E)

Error Messages
If no location is entered, the following message will be displayed:
Identifier command word(s) omitted; please press help

If a location greater than three characters is entered, the following message will
be displayed:
Entry invalid

If the location entered is longer than 3 characters or less than 1 character the
following will be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If the cabinet and carrier specified are in an EPN that is not available, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If a cabinet number of "1" or "01" is entered and the carrier specified is "A" or "B" in
an SPE duplex system, the carrier specified is "A" in a SPE simplex system or if
the "A" carrier is specified with a cabinet other than "1" or "01, or an SCC carrier
location is given," the following message will be displayed:
Cannot recycle control carriers or XE carriers

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
refresh spe-standby

Page 8-268

Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that is
being tested. For this maintenance object, only the cabinet and carrier
values are displayed.

Maintenance
Name

The maintenance name will always be CARR-POW.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test Number

The test number will always be 126.

Test Result

An indicator as to whether the test passed, failed, or was aborted.

Error Code

Further detail about the results of the test.

For the following output example, the command recycle carrier c was entered.

recycle carrier c
TEST RESULTS
Port
01C

Maintenance Name
CARR-POW

Alt. Name Test No. Result
126
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
The ’a’ carrier can never have its power recycled. When the ’b’ carrier of the PPN
contains SPE duplication hardware, the ’b’ carrier similarly is not available for
power recycling.
If a port carrier is recycled, service is interrupted for that port carrier. If a carrier
containing an active EI is recycled, communications with that cabinet will be
disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled, all ports
port network will have service disrupted.
Occasionally, circuit packs show red LEDs and "NO BOARD" when a list
configuration command is issued after a carrier is recycled. The test tdm
command can be used to accelerate retirement of these problems.

refresh spe-standby
This command refreshes the memory of the standby SPE in a High or Critical
Reliability System.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
refresh spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-269

Synopsis
refresh spe-standby

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
refresh spe-standby

Description
The refresh spe-standby command is used to immediately put the Standby SPE
into Standby Mode. The command conducts the same activities regardless of
whether the Standby SPE is already in Standby or Maintenance Mode. When this
command is issued, any Standby SPE maintenance activity that is currently is
progress is preempted, the Standby SPE Processor is held reset, and the
Standby SPE’s DRAM memory is refreshed (that is, all of Active SPE DRAM
memory is shadowed to the Standby SPE memory). The refresh is necessary
because while the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing is
disabled. When the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode, its memory must
be brought up-to-date with Active SPE memory.
Because of its power to preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, the refresh
spe-standby command should be used judiciously. If the Standby SPE is in
Maintenance Mode when the refresh spe-standby command is issued, the
maintenance activity that is being conducted by the Standby SPE is immediately
terminated with the following potential side-effects:
■

Testing of the Standby SPE components that are the target of the
maintenance activity may not have completed. Depending on the
maintenance activity and the point at which it is terminated, tests that
detect faults and/or lack of faults on those Standby SPE components may
not have had the opportunity to run. Accordingly, alarms are not raised or
retired on the components.

■

If the maintenance activity is scheduled and if the refresh spe-standby
command is issued before a scheduled translation save is performed, the
translation save is not done and the translations data on the Active and
Standby SPE mass storage devices do not reflect the changes made
since the last translation save.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
refresh spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-270

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "refresh spe-standby," the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
If the refresh command is successful, the following message will be displayed on
the SAT:
Command successfully completed
If the refresh command is unsuccessful, the following message will be displayed
on the SAT:
Refresh not successful;
use ’display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors
If the active SPE is held reset via the SPE select switches, then the following will
be displayed:
Could only hold Standby SPE reset because
Active SPE is locked via SPE select switches

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-271

If the standby is currently entering maintenance mode, then the following will be
displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later
If the standby is busy with another task, then the following will be displayed:
Standby SPE not available; for information use "status
system"
If the standby is in the process of doing a software upgrade, then the following
will be displayed:
Standby SPE upgrade in progress, command denied

Feature Interactions
The refresh command is not allowed while the standby SPE is being brought out
of standby mode into maintenance mode. Once fully in maintenance mode,
however, the command can be executed.

release access-endpoint
This command will release a specified access endpoint.

Synopsis
release access-endpoint extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
release access-endpoint 25012
release access-endpoint 77868

Description
The release access endpoint command will remove all ports associated with the
specified access endpoint from a maintenance busy state. Periodic and
scheduled tests will resume on the released ports. Maintenance will do
background initialization testing on the released ports. For details of the test
sequence, refer to [3].

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-272

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired access endpoint.
The number of digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "release access-endpoint," the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid
If the EPN on which the access endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned
If the object associated with the specified extension is not an access endpoint,
the following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than access-endpoint
If the board that contains the access endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-273

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released. For
wideband access endpoint the maintenance name for each port
is "WAE-PORT." For single port access endpoint the maintenance
name is "TIE-DS1."

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the extension number of the access endpoint.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object is successfully released.
The possible values are: PASS, FAIL and ABORT.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, the command "release access-endpoint 22502"
was entered. Assume that the access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in
cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6.

release access-endpoint 22502

page 1 of 1

COMMAND RESULTS
Port Maintenance Name Alt. Name Result
01C1101 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
01C1102 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
01C1103 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
01C1104 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
01C1105 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
01C1106 WAE-PORT
22502
PASS
Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-274

release board
This command will release each maintenance object on the specified board.

Synopsis
release board location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
release board 01c11
release board 02c15

Description
The release board command will put every administered maintenance object on
the circuit pack at the specified location into operation. Some tests are done on
the object to make sure that it can be used.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the board to be busied
out or released and is entered as "UUcSS" where "UU" represents the
cabinet number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, and "SS" represents
the slot position.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release board," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 5 character board number

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-275

Error Messages
If the format of the board location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid
If the EPN on which the board resides is not available, the following message will
be displayed:
EPN is not available
If a board is not inserted in the specified location, the following message will be
displayed:
Board not assigned
If the specified board does not have any maintenance objects associated with it,
the following message will be displayed:
No MO in this board
If the specified board is a EI board and it is part of the active link, the following
message will be displayed:
Illegal Command for active object; use ’set’ to switch to
standby
If a reset is attempted on an invalid board in the service slot, the following
message is displayed:
Board invalid
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release cdr-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-276

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the maintenance object
that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the board in cabinet 1, carrier c,
slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. The command that was
entered is "release board 1c07."

release board 01C07
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
Maintenance Name
01C07
ANL-BD
01C0702
ANL-LINE
01C0701
ANL-LINE
01C0703
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name

51001

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release cdr-link
This command will release a maintenance object associated with the specified
call detail recording (cdr)-link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release cdr-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-277

Synopsis
release cdr-link link-id

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release cdr-link primary
release cdr-link secondary

Description
The release cdr-link command will remove the maintenance object associated
with a specified call detail recording (cdr)-link from a maintenance busy state.
A link is made up of several components. It involves a far end data module, a
simulated data channel on a PKTINT board, a manager that initiates and
maintains the link, and a controller/protocol that services the link. A
controller/protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link
is up. A link is considered up if a physical connection is established. A link can
be considered to be up while no useful work can be performed over it, in this
case the link is insane and should be torn down. These links provide
asynchronous data connections from the switch to peripherals.
For information on what a CDR link is and does, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "status cdr-link" manual pages.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
link-id

The link identifier is either "primary" or "secondary."

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release cdr-link," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter ’primary’ or ’secondary’

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release cdr-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-278

Error Messages
If the cdr-link is not administered, then the following message will be displayed:
Link not administered
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released. If releasing
the primary cdr-link the maintenance object will be PRI-CDR, else
if releasing the secondary cdr-link the maintenance object will be
SEC-CDR.

Alt. Name

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Result

The result of the release - "PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release cdr-link primary."

release cdr-link primary
COMMAND RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
PRI-CDR

Alt. Name

Command successfully completed

Result
PASS

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-279

Feature Interactions
None.

release data-module
This command will release a system technician-specified data module or data
channel.

Synopsis
release data-module extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms.

Examples
release data-module 310

Description
The release data module command will put the specified data module (or data
channel) into service. Some tests are executed on the hardware to verify that the
equipment is functioning.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired data module or data
channel. The number of digits in an extension is determined by a
dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release data-module," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned extension

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-280

Error Messages
If the length or format of the extension is incorrect, the following error message
will be displayed:
Extension invalid
If the specified extension is not administered, then the following message will be
displayed:
Extension not assigned
If the specified extension is not a data module or a data channel, then the
following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object
If the EPN that contains the data module port is not available, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the board containing the data module port is part of the SCI link, the following
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release journal-printer

Page 8-281

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out or released, or the number of the
data channel.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out or
released.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied out
or released.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release data-module 300."

release data-module 310
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
Maintenance Name
01C1103
DIG-LINE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release journal-printer
This command will release a maintenance object associated with the system
technician specified pms-log or wakeup-log.

Synopsis
release journal-printer [ pms-log | wakeup-log ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release journal-printer

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-282

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
release journal-printer pms-log
release journal-printer wakeup-log

Description
The release journal-printer command will put the maintenance object associated
with a specified pms-log or wakeup-log link into service. Some tests are
executed on the hardware to verify that the equipment is functioning.
For general information on journal printer links, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "busyout pms-link" manual pages.
For information on what a journal printer is and does, see the second paragraph
in the "Description" section of the "status journal-link" manual pages.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
wakeup-log

This will release the link to the wakeup logging facility. In the output the
port name for this object is 0.

pms-log

This will release the link to the pms printer. In the output the port name
for the pms link is 1.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release journal-printer," the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
pms-log

wakeup-log

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release journal-printer

Page 8-283

Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out or released. In this case, the
physical object port address will be a 0 for wakeup log and a 1
for the pms log.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out or
released.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied out
or released.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release journal-printer wakeup-log."

release journal-printer wakeup-log
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
0

Maintenance Name
JRNL-LINK

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link will sometimes interfere with
the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a
busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may
delay the recover of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a
component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the
technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The
busyout command is used to do this, and will not cause the link to be torn down.
If the link is already down, the busyout command will stop periodic re-setup
attempts on the link.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release link

Page 8-284

release link
This command will release the system technician specified link.

Synopsis
release link link-id

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release link 1
release link 8

Description
The release link command puts the MOs associated with a specified link into
service. Some tests execute on the hardware to verify functioning equipment.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
link-id

The link-id is a number associated with each link between 1-8. Link 1
through 4 reside on Processor Interface circuit pack "1a1" or "1b1" and
5 through 8 reside on Processor Interface circuit pack "1a2" or "1b2."

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release link," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 1 character link number

Error Messages
If the link identifier is not valid, the following error message is displayed:
Link out of range, please press HELP
If the link is not administered, the following error message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-285

Link not administered or not enabled
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out or released. With this command
the Port address represents the link-id.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release link 1."

release link 1
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
Maintenance Name
01C0301
PI-LINK

Alt. Name

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Result
PASS

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release mis

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-286

release mis
This command will release a specified management information system.

Synopsis
release mis

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, cust, rcust.

Examples
release mis

Description
The release mis command will put a management information system into
service. Some tests are executed on the hardware to verify that the equipment is
functioning.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release mis" the following
message will be displayed:
Entry is not required
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release modem-pool

Page 8-287

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

Not applicable.

Maintenance
Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released. MIS for
this command.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed or was
aborted. 1011 - already released

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release mis."

release mis
COMMAND RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
MIS

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release modem-pool
This command will allow all members of a modem pool group to be released.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release modem-pool

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-288

Synopsis
release modem-pool group/member

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician.

Examples
release modem-pool 1
release modem-pool 4/3

Description
The release modem-pool command will remove the specified modem pool group
or group member from the maintenance busy state. A single group member can
be released by specifying the group number, a "/," and the member number. All
members in a modem pool group can be released by specifying the modem pool
group number only.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
group number

The group number is assigned from administration. The group number
may be any administered group from 1-5.

member
number

The member number is assigned from administration. A member is a
pair of analog and digital line ports (or two pair for the Integrated
modem-pool case). The member number may be any administered
group member from 1-32.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release modem-pool" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned group number between 1-5
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command

Error Messages
If the "release modem-pool" command is entered from a login for which the
command is not valid, then the following message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release modem-pool

Page 8-289

"release" is an invalid entry; please press HELP
If the group or member numbers entered are not in a valid format, the following
message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid
If the group number entered is not within the range of groups or the member
number is not within the member range, then the following message will be
displayed:
Boards not assigned
If the specific group or member are not administered, then the following
message will be displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member
If a software fault is encountered while the command is executing, the following
message will be displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
When each modem pool member has been busied out, the following information
will be displayed:
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object which is being busied out.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out or
released. This is always MODEM-PT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release packet-control

Page 8-290

Alt. Name

This field is not applicable to this command.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS,” "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

In the following output example, the command "release modem-pool 1" was
entered.

release modem-pool 1

SPE B
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name

01C0701
01C0703

Alt. Name

MODEM-PT
MODEM-PT

Result

Error Code

PASS
PASS

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release packet-control
This command will release the specified packet-control.

Synopsis
release packet-control location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init

Examples
release packet-control 1A
release packet-control 1B

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release packet-control

Page 8-291

Description
The release packet-control command will put the packet-control circuit pack
in-service, and reestablish each point-to-point signaling link that is terminated on
this packet-control. This command is the complement to the busyout
packet-control command which puts the packet-control in a out-of-service state
and tears down all point-to-point signaling links terminated on this
packet-control.

Defaults
For simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1, carrier A.
For duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1, but there is no default
for the carrier.

Parameters
location

The location only applies to duplicated configurations. If the
configuration is a simplex, the location parameter is not used and thus
is not valid. For duplicated configurations, a "location" represents the
carrier that the packet-control resides on in the system. Valid locations
are either 1A or 1B.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release packet-control," the
following message is displayed:
Enter Packet Control location: [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B)

Error Messages
If this command is entered for a packet-control that resides on the stand-by
control complex of a High or Critical Reliability System, the following message is
displayed:
Command only applies to the active Packet Control
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-292

Output
Port

This field represents the Cabinet-Carrier in which the
Packet-Control resides.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released which is
always PKT-CTRL.

Alt. Name

This field is not used in this output display.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully released (
"PASS," "FAIL," or "ABORT" ).

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release pms-link

Page 8-293

For the following output example, the command release packet-control 1A was
entered.

release packet-control 1A
COMMAND RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name

1A

PKT-CTRL

Alt. Name

Result

Error Code

PASS

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
In a High or Critical Reliability System, an attempt to release the packet-control
that resides in the standby control complex will be disallowed.
When the packet-control in the active control complex is released from a
previously busied-out state, all connectivity across the Packet Bus will be
reestablished. Thus, all ISDN-BRI point-to-point signaling links that had been
established via the packet-control prior to the execution of a busyout
packet-control command will be reestablished by the release packet-control
command.

release pms-link
This command will release a specified property management system link.

Synopsis
release pms-link

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release pms-link

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release pms-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-294

Description
The release pms-link command removes all MOs associated with a property
management system link from the maintenance busy state. A link is made up of
several components. It involves a far-end data module, a simulated data channel
on a NETCON board, a manager that initiates and maintains the link, and a
controller/protocol that services the link. A link is considered up if a physical
connection is established. A link can be considered to be up while no useful work
can be performed over it, in this case the link is insane and should be torn down.
These links provide asynchronous data connections from the switch to
peripherals.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If you press HELP after entering "release pms-link" the following message
displays:
Entry is not required
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message displays showing the login ID of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, the following
message displays:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release port

Page 8-295

Output
Port

With this maintenance object the port field is left blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of MO that is being released (always PMS-LINK).

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the "Busyout/Release
Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release pms-link."

release pms-link
COMMAND RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
PMS-LINK

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link may interfere with the
maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a busy
state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay
the recover of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a component
only taking place when the component is idle. The technician needs to be able to
disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The busyout command is used to do
this, and will not cause the link to be torn down. If the link is already down, the
busyout command will stop periodic re-setup trys on the link.

release port
This command will release a specified port on a circuit pack.

Synopsis
release port location

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-296

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release port 01c1101
release port 02c1501

Description
The release port command will remove the specified port on a circuit pack from a
maintenance busy state.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be released
and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot
position, and "pp" represents the circuit (port).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release port," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 7 character port number

Error Messages
If the format of the port location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid
If the EPN on which the port resides is unavailable, the following message will be
displayed:
EPN is not available
If the board on which the port resides is not administered, the following error
message will be displayed:
Port not assigned

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-297

If the board on which the port resides is part of the SCI link, the following error
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link
If the port is translated within a Wideband Access Endpoint, the following error
message will be displayed:
Port within wideband access endpt;
Use busyout access-endpoint  instead
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot
7, circuit 1 is an analog port. The command that was entered is "release port
1c0701."

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release pri-endpoint

Page 8-298

release port 01C0701
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
01C0701

Maintenance Name
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release pri-endpoint
This command will release a specified PRI endpoint.

Synopsis
release pri-endpoint extension

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
release pri-endpoint 25012
release pri-endpoint 77868

Description
The release PRI endpoint command will remove all PRI endpoint ports
(B-channels) associated with the specified PRI endpoint from a maintenance
busy state. Periodic and scheduled tests will resume on the released ports. The
switch will attempt to negotiate with the far-end PRI terminal adapter to put each
PRI endpoint port (B-channel) into in-service state. Maintenance will do
background initialization testing on the released ports. For details of the test
sequence, refer to [3].

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-299

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired PRI endpoint. The
number of digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "release pri-endpoint," the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid
If the EPN on which the PRI endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned
If the object associated with the specified extension is not a PRI endpoint, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than pri-endpoint
If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release sp-link

Page 8-300

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released. The name
for PRI endpoint port is "PE-BCHL."

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the extension number of the PRI endpoint.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object is successfully released. The
possible values are: PASS, FAIL and ABORT.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, the command "release pri-endpoint 22501" was
entered. Assume that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet
1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 6.

release pri-endpoint 22501

page 1 of 1
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
01B2001
01B2002
01B2003
01B2004
01B2005
01B2006

Maintenance Name Alt. Name
PE-BCHL
22501
PE-BCHL
22501
PE-BCHL
22501
PE-BCHL
22501
PE-BCHL
22501
PE-BCHL
22501

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release sp-link
This command will release the system printer link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release sp-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-301

Synopsis
release sp-link

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release sp-link

Description
The release sp-link command will return the busied out system printer link to
operation and resolve all active alarms for the system printer link.
The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer over which
jobs can be printed. This link is created by administering the system printer
extension and setting up a call to the system printer.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release sp-link," the
following is displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the system printer link is not administered, the following message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release spe-standby

Page 8-302

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being busied out. For this maintenance object,
blanks are displayed.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied
out.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the command failed.

For the following output example the command entered was "release sp-link."

release sp-link

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port

Maintenance Name
SYS-PRNT

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release spe-standby
This command allows the technician to release the standby Switch Processing
Element (SPE).

Synopsis
release spe-standby

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-303

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release spe-standby

Description
The release spe-standby command removes the busyout status of the standby
SPE. Memory shadowing will be restored, a memory refresh of the standby SPE
will occur and 1 minute later the equivalent of scheduled standby SPE
maintenance will be performed which will return the standby SPE’s Fault Severity
Level to the appropriate value.
Release of the standby SPE will be allowed if communication to the standby is
down.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release spe-standby" the
following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release station

Page 8-304

Output
Port

The port address will display the cabinet and carrier location of
the standby SPE. The standby SPE port address will always be
01A or 01B.

Maintenance Name

"STBY-SPE" for the standby SPE maintenance object.

Alt. Name

Always blank for this command.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the standby SPE is located in
carrier "B." The command that was entered is "release spe-standby."

release spe-standby

SPE A
COMMAND RESULTS

Port
01B

Maintenance Name
STBY-SPE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
When the standby SPE is released a memory refresh is performed which may
take several minutes to complete. The standby Fault Severity Level will be
lowered to its appropriate level when a release is requested. One minute later,
the equivalent of scheduled standby SPE maintenance will be performed, after
which a spontaneous SPE interchange could occur, depending of the Fault
Severity Level of the two SPE’s.
If the standby SPE is in poor health, memory shadowing can not be enabled or
communication to the standby is impossible, a release of the standby SPE will
still be successful.

release station
This command will release a specified station.

Synopsis
release station extension

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-305

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init.

Examples
release station 10020
release station 32770

Description
The release station command will remove the specified administered voice
terminal extension (station) from a maintenance busy state.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

An extension number associated with the desired voice terminal. The
number of digits in an extension is determined by a dial-plan.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release station," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter extension for an assigned station

Error Messages
If the format of the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid
If the specified extension is not administered, then the following message will be
displayed:
Extension not assigned
If the specified extension does not belong to a station or attendant console, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-306

If the station port resides on an EPN that is unavailable, the following message
will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the station port resides on a board that is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not assigned
If the station port resides on a board that is part of the SCI link, the following
message will be displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release station 1002."

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release tdm

Page 8-307

release station 1002
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
01C1102

Maintenance Name
DIG-LINE

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release tdm
This command will release a TDM bus on the PPN or any EPN.

Synopsis
release tdm port-network pn number bus bus

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release tdm port-network 1 bus a
release tdm port-network 1 bus b

Description
The release tdm command will remove the specified tdm bus from a
maintenance busy state.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-308

Defaults
No defaults.
pn number

The PN number specifies the Port Network number of the TDM bus to
be released.

bus

The TDM bus ("a" or "b") specifies which half of the TDM bus is desired.
Each 512 time slot TDM bus is configured as two duplicate 256 time
slot buses. This division allows for duplication of control channels and
dedicated tone time slots. The default control bus (carrying the control
channel) is the "a" bus, while the default tone bus (carrying dedicated
tones) is the "b" bus. A port network number (1 - 3) may be entered
with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release tdm," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter ’port-network’, port network number (1-3),
’bus’, bus (’a’ or ’b’)

Error Messages
If the technician enters "bus" before "port-network," the following message will be
displayed:
’bus’ is an invalid identifier; please press HELP
If the technician does not enter all digits for the port-network number, the
following message will be displayed:
Entry must be all digits
If the technician enters a bus other than A or B, the following message will be
displayed:
Identifier invalid
If the technician enters a TDM bus identifier with a Port Network number that is
not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Port Network number not assigned
If the port network on which the desired TDM bus resides is unavailable, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release tdm

Page 8-309

’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port network number (preceded by "PN") and the bus ("A" or
"B") associated with the TDM bus.

Maintenance Name

TDM-BUS is the maintenance object being released.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release tdm port-network 1 bus a."

release tdm port-network 1 bus a
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
PN 01A

Maintenance Name
TDM-BUS

Alt. Name

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
If a bus is busied out, no calls will be torn down. However, no new calls will be set
up on the busied out bus.
Dedicated tone time slots must be moved to another bus (the other half of the
duplicated bus) before a busyout of a particular bus will be allowed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release tone-clock

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-310

release tone-clock
This command will release a tone/clock circuit pack.

Synopsis
release tone-clock location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
release tone-clock c

Description
The release tone-clock command will remove the specified tone/clock from a
maintenance busy state.

Defaults
The cabinet number will default to 1 (one).

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the tone/clock to be
released and is entered as "UUc" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, and "c" represents the carrier. A single digit cabinet number
(1 - 3) may be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release tone-clock," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter tone/clock location:
[cabinet(1-3)];(carrier(A-E))

Error Messages
If an identifier greater than 3 (three) characters is entered, or the cabinet entered
is not a digit (number), the following message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release tone-clock

Page 8-311

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified
If the cabinet entered is not within the valid range of cabinets or the cabinet is not
administered, the following message will be displayed:
Cabinet number not assigned
If there is no tone/clock board at the specified location, one of the following
messages will be displayed:
Board not inserted
Board not assigned
If the specified cabinet carrier location is that of a switch node, the following
message will be displayed:
Switch Node carrier specified;
invalid command for SN carrier
If the cabinet carrier location entered is that of an EPN that is not available, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If the tone/clock is not busied out and the specified action is release, the
following message will be displayed:
Object is not busied out; can’t release
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release trunk

Page 8-312

Output
Port

The tone clock circuit pack maintenance object will only display
the cabinet and carrier of the desired tone/clock board.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released is
TONE-PT, TDM-CLK and TONE-BD.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Result

The result of the release -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release tone-clock 1a."

release tone-clock 1a
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
TONE-PT
TDM-CLK
TONE-BD

Alt. Name

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

release trunk
This command will release a specified trunk group or trunk group member.

Synopsis
release trunk group/member

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-313

Examples
release trunk 78
release trunk 78/1

Description
The release trunk command will remove the specified trunk group or trunk group
member from a maintenance busy state. A single group member can be
released by specifying the group number, a "/," and the member number. All
members in a trunk group can be released by specifying the trunk group number
only.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
group

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99.

member

The member number is an administered number identifying a
particular trunk within a trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "release trunk," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter assigned trunk group number [or group/member]

Error Messages
If the format of the identifier is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Format invalid
If the range of the trunk group is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid
If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members, the following
message will be displayed:
Group not assigned,
or group assigned but with no member

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
release trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-314

If the specified member is not administered, the following message will be
displayed:
Group member not assigned
If the specified trunk group is part of the SCI link, the following message will be
displayed:
Cannot busyout/release part of SCI link
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being released.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being released.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

The result of the release - "PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be found in the
"Busyout/Release Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"release trunk 78/1."

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset board

Page 8-315

release trunk 78/1
COMMAND RESULTS
Port
01C1505

Maintenance Name
CO_TRK

Alt. Name
78/01

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

reset board
This command will reset the specified board.

Synopsis
reset board location repeat number

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
reset board 01c11
reset board c08
reset board 03d12 r 3

Description
The reset board command will perform a soft (i.e. software) reset of every
administered port on the port circuit pack at the specified location. All ports must
be busied out before the port circuit pack is reset. The most efficient way of
doing this is to perform a busyout of the board before resetting it.

! WARNING:
This command is service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-316

Defaults
The carrier and repeat number default to 1.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port board to be
reset and is entered as "UUcSS" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number ( 1 - 3), "c" represents the carrier, and "SS" represents the slot
position.

number

The "number" specifies how many times each board reset is to be
repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "reset board," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter board location, [’repeat’ (1-100)]

Error Messages
If the format of the board location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid
If the EPN on which the specified board is not available, the following message
will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If a board is not inserted in the specified location, then the following message will
be displayed:
Board not assigned
If the specified board is active, the following message will be displayed:
Illegal command for active object;
use ’set’ to switch to standby
If a reset is attempted on an invalid board in the service slot, the following
message is displayed:
Board invalid
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset board

Page 8-317

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the maintenance object
that is being reset.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object being reset.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Result

The result of the reset -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the reset failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the "Reset
Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the board in port network 1, carrier
c, slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. The command that
was entered is "reset board 1c07."

reset board 1C07
TEST RESULTS
Port
01C07

Maintenance Name
ANL-BD

Alt. Name Test No. Result
53
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-318

reset interface
This command will reset the processor interface board (PI).

Synopsis
reset interface location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
reset interface 01a1
reset interface a2
reset interface 01b1
reset interface 01b2

Description
This command resets the Processor Interface circuit pack, causes its associated
software to be read from tape, applications processes to be restarted,
permanent switched calls to be re-established, and each enabled link to be
setup. If the interface cannot be established, a Major alarm i s raised on the
interface and all enabled links are taken out-of-service. When the Message
Server Adjunct (MSA), Distributed Communications System (DCS), Audio
Information Exchange (AUDIX), or Call Management System (CMS) is first
administered and the form submitted, the link for these applications and the
submittal of the form restart the interface. Before the Processor Interface circuit
pack is replaced, the switch must be powered down and then restarted (unless
the system is equipped with High or Critical Reliability).
When resolving troubles, also see the status interface, status link, and status
processor-channel commands to determine where the trouble is located before
performing a reset interfaces because link traffic is interrupted.

! WARNING:
The interface command interrupts operation of the AP, DCS, AUDIX, CMS
or ISDN-PRI.

Defaults
No defaults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-319

Parameters
location

The location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface (PI
board). The position determines which processor interface circuit pack
will be cleared. A position of 1 is the first processor interface in the
carrier, while a position of 2 is the second processor interface in the
carrier.

Help Messages
If you press HELP after entering "reset interface," the following message displays:
Enter identifier: [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B);position(1-2)

Error Messages
If the specified carrier is not the active PE, the following message will be
displayed:
Command must be executed from active SPE
If the technician-entered cabinet and carrier is invalid for a PPN, the following
message will be displayed:
Invalid port-network specified
If the technician-entered carrier is not a valid carrier, the following message will
be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified
If the technician-entered carrier is not active, the following message displays:
Board invalid
If the specified carrier/position processor interface circuit pack is not inserted,
but the specified carrier is active, the following error message will be displayed:
Processor Interface (TN765)
not started or is being started
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-320

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed; use the
"refresh spe-standby" command.
If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed
If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"
If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the reset interface command is successful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed
If the reset interface command is unsuccessful, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-321

reset maintenance
This command will reset the EPN maintenance circuit pack in any Expansion Port
Network cabinet.

Synopsis
reset maintenance location

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: system technician, inads, init.

Examples
reset maintenance 02
reset maintenance 2
reset maintenance 3a

Description
The reset maintenance command performs a reset on a technician specified
EPN maintenance circuit pack. Specifying cabinets 2 or 3 resets the EPN
maintenance circuit pack in the ’a’ carrier of the specified cabinet.
This command is destructive and will drop a SAT terminal session on the EPN
maintenance circuit pack being reset. If this command is run from a EPN
maintenance SAT terminal, the results of the reset will not be displayed.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical position of the desired EPN
maintenance circuit pack. The location consists of a cabinet number
and carrier letter. The cabinet number is one digit, 2 through 3 with a
leading zero allowed. The carrier is always "a" if entered.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "reset maintenance" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter cabinet([0]2-[0]3);[carrier(A)]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset maintenance

Page 8-322

Error Messages
If the cabinet entered is non numeric or not within a valid range, the following
message will be displayed:
Cabinet number out of range; Enter 2 - 3
If the length of the user entered parameter exceeds three (3), or is in any other
way invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Entry invalid
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message displays showing the login ID of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the MO being reset.

Maintenance Name

"MAINT" for the EPN maintenance circuit pack.

Alt. Name

Always blank for this command.

Result

The result of the reset -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL."

Test No.

The test number for this command will always be 306.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the reset failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes can be in the "Reset
Commands" section of this chapter.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"reset maintenance 02a."

reset maintenance 02A
TEST RESULTS
Port
02A

Maintenance Name
MAINT

Alt. Name

Test No.
306

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
Running the command from the EPNSAT, will cause the SAT to be dropped
before the reset results can be displayed. In this case, the user should examine
the error and alarm logs for "MAINT" entries to determine if the reset failed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-323

reset spe-standby
This command resets the standby SPE to a defined level.

Synopsis
reset spe-standby level

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
reset spe-standby 1
reset spe-standby 2
reset spe-standby 3
reset spe-standby 4
reset spe-standby 5

Description
Resetting the standby SPE means bringing that SPE out of standby mode into
maintenance mode with the defined restart level. This command is only for a high
or critical reliability system.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
level

The reset levels are entered numerically with a range of 1 - 5, the levels
are as follows:

Level

Recovery

1

Warm Restart

2

Cold-2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset spe-standby

Level

Page 8-324

Recovery

3

Cold-1

4

Reboot

5

Extended Reboot

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "reset spe-standby" on a
duplex SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter standby SPE recovery level ’1’(WARM), ’2’(COLDII),
’3’(COLDI), ’4’(REBOOT) or ’5’(EXT REBOOT)

Error Messages
If the specified level is invalid (not 1-5), the following message will be displayed:
System reset level invalid
If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the SPE Select switches are selecting the
active SPE, the following message will be displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed
If the standby SPE is not refreshed; the following message will be displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed; use the
"refresh spe-standby" command

Output
If the reset command is successful, the following message displays:
Command successfully completed
If the reset command is unsuccessful, the following message displays:
Standby SPE failed to reset with requested level;
check for STBY-SPE errors
If the standby is in the process of doing a software upgrade, then the following
will be displayed:
Standby SPE upgrade in progress, command denied

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-325

Feature Interactions
The reset spe-standby command will invoke standby SPE initialization as if low
level maintenance had done it. This means that the reset level requested will
never be escalated by software. The reset level requested by the technician will
always be the level that is performed.
If the standby SPE contains a software memory card and the requested restart
level is 4 or 5, then the standby SPE will reload system software before rebooting.

reset system
This command resets the SPE to a defined level, or switch control to the standby
SPE.

Synopsis
reset system [ level | interchange ]health-override

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
reset system 1
reset system 2
reset system 3
reset system 4
reset system 5
reset system interchange
reset system interchange health-override

Description
This command is increasingly destructive as the reset level increases.
The command can also be used to switch control from the currently active SPE to
the standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability System through a HOT (planned)
restart interchange. Once a planned interchange has been started it cannot
be aborted by pressing the CANCEL key. If a "reset system interchange"
command is rejected because the Fault Severity Level of the standby SPE is
higher than that of the active SPE, the "health-override" option can be specified to
try to force a HOT interchange.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset system

Page 8-326

The reset system interchange command does not disrupt in-progress calls.
However, it drops links to local and remote administration terminals and also
drops and re-establishes connections on the Network Control Circuit Pack data
channels. This includes CDR and PMS links. No new calls can be made during
the interchange, but stable calls are not affected.
When a system restart occurs with the corresponding vector bit set, a core dump
is written to memory card, only if the memory card is the special core dump
card), the vector is cleared, and the requested restart is performed.
All successful reset system commands will log the user off.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
llevel

The reset levels are entered numerically with a range of 1 - 5, the levels
are as follows, and the approximate times are listed for each
appropriate level and system configuration:

Level

interchange

Recovery

1

Warm Restart

2

Cold-2

3

Cold-1

4

Reboot

5

Extended Reboot

SMALL
Flash

MEDIUM
Flash

Control of the system passes to the standby SPE as the active SPE
becomes the standby SPE and the standby SPE becomes the active
SPE. The optional "health-override" qualifier can be entered to force an
interchange even if the Fault Severity Level of the standby SPE would
normally cause the maintenance software to abort the interchange.
The Fault Severity Level of an SPE is determined by the alarmed
components in that SPE. Each component is given a severity level, and
the single worst alarm (severity) for a SPE defines Fault Severity Level
for the SPE. The table below lists the maintenance objects, their
alarms, severities and the restart level of the interchange that affect a
SPE’s Fault Severity Level.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset system

Maintenance
Object

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Page 8-327

Fault
Severity Level

Restart
Level

STBY-SPE

WARNING

OFF

120

None

MEM-BD

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

110

Hot or Warm

MEMORY

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

110

Hot or Warm

STBY-SPE

MAJOR

ON

100

None

PROCR

MAJOR

ON

70

Hot or Warm

SW-CTL

MAJOR

ON

65

Cold 2

MEM-CARD

MAJOR

OFF

65

Cold 1

12V-PWR

MIN

ON

65

Hot

DUPINT

MAJOR

ON

61

Hot

CARR-POW

MAJOR

ON

61

Cold 2

SHDW-CIR

MAJOR

ON or OFF

60

Warm

SHDW-LINK

MAJOR

ON

60

Warm

SW-CTL

MINOR

ON

40

Hot

PR-MAINT

MINOR

ON

30

Hot

PI-BD

MAJOR or MINOR

ON

20

Hot

PKT-CTRL

MAJOR

ON or OFF

20

Hot

PKT-CTRL

MINOR

ON or OFF

15

Hot

PI-PT

MAJOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-CHL

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-CON

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

DATA-BD

MINOR

ON

15

Hot

MEM-CARD

MINOR

ON or OFF

10

Hot

PR-MAINT

MINOR

OFF

8

Hot

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset system

Page 8-328

A "reset system interchange" command will abort for the following
reasons:

health-override

■

If the standby SPE is down

■

If the active SPE is locked active

■

If communication to the standby SPE is not possible

■

If memory shadowing to the standby SPE is not functioning

■

If the standby SPE is not fully refreshed

■

If the standby SPE is busied out

If a HOT restart interchange fails because the Fault Severity Level of
the standby SPE is higher than that of the active SPE, the
"health-override" option can be specified to try to force a switch to
occur. If the switch occurs, this option causes the new active SPE
Fault Severity Level to be raised as much as possible in hopes that a
software initiated HOT SPE interchange switch back to the original
active SPE will not occur. This artificial raising of the active Fault
Severity Level will last for one hour at which time the Fault Severity
Level of both SPEs will return to their normal values based on the
alarms listed in the table above.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "reset system" on a simplex
SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter system recovery level ’1’(WARM), ’2’(COLDII),
’3’(COLDI), ’4’(REBOOT), or ’5’(EXT REBOOT)
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "reset system" on a duplex
SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter system recovery level ’1’(WARM), ’2’(COLDII),
’3’(COLDI), ’4’(REBOOT), or ’5’(EXT REBOOT)
or ’interchange [’health-override’]’

Error Messages
If the CANCEL key is pressed after the command has been started, the following
message is displayed:
This command may not be canceled
If the system reset level is not numeric or "interchange," the following message
will be displayed:
System reset level invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
reset system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-329

If the "health-override" option is specified with any level of 1 - 5, the following
message will be displayed:
The ’health-override’ option is only used
with the ’interchange’ level
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If this command is issued while an upgrade software command is active the
following message will be displayed:
Standby SPE upgrade in progress, command denied

Output
If the reset command, including the "reset system interchange," is successful the
user will be logged off.
If the "reset system interchange" command is not successful one of the following
are displayed:
If the "interchange" option is specified and the active SPE is locked active, the
following message will be displayed:
Unable to interchange because the
active SPE is locked active
If the "interchange" option is specified and only the Fault Severity Level of the
standby SPE is preventing the interchange, the following message will be
displayed:
Unable to interchange due to alarms on the standby SPE;
Use ’health-override’ option
If the "interchange" option is specified and the standby SPE is busied out, the
following message will be displayed:
Unable to interchange; standby SPE is busied out
If the reset interchange command cannot be performed for any other reason, the
following message will be displayed on the SAT:
Cannot perform SPE interchange;
for information use ’status system’

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
restore announcements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-330

Feature Interactions
The reset command will invoke system initialization as if low level maintenance
had done it. This means that the reset level requested will never be escalated by
software. The reset level requested by the technician will always be the level that
is performed.
It should be noted that there are two hardware switches associated with the
active and standby SPEs. These hardware switches override any demand
maintenance activities that the system technician requests. If the active SPE is
locked active with these hardware switches, an interchange will not take place
until the active is unlocked using the same hardware switches.
A successful SPE interchange will always logoff the PPNSAT terminal.
Any level of restart will null out the effect of the health-override option.

restore announcements
This command copies announcement data from the specified MSS device (tape
or Card-Mem) to the announcement board.

Synopsis
restore announcements [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
rcust, inads, init.

Examples
restore announcements

Description
The restore announcements command copies announcement data from the
active MSS device to the announcement board.

Defaults
In a tape based system, the announcement data is copied from the active
processor’s tape to the announcement board. In a Card-Mem based system, the
announcement data is copied from the active processor’s Card-Mem to the
announcement board.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
restore announcements

Page 8-331

Parameters
print

In addition to displaying the output of the restore announcement
command on the Manager I terminal, print the result of the restore
announcement command on the printer.

scheduled

Schedule the execution of the restore announcement command at a
specific time.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "restore announcements," the
following message is displayed:
Enter [’print’ or ’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the announcement data module cannot be accessed (upload/download port is
active), the following message is displayed:
Announcement data module not available
If the announcement data module has been taken out of service, the following
message is displayed:
Announcement data module out of service
If one or more of the announcement ports are in use, the following message is
displayed:
Announcement port in use; please try later
If the announcement data module is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Required announcement data module not administered
If the announcement data module is not administered or is currently in use, the
following message is displayed:
Required data module not administered or unavailable
If there is no announcement board in the system, the following message is
displayed:
Integrated announcement board not present
If the NETCON data module is not administered or out of service the following
message is displayed:
Required NETCON data module not
administered or out-of-service

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
restore announcements

Page 8-332

If the NETCON data module is busy the following message is displayed:
Required NETCON data module unavailable
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
Processor

This field displays the processor on which the MSS device
resides that was used to copy announcement data.

Command Completion
Status

This field specifies whether the command completed
successfully. Valid values are:

Error Code

This is a numerical description of whether the announcement
file is successfully restored to the announcement board. A
value of "0" means that the restore was successful. A value of
"1" denotes that the restore failed.

For the following output example, the command entered is "restore
announcements" on a simplex SPE system.

restore announcements

Page

1 of

1

SPE A

RESTORE ANNOUNCEMENTS
Processor
SPE-A

Command Completion Status
Success

Error Code
0

Feature Interactions

! WARNING:
Use of the manager I is blocked for other activities until the command
completes, which can take up to 45 minutes
The command is denied if no announcement data module and no NETCON data
module has been administered.
The command is denied if the announcement data module port is out of service
or active (e.g. performing an announcement playback).
The command is denied if a user is in an integrated announcements session.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
resume hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-333

The command is denied if the board is currently being uploaded or downloaded.
A user cannot save or restore announcement after the restore announcements
command has started.
The command aborts if copying from tape and no tape is in the tape drive.
The restore announcements command will not be allowed if the MSS is in use.
The MSS may be in use by either another user or by maintenance.
In case of a failure, it is the user’s responsibility to make sure the announcement
file is completely copied to the announcement board. If an error is the result of a
hardware or firmware failure, the MSS software will log a hardware error with
maintenance.
The restore announcements command will not be allowed if no announcement
file has been saved on the MSS or a corrupted announcement file is on the MSS.
In case of a failure, it is the user’s responsibility to make sure the announcement
file is completely copied to the announcement board, although the system will
continually attempt to download the board in 10 minute intervals until a download
is successful, announcements are recorded, or a download is initiated from the
SAT. The user should take appropriate action based on the error message
returned. If the error is the result of a hardware or firmware failure, the MSS
software will log a hardware error with maintenance. Maintenance software will
invoke tests to diagnose and attempt to correct the problem. If maintenance
software fails to correct the problem, an alarm is raised and the system
technician should take appropriate action.
In the case where the system crashes and/or there is a spontaneous processor
interchange, the restore operation will fail. In this case, there will not be a valid
announcement file on the announcement board. The command should be
restarted on the newly active processor to copy the announcements from the
active processor’s MSS device to the announcement board. Until the
announcements are successfully and completely copied to the announcement
board, calls will not be connected to any announcements on the ANN board.
When the announcement board is plugged in or reset, maintenance will perform
a series of tests, including a DRAM Checksum test. The test will fail due to the
power loss to the board, resulting in automatic downloading of the
announcement file.

resume hardware-group
A "test hardware-group" command which had been canceled can be resumed by
the user with this command. The reactivated hardware-group command will start
testing where it previously left off.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
resume hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-334

Synopsis
resume hardware-group

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
resume hardware-group

Description
A system technician, in the course of the execution of a "test hardware-group"
command, may find the need to halt the testing, either temporarily or
permanently. A "test hardware-group" command executing in the background
can be canceled with the "cancel hardware-group" command. A "test
hardware-group" command executing in the foreground can be canceled by
pressing the ’cancel’ key on the SAT or by entering the "cancel hardware-group"
command from another SAT. The "resume hardware-group" command provides
the technician the ability to resume the previous "test hardware-group" command
from where it was canceled. This ability to resume a canceled "test
hardware-group" command is lost if another "test hardware-group" command is
entered.
The state of a canceled "test hardware-group" command will appear on the
"status hardware-group" screen as ’canceled’. The state of a resumed "test
hardware-group" command will appear on the "status hardware-group" screen as
’active’.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "resume hardware-group,"
the following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
resume hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-335

Error Messages
If there is no "test hardware-group" command to be resumed, i.e, no "test
hardware-group" command was previously canceled, or some system recovery
had occurred and no "test hardware-group" command had since been entered
and subsequently canceled, then the following message will be displayed:
Command aborted - no hardware-group
test available to resume
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If the previously entered hardware-group command used the "all-ports" option
the following message will be displayed:
Resume disallowed with ’all-ports’
option in original command
If the previously entered hardware-group command used the "SPE-interchange"
option the following message will be displayed:
Resume disallowed with ’SPE-interchange’
option in original command

Output
If a "test hardware-group" command is successfully resumed as a consequence
of the "resume hardware-group" command and the previous "test
hardware-group" was executing in the background, then the following response
will be displayed:
Hardware-group command successfully
resumed in background
If a "test hardware-group" command is successfully resumed as a consequence
of the "resume hardware-group" command and the previous "test
hardware-group" was executing in the foreground, then the test results will start
being displayed on the SAT.

Feature Interactions
Cancel hardware-group
When a "test hardware-group" command is canceled, the test command is put in
an inactive state. This state can be displayed using the "status hardware-group"
screen and will show up as ’canceled’.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save announcements

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-336

When the "resume hardware-group" command is entered to resume a previously
canceled "test hardware-group" command, the state of the test command will be
changed to ’active’ on the "status hardware-group" screen.

save announcements
This command copies announcement data from the announcement board to the
MSS. (tape or Card-Mem)

Synopsis
save announcements [ spe-active | spe-standby ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
rcust, inads, init.

Examples
save announcements
save announcements spe-active
save announcements spe-standby

Description
The save announcements command copies announcement data from the
announcement board to the MSS. The Card-Mem is the storage device for the
system. By default, announcement data is written to the MSS device in a simplex
processor (SPE) system, or to both MSS devices in a High or Critical Reliability
System. Also, the save announcements command can be directed to write to the
MSS device on either of the processors, in a High or Critical Reliability System.
This command is only allowed if there is an integrated announcement board in
the system. The save announcement command is denied if no announcement
data module has been administered and no NETCON data module has been
administered.

Simplex
There are no options for the save announcement in a simplex system. The save
announcement command will save the announcement file to the MSS device.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save announcements

Page 8-337

Duplex
If no options are specified, the system saves the announcement to both
processors’ MSS devices.

Parameters
spe-active

This option forces the system to write the announcement data to the
specified device in the currently active processor.

spe-standby

This forces the system to write the announcement data to the specified
device in the standby processor.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "save announcements" on a
simplex SPE system the following message is displayed:
Entry is not required
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "save announcements" on a
duplex SPE system the following message is displayed:
Enter [’spe-active’ or ’spe-standby’]

Error Messages
If the announcement data module cannot be accessed (upload/download port is
active), the following message is displayed:
Announcement data module not available
If the announcement data module is out of service, the following message is
displayed:
Announcement data module out of service
If one or more of the announcement ports are in use, the following message is
displayed:
Announcement port in use; please try later
If there are no announcements on the announcement board, the following
message is displayed:
No announcements on board
If the announcement data module is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Required announcement data module not administered

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save announcements

Page 8-338

If the announcement data module is not administered or is currently in use, the
following message is displayed:
Required data module not administered or unavailable
If there is no announcement board in the system, the following message is
displayed:
Integrated announcement board not present
If the standby processor times out, the following message is displayed:
Command timed out on standby processor
If an inconsistency between the NETCON data module and the announcement
data module exists (e.g. both data modules using the same COR) the following
message is displayed:
System error, please try later
If the NETCON data module is not administered or out of service the following
message is displayed:
Required NETCON data module not
administered or out-of-service
If the NETCON data module is busy the following message is displayed:
Required NETCON data module unavailable
If the time of day is not set, the following message is displayed:
Please set the time of day before proceeding
If the standby SPE is inaccessible, the following message is displayed:
Cannot access the standby SPE at this time
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save announcements

Page 8-339

Output
Processor

This field displays the processor(s) that had the
announcement data written to its/their device(s). Valid
values are "SPE-A" and "SPE-B."

Command Completion Status

This field specifies whether the command completed
successfully. Valid values are:

Error Code

A value of "0" specifies that the save was successful. A
value of "2" specifies that the save failed.

For the following output example, the command entered is "save
announcements" on a simplex SPE system.

save announcements

Page

1 of

1

SPE A

SAVE ANNOUNCEMENTS
Processor
SPE-A

Command Completion Status
Success

Error Code
0

Feature Interactions

! WARNING:
Use of the manager I is blocked for other activities until the command
completes, which can take up to 45 minutes.
The command is denied if no announcement data module and no NETCON data
module has been administered.
The command is denied if the announcement data module port is out of service
or active (e.g. performing an announcement playback).
The command is denied if no announcements are on the board or a user is in an
integrated announcements session.
The command is denied if the board is currently being uploaded or downloaded.
A user cannot record an integrated announcement after the save
announcements command has started although 15 channels are still available for
announcement playback (one is reserved for uploading and downloading).
The command aborts if saving to the tape and no tape is in the tape drive or the
tape is write-protected. The command also abort if no NETCON data module is
available.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save translation

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-340

The save announcements command will not be allowed if the MSS is in use. The
MSS may be in use by either another user or by maintenance.
If the user requests that announcements be saved to the standby processor, the
standby processor must be in service and shadowing must be enabled.
When MSS devices on both processors in a High or Critical Reliability System are
specified, the save announcements operation will save announcement data from
the announcement board to the active MSS device, then to the standby MSS
device. The status of each save operation is reported to the user separately. If
one of the save operations fail, the save operation to the other device continues.
The goal is to save the new announcement data on some MSS device so that it is
not lost totally; this will cause the announcement data to be inconsistent between
these MSS devices.
In case of a failure, it is the user’s responsibility to make the announcement files
on the two MSS devices consistent. The files may become inconsistent due to
hardware failures or spontaneous processor interchanges. If announcement files
are inconsistent due to failure on the hardware used during the save
announcements command, the user should take appropriate action based on the
error message returned. Maintenance software monitoring this hardware will log
a hardware error with maintenance. Maintenance software will invoke tests to
diagnose and attempt to correct the problem. If maintenance software fails to
correct the problem, an alarm is raised and the system technician should take
appropriate action.
The save announcements command writes two time-stamped identical copies of
announcement data to the selected device(s). The time stamp for both copies
will be the same, i.e. the time of writing to the first copy. Each copy contains a
timestamp and the state of the copy (i.e., "good" or "bad").
If a good copy of the announcement file is not available, then the restore
announcements operation can not be executed until the save announcements
command is successfully completed. The announcements on the board are still
accessible and usable.

save translation
This command allows the user to save the in-memory translation data to the
memory card device.

Synopsis
save translation [ spe-active | spe-standby ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save translation

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-341

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, cust.

Examples
save translation
save translation spe-active
save translation spe-standby

Description
All translation data is dept in memory during system operation. This means that
all data would be lost if the switch went down. The save translation operation will
allow the user to save to tape or memory card the in-memory translation data.
This operation may be done as part of scheduled maintenance and/or on
demand by the customer/system technician.

Simplex
The default is to save translation to the tape/memory-card on SPE_A.

Duplex
The default is to save translation to the tape/memory-card on both SPE-A and
SPE-B.

Parameters
spe-active

This identifies that the save translation should be done on the active
processor’s MSS device.

spe-standby

This identifies that the save translation should be done on the standby
processor’s MSS device.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "save translation" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [’spe-active’ or ’spe-standby’]

Error Messages
If there is another tape activity currently running on the system, then the following
message will be displayed:
A tape command is active;

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
save translation

Page 8-342

this command is not allowed at this time
If the user chooses that save be done on the standby processor, and the standby
processor is inaccessible, then the following message will be displayed:
Cannot access the standby SPE at this time
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
The responses will be displayed on an SPE basis with one line of data displayed
for each SPE.
Processor

This identifies the processor carrier that was translation
data was saved to. (i.e. SPE-A, or SPE-B).

Command Completion Status

This may display a variety of messages, to identify the
success or failure of the command on the given
processor:

For the following output example, assume that the command, save translation is
done on a duplex system.

save translation
SAVE TRANSLATION
Processor
SPE-A
SPE-B

Command Completion Status
Success
Success

Error Code
0
0

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The save translation cannot be performed if translation data is being changed by
an administration command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set expansion-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-343

set expansion-link
This command sets the Expansion-Interface Link between the PPN and an EPN
or between two EPNs to a specific Interface Link circuit pack between PPN and
EPN.

Synopsis
set expansion-link link-identifier

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
set expansion-link 02a01
set expansion-link 3a02

Description
This command sets the Expansion-Interface Link between the PPN and an EPN
or between two EPNs to a specific Interface Link circuit pack between PPN and
EPN.
Note: This command can corrupt any active data links between the PPN and an
EPN or between two EPNs.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
link-identifier

The circuit pack address of the designated Standby Expansion
Interface circuit pack (identified as 1A01, 1A02, 1B01, 1B02, 2A01,
2A02, 2B03, 3A01, 3A02, 3AB02 or 3B03).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set expansion-interface," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter board location:
[cabinet(1-3)];carrier(A-E);slot(0-20)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set expansion-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-344

Error Messages
If the format of the specified expansion interface circuit pack is invalid, the
following message will be displayed:
Port/Board invalid
If the link associated with the entered EI location is already active, the following
message will be displayed:
EXP-INTF is already on active link
If the specified expansion interface is not configured in the system, the following
message will be displayed:
Board not assigned
If the specified expansion interface is already the active link, the following
message will be displayed:
EXP-INTF is already on active link
If the specified expansion interface is unable to become active, the following
message will be displayed:
Standby EXP-INTF Link is unable to take over
If there are no maintenance objects for the specified board, the following
message will be displayed:
No MO in this board
If the specified board is not an expansion interface board, the following message
will be displayed:
Address is not a valid Expansion Interface Board
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-345

Output
The following message indicates that the command completed successfully:
Command successfully completed
The following message indicates that the command was aborted:
Command aborted; please try later
The following message indicates that the command failed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
Command failed

Feature Interactions
None.

set options
This command allows the user to administer whether certain alarms are reported
to INADS or whether they are downgraded to a minor alarm, warning alarm, or no
alarm.

Synopsis
set options

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
set options

Description
This special command enables the technician (that is, remote user with INADS
permission) to select which types of maintenance categories report alarms
automatically and which types require the customer to call in. Judicious use of
this command can reduce the number of ineffective alarms to the TSC. For the
set options command to be effective, the default settings specified in this
section should always be used. These settings are not intended to be changed
on a per-system basis. Special circumstances (for example, special studies) may
require temporary changes under the guidance of Tiers 3 and 4.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-346

NOTE: Alarms can’t be upgraded.

Defaults
Initially, the alarm reporting options for On-board Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1),
both Major and Minor, and Minor, and the Memory Card Capacity Alarm are set
to "yes" (y); all others are set to "warning" (w). All trunk groups are associated with
alarm severity group 1 by default.

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "set options," the following message is
displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Form Input
After entering the command "set options," the user is presented with the following
form.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options

Page 8-347

set options

Page 1 of

8

ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS

On-board
Off-board
On-board
Off-board
On-board
Off-board
On-board
Off-board

On-board Station Alarms:
Off-board Station Alarms:
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 2):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 2):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 3):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 3):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 4):
Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 4):
On-boar Adjunct Alarms:
Off-board Alarms:
Off-board DS1 Alarms:
Off-board PI-LINK Alarms:
Off-board Alarms (Other):
Memory Card Capacity Alarms:

Major
w
w
y
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w

Minor
w
w
y
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
y

set options

Page

2 of

8

TRUNK GROUP ALARM OPTIONS
(Alarm Group)
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

NOTE:
The remaining Trunk Group information is shown on the next 6 pages and is
not documented in this Manual.
On the first page of the Alarm Reporting Options Form, the user selects the alarm
severity options for station alarms, the four trunk alarm severity groups, the
adjunct alarms, off-board DS1 alarms, and PI-LINK alarms, memory card
translation capacity alarms, and other off-board alarms. On the second page,
known as the Alarm Reporting Options Form, the user assigns an alarm severity
group to each trunk group. This feature enables the technician to reduce the
level of alarms reported for on-board or off-board trouble conditions.
The following alarm options are available:
■

Minor

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-348

Alarms are raised as maintenance testing discovers them but the severity
of the alarm is downgraded to a minor. Alarmed resources that would
have normally been taken out of service are still taken out of service. LEDs
on the port board and maintenance board follow the normal Minor alarm
LED strategy and there is a call to the receiving OSS.
■

Warning
Alarms are raised as maintenance testing discovers them, but the severity
of the alarm is downgraded to a warning. The advantage to the technician
here is that the Alarm Log can still be used to pinpoint trunk or station
problems reported by the customer. Alarmed resources that would
normally have been taken out-of-service are still taken out-of-service.
Alarm LEDs light on the port circuit pack and Maintenance circuit pack as
before, but no attendant LEDs or stations reporting alarms are affected.
There is no call to INADS.

■

Report
This option treats the alarms in the same way as the warning category with
one exception: alarms are reported to INADS using a special WARNING
category. When an alarm of this type is received, INADS logs the
occurrence and either creates a trouble ticket or closes it immediately.
The retry strategy for a call of this type is similar to normal Major or Minor
alarm reports. However, the acknowledgment LED on the attendant
console or alarm reporting station does not reflect the status of the call.

■

Yes
Alarms are raised in the normal manner. There is no filtering of alarm data.

■

No
Alarms raised on a trunk, station, or adjunct in this category are dropped.
Error information is provided as before, but there is no trace of an alarm.
There is no LED activity and no call to INADS. Because resources are
taken out-of-service without any record, this option is recommended only
when other options do not provide the desired result.

The alarm options can be administered only on a system-wide basis for the
following alarm categories:
■

Major on-board station alarms

■

Minor on-board station alarms

■

Major off-board station alarms

■

Minor off-board station alarms

Four alarm severity groups are provided for trunk alarms. You can administer the
alarm options for the categories listed below in each alarm severity group.
However, in G1, the alarm options can be administered only on a system-wide
basis for the following categories:
■

Major on-board trunk alarms

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options
■

Minor on-board trunk alarms

■

Major off-board trunk alarms

■

Minor off-board trunk alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-349

For Adjuncts, an alarm severity option is assigned to each of the following
categories:
■

Major on-board adjunct alarms

■

Major off-board adjunct alarms

■

Minor on-board adjunct alarms

■

Minor of-board adjunct alarms

You can also administer the options on a system-wide basis for Minor off-board
DS1 Interface circuit pack alarms and for the Minor off-board Memory Card
Capacity Alarm.
Alarm reporting options information in the Alarm Reporting Options Form is
considered translation data and, thus, is preserved through all levels of restart.
This feature affects the alarming of the MOs listed below. Neither the trunk nor
the station category applies to alarms raised on the common portion of the circuit
pack.
In all cases, if the option associated with the alarm type is set to "n," the alarm
report is dropped. All error information about the alarm is intact, but there is no
record of an alarm and no LEDs light on the port circuit pack, the Maintenance
circuit pack, the attendant console, or alarm reporting station to indicate a
problem.
If the option is set to "warning" or "report," port circuit pack LEDs and LEDs on the
Maintenance circuit pack are affected the same as normal warning alarms.
The default parameters are as follows:
■

Downgrade all station, trunk (except on-board trunk alarms), and Minor
DS1-BD alarms to warning alarms.

■

On-board Major and Minor trunk alarms, and the Memory Card Capacity
alarm should continue to raise alarms and report to INADS.

Station MOs Affected By This Command
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-reported problems.
■

Analog Lines (ANL-LINE, ANL-NE-L, ANL-16-L)

■

Digital Lines (DIG-LINE)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options
■

Hybrid Lines (HYB-LINE)

■

MET Lines (MET-LINE)

■

ISDN-BRI Lines (BRI-PORT, BRI-SET)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-350

Trunk maintenance is characterized by an escalation of a Minor alarm to a Major
alarm if more than 75 percent of the members of the trunk group are alarmed. If
the option for the trunk category is set to "warning," "minor," "report," or "no," this
no longer happens. Maintenance removes an individual trunk member
out-of-service according to the normal criteria used for Major and Minor alarms.

Trunk MOs Affected By This Command:
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-reported problems.
■

Auxiliary Trunks (AUX-TRK)

■

Central Office Trunks (CO-TRK)

■

Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-TRK)

■

Direct Inward and Outward Dial Trunks (DIOD-TRK)

■

DS1 Central Office Trunks (CO-DS1)

■

DS1 Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-DS1)

■

DS1 Tie Trunks (TIE-DS1)

■

ISDN Trunks (ISDN-TRK)

■

Tie Trunks (TIE-TRK)

Circuit Pack MOs Affected By This Command
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-reported problems.
NOTE:
Trunks that are not members of Trunk Groups, (e.g. PCOLs) are
downgraded according to the alarm severity of group one.
■

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack (DS1-BD)

Adjunct-Related MOs Affected By This Command
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-reported problems.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options
■

ASAI Adjunct (ASAI-ADJ)

■

AT&T Adjunct Port (ATT-PORT)

■

Ethernet ASAI Port (LGATE-PT)

■

Ethernet ASAI Adjunct (LGATE-AJ)

■

Ethernet AT&T Port (ATTE-PT)

■

Ethernet AT&T Adjunct (ATTE_AJ)

■

ISDN-BRI Ports connected to Adjuncts (ABRI-PORT)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-351

Although adjuncts are administered as stations, the administration of alarm
severity for the station alarm group does not affect the alarm severity levels of the
adjuncts. Similarly, the administration of alarm severity for the adjunct alarm
group does not affect the alarm severity levels for other types of stations.

PI-Link and associated Link MOs affected by this Command:
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-related problems.
■

See Processor Interface Link ["PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)"] for
other associated Link Maintenance Objects.

Memory Card MOs Affected by This Command
NOTE:
While this option does not downgrade the CAP-MEM alarm by default,
changes to this options may result in alarms being downgraded to warning.
This alarm is raised when the memory card translation capacity is over 98%
full and is intended to alert Services to inform the customer of a possible
need to upgrade to a larger flash card.
■

Memory Card Capacity (CAP-MEM)

Other MOs Affected by This Command
NOTE:
Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings, the alarms should
be investigated with user-related problems.
■

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack (MAINT)

■

Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF)

■

ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISN-SGR)

■

Journal Printer (JNL-PRNT)

■

PMS Link (PMS-LINK)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set options
■

PMS log printer (PMS-LOG)

■

Primary CDR Link (PRI-CDR)

■

Secondary CDR Link (SEC-CDR)

■

SPE Select Switches (SPE-SELEC)

■

Synchronization (SYNC)

■

System Communication Interface (PI-SCI)

■

System Printer (SYS-PRNT)

■

TDM Clock (TDM-CLK)

■

Tone Generator Circuit Pack (TONE-BD)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-352

Field Help
Since all fields on the first page may have the same values, then pressing HELP in
any field on the first page presents the following field help message:
m(inor) n(o) r(eport) w(arning) y(es)
The following is a description of the values:
m(inor)

Downgrade the major alarm to a minor alarm and report the alarm to
INADS.

n(o)

Do not log the alarm or report it to INADS.

r(eport)

Downgrade the alarm to a warning and report the warning to INADS.

w(arning)

Downgrade the alarm to a warning, log it but do not report the alarm to
INADS.

y(es)

Log and report the alarm to INADS.
All fields on page 2 may have the same values. Pressing HELP in any field on
page 2 gives the following field help message:
Enter alarm group number: 1 to 4
The alarm group number is a way of distinguishing four different groups of
alarms. These alarm groups allow the user to specify that alarms in different
groups are handled differently from those in other groups.

Field Error Messages
All of the fields on the first page allow the same values. Only one error message
is printed for all first page fields. If the value is not one of the listed characters
(m,n,r,w,or y) then the following message is displayed:
"X" is an invalid entry; please press HELP key

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-353

All of the fields on page 2 allow the same values. If the value in one of these fields
is not numeric, the following message is displayed:
Entry must be all digits
All of the fields on pages page 2 allow the same values. If the value in one of
these fields is a digit other than 1, 2, 3, or 4, the following message is displayed:
Entry out of range

Output
After the user has entered in the changes to the options and pressed SUBMIT,
the following message appears at the bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

set signaling-group
This command sets the secondary D-channel within the specified group to be the
primary D-channel.

Synopsis
set signaling-group group identifier

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
set signaling-group 1
set signaling-group 2

Description
The set signaling-group command sets the secondary D-channel in the specified
signaling group to be the primary D-channel. The primary D-channel then
becomes the secondary D-channel.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-354

A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated
single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
group identifier

The signaling group identifier is an administered number associated
with each signaling group.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set signaling-group," the
following is displayed:
Enter group identifier

Error Messages
If the specified group identifier is non numeric or out of range, the following
message is displayed:
Signaling group invalid
If the specified group identifier is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
No signaling group assigned
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the set signaling-group command is successful, the following message will be
displayed on the SAT:
Command successfully completed
If the set signaling-group command is unsuccessful, the following message will
be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set synchronization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-355

Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

set synchronization
This command will set the DS1 trunk or tone/clock circuit pack that is to supply
an on-line reference for synchronization.

Synopsis
set synchronization location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
set synchronization 01c08
set synchronization 02a01
set synchronization 01a
set synchronization 02c

Description
The set synchronization command will set the DS1 trunk or active tone/clock
circuit pack that will supply a reference for synchronization. The set command
will work only after synchronization has been disabled via the "disable
synchronization" command. Any administered DS1 trunk or active tone/clock
may be entered with the set command. The DS1 or tone/clock will remain as the
synchronization reference until the set command is run with another board or
until the "enable synchronization" command is run.
After the "enable synchronization" command is run, an administered primary or
secondary synchronization source will be used as the synchronization reference.
If no primary or secondary source is administered, then synchronization will use
an active tone/clock board as the synchronization reference after
synchronization has been enabled.
The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication
between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set synchronization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-356

subsystem is made up of system components involved in synchronization: TDM
bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in
the SPE.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the board (DS1 trunk or
active tone/clock) that will supply a reference for synchronization. The
location of a DS1 trunk is entered as "UUcSS" where "UU" represents
the cabinet number, "c" represents the carrier, and "SS" represents the
slot position. The location of a tone/clock is entered as "UUc" where
"UU represents the cabinet number, and "c" represents the carrier. The
location of a tone/clock may also be entered as "UUcSS" where "UU
represents the cabinet number, "c" represents the carrier, and "SS"
represents the slot position. A cabinet number (1 - 3) may be entered
with or without a leading zero (0).

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set synchronization," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter DS1 board location or Tone-Clock location:
[(cabinet (1-3)]; carrier (A-E))

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later
Can not set synchronization to standby tone clock circuit pack.
Cannot set synchronization to standby tone/clock board.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-357

Output
The following message indicates that the command completed successfully:
Command successfully completed
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to
synchronization not being disabled:
Must disable synchronization-switch first
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
board not being inserted:
Board not inserted
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to an
invalid board being specified (not a DS1 trunk or tone/clock):
Port/Board invalid
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to
reasons other than the ones listed above:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

Feature Interactions
None.

set tdm
This command will set which TDM bus has the control channel and dedicated
tones on it.

Synopsis
set tdm port-network pn number bus bus override

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
set tdm port-network 2 bus a
set tdm port-network 2 bus b override

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-358

Description
The set tdm command sets which TDM bus on a port network has the control
channel and dedicated tones on it.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
pn number

The PN number specifies the Port Network number of the TDM bus to be set.

bus

The TDM bus ("a" or "b") specifies which half of the TDM bus is desired. Each
512 time slot TDM bus is configured as two duplicate 256 time slot buses.
This division allows for duplication of control channels and dedicated tone
time slots. The default control bus (carrying the control channel) is the "a"
bus, while the default tone bus (carrying dedicated tones) is the "b" bus. A
port network number (1 - 3) may be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

override

This qualifier is optional, it will force the setting of a bus which is out of
service or a bus whose dedicated tone time slots are in use.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set tdm," the following
message will be displayed:
Enter ’port-network’, port network number (1-3),
’bus’, bus (’a’ or ’b’); [’override’]

Error Messages
If the technician enters "bus" before "port-network," the following message will be
displayed:
’bus’ is an invalid identifier; please press HELP
If the technician does not enter all digits for the port-network number, the
following message will be displayed:
Entry must be all digits
If the technician enters a bus other than A or B, the following message will be
displayed:
Identifier invalid
If the technician enters a Port Network number that is not administered, the
following message will be displayed:
Port Network number not assigned

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-359

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The following message indicates that the command completed successfully:
Command successfully completed
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
tdm bus being busied out:
Must release tdm bus first
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
health of the tdm bus:
Tdm bus is out-of-service; use ’override’
option to force ’set’ command
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
dedicated tone time slots being used:
Dedicated tone time slots in use; use ’override’
option to force ’set’ command
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to a
tone/clock (TN768) board not being available:
Cannot set tdm bus or tone/clock boards;
need a TN768 board
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
expansion port network (EPN) not being available:
EPN is not available
The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
link to the expansion port network (EPN) not being available:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set time

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-360

EXP-INTF not available; please try later

Feature Interactions
In the rare event that all time slots on a particular bus are being used, and the
dedicated tone time slots are on the other half of the bus, the time slots reserved
for tones on the bus that has no other time slots available will be used for new
calls. If the technician then performs a "set" command to the bus that has calls up
on the dedicated tone time slots, these calls will be dropped.

set time
This command will allow the system technician to set the time of day clock on the
switch.

Synopsis
set time

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
set time

Description
The set time command will present the system technician with a form that
contains the current time of day on the switch. The system technician may then
edit and submit the form in order to change the time of day. The set time
command allows the system technician to change the day of the week, the day of
the month, the month, year, hour, and minute. The second field will be reset to
zero (0) whenever the time on the clock is altered, but cannot be modified by the
technician. The day of the week will be entered as a text string and will be
translated to an integer for internal storage.
If no change is made to any field when the command is entered, there will be no
update of the clock when the form is submitted. If the command is entered and
the form is unchanged, the time will not be reset to the time displayed on the
screen, but will remain the same as the current system clock time.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set time

Defaults
If the system clock has never been set, a default time is used.

Parameters
None.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-361

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set time

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-362

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set time," the following
message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the system encounters an error in getting the current time of day, then the
following message will be displayed:
Error encountered, cannot complete request
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

FORM INPUT
After entering the command "set time," the system technician will be presented
with the following form. The current time, or default time will be placed in the
fields.
Day of the Week:

The day of the week that will be used by the time of day clock on the
switch. Valid entries are Monday through Sunday. The timer will
maintain the value of the day of the week, incrementing it every
twenty-four (24) hours, and resetting it at the seventh day.

Day of the Month:

The day of the month that will be used by the system time of day
clock. 1-31 are valid entries. A check for leap year is also made,
February can have 29 days in 1984, but only 28 in the year 1990.

Month:

The month that will be used by the system time of day clock. Any of
the twelve months are valid entries.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set time

Page 8-363

Year:

The year that will be used by the time of day clock on the switch.
1970-2999 are valid entries for the year field. The year must be
saved as translation data and passed to the kernel whenever kernel
memory is corrupted (system reboot or cold I restart) or the data is
changed.

Hour:

The hour that will be used by the system for the time of day clock.
0-23 are valid hours that can be entered into this field.

Minute:

The minute that will be used by the time of day clock on the system.
0-59 are valid entries for the minute field.

Second:

The second that will be used by the time of day clock on the system.
This field is restricted, and can’t be set to a specific value by the
technician. This field is set to zero when the time of day clock is set.

set time

Page 1 of 1
DATE AND TIME

DATE
Day of the Week: _________
Day of the Month: __

Month: _________
Year: ____

TIME
Hour: __
Minute: __

Second:

Field Help
Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon
tabbing to the specified field and pressing the HELP key.
Day of the Week:

A list of the days of the week will be presented on the bottom line.
The help is longer than 80 characters, consequently, the "(MORE)"
message will appear. In order to get the continuation of the list, the
system technician needs to type another help key. The list of key
words is: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday, Sunday.

Day of the Month:

"Enter current day 1-31."

Month:

A list of the months of the year will be presented on the bottom line.
The help is longer than 80 characters, consequently, the "(MORE)"
message will appear. In order to get the continuation of the list, the
system technician needs to select the HELP key. The list of key
words is: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
September, October, November, December.

Year:

"Enter current year"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tone-clock

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-364

Hour:

"Enter number between 0-23"

Minute:

"Enter number between 0-59"

Second:

This field is restricted and consequently the system technician
cannot tab to or change this value.

Field Error Messages
Following are the error messages that will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen. The messages are displayed when the system technician tabs out of a
field and the validation routines are executed.
Day of the Week:

""xxxxxx" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Day of the Month:

"Day invalid"

Month:

""xxxx" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Year:

"Year invalid"

Hour:

"Hour invalid"

Minute:

"Minute invalid"

Output
After the system technician has entered in the corrections to the time and
pressed the submit key (ENTER), then the following message appears at the
bottom of the screen:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
The date and time are generally available to all software via a system primitive.

set tone-clock
This command sets which tone/clock is active in a port network.

Synopsis
set tone-clock location override

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tone-clock

Page 8-365

Examples
set tone-clock 01b
set tone-clock 1b
set tone-clock 01b override
set tone-clock a

Description
The set tone-clock command sets which tone/clock is active in a PN. This
command is only for use where the tone/clock circuit pack is duplicated in a PN.
Set the default active tone clock in each PN back to active after any use of the
"set tone-clock" command. If it is not in use, a single failure can result in
unnecessary service outage. Schedule maintenance tone-clock switch option
does not set the tone-clock back to the default active if it was not active at the
beginning of the test.

Defaults
The cabinet number defaults to one (1) if it is not specified.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the tone/clock to be tested
and is entered as "UUc" where "UU" represents the cabinet number (1-3),
and "c" represents the carrier. The "b" carriers only contain tone-clock circuit
packs when the system is equipped with High or Critical Reliability.

override

This qualifier is optional. If used, it will force the set command into effect
regardless of the health of the tone/clock circuit pack.

Help Messages
If you press HELP after entering "set tone-clock," the following message displays:
Enter tone/clock location:
[cabinet(1-3)];(carrier(A-E)) [’override’]

Error Messages
If an identifier greater than 3 characters is entered, or the cabinet entered is not a
digit (number), the following message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set tone-clock

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-366

If the cabinet entered is not within the valid range of cabinets or the cabinet is not
administered, the following message will be displayed:
Cabinet number not assigned

If there is no tone/clock board at the specified location, one of the following
messages will be displayed:
Board not inserted
Board not assigned

If the cabinet carrier location entered is that of an EPN that is not available, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the board is not a TN768 tone/clock board, the following message displays:
Cannot set tdm bus or tone/clock boards;
need a TN768 board

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, the following
message displays:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the tone/clock selected is out of service, the following message displays:
Tone/clock board is out-of-service;
use ’override’ option to force ’set’ command

The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
tone/clock being busied out:
Must release tone/clock board first

The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
epn in which the tone/clock resides not being available:
EPN is not available

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-367

The following message indicates that the command was unsuccessful, due to the
link to the EPN in which the tone/clock resides:
EXP-INTF not available; please try later

This message indicates the command was unsuccessful, due to the standby
system clock:
Unable to activate the standby
System Clocks; please try later

This message indicates the command was unsuccessful, due to the standby
system tones:
Unable to activate the standby
System Tones; please try later

Feature Interactions
None.

set vector
This command will set the conditions that cause a core dump of memory to a
core dump memory card.

Synopsis
set vector condition [ spe-standby | spe-active | spe-maint ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
SIMPLEX SYSTEM Examples:
set vector f
set vector 9
DUPLEX SYSTEM Examples:
set vector f spe-standby
set vector f spe-active
set vector f spe-maint
set vector 9

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-368

Description
The set vector command specifies what level of restart must occur before a core
dump occurs. The memory copy (core dump) is placed on the primary Mass
Storage System (a tape in a tape system and a core dump memory card in a
memory card system) device so that it may be examined at a later date. The set
vector command allows the technician to tailor what level of restarts will cause
memory to be copied to the primary Mass Storage System device.
NOTE:
An extended reboot will never be requested by software.
To force a core dump to occur immediately by user demand in a simplex or
duplex system, the appropriate bit should be set using this command, then a
"reset system" should be done at a level that will force a core dump
corresponding to the set vector bit.
When a system restart occurs in a simplex Switch Processing Element (SPE)
system with the corresponding vector bit set, the core dump is written to
secondary storage (the primary MSS device). Once the core dump is written, the
vector is cleared and the restart is performed. This command is always service
disruptive in a simplex system.
When a system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability
System with the corresponding vector bit set, and the "spe-active" option was
selected when the vector bit was set, the active SPE will perform a core dump.
Service will be disrupted while the active SPE is performing the requested
core dump.
When a system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability
System with the corresponding vector bit set, and the "spe-standby" option was
selected when the vector bit was set, the standby SPE will perform a core dump
after the standby SPE has refreshed its memory.
When a system restart occurs on the active SPE in a High or Critical Reliability
System with the corresponding vector bit set, and the "spe-maint" option was
selected when the vector bit was set, the standby SPE will perform a core dump
without refreshing its memory first.
In all cases after a core dump has been performed, the vector will be cleared.

Defaults
In a High or Critical Reliability System, the default option is "spe-standby."

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-369

Parameters
condition

The condition(s) which cause(s) a core dump represented by a
hexadecimal value. The hexadecimal value represents the bit map of
the four reset conditions which cause the dump. These conditions from
least to most significant bit are: WARM start, COLDII restart, COLDI
restart, and REBOOT. To set more than one condition, the logical OR of
the bits needed is used to determine the hexadecimal character.
Setting a vector to a condition of 0 actually clears the vector, and the
vector is not considered set.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set vector

Page 8-370

Vector-Condition Mapping
value

WARM

COLDII

COLDI

REBOOT

0

n

n

n

n

1

y

n

n

n

2

n

y

n

n

3

y

y

n

n

4

n

n

y

n

5

y

n

y

n

6

n

y

y

n

7

y

y

y

n

8

n

n

n

y

9

y

n

n

y

a

n

y

n

y

b

y

y

n

y

c

n

n

y

y

d

y

n

y

y

e

n

y

y

y

f

y

y

y

y

spe-standby

This option is only specified for a High or Critical Reliability System and
is the default option. It specifies that if a restart occurs on the active
SPE and the corresponding vector bit is set, a core dump will be taken
on the standby SPE after the standby SPE has performed a refresh of
memory.

spe-active

This option is only specified for a High or Critical Reliability System. It
specifies that if a restart occurs on the active SPE and the
corresponding vector bit is set, a core dump will be taken on the active
SPE. This option is the default in simplex SPE systems (no options are
specified in a simplex SPE system, but spe-active is always assumed).
This option is service disrupting.

spe-maint

This option is only specified for a High or Critical Reliability System. It
specifies that if a restart occurs on the active SPE and the
corresponding vector bit is set, a core dump will be taken on the
standby SPE without the standby SPE performing a refresh of memory.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
set vector

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-371

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set vector" on a simplex
system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter a memory dump vector value: (0-F)

The memory dump
A hex value of
A hex value of
A hex value of
A hex value of

vector value is a
’1’ causes memory
’2’ causes memory
’4’ causes memory
’8’ causes memory

hex value representing restart levels
dumps to be taken on WARM restarts
dumps to be taken on COLDII restarts
dumps to be taken on COLDI restarts
dumps to be taken on REBOOT restarts

All other hex values represent a combination of restart levels.
The combination is determined by adding the hex values of the individual
restarts together (e.g. a hex value of ’3’ causes memory dumps to
be taken on WARM and COLDII restarts, a hex value of ’F’ causes memory
dumps to be taken on WARM, COLDII, COLDI, and REBOOT restarts, etc.)

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "set vector" on a duplex
system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter a memory dump vector value: (0-F),
[’spe-active’, ’spe-standby’, ’spe-maint’]

The
A
A
A
A

memory dump vector value is a hex value
hex value of ’1’ causes memory dumps to
hex value of ’2’ causes memory dumps to
hex value of ’4’ causes memory dumps to
hex value of ’8’ causes memory dumps to

representing restart levels
be taken on WARM restarts
be taken on COLDII restarts
be taken on COLDI restarts
be taken on REBOOT restarts

All other hex values represent a combination of restart levels.
The combination is determined by adding the hex values of the individual
restarts together (e.g. a hex value of ’3’ causes memory dumps to
be taken on WARM and COLDII restarts, a hex value of ’F’ causes memory
dumps to be taken on WARM, COLDII, COLDI, and REBOOT restarts, etc.)

Error Messages
If the format of the condition (dump vector value) is invalid, the following
message will be displayed:
Entry invalid; please press HELP
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-372

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The following message indicates that the command completed successfully:
Command successfully completed
The following message indicates that the command failed:
Command failed
Error encountered, can’t complete request Feature
Interactions
In a simplex SPE system, service will be disrupted while a core dump is being
written to the primary Mass Storage System device. In addition, service will
continue to be disrupted until the software is restarted at an appropriate level.
These "disruption" times will vary depending upon the particular switch
configuration.
If a core dump already exists on the file system (tape or memory card)
subsequent core dumps will overwrite the existing core dump.
If the Mass Storage System is not accessible, a core dump can not be executed.
The vector will be cleared when a system restart of the proper level is
performed regardless of whether the core is actually dumped.
If handshake is down in a High or Critical Reliability System and one of the
"spe-active," "spe-standby," or "spe-maint" options is selected, the active vector
will be set, but the standby vector will not be cleared. This could lead to two
different vectors on the active and standby SPEs. Therefore, the "set vector"
command should be reissued after handshake is up on the standby SPE.
If handshake is up in a High or Critical Reliability System, the active vector will be
set and the standby vector will be cleared, or vice versa depending on the option
that is selected.

status access-endpoint
This command displays the status of an access endpoint.

Synopsis
status access-endpoint extension print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-373

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
inads, init, nms, browse.

Examples
status access-endpoint 25012
status access-endpoint 77868
status access-endpoint 66078 print

Description
The status access-endpoint command displays internal software state
information for diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities with which an
Access Endpoint is communicating.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

The extension number of the access endpoint to be displayed. The
number of digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is connected to the
SAT.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "status access-endpoint," the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension, [’print’]

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following message displays:
Extension invalid
If the extension is not administered, the following message displays:
Extension not assigned
If the object associated with the specified extension is not an access endpoint,
the following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status access-endpoint

Page 8-374

other than access-endpoint
If the board that contains the access endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted
If the EPN on which the access endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Extension

The extension of the access endpoint to be displayed.

(Starting) Port

Port locations of the access endpoint. For wideband access endpoint,
the location shown is that of the starting port.

Communication
Type

The valid voice and data communication type that the access
endpoint is administered. The options are: 56k-data, 64k-data,
voice-grade-data, and wideband.

Width

For communication types of 56k-data, 64k-data, and voice-grade
data, the width value is 1. For communication type of wideband, this
field displays the number of DS0s that makes up the access endpoint.

Service State

Whether the access endpoint is in-service or out-of-service. One of the
following states displays: in-service/active, in-service/idle, and
out-of-service.

Connected
Ports

Port location connected to the access endpoint for an active call. For
wideband access endpoint connection, all ports connected to the
wideband access endpoint are listed.

For the following output example, the command "status access-endpoint 22502"
was entered. Assume that the access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in
cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6. The access endpoint is connected on
an active call to ports 7 to 12 of board in location 1B19 (cabinet 1, carrier B, slot
19). This means port 01C1101 is connected to 01B1907, port 01C1102 is
connected to 01B1908, port 01C1103 is connected to 01B1909, and so on.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status administered-connection

status access-endpoint 22502

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-375

page 1 of 1

ACCESS-ENDPOINT STATUS

Extension:
(Starting) Port:
Communication Type:
Width:

22502
01C1101
wideband
6

Service State: in-service/active
Connected Ports: 01B1907 01B1908 01B1909
01B1910 01B1911 01B1912

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

status administered-connection
This commands displays the operational status of an administered connection.

Synopsis
status administered-connection ac number print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: rcust, cust, inads, init,
system technician, browse, bcms.

Examples
status administered-connection 1
status administered-connection 50
status administered-connection 128 print

Description
An administered connection provides the ability to automatically establish an
end-to-end connection between two access/data endpoints.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status administered-connection

Page 8-376

Parameters
ac number

The number assigned to an administered connection.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status
administered-connection," the following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned administered connection number(1-128),
[‘print‘]

Error Messages
If the user entered administered-connection number is in the wrong format, the
following error message is displayed:
Identifier invalid
If the user entered administered-connection number is out of range (not between
1 and 128), the following error message is displayed:
Entry out of range
If the user entered administered-connection number is not administered, the
following error message is displayed:
Identifier not assigned
If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered can’t complete request
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status administered-connection

Page 8-377

Output
Connection Number:

The number assigned to the administered connection.

Enabled?

Whether the administered connection is enabled ("y" or "n").

Originator:

The extension of the originating access/data endpoint.

Destination:

The destination address to be used in the routing of the
administered connection.

Connection State:

The current status of the administered connection. Valid values
are "connected," "restored," "failed," "waiting to retry," "attempting
to restore," "attempting to connect," "not scheduled," and
"disabled."

Failure Cause:

The cause of the state of the administered connection (that is,
why the state is reported as attempting to connect, attempting to
restore, or having failed to restore). If the administered
connection was due to be active but is not connected, then this
field shows the most recent reason for failure.

Number of Retries:

The number of consecutive failed establishment attempts.

Auto Restorable?

When an administered connection is in the connected state, this
field indicated whether or not auto restoration is attempted when
failure occurs.

For the following output example, the command status administered-connection
3 was entered.

status administered-connection 3
ADMINISTERED-CONNECTION STATUS

Connection Number:
Enabled?
Originator:
Destination:
Connection State:
Failure Cause:
Number of Retries:
Auto Restorable?

Feature Interactions
None.

page 1 of 1

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status attendant

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-378

status attendant
This command displays the status of the attendant console.

Synopsis
status attendant console number print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, init, bcms, browse.

Examples
status attendant 1
status attendant 2
status attendant 2 print

Description
The status attendant command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the attendant
console is communicating.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
console number

The console number is a unique number assigned to a specific
attendant (i.e. 1 - 16).

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status attendant," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned console(1-16), [’print’]

Error Messages
If the entered console number is not a valid number from 1 through 16 the
following message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status attendant

Page 8-379

Console number invalid
If the console number is not administered, the following error message will be
displayed:
Console number not assigned
If a software fault is encountered while the command is executing, the following
message will be displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then
resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Console Number

The specific number assigned to the attendant (1-16).

Port

The port location of the attendant
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).

Service State

In-service/idle, in-service/active, out of service, or
disconnected.

Usage State

Idle or active.

Maintenance Busy State

Whether maintenance is testing the object.

Connected Ports

Port locations to which the attendant is communicating
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status
attendant 1."

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-380

status attendant 1
ATTENDANT STATUS
Console Number: 1
Port: 01C1106
Connected Ports:

Service State: in-service/night service
Maintenance Busy? no

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

status audits
This command will display the status of all of the Data Relation Audits that have
detected a problem or that have aborted.

Synopsis
status audits [ peak-hour | cumulative ] [ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
status audits cumulative
status audits cumulative print
status audits cumulative schedule
status audits peak-hour
status audits peak-hour print
status audits peak-hour schedule

Description
This command is used to display the results of the execution of the Data Relation
Audits that are built into the switch. Data Relation Audits are used to check for
inconsistencies between selected data items in the switch, to report any
inconsistencies found and to take corrective action if possible. Data Relation

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-381

Audits are useful during the development and testing phases of a project to help
uncover software errors as well as in the field to help the switch recover from
data corruption before that corruption causes an interruption in service.
This command displays the date and time of the beginning of the interval
requested, the number of times that the full sequence of audits was executed
(audit cycles), and status information about each audit that detected a problem
or aborted during the specified interval. The status information contains the name
of the audit, the number of times that the audit ran and corrected an error, the
number of times that the audit ran and detected an error that it could not correct,
the number of times that the audit ran and aborted for some reason, the date and
time of the first problem detected by the audit (only for cumulative) and the time
of the most recent error detected by the audit (only for cumulative).
The audit data is available since the last reboot or since the last execution of the
"clear audits cumulative" command, and for the peak hour since the last reboot or
since the last execution of the "clear audits peak-hour" or "clear audits
cumulative" command. Note: This data is not cleared on single process
restarts, warm starts, cold 2 restarts, cold 1 restarts, or processor
interchanges.
Audits can be executed directly using the "test MO" command (e.g. test MO l
8192 p 512 t 0 will execute the Station Connections Audit, the audit lnames and
numbers (pnames) are included in the Table Of Audits at the end of this main
page). When the "test MO" command is used to execute an audit, the results of
the audit are displayed on the terminal screen. In general, errors discovered as
the result of a demand test are not logged in the error logs. To be consistent with
other error logging and to avoid confusion, errors that are discovered as the
result of a demand test executing an audit are not included in the data displayed
by this command.
The screen does not automatically update, and is a reflection of the system at the
time the request was made. More audits may have been run while the information
is being displayed. These updates will not be reflected until the next execution of
the command.

Defaults
None

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-382

Parameters
cumulative

This option will display the data collected since the last reboot or since
the last execution of the "clear audits cumulative" command.

peak-hour

This option will display the data for the peak hour since the last reboot,
or since the last execution of the "clear audits cumulative" or "clear
audits peak-hour" command. The peak hour is determined by
summing, for all audits, the number of times that the audit found and
fixed a problem, the number of times that the audit found a problem
that it could not fix and the number of times the audit aborted. The data
for the hour with the highest number is displayed as the peak hour’s
data. If two peaks of the same size occur, the most recent is displayed.

print

If specified, this parameter will cause the information displayed by this
command to be sent to the printer attached to the terminal as well as to
the screen.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [3] for more details.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "status audits," the following
message will be displayed:
cumulative

peak-hour

Error Messages
If the "print" option is specified and there is no printer attached to the terminal or if
the printer is off line, then the following message will be displayed:
Printer failed
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-383

Output
The audit information will be displayed with one line of data displayed for each
audit that has detected an error or aborted. The data for audits that have not
detected any errors or aborted is not displayed since all of the numbers would be
zero anyway. The output will be sorted in descending order based on the sum of
the values in the "# Cycles Fixed Data," "# Cycles Could Not Fix Data" and "#
Cycles Audit Aborted" fields for each audit.

Start Date

This field shows the date and time of the beginning of the
interval being displayed. For "cumulative" it will be the
date and time of the last reboot or of the last execution of
the "clear audits cumulative" command. For "peak-hour" it
will be the date and time of the beginning of the peak
hour since the last reboot or since the last execution of a
"clear audits cumulative" or "clear audits peak-hour"
command.

# of Audit Cycles Completed

The switch executes the audits in a set order, one after
another. When all of the audits have been executed, the
switch starts over with the first one in the sequence. An
audit cycle is one execution of all audits in the sequence
of audits executed by the switch. This field shows how
many audit cycles were completed in the specified
interval. The number ranges from 0 to 999999, if it
exceeds 999999 the string "******" will be displayed to
indicate overflow.
NOTE:
Since this field shows the number of audit cycles
completed, it is possible that the individual audit
values, described below, could be larger than this
value if the switch is part way through another audit
cycle. Also, some audits are executed as part of
scheduled maintenance instead of in the normal
audit sequence, the Audit Cycles number does not
apply to these audits.

Audit Name

This field shows the name of the audit that detected an
error or aborted. There are a few audits that are not run in
the normal sequence of audits. Instead, they are
executed as part of scheduled maintenance. Those
audits will be included in the reports but will be marked
with "(SCH)" following the audit name.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-384

# Cycles Fixed Data

This field shows the number of times that the audit ran, in
the specified interval, and found a problem that it was
able to fix. The number ranges from 0 to 65534, if it
exceeds 65534 the string "*****" will be displayed to
indicate overflow.

# Cycles Could Not Fix Data

This field shows the number of times that the audit ran, in
the specified interval, and found a problem that it was not
able to fix. The switch data being audited is left in an
inconsistent state when this happens. The number
ranges from 0 to 65534, if it exceeds 65534 the string
"*****" will be displayed to indicate overflow.

# Cycles Audit Aborted

This field shows the number of times that the audit ran, in
the specified interval, and aborted due to an internal
error. The number ranges from 0 to 65534, if it exceeds
65534 the string "*****" will be displayed to indicate
overflow.

First Error

This field shows the date and time that the audit first
detected any of the three types of problems (i.e. fixed
data, could not fix data, audit aborted) since the last
execution of the "clear audits cumulative" command. The
format used is: two digit month number followed by "/"
followed by the two digit day of the month followed by "/"
followed by the two digit hour in 24 hour time followed by
":" followed by the two digit minute (e.g. 03/27/14:31 for
2:31 pm, March 27th). This field appears only on the
"status audits cumulative" display.

Most Recent Error

This field shows the date and time that the audit last
detected any of the three types of problems. The format
used is: two digit month number followed by "/" followed
by the two digit day of the month followed by "/" followed
by the two digit hour in 24 hour time followed by ":"
followed by the two digit minute (e.g. 03/27/14:31 for 2:31
pm, March 27th). This field appears only on the "status
audits cumulative" display.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Page 8-385

The following are a sample outputs of the "status audits" command.

status audits cumulative
AUDIT STATUS INFORMATION
Start Date: 13:00 MON MAR 19 1990
Audit
Name

# Cycles
Fixed Data

# Cycles Could
Not Fix Data

HTLK
0
CR-AUDIT
135
HU-CALLS
2
SE-CALLS
1
TTR-SID
1
CO-CALLS
1
DE-CALLS
1
TR-QUE
1
CTRK
0
AT-ADM
1
CO-ADM
1
PC-ADM
1
PRI-USR (SCH) 1

# of Audit Cycles Completed: 67532
# Cycles
Audit Aborted

First
Error

0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

03/22/10:14
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:13
05/01/02:17
05/01/02:16
03/22/10:12
04/05/13:05
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:13
04/05/15:05
03/22/10:14

*****
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

Most Recent
Error
06/24/16:03
06/10/19:17
03/22/10:20
03/22/19:14
05/01/02:17
05/01/02:16
03/22/10:12
04/05/13:05
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:12
03/22/10:13
04/05/15:05
03/22/10:14

Command successfully completed

status audits peak-hour
AUDIT STATUS INFORMATION
Start Date: 10:00 MON MAR 22 1990
Audit
# Cycles
Name
Fixed Data
HTLK
0
HU-CALLS
2
CR-AUDIT
1
DE-CALLS
1
CTRK
0
AT-ADM
1
CO-ADM
1
SE-CALLS
0
PRI-USR (SCH)
1

# of Audit Cycles Completed:

# Cycles Could
Not Fix Data
25
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0

Command successfully completed

# Cycles
Audit Aborted
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0

25

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Page 8-386

Feature Interactions
The data displayed by "status audits cumulative" and "status audits peak-hour"
can be affected by the "clear audits" command. The "clear audits cumulative"
command clears the data collected to date and resets the start time kept for that
data and also clears the peak hour’s data. The "clear audits peak-hour"
command clears the data kept for the peak hour so that a new peak hour can be
established.
When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and then a
scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule execution of the
command. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [3] for details about the scheduling form.

TABLE OF AUDITS
The following table shows the names of the audits that are run as part of time
available maintenance, the audit number (pname) and a short description of
each audit. These audits are executed using lname MO_DR_AUDIT (8192).
These audits may be executed using the test MO command with lname 8192,
pname "audit number," and test number 0 (for example, test MO l 8192 p 607 t 0
will execute the AC state audit).

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Description

AC-ISG

607

AC state audit

ADJUSR

595

Adjunct user record audit

ADMTRM

559

Administration terminal audit

ANUR-A

589

Announcement user record audit

AN-ADM

574

Announcement group administration audit

AN-CALLS

572

Announcement group calls audit

AN-QUE

577

Announcement group queue audit

AQSA

545

ACB queue slot allocation audit

ASLINK

606

ASAI link status audit

ASYLED

605

ASAI yellow LED audit

ATACT

558

Attendant active audit

ATAV

557

Attendant availability audit

ATDRCNT

576

Attendant resource count audit

AT-ADM

529

Attendant group administration audit

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Page 8-387

Description

AT-CALLS

515

Attendant group calls audit

AT-QUE

523

Attendant group queue audit

AUR-A

540

Attendant user record audit

AU-CIDP

596

Announcement user cid/port audit

AWOH-UR

614

Admin Without Hardware Split User Record Audit

B2B-TAB

617

Board-to-Board Link Audit

BR-CALLS

629

Bridged extensions audit

BUTLK

560

Button lock audit

CALK

569

Coverage answer member lock audit

CATT

527

Attendant connections audit

CCTRTAB

624

Call Classifier Tone Receiver Table Audit

CCTR-SID

600

Call classifier tone receiver audit

CDM

528

Data module connections audit

CO-ADM

530

Coverage group administration audit

CO-CALLS

516

Coverage group calls audit

CPROC

585

Call process/call record audit

CPTRTAB

623

Call Progress Tone Receiver Table Audit

CPTR-SID

601

Call progress tone receiver audit

CPWAKEUP

586

Wake up call process audit

CR-AUDIT

513

Call processing data audit

CSR-A

544

Connection service record audit

CSTAT

512

Station connections audit

CTRK

526

Trunk connections audit

DA-CALLS

583

DAP call record audit

DA-MSG

584

DAP message buffer audit

DE-ADM

531

Data extension group administration audit

DE-CALLS

517

Data extension group calls audit

DMLK

563

Data module lock audit

DUR-A

543

Data user record audit

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Page 8-388

Description

DXLK

567

Data extension member lock audit

EI-TAB

621

Expansion Interface Table Audit

FHT

554

Facility status hundreds table audit

FTED

553

Facility status tracked user audit

FTING

552

Facility tracking user audit

FTSRA

593

Fiber time-slot record allocation audit

GIP-TIMER

609

GIP Timer Audit

HTLK

568

Hunt member lock audit

HU-ADM

532

Hunt group administration audit

HU-CALLS

518

Hunt group calls audit

HU-QUE

524

Hunt group queue audit

IAP-CALLS

590

IAP call record audit

IAP-URB

591

IAP user record audit

IM-HMM

579

HMM image table audit

INST-LNK

604

Instigator/down-link user link audit

ISGR-A

594

ISG call record audit

LOG-A

570

MDM error/alarm log audit

MAP-HMM

580

HMM map status table audit

MCT-ADM

561

Malicious call trace administration audit

MIS-FAC

587

MIS facility state audit

MP-ADM

575

Modem pool group administration audit

MP-CALLS

573

Modem pool group calls audit

MSGQ-HMM

582

HMM map request queue audit

MST-LOG

549

MST Logging Buffer Audit

MST-STATE

546

MST State Audit

MS-CALLS

588

MISAP call record audit

MUV

555

Message user verification audit

MWIA

550

Message waiting indicator audit

MWL-NOAP

599

Message waiting lamp no AP audit

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status audits

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Page 8-389

Description

PA-ADM

533

Paging group administration audit

PA-CALLS

519

Paging group calls audit

PCLK

566

PCOL member lock audit

PC-ADM

535

Personal CO line group administration audit

PC-CALLS

521

Personal CO line group calls audit

PINC-TAB

612

Packet Inter-Port Network Connection Sub-Table
audit

PI-ADM

534

Pickup group administration audit

PLIP-LNK

602

LIP link audit

PN-HMM

578

HMM pname table audit

PRI-CR

598

PRI call record audit

PRI-TBUF

592

TSCUUI buffer audit

PUR-A

541

Phantom user record audit

SDSBUF

581

Service dispatcher stim buffer audit

SDSID

571

Service dispatcher SID audit

SE-ADM

538

Terminating extension group administration audit

SE-CALLS

537

Terminating extension group calls audit

STNLK

562

Station lock audit

SUR-A

539

Station user record audit

S-INC-TAB

611

Service Inter-Port Network Connection Sub-Table
audit

S-PT-TAB

610

Service-Port Connection Sub-Table audit

S-TAB

620

Service Table Audit

TEGLK

565

TEG member lock audit

TKLK

564

Trunk lock audit

TONE-TS

608

Tone Time Slot Subtable Audit

TR-ADM

536

Trunk group administration audit

TR-CALLS

522

Trunk group calls audit

TR-QUE

525

Trunk group queue audit

TSC-PRI

520

ISDN-PRI TSC resource audit

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Page 8-390

Description

TSRA

547

Time slot record allocation audit

TTI-STATE

618

TTI State Audit

TTI-TRANS

619

TTI Translation Audit

TTR-SID

514

Touch tone receiver audit

TTR-TAB

622

Touch Tone Receiver Table Audit

TUR-A

542

Trunk user record audit

T-TS-TAB

613

Tone Time Slot Connection Sub-Table Audit

UGMA

551

User group membership audit

UPUSR-LNK

603

Up-link user link record audit

URMB

548

User record maintenance busy audit

X25-CHAN

615

X.25 Channel Status Audit

X25-LINK

616

X.25 Link Status Audit

Continued on next page

The following table shows the names of the audits that are run as part of
scheduled maintenance, the audit number (pname) and a short description of
each audit. These audits are executed using lname MO_SCH_AUDIT (8193).
These audits may be executed using the test MO command with lname 8193,
pname "audit number," and test number 0 (for example, test MO l 8193 p 556 t 0
will execute the Message Waiting Lamp Audit audit).

Audit Name

Audit
Number

Description

MWL

556

Message Waiting Lamp Audit

PRI-USR

597

PRI user record audit

SUR-FREE

625

Station User Record Free List Audit

status bri-port
This command displays the current states of the specified ISDN-BRI port.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-391

Synopsis
status bri-port location print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms, browse.

Examples
status bri-port 1c0701
status bri-port 1c0701 print

Description
The status bri-port command displays the service state, maintenance state and
layer 1 state of an ISDN-BRI port. Also displayed on this form is information on
the point-to-point signaling links transported over the port.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be busied out
and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number (1-3), "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot
position, and "pp" represents the circuit (port).

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status bri," the following is
displayed:
Enter an isdn-bri port location, [’print’]

Error Messages
If the format of the port location is incorrect, the following message is displayed:
Port/Board invalid
If the port location entered is not between 5 and 7 characters long, the following
message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-392

Port invalid
If the port is not administered, the following message is displayed:
Port not assigned
If the board associated with the entered port location is not inserted, the following
message is displayed:
Board not inserted
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit
If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-393

Output
Port:

This field specifies the physical address of the ISDN-BRI port.

Service State:

This field specifies whether the ISDN-BRI port is "in-service" or
"out-of-service."

Maintenance Busy?:

This field specifies whether there is any maintenance testing
being performed upon the ISDN-BRI port ("yes" or "no").

Layer 1 State:

This field contains the layer 1 (physical) state of the BRI on the
port. Valid states are "activated," "pend-activation," and
"deactivated."

TEI Value

■

The "activated" state means layer 1 frames are being passed
between the port and BRI endpoints.

■

The "pend-activation" state specifies that the port has been
placed in-service, the layer 1 interface device has been
turned on, layer 1 frames are being sent to the BRI endpoints
connected to this port, but the BRI endpoints are not
responding.

■

The "deactivated" state means that the layer 1 interface
device on the BRI has been turned off due to the port going
out-of-service.

The Terminal Endpoint Identifier(TEI) is a layer 2 addressing
parameter used by the switch to pass information over the
point-to-point signaling link to and from BRI endpoints. Each
point-to-point signaling link has a TEI associated with it. This field
displays the value of this addressing parameter. This value is in
the range from 0 to 127.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Layer2 State:

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-394

This field contains the point-to-point signaling link layer 2 state.
Valid states are "un-assigned," "assigned," "established,"
"l3-established" or "hyperactive."
■

The states of "un-assigned" means the link is in the
TEI-UNASSIGN state at Layer 2.

■

The "assigned" state specifies the link is currently in the
AWAIT_EST (Await Establish) state at layer 2. If the BRI
endpoint supports TEI allocation procedures, this state
means that those procedures have been successfully
executed and a TEI has been assigned to the endpoint by
the switch.

■

The state of "established" signifies that the link is in the MF_
EST_NORM (Multi-Frame Established Normal) state at layer
2. This state means that the switch has successfully started
the link and is now capable of exchanging layer 3 frames with
the endpoint. If the endpoint does not support SPID
initialization procedures, the extension of the endpoint
associated with the link is also displayed. This is the normal
state for the link in the point-to-point wiring configuration.

■

A state of "l3-established" shows that the link is in the MF_
EST_NORM state at layer 2 and SPID initialization procedures
have been completed successfully. The extension of the
endpoint associated with the link is also displayed. This is the
normal state for the link in the multi-point wiring configuration.

■

The state of "hyperactive" means that traffic on this link has
gone over threshold. The link has been suspended and
deemed hyperactive.

Endpt Extension

This field displays the extension of the voice/data endpoint
associated with the link only if the link is in the "established"
(point-to-point configuration) or "l3-established" (multipoint
configuration) layer 2 states, otherwise this field is blank.

Endpt SPID

This field displays the SPID administered on the voice/data
endpoint associated with the link. Note that this information is
displayed only if the link is in either the "established"
(point-to-point configuration) or the "13-established" (multipoint
configuration) layer 2 state. Otherwise this field is blank.

Service SPID

This field displays an indication as to whether the link is
associated with the Service SPID. If the link is associated with the
Service SPID this field contains a "yes" and the endpoint
extension field is blank, otherwise this field is blank. Service SPID
is a feature used by service technicians to check building wiring
between the switch and the BRI endpoint.

For the following output example, the command status bri-port 1c1701 was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

status bri-port 1c1701

Page 1 of

Page 8-395

1

SPE A

STATUS BRI-PORT
Port: 01C1701
Service State: in-service
Maintenance Busy?: no
Layer 1 State: activated
TEI Value
Link1

64

Layer2 State
13-established

Endpt Extension
1010

Endpt SPID

Service SPID?

1010

Link2
Link3

STATUS INTERPRETATION SECTION
The meaning of the information on the status bri-port form is as follows.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-396

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation
TEI
Range

ASAI, BRI 0-126

Layer 2 State

Assigned

Voice
Extension

Service
SPID

blank

blank

Description / Recommendation

Transitory state for BRI
endpoints and ASAI adjuncts.
Link establishment is being
attempted by the switch.
1. Check the endpoint and
wiring by following the SPID
Facility Test Procedure
described in the BRI-SET
(ISDN-BRI Set/ASAI Adjunct)
Maintenance
documentation.
2. Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established for
ASAI adjuncts and BRI
endpoints supporting MIM
(management information
messages) initialization and
Established for fixed TEIBRI
endpoints and automatic
TEIBRI endpoints not
supporting MIM initialization.
NOTE:
A MIM is a level-3
message that conveys
management and
maintenance information
between a
communications system
and a BRI terminal.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

ASAI

Page 8-397

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued
TEI
Range

0-63

Layer 2 State

Established

Voice
Extension

Service
SPID

blank

blank

Description / Recommendation

Transitory state for ASAI
adjuncts. ASAI signaling is
connected at Layer 2. Layer 3
Restart procedure has not
completed between switch and
adjunct.
1. Check the adjunct by
following the recommended
repair procedures of the
manufacturer.
2. Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.

BRI

0-126

Established

BRI, ASAI 64-126 Established

ext

blank

Normal state for non-MIM
initializing, fixed and automatic
TEIBRI endpoints.

blank

blank

Transitory state for automatic
TEIBRI endpoints which support
MIM initialization.
1. Verify that SPID
administration on the switch
and endpoint are
consistent. Verify the repair
by executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.
Otherwise, proceed to Step
2.
2. Try replacing the endpoint.
Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

Page 8-398

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued
Voice
Extension

Service
SPID

ext

blank

Normal state for automatic
TEIBRI endpoints supporting
MIM initialization.

BRI, ASAI 64-126 L3-Establishe
d

blank

yes

SPID Facility Test is being
conducted on the port by
system technician. Link is not
associated with a BRI endpoint
on the port. See description of
SPID Facility Test Procedures
described in the BRI-SET
(ISDN-BRI Set/ASAI Adjunct)
Maintenance documentation.

BRI

64-126 L3-Establishe
d

ext

yes

SPID Facility Test is being
conducted on the port by
system technician. Link is
associated with an endpoint on
the port. See description of SPID
Facility Test Procedures
described in the BRI-SET
(ISDN-BRI Set/ASAI Adjunct)
Maintenance documentation.

BRI

0-126

blank

blank

Invalid SPID assigned to link.

BRI

TEI
Range

Layer 2 State

64-126 L3-Establishe
d

L3-Establishe
d

Description / Recommendation

1. Change the SPID value in
the BRI endpoint to match
the SPID administered to
the BRI endpoint on the port.
Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the BRI
endpoint is L3-Established.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

BRI
(cont’d)

Page 8-399

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued
TEI
Range

0-126

Layer 2 State

L3-Assigned

Voice
Extension

Service
SPID

ext

blank

Description / Recommendation

Transitory state for BRI
endpoints which support MIM
initialization.
2. Wait for five seconds and
repeat the command. If the
state has not changed,
continue with Step 2.
3. Make sure SPID
administration on the switch
and endpoint are
consistent. Verify the repair
by executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.
Otherwise, go to Step 3.
4. Try replacing the endpoint.
Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

BRI

Page 8-400

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued
TEI
Range

0-126

Layer 2 State

L3-Assigned

Voice
Extension

Service
SPID

ext

yes

(cont’d)

Description / Recommendation

Transitory state for BRI
endpoints which support MIM
initialization when SPID Facility
Test was used to initialize the
station.
5. Wait for five seconds and
repeat the command. If the
state has not changed,
continue with Step 2.
6. Make sure SPID
administration on the switch
and endpoints are
consistent. Verify the repair
by executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.
Otherwise, go to Step 3.
7. Try replacing the endpoint.
Verify the repair by
executing the status
bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.

ASAI

0-126

Hyperactive

ignore

ignore

Link has sent too many
messages per unit time.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status bri-port

Table 8-3.
Endpoint
Types

Page 8-401

Status BRI-Port Command Interpretation — Continued
TEI
Range

Layer 2 State

Voice
Extension

BRI

Service
SPID

Description / Recommendation

Signaling was suspended.
System timeouts in 60 seconds
and attempts to place the link in
service again. If a link remains in
this state while there is no
activity at the BRI endpoint:
1. Be sure SPID administration
on the switch and endpoints
are consistent. Verify the
repair by executing the
status bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.
2. Replace the endpoint. Verify
the repair by executing the
status bri-port PCSSpp
command. Determine that
the L2 state of the signaling
link is L3-Established.

ASAI

0-126

L3-Restarting

ext

The switch has sent a Restart
message to the adjunct but has
not yet received a Restart
Acknowledgment message
from the adjunct.

ASAI

0-126

L3-Restarted

ext

After receiving a Restart
Acknowledgment message, the
switch has sent a Heartbeat
message to the adjunct and is
waiting for a response.

ASAI

0-126

L3-Establishe
d

ext

Normal state for ASAI adjunct.

Continued on next page

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-402

status card-mem
This command views the status of the memory card located at the specified SPE.

Synopsis
status card-mem location print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: cust, init, inads, system
technician, nms, rcust, browse, and bcms.

Examples
status card-mem
status card-mem A
status card-mem b print

Description
Memory card is a portable and compact memory card containing a bank of flash
EPROM chips. The non-volatile memory card can be erased and randomly
programmed with user’s data. The system software is stored in the "flash" section
of main memory and the memory card used for saving translations doesn’t
contain a copy of the system software as the tape does. During the system
reboot or a system power down condition, the in-core system maintenance
hardware error logs are temporarily saved in the memory card before the system
goes down and then the error logs file is read back when the system is restarted.
The Hard Patch feature also uses the memory card as a temporary storage when
LMM applies a patched file to the system software.
The "status card-mem" command can show the following information of a
memory card located at either active SPE or standby SPE:
■

Is a valid memory card in place?

■

Is the memory card write-protected?

■

What is the capacity of the inserted memory card?

■

What kind of system configuration - small or medium?

■

What is the number of pulses counted in the last erase operation?

■

What is the percentage of translation storage space used?

■

What are the names of files stored in the memory card, and what is date
and time (if available) when it was saved?

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status card-mem

Page 8-403

Defaults
None.

Parameters
location

This parameter indicates the carrier location where the memory card
resides in a High or Critical Reliability System. This field is not required
in a simplex switch configuration. In a duplex switch configuration, this
field is required and it can be either "A" for control carrier A in
Processor Port Network (PPN) or "B" for control carrier B in PPN.

print

Print the status on the printer attached to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status card-mem," the
following message is displayed for a duplex system:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B), [’print’]
[’print’]

Error Messages
If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
"entered value" is an invalid identifier;
press RETURN to execute modified command
If the NETCON board is not TN777B, then the following message will be
displayed:
Must install TN777B circuit pack
If the system is insane, the following message will be displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict
If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later
If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-404

Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.
If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed
If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"
If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-405

Output
Location

This field indicates the physical location (carrier) of the memory card. In
a simplex system, the "Location" always has the value "01A" for carrier A
of Processor Port Network. In a High or Critical Reliability System, either
"01A" or "01B" can be displayed.

System Size

The "System Size" field reflects the system configuration - Small or
Medium. This information is useful for catching errors such as inserting
wrong size of memory card into the system.

Capacity

The "Capacity" field shows the capacity of the inserted memory card
and the series number of the memory card. This field has a 3-digit
format for the size of memory card and the 1-digit format for the series
number. Three different capacities of memory cards are used in
DEFINITY D92 system. The file contents of each type of memory card
are described in the following table.

Capacity of Memory Card
Card
Size

User

Customer File Names

1 Mb

Small w/o Announcements

translation

4 Mb

Medium w/o Announcements

translation

4 Mb

Small and Medium with
Announcements

translation
announcements

10 Mb

Maintenance (core dump)

translation
announcements core_
dump

10 Mb

System Upgrade

system_software

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status card-mem

Status

Page 8-406

The possible values for the "Status" field are:
"inserted"a valid memory card is in the memory card slot
"no card"no memory card is inserted or the inserted memory card
has a bad connection
"unformatted"the inserted memory card is unformatted or can not
be recognized by the switch
Only when the status is "inserted," the switch can perform I/O
operation to the memory card

Write-Protection

The "Write-Protection" field has a value "on" when the write-protection
toggle on the memory card is turned on. Otherwise, the field is "off."
If the "Write-Protection" field is "on," then the switch can not store any
file to the memory card.

Number of Erase
Pulses

This field contains the number of pulses counted in the last erase
operation on a Series 1 type of memory card. This field is blank for
Series 2 type of memory card due to the different algorithm of erase
operation between two series.

Translation
Storage Space
Used (%)

Indicates the percentage of reserved storage space for storing
translation file in the memory card that has been used for saving the
translation into the memory card.
NOTE:
This percentage is valid only for the specific memory card
used in the most recent save translation operation (which is
implemented via the save translation command or via the
scheduled maintenance with save translation enabled). If the
memory card is replaced with another card, or if no save
translation is performed on the new memory card, the
percentage does not indicate the translation storage space
used in the new card. Therefore, in such a case, the
percentage can be ignored.

File Name

Each formatted memory card has reserved a fixed space in the card
for each file. The starting address and size of each reserved slot is
pre-determined according to the capacity of the memory card. The
file name as defined in Table "Capacity of Memory Card" is shown in
this field.

Data Present

The "Data Present" field is "y" when the file contains valid data.
Otherwise, the "Data Present" field has a value of "n."

Date Time

This field shows the date and time when the file was saved into the
memory card. For the "Software Upgrade" type of memory card, this
field contains the system software release number instead of the
time stamp. Due to the restriction of "core dump" file format, the year
information is not available in the date/time string.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status cdr-link

Page 8-407

For the following output example, the command "status card-mem" was entered.

status card-mem
MEMORY CARD STATUS
Location: 01A
Write Protection:
Status: inserted
Capacity (MB):
System Size: Medium
Number of Erase Pulses:
Translation Storage Space Used (%):

File Name
Data Present
translation
y
announcements
y

Date
2/17/91
2/15/91

off
4 Series 1
78
21

Time
9:00
20:30

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
If the Announcement feature is not available in the system features configuration,
then the "Data Present" field is always "n" for the "announcements" file. The
Announcement feature requires a memory card with a minimum capacity of 4
MB. If the memory card is less than 4 MB, then the Announcements can not be
saved in the memory card.
The Core Dump feature requires a 10 MB memory card for saving the core
dump. If the memory card has a capacity less than 10 MB, then the core dump
operation will fail.

status cdr-link
This command displays the status of the call detail recording (CDR) links.

Synopsis
status cdr-link print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, nms, browse.

Examples
status cdr-link
status cdr-link print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status cdr-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-408

Description
The status cdr-link command displays the status of call detail recording (CDR)
links. Whether the link is up or down will be displayed. If a link is down, the
number of times the switch has tried to set up the link will be shown.
The call detail recording (CDR) link is the physical link connecting the SPE to a
recording device (for example, printer) for sending CDR call records. A CDR link
is composed of a data channel on the NETCON board or EIA port on the
processor circuit pack, a digital port and a data module. There can be up to two
CDR links in the system.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status cdr-link", the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status cleared-alarm-notif

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-409

Output

Link State

Up, down, or extension not administered will be displayed.

Up means the link is up and the application can use the link. This
is the normal state of operation.
Down means the link is physically down.
Extension not administered means you need to administer the
system cdr feature form.
Number of Retries

The number of times the switch has tried to set up the link.

Maintenance Busy

Whether the maintenance object has been busied out or not. Will
be set to either yes or no.

The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

status cdr-link
CDR LINK STATUS
Primary
Link State: up
Number of Retries: 0
Maintenance Busy? no

Secondary
extension not administered

Feature Interactions
None.

status cleared-alarm-notif
This command returns the status of Cleared Alarm Notification.

Synopsis
status cleared-alarm-notif [1 | 2]

Examples
status cleared-alarm-notif
status cleared-alarm-notif 1
status cleared alarm-notif 2

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-410

Description
This command is intended to be used by Expert System to detect a chronic
alarming condition. If this command returns “Feature is suspended”, Expert
System can then identify an open trouble ticket as a chronic problem for special
considerations.

Defaults
The test defaults to return the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of the first OSS
telephone number.

Parameter
1

This option returns the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of
the first OSS telephone number.

2

This option returns the status of Cleared Alarm Notification of
the second OSS telephone number.

Help Messages
[‘1’ or ‘2’]

Output
The command returns one of the following messages:
1. If Cleared Alarm Notification is enabled and has not been suspended:
Feature is enabled
2. If Cleared Alarm Notification is disabled:
Feature is disabled
3. If Cleared Alarm Notification is enabled and has been suspended:
Feature is suspended

Feature Interactions
None.

status conference
This command is a troubleshooting aid to help identify problems with a
multimedia conference and can help solve more complex problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-411

Synopsis
The first screen appears when status conference is entered and at least 1 valid
conference is found.

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
status conference
status conference 2 print
status conference [all \ conference-ID] [print \ schedule]
status conference [all \ conference-ID] [endpoint \ endpoint id]
(see ‘‘Field Descriptions (status conference endpoint)’’ on page 8-426)

Description
Use the status conference command to solve the following multimedia
problems:
1. A user unable to join or remain joined to a conference.
2. A conference having poor video quality due to it being downgraded
because of the automatic algorithms - audio AUTO mode and the Px64
video picture specifications.
3. A user not receiving full service, such as being an audio-only endpoint (no
video).
4. An audio add-on user unable to join or remain joined to a conference.
5. A conferee not being seen by other users due to interworking problems.
6. A user not able to participate in the Muiltpoint Communications Service
conference.
7. A continuous conference not switching endpoints in or out of quadrants.

Defaults
The default for the conference-ID is all (all stored data).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-412

Parameters
status conference

Displays all stored conference data.

status conference 2 print

Displays data on conference 2 (current or last
completed), and sends it to the SAT printer.

Feature Interactions
None.

Output
Depending on the command entered, it is possible to have many records
display. Active conferences display first (in order of conference-ID), followed by
completed conferences (most recently completed first). There is no data or
information about conferences not yet begun.
The data for each conference displays in 2 parts: the first screen describes the
status of the conference and indicates the modes and levels of the conference. It
also shows certain endpoint information such as which endpoints are in use and
which endpoint caused the conference operating mode to change. This screen
is similar to the administration screens. The remainder of the screens display
endpoint level data (up to 8 endpoints per screen), displaying the ports and drop
reasons.
Screen 8-1 shows page 1 of a typical administration screen. The first screen
appears when status conference is entered and at least 1 valid conference is
found.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Screen 8-1.

Page 8-413

status conference: page 1 of 2

Field Descriptions (status conference, page 1)

status

The current status of the conference - active, in-use, complete

conference
name

Always set as MMCH DYNAMIC

conference
mode

Always set as voice-activated

password

Not Applicable

password
scope

Not Applicable

cascade mode

Conference cascade mode - blank

audio mode

The current operating audio mode - G.711-A, G.711-mu, G.728.
G.722

class

The type of conference - dedicated

data mode

Data mode capability for this conference - none, any-mlp, ww-pcs

MLP rate

MLP Data Rate for this conference - blank.

start
time/date

Conference start time in 24-hour notation with month and day.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-414

stop
time/date

End of conference in 24-hour notation with month and day. It is the
actual end time if Status is complete; otherwise it is blank.

admin
bandwidth

The channel bandwidth as administered on the Conference Record
form - 64k.

no of
channels

The number of channels (transfer rate) required for each Px64 endpoint
- 2.

Chair

Identifies the current chair token holder. This field is always blank.

conf
bandwidth

The current operating channel conference bandwidth. This can be
different from the administered bandwidth because of Rate Adaptation.

Rate
adaptation

Does this conference support Rate Adaptation? - n, y.

Format
(in/out)

For single-screen conference, the video format of the conference, CIF,
QCIF, QCIF/CIF, H.CTS, H.CTX+, and SG4. For conferences
other than H.261, the input and output formats are always symmetric
and the mode is the same for input and output. These display as
H.CTX, H.CTX+, and SG4. For H.261 mode non-continuous presence
conferences, the format is always symmetric and displays as CIF and
QCIF. The same is true for the non-presentation, continuous presence
conference in single-screen. For presentation mode H.261 single
screen continuous presence capable conferences, the input and
output formats may be symmetric QCIF/CIF (displayed as CIF) or
asymmetric QCIF/CIF, depending on if the format is administered as
upgradeable. For quad-screen conferences, the format is QCIF/CIF to
reflect the input of QCIF from all participants and output of CIF to all
participants. For presentation mode quad-screen conference, the
format is also QCIF/CIF to reflect the input/output of all participants
except the presenter. In quad-screen mode, the input from the
presenter is always CIF.

FPS

The CIF frame rate (frames per second) - ‘-‘, 30, 15, 10, 7.5. FPS
indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of receiving frames. Note
that there is no indication of the maximum transmit frame rate nor the
current frame rate that the MCU can detect. The frame rate changes as
a function of the amount of motion in the input image.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

QFPS

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-415

The ACIF frame rate (frames per second) - ‘ - ‘, 30, 15, 10, 7.5. QFPS
indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of generating/receiving
frames.
For quad-screen VAS conferences, QFPS reflects the highest common
QCIF frame rate of all endpoints and the rate of the video mixer board,
which may be lower than the rest of the participants. Note that QCIF
calculation takes into account the highest common CIF frame rate
declared by all conference participants, since QCIF rate cannot be
greater than that of the highest common CIF rate.
For quad-screen presentation conferences, QFPS reflects the highest
common QCIF frame rate of all participants and the rate of the video
mixer board. Note that the QFPS cannot be greater than the CIF frame
rate announced by the presenter.
QFPS field is blank for proprietary modes.

lo/hi
interworking

Does this conference support Low Speed/High Speed Interworking? This field will always have a value of n.

Type

The type of conferee, either Audio/Video (P64), Audio Add-on (AUD),
Cascade Link (CAS), BONDing Call (BOND), BONDing Cascade Link
(BCAS), UCC Controller (UCC), or Dedicated Access (DA). BONDing
calls use up to 12 channels to form a single multimedia pipe.

Ext

Endpoint extension chosen at administration. This field is blank.

Meet-me
number

The Meet-Me Number administered for the Meet-Me Extension. This
field is blank.

Dial Type

Indicates whether dial-in or dial-out is used to join the endpoint to the
conference - in, out. The value in is for dial-in, and out is for dial-out.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

In Use

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-416

Is the endpoint currently participating in the conference or in process of
connecting to the conference? - y, c, e, f, n, blank.
y means that the endpoint is in use and is fully connected on all media
in an active conference.
c means that the endpoint is in use and is fully connected, however the
endpoint has changed the conference audio or video capability or has
changed the rate of the conference because of rate adaptation. This
condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode
fields to identify which capability was reduced.
e means that the endpoint is in use but the endpoint had capability
problems. The endpoint does not have one of the required capabilities
(Vid, Bhl, MLP) to be a full participant. For MLP capabilities, see the
“T120” field. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s
capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability.
f means that the endpoint is in use but is not connected to all media.
This indicates that the endpoint has declared all the required
capabilities (channel/video/ audio/data) but is not fully connected to all
conference media at this time. This endpoint may be in the process of
connecting, has failed to connect, or is not a valid video source. This
condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode
fields to identify the problem.
n means that the endpoint was connected in a conference but has/was
disconnected or attempted to connect to a conference but was
unsuccessful.
blank means the field is blank until the first call is made from/to the
endpoint.

Chl

Data on the quantify and quality of channels (transfer rate)? - y, e, n,
blank
y the endpoint has the required number of channels.
e means that the endpoint has not declared support for the correct
number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference.
n means that the endpoint has declared the correct number of
channels, but all the channels have not yet joined the conference, due
to either a network or endpoint problem.
blank Audio add-on endpoints always have the Chl field set to blank.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Aud

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-417

Does it have the required audio capability? - y, c, e, blank
y the endpoint has the required audio capability. Audio add-on
endpoint always have the Aud field set to y once the endpoint has
joined the conference.
c this endpoint is PCM only and it changed the video quality of the
conference by changing the operating audio from G.728 to G.711. If
the administered audio mode is auto and the administered bandwidth
is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel), the system
starts out with the highest common audio of G.728. When the
administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps, the system starts out
with the highest common bandwidth of 7 kHz.
e A PCM-only endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting
the administered audio mode of G.728 (such as a data conference), or
G. 278/G.711 endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting
the administered audio mode of 7 kHz. Such endpoints operate with
PCM audio and interwork with the current operating audio mode.
blank the field is blank until the first call is made from/to the endpoint.

Vid

Does it have the required video capability and is receiving video? - y, c,
e, n, blank
y the endpoint has the required video capability and should be
receiving video if the Chl, Aud, and Dat fields are y.
c means it downgraded the conference’s video quality - either from CIF
to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate. The conference video mode is
set by default to CIF and if a QCIF-only endpoint joins the conference,
then the entire conference is made to operate in QCIF, with the video
clarity downgraded. Also, the conference frame rate is initially set to the
highest frame rate that can then be reduced by any endpoint. If the
conference video mode is not administered with upgrade capability,
then if the video parameters for a conference have been
“downgraded,” they are not “upgraded” until all endpoints disconnect
from the conference.
e means that the endpoint has not declared any video capability in its
cap-set.
n means audio only, not receiving video, possibly due to an audio or
data problem.
blank Audio add-on endpoint always have the Vid field set to blank.

Mlp

The state of the Control Link to the ESM (T.120 stack terminator), the
endpoint MLP data capability, and the state of the data connection in
the T.120 stack. This field value is always blank, indicating that the
Data Mode for the conference is none, and therefore, the data does not
apply, or the endpoint has never joined the conference.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Gx

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-418

Does it have the Still Frame Graphics capability? - y, e, blank
y This endpoint has this capability.
e This endpoint did not declare this capability. The conference retains
the still frame graphics capability when a non-compliant endpoint joins
the conference.
blank This endpoint has never joined the conference.

Rate Adpt

Rate adaptation/Interworking indicator - 5, 6, y, c, e, n, blank. Values
of 5 and 6 apply only to Low Speed/High Speed Interworking. All other
values apply only to Rate Adaptation.
5 A 56-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint has joined a High Speed (128 kbps
or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio only
capability but is not a valid video source and destination.
6 A 64-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint has joined a High Speed (128 kbps
or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio only
capability but is not a valid video source and destination.
y This endpoint has joined the conference at the administered rate of
64 kbps, but because rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by
another endpoint, this endpoint has successfully rate adapted to 56
kbps.
c The administered bandwidth of the conference is 64 kbps and this
endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps. The first 56 kbps
endpoint that joins 64 kbps rate adaptable conference triggers rate
adaptation (see Join Time below).
n A 64-kbps conference was triggered to rate adapt to 56 kbps by
some other endpoint. This endpoint joined the conference at the
bandwidth of 64 kbps, but encountered problems in rate adapting
down to 56 kbps. This endpoint may have the audio and may be
receiving video, but is not a valid video source.
blank Rate adaptation was never triggered by any endpoint, and if this
endpoint is in use and connected, then it has joined the conference at
the administered bandwidth.

Bond Mode

BONDing Mode - blank. This field is blank for calls that are not related
to bonding.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Ts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-419

Indication of the talking state of the endpoint - t, m, M, S, blank.
t At the time the command was invoked, voice energy (talking) was
detected from the endpoint.
m At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint indicated to the
MCU that it was muted. It is possible that an endpoint may mute, but
not send any indication to the MCU. In this situation the MCU does not
display a mute indication.
M At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was
muted via UDD/CRCS Agent interface. M displays when both the
endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have muted the endpoint audio.
S At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was
muted because of solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agent. While in
solo-audio state, new endpoints joining the conference are
automatically muted.
blank At the time the command was invoked voice energy (talking)
was not being detected from the endpoint.

Vs

Indication of the MCU video state for this endpoint - a, b, B, c, i, r, R, s,
S, u, U, v, blank.
For quad-screen conferences an * is affixed before the value of Vs to
indicate that an endpoint is currently part of the mixed image. A # may
be affixed before the value of Vs to indicate that an endpoint was fixed
to be in the mixed image (via administration or UCC/CRCS Agent), but
instead, a Fill video is shown in its place. This occurs when the video
of an endpoint that is fixed in a quadrant cannot be used as a video
source because the endpoint is currently not joined to the conference,
has suppressed its video, or has invalid video to be the video source.
Notice that at most four endpoints have an * or # affixed before the Vs
field value.
For quad-screen conference in VAS mode, the mixed image is
broadcast to all endpoints. For quad-screen conference in presentation
mode, the mixed image is return video to the presenter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Vs
(cont’d.)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-420

a This value applies only to quad-screen conferences. *a indicates that
an endpoint is part of the current mixed image and is fixed in one of the
quadrants via administration. A value of *a indicates that the endpoint
is fixed in a quadrant but is not currently connected (Fill image
displays).
b For full-screen conference it indicates that at the time the command
was invoked, this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites.
This conference was in VAS, broadcast, or presentation mode. For
quad-screen VAS conference it is prefixed with an asterisk (*) and
indicates that this endpoint’s video is part of the mixed image because
of VAS. For quad-screen presentation conferences, b (without an
asterisk) identifies the presenter as the broadcaster.
B At the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites because of the UCC roll call feature.
UCC roll call feature can only be performed in full-screen mode.
c At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in chair mode and
the broadcaster was designated by the chair. Chair features can only
be performed in full-screen mode.
i At the time the command was invoked the endpoint was not a valid
video source. For continuous presence conference, if this endpoint is
fixed in a particular quadrant, an asterisk (#) is affixed before i.
r For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked
the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster. For
continuous presence conference in presentation mode, *r represents a
VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image.
R At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s video was the
return video to the broadcaster because of the UCC browse feature.
UCC Browse feature can only be performed in full-screen mode.
s At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
suppressed at the request of the endpoint. For continuous presence
conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a
particular quadrant a # is affixed before s.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Vs
(cont’d)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-421

S At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
suppressed via UCC/CRCS Agent interface. For continuous presence
conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a
particular quadrant, # is affixed before S. S displays when both the
endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have suppressed the endpoint
video.
u For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked
this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The
conference was in VAS mode and the broadcaster was designated by
the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface. For quad-screen conferences, it
indicates that UCC/CRCS Agent designated this endpoint as fixed in a
quadrant. An asterisk (*) is affixed before u if the endpoint is currently
part of the quad image, and # is affixed if the endpoint is not currently
joined.
U Applies only to quad-screen conference and indicates that
UCC/CRCS Agent designated a quadrant as VAS. An asterisk (*) is
affixed before U to indicate that this endpoint is part of the current quad
image.
v At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode but
the endpoint has asked to be a broadcaster via “See-Me” request and
was granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The See-Me
feature is only performed in full-screen mode.
blank At the time of the request the endpoint’s video was not
broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid
video source.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-422

status conference

page 2 of 2
STATUS OF CONFERENCE:
Sum Grp: Group1
L1:
L2:

Join
Time

Ext

Drop
Time

Drop
Reason

Group2

Group3

Group 4

AC --------Ports--------- Sum
Num Trunk
Video Aud/Esm Grp

Software

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Screen 8-2.

status conference: page 2 of 2

Field Descriptions (status conference, page 2)
Sum Grp

The VD audio Level 1 (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer group parts for
each assigned group (1-4). Summer parts are assigned only for
conferences with over 6 participants. When a conference operates at an
audio mode of 7 kHz (administered audio mode is 7 kHz, or auto with
the bandwidth greater than 128 kbps), the system allocates “primary”
and “secondary” L1 and L2 summer parts. These primary and
secondary parts are allocated as adjacent port slots on the same board.
Status conference only displays the primary summer ports. The
secondary summer ports are always one slot higher than the displayed
primary summer port.

Join Time

Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joined the conference.

Drop Time

Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnected. If the first
channel has a drop time, then it means that the endpoint is not in use. If
there is a drop time without a join time, it means that the call
disconnected without being joined to the conference.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-423

The reason for the channel’s disconnect:
2-pri This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a
mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This
mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see
“Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility).
2-sec This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a
mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This
mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as secondaries (see
“Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility).
Agent The reservation agent has caused the call to disconnect (for
example, the agent has changed a connected dial-out destination
number).
Bandwidth mismatch between a call and the conference it attempted
to join. For example, a 56-kbps call attempted to join a 64-kbps
conference that does not allow rate adaptation.
BondHshake BONDing handshake drop reason can be caused due to
the following reasons: information channel parameter not supported or
invalid, parameter negotiation terminated out of sequence, timer
expired because of the secondary channels did not establish, or
BONDing framing was not detected for one of the other channels.
Busy This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that the
conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. This drop reason is detected by
an ISDN cause value (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for a description
of CPTR usage.
Chair disconnected the endpoint, using either Chair Command
Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals.
Conf End The conference was ended due to reaching stop time for a
reserved conference or due to an active conference being converted to
file.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason
(cont’d)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-424

Endpoint Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from the
endpoint. The endpoint notified the MCU that it intended to disconnect.
Far-end Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from either
the network or the endpoint.
Handshake Either framing was never found (the endpoint could not
complete initialization - problems finding Frame Alignment Signal (FAS),
Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and getting a corrected coded cap-set) or
framing was lost for some time (over 40 seconds) and the endpoint was
disconnected.
IDtimeout The MCU has not received response to the UIN/password
Query from the H.320 user after three attempts. Each attempt has a
system administered timeout period.
Internal MCU has a problem allocating trunk resources necessary to
route the dial-out call for the specified dial-numbers. This problem can
be associated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation (for
example, TAC specified in the dial-out number or routing pattern points
to a trunk group without members), or it can indicate a lack of trunk
resources (for example, all trunk members are maintenance busy or all
in-service members are busy on a call).
Network Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from the
network. The endpoint that had the disconnect notification capability
disconnected without notifying the MCU.
Not-MCU The dial-out destination number(s) of the “CAS” extension has
terminated to a number that is not a dial-in cascade MCU extension.
No-ring This dial-out drop reason occurs when the call has been up
for 30 seconds and no ringing is detected.
Reorder This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that
there are no available trunks in the network to place the call. This drop
reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources. See “Dial-out” for a
description of CPTR usage.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason
(cont’d)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-425

Pre-AnsDrop The call disconnected before answer by an endpoint.
The cause of the disconnect may be the network, an endpoint, or a
terminal adapter. This drop reason is different from ‘No-answer,’ which
indicates that a 60-second timeout occurred while alerting. In this case,
the call drops before the 60-second timer has expired. Some busy
endpoints connected through terminal adapters display this behavior.
Resource MCU could not provide resources (VC or MMI) when the call
arrived or lost the resources during the call. This could be due to them
being Out of Service, busied out by craft, or being used by system
maintenance. This drop reason could also occur if the DS1/MMI cable is
disconnected. If there was a resource problem when the call arrived, it
would get reorder (fast busy) and not get disconnected by the MCU.
Password Either the user entered the wrong password or the audio
add-on user did not enter it within the specified time period. Note that
the audio add-on user gets one attempt to enter a correct password and
inter-digit timing for each digit (that is, about 10 seconds between
digits).
System An MCU restart (level 2) disconnected all calls.
UIN-Inv The user entered an invalid User Identification Number.
Unknown The system could not determine the cause of the disconnect.
Wrong-num This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects
the wrong destination number was dialed. This drop reason is detected
by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value. See “Dial-out” for details.
UCC controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint.

AC Num

Administered Connection Number - from 1 to 128. AC number can be
used to further diagnose a problem by combining status conference
information with the status administered connection command and
data stored in the error and alarm logs.

Ports Trunk

The data endpoint that the channel is using.

Ports Video

The MMI port for the channel.

Ports Aud

If the endpoint type is not “UCC,” the VC audio encoder port (which is
always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first channel).
Because only one audio encoder port is allocated per endpoint, it
appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s channel 1
port slot position of the Port Aud/ESM column. For “UCC” endpoint
type, the channel 1 port slot position displays the allocated Call
Classifier resource.

Ports ESM

The Expansion Service Module MMI data port. This field is always blank.

Sum Grp

Endpoint’s assigned summer group number. The summer group port
assignments are on screen 1.

software

For Lucent Technologies use only.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-426

Field Descriptions (status conference endpoint)
status conference x endpoint y
The first screen appears when status conference x endpoint y is entered and
the specified conference is found. Data relevant for each endpoint displays in 6
pages. If the endpoint-ID of all is used, all possible endpoints associated with
the specified conference display.

Page 1 - Status Conference Endpoint

status conference endpoint
page 1 of 6
STATUS OF CONFERENCE ___
ENDPOINT: __
Status: ________
Ext: _____ Type: ____
Manufacturer/Country: ____/____
Product: _____
Terminal Name: _______________
Data Mode: _________ MLP Rate: ____
Admin Bandwidth: ____
Rate Adaptation: _
Conf Bandwidth: ____
Lo/Hi Interworking: _
Meet-Me Number: ____________________
Dial Out #1: _______________________
Sum Grp: _ L1: ______ L2: ______
#2: _______________________
Quadrature: ______ ________

ENDPOINT STATES/CAPABILITIES/MODES
In Enh ----Capability---- Rate Bond
Use BAS Chl Aud Vid Mlp Gx Adpt Mode Ts Vs
- -

Help line
enter command:

Screen 8-3.

Page 1 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

Endpoint

Endpoint-ID is a slot number associated with the endpoint entered on
the conference forms.

Product

Product identification number obtained from the endpoint.

Manufacturer/
Country

Manufacturer identification number and manufacturer’s country code
obtained from the endpoint.

Terminal Name

This field is always blank.

Sum Grp

Summer group number to which this endpoint belongs and the VC
Audio Level (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer ports for this group. These
fields have an entry only for conferences with over 6 participants.

Dial Out #1
Dial Out #2

Blank
Blank

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

In Use

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-427

Is the endpoint currently participating in the conference or in process
of connecting to the conference? - y, c, e, f, n, blank.
y means that the endpoint is in use and is fully connected on all
media in an active conference.
c means that the endpoint is in use and is fully connected, however
the endpoint has changed the conference audio or video capability
or has changed the rate of the conference because of rate
adaptation. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s
capabilities and mode fields to identify which capability was reduced.
e means that the endpoint is in use but the endpoint had capability
problems. The endpoint does not have one of the required
capabilities (Vid, Bhl, MLP) to be a full participant. For MLP
capabilities, see the “T120” field. This condition requires analysis of
this endpoint’s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing
capability.
f means that the endpoint is in use but is not connected to all media.
This indicates that the endpoint has declared all the required
capabilities (channel/video/ audio/data) but is not fully connected to
all conference media at this time. This endpoint may be in the
process of connecting, has failed to connect, or is not a valid video
source. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities
and mode fields to identify the problem.
n means that the endpoint was connected in a conference but
has/was disconnected or attempted to connect to a conference but
was unsuccessful.
blank means the field is blank until the first call is made from/to the
endpoint.

Enh BAS

EnhancedBasic Service Flag - n, y
y means that the endpoint supports the enhanced BAS
commands/caps;
n means that the endpoint only supports the basic BAS
commands/caps.

Chl

Data on the quantify and quality of channels (transfer rate)? - y, e, n,
blank
y the endpoint has the required number of channels.
e means that the endpoint has not declared support for the correct
number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference.
n means that the endpoint has declared the correct number of
channels, but all the channels have not yet joined the conference,
due to either a network or endpoint problem.
blank Audio add-on endpoints always have the Chl field set to
blank.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Aud

Page 8-428

Does it have the required audio capability? - y, c, e, blank
y the endpoint has the required audio capability. Audio add-on
endpoint always have the Aud field set to y once the endpoint has
joined the conference.
c this endpoint is PCM only and it changed the video quality of the
conference by changing the operating audio from G.728 to G.711. If
the administered audio mode is auto and the administered bandwidth
is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel), the system
starts out with the highest common audio of G.728. When the
administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps, the system starts
out with the highest common bandwidth of 7 kHz.
e A PCM-only endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting
the administered audio mode of G.728 (such as a data conference),
or G. 278/G.711 endpoint that did not have the capability of
supporting the administered audio mode of 7 kHz. Such endpoints
operate with PCM audio and interwork with the current operating
audio mode.
blank the field is blank until the first call is made from/to the
endpoint.

Vid

Does it have the required video capability and is receiving video? - y,
c, e, n, blank
y the endpoint has the required video capability and should be
receiving video if the Chl, Aud, and Dat fields are y.
c means it downgraded the conference’s video quality - either from
CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate. The conference video
mode is set by default to CIF and if a QCIF-only endpoint joins the
conference, then the entire conference is made to operate in QCIF,
with the video clarity downgraded. Also, the conference frame rate is
initially set to the highest frame rate that can then be reduced by any
endpoint. If the conference video mode is not administered with
upgrade capability, then if the video parameters for a conference
have been “downgraded,” they are not “upgraded” until all endpoints
disconnect from the conference.
e means that the endpoint has not declared any video capability in its
cap-set.
n means audio only, not receiving video, possibly due to an audio or
data problem.
blank Audio add-on endpoint always have the Vid field set to
blank.

Mlp

The state of the Control Link to the ESM (T.120 stack terminator), the
endpoint MLP data capability, and the state of the data connection in
the T.120 stack. This field value is always blank, indicating that the
Data Mode for the conference is none, and therefore, the data does
not apply, or the endpoint has never joined the conference.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Gx

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-429

Does it have the Still Frame Graphics capability? - y, e, blank
y This endpoint has this capability.
e This endpoint did not declare this capability. The conference
retains the still frame graphics capability when a non-compliant
endpoint joins the conference.
blank This endpoint has never joined the conference.

Rate Adpt

Rate adaptation/Interworking indicator - 5, 6, y, c, e, n, blank.
Values of 5 and 6 apply only to Low Speed/High Speed Interworking.
All other values apply only to Rate Adaptation.
5 A 56-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint has joined a High Speed (128
kbps or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio
only capability but is not a valid video source and destination.
6 A 64-kbps (Low Speed) endpoint has joined a High Speed (128
kbps or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio
only capability but is not a valid video source and destination.
y This endpoint has joined the conference at the administered rate of
64 kbps, but because rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by
another endpoint, this endpoint has successfully rate adapted to 56
kbps.
c The administered bandwidth of the conference is 64 kbps and this
endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps. The first 56 kbps
endpoint that joins 64 kbps rate adaptable conference triggers rate
adaptation (see Join Time below).
n A 64-kbps conference was triggered to rate adapt to 56 kbps by
some other endpoint. This endpoint joined the conference at the
bandwidth of 64 kbps, but encountered problems in rate adapting
down to 56 kbps. This endpoint may have the audio and may be
receiving video, but is not a valid video source.
blank Rate adaptation was never triggered by any endpoint, and if
this endpoint is in use and connected, then it has joined the
conference at the administered bandwidth.

Bond Mode

BONDing Mode - blank. This field is blank for calls that are not related
to bonding.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Ts

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-430

Indication of the talking state of the endpoint - t, m, M, S, blank.
t At the time the command was invoked, voice energy (talking) was
detected from the endpoint.
m At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint indicated to
the MCU that it was muted. It is possible that an endpoint may mute,
but not send any indication to the MCU. In this situation the MCU
does not display a mute indication.
M At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was
muted via UDD/CRCS Agent interface. M displays when both the
endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have muted the endpoint audio.
S At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was
muted because of solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agent. While in
solo-audio state, new endpoints joining the conference are
automatically muted.
blank At the time the command was invoked voice energy (talking)
was not being detected from the endpoint.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Vs

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-431

Indication of the MCU video state for this endpoint - a, b, B, c, i, r, R,
s, S, u, U, v, blank.
For quad-screen conferences an * is affixed before the value of Vs to
indicate that an endpoint is currently part of the mixed image. A #
may be affixed before the value of Vs to indicate that an endpoint was
fixed to be in the mixed image (via administration or UCC/CRCS
Agent), but instead, a Fill video is shown in its place. This occurs
when the video of an endpoint that is fixed in a quadrant cannot be
used as a video source because the endpoint is currently not joined
to the conference, has suppressed its video, or has invalid video to
be the video source. Notice that at most four endpoints have an * or
# affixed before the Vs field value.
For quad-screen conference in VAS mode, the mixed image is
broadcast to all endpoints. For quad-screen conference in
presentation mode, the mixed image is return video to the presenter.
a This value applies only to quad-screen conferences. *a indicates
that an endpoint is part of the current mixed image and is fixed in one
of the quadrants via administration. A value of *a indicates that the
endpoint is fixed in a quadrant but is not currently connected (Fill
image displays).
b For full-screen conference it indicates that at the time the command
was invoked, this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other
sites. This conference was in VAS, broadcast, or presentation mode.
For quad-screen VAS conference it is prefixed with an asterisk (*) and
indicates that this endpoint’s video is part of the mixed image
because of VAS. For quad-screen presentation conferences, b
(without an asterisk) identifies the presenter as the broadcaster.
B At the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites because of the UCC roll call feature.
UCC roll call feature can only be performed in full-screen mode.
c At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in chair mode
and the broadcaster was designated by the chair. Chair features can
only be performed in full-screen mode.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Vs
(cont’d.)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-432

i At the time the command was invoked the endpoint was not a valid
video source. For continuous presence conference, if this endpoint is
fixed in a particular quadrant, an asterisk (#) is affixed before i.
r For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked
the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster. For
continuous presence conference in presentation mode, *r represents
a VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image.
R At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s video was
the return video to the broadcaster because of the UCC browse
feature. UCC Browse feature can only be performed in full-screen
mode.
s At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
suppressed at the request of the endpoint. For continuous presence
conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in
a particular quadrant a # is affixed before s.
S At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
suppressed via UCC/CRCS Agent interface. For continuous
presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint
is fixed in a particular quadrant, # is affixed before S. S displays when
both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have suppressed the
endpoint video.
u For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked
this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The
conference was in VAS mode and the broadcaster was designated
by the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface. For quad-screen conferences, it
indicates that UCC/CRCS Agent designated this endpoint as fixed in
a quadrant. An asterisk (*) is affixed before u if the endpoint is
currently part of the quad image, and # is affixed if the endpoint is not
currently joined.
U Applies only to quad-screen conference and indicates that
UCC/CRCS Agent designated a quadrant as VAS. An asterisk (*) is
affixed before U to indicate that this endpoint is part of the current
quad image.
v At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was
being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode but
the endpoint has asked to be a broadcaster via “See-Me” request
and was granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The
See-Me feature is only performed in full-screen mode.
blank At the time of the request the endpoint’s video was not
broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid
video source.

Page 2 - Endpoint Channel Information
This section only describes the fields that are specific to the endpoint-level
command output.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-433

status conference endpoint

page 2 of 6
ENDPOINT CHANNEL INFORMATION

Chan.
No.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

Join
Time
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Drop
Time
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

----Drop---Reason Code
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __
_________ __

AC
Num
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

------------Ports---------Trunk Video Aud/ESM BONDng
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______
______ ______
______

Fr
Err
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Software
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________

Help line
enter command:

Screen 8-4.

Page 2 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

Join Time

Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joined the conference.

Drop Time

Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnected. If the first
channel has a drop time, then it means that the endpoint is not in use.
If there is a drop time without a join time, it means that the call
disconnected without being joined to the conference.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-434

The reason for the channel’s disconnect:
2-pri This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes
a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This
mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see
“Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility).
2-sec This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes
a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This
mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as secondaries
(see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary
compatibility).
Agent The reservation agent has caused the call to disconnect (for
example, the agent has changed a connected dial-out destination
number).
Bandwidth mismatch between a call and the conference it
attempted to join. For example, a 56-kbps call attempted to join a
64-kbps conference that does not allow rate adaptation.
BondHshake BONDing handshake drop reason can be caused due
to the following reasons: information channel parameter not
supported or invalid, parameter negotiation terminated out of
sequence, timer expired because of the secondary channels did not
establish, or BONDing framing was not detected for one of the other
channels.
Busy This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that
the conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. This drop reason is
detected by an ISDN cause value (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for
a description of CPTR usage.
Chair disconnected the endpoint, using either Chair Command
Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals.
Conf End The conference was ended due to reaching stop time for
a reserved conference or due to an active conference being
converted to file.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason
(cont’d)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-435

Endpoint Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from
the endpoint. The endpoint notified the MCU that it intended to
disconnect.
Far-end Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from
either the network or the endpoint.
Handshake Either framing was never found (the endpoint could not
complete initialization - problems finding Frame Alignment Signal
(FAS), Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and getting a corrected coded
cap-set) or framing was lost for some time (over 40 seconds) and the
endpoint was disconnected.
IDtimeout The MCU has not received response to the
UIN/password Query from the H.320 user after three attempts. Each
attempt has a system administered timeout period.
Internal MCU has a problem allocating trunk resources necessary
to route the dial-out call for the specified dial-numbers. This problem
can be associated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation
(for example, TAC specified in the dial-out number or routing pattern
points to a trunk group without members), or it can indicate a lack of
trunk resources (for example, all trunk members are maintenance
busy or all in-service members are busy on a call).
Network Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from the
network. The endpoint that had the disconnect notification capability
disconnected without notifying the MCU.
Not-MCU The dial-out destination number(s) of the “CAS” extension
has terminated to a number that is not a dial-in cascade MCU
extension.
No-ring This dial-out drop reason occurs when the call has been up
for 30 seconds and no ringing is detected.
Reorder This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects
that there are no available trunks in the network to place the call. This
drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources. See “Dial-out” for
a description of CPTR usage.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Drop Reason
(cont’d)

Page 8-436

Pre-AnsDrop The call disconnected before answer by an endpoint.
The cause of the disconnect may be the network, an endpoint, or a
terminal adapter. This drop reason is different from ‘No-answer,’
which indicates that a 60-second timeout occurred while alerting. In
this case, the call drops before the 60-second timer has expired.
Some busy endpoints connected through terminal adapters display
this behavior.
Resource MCU could not provide resources (VC or MMI) when the
call arrived or lost the resources during the call. This could be due to
them being Out of Service, busied out by craft, or being used by
system maintenance. This drop reason could also occur if the
DS1/MMI cable is disconnected. If there was a resource problem
when the call arrived, it would get reorder (fast busy) and not get
disconnected by the MCU.
Password Either the user entered the wrong password or the audio
add-on user did not enter it within the specified time period. Note that
the audio add-on user gets one attempt to enter a correct password
and inter-digit timing for each digit (that is, about 10 seconds
between digits).
System An MCU restart (level 2) disconnected all calls.
UIN-Inv The user entered an invalid User Identification Number.
Unknown The system could not determine the cause of the
disconnect.
Wrong-num This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects
the wrong destination number was dialed. This drop reason is
detected by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value. See “Dial-out”
for details.
UCC controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint.

Drop Code

A detail code complementing the Drop Reason (see above).
Additional bonding related information may be obtained from
supplementary BONDing Drop Codes described above.

AC Num

Administered Connection Number - from 1 to 128. AC number can be
used to further diagnose a problem by combining status conference
information with the status administered connection command and
data stored in the error and alarm logs.

Ports Trunk

The data endpoint that the channel is using.

Ports Video

The MMI port for the channel.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-437

Ports Aud

If the endpoint type is not “UCC,” the VC audio encoder port (which is
always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first
channel). Because only one audio encoder port is allocated per
endpoint, it appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s
channel 1 port slot position of the Port Aud/ESM column. For “UCC”
endpoint type, the channel 1 port slot position displays the allocated
Call Classifier resource.

Ports ESM

The Expansion Service Module MMI data port. This field is always
blank.

Ports BONDng

The MMI port used for BONDing for the channel.

Fr Err

Frame error counter. A circular hex counter (0-FF) to indicate the
occurrence of framing errors.

Page 3 - Conference Information
This section only describes the fields that are specific to the endpoint-level
command output.

status conference endpoint
CONFERENCE INFO:

---------CMD STAT
----- ---XRATE: y
AUDIO: n
56/64: y
VIDEO: n
MLP: y
H-MLP: y
LSD: y
HSD: y
CRYPT: y
S/M: y

page 3 of 6

Broadcaster: xx (See-Me)
Return Vid: xx

MODE COMMANDS/COMMUNICATION MODES ------| EPT MISC
| ------- FAW -CONF
EPT-IN
EPT-OUT
|------ I O |
CH1 CH2
------------ ------------- -------------| AIM: y n |
--- --384
384
384
| VIS y n | A-OUT: y
n
G728
neutral
G728
| MIS:
n | A-IN: y
n
derestrict
derestrict
derestrict
| MCV: n
| M-FRM: y
n
H.261
H.261
H.261
|-------------|
MFA: y
n
MLP-off
MLP-off
MLP-off
| TALK: y 05 |
MFN: y
n
H-MLP-off
H-MLP-off
H-MLP-off
| VFCV: y 01 |
FAS: y
n
LSD-off
LSD-off
LSD-off
| BCTK: n 02 |MCUFAL: 00 00
HSD-off
HSD-off
HSD-off
| RTTK: y 01 | FEFAL: 00 00
encrypt-off encrypt-off
encrypt-off | BCLS: n
|
N-comp-6B-H0 N-comp-6B-H0 N-comp-6B-H0 | RTLS: n
|
| HYPR: n 00 |
|DMUTE: n 00 |
|H.261: n 00 |
| VFMT: n 00 |

Help line
enter command:

Screen 8-5.

Page 3 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

Conference Info. This information applies mostly to full-screen conferences. The
Broadcaster field also applies to quad-screen presentation mode
conferences.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Broadcaster

Page 8-438

Indicates the endpoint number that is the current broadcaster. The
Broadcaster can be qualified with the following keywords:
1. Broadcast - indicates a broadcast mode broadcaster.
2. Chair - indicates that the broadcaster was designated by the
chair.
3. See-Me - indicates that the broadcaster is a result of MCV
request from an endpoint.
4. Presenter - indicates a presentation mode broadcaster.
5. Rollcall - indicates that the broadcaster was designated by
the UCC via the Rollcall feature.
6. UCC - indicates that the broadcaster was designated by the UCC.
7. VAS - indicates a Voice Activated Switching broadcaster.

Next
Broadcaster

Indicates the endpoint number that is selected to be the next
broadcaster.

Return Vid

Indicates the endpoint number that is the current return video. The
return video can be qualified with the following keywords:
1. blank - indicates that the return video is the previous broadcaster
forced to be return video because of VAS, action by Chair, action
by UCC, or endpoint MCV request. The broadcaster qualifier
identifies which action forced this endpoint to become return
video.
2. Autoscan - indicates auto scan return video. This is true only
when conference mode is broadcast with auto scan.
3. Browse - indicates that the return video was designated by the
UCC via the Browse feature.
4. VAS - indicates a Voice Activated Switching return video.

Next Return
Vid

Indicates the endpoint number that is selected to be the next return
video.

Mode Commands/Communication Modes. This is a collection of both incoming
and outgoing bandwidth allocations for the multiplex. The Incoming data is the
rate at which the MCU thinks the endpoint is communicating based on the
Bit-rate Allocation Signal (BAS) codes received from the endpoint/codec and the
capabilities the MCU has declared. The Outgoing data is the rate from the MCU
toward the endpoint. The following are column definitions for this section of page
3.
CONF

The desired conference operating mode. This may be different from
the endpoint in (EPT-IN) or endpoint out (EPT-OUT) modes.

CMD

labels for the various types of mode commands

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-439

STAT

indicates if the conference and the incoming modes are compatible.
A value of y indicates mode compatibility; a value of n indicates that
the modes are not compatible.

EPT-IN

defines the communication modes coming in from an endpoint.

EPT-OUT

defines the communication modes sent out to an endpoint based on
the number of channels connected and the capabilities of the
endpoint.
The following are field definitions for the Mode Commands/Communication
Modes section of Page 3.

XRATE

One of the supported rates in Table 8-4:
Table 8-4.

Supported Transfer Rates s

XRATE

Bandwidth of the Call

2x64

2B (2x56 or 2x64)

128

112kbps or 128kbps

196

168kbps or 196kbps

256

224kbps or 256kbps

320

280kbps or 320kbps

384

336kbps or 384kbps

512

512kbps

768

768kbps

1472

1472kbps

1536

1536kbps‘

1920

1920kbps

Continued on next page

XRATE
(cont’d.)

XRATE may be 64 when the endpoint is just dialing in, or in the event
of problems. It implies that only one B channel is being used.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-440

Audio rate (kbps bandwidth) of the conference and the endpoint
must be the same but not necessarily their mode. When the audio
rate of the conference and the endpoint are different the endpoint’s
audio will interwork but the endpoint’s video will be invalid. MCU may
or may not send video to such an endpoint.

AUDIO

Table 8-5 summarizes expected endpoint audio mode with different
configurations of transfer rate, facility bandwidth, conference mode,
and whether or not all endpoints support the highest common audio
mode (HC audio) when the administered mode is auto. The highest
common conference mode is dependent on the administered
bandwidth. A ‘-’ in the table indicates ‘does not apply.’

Table 8-5.

Audio Mode Configurations

Admin Mode
(HC Audio)

All
Support
HC Audio

Xfer
Rate

Facility
BW

auto (G.728)

yes

<=128k

-

auto (G.728)

no

<=128k

auto (G.728)

no

auto (G.722)

Conf Mode

Expected Endpoint Mode

G.728

G.728

64k

G.711-A-56k

G.711-A-56k B.711-Mu-56k

<=128k

56k

G.711-A-48k

G.711-A-48k G.711-MU-48k

-

>128k

64k

G.722-56k

G.722-56k G.711-A-56k G.711-Mu-56k

auto (G.722)

-

>128k

56k

G.722-48k

G.722-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k

G.728

-

-

G.728

G.728

G.711

-

-

64k

G.711-A-56k

G.711-A-56k G.711-Mu-56k

G.711

-

-

56k

G.711-A-48k

G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k

G.722

-

-

64k

G.722-56k

G.722-56k G.711-A-56k G.711-mu-56k

G.722

-

-

56k

G.722-48k

G.722-48k G.711-A-48k G.711-Mu-48k

Continued on next page

AUDIO
(cont’d.)

Other possible AUDIO mode values include neutral (neutralized
I-channel) and Au-off, Frm (no audio signal) which never match
conference mode and are not supported by MCU.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

56/64

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-441

The 65/64 field is derestrict when operating at per-channel
speeds of 64kbps, 128kbps, 192kbps, 256kbps, 320kbps, 384kbps,
512kbps, 768 kbps, 1472kbps, 1536kbps, or 1920kbps; it is
restrict when operating at 56kbps, 112kbps, 168kbps, 224kbps,
280kbps, 336kbps, 448kbps, and 672kbps.
Note that if the conference is configured for Nx56kbs operation, the
endpoint may signal either via capabilities or modes that is operating
at the proper rate. In such a case, even when we receive
derestrict command which does not match the conference
communication mode of restrict, if the capability indicates
restrict (MISC capability has restrict displayed on Page 4) the
STAT 56/64 is set to y to indicate 56/64 compatibility between the
conference and the endpoint.

VIDEO

The Video mode: H.261 (recommended), H.CTX (proprietary),
H.CTX+ (proprietary), or SG4 (proprietary) indicate that video is on in
the direction indicated; video-off when the video is off.

MLP

Multi Layer Protocol data mode. When Data Mode is administered as
any-mlp or ww-pcs, the MLP mode should be var-MLP. Other
values will affect video status.
The MLP mode should be MLP-off when Data Mode is administered
as none. Again, other values in this mode will affect video status.

H_MLP

The High Speed MLP mode. The HMLP mode should be H-MLP-off.
Other values in this mode will affect video status.

LSD

Low Speed Data mode. The LSD mode should be LSD-off. Other
values in this mode will affect video status.

HSD

High Speed Data mode. The HSD mode should be HSD-off. Other
values in this mode will affect video status.

CRYPT

Encryption mode. The CRYPT mode should be encrypt-off. Other
values in this mode will affect video status.

S/M

Single/Multi channel interoperability mode. 6B-H0-comp indicates
that the sender is interoperating multiple channels and a single
channel (for example, 6B and H0). Not-comp-6B-H0 indicates that
the sender is not interoperating between 6B and H0. Normally this
value is Not-comp-6B-H0. Other values in this mode will affect video
status.
Endpoint Miscellaneous (EPT MISC) Information. EPT MISC contains
miscellaneous states and counters for an endpoint. The flags can be a value of y
or n. The counters start with initial value of 0x00, they increment to 0xff, and then

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-442

wrap around to 0x01. AIM and VIS are BAS commands which can be sent as
input (I) to MCU from an endpoint or as output (O) from MCU to an endpoint.
AIM

Audio Indicate Muted. Value of y on input (I) indicates that this
endpoint has muted its audio. MCU will not VAS to an endpoint
displaying mute indicate. Value of n on input indicates that this
endpoint has not muted (only if endpoint audio mode is turned on).
Value of y on output (O) indicates that all other endpoints in the
conference have muted their audio (have sent AIM to MCU). MCU in
turn tells this endpoint (by sending it AIM) that there is no audio
output from MCU. A value of n on output indicates that there is an
audio path open across the bridge.

VIS

Video Indicate Suppressed. Value of y on input (I) indicates that this
endpoint has suppressed its video (indicated video is muted). Value
of y on output (O) indicates that the MCU is not sending video to this
endpoint because there is no video broadcaster (broadcaster has not
joined or broadcaster’s video is not valid).

MIS

Multipoint Indicate Secondary-status. This command is only sent as
output (O) to an endpoint. A value of n indicates that the endpoint is
viewed as capable of being a valid source (although not necessarily
at this moment). A value of n is the correct state to be in for video. A
value of y indicates that MIS was sent to an endpoint and that this
endpoint is viewed as a secondary endpoint. The endpoint is
included in the audio portion of the conference but not the video
portion. Video will not be sent.

MCV

Multipoint Command Visualize. This command is only sent as input (I)
from an endpoint. A value of y indicates that an endpoint has
requested to become a broadcaster. This is used during Still Frame
Graphics and to force “presentation” mode.

TALK

A value of y indicates that the VC board is detecting voice energy
from the endpoint. The TALK counter indicates the number of times a
start/stop was detected.

VRCV

Value of y indicates if the endpoint is receiving video (MCU is
sending video to the endpoint). The VRCV counter indicates the
number of times video was sent/not sent to this endpoint.

BCTK

Applies to single screen and quad-screen presentation mode
conferences. A value of y indicates that the endpoint is the video
broadcast source. The BCTK counter indicates the number of times
this endpoint was the video broadcast source.

RTTK

Applies only to single screen conferences. A value of y indicates that
the endpoint is the return video source. The RTTK counter indicates
the number of times this endpoint was the return video source.

BCLS

Applies to single screen and quad-screen presentation mode
conferences. A value of y indicates that the endpoint is watching the
video of the broadcast source.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-443

RTLS

Applies only to single screen conferences. A value of y indicates that
the endpoint is watching the video of the return source.

HYPR

A value of y indicates hyperactivity from an endpoint (MCU isolated
endpoint from the MMCH conference due to “thrashing” behavior)
and affects endpoint’s status as a video source (for 5 seconds of
hyperactivity timer). The HYPR counter indicates the number of times
this endpoint was hyperactive.

DMUTE

A value of y indicates that the decoder was muted by the VC board or
the software in the MCU. VC board mutes the decoder when it loses
MMI or endpoint framing is lost, when it receives an invalid audio
code word, and when endpoint is hyperactive. The only time that the
MCU software mutes the decoder of an endpoint is to mute all
endpoints, other than the broadcaster, when a mode of a conference
is “broadcastw/scan” (broadcast with auto scan). The DMUTE
counter indicates the number of times this endpoint’s decoder was
muted by the VC board.

VFMT

The video format applicable only to quad-screen conferences. This
field always has a value of n, indicating QCIF format.

H.261

A value of y indicates video framing loss. The H.261 counter
indicates the number of times the framing was lost.
Frame Alignment Word (FAW) Information. The FAW section of page 3
provides the channel Frame Alignment Word information for the communication
paths labeled CHL 1 and 2. For 2B calls, both CHL 1 and 2 are used. For
1-channel calls (112,bps, 128kbps, 168kbps, 196kbps, 224kbps, 256kbps,
280kbps, 320kbps, 336kbps, 384kbps, 768kbps, 1472kbps, 1536kbps, and
1920kbps) only CHL 1 is used. A-OUT, A-IN, M-FRM, MFA, and MFN are flags
with values of y or n.

A-OUT

MCU has endpoint framing.

A-IN

Endpoint has MCU framing

M-FRM

Multichannel frame alignment is present (alignment of both channels
in 2B).

MFA

Multiframe alignment word is present (required in 2B call).

MFN

Multiframe numbering is present (required in 2B call).

FAS

Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) channel number (1 or 2). This number
should match the column header.

MCUFAL

MCU Frame Alignment Loss (MCUFAL). A counter of the number of
times the MCU indicates to the endpoint that it has lost endpoint FAW
or multichannel synchronization (M-FRM). The MCU a-bit toggles
when the MCU gains or loses endpoint multichannel synchronization.
This counter starts with an initial value of 0x00, increments to 0xff,
then wraps around to 0x01. The MCUFAL count is also shown in the
Fr Err field on Page 2

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-444

Far End Frame Alignment Loss (FEFAL). A counter of the number of
changes the MCU detects in the endpoint’s a-bit (A-OUT). The
endpoint a-bit toggles when an endpoint gains or loses MCU framing.
This counter starts with an initial value of 0x00, increments to 0xff,
then wraps around to 0x01.

FEFAL

Page 4 - Endpoint Capability Information
This section only describes the fields that are specific to the endpoint-level
command output.

status conference endpoint

page 4 of 6

ENDPOINT CAPABILITY INFORMATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------VID | vfmt: QCIF
cmpi: 30
H.CTX
SG4
imp
| da_sfg
qmpi: 7.5
H.CTX+
SG4_sfg
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------MISC | derestrict
S/M mbe dcomp
cic
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------XR | 64 64x2 64x3 64x4 64x5 64x6
384
384x2
384x3
384x4
384x5
|
128 192 256 320 512 768 1152 1472
1536
1920
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------AUD | ntrl
711m 711a g728 g722_64
g722_48
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------LSD | var 300 1200 4800 6400 8000 9600 14.4k 16k 24k 32k 40k 48k 56k 62.4k 64k
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------HSD | var 64k 128k 192k 256k 320k 348k 512k 768k 1152k 1536k
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------MLP | var 4k 6.4k 14.4k 16k 22.4k 24k 30.4k 32k 38.4k 40k 46.4k
62.4k
-----|-------------------------------------------------------------------------HMLP | var 62.4k
68k 128k 192k 256k 320k 384k
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Screen 8-6.

Page 4 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-445

Endpoint Capability Information. Fields on this page will only be displayed if an
endpoint declares the specific capability. For example, if an endpoint does not
declare the VID H.CTX capability, the H.CTX field will not be displayed.
VID

Provides information about the type of video and frame rate the
endpoint supports.
vfmt - does not display if the endpoint has no video capability. All
values are blank if there is an active call or this is an audio-only
endpoint. Otherwise, values for this field include:

MISC

■

FCIF for full CIF

■

QCIF for quarter CIF. Support of CIF implies support of QCIF. In
general, for larger screens, CIF displays sharper resolution video,
which ZCIF is blocked, but may run at higher frame rates and less
clear. The differences are less observable on very small displays.

■

cfps and qfps are the maximum frame rate (frames/second) at
which the endpoint can receive video for CIF and QCIF operating
modes. CIF frame rate values are 30fps, 15fps, 10fps, and 7.4fps.
If the endpoint does not support CIF (that is, the vfmt field is
QCIF), the cfps value should be blank.

■

da_sfg indicates support for H.261 Still Frame Graphics
transfers.

■

H.CTX, H.CTX+ and SG4 are proprietary video format
capabilities.

■

SG4_sfg indicates support for SG4 Still Frame Graphics

The restrict field is 1 way for an endpoint to indicate that it is
operating at 56 kbps per channel, the other way is the 56/64
command mode with a value of restrict. An endpoint on a 56 kbps
conference must send one or both of the 2 indications that they are
operating at 56 kbps before they become a video source in a 56 kbps
conference. If they signal either way that they are operating at 56
kbps in a 64 kbps or 384 kbps conference, they are an audio-only
source, but the MCU continues to send Selected Communication
Mode (SCM) toward them when possible.
A MISC capability of derestrict and a 56/64 command of
derestrict together indicate that an endpoint is operating at 64
kbps. If either is restrict, the conference operates at 56 kbps.
Other field values include:
■

dcomp indicates support for WorldWorx PCS data compliance.

■

mbe indicates support for Multi Byte Extension. MBE capability is
used for the exchange of passwords, terminal names, and other
special capabilities, such as, support of WorldWorx PCS specific
features.

■

cic (Chair Indicate Capability) indicates chair control capability.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

XR

Page 8-446

Transfer rate capabilities are statement about the speeds at which
the endpoint can operate over the current connection and operate a
Px64 Multiplex.
For a 384 kbps (H0) call, the endpoint sends its capabilities to
indicate 384 kbps support, which displays as 384. On a 336 kbps
call, the endpoint must signal 384 kbps support. If an endpoint does
not indicate support for 384 kbps on a 384/336 kbps conference, the
MCU provides Audio Only Communications Mode (ACOM). For a 2B
conference, the MCU sets the rate to 2x64, expecting the endpoints
to do likewise (64x2 is displayed; if this is not displayed, there is no
64x2 capability). Endpoints may occasionally take 2x64 (or the
current channel rate: 384, 768, 1472, 1536) out of their capability.
This is Mode 0 forcing and is part of normal procedures. The MCU
will provide AOCM if the endpoint does not signal support matching
the configuration of the conference.

AUD

The audio fields are statements of the audio protocols that the
endpoint supports. 711m and 711a are PCM (G.711) and support Mu
and A-law, respectively, and at least one is required of endpoints.
The g728 field indicates whether G.728 is supported (LB_CELP). This
value depends upon the type of the endpoint and how that endpoint
is currently configured. The g722_48 field indicates endpoint support
for G.722 (7 kHz) at both 48 kbps and 56 kbps. Therefore, g722_48
indicates that the endpoint supports G.722 audio at both rates. The
g722_64 field indicates endpoint support for G.722 at 64 kbps in an
unframed (not supported by the MCU) mode.

LSD

The LSD fields indicate the capabilities for Low Speed Data
conferencing.

HSD

The HSD fields indicate the capabilities for High speed Data
conferencing.

MLP

The MLP fields indicate the capabilities for Multi Layer Protocol Data
capabilities.

HMLP

The HMLP fields indicate the conference’s capability for High Speed
MLP data conferencing.

Page 5 - Endpoint Call Status Information
This page summarizes such call-related status as per-channel join counts,
join/drop time, drop reason, drop code, and auxiliary bonding drop code. In
addition, it contains a drop code and software fields from the previous call. The
data on the page is always retained. The Endpoint Call Status Information section
groups together all call-related fields. The only new field in this section is Join
Count; all other fields are described in Screen 8-3 and Screen 8-4.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

status conference endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-447

page 5 of 6

ENDPOINT CALL STATUS INFORMATION
Join
Chan Count
1: __
2: __
3: __
4: __
5: __
6: __
7: __
8: __
9: __
10: __
11: __
12: __

Screen 8-7.

Join
Time
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

Drop
Time
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____

-------------- Drop -------Reason
Code
BondCode
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__
__________
__
__

--- Previous ----DropCode Software
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________
__
________

Page 5 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

Join Count

This field displays a count of the number of times this endpoint joined
this conference during this conference session. This counter starts
with an initial value of 0, can increment to 64, and wraps around back
to 1.

Page 6 - Administered Connections
This page summarizes information on the administered connections associated
with this endpoint. This data can only be viewed while the conference is active.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-448

status conference endpoint

page 6 of 6

ADMINISTERED CONNECTIONS INFORMATION

Chan
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

AC
Num
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

Screen 8-8.

Dial-out
number

Dial-out Number
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________

Connection State
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________

Retry
Count
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Failure
Cause
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__

Page 6 of 6: status conference x endpoint y

The actual numbers that are dialed out by the administered
connections for each channel in the call. Note that the dial Out #1
and #2 on page 1 of the forms display the DCP endpoint number.
This is particularly useful with bonding dial-out calls.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Connection
State

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-449

Indicates the current call state of the AC. The following are
connection states associated with dial-out ACs:
■

enabled - is transient in nature and indicates that an AC is about
to enter the attempting to connect state.

■

disabled - this may mean one of three things:
— The AC has reached an administered retry threshold, and all
retries are stopped. Verify this by checking the Error Log and
checking whether an error type of 9 is logged against the AC.
— The AC was in a connected state and the far end
disconnected.
— The initial channel call has not yet connected. No dial out call
attempt is made for the additional channel(s) until the initial
channel has reached a connected state.

■

not scheduled - is transient in nature and indicates that an AC
is about to enter the “attempting to connect” state.

■

waiting to retry - means that the AC is inactive (sleeping)
and waiting for the retry timer to expire. Once the timer expires,
the AC sends a dial out call and enters the “attempting to
connect” state. ACs in this state indicate that the dial out call has
failed at least once.

■

attempting to connect - means that the AC is active on a
call, but the call has not yet connected.

■

connected - means that the call associated with the AC has
been answered and join cut-thru to the conference.

Retry Count

This field indicates how many retries have been attempted for this AC
during this join attempt. This field does not clear when the AC
connects. However, it clears when a new join attempt is made via a
Redial feature. Note that this is different from the Join Count which
counts the number of times the channel joined the conference during
this conference session.

Failure Cause

This field shows an ISDN or CPTR cause value (values lower than
0x7f) recorded when the last dial out call was dropped. Values above
0x7f are generated internally. Table 8-6 lists all possible failure cause
values displayed by this field and its associated description. The
Failure Cause value is logged in the Error Log and can be
displayed via the display errors command. (Err Type is normally
displayed as a decimal.)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status conference

Page 8-450

Table 8-6. Status AC - Failure Cause Values
Failure Cause
(hexadecimal)

Description

0x00 (0t0)

N/A

0x01 (0t1)

Incorrect destination address

0x02 (0t2)

Reason unknown

0x06 (0t6)

Reason unknown

0x10 (0t16)

Normal call clearing

0x11 (0t17)

Endpoint not available

0x12 (0t18)

ISDN timer expired

0x15 (0t21)

Reason unknown

0x12 (0t22)

Destination address changed

0x1C (0t28)

Bad destination or access denied

0x1D (0t29)

Access denied

0x1F (0t31)

Reason unknown

0x22 (0t34)

Trunks unavailable

0x26 (0t38)

Temporary or facility failure

0x29 (0t41)

Temporary or facility failure

0x2A (0t42)

Resources unavailable

0x2C (0t44)

Resources unavailable

0x32 (0t50)

Access denied

0x34 (0t52)

Access denied

0x36 (0t54)

Access denied

0x3A (0t58)

Resources unavailable

0x41 (0t65)

Required capability not implemented

0x42 (0t66)

Required capability not implemented

0x45 (0t69)

Required capability not implemented

0x51 (0t81)

ISDN protocol error

0x52 (0t82)

Required capability not implemented

0x58 (0t88)

Incorrect destination number

0x60 (0t96)

ISDN protocol error

0x61 (0t97)

ISDN protocol error

0x62 (0t98)

ISDN protocol error

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status data-module

Page 8-451

Table 8-6. Status AC - Failure Cause Values — Continued
Failure Cause
(hexadecimal)

Description

0x64 (0t100)

ISDN protocol error

0x66 (0t102)

ISDN timer expired

0x7f (0t127)

Reason unknown

0xC2 (0t194)

Ring no answer

0xC8 (0t200)

Hi and dry - no feedback detected

0xC9 (0t201)

Cascade link administered wrong

0xCA (0t202)

CPTR not available to detect failure

Continued on next page

status data-module
This command displays the status of a data-module.

Synopsis
status data-module extension print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
status data-module 30000
status data-module 32770
status data-module 32770 print

Description
The status data-module command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the data module is
communicating.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-452

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
extension

The extension of the data module to be displayed. The number of
digits in an extension is determined by a dial-plan.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status data-module", the
following message will be displayed:
Enter assigned extension, [’print’]

Error Messages
If the format of the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the extension is not a data module, the following
message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

If software fails to complete the command, one of the following messages will be
displayed:
No tests for this MO
EPN is not available
Board not assigned
Port not assigned
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-453

Output

Data Ext/Sta Ext
for Stn DM

The data module extension number. The DTDM is an exception: the
connected station extension is shown.

Port/Channel
Number

The port location of the data module (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). If
the data module specified is a data channel, the channel number
will be shown instead.

Service State

This entry displays the status of the data module; valid states are:
— In-service/idle
— The data module is present but not in use.
— In-service/active
— The data module is present and is in use.
— Out-of-service
— The data module has been removed from service
— Disconnected
— The data module no longer appears to be present

CF Destination Ext

This entry displays the call forwarding destination, if any, of the
station.

Maintenance
Busy?

Whether maintenance is testing the object, "yes" or "no".

Connected Ports

Port locations to which the data module is connected
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status
data-module 301".

status data-module 301
DATA-MODULE STATUS
Data Ext/Stn Ext for Stn DM: 301
Port/Channel Number: 01C1103
CF Destination Ext:
Connected Ports:

Feature Interactions
None.

Service State: out-of-service
Maintenance Busy? no

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-454

status hardware-group
This command displays the status of the hardware group maintenance test.

Synopsis
status hardware-group print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: bcms, browse, system
technician, inads, cust, init, rcust.

Examples
status hardware-group
status hardware-group print

Description
Summary information on the active or last hardware group tests will be displayed.
This display includes the number and percentage of maintenance objects tested,
the percentage of tests passed, failed, and aborted, the time elapsed since
initiating the hardware group test, the specific hardware group test command
(see ‘‘test hardware-group’’ command) initiated, and the state
(active/canceled/complete) of the hardware-group test.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status hardware-group", the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status hardware-group

Page 8-455

Output

Hardware Group
Command State:

The state of a hardware-group command: "active" - if testing
is in progress, "canceled" - if testing has been canceled,
"complete" - if the command has completed and there is no
testing going on.

Number of MOs Tested:

The number of MOs in the specified group (refer to test
hardware-group command) that have had been tested by
the current hardware-group command. This includes all
MOs that were either actually tested or were aborted due to
resource contention.

Total Number of MOs to
be Tested:

The total number of MOs in the group that was specified in
the "test hardware-group" command.

Percent Complete:

A ratio of the number of MOs completed and the total
number of MOs to test in the command.

Elapsed Test Time:

The duration of the hardware-group test. If a test was
canceled and then restarted this time excludes the cancel
period. If the hardware-group command has finished it will
indicate the length of time it took to complete the command.
The time is displayed in the HH:MM:SS format where HH is
hours, MM is minutes, and SS is seconds.

Repetition Number

The number of iterations that have been completed
corresponding to the ’repeat’ or the ’continuously’ option.

Percentage of Tests
Passed:

The percentage of tests that passed.

Percentage of Tests
Failed:

The percentage of tests that failed.

Percentage of Tests
Aborted:

The percentage of tests that were aborted.

Command:

The hardware-group action object and qualifiers that were
entered.

Test sequence:

This will display either short or long.

Test repetition:

This will display either continuously or the keyword repeat
along with the repeat value entered.

Output options:

This will display the selections that were chosen on the input
form: auto-page, background, or failures.

Hardware options:

This will display the selections that were chosen on the input
form: all-ports, or SPE-interchange.

For the following output example, the command "status hardware-group" was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status health

status hardware-group

Page 8-456

page 1 of 1

HARDWARE GROUP STATUS
Hardware Group Command State:
active
Number of MOs Tested:
11070
Total Number of MOs to be Tested:
12300
Percent Complete:
90%
Elapsed Test Time (hr:min:sec): 0:15:30
Repetition Number:
1
Percentage of Tests Passed:
82%
Percentage of Tests Failed:
11%
Percentage of Tests Aborted:
7%

ENTERED HARDWARE GROUP COMMAND
Command:
Test sequence:
Test repetition:
Output Options:
Hardware Options:

test hardware-group system
short
repeat 3
failures
SPE-interchange

Feature Interactions
None.

status health
This command displays the status of the overall health of the system.

Synopsis
status health print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms, browse.

Examples
status health
status health print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-457

Description
The status health command displays the current system alarm summary,
maintenance busy summary, user summary, critical system status, and cabinet
status. This is the same page that is displayed when "monitor health" is entered,
except with the "status health" command the output page is not updated
periodically.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status health", the following
object command word choices will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Major

The number of logged major alarms is displayed as a number ranging
from 0 to 200. Up to 200 major alarms can be reported in the alarm log;
therefore, this is the maximum which can be displayed.

Minor

The number of logged minor alarms is displayed as a number ranging
from 0 to 200. Up to 200 minor alarms can be reported in the alarm log;
therefore, this is the maximum which can be displayed.

Warning

The number of warnings logged in the alarm file is displayed as a value
between 0 and 200, which is the maximum number of warnings
permitted.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-458

Trunks

The number of maintenance busied out trunks is shown.

Stations

The number of maintenance busied out stations is displayed.

Others

The combined number of maintenance busied out objects excluding
trunks and stations is displayed.

Static

Static indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated to
high priority items (for example, the operating system). This percentage
is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that
the occupancy is less than one half of a percent (for example, an
occupancy of 89.6% would be displayed as 90%).

SM

SM indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated to
system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance.
Therefore, if there is a large amount of periodic or scheduled
maintenance testing being performed, this occupancy percentage can
be high without affecting service. This percentage is rounded to the
nearest integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that the occupancy
is less than one half of a percent (for example, an occupancy of 89.6%
would be displayed as 90%).

CP

CP indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently dedicated to
call processing. This occupancy has priority over SM and IDLE
occupancy categories and if needed, will take processor time away from
these occupancy categories. This percentage is rounded to the nearest
integer, therefore a percentage of 0 means that the occupancy is less
than one half of a percent (for example, an occupancy of 89.6% would
be displayed as 90%).

Idle

Idle indicates the proportion of the CPU which is currently available for
use. This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer, therefore a
percentage of 0 means that the occupancy is less than one half of a
percent (for example, an occupancy of 89.6% would be displayed as
90%).

Active SPE

A or B is displayed to indicate the currently active processor complex.
When the active processor complex is locked on-line via lock switching
on DUPINT, the "lock" option will be displayed; otherwise, "auto" will be
shown.

Duplicated?

The duplication status of the SPE component is indicated. "y" indicates
duplication and "n" indicates no duplication.

SPE Power

The current source of power for the processor complex is indicated. The
normal state is "commercial". When commercial power is not available,
battery backup is in use and will be indicated by "backup".

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status health

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-459

Time Source

The current timing source is displayed. The display values for this field
vary according to the timing source selected. If the site has administered
the optional Stratum-3 hardware, "external" will be displayed under
normal operating conditions and "internal" will be displayed when an
internal source, such as a tone clock, is used. Primary and secondary
timing sources must be administered when using the Stratum-4 option.
"primary" is displayed when the primary administered source is in use,
and "secondary" is displayed when the administered secondary source
is in use. When neither the primary or secondary sources are in use,
"local" will be displayed.

# Logins

The number of current users is displayed.

Cab

The assigned cabinet number, ranging from 1 to the highest cabinet
number in the system, is displayed on the screen.

Emerg Trans

The current setting of the emergency transfer switch on the maintenance
board is indicated for each cabinet. Five options are available: auto-on
("auto+" or "a+"), auto-off ("auto-" or "a-"), "on", "off", and "n.a.". Normally,
the "auto+" or "auto-" option is enabled. In this state, emergency transfer
will be activated automatically upon cabinet failure (The "+" indicates
that emergency transfer is currently activated, while the "-" indicates that
emergency transfer is currently not activated). When "on" is displayed,
emergency transfer is automatically activated. The "off" option shows
that the cabinet is prevented from activating emergency transfer. In a
system equipped with duplicated SPEs, the switch settings for both
processors of the PPN (cabinet 1) will be displayed. In this case, "auto+"
will be abbreviated "a+", "auto-" will be abbreviated "a-", and "off" will be
abbreviated as "of". "on" will not be changed. If "n.a." is displayed, the
emergency transfer switch setting is not available.

Mj

The individual number of major alarms associated with the cabinet is
indicated. An asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds
99.

Mn

The individual number of minor alarms associated with the cabinet is
indicated. An asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds
99.

Wn

The individual number of associated with the cabinet is indicated. An
asterisk is used to fill the field when the number exceeds 99.

PNC

Current Port Network Connectivity (PNC) status for each of the port
networks within a cabinet is displayed. When multiple port networks exist
within a cabinet, Carriers A, B, and C are listed first and separated from
Carriers D and E by a slash (for example, up/up). PNC status of a port
network is determined on the basis of availability of the Expansion
Archangel Link (EAL). An "up" denotes that the EAL is available. When
the EAL is not available, then a "dn" (down) is displayed.

Time of Day

The current time of day acquired from the system is displayed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-460

For the following output example, the command "status health" was entered.

status health
SPE:
PNC:
Pwr:
Cab
1
2
3

A/Auto
B/functional
OCC: ST: 9%
Cp: 25% Sm: 10% Idl:66%
A-PNC/Auto B-PNC/functional
ALARM:Maj: 0
Min: 2 Wrn: 9
Comm
Sync:local
Logins:4
BUSYOUTS:Trk: 0
Stn: 0
Oth: 0
EmTr Mj Mn Wn PNC Cab EmTr Mj Mn PNC Cab EmTr Mj Mn Wn PNC
off
0| 7| 0
up
off
0| 0| 4
up
nia
0| 2| 0
up
-Press CANCEL to quit 9:33 THU APR 16 :1993

Feature Interactions
In a High or Critical Reliability System, if the standby SPE Emergency Transfer
Select Switch is changed and handshake is down, the displayed Emerg Trans
field will be incorrect until handshake comes up again.

status interface
This command displays the current value of a number of counters maintained by
the processor interface (PI). The information displayed by this command is only
useful to development environment.

Synopsis
status interface location print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse, bcms, rcust.

Examples
status interface a1
status interface 01a2
status interface 01b1
status interface b2
status interface b2 print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-461

Description
The status interface command displays the current value of a number of counters
maintained by the PI, which is a front end processor implementing the packet
layer and link layer of the BX.25 protocol and the integrated services digital
network (ISDN) procedure-D protocol.

Defaults
The cabinet number defaults to one (1) if it is not specified.

Parameters

location

The location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface (PI
board). A position of 1 is the first processor interface in the carrier,
while a position of 2 is the second processor interface in the carrier.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the
SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status interface", the
following message will be displayed:
Enter location: [cabinet(1)], carrier (A-B),
position(1-2); [’print’]

Error Messages
If the specified carrier is not the active PE, the following message will be
displayed:
Port invalid

If the technician-entered cabinet and carrier is invalid for a PPN, the following
message will be displayed:
Entry is bad

If the technician-entered carrier is not a valid carrier, the following message will
be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If the technician-entered carrier is not active, the following error message will be
entered:
Board invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-462

If the specified carrier/position processor interface circuit pack is not inserted,
but the specified carrier is active, the following error message will be displayed:
Processor Interface (TN765) not
started or is being started

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Base Level Occupancy (Low)
Base Level Occupancy (High)
Primary Queue Audit Error
Secondary Queue Audit Error
Translation Audit Error
Protocol Timer Audit Error
Hardware Sanity Timeout
Hardware Resource Error
Hardware Overload Error
The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

status interface a1
PROCESSOR INTERFACE STATUS
Base Level Occupancy(low):
Base Level Occupancy(high):
Primary Queue Audit Error:
Secondary Queue Audit Error:
Translation Audit Error:
Protocol Timer Audit Error:
Hardware Sanity Timeout:
Hardware Resource Error:
Hardware Overload Error:

10
25
4
10
12
0
1
12
8

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status isdn-testcall

Page 8-463

Feature Interactions
None.

status isdn-testcall
This command displays the operational status (progress) of an outgoing
ISDN-PRI test call.

Synopsis
status isdn-testcall group number/member number print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init

Examples
status isdn-testcall 80/1
status isdn-testcall 78/1 print

Description
The status isdn-testcall command displays the progress of an outgoing ISDN-PRI
test call. The tested ISDN-PRI B-channel port number, bit error rate, number of
bits transmitted, block error rate, number of blocks transmitted, start time,
duration specified, duration of test call and reason of termination are displayed
on the status form.

Defaults
None.

Parameters

group number

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group.

member number

The member number is an administered number identifying a
particular trunk within a trunk group.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status isdn-testcall

Page 8-464

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status isdn-testcall", the
following is displayed:
Enter group #/member # [’print’]

Error Messages
If the specified format of the trunk location is incorrect, the following message is
displayed:
Format invalid

If the specified trunk group or member range is invalid, the following message is
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

If a trunk group and member is not specified, the following message is
displayed:
Must specify group/member pair

\If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members
administered, the following message is displayed:
Group not assigned,
or group assigned but with no member

If the specified trunk group member is not administered, the following message
is displayed:
Group member not assigned

If a test call is currently not in progress when the command is entered, the
following message is displayed:
Test Call not in progress

If the specified trunk is not an ISDN-PRI trunk, the following message is
displayed:
Invalid non ISDN-PRI trunk specified

If software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status isdn-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-465

All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Port

This field specifies the physical address
(cabinet/carrier/slot/circuit) of the ISDN-PRI B-channel.

Bit Error Rate

The measured bit error count according to the comparison of
the sent and received bit pattern. The number is displayed in
scientific notation (one significant digit and an exponent).

Number of Bits

The number of bits generated. The number is displayed in
scientific notation (one significant digit and an exponent).

Block error Rate

The measured block error count according to the comparison
of the sent and received bit pattern. The number is displayed in
scientific notation (one significant digit and an exponent).

Number of Blocks

The number of blocks generated. The number is displayed in
scientific notation (one significant digit and an exponent).

Start Time

The time the test call started (dd/hh:mm).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status isdn-testcall

Page 8-466

Duration Specified

The duration specified in minutes for how long the test call
should run. Valid durations are 1-120 (minutes) or blank (to
indicate the default amount of 10 seconds was used to run the
test).

Duration of Test

The duration specified in minutes for how long the test call has
been running. A blank indicates that the default amount of time
was used to run the test.

Reason of Termination

The reason of termination indicates why the test call has
terminated. Valid reasons of termination are "finished,"
"canceled," "overflow," "no bits," "transmission," "internal fail,"
"data corrupt," "call dropped," "call rejected," and "in progress."
A termination reason of "finished" means the test finished in the
specified time. A termination reason of "canceled" means the
test call has been canceled with the "clear isdn-testcall"
command. A reason of "overflow" denotes that the bits
transmitted have overflowed buffer allocation. A reason of "no
bits" means that no bits have been received because the
ISDN-PRI test call circuit connection is bad. A reason of
"transmission" means there has been a data transmission
interruption, probably caused from a power hit. A termination
reason of "call dropped" indicates that the call dropped due to
abnormal termination, or it couldn’t cut-through to the other
side. A termination reason of "call rejected" means the
originating call was not set up properly. A termination reason of
"internal fail" specifies that there is an internal error on the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack. A reason of "in progress" means
the test is still running and a reason of "data corrupt" is used for
any other error condition.

For the following output example, the command status idsn-testcall 80/1 was
entered.

status isdn-testcall 80/1

Page 1 of

1

SPE A

ISDN TESTCALL STATUS

Port

Bit
Number Block Number
Error Of
Error Of
Start
Rate Bits
Rate Blocks Time

1B1401

0EE0

4EE7

0EE0

6EE2

Duration
Duration Of
Specified Test

25/12:36 120

100

Reason
Of
Termination
in progress

Feature Interactions
If the bit error rate or block error rate is greater than zero, the ISDN-PRI trunk
"may" be in a troubled state. Based on the statistical information displayed on the
terminal, it can be decided to take the ISDN trunk out of service. This is

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status journal-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-467

subjective data because the ISDN trunk may be used for data or voice. If the
trunk is used for data and the rates are high, the trunk should be taken out of
service. If the trunk is used for voice, the trunk may not have to be taken out of
service. Also, high rates may be due to some type of power hit on the line.

status journal-link
This command displays the status of a wakeup-log or a pms-log printer link.

Synopsis
status journal-link [ wakeup-log | pms-log ] print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

Examples
status journal-link wakeup-log
status journal-link pms-log
status journal-link pms-log print

Description
Either command displays whether the link is up or down. If the link is down, the
number of times the switch has tried to set up the link is shown. A journal printer
documents the automatic wake-up events, emergency access to attendant
events, and housekeeping events when the property management system is not
functional. A journal printer may also generate reports of the automatic wake-up
events and the emergency access events at a scheduled time. If system
configuration includes two printers, one is for the housekeeping events only and
the second is for automatic wake-up events and emergency access events only.
For general information on journal printer links, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "busyout journal-printer" pages.

Defaults
No defaults.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status journal-link

Page 8-468

Parameters
wakeup-log

The printer that handles the automatic wakeup and emergency access
to attendant events and scheduled reports.

pms-log

The printer which handles the pms down events.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status journal-link", the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
pms-log

wakeup-log

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Link State

Up, down, or extension not administered displays. A wakeup-log
or a pms-log link is considered administered only if an extension
is given in the System Parameters Hospitality form.

Maintenance Busy

Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed upon
the link.

The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

status journal-link wakeup-log
JOURNAL LINK STATUS
Link State: up
Maintenance Busy? no

Feature Interactions
None.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-469

status link
This command displays the status of an Processor Interface (PI) link.

Synopsis
status link link number print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, init, bcms, browse.

Examples
status link 1
status link 8
status link 4 print

Description
The status link command displays the operational status associated with a
specified processor interface link.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

link number

A link number (1-8) associated with a specific link.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status link", the following
message will be displayed:
Enter 1 character link number [’print’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-470

Error Messages
If the specified link number is invalid, the following message is displayed:
Link out of range, please press HELP

If the specified link number is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Link not administered

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITIONS

Link

A synchronous connection between the Definity system and an
adjunct or another switch. The link consists of three protocol
levels. The entire link is identified by a link number which is
specified on the "change communications-interface links" form.

Level 1

Physical connection of a port on a Processor Interface board to
hardware which serves the same purpose on the adjunct or switch
(for example, a PI board or an SCP board on Audix). There can be
several components between these two endpoints (modems, DS1
facilities, cables, and so forth).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-471

Level 2

The logical protocol that allows data communication between
these two endpoints. BX.25 specifies that this is the LAPB (Link
Access Protocol on the B-channel) protocol. Frames are sent at
level 2. Establishment of the protocol requires one end to send a
SABM (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame and the other to
respond with a UA (User Acknowledgment) frame. Both sides
send SABMs until they receive a UA at which time level 2 is up and
the Link Status field indicates "restarting". This should be a
temporary condition, because the link is unusable until level 3
comes up, and that occurs immediately.

Level 3

The logical protocol that allows multiplexing of many channels
onto one level 2 link. BX.25 specifies that this will be the X.25 data
phase protocol. Packets are sent at level 3 and are included in
level 2 frames. This protocol is established after level 2 is
established by one end sending a Restart packet, and the other
end sending a Restart Confirm packet.

Processor channel

The connection of an application running inside the SPE to a
particular channel on a particular link. Processor channels are
identified by a number associated with an entry on the "change
communication-interface processor-channel" form. There the link
number and level channel number on that link are specified as
well as the application (for example, dcs) that uses that processor
channel are specified.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-472

Output
Link Number

The Processor Interface link number (1-8).

Link Status

The state of the link, valid states are:
— in-service
— PI link is currently up and providing service.
— maintenance busy
— The PI link has been busied out by system
technician.
— disconnected
— The PI link is currently down. Check the Hardware
Error Log for more information on why the link is not
in-service.

Destination

A character string identifying the link destination type.
The valid types are: "ISDN-LNK", "ISDN-TRK", "TIE-DS1",
"PDMODULE", "TDMODULE", and " EIA LINK".

Dest Status

The status of the link destination. Valid states are:
"in-service", "in-service/idle", "in-service/active", and
"out-of-service", "manual OOS", "standby", "awaiting call",
"disconnected", "out-of-service-NE", and
"out-of-service-FE".

Port

The destination port, this port is logically connected to
the Processor Interface.

Destination Information Field

One of the following will be present depending on the
type of link destination.
— Sig Grp
— The signaling group number, valid for "ISDN-LNK".
— Trk/Mem
— The trunk group/member, valid for "ISDN-TRK" and
"TIE-DS1".
— Ext
— The data module extension, valid for "PDMODULE"
and "TDMODULE".

The following fields represent values of counters read from the Packet Interface
board. These counters are not initialized on board insertion. It is therefore
recommended that "clear link" command be issued and the counters are read
after a period of time (15 min) to get a reliable readout.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-473

Hardware Device Check
(receive)

This timeout counter is incremented when there is a 40
to 80 second period during which no link traffic is
received. This condition probably indicates that the link
is down on the far end system. The SABM (Set
Asynchronous Balance Mode) count is probably
increasing also.

Hardware Device Check
(transmit)

This timeout counter is incremented when there is a 40
to 80 second period during which no link traffic is
transmitted. This condition indicates possible PI faults.
The link is down and the SABM count is increasing. If
the link is down at both the near end and the far end,
then this counter will increment along with the Hardware
Device Check (receive) counter.

Far-End MOOS Count

The number of times that the switch tries to restart the
link and the Far-End responds with the link status
"manual-out- of-service." This condition only occurs on
ISDN-PRI Nonfacility Associated Signaling (NFAS) with
D-channel backup. When this occurs, contact the
Network and ask them to release the link.

Far-End FRMR

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link went down because the
switch received an FRMR frame from the Far-End.

Far-End DISC

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link went down because the
switch received a DISConnect frame from the Far-End.

Timeout

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link went down because of a
Layer 2 timer expiration on the PI circuit pack.

Software Initiated Link Down

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the switch software restarted the
link. Look at other PI-LINK errors to determine the
cause.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-474

Level 2 I-frames
retransmitted

This is a count of the number of frames that have been
retransmitted in LAPD (Link Access Procedure D) or
X.25 layer 2. In general, this is a measure of link quality.
This count, which could indicate a very noisy link or
synchronization problem, will increment normally if a
Hot Start PEI is done locally.

Level 2 Reset (SABM)

This is the number of X.25 SABMs or LAPD SABMs that
have been transmitted. Since SABMs are used to
establish links, every time this count is incremented a
link establishment attempt has failed. If the link is
currently in-service and the count is non-zero after
having been previously cleared by the "clear link
link-no" command, then this condition indicates that the
link has gone down in that interval. Check the Hardware
Error Log for additional information.

Invalid Frame Count

This is the number of invalid frames that have been
received. This count is a measure of the link quality and
could indicate a very noisy link or a synchronization
problem. This might increment normally if a Hot Start
PEI is done locally. If an administration error exists, this
counter could be incrementing along with the Level 2
Reset counter. This counter may be incremented by
message retransmissions.

Far-End SABM(E)/DM

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link went down because the
switch received a SABM from the Far-End.

Protocol Error Detected

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link went down because the PI
circuit pack detected a Layer 2 protocol error in its
communications with the Far-End of the link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-475

Local Busy Out

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the link when down because the
switch software made the link local busy. The link is
made "maintenance busy" as part of the D-channel
Back Up protocol or when the link is "busied out" via the
System Access Terminal (SAT).

Firmware Initiated Link Down

This value is informational only and no action is
necessary. It is one of eight counters that tell the history
from the last "clear link" command of why the link went
down. In this case, the PI firmware initiated the link
down. Please consult SCI-BD or PROTOCOL errors to
determine the cause.

LOCAL/REMOTE
PROCESSOR CHANNELS

Local/remote processor channel pairs. Each pair
consists of a processor channel on the local machine
and a processor channel on the remote machine that
are connected in the communication session.
NOTE:
For "ISDN-LNK" links, this is no correlation
between the local and remote processor
channels. Therefore, only the local processor
channel is shown (the remote processor channel
is blank).

The following are examples of the fields contained on the output form. The
command entered, for each example, was "status link 1." Each example shown is
for a different type of link connection.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Page 8-476

status link 1

PI LINK STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: in-service

Destination: ISDN-LNK
Dest Status: standby

Port: 1B1624
Sig Grp: 8

ERROR COUNTERS
Hardware Device Check (receive):
Hardware Device Check (transmit):
Far-End MOOS Count:
Far-End FRMR:
Far-End DISC:
Timeout:
Software Initiated Link Down:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Level 2 I-frames retransmitted:
Level 2 Reset (SABM):
Invalid Frame Count:
Far-End SABM(E)/DM:
Protocol Error Detected:
Local Busy Out:
Firmware Initiated Link Down:

0
3
0
0
0
0
0

LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS
1/

status link 1
PI LINK STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: in-service

Destination: ISDN-TRK
Port: 1B1623
Dest Status: in-service/active Trk/Mem: 20/01

ERROR COUNTERS
Hardware Device Check (receive):
Hardware Device Check (transmit):
Far-End MOOS Count:
Far-End FRMR:
Far-End DISC:
Timeout:
Software Initiated Link Down:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Level 2 I-frames retransmitted:
Level 2 Reset (SABM):
Invalid Frame Count:
Far-End SABM(E)/DM:
Protocol Error Detected:
Local Busy Out:
Firmware Initiated Link Down:

LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS
1/1

0
3
0
0
0
0
0

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status link

Page 8-477

status link 1
PI LINK STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: in-service

Destination: TIE-DS1
Port: 1B0123
Dest Status: in-service/active Trk/Mem: 02/04

ERROR COUNTERS
Hardware Device Check (receive):
Hardware Device Check (transmit):
Far-End MOOS Count:
Far-End FRMR:
Far-End DISC:
Timeout:
oftware Initiated Link Down:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Level 2 I-frames retransmitted:
Level 2 Reset (SABM):
Invalid Frame Count:
Far-End SABM(E)/DM:
Protocol Error Detected:
Local Busy Out:
Firmware Initiated Link Down:

0
3
0
0
0
0
0

LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS
1/

status link 1
PI LINK STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: in-service

Destination: PDMODULE
Dest Status: in-service/active

Port: 1C0303
Ext: 4002

ERROR COUNTERS
Hardware Device Check (receive):
Hardware Device Check (transmit):
Far-End MOOS Count:
Far-End FRMR:
Far-End DISC:
Timeout:
Software Initiated Link Down:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Level 2 I-frames retransmitted:
Level 2 Reset (SABM):
Invalid Frame Count:
Far-End SABM(E)/DM:
Protocol Error Detected:
Local Busy Out:
Firmware Initiated Link Down:

LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS
1/

0
3
0
0
0
0
0

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status logins

Page 8-478

status link 1
PI LINK STATUS
Link Number: 1
Link Status: in-service

Destination: TDMODULE
Dest Status: in-service/active

Port: 1C0303
Ext: 4002

ERROR COUNTERS
Hardware Device Check (receive):
Hardware Device Check (transmit):
Far-End MOOS Count:
Far-End FRMR:
Far-End DISC:
Timeout:
oftware Initiated Link Down:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Level 2 I-frames retransmitted:
Level 2 Reset (SABM):
Invalid Frame Count:
Far-End SABM(E)/DM:
Protocol Error Detected:
Local Busy Out:
Firmware Initiated Link Down:

0
3
0
0
0
0
0

LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS
1/

Feature Interactions
None.

status logins
This command will list the status all of the users that are currently logged into the
system.

Synopsis
status logins print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, rcust, bcms, browse, cust.

Examples
status logins
status logins print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status logins

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-479

Description
This command will display information about all of the users that are currently
logged into the system. This information will contain their login names, location of
physical access, and their currently executing command.
The screen does not automatically update, and is a reflection of the system at the
time the request was made. Users may have logged off, or on, or the command
may have finished executing while the information is being displayed. These
updates will not be reflected until the next execution of the command.

Defaults
None.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "status logins" the following message
will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The login information will be displayed with one line of data displayed for each
user.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status logins

Page 8-480

Login Id

This field shows the login id of the user that is currently logged into the
system. The value of "LOGIN" means that the terminal is connected to that
port and the login prompt is displayed, but no user is currently logged on. An
asterisk in the login id field identifies your login.

Type

This identifies the type of connection that is associated with the login
session. Following are the values for this field:

Login
Type

Description

NET

This represents a dialed-in connection via a Netcon data channel.

EPN

This represents a connection to the SAT port of an EPN maintenance
board. This is accomplished via a hard-wired connection to that port.

MGR1

This signals a physical connection to the local SAT port on the active
processor carrier. This port is accessed via a hard-wired connection.

INADS

This represents a connection to the remote SAT port on the active
processor carrier. This port is normally accessed via a dial-in connection.

SYS-PTR

This identifies that the system printer is active in the system. The login will
be the id of the user who requested the print job, and the active command
will be the command used for the print.

Location

This identifies the physical location where the user or printer is
connected into the switch.
For the types of MGR1 and INADS, this value will be the processor
board location. For the EPN type, this will be the EPN maintenance
board location. For the NET type this will be the physical location of the
terminal port where the customer’s SAT is connected. For a BRI NET
connection the BRI endpoint is the last 3 digits, and for the SYS-PTR
type this is the physical location of the printer port.

Aux

This field give additional location information.
For the types of MGR1 and INADS, this field will contain the port
network number of the processor board (that is, 1). For the EPN type,
this field will contain the port network number of the EPN maintenance
board. For the NET and SYS-PTR types, this field will contain the
Netcon data channel number (1-4).

Active
Command

This field displays the currently executing command, entered by the
user logged into the system at the specified location. If the user has no
command currently executing, then the field is empty.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status mst

Page 8-481

The following is a sample output of a "status logins" command.

status logins
USER LOGIN INFORMATION
Login
*system technician
cust
inads
LOGIN
system technician

Type
Location
Aux
MGR1
01A
1
NET
01c1101001 1
INADS
01A
1
EPN
02A
3
SYS-PTR 01c1102
2

Active Command
stat logins
add station next

list stations

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The command will take a snapshot of the commands that the users on the system
are currently executing. Because of timing, the command could be terminated by
the time this command finishes displaying the list (i.e., the active command may
not be accurate).

status mst
This command allows the user to display the trigger and buffer status of the mst.

Synopsis
status mst

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
status mst

Description
The status mst command will present the user with the form that contains the
current status for the mst triggers and buffers.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status mst

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-482

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If you press HELP after entering "status mst", the following message displays:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

FORM Output
After entering the command "status mst", the user will be presented with the
following form. The current settings will be placed in the fields.

MST STATUS
Trace Status:
Start Trigger Status:
Stop Trigger Status:
Pending Stop Count:
Enable Trace Time:
Disable Trace Time :
Percent of Current Wrap:
Wraparound Count:
Oldest Message Number:
Newest Message Number:
Completed Snapshots:

enabled
triggered
not triggered
5
1/21/90 10:30
3/31/90 10:30
100
2
3345
3923
0

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-483

trace status

Can be "enabled", "disabled by command", "disabled by
timer", "disabled by buffer full", "disabled by stop trigger or
count" or "disabled by restart".

trigger status

Can be "none", "not triggered", "triggered".

Pending stop count

This field will have a value in it whenever it is actually being
used. The value will indicate the number of messages to
be collected before stopping the trace.

Enable trace time

The time the trace was enabled.

Disable trace time

The time the trace was disabled or will be disabled by the
run time limit.

Percent of current wrap

The percentage of the buffer that has been written since
the last wraparound.

Wraparound count

The number of times that the buffer has wrapped around.
This will initially be 0.

Oldest message number

The sequence number of the oldest message in the trace.

Newest message number

The sequence number of the newest message in the trace.

Completed snapshots

The number of complete snapshots that have been
collected.

Feature Interactions
None.

status packet-control
This command displays the status of the specified packet-control.

Synopsis
status packet-control location

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-484

Examples
status packet-control 1A
status packet-control 1B

Description
The status packet-control command will display the service state of the specified
packet-control, and link statistics for links that are terminated on this
packet-control. The service state can be either in-service or out-of-service. The
link statistics describe the connectivity picture for links terminated by this
packet-control. The total number of links is the number of links that have been
administered or translated. The number of established links is the number of links
that have transitioned from a translated (tie-assigned) state to a state of normal
operation (Multi-Frame Established Normal state). Proper handshaking is
required for links to be in the established state.

Defaults
For simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1, carrier A.
For duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1, but there is no default
for the carrier.

Parameters

location

The location only applies to duplicated configurations. If the
configuration is a simplex, the location parameter is not used and thus
is not valid. For duplicated configurations, a "location" represents the
carrier that the packet-control resides on in the system. Valid locations
are either 1A or 1B.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status packet-control", the
following message is displayed:
Enter Packet Control location:
[cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B)

Error Messages
If this command is entered for a packet-control that resides on the stand-by
control complex of a High or Critical Reliability System, the following message is
displayed:
Command only applies to the active Packet Control

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-485

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Service State:

This field describes the service state of the packet-control. Valid
service states are "in-service" and "out-of-service". In-service
means that the packet-control is providing service. Out-of-service
means that the packet-control is not providing service. Typical
reasons for the out-of-service state are:
■

The packet-control is busied out.

■

The packet-control has failed.

Total No. of links:

The total number of links that require establishment for normal
operation. Point-to-point signaling links are an example of links
that require establishment. There is usually one point-to-point
signaling link per endpoint with packet-bus connectivity (for
example, ISDN-BRI endpoints).

No. of links that are
established:

The number of links that are established out of the total number of
links. Ideally, all point-to-point signaling links are in the
established state and thus, the number of established links will be
equal to the total number of links.

For the following output example, the command status packet-control 1A was
entered.

status packet-control 1A
PACKET CONTROL STATUS
Service State: in-service
Total No. of links: 10
No. of links that are established: 10

Command successfully completed

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status periodic-scheduled

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-486

STATUS INTERPRETATION SECTION
The "Total No. of Links" minus the "No. of links that are established" equals the
number of links which are down. Links that are down do not necessarily imply
that there is a Packet Control circuit pack failure. A link goes down if there is a
failure on any of the components through which it passes. These components
include the Packet Control circuit pack, the Packet Bus, the Expansion Interface
circuit pack, the BRI circuit pack, and the endpoint itself. By knowing which
components can cause a link terminating on the Packet Control circuit pack to go
down, and by having an idea of how many links go through each component, it is
possible to determine which components are the most likely to have failed.
For example, when all of the links are down (no links are established) it is likely
that there is a failure with a component through which all of the links pass. All
links always pass through the Packet Control circuit pack and the PPN Packet
Bus. Thus, these two components are likely to have failed. If all of the packet
endpoints are in one EPN, then that EPN’s Packet Bus is also a likely to have
failed. It is unlikely that the failure is with an individual BRI circuit pack, since that
only affects links passing through that one circuit pack (unless there is only one
BRI circuit pack in the system, in which case that circuit pack may have failed).
Conversely, if only a few links are down, then it is not likely that the fault is with the
Packet Control circuit pack or the PPN Packet Bus, since a fault on either of these
would normally affect all links equally. In this case, the fault is more likely to be on
an individual BRI circuit pack or endpoint.

! CAUTION:
The purpose of the information described above is to provide general
information about the causes of link failures. This information should be
used in conjunction with the procedures found throughout this manual, and
not as a replacement for those procedures.

Feature Interactions
In a high or critical reliability system, an attempt to get the status of the
packet-control that resides in the standby processor complex is not allowed.

status periodic-scheduled
This command displays the status of periodic and scheduled maintenance
testing performed by the system.

Synopsis
status periodic-scheduled print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status periodic-scheduled

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-487

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
status periodic-scheduled
status periodic-scheduled print

Description
The status periodic-scheduled command displays summary information on
active scheduled and periodic testing. Periodic tests are run every hour, while
scheduled tests are run every 24 hours. Scheduled tests can have their starting
and stopping times administered. For periodic maintenance, the completion
percentage for all resources will be displayed for the current cycle of testing as
well as the previous cycle of testing. For scheduled maintenance, the completion
percentage of all resources will be displayed for the last 24 hour testing cycle.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status period-scheduled",
the following message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit.

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status periodic-scheduled

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-488

Output

Pre - SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE

During scheduled maintenance, a delay of about 1 to 15
minutes can be observed prior to the testing of System Critical
Resources. During this period maintenance is switching those
duplicated resources administered on the system-parameters
maintenance screen.
Pre-scheduled maintenance also includes the time the standby
SPE is being tested in a system with the duplication option.

System Critical
Percentage Complete:

The ratio of the number of System Critical MOs tested to the
number of System Critical MOs left to test. This number is
displayed for the current testing period as well as the previous
testing period. System critical resources are considered
imperative to test, and are tested first (for example, Processor).

Shared Percentage
Complete:

The ratio of the number of Shared MOs tested to the number of
Shared MOs left to test. This number is displayed for the
current testing period as well as the previous testing period.
Shared resources are resources that are used by more than
one user, and are tested after system critical resources (for
example, Trunks).

Single User
Percentage Complete:

The ratio of the number of Single User MOs tested to the
number of Single User MOs left to test. This number is
displayed for the current testing period as well as the previous
testing period. Single User resources are resources that are
used by a single user only, and are tested after shared
resources (for example, Voice Stations).

Start Time of Current
or Previous Cycle:

For both periodic and scheduled maintenance if any of the
three levels of MOs are active, then the time the System Critical
MOs started for this current cycle is shown. If, however, none
of the MO levels are currently being tested, then the start time
for previous completed cycle is shown.

For the following output example, the command "status periodic-scheduled" was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pms-link

status periodic-scheduled

Page 8-489

SPE B

MO
Type

PERIODIC
MAINTENANCE

Current Current Previous Cycle Rate of
Cycle %
Cycle
Duration
Completed
Complete Active? (hr:min:sec)
Cycles
System Critical
100%
n
00:00:45
1.0/hr
Shared Resource
100%
n
00:00:43
1.0/hr
Single User
0%
n
00:00:01
1.0/hr
Total
00:01:29

Start Time of Current or Previous Cycle: 11/19/13:34:56

Pre - SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE

System Critical
Shared Resource
Single User
Total

16%
100%
100%

n

00:00:01

y
n
n

00:00:44
00:03:16
00:00:00
00:04:00

1.0/day
1.0/day
1.0/day

Start Time of Current or Previous Cycle: 11/19/13:42:08

Feature Interactions
None.

status pms-link
This command displays the status of the property management system interface
link.

Synopsis
status pms-link print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse.

Examples
status pms-link
status pms-link print

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pms-link

Page 8-490

Description
The status pms-link command displays the status of the property management
system interface link. If the link is up, whether or not a data base swap is taking
place between the switch and PMS, will be shown. If the link is down, the number
of times the switch has tried to set up the link will be shown.
A property management system (PMS) is a stand alone computer system which
can be integrated with the switch to enhance the service capability for a
hotel/motel.
For general information on PMS links, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "busyout pms-link" manual pages.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status pms-link", the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-491

Output

Physical Link State

Up, down, or extension not administered will be displayed. The
PMS link is considered administered only if an extension is given in
the System Hospitality form.

Protocol State

"up", "down", or blank if not administered.

Number of Retries

Number of times the switch has tried to set up the link. Only
displayed when the link is down. The Largest number that can be
displayed is 999.

Maintenance Busy

"yes", or "no" (that is, system technician has or has not busied out
the link). Blank if PMS link not administered.

The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

status pms-link
PMS LINK STATUS
Physical Link State:
Protocol State:
Number of Retries:
Maintenance Busy?

down
down
3
no

Feature Interactions
None.

status pri-endpoint
This command displays the status of a PRI endpoint.

Synopsis
status pri-endpoint extension print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
inads, init, nms, browse.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-492

Examples
status pri-endpoint 25012
status pri-endpoint 77868
status pri-endpoint 66078 print

Description
The status pri-endpoint command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities with which a PRI endpoint is
communicating. Status information for each of the B-channels making up the PRI
endpoint are displayed in addition to some overall PRI endpoint information.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

extension

The extension number of the PRI endpoint to be displayed. The number
of digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

print

This causes the report to be printed if a printer is connected to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "status pri-endpoint", the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned extension, [’print’]

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not a PRI endpoint, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than pri-endpoint

If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-493

Board not inserted

If the EPN on which the PRI endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Extension

The extension of the PRI endpoint.

Width

Administered number of B-channels associated with the
specified PRI endpoint.

Signaling Group ID

The ID number of the signaling group which handles the
signaling for the ports in the specified PRI endpoint.

Originating Auto Restoration

Administered option for the auto restore feature which
restores calls originated from this PRI endpoint in the
case of network failure. Displayed values for this field are
"y" for the restoration option enabled and "n" for the
restoration option disabled.

B-Channels Active

The number of B-channels active on a call.

B-Channels Idle

The number of B-channels that are in the in-service/idle
state.

Port

Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for each of the
B-channels that makes up the PRI endpoint.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status pri-endpoint

Page 8-494

Service State

This field shows whether each of the B-channels is
in-service or out-of-service. One of the following states is
displayed: in-service/active, in-service/idle,
out-of-service-NE, out-of-service-FE, maint-NE/active,
maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, and maint-FE/idle. NE
(Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to which "end" of the
B-channel has placed the facility in the state that it is in.
NE refers to the switch and FE refers to the PRI terminal
adapter (or any device that terminates the D-channel
signaling on the facility).

Test In Progress

Whether there is any maintenance testing being
performed on the port.

Connected Port

This field lists the connected port location
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for each of the B-channels
active on a call.

For the following output example, the command "status pri-endpoint 22501" was
entered. Assume that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet
1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 6. The ports 1 to 3 of the specified PRI endpoint
are connected on an active call to ports 13 to 15 of board in location 1B19
(cabinet 1, carrier B, slot 19). Ports 4 and 5 of the specified PRI endpoint are idle.
Port 6 of the specified PRI endpoint is out of service and background
maintenance testing is being performed on the port.
Note that a PRI endpoint can initiate and receive a call on any one or more of the
B-channels making up the PRI endpoint.

status pri-endpoint 22501

page 1 of 1

PRI-ENDPOINT STATUS
Extension: 22501
Signaling Group ID: 3
Originating Auto Restoration? n

Port
01B2001
01B2002
01B2003
01B2004
01B2005
01B2006

Service State
in-service/active
in-service/active
in-service/active
in-service/idle
in-service/idle
out-of-service-NE

Width: 6
B-Channels Active: 3
B-Channels Idle: 2

Test In Progress
n
n
n
n
n
y

Connected Port
01B1913
01B1914
01B1915

Command Successfully Completed

Note that the line listing of each B-channel’s status may continue on to the next
page. The user is prompted to hit  key to continue the display.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status processor-channel

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-495

Feature Interactions
None.

status processor-channel
status processor-channel - This command displays the status of a processor
channel.

Synopsis
status processor-channel channel number print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse, bcms, rcust.

Examples
status processor-channel 1
status processor-channel 10
status processor-channel 64
status processor-channel 64 print

Description
The status processor-channel command displays the status of the technician
specified processor channel and the values of its various counters. A processor
channel is one 64 logical channels associated with an SCI link. Each processor
channel terminates in the switch processing element with a session.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

channel number

The processor channel number (1-64).

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status processor-channel

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-496

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status processor-channel",
the following message will be displayed:
Enter a processor-channel number 1-64 [’print’]

Error Messages
If the technician-entered channel number is invalid, the following message will be
displayed:
Channel invalid

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status processor-channel

Page 8-497

Output

Channel Number

The processor channel number 1-64.

Channel Status

The state that the channel is in: 1-10 (Channel status 9 and
10 pertain to ISDN-PRI channels). The following describes
the various channel states:
1. Channel is not administered.
2. Channel is administered but not used.
3. Channel is in a state entering "wait session accept"
(WSA).
4. Channel is in a state waiting for a "session accept"
message from the far end.
5. Channel is waiting for action.
6. Channel is in data transfer state (channel is up and
running).
7. Channel is in resynchronization state.
8. Channel is waiting for acknowledge of disconnect
message.
9. ISDN-PRI Channel is currently down.
10. ISDN-PRI Channel is in the data transfer state (that is,
channel is up and running).

Reset Count

The number of times that the reset has been issued for this
channel.

Message Buffer Number

The number of message buffers that are currently used for
the communication on this channel.

Link Number

The physical SCI link (i.e. 1-8) associated with the channel.

Retransmission Count

The number of times that message retransmission has
occurred.

The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-498

status processor-channels 1

PROCESSOR CHANNEL STATUS
Channel Number:
Channel Status:
Reset Count:
Message Buffer Number:
Link Number:
Retransmission Count:

1
6: In data transfer state
3
1
4
5

Feature Interactions
None.

status signaling-group
status signaling-group - This command displays the operational status of the
specified ISDN-PRI signaling group.

Synopsis
status signaling-group group identifier print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse.

Examples
status signaling-group 1
status signaling-group 2 print

Description
The status signaling-group command displays the state, type, port location, and
state of the Primary and Secondary D-channels within the group.
A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated
single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status signaling-group

Page 8-499

Defaults
None.

Parameters

group identifier

The signaling group identifier is an administered number associated
with each signaling group (1-8).

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status signaling-group", the
following is displayed:
Enter group identifier (1-8) [’print’]

Error Messages
If the specified group identifier is non numeric or out of range, the following
message is displayed:
Signaling group invalid

If the specified group identifier is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
No signaling group assigned

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status signaling-group

Page 8-500

Output

Group ID:

The numerical ID of the signaling group. Valid identifiers are 1-8.

Type:

The signaling group can be either "facility associated signaling" or
"non-facility associated signaling." In the "facility associated signaling"
type all members are on a single DS-1 facility. Facility associated
signaling groups support only the simplex D-channel configuration. In
the "non-facility associated signaling" type members can be carried by
multiple DS-1 facilities. The DS-1 facility is identified across the
ISDN-PRI using an explicit facility identifier. In a simplex configuration
one D-channel is used to signal for B-channel members, while in a
duplex configuration two D-channels are used to signal for B-channel
members (one channel is active and the other is used as a backup to
the active channel).

Group State:

The signaling group state can be either "in-service" or "out-of-service."
The group is "in-service" when one of the D-channels signaling for the
group is in service. The group is "out-of-service" when neither
D-channel in the group is in service. NOTE: If there is no D-channel
backup and the primary D-channel is out-of-service, then the signaling
group is in an "out-of-service" state.

Link:

The link transporting the D-channel.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-501

Port:

The physical address of the port transporting either the primary or
secondary D-channel.

Level 3 State:

The state of the primary or secondary D-channels. The state can be
"in-service," "standby," "wait," "maintenance busy,"
"manual-out-of-service," "out-of-service," or "no-link."
in-service:A D-channel is "in-service" when it is in the
multiple-frame-established state at layer 2 carrying normal call-control
signaling at layer 3.
standby:A D-channel is "standby" when it is in the
multiple-frame-established state at layer 2, and not carrying any layer 3
call-control messages on logical link 0,0.
wait:A D-channel is in a "wait" state when an attempt has been made by
one side of the interface to establish layer 3 peer communications as
part of the process of going to the "in-service" state. This state is
transitional in nature. As ISDN SERVICE message is sent over the
interface, When the far end of the interface responds with a SERVICE
ACKnowledge message the D-channel is placed in the "in-service"
state.
maintenance-busy:A D-channel is "maintenance-busy" when it is not in
the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2. This state is entered
automatically when an active D-channel is declared failed. A D-channel
which has been placed in the "maintenance-busy" state may be place in
the "out-of-service" state without system technician intervention.
manual-out-of-service:A D-channel is "manual-out-of-service" when
system technician intervention has caused it to be placed in the
TEI-assigned state at layer 2. System Technician intervention is
required to retrieve a D-channel from this state.
out-of-service:A D-channel is "out-of-service" when it is in the
TEI-assigned state at layer 2, but is periodically requested by layer 3 to
attempt to establish the link.
no-link:No link is administered for the D-channel.

For the following output example, the command status signaling-group 1 was
entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status sp-link

status signaling-group 1

Page 8-502

Page 1 of

1

SPE A

STATUS SIGNALING-GROUP
Group ID: 1
Type: facility associated signaling
Group State: in-service

Primary D-Channel
Link: 1

Port: 01C1924

Level 3 State: in-service

Secondary D-Channel
Link:

Port:

Level 3 State:

Feature Interactions
None.

status sp-link
This command displays the operational attributes of the system printer link.

Synopsis
status sp-link print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician, cust,
rcust, bcms, inads, init, browse.

Examples
status sp-link
status sp-link print

Description
The status sp-link command displays a page of output summarizing the
operational status of the system printer link. The link state, number of retries, and
whether the link is maintenance busy is displayed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status sp-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-503

Defaults
None.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status sp-link", the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-504

Output

Link State:

This field displays the operational mode of the link. A state of "up,"
"down," or "extension not administered" is displayed. A state of "up"
means that the link is administered and a call is setup between the
switch and the system printer. A state of "down" means that the link
is administered, but a call is not setup between the switch and the
system printer. A state of "extension not administered" means that
the link is not administered (no system printer extension has been
administered).

Number of Retries:

This field is displayed only if the "Link State:" is "down." The field
displays the number of times the switch has tried to set up the link
since a request to set up the link has been received. The largest
number that can be displayed is "999". If more than "999" retries
have occurred, "999" is still displayed.

Maintenance Busy?

This field displays whether any maintenance testing is being
performed on the system printer link. Values of "yes" and "no" are
displayed if the system printer link is administered (the system
printer extension is administered). Blanks are displayed if the
system printer link is not administered.

For the following output example, the command status sp-link was entered.

status sp-link

SPE A

SYSTEM PRINTER LINK STATUS
Link State: up
Number of Retries:
Maintenance Busy? no

Feature Interactions
None.

status station
status station - This command displays the status of a station.

Synopsis
status station extension print

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-505

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse.

Examples
status station 10020
status station 83277
status station 83277 print

Description
The status station command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the station is
communicating.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

extension

The extension of the station to be displayed. The number of digits in an
extension is determined by a dial-plan.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status station", the following
message will be displayed:
Enter assigned extension, [’print’]

Error Messages
If the extension format is incorrect, the following message will be displayed:
Extension invalid

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the extension is not a station or an attendant
console, the following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-506

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output

Type

The administered station type.

Extension

The extension of the station or attendant to be displayed.

Port

The port location of the station (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).

Call Park

Whether the station has a call parked ("yes" or "no").

Ring Cut Off Activated

Whether ring cut off is activated ("yes" or "no").

CF Destination Ext

The call forwarding destination extension, if any.

Message Waiting

Whether there is a message waiting for the station. "AP-SPE",
"AUDIX", "PMS" or blank if no messages are waiting.

Connected Ports

Port locations of the facilities to which the station is
connected (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).

Agent Logged In

Displays (underneath it) the hunt groups (up to 3) that the
agent is logged into.

On ACD Call?

Whether the agent is on an ACD call currently ("yes" or "no").

Work Mode

Work mode of each hunt group that an agent is logged into.

Service State

In service/on-hook, in service/off-hook, out of service, or
disconnected.

Maintenance Busy State

Whether maintenance is testing the object ("yes" or "no").

SAC Activated

Whether send all calls is activated ("yes" or "no").

User Cntrl Restr

One or two of the following: "none", "total", "stat-stat",
"outward" or "terminate".

Group Cntrl Restr

One or two of the following: "none", "total", "stat-stat",
"outward" or "terminate".

AWU Call at

What time an automatic wakeup call is scheduled.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status synchronization

Page 8-507

User DND

Status of the do not disturb feature.

Group DND

Status of the group do not disturb feature.

Room Status

Whether a room is occupied or not ("non-guest room",
"vacant" or "occupied").

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status
station 1002".
status station 1002

GENERAL STATUS
Type:
Extension:
Port:
Call Parked?
Ring Cut Off Act?
CF Destination Ext:
Message Waiting:
Connected Ports:

7405D
1002
01C0702
no
no

ACD STATUS
Agent Logged In

Service State:
Maintenance Busy?
SAC Activated?
User Cntrl Restr:
Group Cntrl Restr:

in-service/on-hook
no
no
none
none

HOSPITALITY STATUS
Work Mode

AWU Call At:
User DND: not activated
Group DND: not activated
Room Status: non-guest room

On ACD Call? no

Feature Interactions
None.

status synchronization
This command displays the current status of synchronization.

Synopsis
status synchronization print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, browse.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status synchronization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-508

Examples
status synchronization
status synchronization print

Description
The status synchronization command displays the location of the DS1 or
tone-clock circuit pack that is used for an on-line synchronization reference.
The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication
between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The
subsystem is made up of system components involved in synchronization: TDM
bus clock, DS1 trunk board, maintenance and administration software resident in
the SPE.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status synchronization", the
following message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-509

Output

Stratum Level

This is the synchronization stratum level, either a "3"
or "4."

Maintenance Name:

Either "TONE-BD," "DS1-BD," or "STRAT-3."

Physical Location

The board location of the selected DS1 or tone-clock
circuit pack. This includes the cabinet-carrier-slot for
a DS1 or the cabinet-carrier for a tone-clock.

Switching Capability

Whether the on-line reference for synchronization can
be switched. "Enabled" and "Disabled" are used to
describe the current capacity for reference switching.

Excessive Reference Switching

This field gives a high level description of how many
times the synchronization reference has been
switched. If excessive reference switching is taking
place (sync error 1793 is at threshold) this field
displays "Yes," otherwise "No" is displayed.

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status
synchronization".

status synchronization

SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS
Stratum Level:4
Maintenance Name: TONE-BD
Switching Capability: Enabled
Excessive Reference Switching: No

Physical Location: 01A

Feature Interactions
None.

status system
This command displays the status, mode, and operational attributes of the
SPE(s), TDM and Packet busses, tone-clock circuit pack(s), expansion interface
links (exp-links), and emergency transfer switch of a single cabinets or all
cabinets in the system.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-510

Synopsis
status system cabinet

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: bcms, browse, system
technician, cust, inads, init, rcust.

Examples
status system 1st-cabinet
status system 2nd-cabinet
status system 3rd-cabinet
status system all-cabinets

Description
status system - This command displays the status, mode, and operational
attributes of the SPE(s), TDM and Packet busses, tone-clock circuit pack(s),
expansion interface links (exp-links), and emergency transfer switch of a single
cabinets or all cabinets in the system.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
cabinet

The cabinet specifies for which cabinet to display status. "1st-cabinet"
always refers to the PPN, "2nd-cabinet" refers to the 1st EPN, and
"3rd-cabinet" refers to the 2nd EPN. The status for one cabinet is
displayed on one page of output. If "all-cabinets" are specified, then
the user gets a 3 page output, one for each cabinet in the system. The
status displayed for a cabinet is always related to that cabinet except
in the case of status for EPNs and the SPE attributes. SPE attributes
always refer to PPN status regardless of which cabinet is being
displayed.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status system", the following
message will be displayed:
Please enter one of the following object command words:
1st-cabinet
2nd-cabinet

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-511

3rd-cabinet
all-cabinets

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status system cabinet",
where "cabinet" is one of the object described above, the following message will
be displayed:
[’print’]

Error Messages
None

Output

! CAUTION:
The purpose of this command is to provide general information about the
cabinet status. This information may not display correctly when the cabinet
is in a transient period. In this case, wait for 1 minute and enter the
command again.

SPE

The identifier of the Switch Process Element (SPE). Valid identifiers are 1A or
1B.

MODE

The modes of an SPE are different for simplex systems versus those for
systems with the duplication option.
1. SIMPLEX SPE MODES
■

active The 1ASPE in a simplex system is always the active SPE.

■

 The 1BSPE in a simplex system always displays 
indicating there is no 1B SPE.

2. DUPLEX SPE MODES
The modes for the active and standby SPE in a system with the duplication
option are different.
3. DUPLEX ACTIVE SPE MODES
■

active This SPE is performing its designed functions for the system
as the active SPE.

■

active/override-on This SPE is performing its designed functions
for the system as the active SPE, however, this SPE is active
because it was forced active via a reset system interchange
health-override command.

■

selected This SPE is the "active" SPE and is performing its
designed functions for the system, however, the SPE select
switches will not allow this SPE to become the standby SPE.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-512

4. DUPLEX STANDBY SPE MODES
The modes of the standby SPE can be classified into one of the following
four areas: Standby Mode, Busyout Modes, Maintenance Modes and
Down Modes.
5. STANDBY MODE
■

standby This SPE is held reset, its memory is being shadowed from
the active SPE, and is ready to take over the functions being
performed by the active SPE.

6. BUSYOUT MODES
Busyout modes occur when the standby SPE has been busied out via the
busyout spe-standby command. The active SPE could be either active
or selected when the standby SPE is in one of the Busyout modes.
■

busyout/idle This standby SPE has been busied out and no
maintenance activity is currently taking place. The active SPE could
be either active or selected.

■

busyout/entering This standby SPE has been busied out and is
currently in the process restarting the switch software on this SPE.
As soon as the switch software on this SPE finishes its initialization,
the standby SPE will be ready to perform SAT requested
maintenance functions on the standby SPE and the mode will
change.

■

busyout/testing This standby SPE has been busied out, however
the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently
in the process of executing a SAT demanded test command.

■

busyout/not-refreshed This standby SPE has been busied out,
however the busyout spe-standby command was executed at a
time when the standby memory was not refreshed. The standby
SPE will not be able to perform any maintenance or SAT requested
activities until a successful refresh spe-standby command is
executed.

■

busyout/list-config This standby SPE has been busied out,
however the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is
currently in the process of executing a SAT demanded list
configuration command.

■

busyout/status This standby SPE has been busied out, however
the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently
in the process of executing a SAT demanded status card-mem
command.

7. MAINTENANCE MODES
Maintenance modes occur when the standby SPE is taken out of standby
mode to perform a maintenance or SAT requested function. Unlike the
busyout and down modes, being in maintenance mode implies this SPE
can be returned to standby mode when the requested activity is

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-513

completed assuming there are no faults in the standby SPE complex. The
active SPE could be either active or selected when the standby SPE is in
one of the Maintenance modes.
■

maint/init The standby SPE is in maintenance mode because the
system has restarted within the last 10 minutes. During this 10
minute interval, the standby SPE is not placed into standby mode
just in case a core dump is being written to the tape or memory
card on the standby SPE.

■

maint/idle This standby SPE is in maintenance mode, however no
maintenance activity is currently taking place. The active SPE could
be either active or selected.

■

maint/entering This standby SPE is currently in the process of
restarting the switch software on this SPE. As soon as the switch
software on this SPE finishes its initialization, the standby SPE will
be ready to perform SAT requested maintenance function and the
mode will change.

■

maint/testing This standby SPE is in maintenance mode executing
a SAT demanded test command.

■

maint/not-refreshed This standby SPE is in maintenance mode
executing a destructive background maintenance test that has
temporarily left the standby memory not refreshed. Once the
current test has completed a refresh of the standby SPE will be
performed by background maintenance and the mode will change.

■

maint/not-tested This standby SPE is in maintenance mode
because previously the active SPE had been selected with the SPE
select switches and since the active was unselected the standby
has not been tested to ensure the standby can enter standby
mode. Once the standby is tested successfully, the standby will go
back to standby mode.

■

maint/list-config This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of executing a SAT demanded list
configuration command.

■

maint/save~trans This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of executing a SAT demanded save
translation command.

■

maint/save~announce This standby SPE is in maintenance mode
and is currently in the process of executing a SAT demanded save
announcement command.

■

maint/status This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of executing a SAT demanded status
card-mem command.

■

maint/patching This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of applying a software patch to the standby
SPE memory.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-514

■

maint/periodic This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of performing periodic background
maintenance. Periodic background maintenance is performed on
the standby SPE every two hours if some component of the standby
SPE is currently alarmed.

■

maint/scheduled This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of performing daily scheduled background
maintenance.

■

maint/analysis This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of performing background maintenance
testing in response to a reported trouble by some component in the
active or standby SPE complex that relates to the standby SPE.

■

maint/upgrade This standby SPE is in maintenance mode and is
currently in the process of performing software upgrade.

8. DOWN MODES
The standby SPE is placed in down mode when a fault occurs in the
standby SPE complex that would prevent that SPE from performing
system functions. Down mode is always associated with STBY-SPE
alarms and errors. The active SPE could be either active or selected
when the standby SPE is in one of the Down modes.
■

down/bad_upgrade This standby SPE is in down mode because a
software upgrade attempt failed. The standby SPE will stay in down
mode until a successful software upgrade is performed.

■

down/idle This standby SPE is in down mode, however, no
maintenance activity is currently taking place. The active SPE could
be either active or selected.

■

down/entering This standby SPE is in down mode, but is currently
in the process of trying to restart the switch software on this SPE. As
soon as the switch software on this SPE finishes its initialization, the
standby SPE will be ready to perform background or SAT
requested maintenance activity.

■

down/mismatch_soft This standby SPE is in down mode because
the vintage of software in flash memory of the standby SPE does
not match the vintage of the software in the active SPE. The
standby SPE will stay in down mode until a successful software
upgrade is performed to fix the software mismatch.

■

down/testing This standby SPE is in down mode attempting to
execute a SAT demanded test command.

■

down/not-refreshed This standby SPE is in down mode executing
a destructive background maintenance test that has temporarily left
the standby memory not refreshed. Once the current test has
completed a refresh of the standby SPE will be attempted by
background maintenance and the mode will change.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system
■

SELECT SWITCH

Page 8-515

down/analysis This standby SPE is in down mode and is currently
in the process of performing background maintenance testing in an
effort to determine if the problem has been corrected.

The position of the SPE select switch on the Duplication Interface
circuit pack is displayed in the SPE related information section. The
switch can be in one of three positions:
— auto
The switch is in the position.
— spe-a
The switch is in the left position.
— spe-b
The switch is in the right position.
— 
Always appears for the 1A and 1B SPE in a simplex system. In a
system with High or Critical Reliability, a "blank" implies a
hardware problem with the Duplication Interface circuit pack.

PE ALARMS MAJOR

The number of Major alarms associated with the SPE complex that
affect the fault severity level of this SPE is shown. If the system is
simplex system, then the 1B SPE always shows blank.

SPE ALARMS MINOR

The number of Minor alarms associated with the SPE complex that
affect the fault severity level of this SPE is shown. If the system is
simplex system, then the 1B SPE always shows blank.

TONE/CLOCK

The location of the tone-clock circuit pack. Valid locations are 1A,
1B, 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B.

SERVICE STATE

The operational state of the Tone-Clock circuit pack. The possible
states are as follows:
— in
The Tone-Clock is installed in the system and is in-service.
— out
The Tone-Clock has failed certain maintenance tests and has
been removed from service.
— 
If the system is not duplicated, then there is no B carrier
Tone-Clock and this field displays "blank".

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

SYSTEM CLOCK

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-516

This field shows which Tone-Clock circuit pack supplies the system
clock for the cabinet being displayed.
— active
This Tone-Clock is active and is supplying the system clock for
this cabinet.
— standby
This Tone-Clock is standby and is ready to supply the system
clock for this cabinet if the active clock fails.
— down
This Tone-Clock has failed some maintenance activity and can
not supply the system clock for this cabinet.
— unavail
If the system has an EPN that is currently down, then unavail is
displayed for the Tone-Clock.
— 
If the system is Simplex, then the 1B Tone-Clock for the PPN will
display a blank. If the system does not have an EPN, then both
the 1A and 1B Tone-Clock for this EPN will display a blank.

SYSTEM TONE

This field shows which Tone-Clock circuit pack supplies the system
tones for the cabinet being displayed.
— active
This Tone-Clock is active and is supplying the system tones for
this cabinet.
— standby
This Tone-Clock is standby and is ready to supply the system
tones for this cabinet if the active clock fails.
— down
This Tone-Clock has failed some maintenance activity and can
not supply the system tones for this cabinet.
— unavail
If the system has an EPN that is currently down, then unavail is
displayed for the Tone-Clock.
— 
If the system is Simplex, then the 1B Tone-Clock for the PPN will
display a blank. If the system does not have an EPN, then both
the 1A and 1B Tone-Clock for this EPN will display a blank.

TDM

The TDM Bus identifier. Valid identifiers are 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A and
3B.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

SERVICE STATE

Page 8-517

The operational state of the TDM Bus circuit pack. The possible
states are as follows:
— in
The TDM Bus is installed in the system and is in-service.
— out
The TDM Bus has failed certain maintenance tests and has
been removed from service.

CONTROL
CHANNEL

Indicates whether the control channel is on this TDM Bus. Either
y(es) or n(o) is displayed.

DEDICATED
TONES

Indicates whether the dedicated tones are on this TDM Bus. Either
y(es), n(o) is displayed.

PKT

The Packet Bus identifier, which is the same as the cabinet number.
Valid Packet Buses are 1, 2 and 3. If the system is running on a
X75XE cabinet all the PKT fields will be blank and the following will
be displayed instead:
S75XE does not support Packet
Refer to Packet Bus Maintenance descriptions for more information.

SERVICE STATE

The operational state of the Packet Buses. Possible states are:
— in
The Packet Bus is in-service and operating normally.
— out
The Packet Bus has failed certain maintenance tests and has
been removed from service.
— reconfig
The Maintenance/Test circuit pack has swapped one or more
signal leads because of lead faults detected during testing
(High or Critical Reliability System only).
— open lds
The Maintenance/Test circuit pack can not correct all of the
Packet Bus faults. There are open leads, but the Packet Bus is
still at least partly functional (on a High or Critical Reliability
System only).
— unavail
If the system has an EPN that is currently down, then unavail is
displayed for the Packet Bus.
— 
If the system does not have the Packet Bus feature, a blank is
displayed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-518

BUS
ALARMS-MAJOR

This y(es) or n(o) field shows whether Major alarms exist for packet
bus components.

BUS
ALARMS-MINOR

This y(es) or n(o) field shows whether Minor alarms exist for packet
bus components.

BUS FAULTS

This field indicates the number of faulty bus leads, where a fault is
defined as either shorted to another lead, stuck at some value or an
open lead. This field may take on any integer between 0 and 24.
The system displays a blank if the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is
not present, if the Packet Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack has been taken out-of-service or if the system does not have
the Packet Bus feature.

OPEN BUS
LEADS

This field indicates the number of bus leads which tests indicate
have an open circuit between the Maintenance/Test circuit pack
and bus terminator. Bus leads test open as a result of physical
damage to the backplane or its connectors OR because a bus
terminator is missing. This field may contain values between 0 and
24. The system displays a blank if the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack is not present or has been take out-of-service, if the Packet
Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been take
out-of-service or if the system does not have the Packet Bus
feature.

EMERGENCY
TRANSFER

The location of the Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack
containing the Emergency Transfer Select Switch is displayed.
Valid locations are 1A and 1B for the PPN, and 2A or 3A for the
EPNs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

SELECT SWITCH

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-519

The position of the Emergency Transfer Switch on the Processor(s)
or the EPN maintenance circuit pack and the state of Emergency
Transfer in the cabinet are displayed as follows:
— on
The switch is in the right position. If this is a Simplex PPN or an
EPN, then designated analog phones in this cabinet are cut
through to CO trunk lines. The switch should only be in this state
in an emergency situation. In a High or Critical Reliability
System, the Emergency Transfer Switches on both SPEs in the
PPN must be in the on position before Emergency Transfer is
invoked for the PPN.
— off
The switch is in the left position and regardless of Simplex or
Duplex, PPN or EPN, Emergency Transfer is off and can not be
invoked by the system software. The switch should only be in
this state when a service technician is on sight.
— auto-on
The switch is in the or auto position, however, because of a
serious system fault, system software has invoked Emergency
Transfer.
— auto-off
The switch is in the or auto position and because the system
has no serious faults, system software has not invoked
Emergency Transfer.
— unavail
If the system has an EPN that is currently down, then unavail is
displayed for the Emergency Transfer.
— 
If the system is Simplex, then the 1B Emergency Transfer
indication for the PPN will display a blank. If the system does
not have an EPN, then both the 1A and 1B Emergency Transfer
indications for the EPN will display a blank.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

EXP-LINK

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-520

An identifier of the Expansion Links that originate from this cabinet
showing the locations of the two Expansion Interface circuit packs
that make up the link. If the Expansion Link does not exist in the
system then a - is displayed.
The following are valid Expansion Link identifiers for the PPN or
Cabinet 1:
"1A01-2A01", "1B01-2B02", "1A02-3A01", "1B02-3B02"
The following are valid Expansion Link identifiers for the first EPN or
Cabinet 2:
"1A01-2A01", "1B01-2B02", "2A02-3A02", "2B03-3B03"
The following are valid Expansion Link identifiers for the second
EPN or Cabinet 3:
"1A02-3A01", "1B02-3B02", "2A02-3A02", "2B03-3B03"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

SERVICE STATE

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-521

The operational state of the Expansion Interface Link. The possible
states are as follows:
— in
The Expansion Interface Link is installed in the system and is
in-service.
— out
The Expansion Interface Link has failed certain maintenance
tests and has been removed from service.
— 
The Expansion Interface Link does not exist in the system.

MODE

— active
The Expansion Interface Link is in-service and is providing the
active connectivity between the two cabinets.
— standby
The Expansion Interface Link is in-service and is ready to
provide connectivity between the two cabinets should the active
link fail.
— down
The Expansion Interface Link is out-of-service and can not
provide connectivity between the two cabinets.
— 
The Expansion Interface Link does not exist in the system.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status system

CABINET TYPE

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-522

Indicates the type of physical cabinet containing this cabinet.
— MCCA Medium Carrier Cabinet capable of supporting up to 5
carriers. An MCC can run as either simplex or duplex as a PPN.
— SCC
A Single Carrier Cabinet capable of supporting up to 4 carriers.
An SCC can run as either simplex or duplex as a PPN.
— EMCCA Enhanced Medium Carrier Cabinet capable of supporting up
to 5 carriers. An EMCC can only be a PPN cabinet. An EMCC
can run as either simplex or duplex as a PPN.
— ESCCA Enhanced Medium Carrier Cabinet capable of supporting up
to 4 carriers. A ESCC can only be a PPN cabinet. An ESCC can
run as either simplex or duplex as a PPN.
— MICRO
A Mirco or Wall Mounted cabinet always exists alone as an A
carrier in the PPN. A MICRO cabinet can be only used in
simplex systems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status trunk

Page 8-523

The following is an example of the fields contained on the output form.

status system all-cabinets

Page

1 of

3

SPE B

SYSTEM STATUS CABINET 1

SPE MODE
1A busyout/not-refreshed
1B active

TDM
1A
1B

SERVICE
STATE
in
in

EMERGENCY
TRANSFER
1A
1B

CONTROL
CHANNEL
y
n

SELECT
SWITCH
auto-off
auto-off

SELECT
SWITCH
auto
auto

DEDICATED
TONES
n
y

SPE ALARMS
MAJOR MINOR
n
y
n
n

PKT
1

TONE/
CLOCK
1A
1B

SERVICE
STATE
in
in

SERVICE BUS ALARMS
STATE MAJOR MINOR
in
n
n

SERVICE
EXP-LINK
STATE
01A01-02A01 out
01B01-02B02 in
01A02-03A01 in
01B02-03B02 in

SYSTEM
CLOCK
standby
active

SYSTEM
TONE
standby
active

BUS
OPEN BUS
FAULTS LEADS
0
0

CABINET
MODE
TYPE
down
SCC
active
active
standby

Feature Interactions
None.

status trunk
This command displays the status of an individual trunk group member or all of
the members in a particular group.

Synopsis
status trunk group/member print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, rcust, bcms, init, browse.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-524

Examples
status trunk 78
status trunk 80
status trunk 78/1
status trunk 80/2
status trunk 80/2 print

Description
The status trunk command displays internal software state information for
diagnosis. This command can help locate facilities to which the trunk is
communicating.
If a trunk group number is entered without a member number, a list showing the
status for each member in the specified group is displayed. If a trunk group
number and member number are both entered, only status for the specified
member is displayed.

Defaults
None.

Parameters
group

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99. If a group number is entered
without a member number, a list showing the status of each member in
the group is displayed.

member

The member number is an administered number identifying a particular
member within a trunk group. The valid range is 1 - 99. If a member
number is entered, status for that member only is displayed.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status trunk", the following
message is displayed:
Enter assigned trunk group(1-99)
or [group/member(1-99)], [‘print‘]

Error Messages
If the format of the trunk identifier is incorrect, the following error message is
displayed:
Format invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status trunk

Page 8-525

If the trunk identifier is not in the valid range, the following error message is
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

If the trunk group is not administered or has no members, the following message
is displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned
but with no member

If the trunk group member is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
Group member not assigned

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

MEMBER Output
The following is output when a user enters a trunk group and member:
Trunk Group/Member

The trunk group number and group member number. Valid
identifiers are 1-99/1-99.

Port

The port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the trunk.

Signaling Group ID

If the trunk is of type ISDN, then this field contains the number of
the ISDN Signaling Group to which this group belongs.
Otherwise, this field is blank.

Connected Ports

Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the
trunk.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-526

Service State

Whether the trunk is in service or out of service. One of the
following states is displayed: in-service/active, in-service/idle,
out-of-service, out-of-service-NE (Near End), out-of-service-FE
(Far End), maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle,
maint-FE/idle, pending-in-service, pending-maint, or
disconnected. NE (Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to which
"end" of the trunk has placed the facility in the state that it is in.

Maintenance Busy

Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed
upon the trunk.

CA-TSC State

The state of the temporary signaling connection. A temporary
signaling connection is a connection set up to pass call
information over PRI signaling links.

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status trunk
78/1".

status trunk 78/1

TRUNK STATUS
Trunk Group/Member: 078/001
Port: 01C1505
Signaling Group ID:
Connected Ports:

Service State: in-service/idle
Maintenance Busy? no
CA-TSC State:

GROUP Output
The following is output when a user enters only a trunk group:
Member

The trunk group number and group member number. Valid identifiers
are 1-99/1-99.

Port

The port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the trunk.

Service State

Whether the trunk is in service or out of service. One of the following
states is displayed: in-service/active, in-service/idle, out-of-service,
out-of-service-NE (Near End), out-of-service-FE (Far End),
maint-NE/active, maint-FE/active, maint-NE/idle, maint-FE/idle,
pending-in-service, pending-maint, or disconnected. NE (Near End)
and FE (Far End) refer to which "end" of the trunk has placed the
facility in the state that it is in.

Mtce Busy

Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed upon the
trunk.

Connected Ports

Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status tsc-administered

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-527

For the following output example, the command that was entered is "status trunk
78".

status trunk 78

TRUNK GROUP STATUS
Member

Port

Service State

078/001
078/002

01C1505 in-service/idle
01C1506 in-service/idle

Mtce Connected Ports
Busy
no
no

Feature Interactions
None.

status tsc-administered
This command displays the operational status of Temporary Signaling
Connections (TSCs) for a signaling group.

Synopsis
status tsc-administered signaling group #/tsc index print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
status tsc-administered 1
status tsc-administered 1/1
status tsc-administered 1/2 print

Description
The status tsc-administered command displays the operational status of TSC’s
administered for an administered signaling group. The status represents the
state of the TSC according to switched services.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status tsc-administered

Page 8-528

Defaults
None.

Parameters
signaling group #

An administered number associated with each signaling group.

tsc index

A number associated with each TSC in a signaling group.

print

This causes the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status tsc-administered" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter sig group # (1-8) /tsc index # (1-64),
[’print’]

Error Messages
If the format for the specified signaling group or the signaling group and TSC is
incorrect, the following message is displayed:
Format invalid

If the specified signaling group number is out of range, the following message is
displayed:
Signaling group invalid

If the specified signaling group is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
No signaling group assigned

If the specified signaling group has no TSC assigned or the specified TSC is
unadministered, the following message is displayed:
No TSC assigned

If the specified TSC number is out of range, the following message is displayed:
Tsc index invalid

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status tsc-administered

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-529

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
TSC Index

The administered TSC index (1-64).

TSC State

The state of the administered TSC. A state of "inactive" means that the
administered TSC is not functioning (i.e. D-channel out-of-service, or
disabled, etc.). A state of "active" indicates that the administered TSC is
up and user information can be exchanged end-to-end. A state of
"pending-inactive" shows that the TSC is being released. A state of
"pending-active" means that the TSC is about to come up.

Establish

This field refers to the switch responsible for the origination of the
administered TSC. A state of "as-needed" shows that the TSC is
established on an as needed basis. A state of "permanent" shows that
the TSC is permanently established.

Enabled

Indicates if the administered TSC’s have been enabled ("yes" or "no").

Congested

This field indicates the administered TSC congestion history (i.e.
whether the network can handle the receipt of USER INFORMATION
messages for the administered TSC). A "yes" in this field indicates that
the administered TSC is congested. A "no" indicates that the
administered TSC is not congested. A "clear" in this field denotes the
administered TSC congestion was cleared during its’ active period.

For the following output example, the command that was entered was "status
tsc-administered 1/1".

status tsc-administered 1/1

ADMINISTERED NON-CALL-ASSOCIATED TSC STATUS
TSC
Index
1

TSC
State
inactive

Feature Interactions
None.

Establish
as-needed

Enabled
yes

Congested
no

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status tti

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-530

status tti
This command displays the status of the TTI (Terminal Translation Initialization)
background maintenance task.

Synopsis
status tti print

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust init, nms, browse.

Examples
status tt
status tti print

Description
The status tti command displays the status (active/not active) of the tti
background maintenance task and if it is active, then it will display whether tti
ports are being generated or removed, the number of tti-supported boards that
have processed, and the number of tti-supported boards that have not yet been
processed. The display also includes the elapsed time since the background
maintenance task started.

Defaults
No defaults.

Parameters
print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "status tti", the following
message will be displayed:
[’print’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
status tti

Page 8-531

Error Messages
If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit.

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later.

Output

TTI Background Task
State:

The state of the tti background maintenance task: generating tti
ports, removing tti ports, suspended, not active, completed - all
ports translated, completed - some ports not translated. If the
last execution of the background task completed normally,
then "completed - all ports translated" is displayed here. If the
task completed due to resource exhaustion with some ports left
untranslated, then "completed - some ports not translated" is
displayed in this field.

TTI State:

The tti state field contains "off" if the TTI feature is not enabled
for the system or if it is enabled then it contains what kind of tti
ports are being generated or removed: voice, data.

# of Boards
Completed:

The number of TTI-supported boards that have had been
processed by the background maintenance task. A
"completed" board has either had all its unadministered ports
translated as TTI ports or its TTI ports have been removed and
are now unadministered ports. This depends on whether the
TTI background task is generating or removing tti ports.

# of Boards Left to
Process:

The number of TTI-supported boards that have not yet been
processed by the background maintenance task.

Percent Complete:

A ratio of the of number of boards completed and the number
of boards left to process.

Elapsed Time since
Task Started:

The amount of time that has elapsed since the TTI background
task was started. If the task is "not active", then this field will
blank. If the task is "completed" it will indicate the length of time
it took to complete the task. If the task is "suspended", then it
will display the elapsed time at the point the task was
suspended. The time is displayed in the HH:MM format where
HH is hours and MM is minutes.

For the following output example, the command "status tti" was entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test access-endpoint

status tti

Page 8-532

Page 1 of 1

TTI STATUS
TTI Background Task State:
TTI State:
# of Boards Completed:
# of Boards Left to Process:
Percent Complete:
Elapsed Time since Task Started:

generating tti ports
voice
30
120
25
0:15

Feature Interactions
The TTI Background maintenance task is activated by enabling the TTI system
parameter on the system-parameters features administration form.

test access-endpoint
This command will perform hardware diagnostic tests on all port circuits that are
associated with the specified access endpoint extension.

Synopsis
test access-endpoint extension [ short | long ] repeat number schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint
test access-endpoint

25012
45002 sh
45892 l
24389 sh r 4
34899 l r 6
34912 l r 5 schedule
93483 r 2
10022 c
92349 schedule

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-533

Description
The test access-endpoint command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all
port circuits that are associated with the specified access endpoint.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with repeat number of 1.

Parameters
extension

The extension of the access endpoint to be tested. The number of
digits in an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of
nondestructive diagnostic tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "test access-endpoint", the following
message is displayed:
Enter extension number, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100)], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the EPN on which the access endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test access-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-534

Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not an access endpoint,
the following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object
other than access-endpoint

If the board that contains the access endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a port-by-port and test-by-test basis with one
line of data displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. For wideband
access endpoint the maintenance name for each port is
"WAE-PORT". For single port access endpoint the maintenance
name is "TIE-DS1".

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the extension number of the access endpoint.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Page 8-535

For the following output example, the command "test access-endpoint 22502"
was entered. Assume that the access endpoint ports for extension 22502 are in
cabinet 1, carrier C, slot 11, circuit 1 to 6.

test access-endpoint 22502 short

page 1 of 1

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C1101
01C1102
01C1103
01C1104
01C1105
01C1106

Maintenance Name
WAE-PORT
WAE-PORT
WAE-PORT
WAE-PORT
WAE-PORT
WAE-PORT

Alt. Name Test No. Result
22502
36
PASS
22502
36
PASS
22502
36
PASS
22502
36
PASS
22502
36
PASS
22502
36
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test alarms
This command tests the hardware associated with selected alarms

Synopsis
test alarms auto-page failures step [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
test alarms
test alarms step failures
test alarms long clear auto-page
test alarms long failures

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-536

Description
This command allows the technician to automatically test all of the hardware that
is associated with the active alarms in the alarm log. This command provides a
query form to help the user narrow the selection of alarmed objects. Once the
form is filled out, the user presses "ENTER" and the hardware associated with the
selected alarm log entries is tested. The results will be displayed in standard test
output and status information will be displayed on the message line as the
command progresses.
Several alarms may be logged against a single maintenance object, each alarm
representing a different problem. Even if there are multiple entries in the alarm
log for a single object, the test alarms command will only test each physical
object once.

Defaults
The default options for this command are: short, repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-537

Parameters
auto-page

This option provides the ability to continue testing and displaying test
results, by providing a new screen every time the SAT screen is filled
with test results. The screen does not scroll to accommodate new
results; instead a new screen is provided after the current screen fills
up.
If the auto-page option is not specified, the SAT screen will not be
refreshed once it is filled with test results and testing will stop until the
user enters the "PAGE" key to continue or the "CANCEL" key to halt the
testing.

failures

This requests that only the failures be displayed on the screen. All
passes will not be displayed on the output screen. Hardware failures as
well as aborts, conflicts and EPN-down failures will be displayed.

step

This option will allow the user to step to the next or previous alarm and
not have the current alarm tested. When this option is specified, the
user is presented with the alarm information and prompted for a
keypress. The user may enter CANCEL to abort the command, ENTER
to test the currently displayed alarm, NEXT ALARM (function key) to
move to the next alarm, PREV ALARM (function key) to move to the
previous alarm without testing the currently displayed alarm. If this
option is given, then the NEXT ALARM (function key) or PREV ALARM
(function key) may be pressed at any time during the command (even
during test results). If the NEXT ALARM or PREV ALARM is pressed
during a test, the test is aborted, testing of the current alarm stops, and
the next alarm or previous alarm is displayed. If the first alarms is
displayed, and the PREV ALARM is pressed, then the last alarm is
displayed. Also, if the last alarm is currently displayed, and the NEXT
ALARM is requested, then the first alarm will be shown.
NOTE:
When this option is given the only way to terminate this command
is to press CANCEL.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-538

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails. The long clear
option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during
testing. The short clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in
the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Executing a clear with short option, may not clear all alarms even
if all tests pass.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.

Help Messages
If the technician presses HELP after entering "test alarms" the following message
will be displayed:
Enter [’auto-page’], [’failures’], [’step’],
[’short’ or ’long’], [’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’]

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Page 8-539

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

QUERY FORM INPUT
After entering the command "test alarms", the system technician will be
presented with an options form for alarm selection.

test alarms repeat 1

HARDWARE TEST ALARM QUERY
The following options control which alarms will be tested.
ALARM TYPES
Major? y_
REPORT PERIOD
Interval: m_

Minor? y_

Warning? y_

From: __/__/__:__

To: __/__/__:__

EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one, if any, of the following )
Cabinet: __
Port Network: __
Board Number: ____
Port: ______
Category: ________
Extension: _____
Trunk ( group/member ): __/__

Alarm Types

The type of alarm to be tested is specified by placing a ’y’ or ’n’ in the
alarm type fields. The technician can choose a combination of active
alarms: major, minor, and/or warning.

Interval

Test alarms for records for the last hour (h), last day (d), last week (w)
or all (a). The default is all.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Page 8-540

From

Test alarm associated with records from the time specified by
mm/dd/hh/mm, where mm month, dd is the day, hh is the hour and
mm is the minute. If no "from" date is entered, then no checking is
done. This will give the user all the alarms active since a month prior
to the current time.

To

Test alarms associated with records to the time specified by
mm/dd/hh/mm, where mm is the month, dd is the day, hh is the hour
and mm is the minute. If no "to" date is entered, any alarm which is
active after the from date will be selected.

Equipment Type

The technician can choose between five different equipment types. If
there is no input to any of these fields, the system will default to all the
equipment. The user can select one of the following fields:
■

Cabinet: This allows the technician to test all alarms associated
with a particular cabinet. Alarms for a cabinet are referenced by a
number ranging from 1 to 3 which is assigned during cabinet
administration.

■

Port Network: This allows the technician to test all alarms
associated with a particular port network. Alarms for a port
network are referenced by a number ranging from 1 to 3.

■

Board Number: This allows the technician to choose all alarms
associated with a particular circuit pack for testing. Alarms for a
circuit pack are referenced by circuit pack location
(cabinet-carrier-slot). If the cabinet number is omitted, the system
will default to 1.

■

Port: This allows the technician to choose all alarms associated
with a particular port on a circuit pack for testing. Alarms for a
port circuit are referenced by port location
(cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). If the cabinet number is omitted, the
system will default to 1.

■

Category: Alarms for a particular equipment category.

■

Extension: Alarms associated with an extension number.

■

Trunk (group/member): The technician can choose to test all
alarms associated with a particular trunk group or trunk group
member. The group identifier should be entered to test all alarms
associated with a trunk group (XX/__). The group identifier and
member identifier should both be entered to test all alarms
associated with a specific trunk group member (XX/XX).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-541

Field Help
Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon
tabbing to the specified field and pressing the HELP key.
Major?

"n(o) y(es)"

Minor?

"n(o) y(es)"

Warning?

"n(o) y(es)"

Interval:

"m(onth), h(our), d(ay), w(eek), a(ll)"

From month

"Enter month between 1-12"

From (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

From (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

From (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

To (month)

"Enter month between 1-12"

To (day)

"Enter day between 0-31"

To (hour)

"Enter hour between 0-23"

To (minute)

"Enter minute between 0-59"

Cabinet:

"Enter cabinet number (1-3)"

Port Network:

"Enter port network number (1-3)"

Board Number:

"Enter 4 character board number;
[cabinet(1-3)]:carrier(A-E):slot(0-21)"

Port:

"Enter port number;
[cabinet(1-3)]:carrier(A-E):slot(0-21):circuit(1-24)"

Category:

"adm-conn, announce, bri/asai, card-mem, cdr,
data-mod, detector, dup-spe, environ, ext-intf, ext-dev,
generatr, inads-link, infc, maint, mbus, memory, misc,
mnt-test, modem, netcon, pkt, pkt_ctrl, quick-st, pms/jrnl,
procr, s-syn, stabd, stacrk, stations, sys-prnt, tape, tdm,
tone, trkbd, trkcrk, trunks and wideband" (For a table
describing the category entries in greater detail, see the
"display errors" command.)

Extension:

"Enter assigned extension, or blank"

Trunk (group)

"Enter group number between 1-99"

Trunk (member)

"Enter group member between 1-99, or blank"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-542

Field Error Messages
Following are the error messages that will be displayed on the screen. The
messages are displayed when the system technician tabs out of a field and the
validation routines are executed. In the following messages, an "x" represents the
character that was entered by the user.
Major?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Minor?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Warning?

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

Interval:

""x" is an invalid entry; please press HELP key"

From (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

From (day)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Day invalid"

From (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Hour invalid"

From (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Minute invalid"

To (month)

"Entry must be all digits"

To (day)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Day invalid"

To (hour)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Hour invalid"

To (minute)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Minute invalid"

Cabinet:

"Invalid entry"

Port Network:

"Port Network invalid"

Board Number:

"Invalid entry"

Port:

"Port invalid"

Category:

""xxxxxxxx" is an invalid entry; please press HELP"

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Extension:

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-543

"Entry must be all digits"
"Extension not assigned"

Trunk (group)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member"

Trunk (member)

"Entry must be all digits"
"Number invalid""
"Group member not assigned"
"Trunk or trunk group invalid"

Output
The responses, with normal output, will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with
one line of data displayed for each test result. With the failures option only the
tests that have failed will be displayed.
The following output fields are for the ALARM ENTRY section:
Port

The location of the alarmed object (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).
This is the same identifier as used by the alarm log.

Maintenance Name

The logical name of the maintenance object which has been
alarmed.

On Board

Whether the fault detected is on the associated circuit pack, or an
off board element connected to the circuit pack.

Alt Name

Terminal extension numbers or trunk group numbers.

Alarm Type

Major, Minor, or Warning. This is an indicator to the seriousness of
the alarm raised.

Service State

RDY (ready for service), OUT (out of service), or IN (in service).
This is the current service state of the station and trunk ports
shown.

Ack

The columns under the “1” and “2” headings denote if the alarm
has been acknowledged by the first and second OSS telephone
numbers, respectively.

Date Alarmed

Day, hour, and minute of alarm.

Alarm Count

This field contains the count of the current alarm entry verses the
total number of alarms to be tested.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test alarms

Page 8-544

The following fields are displayed for the test results:
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

An indicator as to whether the test failed, passed, aborted or no
hardware was available (no board). If this field has conflict, this
means that another user was testing this hardware. If this field has
epn-down it means that the epn is inaccessible at this time.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the test failed or was aborted.

When errors are encountered preparing a particular object to be tested (not
inserted, contention, etc.) the an error message will be displayed. This error
message will be displayed in the TEST RESULTS data.
For the following output example, assume that only one alarm was in the alarm
log and it is on the board in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot 7. The command that was
entered was "test alarms" and the query form was left empty by just pressing
"ENTER"
.
test alarms

Page

Port

Maintenance On
Alt
Name
Brd? Name

01C03

UDS1-BD

Port

ALARM ENTRY
Alarm
Svc
Type
State

n

Maintenance Name

Ack?
1 2

WARNING

138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146

press CANCEL to quit --

Alarm
Count

03/06/16:48 1/4

TEST RESULTS
Alt. Name Test No. Result

01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
01C03
UDS1-BD
Testing completed for this object.

Date
Alarmed

NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

Error Code

BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD

press NEXT PAGE to continue

1

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test analog-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-545

Feature Interactions
With the enhancement of multiple maintenance users, there may be a possibility
of two users attempting to test the same physical hardware (for example, one via
the test alarms command and another through the test board command). If this
command should attempt to test a board that is currently being tested by another
user, a error message is displayed.

test analog-testcall
This command will place an analog test call on a trunk or a group of trunks.

Synopsis
test analog-testcall [ trunk group number/member number | port location | board
location ] [ full | supervision | no-selftest | no-return-loss | no-st-or-rl ][ repeat
number ] schedule

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: system technician, inads, cust,
init.

Examples
test analog-testcall trunk 78 f
test analog-testcall trunk 78 f schedule
test analog-testcall trunk 80/1 s r 2
test analog-testcall trunk 80/1 s r 2 schedule
test analog-testcall trunk 78/2 no-selftest r 10
test analog-testcall trunk 78/2 no-selftest r 10 schedule
test analog-testcall trunk 78 r 4
test analog-testcall trunk 78 r 4 schedule
test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-st-or-rl r 4
test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-st-or-rl r 4 schedule
test analog-testcall board 2a15
test analog-testcall board 2a15 schedule
test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-return-loss
test analog-testcall port 2a1505 no-return-loss schedule
te an t 80
te an t 80 schedule

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test analog-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-546

Description
The test analog-testcall command performs facility diagnostic tests on an entire
trunk group, an individual trunk group member, an individual trunk port or on all
trunks on a board, depending on the options entered by the technician. The type
of test call, the far end test line number and the various other test call related
parameters must be administered on the trunk group form before executing the
command. Press HELP.
Normally the user should only invoke the full or supervision test. The other
options are provided primarily for testing when setting up an ATMS schedule.

Defaults
The default for the command is full with the repeat of 1.

Parameters
group number

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group.

member number

The member number is an administered number identifying a
particular trunk within a trunk group. If a group number is entered,
and no member number is given, then all trunks in the group will be
tested.

location

A "location" represents the physical position of the board or port to be
tested and is entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the
cabinet number, "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot
position, and "pp" represents the circuit. A cabinet number (1 - 3)
may be entered. The "pp" should be omitted for a board location.

full

This will execute the most comprehensive test call available using the
administered test set type.

supervision

This will cause the system to execute a supervision only test call. It
will take about 10 seconds and will only confirm the presence of the
test set at the far end.

no-selftest

This will execute the "full" test, but will skip any self test sequences.
This saves about 20 seconds on the type 105 transmission test and
will not have any effect on type 100 transmission tests or on type 102
transmission tests.

no-return-loss

This will execute the "full" test, but will skip any return loss sequences.
This saves about 20 seconds on the type 105 transmission test and
will not have any effect on type 100 transmission tests or type 102
transmission tests.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test analog-testcall

Page 8-547

no-st-or-rl

This will execute the "full" test, but will skip all self test and return loss
sequences. This saves about 40 seconds on the type 105
transmission test and will not have any effect on type 100
transmission tests or type 102 transmission tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test analog-testcall" a
message showing the following keywords is displayed:
trunk

board

port

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test analog-testcall trunk,"
the following message will be displayed:
Enter group number or group number/member number,
[’full’ or ’supervision’ or
’no-selftest’
or ’no-return-loss’ or ’no-st-or-rl’],
[’repeat 1-100’], [’schedule’]

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test analog-testcall port" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter trunk port number [’full’ or ’supervision’
or ’no-selftest’ or’no-return-loss’
or ’no-st-or-rl’], [’repeat 1-100’], [’schedule’]

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test analog-testcall board"
the following message will be displayed:
Enter trunk board number, [’full’ or ’supervision’
or ’no-selftest’ or ’no-return-loss’
or ’no-st-or-rl’], [’repeat 1-100’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the trunk location is incorrect, the following message displays:
Format invalid

If the trunk group or member range is invalid, the following message displays:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test analog-testcall

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-548

If the board is not inserted, the following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted

If the specified board does not have any maintenance objects associated with it,
the following message will be displayed:
No MO in this board

If the EPN on which the board resides is not available, the following message will
be displayed:
EPN is not available

If there is a software communication problem, the following message displays:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the trunk group is not administered, the following message displays:
Group not assigned, or group
assigned but with no member

If the trunk group member is not administered, the following message displays:
Group member not assigned

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message is
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

If the format for the board or port location is incorrect, the following message
displays:
Port/Board invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test analog-testcall

Page 8-549

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the
trunk group number and yyy is the member number.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO (for example, CO_TRK Transmission Tests
(#844-849).

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test analog-testcall trunk 78".

test analog-testcall trunk 78

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C1505
01C1507

Maintenance Name
CO-TRK
CO-TRK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
78/1
845
PASS
78/2
845
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Additional data is available after running a test. See the list measurements
test-calls command for details on how to access the additional data.
If the trunk is in use by call processing the test will abort.
If the trunk is in use by maintenance, the test will queue and will run when the
current maintenance activity finishes.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-550

test board
This command will perform a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the specified
circuit pack. The tests will vary according to the type of pack and short or long
request.

Synopsis
test board location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
test board 01c11 l
test board 01c11 l schedule
test board 02e15 sh r 2
test board 01c08
test board 02d12 r 4
test board 02d12 c

Description
The test board command will validate that the board exists at the specified
location. Based on the logical type (e.g., Analog, Digital, Hybrid, etc.) of board a
series of tests will be executed. Each individual test will exercise diagnostics on
the board and then return results of the test along with any possible error codes.
Some of the tests can be disabled by administering forms on the administration
terminal.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-551

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the board to be tested.
For R3 Standard cabinets a location is entered as "UUcSS" where "UU"
represents the cabinet number, "c" represents the carrier, and "SS"
represents the slot position. A single digit cabinet (1 - 9) may be
entered with or without a leading zero (0).

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This executes a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test board" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter board location, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the board location is incorrect, the following error message will
be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test board

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-552

Port/Board invalid

If the EPN in which the specified board resides is not available, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the specified board is not configured in the system, the following message will
be displayed:
Board not assigned

If the request for all maintenance objects associated with the board fails, the
following message will be displayed:
No MO in this board

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message displays:
No tests for this MO

If the specified board is a Switch Node Interface (SNI) board which resides on
the active Port Network Connectivity (assuming PNC is duplicated) and a long
test has been specified, the following message will be displayed:
Must busyout specified object first

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test board

Page 8-553

Output
The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data displayed for
each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, the command entered was "test board 1c07".

test board 01C07 short

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C07
01C07
01C0703
01C0703
01C0703
01C0701
01C0701
01C0701
01C0702
01C0702
01C0702

Maintenance Name
ANL-BD
ANL-BD
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name Test No. Result
51
PASS
52
PASS
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Destructive long tests on a Switch Node Interface (SNI) board are not allowed
unless the board has been busied out.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test card-mem

Page 8-554

test card-mem
This command will initiate a test sequence on the specified memory card.

Synopsis
test card-mem location [ short | long ] [ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician.

Examples
test card-mem
test card-mem a l
test card-mem b sh r 2
test card-mem a sch
test card-mem a c

Description
The "test card-mem" command executes a sequence of tests on the memory
card in the specified switch processor element. The test sequences in order for
both "long" and "short" versions are described in the following table:

Included
In Short?

Included
In Long?

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Match Test (#697)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699)

Yes

Yes

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694)

No

Yes

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693)

No

Yes

Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014)

No

Yes

Flash Data Consistency Test (#421)

No

Yes

TEST

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-555

The tests in the sequence can verify the sanity of the memory card device, the
basic read/erase/write operations to the memory card, the integrity of the
translation data stored in the memory card, the function of 12 volt power supply
in TN777B NETCON circuit pack used for memory card erase/write operations,
the translation capacity of the memory card, and the consistency of data stored
in both memory cards in a High or Critical Reliability System. This command can
help system technician to trouble-shoot the hardware errors related to
maintenance objects such as "CARD-MEM", "12V-PWR", CAP-MEM, and
"FL-DATA" logged in the system hardware error log. The details of test results
and the repair procedures for recovery are described in Maintenance Service
Document associated with each maintenance object.
If the switch is a simplex system, then the "Flash Data Consistency Test" is not
executed.

Defaults
The defaults for this test command are "short" with a repeat number of "1". The
location of carrier where the memory card resides must be specified in the
command line for a High or Critical Reliability System.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test card-mem

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-556

Parameters
location

This parameter indicates the carrier location where the memory card
resides in a High or Critical Reliability System (i.e. "a" or "b"). In a
duplicated switch configuration, it can be either "a", "A", "b", or "B".

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test card-mem", the
following message is displayed for a simplex switch configuration:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test card-mem

Page 8-557

For a duplex switch configuration, the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B), [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the SPE is not active, the following message will be displayed:
Command must be executed from active SPE

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
"entered value" is an invalid identifier;
press RETURN to execute modified command

If the NETCON board is not TN777B, the following message is displayed:
Must install TN777B circuit pack

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test card-mem

Page 8-558

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested. This object is always associated with
cabinet 1. The carrier is "A" for the control carrier A in a simplex
system, and it can be either "A" or "B" for the control carriers A and
B in a duplex system. The slot and circuit fields of port address for
the maintenance objects, 12V-PWR, CAP-MEM, and CARD-MEM,
are always blank. The port address for maintenance object
"FL-DATA" is blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested "CARD-MEM" for the memory card; "12V-PWR" for 12 volt power
supply in TN777B NETCON board; "CAP-MEM" for memory card
capacity; and "FL-DATA" for the data consistency stored in
memory cards in a duplicated switch.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

An indicator such as PASS for test passed, FAIL for test failed,
ABORT for test was aborted.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the individual test
failed or was aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to
"Test No." is provided for each maintenance object.

For the following output example, the command "test card-mem" was entered.

test card-mem a long

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
12V-PWR
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CAP-MEM
FL-DATA

Alt. Name Test No. Result
701
PASS
695
PASS
696
PASS
697
PASS
698
PASS
699
PASS
694
PASS
693
PASS
1014
PASS
421
PASS

Command successfully completed

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test cdr-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-559

Feature Interactions
The "test card-mem long" command will invoke the Memory Card
Erase/Write/Read Test. This means that the "save translation" and "save
announcement" commands will be rejected while a write-to-memory-card
operation is active.
The "test card-mem long" command will also invoke the Memory Card Capacity
Test which will check if the memory card is more than 98% full or not. This test
will also be invoked after a "save translation" command.
In a High or Critical Reliability System, running "test card-mem" command for a
memory card in the standby SPE means that the standby SPE is put into the
maintenance mode and no SPE interchange is allowed through the "reset system
interchange" command or scheduled SPE interchange.

test cdr-link
This command will perform a set of tests on a call detail recording (cdr)-link.

Synopsis
test cdr-link [ primary | secondary ][ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]
schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test cdr-link primary l
test cdr-link secondary sh r 2
test cdr-link primary
test cdr-link secondary
test cdr-link secondary c
test cdr-link primary schedule

Description
The test cdr-link command will validate that the call detail recording (cdr)-link has
been administered and exists in the PBX. Each individual test will exercise
diagnostics on the link and then return results of the test along with any possible
error codes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test cdr-link

Page 8-560

For information on what a CDR link is and does, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "status cdr-link" manual pages.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

Parameters
link-id

A "Link-id" is either "primary" or "secondary".

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test cdr-link" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter ’primary’ or

’secondary’

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test cdr-link primary" or "test
cdr-link secondary" the following message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the link is not administered, the following error message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test cdr-link

Page 8-561

Link not administered or not enabled

If no tests can be found for the link, the following message will be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Maintenance
Name

The type of MO being tested. If testing primary cdr-link the MO is
PRI-CDR, else if testing secondary cdr-link the MO is SEC-CDR.

Alt. Name

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL", "DISABLED".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or aborted. A
detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is provided for each MO.

For the following example, the command entered was "test cdr-link primary".

test cdr-link primary short

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
PRI-CDR

Alt. Name Test No. Result
215
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test customer-alarm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-562

Feature Interactions
None.

test customer-alarm
This command allows the technician to test the leads for a customer-provided
alarming device on the Processor and EPN maintenance circuit packs.

Synopsis
test customer-alarm location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm
test customer-alarm

schedule
02 r 2
01b r 25
01b r 25 schedule
2a
2a sh
01b l schedule
3c

Description
The test customer-alarm command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the
leads of the Processor and EPN maintenance circuit packs. These are used for
customer provided alarms by closing the appropriate relay for one minute.
Failure is verified by the technician checking the customer alarm attached to the
circuit pack that was specified.

Defaults
The default cabinet is cabinet 1. The default carrier is carrier "a" except for SPE
duplex system PPNs. In this case the carrier has no default and either "a" or "b"
must be entered. The default for the remaining parameter is a repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test customer-alarm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-563

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical position of the desired
customer-alarm circuit pack. The location consists of a cabinet number
and carrier letter. The cabinet number is one or two digits from 1 to 3
with leading zeros allowed. Cabinet 1 is the PPN with 2-3 referring to
some optional EPN. The carrier is either "a" or "b" for cabinet 1 for SPE
duplex systems. For SPE simplex systems, when selecting cabinet 1,
the carrier must be "a" if entered. For cabinets 2-3, the carrier must be
"a" if entered.

short

This will cause test number 115 to run.

long

This will cause test number 115 to run and is the same as the short
sequence.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test customer-alarm" on a
simplex SPE system, the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1-3)],[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test customer-alarm" on a
duplex SPE system the following message will be displayed:
For cabinet 1 enter [cabinet(1)];
carrier (A-B),[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]
For cabinet 2-3 enter cabinet(2-3),[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test data-module

Page 8-564

Error Messages
If the location identifier entered is not valid, the following message will be
displayed:
Command aborted; please try later

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the maintenance object
that is being reset.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance name will always be CUST-ALM.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The test number will always be 115.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL.”

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered is
"test customer-alarm 02a".

test customer-alarm 02A

TEST RESULTS
Port
02A

Maintenance Name
CUST-ALM

Alt. Name Test No. Result
115
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test data-module
This command allows the technician to test a data module or a data channel.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-565

Synopsis
test data-module extension [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms.

Examples
test data-module 30000 l
test data-module 30000
test data-module 32000 sh r 2
test data-module 33000 l r 25
test data-module 33000 l r 25 schedule
test data-module 30000 c

Description
The test data-module command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a data
module or a data channel. Test results are determined by the interface to the
digital switch-data line port, digital line port, or network control data channel.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-566

Parameters
extension

The extension associated with the data module or data channel to be
tested. The number of digits in an extension is determined by a
dial-plan.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test data-module" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter extension, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the extension format is invalid, the following error message would be displayed:
Extension invalid

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test data-module

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-567

Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not a data module or a
data channel, the following message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

If the EPN that contains the data module port is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the board that contains the data port is not configured in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not assigned

If no tests can be found for the current MO, the following message will be
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test ds1-loop

Page 8-568

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

An indicator as to whether the test failed, passed, aborted or no
hardware was available (no board).

Error Code

A numerical description of why the test failed or was aborted.

For the following output example, the command entered was "test data-module
300".

test data-module 300

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C1103

Maintenance Name
PDMODULE

Alt. Name Test No. Result
17
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test ds1-loop
test ds1-loop - For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface circuit packs,
this command is used for loopback and one-way span testing of the DS1 span.

Synopsis
test ds1-loop location [ cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin [number-of-bits bit-pattern]
| far-csu-loopback-test-begin | one-way-span-test-begin |
end-loopback/span-test | inject-single-bit-error | ds1/csu-loopback-tests]

Permissions
Logins with the following service levels may execute this command: system
technician, inads, init, super-user, or logins with Maintain Switch Circuit Packs
permissions enabled.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test ds1-loop

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-569

Examples
test ds1-loop 01c08
test ds1-loop 1-3c03 cpe-loopback-jack
test ds1-loop 1-3c03 cpe
test ds1-loop 10c03 end
test ds1-loop 02d12 fa
test ds1-loop 02d12 inj

Description
The test ds1-loop command will validate that the board exists at the specified
location, that the board is a TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface
board. Based on the command parameter, a long-duration loopback/span test or
series of short-duration loopback tests will be executed.
Long-duration loopback tests execute for an extended period of time until the
system technician terminates it. Short-duration loopback tests return the result of
the test to the screen when finished executing. The "list measurements ds1
summary" command should be used to monitor the status of a long-duration
loopback/span test.

Defaults
The default for the command is ds1/csu-loopback-tests.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test ds1-loop

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-570

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the
board to be tested. For standard cabinets, a location is
entered as "UUcSS" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, "c" represents the carrier, and "SS" represents
the slot position. A single digit cabinet (1-3) may be
entered with or without a leading zero (0).

cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
will cause a long-duration loopback test to be setup
through the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)
Loopback Jack. The command allows the user to
specify a loop-up code for the CPE loopback jack if it
differs from the default of 0x47F. This loop-up code is
entered by specifying the number of bits in the loop-up
code as well as the actual bit-pattern (in hexadecimal).
The test will abort if the board has not been taken out of
service via the "busyout" command.

far-csu-loopback-test-begin

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
will cause a long-duration loopback test to be setup
through the far-end Channel Service Unit (CSU). The
test will abort if the board has not been taken out of
service via the "busyout" command.

one-way-span-test-begin

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
will begin execution of a long-duration one-way span
test. The test will abort if the board has not been taken
out of service via the "busyout" command.

end-loopback/span-test

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
parameter terminates long-duration one-way span and
loopback testing.

inject-single-bit-error

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
parameter causes a single bit error to be sent within an
active framed 3-in-24 test pattern used in long-duration
loopback and span testing.

ds1/csu-loopback-tests

For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards, this
parameter will execute the following loopback tests:
DS1 Board LoopBack, CSU Module Equipment
LoopBack, and CSU Module Repeater LoopBack.
These tests are performed sequentially for a short
duration each, and individual PASS/FAIL/ABORT test
results are reported following each test.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test ds1-loop

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-571

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test ds1-loop" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter DS1 board location,
[’cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin [number-of-bits bit-pattern]’ or
’far-csu-loopback-test-begin’ or ’one-way-span-test-begin’ or
’end-loopback/span-test’ or ’inject-single-bit-error’ or
’ds1/csu-loopback-tests’]

Error Messages
If the format for the board location is incorrect, the following error message will
be displayed:
Port/Board invalid

If the EPN in which the specified board resides is not available, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the specified board is not inserted in the system, the following message will be
displayed:
Board not inserted

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

If the "test ds1-loop" command is executed and the "Version" field on the
"system-parameters customer-options" form is not V5 or later, then the following
message will be displayed:
G3 Version must be V5 or later

If the "test ds1-loop" command is executed on a circuit pack other than TN464F
or TN767E or later DS1 board, then the following message will be displayed:
Command valid for TN464F or TN767E or
later release DS1 circuit packs

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test ds1-loop

Page 8-572

If the "inject-single-bit-error" parameter is selected, but no CPE Loopback Jack,
far-end CSU, or one-way span test is active on the DS1 circuit pack, then the
following message will be displayed:
Parameter valid only if a loopback/span test is active on the DS1

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the board in cabinet 1, carrier c,
slot 7 is a TN767E DS1 board. The command that was entered was "test ds1-loop
1c07."

test ds1-loop 01C07 ds1/csu-loopback-tests

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C07
01C07
01C07

Maintenance Name
DS1-BD
DS1-BD
DS1-BD

Alt. Name Test No. Result
1209
PASS
1210
PASS
1211
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Loopback or span tests will not be allowed on DS1 boards unless the board has
been busied out.
Only one of the CPE Loopback Jack, far-end CSU, one-way span, or DS1/CSU
loopback tests may be active at any given time on a DS1 span.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test duplication-interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-573

test duplication-interface
This command will test the indicated duplication-interface board.

Synopsis
test duplication-interface location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]
schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test duplication-interface a
test duplication-interface b sh
test duplication-interface a l r 25
test duplication-interface 1b l r 25 schedule
test duplication-interface 1a l c

Description
The test duplication-interface command performs hardware diagnostic tests on
the indicated duplication interface circuit pack. Testing is under control of the
active SPE. The SHDW-CIR, SPE-SELECT and DUPINT maintenance objects are
tested using this command. The SHDW-CIR maintenance object is associated
with that portion of the duplication interface circuit pack that handles memory
shadowing from the active to the standby SPE. The SPE-SELECT maintenance
objects is associated with the SPE Select switch located on the front of the circuit
pack. The DUPINT maintenance object is associated with the duplication
interface circuit packs other functions which include SPE to SPE communication,
SAT connection and environmental maintenance leads.

Defaults
Defaults for the parameters are short with a repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test duplication-interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-574

Parameters
location

The location designates the SPE location of the desired duplication
interface circuit pack; either "1a", "1b" "a" or "b".

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. The long version includes a destructive test for this
command.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test duplication-interface,"
the following message is displayed:
Enter [network(1);carrier(A-B) [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
For any system, if a user entered parameter is not among those listed in the
"Parameters" section, the following message is displayed:
Entry invalid

If an invalid port network is specified, the following message is displayed:
Invalid port-network specified

If an invalid carrier is specified, the following message is displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test duplication-interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-575

Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) will always be 01A or 01B.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance name will always be SHDW-CIR, SPE-SELE, or
DUPINT.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test eda-external-device-alrm

Page 8-576

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test duplication-interface 1A" while "A" was the active carrier in an SPE
duplex system.

test duplication-interface a long

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A

Maintenance Name
SHDW-CIR
SHDW-CIR
SHDW-CIR
SPE-SELE
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT
DUPINT

Alt. Name Test No. Result
285
PASS
283
PASS
284
PASS
278
PASS
315
PASS
275
PASS
276
PASS
280
PASS
271
PASS
277
PASS
272
PASS
274
PASS
273
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Failures of the duplication-interface may prevent SPE switching.

test eda-external-device-alrm
test eda-external-device-alrm all | physical location [ repeat number | clear ][
schedule ]

This test will perform hardware diagnostic tests on an individual
external-device-alarm port or on all external-device-alarm ports.
The test eda-external-device-alrm command performs a hardware diagnostic
test on all administered external device alarms if all is entered. If an administered
external device alarm port is entered, the test external-device-alarm command
performs a hardware diagnostic test on that port. The test PASSES if the external
device is not reporting an external device alarm and FAILS if the external device
is reporting an external device alarm. If the technician specifies the port it must
be administered as an external device alarm port on a maintenance board or on
an analog line port carrier board.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test eda-external-device-alrm

Defaults
The default for this command is a repeat of 1.

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-577

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test eda-external-device-alrm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-578

Parameters
physical location

In addition to entering the word "physical" the system technician
must specify the physical location. For an administered external
device alarm analog line port, a "physical location" represents the
physical position of the port to be tested and is entered as
"UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the cabinet number (1-MAX_
CABS), "c" represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot position,
and "pp" represents the circuit.
Since the "maintenance board" alarm connections connect to
control carrier boards that are in unnumbered slots, the standard
port format cannot be used to designate these alarm connections.
The special ports UUmajor and UUminor are used designate the
major or minor maintenance board alarm connection for cabinet UU.
NOTE:
The major/minor designation specifies the pair of wires, not
the alarm level associated with the connection (i.e. the "major"
port can be administered as a major, minor or warning alarm
and the "minor" port can be administered as a major, minor or
warning alarm).
The "all" location is used to test all administered external device
alarm ports on analog line boards and maintenance boards.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times the “test physical location”
is to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until
the alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or
a single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered
against the maintenance object then the test sequence will be
exercised only once.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed
in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specifications [1] for more details.

Examples
test eda-external-device-alrm
test eda-external-device-alrm
test eda-external-device-alrm
test eda-external-device-alrm

all
all schedule
physical 1major r 10
physical 2c1101 c

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test eda-external-device-alrm

Page 8-579

Output
For the following output example the command that was entered was "test
external-device-alarm all":

test eda-external-device-alrm all
TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name

03major
03A2102
01major
01minor
01c1201
03A2101
01c1202
03minor
04major

Alt. Name Test No. Result

EXT-DEV
EXT_DEV
EXT-DEV
EXT-DEV
EXT-DEV
EXT_DEV
EXT-DEV
EXT-DEV
EXT-DEV

CMS1
CMS2
UPS1
UPS1
UPS1
CC temp
Audix1
Audix2
unknown

120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120

Error Code

PASS
FAIL
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
FAIL
FAIL

Command successfully completed

The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Field definitions:

Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance object
that is being tested.

Maintenance
Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This is an
administered more descriptive name of the external device alarm

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL",
"NO BOARD", "DISABLED", "EXTRA BD".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or aborted.
A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is provided for each
MO.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test environment

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-580

test environment
This command will test the environment monitoring and control capabilities
including emergency transfer in any cabinet.

Synopsis
test environment location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test environment
test environment schedule
test environment 1 sh
test environment 1 l r 25
test environment 01 l r 25
test environment 01 l r 25 schedule
test environment 2 l c
test environment 3 c

Description
The test environment command performs hardware diagnostic tests of the
environment monitoring and control, and emergency transfer functions of a
technician specified cabinet. This command will test both Processor Port
Network (PPN) cabinets and Expansion Port Network (EPN) cabinets. Circuit
packs involved are the Processor circuit pack (PPN simplex systems), the
Duplication Interface circuit pack (PPN duplex systems) and EPN Maintenance
circuit packs. The tone/clock circuit pack is involved in tests of the ring
generator.
There are 8 Maintenance Objects involved in this testing. DC-POWER tests
power availability, battery charging and temperature functions in SCC cabinets
only. EMG-XFER tests emergency transfer status, and EXT-DEV tests external
(i.e. AUDIX) alarm status for both the SCC and MCC cabinet systems. POWER
tests battery backup, AC-POWER tests AC power availability, CARR_POW tests
carrier DC power availability, CABINET tests air flow and temperature, RING_
GEN tests ringing voltage are tested in MCC cabinets only.
Note that the long test of CARR_POW includes a power recycle test for
non-Processor Element (SPE) carriers and is destructive. There is one instance of
CARR_POW for each carrier in the cabinet.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test environment

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-581

NOTE:
The processor carrier and its duplicate if present as well as any EPN
control carrier or an SCC carrier will not be recycled. All port carriers are
recycled, and service is interrupted for each port carrier. If a carrier
containing an active EI is recycled, communications with that cabinet will
be disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled,
all ports in the cabinet or port network will have service disrupted.

Defaults
The default cabinet is cabinet 1. Defaults for the remaining parameters are short
with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
location

The location the cabinet number. The cabinet number is one or two
digits from 1 to 3 with leading zeros allowed. Cabinet 1 is the PPN with
2-3 referring to some optional EPN.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This includes both destructive and nondestructive
tests for this command.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test environment," the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1-3)],[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’],[’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test environment

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-582

Error Messages
If the entered cabinet location is greater than two characters or otherwise invalid,
the following error message is displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the indicated EPN is not available, the following message is displayed:
EPN is not available

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message is displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that
is being tested. For all but the CARR-POW maintenance object,
only the cabinet value is displayed. For the CARR-POW
maintenance object, both the cabinet and carrier values are
displayed.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"
"DISABLED.”

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test environment 1" to test a MCCPPN cabinet.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test environment

Page 8-583

test environment 1

TEST RESULTS
Port
01
01
01A
01B
01C
01D
01E
01
01
01
01

Maintenance Name
POWER
AC-POWER
CARR-POW
CARR-POW
CARR-POW
CARR-POW
CARR-POW
EMG-XFER
CABINET
EXT-DEV
RING-GEN

Alt. Name Test No. Result
5
PASS
79
PASS
127
PASS
127
PASS
127
PASS
127
PASS
127
PASS
124
PASS
122
PASS
120
PASS
118
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test environment 2" where cabinet 2 is an SCC cabinet.

test environment 2

TEST RESULTS
Port
02
02
02
02
02

Maintenance Name
DC-POWER
EMG-XFER
EXT-DEV
RING-GEN
RING-GEN

Alt. Name Test No. Result
5
PASS
124
PASS
120
PASS
117
PASS
118
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The long test will recycle power in some specified cabinet on non-SPE and
maintenance board carriers and is destructive. Specifically, the ’a’ carrier of
PPNs and EPNs does not have power recycled. In PPNs containing duplicated
SPEs the ’b’ carrier also does not have power recycled.
All port carriers are recycled, and service is interrupted for each port carrier. If a
carrier containing an active EI is recycled, communications with that cabinet will
be disrupted. If a carrier containing an active tone-clock board is recycled, all
ports in the cabinet or port network will have service disrupted.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-584

test hardware-group
This command allows a user to perform a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the
whole system, a carrier, cabinet, spe, or board. The tests will vary according to
the configuration of the system and the specified command options.

Synopsis
test hardware-group [ system | carrier carrier location |
cabinet cabinet location | board board location | spe ]

[ print | schedule ]

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: inads, init.

Examples
test hardware-group system
test hardware-group system print
test hardware-group carrier 1a
test hardware-group carrier 1a schedule
test hardware-group cabinet 2
test hardware-group board 01c07
test hardware-group board 01c07 schedule
test hardware-group spe
test hardware-group spe print
test hardware-group spe schedule

Description
The "test hardware-group" command will run a series of tests on all the hardware
on the entire system, an individual carrier, cabinet, spe, or board. The tests will
vary depending on options chosen and board types. Each individual test will
exercise diagnostics on all the hardware in the specified hardware group and
return results of the test along with any possible error codes. Concurrent testing
is done to enhance performance, therefore, test results are displayed on the SAT
in the order they are received. Consequently, test results of one maintenance
object may be intermixed with test results of other maintenance objects.
Because the tests in the "test hardware-group" command are not destructive, the
tests performed on a particular maintenance object with either the ’short’ or the
’long’ option of the "test hardware-group" command may not be the same as the
corresponding demand tests.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-585

A hardware-group command executing in the foreground may be aborted by
either pressing the ’cancel’ key on the SAT or by entering the "cancel
hardware-group" command on a different SAT.
However, if the system technician wishes to cancel a "test hardware-group"
command running in the background the "cancel hardware-group" command
needs to be entered on any SAT.
A canceled "test hardware-group" command can be resumed at the point it left
off by entering the "resume hardware-group" command on the SAT. Restarts are
not allowed for "test hardware-group" commands entered with either the
"all-ports" option or the "spe-interchange" option.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters

carrier location

A ’carrier location’ represents the carrier to be tested and is entered
as UUC format where ’UU’ is a valid cabinet number (1-3) and the ’C’
represents any value between A-E. The type of carrier may be port, or
processor. In the case of a port carrier, all universal port and
tone-clock boards (see reference 4) and its affiliated MOs residing in
the specified carrier are tested. For a processor carrier, all SPE
complex and tone-clock boards and its affiliated MOs are tested.

cabinet location

A ’cabinet location’ represents the cabinet to be tested. It can be any
value between 1-3. All PN and PNC related MOs plus cabinet specific
MOs, including maintenance boards and environment (ring
generator, battery, power, emergency transfer, external alarms, fans,
and temperature) will be tested if they reside in the specified ’cabinet
location’.

board location

A ’board location’ represents the physical location of the board and is
entered as ’UUCSS’ format, where ’UU’ is a valid cabinet number
(1-3), ’C’ is a carrier number between A-E, and ’SS’ is the slot position.
All MOs on the specified ’board location’ including ports will be
tested.

print

This will cause the report to be printed if a printer is linked to the SAT.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [5] for more details.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Page 8-586

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group" the
following message will be displayed:
board

cabinet

carrier

spe

system

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group board"
the following message will be displayed:
Enter board location: [cabinet (1-3);
carrier (A-E);slot(00-20)]

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group
cabinet" the following message will be displayed:
Enter cabinet (1-3)

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group carrier"
the following message will be displayed:
Enter carrier location:
[’cabinet’(1-3)]; carrier (A-E)

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group system"
the following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test hardware-group spe"
the following message will be displayed:
Entry is not required

Error Messages
If there is another "test hardware-group" active the following message will be
displayed:
Command aborted - another hardware-group
test already in progress

If an "add station" command is entered for a non-customer translated port at the
same time as it is being tested because of the "test hardware-group" command
with the ’all-ports’ option the request to "add station" will fail and the following
message will be displayed:
Object in use; please try later

If an invalid physical location is specified with the "test hardware-group board"
command the following message will be displayed:
Board invalid

If an unassigned board is specified with the "test hardware-group board"
command the following message will be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-587

Board not assigned

If an invalid carrier is specified with the "test hardware-group carrier" command
the following message will be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

If an invalid cabinet is specified with the "test hardware-group cabinet" command
the following message will be displayed:
Invalid cabinet specified

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

FORM INPUT
Once the user has entered the desired action (test hardware-group) and the
object (board, carrier, etc.), then the user is presented with an options form.
Test sequence

This allows the user to specify whether the short (nondestructive) or
the long (more comprehensive and still nondestructive) test sequence
should be exercised.

Test Repetition

This allows the user to enter either ’repeat’ with a corresponding
repeat value (between 1 and 99) or ’continuously’. The repeat option
will cause each test to be executed the number of times specified on
each physical object. The continuously option, on the other hand, will
cause all tests on all the hardware specified to be executed until the
CANCEL key is hit or the ’cancel hardware-group’ command is run.

count:

This field allows the technician to enter a repeat value between 1 and
99. If the ’test sequence’ field is set to continuously, then this field is
removed from the screen. When the ’test sequence’ field is set to
repeat, then this field is added to the screen.

Auto-page?

This option provides the ability to continue testing and display of test
results by providing a new screen every time the SAT screen is filled
with test results. The screen does not scroll to accommodate new
results; instead a new screen is provided after the current screen fills
up.
This option is not allowed if the ’background’ option has been chosen.
If the ’auto-page’ option is not specified, the SAT screen will not be
refreshed once it is filled with test results and testing will stop until the
user enters the ’page’ key to continue or ’cancel’ key to halt the testing.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Background?

Page 8-588

This option provides the ability to run the command in the background
thus freeing up the SAT. The error results will be tabulated in the error
log but no results will be displayed on the terminal.
This option may not be used if the ’continuously’ option or the
’auto-page’ option is specified.

Failures?

This option will select only failing test results to be displayed on the
test results screen. Test results which pass or abort are not displayed.
The ’failures’ option has no effect if entered with the ’background’
option.

All-ports?

The ’all-ports’ option will allow testing of all customer translated line
and trunk ports and also a set of line and trunk ports without customer
translations. Untranslated ports for the following board types will be
tested:

Table 8-7.

Test of ‘all ports’ option for the following
boards:

Board Number

Description

TN413

Digital Line

TN417

Auxiliary Trunk

TN429

Direct Inward/Outward Dialing Trunk

TN436

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

TN437

Tie Trunk

TN438

Central Office Trunk

TN439

Tie Trunk

TN447

Central Office Trunk

TN458

Tie Trunk

TN459

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

TN464C

Universal DS1

TN465

Central Office Trunk

TN467

8 port Analog line

TN468

16 port Analog line

TN479

16 port Analog line

TN497

Tie Trunk

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Table 8-7.

Page 8-589

Test of ‘all ports’ option for the following
boards: — Continued

Board Number

Description

TN556

ISDNBRI Line

TN722B

DS1 Tie Trunk

TN726B

Data Line

TN735

MET Line

TN742

8 port Analog Line

TN746

16 port Analog Line

TN747B

Central Office Trunk

TN753

Direct-Inward-Dial Trunk

TN754

Digital Line

TN760C

Tie Trunk

TN762B

Hybrid Line

TN763C

Auxiliary Trunk

TN767

DS1 Interface

TN769

Analog Line with Message Waiting

TN784

Digital Line

TN785

16 port Analog Line

TN2135

Italian 16 Port Analog Line

TN2136

Digital Line

TN2138

International Central Office Trunk

TN2139

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

TN2140

Tie Trunk

TN2144

Analog Line

TN2146

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

TN2147

Central Office Trunk

TN2149

Analog Line

TN2180

16 port Analog line

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

SPE-interchange?

Page 8-590

The ’spe-interchange’ option will allow for the planned
interchange of duplicated SPEs and subsequent
testing of both the active and standby SPEs.

test hardware-group system

Page 1 of 1

TEST HARDWARE-GROUP SELECTIONS
Select the desired options for the specified test.
Test sequence: short
Test repetition: repeat
count: 1

Output OPTIONS:
Auto-page? n
Background? n
Failures? n

HARDWARE OPTIONS:
All-ports? n
SPE-interchange? n

Field Help
Following are the help message that the system technician will see upon tabbing
to the specified field and pressing the HELP key.
Test sequence

Enter short or long

Test Repetition

Enter repeat or continuously

count:

Enter repeat number between 1-99

Auto-page?

n(o) y(es)

Background?

n(o) y(es)

Failures?

n(o) y(es)

All-ports?

n(o) y(es)

SPE-interchange?

n(o) y(es)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Page 8-591

Field Error Message
Following are the error message that will be displayed on the screen. The
message are displayed when the system technician tabs out of a field and the
validation routines are executed. In the following messages, an "x" represents
what was entered by the user.
Test sequence

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP

Test Repetition

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP
"x" The background option cannot be chosen with continuous
testing

count:

Entry must be all digits
Entry out of range

Auto-page?

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP
"x" The auto-page and background options may not both be
activated

Background?

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP
"x" The background option cannot be chosen with continuous
testing
"x" The auto-page and background options may not both be
activated

Failures?

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP

All-ports?

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP

SPE-interchange?

"x" is an invalid entry, please press HELP

Output
If the ’background’ option was chosen then the following message is displayed:
Command started in background mode

Progress information will be displayed on the SAT screen for a "test
hardware-group" command run in the foreground. While testing is in progress, a
running count of MOs tested, the total number of MOs to be tested, and the
current pass number will be displayed on the screen.
If the all-ports option is entered the following message will be displayed before
testing has begun:
Preparing unadministered ports for testing

If the "failures" option was selected and no tests fail the following message will be
displayed:
No failing test results available

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-592

If no tests are available for the MOs in the specified hardware group the following
message is displayed:
No tests available for MOs in the
specified hardware group

If the spe-interchange option was selected and the command was run from a
non-PPNSAT the following message is displayed while the interchange takes
place:
SPE interchange in progress, please wait

If the spe-interchange option was selected and the command was run from the
PPNSAT, the interchange will be the last operation to run and then the SAT will be
logged off as part of the interchange.
If an interchange cannot be performed the following message is displayed:
Cannot perform SPE interchange,
for information use ’status spe’

The responses to a "test hardware-group" command run in the foreground will be
displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data displayed for each test
result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that has been tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that has been tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Page 8-593

Test No.

The actual test that has been executed.

Result

An indicator as to whether the test failed, passed or was aborted.
Sometimes a maintenance object cannot be tested and one of the
following test results will be displayed:
NO BOARD
The board is administered but not inserted.
EXTRA BD
The wrong type of board is inserted in this slot.
DISABLED
This maintenance object has been disabled, either through a
demand maintenance command ("disable MO") or by an internal
maintenance action.
SKIPPED
This maintenance object is busy with other maintenance activity.
Hardware-group maintenance will not preempt other types of
testing, not even background maintenance.

Error Code

A numerical description of why the test failed or was aborted.

For the following output example, assume that the board in port network 1, carrier
c, slot 7 is an analog board with three ports administered. The command that
was entered was "test hardware-group system" and a repeat with count of 3 was
chosen.

test hardware-group system

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C07
01C07
01C0703
01C0702
01C0703
01C0701
01C0702
01C0703
01C0702
01C0701
01C0701

Maintenance Name
ANL-BD
ANL-BD
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name Test No. Result
51
PASS
52
PASS
35
PASS
35
PASS
48
PASS
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS
36
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS

Error Code

Testing system, 11070 of 12300 (90%) MOs tested for repetition 1

For the following output example, the command that was entered was "test
hardware-group system" and the background option was chosen.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test hardware-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-594

test hardware-group system
Command started in background mode

Feature Interactions
Test hardware-group
Only one "test hardware-group" command can be active at any given time.

TTI
If the "test hardware-group" command is issued with the ’all-ports’ option when
the TTI background task is active, some unadministered ports may not be tested.
In addition, active alarms on line ports may be cleared by this task. The "status tti"
command may be used to determine the state of the TTI background task.

Add Station
If a "add station" command is entered for an untranslated port at the same time
as it is being tested because of the "test hardware-group" command with the
’all-ports’ option, the request to "add station" will fail and the following message
will be displayed:
Object in use; please try later

Trunk Administration
If an attempt is made to add an unadministered trunk port to a trunk group at the
same time as it is being tested because of the "test hardware-group" command
with the ’all-ports’ option, the request will fail and the following message will be
displayed:
Object in use; please try later

Save Translation
If the "test hardware-group" command is issued with the ’all-ports’ option when a
translation save operation is active, some unadministered ports may not be
tested. All other hardware will be tested normally.

Hardware Alarms
When a hardware error is detected by the "test hardware-group" command the
hardware goes through the standard escalation strategy. Alarms are raised on
hardware that manifest ’hard’ errors. This alarming strategy is the same,
regardless of whether the ports are translated or not.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test inads-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-595

System Interaction
The performance of "test hardware-group" is affected by call processing traffic,
administration activity, choice of the ’short’ or ’long’ option, whether the ’all-ports’
option was chosen, whether the ’spe-interchange’ option was chosen, and other
demand maintenance activity.

Scheduled and Periodic maintenance
When a "test hardware-group" command is entered, all activity related to
scheduled background maintenance, periodic background maintenance, and
data audits is suspended for the duration of the execution of the "test
hardware-group" command. When a "test hardware-group" command is
canceled or when the "test hardware-group" command completes, all suspended
periodic, scheduled, and data audits background maintenance activity will be
restarted where it left off.

test inads-link
This command will perform hardware diagnostic tests from the inads port that is
accessible through the maintenance board to an OSS telephone number.

Synopsis
test inads-link [1 | 2]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
test inads-link
test inads-link 1
test inads-link 2

Description
The test inads-link command attempts to make a call over the inads port on the
maintenance board to verify the INADS alarm notification process. By default, the
link to the first OSS telephone number is tested. If there is an alarm pending to be
reported or the call is in progress or up, then the test will be aborted. If the alarm
origination to the OSS telephone number to be tested is disabled, the test
generates an informative error and the test continues. The test will wait 2 minutes
before executing to allow the remote maintenance technician to logoff freeing the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test inads-link

Page 8-596

line. The line must be free so the system can place a call to INADS. A local SAT
user entering the "test inads-link" command need not log off for the system to
place a call to INADS, but the two minute delay still exists.
Once the call is answered by INADS, the system will send a message with a test
alarm type. INADS acknowledges receipt of the message and creates a trouble
ticket. The trouble ticket will be closed immediately and have a "INADS LINK
TEST" message entered in the description field. If an alarm is raised while the test
call is up, the system will not send an alarm message over the existing link. The
normal retry mechanism will be followed, which means an attempt to make a call
to INADS to report the error will take place seven (7) minutes later. An INADS
trouble ticket will be created only if the connection is successfully established,
and a message is sent to the system acknowledging that INADS received the
system message.
The "Maintain Process Circuit Packs" field must be set to yes on the inads and
technician permission forms. This will provide permissions to execute the "test
inads-link" command. The field can be changed by executing a "change
permission login" command.
There will be no alarms raised on the system as a result of the "test inads-link"
command. Attendant alarm and acknowledgment lamp states will not be
changed as a result of the command. The test will not be run during periodic or
scheduled maintenance.

Defaults
The test will default to test the link to the first OSS telephone number.

Parameter
1

This option causes testing of the link to the first OSS telephone number.

2

This option causes testing of the link to the second OSS telephone number.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test inads-link" the following
message will be displayed:
[‘1’ or ‘2’]
Or press CANCEL to cancel the command
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-597

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
If the test passed then the following message will be displayed:
Command successfully completed

If the test failed, because the link was up or because there was an active alarm
that the switch needs to report or there was a problem with the call, the following
message will be displayed:
Command failed

NOTE: An entry is made in the error log describing why the inads-link test failed.

Feature Interactions
None.

test interface
This command will test a processor interface board.

Synopsis
test interface location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-598

Examples
test interface 01a1 l
test interface 01b2 s r 2
test interface 01b2 s r 2 schedule
test interface b1 l r 25
test interface a2

Description
The test interface command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the
technician specified processor interface circuit pack. In addition to testing the PI
board, the tests will examine the protocol and link interface that is transmitted
over the board.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

Parameters

location

The location (cabinet-carrier-position) of the processor interface. The
position determines which processor interface circuit pack will be
cleared. A position of 1 is the first processor interface in the carrier,
while a position of 2 is the second processor interface in the carrier.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-599

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test interface" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B), pos(1-2),
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the specified carrier is not the active PE, the following message will be
displayed:
Command must be executed from active SPE

If the technician-entered cabinet and carrier is invalid for a PPN, the following
message will be displayed:
Invalid port-network specified

If the technician-entered carrier is not a valid carrier, the following message will
be displayed:
Invalid carrier specified

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test interface

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-600

If the technician-entered carrier is not active, the following error message will be
entered:
Board invalid

If the specified carrier/position processor interface circuit pack is not inserted,
but the specified carrier is active, the following error message will be displayed:
No such MO’s lname/pname

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test isdn-testcall

Page 8-601

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot) of the maintenance object
that is being tested. With this particular maintenance object, the
port address represents the carrier associated with the particular
processor interface board.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test interface a1".

test interface a1

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A1
01A1

Maintenance Name
PI-SCI
PI-BD

Alt. Name Test No. Result
231
PASS
52
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test isdn-testcall
This command starts an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call.

Synopsis
test isdn-testcall group number/member number minutes minute number
schedule

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test isdn-testcall

Page 8-602

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test isdn-testcall 80/1
test isdn-testcall 80/1 schedule
test isdn-testcall 78/2 minutes 10
test isdn-testcall 78/3 minutes 100 schedule

Description
The test isdn-testcall command starts an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call in the
asynchronous method. The trunk to originate the ISDN-PRI test call from is
specified. If the test results are "PASS" the test call is started. A test result of
"ABORT" means that a resource wasn’t available (i.e. B-channel,
Maintenance/Test circuit pack). A test result of "FAIL" denotes that the outgoing
ISDN-PRI test call was not established.

Defaults
The duration of the test call defaults to 8.4 or 9.6 seconds.

Parameters
group number

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group.

member number

The member number is an administered number identifying a
particular trunk within a trunk group.

minute number

The duration of the test call specified in minutes (1-120).

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed
in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test isdn-testcall" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter group #/member # [’minutes’ (1-120)],
[’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test isdn-testcall

Page 8-603

Error Messages
If the specified format of the trunk location is incorrect, the following message is
displayed:
Format invalid

If the specified trunk group or member range is invalid, the following message is
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

If a trunk group and member is not specified, the following message is
displayed:
Must specify group/member pair

If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members administered,
the following message is displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned
but with no member

If the specified trunk group member is not administered, the following message
is displayed:
Group member not assigned

If the specified trunk is not an ISDN-PRI trunk, the following message is
displayed:
Invalid non ISDN-PRI trunk specified

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message is
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If an ISDN-PRI test call has already been started, the following message is
displayed:
There is a test call already in progress

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test isdn-testcall

Page 8-604

Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the trunk object xxx/yyy, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO [for example, see "ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN
Trunk)" section error code description Test Number 258].

For the following output example the command entered was "test isdn-testcall
80/1".

test isdn-testcall 77/1

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port
01B1501

Maintenance Name
ISDN-TRK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
077/001
258
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Additional data is available after running the test. See the status isdn-testcall
command for details on how to access the additional data.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test journal-printer

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-605

Only one ISDN trunk can be tested per port network at a time. Once testing is
completed, another ISDN trunk can be tested in that port network.
The maximum number of asynchronous outgoing test calls running, depends on
the number of Maintenance/Test circuit packs in the system.

test journal-printer
This command will perform tests on the journal printer links.

Synopsis
test journal-printer [ pms-log | wakeup-log ] [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear
] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test journal-printer pms-log l
test journal-printer pms-log l schedule
test journal-printer wakeup-log r 2
test journal-printer wakeup-log r 2 schedule
test journ pm r 3
test journ pm r 3 schedule

Description
The test journal-printer command will perform hardware diagnostics on the link
between the switch and one of the technician specified journal printer links.
There are two types of journal printer links (pms-log wakeup-log).
For general information on journal printer links, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "busyout pms-link" manual pages.
For information on what a journal printer is and does, see the second paragraph
in the ‘‘Description’’ section of the ‘‘status journal-link’’ manual pages.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test journal-printer

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-606

Parameters
pms-log

This will test the link to the pms logging printer. The maintenance name
for the pms-log printer, displayed on the test results form on output, is
PMS-PRNT.

wakeup-log

This will test the link to the wakeup logging printer. The maintenance
name for the wakeup-log printer, displayed on the test results form on
output, is JNL-PRNT.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test journal-printer", the
following object command word choices will be displayed:
pms-log

wakeup-log

Error Messages
If the link is not administered, the following error message will be displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If no tests can be found for the link, the following message will be displayed:
No tests for this MO

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test journal-printer

Page 8-607

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. If testing the
pms-log printer link the maintenance name will be PMS-PRNT, else
if testing the wakeup-log printer link the maintenance name will be
JNL-PRNT.

Alt. Name

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL",
"DISABLED".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test journal-printer pms-log".

test journal-printer pms-log short

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
JRNL-LINK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
215
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test led

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-608

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link will sometimes interfere with
the maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a
busy state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may
delay the recovery of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a
component only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the
technician needs to be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The
busyout command is used to do this, and will cause the link to be torn down. If
the link is already down, the busyout command will stop periodic re-setup trys on
the link.

test led
This command will perform a test on all the LEDs in a specified cabinet. The test
consists of turning all the LEDs on all circuit packs on and then off.

Synopsis
test led [ all | cabinet number ] [ short | long ] repeat number

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test led
test led all r 2
test led cabinet 1
test led c 1
test led 1 long

Description
The test led command will validate that the specified cabinet exists. Once the
range of circuit packs is determined, the test LED command will turn on all LEDs
on the circuit packs contained in each carrier until all affected carriers are lit.
Once all the LEDs are on there will be a 2 second pause and then all the LEDs
will be turned off in the same order as they were lit. Once all of the repeat cycles
are completed, all affected LEDs will be restored to the current status.
On a duplex PPN, only the long option will test the leds in the standby SPE. When
executing the test led long command, the standby Processor, Memory and
Packet Control circuit pack LEDs can take up to 20 seconds to light.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test led

Page 8-609

The following LEDs are NOT lighted by the test led command:
■

SPE Select LEDs on the Duplication Interface Circuit Packs.

■

Power Unit LEDs.

■

The yellow (amber) LED on the tape drive.

Defaults
The default for the command is "all" with a repeat of 1 and short in a duplex
system.

Parameters
all

All LEDs in all carriers will be tested.

cabinet number

The number of the cabinet that will be tested. Each carrier in the
cabinet will complete testing before the next carrier is started.

short

In a simplex system the short and long option are identical and will
turn on and off all leds in the specified port network. In a duplex
system, the short option will NOT affect the leds in the standby SPE
carrier in the PPN.

long

In a simplex system the short and long option are identical and will
turn on and off all leds in the specified port network. In a duplex
system, the long option will affect the leds in the standby SPE carrier
in the PPN.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test is repeated.
"Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test led" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter [’all’ or ’cabinet’ (1-3)],
[’long’ or ’short’ ], [’repeat’ (1-100)]

Error Messages
If there is an error in the input to the command, where "x" is the invalid input, the
following message will be displayed:
"x" is an invalid identifier;
press RETURN to execute modified command

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test link

Page 8-610

Output
If the command is successful, the following message will be displayed:
Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test link
This command will perform a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the specified
link.

Synopsis
test link link-id [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test link 1
test link 1 schedule
test link 3 l
test link 2 sh
test link 2 r 2
test link 2 l c

Description
The test link command will validate that the link specified is administered. Then
the tests for a link will be executed on the specified link. The results of the test
along with any possible error codes are displayed.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-611

Parameters

link-id

A link number between 1-8 that identifies the link to be tested. The link
number is assigned via the communication-interface links form.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only once.
The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem
exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls
may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test link" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter link number(1-8), [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the link number is not within the valid range, then the following error message is
displayed:
Link out of range, please press HELP

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-612

If the link has not been administered, then the following message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If there are no tests for the current MO, the following message is displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

Port address on the Processor Interface board associated with
the link-id being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

Following is an sample output for the command "test link 1 long".

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test maintenance

Page 8-613

test link 1 long

TEST RESULTS
Port
01AXX01
01AXX01
01AXX01
01AXX01

Maintenance Name
PI-LINK
PI-LINK
PI-LINK
PI-LINK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
182
PASS
183
PASS
234
PASS
233
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test maintenance
This command will test the EPN maintenance circuit pack in any Expansion Port
Network control carrier.

Synopsis
test maintenance location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test maintenance 2
test maintenance 3 schedule
test maintenance 2 sh
test maintenance 2 l c

Description
The test maintenance command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a
technician specified maintenance circuit pack. Specifying cabinets 2 through 3
will allow testing of any connected EPN maintenance circuit packs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-614

For the EPN maintenance circuit pack, the SAT interface, EI link, reset and sanity
functions are tested. The long test resets the EPN maintenance circuit pack
causing the EPNSAT link to be dropped and is destructive.

Defaults
The default for the parameters are short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical position of the desired
maintenance circuit pack. The location consists of a cabinet number
and carrier letter. The cabinet number is one or two digits from 2 to 3
with leading zeros allowed.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This includes both destructive and nondestructive
tests for this command.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against
the maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test maintenance", the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(2-3)];carrier(A)],
[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-615

Error Messages
For any system, if the entered value is invalid, the following message will be
displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the port network specified is not available, the following message will be
displayed:
EPN is not available

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that
is being tested. For this maintenance object, only the cabinet and
carrier values are displayed.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance name will always be MAINT.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"
"DISABLED."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test maintenance 2".

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test memory

Page 8-616

test maintenance 2

TEST RESULTS
Port
02A
02A
02A
02A

Maintenance Name
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT
MAINT

Alt. Name Test No. Result
106
PASS
229
PASS
303
PASS
337
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The long test on EPN maintenance circuit packs will cause the EPNSAT link to be
dropped. The reset test is the last test and drops this link.

test memory
This command will test memory circuit packs.

Synopsis
test memory location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

Examples
test memory
test memory a
test memory a schedule
test memory 1a2
test memory b1 sh
test memory b l r 25
test memory a l c

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test memory

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-617

Description
This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on any one memory circuit
packs or on all memory circuit packs in the technician specified carrier. Neither
the short nor the long test is destructive when testing memory.

Defaults
The cabinet default is always cabinet 1. For SPE simplex systems, the default
carrier is the "a" carrier. For SPE duplex systems, there is no default carrier. The
defaults for the remaining parameters are short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical position of the desired memory
circuit pack. The location consists of a cabinet number and carrier
letter. The cabinet number is always optional and must be a "1" or a
"01" if entered. The carrier must be either "a" or "b" for SPE duplex
systems. For SPE simplex systems, the carrier must be "a" if entered.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. The long version does not include any destructive
tests for this command.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test memory" on a simplex
SPE system the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A),

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test memory
[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-618

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test memory

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-619

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test disk" on a duplex SPE
system the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B),
[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
For SPE duplex systems, if no carrier is entered on the command line, the
following message will be displayed:
A carrier must be specified for duplex systems

For any system, if the length of the user entered parameter exceeds five (5), the
following message will be displayed:
Entry invalid

On any system, if any cabinet other than "1" or "01" is specified, the following
message will be displayed:
Only cabinet ’1’ may be specified for this command

If a carrier is entered which is not valid for the current system configuration (for
example, anything other than "A" or "B" for SPE duplex and anything other than
the ’a’ carrier for SPE simplex), the following message will be displayed:
Carrier out of range;
Enter ’a’ if SPE simplex, ’a’ or ’b’ if SPE duplex

If the standby SPE was specified, and it does not respond, the following
message will be displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use ’status system’

If an invalid position number is entered, the following message will be displayed:
Board position is invalid

If a non administered circuit pack location is entered, the following message will
be displayed:
Memory Board not assigned

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test memory

Page 8-620

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that
is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested will be
MEMORY.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test memory 1b".

test memory 1b

TEST RESULTS
Port
01B
01B

Maintenance Name
MEM-BD
MEM-BD

Alt. Name Test No. Result
87
PASS
631
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test modem-pool

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-621

test modem-pool
This command will perform hardware diagnostic tests on the specified modem
pool group or an individual member of a specified group.

Synopsis
test modem-pool group/member [ short | long ] repeat number schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: init, inads, system
technician.

Examples
test modem-pool 1
test modem-pool 1 schedule
test modem-pool 1/3 l r 2
test modem-pool 1/3 l r 2 schedule
test modem-pool 2 r 2
test modem-pool 2 l

Description
The "test modem-pool" command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all of
the members that are in a modem-pool group or, on a single member if the
optional member number is supplied.
If the member number is supplied, what is tested depends on the type of
modem-pool group, Combined or Integrated. A Combined modem-pool group
consists of pairs of Analog and Digital Line ports. One pair of Analog and Digital
Line ports used for modem-pooling is called a conversion resource. An
Integrated group, on the other hand, consists of modem-pool circuit packs each
of which contains two conversion resources. Therefore, when a member number
is specified for a Combined modem-pool group, one conversion resource is
tested and when a member number is specified for an Integrated modem-pool
group, two conversion resources are tested.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with a repeat number of 1.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test modem-pool

Page 8-622

Parameters
group number

The group number is assigned from administration. The group
number may be any administered group from 1-5.

member number

The member number is assigned from administration. A member is a
pair of analog and digital line ports (or two pair for the Integrated
modem-pool case). The member number may be any administered
group member from 1-32.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and
nondestructive tests.

repeat number

This number specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. The number may be any integer between 1 and 100.
For example, if number = 2, then each test in the sequence is
executed twice.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed
in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test modem-pool" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter group #(1-5) or group #/member #,
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)],
[’schedule’] or press CANCEL to cancel the command

Error Messages
If the "test modem-pool" command is entered from a login for which the
command is not valid, then the following message will be displayed:
"test" is an invalid entry; please press HELP

If the group or member numbers entered are not digits, then the following
message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the group number or member number entered is not within the valid range of
groups or members, the following message will be displayed:
Boards not assigned

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test modem-pool

Page 8-623

If the group is not administered or is administered but with no members, the
following message will be displayed:
Group not assigned, or group
assigned but with no member

If the a member is assigned, but the port is does not exist in the system, then the
following message is displayed:
Port not assigned

If there are no tests found for the maintenance object, the following message will
be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. This is
always MODEM-PT.

Alt. Name

This field is not applicable to this command.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test network-control

Page 8-624

In the following output example, the command "test modem-pool 1/3" was
entered.

test modem-pool 1/3 short

SPE B

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C0701
01C0701

Maintenance Name
MODEM-PT
MODEM-PT

Alt. Name Test No. Result
98
PASS
99
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test network-control
This command will test a network control board.

Synopsis
test network-control location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test network-control
test network-control a l
test network-control b sh r 2
test network-control b l r 25
test network-control a
test network-control a c

Description
The test network-control command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a
technician specified network control circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test network-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-625

Defaults
The default for the command is cabinet 1, carrier a, short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
location

The location designates the desired network control board carrier in a
High or Critical Reliability System (i.e. "a" or "b").

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test network-control" the
following message will be displayed for a simplex switch configuration:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test network-control

Page 8-626

For a duplex switch configuration, the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B),
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the SPE is not active, the following message will be displayed:
Command must be executed from active SPE

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:
"entered value" is an invalid identifier;
press RETURN to execute modified command

If the NETCON board is not TN777B, the following message will be displayed:
Must install TN777B circuit pack

If the entered standby carrier cannot be retrieved, the following message will be
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If there aren’t any tests found for this MO, the following message will be
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test network-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-627

use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested. This object is always associated with
cabinet 1. For maintenance objects: DATA-BD, SW-CTL,
12V-PWR, CARD-MEM, the slot and circuit fields of port address
are blank. The administered data channel maintenance object,
DATA-CHL, uses the "XX" as the slot address and has a circuit
number between 01 and 04. The carrier field has a value "A" for
the control carrier A in a simplex system, and "A" or "B" for control
carriers A and B in a duplex system.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. The
maintenance objects are: DATA-BD for Network Control board,
SW-CTL for Switch Control Arch-angel, DATA-CHL for
administered data channel, 12V-PWR for 12 volt power supply
unit on Network Control board, CARD-MEM for flash memory card
on Network Control board. 12V-PWR and CARD-MEM are shown
only when the Network Control board is TN777B.

Alt. Name

This field contains the extension number of the DATA-CHL if
administered. For other maintenance objects, this field is not
applicable and left empty.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test packet-control

Page 8-628

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

An indicator such as "PASS" for test passed, "FAIL" for test failed,
"ABORT" for test was aborted, "NO BOARD" for no Network
Control Board was inserted.

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the individual test
failed or was aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to
"Test No." is provided for each maintenance object.

For the following output example, assume that the entered command was "test
network-control a".

test network-control a

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A
01AXX01
01AXX01
01AXX01
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
DATA-BD
DATA-CHL
DATA-CHL
DATA-CHL
SW-CTL
SW-CTL
SW-CTL
SW-CTL
12V-PWR
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM
CARD-MEM

Alt. Name Test No. Result
52
PASS
4001
109
PASS
4001
110
PASS
4001
111
PASS
95
PASS
92
PASS
94
PASS
324
PASS
701
PASS
695
PASS
696
PASS
697
PASS
698
PASS
699
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test packet-control
This command will test the specified packet-control.

Synopsis
test packet-control location [ short | long ][ repeat (1-100) | clear ] [ schedule ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-629

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms

Examples
test packet-control
test packet-control A
test packet-control B
test packet-control 1A
test packet-control 1B
test packet-control a short
test packet-control a s repeat 5
test packet-control b s r 5
test packet-control b long clear
test packet-control b l r 25

Description
The test packet-control command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a
technician specified packet-control circuit pack.

Defaults
For simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1, carrier A.
For duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1, but there is no default
for the carrier.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test packet-control

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-630

Parameters
location

The location only applies to duplicated configurations. If the
configuration is a simplex, the location parameter is not used and thus
is not valid. For duplicated configurations, a "location" represents the
carrier that the packet-control resides on in the system. Valid locations
are either 1A or 1B.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. The long version does not include any destructive
tests for this command.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if on exists against the packet-control) is cleared or a single test
in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
packet-control the test sequence will be run only once. The long clear
option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during
testing. The short clear option only clears alarms related to tests in the
short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test packet-control", the
following message is displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)]; carrier (A-B),
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If this command is executed on the standby SPE and this SPE is busy at the
moment, the following will be displayed:
Standby SPE busy;
See status system for more details

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test packet-control

Page 8-631

Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
Port

This field represents the Cabinet-Carrier in which the
Packet-Control resides.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being busied out.

Alt. Name

This field is not used in this output display.

Test No.

This field lists the test run on the packet-control.

Result

An indicator as to whether the object was successfully busied out
("PASS", "FAIL", "ABORT", "NO BOARD", "DISABLED", "EXTRA
BD").

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the coeds according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, the command test packet-control 1B long was
entered. Note that carrier B is the active carrier in these example outputs.

test packet-control 1B l

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name

01B
01B
01B

PKT-CTRL
PKT-CTRL
PKT-CTRL

Alt. Name Test No.

Command successfully completed

583
584
585

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pkt

Page 8-632

For the following output example, the command test packet-control 1B was
entered. Note that carrier B is the active carrier in these example outputs.

test packet-control 1B

TEST RESULTS
Port
01B

Maintenance Name
PKT-CTRL

Alt. Name Test No.
585

Result
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

For the following output example, the command test packet-control 1A was
entered. Note that carrier A is the standby carrier in these example outputs.

test packet-control 1A

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
PKT-CTRL
PKT-CTRL
PKT-CTRL

Alt. Name Test No.
586
583
585

Result
PASS
PASS
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
The reset packet-control test (586) does not run on the active packet-control.
This test is part of the standby packet-control test sequence as illustrated in the
Output section of this manual page.

test pkt
This command will test the Packet bus on the specified PPN or EPN.

Synopsis
test pkt port-network pn number [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pkt

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-633

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test pkt port-network 1 l
test pkt port-network 2 sh r 2
test pkt port-network 2 sh schedule
test pkt port-network 1 l r 25
test pkt port-network 2
test pkt port-network 1 c

Description
The test pkt runs a series of diagnostic packet bus tests that return results of the
test along with possible error codes to the user.

Defaults
The default for this command is short with a repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pkt

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-634

Parameters
pn number

The individual Packet bus to be tested is entered as "NN" where "NN"
represents the port network number of the port network to have its
Packet bus tested. A port network number (1-3) may be entered.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test pkt" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter ’port-network’, port network number (1-3),
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the technician does not enter all digits for the port-network number, the
following message will be displayed:
Entry must be all digits

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pkt

Page 8-635

If the port network on which the desired Packet bus resides is unavailable, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

For any system, if the length of the user entered parameter "port network"
exceeds 3 the following message will be displayed:
Entry invalid

If the packet bus is not activated the following message will be displayed:
Packet Bus is not activated,
check system-parameters maintenance form

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message is
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

A port network number is displayed (1-3).

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pms-link

Page 8-636

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO [for example, see MO section on
"PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)"].

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test pkt port-network 1".

test pkt port-network 1

TEST RESULTS
Port
PN 01
PN 01
PN 01

Maintenance Name
PKT-BUS
PKT-BUS
PKT-BUS

Alt. Name Test No. Result
571
PASS
572
PASS
573
PASS

Error Code

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test pms-link
This command will test a property management system link.

Synopsis
test pms-link [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pms-link

Page 8-637

Examples
test pms-link sh r 5
test pms-link l
test pms-link
test pms-link c
test pms-link c sch

Description
The test pms-link command will perform the specified property management
system link tests on the specified pms link, by checking to see if the link is
accessible and then performing a reset on the link. The above scenario is for the
long test only.
For general information on PMS links, see the second paragraph in the
"Description" section of the "busyout pms-link" manual pages.
For information on what a PMS is and does, see the second paragraph in the
‘‘Description’’ section of the ‘‘status pms-link’’ manual pages.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pms-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-638

Parameters
short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This executes a more comprehensive and longer version of the diagnostic
tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive tests.

repeat
number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to be
repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a single
test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only once.
The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command
queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by
the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen. Refer to
the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification [1] for more
details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test pms-link" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the link is not administered, the following error message will be displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If no tests can be found for the link, the following message will be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pms-link

Page 8-639

Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

With this object the port field is blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of MO that is being tested (always PMS-LINK).

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following example, the command entered was "test pms-link l".

test pms-link long

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
PMS-LINK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
214
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The maintenance of a particular component on a link may interfere with the
maintenance of the link itself. Maintenance can put a link component in a busy
state causing link set-up to fail. Frequent attempts at re-setup of a link may delay
the recovery of a faulty component, due to the maintenance test of a component
only taking place when the component is idle. Therefore, the technician needs to
be able to disable the attempted re-setup of a link. The busyout command is
used to do this, and causes the link to be torn down. If the link is already down,
the busyout command stops periodic re-setup tries on the link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-640

test port
This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port circuit.

Synopsis
test port location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test port 01c1101 l
test port 01c1101 l schedule
test port 02e1502 sh r 2
test port 02d1201 r 4
test port 01c1101 c

Description
The test port command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port
circuit. In most cases, tests will be performed on hardware that is connected to
the port. The technician must specify the port on the port carrier board which the
tests are to be performed on.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-641

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the port to be tested and is
entered as "UUcSSpp" where "UU" represents the cabinet number (1-3), "c"
represents the carrier, "SS" represents the slot position, and "pp" represents
the circuit.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This executes a more comprehensive and longer version of the diagnostic
tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive tests.

repeat
number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to be
repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a single
test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only once.
The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem
exists. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls
may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the command
queue and is executed at the specified time. The information displayed by
the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen. Refer to
the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification [1] for more
details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test port" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter port location, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the port location is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Port/Board invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test port

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-642

If the EPN on which the port resides is not accessible, the following message will
be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the board on which the port resides is not configured in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Port not assigned

If there are no tests found for this maintenance object, the following message will
be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station, and it
contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the trunk
group number and yyy is the member number. It contains P/xxx
when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private CO
line group number.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pri-endpoint

Page 8-643

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot
7, circuit 1 is an analog port. The command that was entered was "test port
1c0701".

test port 01c0701 short

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C0701
01C0701
01C0701

Maintenance Name
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name Test No. Result
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test pri-endpoint
This command will perform hardware diagnostic tests on all port circuits
(B-channels) that are associated with the PRI endpoint extension.

Synopsis
test pri-endpoint extension [ short | long ] repeat number schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init, nms.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-644

Examples
test pri-endpoint 25012
test pri-endpoint 45002 sh
test pri-endpoint 45892 l
test pri-endpoint 24389 sh r 4
test pri-endpoint 34899 l r 6
test pri-endpoint 34912 l r 5 schedule
test pri-endpoint 93483 r 2
test pri-endpoint 10022 c
test pri-endpoint 92349 schedule

Description
The test pri-endpoint command performs hardware diagnostic tests on all port
circuits (B-channels) that are associated with the specified PRI endpoint.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with repeat number of 1.

Parameters
extension

The extension of the PRI endpoint to be tested. The number of digits in
an extension is determined by the dial-plan.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of
nondestructive diagnostic tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the user presses HELP after entering "test pri-endpoint", the following message
is displayed:
Enter extension number, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100)], [’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test pri-endpoint

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-645

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

If the EPN on which the PRI endpoint resides is not accessible, the following
message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not a PRI endpoint, the
following message will be displayed:
Extension assigned to object other than pri-endpoint

If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system, the
following message will be displayed:
Board not inserted

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a port-by-port and test-by-test basis with one
line of data displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. The name for
PRI endpoint port is "PE-BCHL".

Alt. Name

The alternate way of identifying the maintenance object. This field
contains the specified extension number of the PRI endpoint.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test processor

Page 8-646

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, the command "test pri-endpoint 22501" was
entered. Assume that the PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet
1, carrier B, slot 20, circuit 1 to 3.

test pri-endpoint 22501 short

page 1 of 1

TEST RESULTS
Port
01B2001
01B2001
01B2001
01B2001
01B2002
01B2002
01B2002
01B2002
01B2003
01B2003
01B2003
01B2003

Maintenance Name
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL
PE-BCHL

Alt. Name
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501
22501

Test No. Result
36
PASS
255
PASS
256
PASS
257
PASS
36
PASS
255
PASS
256
PASS
257
PASS
36
PASS
255
PASS
256
PASS
257
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test processor
This command will test the processor circuit pack.

Synopsis
test processor location [ short | long ] clear schedule

Error Code

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test processor

Page 8-647

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test processor
test processor schedule
test processor a
test processor 1a
test processor b sh
test processor a l c

Description
The test processor command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a
technician specified processor circuit pack.

Defaults
For SPE simplex systems, the location is optional and defaults to cabinet 1,
carrier "a". For SPE duplex systems, the cabinet default is again cabinet 1 but
there is no default for the carrier. Defaults for the remaining parameters are short
with a repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test processor

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-648

Parameters
location

The location designates the physical position of the desired processor.
The location consists of a cabinet number and carrier letter. The
cabinet number is always optional and must be a "1" or a "01" if entered.
The carrier is an optional "a" for SPE simplex systems but is required for
SPE duplex systems and must be either "a" or "b" in this case.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. The long version does not include any destructive
tests for this command.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only once.
The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test processor" on a simplex
SPE system the following message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test processor

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-649

If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test processor" on a duplex
SPE system the following message will be displayed:
Enter [cabinet(1)];carrier(A-B),
[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’(1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
For SPE duplex systems, if no carrier is entered on the command line, the
following message will be displayed:
A carrier must be specified for duplex systems

For any system, if the length of the user entered parameter exceeds three (3), the
following message will be displayed:
Entry invalid

On any system, if any cabinet other than "1" or "01" is specified, the following
message will be displayed:
Only cabinet ’1’ may be specified for this command

If a carrier is entered which is not valid for the current system configuration (for
example, anything other than "A" or "B" for SPE duplex and anything other than
the ’a’ carrier for SPE simplex), the following message will be displayed:
Carrier out of range;
Enter ’a’ if SPE simplex, ’a’ or ’b’ if SPE duplex

If the standby SPE was specified, and it does not respond, the following
message will be displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use ’status system’

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test shadow-link

Page 8-650

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier) of the maintenance object that
is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested is MEMORY.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test processor a".

test processor a

SPE B

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
PROCR
PROCR
PROCR
PR-MAINT
PR-MAINT
PR-MAINT
PR-MAINT
PR-MAINT
MEMORY
MEMORY

Alt. Name Test No. Result
77
PASS
80
PASS
82
PASS
102
ABORT
103
ABORT
106
PASS
228
PASS
229
ABORT
87
PASS
631
PASS

Error Code

1018
1018

1018

Command successfully completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test shadow-link
This command allows the technician to test the shadow link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test shadow-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-651

Synopsis
test shadow-link [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test shadow-link l
test shadow-link sh r 2
test shadow-link sh r 2 schedule
test shadow-link c

Description
The test shadow-link command performs hardware diagnostics for the shadow
link between the two duplication-interface circuit packs. This command works
only with a High or Critical Reliability System. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for more details.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

Parameters

short

The short and long test sequence both execute only test #318.

long

The short and long test sequence both execute only test #318.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test shadow-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-652

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test shadow-link" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test shadow-link

Page 8-653

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address will always be blank for this command.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance name will always be SHDW-LNK for this
command.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The test number will always be 318 for this command.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL,"
"DISABLED,".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test shadow-link"

test shadow-link

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
SHDW-LNK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
318
PASS

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

Error Code

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-654

test signaling-group
This command performs a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the specified
signaling group. The tests vary according to whether a short or long option is
specified.

Synopsis
test signaling-group group identifier [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]
schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test signaling-group 1
test signaling-group 1 repeat 10
test signaling-group 2 short
test signaling-group 4 long
test signaling-group 4 long clear
test signaling-group 2 schedule

Description
The test signaling-group validates that the specified signaling group is
administered and runs a series of diagnostic tests that return results of the test
along with possible error codes to the user.
A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated
single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test signaling-group

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-655

Parameters
group identifier

The signaling group identifier is an administered number associated
with each signaling group (1-8).

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and
nondestructive tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against
the maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test signaling-group", the
following is displayed:
Enter group identifier (1-8), [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the specified group identifier is non numeric or out of range, the following
message is displayed:
Signaling group invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test signaling-group

Page 8-656

If the specified group identifier is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
No signaling group assigned

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message is
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The signaling group number (1-8) of the signaling group that is
being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not Applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO [for example, see MO section on
"ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)"].

For the following output example, assume that the command "test
signaling-group 1" was entered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test sp-link

test signaling-group 1

Page 8-657

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port
1
1
1

Maintenance Name
ISDN-SGR
ISDN-SGR
ISDN-SGR

Alt. Name Test No. Result
636
PASS
639
PASS
637
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Additional data is available after running a test. See the status signaling-group
command for details on how to access the additional data.

test sp-link
This command performs a set of hardware diagnostic tests on the system printer
link (if one exists). The tests vary according to whether a short or long option is
specified.

Synopsis
test sp-link [ short | long ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test sp-link
test sp-link sh
test sp-link l
test sp-link schedule
test sp-link sh sch

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test sp-link

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-658

Description
The test sp-link command validates that the system printer link is administered
and runs a series of diagnostic tests that return results of the test along with
possible error codes to the user.
The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer over which
jobs can be printed. This link is created by administering the system printer
extension and setting up a call to the system printer.

Defaults
The default for the command is short.

Parameters
short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test sp-link", the following is
displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the system printer link is not administered, the following message is displayed:
Link not administered or not enabled

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message is displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message is displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test spe-standby

Page 8-659

All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested. This will
always be "SYS-PRNT".

Alt. Name

Not applicable. Will always be blank.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test - "PASS", "ABORT", "FAIL", "NO
BOARD", "DISABLED", "EXTRA BD".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example the command entered was "test sp-link".

test sp-link

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
SYS-PRNT
SYS-PRNT

Alt. Name Test No. Result
215
PASS
213
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test spe-standby
This command allows the technician to test the standby Switch Processing
Element.

Synopsis
test spe-standby [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-660

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test spe-standby long
test spe-standby l
test spe-standby s r 2
test spe-standby c

Description
The test spe-standby command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the
standby Switch Processing Element (SPE) in a duplex SPE system. This
command tests all MOs in the standby MO. The STBY-SPE MO itself does not
have any defined tests. Instead tests are run on the following MOs when the test
spe-standby command is run. Refer to the sections for these MOs for more
details. This command is only for a High or Critical Reliability System. This
command will run the following tests on the standby SPE:
9. MEMORY
10. SHDW-LNK
11. SHDW-CIR
12. SPE_SELEC
13. DUPINT
14. DATA-BD
15. DATA-CHL
16. SW-CTL
17. PROCR
18. PR-MAINT
19. 12V-PWR
20. CARD-MEM
21. FL-DATA
22. PI-BD
23. PI-PT
24. PKT-CTRL

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-661

Defaults
The defaults for this command are short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test spe-standby" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed,
then the following message is displayed:
Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later

If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed;
use the "refresh spe-standby" command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test spe-standby

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-662

If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the
SPE select switches when this command is executed, then the following
message is displayed:
Active SPE locked via select switches;
Standby SPE memory not refreshed

If the standby SPE is busy with another task, then the following message is
displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use "status system 1"

If the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed, then the
following message is displayed:
Standby SPE not available;
for information use "status system 1"

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested. This maintenance object will display
the cabinet and carrier location of the standby SPE only.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a data module.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED,".

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the standby SPE is located in
carrier B and the command entered is "test spe-standby".

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test station

test spe-standby

Page 8-663

SPE A

TEST RESULTS
Port
01B
01B
01B
01B
.
.
.

Maintenance Name Alt. Name Test No. Result
SHDW-CIR
285
SHDW-CIR
284
SPE-SELECT
278
DUPINT
315
.
.
.
.
.
.

Error Code
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
.
.
.

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
The testing of the standby SPE maintenance object makes the standby SPE
unavailable to take over for the active SPE.

test station
This command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port circuit
that is associated with the extension.

Synopsis
test station extension [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init, nms.

Examples
test station 81709 l
test station 85136 s r 2
test station 85036 l r 25
test station 85036 l r 25 schedule
test station 84297 r 4
test station 81709 c

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-664

Description
The test station command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an individual
port circuit assigned to that extension. Tests will be performed on the hardware
that is connected to the port. The technician must specify the extension and a
translation is automatically done to the physical port location.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-665

Parameters
extension

The extension of the station to test. The number of digits in an
extension is determined by a dial-plan.

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

! WARNING:
Since the "clear long" options clear all counters if tests pass, it is
possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a
problem exists. In some cases customer service might degrade
since calls may be routed over defective equipment.
schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test station" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter extension, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the extension is incorrect, the following error message will be
displayed:
Extension invalid

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test station

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-666

If the EPN on which the port resides is not accessible, the following message will
be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the extension is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Extension not assigned

If the object associated with the specified extension is not a station, the following
message will be displayed:
Extension exists but assigned to a different object

If the board that contains the port is not inserted in the system, the following
message will be displayed:
Board not assigned

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains the extension when the object is a station.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test synchronization

Page 8-667

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the port in cabinet 1, carrier c, slot
7, circuit 1 is an analog port and extension 81902 is connected to that port. The
command that was entered was "test station 81902".

test station 81902 short

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C0701
01C0701
01C0701

Maintenance Name
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE
ANL-LINE

Alt. Name Test No. Result
35
PASS
48
PASS
36
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test synchronization
This command updates all the boards involved with synchronization.

Synopsis
test synchronization [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test synchronization

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-668

Examples
test synchronization r 3
test synchronization sh r 1
test synchronization sh r 1 schedule
test synchronization l

Description
The test synchronization command makes sure that the proper sources are
being used for timing synchronization and updatse the boards with the correct
synchronization parameters. The tone-clocks, DS1s, and EIs are all sent
down-link messages to place them in the correct synchronization configuration
given the current on-line synchronization reference.
The synchronization subsystem provides error free digital communication
between the switch and other PBXs, COs, or customer premise equipment. The
subsystem is made up of: TDM bus clock, DS1 trunk board, and maintenance
and administration software resident in the SPE.

Defaults
The default for this command is short with a repeat of 1.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test synchronization

Page 8-669

Parameters
short

This causes the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This executes a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This involves both destructive and nondestructive
tests. For the synchronization MO, the same nondestructive test is run
for both the short and long tests: test 417. If stratum-3 synchronization
is administered, an additional nondestructive test (649) is also run.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against synchronization maintenance object) is
cleared or a single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are
registered against synchronization maintenance object then the test
sequence will be exercised only once. The long clear option forces a
clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short
clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The information
displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature
specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test synchronization", the
following message will be displayed:
Enter [’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100)
or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If there are no tests found for synchronization maintenance object, the following
message will be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tdm

Page 8-670

Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

Not applicable.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance object being tested is Synchronization.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No.

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

The command that was entered was "test synchronization short".

test synchronization short

TEST RESULTS
Port

Maintenance Name
SYNC

Alt. Name Test No. Result
417
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test tdm
This command tests all the time slots on a bus associated with a PPN or an EPN.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-671

Synopsis
test tdm port-network pn number [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ][
schedule ]

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test tdm port-network 1 l
test tdm port-network 2 sh r 2
test tdm port-network 2 sh sch
test tdm port-network 1 l r 25
test tdm port-network 2
test tdm port-network 1 c

Description
The test tdm command performs hardware diagnostic tests on the time slots of
the desired bus.

Defaults
The default for this command is short with a repeat of 1.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-672

Parameters
pn number

The individual TDM bus to be tested is entered as "NN" where "NN"
represents the port network number of the port network to have its TDM
bus tested. Both halves ("a" and "b") of the TDM bus will be tested. A
port network number (1 - 3) may be entered with or without a leading
zero (0).

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the TDM-BUS maintenance object) is
cleared or a single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are
registered against the TDM-BUS maintenance object then the test
sequence will be exercised only once. The long clear option forces a
clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing. The short
clear option only clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated and
then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to schedule
execution of the command. The command is then placed in the
command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test tdm" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter ’port-network’, port network number (1-3),
[’long’ or ’short’], [’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the technician does not enter all digits for the port-network number, the
following message will be displayed:
Entry must be all digits

If the technician enters a Port Network number that is not administered, the
following message will be displayed:
Port Network number not assigned

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tdm

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-673

If the port network on which the desired TDM bus resides is unavailable, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

For TDM-BUS maintenance object the port network number and
the bus (A or B) is displayed.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance object being tested is TDM-BUS.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tone-clock

Page 8-674

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test tdm port-network 1".

test tdm port-network 1

TEST RESULTS
Port
PN 01A
PN 01A
PN 01A
PN 01B
PN 01B
PN 01B

Maintenance Name
TDM-BUS
TDM-BUS
TDM-BUS
TDM-BUS
TDM-BUS
TDM-BUS

Alt. Name Test No. Result
294
PASS
296
PASS
297
PASS
294
PASS
296
PASS
297
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test tone-clock
This command will test a tone/clock board.

Synopsis
test tone-clock location [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ] schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

Examples
test tone-clock 01a l
test tone-clock 01b l schedule

Description
The test tone/clock command performs hardware diagnostic tests on a
technician specified tone/clock circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tone-clock

Page 8-675

Defaults
The default for the command is short with a repeat of 1.

Parameters
location

A "location" represents the physical position of the tone/clock to be
tested and is entered as "UUc" where "UU" represents the cabinet
number, and "c" represents the carrier. A cabinet number (1 - 3) may
be entered with or without a leading zero (0).

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive
tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is to
be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until the
alarm (if one exists against the tone clock circuit pack) is cleared or a
single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against the
tone clock circuit pack then the test sequence will be exercised only
once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are
encountered during testing. The short clear option only clears alarms
pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed in
the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test tone-clock" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter [[cabinet(1-3)];carr(A-B)],[’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If an identifier greater than 3 (three) characters is entered, or the cabinet entered
is not a digit (number), the following message will be displayed:
Identifier invalid

If the carrier entered is invalid, the following message will be displayed:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tone-clock

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-676

Invalid carrier specified

If the cabinet entered is not within the valid range of cabinets or the cabinet is not
administered, the following message will be displayed:
Cabinet number not assigned

If there is no tone/clock board at the specified location, one of the following
messages will be displayed:
Board not inserted
Board not assigned

If the specified cabinet carrier location is that of a switch node, the following
message will be displayed:
Switch Node carrier specified; invalid command for SN carrier

If the cabinet carrier location entered is that of an EPN that is not available, the
following message will be displayed:
EPN is not available

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy; Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The tone clock circuit pack maintenance object will only display
the cabinet-carrier location.

Maintenance Name

The maintenance objects being tested is TONE-BD, TONE-PT
and TDM-CLK.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test trunk

Page 8-677

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test tone-clock 1a".

test tone-clock 1a

TEST RESULTS
Port
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A
01A

Maintenance Name
TONE-BD
TONE-BD
TONE-PT
TONE-PT
TDM-CLK
TDM-CLK
TDM-CLK
TDM-CLK
TDM-CLK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
46
PASS
52
PASS
40
PASS
41
PASS
148
PASS
149
PASS
150
PASS
151
PASS
574
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test trunk
This command will test an entire trunk group or a specific trunk group member.

Synopsis
test trunk group number/member number [ short | long ][ repeat number | clear ]
schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, cust, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test trunk

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-678

Examples
test trunk 78 l
test trunk 80/1 sh r 2
test trunk 78/2 l r 25
test trunk 78/2 l r 25 schedule
test trunk 80
test trunk 80 schedule
test trunk 78 r 4
test trunk 78 c

Description
The test trunk command performs hardware diagnostic tests on an entire trunk
group or an individual trunk group member, depending on the options entered
by the technician.

Defaults
The default for the command is short with the repeat of 1.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test trunk

Page 8-679

Parameters
group number

The group number is an administered number associated with each
trunk group (1-99).

member number

The member number is an administered number identifying a
particular trunk within a trunk group (1-99).

short

This will cause the command to execute a series of nondestructive
diagnostic tests.

long

This will execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the
diagnostic tests. This may involve both destructive and
nondestructive tests.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the sequence is
to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer between 1 and 100.

clear

This option causes the test sequence (short or long) to repeat until
the alarm (if one exists against the maintenance object) is cleared or
a single test in the sequence fails. If no alarms are registered against
the maintenance object then the test sequence will be exercised
only once. The long clear option forces a clear of all alarms if no
errors are encountered during testing. The short clear option only
clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is validated
and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow the technician to
schedule execution of the command. The command is then placed
in the command queue and is executed at the specified time. The
information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer
instead of the screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System
Printer feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test trunk" the following
message will be displayed:
Enter group # or group #/member #, [’long’ or ’short’],
[’repeat’ (1-100) or ’clear’], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the trunk location is incorrect, the following error message would
be displayed:
Format invalid

If the trunk group or member range is invalid, the following message will be
displayed:
Trunk or trunk group invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test trunk

Page 8-680

If a software fault is encountered while the command is executing, the following
message will be displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If the trunk group is not administered, the following message will be displayed:
Group not assigned, or group assigned but with no member

If the trunk group member is not administered, the following message will be
displayed:
Group member not assigned

If there are no tests found for this maintenance object, the following message will
be displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the maintenance
object that is being tested.

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object. This
field contains xxx/yyy when the object is a trunk, where xxx is the
trunk group number and yyy is the member number. It contains
P/xxx when the object is a private CO line, where xxx is the private
CO line group number.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tsc-administered

Page 8-681

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the release failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO.

For the following output example, assume that the command that was entered
was "test trunk 78".

test trunk 78

TEST RESULTS
Port
01C1505
01C1505

Maintenance Name
CO-TRK
CO-TRK

Alt. Name Test No. Result
078/001
3
PASS
078/001
36
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
None.

test tsc-administered
This command performs switched services request to run a heartbeat test on any
type of administered Temporary Signaling Connection (TSC).

Synopsis
test tsc-administered signaling group number/tsc index repeat number schedule

Permissions
The following default logins may execute this command: system technician,
inads, init.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tsc-administered

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-682

Examples
test tsc-administered 1
test tsc-administered 1/1 repeat 2
test tsc-administered 1/2 schedule

Description
The test tsc-administered command runs a switched services request to run the
TSC heartbeat test is for administered Temporary Signaling Connection’s (TSCs)
on a signaling group.

Defaults
The default for the command is a repeat of 1.

Parameters
signaling group number

An administered number associated with each signaling
group (1-8).

tsc index

A number associated with each TSC in a signaling group.

repeat number

The "number" specifies how many times each test in the
sequence is to be repeated. "Number" may be any integer
between 1 and 100.

schedule

When the "schedule" option is specified, the command is
validated and then a scheduling form is displayed to allow
the technician to schedule execution of the command. The
command is then placed in the command queue and is
executed at the specified time. The information displayed by
the command is sent to the system printer instead of the
screen. Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer
feature specification [1] for more details.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "test tsc-administered" the
following message will be displayed:
Enter group # (1-8) or group #, [/tsc index (1-64)],
[’repeat’ (1-100)], [’schedule’]

Error Messages
If the format for the specified signaling group or the signaling group and TSC is
incorrect, the following message is displayed:
Format invalid

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
test tsc-administered

Page 8-683

If the specified signaling group number is out of range, the following message is
displayed:
Signaling group invalid

If the specified signaling group is not administered, the following message is
displayed:
No signaling group assigned

If the specified signaling group has no TSC assigned or the specified TSC is
unadministered, the following message is displayed:
No TSC assigned

If the specified TSC number is out of range, the following message is displayed:
Tsc index invalid

If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT, the following message is
displayed:
Error encountered, can’t complete request

If no tests can be found for the associated MO, the following message is
displayed:
No tests for this MO

If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command,
then a message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and
the conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires
the user to restart the command, then the following message will be displayed:
Command resources busy;
Press CANCEL to clear, and then resubmit

If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use, then the
following message will be displayed:
All maintenance resources busy; try again later

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Page 8-684

Output
The responses will be displayed on a test-by-test basis with one line of data
displayed for each test result.
Port

The port address of the administered temporary signaling
connection that is being tested (signaling group no/tsc index).

Maintenance Name

The type of maintenance object that is being tested.

Alt. Name

Not applicable.

Test No

The actual test that is being executed.

Result

The result of the individual test -"PASS," "ABORT," "FAIL," "NO
BOARD," "DISABLED," "EXTRA BD."

Error Code

A system-generated number that tells why the test failed or
aborted. A detailed list of the codes according to "Test No." is
provided for each MO (for example, see MO section "TSC-ADM
(Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)").

For the following output example, the command that was entered was "test
tsc-administered 1/1".

test tsc-administered 1/1

TEST RESULTS
Port
1/1

Maintenance Name
TSC-ADM

Alt. Name Test No. Result
604
PASS

Error Code

Command Successfully Completed

Feature Interactions
Additional data is available after running the test. See the status tsc-administered
command for details on how to access the additional data.

upgrade software
This command allows the software text image, the flash component of the LMM
firmware, the MTP firmware, the Packet Control (PACCON) and the Processor
Interface (PI) firmwares to be upgraded. Save translation must be done before
this command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-685

Synopsis
Simplex/Duplex2
upgrade software

Permissions
The following logins may execute this command: system technician, inads, init.

Examples
Simplex/Duplex
upgrade software

Description
Simplex
The command verifies that a software card-mem is present and then, if present,
proceeds to reprogram the flash memory and perform a level-4 restart. During
the restart of the system, the system technician is prompted to replace the
software card-mem with the translation card-mem. Service is provided upon
completion of the system restart. Service down time is between 5 to 12 minutes.

Duplex
The command verifies that a software card-mem is present in the standby SPE,
programs the flash memory, resets the standby SPE, and prompt the system
technician to replace the software card-mem with the translation card-mem as in
the simplex case. An interchange of SPE’s is performed upon completion of a
successful standby upgrade. At the same time, the old active SPE is upgraded
automatically with the new software through similar swapping of card-mems. The
service disruption is between 1 to 4 minutes, which is less disruptive than the
simplex case.

Defaults
None.

2.

In this context, simplex is equivalent to the stand reliability option
In this context, duplex is equivalent to the high reliability option or critical reliability option.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Page 8-686

Parameters
None.

Help Messages
If the system technician presses HELP after entering "upgrade software," the
following message is displayed:
Entry is not required

If no card-mem is loaded into the system, the following message will be
displayed:
Software card-mem is not inserted in the system

If a wrong card-mem is loaded into the system, the following message will be
displayed:
Incorrect card-mem loaded; insert software card-mem

If the directory information on the software card-mem is corrupted or the
card-mem is not formatted properly, the following message will be displayed:
Software card-mem not readable; try another card-mem

If this command is in conflict with another currently executing command, then a
message will be displayed showing the login id of the conflicting user and the
conflicting command. The message is as follows:
’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict

If the checksum on the software card-mem is bad, the following message will be
displayed:
Bad checksum on software card-mem; try another card-mem

If the software upgrade failed in the standby SPE, the following message will be
displayed:
No response on upgrade status from standby SPE, command failed

If the software card-mem in the standby SPE is not replaced with a translation
card-mem within 2 minutes, the following message will be displayed:
No translation card-mem inserted
in the standby SPE, command aborted

If the flash text checksum failed after the standby upgrade, the following
message will be displayed:
Standby SPE text checksum failed, command aborted

If the software card-mem is not inserted in the active SPE within 2 minutes after
the prompting string: "REPLACE TRANSLATION CARD-MEM ON  WITH SOFTWARE CARD-MEM," the command has to be retried again
and the following message will be displayed:
No software card-mem inserted in active SPE; command aborted

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Page 8-687

If the SPE-select switches are thrown to prevent the SPE-interchange during a
software upgrade, the following message is displayed:
SPE select switches thrown; upgrade complete only on standby

If the standby SPE is not in the standby mode and is busy running tests, the
following message will be displayed:
Standby SPE busy with another task;
for information use ’status system’

If the standby SPE has not completed initialization, the following message will be
displayed:
Standby SPE memory not refreshed; Use ’refresh spe-standby’

If the active SPE cannot communicate with the standby SPE after the standby
SPE is properly upgraded, the following message will be displayed:
Upgrade failed; no communication with
standby after new software booted

If the SPE-interchange failed and the new software cannot be run in the active
SPE, the following message is displayed:
Software upgrade failed, could not perform an interchange

Output
The following is the output of a successful simplex upgrade upon entering the
"upgrade software" command:
INITIATING SOFTWARE UPGRADE
MEM-CARD CHECKSUMPASSED
REPROGRAMMING MTPPASSED
ERASING MEMORYPASSED
REPROGRAMMING SPEPASSED
FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM
PASSED
UPGRADE COMPLETE

REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM-CARD WITH TRANSLATION MEM-CARD


DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-688

Explanations and error recoveries to the above steps are as follows:
INITIATING SOFTWARE
UPGRADE:

This indicates that the system is proceeding to do a
software upgrade.

MEM-CARD CHECKSUM:

If the card-mem checksum fails, the system will reboot
without performing an upgrade. Retry the command with
another software card-mem.

REPROGRAMMING MTP:

If the MTP programming fails, the Manager I will not be
functional anymore. So the rest of the upgrade (if it occurs)
will not be visible. Nor will the MTP be present to monitor
the health of the processor. The only recovery procedure
is to power down and power up the system since the
presence of a software card-mem will cause a software
upgrade.

ERASING MEMORY:

The rest of the memory is being erased.

REPROGRAMMING SPE:

This shows the status of the reprogramming. A total of 7
Mbytes has to be reprogrammed. If the reprogramming
fails in the midst of upgrade, it will take the system into
SPE-down mode. In this mode, the system technician can
only reset the system or display alarms. The system
should be reset, and another upgrade attempt will be
done due to the detection of a software card-mem in the
system.

FLASH TEXT CHECKSUM:

If the checksum fails, the software may or may not be
healthy. But it will try to run for as long as it can until further
system reset due to system technician intervention.

REPLACE SOFTWARE
MEM-CARD WITH
TRANSLATION
MEM-CARD:

The system technician is prompted by a beep and this text
string on the Manager I to replace the software card-mem
with the translation card-mem. The system boots without
translation if the replacement is not done within 2 minutes.
The only way to recover from this is to replace the
card-mem and issue a reset system 3 to read in the
translations again.

UPGRADE COMPLETE:

This indicates that the software upgrade is completed.

Feature Interactions
System Restarts
An upgrade will cause a system restart. Simplex systems will result in a level-4
restart. Duplex system will undergo a level-2 SPE-interchange after the standby
is upgraded through a level-4 restart.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-689

Initcauses
Executing "display initcauses" shows that software upgrade and the level of
system reset being done.

Multi-user Contention
When this command is executing, all other maintenance commands will be
blocked. Exceptions to these are most of the status or display type commands.
All administrations commands are not blocked. It is the user’s responsibility to
make sure that no new translations are added between the last save translation
operation and the completion of the upgrade software command.

Recent Change History Log
The upgrade software command will not be logged for both simplex and duplex
systems. This is due to the clearing of memory during the level 4 reset.

Periodic and Scheduled Maintenance
Periodic and scheduled maintenance will be suspended while the upgrade
command is executing.

Error and Alarm Log
Error and alarm logs before the software upgrade will be lost.

Demand Busyout Objects
Maintenance objects that have been demand busyout will be released when the
processor reboots or interchanges during the software upgrade. If the command
is cancelled before the actual reboot or interchange starts, then all demand
busyout objects status will be preserved.

Standby SPE Maintenance
Data consistency alarms will be generated if the software in the active and
standby are not consistent.

Disabled Objects
All disabled objects retain their "disabled" status after a software upgrade
according to status recorded in the last successful save translation command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

8

Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids
upgrade software

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 8-690

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
General

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and
Correction

9

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-1

9

General
This chapter describes the fault isolation/correction procedures for the Packet
Bus and for the various MOs that use the Packet Bus. Because the Packet Bus is
shared by all circuit packs that must communicate on it, a faulty circuit pack can
disrupt communication over the Packet Bus. In addition, a circuit pack that does
not use the Packet Bus can cause service disruptions if the physical
configuration of the switch is being modified (this is discussed in more detail
later). For these reasons, isolating the cause of Packet Bus failure can be
complicated. In this chapter, a flowchart is provided to aid in this isolation effort,
as are detailed discussions of the tools and procedures used in the fault isolation
and correction.
This chapter is organized into several sections that provide introductory
information, as well as packet bus fault isolation and correction procedures. The
sections of the chapter are as follows:
■

‘‘Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance’’ discusses the
strategy and the requirements for performing remote maintenance and
on-site maintenance for the Packet Bus.

■

‘‘Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ discusses the tools
that are needed to isolate and correct Packet Bus faults.

■

‘‘Packet Bus’’ describes the Packet Bus, its use, and the types of faults
that can occur on the Packet Bus. A diagram that shows the physical and
logical connections between circuit packs connected to the Packet Bus is
also included.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Remote Maintenance versus On-Site Maintenance

Page 9-2

9

■

‘‘Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus’’ describes the various circuit
packs, ports, and endpoints that use the Packet Bus. The section
discusses how these maintenance objects interact, how a failure of one
maintenance object can affect another, and also the failure symptoms of
these maintenance objects.

■

‘‘Maintenance of the Packet Bus’’ describes the Packet Bus maintenance
software strategy. Similarities and differences between the Packet Bus
and the TDM Bus are discussed. An overview of the Fault Isolation and
Correction Procedures is also presented.

■

‘‘The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)’’ discusses the use of the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack in normal switch maintenance, as well as its
role in Packet Bus fault isolation. The standalone mode of the
Maintenance/Test (which is used to perform the Packet Bus Fault Isolation
and Correction procedures on-site) is discussed in detail.

■

‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart’’presents a flowchart that is used to
isolate a Packet Bus problem. This flowchart is the starting point for this
process, and it is used to determine if a failure of service is caused by the
Packet Bus itself or by another maintenance object on the Packet Bus.

■

‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ presents the procedures required to correct
either a problem with the Packet Bus itself or one that is caused by a
circuit pack connected to the Packet Bus.

The Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart is intended to be the normal starting
point for isolating and resolving Packet Bus problems. However, anyone who is
unfamiliar with Packet Bus maintenance should read the introductory sections to
gain a good understanding of the Packet Bus maintenance and the procedures
involved.

Remote Maintenance versus On-Site
Maintenance
Most packet bus fault isolation and repair procedures require a technician to be
on-site. This is true because a packet bus failure is caused by a hardware failure
of the packet bus itself or by a circuit pack that is connected to it. However, initial
diagnoses can be made via use of the flowchart presented in the ‘‘Packet Bus
Fault Isolation Flowchart’’ section of this chapter. However, before implementing
the Maintenance/Test Standalone Mode Procedure (described later) and the
Packet Bus Fault Correction Procedure, a technician must be on-site.
The flowchart as presented refers to the repair procedures in Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, for various MOs. When one of the
decision points is reached, a remote technician can refer to the appropriate
section and attempt to resolve any fault conditions. In addition, the remote
technician can examine some of the other MOs on the flowchart. Keep in mind
that if an MO that appears early on the flowchart fails, this failure can cause
alarms with MOs that appear later in the flowchart.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction

Page 9-3

9

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port (described in detail later in this chapter)
can give the remote technician information about the state of the packet bus.
This information can be obtained via the status system command and via the
PKT-BUS test sequence. As described later, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack
may or may not be present at a customer site, depending on system
configuration. If a Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not present, one must be
taken to the customer site.
In a high or critical reliability system, a Processor Interchange may resolve the
packet bus problem. This operation can be done remotely, and is discussed in
the ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ section in this chapter.

Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation
and Correction
The following list discusses several tools that are (or may be) required to perform
Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction. The technician should be provided
with these tools at the customer site:
■

TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack for use in standalone mode, as well
as the required connectors and cables. (Refer to the ‘‘The
Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)’’ section in this chapter.)

■

Replacement TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack may be needed.
Conditions for requirement, and the relevant implementation steps are
documented in the ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’ section in
this chapter.

■

Backplane pin-replacement kit may be required in the procedures
described in the ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Correction’’ section of this chapter. If
the kit is not available, replacement of a carrier may be required.

Packet Bus
Each port network has its own packet bus, and, accordingly, there is one packet
bus MO in each port network. The packet bus is not duplicated, as is the TDM
Bus. However, there are several spare leads on the packet bus and, in high and
critical reliability systems, these spare leads are used to recover from some
failures on the packet bus.

Packet Bus Usage
The packet bus carries ISDN-BRI signaling information for ISDN-BRI stations and
data modules and for ASAI adjunct connections. The TN556 ISDN-BRI circuit
pack is used for these connections. The SPE interface to the packet bus is the
TN778 Packet Control (in high and critical reliability systems, there is one TN778
in each SPE). For systems with multiple port networks, the TN570 Expansion
Interface is used to pass messages from the packet bus in one port network to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-4

the packet bus in its neighbor. The TN771 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack
(discussed in detail later) provides packet bus maintenance testing and
reconfiguration capabilities.

Packet Bus Faults
Two types of packet bus failures can occur:
■

Shorts. A short occurs when leads on the packet bus become connected
together. Such a connection can occur due to component failures on the
packet bus interface of a circuit pack, a failure of the cables between
carriers or the TDM/LAN terminators, or by pins being bent together on the
backplane. Usually, a failure that occurs during normal operation is
caused by a circuit pack failure. However, if the system configuration is
being modified (for example, circuit packs are being moved), the cause of
a subsequent packet bus failure is probably bent pins.

■

Opens. An open occurs when there is a break on the packet bus such that
the electrical path to the termination resistors is broken. Usually, this break
is caused by a failed TDM/LAN cable or by a failed TDM/LAN terminator.
The break can also be caused by a failure in the backplane of a carrier,
although this is unlikely.

Shorts on the packet bus occur much more often than do opens. This is because
the incorrect insertion of a circuit pack can cause leads to be shorted together. It
is possible for a circuit pack to be the cause of a packet bus fault but still exhibit
trouble-free operation. For example, the insertion of a TDM-only circuit pack
(TN754B Digital Line) could bend the packet bus pins on the backplane.
However, since the circuit pack does not communicate on the packet bus, the
pack is not affected by the problem.
Packet bus faults do not necessarily cause service interruptions. However, most
packet bus shorts do cause these interruptions. Depending on what leads are
defective, the system may be able to recover and continue to communicate. This
can be detrimental because it makes isolating the fault difficult. The
Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides the capability to detect, and, in some
cases, correct packet bus faults.

Packet Bus Connectivity
Various circuit packs communicate on the packet bus (see next section).
For details on ISDN-BRI and ASAI connectivity, refer to “BRI-PORT” and
“BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ” in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.
For details on Expansion Interface connectivity, refer to “EXP-INTF”.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-5

Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus
Four circuit packs can use the packet bus. The following list identifies and
discusses each circuit pack. An explanation of how each circuit pack assists in
packet bus maintenance is also included.
NOTE:
The MOs involved with each circuit pack are listed in brackets.
Documentation for each maintenance object is provided in Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.
■

TN778 Packet Control [PKT-CTRL] provides the SPE interface to the
packet bus, just as the TN777 Network Control does to the TDM Bus. All
traffic on the packet bus passes through the packet control.
The packet control can detect failures of certain control leads on the bus.
Such failures are indicated by an inability to transmit data. The packet
control can also detect data errors on the packet bus.

■

TN570 Expansion Interface [EXP-INTF] is used to connect the PNs in the
system. For systems that use the packet bus, all Port Network connections
must be made with TN570 circuit packs. All packet traffic between PNs
passes through a pair of TN570s (one in each port network).
The Expansion Interface can detect a subset of control lead failures
(though not as many as the packet control), and it can detect many data
lead failures via parity errors on received data.

■

TN556, TN2198 and TN2208 ISDN-BRI circuit packs [BRI-BD,
BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ] provides
connections for ISDN-BRI station sets and data modules and for ASAI
adjuncts. The Packet Bus is used to carry signaling information for sets
and data modules. The Packet Bus passes signaling information and ASAI
messages between the SPE and the ASAI adjunct. The ISDN-BRI circuit
pack has the same fault detection capabilities as the TN570 Expansion
Interface.

■

TN771D (or later) Maintenance/Test circuit pack is the workhorse of
packet bus maintenance. This circuit pack can detect all packet bus
failures for the PN in which it resides. In High and Critical Reliability
systems, the circuit pack enables the reconfiguring of the packet bus
around a small number of failed leads. The TN771D circuit pack provides
a standalone mode (that is, one that does not involve communication with
the SPE) for inspecting the packet bus for faults. This is a critical tool for
the packet bus fault correction procedures, which are described later.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-6

Effect of Circuit Pack Failures on the Packet Bus
A failure of any of the circuit packs described in the previous section can disrupt
traffic on the Packet Bus. Some failures cause actual Packet Bus failures with
corresponding alarms, while others cause service outages without alarming the
Packet Bus (although the failed circuit pack(s) should be alarmed).
The following list discusses the effects on the Packet Bus of a failure on each
circuit pack that uses the Packet Bus.
■

TN778 Packet Control. A failure of the Packet Control typically causes all
Packet traffic in the system to fail. As a result, ISDN-BRI sets are not able
to make or receive calls, and communication with an ASAI adjunct fails. A
failure of the Packet Control may also cause a failure of the Packet Bus
itself if the failure is on the interface circuitry. Otherwise, only the Packet
Control is alarmed.
In a High or Critical Reliability system, there is one TN778 Packet Control
in each SPE. If a Packet Control failure in the active SPE causes a Packet
Bus disruption, performing an SPE interchange may restore service. In
some cases, circuit pack failures may require that the circuit pack be
replaced before service is restored.

■

TN570 Expansion Interface. A failure of the Expansion Interface typically
causes all Packet traffic in the connected EPN to fail. If the failure is on the
Packet Bus interface, the Packet Bus may be alarmed as well.
In a High or Critical Reliability system, there is one EPN link in each control
carrier for each EPN. If an active Expansion Interface failure causes a
Packet Bus disruption, performing an Expansion Link switch may restore
service. In some cases, circuit pack failures may require that the circuit
pack be replaced before service is restored.

■

TN556 ISDN-BRI Circuit Pack. A failure of the ISDN-BRI circuit pack
typically causes some or all ISDN-BRI sets and data modules and/or an
ASAI adjunct connected to the circuit pack to fail to function. If the failure
is on the Packet Bus interface, the Packet Bus may be alarmed as well.

■

TN771 Maintenance/Test. A failure of the Maintenance/Test may cause
an incorrect indication of a packet bus failure or the inability to detect such
a failure. A failure of the packet bus interface of the circuit pack may
cause the packet bus to be alarmed.

A failure of the packet bus interface on any of the circuit packs discussed can
cause the packet bus to be alarmed. This is true because such a failure may
result in shorting packet bus leads together. This typically disrupts ALL packet
bus traffic in the affected port network. A failure of the packet bus in the PPN
affects packet traffic in the EPNs as well. Also, packet bus failures that do not
affect all endpoints on that packet bus may occur. Therefore, a packet bus failure
should not be ruled out even if some packet service is still present.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Maintenance of the Packet Bus

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-7

A circuit pack can fail in a manner such that it transmits bad data on the Packet
Bus. If the Packet Control fails in such a fashion, all Packet traffic is disrupted
(because all traffic requires the Packet Control). Likewise, such a failure on the
Expansion Interface may disrupt all Packet traffic in that port network.
However, if an ISDN-BRI circuit pack fails such that it transmits bad data, all
devices connected to the circuit pack fail to function. This failure may also
disrupt the entire Packet Bus whenever the circuit pack tries to transmit data.
Such a disruption may be indicated by Packet Bus alarms that occur and go
away, intermittent failures of other Packet circuit packs, and/or interference with
other connected endpoints. The failures mentioned are difficult to isolate
because of their intermittent nature. In most cases, the failed circuit pack is
usually alarmed, and all connected endpoints on the circuit pack are out of
service until the circuit pack is replaced. These symptoms help in isolating the
fault.

Maintenance of the Packet Bus
The following topics are discussed:
■

Comparison between the Packet Bus and the TDM Bus

■

Packet Bus Maintenance Software

■

Overview of Fault Correction Procedures

Packet Bus and TDM Bus: a Comparison
Although the Packet Bus is similar to the TDM Bus in many ways, there are some
important differences. For example, there are two physical TDM Busses in the
switch (refer to the TDM-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair
Procedures’’, for more information), and one of these busses can fail without
affecting the other (although half of the call-carrying capacity is lost in this case).
On the other hand, there is only a single Packet Bus in the switch, and a failure of
that bus can disrupt all traffic on the Packet Bus.
In High or Critical Reliability systems, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides
Packet Bus reconfiguration capabilities. This allows the Packet Bus to remain in
service with up to three lead failures. There is no corresponding facility on the
TDM Bus, where the second physical TDM Bus continues to carry traffic until
repairs are completed.
In addition, the system response varies according to the type of bus failure.
Specifically, a catastrophic TDM Bus failure (one that affects both TDM Buses)
disables ALL traffic in the system, while a catastrophic Packet Bus failure affects
only Packet traffic. This means that all TDM traffic is unaffected, while all BRI and
ASAI traffic does not work. The significance of this distinction depends on the
customer’s application. (For example, a customer whose primary application
requires ASAI would consider the switch to be out of service, while a customer

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Issue 1
April 1997

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Maintenance of the Packet Bus

Page 9-8

with a large number of Digital/Analog/Hybrid sets and a small number of
ISDN-BRI sets would probably not consider the Packet Bus failure a catastrophic
problem.) The only way a Packet Bus failure can affect TDM traffic is via possible
impact on system response time in a large switch due to ISDN-BRI endpoint
maintenance running. This should rarely happen because the Packet Bus
maintenance software is able to prevent this impact for most Packet Bus faults
(see the next section).

! CAUTION:
Since the correction procedures and some of the fault isolation procedures
for the Packet Bus are highly destructive to service throughout the system
(inasmuch as the procedures primarily involve removing circuit packs),
particular attention must be paid to nondestructive fault isolation. Also, for
the same reason, the time taken with destructive procedures must be
minimized. This is the major reason that maintenance of the Packet Bus and
of the Packet maintenance objects is described in such detail.

Packet Bus Maintenance Software
Packet Bus maintenance software involves the traditional set of error conditions,
tests, and alarms relevant to Packet Bus faults. These are described in the
PKT-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and
they are similar in design to the maintenance strategy for most maintenance
objects.
In addition, because a Packet Bus failure can cause all BRI/ASAI endpoints in
the affected Port Network (and their associated ports and circuit packs) to report
failures, special care must be taken to ensure that the flood of error messages
from the affected maintenance objects does not overload the system and
interfere with TDM Bus traffic. When such a failure occurs, maintenance of
Packet circuit packs is affected in the following manner:
■

ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-BD) in-line errors indicating possible Packet
Bus failures are placed into the error log, but are not acted upon.

■

ISDN-BRI port (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT) in-line errors indicating possible
Packet Bus failures are neither placed into the error log nor acted
upon.

■

ISDN-BRI endpoint (BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ) in-line error are
neither placed into the error log nor acted upon.

■

Circuit pack and port in-line errors that are not related to the Packet Bus,
or that indicate a circuit pack failure, are acted upon in the normal fashion.

■

Normal background maintenance (periodic and scheduled) is not
affected.

■

Foreground maintenance (for example, commands executed on the
Manager I terminal) are not affected.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Maintenance of the Packet Bus

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-9

These interactions allow normal, non-Packet, system traffic to continue
unaffected, and they reduce the number of extraneous entries into the
Error/Alarm Logs. If the Packet Bus failure is caused by a failed circuit pack, the
circuit pack should appear in the Error/Alarm Logs, which aids in fault isolation.
The following events indicate a Packet Bus failure that requires the actions in the
previous paragraph to occur:
■

In-line errors that indicate a possible Packet Bus failure reported by two or
more Packet circuit packs

■

Packet Bus Uncorrectable report from the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus
port (M/T-PKT)

■

Packet Bus Interface Failure from the Packet Control (PKT-CTRL)

If such a failure occurs, this information will be available in an Error Log entry for
PKT-BUS. Refer to the PKT-BUS section in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’, for more detailed information.

Overview of Fault Correction Procedures
This section gives an overview of the procedures used to (1) isolate the cause of
Packet Bus faults and to (2) correct the Packet Bus faults. These procedures are
applicable to High and Critical Reliability systems, and they are detailed fully
later in this chapter:
1. The first procedure attempts to determine if a circuit pack that interfaces
to the Packet Bus is the cause of the Packet Bus problem. The error and
alarm logs are examined for entries for these circuit packs, and the normal
maintenance procedures for those circuit packs are attempted.
2. If the Packet Bus problem still exists, port circuit packs (those in the
purple slots) are removed to look for circuit pack(s) that have failed and/or
have damaged the Packet Bus pins (a diagram of the backplane pins is
provided later).
3. If the Packet Bus problem is still not resolved, the same procedure is
attempted for the control complex circuit packs.
4. If the problem is still not resolved, or if the Packet Bus faults are known to
have open leads, a procedure is undertaken in which the bus terminators
and cables are replaced. If this does not resolve the problem, the carrier
connectivity of the port network is reconfigured to attempt to isolate a
faulty carrier.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-10

The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack
(TN771D)
Description
Packet bus reconfiguration is available only in high and critical reliability
systems. In such systems that use the packet bus, a Maintenance/Test is
required in each port network. In other configurations (for example, Standard
Systems, no packet bus use), the circuit pack is optional.

! CAUTION:
All TN771 circuit packs must be of TN771D vintage or later.

Normal Packet Functionality
The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port provides the packet bus testing and
reconfiguration capabilities. When the port is in service, the port continuously
monitors the packet bus for faults (or recovery from faults), and it reports this
information to packet bus maintenance.
The yellow LED on the TN771D Maintenance/Test circuit pack provides a visual
indication of the state of the packet bus, as follows:
■

Blinking at a rate of 1 per sec — the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port
cannot swap leads to correct a Packet Bus fault (that is, there are too
many faults). The Packet Bus may be unusable. If the failures detected
by the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port are open lead failures, the
Packet Bus may still be operating.

■

On steady — the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has swapped leads
on the Packet Bus. The Packet Bus is still operating.
NOTE:
Because the yellow LED on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack can
also be on steady when the other ports on the circuit pack are in use,
the ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack used for ISDN-PRI
trunk testing must be busied out before the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack is used to help resolve Packet Bus faults. This is done via the
busyout port PCSS02 and busyout port PCSS03 commands.
Also, be sure to release these ports when the process is completed.

■

Off — there is no Packet Bus fault present.
NOTE:
It takes 5 to 10 seconds for the LED to respond to a change in the
state of the Packet Bus.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-11

In normal switch operation, the Maintenance/Test provides the visual feedback of
the Packet Bus state. When standalone mode (described in the next section) is in
effect, these visual indications are still provided; however, the Packet Bus is
never reconfigured, and, as a result, the yellow LED either blinks or is off.

Standalone Mode
The TN771D Maintenance/Test provides a standalone mode for detecting Packet
Bus faults. In the standalone mode, a terminal is connected to the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack via the Amphenol™ connector on the back of the
cabinet. This setup allows the System Technician to determine the state of the
Packet Bus without having to access the Manager I terminal to provide these
functions, even if the switch is not in service. Note that the Maintenance/Test
does not reconfigure the Packet Bus when it is operating in standalone mode.
Standalone mode is used in the Packet Bus Fault Correction procedures. As a
result, a TN771 and a corresponding terminal must be available to the
technician who is to perform such procedures. A High or Critical Reliability
system has a TN771 in each port network. However, the customer of a system
that does not have High or Critical Reliability may have purchased a TN771 for
ISDN-PRI trunk testing, or to increase the system’s ability to detect Packet Bus
failures.
The list configuration command is used to check for the presence of a circuit
pack in the system. If a circuit pack is not present in the system, one must be
taken to the customer site. The ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’
section in this chapter discusses the special cases when a spare TN771 must be
taken to the customer site.
NOTE:
When in standalone mode, the yellow LED on the TN771 blinks if there is a
Packet Bus fault. If there is no such fault, the yellow LED is off. This is true
because Packet Bus reconfiguration cannot occur in standalone mode.

Required Hardware for Standalone Mode
In addition to the TN771, the following equipment is required to use the
standalone mode:
1. Terminal or PC with terminal-emulation software. The EIA-232 (RS-232)
port should be configured at 1200 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and one
stop bit. This is not the same configuration as for the Manager I terminal.
Therefore, if the Manager I can be used for this operation (and this
depends on the switch configuration and on customer requirements),
remember to restore the original communication parameters before
returning the Manager I to service.
2. 355A EIA-232 Adapter (COMCODE 105 012 637).
3. 258B Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter (COMCODE 103 923 025).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-12

4. D8W 8-wire modular cable of an appropriate length to connect the 258A
on the back of the cabinet to the 355A adapter. The relevant COMCODE is
determined by the length of the cable, as follows:
■

103 786 786 (7 feet)

■

103 786 802 (14 feet)

■

103 786 828 (25 feet)

■

103 866 109 (50 feet)

Slot Selection for Standalone Mode
When selecting a carrier slot to use for standalone mode in a port network that
does not already contain a TN771, keep the following points in mind:
■

A port circuit slot (indicated by a purple label) should be used.

■

-5 volt power supply must be available in the carrier. This section
describes the power supply configurations that provide this power supply.

■

It is preferable that the slot chosen is in the A carrier if a free slot that
matches the criteria presented in the first two items of information in this
list is available.

Entering and Exiting Standalone Mode
NOTE:
When in standalone mode, the red LED on the TN771 is lit. This function is
correct, and it serves as a reminder to remove the TN771 from standalone
mode.

! CAUTION:
The TN771 in standalone must be the ONLY TN771 in the port network. If a
TN771 is already in the port network, place that TN771 in standalone mode.
Do not insert a second TN771 into standalone mode. System behavior is
rendered as undefined if this is done. In addition, the system is not able to
detect the extra circuit pack in this case because a TN771 in standalone
mode is invisible to the SPE.

! CAUTION:
If the TN771 Packet Bus port has reconfigured the Packet Bus in a switch
with a High or Critical Reliability system, (indicated by error type 2049
against PKT-BUS), placing the Maintenance/Test in standalone mode
causes a loss of service to the Packet Bus. This is true because
reconfiguration is not performed in standalone mode. Therefore, this
procedure should be considered a service-disrupting procedure.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-13

If the system has a TN771 installed in the Port Network to be examined, use the
following steps to enter the standalone mode:
1. Ensure that Alarm Origination is suppressed either at login time or via the
Maintenance-Related System Parameters form.
2. Attach the 258B Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter to the Amphenol
connector for the TN771’s slot. Connect one end of a D8W 8-wire modular
cable to port 1 of the 258B. Connect the other end of the cable to a 355A
EIA-232 Adapter. Plug the EIA-232 Adapter into the terminal to be used,
and turn the terminal on.
3. Reseat the TN771 circuit pack.
NOTE:
In a High or Critical Reliability system, this causes a Minor, Off-board
alarm to be raised against the Packet Bus. This alarm is not resolved
until the TN771 (in particular, the Packet Bus port is returned to
service. To ensure that Packet Bus alarms have been cleared, it may
be necessary to restore the TN771 to normal mode.
If there is no TN771 in the Port Network, use the following steps to enter the
standalone mode:
1. Attach the 258A Six-Port Male Amphenol Adapter to the Amphenol
connector for the slot into which the TN771 is to be inserted. Connect one
end of a D8W 8-wire modular cable to port 1 of the 258A. Connect the
other end of the cable to a 355A EIA-232 Adapter. Plug the EIA-232
Adapter into the terminal to be used, and turn the terminal on.
2. Insert the TN771 circuit pack into the slot. The system does not recognize
the presence of the circuit pack.
If the standalone mode is entered successfully, the following is displayed on the
connected terminal:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-14

TN771 STANDALONE MODE
(Type "?" at the prompt for help)

Command:

Figure 9-1.

Normal Standalone Mode Display

! CAUTION:
If the display in Figure 9-1 does not appear, be sure to check the wiring
between the terminal and the TN771, and also the terminal parameters. If
these are correct, the TN771 may be defective. In such a case, follow the
procedures to exit standalone mode (described in the next paragraph).
Then test the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the TN771 fails while in standalone mode, the message TN771 circuit
pack failed is displayed, and no further input is accepted on the
terminal. The circuit pack must be replaced.
Use the following procedures to exit standalone mode:
1. Remove the 258A Adapter from the Amphenol connector.
2. If the TN771 was installed for this procedure, remove it. Otherwise, reseat
the TN771.
3. Be sure that alarm origination is re-enabled on the Maintenance-Related
System Parameters form if it was disabled there (if it was disabled at login,
it is automatically re-enabled at logoff).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-15

Using Standalone Mode in Packet Bus Fault
Isolation and Correction
When the TN771 is in standalone mode, three commands can be used at the
terminal:
■

ds displays the current state of the Packet Bus leads.

■

dsa toggles auto-report mode on and off. In auto-report mode, the state of
the Packet Bus leads are displayed and the terminal beeps whenever a
change occurs.

■

? displays the available commands.

Figure 9-2 presents an example of a standalone mode display. In the display, an
‘S’ indicates a shorted lead, an ‘O’ indicates an open lead, and a blank indicates
no fault.

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
S
S
S
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
F
B
F
_P____________________________________________________________________________________________________
S
S
O
Command:

Figure 9-2.

Example Standalone Mode Display

The information within a standalone mode display is used in the Packet Bus Fault
Correction procedures that follow. The TN771 display indicates the specific
leads on the backplane to examine for bent or damaged pins. Figure 9-3 shows
the location of the packet bus leads on the backplane as viewed from the front of
the carrier, while Figure 9-4 shows the same slot as viewed from the back of the
carrier.
NOTE:
This information is available only from the standalone mode and with an
on-site connected terminal. This information is not available from the
Manager I, and, thus, it is not available remotely. This is not a concern,
inasmuch as this information cannot be used effectively if testing is not on
site.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Page 9-16

SLOT XXX

Backplane
Separation

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
..
..
..

Figure 9-3.

+5v
L0
GND
L3
GND
L6
GND
HP
H1
GND
H3
GND
H5
GND
LF
GND

GND
GND
+5v
+5v

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
...
...

+5v
LP
L1
L2
L4
L5
L7
L8
H0
SB
H2
H4
SF
H6
H7
H8
GND
SS
GND
GND
+5v
+5v

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

..
..
..

..
..
..

Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane - Front View

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Page 9-17

SLOT XXX

Backplane
Separation

Figure 9-4.

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

..
..
..

...
..
.

..
..
..

+5v
LP
L1
L2
L4
L5
L7
L8
H0
SB
H2
H4
SF
H6
H7
H8
GND
SS
GND
GND
+5v
+5v

..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.

+5v
L0
GND
L3
GND
L6
GND
HP
H1
GND
H3
GND
H5
GND
LF
GND

GND
GND
+5v
+5v

..
..
..

Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane - Back View

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771D)

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-18

Special Precaution Concerning the TN771
NOTE:
A new TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack must be taken to the customer
site whenever the following is true:
■

Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port indicates that a Packet Bus fault is
present.
NOTE:
Such a fault is indicated by a Major or Minor alarm against the
Packet Bus. A Major alarm is indicated in the error log by Error Type
513, while a Minor alarm is indicated by Error Type 2049.

■

Test #572 of the PKT-BUS test sequence is the only test that fails.

This precaution is taken because certain failures of the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack can appear as Packet Bus failures. To ensure that the problem is indeed
with the Packet Bus, implement the following steps:
1. Refer to the M/T-PKT Maintenance documentation in Chapter 10,
‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’. Correct any problems with the
TN771 Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port as described in that section. If
the TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is replaced during the correction
process, enter the test pkt P long command to determine if the Packet
Bus faults have been resolved. If there are still Packet Bus problems,
correct them by using the procedures in the sections that follow.
2. If the Maintenance/Test circuit pack was not replaced, enter the test pkt P
command. Record the results (PASS/FAIL/ABORT) and error codes for
Test #572.
3. Enter the status system P command. Record the information listed for the
Packet Bus.
4. Busyout the Maintenance/Test circuit pack by entering the busyout board
PCSS command.
5. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack with the new circuit pack.
6. Release the Maintenance/Test circuit pack by entering the release board
PCSS command.
7. Enter the test pkt P and status system P commands as described in
Steps 2 and 3.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-19

8. If the data matches the previously recorded data, a Packet Bus problem
exists. The original TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not defective,
and it does not need to be returned to the factory. Replace the original
TN771, then correct the Packet Bus problem by using the procedures in
the sections that follow.
9. If the data does not match the previously recorded data, the original
TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is defective. If there are still
indications of Packet Bus problems, correct them by using the procedures
in the sections that follow.

Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart
The flowchart in this section presents the steps to be taken for isolating and
resolving Packet Bus problems. The order in which the maintenance objects
should be examined can be determined by assessing how wide-spread the
failure is. For example, since all ISDN-BRI devices communicate with the TN778
Packet Control circuit pack, this MO should be examined early in the sequence.
On the other hand, a failure of a TN570 circuit pack in an EPN may cause
ISDN-BRI failure in an EPN, but it could not be the cause of a failure in the PPN.
Whenever the flowchart refers to the Maintenance documentation for a specific
MO, keep in mind that the repair procedure for that MO may in turn refer to
another MO’s repair procedure. The flowchart tries to coordinate these
procedures so that a logical flow is maintained if the Packet Bus problems are
not resolved via the first set of repair procedures. However, a Packet Bus failure
can lead to a somewhat haphazard referencing of various MO procedures that
may result in your implementing steps that either have already been completed
or are not necessary. If this occurs, return to the flowchart at the step that follows
the reference to Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and then
continue.
NOTE:
The following status commands can also help diagnose Packet Bus
problems:
■

status system

■

status packet-control

■

status bri-port

■

status station

■

status data-module

For a description of these commands, refer to the "Status Commands"
section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing
Aids’’. The commands provide information about the service state of
various Packet maintenance objects. This information can be useful for
remote maintenance, inasmuch it can explain the impact of the failure(s)
on the system.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

Page 9-20

The Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart appears on the following two pages.
NOTE:
See the ‘‘Flowchart Description and Supplement’’ section following the
flowchart for a description of the flowchart as well as for supplementary
information, the availability of which is indicated by the uppercase letters
that appear in the flowchart.

DIAL ARS/AAR
ACCESS CODE

FACILITY IS ORIGINATION
OR OUTWARD RESTRICTED
-- OR -USER IS CONTROLLED
OUTWARD OR TOTAL
RESTRICTED

AAR

INTERCEPT
ANNOUNCEMENT,
ATTENDANT
OR EXTENSION

ARS
*TREATMENT DEPENDS ON
RESTRICTION AND ADMINISTRATION.

SECOND DIAL TONE IF
"AAR/ARS DIAL TONE" IS
ENABLED ON THE FEATURE
RELATED SYSTEM
PARAMETERS FORM.

A

CONVERT
TO AAR OR
ARS CALL

ARS
OR AAR
CALL

AAR

ARS

ANALYZE
ARS NUMBER
(NOTES 3 & 4)

ANALYZE
AAR NUMBER
(NOTE 4)

B

Figure 9-5.

Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 1 of 2)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

B

Page 9-21

MATCH
FOUND
?

NO

INTERCEPT

YES

DIGIT
CONVERSION
?

NO

C

YES

CONVERSION
LIMIT
EXCEEDED?

YES

INTERCEPT

NO

MODIFY DIGIT
STRING
(CONVERT)

FURTHER
CONVERSION
ALLOWED?

NO

YES

INCREMENT
CONVERSION
COUNTER

ANALYZE
RESULT AS
SPECIFIED
BY ‘‘NET’’

DISABLE
CONVERSION

AAR, ARS

A

EXT

DIAL PLAN

Figure 9-6.

Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 2 of 2)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-22

Flowchart Description and Supplement
An uppercase letter in bold (for example, A, B, C, etc.) indicates that there is
supplemental information with details about the relevant process that could not fit
into the appropriate box or diamond.
NOTE:
Due to space restrictions, individual error codes and alarms are not
detailed on the flowchart. The maintenance object descriptions in Chapter
10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, discuss which errors and
alarms could cause or be indicative of Packet Bus problems. In general,
unless an error, alarm, or test refers explicitly to the TDM Bus, the error,
alarm, or test should be considered a possible cause of Packet Bus
problems.
The following paragraphs supplement the corresponding letter in the flowchart.
a. Problems with the system clock (TDM-CLK) can cause service disruptions
on the Packet Bus as well as on the TDM Bus. Therefore, if there are
alarms active against TDM-CLK, these alarms should be resolved before
any other Packet Bus fault isolation is attempted.
NOTE:
All TDM-CLK problems should be resolved before the process is
continued, even if the problems refer only to the TDM Bus. (This is an
exception to the previous note.) This is recommended because a
Packet Bus problem cannot cause a TDM-CLK problem, while a
TDM-CLK problem can cause a Packet Bus problem.
b. The question ‘‘Are the Packet Bus problems resolved?’’ appears several
times on the flowchart. This is a general question that can involve several
checks. The basic question is ‘‘Are the problems that caused you to use
this flowchart resolved?’’ Some of the more specific questions might be:
■

Are all Packet Bus alarms resolved?

■

Are all Packet circuit pack (port, endpoint) alarms resolved?
NOTE:
If all alarms are resolved, issue the clear pkt command. This
command attempts to put the switch back into the service
state by resolving any BRI problems that exist. Refer to
Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing
Aids’’, for more information.

■

Are all ISDN-BRI stations/data modules and/or ASAI adjuncts in
service?

■

Does the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port (in normal or
standalone mode) still indicate a Packet Bus fault?

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-23

c. If only a single EPN is affected, the Packet Control is probably not the
source of the problem. However, if all of the ISDN-BRI circuit packs are
located in a single EPN, assume that the answer to this question is ‘‘No,’’
and check the Packet Control.
d. A Packet problem that affects more than one port network is probably
caused by either a Packet Control failure or a PPN Packet Bus failure. The
Packet Control is checked before the Packet Bus Fault Correction
procedures are implemented.
e. Because the Packet Bus in each port network is physically separate, each
affected port network must be checked individually. The PPN should be
checked first, however, since any EPN Packet problems are usually
resolved once the PPN Packet problem is resolved. After resolving the
problem in one port network, be sure to check if the problems in other port
networks have also been resolved.
f. This step applies only when an attempt to resolve an EPN Packet Bus
problem is made. When checking the Expansion Interfaces in an EPN, be
sure to check the corresponding ones in the PPN. Also, recall that all
Expansion Interfaces in 286 systems, 386 systems, or later systems that
are using the Packet Bus must be TN570s. Using TN776s results in an
EPN where TDM traffic works but Packet traffic does not work.
g. If a TN771 is not present, one must be installed to accommodate the
standalone mode, which is discussed earlier in this chapter.
h. If a TN771 is present, it can fail in such a fashion that it eventually disrupts
the Packet Bus or misinterprets a Packet Bus problem.
i. If work is being done on-site, follow the procedures described earlier in
this chapter for placing the TN771 into standalone mode. If work is not
being done on-site, go to the next step.
j. The answer is ‘‘Yes’’ if the TN771 in standalone mode indicates any faulty
leads. The answer is also ‘‘Yes’’ if Test #572 in the PKT-BUS test sequence
fails, and/or if the status system display indicates that faulty leads are
present and the TN771 in the port network is known to be functioning
correctly.
k. If the non-functional endpoints are isolated to a single circuit pack, the
circuit pack is probably the cause of the problem.
l. The procedures that must be executed are determined by which
maintenance objects on the circuit packs are alarmed. Start with the
procedures for the circuit pack errors/alarms, then continue with those for
the port. Finally, execute the procedures for the endpoint.
m. Follow the procedures outlined later in this chapter.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-24

Packet Bus Fault Correction
Using and Interpreting Results from the Status
System Command
The status system command can be issued to retrieve information about the
Packet Bus. This command is described fully in the "Status Commands" section
in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.
The status system command provides the service state, alarm status, and (if the
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is activated) the number of faulty and open
leads. This information can be used to determine the urgency of the repair. In
general, a service state of ‘‘out’’ indicates extreme urgency, while a service state
of ‘‘reconfig’’ indicates moderate urgency.

! CAUTION:
Ultimately, the urgency of a repair is determined by the customer’s
requirements. A customer who uses ISDN-BRI for station sets probably
considers a Packet Bus failure critical. However, a customer with only a
small percentage of ISDN-BRI service may consider even an uncorrectable
Packet Bus fault to be of minor importance and may prefer to delay
performing repairs, due to their destructive nature.
NOTE:
If maintenance is actively running on the Packet Bus at the time the status
system command is issued, the data reported for the Packet Bus may be
inconsistent. The reason is that this data is updated by the maintenance
tests that are running. If the data seems inconsistent, enter the command
again.
If test results or the results of the status system command indicate that there are
24 faults on the Packet Bus, the problem is probably caused by faulty cables
between carriers, or by defective bus terminators. However, before proceeding,
make sure that the report is not being falsely given by the Maintenance/Test
Packet Bus port. Accordingly, look for an M/T-PKT error in the error log. Then test
the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port by entering the test port command. Refer
to the ‘‘Special Precaution Concerning the TN771’’ section earlier in this chapter
if any problems are suspected.
If the carrier into which a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit pack is installed does
not have a -5 volt power supply, the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port reports
24 open leads on the Packet Bus (via the status system command and via Test
#572 of the PKT-BUS test sequence). No failure of the TN771 is indicated in this
case because the TN771 is not defective. Refer to CARR-POW maintenance in
Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’, and ensure that a -5 volt
power supply is available.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-25

Considerations for High and Critical Reliability
Systems
If a High or Critical Reliability system is involved, special considerations involving
the features of this type of system must be kept in mind. In particular, if a Packet
Bus problem is caused by a duplicated component, switching to the standby
component may both alleviate the problem and isolate the faulty circuit pack.
Therefore, the commands in the following list should be executed first in a High
or Critical reliability system. For more information on these commands, refer to
Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’.
■

reset system interchange If this command resolves the Packet Bus
problem, the problem is with the Packet Control in the (new) standby SPE.
Refer to PKT-CTRL maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’.

■

set exp-link If this command resolves the Packet Bus problem, the
problem is with either the (new) standby EI Link or the EIs at either end.
Refer to EXP-INTF maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object
Repair Procedures’’.

■

set tone-clock If this command resolves the Packet Bus problem, the
problem is with the (new) standby Tone-Clock. Refer to TDM-CLK
maintenance in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’.
NOTE:
Keep in mind that, even though the steps discussed in the previous
list may fail to resolve the problem, the steps are not necessarily
fault-proof. Continue with the procedures in the next section.

Troubleshooting Procedures
As we discussed earlier in this chapter, Packet Bus faults are usually caused by
a defective circuit pack connected to the backplane, by bent pins on the
backplane, or by defective cables/terminators that make up the Packet Bus. The
first two faults cause shorts, while the third fault causes either shorts or opens.
There are four procedures for correcting Packet Bus faults. The number of
procedures that are to be used to correct faults depends upon a number of
factors relevant to system performance and to the content of the procedures
themselves. For example, if the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is activated,
and if there is an indication of open leads on the Packet Bus (either via the status
system command or via Test #572 failure), go directly to Procedure 4. The
reason for this is that Procedures 1 through 3 try to locate faulty circuit packs or
bent pins behind circuit packs. Since these types of failures can never cause
open faults, Procedures 1 through 3 need not be implemented in this case.
However, if there are both shorts and opens, execute Procedure 4, then return to
Procedure 1 if there are still shorts after the open lead problems are resolved.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-26

! CAUTION:
Since Packet Bus fault isolation procedures involve removing circuit packs
and possibly disconnecting entire carriers, these procedure have a
profound effect on service. Therefore, if possible, implement these
procedures after hours or during hours of minimum system use.
NOTE:
Each of these procedures contains one or more steps that require a
determination as to whether the Packet Bus problem has been resolved.
Accordingly, several condition checks must be performed. We can present
each such check in the form of a question, as follows:
■

Did the Maintenance/Test circuit pack standalone mode initially indicate
the existence of faulty leads, and are these leads no longer indicated?

■

Have all alarms against the Packet Bus and Packet circuit packs been
resolved?
NOTE:
If all alarms are resolved, issue the clear pkt command. This
command attempts to put the switch back into the service state by
resolving any BRI problems that exist. Refer to Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, for more
information.

■

Are all ISDN-BRI stations and data modules as well as any relevant ASAI
adjuncts in service?

Note that if one of these conditions is not yet met, the others need not be
checked.
The following sections discuss the four procedures for correcting Packet Bus
faults.

Procedure 1
Procedure 1 determines if any circuit packs that use the Packet Bus have faults.
For each circuit pack type (see Table 9-1), perform the following steps:
NOTE:
The circuit packs need not be checked in the order presented if the
flowchart in this chapter has been followed. However, if newly added circuit
packs are involved, check these packs first, inasmuch as the packs are
most likely to have caused a problem.
1. Display the Error and Alarm Logs for the circuit pack via the display
errors and display alarms commands.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Page 9-27

2. If there are errors for the circuit pack, refer to the appropriate maintenance
documentation in Chapter 10, ‘‘Maintenance Object Repair Procedures’’,
and follow the recommended maintenance procedure to resolve the
errors. Note that some of these procedures may refer to PKT-BUS
maintenance as the cause of the fault; if so, implement these Packet Bus
Fault Correction procedures at that point.
3. After implementing the repair procedure for the circuit pack (and
regardless of whether this procedure succeeds or fails), determine if the
Packet Bus fault is still present.
4. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, implement Procedure 1 for the next
circuit pack.
5. If there are no more circuit packs in the list, go to Procedure 2.
6. If the Packet Bus fault has been resolved, the procedures are completed.
Table 9-1.

Packet Circuit Packs

Circuit Pack Name

Circuit Pack
Code

Associated Maintenance Objects

ISDN-BRI

TN556

BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT,
BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ

Maintenance/Test

TN771

M/T-BD, M/T-PKT

Packet Control

TN778

PKT-CTRL

Expansion Interface

TN570

EXP-INTF

Procedure 2
Procedure 2 removes and reinserts port circuit packs (those in the purple slots)
one or several at a time. Use Procedure 2 for each port circuit pack in the port
network until either (1) the problem is resolved or (2) there are no more circuit
packs in the port network.
NOTE:
This procedure should also be used for the TN570 Expansion Interface
circuit pack in a standard system. For a High or Critical Reliability system,
refer to Procedure 3 for the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Also, refer to
Procedure 3 for the TN768 or TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack in a switch
with a High or Critical Reliability system.

! CAUTION:
The Expansion Interface circuit pack should be the last one checked in this
procedure, since removing this circuit pack disconnects its EPN. The
Tone-Clock circuit pack should be the next-to-last one checked. In
addition, the TN771 must be reseated after the Tone-Clock is reinstalled.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-28

If the Packet Bus problem is present when the circuit pack is inserted, but is
resolved when the circuit pack is removed, either the circuit pack or the
backplane pins in that slot caused the problem. If the backplane pins are intact,
replace the circuit pack.
NOTE:
In a multiple failure situation, the circuit pack could be one cause of the
Packet Bus problem. However, there could also be other failures that are
causing Packet Bus faults.
In Procedure 2, an option of working either with one circuit pack at a time or with
multiple circuit packs simultaneously is available. In view of this, determine the
level of service interruption to be allowed during this procedure. If causing a
disruption to all users in the port network is deemed permissible, large groups of
circuit packs should be worked with. This option allows faster job completion.
However, if large service disruptions are to be avoided, work with one circuit
pack at a time. This option is slower, but it disrupts only the users of a single
circuit pack.

! CAUTION:
If the TN771 Standalone mode does NOT indicate Packet Bus faults,
perform Procedure 2 for ONLY the port (purple) slot Packet circuit packs
listed in Table 9-1. Also, problems with the backplane pins need not be
checked for. Determining if the problem is resolved by removing circuit
packs is sufficient.
Steps for Procedure 2:
1. Remove one or several circuit packs as appropriate, according to the
considerations presented in the previous paragraphs. Any circuit pack(s)
(whether Packet or non-Packet) that have been recently inserted should
be checked first. It is likely that such a circuit pack caused a new problem.
Keep in mind that Packet circuit packs should be checked before
non-Packet circuit packs.
If the decision is made to remove multiple circuit packs, consider working
with an entire carrier at a time to ensure a good granularity.
2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present.
3. If the Packet Bus fault is still present:
■

Determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot
are bent. Use the output from the Maintenance/Test standalone
mode and Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4.

■

If the backplane pins are bent, power down the carrier (refer to the
"Removing Power" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’, straighten or replace the pins, reinsert the circuit
pack, restore power (refer to the ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in
Chapter 5, and repeat Procedure 2, beginning with Step 2, for the
same circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

!

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-29

WARNING:
If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, and if the slot is in the
Active control carrier, perform an SPE interchange before changing
the circuit pack. Follow the procedures presented in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
■

If the backplane pins are not bent, reinsert the circuit pack(s), and
perform Procedure 2 for the next set of circuit packs.

4. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, do the following:
■

Reinsert a circuit pack. If multiple circuit packs have been
removed, reinsert the circuit packs one at a time, and repeat the
following substeps until all of the circuit packs have been
reinserted.

■

Determine if the Packet Bus fault has returned.

■

If the Packet Bus fault has returned, the reinserted circuit pack is
defective. Replace the circuit pack and then continue.

■

If the Packet Bus fault does not return when all of the circuit packs
have been reinserted, the procedure is completed.

Continue with Procedure 3 if all the port circuit packs have been checked, but
the Packet Bus fault is still not resolved.

Procedure 3
Procedure 3 removes and reinserts control carrier circuit packs one at a time.
The Packet Control, Tone-Clock, and Expansion Interface circuit packs are the
only processor complex circuit packs that communicate on the Packet Bus. In
addition, the Memory 1 and EPN Maintenance Board circuit packs are
connected to the Packet Bus in the backplane (while the Memory 2 circuit pack is
not). Therefore, these are the only processor complex circuit packs that are likely
to cause a Packet Bus problem in a stable system. As a result, Procedure 3
should be performed only on the Packet Control, Memory 1, and EPN
Maintenance Board circuit packs in all systems, and on the Expansion Interface
and Tone-Clock circuit packs in High and Critical Reliability systems.

! CAUTION:
If the TN771 Standalone mode does NOT indicate Packet Bus faults,
perform Procedure 3 for ONLY the Packet Control, Expansion Interface,
and Tone-Clock circuit packs. Also, problems with the backplane pins need
not be checked for. Determining if the problem is resolved by removing
circuit packs is sufficient.
In a system without High or Critical Reliability, do the following:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-30

1. Power down the control carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
2. Remove the suspect circuit pack.
3. As in Procedure 2, determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit
pack’s slot are bent.
4. If the backplane pins are bent, do the following:
a. Straighten or replace the pins
b. Insert the same circuit pack
5. If the backplane pins are not bent, replace the circuit pack (reinsert the
circuit pack if a replacement is not available).
6. Turn the power back on to reboot the system. Refer to the ‘‘Restoring
Power’’ section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
7. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present.
8. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, do the following:
a. If the circuit pack was reinserted in Step 5, replace the circuit pack,
and repeat Procedure 3.
b. If the circuit pack was replaced in Step 5, repeat Procedure 3 for
the next processor complex circuit pack.
9. If the Packet Bus fault does not recur, the procedure is completed.
If Procedure 3 fails to identify the cause of the problem, go to Procedure 4.

In a High or Critical Reliability System, do the following:
1. If the circuit pack to be replaced is in the SPE, perform an SPE
interchange by entering the reset system interchange command. For an
Expansion Interface circuit pack, enter the set exp-link command to
switch to the standby expansion link. For a Tone-Clock circuit pack, enter
the set tone-clock command to switch to the standby Tone-Clock circuit
pack.
2. Remove the newly-inactive suspect circuit pack. For a circuit pack in the
processor complex, use the procedures in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
3. As in Procedure 2, determine if the backplane pins in the removed circuit
pack’s slot are bent.
4. If the pins are bent, do the following:
a. Power down the carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
b. Straighten or replace the pins.
c. Insert the same circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-31

d. Restore power to the carrier. Refer to the ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section
in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
5. If the backplane pins are not bent, insert or replace the circuit pack.
6. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present.
7. If the Packet Bus fault is still present, do the following:
a. If the circuit pack was reinserted in Step 5, replace the circuit pack.
Then repeat Procedure 3, starting at Step 2.
b. If the circuit pack was replaced in Step 5, continue with Step 9.
8. If the Packet Bus fault does not recur, then the procedure is completed.
9. If the suspect circuit pack has been tested in the other control carrier, go
to Step 10. Otherwise, implement Step 1, then Steps 2 through 8.
10. Repeat the procedure in the previous step for the next suspect circuit
pack.
If all processor complex circuit packs have been checked and the problem is not
resolved, continue with Procedure 4.

Procedure 4
Procedure 4 tries to isolate the failure to a particular set of carriers. Only the
circuit packs in those carriers are checked. Procedure 4 is used if the preceding
procedures fail, because it can help locate multiple circuit pack failures as well
as failures of the carrier hardware. The procedure is also used if there are open
leads on the Packet Bus. (The faults detected by Procedures 1 through 3 cannot
cause open leads.)
In Procedure 4, the TDM/LAN Cable Assemblies and TDM/LAN termination
resistor packs are replaced. If this action does not resolve the Packet Bus fault,
the carriers are reconfigured by moving the termination resistor packs in such a
manner that certain carriers are disconnected from the bus. This is done by
moving the termination resistors on the carrier backplanes. To terminate the
Packet Bus at the end of a particular carrier, first unplug the cable that connects
the carrier to the next carrier and then replace the cable with a termination
resistor (see Figure 9-6). When the length of the Packet Bus is modified via this
procedure, circuit packs that are essential to system operation (for example,
Processor Complex, Tone-Clock) must still be connected to the new ‘‘shortened’’
Packet (and TDM) Bus. In addition, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (in
standalone mode) must be connected to the ‘‘shortened’’ bus.

! WARNING:
Power must be removed from the entire port network before any cables or
terminators are removed. Failure to do so can cause damage to circuit
packs and power supplies and can be hazardous to the technician. After
cabling changes are made and verified, power must be restored to the port

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-32

network. Use the TN771 Standalone mode to determine if the Packet Bus
fault is resolved.

! CAUTION:
Circuit packs in carriers that are not part of the shortened bus are not
inserted. As a result, these circuit packs are not alarmed. Ignore these
alarms for now. All alarms should be resolved when the cabinet is restored
to its original configuration.

Figure 9-7.

Carrier Rewiring Example

Procedure 4 is organized into two parts, as follows:

Part 1:
1. Power down the PN. See ‘‘Removing Power’’ section in Chapter 5,
‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
2. Replace all of the TDM/LAN cables and both TDM/LAN terminators.
3. Restore power to the PN. See ‘‘Restoring Power’’ section in Chapter 5,
‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
4. Determine if the packet bus fault is still present.
5. If the fault is present, go to Part 2.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-33

Part 2:
Processor Port Network:
1. Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the Active control
carrier (that is, the carrier that contains the Active SPE) to the carrier that
contains the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. To allow this procedure to
isolate the failure to the smallest possible number of carriers, place the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack into a carrier that contains a processor
complex, if possible.
2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. If so, and if there are
shorts on the Packet Bus, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for
only the circuit packs in those carriers that are connected to the
‘‘shortened’’ Packet Bus. (Procedure 2 is performed for port circuit packs,
and Procedure 3 is performed for processor complex circuit packs.)
3. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, extend the Packet Bus to another
carrier, and repeat the procedure in the previous step. When a carrier that
causes the fault to recur is added, and if there are shorts, perform
Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in that carrier.
4. If the Packet Bus fault recurs as the Packet Bus is extended, and if
Procedures 2 and 3 (if performed) do not resolve the problem, the added
carrier(s) that caused the problem to recur are defective and must be
replaced.
Other Port Networks:
1. Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the carrier that
contains the Active Expansion Interface to the nearest carrier that contains
the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Place the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack into a carrier that contains an Expansion Interface circuit pack in
order to allow the procedure to isolate the failure to the smallest possible
number of carriers.
2. Determine if the Packet Bus fault is still present. If so, and if there are
shorts on the Packet Bus, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for
only the circuit packs in those carriers that are connected to the
‘‘shortened’’ Packet Bus.
3. If the Packet Bus fault is not present, extend the Packet Bus to another
carrier, and repeat the procedure in the previous step. When a carrier that
causes the fault to recur is added, and if there are shorts, perform
Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in that carrier.
4. If the packet bus fault recurs as the packet bus is extended, and if
Procedures 2 and 3 (if performed) do not resolve the problem, the added
carrier(s) that caused the problem to recur are defective and must be
replaced.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

9

Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction
Packet Bus Fault Correction

Issue 1
April 1997
Page 9-34

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
Escalation Procedures

Maintenance Object Repair
Procedures
10

Page 10-1

10

For Maintenance Objects on the DEFINITY Wireless Business System (DWBS),
refer to the appropriate documentation that accompanies the DWBS.
Trouble-clearing is based on the type of indication received, system-alarmed
troubles, or user-reported troubles. When viewing the Alarm Log, all major alarms
display first, followed by minor alarms, and warning alarms. Resovle the first
alarmed entry first because it may affect the rest of the alarmed entries.
System-alarmed and user-reported troubles may exist at the same time. Always
clear the alarmed troubles first. This often clears the user-reported faults without
additional maintenance.

Escalation Procedures
This document is not intended to solve all troubles. When the limits of these
procedures are reached and the problem is not resolved, it is the technician’s
responsibility to escalate to a higher level of technical support. Escalation must
conform to the procedures in the Technical and Administration Plan.

Cabling Precautions
! CAUTION:
Do not cut or bend fiber optic cables. Doing so may adversely affect
communication between the EPN and the PPN cabinets.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
Cabling Precautions

Page 10-2

! CAUTION:
To avoid damaging the cable-to-connector interface when removing any
Inter-Carrier Cable, grasp the cable connector, not the cable itself.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)

Page 10-3

12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run

Full Name of MO

12V-PWR

MINOR

test card-mem sh

12 Volt Power Supply

12V-PWR

WARNING

test card-mem sh

12 Volt Power Supply

The 12 Volt Power Supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is required for
programming flash memory devices in circuit packs such as the TN786B or
TN790 Processor circuit pack and the removable translation card. During the
erase and write operations of a flash memory or translation card, the 12 volt
power supply must be turned on under the instruction of software. For the
read-only operation, the 12 volt power supply is not required.
If the 12-volt power supply cannot be turned on, all the erase and write
operations to a flash device fail. Features such as "save translation," "save
announcements," "system upgrade," "hard patching," and "core dump" always fail
in this case.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values

Table 10-1.

12 Volt Power Supply Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Error
Type

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test card-mem

12

Any

12 Volt Power Supply Test
(#701)

MINOR

ON

test card-mem

2573

Any

12 Volt Power Supply Test
(#701)

WARNING

ON

test card-mem

1.
2.
3.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Software cannot turn on the 12 volt power supply to provide 12 volt power to the flash memory or to
the translation card.
Software can turn on the 12 volt power supply, and 12 volt power is available. However, the software
cannot turn the power supply off after operations are completed. The 12 volt power remains on. This
error does not affect the normal operations involved in accessing the memory or the translation
card.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)

Page 10-4

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing
error codes associated with the 12 Volt Power Supply Test for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The 12 Volt
Power Supply Test can be initiated via either the test card-mem command or the
test network-control command.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

X

X

ND

X

X

ND

Memory Card Format and Read Test
(#696) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Match Test (#697)2

X

X

ND

Memory Card Write-Protected Test
(#698)2

X

X

ND

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test
(#699)2

X

X

ND

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity
Test (#694)2

X

ND

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test
(#693)2

X

ND

Order of Investigation
12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701)
Memory Card Insertion Test (#695)

1.
2.

2

Reset Board
Sequence

D/ND1

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive
Refer to “CARD-MEM (Memory Card)” information for a description of this test.

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701)
This test is nondestructive.
The purpose of the test is to diagnose the 12 volt power supply unit in the
TN777B NETCON circuit pack. No erase and write-to-memory operations are
started or verified during the test. The contents of flash memory and of the
memory card should not be changed.
The test turns on the power supply, and it verifies that 12 volt power appears by
reading the control register in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. After the power
supply is turned on, the maintenance software waits for three seconds before
verifying the appearance of 12 volt power. After the 12 volt power supply can be
turned on and verified, the test turns the power supply off and then verifies that

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)

Page 10-5

the power is off. The control register in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is read
again for the verification.
If, while this test is running, an application attempts to erase or write a flash
memory or a memory card, this test remains active, and the application is barred.
Table 10-2.
Error
Code
1192

12 Volt Power Supply Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
12 volt power supply is being used by other applications or by
maintenance.
1. The 12 volt power supply is in use. Retry the test card-mem
command after the maintenance operation application is completed.

2106

ABORT

2114
2108

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

ABORT

The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

109

FAIL

The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack
cannot be turned on by the software.
1. Retry the test card-mem command one more time to verify the
operation of the 12 volt power supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit
pack.
2. If the failure indicated by Error Code 109 persists, the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack must be replaced with a new circuit pack.
Follow the standard procedure for replacing the NETCON circuit
pack from the SPE control carrier.
3. After the new TN777B circuit pack is inserted, enter the test
card-mem command to verify the operations of the 12 volt power
supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack. The alarm is resolved
after the test passes twice.

110

FAIL

The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack
cannot be turned off by the software.
1. Retry the test card-mem command one more time to verify the
operation of the 12 volt power supply in the TN777B NETCON circuit
pack.
2. If the failure indicated by Error Code 110 persists, the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack should be scheduled for replacement during
the next regular maintenance visit. This failure does not cause any
service disruption.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply)
Table 10-2.
Error
Code

Page 10-6

12 Volt Power Supply Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The 12 volt power supply unit in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack is
functioning correctly.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-7

ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
ABRI-PORT
ABRI-PORT

1.

2.

2

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

MAJOR(b)

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN-BRI Port

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN-BRI Port

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is
located (01, 02, ..., and so forth); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).
The alarm level for ABRI ports may be administered using the set options command. The
alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to MAJOR for all
ABRI ports in the system.

NOTE:
Refer to "BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI
Port)" for repair procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Page 10-8

AC-POWER
AC Power for AC-Powered Systems
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
AC-POWER

1.

Alarm Level
WARNING

Initial Command to Run1
test environment P

Full Name of
MO
AC Power

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from
the Alarm or Error Log.

NOTE:
For environment maintenance, PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects
in a high or critical reliabilty system are irrelevant.
The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Also refer to the DC-POWER (DC Power)
for environment maintenance strategy.
The AC Power MO represents the AC power provided to the system from a wall
outlet. The AC power comes from the wall outlet, through the Power Distribution
Unit (PDU), if installed, and is then distributed to the various cabinets. The
battery charger monitors AC power via fuse F3. See Figure 10-1. If no PDU is
installed, the power is supplied directly to each cabinet from each individual wall
outlets.
When the system loses power (for example, a power outage in the building), a
Major alarm is logged against AC Power and the system goes on battery backup,
which is known as Nominal Power Holdover (NPH). If power is restored before
the NPH time expires, the alarm is resolved. Each basic control cabinet has
separate batteries for NPH. The nominal power holdover provided is as follows:
■

The batteries power the system for 10 seconds in a PPN cabinet, for 15
seconds in an EPN cabinet, and for 10 minutes in the control carrier in a
standard reliability system.

■

The batteries also provide system power for five minutes in the control
carrier in high and critical reliability systems.

! WARNING:
Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX
circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging
the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the
"DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures" in Chapter 5, "Routine

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Page 10-9

Maintenance Procedures", on the circuit pack, and in DEFINITY AUDIX
documentation.

CONVENIENCE OUTLET

F3

CONVENIENCE OUTLET

F6
20A

F8

20A

2A
F7

15A
FUSE F7 IS
FOR CONVENIENCE
OUTLETS
BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FUSE LOCATIONS

FUSE LOCATIONS

THE 3 FANS ARE ACTUALLY
A
H
D
1

ON BACK OF CABINET AND
S4

ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM

S4

FRONT OF CABINET.
A

FILTER

I
AC

R
631

CARRIER B

DA
AC

F3

F

631

L

DB

F6

O
631

W

CARRIER A

631
DB

DA

NOTE: THE 631AR AND
631BR MAY BE USED AS

POWER
DISTRIBUTION

THE CARRIER POWER UNIT

BATTERY &

AC

RING

BATTERY

DIST.

GENERATOR

PROVIDED A TN736 OR
TN752 POWER UNIT CIRCUIT

CHARGER
S3

UNIT

PACK IS IN SAME CARRIER

FRONT VIEW

Figure 10-1.

Small Cabinet Environment Components (AC-POWER)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Page 10-10

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-3.
Error
Type

AC Power Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

Associated Test

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

513

Any

AC Power Query
Test (#78)

WARNING

OFF

test environment P sh r 1

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence.

Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended
procedures.

AC Power Query Test (#78)
Table 10-4.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #78 AC Power Query Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description / Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system
powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Resolve all
DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 Error Code, resolve all
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a high or critical reliability
system PPN, PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a
standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an
EPN. Repeat the test.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER
Table 10-4.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-11

TEST #78 AC Power Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description / Recommendation

NOTE:
For a Global AC MCC (J58890CH) use the procedures outlined in
step 2.
The switch is currently without AC power.

! WARNING:
Turn off power to the 397C Battery Charger before removing Fuse
F5.
1. Check for AC at the wall outlet.
a. If there is no AC power at the wall outlet, then the problem is not
with the system itself. Power must be restored to the wall outlet.
b. If there is AC power at the wall outlet, then there could be a
problem with the Battery or Battery chargers. Resolve all alarms
logged against POWER (Battery & Battery Charger), and rerun the
test. If the test still fails, the fuse F5 may have opened. Replace
fuse F5 and rerun the test. If the test still fails, then the PR-MAINT
(Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a PPN in a system without High
or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit
pack in a high or critical reliability system PPN, or the EPN MAINT
(Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system
may be incorrectly reporting the problem.
c. alarms against these MOs, and rerun the test. There are failures
that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication
Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected
by the respective maintenance, but that cause many, if not all,
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the
suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration,
should be replaced and the test rerun.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Page 10-12

TEST #78 AC Power Query Test — Continued

Table 10-4.
Error
Code

Test
Result

1

FAIL

(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

Description / Recommendation
2. Procedures for a Global MCC (J58890CH):
a. For a nominal holdover system if there is no AC power at the wall
outlet, then the problem is not with the system itself. Power must be
restored to the wall outlet.
b. If there is AC power at the wall outlet, then there could be a
problem with the Rectifiers (RM850), Battery Interface Unit, or
battery. Resolve all alarms logged against the POWER
Maintenance Object, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the BIU
may be defective. Check to see if the BOD alarm LED is “on”, on
the BIU. If the BOD LED is “on” replace the Battery Interface Unit
(BIU). If the BOD LED is “off” and the BOK LED is “on” then the
SYSAM or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be incorrectly
reporting the problem. Resolve all alarms against these
Maintenance Objects and rerun the test.

100

FAIL

The switch is currently without AC power, and AC Power maintenance is in
the middle of timing the NPH interval.
1. Follow the repair steps outlined above for Error Code 1.

PASS

The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a PPN in a system
without High or Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface)
circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN MAINT
(Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system has
reported that the switch has AC power. If there is no AC power at the wall
outlet, then look for and resolve all alarms against the appropriate MO
listed.

Continued on next page

AC Power for DC-Powered Systems
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
AC-POWER

1.

Alarm
Level
WARNING

Initial Command to Run1
test environment P

Full Name of MO
AC Power

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

NOTE:
For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration
aspects in a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Page 10-13

The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Refer to the "DC-POWER (Single-Carrier
Cabinet Power)" information for environment maintenance strategy.
In a DC-powered multicarrier cabinet system, the AC-POWER maintenance
object still exists, but serves no functional purpose. Because the system cannot
determine the type of powering provided, all AC-POWER tests should always
either pass or abort.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values

Table 10-5.
Error
Type
0

1

513

1.

AC Power Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

Any

AC Power Query Test
(#78)

WARNING

OFF

test environment P sh r 1

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing
error codes associated with the AC Power Query Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
Table 10-6.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: AC-Power
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER
Table 10-6.

Page 10-14

System Technician-Demanded Tests: AC-Power — Continued
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) (d)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Notes:
a. Refer to "POWER" for a description of this test.
b. Refer to "CARR-POW" for a description of this test.
c. Refer to "EMG-XFER” for a description of this test.
d. Refer to "CABINET" for a description of this test.
e. Refer to "EXT-DEV ADMIN? N” or "EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y" for a description of
this test.
f. Refer to "RING-GEN" for a description of this test.

AC Power Query Test (#78)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN in a system without
High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or
Critical Reliability system PPN, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN
multicarrier cabinet system for the status of AC power to the switch. In a
DC-powered system, this test should never fail.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
AC-POWER

Table 10-7.
Error
Code

Page 10-15

TEST #78 AC Power Query Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

any

FAIL

The Maintenance/Tape Processor in a PPN in a system without High or
Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or Critical
Reliability system PPN, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN
multicarrier cabinet system is incorrectly reporting a problem with AC
power. If this test fails, the problem is with the circuit pack and not with
AC-POWER. The suspect circuit pack, depending on the system
configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun.

PASS

All that can be inferred is that the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape
Processor) in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability, the
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability
system PPN, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN
multicarrier cabinet system is working properly.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADM-CONN (Administered Connection)

Page 10-16

ADM-CONN (Administered
Connection)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

ADM-CONN

MAJOR

status administered-connection N

Administered Connection

ADM-CONN

MINOR

status administered-connection N

Administered Connection

ADM-CONN

WARNING

status administered-connection N

Administered Connection

1.

Where N is an appropriate Administered Connection number determined via the PORT field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

An Administered Connection provides an end-to-end connection between two
access endpoints or data modules. This connection is automatically established
when the administered connection is administered and is due to be active. An
error is logged when an administered connection cannot be established or when
an established administered connection fails. An alarm is logged when a
connection cannot initially be established or fails and cannot be reestablished.
An alarming strategy is supported on a per administered connection basis. An
alarm is raised for a connection when either the number of consecutive failed
attempts to establish the connection reaches the alarm threshold or it can be
determined that a failed attempt to establish was due to an administered error.
The alarm raised ("major," "minor," "warning," or "none") is specified in the "Alarm
Type" field of the Administered Connection Administration Form.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-8.

Administered Connection Error Log Entries

Error Type

Aux Data

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

0 (a)(b)(c)(k)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

1 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

2 (a)(b)(c)(f)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

6 (a)(b)(c)(g)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

16 (a)(b)(c)(k)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

17 (a)(c)(h)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

18 (a)(b)(c)(i)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADM-CONN (Administered Connection)
Table 10-8.

Page 10-17

Administered Connection Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

21 (a)(b)(c)(g)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

22 (a)(b)(c)(d)(j)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

28 (a)(b)(c)(d)(e)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

29 (a)(b)(c)(k)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

31 (a)(b)(c)(g)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

34 (a)(b)(c)(l)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

38 (a)(b)(c)(m)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

40 (a)(b)(c)(l)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

41 (a)(b)(c)(m)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

42 (a)(b)(c)(l)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

43 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

44 (a)(b)(c)(l)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

50 (a)(b)(c)(d)(n)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

52 (a)(b)(c)(d)(o)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

54 (a)(b)(c)(o)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

58 (a)(b)(c)(l)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

65 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

66 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

69 (a)(b)(c)(d)(p)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

81 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

82 (a)(b)(c)(r)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

88 (a)(b)(c)(d)(s)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

91 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

95 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

96 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

97 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

98 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

99 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

100 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

102 (a)(b)(c)(i)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADM-CONN (Administered Connection)
Table 10-8.

Page 10-18

Administered Connection Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

111 (a)(b)(c)(q)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

127 (a)(b)(c)(g)

Any

None

Any

OFF

None

Continued on next page

Notes:
a. These errors have no specific test associated with them. Refer to Notes b
through p for an explanation and appropriate action.
b. These errors are valid only for administered connection established over
ISDN facilities; only error 127 is valid for administered connection
established over non-ISDN facilities (or between two endpoints on the
same switch).
■
■

■
■

■

Aux Data 1—Administered connection establishment failed
Aux Data 2—Active administered connection failed; attempting
reestablishment via auto restoration
Aux Data 3—Auto restoration failed
Aux Data 4—Active administered connection failed; attempting
reestablishment via fast retry
Aux Data 5—Fast retry failed

c. These errors are typically associated with administrative problems and are
not expected to be of a temporary nature. Therefore, the administered
connection is not retried and the failure is alarmed immediately (the alarm
threshold specified by the customer is ignored).
d. The address of the destination endpoint is: an unassigned number (1);
has an invalid number format (28); or is restricted form terminating calls
("Access Denied") [due to COR (Class of Restriction)]. Verify that the
destination address is correct and that the destination endpoint is
administered. The destination endpoint is not administered on the switch
where this error is logged.
e. A request has been made to use a transit network or common carrier that
cannot be accessed. Check the routing pattern used by this Administered
Connection and verify that the inter-exchange carrier specified is correct.
f. The exact failure cause is unknown or has been mapped to one of these
values. If this is not a temporary condition, try reversing the direction of the
Administered Connection (that is, originate the Administered Connection
from the destination switch). This may yield another failure cause.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADM-CONN (Administered Connection)

Page 10-19

g. The destination endpoint is not available. Check the status of the
destination endpoint (using status access-endpoint or status
data-module) and verify that the endpoint is not busy or otherwise
unavailable (for example, out-of-service). The status for the destination
endpoint is not available on the switch where this error is logged.
h. This switch sent an ISDN message to another switch, which either did not
respond (18) or did not respond within the allotted time (102). This could
be due to link failure or congestion or outage at the other switch.
i. The address of the destination endpoint has changed. Verify that the new
address is correct and change the Administered Connection accordingly.
The destination endpoint is not administered on the switch logging this
error.
j. Indicate that a resource (for example, a circuit or bearer capability)
required by the administered cConnection is not presently available.
k. A network failure (38) or temporary failure (41) has occurred. Error Log
entries for other maintenance objects (for example, DS1-BD or ISDN-LNK)
may indicate a local problem.
l. A request to use a network service has been denied because the service
has not been purchased. Check the routing pattern used by this
Administered Connection and verify that the service type is correct. If the
service type appears correct, check with the customer or network provider
or both to determine what services have been purchased by the
customer.
m. Indicate that outgoing calls may be barred on the originating switch (52)
or that incoming calls may be barred on the destination switch (54). To
restore an administered connection failure, issue the status administered
connection command for current administered connection state (observe
the retry count). If the administered connection state is "failed," then verify
and correct the Administered Connection Administration Form.
n. The requested bearer capability (65), channel type (66), or facility (69) is
not implemented or is unknown to the network. Check the address of the
destination endpoint and the routing pattern used by this Administered
Connection, and verify that they are correct and available.
o. These errors indicate that an ISDN protocol error has occurred.
p. The destination endpoint (or some intermediate facility) is not compatible
with the originating endpoint. Check the BCC fields of the routing pattern
used by this Administered Connection. Also, check if the originating and
destination endpoints are compatible (for example, the originating access
endpoint is voice-grade data, and the destination access endpoint is 64k
data).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)

Page 10-20

ADX8D-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
ADX8D-BD

1.

Alarm Level
MINOR or
WARNINGS

Initial Command To Run1
test board PCSS sh

Full Name of MO
AUDIX Circuit Pack

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation
(A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21).

The ADX8D-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY
AUDIX circuit pack (sometimes called Embedded AUDIX) operating in
digital-port (DP) mode. For circuit pack problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port
Circuit Pack)”. Port level problems are covered by ADX8D-PT.
DEFINITY AUDIX consists of two circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port
cabinet. The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side
maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus
interface. The AUDIX system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is
described in DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-21

ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command To Run1

Full Name of MO

ADX8D-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

AUDIX Digital Port

ADX8D-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

AUDIX Digital Port

1.

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack
resides (01 to 21). pp is the two digit port number (01, 02, ...).

The ADX8D-PT maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169
DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack (sometimes called Embedded AUDIX) operating in
digital-port (DP) mode. The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN566
operating in control-link mode is described in ADX16A-PT.
The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which
tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX
system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY
AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.
AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction
Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this
combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the switch is
concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots
(or ADXDP-RS/ADX8D-RS.)
In DP mode the TN566 pack supports up to 8 voice ports, each with a primary
information channel and a secondary information channel. Ports are
administered in increments of two. When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is
not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports.
Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct.

! CAUTION:
Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow
instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate:
■

Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Remove power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-22

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-9.
Error
Type
1

DEFINITY AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

0

Any

Any

1(a)

40987

None

WARNING

OFF

1(b)

1 to
20

None

WARNING

OFF

15(c)

Any

None

18(d)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

23(e)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

None

WARNING

ON

WARNING

OFF

0

130(f)
257(g)

40971

None

513(h)

Any

None

1537(i)

40968

None

Any

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2049

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#9)

MIN/WRN2

None

3840(k)

40965

None

3840(l)

41029

None

2.

test port PCSSpp sh

test port PCSSpp l r 3

MIN/WRN

1.

release port PCSSpp

ON

Voice & Ctrl. Local
Loop Test (#13)

40967

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

2

1793

2305(j)

Test to Clear Value

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. The user may experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem
that is detected by the port circuit. If this problem exists, replace the
circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the
problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined time.
b. At least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the
voice port. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is
incremented. Also see Note (a).
c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails.
d. The port is busied-out by command. You can release the port via the
release port PCSSpp command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-23

e. The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed. The alarm will
clear when a circuit pack is inserted.
f. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21
minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see
pcaution at the beginning of this section).
g. Something is interfering with transmitting to the voice port. This is usually
an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are
received.
h. AUDIX is not available to the switch, possibly due to a busyout on the
AUDIX system. Check out the AUDIX system referring DEFINITY AUDIX
System Maintenance, 585-300-110, if necessary.
i. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to
some problem with the link to the voice port. This can be ignored if no user
complaints are received. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack
(see precaution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is
resolved, the alarm is retired after a certain period of time.
j. The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset.
No craft action is necessary.
k. No voice ports are connected to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. No
maintenance action is required.
l. The message buffer in the circuit pack is full.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when you are
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13)

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Short Test
Sequence

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-24

NO-OP Tests
The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for DIG-LINE.
The tests listed below apply only to DIG-LINE and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These
are referred to as NO-OP tests, and they always return PASS.
■

Electronic Power Feed Test (#11)

■

Station Lamp Updates Test (#16)

■

Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17)

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and
that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE
is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This
test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence, and it takes about 20 to 30 seconds
to complete.
Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel (voice)
and on the secondary information channel (data) associated with each DEFINITY
AUDIX port. If this test fails on either channel, the voice port is taken
out-of-service.
Table 10-10. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may not
have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the test.
1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle. When
the port is idle, try (a).

2

ABORT

System resources may not have been available, or the port may have been
busy during the test. Try (a).

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be
in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port
extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
you must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a).

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-25

Table 10-10. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
1002

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due to
TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM-BUS
errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic,
try (a).

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors
may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Try (a).

1004

ABORT

The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of the
port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the port is in use, wait until the port is idle before testing.

1020

ABORT

Test disabled by background testing. Use the status station command to
determine when the voice port is available for testing.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. Try (a).

1
2

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port is transmitting in error. This causes noisy and
unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed
on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed
on the secondary channel.
1. Replace the circuit pack .

PASS

The port is using its allocated time slots correctly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to a
maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections.

Continued on next page

Note:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13)
This test checks the information and control channels between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and the DEFINITY AUDIX port circuit. First, the
primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-26

While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel
Loop Around Test is performed. The Loop Around Test for the secondary
information (data) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary
information channel loop around test.
Next, a Conference Test is implemented for the primary information channel. This
test is the same as Conference Test #6.
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the four tests run.
If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped.
Table 10-11. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error. Try (a).

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be in
use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port
extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, you
must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Try (a).

1001

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available. Try (a).

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under
heavy traffic conditions, or may have time slots that are out-of-service due to
TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, and is not handling heavy traffic, try
(a).

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors
may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, try (a).

1004

ABORT

The port was put in use during the test. Use the display port PCSSpp to
determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, you must wait until the port is idle before
retesting. Try (a).

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. Try (a).

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX8D-PT (AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-27

Table 10-11. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

7

FAIL

Conference Test failed on the primary channel. Some users may not notice a
disruption in service. In extreme cases, the conferencing feature may not work
at all.

14

FAIL

The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may range
from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack
is not transmitting properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to
loss of use of this port. This failure could also be disruptive to other users.

16

FAIL

The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may
range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port.

None

FAIL

The test failed for reasons external to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the
Tone Detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS s command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit
pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning
properly, and if the test still fails, replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see
precaution at the beginning of this section).

PASS

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are
transmitting properly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to 10
times and see if it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit Pack)

Page 10-28

ADX16D-B (16 Port AUDIX Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command To Run1

Full Name of MO

ADX16D-B

MINOR

test board PCSS sh

AUDIX Circuit Pack

ADX16D-B

WARNING

test board PCSS sh

AUDIX Circuit Pack

1.

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack
resides (01 to 21).

The ADX16D-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY
AUDIX circuit pack combination operating in 16 port mode digital (DP). For
circuit-pack-level problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”.
Port-level maintenance is covered by ADX16D-PT.
DEFINITY AUDIX consists of 2 circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port carrier.
The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side maintenance which
tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX
system has an extensive maintenance strategy of its own that is described in
DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)

Page 10-29

ADX16A-BD (AUDIX Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
ADXCL-BD or
\ADX16A-BD

1.

Alarm Level
MINOR, or
WARNINGS

Initial Command To
Run1
test board PCSS sh

Full Name of MO
AUDIX Circuit Pack

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack
resides (01 to 21).

The ADX16A-BD maintenance object represents a TN566/TN2169 DEFINITY
AUDIX circuit pack combination operating in control-link (CL) mode. For
circuit-pack-level problems, see “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)”.
Port-level maintenance is covered by ADX16A-PT.
DEFINITY AUDIX consists of 2 circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port carrier.
The tests described in this manual apply only to switch-side maintenance which
tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX
system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY
AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-30

ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital
Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
ADX16D-P

1.

Alarm Level
MINOR or WARNINGS

Initial Command To Run1
test port PCSSpp l

Full Name of MO
AUDIX Digital Port

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2-44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B,
C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). pp is the two
digit port number (01, 02, ...).

! CAUTION:
Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow the
instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate:
■

Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Remove power to a carrier or cabinet containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit
pack.

The ADX16D-P maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169
DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack operating in digital-port (DP) mode. The
maintenance strategy for ports on the TN566 operating in control-link mode is
described in ADX16A-PT.
The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which
tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX
system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY
AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.
AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction
Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this
combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the system is
concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots
(or ADX16-RES/ADX16D-RS).
In 16 Port DP mode, the TN566 pack supports up to 16 voice ports, each with a
primary information channel and a secondary information channel. Ports are
administered in increments of two. When a call to a station with an AUDIX login is
not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of the available voice ports.
Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-31

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-12. DEFINITY AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries
Error
Type
0

1

Aux
Data
0

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level
Any

On/Off
Board
Any

1(a)

40987

None

WARNING

OFF

1(b)

1 to 20

None

WARNING

OFF

15(c)

Any

None

18(d)

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

23(e)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

None

WARNING

ON

130(f)
257(g)

40971

None

513(h)

Any

None

1537(i)

40968

Test to Clear Value
test port PCSSpp sh r 1

release port PCSSpp
test port PCSSpp sh

None

WARNING

OFF

1793

Voice and Control
Local Loop TEST
(#13)

MIN/ WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2049

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#9)

MIN/ WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2305(j)

40967

None

3840(k)

40965

None

3840(l)

41029

None

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options
command.

Notes:
a. The user may experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem
that is detected by the port circuit. If this problem exists, replace the
circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the
problem is resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined time.
b. At least 15 off-board problems have been detected with the link to the
voice port. When an error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is
incremented. Also see Note a, above.
c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails.
d. The port is busied-out by command. Release the port with the release
port PCSSpp command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-32

e. The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed. The alarm will
clear when a circuit pack is inserted.
f. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21
minutes. To clear the error, reseat or replace the AUDIX circuit pack (see
caution at the beginning of this section).
g. Something is interfering with transmitting to the voice port. This is usually
an on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are
received.
h. AUDIX is not available to the switch, possibly due to a busyout on the
AUDIX system. Refer to DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance,
585-300-110, if necessary.
i. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to
some problem with the link to the voice port. This can be ignored if no user
complaints are received. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack
(see caution at the beginning of this section). Once the problem is
resolved, the alarm is retired after a certain period of time.
j. The link between the circuit pack and the voice port is successfully reset.
No craft action is necessary.
k. No voice ports are connected to the DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack. No
maintenance action is required.
l. The message buffer in the circuit pack is full.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around
Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the
testing sequence.
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13)

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

Short Test
Sequence

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NO-OP Tests
The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for DIG-LINE.
The tests listed below apply only to DIG-LINE and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These
tests always return PASS.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-33

■

Electronic Power Feed Test (#11)

■

Station Lamp Updates Test (#16)

■

Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17)

■

Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test (1201)

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and
that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE
is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This
test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence, and it takes about 20 to 30 seconds
to complete.
Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel (voice)
and on the secondary information channel (data) associated with each DEFINITY
AUDIX port. If this test fails on either channel, the voice port is taken
out-of-service.
Table 10-13. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may
not have been available. Also, the port may have been busy during the
test.
1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the voice port extension of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If the port is in
use, it is unavailable for this test. Wait until the port is idle (a).

2

ABORT

System resources may not have been available, or the port may have been
busy during the test.
1. Check if port is being used try (a)

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice
port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain
tests. Refer to “Status” commands in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands
and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states. Wait
until the port is idle before testing.
1. If the port status is idle, try (a)

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Try (a)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-34

Table 10-13. TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
1002

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic,
try (a)

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone
detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log.

1004

ABORT

The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice port extension of
the port. Use the status station command to determine the service state of
the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Refer to
“Status” commands in Chapter 8 for explanations of all possible states.
Wait until the port is idle before testing.

1020

ABORT

Test disabled via background testing. Use the status station command to
determine when the voice port is available for testing.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period (a).

1
2

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1 indicates that the
Crosstalk test failed on the primary channel. Failure code 2 indicates that
the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary channel.
1. Replace the circuit pack (see caution at the beginning of this section).

PASS

The port is using its allocated time slots correctly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to
a maximum of 10 times to make sure it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections.

Continued on next page

Note:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-35

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13)
This test checks the information and control channels between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and the DEFINITY AUDIX port circuit. The SPE sends
a message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port.
First, the primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run.
While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel
Loop Around Test is performed. The Loop Around Test for the secondary
information (data) channel is then performed. This test is the same as the primary
information channel loop around test.
Next, a Conference Test is implemented for the primary information channel. This
test is the same as Conference Test #6.
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the four tests run.
If any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped.
Table 10-14. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error (a)

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the voice
port extension of the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain
tests. Refer to “Status” commands in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands
and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for explanations of all possible states. Wait
until the port is idle before retesting, then try (a).

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available; try (a).

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots that are
out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and if it is not handling heavy
traffic, try (a).

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone
detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16D-P (16-Port AUDIX Digital Port)

Page 10-36

Table 10-14. TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1004

ABORT

The port was put in use during the test. The test has been aborted. Use the
display port PCSSpp to determine the voice port extension of the port.
Use the status station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port
is idle before retesting. Try (a).

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. Try (a).

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

7

FAIL

Conference Test failed on the primary channel. In some cases, users may
not notice a disruption in service. In extreme cases, the conferencing
feature may not work at all.

14

FAIL

The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may
range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and AUDIX is not transmitting
properly. User impact may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of
this port. This failure could also be disruptive to other users.

16

FAIL

The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact
may range from no noticeable effect to loss of use of this port.

None

FAIL

The test failed for reasons external to the AUDIX.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the
tone detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS s command.
2. Resolve any problems detected on the tone generator circuit pack or
tone detector circuit pack.
3. If the tone generator and tone detector circuit packs are functioning
properly, and if the test still fails, replace the AUDIX (see caution at the
beginning of this section).

PASS

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All channels are
transmitting properly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to
10 times and see if it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the connections.

Continued on next page

Notes:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-37

ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog
Line/Control Link)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command To
Run1

Full Name of MO

ADXCL-PT or
ADX16A-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

AUDIX Analog Line/ Control Link

ADXCL-PT or
ADX16A-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

AUDIX Analog Line/ Control Link

1.

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A,
B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21). pp is the
two digit port number (01, 02, ...).

! CAUTION:
Never do any of the following without first shutting down AUDIX. Follow the
instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate:
■

Remove DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Cycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

■

Remove power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX circuit packs

The ADX16A-PT maintenance object represents a port on a TN566/TN2169
DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack that is operating in control-link (CL) mode. For
circuit-pack-level problems (ADX16A-BD or ANL-16-BD), see “XXX-BD
(Common Port Circuit Pack)”. For port-level problems with AUDIX operating in
digital-port mode, see ADXDP-PT/ADX8D-PT.
The tests described in this section apply only to switch-side maintenance which
tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface. The AUDIX
system has an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in DEFINITY
AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.
AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs: the TN566 Multifunction
Board (MFB) and the TN2169 Alarm Board (ALB). Because of its size this
combination occupies 5 slots, but only 1 slot is functional as far as the switch is
concerned. The other 4 slots are seen by the switch as ‘‘AUDIX-reserved’’ slots.
In CL mode the TN566 pack supports up to 16 voice ports. When a call to a
station with an AUDIX login is not answered, AUDIX answers the call using one of
the available voice ports.
Unlike other AUDIX systems, DEFINITY AUDIX is not an adjunct.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-38

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-15. DEFINITY AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link Error Log Entries
Error
Type
0

1

Aux
Data
0

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1
release station extension

1(a)

40977

None

18

0

busyout station


WRN

ON

23(b)

0

None

WRN

OFF

None

WRN

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

130(c)
257(d)

40973

None

513(e)

Any

None

1025(f)

Loop Around Test
(#161)

MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

1281

Conference Test (#7)

MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

1537

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This indicates
that no terminal equipment was present when ringing was attempted.
Execute the short test port PCSSpp command.
b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically
installed. The alarm will be cleared when the circuit pack is installed.
c. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11
minutes. To clear the error, reseat or replace the circuit pack.
d. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This error
indicates that ringing voltage is absent. If only one analog circuit pack in
the system has this problem, then replace the circuit pack. If only analog
circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error, then the ringing
generator may not be connected to this carrier. If analog circuit packs on
many carriers have this error, check the ringing generator.
e. AUDIX is not available to the switch. Check the AUDIX system, referring to
DEFINITY AUDIX System Maintenance, 585-300-110.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-39

f. The TDM bus is out of service. See the “TDM-BUS” section.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Loop Around Test #161 for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Loop Around Test (#161)

X

ND

Conference Test (#7)

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

Short Test
Sequence

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NO-OP Tests
The maintenance strategy for DEFINITY AUDIX emulates the one for ANL-16-L.
The tests listed below apply only to ANL-16-L and not to DEFINITY AUDIX. These
tests always return PASS.
■

Battery Feed Test (#35)

■

Audits and Updates Test (#36)

■

Station Present Test (#48)

Tests 36 and 48 ABORT when AUDIX is not running.

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
This test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and
never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
part of the long test sequence and takes about 25 seconds to complete.
Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-40

Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable
for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before testing. Try (a).

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. Try (a).

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
then try (a).

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone
detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors. Then, try (a).

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the port is in use, it is unavailable for certain tests. Wait until
the port is idle before testing. Try (a).

1005

ABORT

This condition indicates that the test is not applicable when the analog port
is used in a combined modem pool. This error can be ignored.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter
the change station  command and change the ‘‘Test?’’
field on the Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2012

ABORT

System could not respond to this request.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-41

Table 10-16. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles
on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining
station wiring, or by examining the station.

Continued on next page

Note:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
This test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly
perform the conferencing function.
Table 10-17. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. (a)

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run test are not available. The port may be busy
with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension. Use the status station command to determine the service
state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle before retesting.(a)

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted.
Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension.
Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If
the port is in use, wait until it is idle before testing. Try (a).

1018

ABORT

Test disabled by administration. This only applies to analog stations.
1. To enable the test for the analog station being tested, enter the change
station  command and change the ‘‘Test?’’ field on the
Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-42

Table 10-17. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
Any

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes
noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by
examining station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Note:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Loop Around Test (#161)
This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE
on the analog port.
Table 10-18. TEST #161 Loop Around Test
Error
Code

1000

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be
busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine
the station extension. Use the status station command to determine the
service state of the port. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle before testing.
1. If the port status is idle, try (a).

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be under
heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to
TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, try (a).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ADX16A-PT (AUDIX Analog Line/Control Link)

Page 10-43

Table 10-18. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be
oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may
be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, try (a).

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted.
Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension.
Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port. If
the port is in use, wait until the port is idle before testing. Try (a).

1018

ABORT

Test disabled by administration. To enable the test for the particular analog
station being tested, enter the change station  command and
change the ‘‘Test?’’ field on the Station Form from ‘‘n’’ to ‘‘y.’’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources for this test. Try (a).

FAIL

The reflective Loop Around Test failed. This causes noisy or unreliable
connections or other users calling this port may hear an echo.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station
equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using
other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the station.

Continued on next page

Note:
a. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT)

Page 10-44

ALARM-PT (ALARM PORT)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ALARM-PT

MIN

test port PCSSpp l

Alarm-Port

ALARM-PT

WRN

test port PCSSpp sh

Alarm-Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the
carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot
in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and
pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).

The Alarm Port Maintenance Object provides on-board maintenance for an
analog line port that is administered as an external device alarm port. Tests are
provided to verify the analog line port’s ability to detect an external device alarm.
The External Device Alarm (EXT-DEV) Maintenance Object is used for the
off-board external device alarm.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-45

ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

ANL-16-L

MIN

test port PCSSpp l

16-Port Neon Analog Line

ANL-16-L

WRN

test port PCSSpp sh release
station 

16-Port Neon Analog Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack
is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).

The following are 16-Port Analog Line circuit packs:
TN746

TN746B

TN468 [G3iV2-386]

TN749 [G3iV2-386]

TN468B [G3iV2-386]

TN2135 [G3iV2-386]

TN2144 [G3iV2-386]

TN2149 [G3iV2-386]

These circuit packs provide 16 ports for analog voice terminals. The TN746,
TN468, and TN749 support only single-line, on-premises/in-building, analog
voice terminals, and not off-premises stations, since these circuit packs are not
equipped with lightning protection. The TN746B, TN2144, TN2149, and TN468B
support both on-premises and off-premises (that is, out-of-building) analog voice
terminals. The TN468, TN468B, TN479, TN2135, TN2144, and TN2149 do NOT
support the neon message waiting feature.
Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment,
it should be disabled via the change station  command. However,
on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #7, #161, and
#35 as well as Test #48.
No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 16-Port Neon Analog Line
circuit pack is performed, except to determine whether or not the terminal is
connected. Failures of the neon message waiting lamp power and the common
ringing application circuitry are reported as part of the Common Port Circuit Pack
errors (see errors 1281 and 1793 in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-46

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-19. 16-Port Neon Analog Line Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Associated Test

0

Any

1 (a)

40960
40977

none

15 (b)

Any

Audits and Updates
Test (#36)

18

0

0

130 (c)
257 (d)

40973

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

busyout station


WRN

ON

release station 

None

WRN

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

none

513 (e)

Station Present Test
(#48)

WRN

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

769

Battery Feed Test
(#35)

MIN/WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

1025

Loop Around Test
(#161)

MIN/WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

1281

Conference Test (#7)

MIN/WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

1537

1.
2.

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MIN/WRN

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test
description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options
command.

Notes:
a. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This indicates
that no terminal equipment was present when ringing was attempted.
Execute the short test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure
for the results of Test #48.
■

40960—indicates that too many simultaneous incoming ringing
attempts were made on this board. Only four ports on a board may
be ringing simultaneously. A fifth incoming call will cause an inline
error from the board.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)
■

Page 10-47

40977—indicates that no terminal equipment was connected when
ringing was attempted. Run the short Test via the test port
PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for the results of Test
#48.

b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors
(if any).
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
d. This is an in-line error and can only be resolved over time. This error
indicates that ringing voltage is absent. If only one Analog circuit pack in
the system has this problem, then replace the circuit pack. If only Analog
circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error, then the ringing
generator may not be connected to this carrier. If Analog circuit packs on
many carriers have this error, then it is probably a problem with the ringing
generator.
e. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal
equipment, it should be disabled using the change station 
command. However, on some releases of the software, this action
disables Tests #6, #7, #161, and #35 as well as Test #48.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery Feed Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery Feed Test (#35)

X

X

ND

Station Present Test (#48)

X

X

ND

Loop Around Test (#161)

X

ND

Conference Test (#7)

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-48

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and
provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30
seconds to complete.
Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be
due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-49

Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV
(TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV
(TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be
applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a
voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold).

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’
field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this
field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing
application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for a particular station being tested, enter change
station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from 'n' to 'y.'

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. This could be
due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-50

Table 10-20. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
Any

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board
problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults
associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board
problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS
problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane
or bent pins on the backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared.
Replace the board only if the test fails.

0

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles
on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining
station wiring, or by examining the station.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for
the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-51

instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together.
The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the
tone is within a certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-21. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be
applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a
voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold).

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’
field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this
field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing
application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter
change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from
'n' to 'y.'

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-52

Table 10-21. TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
2. If there are no TONE-PT errors in the error log, retry the test at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This will
cause noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Issue the display port and the status station commands to
determine if the station is idle. If the station is found to be idle, issue
the test port command for this port.
2. If the test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and the release
port commands, and then retest the port.
3. If the test still fails, replace the board.

0

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and
by examining station, trunk, or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-53

Battery Feed Test (also called Port Diagnostic
Test) (#35)
The battery feed chip provides power to the telephone equipment, signaling,
rotary dial pulsing, transmission, and balance. This test checks the signaling and
switchhook capabilities of the battery feed chip by terminating the port, applying
battery, and by trying to detect a current.
NOTE:
For the TN746B 16-Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack, Test #35 always
"passes." No actual testing is performed on the TN746B while the test is
running. Test #35 operates in the normal manner for TN746.
Table 10-22. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be
applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a
voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-54

Table 10-22. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued
Error
Code
1018

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’
field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this
field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing
application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter
change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from
'n' to 'y.'

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

FAIL

The port's battery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the
terminal equipment. This could be a marginal test, and the terminal
equipment may be operating satisfactorily.
1. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, determine whether the customer is
experiencing problems on this line. Replace the circuit pack only if the
customer is experiencing problems.

0

PASS

The port’s battery feed chip is able to provide power to the station
equipment to detect on-/off-hook, but may not be able to supply power for
touch-tones. If touch-tones are inoperative on this station, then replace the
circuit pack because this port is inoperative. User-reported troubles on
this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining
station wiring, or by examining the station.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-55

Station Status and Translation Audits and
Updates Test (#36)
This test updates the Analog port’s message lamp state (if it has one) and
translations (such as station type, dial type, network connection) with information
kept in the software. The software is updated with the switchhook state reported
by the port processor. When the ringer is in the off state, this test also turns off
the station’s ringer to prevent constant ringing caused by defective hardware.
Table 10-23. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be
applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a
voice terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold).

1006

ABORT

This port has been busied out by command, or taken out-of-service by the
failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test.
1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If
this error is present, release the port with the release station
extension command, and run the test again.
2. Look in the error log for error type 1025 (NPE crosstalk test failed) for
this port. If this error is present, investigate the errors associated with
the NPE Crosstalk Test 6.
3. Make sure that the terminal is connected and in service, and then
retest.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-56

Table 10-23. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test — Continued
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This does not indicate a hardware problem. The switchhook audit failed.
The other updates were not performed because of this failure. This may
occur when the audit is performed at the same time that the terminal
equipment goes off-hook. Use the status station command to determine
when the port is available for testing.
1. When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

5

FAIL

This does not indicate a hardware problem. However, there may be an
internal software error. The message waiting lamp update failed. The
translation and ringer updates were not performed because of this failure.

7

FAIL

The translation update failed. This does not indicate a hardware problem.
However, there may be an internal software error. The ringer update was
not performed because of this failure.

8

FAIL

This does not indicate a hardware problem. However, there may be an
internal software error. The ringer update failed.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

0

PASS

The software and the port processor have the same status. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by
examining station wiring, or by examining the station.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Station Present Test (also called Ringing
Application Test) (#48)
This test provides a burst of ringing current to the terminal equipment and
detects that current flows. This test ascertains whether terminal equipment is
connected to the port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-57

This test may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment,
it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen
form. However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6,
#7, #161, and #35 as well as Test #48.
Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals
a maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This test may not be
applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice
terminal (for example, the modem pool member or music on hold).

1008

ABORT

Could not allocate a ringing circuit. Either all the ringing circuits are in use
or the ringing generator is defective or it is not wired correctly.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN errors in the Error Log.
If an ABORT 1008 occurs for this test on other circuit packs as well,
then the ringing generator may be defective or is not wired correctly
(see errors for RING-GEN). If it doesn’t occur on other ports, then all
four ring phases are in use.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-58

Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued
Error
Code
1018

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’
field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this
field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the brief ringing
disturbance that this test may cause).
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter
change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from
'n' to 'y.'

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

FAIL

The terminal equipment is not connected to the circuit pack. Some terminal
equipment such as modems may fail even when connected properly.
1. Remotely test the equipment.
2. If the test fails again, look for RING-GEN errors in the error log. If
present, refer to the RING-GEN (analog ring generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. Check all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch.
Then, run the test again.
4. If the test still fails, the set may be defective. Check the set, and
replace it, if necessary.
5. Some terminal equipment could fail even when it is connected
properly. If this is the case, disable the test using the change station
extension command (enter 'n' into the Test field). Note that this action
also disables tests 6, 7, 161, and 35 on this port.

PASS

The station is connected properly to the switch. This test may also pass if
no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far
from the switch. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated
by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the
station.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-59

Table 10-24. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be
due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Loop Around Test (#161)
Each Analog port consists of:
■

an NPE for port connectivity and gain, and conferencing functionality

■

a code that converts the digital signals of the TDM Bus to analog signals

■

a battery feed chip that provides power to the telephone set for signaling,
dial pulsing, transmission, and balance

This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE,
the codec, and the battery feed chip of the analog port. A Tone Detector and a
Tone Generator talk and listen on the same pair of time slots as the Analog Port.
The Analog Port is then instructed to go into loop around mode (see the following
below). The test passes if the signal measured by the Tone Detector is within
acceptable limits.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-60

BFC

COD

TONE
LEVEL
MEASUREMENT

TONE
SOURCE

NPE

TDM BUS
* BFC - BATTERY FEED CHIP

Figure 10-2.

Analog Loop Around Test

Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-61

Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the
"TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the
"TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension. Use the status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test is not run because the port is administered as either an External
Alert or Announcement port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-62

Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1018

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test has been disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’
field on the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this
field has been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing
application test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station being tested, enter
change station extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the station from
'n' to 'y.'

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. This
could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The reflective loop around test failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable
connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The problem can
also be off-board, as described below.
1. Since the test may be affected by a line seizure, repeat the test at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the
tone detector circuit pack by using the test board PCSS short
command.
3. Resolve any problems that are detected on the tone generator circuit
pack or the tone detector circuit pack.
4. If the tone generator and tone detector circuit packs are functioning
properly and the test still fails and a voice terminal is connected and
wired properly, replace the analog line circuit pack.

PASS

The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station
equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by
using other port tests, by examining station wiring, or by examining the
station.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-63

Table 10-25. TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-64

ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ANL-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

8-Port Analog Line Circuit Pack

ANL-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

8-Port Analog Line Circuit Pack

ANL-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

8-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack

ANL-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

8-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack

ANL-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

16-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack

ANL-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

16-Port Neon Analog Line Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or [G.1] 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also "ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L
(8-Port Neon Analog Line)", and "ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line)"
Maintenance documentation for related line information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-65

ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line),
ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ANL-LINE

MIN

test port PCSSpp l

8-Port Analog Line

ANL-LINE

WRN

test port PCSSpp sh

8-Port Analog Line

ANL-NE-L

MIN

test port PCSSpp l

8-Port Neon Analog Line

ANL-NE-L

WRN

test port PCSSpp sh

8-Port Neon Analog Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit
port number (for example, 01).

The 8-Port Analog Line circuit packs are:
TN742

TN431 [G3iV2-386]

TN769

TN443 [G3iV2-386]

TN712

TN467 [G3iV2-386]
TN411 [G3iV2-386]

These circuit packs provide eight ports for single line on-premises or
off-premises analog endpoints such as analog voice terminals, queue warning
level lamps, recorded announcements, dictation machines, PagePac™ paging
equipment, external alerting devices, modems, facsimile machines, and AUDIX
voice ports. The TN769 supports a neon message waiting lamp. The other
eight-port analog lines do not support the lamp.
Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment,
it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen.
However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #47,
and #35 as well as Test #48. Test #47 may cause a false alarm when the port is
connected to off-premises equipment, some non-voice terminal equipment, and
some loop equipment. If this is the case, then the test should be disabled using
the Tests field of the change station  command.
No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 8-Port Analog Line circuit pack
or 8-Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed, except to determine
whether or not the terminal is connected. Failures of the neon message waiting
lamp power (for ANL-NE-L only) and the common ringing application circuitry are

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-66

reported as part of the Common Port Circuit Pack errors (see errors 1281 and
1793 in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation).

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-26. 8-Port Analog Line Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Associated Test

0

Any

1 (a)

40960
40975
40977

None

15 (b)

Any

Audits and Updates
Test (#36)

18

0

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

busyout station


WRN

OFF

release station 

130(c)

None

WRN

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

257 (d)

Station Present Test
(#48)

WRN

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

513

Battery Feed Test
(#35)

MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

769 (e)

Loop Around and
Conference Test(#47)

1025

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

0

test port PCSSpp l r 3
MIN/WR
N2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1281 (f)
1793 (f)

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used
in the set options command.

Notes:
a. These are in-line errors and can only be resolved over time.
■

40960—indicates that too many simultaneous incoming ringing
attempts were made on this board. Only four ports on a board may
be ringing simultaneously. A fifth incoming call will cause an inline
error from the board.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)
■

■

Page 10-67

40975—indicates that the terminal equipment was on-hook when
ring-tip was detected during ringing. This usually indicates a failure
in the terminal equipment or the type of terminal has a low ringer
impedance. Call the terminal equipment and verify that the terminal
rings. If the terminal doesn’t ring, then replace it. Otherwise, issue
the test port PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for Test
#48.
40977—indicates that no terminal equipment was connected when
ringing was attempted. Run the Short Test via the test port
PCSSpp command, and follow the procedure for the results of Test
#48.

b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any).
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
d. Test #48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal
equipment, it should be disabled via the change station 
command. However, on some releases of the software, this disables Tests
#6, #47, and #35 as well as Test #48.
e. Test #47 may cause a false alarm when the port is connected to
off-premises equipment, some non-voice terminal equipment, and some
loop equipment. If this causes a false alarm, then disable the test by
changing the Tests field of the change station command to "no."
f. Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance
documentation.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery Feed Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery Feed Test (#35)

X

X

ND

Station Present Test (#48)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-68

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Loop Around and Conference Test (#47)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test
Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-69

Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV
(TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TONE-PT
(Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result
under either of the following conditions:
1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal
equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool
member or music on hold).
2. The circuit pack is one of the following:
— TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15
— TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. The default for the 'Test' field on the
'Station' form is 'y'; thus, you may want to determine why this field has
been set to 'n' on this station (this may be due to the ringing application
test 48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station
extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port
or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit
pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-70

Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a
system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a
service state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone
source failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and
tone detectors could be having a communication problem, for example,
the companding modes could be out of synchronization.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-71

Table 10-27. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code
Any

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems. Off-board
problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults
associated with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board
problems before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS
problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected to the backplane
or bent pins on the backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are cleared.
Replace the board only if the test fails.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles
on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by examining
station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal
is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises.

NOTE:
This test always passes for Analog circuit packs TN712 prior to
Vintage 14 and TN742 prior to Vintage 4.
0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could
be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-72

Battery Feed Test (also called Port Diagnostic
Test) (#35)
The battery feed chip provides power to the telephone equipment, signaling,
rotary dial pulsing, transmission, and balance. This test checks the signaling and
switchhook capabilities of the battery feed chip by terminating the port, applying
battery, and trying to detect a current.
Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at one-minute intervals
a maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result
under either of the following conditions:
1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal
equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool
member or music on hold).
2. The circuit pack is one of the following:
— TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15
— TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-73

Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued
Error
Code
1018

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Test disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on the
’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been
set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48,
which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station
extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system
allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service
state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source
failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone
detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the
companding modes could be out of synchronization.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The port’s battery feed chip is unable to supply sufficient power to the
terminal equipment. This may occur when the test is performed at the same
time that the terminal equipment goes off-hook.
1. Use status station to determine when the port is available for testing.
When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at
1-minute intervals a minimum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, determine whether the customer is
experiencing problems on this line. Replace the circuit pack only if the
customer is experiencing problems.

PASS

The port’s battery feed chip is able to provide power to the station
equipment to detect on-/off-hook. However, the battery feed chip may still
be unable to provide power for touch-tones. If tones are heard when
buttons are pressed, then the battery feed chip is functioning correctly;
otherwise, replace the circuit pack because this port is defective.
User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other
port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by
ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or
on-premises.

NOTE:
This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to
Vintage 14 and TN742 prior to Vintage 6.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-74

Table 10-28. TEST #35 Battery Feed Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be
due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Station Status and Translation Audits and
Updates Test (#36)
This test updates the analog port’s message lamp state (if it has one) and
translations (such as station type, dial type, network connection) with information
kept in the software. The software is updated with the switchhook state reported
by the port processor. When the ringer is in the off state, this test also turns off
the station’s ringer to prevent constant ringing caused by defective hardware.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-75

Table 10-29. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test
Error
Code

1004

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result
under either of the following conditions:
1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal
equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool
member or music on hold).
2. The circuit pack is one of the following:
— TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15
— TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5

1006

ABORT

This port has been busied out by command or taken out-of-service by the
failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If
this error is present, then release the port with the release station
extension command and run the test again.
2. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 1025 (NPE Crosstalk Test failed)
for this port. If this error is present, then investigate the errors
associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) first.
3. Make sure that the terminal is connected and in service, and then
retest.

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-76

Table 10-29. TEST #36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test — Continued
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This does not indicate a hardware problem. The switchhook audit failed,
and the other updates were not performed because of this failure. This
condition may occur when the audit is performed at the same time that the
terminal equipment goes off-hook. Use the status station command to
determine when the port is available for testing.
1. When the port becomes available for testing, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

5

FAIL

This does not indicate a hardware problem but may indicate an internal
software error. The message waiting lamp update failed. The translation
and ringer updates were not performed because of this failure.

7

FAIL

The translation update failed. The ringer update was not performed
because of this failure. This does not indicate a hardware problem but may
be an internal software error.

8

FAIL

This does not indicate a hardware problem but may be an internal software
error. The ringer update failed.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

PASS

The software and the port processor have the same status. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests, by
examining station wiring, by examining the station, and by ensuring that the
terminal is correctly translated as off-premises or on-premises.

NOTE:
This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to
Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6.
0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be
due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-77

Loop Around and Conference Test (#47)
Each Analog Port consists of:
■

an NPE for port connectivity and gain, and conferencing functionality

■

a code that converts the digital signals of the TDM Bus to analog signals

■

a battery feed chip that provides power to the telephone set for signaling,
dial pulsing, transmission, and balance.

This test is designed to check the on-board transmission capabilities of the NPE,
the code, and the battery feed chip of the Analog Port. A Tone Detector and a
Tone Generator talk and listen on the same pair of time slots as the Analog Port.
The Analog Port is then instructed to go into loop around mode (see Figure 10-2).
The test passes if the signal measured by the Tone Detector is within acceptable
limits.
The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being
tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. As part of Test #47, the
operation of the port conference circuits in the NPE for three and four parties is
also tested. In addition, a test is run to measure noise. The NPE is instructed to
listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting
signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a
certain range, the test passes.
The noise test is performed by filtering out the tone, and then measuring inherent
port noise.
NOTE:
This Loop Around Test is sensitive to the length of the loop, the equipment
in the loop, or the equipment terminating the loop, such as off-premises
stations. If this test is causing a false alarm, then disable the test by
changing the Tests field to "no" using the change station command for this
station.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-78

B

CO

TONE
LEVEL
MEASUREMENT

TONE

N

SOURCE

TDM BUS

* BFC BATTERY FEED AND HYBRID CHIP

Figure 10-3.

Analog Loop Around and Conference Test

Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

7

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call.
1. Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter
status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If
the port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
2. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-79

Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. (This could be a Music-on-Hold port.)
1. Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter
status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If
the port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
2. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TTR-LEV
(TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to "TONE-PT
(Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized for a valid call during the conference or noise
test. Use the status station command to determine when the port is
available for testing.
1. If the circuit pack is a TN742 with vintage 10 or less, this test is not
valid. Otherwise, proceed with #2.
2. When the port is available for testing, retry the command at 1-minute
intervals, a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-80

Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued
Error
Code
1005

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result
under either of the following conditions:
1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal
equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool
member or music on hold).
2. The circuit pack is one of the following:
— TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15
— TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. The default for the 'Test' field on the
'Station' form is 'y'; thus, you may want to determine why this field has been
set to 'n' on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test 48,
which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station
extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system
allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service
state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source
failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone
detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the
companding modes could be out of synchronization.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

7

FAIL

The conference test or the noise test failed. This could cause noisy or
unreliable connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The
problem can also be off-board, as described below.

13

The reflective loop around with gain set to low and the 600-ohm balance
failed. This will cause noisy or unreliable connections.

14

The reflective loop around test (with the gain set to high, using RC balance)
failed. This could cause noisy or unreliable connections. The problem can
also be off-board, as described below.

15

The nonreflective loop around test failed. This could cause noisy or
unreliable connections, or users calling this port may hear an echo. The
problem can also be off-board, as described below.

More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-81

Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued
Error
Code
7
13
14
15

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
1. Disconnect the terminal equipment from the circuit pack at the
cross-connect and run the test again.
2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack and reconnect the
terminal equipment. If the test passes the second time, then the test
results were affected by the terminal equipment connected to the port;
in this case, ignore the results of this test if all other tests pass or abort
and the station is operating properly. Failure of test 47 does not cause
an alarm. If there are failures of other tests, then investigate those
errors. User reported troubles with this port should be investigated by
using other port tests, by examining station wiring, and by examining
the station to ensure that it is correctly translated as off-premises or
on-premises.

(cont’d.)

NOTE:
If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for all ports on a
circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or
TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC
power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB
power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC source.
The 645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC
power source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power
unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of
power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit,
refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered
systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate problems with
a 645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power
unit for DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red
LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the
pack. If the test fails on more than 1 port, check for errors on the
TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If errors, take appropriate actions. When
the tone errors are cleared, rerun the test.
PASS

The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station
equipment. User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated by
using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by examining the
station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as
off-premises or on-premises.

NOTE:
This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to
Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-82

Table 10-30. TEST #47 Loop Around and Conference Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be
due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Station Present Test (also called Ringing
Application Test) (#48)
This test provides a burst of ringing current to the terminal equipment and
detects that current flows. This test is to ascertain whether or not terminal
equipment is connected to the port.
This test may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily
maintenance. If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment,
it should be disabled using the Tests field of the station administration screen.
However, on some releases of the software, this action disables Tests #6, #47,
and #35 as well as Test #48.
Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-83

Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call.
Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the station’s extension. Enter
status station extension to determine the service state of the port. If the
port is in use, it will be unavailable for certain tests. Wait until the port is idle
before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.
2. Check for phone left off-hook or for wiring problems.

1004

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension. Use the status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

1005

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a configuration problem. This code will result
under either of the following conditions:
1. This test may not be applicable, or it may be disruptive to terminal
equipment other than a voice terminal (for example, the modem pool
member or music on hold).
2. The circuit pack is one of the following:
— TN742 vintages 13,14 and 15
— TN769 vintages 3,4 and 5

1008

ABORT

Could not allocate a ringing circuit for one of the following reasons:
■

All the ringing circuits are in use, or

■

The ringing generator is defective, or

■

It is not wired correctly.

1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN errors in the Error Log.
If an ABORT 1008 occurs for Test #48 on other circuit packs as well,
then the ringing generator may be defective or not wired correctly. If it
does not occur on other ports, then that circuit pack is currently using
all four ringing phases.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-84

Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued
Error
Code
1018

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was disabled via administration. The default for the ’Test’ field on
the ’Station’ form is ’y’; thus, you may want to determine why this field has
been set to ’n’ on this station (this may be due to the ringing application test
48, which can be customer or terminal disturbing).
1. To enable the test for a particular station, enter change station
extension and set the ‘Test?’ field on the ‘Station Form’ to ‘y.’

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Either a system
allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service
state failed or the attempt to put the port in connection with a tone source
failed (this could be a tone-clock problem). The tone-clock and tone
detectors could be having a communication problem, for example, the
companding modes could be out of synchronization.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The terminal equipment is not connected to the circuit pack or the ringing
generator may have failed.
1. Remotely test the equipment.
2. If the test fails again, look for RING-GEN errors in the error log. If
present, refer to the RING-GEN (analog ring generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. Check all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch.
Then, run the test again.
4. If the test still fails, the set may be defective. Check the set, and
replace it, if necessary.
5. Some terminal equipment (such as a modem) could fail even when it is
connected properly. If this is the case, disable the test using the
change station extension command (enter 'n' into the 'Test' field).
Note that this action also disables tests 6, 7, 161, and 35 on this port.

PASS

The station is connected properly to the switch. This test may also pass if
no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located far from the
switch (that is, it is off-premises). User-reported troubles on this port should
be investigated by using other port tests, by examining station wiring, by
examining the station, and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly
translated as off-premises or on-premises.

NOTE:
This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to
Vintage 14 and TN742 circuit packs prior to Vintage 6.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line)

Page 10-85

Table 10-31. TEST #48 Station Present Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board). This could be
due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the list
config command, and resolve any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish the
linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not the case,
dispatch to check to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-86

ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ANN-BD

MINOR

test board PCSS l

Announcement Circuit Pack

ANN-BD

WRN

test board PCSS l

Announcement Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

The TN750 Announcement circuit pack is a service circuit which provides a
DEFINITY Generic 3 customer with an integrated means for recording
announcements that can be played back on demand by call processing as part
of a calling feature (for example, announcements on hunt group calls). There are
16 Announcement Ports on the Announcement circuit pack. Each port can play
any integrated announcement, independently of the other ports. In addition to the
16 Announcement Ports, the Announcement circuit pack also has one Data Line
Circuit Port (port 17). The Data Line Circuit Port is used for
uploading/downloading the announcement memory to/from the system tape
[G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. If there are any
errors associated with port 17, refer to "DAT-LINE (Data Line)" Maintenance
documentation. If there are any errors associated with any other port, refer to
"ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation.
NOTE:
TN750C is required if your system will have multiple announcement boards.
To use multiple announcement boards, you must have G3V4 software, and
at least one TN750C (up to ten are allowed). Only one TN750A/B may be
present in the system when a TN750C is used. The announcements from a
TN750A/B can be saved and restored to a TN750C — but once the
announcements are recorded onto a TN750C, they are not backward
compatible with the TN750A/B.
The Announcement circuit pack has two processors on it. The first processor, or
Angel, controls the circuit pack and communicates with the switch via the control
channel on the TDM Bus. The second processor, or Speech Processor (SP),
controls the speech memory and announcements. Digital speech is converted
from its TDM Bus form to an internal storage form (for recording) and vice versa
(for playbacks) by the 140AY device on the circuit pack, which has 16 channels
(one for each Announcement Port).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-87

General Notes
Here are a few very important general notes that apply to any problem on the
Announcement circuit pack. The user should read this before attempting to work
on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack or Announcement Ports, especially if
the circuit pack needs to be replaced.
1. The Announcement circuit pack retains all integrated announcements as
long as the circuit pack has power. For this reason, whenever there is a
problem with either the Announcement circuit pack or an Announcement
Port that may require the circuit pack to be reset, it is always best to try to
reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command first. If that
does not work, replace the circuit pack. Announcements are preserved
through a software reset, but they are lost when the circuit pack is
reseated.
2. If a customer has announcements on the Announcement circuit pack
that cannot be rerecorded easily, then announcements must be saved
on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386,
G3vsV2] to ensure that they are not lost. This should be done as soon
as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack (or whenever they
are changed), assuming that the circuit pack is in proper working order
(see Note).
NOTE:
Unlike translations, announcements are NEVER automatically saved
to the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2,
G3iV2-386, G3vsV2].
3. The administration terminal save announcements command replaces the
announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card
[G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] the Announcement circuit pack speech
memory. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command and,
as a result, destroy a valid file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or
memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2].
4. The restore announcements command replaces the Announcement
circuit pack speech memory with the announcement file on the system
tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2]. Care
must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command, destroying valid
speech memory (especially if the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory
card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] does not have a valid announcement
file on it).
5. Whenever the Announcement circuit pack is replaced, announcements
must always be rerecorded or downloaded to the new circuit pack.
Otherwise, call processing is not able to use the pack.
6. If announcement speech memory is corrupted, announcements should
not be saved [that is, if the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) fails, or
if the speech sounds corrupted on playback]. This can ruin a good
announcement file on the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-88

[G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] and potentially cause errors/alarms on any
circuit pack to which the new file is downloaded. However, if the customer
does not have a valid announcement file on the system tape
[G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2],
announcements can be saved in an effort to try to retain some of them (all
of the announcements recorded may not be corrupted).
7. Due to a hardware fault in the TN750 announcement board, the following
sequence of events my cause the announcement file to become corrupted
and unusable:
■

Fill the board with recorded announcements.

■

Delete the last few announcements recorded.

■

Re-record the announcements deleted.

If the announcement file becomes corrupted, the only solution is to
re-record all announcements. To do this, follow these steps:
a. Remove the announcement board.
b. Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive. Do this so that
announcements are not automatically restored from tape.
c. Re-insert the announcement board.
d. Re-record all announcements.
e. Insert the tape cartridge in the tape drive.
f. Issue the save announcements command to save all the
announcements on the tape.
This hardware fault is fixed in the TN750B announcement board. However,
the TN750B board will not automatically correct an announcement file
which has previously been corrupted by a TN750 board. The only way to
correct an announcement file corrupted by the TN750 board is to follow
the steps above.

Announcement Administration
A brief description of the integrated announcement administration is given here
to aid in troubleshooting the Announcement circuit pack and its ports. In many
cases, it is necessary to record, play back, and/or delete announcements to
resolve an alarm. It may also be necessary to save and restore announcements
as part of the maintenance procedures. For a complete description of integrated
announcement administration, please refer to the following manuals:
1. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation,
555-230-653
2. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 System
Management, 555-230-500

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-89

3. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2 Traffic Reports,
555-230-511
4. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Voice
Terminal Operations, 555-230-701

Announcement Session
Announcements can be recorded, played back, and deleted from an
announcement session. A station’s COS needs to include console permissions in
order for that station to be able to enter an announcement session. To enter an
announcement session, go off-hook on a station that has console permissions
and enter the appropriate Feature Access Code (FAC), administered as
Announcement access code on the FACs form. Dial tone should be returned at
this point. Enter the extension of the announcement that needs to be recorded,
deleted, or played back. Again, dial tone should be heard. To record an
announcement, press station keypad digit 1, record after the tone, and hang up
when done. To play back an announcement, press 2. To delete an
announcement, press 3 (confirmation tone is given if the delete worked).
Announcements can also be played back by simply calling the announcement
extension associated with them.

Uploading/Downloading Announcements
Integrated announcements on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack can be
uploaded to the system tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386,
G3vsV2] with the administration terminal save announcements command.
Likewise, integrated announcements can be downloaded to the Announcement
circuit pack with the restore announcements command. Both of these
commands require a free data module of NETCON type to be administered, a
data module of announcement type (on the Announcement circuit pack) to be
administered, and a tape cartridge to be in the system’s tape drive (must not be
write-protected) or a memory card (must not be write-protected). These
commands are useful in maintaining the customer’s recorded announcements.
Depending on system traffic, announcement uploads and/or downloads take
between 30 and 45 minutes.
The system automatically tries to download the Announcement circuit pack five
minutes after it is inserted. This automatic download procedure is aborted if:
1. An announcement is recorded within 10 minutes of circuit pack insertion.
2. An announcement download is invoked sooner with the administration
terminal restore announcements command.
3. No announcement and/or NETCON data module is administered.
4. Either the announcement data module is busy or all the administered
NETCON data modules are busy.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-90

5. No tape [G3iV1.1-286] or memory card [G3sV2, G3iV2-386, G3vsV2] is in
the system.
6. The tape or memory card in the system does not have a valid
announcement file saved on it.
NOTE:
Unlike translations, there is no provision in the Generic 3 system for
automatically saving announcements to the system tape or memory card.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-32. Announcement Circuit Pack Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level (See
WARNING
message below)

On/Off
Board

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1(a)

0

Circuit pack
removed or SAKI
Test (#53)

MINOR

ON

2(p)

Test to Clear Value
test board PCSS sh r 1

None

14(b)

1 to 64

Announcement
Checksum Test
(#209)

18

0

busyout board
PCSS

WARNING

OFF

23(c)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

None

MINOR

ON

125(d)
170(e)

0

None

MINOR

ON

217(f)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

257

65535

Control Channel
Test (#52)

MINOR

ON

257(g)

Any

None

267(f)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

513(h)

Any

None

1025(i)

4363

NPE Audit Test
(#50)

1281(j)

17699

None

release board PCSS

test board PCSS l r 20

test board PCSS l

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-91

Table 10-32. Announcement Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued

Error
Type
1538(k)

Aux
Data
Any

1793

17680
2049(l)
(m)

Alarm Level (See
WARNING
message below)

On/Off
Board

None

MINOR

ON

Angel-SP
Handshake Test
(#208)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS l r 3

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS sh r 3

Associated Test

In-line Error
Clock Match
Inquiry Test (#212)

17674

Test to Clear Value

In-line Error

2305

140AY Loop
Around Test (#210)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS sh r 3

2561

Super Frame
Match Inquiry Test
(#211)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS sh r 3

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS sh r 3

17676
2817(l)

In-line Error
Announcement
Checksum Test
(#209)

17682

In-line Error

17699
(m)

In-line Error

3840(n)

Any

None

3999(o)

Any

None

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

! WARNING:
All alarms are upgraded to MAJOR when the BASE Tone Generator is set to
12. (France).
Notes:
a. Error Type 1 This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped
functioning or it was physically removed from the system.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-92

NOTE:
The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been
removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same
slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in
the system and the red LED is on, follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)"
in the "Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs" section in Chapter 7,
"LED Interpretation".
NOTE:
The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been
removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails.

!

WARNING:
Reseating and/or replacing the circuit pack results in loss of
integrated announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning
of this Maintenance procedure.

b. Error Type 14 Whenever the Announcement Checksum Test (#209)
fails, this error is logged. The Aux Data indicates the number of the first
defective announcement found. This number corresponds to the
announcement numbers on the announcement form. The extension
relating to the announcement can be determined by the display
announcement command. This error only appears in the Error Log in
conjunction with Error Type 2817. Follow the procedures for Error Type
2817 to troubleshoot Error Type 14.
c. Error Type 23The circuit pack has been logically administered but not
physically installed. The alarm is cleared when the circuit pack is installed.
d. Error Type 125A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this
circuit pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either
remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit
pack OR use the change circuit-pack command to readminister this slot
to match the circuit pack inserted.
e. Error Type 170Announcement board is not allowed in slot A03 for a
system with Enhanced SCC cabinet. The red led of announcement board
is turned on and the error message "Announcement board is not allowed
in slot A03" is shown on SAT when test/busyout/release board A03
commands are entered. The announcement board must be removed and
inserted into a different slot.
f. Error Type 217 and 267 Indicate that there is more than one TN750
Announcement circuit pack inserted in the system. Remove the alarmed
circuit pack..
g. Error Type 257This error indicates transient communication problems
with this circuit pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is
required.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-93

h. Error Type 513This error, when reported with Aux Data in the range of
4352 to 4358, indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on
the circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced.

!

WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance procedure.

i. Error Type 1025This error is not service-affecting and no action is
required.
j. Error Type 1281The SP found a fault in the speech main memory (SMM)
(that is, it found one or more faulty memory locations). Whenever this error
is logged, error 2817 is also logged [see Note (k)], which causes the
maintenance system to run the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) to
determine if the bad memory location was being used by an
announcement.
k. Error Type 1538 The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may
exhibit one or more of the following symptoms:
1. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a
NO-BOARD.
2. A busyout/release of the circuit pack has no effect on test results.
3. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and
ports are properly installed.
The system tries to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. If the error
recurs after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. (Refer to Chapter 5,
"Routine Maintenance Procedures".)
l. Error Type 2049 and 2817These errors are logged in conjunction with
Error Type 1281, Aux Data 17699. Since that error [see Note (j)] means
that a defective speech memory location was found, the announcement
checksum error is also logged. This causes the Announcement Checksum
Test (#209) to run, which determines if the defective memory location has
corrupted any recorded announcements. If the Checksum Test passes,
the faulty memory location is currently not being used, and the SP marks
the location as faulty to ensure that future announcements do not attempt
to use it.
NOTE:
As memory locations are marked faulty, the amount of available
memory decreases, which decreases the total amount of
announcement time available on the circuit pack.
m. Error Type 2049A transient error that does not cause an alarm can
occasionally occur during a SPE, TDM BUS, or Tone Clock interchange. It
is possible for a marginal Tone-Clock circuit pack to cause this error

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-94

against the ANN-BD without alarming the TONE-BD. If this error occurs
again, replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack may clear up this error. See
the FAIL case in the Clock Match Inquiry Test (#212).
n. Error Type 3840 This error is not service-affecting and no action is
required.
o. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.
p. Error Type 2Check the Class of Restriction (COR) administered for the
Data Line extension assigned to the TN750 for uploading and
downloading announcements. The extension can be found by using list
data-module.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in Table 10-33 when inspecting
errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Control Channel
Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.
Table 10-33. System Technician-Demanded Tests: ANN-BD

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Reset
Board
Sequence

D/ND1

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a)

X

ND

Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test
(#208)

X

ND

Clock Match Inquiry (#212)

X

X

ND

Super Frame Match Inquiry (#211)

X

X

ND

140AY Loop Around Test (#210)

X

X

ND

Announcement Checksum Test (#209)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Network Processor Element (NPE) Audit Test
(#50) (a)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-95

Table 10-33. System Technician-Demanded Tests: ANN-BD — Continued

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

SAKI Test (#53) (a)

Reset
Board
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Note:
a. For a complete description of these tests, refer to the "XXX-BD (Common
Port Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation.

Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test
(#208)
This test checks the integrity of the communication link between the two
processors on the Announcement circuit pack. Failure of this test indicates that
the Speech Processor is insane and results in the loss of all integrated
announcements on the circuit pack.
Table 10-34. TEST #208 Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the
maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-96

Table 10-34. TEST #208 Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. Circuit pack cannot be used. Announcement speech
memory is cleared when this test fails. Therefore, when the problem
has been resolved, announcements must be rerecorded or
downloaded to the circuit pack. Refer to "General Notes" near the
beginning of this Maintenance documentation.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then
run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack
and then run this test again.
2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test
failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works.

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance documentation.
PASS

The communications link between the two processors on the
Announcement circuit pack is functioning properly. User-reported troubles
on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and
port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance
documentation for a description of the port tests.

Continued on next page

Announcement Checksum Test (#209)
Associated with every recorded announcement is a checksum. In this test, the
SP checks a stored global checksum covering all recorded announcements
against a calculated one and returns the results to the maintenance system. If the
global checksum failed, maintenance requests the SP to check each individual
announcement’s checksum.
If the test fails, then it returns the total number of defective announcements
found. In addition, associated with each failure is an error in the Error Log (Error
Type 14). The Aux Data indicates the number of the first defective announcement
found. This number corresponds to the announcement numbers on the
announcement form. The extension relating to the announcement can be
determined by the display announcement command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-97

Table 10-35. TEST #209 Announcement Checksum Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

0

ABORT

An error code of 0 indicates that the announcement file has been
corrupted due to a hardware fault in the TN750 board. Follow step #7
under "General Notes" at the beginning of this section.

1023

ABORT

There are no announcements currently recorded on the circuit pack.

1024

ABORT

This abort code is given for the following reasons:
1. An announcement upload or download is in progress.
2. An announcement upload or download is requested when this test is
running.
3. A record is in progress.
4. A record request comes in when this test is running.
If an announcement upload or download is in progress, a status
data-module  command should show
that the announcement data port is connected to a NETCON data channel,
and [for G3iV1.1-286] the tape drive should be active or [for G3sV2,
G3iV2-386, or G3vsV2] the "card-in-use" amber LED for the memory card
is on (to determine the extension of the announcement data module, use
the list data-module command).
See Note (a) at end of table for more information.
1. Wait until the blocking event is finished, and then run this test again.
An upload or download could take up to 45 minutes to complete, and
a recording session is finished as soon as the station that was making
the recording is placed on-hook.
2. If the test continues to abort, and a record or upload/download is not
in progress, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the
maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-98

Table 10-35. TEST #209 Announcement Checksum Test — Continued
Error
Code
0-256

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. The error code indicates the total number of defective
announcements that were found.
When TEST #209 fails with error code 0, the Global Checksum failed on
the board, but no individual Checksum failed.

NOTE:
Since the announcements are recorded digitally, it is possible for
the Announcement Checksum Test to fail but still have all the
announcements sound uncorrupted. When an individual
announcement fails the Checksum Test, always listen to the
announcement first before taking any action (an announcement can
be played back by dialing the announcement extension associated
with the announcement number). If the announcement sounds
corrupted, then rerecord it or delete it.
1. Look in the Error Log to determine the number of the first defective
announcement. Play back the announcement. If the announcement
sounds defective, rerecord it or delete it. If the error code was greater
than one (indicating that there is more than one defective
announcement), run this test again and repeat this step.
2. If after deleting and rerecording all defective announcements, the
checksum test still fails, reset the circuit pack using the reset board
PCSS command and run this test again.
3. If the test still continues to fail, reseat the circuit pack and restore all
announcements with an appropriate time estimate (for example, 40
minutes.) Then rerecord the lost announcements (that is, those
recorded since the last save operation) and run this test again.
4. If the test still continues to fail, replace the circuit pack, and run this
test again.

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance procedure.
PASS

All recorded announcements checksum correctly, indicating that the
speech main memory is functioning properly. User-reported troubles on
this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack and port
tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance
documentation for a description of the port tests.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-99

Notes:
a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow
recording.
If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare
condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack will be
unusable by software, one of which is the record port. Also, save/restore
announcements will not work, since the record port looks busy to the
circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this,
and attempts to use the ports.
If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are
observed:
1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the
proper record tone, but the announcement do not record (they do
not know it until the announcement is played back).
2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state
yield the following abort codes:
■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024

■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000

■

Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024

3. The save/restore announcements command times out with:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by
performing a soft reset to the circuit pack:
■

busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on
the Announcement circuit pack)

■

reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command

■

release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command

140AY Loop Around Test (#210)
This test checks the integrity of the record channel on the Announcement circuit
pack (Announcement Port 1). The main function of the 140AY device is to accept
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)/Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
(ADPCM) samples and compress/expand the samples using ADPCM. This test
connects a Tone Generator to one port (Announcement Port 1, the recording
port), and a Tone Detector to another port (Announcement Port 9). A tone is
generated by the Tone Generator on the first port and looped through the 140AY
device to the second port. The Tone Detector then responds with a tone
present/absent message. The 140AY Loop Around Test is repeated at three
different speech compression rates.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-100

Since this test involves sending a tone through two different ports, the Playback
Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test (#206) [see ANN-PT (Announcement Port)
Maintenance documentation for a description of this test] is run on the two ports
first to make sure that they are working properly.
Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test
Error
Code
1-3

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. The error code indicates at which speech compression rate the test
aborted (one being the first rate tested, three being the last).
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

10

ABORT

The PSMA Test (#206) failed on Announcement Port 1.

90

ABORT

The PSMA Test (#206) failed on Announcement Port 9.
1. Refer to"ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance documentation,
Test #206.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. This test needs
Announcement Ports 1 and 9 to run. One of the ports may be in use on a
valid call.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and Ports 1 and 9 are not in use, escalate
the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the
"TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to the
"TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-101

Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1007

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Announcement circuit pack thinks that Port 1 or Port 9 is busy.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow the Announcement Port
maintenance procedures for Ports 1 and 9.
3. If the Announcement Ports pass all their tests, escalate the problem.

1024

ABORT

Announcement circuit pack blocked the test because an announcement
download is in progress. If an announcement download is in progress, a
status data-module  command should
show that the announcement data port is connected to a NETCON data
channel, and [for G3iV1.1-286] the tape drive should be active or [for
G3sV2, G3iV2-386, or G3vsV2] the "card-in-use" amber LED for the
memory card should be on (to determine the extension of the
announcement data module, use the list data-module command). See
Note (a) at end of table for more information.
1. Wait until download is finished (can take up to 45 minutes), and then
run the test again.
2. If the test continues to abort and there is no download in progress,
escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the
maintenance strategy recommended for this error type.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2007

ABORT

The Announcement circuit pack thinks that Port 1 or Port 9 is busy.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow the Announcement Port
maintenance procedures for Ports 1 and 9.
3. If the Announcement ports pass all their tests, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-102

Table 10-36. TEST #210 140AY Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1-3

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. The error code indicates at which speech compression rate the
test actually failed (one being the first rate tested, three being the last).
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then
run this test again. If the test still fails, replace the circuit pack (see
Warning) and run this test again.
2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test
failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance procedure.
PASS

The record channel on the Announcement circuit pack is functioning
properly. User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated
using other circuit pack and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement
Port)" Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests.

Continued on next page

Notes:
a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow
recording.
If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare
condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack will be
unusable by software, one of which is the record port. Also, save/restore
announcements will not work since the record port looks busy to the
circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this,
and attempts to use the ports.
If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are
observed:
1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the
proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they
do not know it until the announcement is played back).
2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state
yields the following abort codes:
■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024

■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000

■

Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-103

3. The save/restore announcements command times out with:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by
performing a soft reset to the circuit pack:
■

busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on
the Announcement circuit pack)

■

reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command

■

release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command

Super Frame Match Inquiry Test (#211)
The super frame is a means by which the SP synchronizes with the 140AY device
on the Announcement circuit pack. If the super frame is not synchronized, the SP
is not able to properly process record/playback requests. Both the SP and the
hardware generate a super frame pulse. When these two pulses are out of synch,
the SP sets a flag to indicate the mismatch. When this test is run, the state of this
flag is returned.
Table 10-37. TEST #211 Super Frame Match Inquiry
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the
maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-104

Table 10-37. TEST #211 Super Frame Match Inquiry — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. Announcement playbacks should sound corrupted.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then
run this test again. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack
(see Warning).
2. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test
failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance procedure.
PASS

The SP can properly process record/playback requests. User-reported
troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using other circuit pack
and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)" Maintenance
documentation for a description of the port tests.

Continued on next page

Clock Match Inquiry Test (#212)
This test is supported to determine the state of the clock generation circuitry on
the Announcement circuit pack. This circuitry is used for controlling various
pieces of the hardware, like the 140AY device. It is also used to synchronize the
Announcement circuit pack with the clock that is on the backplane.
Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow the
maintenance strategy recommended for this Error Type.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-105

Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. Announcements recorded or played back while the clock
circuitry is not functioning properly sound distorted. The ANN-BD may be
defective or the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD) in the same
Port Network as the ANN-BD may be marginal and is causing this test to
fail.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then
run this test again. If the test continues to fail, proceed to Step 2 or 3
as applicable.
2. If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, determine the Active
TONE-BD in this Port Network via the status system command and
make the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set
tone-clock PCSS command. Rerun the test. If the test passes, then
replace the now Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. If the test continues
to fail, replace the ANN-BD circuit pack.

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of integrated
announcements. See "General Notes" near the beginning of this
Maintenance procedure.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)

Page 10-106

Table 10-38. TEST #212 Clock Match Inquiry Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. If this is a Standard system (that is, not a High or Critical Reliability
system), replace the ANN-BD. Rerun the test. If the test continues to
fail, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack located in the same Port
Network as the ANN-BD.

! WARNING:
Replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack causes a standard system
PPN to perform a COLD 2 reset or an EPN to reset. See the "How to
Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack" section in the "TONE-BD
(Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)" Maintenance documentation. Replacing
the ANN-BD results in loss of integrated announcements. See
"General Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure.
4. If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test
failing, replace the ANN-BD even if the previous steps were
successful.

! WARNING:
Replacing the TONE-BD causes a standard system PPN to perform
a COLD 2 reset or an EPN to reset. Replacing the ANN-BD results in
loss of integrated announcements. See the "General Notes" section
near the beginning of this Maintenance procedure.
PASS

Announcement record/playbacks should have clear sound quality.
User-reported troubles on this circuit pack should be investigated using
other circuit packs and port tests. Refer to "ANN-PT (Announcement Port)"
Maintenance documentation for a description of the port tests.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-107

ANN-PT (Announcement Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ANN-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Announcement Port

ANN-PT

WRN

test port PCSSpp l

Announcement Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

The TN750 Announcement circuit pack is a service circuit pack that provides a
customer with an integrated means for recording announcements that can be
played back on demand by call processing as part of a calling feature (that is,
announcements on hunt group calls). There are 16 Announcement Ports on the
Announcement circuit pack. Each port can play any integrated announcement,
independently of the other ports. In addition to the 16 Announcement Ports, the
Announcement circuit pack also has one Data Line Circuit Port (Port 17). The
Data Line Circuit Port is used for uploading/downloading the announcement
memory to/from the system tape. If there are any errors associated with Port 17,
refer to "DAT-LINE (Data Line)" Maintenance documentation. If there are any
errors associated with the circuit pack, refer to "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit
Pack)" Maintenance documentation.
The Announcement circuit pack has two processors on it. The first processor, or
Angel, controls the circuit pack, and communicates with the switch via the
control channel on the TDM Bus. The second processor, or SP, controls the
speech memory and announcements. Digital speech is converted from its TDM
Bus form to an internal storage form (for recording) and vice versa (for
playbacks) by the 140AY device on the circuit pack, which has 16 channels (one
for each Announcement Port).

General Notes
Here are a few very important general notes that apply to any problem on the
Announcement circuit pack. The user should read this before attempting to work
on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack or Announcement Ports, especially if
the circuit pack needs to be replaced.
1. The Announcement circuit pack retains all integrated announcements as
long as the circuit pack has power. For this reason, whenever there is a
problem with either the Announcement circuit pack or an Announcement
Port that may require the circuit pack to be reset, it is always better to try to
reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command first and, if that

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-108

does not work, then try to reseat it. Announcements are preserved
through a software reset, but they are lost when the circuit pack is
reseated.
2. If a customer has announcements on the Announcement circuit pack
that cannot be re-recorded easily, then announcements must be
saved on the system tape to ensure that they are not lost. This should
be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack
(or whenever they are changed), assuming that the pack is in proper
working order (see Note).
This should be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the
circuit pack (or whenever they are changed), assuming that the pack is in
proper working order (see Note).
NOTE:
Unlike translations, announcements are NEVER automatically saved
to the system tape.
3. The administration terminal save announcements command replaces the
announcement file on tape with the Announcement circuit pack speech
memory. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this command,
thereby destroying a valid file on tape.
4. The terminal restore announcements command replaces the
Announcement circuit pack speech memory with the announcement file
on the system tape. Care must be taken not to mistakenly enter this
command, thereby destroying valid speech memory (especially if the
system tape does not have a valid announcement file on it).
5. Whenever the Announcement circuit pack is replaced, announcements
must always be re-recorded or downloaded to the new circuit pack.
Otherwise, call processing is not able to use the circuit pack.
6. If announcement speech memory is corrupted, announcements should
not be saved, that is, if the Announcement Checksum Test (#209) fails or
if the speech sounds corrupted on playback. This can ruin a good
announcement file on tape and potentially cause errors/alarms on any
circuit pack to which the new file is downloaded. However, if the customer
does not have a valid announcement file on tape, then announcements
can be saved in an effort to try to retain some of them (all of the
announcements recorded may not be corrupted).
7. Although Announcement Port 5 and Data Line Circuit Port 17 on the
Announcement circuit pack are logically two separate ports, they are
physically the same port. Therefore, if one of the ports is in use, the other
one will be busy. Also, if Announcement Port 5 is out-of-service, the Data
Line Circuit Port is taken out-of-service. However, if the Data Line Circuit
Port is out-of-service, the Announcement Port remains in-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-109

Announcement Administration
A brief description of the integrated announcement administration is given here
to aid in the troubleshooting of the Announcement circuit pack and its ports. In
many cases, it is necessary to record, play back, and/or delete announcements
to resolve an alarm. It may also be necessary to save and restore
announcements as part of the maintenance procedures. For a complete
description of integrated announcement administration, please refer to the
following manuals:
1. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation,
555-230-653
2. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Voice
Terminal Operations, 555-230-701
3. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 System
Management, 555-230-500
4. DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2 Traffic Reports,
555-230-511

Announcement Session
Announcements can be recorded, played back, and deleted from an
announcement session. A station’s COS needs to include console permissions in
order for that station to be able to enter an announcement session. To enter an
announcement session, go off-hook on a station that has console permissions
and enter the appropriate FAC (administered as Announcement access code on
the FACs form). Dial tone should be returned at this point. Enter the extension of
the announcement that needs to be recorded, deleted or played back. Again,
dial tone should be heard. To record an announcement, press station keypad
digit 1, record after the tone, and hang up when done. To play back an
announcement, press station keypad digit 2. To delete an announcement, press
station keypad digit 3 (confirmation tone is given if the delete worked).
Announcements can also be played back by simply calling the announcement
extension associated with them.

Uploading/Downloading Announcements
Integrated announcements on the TN750 Announcement circuit pack can be
uploaded to the system tape with the administration terminal save
announcements commands. Similarly, integrated announcements can be
downloaded to the Announcement circuit pack with the administration terminal
restore announcements command. Both of these commands require a free
data module of NETCON type to be administered, a data module of
announcement type (on the Announcement circuit pack) to be administered, and
a tape cartridge to be in the system’s tape drive (must not be write-protected).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-110

These commands are useful in maintaining the customer’s recorded
announcements. Depending on system traffic, announcement
uploads/downloads take between 30 and 45 minutes.
The system automatically tries to download the Announcement circuit pack five
minutes after it is inserted. This automatic download procedure is aborted if:
1. An announcement is recorded within 10 minutes of circuit pack insertion.
2. An announcement download is invoked sooner with the administration
terminal restore announcements command.
3. There is no announcement and/or NETCON data module administered.
4. Either the announcement data module is busy or all the administered
NETCON data modules are busy.
5. There is no tape in the system.
6. The tape in the system does not have a valid announcement file saved
on it.
NOTE:
Unlike translations, there is no provision in the system for automatically
saving announcements to the system tape.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-111

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Announcement Port Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

Playback Speech Memory
Array (PSMA) Test (#206)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

The port was busied out

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

130 (a)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

257

Channel Administration
Memory Array (CAMA)
Test (#205)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

01

Aux
Data
0

1
18

0

17667
513

769 (b)

Test to Clear Value

In-line error
140AY Channel Sanity
Inquiry Test (#222)

17684

1.

Associated Test

In-line error
None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
b. This error is logged and the port is alarmed when an alarm is raised on the
Announcement circuit pack because of a faulty condition with a common
circuit pack resource. Any one of the following alarmed errors on the
Announcement circuit pack causes this error to be logged against the
Announcement Port: 1793, 2049, 2305, 2561. Follow the ANN-BD
(Announcement Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to resolve
these alarms. When the corresponding circuit pack alarm is cleared, this
alarm clears.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-112

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Channel Administration Memory Array
(CAMA) Test (#205)

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA)
Test (#206)

X

X

ND

140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test (#222)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA)
Test (#205)
This test is a memory device that stores information used to control the 140AY
device. The Angel asynchronously feeds the CAMA with the control information.
During the CAMA test, the Angel writes patterns into the CAMA, reads them
back, and verifies that they match. If the patterns do not match, the test fails. This
test is run periodically by the switch maintenance and by the Announcement
circuit pack in the background.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-113

Table 10-39. TEST #205 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA)
Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the circuit pack is
not in use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period. See Note (a) at end of table for
more information.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-114

Table 10-39. TEST #205 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA)
Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. Announcements played back on this port
may sound corrupted.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS
command and then run this test again. If the test
continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see
Warning).
2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by
this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step
1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of
integrated announcements. Refer to "General
Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance
procedure.
PASS

This test verifies that the Angel processor can properly
set up this port for playbacks. User-reported troubles on
this circuit pack should be investigated using other port
and circuit pack tests. (Refer to "ANN-BD
(Announcement Circuit Pack)" Maintenance
documentation for a description of the circuit pack
tests.)

Continued on next page

Notes:
a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow
recording.
If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare
condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack (one of
which is the record port) will be unusable by software. Also, save/restore
announcements will not work since the record port looks busy to the
circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this
and attempts to use the ports.
If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are
observed:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-115

1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the
proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they
do not know it until the announcement is played back).
2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state
yields the following abort codes:
■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024

■

Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000

■

Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024

3. The save/restore announcements command times out with:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by
performing a soft reset to the circuit pack:
■

busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on
the Announcement circuit pack)

■

reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command

■

release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command

Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test
(#206)
The PSMA test checks the integrity of a playback channel’s interface to the
speech memory and the TDM Bus. The SP has an internal buffer that contains a
specific 256-byte sequence. During this test, the byte sequence is "played"
through the 140AY device onto the TDM Bus. A General Purpose Tone Detector
is used to confirm that the proper sequence was played. This test is very
important. It is the only test that actually checks an Announcement Port’s ability
to play back an announcement on the TDM Bus. If the test fails, the Tone
Detector returns the number of bytes that did not match the expected sequence.
The larger the number, the more severe the problem with that port. If this test
fails, announcements played over this port should sound corrupted.
It is the only test that actually checks an Announcement Port’s ability to play back
an announcement on the TDM Bus. If the test fails, the Tone Detector returns the
number of bytes that did not match the expected sequence. The larger the
number, the more severe the problem with that port. If this test fails,
announcements played over this port should sound corrupted.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-116

Table 10-40. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array
(PSMA) Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the pack is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to "TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)" Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling
heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to "TTR-LEV (TTR Level)" Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to "TONE-PT (Tone Generator)" Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-117

Table 10-40. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array
(PSMA) Test — Continued
Error
Code
1024

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Announcement circuit pack blocked the test because an
announcement download is in progress. If an
announcement download is in progress, a status
data-module 
command should show that the announcement data port
is connected to a NETCON data channel, and the tape
drive should be active. (To determine the extension of
the announcement data module, use the list
data-module command.)
See Note (a) at end of table for more information.
1. Wait until download is finished (could take a
maximum of 45 minutes), and then run the test
again.
2. If the test continues to abort and there is no
download in progress, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-118

Table 10-40. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array
(PSMA) Test — Continued
Error
Code
1 to 254

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed. The error code indicates the number of byte
count errors found by the Tone Detector.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS
command and then run this test again. If the test
continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see
Warning).
2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by
this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step
1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of
integrated announcements. Refer to "General
Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance
procedure.
255

FAIL

Test failed. The Announcement Port and the Tone
Detector never synchronized. Check for active GPTD-PT
errors, and refer to "GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone
Detector Port (CPTR)]" Maintenance documentation to
diagnose them first.
1. If there are no active GPTD-PT errors, reset the
circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command
and then run this test again. If the test continues to
fail, replace the circuit pack (see Warning).
2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by
this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step
1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of
integrated announcements. Refer to "General
Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance
procedure.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Page 10-119

Table 10-40. TEST #206 Playback Speech Memory Array
(PSMA) Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
This port can cleanly play announcements.
User-reported troubles on this pack should be
investigated using other port and circuit pack tests.
Refer to "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)"
Maintenance documentation for a description of the
circuit pack tests.

Continued on next page

Notes:
a. The Announcement circuit pack can exhibit a condition that does not allow
recording.
If the circuit pack gets locked into this state (this is an extremely rare
condition), two of the Announcement Ports on the circuit pack (one of
which is the record port) will be unusable by software. Also, save/restore
announcements will not work, since the record port looks busy to the
circuit pack. Note that software does not have any way of knowing this
and attempts to use the ports.
If the circuit pack is locked into this state, the following symptoms are
observed:
1. When attempting to record an announcement, users hear the
proper record tone, but the announcement does not record (they
do not know it until the announcement is played back).
2. Performing a test board long when the circuit pack is in this state
yields the following abort codes:
■

Ports 1 and 9 abort Test #206 with code 1024

■

Ports 1 and 9 abort Test #205 with code 2000

■

Board level Tests #209 and #210 abort with code 1024

3. The save/restore announcements command times out with:
Error encountered, can’t complete request
The Announcement circuit pack lock-up can be cleared remotely by
performing a soft reset to the circuit pack:
■

busyout board PCSS (this command drops all calls in progress on
the Announcement circuit pack)

■

reset circuit pack using the reset board PCSS command

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)
■

Page 10-120

release circuit pack using the release board PCSS command

140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test (#222)
The Angel keeps a sanity status bit for each of the 16 channels on the 140AY
device. This test queries the Angel to determine the status for a particular
channel. If a channel is insane, that implies that announcements cannot be
played back on that channel.
Table 10-41.
Error
Code

TEST #222 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Test failed. Announcements cannot be played back over
this port.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS
command and then run this test again. If the test
continues to fail, replace the circuit pack (see
Warning).
2. If there are recurring alarms on this port caused by
this test failing, replace the circuit pack even if Step
1 works (see Warning).

! WARNING:
Replacing the circuit pack results in loss of
integrated announcements. Refer to "General
Notes" near the beginning of this Maintenance
procedure.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANN-PT (Announcement Port)

Table 10-41.
Error
Code

Page 10-121

TEST #222 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Announcements can be played back over this port.
User-reported troubles on this pack should be
investigated using other port and circuit pack tests.
Refer to the "ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack)"
Maintenance documentation for a description of the
circuit pack tests.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANNOUNCE (Announce)

Page 10-122

ANNOUNCE (Announce)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Initial Command
to Run

Alarm Level

ANNOUNCE

none

none

Full Name of MO
ANNOUNCEMENT

The ANNOUNCE MO logs an error in the hardware error log if at least one of the
following is true:
■

The save announcements or restore announcements command does
not complete successfully, or the

■

System fails to restore announcements from the memory card [386
system] or tape [286 system] at boot time.

Figure 10-4 shows the connection of the Announcement Circuit Pack to the
system. To save or restore announcements, an ANNOUNCEMENT Data
Extension must be administered, and at least one DATA-CHL (Network Control
Data Channel) must be in the in-service/idle state.

SWITCH
SOFTWARE
APPLICATIONS
DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

PR-MAINT

TAPE
DRIVE

PROCESSOR

MEMORY BUS
NETWORK CONTROL
DATA
CHL1

DATA
CHL2

DATA
CHL3

DATA
CHL4

CARD-MEM

TDM BUS
ANNOUNCEMENT
CIRCUIT PACK

Figure 10-4.

Connection of Announcement Circuit Pack to the System

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANNOUNCE (Announce)

Page 10-123

Hardware Error Log Entries
ANNOUNCE Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Error Type

Associated
Test

1(a)(f)

any

None

257(b)(f)

any

None

513(c)(f)

0

None

769(d)(f)

0

None

1025(e)(f)

any

None

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Notes:
a. Error occurred while saving announcements. (See Table 10-42 in the next
section for an explanation of Aux Data and for recommended repair
actions.)
b. Error occurred while saving announcements to the standby SPE. (See
Table 10-42 in the next section for an explanation of Aux Data and for
recommended repair actions.)
c. User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the
active PE.
d. User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the
standby PE.
e. Error occurred while restoring announcements. (See Table 10-42 in the
next section for an explanation of Aux Data and for recommended repair
actions.)
f. The port field for this error contained the active PE complex when the error
occurred.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANNOUNCE (Announce)

Page 10-124

Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended Repair
Procedures
Table 10-42. Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended
Repair Procedures
Aux
Data
9000
through
9031

Description/ Recommendation
CARD-MEM [386 systems] errors.

Check and resolve CARD-MEM [386 systems] errors and alarms.
30001
through
30054

Tape [286 systems] errors.

Check and resolve TAPE [286 systems] errors and alarms.
32001

Internal system error.
1. Check other ANNOUNCE errors and take corrective action. If
there are no other ANNOUNCE errors, do the following:
2. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three
times.
3. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate
the problem.

32002

Announcement circuit pack is in use.
1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three
times.
2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate
the problem.

32003

Announcement port is in use.
1. Wait for all Announcement ports to become available.
2. Enter the save/restore announcements command.

32004

There are no announcements recorded on the Announcement
Circuit Pack. The save announcements command is not allowed to
prevent the destroying of the announcement file on tape [286
systems] or on the memory card [386 systems].

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANNOUNCE (Announce)

Page 10-125

Table 10-42. Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended
Repair Procedures — Continued
Aux
Data
32005

Description/ Recommendation
Integrated announcement circuit pack is not present. The
Announcement Circuit Pack is not inserted, or it is defective.
1. Enter the list config command to check for the presence of the
circuit pack in the system.
2. If the Announcement Circuit Pack is present, use the test board
PCSS command to check the status of the Announcement
Circuit Pack.

32006

Announcement Data Module not available.
1. Use the status command to check the status of the
Announcement Data Module.

32007

Announcement Data Module out of service.
1. Use the status command to check the status of the
Announcement Data Module.

32008

Announcement data is being saved or loaded.
1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three
times.
2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate
the problem.

32009

Required DATA-CHL is not administered or out of service. (A
DATA-CHL is required to save or restore announcements.)
1. Add a DATA-CHL if none is administered.
2. If a DATA-CHL is administered, use the status command to
check the status of all DATA-CHLs. At least one DATA-CHL
should be in the in-service/idle state.

32010
32013

DATA-CHL is not administered, or it is unavailable. (A DATA-CHL is
required to save or restore announcements.)
1. Add a DATA-CHL if none is administered.
2. If a DATA-CHL is administered, use the status command to
check the status of all DATA-CHLs. At least one DATA-CHL
should be in the in-service/idle state.

32012

Required Announcement Data Module is not administered.
1. Add an Announcement Data Module and repeat the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ANNOUNCE (Announce)

Page 10-126

Table 10-42. Aux Data Error Codes and Recommended
Repair Procedures — Continued
Aux
Data
32014

Description/ Recommendation
Command timed out on the standby processor [286 systems]. This
could present problems.
1. Check the error and alarm logs for errors and alarms that are
logged against the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) [286 systems].

32015

Time of day not set.
1. Set the time of day, and reenter the save/restore
announcements command.

32016

Internal System errors.
Check for any other ANNOUNCE errors and take corrective action.If
there are no other announcements errors, do the following:
1. Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three
times.
2. If the save/restore announcements command fails, escalate
the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board)

Page 10-127

ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform
Board)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run 1

Full Name of MO

ASAI-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

ASAI-BD

ASAI-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

ASAI-BD

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth).

Maintenance testing of the common circuit pack is handled by on-board
firmware and SPE-controlled tests. Maintenance software queries the firmware
for error and alarm information, status, and test results. Firmware automatically
reports error conditions that result in SPE-controlled testing.
For MAPD board insertion, the switch makes an additional board query if any of
the following circuit packs are inserted:
Circuit Pack

Vintage

TN754

49

TN556

49,
80 or greater

TN800

any

For any of the above initial board uplinks, the switch queries the board for
administration data, as well as reporting the switch software release and the
system type.
For the native mode, the response to the board query downlink messages
consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code,
vintage, suffix, emulation type, and number of reserved slots needed.
NOTE:
Refer to LAN-BD Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors.
See also ASAI-PT/ASAI-EPT (BRI Line) maintenance documentation for
related line information. See the following exceptions listed below:
■

Hyperactivity: currently, the common circuit pack is considered
"hyperactive" if the Service Dispatcher receives 200 uplink
messages from the circuit pack in a 10-second period. Since
MAPD has 32 ports, the hyperactivity limit increases to 500 uplink

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-BD (Multi-Application Platform Board)

Page 10-128

messages per 10 seconds. The switch issues an alarm when the
limit reaches 400; when it reaches 500 up-link messages in 10
seconds, the board is taken out of service.
■

LED use: the LED Control Message 038x requests the Angel to
drive the red, yellow, and green LEDs on the face plate of a typical
port board on or off. On the MAPD, only the red LED is controlled
by this message. Yellow and green change requests received from
the switch by the MAPD drive LCD behavior rather than LED
behavior. The DEFINITY switch continues to send the same LED
control messages to the MAPD that the DEFINITY switch currently
sends to all other port boards. The MAPD handles proper
interpretation of these messages. You should note that the PC on
the MAPD and the switch itself control the LEDs and the LCD on the
MAPD.

■

Port Administration: in Administration Without Hardware (AWOH),
the switch allows administration of up to 8 ports in any of the first 12
ports. If the port type later reported by the board does not match
the existing type, the switch assumes it to be a MAPD board with a
different configuration and rejects the board.
NOTE:
Refer to the LAN-BD documentation for circuit pack level
errors. For related information, see ASAI-PT and ASAI-EPT
maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-129

ASAI-EPT
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

ASAI-EPT

1.

MAJOR

1

Initial Command to Run
test station extension

Full Name of MO
ASAI-Adjunct

The alarm level for ASAI adjuncts is administered using the set options command. The
alarm level can be set independently for off-board and on-board alarms to WARNING,
MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjuncts in the system.

The maintenance strategy for this endpoint MO is built on maintenance facilities
offered in the Lucent ISDN-BRI protocol and in the ASAI adjuncts. Currently there
are no facilities in the protocol that provide for maintenance of set data features.
The TN800 is a PC-based platform that allows interaction of multiple applications
with DEFINITY at any time. DEFINITY Release 5 software (Native mode) supports
emulation of three types of port MOs on this board. The type of ports to be
emulated is defined by the applications running on the TN800.
NOTE:
If the TN800 is emulating BRI, the software/firmware supports a maximum
of 12 ports, but only 8 of the 12 ports can be administered at any one time.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-43. ASAI-EPT Error Log Entries

Error
Type
0

1

Aux
Data
0

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level
ASAI-EPT

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test ASAI-ADJ

2 (a)

2-102

None

257 (b)

Any

BRI Layer 3 Query

MAJ/WNG2

OFF

test station ext r 2
test data-module ext r 2

351 (c)

0

none

WARNING

OFF

busyout and release
station

513 (d)

0

None

769 (e)

0

None

MAJOR

OFF

2561 (f)

0

None

25622566 (g)

0

None

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-130

Table 10-43. ASAI-EPT Error Log Entries — Continued

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

2567 (h)

0

None

2568 (i)

0

None

3329 (j)

Any

Signaling Link
Status (626)

35843839 (k)

0, 1

None

3841 (l)
4095

0

None

Alarm
Level
ASAI-EPT

MAJ/WNG†

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

OFF

Continued on next page

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Notes:
a. Errors of this type indicate violations of the ISDN-BRI signaling protocol.
Timers associated with certain Layer 3 messages have expired before a
required response was received. In the following table, the aux data
column indicates which timer has just expired. For more information, refer
to the Lucent ISDN-BRI Specification.

Aux Data

Timer Type

2

First T303 (SETUP timer)

3

Second T303 (SETUP timer)

4

T305 (DISConnect timer)

5

First T308 (RELease timer)

6

Second T308 (RELease timer)

10

T316 (RESTart timer)

12

T309 (Layer 2 Failure timer)

16

TM100 (Management Information Message timer 1)

17

TM200 (Management Information Message timer 2)

102

TASAI (ASAI Routing Timer)

The switch sent a message to an endpoint that did not respond in the
allotted time. This may be due to failure of the point-to-point signaling link
or because of a problem in the ASAI adjunct. To repair:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-131
■

Execute the test station extension command and perform the
associated repair procedures for those tests.

b. An endpoint is not responding to the service state query message sent to
the adjunct or to the endpoint. This error causes an alarm to be raised.
The alarm is retired when the switch receives a response to the service
state query to the endpoint or to the adjunct.
When this error occurs for an ASAI adjunct, the Aux Data field indicates
the state of the ASAI link and whether an invalid response or no response
was received to the query from the switch, as shown in the following table:
Aux Data

ASAI Link State

Error

102

13-restarting

No response to RESTART message

104

13-restarting

Invalid response to RESTART message

152

13-restarted

No response to Layer 3 query

154

13-restarted

Invalid response to Layer 3 query

202

13-established

No response to Layer 3 query

204

13-established

Invalid response to Layer 3 query

See "status bri-port" in Chapter 8 for an explanation of the ASAI link states.
For ASAI or Lucent adjuncts, the switch queries the adjunct every two
minutes. The Layer 3 Query Test is not executed for ASAI or Lucent
adjuncts through a command issued from the management terminal.
While alarmed for this error, the switch takes the associated port
out-of-service for five seconds every 15 minutes. This action attempts to
stimulate recovery actions to be taken by the adjunct.
When this error occurs for an ASAI or Lucent adjunct, the service
technician should:
1. Execute the test station extension command and perform the
associated repair procedures for those tests.
2. Check the health of the adjunct by following the recommended
repair procedures of the manufacturer of the adjunct if the
preceding step does not resolve the problem.
c. This error and associated warning alarm are logged against an ASAI
endpoint when the adjunct has asked the switch to suspend maintenance
on the ASAI endpoint. Busying out and releasing the ASAI station clears
this alarm.
d. This error occurs when the endpoint sends more messages than the
switch can handle. The switch suspends the reception of messages from
the endpoint for a short period of time. There is no repair procedure for
this error. If the condition persists, replace the endpoint.
e. This error occurs when the signaling link associated with the ASAI
endpoint has too much link-establishment related traffic. This occurs if the
signaling link is alternating between assigned and established states. If
this problem persists, replace the endpoint.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-132

f. This error occurs when the ASAI-EPT message is not transmitted because
the PKT-CTRL (packet control circuit pack) transmit buffers are
exhausted. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may
indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the
signaling link, or the ASAI adjunct. Resolve the problem by following the
repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL. If these attempts fail, re-engineering
the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary.
g. The ASAI message is not transmitted because the transmit buffer for the
ASAI link is full, causing the link to be flow-controlled. Frequent or
persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem
or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI
adjunct. Resolve the problem by following the repair procedures issued
by the manufacturer of the adjunct. If these attempts fail, re-engineering of
the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary.
h. This version of ASAI is not supported. Check the software version that is
running on the ASAI adjunct.
i. The adjunct identification is invalid. Check the vendor ID or software
running on the ASAI adjunct.
j. This occurs when the point-to-point signaling link to the endpoint goes
down, except when the link goes down because either a system
technician has busied out the PKT-CTRL or the PKT-BUS, or they have
failed. This error raises an alarm against the endpoint or adjunct. Execute
the test station extension short command and note the results of the
Signaling Link Status Test (#626). If this test fails, follow the repair
procedure for Test #626. The alarm is retired when the signaling link is
re-established to the endpoint or adjunct.
k. The switch software logs certain ASAI cause values. The cause value is
determined from the following formulas:
— If the error type is greater than 3712, then the ASAI cause value is
equal to the error type minus 3712. The switch sent this value to the
adjunct.
— If the error type is less than 3712, then the ASAI cause value is
equal to the error type minus 3584. The switch sent this value to the
adjunct.
Table 10-44 contains a description of the various ASAI cause values and
recommended system technician actions associated with the cause value.
The ISDN-BRI Specification (AT&T PUB 801-802-100) contains further
information. In addition, the Aux Data field of the Error Log entry contains
additional diagnostic information.
l. The switch software logs certain ASAI cause values. The cause value is
determined from the following formula:
— If the error type is greater than 3968, then the ASAI cause value is
equal to the error type minus 3968. The switch sent this value to the
endpoint.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-133

— If the error type is less than 3968, then the ASAI cause code is
equal to the error type minus 3840. The switch sent this value to the
endpoint.
Table 10-44. ASAI Cause Values
Code
0

Explanation
Unrecognized
ASAI Protocol
Operation.

Recommendation
Requested ASAI protocol is not implemented by switch or adjunct. Aux
data field of error log entry contains protocol identifier for unrecognized
operation.
1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine which set of
operations is supported by switch and the adjunct. Adjunct
administration turning off operations not implemented by the switch
may resolve the problem.

34

No circuit or
channel
available

A resource on the switch is unavailable for a call. For BRI endpoints, this
cause value is not logged. For ASAI, this condition means that there are
no available trunks for an outgoing call request.
1. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the trunk
capabilities of the switch.
2. Investigate trunk group status by issuing the status trunk command
from the SAT or by requesting trunk group query(ies) from the
adjunct.
3. Perform trunk diagnostic procedures outlined in this manual.

40

Resources not
available.

No available internal resources to service switch or adjunct request.
Exceeds system transaction capacity for adjunct or switch.
1. May require re-engineering of adjunct services.

50

Requested
facility not
subscribed

Requested facility is implemented, but not administered. Potential
administration problem with endpoint or adjunct.
For BRI endpoints:
1. Verify the switch administration of endpoint using either the display
station or display data-module commands.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, refer to the endpoint’s service
manual and verify administration on the endpoint.
For ASAI adjuncts:
1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form (administration
screen) on the switch to determine which ASAI capabilities are
turned on in the switch.
2. Verify that the adjunct is administered to support the identical
capabilities as the switch. If there is a mismatch in the administered
capabilities, then readminister the switch and/or the adjunct to
establish a consistent set of desired capabilities on both the switch
and the adjunct.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-134

Table 10-44. ASAI Cause Values — Continued
Code

Explanation

Recommendation

58

Bearer
capability not
presently
available

Requested bearer capability is implemented, but not administered. No
B-channel administered. See code 50 above.

63

Service or
option not
available

Requested ASAI capability or resource is not available on the switch or
adjunct. More than one adjunct may be contending for the same switch
resource. Potential administration mismatch between the resource
domains administered on the switch and those administered on the
adjunct.
1. Verify that no overlapping administration of switch resources (for
example, requesting notifications on a single domain by multiple
adjuncts attempting to control a single call) exists across all adjuncts
connected to the switch. If overlaps exist, then re-administer the
adjuncts to ensure that each adjunct is associated with a unique set
of switch resources.

65

Bearer service
not
implemented

Requested service not implemented in switch or endpoint.

69

Requested
facility not
implemented

Requested service not supported in switch or endpoint.

Service or
option not
implemented

Requested service or option (or combination of selected options) is not
supported (implemented) in switch or the adjunct.

Invalid CRV

An invalid CRV was sent by the adjunct.

79

81

1. Consult switch and endpoint documentation to determine service
support.

1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine ASAI
service and options supported by both switch and adjunct.
Re-administration of the switch-administered capabilities (see
Customer Optional Feature Form) or those of the adjunct may be
necessary to correct the problem.

1. This may indicate a CRV inconsistency between the switch and the
adjunct. See the CallVisor protocol reference manual.
87

Internal switch
audit

There is an inconsistency in switch data records.
1. There is no action needed, since the switch has corrected the data
inconsistency.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-135

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
When inspecting errors in the system, always investigate errors associated with
the circuit pack and port first. Clearing these error codes first may also clear
errors generated against the endpoint. When all circuit pack and port errors have
been cleared, but errors still exist against the endpoint, investigate errors in the
table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Signaling Link Status
Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the
testing sequence.

Order of Investigation
Signaling Link Status Test (#626)

1.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629)
This test is not used by the ASAI-ADJ maintenance object. For information about
this test, see BRI-SET in the maintenance documentation.

Signaling Link Status Test (#626)
This test determines the current status of the signaling link. This test passes if the
link is "bound" to an endpoint and fails if the link is "not bound."
The definition of the term "bound" for a link depends upon the type of endpoint
and may depend on the successful completion of procedures at both Layers 2
and 3 of the protocol. The definition of "bound" for ASAI type of endpoint is:
■

ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not administered for MIM initialization
(point-to-point):
For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is
connected at Layer 2 (L2 established).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-EPT

Page 10-136

Table 10-45. TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test
Error
Code
1139

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command
and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to
verify the repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.

1144

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.

1. Refer to PKT-CTRL maintenance documentation.

1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in the PPN.
2. Execute the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of
the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair.
2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1113

FAIL

The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct. For ASAI adjuncts this error
indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since the signaling link
associated with the endpoint has been identified by administration, the link
is only "unbound" from the endpoint when it is disconnected.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and refer to the
associated procedures for this command contained in “BRI-PORT”.
PASS

The signaling link is connected at Layer 2 and "bound" to the ASAI adjunct.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-137

ASAI-PT
MO Name (in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ASAI-PT

MAJOR

2,3

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN BRI Port

ASAI-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN BRI Port

1.

2.

3.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth).
The alarm level for ASAI adjunct ports may be administered using the set options
command. The alarm level can be set independently for off-board and on-board alarms to
WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjunct ports in the system.
All alarming for an ASAI adjunct and off-board alarming for an ASAI port is disabled if the
ASAI adjunct asks the switch to suspend maintenance. When this occurs, an error and a
WARNING alarm is logged against the ASAI adjunct. Check the Hardware Error and Alarm
Logs to see if the adjunct has disabled alarming.

Unless otherwise stated, all maintenance actions contained in this section apply
to ASAI-PT and ISDN-BRI ports connected to ASAI adjuncts. This port type is
administered as an ASAI-BD on the TN800 circuit pack.
The TN800 circuit pack is a PC-based platform that allows interaction of multiple
applications with DEFINITY at any time. DEFINITY Release 5 software (Native
mode) will support emulation of three types of port MOs on this board. The type
of ports to be emulated are defined by the applications running on the TN800.
The TN800 can support a maximum of 32 ports (time slots) at a time.
The TN800 connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane,
however its width is not limited to one slot. The number of slots occupied by the
TN800 is supplied by the board during its insertion. The TN800 in Release 5 is 3
slots wide. The blank (reserve) slots are to the left of the functional slot.
In non-native mode the TN800 is recognized as TN556, TN2181, TN754, or
TN746 based on the switch software and the application running on the TN800.
In non-native mode only one type of port MOs will run at any time, and the port
type depends on the application running on the TN800. If the TN800 fails
diagnostics in non-native mode, the system’s alarm and error logs would show a
failure for the board type the TN800 is emulating.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-138

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-46. ASAI-PT Port Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level
ASAI-PORT

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

1 (a)

(a)

Level 1 Status
Inquiry (#621)

MAJ2

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

513 (b)

0

none

(b)

ON

MAJ2

OFF

0

1537 (c)

46210

CRC Error
Counter (#623)

3841 (d)

46208

None

3844 (e)

46223

None

3845 (f)
3846 (g)

None
TEI

None

Continued on next page

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major and Minor alarms may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Notes:
a. This error occurs when the Level 1 Status Inquiry fails or when the BRI
circuit pack detects that Level 1 has been deactivated on the port. The
aux data field contains one of the following values:
Blank

This indicates that the Level 1 Status Inquiry failed.

32773

This is a message from the ASAI-Line circuit pack
indicating Level 1 has been deactivated.

Refer to the repair procedures for Test #621.
b. The circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus,
thus affecting the conveyance of signalling information over D-channel.
This error occurs when the Packet Bus transmit FIFO buffer overflows. This
condition probably indicates a hardware problem as well. The ASAI-PORT
alarm level is MAJOR with aux data 0. Use troubleshooting procedures for
both on-board hardware problems and potential off-board Packet Bus
problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-139

c. The port received an invalid frame over the D-channel. When the Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) errors exceed 5 within 15 minutes, the port is
taken out of service for 5 seconds. If 5 more CRC errors are received
within 15 minutes of the first set of 5 errors, the port is taken out of service
for one minute. If 5 more CRC errors are received within 15 minutes of the
last 5, the port is taken out of service for 15 minutes.
This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring to the set or
adjunct, interference on the wiring due to a noise source, or no termination
(an open circuit). It usually does not indicate a problem with the circuit
pack.
■

Check the wiring to the endpoints or the adjunct.

■

If the problem persists, replace the endpoints or adjuncts.

d. This error occurs when a Layer 1 Transmission error is detected for the
port. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of the Layer 1
Transmission Error Counter Test (#624).
e. This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive
buffers. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of the Receive
FIFO Overflow Counter Test (#625).
f. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618)
fails. Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of Test (#618).
g. The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) administered for the ASAI endpoint
most likely does not match the TEI administered in the ASAI adjunct.
Check the switch administration of the TEI against that of the adjunct, and
make sure that both are using the same TEI.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. For example, by clearing error codes associated
with the NPE Crosstalk Test, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

ASAI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618)
Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621)

D/ND1

X

D

X

ND

CRC Error Counter Test (#623)

X

ND

Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624)

X

ND

Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test (#625)

X

ND

X

ND

Clear Error Counters (#270)

X

Long Test
Sequence

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

1.

Page 10-140

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test (#618)
This test is destructive.
This test verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the LAN Bus and executes
only if the port is out-of-service. The test aborts if calls associated with the port
are in-progress. Failures of this test indicate either on-board faults associated
with the ASAI-PT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus,
which is used to form connectivity between the switch and the ASAI-PT.
The dotted lines in Figure 10-5 show how a Looparound Test is performed across
the Packet Bus for the D-channel.

PACKET
INTERFACE
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. . .

.
.
.
.
.

PACKET BUS

BRI LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK

Figure 10-5.

BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Path

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-141

Table 10-47. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Looparound
Error
Code
1015

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The port is not in the out-of-service state.
1. Display the Port Status form using the status bri-port PCSSpp
command to determine which stations or adjuncts are on this port.
2. Use the extension shown on this form in the status station command to
determine if the station or adjunct is in use.
3. If the port is in use, wait until it is idle, and use the busyout port
PCSSpp command to place it in the out-of-service state and repeat this
test.

! WARNING:
Since the "busyout" command is destructive, using this command
prior to the port being idle causes all transactions associated with the
ASAI on the port to be torn down. Note that third party calls
established by an ASAI adjunct remain connected even though the
port is taken out-of-service.
1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long PCSSpp command
and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to
verify the repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL.
2. Issue the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of
the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair.

1144

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. Issue the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of
the BRI Port Local LAN Looparound Test to verify the repair.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-142

Table 10-47. TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Looparound — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The Looparound test has failed.
1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other
ports on the board are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the
busyout board PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test fails again, execute test pkt P on the management terminal. If
this fails, follow the failure procedures the in PKT-BUS section.
3. If the tests executed in Step 2 pass, the problem is local to the BRI
board. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The BRI Port Local LAN Looparound test has passed.

Continued on next page

Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621)
This test determines the state of the transmission facility of a BRI port at the
Level 1 (L1) or physical layer. L1 can be in one of two possible states: Activated
or Deactivated.
The Activated state is the correct state for an ISDN-BRI port. In this state the
Level 1 interface can communicate with the BRI endpoint or ASAI adjunct
administered on this port. This test passes if the state of L1 is activated. This test
also passes if software has taken this port out of service.
The Deactivated state indicates a problem with the ASAI circuit pack. When in
this state, the Level 1 interface is idle and is not trying to communicate with the
BRI endpoints or adjunct. When an ASAI port is placed in the out-of-service
state, Level 1 is also put into the deactivated state. This could be due either to
the system detecting a fault with the port or in response to a busyout port
PCSSpp request.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-143

Table 10-48. TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry
Error
Code
1187

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The board, port, or station may have been busied-out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port and
ASAI-BD (board busied out). If this error type is present for ASAI-PT
only, then release the port using the release port pp command and run
the test again. If the error is present for both ASAI-BD and ASAI-PT,
then release the board with the release port PCSS command and run
the test again.

NOTE:
When you release a port, you release all ports associated with it. If
certain ports still need to be busied out, use the release port
PCSSpp command to busy them out.
2. Make sure the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2000

ABORT

Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time
period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit pack
using the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

3

FAIL

Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated; the port is out-of-service.
1. Issue the status bri-port PCSSpp command to verify that the service
state of the port is out-of-service. If the port is not out-of-service,
proceed to Step 2.
2. If the port has been placed out-of-service using the busyout port
PCSSpp command, try releasing the port by executing the release port
PCSSpp command. Then issue the test port long PCSSpp command,
and review the results of Level 1 Status Inquiry test. If this test is still
failing, proceed to Step 3.
3. After executing the test port long PCSSpp command, review the
results of all the tests. Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail.
Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port PCSSpp
command and by determining that the Level 1 Status test passes.

PASS

This test indicates that Level 1 is activated, or that software has taken the
port out of service.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-144

Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624)
This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Layer 1 Transmission error counter
maintained on the ASAI circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit
pack when it detects a Layer 1 transmission problem. The test passes if the value
of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not zero, the test
fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field.
This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring or adjunct (verify that the
wiring meets the configuration rules defined in DEFINITY Communications
System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111). It does not indicate a
problem with the TN800 circuit pack. This test is useful for verifying the repair of
the problem
Table 10-49. TEST #624 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time
period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit
pack using the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS
commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The TN800 circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code
field contains the value of this counter.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of other tests in the Long
Test Sequence. Note the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test.
Follow the repair procedures for any of the executed tests if they fail.
Otherwise, go to the next step.
3. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read correctly and has a value
of 0.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-145

Receive FIFO Error Counter Test (#625)
This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Receive FIFO error counter maintained
on the TN800 circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when
it detects an overflow of its receive buffers. The test passes if the value of the
counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not zero, the test fails,
and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field.
This error can occur if signaling frames are being received from a Packet Bus at
a rate sufficient to overflow the receive buffers on the circuit pack for a port or if
hardware fault is causing the receive buffers not to be emptied properly. This test
is useful for verifying the repair of the problem.
.

Table 10-50. TEST #625 Receive FIFO Error Counter Test
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time
period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times, reset the circuit
pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate necessary system resources to run test.

Any

FAIL

The TN800 circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The Error Code
field contains the value of this counter.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of other tests in the Long
Test Sequence. Note the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test.
Follow repair procedures for any of the tests that fail. Otherwise, go to
the next step.
3. If the tests for the endpoints or adjunct pass and the Layer 1
Transmission Error Counter Test continues to fail, check the wiring to
the endpoints or adjunct.
PASS

The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read correctly and has a value
of 0.

Continued on next page

Clear Error Counters Test (#270)
There are various error counters associated with each ASAI-PT. This test clears
those counters and triggers the auditing of Layer 3 reinitialization. This test is
used only to send messages to the ASAI-PT and, therefore, should neither abort
nor fail. ASAI uses a fixed TEI value of 1.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-PT

Page 10-146

Table 10-51. TEST #270 Clear Error Counters
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

Any

ABORT

This test should never abort.

Any

FAIL

This test should never fail.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The message to clear the error counters of the ASAI-PT has been sent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot)

Page 10-147

ASAI-RES/E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve
slot)

MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run

Full Name of MO

ASAI-RES

NONE

NONE

TN800 ASAI reserve slot

E-DIG-RES

NONE

NONE

TN800 DIG reserve slot

There are no tests associated with these MOs. Both the test board and busy out
board commands abort when either is attempted on a reserved slot. An error
message indicates the slot is associated with the circuit pack that the TN800 is
emulating, but the requested operation is not valid.
The TN800 MAPD (Multi-Application Platform for DEFINITY) circuit pack
connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane. The number of
slots occupied by the MAPD pack is supplied by the board when inserted. The
TN800 in R5EM is 3 slots wide. The TN800 requires 2 reserve slots to its left. The
reserve (blank) slots are to left of the functional slot and are place holders on the
switch, and do not have any interaction with the switch.
Each instance of these MOs represents a reserve slot associated with respective
circuit pack mode in which the MAPD is working.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-148

BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line
Circuit Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

BRI-BD

MAJOR

test board PCSS l

ISDN-BRI Line
Circuit Pack

BRI-BD

MINOR

test board PCSS l

ISDN-BRI Line
Circuit Pack

BRI-BD

WARNING

test board PCSS sh

ISDN-BRI Line
Circuit Pack

LGATE-BD

MAJOR

test board PCSS l

DEFINITY Lan
Gateway

LGATE-BD

MINOR

test board PCSS l

DEFINITY Lan
Gateway

LGATE-BD

WARNING

test board PCSS sh

DEFINITY Lan
Gateway

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the
circuit pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.).

NOTE:
Some of the information in this section is reserved for future use.

! CAUTION:
A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included
in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart,
along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in
resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack.
Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to
Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference
Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction", in addition to the
relevant MO documentation.
ISDN-BRI Line is a packet port circuit pack that provides access to ISDN-BRI
endpoints. The ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack supports 12 ports, each of which
provides access to ISDN stations. Voice and circuit-switched data from the ISDN
stations are carried on the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. Signaling is
carried over the Packet Bus.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-149

LEDS
The ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack performs extensive initialization tests and lights
both the red and green LEDS during the initialization testing. See Chapter 7,
"LED Interpretation", for more details on circuit pack status LEDs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-150

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
BRI-BD Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1(a)

Any

None

MINOR

ON

18(b)

0

busyout board
PCSS

WARNING

OFF

23(c)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

257(d)

65535

Control Channel
Loop Test (#52)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS r 20

513(e)

4352 to
4357

769(f)

4358

1025(g)

4363

NPE Audit Test
(#50)

1293
to
1294 (h)

46088
to
46096

SAKI Sanity Test
(#534)

MINOR

ON

See footnote (h)

1537 to
1538 (i)

46082

MINOR

ON

1793 (j)

46080

MINOR

ON

1794 (j)

46094

MINOR

ON

1795 (j)

46085

MINOR

ON

MINOR

OFF

2306 (j)

release board PCSS

LANBIC Receive
Parity Error Counter
Test (#595)

3330 (k)

46083

3840 (l)

4096 to
4101

3843 (m)

46097

3999 (n)

Any

1.

test board PCSS sh r 1

None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-151

Notes:
a. This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was
physically removed from the system.
NOTE:
The alarm is logged approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack
has been removed and/or SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same
slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in
the system and the red LED is on, then follow the instructions for "Red
(alarm)" in the "Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs" section in
Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation". (Also, refer to the "Handling Control Circuit
Packs" section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".
b. This circuit pack has been busied out via the busyout board PCSS
command.
c. Port(s) has(have) been administered on this circuit pack but the circuit
pack is not physically present.
d. This error indicates transient communication problems between the switch
and this circuit pack. Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to
the repair procedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52).
e. An on-board hardware failure has been detected by the circuit pack.
The reported aux data values correspond to the following detected errors:
4352

External RAM error

4353

Internal RAM error

4355

ROM Checksum error

4357

Instruction set error

Reset the circuit pack by executing the busyout board PCSS and reset
board PCSS commands. When it is reset, the circuit pack executes a set
of tests to detect the presence of any of the above faults. The detection of
one of these errors during initialization causes the circuit pack to lock-up
and appear insane to the system. See the repair procedure in footnote (a)
for error type 1.
f. This error is reported by the circuit pack when it detects a program logic
error. While no action is required, this error may lead to errors of other
types being reported against this circuit pack.
g. This error is reported by the circuit pack when it cannot update NPE
memory and read it back. This error type can be ignored, but may lead to
errors of other types being reported against this circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-152

h. A critical hardware failure has been detected on the circuit pack. Reset
the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS
commands. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) passes, then the
on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm via the test board PCSS
long clear command. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) fails, replace
the circuit pack.
The reported error types correspond to the following detected errors:
1293

On-board auxiliary processor insane

1294

Internal memory access error

i. These error types are reported when the following errors are detected:
1537

Frame overrun at Packet Bus interface. This condition may be
caused by an on-board fault or by faulty data received on
one of the circuit pack’s external ports. If any of the ports on
this circuit pack are alarmed, refer to the repair procedures
for those maintenance objects.

1538

Circuit packet is hyperactive; that is, it is flooding the switch
with messages sent over the control channel. The circuit
pack is taken out-of-service when a threshold number of
these errors is reported to the switch. Clear the alarm via the
following commands: busyout board PCSS, reset board
PCSS, test board PCSS long clear, release board PCSS. If
the error recurs within 10 minutes, then replace the circuit
pack.

j. These errors indicate that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting
data to the Packet Bus.
1793

Parity errors are detected when transmitting data to the
Packet Bus.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-153

1794

Overflow of Packet Bus transmit buffers has occurred.

1795

Circuit pack cannot find end of frame when transmitting to
Packet Bus. Clear the alarm via the following commands:
busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS
long clear, release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10
minutes, then replace the circuit pack.

2306

This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an error in a
received frame from the packet bus. These errors are most
likely caused by a packet bus problem, but may be due to a
circuit pack fault.An invalid Link Access Procedure Data
(LAPD) frame error occurs if the frame contains a bad
Cyclical Redundancy Checking (CRC), is greater than the
maximum length, or violates the link level protocol.When bus
parity errors are reported, the LANBIC Receive Parity Error
Counter Test (#595) should be performed to determine if the
condition had cleared. Refer to the "PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)"
Maintenance documentation to determine if the problem is
isolated to this circuit pack or if the problem is caused by
Packet Bus faults.

k. A critical failure has been detected in the Packet Bus interface of the
circuit pack. This failure may be due to either a Packet Bus fault or an
on-board fault. If the Packet Bus is alarmed, refer to the "PKT-BUS (Packet
Bus)" section and Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction"
for recommended repair procedures. The probability of this error being
related to Packet bus problems increases with the number of ISDN-BRI
circuit packs displaying this error.
If the Packet Bus is not alarmed, reset the circuit pack via the busyout
board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands. If the Circuit Pack
Restart Test (#594) passes, then the on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire
the alarm via the test board PCSS long clear command. If the Circuit
Pack Restart Test (#594) fails, replace the circuit pack. If the problem
persists after complying with the above instructions, then follow normal
escalation procedures.
l. These errors are not service-affecting. No action is required. These errors
are reported by the circuit pack when it receives a bad control channel
message from the switch. The auxiliary data identifies the following error
events:
4096

Bad major heading

4097

Bad port number

4098

Bad data

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-154

4099

Bad sub-qualifier

4100

State inconsistency

4101

Inconsistent downlink message

m. This error is not service-affecting. No action is required.
3843

Bad translation RAM detected, but call continues by using
another translation location.

n. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Control Channel Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

NPE Audit Test (#50)

X

ND

LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test
(#595)

X

ND

Order of Investigation
Control Channel Loop-Around Test (#52)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Audit Test (#50)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack)" Maintenance documentation as NPE Audit Test (#50).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-155

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack)" Maintenance documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52).

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack)" Maintenance documentation as SAKI Sanity Test (#53).

LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test (#595)
This test is destructive.
The test reads and clears the LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter on the circuit
pack. This counter is incremented by the circuit pack when it detects a parity
error in data received from the Packet Bus.
These errors may be indicative of a circuit pack problem, Packet Bus problem, or
a problem with another circuit pack on the bus. This test is useful for verifying the
repair of the problem.
Table 10-52. TEST #595 LANBIC Receive Parity Error
Counter Test
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times,
reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS
and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-BD/LGATE-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-156

Table 10-52. TEST #595 LANBIC Receive Parity Error
Counter Test — Continued
Error
Code
1-10

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type. The
error code indicates the value of the on-board error
counter.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, verify the validity of the
Packet Bus. Run the Packet Bus maintenance test
with the test pkt P long command. If any Packet
Bus tests fail, refer to the"PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)"
Maintenance documentation for recommended
repair procedures.
3. If the Packet Bus test passes, check the validity of
the circuit pack. Execute a test that involves data
transmission onto the Packet Bus. For example, the
BRI may use the connectivity tests of the port-level
maintenance object (BRI-PORT) by executing the
test port PCSSpp command. Refer to the repair
procedures for the executed test if it fails. Otherwise,
proceed to the next step.
4. Other circuit packs on the Packet Bus may be the
cause of the parity error. Use the display errors
command to check the Error Log for other circuit
packs that are alarmed. If any alarms are present for
the other circuit packs, retire those alarms also.
Then, rerun the LANBIC Receive Parity Error
Counter Test (#595) on this circuit pack.

PASS

No errors detected by circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI)

Page 10-157

BRI-DAT (ISDN-BRI)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

BRI-DAT

WARNING1

1.

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
test data-module

Full Name of MO
ISDN-BRI Standalone
Data Module

The alarm level for ASAI adjuncts may be administered using the set options command.
The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to
WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI adjuncts in the system.

Refer to BRI-SET (ISDN-BRI Set) Maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-158

BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port),
ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

BRI-PORT

MINOR

BRI-PORT

WARNING
23

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

test port PCSSpp l

ISDN-BRI Port

test port PCSSpp sh

ISDN-BRI Port

ABRI-PORT

MAJOR ,

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN-BRI Port

ABRI-PORT

WARNING2,3

test port PCSSpp l

ASAI ISDN-BRI Port

2 3

ATT-PORT

MAJOR ,

test port PCSSpp l

AT&T Adjunct
ISDN-BRI Port

ATT-PORT

WARNING2, 3

test port PCSSpp l

AT&T Adjunct
ISDN-BRI Port

LGATE-PORT

MAJOR2, 3

test port PCSSpp l

Ethernet ASAI Port

LGATE-PORT

WARNING2, 3

test port PCSSpp l

Ethernet ASAI Port

2 3

ATTE-PT

MAJOR ,

test port PCSSpp l

Ethernet AT&T
Adjunct Port

ATTE-PT

WARNING2, 3

test port PCSSpp l

Ethernet AT&T
Adjunct Port

1.

2.

3.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is
located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).
The alarm level for ASAI and AT&T adjunct ports may be administered using the set options
command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and On-Board alarms to
WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI and AT&T adjunct ports in the system.
All alarming for an ASAI and AT&T adjunct and OFF-BOARD alarming for an ASAI or AT&T
port is disabled if the ASAI or AT&T adjunct asks the switch to suspend maintenance. When
this occurs, an error and a WARNING alarm is logged against the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. The
Hardware Error and Alarm Logs should be checked to see if the adjunct has disabled
alarming.

NOTE:
Some of the information in this section is reserved for future use.

! CAUTION:
A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included
in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart,
along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in
resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack.
Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-159

Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference
Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition to the
relevant MO documentation.

! WARNING:
If a significant Packet Bus failure occurs, errors and alarms may not be
logged as expected for
BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT. Conditions under
which this occurs are detailed in the "Maintenance of the Packet Bus"
section of Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction".
The TN2208 LGATE MFB provides DEFINITY with the interface to Adjunct-Switch
Application Interface (ASAI) and AT&T adjuncts (for example, CONVERSANT®.
Voice System). The circuit pack contains 12 ports of line circuit interface
(although only 8 are usable by the switch), each of which operates with two
B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2 throughout this section) and one D-channel
as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification. In this context, the term
"ISDN-BRI port" is used to refer collectively to ports on the TN2208 circuit pack
which are connected to ASAI or AT&T adjuncts.
The TN556 and TN2198 ISDN-BRI Line circuit packs provide DEFINITY with the
interface to ISDN-BRI end points, Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI)
and AT&T adjuncts (for example, CONVERSANT®. Voice System). The circuit
packs contain 12 ports of line circuit interface, each of which operates with two
B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2 throughout this section) and one D-channel
as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification. In this context, the term
"ISDN-BRI port" is used to refer collectively to ports on the TN556 an TN2198
circuit packs which are connected to either BRI endpoints or ASAI or AT&T
adjuncts.
For BRI endpoints, each B-channel may support voice or circuit-switched data
and may be circuit-switched simultaneously. The B-channels are not used on
ports connected to ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The D-channel is used for conveying
signaling between the switch and a BRI endpoint(s) or ASAI or AT&T adjunct.
Each ISDN-BRI D-channel is connected to the switch processor and the
ISDN-BRI port through the Packet Control circuit pack and the Packet Bus.
ISDN-BRI endpoints are available in various configurations. All endpoints require
the D-channel to convey signaling information to the switch. Only one B-channel
is required for a voice-only set or a stand-alone data module (BRI-DAT). A voice
and data-capable set requires both B-channels (one for voice and one for data).
Therefore, each TN556 or TN2198 port can support either two voice-only sets,
two stand-alone data modules (BRI-DAT), or one voice and data-capable set.
Only a single ASAI or AT&T adjunct may be connected to an ISDN-BRI port.
Multiple adjuncts per line are not supported.
Figure 10-6 illustrates the physical connection (solid line) between an ISDN-BRI
Port and its associated ISDN-BRI set(s). Each physical connection allows for two

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-160

B-channels and one D-channel. Each ISDN-BRI circuit pack can support up to
12 of these physical connections to different voice and voice/data sets or ASAI or
AT&T adjuncts. On a TN2198 each ISDN-BRI circuit pack can support up to 12
physical connections to a NT1, which, in turn, connects to 2 terminals.
This section covers the maintenance documentation for ISDN-BRI ports. Some of
the results of maintenance testing of ISDN-BRI ports may be affected by the
health of the ISDN-BRI Line circuit pack (BRI-BD), BRI endpoint (BRI-SET), or
ASAI adjunct (ASAI-AJ/LGATE-AJ) or AT&T adjunct (ATT_AJ/ATTE-AJ). These
interactions should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of ISDN-BRI
port problems. For more information on the circuit pack and endpoints, refer to
the BRI-BD (ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation, the
BRI-SET (ISDN-BRI Endpoint) Maintenance documentation, and ASAI-AJ
(Adjunct-Switch Application Interface) Maintenance documentation, ATT-AJ
(AT&T Adjunct) Maintenance documentation, LGATE-AJ (Ethernet
Adjunct-Switch Application Interface) Maintenance documentation, and ATTE-AJ
(Ethernet AT&T Adjunct) Maintenance documentation.

VOICE
OR DATA
TERMINAL

BRI LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK
D-CHANNEL
DEFINITY
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM

P
O
R
T

B-CHANNEL
B-CHANNEL

VOICE
OR DATA
TERMINAL
LOGICAL CONNECTION
PHYSICAL CONNECTION

Figure 10-6.

ISDN-BRI Port Interactions

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-161

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-53.

Error
Type

ISDN-BRI Port Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level
BRI-POR
T

Alarm Level
ABRI-PORT
ATT-PORT
LGATE-PORT
ATTE-PT

On/
Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

Any

test port
PCSSpp sh r 1

1 (a)

(a)

Level 1 Status
Inquiry (#621)

WRN

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

test port
PCSSpp sh r 2

busyout port
PCSSpp

WRN

OFF

release port
PCSSpp

WRN

ON

test port
PCSS sh
test port
PCSSpp sh r 1

18
130 (b)
257 (c)

(c)

EPF Inquiry
(#622)

WRN

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

513 (d)

(d)

none

(d)

(d)

ON

769 (e)

0

none

WRN

MAJ

OFF

NPE Crosstalk
(#617)

MIN/
WRN2

CRC Error
Counter (#623)

WRN

BRI Port Local
TDM

MIN/
WRN2

1281 (f)
1537 (g)

46210

1793 (h)

ON
MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

test port
PCSSpp l r 2

OFF
ON

test port
PCSSpp l r 2

Loop Around
(#619)
3841 (i)

46208

None

3842 (j)

0

None

3843 (k)

0

None

3844 (l)

46223

None

3845 (m)

None

3846 (n)

TEI

None

3847 (o)

0

None

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

1.
2.

Page 10-162

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description, and follow the recommended procedures.
Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in
the set options command.

Notes:
a. This error occurs when the Level 1 Status Inquiry fails or when the BRI
circuit pack detects that Level 1 has been deactivated on the port. The
aux data field contains one of the following values:
■

blank - this indicates that the Level 1 Status Inquiry failed.

■

32773 - this is a message from the BRI-LINE circuit pack indicating
Level 1 has been deactivated.

Refer to the repair procedures for Test #621.
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or
reinsert the circuit pack.
c. This error occurs when the EPF Status Inquiry fails due to an overcurrent
condition or when the BRI-LINE circuit pack detects that the EPF is in an
over current condition. The aux data field contains one of the following
values:
■

blank - this indicates that the EPF Status Inquiry failed due to an
overcurrent condition.

■

40988 - this indicates that the BRI-LINE circuit pack has detected
an overcurrent condition and has turned the EPF off.

Execute the Short Test Sequence and see the repair procedures for Test
#622.
d. This error indicates that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting
data to the Packet Bus, thus affecting the conveyance of signaling
information over the D-channel. With Aux Data 46222, this error occurs
when the Packet Bus transmit buffers overflow. This condition probably
indicates a hardware problem. The BRI-PORT Alarm Level for the error
with Aux Data 46222 is "MIN/WRN," and the
ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT Alarm Level is
"MAJ/MIN/WNR." With Aux Data 0, this error occurs whenever the Packet
Bus transmit FIFO buffers overflow. This condition can be caused by an
on-board hardware problem as well as by problems on the Packet Bus
that disrupt the BRI circuit pack’s ability to transmit data onto the Packet
Bus. Use troubleshooting procedures for both on-board hardware
problems and potential off-board Packet Bus problems. See the "PKT-BUS
(Packet Bus)" Maintenance section in this chapter as well as Chapter 9,
"Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" for more details on Packet Bus

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-163

troubleshooting procedures. The BRI-PORT Alarm Level for the error with
Aux Data 0 is "MINOR," and the
ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT Alarm Level is "MAJOR."
e. This error occurs when the NPE Crosstalk Test (#617) fails. Run the Long
Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the results of Test #617.
f. This error occurs when broadcast signaling links associated with this port
have too much link establishment related traffic. This could occur if an
endpoint on this port is sending link establishment traffic on a port level
broadcast link, or if there are Level 1 problems on the port. Check the
error logs for Level 1 errors. If Level 1 problems exist, follow the repair
procedures listed for test #621. Software will suspend activity to this port
for 75 minutes when the port is alarmed due to this error (note that service
suspension does not occur if the port is an
ABRI-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT/ATT-PORT). If this problem persists,
replace the endpoint or endpoints associated with this port. If replacing
the endpoints does not fix the problem, follow normal escalation
procedures.
g. This error occurs when the port receives an invalid frame over the
D-channel. When CRC errors exceed five within 15 minutes, the port is
taken out of service for five seconds. If five more CRC errors are received
within 15 minutes of the first set of five errors, the port is taken out of
service for one minute. If five more CRC errors are received within 15
minutes of the last five, the port is taken out of service for 15 minutes.
This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring to the set or
adjunct, interference on the wiring due to a noise source or no termination
(an open circuit). It usually does not indicate a problem with the circuit
pack.
■

Check the wiring to the endpoints or the adjunct.

■

If the problem persists, replace the endpoints or adjuncts, or
escalate the problem.

h. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test (#619)
fails. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the
results of Test #619.
There are no Test to Clear Values for the following error types. The error
types are simply provided as additional data that may prove useful while
troubleshooting.
i. This error occurs when a Layer 1 Transmission error is detected for the
port. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the
results of the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624).
j. A BRI port supports up to three Terminal Endpoint Identifiers (TEIs). This
error occurs when the switch receives a request for a fourth TEI on a port.
Check the number of endpoints administered for this port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-164

k. This error occurs when an SPID initialization request is made from an
endpoint and the switch determines that the SPID value is invalid or is a
duplicate of another SPID that is already initialized at Layer 3 on the port.
Check the administration of the endpoints.
l. This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive
buffers. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the
results of the Receive First In First Out (FIFO) Overflow Error Counter Test
(#625).
m. This error occurs when the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test (#618)
fails. Run the Long Test Sequence, and pay particular attention to the
results of Test #618.
n. This error most likely occurs when the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI)
administered for the ASAI or AT&T endpoint does not match the TEI
administered in the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Check the switch
administration of the TEI against that of the adjunct, and make sure that
both are using the same TEI.
o. Indicates that sets on the port do not support Layer 3 initialization. Consult
the Service Set documentation.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#617)

X

D

BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test
(#618)

X

D

BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test
(#619)

X

D

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Electronic Power Feed Restoral Test
(#620)

X

X

ND

Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621)

X

X

ND

Electronic Power Feed Inquiry Test (#622)

X

X

ND

X

ND

CRC Error Counter Test (#623)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-165

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test
(#624)

X

ND

Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test
(#625)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Clear Error Counters (#270)

1.

Short Test
Sequence

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NOTE:
The NPE Crosstalk Test and the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test are
not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT.

NPE Crosstalk Test (#617)
This test is destructive.
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence
and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete. Crosstalk testing is
performed on both B-channels (B1 and B2) associated with a BRI port. If this test
fails on either channel, any endpoints connected to the port are taken
out-of-service.
This test is not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT because
the B-channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T adjuncts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-54.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-166

TEST #161 Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension or trunk group/member number of the
port. Use the status bri-port PCSSpp command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) Wait until the port is
idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status station command for the station associated
with this port and determine when the port is available
for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

This test is not valid for this type of translation. Ports
administered as “ASAI” or “ADJK” can not run this test,
because the B channels associated with the port are not
used by ASAI or AT&T Adjunct Links. This is a normal
condition.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this
test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-54.
Error
Code
1, 2

Page 10-167

TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
Error code 1 indicates that the NPE Crosstalk Test failed
on Channel B1. Error code 2 indicates that the NPE
Crosstalk Test failed on Channel B1.
1. Replace circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem,
repeat this test a maximum of 10 times to make sure
it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the station,
connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test (#618)
This test is destructive.
This test, which verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the LAN Bus,
executes only if the port is out-of-service. The test aborts if calls associated with
the port are in-progress. Failures of this test indicate either on-board faults
associated with the BRI-PORT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the
LAN Bus, which is used to form connectivity between the switch and the
BRI-PORT.
The dotted lines in Figure 10-7 show how a Loop Around Test is performed
across the Packet Bus for the D-channel.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-168

PACKET
INTERFACE
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
. .
. .
. . .

.
.
.
.
.

PACKET BUS

BRI LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK

Figure 10-7.

Path of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-55.
Error
Code
1015

Page 10-169

TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port is not in the out-of-service service state.
1. Display the BRI Port Status form via the status
bri-port PCSSpp command to determine which
stations or adjuncts are on this port.
2. Use the extension shown on this form in the status
station command to determine if the station or
adjunct is in use.
3. If it is in use, wait until it is idle, and then busyout the
port (using the busyout port PCSSpp command) to
place it in the out-of-service state and repeat this
test.

! WARNING:
Since the "busyout" command is destructive,
execution of this command prior to the port being
idle causes all calls associated with BRI endpoints
and all transactions associated with ASAI or AT&T
adjuncts on the port to be torn down. Note that
third party calls established by an ASAI or AT&T
adjunct remain connected even though the port is
taken out-of-service.
1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the PKT-CTRL.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-55.
Error
Code
1144

Page 10-170

TEST #618 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The Loop Around Test has failed.
1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit
pack if the other ports on the board are not in use.
Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board
PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test fails again, execute test pkt P on the
G3MT terminal. If this fails, follow failure procedures
in PKT-BUS section.
3. If tests executed in Step 2 pass, the problem is local
to the BRI board. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test has passed.

Continued on next page

BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test (#619)
This test is destructive.
This test verifies the connectivity of a BRI port across the TDM Bus. It aborts if
calls associated with the port are in progress. Failure of this test indicates an
on-board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack.
This Loop Around Test runs a series of individual tests on the two B-channels (B1
and B2) associated with the port. It is a collection of the following:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-171

■

A Loop Around Test across the TDM Bus for B1.

■

A Conference Circuit Test for B1.

■

A Loop Around Test across the TDM Bus for B2.

■

A Conference Circuit Test for B2.

The tests are run in the above order. If one fails, the remaining tests in the
sequence are not executed. An error code is returned at that point.
This test is not executed for ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT because
the B-channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or AT&T adjuncts.
The dotted lines in Figure 10-8 show how a Loop Around Test is performed for
the B-channels. The figure shows a terminal connected to a BRI line board using
a TN556. If a TN2198 is used, the terminal would be connected to a NT1, and the
NT1 to the BRI board.

Tone
Generator

Tone
Detector

TDM Bus

BRI Line
Board

Figure 10-8.

Path of the BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-56.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-172

TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension or trunk group/member number of the
port. Use the status bri-port PCSSpp command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) Wait until the port is
idle before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-56.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-173

TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status station command for the station associated
with this port and determine when the port is available
for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

This test is not valid for this type of translation. Ports
administered as “ASAI” or “ADJK” can not run this test,
because the B channels associated with the port are not
used by ASAI or AT&T Adjunct Links. This is a normal
condition.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the
BRI-LINE circuit pack within the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the
circuit pack if the other ports are not in use. Reset
the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSS
and the reset board PCSS commands.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-56.
Error
Code

Page 10-174

TEST #619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this
test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2103

ABORT

The system could not make the conference connection
for the test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1, 2

FAIL

As stated previously, this test runs a TDM Loop Around
Test on each B-channel. This indicates that the loop
around failed on one of the channels. Error Code 1
indicates that the TDM Loop Around Test failed on B1.
Error Code 2 indicates that the TDM Loop Around Test
failed on B2.

7, 8

FAIL

As stated previously, this test runs a Conference Circuit
Test on each B-channel. A failure here indicates that one
of these conference tests failed; Error Code 7 means
that the test failed on B1; Error Code 8 means that the
test failed on B2.
1. If the test fails repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit
pack if the other ports on the circuit pack are not in
use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout
board PCSS and the reset board PCSS
commands.
2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around Test has passed.

Continued on next page

Electronic Power Feed Restoral Test (#620)
This test attempts to restore the Electronic Power Feed (EPF) on an ISDN-BRI
port twice. In this test, the processor requests that the EPF be turned on for a
given port. An attempt is made to turn on the power unit to the station or adjunct.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-175

If no current is being drawn by a station, this probably indicates that the station is
not connected. No current being drawn by an adjunct is the normal condition. If
an overcurrent condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this
condition may indicate a short in the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct.
Depending on what condition is sensed, a message is returned stating that either
the EPF was turned on successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent
condition is sensed. This response is reported by the Electronic Power Feed
Inquiry (#622), which follows in the testing sequence. EPF Restoral is attempted
again by this test five seconds later. This test always passes for the TN2198
because it has no EPF. This test will always abort when run on the TN2208.

Table 10-57.
Error
Code

TEST #620 Electronic Power Feed Restoral
Test
Result

Description / Recommendation

1005

ABORT

This test is not valid for this port type. The TN2208 does
not have an electronic power feed, and the test will
abort.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

The EPF Test passed. The message to turn on the
power feed to the station or the adjunct was
successfully sent to the port.
1. Although this test should not return a fail result, after
running this test, the Error Log should be checked
for any entries with error type 257 to examine the
real results of this test.
2. An error type of 257 in the Error Log indicates some
problem with the power to the station or the adjunct.
Check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a
defective voice terminal or adjunct, or an incorrect
type of terminal.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-176

Level 1 Status Inquiry Test (#621)
This test determines the state of the transmission facility of a BRI port at the
physical layer (that is, Level 1). Level 1 can be in one of three possible states:
Activated, Pending Activation, or Deactivated.
The Activated state is the correct state for an ISDN-BRI port. In this state the
Level 1 interface can communicate with the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T
adjunct administered on this port. This test passes if the state of Level 1 (L1) is
Activated. This test also passes if software has taken this port out of service. See
the description of the Level 1 "Deactivated State" below for more details.
The Pending Activation state indicates a problem with the endpoints or adjunct,
the wiring to the sets or adjunct, or the BRI-LINE circuit pack. When in this state,
the Level 1 interface is either not receiving any L1 framing from the endpoint or
adjunct (Endpoint Idle), or it is communicating with the endpoint or adjunct but
cannot transition to the Activated state (Endpoint Active).
The Deactivated state indicates a problem with the BRI-LINE circuit pack. When
in this state, the Level 1 interface is idle and is not trying to communicate with the
BRI endpoints or adjunct. When an ISDN-BRI port is placed in the out-of-service
state, Level 1 is also put into the Deactivated state. This could be due either to
the system detecting a fault with the port or to a busyout port PCSSpp request.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-58.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-177

TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The board, port or station may have been busied out by
a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port and BRI-BD (board busied out). If
this error type is present for BRI-PORT only, then
release the port via the release port pp command
and run the test again. If the error is present for both
BRI-BD and BRI-PORT, then release the board via
the release port PCSS command and run the test
again.
NOTE:
When you release a port, you release all ports
associated with it. If certain ports still need to be
busied out, use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
2. Make sure the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times,
reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS
and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-58.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-178

TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Received a status of Level 1 Pending
Activation-Endpoint Idle which indicates a problem with
the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the wiring to
the endpoint or adjunct, or the ISDN-BRI port.
For the TN2198, received a status of Level 1 Pending
Activation. U interface down, which indicates a problem
with a connection between the switch and the NT1.
NOTE:
An NT1 is a 2- to 4-wire converter that is used to
connect 4-wire AT&T terminals to a 2-wire TN2198
circuit pack. The NT1 also has status lamps to
determine the health of the unit.
1. For the TN556 or TN2208, verify that an endpoint is
connected to the port. If an endpoint is connected to
the port, then proceed to step 2. For the TN2198
verify that the connections are good between the
switch and the NT1. Verify that the NT1 has power.
2. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between
the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct. If a
TN2198 is used, the set must have been plugged in
for at least 15 seconds before it will stabilize.
Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and
review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test
to verify the repair. If this test is still failing, proceed
to Step 3.
3. For BRI endpoints, replace the BRI endpoint(s)
connected to the port or the NT1 if a TN2198 is
used. For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts, follow the
recommended repair procedures of the
manufacturer for link communication problems. For
the NT1, follow the manufacturers repair
procedures. Then execute the test port PCSSpp
command and review the results of the Level 1
Status Inquiry Test to verify repair. If this test is still
failing, proceed to Step 4.
4. Escalate the problem to the next tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-58.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-179

TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
For the TN556 or TN2208, received a status of Level 1
Pending Activation-Endpoint Active which indicates a
problem with the BRI endpoint or ASAI or AT&T adjunct,
the wiring to the endpoint or adjunct, or the ISDN-BRI
port.
For the TN2198, received a status of Level 1 Pending
Activation. U interface up S/T interface down, which
indicates a problem with the NT1 or the wiring between
the NT1 and the BRI endpoint (S/T interface).
1. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between
the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct.
Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and
review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to
verify the repair. If this test is still failing, proceed to
Step 2.
2. For BRI endpoints, try replacing the BRI endpoint(s)
connected to the port. For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts,
follow the recommended repair procedures of the
manufacturer for link communication problems. For
the NT1, follow the recommended repair procedures
of the manufacturer. Then execute the test port
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify repair. If this test
is still failing, proceed to Step 3.
3. Escalate the problem to the next tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-58.
Error
Code
3

Page 10-180

TEST #621 Level 1 Status Inquiry — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated; the port is
out-of-service.
1. Issue the status bri-port PCSSpp command to
verify that the service state of the port is
out-of-service. If the service state of the port is not
out-of-service, escalate the problem to the next tier.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 2.
2. If the port has been placed out-of-service via the
busyout port PCSSpp command, try releasing the
port by executing the release port PCSSpp
command. Then issue the test port long PCSSpp
command, and review the results of Level 1 Status
Inquiry test. If this test is still failing, proceed to Step
3.
3. After executing the test port long PCSSpp
command, review the results of all the tests. Follow
the repair procedures for any tests that fail. Verify
repair of the problem by executing the test port
PCSSpp command and by determining that the
Level 1 Status test passes. If the test continues to fail
for this reason, proceed to Step 4.
4. Escalate the problem to the next tier.

4

FAIL

For the TN2198 only:
Received a status of Level 1 Pending Activation, the NT1
has a loss of power indicating a problem with the NT1.
1. For the NT1 follow the manufacturers recommended
repair procedures.
2. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and
review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to
verify the repair. If the test is still failing proceed to
Step 3.
3. Escalate the problem to the next tier.

PASS

This test indicates that Level 1 is activated, or that
software has taken the port out of service.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-181

Electronic Power Feed Inquiry (#622)
This test queries the BRI-LINE circuit pack for the status of the Electronic Power
Feed (EPF) supplied to a BRI endpoint or an ASAI or AT&T adjunct. If the EPF is
on and no overcurrent condition exists, this test passes. All other states are not
normal and indicate a problem with the endpoint or adjunct, the wiring to the
endpoint or adjunct, or the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This test is not run on the
TN2208 circuit pack or the TN2198 and will always return a pass for a TN2198.
The TN2208 has no power feeds.
Table 10-59.
Error
Code

TEST #622 Electronic Power Feed Inquiry
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1005

ABORT

This test is not valid for this port type. Ports on the
TN2208 cannot run this test because this board does
not have an electronic power feed.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times,
reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS
and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Table 10-59.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-182

TEST #622 Electronic Power Feed Inquiry — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The BRI-LINE circuit pack reports that it has detected an
overcurrent condition and has turned off the EPF.
1. As necessary, check and repair the wiring between
the circuit pack and the endpoint or adjunct. Check
the endpoints and replace one or both sets if the
sets are drawing too much current. Execute the test
port PCSSpp command and review the results of
the EPF Inquiry Test to verify the repair. If this test is
still failing, proceed to Step 2.
2. Execute the test port PCSSpp command, and
review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test.
If this test is also failing, then follow the repair
procedure for the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test.
Otherwise, escalate this problem to the next tier.

2000

PASS

The Electronic Power Feed Inquiry Test reports that the
EPF is on.

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times,
reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS
and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

Continued on next page

Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test (#624)
This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Layer 1 Transmission error counter
maintained on the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the
circuit pack when it detects a Layer 1 transmission problem. The test passes if
the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is not
zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code
field.
This error is most likely due to a problem with the wiring or the endpoint or
adjunct (verify that the wiring meets the configuration rules defined in DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111). It does

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-183

not indicate a problem with the ISDN-BRI circuit pack. This test is useful for
verifying the repair of the problem.
Table 10-60.
Error
Code
2000

TEST #624 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five
times, reset the circuit pack via the busyout board
PCSS and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate necessary system resources to run
test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

value

FAIL

The BRI-LINE circuit pack is still detecting errors of this
type. The Error Code field contains the value of this
counter.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, review the results of
other tests in the Long Test Sequence. Pay
particular attention to the results of the Level 1
Status Inquiry test. Follow repair procedures for any
of the executed tests if they fail. Otherwise, go to
the next step.
3. If the tests for the endpoints or adjunct pass and
the Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test
continues to fail, check the wiring to the endpoints
or adjunct. If the wiring appears to be fine, escalate
the problem.

PASS

The Layer 1 Transmission error counter was read
correctly and has a value of 0.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-184

Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test (#625)
This test reads and clears the BRI port’s Receive FIFO Overflow error counter
maintained on the BRI-LINE circuit pack. This counter is incremented by the
circuit pack when it detects an overflow of its receive buffers. The test passes if
the value of the counter is 0 (that is, the error is cleared). If the counter is
non-zero, the test fails, and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error
Code field.
This error can occur if signaling frames are being received from the Packet Bus
at a rate sufficient to overflow the receive buffers on the circuit pack for a port OR
if a hardware fault is causing the receive buffers not to be emptied properly by
the circuit pack. This test is useful for verifying the repair of the problem.
Table 10-61. TEST #625 Receive FIFO Overflow Error
Counter Test
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received from the circuit
pack within the allowable time period.
1. If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times,
reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS
and reset board PCSS commands.
2. If the test aborts again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

value

FAIL

The BRI-LINE circuit pack is still detecting errors of this
type. The Error Code field contains the value of this
counter.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, run the Long Test
Sequence and pay particular attention to the Loop
Around Tests (#618 and #619). See the repair
procedures for the executed test if it fails. Otherwise,
go to the next step.
3. Replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port)

Page 10-185

Table 10-61. TEST #625 Receive FIFO Overflow Error
Counter Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The Receive FIFO Overflow error counter was read
correctly and has a value of 0.

Continued on next page

Clear Error Counters Test (#270)
This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. There are various
error counters associated with each
BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT. This test clears those
counters and triggers the auditing of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) values
and layer 3 reinitialization. This test is used only to send messages to the
BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT and, therefore, should
neither abort nor fail.
Table 10-62.
Error
Code

TEST #270 Clear Error Counters
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

Any

ABORT

This test should never abort.

Any

FAIL

This test should never fail.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The message to clear the error counters of the
BRI-Port/ABRI-Port/ATT-PORT/LGATE-PT/ATTE-PT has
been sent.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-186

BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

BRI-SET

WARNING2

test station extension
l, test data-module
extension

ISDN-BRI Set

ASAI-ADJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

ASAI-Adjunct

ASAI-ADJ

MAJOR2

test data-module
extension

ASAI-Adjunct

ASAI-ADJ

WARNING3

test data-module
extension

ASAI-Adjunct

ATT-ADJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

AT&T-Adjunct

ATT-ADJ

2

MAJOR

test station extension

AT&T-Adjunct

ATT-ADJ

WARNING3

test station extension

AT&T-Adjunct

LGATE-AJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct

LGATE-AJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct

LGATE-AJ

WARNING3

test station extension

Ethernet ASAI-Adjunct

ATTE-AJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct

ATTE-AJ

MAJOR2

test station extension

Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct

ATTE-AJ

WARNING3

test station extension

Ethernet AT&T-Adjunct

BRI-DAT

1.

test data-module

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01). The
alternate name field contains the extension of the endpoint. This field is used to distinguish
between endpoints on the same port.

2. The alarm level for ASAI and AT&T adjuncts may be administered using the set
options command. The alarm level can be set independently for Off-Board and
On-Board alarms to WARNING, MINOR, or MAJOR for all ASAI and AT&T adjuncts
in the system.
3. Alarming for an ASAI and AT&T adjuncts is disabled if the adjunct asks the switch
to suspend maintenance. When this occurs, an error and a WARNING alarm are
logged against the endpoint. Busying out and releasing the ASAI station or ADJLK
station will clear the alarm.

! CAUTION:
A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-187

in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". this flowchart,
along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in
resolving problems that involve more than a single station or circuit pack.
Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to
Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference
Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition to the
relevant MO documentation.

! WARNING:
If a significant Packet Bus failure occurs, errors and alarms may not be
logged as expected for
BRI-SET/BRI-DAT/ASAI-ADJ/ATT-ADJ/LGATE-AJ/ATTE-AJ. Conditions
under which this occurs are detailed in the ""Maintenance of the Packet
Bus" section of Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction".
The TN2208 ESAI MFB provides DEFINITY with an Ethernet interface to
Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI) and AT&T adjuncts (for example,
CONVERSANT® Voice System). This circuit pack contains 8 ports of line circuit
interface, each of which operates with two B-channels (referred to as B1 and B2
throughout this section) and one D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI
Specification. In this context, the term ‘ ‘ISDN-BRI port’’ is used to refer
collectively to ports on the TN2208 MFB circuit pack which is connected to ASAI
or AT&T adjuncts. The TN2208 ESAI MFB is handled by switch software as it is
an ISDN BRI compatible board and all maintenance actions referring to ASAI and
AT&T Adjunct Links in this section apply.
In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, two types of ISDN-BRI endpoints may be
connected to ISDN-BRI (ISDN Basic Rate Interface Line) TN556 and TN2198
circuit packs: ISDN-BRI station endpoints, ASAI (Adjunct-Switch Application
Interface) and AT&T adjuncts (for example CONVERSANT® Voice System).
These circuit packs contain 12 ports of line circuit interfaces, each of which
operates at 192 kilobits per second (kbps) with two B-channels and one
D-channel as specified in the AT&T ISDN-BRI specification (PUB 801-802-100).
For BRI endpoints, each B-channel may support voice or circuit-switched data
and may be circuit-switched simultaneously. The B-channels are not used by
ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. The D-channel is used for conveying signaling between
the switch and a BRI endpoint(s) or ASAI or AT&T adjuncts. Each ISDN-BRI
D-channel is connected to the switch processor and the ISDN-BRI port through
the PKT-CTRL (Packet Control) and the PKT-BUS (Packet Bus).
ISDN-BRI endpoints come in a number of configurations. All endpoints require
the D-channel to convey signaling information to the switch. A voice-only set
requires only one B-channel. A voice and data-capable set requires both
B-channels (one for voice and one for data). Therefore, each TN556 port can
support either two voice-only sets or one voice and data-capable set. Only a
single ASAI or AT&T adjunct may be connected to an ISDN-BRI port. Multiple
adjuncts per line are not supported.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-188

Figure 10-9 illustrates the physical connection (solid line) between an ISDN-BRI
Circuit Pack and a voice or voice/data set. Each physical connection allows for
two B-channels, as stated above, plus one D-channel. Each ISDN-BRI circuit
pack can support up to 12 of these PHYSICAL connections to different voice and
voice/data sets or ASAI and AT&T adjuncts.

VOICE
or DATA
SET

BRI Line
Circuit Pack

P
O
PBX

R
T

D-Channel
B-Channel
B-Channel
PHYSICAL CONNECTION

VOICE
or DATA
SET

Logical Connection
Physical Connection

Figure 10-9.

ISDN-BRI Set Interactions

This section contains the ISDN-BRI Set, ASAI Adjunct, and AT&T Adjunct
Maintenance documentation. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the
ISDN-BRI Set or the ASAI and AT&T Adjunct may be affected by the health of the
ISDN-BRI circuit pack and Port. These interactions should be kept in mind when
investigating the cause of ISDN-BRI Set problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-189

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-63.

BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ Error Log Entries

Error Type

Aux
Data

Associated
Test

01

0

Any

2(a)

2-10
2

None

18

0

busyout
station ext

130(b)

Alarm
Level
BRI-PORT

Alarm Level
ABRI-PORT
ATT-PORT
LGATE-PORT
ATTE-PT

On/
Off
Board

Any

Any

Any

test BRI-SET
or ASAI-ADJ
ATT-ADJ
LGATE-AJ
ATTE-AJ

WARNING

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

release
station 

ON

test port
PCSS sh

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

test station
ext r 2
test
data-module
ext r 2

WARNING

OFF

busyout and
release station

WARNING

MAJOR

OFF

WARNING

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

WRN

257(c)

Any

BRI Layer 3
Query (#629)

351(d)

0

None

513(e)

0

None

769(f)

0

None

2561(g)

0

None

25622566(h)

0

None

2567(o)

0

None

2568(p)

0

None

2817(i)

0

XID Test
(#628)

WARNING

Test to Clear
Value

test station
ext r 2
test
data-module
ext r 2

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-63.

Page 10-190

BRI-SET/ASAI-ADJ Error Log Entries — Continued

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level
BRI-PORT

Error Type

Aux
Data

3073(j)

0

BRI Remote
Loop Back
(#627)

WARNING

3329(k)

Any

Signaling
Link Status
(626)

WARNING

3584

0, 1

None

35853839(i)

0

None

38404095(m)(n)

0

None

Alarm Level
ABRI-PORT
ATT-PORT
LGATE-PORT
ATTE-PT

MAJOR/
WARNING2

On/
Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

OFF

test station
ext l r 2
test
data-module
ext l r 2

OFF

†

Continued on next page
1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Notes:
a. Errors of this type indicate violations of the ISDN-BRI signaling protocol;
timers associated with certain Layer 3 messages have expired before a
required response was received. In the following table, the aux data field
indicates which timer has just expired. (For more information, refer to the
AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification.)

Aux Data

Timer Type

2

First T303 (SETUP timer)

3

Second T303 (SETUP timer)

4

T305 (DISConnect timer)

5

First T308 (RELease timer)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-191

Aux Data

Timer Type

6

Second T308 (RELease timer)

10

T316 (RESTart timer)

12

T309 (Layer 2 Failure timer)

16

TM100 (Management Information Message timer 1)

17

TM200 (Management Information Message timer 2)

102

TASAI (ASAI Routing Timer)

The switch sent a message to the endpoint which did not respond in the
allotted time. This can happen occasionally due to failure of the
point-to-point signaling link or because of a problem in the BRI endpoint or
ASAI adjunct or AT&T adjunct. Execute the test station extension sh
command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Layer 3
Query Test (#629). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test
#629.
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or
reinsert the circuit pack.
c. This error occurs when the endpoint does not respond to the service state
query message sent to the adjunct or the endpoint. This error causes an
alarm to be raised. The alarm is retired when the switch receives a
response to the service state query to the endpoint or the adjunct.
For BRI endpoints, the Aux Data field for this error contains "0." When it
occurs, execute the test station extension sh command and pay
particular attention to the results of the BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629). If
this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #629.
When this error occurs for an ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the Aux Data field
indicates the state of the ASAI link or AT&T link and whether an invalid
response or no response was received to the query from the switch, as
shown in the following table:
Aux Data

ASAI Link State

Error

102

13-restarting

No response to RESTART message

104

13-restarting

Invalid response to RESTART message

152

13-restarted

No response to Layer 3 query

154

13-restarted

Invalid response to Layer 3 query

202

13-established

No response to Layer 3 query

204

13-established

Invalid response to Layer 3 query

(See "Status BRI-Port" in Chapter 8, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for an explanation of the ASAI link states.)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-192

For ASAI or AT&T adjuncts, the switch automatically queries the adjunct
every two minutes (and therefore the Layer 3 Query Test is not executed
for ASAI or AT&T adjuncts via a command issued from the G3MT
terminal). While alarmed for this error, the switch momentarily (for five
seconds) takes the associated port out-of-service every 15 minutes. This
action is taken in an attempt to stimulate recovery actions to be taken by
the adjunct.
When this error occurs for an ASAI or AT&T adjunct, the service technician
should:
1. Execute the test station extension command, paying particular
attention to any tests which fail, and perform the associated repair
procedures for those tests.
2. Check the health of the adjunct by following the recommended
repair procedures of the manufacturer of the adjunct if the
preceding step does not resolve the problem.
3. The alarm condition persists and, if the above steps do not resolve
the problem, follow normal escalation procedures.
d. This error and associated WARNING alarm are logged against an ASAI or
AT&T endpoint when the adjunct has asked the switch to suspend
Maintenance on the ASAI or AT&T endpoint. Busying out and releasing
the ASAI station or ADJLK station will clear this alarm.
e. This error occurs when the endpoint sends more messages than the
switch can handle. The switch suspends the reception of messages from
the endpoint for a short period of time. There is no repair procedure for
this error. If the condition persists, replace the endpoint.
f. This error occurs when the signaling link associated with a BRI endpoint
has too much link establishment related traffic. This could occur if the
signaling link is bouncing between assigned and established states.
Software will suspend activity to this endpoint for 75 minutes when the
endpoint is alarmed due to this problem (note that service suspension
does not occur if the endpoint is an ASAI or AT&T adjunct). If this problem
persists, replace the endpoint. If replacing the endpoint does not fix the
problem, follow normal escalation procedures.
g. This error occurs when the ASAI-ADJ or ATT-ADJ or LGATE-AJ or
ATTE-AJ message is not transmitted because the PKT-CTRL (Packet
Control Circuit Pack) transmit buffers are exhausted. Frequent or
persistent occurrence of these events may indicate a hardware problem
or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the signaling link, or the ASAI or
AT&T adjunct. Attempt to resolve the problem by following the repair
procedures for the PKT-CTRL. If these attempts fail, the problem should
be escalated because re-engineering of the traffic on the PKT-CTRL,
signaling link, or adjunct may be necessary.
h. This error occurs when the ASAI message is not transmitted because the
transmit buffer for the ASAI link is full, causing the link to be flow
controlled. Frequent or persistent occurrence of these events may

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-193

indicate a hardware problem or traffic overload on the PKT-CTRL, the
signaling link, or the ASAI or AT&T adjunct. Attempt to resolve the problem
by following the repair procedures issued by the manufacturer of the
adjunct. If these attempts fail, the problem should be escalated because
re-engineering of the traffic on the PKT-CTRL, signaling link, or adjunct
may be necessary.
i. This error indicates a problem with Layer 2 over the D-channel between
the switch and the endpoint. When this error occurs, an alarm is raised
against the station or adjunct. Execute the test station extension short
command and pay particular attention to the results of the BRI XID Test
(#628). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #628.
j. This error indicates a problem with the B-channel connection between the
switch and the endpoint. When this error occurs, a warning alarm is raised
against the endpoint. Execute the test station extension l command, and
pay particular attention to the results of the BRI Remote Loop Back Test
(#627). If this test fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #627.
k. This error occurs whenever the point-to-point signaling link to the endpoint
goes down (except when it goes down because either the PKT-CTRL or
the PKT-BUS has failed or has been busied out by system technician).
When this error occurs, an alarm is raised against the endpoint or adjunct.
Execute the test station extension short command and pay particular
attention to the results of the Signaling Link Status Test (#626). If this test
fails, follow the repair procedure for Test #626. The alarm is retired when
the signaling link is reestablished to the endpoint or adjunct.
l. Certain ASAI protocol-specific cause codes are logged by switch
software. The cause code can be determined from the following formula:
If the error type is greater than 3712, then the ASAI cause code is equal to
the error type minus 3712. This code was sent to the adjunct by the
switch.
If the error type is less than 3712, then the ASAI cause code is equal to the
error type minus 3584. This code was sent to the switch by the adjunct.
A description of the various ASAI cause values is contained in the Table
10-64. This table also contains recommended system technician actions
associated with the cause value. Further information can also be found in
the AT&T ASAI Specification (AT&T PUB 288-500-03). In addition, the Aux
Data field of the Error Log entry contains additional diagnostic information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-64.
Code

Page 10-194

ASAI Cause Values

Explanation

Recommendation

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
AVAILABLE
0

Unrecognized
ASAIProtocol
Operation

Requested ASAI protocol operation is not
implemented by the switch or adjunct. Aux Data
field of Error Log entry contains protocol identifier
for unrecognized operation.
1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to
determine which set of operations is supported
by the switch and the adjunct. Adjunct
administration turning off operations not
implemented by the switch may resolve the
problem.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

40

Resources not
available

No available internal resources to service switch or
adjunct request. System transaction capacity for
adjunct or switch is exceeded.
1. Re-engineering of adjunct services my be
required. If problem persists, escalate problem
to the next tier.

63

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
AVAILABLE

Requested ASAI capability or resource is not
available on the switch or adjunct. More than one
adjunct may be contending for the same switch
resources. Potential administration mismatch
between the resource domains administered on the
switch and those administered on the adjunct.
1. Verify that no overlapping administration of
switch resources (e.g., requesting notifications
on a single domain by multiple adjuncts or
multiple adjuncts attempting to control a single
call) exists across all adjuncts connected to the
switch. If overlaps exist, then readminister the
adjuncts to guarantee that each adjunct is
associated with a unique set of switch
resources.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-64.
Code

Page 10-195

ASAI Cause Values — Continued

Explanation

Recommendation

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
IMPLEMENTED
79

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
IMPLEMENTED

Requested service or option (or combination of
selected options) is not supported (implemented) in
switch or the adjunct.
1. Consult switch and adjunct documentation to
determine ASAI service and options supported
by both switch and adjunct. Readministration of
the switch-administered capabilities (see
Customer Optional Feature Form) or those of
the adjunct may be necessary to correct the
problem.
2. If Step 1 does not provide the set of desired
services due to deficient implementation,
escalate the problem to the next tier.

SWITCH
ERROR
CONDITIONS
87

Internal switch
audit

There is an inconsistency in switch data records.
1. There is no action needed since the switch has
corrected the data inconsistency.
2. If a number of these errors continue to occur,
then escalate to next tier.

Continued on next page
m. Certain ISDN-BRI cause codes are logged by switch software. The cause
code can be determined from the following formula:
If the error type is greater than 3968, then the ISDN-BRI cause code is
equal to the error type minus 3968. This code was sent to the endpoint by
the switch.
If the error type is less than 3968, then the ISDN-BRI cause code is equal
to the error type minus 3840. This code was sent to the switch by the
endpoint.
A description of the various ISDN-BRI cause values is contained in Table
10-65. This table also contains recommended system technician actions
associated with the cause value. Further information can also be found in

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-196

the AT&T ISDN-BRI Specification (AT&T PUB 801-802-100). In addition,
the Aux Data field of the Error Log entry contains additional diagnostic
information.
n. Error 3847 indicates that sets on the port do not support level 3
initialization. Consult the Set Service documentation
o. For the Error 2567 indicates that the version of ASAI is not supported,
check version of the software running on the ASAI or AT&T adjunct.
p. For Error 2568 indicates that the adjunct id is invalid, check the vender id
or software running on the AT&T adjunct.
Table 10-65.
Code

ISDN-BRI Cause Values

Explanation

Recommendation

CHANNEL IN
USE
1

Requested channel is in use by another station on
the BRI-PORT. (Not applicable for ASAI or AT&T
adjuncts.)
For BRI endpoints:
1. Try to originate a call to or from this port.
2. If the error persists, busy out and release the
port.
3. If the problem still persists, replace stations on
the port.
4. If the problem still persists, escalate to the next
tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-65.
Code

Page 10-197

ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued

Explanation

Recommendation

SWITCH
RESOURCES
NOT
AVAILABLE
34

No circuit or
channel
available

A resource on the switch is unavailable for a call.
For BRI endpoints: This cause value is not logged.
For ASAI or AT&T Adjuncts: This condition means
that there are no available trunks for an outgoing
call request.
1. Verify that the adjunct is administered to
support the trunk capabilities of the switch.
2. Investigate trunk group status by issuing status
trunk commands from the SAT or by requesting
a trunk group query or queries from the adjunct.
3. Perform trunk diagnostic procedures outlined in
this manual.
4. If step 3 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

42

Switch
Equipment
Congestion

Switch takes control to limit received traffic. For BRI
endpoints: This cause value is not logged. For ASAI
or AT&T Adjuncts:
1. See CallVisor protocol reference manual.
2. If step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
AVAILABLE

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-65.
Code
50

Page 10-198

ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued

Explanation
Requested
Facility Not
Subscribed

Recommendation
Requested facility is implemented, but not
administered. Potential administration problem with
endpoint or adjunct. For BRI endpoints:
1. Verify the switch administration of endpoint
using either the display station or display
data-module commands.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, refer to
the endpoint’s service manual and verify
administration on the endpoint.
3. If Step 2 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.
For ASAI adjuncts:
1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form
(administration screen) on the switch to
determine which ASAI capabilities are turned on
in the switch.
2. Verify that the adjunct is administered to
support the identical capabilities as the switch.
If there is a mismatch in the administered
capabilities, then readminister the switch and/or
the adjunct to establish a consistent set of
desired capabilities on both the switch and the
adjunct.
3. If Step 2 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.
For AT&T adjuncts:
1. Display the Customer Optional Features Form
(administration screen) on the switch to
determine if the AT&T adjunct is set enabled on
in the switch.
2. If error type 2567 or 2568, verify the AT&T
adjunct version, and readminister if needed.
3. If step 2 does not fix the problem, escalate to
the next tier of support.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-65.
Code
58

Page 10-199

ISDN-BRI Cause Values — Continued

Explanation
Bearer
Capability Not
Presently
Available

Recommendation
Requested bearer capability is implemented, but
not administered. No B-channel administered. See
recommendation 50 above.

SERVICE OR
OPTION NOT
IMPLEMENTED
65

Bearer Service
Not
Implemented

Requested service not implemented in switch or
endpoint.

69

Requested
Facility Not
Implemented

Requested service not supported in switch or
endpoint.
1. Consult switch and endpoint documentation to
determine service support.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

ADJUNCT/SWI
TCH ERROR
CONDITIONS
81

Invalid CRV

An invalid CRV was sent by the adjunct.
1. This may indicate a CRV inconsistency between
the switch and the adjunct. See the CallVisor
protocol reference manual.
2. If step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate
to the next tier.

Continued on next page

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
When inspecting errors in the system and deciding which ones to address,
always investigate errors associated with the circuit pack and port first. Clearing
these error codes first may also clear errors generated against the endpoint.
When all circuit pack and port errors have been cleared, and errors still exist
against the endpoint, always investigate errors in the order they are presented in

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-200

the table below. By clearing error codes associated with the Signaling Link
Status Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Signaling Link Status Test (#626)

X

X

ND

BRI XID Test (#628)

X

X

ND

X (a)

X (a)

ND

X (a)

ND

X (a)

ND

BRI Vendor ID Test (#631)

X (a)

ND

BRI Model/Vintage ID Test (#632)

X (a)

ND

BRI Layer 3 Query (#629)
BRI Remote Loop Back (#627)
BRI Set Audits (#630)

1.

X (a)

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Note:
a. Will execute the test port long PCSSpp command, and review the results
of the BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the repair.

Signaling Link Status Test (#626)
This test determines the current status of the signaling link. This test passes if the
link is "bound" to an endpoint and fails if the link is "not bound."
The definition of the term "bound" for a link depends upon the type of endpoint
and may depend on the successful completion of procedures at both Layers 2
and 3 of the protocol. The definition of "bound" for each type of endpoint is as
follows:
■

BRI endpoints administered for MIM (management information
messages) initialization (multipoint):
NOTE:
An MIM is a level 3 message that conveys management and
maintenance information between a communications system and a
BRI terminal.
For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is
connected at Layer 2 and the link has been associated with an endpoint,
[that is, the endpoint has completed SPID initialization (L3 established)].

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT
■

Page 10-201

ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints not administered for MIM
initialization (point-to-point):
For endpoints of this type, the signaling link is "bound" when the link is
connected at Layer 2 (L2 established).

For all endpoint types, a signaling link becomes "unbound" when it is
disconnected at Layer 2. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization, a
signaling link may also become "unbound" if a subsequent attempt to perform
SPID initialization on a "bound" link fails, (that is, wrong SPID is entered into the
endpoint by the user).
Table 10-66.
Error
Code
1139

TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to
the next tier.

1144

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in
the PPN.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-66.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-202

TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied
out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out )
for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET.
2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then
release the station via the release station
command.
a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and
BRI-SET, then release the port via the release
port PCSSpp command and run the test again.
b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and
BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the
release port PCSSpp command and run the test
again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only,
then release the circuit pack via the release port
PPCSS command and run the test again. If the
error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT,
then release the circuit pack via the release
board PPCSS command and run the test again.
NOTE:
When you release the circuit pack, you
release all ports associated with it. If
certain ports still need to be busied out,
use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
3. Make sure the terminal is connected.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-66.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-203

TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1113

FAIL

The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct or
endpoint. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM
initialization, this error indicates that the endpoint has
not been bound to a signaling link (that is, SPID
initialization has not been completed). Since the
signaling link associated with the endpoint is not
identified until SPID initialization completes, this error
does not imply that the signaling link is connected or
disconnected at Layer 2 nor does it provide the status of
TEI assignment for the endpoint. For ASAI adjuncts and
BRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization, this error
indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since
the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been
identified via administration, the link is only "unbound"
from the endpoint when it is disconnected.
1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and
refer to the associated procedures for this command
contained in the BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The signaling link is connected at Layer 2 and "bound"
to the BRI endpoint or ASAI adjunct.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-66.
Error
Code
1113

Page 10-204

TEST #626 Signaling Link Status Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The signaling link is not "bound" to the adjunct or
endpoint. For BRI endpoints supporting MIM
initialization, this error indicates that the endpoint has
not been bound to a signaling link (that is, SPID
initialization has not been completed). Since the
signaling link associated with the endpoint is not
identified until SPID initialization completes, this error
does not imply that the signaling link is connected or
disconnected at Layer 2 nor does it provide the status of
TEI assignment for the endpoint. For ASAI adjuncts and
BRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization, this error
indicates that the link is disconnected at Layer 2. Since
the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been
identified via administration, the link is only "unbound"
from the endpoint when it is disconnected.
1. Execute the status bri-port PCSSpp command and
refer to the associated procedures for this command
contained in the BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

BRI Remote Loop Back Test (#627)
This test checks the integrity of a circuit switched B-channel connection between
the switch and the endpoint.
In this test, the endpoint is put in the "maintenance busy" state to prevent the
switch from issuing calls to the endpoint during the test. An application message
containing a loop back activate request for the appropriate B-channel is sent to
the endpoint. The endpoint responds with a loop back activated response.
Maintenance then sends data to the endpoint over the B-channel under test.
Since the B-channel is looped back at the endpoint, maintenance should receive
the data that it sent. If no data is detected, the test fails. An application message
containing a loop back deactivate request is then sent to the endpoint to
terminate the remote loop back test. The endpoint responds with an MIM
message containing a loop back deactivate response. Maintenance then
releases the endpoint so that it is available to terminate calls.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-205

This test is not executed for ASAI adjuncts because adjuncts do not support
MIMs upon which this test is based.
Table 10-67.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not seize the endpoint or B-channels for test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

The endpoint’s MIMs Supported field is administered to
"no."
1. Use the change station extension command to
change parameter only if the endpoint
documentation reflects support for ISDN-BRI
Management and Maintenance Procedures.

1113

ABORT

The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint
is down.
1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear
any errors which prevent establishment of the
signaling link.
2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test
(#626) which is run as part of this command. If this
test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for
Test #626.
3. If the XID Test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to
the next tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-67.
Error
Code
1144

Page 10-206

TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in
the PPN.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-67.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-207

TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied
out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out )
for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET.
2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then
release the station via the release station
command.
a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and
BRI-SET, then release the port via release port
PCSSpp command and run the test again.
b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and
BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the
release port PCSSpp command and run the test
again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and
BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the
release board PPCSS command and run the test
again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only,
then release the circuit pack via the release port
PPCSS command and run the test again.
NOTE:
When you release the circuit pack, you
release all ports associated with it. If
certain ports still need to be busied out,
use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
3. Make sure the terminal is connected.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-67.
Error
Code
2068

Page 10-208

TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The endpoint has rejected the switch sent application
message. This indicates that the endpoint does not
support the ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance
Procedure for Loop Back Testing.
1. Use the change station extension command and
change the MIMs Supported field to "no."

2069

ABORT

The endpoint has returned an error response to the
application message sent by the switch.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

FAIL

No loop back activation or deactivation response is
received from the endpoint.
1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if
ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance
Procedures are supported. If not supported, use
change station extension command to change the
MIMs Supported? field to "no." Use the busyout
station extension and release station extension
commands to busyout and release the endpoint to
resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of
this test.
2. If the endpoint supports these procedures and the
test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is
defective and replace it.

2071

FAIL

No data is detected on Channel B1 during loop back.

2072

FAIL

No data is detected on Channel B2 during loop back.
1. Replace the endpoint and repeat test.
2. If test continues to fail, check the wiring between the
endpoint and the switch and repeat the test.
3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-67.
Error
Code

1000

Page 10-209

TEST #627 BRI Remote Loop Back — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

The endpoint has responded to the switch activate and
deactivate loop back application messages. Data has
been detected on the looped back channels.

ABORT

Could not seize the endpoint or B-channels for test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

BRI XID Test (#628)
This test checks the D-channel connection between the SPE and the endpoint or
adjunct.
In this test, a D-channel XID frame is sent to the endpoint or adjunct over the
point-to-point signaling link. The test passes if the endpoint or adjunct responds
with a Layer 2 XID-RESPONSE frame.
This test must be administered to not run in the station administration form for
ports on a TN2208.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-68.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-210

TEST #628 BRI XID
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, ATT-ADJ, LGATE-AJ, ATTE-AJ
is busy. The test cannot be executed at this time:
1. Pause momentarily (30 seconds) and re-execute at
this time.
2. If this problem persists, escalate this problem.
NOTE:
A BRI-PORT can also be busy. When using this for
BRI-PORT/ABRI-PORT tests, the words "BRI-SET,
ASAI-ADJ, ATT-ADJ, " can be changed to
"BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, ATT-ADJ."

1005

ABORT

The endpoint is not administered to support XID Testing.
1. If the endpoint documentation reflects support XID
testing, use the change station extension
command to change the XID Testing? field on the
form to "yes."

1113

ABORT

The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint
is down.
1. Use the test port PCSSpp l command to clear any
errors which prevent establishment of the signaling
link.
2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test
(#626) which is run as part of this command. If this
test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for
Test #626.
3. If the XID test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-68.
Error
Code
1141

Page 10-211

TEST #628 BRI XID — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to
the next tier.

1144

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in
the PPN.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-68.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-212

TEST #628 BRI XID — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied
out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out )
for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET.
2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then
release the station via the release station
command.
a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and
BRI-SET, then release the port via release port
PCSSpp command and run the test again.
b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and
BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the
release port PCSSpp command and run the test
again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only,
then release the circuit pack via the release port
PCSSpp command and run the test again. If the
error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT,
then release the circuit pack via the release
board PPCSS command and run the test again.
NOTE:
When you release the circuit pack, you release all
ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to
be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
3. Make sure the terminal is connected.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-68.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-213

TEST #628 BRI XID — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The XID-RESPONSE message was not received from
the endpoint.
1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if
the Layer 2 XID and XID-RESPONSE messages are
supported. If the documentation reflects no support
for these messages, change XID Testing? field to
"no" using the change station extension command.
2. If the endpoint supports these Layer 2 messages
and the test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is
defective and replace it.
3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The switch can successfully pass messages over the
D-channel to the BRI endpoint.

Continued on next page

BRI Layer 3 Query Test (#629)
This test is used to check the application layer communications between the
switch and the endpoint or adjunct.
For BRI endpoints, an application message containing the appropriate endpoint
service state is sent by the switch to the endpoint. The endpoint responds with an
acknowledgment to the application message.
For ASAI and AT&T adjuncts, this test is not executed from the administration
terminal. Rather, a query message is automatically sent by the switch every two
minutes. Failure of the switch to receive a response to a query from the adjunct is
logged in the Hardware Error Log.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-69.
Error
Code
1005

Page 10-214

TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The endpoint’s MIMs Supported? field is administered to
"no."
1. Use the change station extension command to
change the parameter only if the endpoint
documentation reflects support for ISDN-BRI
Management and Maintenance Procedures.

1113

ABORT

The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint
or adjunct is down.
1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear
any errors which prevent establishment of the
signaling link.
2. Examine the results of Test #626, which is executed
with the command. If this test aborts or fails, follow
the repair procedure for the Signaling Link Status
Test.
3. Escalate problem if BRI Layer 3 Query Test
continues to abort.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

1141

ABORT

The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Consult the repair procedure for PKT-CTRL (Packet
Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to
the next tier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-69.
Error
Code
1144

Page 10-215

TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in
the PPN.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-69.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-216

TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied
out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out )
for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET.
2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then
release the station via the release station
command.
a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and
BRI-SET, then release the port via the release
port PCSSpp command and run the test again.
b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and
BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the
release port PCSSpp command and run the test
again. If the error is present for BRI-SET only,
then release the circuit pack via the release port
PPCSS command and run the test again. If the
error is present for both BRI-BD and BRI-PORT,
then release the circuit pack via the release
board PPCSS command and run the test again.
NOTE:
When you release the circuit pack, you
release all ports associated with it. If
certain ports still need to be busied out,
use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
3. Make sure the terminal is connected.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-69.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-217

TEST #629 BRI Layer 3 Query — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2068

ABORT

The endpoint has rejected the switch sent application
message. This indicates that the endpoint does not
support the ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance
Procedure for Endpoint Service Messages.
1. Use the change station extension command and
change the MIMs Supported? field to "no."

2069

ABORT

The endpoint has returned an error response to the
switch sent application message.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

FAIL

No response is received from the endpoint or the
adjunct. For BRI endpoints:
1. Consult the endpoint documentation to determine if
ISDN-BRI Management and Maintenance
Procedures are supported. If not supported, use the
change station extension command to change the
"MIMs Supported?" field to "no." Use the busyout
station extension and release station extension
commands to busyout and release the endpoint to
resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of
this test.
2. If the endpoint supports these procedures and the
test continues to fail, assume the endpoint is
defective and replace it.

PASS

The endpoint has successfully responded to the
switch’s application message.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-218

BRI Set Audits Test (#630)
This is a series of two tests which are classified as audits. The switch sends
messages to the BRI endpoint to perform the following tests:
■

Ringer Audit - This audit ensures that both the switch and the endpoint
agree as to the current state of the endpoint’s ringer.

■

Lamps Audit - This audit ensures that both the switch and the endpoint
agree as to the current state of the endpoint’s lamps.

■

Call Activity Audit - This audit ensures that the state of calls is consistent
between the switch and the endpoint.

This test is not executed for ASAI or AT&T adjunct because adjuncts do not
employ ringers or lamps, or establish calls on the B-channels associated with the
BRI interface.
Table 10-70.
Error
Code
1113

TEST #630 BRI Set Audits
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The signaling link between the switch and the endpoint
is down.
1. Use the test port PCSSpp long command to clear
any errors which prevent establishment of the
signaling link.
2. Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test
(#626) which is run as part of this command. If this
test aborts or fails, follow the repair procedure for
Test #626.
3. If the BRI Set Audits test continues to abort, escalate
the problem.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the port network is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-70.
Error
Code
1141

Page 10-219

TEST #630 BRI Set Audits — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The PKT-CTRL is out-of-service.
1. Refer to PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
2. If Step 1 does not resolve the problem, escalate to
the next tier.

1144

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is out-of-service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus in
the PPN.
2. After completing Step 1, execute the test port long
PCSSpp command, and review the results of the
BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test to verify the
repair.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Table 10-70.
Error
Code
1187

Page 10-220

TEST #630 BRI Set Audits — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The circuit pack, port or station may have been busied
out by a technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (busied out )
for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, or BRI-SET.
2. If this error type is present for BRI-SET only, then
release the station via the release station
command.
a. If this error type is present for BRI-PORT and
BRI-SET, then release the port via the release
port PCSSpp command and run the test again.
b. If the error is present for BRI-BD, BRI-PORT, and
BRI-SET, then release the circuit pack via the
release port PCSSpp command and run the test
again. If the error is present for both BRI-BD and
BRI-PORT, then release the circuit pack via the
release board PPCSS command and run the test
again.
NOTE:
When you release the circuit pack, you release all
ports associated with it. If certain ports still need to
be busied out, use the release port PCSSpp
command to busy them out.
3. Make sure the terminal is connected.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-221

SPID Facility Test
This test is used to verify the wiring and operation of the signaling link between
the switch and a endpoint or adjunct on a BRI interface. This test is not
executed from the administration terminal, but rather is executed by using a
BRI test set equipped with a display. The test set may replace the BRI set,
ASAI or AT&T adjunct under test by plugging it into the same jack or by bridging
it onto the wiring at some point between the switch and the endpoint (or adjunct),
thereby creating a pseudo-BRI multipoint configuration.
When plugged into the port in this manner, the test set establishes a signaling
link connection with the switch and attempts to complete SPID initialization by
using the Service SPID administered for the system (see the System
Maintenance Administration Form). If the test set displays the correct
administered port address for the endpoint or adjunct under test, the test passes
(see Service SPID Display which follows). If after one-minute nothing is displayed
on the test set, the test fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-222

SPID Facility Test
Test
Result

Description / Recommendation

FAIL

No response is received from the endpoint.
1. Check the physical wiring between the switch and the
endpoint or adjunct.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate to the next tier.

FAIL

Display does not match administered port address for the
endpoint or adjunct.
1. Change station administration for endpoint or adjunct to
match displayed port address.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Display matches administered port address for the endpoint or
adjunct.
For BRI endpoints:
1. Verify that the SPID values administered in the switch and
the endpoint are consistent.
2. If the SPID values are correct, replace the endpoint.
3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.
For ASAI adjuncts:
1. Verify that the TEI values administered in the switch and the
adjunct are consistent.
2. If the TEI values are correct, consult the recommended
repair procedures of the manufacturer for the adjunct.
3. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

The abbreviations used in (Service SPID Display) have the following meanings:

P

port network (1,2, ...)

C

Carrier (A,B,C, ...)

SS

Slot (01, 02, ...)

pp

port (01-12)

ext

extension one and two (one through 99999)

SPID

service order profile identifier

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT

Page 10-223

Restricted Service
starting display column
1
PCSSpp

8
-

ext1

14
-

SPID111111

25
-

ext2

31
-

SPID222222

Bound to First Endpoint Translation
starting display column
1
PCSSpp

8
*

ext1

14
*

SPID111111

25
-

ext2

31
-

SPID222222

Bound to Second Endpoint Translation
starting display column
1
PCSSpp

8
-

ext1

14
-

SPID111111

25
*

ext2

31
*

SPID222222

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-224

CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
CABINET
CABINET

1.
2.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR
MINOR

2

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run1

Full Name of MO

test environment P

Cabinet Sensors

test environment P

Cabinet Sensors

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the
Alarm or Error Log.
If a minor alarm occurs for a variable speed fan, the fan should be checked for a dirty
filter. If the filter is not dirty, the fan should be replaced.

NOTE:
CABINET is valid only in a multicarrier cabinet system. For information
concerning single-carrier cabinet systems, refer to the DC-POWER
(Single-Carrier Cabinet Power) Maintenance documentation.
Each multicarrier cabinet is equipped either with six non-variable speed fans or
with six variable speed fans.
Non-Variable Speed (Standard) Fan Option. A non-variable speed (standard)
fan is indicated by one of the following Product Codes: "ED67077 G1," "ED67077
G2," or "ED67077 G3." Multicarrier cabinets with non-variable speed fans contain
a fan speed control unit known as the AHD1 circuit pack. This circuit pack is
designed to keep the temperature within the cabinet below 650 C (1490 F). Air is
drawn in by the three fans located in the front of the cabinet. The air is channeled
upwards through a filter, then through carriers A, B, and C and out the top of the
cabinet. Air is drawn in by the three fans located in the back of the cabinet as
well. The air is channeled down through a filter, then through carriers D and E
and out the bottom of the cabinet. The AHD1 circuit pack monitors five of the six
temperature sensors located throughout the multicarrier cabinet, and it uses the
output of these sensors to adjust fan speed and to report air flow problems. The
Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the Duplication
Interface circuit pack, a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, and the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system directly monitor
the sixth sensor (S1) to report temperature problems. The Cabinet Sensors
maintenance object represents the air flow and temperature problems reported
by the AHD1 circuit pack and by the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in the
multicarrier cabinet systems.
The fans and the AHD1 circuit pack obtain their power from the -48 volt DC
power supply of the 631 DB DC power unit in the A carrier. In a PPN cabinet for a
High or Critical Reliability system, the 631 DB DC power unit in the B carrier can
also provide power to the fans. The power goes from the power unit(s) to the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-225

current limiter card (982LS), over a wiring harness from the A carrier to the back
of the fan unit, through the AHD1 circuit pack, and then to the fans. The front fans
are wired in parallel with a rear fan. The repair scenarios that follow rely on the
technician’s ability to distinguish between high fan speed and low fan speed. The
only way to distinguish between the fan speeds is by the sound of the fans. When
operating at high speed, the fans make a higher pitched sound than when they
run at low speed. The technician probably knows from prior experience what the
fans sound like at low speed as well as at high speed.
Figure 10-10 shows a multicarrier cabinet system and the location of the
temperature sensors S1 through S4 (there are actually two S3 sensors and two
S4 sensors) as well as the location of the fans, the AHD1 circuit pack, and the
filters. The figure also shows other environment-related components of a
multicarrier cabinet system and can be ignored for this section on Cabinet
Sensors.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-226

S2

S3

S1
A

AC

631

CARRIER C

DA

I

631

R

DB

AC
F2

F3
F
L
CARRIER B

631
DA

631
F1

O

631

W

DB

631

CARRIER A

DA

DB

AC
FILTER
A
H

S4

S4

FANS -3 FRONT
3 BACK

D
1
FILTER

AC

631

CARRIER D

DA

A

631

I

DB

R

F5

AC
F4

F
631

CARRIER E

DA

L

631

O

DB

W
DC
FUSE F1-F7
F7

BATTERY &
BATTERY

DC

CHARGER

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

Figure 10-10.

AC

RING

ON BACK OF

GENERATOR

PDU, FUSE

F6

F9 ON FRONT

DIST.
S3

OF PDU

F9

Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CABINET)
[Non-Variable Speed Fan Option]

Sensor S1 informs the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the Duplication Interface
circuit pack, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack when the temperature at the
top of the cabinet reaches 650 C (1490 F). Sensor S2 is not monitored by any
circuit pack. However, when the temperature at the top of the cabinet reaches
700 C (1580 F), this sensor causes the Power Distribution Unit to shut down
power to the entire cabinet. At this point, Emergency Transfer is invoked, and no
other system functions are provided.
The S3 and S4 sensors constantly report the temperature at the air exhaust in the
cabinet (top and bottom S3 sensors) and at the air intake (S4 sensors). The
AHD1 circuit pack uses this information to determine fan speed and air flow

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-227

alarm state. If there is at least a 15 0C (27 0F) air temperature difference between
the air exhaust and air intake, and if the air exhaust temperature is greater than
50 0C (122 0F), all the fans are turned up to high speed. If this condition exists,
the AHD1 circuit pack reports an air flow problem which results in a Minor alarm
against the Cabinet Sensors.
Variable Speed Fan Option. A variable speed fan is indicated by the Product
Code "ED67077 G‘x,"’ where ‘x’ is ‘4’ or a number greater than ‘4.’ A variable
speed fan contains Thermal Speed Control and an alarm circuit. As a result, the
AHD1 circuit pack is not required in this type of fan.
A variable speed fan has two connectors: a two pin connector for the -48 volt
input power for backward compatibility, and the five pin Molex connector for
speed control and alarm circuitry. The -48 volt power circuitry is isolated from the
speed control and the alarm circuitry.
An alarm lead from all six variable speed fans is tied to a single lead leading to
the processor circuit pack. Three fans on the front of the system are connected to
an S3 sensor, which monitors the exhaust air temperature above carrier position
"C." Three fans on the back of the system are connected to another S3 sensor,
which monitors the exhaust air in the power distribution unit. The speed of the
variable speed fans is determined by the temperature detected by the S3
sensors. Thus, the fans’ speed changes continuously according to the
temperature of the exhaust air. If the fan speed drops below the preset limit, or if
the fan fails, the fan alarm circuit reports an air flow problem, which results in a
minor alarm.
A multicarrier cabinet containing variable speed fans is presented in Figure
10-11. Note that the two S4 sensors that are included with non-variable speed
fans are not required with variable speed fans.
NOTE:
The new variable speed fans are backward compatible to the carriers for
the non-variable speed fans. However, the carriers for the variable speed
fans are not backward compatible to cabinets configured for the carriers
for the non-variable speed fans. Finally, the carriers for the non-variable
speed fans are not forward compatible to cabinets configured for the
carriers for variable speed fans.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-228

S2

S3

S1
A

AC

631

CARRIER C

DA

I

631

R

DB

AC
F2

F3
F
L
CARRIER B

631
DA

631
F1

O

631

W

DB

631

CARRIER A

DA

DB

AC
FILTER
A
H

S4

S4

FANS -3 FRONT
3 BACK

D
1
FILTER

AC

631

CARRIER D

DA

A

631

I

DB

R

F5

AC
F4

F
631

CARRIER E

DA

L

631

O

DB

W
DC
FUSE F1-F7
F7

BATTERY &
BATTERY

DC

CHARGER

AC

RING

ON BACK OF

GENERATOR

PDU, FUSE

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

Figure 10-11.

F6

F9 ON FRONT

DIST.
S3

OF PDU

F9

Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CABINET)
[Variable Speed Fan Option]

Replacement Procedures for AHD1 Fan Speed
Controller Circuit Packs and Fans
AHD1 Fan Speed Controller Circuit Pack
Replacement Procedure
NOTE:
The procedures in this section pertain only to non-variable speed
(standard) fans.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-229

1. Refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", for details on
removing power from the system.
2. Remove the fan assembly cover by pulling the cover outward.
3. Loosen and remove the retaining screw nearest the power plug on the
front fan located to the extreme left.
4. Disconnect the power plug from the fan.
5. Loosen and remove the other retaining screw on the fan.
6. Remove the fan from the fan assembly.

! CAUTION:
DO NOT TOUCH! Resistors on the circuit pack are hot.
7. Lift the latch on the AHD1 fan speed controller circuit pack.
8. Using the latch as a handle, pull the circuit pack up and out of its holder.
9. Insert a replacement AHD1 circuit pack, and push down on the latch until
the latch snaps in place.
10. Position the fan, and reconnect the fan power plug.
11. Insert and tighten the retaining screws.
12. Replace the fan assembly cover.
13. Refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures", for details on
restoring power to the switch.

Fan Replacement Procedure
NOTE:
The procedures in this section pertain to both non-variable speed
(standard) fans and variable speed fans.
First, determine which fans are defective:
NOTE:
The following instructions are for servicing a Medium Cabinet. For a Small
Cabinet (only two fans in the rear), follow Step 2A below, but start from the
rear of the cabinet.
1. If any fan is not rotating, a more detailed inspection is required to
determine why the fan has stopped operating. The fact that a fan is not
spinning is not always proof that it is damaged. Since each front fan is
electrically in parallel with a rear fan, an internal short circuit in a front fan
prevents power from reaching the rear fan (and vice versa).
Remove the fan assembly cover by pulling the cover outward. Remove the
power connector from each inoperative front fan.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-230

2. The following must be done to determine if the front fan or the rear fan has
failed:
a. Test the front fan:
Measure the input impedance between the (+) and (-) input
terminals of the front fan with an ohmmeter. IMPORTANT: Attach
the "common" lead of the ohmmeter to the fan’s (-) input
terminal and the "ohms" or "+" lead of the ohmmeter to the
fan’s (+) input terminal.
Follow the guidelines in the table below:

Input Impedance

Fan Analysis

Action

Next Step

2.0M < ohms < 20M

Good

None

Go to Step 2B

ohms < 2.0M

Short Circuit

Replace

Go to Step 3

ohms > 20M

Open Circuit

Replace

Go to Step 3

b. Test the "paired" rear fan:
From the front of the cabinet, use a voltmeter to measure the DC
voltage across the two female contact pins in the connector
housing of the fan wire harness removed from the inoperative front
fan in Step 1. (This voltage is the same voltage seen across the
input terminals of the paired fan in the rear of the assembly.)
Follow the guidelines in the table below:

Input
Impedance

Fan Analysis

Action

VDC > 25V

Good

(AHD1 or Front Fan failed)

VDC < 25V

Short Circuit

Replace

Next Step

Go to Step 3

3. To replace a fan located at the front of the switch cabinet, remove the fan
assembly cover by pulling the cover outward. To replace a fan located at
the rear of the switch cabinet, use a No. 10 slot screwdriver or 5/16-inch
(8mm) wrench and remove the panel covering the fan assembly.
4. Loosen and remove the retaining screw nearest the power plug on the
defective fan.

! DANGER:
48-volt power is present on the fan plug.
5. Disconnect the power plug from the defective fan.
6. Loosen and remove the other retaining screw on the fan.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-231

7. Remove the fan from the fan assembly.
8. Position the replacement fan and reconnect the fan power plug.
9. Insert and tighten the retaining screws.
10. Replace the fan assembly cover or panel.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Cabinet Sensors Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1

Any

Cabinet
Temperature
Query Test (#122)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 3

257

Any

Cabinet
Temperature
Query Test (#122)

MAJOR

ON

test environment P sh r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-232

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query
Test (#5) (a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier E)
(#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier D)
(#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier A)
(#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier B)
(#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier C)
(#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test
(#124) (d)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Temperature Query Test
(#122)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test
(#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator
Initialization Test (#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query
Test (#118) (f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-233

b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC-Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for AC- and DC-Powered
Systems) Maintenance documentation for a description of this test.
d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test. This test shows up in the test sequence only if
there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Cabinet Temperature Query Test [for
Non-Variable Speed Fans] (#122)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability
system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN for the status of the
cabinet sensors in the cabinet that contains non-variable speed fans.
NOTE:
The descriptions for Error Codes 1 and 2 (FAIL) in the following table are
reversed for Generic 1 systems that use a TN731B maintenance circuit
pack . That is, Error Code 1 indicates an "over temperature" problem while
Error Code 2 indicates and "air flow" problem. If you are servicing a Generic
1 system, be sure to follow the proper service strategy.
Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans]
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-234

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000,
check for system powering problems with the A
carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all
AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier
cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a
single-carrier cabinet system. Then, repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a Error Code
2000, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication
Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN,
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a
standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit
pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to ABORT with a Error Code
2000, escalate the problem.

2029

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-235

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The AHD1 circuit pack has reported an air flow problem.
The temperature difference between the air intake and
the air exhaust is at least 15 0 C (27 0 F) and the absolute
temperature at the top of the cabinet is at least 500 C
(122 0F) (referred to as the 150 C/500 C criteria). The
fans should be running at high speed.
1. If none of the fans are running, then:
a. Look for and resolve all alarms against the
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit).
b. Verify -48 volt DC power is available to the fan
units. Check the fan unit wiring harness
connector. Check that there is 48 volt DC
between pins 3, 9, 11 and 2, 8, 10.
■

If there is -48 volt DC power at the connector,
there should be power to the fans. If the fans are
not running, replace the AHD1. If the fans still do
not run, escalate the problem.

■

If there is no -48 volt DC power at the connector,
then the current limiter card (982LS) is probably
defective. Replace the current limiter card. If the
fans still do not run, escalate the problem.

2. If only a few of the fans are not running, replace the
defective fans.
3. If all the fans can be started, wait five minutes and
rerun the test. If the test fails again, proceed to Step
4 or 5 as applicable.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-236

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
4. If the fans are not at high speed, measure the
cabinet temperature at the air intake and the air
exhaust at the top of the cabinet.
a. If the 150 C/500 C criteria is met, there is a
problem with either the AHD1 circuit pack or the
fans that is preventing the fans from operating at
high speed. Replace the AHD1 circuit pack
and/or the fans. If this succeeds in getting the
fans to run at high speed, wait five minutes to
give the cabinet time to cool down and, rerun the
test. If the problem persists, go to step 5.
b. If the 150 C/500 C criteria is not met, the
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor),
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or
the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack is
incorrectly reporting this condition. Look for and
resolve all errors on these maintenance objects
first, then rerun the test. If the test still fails,
escalate the problem.
5. If the fans are running at the high speed, check the
items on list that follows. Any on of the items could
be restricting or redirecting the flow of air within the
cabinet.
a. Check both filters. If a filter is dirty or clogged it
should be cleaned or replaced. The filters can
either be washed with soap and water or
vacuumed.
b. Make sure there is nothing (other than circuit
packs) in the carrier slots that could be restricting
the air flow.
c. Make sure there are no missing (blank) circuit
pack or carrier faceplates. Install and/or replace
them as necessary.
d. Make sure the cabinet door is properly closed.
The door must be closed for the fans to be able to
properly cool the cabinet. Wait five minutes to
give the fans a chance to cool the cabinet. Rerun
the test. If the tests still fails, proceed to Step 6.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-237

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
1

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
6. At this point, there should be nothing impeding the
air flow, and the fans should be running at high
speed. Check the temperatures for the 150 C/500 C
criteria.
a. If the 150 C/500 C criteria exists, a temperature
problem exists, and the fans (at high speed)
should cool down the switch. Wait five minutes
and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the ambient
room temperature is probably too high, and the
room should be cooled.
b. If the 150 C/500 C criteria does not exist, the
AHD1 circuit pack, the fans, or the S3 or S4
sensors are defective. Replace these items one
at a time (in the order listed). Rerun the test
between each replacement. Failures can occur
on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, the
Duplication Interface, and the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack that are not detected by the
respective maintenance, but that cause many, if
not all, environment tests to fail. If many
environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit
pack, depending on the system configuration,
should be replaced and the test rerun. If this does
not clear the problem, follow normal escalation
procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-238

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
2

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT
(Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT
(Maintenance) circuit pack has reported a temperature
problem because the S1 sensor has detected a
temperature of at least 650 C (1490 F). The entire
cabinet is in danger of being powered down if the
temperature reaches 70 0C (1580 F).
1. If none of the fans are running:
a. Look for and resolve all alarms against the
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit).
b. Verify that 48 volt DC is available to the fan units.
Check the fan unit wiring harness connector.
Verify that there is 48 volt DC between pins (3, 9,
11 and 2, 8, 10).
■

If there is 48 volt DC at the connector, there
should be power to the fans. If the fans are not
running, replace the AHD1. If the fans still do not
run, follow normal escalation procedures.

■

If there is not 48 volt DC at the connector, the
current limiter card (982LS) is probably defective.
Replace the current limiter card. If the fans still do
not run, escalate the problem.

2. If only a few of the fans are not running, replace the
defective fans.
3. If all the fans can be started, wait five minutes, and
rerun the test.If the test fails again, proceed to Step

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors)

Page 10-239

Table 10-71. TEST #122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable
Speed Fans] — Continued
Error
Code
2

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
4. Check the temperature at the top of the cabinet. If
the temperature is at least 650 C (1490 F), the
ambient room temperature is too high, and the fans
cannot cool the system. Unless the room
temperature is reduced, the system is going to shut
down soon. If the temperature is less than 650 C,
then:
a. The PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor),
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or
the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may
be incorrectly reporting this condition. First, look
for and resolve all errors on these MOs, then
rerun the test. If this test fails again, return to Step
1. If there are no errors, continue.
b. The sensor S1 may be incorrectly reporting the
temperature at the top of the cabinet. Replace
sensor S1, and rerun the test. If the test still fails,
escalate the problem.

3

FAIL

The AHD1 circuit pack has reported both air flow and
temperature problems. Resolve the airflow error first,
then, correct the temperature error as described
previously.

PASS

The AHD1 circuit pack has not reported any
temperature or air flow problems. The temperatures at
the air exhaust at the top of the cabinet and the air
intake at the bottom of the cabinet can be measured
and the results compared against the criteria described
previously. If a problem has been reported, troubleshoot
this problem by using the procedures for the "FAIL"
cases described previously.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity)

Page 10-240

CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
CAP-MEM

1.

Alarm Level
MINOR/
WARNING1

Initial Command to
Run
test card-mem long

Full Name of MO
Memory Card Capacity

The WARNING alarm is generated when the alarm is downgraded by using the set option
command.

Memory Card Capacity tracks the percentage of used translation storage space
on the memory card. Whenever translation space usage on the memory card
reaches 98% of capacity, an alarm is generated. This alarm serves to inform the
user that a larger flash card may be required for the system.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-72. Memory Card Capacity Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

1 (a)

112

Associated Test
Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014)

Alarm Level
MINOR/
WARNING (b)

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

OFF

test card-mem long

Notes:
a. The memory card translation storage space is at least or more than 98%
full.
b. This alarm has been downgraded by the set option command.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table that follows when you
are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
"Memory Card Capacity Test," for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence. The "Memory Card Capacity Test" can
be initiated via either the test card-mem long command or after a save
translation command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity)

Page 10-241

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Match Test (#697) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (b)

X

ND

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (b)

X

ND

Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Maintenance documentation for
a description of this test.
b. Refer to CARD-MEM (Memory Card) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.

Memory Card Capacity Test (#1014)
This test is a nondestructive test. The purpose of the test is to verify that the
percentage of translation storage space used in the memory card is less than
98%.
This test can be initiated through a system technician demanded test card-mem
long command, or it can be executed as part of a maintenance test sequence
after the save translation operation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CAP-MEM (Memory Card Capacity)

Page 10-242

Table 10-73. TEST #1014 Memory Card Capacity Test
Error
Code
112

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Memory Card Translation storage is at least 98% full.
1. Inform the user that it may be necessary to upgrade to a larger flash
card.
2. Replace the memory card with a larger one, or downgrade the alarm to
WARNING by using the set option command.
3. Rerun the test.

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for repairing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem long command.

2110

ABORT

No Memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

PASS

The Memory Card Translation storage is less than 98% full.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-243

CARD-MEM (Memory Card)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

CARD-MEM

MAJOR1

CARD-MEM

MINOR

test card-mem long

Memory Card

CARD-MEM

WARNING

test card-mem sh

Memory Card

1.

Memory Card

The "MAJOR" alarm occurs only at power-up time or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5
when the switch cannot load all translations from the memory card.

A memory card contains a set of flash EPROM memory devices. The data can be
stored in a memory card and can remain nonvolatile, even when the power is off.
The memory card is installed into the TN777B NETCON circuit pack to save the
translations, announcements, and core dumps. During the system reboot or a
system power down condition, the in-core system maintenance hardware error
logs are temporarily saved in the memory card before the system goes down.
When the system is restarted, the error logs file is read back from the memory
card.
The Hard Patch feature also uses the memory card as temporary storage when
LMM applies an update file to the in-core system software. The system software
is stored in the "flash" section of main memory. The memory card used for saving
translations doesn’t contain a copy of the system software.
The recommended size of a memory card for each configuration is described in
the following table.
Memory Card Size

Usage

File Names

1 Megabyte

Without Announcements

translation

4 Megabyte

With Announcements

translation announcements

10 Megabyte

With Announcements

translation announcements

10 Megabyte

Maintenance

translation announcements core_dump

10 Megabyte

System Upgrade

system_software

Customers can have either 1 MB, 4 MB, or 10 MB memory cards for the normal
operations. 10 MB memory cards are also used for maintenance and software
upgrades. The software upgrade memory card cannot be used for saving
translations.
Always use 4 MB memory Cards, 10 MB memory cards should only be used
when a 4MB card gives an error in the CAP-MEM Maintenance Object Test
#1014 (Memory Card Capacity Test).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-244

A memory card has a write-protection switch along its edge. If the
write-protection switch is enabled, the memory card cannot be written to.
The 12 volt power supply unit located in TN777B NETCON circuit pack supports
the erase and write operations of flash memory devices in the TN786B or TN790
Processor circuit pack. The unit also supports the memory card inserted in the
TN777B NETCON circuit pack. If the 12 volt power supply unit cannot be turned
on to supply 12 volts, all erase and write operations fail. Refer to 12V-PWR (12
volt power supply) Maintenance documentation for a detailed description.
To write data (for example, translations) onto a memory card, the system
software first erases the memory card and then writes the data. An erased bit can
be written again, but a written bit cannot be changed or written again until after
the next erasure. Software erase and write operations on a memory card take
longer as the card usage increases. A memory card that cannot be erased or
written to by software should be replaced.

Removing A Memory Card From The Slot
A memory card can be removed from the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit
pack only when the fourth yellow LED with a label "card-in-use" is not glowing.
Otherwise, the memory card operation might be interrupted abnormally, and the
files stored in the memory card may become corrupted.

Resolving an Alarm Raised Against a Memory
Card
The list that follows discusses the procedures for resolving an alarm that is raised
against a memory card:
1. Remove the inserted memory card from the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack while the "card-in-use" amber LED on TN777B is not glowing.
2. Insert the new formatted memory card firmly into the slot at the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack.
3. Enter the test card-mem command to verify the new memory card.
4. If the alarm cannot be resolved by replacing the memory card, do the
following:
a. Remove the memory card from the TN777B NETCON circuit pack.
b. Replace the TN777B NETCON circuit pack in the appropriate
control carrier. Since the TN777B is in the SPE control complex,
follow the standard procedures for replacing an SPE circuit pack.
c. Insert the memory card back into the slot at the TN777B circuit
pack.
d. Enter the test network-control [long] command to verify the new
TN777B and the memory card.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-245

5. Once the alarm is resolved, enter the save translation command to store
the current system translations to the memory card.
6. If applicable, enter the save announcements command to store the
current announcements to the memory card.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-74. Mrmory Card Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test card-mem

1(a)

Memory Card Insertion
Test (#695)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem

257(b)

Memory Card Format and
Read Test (#696)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem

Memory Card Match and
Read Test (#697)

WARNING

OFF

test card-mem

Memory Card
Write-Protected Test
(#698)

WARNING

OFF

test card-mem

0

0

Associated Test

513(c)

Any

769(d)

1025(e)

104
105
106
107
108

Memory Card Dir.
Recovery Test (#699)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem

1281(f)

Any

Memory Card Translation
Data Integrity Test (#694)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem long

1537(g)

104
105
106
107
108

Memory Card
Erase/Write/Read Test
(#693)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem long

3329(h)

any

None

MINOR/
MAJOR

OFF

3841(i)

Any

Save Translation

MINOR

OFF

save translation

3843(j)

Any

Save Translation

MINOR

OFF

save translation

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-246

Notes:
a. System detects that no memory card is inserted in the slot at the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack. If a memory card is in place, the memory card may
have a bad physical connection.
b. System software cannot recognize the inserted memory card because the
inserted memory card is not formatted or the directories in the memory
card are corrupted. The system cannot use this memory card. The
memory card must be replaced with a good memory card.
c. The inserted memory card does not have enough storage space to
support system operations, such as saving translations and, if applicable,
announcements; or, the memory card is a system-upgrade memory card
that cannot be used for saving translations. This hardware error raises a
WARNING/OFF_BOARD alarm. The memory card should be replaced with
one of the recommended size.
The "Aux Data" field contains the following error codes:
■

101: Inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card

■

102: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement
file is available in the memory card

■

103: The inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card,
and, while the announcement feature is in use, no announcement
file is available in the memory card.

■

116: The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the
system configuration.

■

118: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement
file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted
memory card doesn’t match the system configuration.

■

132: System translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory
card reserved storage space.

■

134: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement
file is available in the memory card, and system translation reaches
a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space.

■

148: The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the
system configuration, and system translation reaches a 98%
capacity of the memory card reserved storage space.

■

150: While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement
file is available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted
memory card doesn’t match the system configuration. Also, the
system translation reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card
reserved storage space.

d. The write-protection switch of the memory card is in the "protected"
position. A write-protected memory card can not be erased or written.
Before entering the test command to resolve the alarm, follow the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-247

standard procedure for taking the memory card out of the slot. Then,
change the "write-protection" switch to the "not-protected" position. Finally,
insert the memory card back into the slot.
e. The memory card has been detected with a broken directory. A
MINOR/OFF_BOARD alarm is raised when maintenance cannot restore
the broken directory. The memory card must be replaced before the test
to resolve the alarm is run.
The "Aux Data" field contains the following error codes:
■

104: Directories on the memory card are corrupted and cannot be
recovered.

■

105: "0" cannot be written into the memory card before an erase
operation.

■

106: Memory card cannot be erased.

■

107: Data cannot be written into a memory card after an erasure.

■

108: 12 volt power supply for directory recovery can’t be turned on.
The 12 volt power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may be
defective. Follow the standard procedure to replace the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack.

f. The translations file stored in the memory card is corrupted with a
checksum error during the read operation. The memory card can no
longer hold the written data. Enter the save translation command to
restore the translations. Then, run the test command to clear the alarm. If
the error occurs repeatedly, replace the memory card.
g. The maintenance test "Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test" failed. Enter
the status card-mem command to verify that a user’s memory card is
inserted and that the write-protection switch of the memory card is off.
Rerun the test card-mem command to verify that the 12 volt power supply
is functional.
Enter the test card-mem long command again to verify the test result of
the "Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test." If the test still fails, the memory
card should be replaced. After the new memory card is inserted, enter the
test card-mem long command again to resolve the alarm.
The "Aux Data" field contains the same error codes as for Error Type
"1025." See Note (e).
h. There was an error while translations were being loaded. The relevant
alarm occurs at power-up or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5 if the switch
cannot load translations.
In a standard system, the alarm invokes Emergency Transfer. The repair
procedure for a standard system is provided in the list that follows:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-248

NOTE:
Follow this procedure only if there are no other memory card errors
or alarms. If such errors or alarms exist, resolve them before trying to
resolve this alarm.
1. After you resolve all other memory card problems, issue the reset
system 3 command.
2. After the system is restarted, issue the status card-mem
command.
3. If the "translation" is not present, insert a backup memory card and
then issue the reset system 3 command.
NOTE:
In a High or Critical Reliability System where the problem is in the
Standby SPE, use the procedure above substituting reset
spe-standby 3 and status card-mem a/b for the Standby SPE.
i. The "save translation" operation failed. The reasons for failure are
described in the "Aux Data" field and include the following:
Aux
Data

Description

1

Directory file on the memory card failed the checksum test

2

NETCON is not a TN777B circuit pack

3

Too many commands are running

4

Command has been aborted

5

Command has collided with a current command

6

Software controller is idle

7

Memory card has been erased

8

Only one good directory is on the card

9

All directories are corrupted, and the memory card needs reformatting

10

Hard patch file is full

11

Hardware fault: data can’t be written into the memory card

12

Software error: passed parameters were out of range

13

Command has been aborted

14

Magic number is illegal

15

Driver was trapped when reading the memory card

16

No memory card is inserted

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-249

17

Second directory in the memory card could not be found

18

File in the memory card is not available

19

Memory card does not match the system usage

20

Memory card is too small for the system usage

21

Broken directory couldn’t be recovered

22

System upgrade card is inserted

23

Illegal write is requested

24

Generic software failure

25

Driver timed out

26

Driver is unable to program "O’s" in the memory card

27

Memory card can’t be erased

28

Memory card is write-protected

29

12 volt power supply could not be turned on

109

Standby SPE does not respond to the request from the Active SPE

124

Can’t access Standby SPE for saving translation

Continued on next page
A MINOR/OFF_BOARD alarm is raised when two consecutive "save
translation" operations fail. The alarm is resolved only when the translation
is saved onto the memory card successfully.
j. The save translations failure is due to other hardware failures. Enter the
test card-mem long command and resolve other card-mem failures first.
After the all test card-mem pass message is received, use the save
translation command to resolve this error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-250

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Memory Card Insertion Test for example, you
may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Match Test (#697)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test
(#699)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity
Test (#694)

X

ND

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

Reset Board
Sequence

D/ND1

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Note:
a. Refer to 12V-PWR (12 Volt Power Supply) Maintenance documentation for
a description of this test.

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693)
The purpose of this test, which is nondestructive, is to verify the erase, write, and
read operations. The test erases the backup copy of the translation file stored in
the memory card, and it verifies that the erase operation works. The test then
writes the primary copy of the translation file from the same memory card to the
erased flash segment, and it verifies that the translation file is written
successfully.
This test can be initiated through a system technician demanded test card-mem
long command, or it can be executed as part of a maintenance test sequence
when the save translation and save announcements operations fail. The test
and relevant applications (for example, saving translations, saving
announcements) cannot be executed at the same time.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-251

Table 10-75. TEST #693 Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test
Error
Code
1192

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Applications are accessing the memory card.
1. Wait 10 minutes for the applications to complete.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

2110

ABORT

No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2111

ABORT

Inserted memory card cannot be recognized.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2112

ABORT

Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade"
memory card.
1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2115

ABORT

The memory card is write-protected.
1. Take the memory card out, and change the "write-protection" switch to
the "not-protected" position.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2113

ABORT

The inserted memory card has only one directory file.
1. Enter the test card-mem command, and verify that the "Memory Card
Directory Recovery Test" (#699) passes. If the directory file cannot be
recovered, replace the memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-252

Table 10-75. TEST #693 Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test — Continued
Error
Code
2117

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
No translation file has been saved onto the memory card.
1. Enter the save translation command, and verify that the translations are
saved onto the memory card successfully.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

104

FAIL

Directories on the memory card are corrupted and cannot be recovered.

105

FAIL

"0" cannot be written into memory before an erase operation.

106

FAIL

Memory card cannot be erased.

107

FAIL

Data cannot be written onto a memory card after an erasure.
1. Replace the memory card and re-run the test.

108

FAIL

12 volt power supply for the Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test can’t be
turned on. The 12 volt power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may
be defective.
1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify the result of Test 701
for the 12 Volt Power Supply.
2. If Test 701 fails, follow the Standard Repair Procedure to replace the
TN777B NETCON circuit pack with a new TN777B circuit pack.
3. Retry the command a 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test
(#694)
This test, which is nondestructive, verifies the integrity of the translation file stored
in the memory card by reading (without any PREC updates) the translation file
from the memory card and by then performing a checksum error checking. The
calculated checksum value is compared with the recorded checksum value in
the translation file. If these two values are different, this indicates that the
translation file is corrupted.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-253

Table 10-76. TEST #694 Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

2110

ABORT

No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2111

ABORT

Inserted memory card cannot be recognized.
1. Insert a new formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2112

ABORT

Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade"
memory card.
1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

A checksum error is detected in the translation file that is stored in the
inserted memory card.
1. Enter the save translation command, and verify that translations can
be successfully saved onto the memory card.
2. Rerun the test.
3. If the test fails again, replace the memory card, and repeat Steps 1
and 2.

PASS

No checksum error is found in the translation file.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-254

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695)
This test, which is nondestructive, verifies whether a memory card is inserted into
the memory card slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit pack and also whether the
system can detect its existence.
Table 10-77. TEST #695 Memory Card Insertion Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

FAIL

No memory card is inserted in the TN777B NETCON circuit pack, or the
inserted memory card has a bad connection.
1. Insert a memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON circuit
pack.
2. If a memory card is already inserted, take the memory card out and
examine the connectors of the memory card and the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack. Insert the memory card into the slot again.
3. When a memory card is pushed into the slot, make sure that the
memory card is inserted firmly into the slot.
4. Re-enter the test card-mem command. If the test still fails, replace the
memory card, and then repeat this step one more time.
5. If the test still fails after you replace the memory card, replace the
TN777B NETCON circuit pack. Follow the Standard Repair
Procedures for a memory card.

PASS

A memory card is inserted into the TN777B NETCON circuit pack, and the
system can recognize its existence.

Continued on next page

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696)
This test is a nondestructive test. The memory card must be formatted before an
application. The test reads the directory file from the memory card, and it verifies
the integrity of the directory file.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-255

Table 10-78. TEST #696 Memory Card Format and Read Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

2110

ABORT

No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2113

ABORT

One of the two directories in the memory card is corrupted.
1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify that Test #699
passes.
2. If the test is aborted again with this error code, replace the memory
card.

FAIL

System software cannot recognize the inserted memory card. The memory
card is not formatted, or the directories of the memory card are corrupted.
1. Replace the memory card with a new formatted memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

System recognizes the inserted memory card, and it can read the
directories from the memory card.

Continued on next page

Memory Card Match Test (#697)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test verifies the inserted memory card for
consistency with the system configuration. The test helps answer the following
questions:
■

Is the inserted memory card a system software upgrade card?

■

Does the size of the inserted memory card match the capacity of the
system configuration?

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-256

■

Does the inserted memory card contain the Announcement file for a
system with an Announcement circuit pack?

■

Does the size of the translations in the system reach 98% of the reserved
storage space on the memory card?

If the answer to any of these questions is "yes," maintenance raises a WARNING
alarm for service attention. A new memory card is usually required.
Table 10-79. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

2110

ABORT

No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

2111

ABORT

Inserted memory card is not formatted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

101

FAIL

The inserted memory card is a system-upgrade memory card.
1. Replace the memory card with a user’s memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

102

FAIL

The inserted memory card does not contain an Announcements file, and
the system is configured with the Announcement feature.
1. Replace the memory card with a 10 MB memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-257

Table 10-79. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test — Continued
Error
Code
103

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The memory card is a system-upgrade memory card and, while the
announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is available in the
memory card.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

116

FAIL

The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system
configuration.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

118

FAIL

While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is
available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory
card doesn’t match the system configuration.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

132

FAIL

Translation reaches 98% of the memory card reserved storage space.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

134

FAIL

While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is
available in the memory card, and system translation reaches a 98%
capacity of the memory card reserved storage space.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

148

FAIL

The capacity of the inserted memory card doesn’t match the system
configuration, and system translation reaches 98% of the memory card
reserved storage space.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-258

Table 10-79. TEST #697 Memory Card Match Test — Continued
Error
Code
150

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
While the announcement feature is in use, no announcement file is
available in the memory card, and the capacity of the inserted memory
card doesn’t match the system configuration. Also, system translation
reaches a 98% capacity of the memory card reserved storage space.
1. Replace the memory card with one of a larger size. See the system
configuration guidelines.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The inserted memory card matches the system configuration, and the card
has enough space for saving translations and (if applicable)
announcements.

Continued on next page

Memory Card Write-Protection Test (#698)
This test, which is nondestructive, verifies whether the write-protected switch on
the memory card is turned on. The memory card cannot be erased or written to
when the write-protected switch is on.
Table 10-80. TEST #698 Memory Card Write-Protected Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-259

Table 10-80. TEST #698 Memory Card Write-Protected Test — Continued
Error
Code
2110

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2111

ABORT

Inserted memory card is not formatted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Write-Protect switch of the inserted memory card is set to the protect
position.
1. Take the memory card out, and move the write-protect switch to the
"not-protected" position.
2. Insert the memory card back into the slot.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The inserted memory card is not write-protected.

Continued on next page

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699)
This test is a nondestructive test. All memory cards, except the memory card for
system software upgrade, have two copies of both directory files and translation
files to ensure that there is at least a good translation file in the memory card at
any time, especially during the "save translation" operation.
If one of the two directory files (for example, the directory file) is missing or
broken (for example, the directory file has a bad checksum), maintenance can
build the directory file. The Memory Card Directory Recovery Test
■

Verifies the integrity of both active and backup directory files in a memory
card, and

■

Requests a rebuilding of the directory file if the file is missing or corrupted.

When the test passes, both directories are sane. If the memory card is a
system-upgrade memory card, the test is aborted. If the test fails, the broken or
missing directory cannot be rebuilt. As a result, all subsequent "write-to-memory
card" operations are blocked. When an alarm is raised and Error Type 1025 for
"CARD-MEM" is active, replace the memory card.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-260

Table 10-81. TEST #699 Memory Card Directory Recovery Test
Error
Code
1192

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Contention error. Applications are accessing the memory card.
1. Wait 10 minutes for the applications to complete.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2012
2106
2114

ABORT

2013
2100
none

ABORT

2108

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The NETCON circuit pack is not a TN777B circuit pack.
1. Follow the Standard Repair Procedures for replacing the NETCON
circuit pack with the TN777B circuit pack.
2. Re-enter the test card-mem command.

2110

ABORT

No memory card is inserted.
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B NETCON
circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2111

ABORT

Inserted memory card cannot be recognized.
1. Insert a new formatted memory card into the slot at the TN777B
NETCON circuit pack.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2112

ABORT

Internal system error The inserted memory card is a "system-upgrade"
memory card.
1. Replace the inserted memory card with a user’s memory card.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2115

ABORT

The memory card is write-protected.
1. Take the memory card out, flip the "write-protection" switch to the
"not-protected" position, and insert the memory card back into the slot.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARD-MEM (Memory Card)

Page 10-261

Table 10-81. TEST #699 Memory Card Directory Recovery Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

104

FAIL

Directories in the memory card are corrupted and cannot be recovered.

105

FAIL

"0" cannot be written into memory before an erase operation.

106

FAIL

Memory card cannot be erased.

107

FAIL

Data cannot be written into a memory card after the erase operation.
Maintenance cannot restore the missing or broken directory file in the
inserted memory card.
1. Replace the memory card with a new, formatted one.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

108

FAIL

12 volt power supply for directory recovery can’t be turned on. The 12 volt
power supply on TN777B NETCON circuit pack may be defective.
1. Re-enter the test card-mem command, and verify the result of Test
701 for 12 Volt Power Supply.
2. If Test 701 fails, follow the Standard Repair Procedure to replace the
TN777B NETCON circuit pack with a new TN777B circuit pack.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

Both directory files in the inserted memory card are sane.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-262

CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit)
for AC-Powered Systems
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
CARR-POW

1.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1
recycle carrier PC

Full Name of MO
Carrier Port Power Unit

Recycle the carrier indicated by the PORT field in the Alarm Log.

DEFINITY Generic 1 offers two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the
multicarrier cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both
cabinet system configurations may be powered by either an external AC or DC
power source.
NOTE:
For environment maintenance, the aspects of a PPN configuration for a
High or Critical Reliability system or of an EPN cabinet configuration are
irrelevant.
The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find
the appropriate MO section(s).
■

For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the "DC-POWER" Maintenance
documentation for environment maintenance strategy.

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
"AC-POWER", "CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or
"POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems".

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
"AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM
(Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery
Charger) for DC-Powered Systems".

Every carrier in the system must be supplied with +5 volt, -48 volt, and -5 volt DC
power for the various circuit packs to operate properly. This power is supplied to
the carriers as follows: AC from a wall outlet comes into the PDU, which
distributes the power via a set of fuses (F1 to F7) to the power units. Each carrier
in the system is equipped with two power units: the 631 DA AC power unit and
the 631 DB AC power unit, which together supply the required voltages to the
carrier. Figure 10-12 illustrates the position of the power unit and the power
distribution unit (PDU) and shows which power unit each fuse controls (Figure
10-12 also shows other Environment maintenance-related items that can be

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-263

ignored for this section on Carrier Port Power Unit). Figure 10-13 illustrates the
position of the power unit and the PDU and shows which power unit each fuse
controls in a small cabinet (from a System 75 R1V3 upgrade). Figure 10-14
shows the position of the fuses on the PDU and describes how to replace a fuse.
The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the
various voltages on the backplane pins. For more information, refer to the
"Troubleshooting Backplane Voltage Problems" section found in Chapter 5,
"Routine Maintenance Procedures".
The power unit has two LEDs: if the yellow LED is lit it means the power unit is
operating as normal; if the red LED is lit it means the power unit has a fault; and if
neither is lit it LED means no external power is being supplied. The CARR-POW
(Carrier Port Power Unit) MO represents the pair of power units that power each
carrier in a multicarrier cabinet system. If a problem is reported by hardware for a
power unit on a port carrier, the system can recycle the pair of power units in a
port carrier; however, if the problem is reported on a control carrier, the system
cannot recycle the pair of power units in a control carrier. In a standard
multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN) carrier A is the control carrier, and carriers B,
C, D, and E are the port carriers. In a High or Critical Reliability system
multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carriers A and B are the control carriers, and
carriers C, D, and E are the port carriers. However, carrier B can be recycled
only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone-Clock circuit pack are
in the A carrier.
Loss of the 631 DB Carrier Port DC Power Unit in the active control carrier (the A
carrier for a standard system and either the A or B carrier for a High or Critical
Reliability system) causes loss of the administration terminal. In a High or Critical
Reliability system, the Active SPE should switch to the Standby SPE if there is a
CARR-POW alarm.
Recycling a carrier turns off the pair of power units, and turns them back on two
seconds later.

! WARNING:
Recycling carriers disrupts service for all circuit packs on the carrier.
The DEFINITY Generic 1 can also support neon message waiting lamps on
analog telephones. If this is required, then the carrier(s) that contains the TN769
Analog Neon circuit packs must also be supplied with 165 volt to power the neon
lights. The 165 volt can only be supplied by a TN752 or a TN755B power unit
circuit pack. The following table lists all power unit and power-related circuit
packs for the system and indicates the voltages they can supply. Figure 10-12
through Figure 10-17 show a schematic of each power unit type. The TN2036
Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-264

on the backplane pins. Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System
Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104.

Power Supply

+5

-48V

-5V

165V

Cabinet Position

631 WA

yes

no

no

no

Left Side

631 WB

no

yes

no

no

Right Side

631 AR

yes

no

no

no

Left Side

631 BR

no

yes

no

no

Right Side

631 DA

yes

no

no

no

Left Side

631 DB

no

yes

yes

no

Right Side

TN736

no

no

yes

no

-

TN752

no

no

yes

yes

-

TN755B

no

no

no

yes

-

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

S2

S3

Page 10-265

S1
A

AC

631

CARRIER C

DA

I

631

R

DB

AC
F2

F3
F
L
CARRIER B

631
DA

631
F1

O

631

W

DB

631

CARRIER A

DA

DB

AC
FILTER
A
H

S4

S4

FANS -3 FRONT
3 BACK

D
1
FILTER

AC

631

CARRIER D

DA

A

631

I

DB

R

F5

AC
F4

F
631

CARRIER E

DA

L

631

O

DB

W
DC
FUSE F1-F7
F7

BATTERY &
BATTERY

DC

CHARGER

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

Figure 10-12.

ON BACK OF

RING
AC

GENERATOR

F6

PDU, FUSE
F9 ON FRONT

DIST.
S3

OF PDU

F9

Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components (CARR-POW)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-266

CONVENIENCE OUTLET

F3

CONVENIENCE OUTLET

F6
20A

F8

20A

2A
F7

15A
FUSE F7 IS
FOR CONVENIENCE
OUTLETS
BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FUSE LOCATIONS

FUSE LOCATIONS

THE 3 FANS ARE ACTUALLY
A
H
D
1

ON BACK OF CABINET AND
S4

ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM

S4

FRONT OF CABINET.
A

FILTER

I
AC

R
631

CARRIER B

DA
AC

F3

F

631

L

DB

F6

O
631

W

CARRIER A

631
DB

DA

NOTE: THE 631AR AND
631BR MAY BE USED AS

POWER
DISTRIBUTION

THE CARRIER POWER UNIT

BATTERY &

AC

RING

BATTERY

DIST.

GENERATOR

PROVIDED A TN736 OR
TN752 POWER UNIT CIRCUIT

CHARGER
S3

UNIT

PACK IS IN SAME CARRIER

FRONT VIEW

Figure 10-13.

Small Cabinet Environment Components (CARR-POW)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-267

F9
F4

F1
2A
20A

20A

AC

AC

F5

AC

F2

20A

20A

AC

AC
MAIN AC
F3

F6

20A

20A

DC

AC

CIRCUIT BREAKER

F7

20A
DC

BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FUSE F8 (5A AC) IS LOCATED ON THE
BACK OF THE PDU ABOVE THE
CONVENIENCE OUTLET AND IS NOT SHOWN

FUSE
TIP

FUSES F1-F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT.
WHEN REPLACING ONE OF THESE FUSES, CARE
MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP
FIRST.
FUSES F8-F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE
FUSE

INSERTED EITHER WAY.

RETAINER

Figure 10-14.

Multicarrier Cabinet Fuse Location and Replacement

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-268

STATUS
LEDS
RED
AMBER

LOCKING
LEVER

POWER
CORD

LOCKING
SLIDE
OUTLET

Figure 10-15.

631WA or 631WB AC Power Unit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-269

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

ON

OFF

STATUS
LED

LOCKING
LEVER

POWER
CORD

LOCKING
SLIDE
OUTLET

Figure 10-16.

631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-270

STATUS
LEDS
RED
AMBER

LOCKING
LEVER

POWER
CORD

LOCKING
SLIDE
OUTLET

Figure 10-17.

631DA or 631DB AC Power Unit

Power Unit Replacement Procedures
The procedures for replacing the various power units are given below:

Replacing a 631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit
If the power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system, refer to
"Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance
Procedures", before replacing the power unit. To replace the power unit,
implement the following steps:
1. Set the power switch to OFF, and unplug the power cord.
2. Move the locking slide on the power unit to its leftmost position and
unlatch the locking lever.
3. Remove the power unit from the carrier.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-271

4. Before installing the replacement power unit in the carrier, turn the power
unit on its side and operate rocker switches 1 through 4 on the dip switch
as follows:

Switch

631AR Position

631BR Position

1

open

open

2

closed

closed

3

open

open

4

closed

open

NOTE:
In the open position, the rocker is down on the side opposite the
number. In the closed position, the rocker is down on the side
adjacent to the number.
5. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left
position and open the locking lever.
6. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt.
7. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches.
8. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right
position.
9. Connect the power cord and set the power switch to ON.

Replacing a 631DA or 631DB AC Power Unit
If the power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system, refer to
"Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance
Procedures" before replacing the power unit. To replace the power unit, follow
the procedure below:
1. Unplug the power cord.
2. Move the locking slide on the power unit to the extreme left position and
unlatch the locking lever.
3. Remove the power unit from the carrier.
4. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left
position and open the locking lever.
5. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt.
6. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches.
7. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right
position.
8. Connect the power cord and set the power switch to ON.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-272

Replacing a TN736 or TN752 Power Unit Circuit
Pack
If the TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is in a control carrier of a PPN
system, then refer to the "Handling Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5,
"Routine Maintenance Procedures". Replacing either power unit interrupts the -5
volt supply to the carrier. This causes all the analog circuit packs in the carrier to
fail their Loop Around Tests and may cause failures in circuit packs in the control
complex. After the power unit has been replaced, look for alarms against these
maintenance objects. If ANL-LINE alarms exist, refer to Test #47 (Loop Around
and Conference Test) in ANL-LINE Maintenance documentation. For CO-TRK
alarms, refer to Test #33 (Loop Around and Conference Test) in CO-TRK
Maintenance documentation.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Carrier Port Power Unit Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1(a)(b)

0 or 1

Power Unit Query
Test (#127)

MAJOR

ON

test environment P r 2

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. Where P is an appropriate port network number taken for the PORT field of
the Error Log.
b. Run the Power Unit Query Test (#127) first using the test environment P r
2 command. Then, if a carrier must be recycled to clear the CARR-POW
alarm, use the recycle carrier PC command to run the Power Unit
Recycle Test (#126). The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is not included
in either the long or Short Test Sequences.

!

WARNING:
The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is destructive. For more
information, refer to the description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-273

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test
(#5) (a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier E)
(#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier D)
(#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier A)
(#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier B)
(#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier C)
(#127)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test
(#124) (c)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Temperature Query Test
(#122) (d)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test
(#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization
Test (#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test
(#118) (f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-274

b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test. This test only shows up in the test sequence if
there is a TN768 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Power Unit Recycle Test (#126)
This test is destructive.
This test is destructive because it requires all circuit packs in the recycled carrier
to be removed and inserted. These actions cause all calls originating or
terminating on circuit packs in this carrier to be dropped. The pair of power units
in the specified carrier is recycled. Both power units in the carrier are turned off
for two seconds and then back on again. After the power units have been turned
back on, the test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system
PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or
Critical Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier
cabinet system for the status of pair of power units in the specified carrier. If both
power units are on and functioning, then the test passes. If both power units are
not on and functioning, the test fails, and BOTH power units are turned off.
Table 10-82.

Error Code
1000

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-82.

Page 10-275

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued

Error Code
1129

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates
that the Active Tone-Clock for the EPN is in carrier
2B.
1. Issue the set tone-clock 2A command.
2. Rerun the test.

1130

ABORT

Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates
that the Active Expansion Interface Link for the
EPN is in carrier 2B.
1. Issue the set expansion-link A01 command.
2. Rerun the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received
within the allowable time period.

2029

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

1 (Carrier E)
2 (Carrier D)
4 (Carrier A)
8 (Carrier B)
16 (Carrier C)

FAIL

There is a problem with one or both Power Unit(s)
on the recycled carrier.
1. Since the Power Unit Recycle Test failed, both
Power Units in the recycled carrier should
have been powered off by the system
software. Both power units should be showing
a red status LED, instead of a green one.
Since the Power Unit Query Test is a subset of
the Power Unit Recycle Test, the Power Unit
Query Test (#127) should also fail. Run the
Power Unit Query Test by using the test
environment P command where P is the
appropriate port network number.
2. If the test fails, follow the repair procedures
described for Test #127. If problem persists,
follow normal escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-276

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued

Table 10-82.

Error Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Both power units in the recycled carrier were
found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape
Processor in a Standard system PPN, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a
system with High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier
cabinet system after the power units were
powered down and back up. If the status LEDs on
both power units are not showing green, then the
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor),
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the
EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have
incorrectly reported the state of the power units.
Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs.

Continued on next page

Power Unit Query Test (#127)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical
Reliability, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet
system for the status of pair of power units in the specified carrier. If both power
units are on and functioning, then the test passes. If both are not on and
functioning, it fails.
Table 10-83.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-83.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-277

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000,
check for system powering problems with the A
carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all
AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier
cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a
single-carrier cabinet system. Then, repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication
Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN,
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a
standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit
pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, escalate the problem.

2029

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-83.
Error
Code

Page 10-278

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
There is a problem with one or both power units on the
tested carrier.
1. For each power unit that has all sttus LEDs OFF,
check the AC input to the power unit at the power
unit outlet (see Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13). If
there is no AC, then check the appropriate fuses
(see Figure 10-14) for the affected power unit. If the
fuses are blown out, replace the fuses (see ). If the
fuses blow out again or AC does not show up at the
power unit outlet, then there is probably a power
wiring problem in the cabinet. Follow normal
escalation procedures.
2. At this point AC should be present at the power unit
outlet. If the carrier being tested is the 1A or 2A
carrier or the 1B carrier in a High or Critical
Reliability system, refer to "Troubleshooting Control
Carrier Power Units" in Chapter 5, "Routine
Maintenance Procedures". Otherwise, use the
recycle carrier PC command (where PC is the
appropriate port network and carrier) in an attempt
to bring back the power units for this carrier.
If the test passes, the trouble is cleared. If the test
does not pass, one power unit, or both, in the tested
carrier is defective.
If only one power unit is defective, the status LEDs
on the healthy power unit light green for a moment.
When the recycle test determines that both power
units are defective, the software turns off power to
both the good and defective power units. This
causes the status LED(s) on the good power unit to
light red.
3. Unplug both power units, and wait about one minute
to allow the power units to cool down. Plug in the
power units. If either power unit is operating properly
(that is, the status LEDs show green), then replace
the defective power unit(s). See "Power Unit
Replacement Procedures" in this section.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-83.
Error
Code

Page 10-279

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
4. If the replaced power unit still does not operate
properly, then a circuit pack or a defective
telephone connected to a circuit pack in the affected
carrier may be causing an electrical load which is
preventing the power unit from operating properly.
Unseat all the circuit packs in the carrier and reissue
the recycle carrier command.
a. If the recycle passes, then the power units are
healthy, and the problem is with one of the circuit
packs. Reinsert the circuit packs one at a time. If
the status LED shows red after reinserting a
circuit pack, replace the defective circuit pack. If
the status LED still shows red, remove the
Amphenol. connector on the back of the slot
containing this circuit pack and reissue the
recycle carrier command. If the status LED
shows green, the problem is with one of the
telephones or the wiring to one of the telephones
on this slot. If the status LED still shows red,
escalate the problem.
b. If either power unit still shows a red status LED,
check for bent pins and cable placement in the
affected carrier. There are failures that can occur
on the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication
Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that
are not detected by the respective maintenance,
but that cause many, if not all, environment tests
to fail. If many environment tests are failing, the
suspect circuit pack, depending on the system
configuration, should be replaced and the test
rerun. If no other problems can be found,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-83.
Error
Code

Page 10-280

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Both power units in the tested carrier were found to be
healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard
system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a
PPN for a system with High or Critical Reliability, or the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier
cabinet system. If the status LEDs on both power units
are not showing green, the PR-MAINT
(Maintenance/Tape Processor), DUPINT (Duplication
Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance)
circuit pack may have incorrectly reported the state of
the power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on
these MOs.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-281

CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit)
for DC-Powered Systems
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
CARR-POW

1.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1
recycle carrier PC

Full Name of MO
Carrier Port Power Unit

Recycle the carrier indicated by the Port field in the Alarm Log.

Generic 1 offers two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the multicarrier
cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both cabinet system
configurations may be powered by either an external AC or DC power source.
NOTE:
For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration
aspects for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant.
The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find
the appropriate MO section(s).
■

For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the "DC-POWER
(Single-Carrier Cabinet Power)" Maintenance documentation for
environment maintenance strategy.

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
"AC-POWER (AC Power) for AC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM
(Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery
Charger) for AC-Powered Systems".

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
"AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems", "CUST-ALM
(Customer-Provided Alarming Device)", or "POWER (Battery & Battery
Charger) for DC-Powered Systems".

Every carrier in the system must be supplied with +5 volt, -48 volt, and -5 volt DC
power for the various circuit packs to operate properly. A multicarrier system can
be supplied by an external AC power source or an external DC power source.
In a DC-powered system, power is supplied to the carriers as follows: DC power
from an external device comes into Power Distribution Units (PDU J58890CF and
PDU J58890CF-1), which distribute the power via circuit breakers (CB1-CB12 for
PDU J58890CF, CB1-CB6 for J58890Cf-1) to the carrier power units. Each carrier
in the system is equipped with two power units, the 644A and the 645B, which

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-282

together supply the required voltages to the carrier. Figure 10-17 illustrates the
position of the carrier power units and PDU J58890CF and shows which power
unit each circuit breaker controls (Figure 10-17 also shows other Environment
maintenance-related items that can be ignored for this section on Carrier Port
Power Unit). Figure 10-18 shows the position of the circuit breakers on the PDU
J58890CF. Figure 10-19 illustrates the position of the carrier power units and
PDU J58890CF-1 and shows which power unit each circuit breaker controls
(Figure 10-19 also shows other Environment maintenance-related items that can
be ignored for this section on Carrier Port Power Unit). Figure 10-20 shows the
position of the circuit breakers on the PDU J58890CF-1. The TN2036 Voltage
Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the
backplane pins. Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System
Generic 1 and Generic 3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104. The CARR-POW
(Carrier Port Power Unit) MO represents the pair of power units for each carrier in
a multicarrier cabinet system. If a problem is reported by hardware for a power
unit on a port carrier, the system can recycle the pair of power units in a port
carrier; however, if the problem is reported on a control carrier, the system
cannot recycle the pair of power units in a control carrier. In a standard
multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carrier A is the control carrier, and carriers B,
C, D, and E are the port carriers. In a High or Critical Reliability system
multicarrier cabinet (PPN or EPN), carriers A and B are the control carriers, and
carriers C, D, and E are the port carriers. However, carrier B in the EPN can be
recycled only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone-Clock circuit
pack are in the A carrier.
The carrier port power unit has one LED: the yellow LED on means operating as
normal and the LED off means no external power is being supplied or that the
power unit has a fault.
Loss of the 645B Carrier Port Power Unit in the active control carrier (the A carrier
for a standard system and either the A or B carrier for a High or Critical Reliability
system) causes loss of the administration terminal. In a High or Critical Reliability
system, the Active SPE should switch to the Standby SPE if there is a CARR-POW
alarm.
Recycling a carrier turns off the pair of carrier power units and turns them back
on two seconds later.

! WARNING:
Recycling carriers disrupts service for all circuit packs on the carrier.
Generic 1 can also support neon message waiting lamps on analog telephones.
If this is required, then the carrier(s) that contains the TN769 Analog Neon circuit
packs must also be supplied with 165 volt DC power to power the neon lights.
The 165 volt DC power can only be supplied by a TN752 or a TN755B power unit
circuit pack. The following table lists the power units and power-related circuit
packs that can be used in a DC-powered system and indicates the voltages they
can supply. Figure 10-21 and Figure 10-22 show a schematic of the 644A and
645B power supplies, respectively. The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-283

provides easy access for testing the various voltages on the backplane pins.
Refer to Chapter 2 in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic
3 Installation and Test, 555-230-104.

Power
Supply

+5V

-48V

-5V

165V

Cabinet
Position

644A

yes

no

no

no

Left Side

645B

no

yes

yes

no

Right Side

TN736

no

no

yes

no

-

TN752

no

no

yes

yes

-

TN755B

no

no

no

yes

-

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

S2

S3

Page 10-284

S1
A

CB10
644A

CARRIER C

I

CB3
645B

R
F
L

CB9
CARRIER B

644A

O

CB2
645B

W

CB8

CB1
CARRIER A

644A

645B

FILTER
A
H

S4

FANS -3 FRONT

S4

3 BACK

D
1
FILTER

CB11

CB4
A

CARRIER D

644A

645B

I
R
F

CB12

L

CARRIER E

644A

O

CB5
645B

W

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CB6
DC
CB7

Figure 10-18.

RING

CB1-CB12 ARE

GENERATOR

LOCATED ON THE

DISTRIBUTION
S3

BACK OF THE PDU

Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU8890CF)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

list measurements occupancy summary

Page 10-285

Page 1

command: list measurements trunk group summary

Command Line

Figure 10-19.

Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU
58890CF)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

S2

S3

S1

Carrier C

a
i
r

644A

Carrier B

f
l
o
w

644A

Carrier A

644A

Page 10-286

645B

CB3

CB1

CB2
645B

645B

CB1

Filter
A
H
D
1

S4

Fans 3 Front
3 Back

S4

Filter

644A

Carrier D

a
i
r

Carrier E

f
l
o
w

645B

CB5

CB4
644A

CB6

DC
Distribution

Ring Generator

645B

Circuit Breakers
CB1-CB5 are
located on the
back of the PDU

S3

Power Distribution Unit

Figure 10-20.

Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems
(PDU8890CF-1)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-287

Power Distribution Unit
Main
On/Off
Switch

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

2A

Ring Generator

Circuit
Breakers

Front View

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

CB1

CB2

CB3

CB4

CB5

CB6

CB7

CB8

CB9

CB10

CB11

CB12

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF
FLTA

OFF
FLTB

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A-R

B-R

C-R

D-R

E-R

A-L

B-L

C-L

D-L

E-L

TB2
-48VDC
Return
-48VDC
A
-48VDC
B

Back View

Figure 10-21.

Power Distribution Unit for DC-Powered Systems (PDU
58890CF-1)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-288

STATUS
LEDS
RED
AMBER

LOCKING
POWER

LEVER

CORD

LOCKING
SLIDE
OUTLET

Figure 10-22.

644A Port Carrier Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-289

STATUS
LEDS
RED
AMBER

ON

OFF

LOCKING
LEVER

POWER
CORD

OUTLET

LOCKING
SLIDE

Figure 10-23.

645B Port Carrier Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems

Port Carrier Power Unit Replacement Procedures
The procedures for replacing a 644A or 645B carrier DC power unit are given
below.
If the port carrier power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN
system, refer to the "Removing Power" and "Restoring Power" sections in Chapter
5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures" before replacing the port carrier power
unit. To replace the port carrier power unit, follow the procedure below:
1. If this is a 645B power unit, set the power switch to OFF.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Move the locking slide on the power unit to the extreme left position, and
unlatch the locking lever.
4. Remove the power unit from the carrier.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-290

5. Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left
position and open the locking lever.
6. Insert the power unit into the carrier until some resistance is felt.
7. Lift the locking lever upward until it latches.
8. Move the locking lever slide on the power unit to the extreme right
position.
9. Connect the power cord.
10. If this is a 645B power unit, set the power switch to ON.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Carrier Port Power Unit Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1(a)(b)

0 or 1

Power Unit Query
Test (#127)

MAJOR

ON

test environment P r 2

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

a. Where P is an appropriate port network number taken for the Port field of
the Error Log.
b. Run the Power Unit Query Test (#127) first using the test environment P r
2 command. Then, if a carrier must be recycled to clear the CARR-POW
alarm, use the recycle carrier PC command to run the Power Unit
Recycle Test (#126). The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is not included
in either the long or Short Test Sequences.

!

WARNING:
The Power Unit Recycle Test (#126) is destructive. For more
information, refer to the description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-291

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5)
(a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Temperature Query Test (#122) (d)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test
(#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118)
(f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1. D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive
a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-292

f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
NOTE:
This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a TN768
Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Power Unit Recycle Test (#126)
This test is destructive.
This test is destructive because it requires all circuit packs in the recycled carrier
to be removed and inserted. These actions cause all calls originating or
terminating on circuit packs in this carrier to be dropped. The pair of port carrier
power units in the specified carrier is recycled. Both port carrier power units in
the carrier are turned off for two seconds and then back on. After the port carrier
power units have been turned back on, the test queries the Maintenance/Tape
Processor in Standard system PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a
PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of the pair of port carrier
power units in the specified carrier. If both port carrier power units are on and
functioning, then the test passes. If both port carrier power units are not on and
functioning, the test fails, and BOTH port carrier power units are turned off.
Table 10-84.

Error Code
1000

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

1129

ABORT

Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates
that the Active Tone-Clock for the EPN is in carrier
2B.
1. Issue the set tone-clock 2A command.
2. Rerun the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Table 10-84.

Page 10-293

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued

Error Code
1130

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Only occurs when recycling carrier 2B. Indicates
that the Active Expansion Interface Link for the
EPN is in carrier 2B.
1. Issue the set expansion-link A01 command.
2. Rerun the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received
within the allowable time period.

2029

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

1 (Carrier E)
2 (Carrier D)
4 (Carrier A)
8 (Carrier B)
16 (Carrier C)

FAIL

There is a problem with one or both port carrier
power units on the recycled carrier.
1. Since the Power Unit Recycle Test failed, both
port carrier power supplies in the recycled
carrier should have been powered off by the
system software. Both port carrier power units
should be showing a red status LED, instead
of a green one. Since the Power Unit Query
Test is a subset of the Power Unit Recycle
Test, the Power Unit Query Test (#127) should
also fail. Run the Power Unit Query Test by
using the test environment P command
where P is the appropriate port network
number.
2. If the test fails, follow the repair procedures
described for Test #127. If the problem
persists, follow normal escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-294

TEST #126 Power Unit Recycle Test — Continued

Table 10-84.

Error Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Both port carrier power units in the recycled
carrier were found to be healthy by the
Maintenance/Tape Processor in Standard system
PPN, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a
PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN
multicarrier cabinet system after the port carrier
power units were powered-down and powered up
again. If the status LEDs on both port carrier
power units are not showing green, then the
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor),
DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack, or the
EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have
incorrectly reported the state of the port carrier
power units. Look for and resolve any alarms on
these MOs.

Continued on next page

Power Unit Query Test (#127)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability
system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet
system for the status of the pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier.
If both port carrier units are on and functioning, the test passes. If both are not on
and functioning, the test fails.
Table 10-85.
Error
Code

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Table 10-85.
Error
Code
2029

Page 10-295

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

There is a problem with one or both port carrier power
units on the tested carrier.
1. For each port carrier power unit that has all status
LEDs OFF, check the DC input to the port carrier
power unit at the port carrier power unit outlet (see
Figures 11-19 through 11-22). If there is no DC, then
check the appropriate circuit breakers for the
affected port carrier power unit. If the circuit breaker
has tripped (that is, it is in the down position), reset
the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker trips again
or DC is not present at the port carrier power unit
outlet, there is probably a power wiring problem in
the cabinet. Follow normal escalation procedures.
2. At this point, DC should be present at the port carrier
power supply outlet. If the carrier being tested is the
1A or 2A carrier, or the 1B carrier in a High or Critical
Reliability system, refer to"Troubleshooting Control
Carrier Power Units"" in Chapter 5, "Routine
Maintenance Procedures". Otherwise, use the
recycle carrier PC command (where PC is the
appropriate port network and carrier) in an attempt
to bring back the power units for this carrier. If the
test passes, the trouble is cleared. If the test does
not pass, one port carrier power unit, or both, in the
tested carrier is defective.
If only one port carrier power unit is defective, the status
LEDs on the healthy port carrier power unit light green
for a moment. When the recycle test determines that
both port carrier power units are defective, the software
turns off power to both the good and defective port
carrier power units. This causes the status LED(s) on the
good port carrier power unit to light red.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Table 10-85.
Error
Code

Page 10-296

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. Unplug both port carrier power units, and wait about
one-minute to allow the port carrier power units to
cool down. Plug in the port carrier power units. If
either port carrier power unit is operating properly
(that is, the status LEDs show green), then replace
the defective port carrier power unit(s). See "Port
Carrier Power Unit Replacement Procedures" in this
section.
4. If the replaced port carrier power unit(s) still does
(do) not operate properly, then a circuit pack or a
defective telephone connected to a circuit pack in
the affected carrier could be causing an electrical
load which is preventing the port carrier power unit
from operating properly. Unseat all the circuit packs
in the carrier, and reissue the recycle carrier
command.
a. If the recycle passes, then the port carrier power
units are healthy, and the problem is with one of
the circuit packs. Reinsert the circuit packs one
at a time. If the status LED shows red after
reinserting a circuit pack, replace the defective
circuit pack. If the status LED still shows red,
remove the Amphenol connector on the back of
the slot containing this circuit pack and reissue
the recycle carrier command. If the status LED
shows green, the problem is with one of the
telephones or the wiring to one of the telephones
on this slot. If the status LED still shows red,
escalate the problem.
b. If either port carrier power unit still shows a red
status LED, check for bent pins and cable
placement in the affected carrier. There are
failures that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape
Processor, Duplication Interface, and EPN
Maintenance circuit pack that are not detected
by the respective maintenance, but that cause
many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many
environment tests are failing, the suspect circuit
pack, depending on the system configuration,
should be replaced and the test rerun. If no other
problems can be found, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems

Table 10-85.
Error
Code

Page 10-297

TEST #127 Power Unit Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Both port carrier power units in the tested carrier were
found to be healthy by the Maintenance/Tape Processor
in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or
Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system. If the
status LEDs on both port carrier power units are not
showing green, the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape
Processor), DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit pack,
or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit pack may have
incorrectly reported the state of the port carrier power
units. Look for and resolve any alarms on these MOs.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack)

Page 10-298

CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

CLSFY-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Call Classifier Circuit Pack

CLSFY-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Call Classifier Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) Maintenance
documentation for related port information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Page 10-299

CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

CLSFY-PT(a)

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Call Classifier Port
Maintenance

CLSFY-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Call Classifier Port
Maintenance

CLSFY-PT

WARNING

release port PCSSpp

Call Classifier Port
Maintenance

1.

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (e.g., A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the
circuit pack is located (e.g., 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (e.g.., 01).

The TN744 Call Classifier (CLSFY-BD) circuit pack is a service circuit pack that
enables usage of the Outbound Call Management (OCM) and the Inbound Call
Management (ICM) features. On a G3iV2-386 system, the TN744 also enables
usage of R2-MFC signaling for incoming and outgoing feature operation. There
are eight ports (CLSFY-PTs) on the Call Classifier circuit pack. Each port can
handle call classification, touch-tone reception, or, for G3iV2-386 systems, MFC
tone generation and detection or touch-tone reception.
The CLSFY-PT maintenance feature defines a set of tests to ensure that the Call
Classifier circuit pack ports are capable of detecting tones for call classification,
and detecting and generating necessary tones for correct MFC feature
operation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Page 10-300

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data
any

18

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Tone Detector
Audit/Update Test
(#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r
2

Port has been
busied out by
system technician

WARNING

OFF

release port
PCSSpp

257 (b)

17666

Test (#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR(a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r
3

513 (c)

any

Tone Detection
Verification Test
(#42)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r
3

Notes:
a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error type: major alarm and
minor alarm. A major alarm is raised if the total number of call classifier
ports currently in-service is less than or equal to 1/2 of the administered
threshold number. Otherwise, a minor alarm is raised. In either case, run
the short test sequence against the port and follow the error code
procedures for the individual tests.
The threshold number of call classifier ports for service is administered
using the change system-parameters maintenance command. For
details, refer to Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".
b. The call classifier port lost its translation. Testing the call classifier port is
sufficient to reload its translation. If testing the call classifier port does not
clear the error, then the call classifier circuit pack containing the defective
call classifier port should be replaced.
c. This error indicates the call classifier port is having problems detecting
system tones (DTMF, etc.) or detecting and generating necessary
R2-MFC tones. This error should accompany some percentage of failed
calls. If this error type is persistently logged, then the call classifier circuit
pack containing the defective call classifier port should be replaced.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Page 10-301

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone
Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Audit/Update Test (#43)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)
This test checks out each port in both the touch-tone receiver mode and in the
R2-MFC tone detection/generation mode. During the first half of the test, the
touch-tone receiver mode is tested. In the second half of the test, each port is put
into the R2-MFC mode. During this portion of the test, each port’s ability to
accurately detect and generate all forward and backward MFC tones is verified.
Table 10-86.
Error
Code

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none

ABORT

The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test OR there was an Internal System
Error.

1

ABORT

The system could not allocate all the resources needed
to test the tones.

1001

ABORT

The system was unable to put the Call Classifier port in
the appropriate mode to test it.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Table 10-86.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-302

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test
connection. This situation could occur when the system
is heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded,
then test the TDM-BUS via the test tdm [1|2] command.
Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation for details.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone-Clock circuit pack
for the test connection. This situation could occur when
the system is heavily loaded or if a Tone-Clock circuit
pack is not present in the port network when this test is
executed.
1. Verify the existence of a Tone-Clock circuit pack in
the same port network.
2. If a Tone-Clock circuit pack is missing, install one in
the same port network.
3. Allow approximately one minute for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack maintenance to run on the newly
inserted Tone-Clock circuit pack.
4. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Table 10-86.
Error
Code
2006

Page 10-303

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This abort code indicates that the active Tone-Clock
circuit pack might not be functioning properly. If there is
more than one Tone Detector circuit pack in the system,
then the problem can be either with the Tone-Clock
circuit pack or the Tone Detector circuit pack. This could
also be caused by the companding mode administered
for the system not matching that of the Tone Detector
circuit pack [G3iV2-386].
1. [G3iV2-386] Make sure that the companding mode
of the system matches that of the Tone Detector
(TN748 for Mu-law systems and TN420 for A-law
systems).
2. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port
network. This test is being executed via the test
tone-clock qualifier system technician command.
("qualifier" is the carrier of the active Tone-Clock
circuit pack to be tested. Valid qualifiers are: a, b,
1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b.) Refer to the TONE-BD
(Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Table 10-86.
Error
Code
1-3

Page 10-304

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
DTMF digits were not detected correctly. This may or
may not impact reception of R2-MFC calls.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity will be reduced. In
order to restore system performance to normal,
replace the Call Classifier circuit pack containing the
defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port).

101-122

FAIL

Forward or Backward MFC signals were not correctly
generated or detected. This impacts reception of
incoming MFC calls.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity will be reduced. In
order to restore system performance to normal,
replace the Call Classifier circuit pack containing the
defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port).

PASS

Tone Detection Verification is successful. The Call
Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) is able to detect/generate all
necessary tones.

Continued on next page

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43)
A sanity audit is performed on the CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port)

Table 10-87.
Error
Code
none

Page 10-305

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43)
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test.
1. Wait one-minute, and repeat the command a
maximum of five times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Hardware audit failed.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity will be reduced. In
order to restore system performance to normal,
replace the CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier circuit pack)
containing the defective CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier
Port).

PASS

The (CLSFY-PT) Call Classifier Port has passed the
sanity inquiry.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack)

Page 10-306

CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

CO-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack

CO-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for
example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is
located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also CO-TRK (CO Trunk) Maintenance
documentation for related trunk information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-307

CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

CO-DS1

MAJOR1

test trunk  l

DS1CO Trunk

CO-DS1

MINOR

test trunk  l

DS1CO Trunk

CO-DS1

WARNING

test trunk 

DS1CO Trunk

1.

A Major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by the
set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are
alarmed.

A DS1CO (central office) trunk provides a communications channel between the
system and a central office switch through either a 1.544 Mbps or a 2.048 Mbps
[G3iV2-386] DS1 link. A 24 channel DS1 link consists of 24 digital DS1CO trunks.
A 32 channel DS1 link [G3iV2-386] consists of 30 digital DS1CO trunks. A
DS1CO trunk can be used for both voice and data communication.
The DS1CO Trunk Maintenance provides a strategy in the system to maintain a
CO trunk via a port on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The TN767 and TN464
[G3iV2-386] DS1 Interface circuit packs support the low level CO trunk signaling
interfaces, ground-start and loop-start. This strategy covers the in-line errors log,
initialization tests, periodic tests, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm
resolution and escalation.
Three trunk service states are specified in the DS1CO trunk maintenance. They
are: out-of-service in which the trunk is in a deactivated state and cannot be used
for either incoming or outgoing calls; in-service in which the trunk is in an
activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls;
disconnect (ready-for-service) in which the trunk is in an activated state but can
only be used for an incoming call. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
out-of-service, then all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack are also in the
out-of-service state, and a Warning alarm is raised for each trunk.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-308

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

DS1CO Trunk Error Log Entries
Error Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test trunk
/

1 (a)

57408

1 (a)

57487

15 (b)

Any

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

18 (c)

0

busyout trunk
/

WARNING

OFF

release trunk
/

None

WARNING

ON

test trunk
/

130 (d)

Test to Clear Value

257 (e)

57392

DS1 CO Dial Tone
Seizure Test (#314)

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

513 (f)

57393

DS1 CO Dial Tone
Seizure Test (#314)

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

769 (g)

57484

1025

DS1CO Dial Tone
Seizure Test (#314)

WARNING

OFF

test trunk
/

1281

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk
/ r 4

1537

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk
/ r 3

ON

test board PCSS l

1793 (h)
2562(i))

16665

2817(j)

52992

3840 (k)

1.
2.

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test
description and follow the recommended procedures.
This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set
to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service,
then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)
3.

Page 10-309

Minor alarms on this maintenance object (MO) may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used
in the set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the Minor alarm
is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this group are alarmed.

Notes:
a. Error Type 1—Aux Data 57408—No tip ground is detected on an outgoing
call.
Aux Data 57487—PBX could not get "loop close" signal (TN767).
The DS1 Interface circuit pack detected a hardware fault. These errors
cause the Dial Tone Test (#314) to run and are only considered a problem
if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1025 also shows up).
In this case, the trunk may be put in ready-for-service state (shown as
"disconnected" by status command), which allows only incoming calls.
Run the Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow its outlined procedures.
b. Error Type 15—This is a software audit error that does not indicate any
hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate
associated errors (if any).
c. Error Type 18—System Technician has busied-out the trunk to the
out-of-service state. No calls can be made on this trunk except the Facility
Access Test Call. For details on this feature, refer to "Facility Test Calls"
section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".
d. Error Type 130—This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been
removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error,
reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
e. Error Type 257—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
The Aux Data field contains the following error type: 57392—no external
release on PBX disconnect [E030]. Escalate the problem.
f. Error Type 513—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
The Aux Data field contains the following error type: 57393—belated
external release on PBX disconnect [E031]. Escalate the problem.
g. Error Type 769—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
The Aux Data field contains the following error type:—57484, fault is
detected on tip/ring [E08C]. Escalate the error.
h. Error Type 1793—DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for
DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for details.
i. Error Type 2562—Retry Failure error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error comes from call processing and is generated when a
second attempt (retry) to seize an outgoing trunk fails.
j. Error Type 2817—Glare error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a two-way trunk

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-310

from both the near-end and the far-end. Attempt to place the call again. If
the error persists, execute the Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) and follow
those procedures.
k. Error Type 3840—Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an
internal system error. Enter the status trunk command to verify the status
of the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter the release trunk
command to put it back into in-service. Retry the test command. If the test
continues to abort, then escalate the problem.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

DS1CO Trunk Seizure Test (#314)

X

X

ND

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) resides on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and
provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30
seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-88.
Error
Code

Page 10-311

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-88.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-312

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-88.
Error
Code
2053

Page 10-313

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1
circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red
alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity
(1537).
1. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error
Log and follow the procedures given in the
appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance
documentation for the listed error types.

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-88.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-314

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an
insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive
(see note below).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.
NOTE:
Hyperactivity causes some special problems with
the sequence suggested above. If the ports are
translated after issuing the list config command
but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board
(when there really is a board), then the busyout
board and the release busy board commands
will not work (even though the reset board
command will work). The software will put the
hyperactive board back in service after the
hyperactivityclears.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and
provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test
verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the
conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different tones

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-315

and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured by a
tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test
passes.
Table 10-89.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The test was aborted. System resources required to run
this test were not available. The port may be busy with a
valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the trunk group/member number of the port.
Use the status trunk command to determine the service
state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The test was aborted. The system could not allocate
time slots for the test. The system may be under heavy
traffic conditions, or it may have time slots out of service
due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM
bus) maintenance documentation to diagnose any
active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle,
retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-89.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-316

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors
may be out of service. Issue the list measurements
tone-receiver command to display basic information
about the system’s tone receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TTR-LEV maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-PT maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status station or status trunk command to
determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

The test was disabled via translation. You may want to
determine why the test has been disabled before you
enable it.
1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration' screen is set to 'n.’ To enable the
test, change the trunk administration and enter 'y'
into the 'Maintenance Test' field.
2. Repeat the test.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-89.
Error
Code

Page 10-317

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT

At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1
circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red
alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity
(1537).
1. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error
Log and follow the procedures given in the
appropriate DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance
documentation for the listed error types.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-89.
Error
Code

Page 10-318

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
1. Enter the ’list configuration board UUCSS’
command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8
or 9, replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or
later.The error log may have error type 1281 entries.
2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one
fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an
incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during
the test). Retest the board.
3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see
Note below).
4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD
or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the
appropriate action. When the TONE errors have
cleared, rerun the test.
5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported,
coordinate isolation with the CO. Make sure that the
switch, the CO, and any NTCE equipment (the
CSU’s) have the correct administration.
6. Replace the circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a
circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated.
If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is
present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the
676B DC power unit may be defective. (The
631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC
power source.) The system may contain a TN736
or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit,
but not both types of power units. To investigate
problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance
Documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW
(carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems)
Maintenance Documentation. If a red LED on
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on,
replace the pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-89.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-319

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
This result could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an
insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive
(see note below).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check
to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.
NOTE:
Hyperactivity causes some special problems with
the sequence suggested above.If the ports are
translated after issuing the list config command
but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board
(when there really is a board), then the busyout
board and the release busy board commands
will not work (even though the reset board
command will work). The software will put the
hyperactive board back in service after the
hyperactivity clears.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-320

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1
Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation
updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing
parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the
consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack
and in the switch software.
Table 10-90.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The test was aborted because system resources
required to run this test were not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Issue the display port
PCSSpp command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a descriptionof this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

FAIL

Test failed due to internal system error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-90.
Error
Code

Page 10-321

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The
current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is
busied out, the test does not run, but returns to PASS. To
verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status trunk command to verify that the trunk
is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further
action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service,
continue to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-90.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-322

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued
Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This result could be due to incorrect
translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect board is
inserted, an insane board is inserted, or the board is
hyperactive (see note below).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check
to ensure that there is a valid board inserted.
Hyperactivity causes some special problems with the
sequence suggested above. If the ports are translated
after issuing the list config command but the 'Vintage'
field reports that there is no board (when there really is a
board), then the busyout board and the release busy
board commands will not work (even though the reset
board command will work). The software will put the
hyperactive board back in service after the hyperactivity
clears.

Continued on next page

DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314)
DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test checks the trunk’s signaling capability provided
by the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance software initiates the test by
sending a "seizure" message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack and expects an
"active" reply from the DS1 interface circuit pack. If the "active" message is
received, then the test passes. If no message is received and the timer expires,
the test is aborted. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack sends a "reorder" message
back to maintenance software, then the test fails.
The test CANNOT be run on a trunk if one of the following cases is true:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Page 10-323

a. The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk.
b. The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call.
c. The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled.
Table 10-91.
Error
Code

TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The test was aborted because system resources
required to run this test were not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the trunk group/member number
of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The test was aborted because the port was seized by a
user for a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the trunk group/member number
of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-91.
Error
Code
1005

Page 10-324

TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed due to incompatible configuration
administered in trunk group form.
1. Verify the following fields on the trunk group
administration screen: Is trunk direction incoming
only? Is trunk the port 24 of the DS1 Interface circuit
pack while common control channel signaling is
specified? Is trunk group type the automatic CO (for
example, FX)?
2. If the trunk has been administered using the above
information, then this test should abort.

1018

ABORT

Thest is disabled via tranlsation. You may want to
determine why the test has been disabled before you
enable it.
1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk
Group’ form is set to ’n’. To enable the test, issue the
change trunk-group x command (x equals the
number of the trunk group to be tested). Then,
change the entry in the ’Maintenance Test’ field on
the form to ’y’.
2. Repeat the test.

1020

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1040

ABORT

The test was aborted because this port may be an
access endpoint.
1. Verify that this port is an access endpoint by issuing
the display port command.
2. If the port has been administered as an access
endpoint, then this is a normal abort.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-91.
Error
Code

Page 10-325

TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2012

ABORT

The test was aborted due to an internal system error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call. This
could cause in-line failures to be reported against the
trunk (no answer would report error type 257 with
auxiliary data 57487 in the error log).
1. Verify that the Trunk Type field on the trunk
administration screen form matches the trunk type
administered on far end switch.
2. Look for DS1-BD/UDS1-BD errors in Hardware Error
Log. If present, refer to the appropriate
DS1-BD/UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
3. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of
5 times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-91.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-326

TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the seizure message was not received
within the allowable time period.
1. Enter the list configuration board PCSS command.
If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, a
failure of test 314 causes a subsequent failure of test
7 due to a firmware bug. Eventually, the board and
all of its ports will be taken out of service and
extraneous on-board alarms will be generated.
Replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later.
2. Verify that the ’Trunk Type’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration’ screen matches the trunk type
administered on far-end switch.
3. Look for DS1-BD or UDS1-BD errors in the hardware
error log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 trunk
circuit pack) maintenance documentation or to the
UDS1-BD (UDS1 trunk circuit pack) maintenance
documentation.
4. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of
5 times.
5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

2053

FAIL

At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1
circuit pack: loss of signal (1281), blue alarm (1793), red
alarm (2049), yellow alarm (2305), or hyperactivity
(1537).
1. Look for these error types in the hardware error log
and then follow the procedures given in the
maintenance documentation that is appropriate for
the error type that was found.

PASS

The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk)

Table 10-91.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-327

TEST #314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued
Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, an
insane board is inserted, or the board is hyperactive
(see Note below).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.
NOTE:
Hyperactivity causes some special problems with
the sequence suggested above. If the ports are
translated after issuing the list config command
but the ’Vintage’ field reports that there is no board
(when there really is a board), then the busyout
board and the release busy board commands
will not work (even though the reset board
command will work). The software will put the
hyperactive board back in service after the
hyperactivity clears.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-328

CO-TRK (CO Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

CO-TRK

MAJOR2

test port PCSSpp l

CO Trunk

CO-TRK

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

CO Trunk

CO-TRK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l

CO Trunk

1.

2.

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); c is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.).
A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded
by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk
group are alarmed.

NOTE:
If ATMS testing is enabled, check the error log for ATMS Errors #3840 and
#3841. If the error log indicates that measurements exceeded acceptable
thresholds, and if no other trouble is found with the test trunk command,
run the ATMS test call with the test analog-testcall port UUCCSSpp full
command.
Central Office (CO) trunks are 2-wire analog lines to the CO which support both
incoming and outgoing calls. A CO trunk circuit pack provides an interface
between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the system’s (4-wire) Time
Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. The CO Trunk circuit packs include:
■

TN747B (United States), 8 port loop start or ground start CO, foreign
exchange (FX), or Wide Area Telecommunications (WATS) trunks.

■

TN438B (Australia), 8 port loop start.

■

TN447 (United Kingdom), 8 port ground start.

■

TN465 (multiple countries), 8 port loop start.

■

TN2138 (Italy), 8 port loop start.

■

TN2147 (multiple countries), 8 port loop start and United Kingdom Earth
Calling or Loop Calling Guarded Clearing.

LOOP START AND UK LOOP CALLING GUARDED CLEARING OPERATION
Idle State - Tip _ ground, Ring = CO Battery

A. Outgoing Call
1. PBX Off-Hook (Seize Message): Closes the Tip-Ring Loop

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-329

a. CO Response: DC loop current + Dial tone
2. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current
a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note)

B. Incoming Call
1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage
a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current
2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop
a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current
3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current
a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note)
NOTE:
Except for the Netherlands Loop Start and UK Loop Calling Guarded
Clearing trunks, CO does not normally provide an On-Hook (Disconnect)
signal.
GROUND START AND UK EARTH CALLING OPERATION
Idle state - Tip _ open, Ring = CO Battery

A. Outgoing Call
1. PBX Off-Hook(Seize Message): Places ground on Ring
a. CO Response: Places ground on Tip
b. PBX Response: close the loop
c. CO Response: provide loop current
d. PBX response: dial out digits
2. PBX On-Hook first (Drop Message): Open the Tip-Ring Loop, no loop
current
a. CO Response: Open circuit on Tip
3. CO On-Hook first (Disconnect): Open circuit on Tip, no loop current.
a. PBX Response: Open Tip-Ring loop
B. Incoming Call
1. CO Off-Hook (Seizure): CO applies ground on Tip, CO applies ringing
voltage
a. PBX Response: Detect ringing, ring destination
2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop
a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-330

3. PBX On-Hook first (Drop Message): Open the Tip-Ring Loop, no loop
current
a. CO Response: Open circuit on Tip
4. CO On-Hook first (Disconnect): Open circuit on Tip, no loop current

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-92.
Error
Type
0

1

CO Trunk Error Log Entries

Aux Data

Associated Test

0

Any

1 (a)

57347

None

15 (b)

any

Port Audit Update
Test (#36)

18

0

130(c)

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

busyout trunk
/

WARNING

OFF

release trunk
/

None

WARNING

ON

test trunk /

257 (a)

50176

None

513 (a)

57364

None

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

769 (a)

57392

None

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

1025 (e)

Any

Demand
Diagnostic Test
(#3)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

test port PCSS sh r 2

1281 (e)

Any

Demand
Diagnostic Test
(#3)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSS sh r 3

1537

Dial Tone Test (#0)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

test port PCSS l r 2

1793

Loop Around and
Conference Test
(#33)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSS l r 3

2049

NPE Cross Talk
Test (#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSS l r 3

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-92.
Error
Type

Page 10-331

CO Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued

Aux Data

Associated Test

2561 (d)

57345

None

2817 (a)

57360

None

2817 (a)

57393

None

2817 (d)

57484

Dial Tone Test (#0)

3073 (d)

57376

None

3329 (d)

57408

None

3329 (d)

57484

Dial Tone Test (#0)

3585 (d)

57424

None

3840 (f)

8000

Analog
Transmission
(#844-848)

3841 (f)

Analog
Transmission
(#844-848)

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

test port PCSS l r 1

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

test port PCSS l r 1

OFF

MINOR

OFF

test analog testcall
UUCSS pp r 2

Continued on next page
1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test
description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the values used in the set options
command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor alarm is upgraded to a
Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.

Notes:
a. These are in-line errors that have no specific test associated with them.
Refer to Table 10-93 for an explanation and appropriate action.
b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-332

d. Aux data 57345 -- Single polarity ringing current
Aux data 57376 -- No loop current on incoming call
Aux data 57408 -- No tip ground detected on outgoing call
Aux data 57424 -- No loop current on outgoing call
Aux data 57484 -- No dial tone on outgoing call
These errors cause the Dial Tone Test (#0) to run and are only considered
a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1537 also
shows up). In this case, the trunk may be put in "Ready-for-Service" state
(shown as "disconnected" by status command), which allows only
incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#0) and follow its outlined
procedures.
If error count associated with this error type is very high (that is, 255) and if
Alarm Status on the Hardware Error Report is "n" (not alarmed), then the
existence of this error type indicates that, despite the fact that many in-line
error messages have been received, all Call Seizure Tests have passed.
Problems at the CO may cause this condition rather than problems with
the PBX.
e. These errors are logged for all versions of the CO-TRK/CO-BD. However,
no MINOR alarms are generated for Central Office Trunks [TN747B] with
vintages V8 or greater. Any failures received by this test are still logged as
Error type 1025/1281 as additional information for the system technician
person.
The system technician person should check for the use of MFT/Range
extenders. If there are extenders present, and there are no other
complaints or maintenance errors against this trunk, then there is a good
chance that Test #3 failed due to excessive loop current and may be
ignored.
f. Test calls made by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System
(ATMS) returned measurements that were outside the acceptable limits.
Use the list testcall detail command to examine specific transmission
parameters that are out of spec, and investigate the trunk for that kind of
noise. If the noise is acceptable, the limits administered on the "change
trunk" screen should be changed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-93.
Error
Type

Page 10-333

CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests

Aux
Data

Description and System Action

System Technician Action

1

57347

Port error. Ringing without ground. This
error is detected on an incoming call on
a ground-start CO trunk. The CO trunk
circuit pack has not detected a Tip
ground before ringing current is
detected. This may indicate that the
ground detector is not working.
However, the call is accepted.

See Note 1 at end of table.

257

50176

Battery reversal detected. This is
usually caused by the CO (often seen
with step-by-step and cross-bar offices
in connection with outgoing calls). This
is detected if the direction of the loop
current changes from normal to reverse
for at least 40 msec. Could occur if the
trunk was just installed and for some
reason the Tip and Ring wires were
reversed at the PBX. If battery reversals
occur during dialing, wrong numbers
may result. The CO should be asked to
remove the battery reversal option.

Refer problem to CO.

513

57364

Ground detector stuck active. After
several occurrences, an on-board minor
alarm is generated.

Run short test. If test aborts
with Error Code 1000,
disconnect Tip and Ring and
repeat short test. If test still
aborts, replace circuit pack.
If test passes, refer problem
to CO. If any other error code
is received, pursue that
problem.

769

57392

CO not releasing after call is dropped
from PBX end (off-board alarm after
several occurrences), or the loop is not
open after a disconnect (on-board
alarm after several occurrences).

For off-board alarm, refer
problem to CO. For on-board
alarm, the circuit pack has an
on-board problem (for
example, stuck relay) and
should be replaced.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-93.

Page 10-334

CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests — Continued

Error
Type

Aux
Data

2561

Description and System Action

System Technician Action

57345

Single polarity ringing current. This error
results from abnormal ringing current,
but does not prevent the incoming call
from being accepted. One cause could
be that the reverse current detector
associated with the port is failing. (Will
not be detected by any tests.) Another
cause could be that normal current is
not detected. In this case, neither
incoming nor outgoing calls can be
completed, and the dial tone test also
fails. The last cause could be that
certain types of noise are present on the
CO line during the silent period of
ringing.

Check for other errors first
and then see Note 4 at end of
table.

2817

57360

Ground but no ringing. This error occurs
on an incoming call on a ground-start
trunk. If ringing is not detected within 5
seconds of the Tip being grounded, the
call is still accepted. If the CO is of the
No. 5ESS. switch type, ringing delays of
more than 5 seconds during heavy
traffic are fairly common.

Check for other errors.

2817

57393

On the TN465, the loop is opening too
slowly after a disconnect. This error
indicates an on-board problem,
although the trunk may be functional.
On the TN2138, CO released the trunk
at least 4 minutes after the PBX
dropped the call. This error code is
log-only and causes no other testing to
occur. No alarm is generated.

Check for other errors.

3073

57376

No loop current on incoming call. The
incoming destination has already
answered and no loop current has been
detected. If this is a hard fault, the dial
tone test and all outgoing calls should
also fail.

Check for other errors.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-93.

Page 10-335

CO Trunk Errors with NO Tests — Continued

Error
Type

Aux
Data

3329

57408

Trunk error. No Tip ground detected on
outgoing call. This error occurs when an
attempt is made to seize a ground-start
CO trunk for an outgoing call and Tip
ground is not detected or the caller
hangs up before Tip ground is
detected.

See Notes 1 and 2 at end of
table.

3585

57424

No loop current on outgoing call. This
error occurs on attempt to seize a loop
or ground-start trunk for an outgoing
call. An error occurs if loop current is
not detected or the caller hangs up
before it is detected.

See Note 3 at end of table.

Description and System Action

System Technician Action

Continued on next page
Notes:
1. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long
Test Sequence. Observe the test results. If any tests fail, refer to the
description of the tests and the associated error codes. Release the port.
If users continue to report troubles, check for other errors and make test
calls to determine whether the problem should be escalated or referred to
the CO.
2. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long
Test Sequence. If Dial Tone Test #0 passes, ignore this error. Release the
port.
3. At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long
Test Sequence. If CO Demand Diagnostic Test #3 passes and this error
keeps occurring, refer problems to CO. Release the port.
4. If the error count associated with this error type is very high (that is, 255)
and all tests pass, then either the reverse current detector is defective or
the CO line is noisy. If the CO line is suspected, Tip and Ring observations
should be made. If the line is determined to be noisy, the problem should
be referred to the CO. If the reverse current detector is defective, ignore
this error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-336

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Dial Tone Test (#0)

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

X
(c)

ND

Order of Investigation

CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) (a)

Short Test
Sequence

X

Loop Around and Conference Test (#33)
Audit Update Test (#36)
Analog Transmission Test (#844-848) (b)

1.

X
(c)

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. A demand test of Diagnostic Test (#3) always returns a PASS indication for
CO-TRK/CO-BD [TN747B] version 8 or greater. However, any errors
produced as a result of this test are logged and produce no alarms.
If errors logged by Test #3 are the only complaints against this trunk, then
the system technician person should check if MFT/Range Extenders are
being used. If extenders are present, then there is a good chance that
there is excessive loop current, which causes Test #3 to log errors.
However, all else being normal, these errors should not affect the
customer.
b. Refer to TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk) Maintenance documentation for a description
of this test.
c. ATMS test are not part of either sequence. They are run either on demand
with the test analog-testcall command or via the ATMS schedule.

Dial Tone Test (#0)
This test attempts to seize a port and checks for the return of a dial tone.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-94.
Error
Code

Page 10-337

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the command display port PCSSpp to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-94.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-338

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Trunk has been administered as incoming-only; dial
tone can only be obtained on outgoing trunks. This is a
normal condition.

1018

ABORT

Test has been disabled via administration.
1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the
Trunk Group Form is set to "n". To enable the test,
issue the change trunk-group x command where
"x" equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance
Tests?" field on the form to "y."

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-94.
Error
Code

Page 10-339

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Trunk was seized, but dial tone could not be detected.
1. Test all administered outgoing ports on the board.
Failure of 1 indicates a problem toward the CO.
2. If all fail, see note below.
3. Check for errors on the TONE-BD or TONE-PT. Clear
any errors found, and repeat the test.
4. If the error has still not cleared, refer the problem to
the CO.
5. If no service problems exist on the port, continue to
use the port until the circuit pack can be replaced
(as a last resort). Perform a trunk test call to see if
the trunk is operable.
NOTE:
If the dial tone test fails for all ports on a circuit
pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present,
either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC
power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power
unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an
AC source. The 645B power unit is used in a
medium cabinet powered by a DC power source.)
The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power
unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit, but not
both types of power units. To investigate problems
with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance
documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW
(carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems)
Maintenance documentation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-94.
Error
Code
2002

Page 10-340

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem.
Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk.
1. If the CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3) also failed,
display the Hardware Error Log. If the CO Demand
Diagnostic Test failed because it could not detect
ground (indicated by Error Type 1281 in the
Hardware Error Log) AND Error Type 3329 or 3585
appears in the Hardware Error Log (with the same
last occurred time as Error Type 1281 and 1537),
replace the circuit pack.
2. Check trunk wiring to ensure good connection;
repeat test if wiring correction made.
3. Locate another identical CO trunk and swap its
wiring with one under test. Repeat test on both
trunks and determine if problem follows trunk or
remains at original port. If problem follows trunk,
refer problem to CO. If problem remains at port,
replace circuit pack and repeat test.
4. If replacing circuit pack does not clear failure,
escalate the problem.

1009

PASS

Detected tone was not pure dial tone. [G1, G3iV1.1-286]
No action required.

PASS

Trunk was seized, and dial tone was detected.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
trunk or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-94.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-341

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued
Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

CO Demand Diagnostic Test (#3)
For ground start trunks only, port circuit pack relays are operated and checks are
made to see if the port can detect and apply ground on the Tip lead. This test
also verifies that there is no external ground on the Ring lead. In the absence of
other failures, the circuit pack should be replaced only if this test fails with the CO
line disconnected.
For the TN2147 World Class Central Office circuit pack, this test also checks the
on-board programmable transmission circuitry that allows the circuit pack to
support the transmission characteristics of several countries.
Table 10-95.
Error
Code

TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-95.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-342

TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Test inapplicable to present configuration. This is a
normal condition.

1018

ABORT

Test has been disabled via administration.
1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the
Trunk Group Form is set to "n". To enable the test,
issue the change trunk-group x command where
"x" equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance
Tests?" field on the form to "y."

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-95.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-343

TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Failure to detect ground or faulty ground detected on
Ring lead. Display the hardware errors for this trunk, to
determine if the fault was on- or-off board. Look for Error
Type 1025 or 1281 (if both appear in the Hardware Error
Log, pick the most recent error). Error Type 1025
indicates a faulty ground detected on Ring lead (an
off-board fault) and Error Type 1281 indicates failure to
detect (internally generated) ground (an on-board fault).
Faulty ground detected on Ring lead (Error Type 1025):
NOTE:
On TN747B vintage 8 and greater circuit packs,
an incoming seizure during this test may cause it
to fail with an off-board fault.
1. Repeat test. If test passes, ignore the original failure.
If test aborts, follow the recommended procedures.
2. Repeat test with CO line removed.
3. If test fails, replace the circuit pack.
4. If test passes, refer problem to CO.
Failure to detect ground (Error Type 1281):
1. Run the long test sequence. If the CO Demand
Diagnostic Test fails, the Dial Tone Test (#0) fails
with Error Code 2002, AND Error Type 3329 or 3585
appears in the Hardware Error Log (with the same
last occurred time as Error Type 1281 and 1537),
replace the circuit pack.
2. Repeat test with CO line removed.
3. If test fails, replace the circuit pack.
4. If test passes, the CO may be drawing too much
current. Refer problem to CO.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-95.
Error
Code
57481

Page 10-344

TEST #3 CO Demand Diagnostic Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
On-board test of programmable transmission circuitry
failed.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

0

PASS

This test verifies that the port is able to apply ground for
outgoing calls and detect ground for incoming calls;
however, it does not provide information on whether a
CO line is actually connected. User-reported troubles on
this port should be investigated by using other port tests
and by examining trunk or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and
provides conferencing functions on a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
usually only part of a port’s long test sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30
seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-96.
Error
Code

Page 10-345

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the Error Log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
Check the CO wiring, check for excessive loop
current, and check the trunk translations. (If the trunk
is translated incorrectly, this test will abort.)
2. If the port status is idle, busyout and release the
trunk, and then retry the command at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test still aborts, replace the circuit pack.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-96.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-346

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-96.
Error
Code

Page 10-347

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the trunk group/member number
of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

0

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
trunk or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-348

Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33)
This test checks the reflective loop around and conference capabilities of a CO
port circuit. The test uses 404-Hz, 1004-Hz, and 2804-Hz tones. Each tone is
transmitted separately through the loop and checked.
Table 10-97. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run
this test.

7

ABORT

Conference Circuit Test aborted.

129

ABORT

The 404-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response to
the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

131

The 1004-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response
to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

133

The 2804-Hz reflective loop around test aborted. Response
to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port
UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable
for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no
calls), check the error log for error type 769 (see the
Error Log table for a description of this error and
required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-349

Table 10-97. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

1002

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have
time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to
TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS
errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling
heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test.
The system may be oversized force.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer
to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer
to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port
UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable
for certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-350

Table 10-97. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

1018

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was disabled via administration. Verify that the
’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk Group’ form is set to
’n’. To enable the test, issue the ’change trunk-group x’
command (x equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested). Then, change the entry in the ’Maintenance Test’
field on the form to ’y’.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable
time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run
this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum
of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-351

Table 10-97. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
7,

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The conference capabilities of the port failed (Error Code 7).

129,

The reflective 404-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission was
detected to or from the port (Error Code 129).

131,
or

The reflective 1004-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission
was detected to or from the port (Error Code 131).

133

The reflective 2804-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission
was detected to or from the port (Error Code 133).
FAULT ISOLATION: Proceed as follows unless power or
tone problems are suspected (see notes on the next page).
1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect the
port from the CO and retry the test. Coordinate this with
the CO, or do it after busy hours; otherwise, the CO may
put the connection out of service.
2. If the retry fails, replace the circuit pack.
3. If the retry passes and no troubles have been reported,
disable the test. If the retry passes and troubles have
been reported, refer the problem to the CO.

More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-352

Table 10-97. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
7,
129,
131,
or
133

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

0

Description/ Recommendation
NOTE:
If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for
all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is
indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack
is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B
DC power unit may be defective. (The 631DB power
unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC
source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium
cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The system
may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack
or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power
units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power
unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation.
To investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit,
refer to the CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
DC-powered systems) Maintenance documentation. If
a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack
is on, replace the pack. If the test fails on more than 1
port, check for errors on the TONE-BD or the
TONE-PT. If errors, take appropriate actions. When the
tone errors are cleared, rerun the test. If the test fails
again, see FAULT ISOLATION above.

PASS

CO Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is successful.
User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated
by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external
wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct.
Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should re-establish
the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-353

Port Audit Update Test (#36)
This test sends updates of the CO port translation for all ports on the circuit pack
that have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against
possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No
response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation
updates. The port translation data includes: ground or loop start trunk, tone or
rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, network balance R/RC, and
disconnect timing.
Table 10-98.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The port has been placed out of service, perhaps by
craft busyout. Use the display port UUCSSpp
command to determine the trunk group/member number
of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal system error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-98.
Error
Code

Page 10-354

TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
This test passed. Translation information was
successfully updated on the circuit pack. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using
other port tests and by examining trunk or external
wiring. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run,
but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is
in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action
is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue
to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Transmission Test (#844-848)
This test is non-destructive.
NOTE:
Tests #844-848 are not supported on a International switch.
These tests are run by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System
(ATMS). They are not part of the long or short trunk test sequences. Instead, they
are run on demand with the test analog-testcall command or as part of ATMS
scheduled testing.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Page 10-355

The test call is run from an analog port on a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit
pack. It attempts to seize a port and make a call to a terminating test line (TTL) on
the trunk’s far end. Transmission performance measurements are made and
compared to administered thresholds. Errors are generated when results fall
outside of ‘‘marginal’’ or ‘‘unacceptable’’ thresholds. Detail and summary
measurement reports are obtainable via the list testcalls command.
Table 10-99.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the "status trunk"
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port unavailable for this test. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description all possible states). You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate timeslots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have timeslots out of service due to TDM bus errors.
Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM bus errors.
1. If system has no TDM bus errors and is not handling
heavy traffic, repeat test at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-99.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-356

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
status trunk to determine when the port is available for
testing.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Trunk has been administered as incoming-only;
transmission tests can only be run on outgoing trunks.

1115

ABORT

The near end test line on the TN771 circuit pack could
not be allocated.
1. Verify that the TN771 circuit pack is in service and
that port 1 is administered and in service with the
status port command.
2. retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
3. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1900

ABORT

The test completion message was not received from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1901

ABORT

This error occurs when the TN771 circuit pack uplinks a
message that is not the proper response for this test.
The anticipated uplink messages are seize, ring or
answer.
1. Verify that the Trunk is administered properly.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1905

ABORT

Intercept tone detected from far end.
1. Get the test line data from theand verify it with the far
end. Dial the test number manually to see if the TTL
is reached. If it is not, then either the number is
wrong, or the far end is administered incorrectly.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-99.
Error
Code
1906

Page 10-357

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Reorder tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1907

ABORT

Other unexpected tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1913

ABORT

Audible Ring detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1914

ABORT

Unidentified interrupted tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905

1915

ABORT

Busy tone detected from far end.
1. Since the test line at the far end was busy. Try the
test again.
2. If the test continues to abort, the problem is with the
far end system.

1918

ABORT

Test progress tone not removed from far end (type 105
test line only).
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1919

ABORT

Unexpected far end release
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1920

ABORT

No response from far end.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1921

ABORT

No data returned from far end.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-99.
Error
Code
1922

Page 10-358

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Steady, unidentifiable tone from far end
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1923

ABORT

Broadband energy detected from far end (such as voice
or announcement).
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1924

ABORT

No test tone from far end
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1938

ABORT

Near-end self test failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1939

ABORT

Loss self check at 0dBm at 1004 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1940

ABORT

Far end noise self check failed.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1941

ABORT

High frequency singing return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1942

ABORT

Echo return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1943

ABORT

Singing return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1944

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 1004 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-99.
Error
Code
1945

Page 10-359

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 404 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1946

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 2804 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1947

ABORT

Noise with tone self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

The test timed out while waiting for a response from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

An internal software error occurred.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT

The test call could not be established, but no information
on why is available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2056

ABORT

An error occurred while trying to obtain results from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CO-TRK (CO Trunk)

Table 10-99.
Error
Code

8000

Page 10-360

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

FAIL

Measured transmission performance was in the
unacceptable range as administered on the trunk group
form. Retrieve a measurement report via the list
testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS thresholds
are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form.
Besides the facility, test failures can be caused by faulty
test lines or switch paths. If the measurements point to a
facility problem, report the results to the trunk vendor.

FAIL

Measured transmission performance was in the
marginal range as administered on the trunk group form.
This generally means that the trunk is usable but has an
undesirable amount of noise or loss. If the user does not
report unacceptable effects, it may not be necessary to
take any action. Retrieve a measurement report via the
list testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS
thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group
form.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Page 10-361

CONFIG (System Configuration)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
CONFIG

Alarm
Level
none

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
none

Full Name of MO
System Configuration

The System Configuration maintenance object (MO) oversees logical insertion
and removal of circuit packs in the system. When Switch Control detects that a
circuit pack is present in a port slot, it informs System Configuration and System
Configuration queries the circuit pack to determine the type and vintage of the
circuit pack. Similarly, when Switch Control detects that a circuit pack has been
removed from a port slot, it informs System Configuration.
There are no alarms or tests for System Configuration, but three types of errors
are logged to the Hardware Error Log (see below).

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
System Configuration Error Log Entries
Error Type
0

1

2-117(a)

Aux
Data

Associated Test

0

Any

0-2

none

257(b)

Any

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

none

none

1002-1117(c)

1.

Alarm
Level

0-2

none

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates that a Port circuit pack in the system did not respond
to a circuit pack type inquiry. Follow the procedures outlined in (b) to
determine if there is an error.
b. This error indicates that less than 25% of Trunk Group is available.
c. This error indicates that a Port circuit pack in the system did not respond
to a vintage inquiry.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Page 10-362

As a result of either of these errors, a Port circuit pack may be physically
inserted in a Port slot, but the system may not recognize its existence. The
Error Type and Aux Data fields specify the location of the port circuit pack
that caused the error as indicated in Table 10-100. If the Error Type field is
greater than 1000, subtract 1000 from the Error Type field before
consulting the table.
If more than one CONFIG error is logged with an Aux Data of 1 at the
same time, investigate any EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface) errors before
proceeding.
Once the Port circuit pack location has been determined from Table
10-100, use the list configuration all command to determine if the circuit
pack is inserted. If not, insert the pack. If the circuit pack has already been
inserted but the error persists, replace the circuit pack.
Table 10-100.

System Configuration Error Log Entries

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

1

0

GAMUT Circuit Pack1

1

1

GAMUT Circuit Pack1

2

0

1E01

2

1

2E01

2

2

3E01

3

0

1E02

3

1

2E02

3

2

3E02

4

0

1E03

4

1

2E03

4

2

3E03

5

0

1E04

5

1

2E04

5

2

3E04

6

0

1E05

6

1

2E05

6

2

3E05

7

0

1E06

7

1

2E06

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-363

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

7

2

3E06

8

0

1E07

8

1

2E07

8

2

3E07

9

0

1E08

9

1

2E08

9

2

3E08

10

0

1E09

10

1

2E09

10

2

3E09

11

0

1E10

11

1

2E10

11

2

3E10

12

0

1E11

12

1

2E11

12

2

3E11

13

0

1E12

13

1

2E12

13

2

3E12

14

0

1E13

14

1

2E13

14

2

3E13

15

0

1E14

15

1

2E14

15

2

3E14

16

0

1E15

16

1

2E15

16

2

3E15

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-364

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

17

0

1E16

17

1

2E16

17

2

3E16

18

0

1E17

18

1

2E17

18

2

3E17

19

0

1E18

19

1

2E18

19

2

3E18

20

0

1E19

20

1

2E19

20

2

3E19

21

0

1E20

21

1

2E20

21

2

3E20

24

0

1B Network Control

25

0

1B Network Control

26

0

1A Network Control

26

1

Maintenance Circuit Pack

27

0

1A Network Control

27

1

2A Tone-Clock

28

0

1A Tone-Clock

28

1

2A01

28

2

3A01

29

0

1A Tone-Clock

29

1

2A02

29

2

3A02

30

0

1A01

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-365

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

30

1

2A03

30

2

3A03

31

0

1A02

31

1

2A04

31

2

3A04

32

0

1A2 Processor Interface

33

0

1B2 Processor Interface

34

0

1D01

34

1

2D01

34

2

3D01

35

0

1D02

35

1

2D02

35

2

3D02

36

0

1D03

36

1

2D03

36

2

3D03

37

0

1D04

37

1

2D04

37

2

3D04

38

0

1D05

38

1

2D05

38

2

3D05

39

0

1D06

39

1

2D06

39

2

3D06

40

0

1D07

40

1

2D07

40

2

3D07

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-366

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

41

0

1D08

41

1

2D08

41

2

3D08

42

0

1D09

42

1

2D09

42

2

3D09

43

0

1D10

43

1

2D10

43

2

3D10

44

0

1D11

44

1

2D11

44

2

3D11

45

0

1D12

45

1

2D12

45

2

3D12

46

0

1D13

46

1

2D13

46

2

3D13

47

0

1D14

47

1

2D14

47

2

3D14

48

0

1D15

48

1

2D15

48

2

3D15

49

0

1D16

49

1

2D16

49

2

3D16

50

0

1D17

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-367

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

50

1

2D17

50

2

3D17

51

0

1D18

51

1

2D18

51

2

3D18

52

0

1D19

52

1

2D19

52

2

3D19

53

0

1D20

53

1

2D20

53

2

3D20

56

0

1A03

56

1

2A05

56

2

3A05

57

0

1A04

57

1

2A06

57

2

3A06

58

0

1A05

58

1

2A07

58

2

3A07

59

0

1A06

59

1

2A08

59

2

3A08

60

0

1A07

60

1

2A09

60

2

3A09

61

0

1A08

61

1

2A10

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-368

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

61

2

3A10

62

0

1A09

62

1

2A11

62

2

3A11

63

0

1A10

63

1

2A12

63

2

3A12

66

0

1B01

66

1

2B01

66

2

3B01

67

0

1B02

67

1

2B02

67

2

3B02

68

0

1B03

68

1

2B03

68

2

3B03

69

0

1B04

69

1

2B04

69

2

3B04

70

0

1B05

70

1

2B05

70

2

3B05

71

0

1B06

71

1

2B06

71

2

3B06

72

0

1B07

72

1

2B07

72

2

3B07

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-369

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

73

0

1B08

73

1

2B08

73

2

3B08

74

0

1B09

74

1

2B09

74

2

3B09

75

0

1B10

75

1

2B10

75

2

3B10

76

0

1B11

76

1

2B11

76

2

3B11

77

0

1B12

77

1

2B12

77

2

3B12

78

0

1B13

78

1

2B13

78

2

3B13

79

0

1B14

79

1

2B14

79

2

3B14

80

0

1B15

80

1

2B15

80

2

3B15

81

0

1B16

81

1

2B16

81

2

3B16

82

0

1B17

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-370

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

82

1

2B17

82

2

3B17

83

0

1B18

83

1

2B18

83

2

3B18

84

0

1B19

84

1

2B19

84

2

3B19

85

0

1B20

85

1

2B20

85

2

3B20

88

1

2A13

88

2

3A13

89

1

2A14

89

2

3A14

90

1

2A15

90

2

3A15

91

1

2A16

91

2

3A16

92

1

2A17

92

2

3A17

93

0

1B Tone-Clock

93

1

2A18

93

2

3A18

94

0

1A1 Processor Interface

94

1

2A19

94

2

3A19

95

0

1B1 Processor Interface

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-371

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

98

0

1C01

98

1

2C01

98

2

3C01

99

0

1C02

99

1

2C02

99

2

3C02

100

0

1C03

100

1

2C03

100

2

3C03

101

0

1C04

101

1

2C04

101

2

3C04

102

0

1C05

102

1

2C05

102

2

3C05

103

0

1C06

103

1

2C06

103

2

3C06

104

0

1C07

104

1

2C07

104

2

3C07

105

0

1C08

105

1

2C08

105

2

3C08

106

0

1C09

106

1

2C09

106

2

3C09

107

0

1C10

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-372

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

107

1

2C10

107

2

3C10

108

0

1C11

108

1

2C11

108

2

3C11

109

0

1C12

109

1

2C12

109

2

3C12

110

0

1C13

110

1

2C13

110

2

3C13

111

0

1C14

111

1

2C14

111

2

3C14

112

0

1C15

112

1

2C15

112

2

3C15

113

0

1C16

113

1

2C16

113

2

3C16

114

0

1C17

114

1

2C17

114

2

3C17

115

0

1C18

115

1

2C18

115

2

3C18

116

0

1C19

116

1

2C19

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CONFIG (System Configuration)

Table 10-100.

Page 10-373

System Configuration Error Log Entries — Continued

Error Type

Aux Data

Port Circuit Pack Location

116

2

3C19

117

0

1C20

117

1

2C20

117

2

3C20

other

-

Unknown Circuit Pack

Continued on next page

1.

Development Laboratory only

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)

Page 10-374

CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided
Alarming Device)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
CUST-ALM

1.

Alarm
Level
none

Initial Command to Run1
test customer-alarm PC

Full Name of MO
Customer-Provided Alarming Device

Where PC is an appropriate port network number and carrier (for a High or Critical Reliability
system, specify 1a or 1b).

The system provides customers a way to connect their own alarm indication
device to a switch. The CUST-ALM maintenance object represents this
Customer-Provided Alarming Device (CPAD). When an alarm occurs at least to
the level to which the CPAD is administered, the CPAD in the Processor Port
Network (PPN) and in the Expansion Port Network (EPN) are activated. The
CPAD is administered by the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form
(CPE Alarm Activation Level field). The CPAD is connected to the
Maintenance/Tape Processor in the PPN (in a High or Critical Reliability system,
the CPAD is connected to both Maintenance/Tape Processors) and to the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN. The valid levels to which to set the CPE
Alarm Activation Level are: none, warning, minor, or major. The CPAD is also
activated within a cabinet whenever Emergency Transfer is invoked within that
cabinet. The CUST-ALM MO is not maintained by the system, and does not
generate any alarms. If a problem is suspected with the CPAD, it may be tested
using the test customer-alarm command, which activates the device by closing
the relay on either the Maintenance/Tape Processor or the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack (whichever is specified) for 1 minute. In a High or Critical Reliability
system, the CPAD on the PPN is connected to the Maintenance/Tape Processor
on both carrier A and carrier B, and the test customer-alarm command can
specify which Maintenance/Tape Processor should close its relay. The repeat
parameter may be used to close the relay for a longer length of time (5 minutes is
the suggested repeat value).
The CPAD is also activated within a cabinet whenever Emergency Transfer is
invoked within that cabinet. The CUST-ALM MO is not maintained by the system,
and does not generate any alarms. If a problem is suspected with the CPAD, it
may be tested using the test customer-alarm command, which activates the
device by closing the relay on either the Maintenance/Tape Processor or the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack (whichever is specified) for 1 minute. In a High or
Critical Reliability system, the CPAD on the PPN is connected to the
Maintenance/Tape Processor on both carrier A and carrier B, and the test
customer-alarm command can specify which Maintenance/Tape Processor
should close its relay. The repeat parameter may be used to close the relay for a
longer length of time (5 minutes is the suggested repeat value).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)

Page 10-375

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-101.
Error
Type
none

Customer Provided Alarming Device Error Log Entries
Aux
Data
none

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

none

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
There are no errors associated with the CPAD CUST-ALM MO. The test
customer-alarm PC command is provided to allow a technician to check that the
customer-provided alarming device is correctly installed and functional. It is
recommended that this test be run at least once after both the switch and the
customer alarm have been installed.
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test (#115)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test (#115)
This test closes the relay that activates the CPAD for 1 minute only within the port
network specified. If it takes longer than 1 minute to check that the CPAD has
been activated, the Repeat field on the test customer-alarm PC command can
be used to close the relay for up to 99 minutes. Note that when the repeat option
is used, the results for Test #115 come back immediately and, for each test that
passed, the CPAD is kept on for that many minutes. The CPAD does not go off
after 1 minute and then come back on. Instead, the CPAD is kept on continuously
for the entire time. If the CPAD is being activated and deactivated in a flickering
fashion, there is a problem with either the CPAD, or the Maintenance/Tape
Processor, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
CUST-ALM (Customer-Provided Alarming Device)

Table 10-102.

Page 10-376

TEST #115 Customer-Provided Alarming Device Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

(blank)
1000
2029

ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The switch software successfully sent the request to the
Maintenance/Tape Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack to turn on
the CPAD. The CPAD must be physically inspected to verify that it is
working. If the CPAD is working and the customer has complained that the
CPAD did not indicate a system alarm when it occurred, then check the
administered levels for turning on the CPAD via the Display
System-Parameter Maintenance screen form. Compare these levels with
the customer’s specifications. If Test #115 passes, and the CPAD is not
being activated, check the connection of the CPAD to the
Maintenance/Tape Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If the
CPAD can be activated but cannot be deactivated, first check to make
sure Emergency Transfer is not activated in the affected port network via
the status system command. Emergency Transfer can be forced to
manual OFF by the Emergency Transfer switch on the Maintenance/Tape
Processor or EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If Emergency Transfer is OFF
and the CPAD still cannot be deactivated, check the administered levels
for the CPAD via the Display System-Parameter Maintenance screen form
and compare against the alarm levels currently present in the system
(display alarms command).

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-377

DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

DATA-BD

WARNING

test network-control

Network Control Circuit Pack

DATA-BD

MINOR

test network-control

Network Control Circuit Pack

DATA-BD

WARNING

test network-control

Network Control Circuit Pack

The TN777 or TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following
objects: the SW-CTL (Switch Control), four DATA-CHLs (Network Control Data
Channels), the DATA-CON (Network Control Driver), and the generic hardware
that interfaces with the TDM Bus (that is, DATA-BD). The generic hardware
DATA-BD is described here.
All circuit packs that have an interface with the TDM Bus have a common set of
generic hardware that provides the TDM Bus interface. Consequently, these
circuit packs share a common set of tests that verify the integrity of the generic
hardware. The circuit packs and common set of tests that they share are
described in XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
Because the Network Control circuit pack has this common set of hardware, it is
classified in the XXX-BD Maintenance documentation as a service port circuit
pack.
A DEFINITY system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack.
A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network Control circuit packs: one
that resides in the Active SPE control carrier, and one that resides in the Standby
SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid",
and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description
of High and Critical Reliability systems.
Because the Network Control circuit pack is a SPE circuit pack, it has two
important characteristics that make maintenance on the DATA-BD MO different
from the maintenance on other XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) MOs. First,
because the Network Control circuit pack has the SW-CTL (Switch Control) on it,
it must always be physically installed in the system. Therefore, the DATA-BD MO
is always logically administered. Second, because the Network Control circuit
pack is a SPE circuit pack, it has no PCSS designation. Therefore, the DATA-BD
MO cannot be accessed by system technician via the test board PCSS, reset
board PCSS, busyout board PCSS, or release board PCSS commands. The
only system technician access to the DATA-BD MO is via the test
network-control [a | b] [short | long] command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-378

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-103.
Error
Type

Network Control Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test data-module
 sh r 1

1 (a)

0

Data Channel Reset
Test (#107)

MINOR

ON

test data-module
 l

23 (b)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

257

Any

Control Channel Test
(#52)

MINOR

ON

257 (c)

0

None

513 (d)

Any

None

769 (e)

4358

None

1025 (f)

4363

NPE Audit Test (#50)

1538 (g)

Data Channel Reset
Test (#107)

3840 (h)

Any

None

3841(i)

Any

None

3999(j)

Any

None

1.

test network-control
[a | b] sh r 20

test network-control
[a | b] sh
MINOR

ON

test data-module
 l

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates the DATA-BD portion of the Network Control circuit
pack stopped functioning. Since the Network Control circuit pack cannot
be reset via the reset board PCSS command, the Data Channel Reset
Test (#107) in the Long Test Sequence for the DATA-CHLs and
DATA-CON must be used to reset it as follows:
1. Issue the list data command to determine if one, or more, Network
Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) is administered.
NOTE:
A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by
a "type" value of "netcon."
2. If a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is not administered,
use the add data-module [ | next] command to administer a
DATA-CHL.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-379

3. From the form resulting from the list data command, choose a
Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) whose port field value
indicates that it is on the same carrier (A or B) as the Network
Control circuit pack to be reset.
4. Issue the test data-module  long command using the
extension for the DATA-CHL chosen in Step 3.

!

WARNING:
Issuing this command drops all data channel extensions. See
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Maintenance
documentation first.

If the red LED stays on, then replace the circuit pack.
b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically
installed. The alarm is cleared when the circuit pact is installed.
c. This error indicates transient communications problems with this circuit
pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
d. This error indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on the
circuit pack. The circuit pack should be replaced.
e. This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this circuit pack.
f. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
g. This error indicates the DATA-BD portion of the Network Control circuit
pack is out-of-service. Since the Network Control circuit pack cannot be
reset via the reset board PCSS command, the Data Channel Reset Test
(#107) in the Long Test Sequence for the DATA-CHL and DATA-CON
must be used to reset it as follows:
1. Issue the list data command to determine if one or more Network
Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) are administered.
NOTE:
A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by
a "type" value of "netcon."
2. If a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is not administered,
use the add data-module [ | next] command to administer a
DATA-CHL.
3. From the form resulting from the list data command, choose a
Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) whose port field value
indicates that it is on the same carrier (A or B) as the Network
Control circuit pack to be reset.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-380

■

Refer to “DATA-CHL” before issuing the test networkcontrol [a | b] long command to determine if CDR, System
Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are using the
DATA-CHLs and how to busyout these links prior to running
destructive tests on the DATA-CHLs.

■

Refer to “SW-CTL” before issuing the test network-control
[a | b] long command to determine the consequences of
running the Switch Control Reset Test (Test #93).

4. Issue the test data-module  long command using the
extension for the DATA-CHL chosen in Step 3.
If the error happens again within 15 minutes, then replace the
circuit pack.
h. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
i. In a High Critical Reliability system, the vintage number of the TN777B
Network Control circuit pack must be greater than or equal to 17. The aux
value for error 3841 indicates the vintage of the current TN777B installed.
j. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the NPE Audit Test, for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

NPE Audit Test (#50) (a)
Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

X

ND

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-381

Note:
a. Refer to “DATA-CHL” and “SW-CTL” for other tests associated with
DATA-BD maintenance.

NPE Audit Test (#50)
The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the
network connectivity information for all the NPEs on the circuit pack.
Table 10-104.
Error
Code

TEST #50 NPE Audit Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1019

ABORT

Test already in progress.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The circuit pack’s NPEs have been updated with their translation.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies
its records.
Table 10-105.
Error
Code

TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

Communication with this circuit pack is successful.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-382

DATA-CHL (Network Control Data
Channel)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
DATA-CHL1
DATA-CHL

1.
2.

3.

2

Alarm
Level
MINOR
WARNING

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

test data-module l 
test data-module sh 

Network Control Data Channel
3

Network Control Data Channel

The test data-module  long command drops all sessions on all of the Network Control ports.
Refer to Data Channel Reset Test (#107).
 is the extension of the Data Channel to be tested. The extension can be determined by
issuing the list data-module command from the administration terminal. The resulting form
provides a mapping from the 1CXXpp designation of the Data Channel to its corresponding
extension, where pp indicates which one of the four Data Channels is alarmed (01, 02, 03, or 04)
and C indicates the carrier on which the alarmed Data Channel resides (A for carrier A or B for
carrier B).
The test data-module  long command drops all sessions on all of the Network Control ports.
Refer to Data Channel Reset Test (#107).

The TN777 or TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following
objects: the SW-CTL (Switch Control), four Data Channels, the Driver, and the
generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM Bus (that is, DATA-BD). The Data
Channels are the subject of this section. The Driver is also described.
Together, the four DATA-CHLs and the DATA-CON provide a data
communications interface that allows data terminal equipment connected to port
circuit packs to communicate with software applications running on the system.
The DATA-CON represents the interface to the control channel of the TDM Bus.
Each DATA-CHL represents a dial-up/dial-out asynchronous communications
port that interfaces to the TDM Bus. The DATA-CON supports the signaling
required to establish and tear down a connection between the terminal
equipment and a software application. Data is transported between the terminal
equipment and the software application over the connection established over the
DATA-CHL.
A system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack (DATA-BD).
Thus, there is single set of four DATA-CHLs. A High or Critical Reliability system
has two Network Control circuit packs: one that resides in the Active SPE control
carrier, and one that resides in the Standby SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter
6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Maintenance documentation for descriptions of High and Critical Reliability
systems.
Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs) may be used to support the
following features and functions:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-383

■

Establishment of a connection over which to log CDR data to a printer or
other storage unit. This connection is called PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR
Link).

■

Establishment of connection(s) over which to log PMS, Automatic
Wakeup, and Emergency Access to Attendant data to a Journal printer.
This connection is called PMS-PRINT/JRNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link).

■

Establishment of a connection to a customer-owned PMS. This connection
is called the PMS-LINK.

■

Establishment of a connection to system printer. This connection is called
the System Printer Link (SYS-PRNT).

■

Establishment of connection(s) for up to two secondary administration
terminals.

■

Saving announcements from the ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) to
tape.

■

Restoring announcements from tape to the ANN-BD (Announcement
Circuit Pack).

■

Maintenance testing of the DATA-CHLs and DATA-CON.

From the viewpoint of administration, the four DATA-CHLs on a Network Control
circuit pack are numbered 01 through 04. In a system with a single SPE or in the
Active SPE of a system with High or Critical Reliability, each DATA-CHL may be
assigned a unique extension using the add data-module [  | next ]
command. These extensions are called active extensions. When assigning an
active extension to a DATA-CHL XX (where XX is 01, 02, 03, or 04) the Add
Data-Module form also requires the user to assign a unique maintenance
extension to the corresponding Standby SPE DATA-CHL XX. The maintenance
extension is required even when the system does not High or Critical Reliability;
that is, even when there are no Standby SPE DATA-CHLs. In a High or Critical
Reliability system, a Standby SPE DATA-CHL is tested by using its maintenance
extension to identify it.
NOTE:
If a DATA-CHL or the DATA-CON becomes defective on the Network
Control in a system with a single SPE, the Network Control circuit pack
cannot be replaced without powering down the system.
Figure 10-24 illustrates the logical decomposition of DATA-CHL (Network Control
Channel) and the DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) into software and
hardware components. The figure also shows the interface to the switch software
via the memory bus and to terminal equipment via the TDM Bus and port circuit
packs.
As indicated in the figure, DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common Dual Port RAM
(DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware, and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a
common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if DATA-CHL 1 is
defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-384

DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be defective and vice
versa.
1. Determine if CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are
using the DATA-CHLs and busyout these links if it is necessary to use the
test network-control [a | b] long command.
2. Refer to SW-CTL (Switch Control) Maintenance documentation before
executing the test network-control [a | b] long command to determine
the consequences of running the Switch Control Reset Test (Test #93).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-385

SWITCH
SOFTWARE
APPLICATIONS

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CON

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

DATA-CHL
SOFTWARE

MEMORY BUS

NETWORK CONTROL CIRCUIT PACK(TN773)

DATA-CON
DPR

DATA-CHLs
1&2
DPR

DATA-CHLs
3&4
DPR

DATA-CON
HARDWARE

DATA-CHLs
1&2
HARDWARE

DATA-CHLs
3&4
HARDWARE

SWITCH CONTROL
(SW-CTL)

GENERIC TDM BUS
INTERFACE
(DATA-BD)

DATA-CON AND DATA-CHLs

TDM BUS

DATA LINE
CIRCUIT PACK
(TN726)

POOLED MODEM
CIRCUIT PACK
(TN758)

ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA
UNIT

Figure 10-24.

PRINTER
OR
TERMINAL

DIGITAL LINE
CIRCUIT PACK
(TN754 OR
TN754B)

PROCESSOR
DATA MODULE
OR TRUNK
DATA MODULE
OR DIGITAL
TERMINAL
DATA MODULE

DATA-CON (Network Control Driver)

ANNOUNCEMENT
CIRCUIT PACK
(TN750)

PRINTER
OR
TERMINAL

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-386

Status of Network Control Data Channels
In order to perform maintenance testing on the Network Control DATA-CHLs, the
DATA-CHLs cannot be busy with one of the functions described previously. A
series of system technician commands can be used to determine if the
DATA-CHLs are busy and, if so, to determine the function for which they are
being used. This series of system technician commands is described below and
should be done before testing the DATA-CHLs.
Issue the list data-module command to determine the extensions for the
administered Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
NOTE:
A Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) is identified by a "type" value
of "netcon."
For each Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL) on the Active SPE,
determine if the DATA-CHL is busy by issuing the status data-module 
command using the DATA-CHL’s extension. If the DATA-CHL is busy, the
Service State field in the resulting form will be in service/active. However, the
form does not indicate the reason the DATA-CHL is busy. This must be
determined using other system technician commands.
Use the procedures below to determine whether busy Network Control Data
Channels (DATA-CHLs) are being used for CDR, Journal Printer, or PMS Links. If
a DATA-CHL is busy with one of these links then, in order to test the DATA-CHL,
the link must be busied out using busyout smdr-link, busyout journal-printer
wakeup-log, busyout journal-printer pms-log, or busyout pms-link
command, respectively. Do not issue any of these busyout commands unless
instructed to do so while investigating Error Codes according to the "System
Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes" subsection. If one
of these links must be busied out to perform maintenance testing, restore the link
to service according to PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link),
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link), and PMS-LINK Maintenance
documentation, respectively.
If a DATA-CHL is busy but is not being used for one of these links, then it is being
used for a secondary administration terminal connection or for maintenance
testing. If it is being used for a secondary administration terminal connection,
then in order to test the DATA-CHL that the connection is using, the DATA-CHL
must be busied out using the busyout data-module  command.
NOTE:
The busyout data-module  command causes the connection over
the associated DATA-CHL to be dropped. Do not issue this command
unless instructed to do so.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-387

If the DATA-CHL must be busied out in order to perform maintenance testing, the
secondary administration terminal connection must be re-established by
redialing the DATA-CHL.

CDR Links
1. Issue the status smdr-link command to see if an CDR Link has been
established. If the Link State field is "Up," then the CDR Link may be using
one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
2. Issue the display system features command and go to the CDR
subsection on Page 2 of the resulting form. Note the values in the Primary
Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields. If the values are
extensions, then the CDR Link is using one of the Network Control Data
Channels (DATA-CHLs).
3. For each of the extensions in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary
Output Extension fields, issue the status data-module  command
using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the
resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the indicated port is
a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL).
4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the
Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of
"netcon." If so, then there is an CDR Link over that DATA-CHL.

System Printer Links
1. Issue the status sp-link command to see if a System Printer Link has
been established. If the Link State field is "Up," then the System Printer
Link may be using one of the Network Control Data Channels
(DATA-CHLs).
2. Issue the display system features command and go to the System
Printer subsection on Page 2 of the resulting form. Note the values in the
Primary Output Extension and Secondary Output Extension fields. If the
values are extensions, then the System Printer Link is using one of the
Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
3. For each of the extensions in the Primary Output Extension and Secondary
Output Extension fields, issue the status data-module  command
using the extension. Note the value in the Connected Ports field of the
resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the indicated port is
a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL).
4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the
Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of
"netcon." If so, then there is a System Printer Link over that DATA-CHL.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-388

Journal Printer Links
1. Issue the status journal-link wakeup-log and status journal-link
pms-log commands to see if one or both of these Journal Printer Links
have been established. If the Link State field is "Up" for either of these,
then that Journal Printer Link may be using one of the Network Control
Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
2. Issue the display system hospitality command and note the values in
the Extension of Journal/System Printer and Extension of PMS Log Printer
fields. If either of these values are extensions, then that Journal Printer Link
is using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
3. For each of the extensions in the Extension of Journal/Schedule Printer
and Extension of PMS Log Printer fields, issue the status data-module
 command using the extension. Note the value in the Connected
Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the field, then the
indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL).
4. Issue the list data-module command, locate each port indicated in the
Connected Ports fields, and determine if that port has a "type" value of
"netcon." If so, then there is a Journal Printer Link over that DATA-CHL.

PMS Link
1. Issue the status pms-link command to see if a PMS Link has been
established. If the Link State field is "Up," the PMS Link may be using one
of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
2. Issue the display system hospitality command and note the value in the
Extension of the PMS field. If this value is an extension, the PMS Link is
using one of the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).
3. For the extension in the Extension of PMS field, issue the status
data-module  command using the extension. Note the value in the
Connected Ports field of the resulting form. If there is a port value in the
field, the indicated port is a Network Control Data Channel (DATA-CHL).
4. Issue the list data-module command, locate the port indicated in the
Connected Ports field, and determine if that port has a "type" value of
"netcon." If so, there is a PMS Link over that DATA-CHL.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-389

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-106.
Error
Type

Network Control Data Channel Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

Associated Test

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01(a)

0

Any

Any

Any

test data-module  sh r 1

1

Any

Local Loop Back Test
(#111)

MINOR

ON

test data-module  sh r 3

18 (b)

0

busyout data-module


WARNING

OFF

release data-module 

None

WARNING

ON

test data-module  sh

130
257

Any

Remote Maintenance
Loop Around Test
(#109)

MINOR

ON

test data-module  sh r 5

513

Any

Crosstalk Test (#110)

MINOR

ON

test data-module  sh r 3

769

Any

Dual Port RAM Test
(#108)

MINOR

ON

test data-module  l r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
b. In a system with the duplication option, a busyout of the DATA-CHL is
preserved across an SPE interchange. When an SPE interchange occurs,
and the DATA-CHL is busied out, the busyout state is transferred to the
corresponding DATA-CHL on the new active SPE while the DATA-CHL on
the former active SPE is released.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
There are two system technician test commands that include the Network Control
Data Channels (DATA-CHLs). The test data-module  [short | long]
command tests the single DATA-CHL that has the extension specified by .
The test network-control [a | b] [short | long] command tests each
administered DATA-CHL that resides on the Network Control circuit pack in the
specified carrier.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-390

Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Data
Channel Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND 1

Data Channel Reset Test (#107) (a)

X

D

Data Channel Dual Port Ram Test (#108) (a)

X

D

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Note:
a. Determine if CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Links are
using the DATA-CHLs and busyout these links if it is necessary to use the
test network-control [a | b] long command.

Table 10-107.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: DATA-CHL
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

X

ND

Data Channel Reset Test (#107)

X

D

Data Channel DPR Test (#108)

X

D

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Control Channel Test (Common Port Circuit Pack) (#52) (a)
NPE Audit Test (Common Port Circuit Pack) (#50) (a)

X

Data Channel Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111)

X

X

ND

Switch Control Reset Test (#93) (b)

X

D

EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#325) (b)

X

D

Time-of-Day Clock Test (#95) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Interface Test (#92) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Transmission Test (#94) (b)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-107.

Page 10-391

System Technician-Demanded Tests: DATA-CHL — Continued
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#324) (b)

X

X

ND

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (c)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (c)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (c)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Match Test (#697) (c)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (c)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (c)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (c)
Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (c)

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Notes:
a. Refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests.
b. Refer to SW-CTL (Switch Control) Maintenance documentation for a
description of these tests.
c. Refer to the CARD-MEM MO section for information on this test.

Data Channel Reset Test (#107)
This test is destructive.
This test resets the entire data communications interface provided by the
DATA-CON and the four DATA-CHLs. All existing connections over the
DATA-CHLs are dropped.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Table 10-108.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-392

TEST #107 Data Channel Reset Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2011
2012
2013
2016
2017
2020
2022
2030

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a
description of these error codes.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are unavailable.

ABORT

An ABORT has one of two different meanings:
1. System resources required to run this test are not available.
2. Internal system error

10704

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Try the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to reset.
1. Execute the command again.
2. If the problem persists, replace the TN777 Network Control circuit
pack.
After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day
clock must be set using the set time command. If this is a high or critical
reliability system, set the Time-of-Day clocks as described in Chapter 6,
"Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid", to ensure that the clocks on both
Network Control circuit packs are synchronized.

PASS

The circuit pack initializes correctly.

Continued on next page

Data Channel Dual Port RAM Test (#108)
This test is destructive.
This is a coordinated test of the dual port RAM that is shared between the
hardware and software composing the DATA-CON. Control messages and data
are passed through this dual port RAM to establish and tear down connections
over the DATA-CHLs. This test requests each side to read and write the dual port
RAM, first one at a time and then simultaneously in alternate locations.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-393

This test prevents any control stimuli from being received from or sent to the TDM
Bus control channel preventing the establishment of new connections over the
DATA-CHLs. However, existing connections are not (and cannot) be dropped.
Table 10-109.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #108 Data Channel Dual Port RAM Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2020

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

FAIL

The DATA-CON dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Either the
software cannot correctly read from it and/or write to it or the hardware
cannot correctly read from it and/or write to it. Connections cannot be
established over the DATA-CHLs.
1. Execute the command again.
2. If the problem persists, replace the TN777 Network Control circuit
pack. After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its
Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command.

PASS

The DATA-CON dual port RAM is functioning. Connections can be
established over the DATA-CHLs.

Continued on next page

Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around
Test (#109)
This test verifies the integrity of the entire DATA-CHL (that is, the software, dual
port RAM, and hardware that compose it). It verifies that a connection can be
established over the DATA-CHL and that the DATA-CHL can correctly send and
receive data over the connection (that is, over the TDM Bus). The test actually
involves two DATA-CHLs: the DATA-CHL that is the target of the test and a
second, arbitrary, unbusy DATA-CHL. A connection is set up by placing a call
out from the arbitrary DATA-CHL and into the target DATA-CHL. Data is looped
over the connection in each direction (that is, the target DATA-CHL is tested as
both a sender of data and a receiver of data). The test checks that the data
received by one DATA-CHL is the same as the data that was sent by the other
DATA-CHL.
Because it establishes a connection between two Network Control Data
Channels (DATA-CHLs) across the TDM Bus, this test does more than just verify
the integrity of the target DATA-CHL. It also verifies the integrity of the
DATA-CON (by establishing the connection) and of the TDM Bus and
Tone-Clock circuit pack (by sending and receiving data).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Page 10-394

If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether
the defective DATA-CHL is the target DATA-CHL or the arbitrarily chosen
DATA-CHL, or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON, TDM Bus, or Tone-Clock
circuit pack. The results of running Tests #107, #108, #110, and #111 on the
DATA-CHL can be used to determine whether the target DATA-CHL is defective.
Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common
Dual Port RAM (DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4
share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds
that DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice
versa. Similarly, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4
is likely to be defective and vice versa.
NOTE:
If an Error Code is encountered recommending that an CDR, System
Printer, Journal Printer, and/or PMS Link be busied out, restore each busied
out link to service according to PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link),
SYS-PRNT (System Printer Link), JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link), or
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) Maintenance documentation,
respectively, before concluding work on the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Table 10-110.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-395

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have 1 of 2 different meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. Internal system error
Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the
target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then
there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL:
1. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that
is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or
secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously
in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for
errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors,
there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed
with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the
target DATA-CHL.
2. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link)
or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only).
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.Restore
any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link to
service before moving on to another activity.

30
31
32
33
40
41
70
75

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-396

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different
meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. No other DATA-CHLs are administered and, therefore, not available
to place the call to the target DATA-CHL.
c. All other DATA-CHLs are busy and, therefore, not available to place
the call to the target DATA-CHL.
d. System resources required to run this test are not available.
e. Internal system error
Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the
target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then
there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL:
1. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that
is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or
secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously
in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for
errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors,
there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed
with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the
target DATA-CHL.
2. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link)
or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection only).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code

Page 10-397

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

1000

Description/Recommendation
3. Issue the list data-module command to determine if other DATA-CHLs
are administered. If no other DATA-CHLs are administered, administer at
least one at this time.

(cont’d.)

4. Determine if the DATA-CHLs OTHER THAN the target DATA-CHL are all
in use for some other function (that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link,
Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary administration terminal
connection) as described previously in the "Status of Network Control
Data Channels" section. If so, and if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL, use the following preference guidelines to free
one of the DATA-CHLs for testing.
a. If a DATA-CHL is being used for a secondary administration terminal
connection, busyout that DATA-CHL.
b. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a PMS Link, busyout the
PMS Link.
c. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a Journal Printer Link,
busyout the Journal Printer Link.
d. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for an CDR Link, busyout the
CDR Link.
e. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a System Printer Link,
busyout the System Printer Link.
5. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
6. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS
Link to service before moving on to another activity.
1006

ABORT

For this test, an Error Code of 1006 can have one of several different
meanings:
a. No other DATA-CHLs are administered and, therefore, not available
to place the call to the target DATA-CHL.
b. All other DATA-CHLs are busy and, therefore, not available to place
the call to the target DATA-CHL.
c. System resources required to run this test are not available.
d. Internal system error
Note the results of Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the
target DATA-CHL. If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both PASS, then
there is a high probability that the target DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL:

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code

Page 10-398

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

1006

Description/Recommendation
1. Issue the list data-module command to determine if other DATA-CHLs
are administered. If no other CATA-CHLs are administered, administer at
least one at this time.

(cont’d.)

2. Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that
is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or
secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously
in the "Status of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for
errors on the function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors,
there is a high probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed
with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the
target DATA-CHL.
a. If a DATA-CHL is being used for a secondary administration terminal
connection, busyout that DATA-CHL.
b. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a PMS Link, busyout the
PMS Link.
c. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a Journal Printer Link,
busyout the Journal Printer Link.
d. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for an CDR Link, busyout the
CDR Link.
e. Otherwise, if a DATA-CHL is being used for a System Printer Link,
busyout the System Printer Link.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
4. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS
Link to service before moving on to another activity.
1016

ABORT

Resources for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

2003

ABORT

Internal system error

2004

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Check the dial plan to make sure that the extensions of the data channel
are set up as local extensions rather than remote or UDP extensions.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code

Page 10-399

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2011
2012
2013
2016
2017
2020
2022
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a
description of these error codes.

40
41
2000
2003
2004

FAIL

In the case of Error Codes 40 and 41, the Remote Maintenance Loop Around
Test failed because the data received over the connection did not match the
data sent over the connection (data was corrupted). In the case of Error
Codes 2000, 2003, and 2004, the Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test
failed because the data looped over the connection was not received (data
was lost).
However, because it involves two DATA-CHLs, the test’s failure is not
sufficient to indict either one of the two DATA-CHLs as defective.
1. Check the dial plan to make sure that the extensions of the data channel
are set up as local extensions rather than remote or UDP extensions.
2. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs is in use for some other function
(that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or
secondary administration terminal connection) as described in the
"Status of Network Control Data Channels" section.
3. Note the test results for Tests #110 and #111 in the Short Test Sequence
for the target DATA-CHL and refer to Steps 4, 5, and/or 6 to determine
the appropriate actions to take based on those results.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code
40
41
2000
2003
2004

Page 10-400

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation
4. If the result of Test #110 is PASS and the result of Test #111 is PASS for
the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the arbitrarily
chosen DATA-CHL is defective.
■

Run the Short Test Sequence for each DATA-CHL that is not in use
for some other function. Note the test results for Tests #110 and #111
for each of them.

■

If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are both FAIL for at least one of
the other DATA-CHLs, investigate the possibility of a defective
arbitrarily chosen DATA-CHL.

(cont’d.)

a. Issue the remove data-module  for each DATA-CHL for
which the results of Tests #110 and #111 were both FAIL to
remove the DATA-CHL from operation.
b. Repeat the test.
c. Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest
convenience.
Replace the circuit pack as described in Chapter 5, "Routine
Maintenance Procedures".
After the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its
Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command.
■

If the results of Tests #110 and #111 are not both FAIL for any one of
the other DATA-CHLs that are not in use for some other function,
investigate the possibility of a defective TDM Bus as described in
Step 5.

5. If the result of Test #110 is FAIL and the result of Test #111 is PASS for
the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the TDM Bus
or Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective.
■

Check for the existence of TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock
circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms.
If they exist:
a. Refer to the corresponding Maintenance documentation to
clear the errors and alarms.
b. Repeat the test.

■

If TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD,
TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms do not exist, investigate
the possibility that the target DATA-CHL, the DATA-CON, or the
Network Control circuit pack is defective as described in Step 6.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code
40
41
2000
2003
2004

Page 10-401

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation
6. If the result of Test #110 is either PASS or FAIL and the result of test #111
is FAIL for the target DATA-CHL, then the most likely problem is that the
target DATA-CHL is defective, the DATA-CON is defective, or the TN777
Network Control circuit pack is defective.
■

(cont’d.)

Busyout all functions that are using the Network Control Data
Channels (DATA-CHLs).

! CAUTION:
All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive and
terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs.
■

Issue the test data-module  long for the target DATA-CHL.
Note the test results for Test #107 and #108.
a. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network
Control circuit pack is defective.

■

Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After the
Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day
clock must be set using the set time command.

■

Repeat the test.
b. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is
FAIL, then the DATA-CON is defective.

40
41
2000
2003
2004
(cont’d.)

■

Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still
operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs, replace the
Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s convenience. After the
Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its Time-of-Day
clock must be set using the set time command.

■

Repeat the test.

If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is PASS, then the
target DATA-CHL is defective.
■

Issue the remove data-module  for the target DATA-CHL to
remove it from operation.

■

Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest
convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been
replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time
command.

7. Restore any busied out CDR, Journal Printer, System Printer, or PMS
Link to service before moving on to another activity.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-110.
Error
Code

Page 10-402

TEST #109 Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The target DATA-CHL, DATA-CON, TN777 Network Control circuit pack,
TDM Bus (TDM-BUS), and Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT,
TDM-CLK) are functioning. Connections can be established over the
DATA-CHLs.

Continued on next page

Data Channel Crosstalk Test (#110)
This test verifies the integrity of the entire DATA-CHL, that is, the software, dual
port RAM, and hardware that composes it. However, unlike the Remote
Maintenance Loop Around Test (#109), this test only involves the single
DATA-CHL that is the target of the test. A loop around connection is established
over the TDM Bus from the DATA-CHL back to itself. Data is looped over the
connection in each direction, that is, the DATA-CHL is tested as both a sender of
data and a receiver of data. The test checks that the data received by the
DATA-CHL is the same as the data that was sent by the DATA-CHL.
Because it establishes a loop around connection from the Network Control
DATA-CHL back to itself across the TDM Bus, this test does more than just verify
the integrity of the target DATA-CHL. It also verifies the integrity of the
DATA-CON (by establishing the connection) and of the TDM Bus and
Tone-Clock circuit pack (by sending and receiving data).
If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether
the target DATA-CHL is defective or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON, TDM
Bus, or Tone-Clock circuit pack. The results of running Tests #107, #108, and
#111 on the DATA-CHL can be used to determine whether the target DATA-CHL
is defective.
Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common
DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4 share a common
DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 1 is
defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice versa. Similarly, if
this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4 is likely to be
defective and vice versa.
NOTE:
If an Error Code is encountered that recommends that an CDR Link, System
Printer Link, PMS Log Printer, Wakeup-Log Printer Link, and/or PMS Link be
busied out, restore each busied-out link to service according to the
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), SYS-PRNT, or PMS-LINK Maintenance
documentation, respectively, before concluding work on the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Table 10-111.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-403

TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have one of two different meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. Internal system error
Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is,
CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary
administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of
network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function
that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability
that the DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL:
1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link) or
the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal connection
only).
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. Restore any busied out CDR, System Printer, Journal Printer, or PMS Link
to service before moving on to another activity.

40
70
75

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-111.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-404

TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different
meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. System resources required to run this test are not available.
c. Internal system error
Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is,
CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary
administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status of
network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the function
that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high probability
that the DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test
the target DATA-CHL:
1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT,
PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal
connection only).
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT,
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to
another activity.

1002

ABORT

For this test, an Error Code of 1002 can have one of two different meanings:
1. System resources required to run this test are not available.
2. Internal system error

1006

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

1016

ABORT

Resources for the test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

2000

ABORT

Resources for the test are not available.

2003

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-111.
Error
Code

Page 10-405

TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2011
2012
2013
2016
2017
2020
2022
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) for a description of these error codes.

14
16
40
2000
2003
2004

FAIL

In the case of Error Code 40, the Crosstalk Test failed because the data
received over the connection did not match the data sent over the connection
(data was corrupted). In the case of Error Code 2000, 2003, and 2004, the
crosstalk test failed because the data looped over the connection was not
received (data was lost).
1. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs are in use for some other function
(that is, CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or
secondary administration terminal connection) as described previously in
the "Status of Network Control Data Channels" section.
2. Note the test result for Test #111 in the Short Test Sequence for the target
DATA-CHL and refer to Steps 3 and/or 4 to determine the appropriate
actions to take based on those results.
3. If the result of Test #111 is PASS, then the most likely problem is that the
TDM Bus or Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective.
a. Check for the existence of TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock
circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms.
If they exist:
1. Refer to the corresponding Maintenance documentation to clear
the errors and alarms.
2. Repeat the test.
b. If TDM Bus (TDM-BUS) and/or Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD,
TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) errors and alarms do not exist, investigate
the possibility that the target DATA-CHL, the DATA-CON, or the
Network Control circuit pack is defective as described in Step 4.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-111.
Error
Code
14
16
40
2000
2003
2004
(cont’d.)

Page 10-406

TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation
4. If the result of Test #111 is FAIL, then the most likely problem is that the
target DATA-CHL is defective, the DATA-CON is defective, or the TN777
Network Control circuit pack is defective. Busyout all functions that are
using the Network Control Data Channels (DATA-CHLs).

! CAUTION:
All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive and
terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs.
a. Issue the test data-module  long command for the target
DATA-CHL. Note the test results for Tests #107 and #108.
1. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network Control
circuit pack is defective.
(a).Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After
the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its
Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time
command.
(b).Repeat the test.
2. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is
FAIL, then the DATA-CON is defective.
(a).Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still
operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs,
replace the Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s
convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has
been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the
set time command.
(b).Repeat the test.
3. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is
PASS, then the target DATA-CHL is defective.
(a).Issue the remove data-module  command for the
target DATA-CHL to remove it from operation.
(b).Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest
convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has
been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the
set time command.
5. Restore any busied out function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT,
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) to service before moving on to
another activity.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-111.
Error
Code

Page 10-407

TEST #110 Data Channel Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The target DATA-CHL, DATA-CON, TN777 Network Control circuit pack, TDM
Bus (TDM-BUS), and Tone-Clock circuit pack (TONE-BD, TONE-PT,
TDM-CLK) are functioning. Connections can be established over the target
DATA-CHL.

Continued on next page

Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (#111)
This test verifies the integrity of the dual port RAM that is shared between the
software and hardware that composes the DATA-CHL. The dual port RAM is
placed in local loop back mode such that data to be sent by the DATA-CHL is
instead looped back to be received by the DATA-CHL. The loop back is done
within the dual port RAM, that is, the data is never sent over the TDM Bus. The
test checks that the data received by the DATA-CHL is the same as the data that
was sent by the DATA-CHL.
This test actually does more than just verify the integrity of the target DATA-CHL.
Because it is the DATA-CON that actually puts the Dual Port RAM in local loop
back mode and loops the data from the Dual Port RAM back into the Dual Port
RAM, the test also verifies the integrity of the DATA-CON.
If this test aborts or fails, it is impossible to determine from this test alone whether
the target DATA-CHL is defective or if the problem lies with the DATA-CON. The
results of running Tests #107 and #108 on the DATA-CHL can be used to
determine whether the target DATA-CHL is defective.
Finally, recall from the description of that DATA-CHLs 1 and 2 share a common
Dual Port RAM (DPR) and TDM Bus interface hardware and DATA-CHLs 3 and 4
share a common DPR and TDM Bus interface hardware. Thus, if this test finds
that DATA-CHL 1 is defective, then DATA-CHL 2 is likely to be defective and vice
versa. Similarly, if this test finds that DATA-CHL 3 is defective, then DATA-CHL 4
is likely to be defective and vice versa.
NOTE:
If an Error Code is encountered that recommends that an CDR Link, System
Printer Link, PMS Log Printer, Wakeup-Log Printer, and/or PMS Link be
busied out, restore each busied-out link to service according to the
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link), SYS-PRNT (System Printer Link),
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link), or PMS-LINK (Property
Management System Link) Maintenance documentation, respectively,
before concluding work on the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)

Table 10-112.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-408

TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 4 can have one of two different meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. Internal system error
Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is,
CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary
administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status
of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the
function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high
probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective. Proceed with the remaining
steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA-CHL.
1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT,
PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal
connection only).
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT,
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to
another activity.

40
70
75

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-112.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-409

TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
For this test, an Error Code of 1000 can have one of several different
meanings:
a. The target DATA-CHL is busy and, therefore, not available for use.
b. System resources required to run this test are not available.
c. Internal system error
Determine if the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function (that is,
CDR Link, System Printer Link, Journal Printer Link, PMS Link, or secondary
administration terminal connection) as described previously in the "Status
of network Control Data Channels" section. If so, check for errors on the
function that is using the DATA-CHL. If there are no errors, there is a high
probability that the DATA-CHL is not defective.
Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely
test the target DATA-CHL:
1. If the target DATA-CHL is in use for some other function, busyout the
function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT,
PMS-LINK) or the DATA-CHL (secondary administration terminal
connection only).
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. Restore any busied out PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT,
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK MOs to service before moving on to
another activity.

1006

ABORT

For this test, an Error Code of 1006 can have one of several different
meanings:
a. System resources required to run this test are not available.
b. Internal system error. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1016

ABORT

Resources for the test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

2000

ABORT

Internal system error

2003

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-112.
Error
Code

Page 10-410

TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2011
2012
2013
2016
2017
2020
2022
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a
description of these error codes.

40
2000
2003
2004

FAIL

In the case of Error Code 40, the Local Loop Back Test failed because the
data received over the connection did not match the data sent over the
connection (data was corrupted). In the case of Error Code 2000, 2003,
and 2004, the Local Loop Back Test failed because the data looped over
the connection was not received (data was lost).
1. Determine which of the DATA-CHLs are in use for some other function
(that is, PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR, SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT,
PMS-LINK or secondary administration terminal connection) as
described previously in the "Status of Network Control Data Channels"
section.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel)
Table 10-112.
Error
Code
40
2000
2003
2004

Page 10-411

TEST #111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
2. The most likely problem is that the target DATA-CHL is defective or the
DATA-CON is defective.
Busyout all functions that are using the Network Control Data Channels
(DATA-CHLs).

(cont’d.)

! CAUTION:
All functions must be busied out because Test #107 is destructive
and terminates all established connections over the DATA-CHLs.
3. Issue the test data-module  long command for the target
DATA-CHL. Note the test results for Tests #107 and #108.
a. If the result of Test #107 is FAIL, then the TN777 Network Control
circuit pack is defective.
1. Replace the Network Control circuit pack immediately. After
the Network Control circuit pack has been replaced, its
Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time command.
2. Repeat the test.
b. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is FAIL,
then the DATA-CON is defective.
1. Although all DATA-CHLs are unusable, the SW-CTL is still
operational. Based on the customer’s use of DATA-CHLs,
replace the Network Control circuit pack at the customer’s
convenience. After the Network Control circuit pack has been
replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using the set time
command.
2. Repeat the test.
FAIL

c. If the result of Test #107 is PASS and the result of Test #108 is
PASS, then the target DATA-CHL is defective.
1. Issue the remove data-module command.
■

Replace the Network Control circuit pack at your earliest
convenience. After the TN777 Network Control circuit pack
has been replaced, its Time-of-Day clock must be set using
the set time command.

2. Restore any busied out function (PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR,
SYS-PRNT, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, PMS-LINK) to service
before moving on to another activity.
PASS

The target DATA-CHL and DATA-CON are functioning. Connections can be
established over the target DATA-CHL.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CON (Network Control Driver)

Page 10-412

DATA-CON (Network Control Driver)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
DATA-CON

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial Command to Run
none

Full Name of MO
Network Control Driver

The TN777B Network Control circuit pack contains the following objects: the
SW-CTL (Switch Control), four DATA-CHLs (Data Channels), the DATA-CON
(Network Control Driver), and the generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM
Bus (DATA-BD). The DATA-CON (Network Control Driver) is the subject of this
section. The DATA-CHLs (Network Control Channels) are also described.
Together the four DATA-CHLs and the DATA-CON provide a data
communications interface that allows DTE equipment connected to port circuit
packs to communicate with software applications running on the system. The
DATA-CON represents the interface to the control channel of the TDM Bus. Each
DATA-CHL represents a dial-up/dial-out asynchronous communication port that
interfaces to the TDM Bus. The DATA-CON supports the signaling required to
establish and tear down a connection between the terminal equipment and a
software application. Data is transported between the terminal equipment and
the software over the connection established over the DATA-CHL.
A system with a single SPE has a single Network Control circuit pack. Thus, there
is a single DATA-CON. A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network
Control circuit packs, one in each of the two SPEs. Thus, there is a DATA-CON
on the Network Control circuit pack that resides in the Active SPE control carrier
and a DATA-CON on the Network Control circuit pack that resides in the Standby
SPE control carrier. Refer to Chapter 6, "Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid",
and the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for discussions of
High and Critical Reliability systems.
From an external (user) point of view, the DATA-CON is not directly accessible
via a system technician command; that is, there is no object command word that
represents it. Instead, the DATA-CON is tested under the guise of the
DATA-CHLs that it controls. The test data-module  [short | long]
command tests the DATA-CON along with the DATA-CHL designated by 
but all Test Results are associated with the DATA-CHL Maintenance Name.
From an internal (system software) point of view, the DATA-CON uses the same
set of tests as the DATA-CHLs. Therefore, the DATA-CON assumes the same
Error Type and Aux Data values as the DATA-CHLs in the Hardware Error Log. It
is also alarmed at the same Alarm Level (that is, MINOR, ON BOARD) in the
Alarm Log. In both logs, the Maintenance Name is DATA-CON.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DATA-CON (Network Control Driver)

Page 10-413

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-113.
Error
Type
01

Network Control Driver Error Log Entries

Aux
Data
0

1
257

Any

513
769

1.

Any

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value (a)

Any

Any

Any

none

Local Loop Back Test (#111)

MINOR

ON

none

Remote Maintenance Loop Around
Test (#109)

MINOR

ON

none

Crosstalk Test (#110)

MINOR

ON

none

Dual Port RAM Test (#108)

MINOR

ON

none

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Note:
a. As previously described, the DATA-CON is not directly accessible via a
system technician command so there is no Test to Clear value that can be
used to directly clear errors and alarms raised against the DATA-CON.
However, since the DATA-CON and the DATA-CHLs share the same set of
tests (that is, test the same set of hardware, firmware, and software),
DATA-CON errors and alarms are accompanied by DATA-CHL errors and
alarms.

Therefore, the strategy to clear DATA-CON errors and alarms is to first clear all
DATA-CHL errors and alarms. After DATA-CHL errors and alarms have been
cleared, allow about 60 minutes for maintenance software to run internally and to
automatically clear the DATA-CON errors and alarms.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Because the DATA-CON uses the same set of tests as the DATA-CHLs, refer to
the "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes" in the
DATA-CHL (Network Control Data Channel) Maintenance documentation for a
description of the tests and their associated error codes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Page 10-414

DAT-LINE (Data Line)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DAT-LINE

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Data Line

DAT-LINE

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Data Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

The TN726 Data Line circuit pack is a port circuit that provides connectivity from
the system to asynchronous CPE having RS232-compatible serial interfaces.
There are eight data lines (DAT-LINEs) on the Data Line circuit pack. If there are
errors associated with the DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack), refer to the
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
Data Lines are administered via the administration terminal add data-module
command. The data module type is data-line. The list data-module command
lists all administered data modules in the system.
The TN750 Announcement circuit pack has one Data Line on it. The Data Line is
used for saving and restoring announcements. For a description of this feature,
refer to ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
Also, if there are errors associated with the Announcement circuit pack, refer to
the ANN-BD Maintenance documentation.
NOTE:
If the tests for the Data Line in question pass and there are still
user-reported problems, there is probably an external problem. Test the
ADU, following the procedures outlined in User Manual Z3A Asynchronous
Data Unit, 555-401-701. If the ADU appears to be working properly, check
the external wiring and, finally, check the customer equipment.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Page 10-415

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value
s

Table 10-114.

Data Line Error Log Entries

Error
Type
01

Aux
Data
0

1

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

Digital Loop Around
Test (#171)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

15(a)

Any

Audit Update Test
(#36)

18

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

130 (b)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

257

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

513

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

769(a)

1.

Any (c)

None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any).
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
c. This error is logged when the Data Line circuit pack finds an error with the
transmit/receive circuitry of an administered Data Line on circuit pack
insertion. Perform the following procedure:
1. Issue the busyout board PCSS command to busyout the Data Line
circuit pack on which this port resides.
2. Issue the reset board PCSS command. Check the Hardware Error
Log to determine if Error Type 769 is logged again for the DAT-LINE
MO.
NOTE:
When displaying errors, set the Active Alarms Only field to "n."
If Error Type 769 reappears, replace the DAT-LINE circuit pack. If
Error Type 769 does not reappear, proceed to Step 3.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Page 10-416

3. Issue the release board PCSS command to release the Data Line
circuit pack on which this port resides.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Digital Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation
Digital Loop Around Test (#171)

Audit Update Test (#36)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If
the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be
observed. This test is usually part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes
about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-115.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the
port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)
Table 10-115.
Error
Code
1001

Page 10-417

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone
Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status
data-module to determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type
769).
1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs
on this port, replace the circuit pack.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots. User-reported troubles
on this port should be investigated using other port tests, examining the
ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Page 10-418

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being
tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to
listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting
signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the tone is within a
certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-116.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the
port is available for testing.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status
data-module to determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type
769).
1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs
on this port, replace the circuit pack.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The conference circuit test failed (possible off-board problem).
1. Busyout and release the port (data line), and then retest.
2. Replace the circuit pack if the test continues to fail.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests,
examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment.

Continued on next page

Audit Update Test (#36)
This audit makes sure that the hardware state of the Data Line is consistent with
the system translations. When this audit is run, the port is queried for the
switchhook state, and the software state is updated according to the returned
value. Also, the data line options are sent down to the port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Table 10-117.
Error
Code
1006

Page 10-419

TEST #36 Audit Update Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type
769).
1. Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769. If Error Type 769 still occurs
on this port, replace the circuit pack.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

7

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The hardware port state is consistent with the software state. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests,
examining the ADU, external wiring, and customer equipment.

Continued on next page

Digital Loop Around Test (#171)
The Digital Loop Around Test checks the Data Line’s ability to transmit and
receive data on the TDM Bus. Data is sent through Network Control Data
Channel 3 (data channel port 3) over the TDM Bus, internally looped through the
Data Line back onto the TDM Bus, and received again by Network Control Data
Channel 3.
If data channel 3 is in use or not administered, this test aborts. This test may fail if
Network Control Data Channel 3 is not functioning properly. If there are any
DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log, refer to the DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation to clear them up first. This test passes
regardless of any customer equipment that may be connected to the port, as
long as the port is not in use by the equipment.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)

Table 10-118.
Error
Code

Page 10-420

TEST #171 Digital Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use status data-module to determine when the
port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005
1007

ABORT

Network Control Data Channel 3 is not administered. This port is required to
run this test.
1. Verify that data channel 3 is not administered with the list data-module
command. Administer data channel 3 with the add data-module
command, and run this test again.

1016

ABORT

Network Control Data Channel 3 is busy. The port may be in use on a valid
call. Use status data-module to determine when the port is available for
testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port (Error Type
769).
1. Reseat the circuit pack and look in the Error Log. If Error Type 769 still
occurs on this port, replace the circuit pack.

2003

ABORT

Failed to receive an off-hook from the Data Line.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2004

ABORT

Failed to receive an off-hook from the Network Control Data Channel.

2005

ABORT

The handshake between the data channel and the data line port failed.
1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD
(Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test still aborts, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DAT-LINE (Data Line)
Table 10-118.
Error
Code

Page 10-421

TEST #171 Digital Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The test failed because the data received did not match the data sent. This
would indicate that there is a fault somewhere in the transmit/receive path
to the TDM Bus, which probably results in data corruption over this port.
This test may fail if Network Control Data Channel 3 is not functioning
properly.
1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD
(Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. Repeat this test.
3. If the test fails again, replace the Data Line circuit pack.

2000

FAIL

The test failed waiting for the transmitted data to be looped back.
1. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to DATA-BD
(Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. Repeat this test.
3. If the test fails again, replace the Data Line circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly transmit/receive data. User-reported troubles on this
port should be investigated by examining the ADU, external wiring, and
customer equipment.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DC-POWER

Page 10-422

DC-POWER
Single-Carrier Cabinet Power
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
DC-POWER

1.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to Run1
test environment P

Full Name of MO
Single-Carrier Cabinet Power

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined from the PORT field of the alarm log.

NOTE:
For environment maintenance, the high or critical reliability system, PPN, or
EPN cabinet configuration aspects are irrelevant.
The DC-POWER MO represents all the environmental maintenance for a
single-carrier cabinet system. It includes an external power unit and all the port
power units in the Port Network. The external power unit can be either a DC or an
AC power source. If the external power unit is AC, then the Carrier Port Power
Units must be WP-91153 power units. If the external power unit is DC, then the
Carrier Port Power Units must be 676B power units. If the hardware detects a
problem with any one of these elements, it reports the information to the system
software through a single lead. The system software cannot differentiate between
different environmental failures. All environmental alarms on a single-carrier
cabinet system are logged as a major DC-POWER alarm. Therefore, it is possible
to get a DC-POWER alarm when there is still power to the system. The yellow
LED on the power unit means operating as normal. If the LED is off, no external
power is being supplied or that the power unit has a fault.
NOTE:
Physically removing a Carrier Port Power Unit from a single-carrier cabinet
system does not raise a DC-POWER alarm. The removal of the power unit is
equivalent to the carrier being physically absent since DC-POWER
maintenance cannot distinguish between these two situations.
A single-carrier cabinet system powered by an AC external power source with
WP-91153 Carrier Port Power Units has a minimal Nominal Power Holdover
(NPH) for the PPN only in standard, high, and critical reliability systems. There is
no NPH for a DC- powered PPN or for an AC- or DC-powered EPN. NPH in the
PPN of an AC-powered system without high or critical reliability provides full
powering for 0.25 seconds, and power to the control complex for an additional
two minutes.

! WARNING:
Before powering down a cabinet or carrier that contains DEFINITY AUDIX
circuit packs (TN566), first power down the AUDIX unit to avoid damaging

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DC-POWER

Page 10-423

the AUDIX software. Instructions for powering down this unit are in the
"DEFINITY AUDIX System Power Procedures" in Chapter 5, "Routine
Maintenance Procedures", on the circuit pack, and in DEFINITY AUDIX
documentation.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-119.
Error
Type

Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

1

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

513

0

Single-Carrier Cabinet

MAJOR

ON

test environment P r 2

0

Power Query Test (#79)

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table. By clearing
error codes associated with the Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence. Test descriptions and recommended maintenance procedures follow
for all errors that can occur during system technician-demanded testing.
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test (#79)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (a)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (b)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to “EMG-XFER” for a description of this test.
b. Refer to “EXT-DEV” for a description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DC-POWER

Page 10-424

c. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test.
NOTE:
Tests #117 and #118 only show up in the test sequence if there is a TN768
Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test (#79)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor (in a PPN) or the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack (in an EPN) about the status of the power in a
single-carrier cabinet system. This test can only detect power problems in
carriers in the Port Network for which the Carrier Port Power Unit is physically
present.
Table 10-120.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #79 Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000, check for system
powering problems with the A cabinet (PPN or EPN). Resolve all
DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test. If the test continues to ABORT
with a 2000 Error Code, resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack) errors in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system, or MAINT
(EPN Maintenance circuit pack) errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DC-POWER
Table 10-120.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-425

TEST #79 Single-Carrier Cabinet Power Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
There is a problem with the environment of the power system.
1. The power unit for any one of the cabinets may have been lost.
a. Verify and, if necessary, restore power units for each cabinet.
b. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed to Step 2.
2. Either the WP-91153 AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit for one of
the cabinets could be defective. Refer to the "Removing Power" and
"Restoring Power" sections in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance
Procedures".
a. If the yellow LED on the WP-91153 AC power unit or the 676B DC
power unit is off, replace the power unit.
b. If the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack loses power, the system performs
a Cold-2 restart to finish (the login prompt appears at the
administration terminal).
c. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed with Step 3.
3. The DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), or the MAINT (EPN
Maintenance Circuit Pack) could be incorrectly reporting this error.
Resolve all alarms on these MOs, and rerun the test. There are failures
that can occur on the Duplication Interface and EPN Maintenance circuit
pack that are not detected by the respective maintenance, but that
cause many, if not all, environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on the system
configuration, should be replaced and the test rerun.

PASS

The DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), or the MAINT (EPN
Maintenance Circuit Pack) has reported no problem with the power.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DETR-BD

Page 10-426

DETR-BD
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run1

DETR-BD

MINOR

test board PCSS

Tone Detector Circuit Pack

DETR-BD

WARNING

test board PCSS

Tone Detector Circuit Pack

1.

Full Name of MO

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for EPN2); C is the carrier
number (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

G1, G3iV1.1-286, and those G3iV2-386 systems that use the Mu-law
companding mode use TN748 Tone Detector circuit packs or TN756
combination Tone Detector-Tone-Clock circuit packs. G3iV2-386 systems that
use the A-Law companding mode use TN420B (and higher suffixes) Tone
Detector circuit packs. The companding mode of the DETR-BD circuit pack must
match that administered for the system for proper tone detection. The
companding mode is administered on the System-Parameters Country-Options
form. Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Implementation,
555-230-653.
For all DETR-BD circuit pack level errors, refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Board)
Maintenance documentation.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack)

Page 10-427

DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk
Circuit Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

1.

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DID-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Direct Inward Dial
Trunk Circuit Pack

DID-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Direct Inward Dial
Trunk Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or; C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where
the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also DID-TRK (DID Trunk) Maintenance
documentation for related trunk information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Page 10-428

DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

DID-DS1

MAJOR1

test trunk
/ l

Direct Inward Dial Trunk

DID-DS1

MINOR

test trunk
/ l

Direct Inward Dial Trunk

DID-DS1

WARNING

test trunk
/

Direct Inward Dial Trunk

1.

A major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by
the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group
are alarmed.

The DID-DS1 trunk provides a digital DID trunk from a CO switch into the system
through a DS1 link. A 24 channel DS1 link can support up to 24 DID-DS1 trunk
calls simultaneously. A 32 channel DS1 link [G3iV2-386] can support up to 30
DID-DS1 trunk calls simultaneously. A DID-DS1 trunk can be used for both voice
and data communications with appropriate DS1 signaling mode (for example,
common channel signaling). Only the TN767 and TN464 [G3iV2-386] DS1
Interface circuit packs support the DID-DS1 trunk call processing signalings,
wink-start, and immediate-start.
DID-DS1 trunk maintenance provides a means to maintain a DID trunk on a port
of DS1 Interface circuit pack. Information included covers the in-line errors log,
initialization tests, periodic tests, system technician demand tests, and alarms
escalation and elimination. Two trunk service states are specified in the DID-DS1
trunk maintenance. They are: out-of-service, the trunk is in a deactivated state
and can’t be used for incoming calls; in-service, the trunk is in an activated state
and can be used for incoming calls. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
out-of-service, then all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack are put into
out-of-service state and a Warning alarm is raised.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Page 10-429

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Direct Inward Dial Trunk Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

01

0

1 (a)

Any

15 (b)

Any

Associated Test
Any

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test trunk /
sh r 1

WARNING

OFF

release trunk
/mbr>

None

WARNING

ON

test trunk /

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

18 (c)
130 (d)

Alarm
Level

257 (e)

57474
57473

513 (f)

57392

None

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

769 (g)

57393

None

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

1281

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk / l

1537

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk / l

ON

test board PCSS l

1793 (h)
2305(i)

50944

3840 (j)

1.
2.

3.

None

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator
field set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are
out of service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set
options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the Minor alarm is
upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.

Notes:
a. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field
contains the Error Type: 57476, on-hook before wink; 57477, on-hook
before ready to receive digits; 57485, wink too short for valid signal.
Escalate the error.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Page 10-430

b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate errors (if any).
c. System Technician has busied out the trunk to out-of-service state. No
calls can be made on this trunk.
d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
e. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field
contains the Error Type: 57474, rotary dial rate above 12 pulses per
second; 57473, rotary dial rate below eight pulses per second. Escalate
the error.
f. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field
contains the Error Type: 57392, no external release on PBX disconnect.
Escalate the error.
g. DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error. The Aux Data field
contains the Error Type: 57393, belated external release on PBX
disconnect. Escalate the error.
h. DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for DS1-BD errors in
Hardware Error Log. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation for details.
i. Error Type 2305—This error indicates that a signaling change was
detected by the PBX trunk circuit pack which is inconsistent with the
present state of the trunk.
j. Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an internal system error.
Enter status trunk command to verify the status of the trunk. If the trunk is
out-of-service, then enter the release trunk command to put it back to
in-service. Retry the test command. If the test continues to abort, then
escalate the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Page 10-431

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence..

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test
Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-121.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-121.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-432

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not
available.
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display
port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the Error Log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM BUS error.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-121.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-433

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-121.
Error
Code
2053

Page 10-434

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm,
2049—Red Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—
Hyperactivity.
Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.

ANY

FAIL

The test failed. This can be due to on-board or off-board
problems. Off-board problems of concern include
EXP-PN and EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and
faults associated with the tone detectors/tone
generators. Clear all off-board problems before
replacing the board. Keep in mind that a TDM-BUS
problem is usually the result of a faulty board connected
to the backplane or bent pins on the backplane.
1. Look for EXP-PN and/or EXP-INTF errors in the error
log. If present, refer to the EXP-PN and the EXP-INTF
Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD and the
TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
4. Retest when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are
cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-121.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-435

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the lIst config command and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for
the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is
instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together.
The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the
tone is within a certain range, the test passed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-122.
Error
Code

Page 10-436

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this
test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not available. The
port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port
UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You
must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no calls),
check the error log for error type 1025 (see the Error Log
table for a description of this error and required actions). The
port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system
may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may have time slots
out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to the TDM-BUS
(TDM bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling
heavy traffic and the port status is idle, retry the command at
1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-122.

Page 10-437

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

1003

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The
system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors
present or some of the tone detectors may be out of service.
Issue the list measurements tone-receiver command to display
basic information about the system’s tone receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present, refer to the
TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present, refer to
the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute intervals
for a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the display
port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member
number of the port. Issue the status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

The test was disabled via translation. You may want to determine
why the test has been disabled before you enable it.
1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration’ screen is set to ’n’. To enable the test, change
the trunk administration and enter ’y’ into the ’Maintenance
Test’ field.
2. Repeat the test.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the
specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the
circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the previously existing
error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-122.

Page 10-438

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this
test.

Description/ Recommendation

1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum of five
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.
2053

ABORT

At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit
pack: 1281—Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm, 2049—Red
Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—Hyperactivity.
Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log and
follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1-BD or
UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-122.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Page 10-439

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This can cause noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Enter the list configuration board UUCSS command. If the
circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9, replace the circuit
pack with a TN767C V3 or later. The error log may have error
type 1281.
2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one fails, this
could be an off-board problem (such as an incoming seizure
or an off-hook port seizure during the test). Retest the board.
3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see note below).
4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD or
TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the appropriate
action. When the TONE errors have cleared, rerun the test.
5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported,
coordinate isolation with the CO. Make sure that the switch,
the CO, and any NTCE equipment (the CSUs) have the
correct administration.
6. Replace the circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a circuit
pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a TN736 or
TN752 power unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB
AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be
defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a medium
cabinet powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power
source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power
unit or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of power
units. To investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit,
refer to the ’CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance Documentation’. To
investigate problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to
the ’CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered
systems) Maintenance Documentation’. If a red LED on
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on, replace the
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-122.
Error
Code

Page 10-440

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated using
other port tests and by examining station, trunk, or external
wiring.
NOTE:
This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs
prior to Vintage 14 and for TN742 prior to Vintage 4.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted,
an incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use
the lIst config command and resolve any problems that are
found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1,
issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should re-establish
the linkage between the internal ID and the port. If this is not
the case, check to see that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from the switch processor to the DS1
Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation
updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing
parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the
consistency of the current state of the trunk as kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and in the switch software.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-123.
Error
Code

Page 10-441

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The port may be busy with a valid call. Issue the display
port UUCSSpp command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the Error Log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The test was aborted because the trunk is out of service.
1. Use the status trunk command to verify that the
trunk is out of service.
2. If the trunk is out of service, determine why.
3. If it is OK to put the trunk back in service, issue the
release trunk command to put the trunk back in
service, and then retry the test.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk)

Table 10-123.
Error
Code

Page 10-442

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Test failed due to Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The
current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is
busied out, the test does not run, but returns PASS. To
verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is
in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action
is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue
to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-443

DID-TRK (DID Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Alarm Level

Full Name of MO

DID-TRK

MAJOR2

test port PCSSpp l

DID Trunk

DID-TRK

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

DID Trunk

DID-TRK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l

DID Trunk

1.

2.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).
A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by
the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group
are alarmed.

Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks, coming from the Central Office (CO), allow
outside parties to call directly to an extension in the system. DID Trunk circuit
packs include:
TN753 [G1, G3iV1.1-286, G3iV2-386]

United States

TN2146 [G3iV2-386]

Belgium and the Netherlands

TN2139 [G3iV2-386]

Italy

TN 436 [G3iV2-386]

Australia

TN459 [G3iV2-386]

United Kingdom

The DID Trunk circuit packs support eight, incoming-only, ports. Each port
provides an interface between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the
DEFINITY system. The DID port receives 3 to 5 digits from the CO that is used to
directly connect an outside caller to the called station without assistance from an
attendant. See Figure 10-25.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-444

1
"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM

CENTRAL

DID
TRUNK

OFFICE
8

SWITCH

INCOMING
CALLS ONLY

Figure 10-25.

DID Trunk Interactions

For each call, the CO switch signals the system by opening and closing
individual DID loops (one of the eight ports) and causing the starting or stopping
of loop current.
A DID trunk operation involves three significant aspects:
1. Transmission—deals with the interface requirements regarding all AC
signals. Transmission includes gain, analog to digital encoding, and
digital to analog decoding.
2. Signaling—involves interpretation of DC signals appearing on Tip and
Ring to and from the CO. These signals include off-hook, on-hook, and
dial pulse detection.
3. Switch Connection—involves the connection between the trunk circuitry
and the TDM Bus of the system. It operates the switchhook connection to
the TDM Bus.
Four tests are implemented to diagnose the health of a DID trunk. All of them test
on-board circuitry only. They are:
1. Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test—verifies the transmission
operation of the circuit pack (loop around within the port), and checks the
conference capabilities of all ports.
This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines.
Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power
company. To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this
test, the test may be disabled from trunk administration Test field. (This
also disables the port diagnostic test).
2. NPE Crosstalk Test—verifies the switch connection operation of the circuit
pack. The test also verifies that the trunk circuitry only talks on the
selected time slot on the TDM Bus and never crosses over to time slots
reserved for other connections.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-445

3. Port Diagnostic Test—the battery feed circuitry is tested for hook
detection.
4. Port Audit Update Test—updates the DID translation information on
individual ports of the DID trunk. The port translation data consists of
signaling parameters whose values depend on the CO switch connected
to the trunk. These parameters include:
■

wink (signal indicating PBX is ready to receive digits) or immediate
start

■

dial tone or rotary dialing trunk

■

rotary dialing inter-digit timing

■

network balance R/RC

■

disconnect timing

Additional in-line testing is performed while a call is in progress. Thus, in-line
errors may occur during operation. See Error Log table for a description of these
errors. These errors may be reproduced by using the trunk (that is, placing a call)
and checking their occurrence in the Hardware Error Log.
Problems detected during signaling may be caused by faults off-board (in the
CO switch or connections) for which a Warning alarm is raised.
Before a maintenance test can be run on a port, the port must be idle. If an
incoming call seizes the port which is being tested by maintenance, the test is
aborted, and the incoming call proceeds.
For transmission and signaling standard specification, refer to Digital PBX
Standards document RS4648.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-446

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
DID Trunk Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

WRN

OFF

1 (b)

57476

None

WRN

OFF

1 (c)

57477

None

WRN

OFF

1 (d)

57483

None

WRN

OFF

15 (e)

Any

Port Audit Update
(#36)

18

0

busyout trunk


WRN

OFF

release trunk 

None

WRN

ON

test trunk /

130 (f)

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

257 (g)

57472

None

WRN

OFF

257 (h)

57473

None

WRN

OFF

257 (i)

57474

None

WRN

OFF

257 (j)

57475

None

WRN

OFF

513 (k)

57392

None

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

OFF

510 (l)

57393

None

769

Any

Port Diagnostic
(#35)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

1025

Loop Around and
Conference (#33)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

1281

NPE Crosstalk (#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

OFF

test port PCSSpp r 3

1537

Any

Port Diagnostic
(#35)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN2

1793 (m)

57489

None

None

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set
options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor alarm is
upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-447

Notes:
A common trouble on DID trunks, which reports no errors or alarms, occurs when
the CO busies out the port (disconnects port). This situation occurs when the CO
thinks there are problems with the DID port. In this case, no incoming calls are
possible through this port. In addition to complaints received from outside callers
trying unsuccessfully to call in, this problem can be diagnosed by listing
measurements on lightly used trunks. If a particular port is detected as not in use,
a call to the CO is necessary to get the connection back in service.
a. This condition occurs when the tone detector times out waiting for digits.
1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter.
2 – Verify the dial type.
3 – Refer problem to the CO.
b. Rotary dial before wink – This condition occurs when the CO starts dialing
before the PBX sends wink on a wink-start trunk. 1 – Verify trunk
administered wink/immediate-start parameter.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
c. Rotary dial too early – This condition occurs when the CO starts dialing too
soon after seizure on an immediate-start trunk.
1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
d. Rotary dial pulse during wink – This condition occurs when the CO sends
rotary dial digits too soon after seizure on a wink-start trunk.
1 – Verify trunk administered wink/immediate-start parameter.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
e. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).
f. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
g. Rotary dial pulse on-hook longer than 105 msec – Break between rotary
pulses is too long.
1 – Test trunk by performing an incoming test call.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
h. Rotary dial rate below eight pulses/sec – More than 135 msec between
two successive breaks.
1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit-timing parameters.
2 – Refer problem to CO.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-448

i. Rotary dial rate above 12 pulses/sec – Less than 75 msec between two
successive breaks.
1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit-timing parameters.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
j. Digit detection – Co is starting new rotary dial digit within 150 msec of
previous digit.
1 – Verify trunk administered interdigit timing parameters.
2 – Refer problem to CO.
k. Loop current active – CO not releasing trunk after PBX disconnect. Occurs
when the PBX end drops first and the CO does not release the trunk within
four minutes.
1 – Verify the interface to the network with a hand telephone set. If calls
are placed correctly, then refer problem to the CO.
2 – If unable to place calls or this equipment is not available, check the
status on port using the status trunk command. If active but not
connected, disconnect bridging clips at the network interface. Check
status on the trunk. If trunk went idle, then replace clips. If trunk is still
active but unable to place calls, refer problem to the CO.
l. Late CO trunk release – This event only happens after the occurrence of
Error Type 513. The CO released the trunk four minutes after the PBX
dropped the call. This event decrements the severity (error count) of Error
Type 513, or may mean the problem related to Error Type 513 has been
fixed.
1 – Verify that Error Type 513 does not occur again. Refer to Error 513.
m. Incomplete Dial timer expired. This error applies only to the TN459.
Problem with incoming dialing stream. Refer problem to the CO.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
DID-TRK Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from subsequent tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation
NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence
X

D/ND1
ND

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-449

Short Test
Sequence

Order of Investigation
Port Diagnostic Test (#35)

X

Loop Around and Conference Circuit
Test (#33)
Port Audit Update Test (#36)

1.

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test
Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-124.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-450

Table 10-124.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), then check the Error Log for Error Type
513 (see Error Log table for description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-451

Table 10-124.
Error
Code
1003

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-452

Table 10-124.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems.
Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults,
TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone
detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems
before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a
TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board
connected to the backplane or bent pins on the
backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD
Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3
are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails..

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-453

Table 10-124.
Error
Code
0

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33)
This test checks the reflective and non-reflective loop around and conference
capabilities of a DID port circuit. The test that uses 404-Hz, 1004-Hz, and
2804-Hz tones is an on-board test only. Each tone is separately transmitted to
and from the port (loop around within the port) and verified.
This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines.
Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company.
To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test, the test may
be disabled from trunk administration Test field. (This also disables the port
diagnostic test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-454

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run
this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of
5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension, attendant number, or trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status station, status
attendant, or status trunk command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter
10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids",
for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always
in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use (no
calls), check the Error Log for Error Type 513 (see Error
Log table for description of this error and required
actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-455

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
1004

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test
has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If the
service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use
(off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port is not
busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum
of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use,
escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. Verify that the
"Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk Group Form is set
to "n." To enable the test, issue the change trunk-group x
command where "x" equals the number of the trunk group
to be tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance
Tests?" field on the form to "y."

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable
time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-456

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
2100

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. This may be due to the port being seized.
1. This abort code is usually associated with tone-clock
(TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK) resources. First,
clear any tone errors in the error log.
2. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-457

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
3

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The nonreflective 1004 Hz tone test of the port failed. An
echo was detected from the port. Poor quality transmission
was detected to or from the port. The problem may be
off-board.

7

The conference capabilities of the port failed. Poor quality
transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem
may be off-board.

129

The reflective 404-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality
transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem
may be off-board.

131

The reflective 1004-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality
transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem
may be off-board.

133

The reflective 2804-Hz tone test failed. Poor quality
transmission was detected to or from the port. The problem
may be off-board.

! CAUTION:
The port may still be operational, or the fault may be
off-board (connections or CO). Off-board problems
also include incoming seizures or off-hook port
seizures during the test and, perhaps somewhat
unlikely, noise induced by adjacent electric power
lines. Customers having this problem should resolve
it with their local power company to temporarily
alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test.
The test may be disabled from trunk administration
’Test’ field. This turns off all testing for that trunk group
except for tests 6 and 36.
More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-458

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
3
7
129
131
133
(cont’d.)

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
FAULT ISOLATION: Proceed as follows unless power or
tone problems are suspected (see note below).
1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect the
port from the far-end and retry the test. Coordinate this
with the CO, or do it after busy hours.
2. If the retry fails, replace the circuit pack.
3. If the retry passes and no troubles have been reported,
disable the test in the trunk group administration. If the
retry passes and troubles have been reported,
coordinate isolation with the CO.
NOTE:
If the loop around and conference circuit test fails for
all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is
indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit
pack is present, either the 631DB AC power unit or
the 676B DC power unit may be defective. (The
631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power
source.) The system may contain a TN736 or TN752
power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit,
but not both types of power units. To investigate
problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for AC-powered
systems) Maintenance documentation. To investigate
problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for DC-powered
systems) Maintenance documentation. If a red LED
on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on,
replace the pack. If the test fails on more than 1 port,
check for errors on the TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If
errors, take appropriate actions. When the tone
errors are cleared, rerun the test. If the test fails
again, see ’FAULT ISOLATION’ above.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-459

Table 10-125. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
DID Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is
successful. This port is functioning properly.
1. If users are reporting troubles, examine loop
connections to the port and refer problem to the CO.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct.
Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the
port.

Continued on next page

Port Diagnostic Test (#35)
This test checks a port’s battery feed circuitry. The battery feed circuitry is tested
for on-/off-hook detection, battery shutdown, and battery reversal (WINK)
capabilities.
Table 10-126.
Error
Code

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-460

Table 10-126.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), then check the error log for error type 513
(refer to the Error Log table for a description of this
error and required actions). The port may be locked
up.
2. If the port status is idle, busyout and release the
trunk, and then retry the command at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, check for wiring errors
toward the CO which may cause the trunk to lock up.
4. If the wiring is OK and the test continues to abort,
replace the TN753.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-461

Table 10-126.
Error
Code

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1018

ABORT

Test has been disabled by trunk group administration.
Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the Trunk
Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test, issue the
change trunk-group x command where "x" equals the
number of the trunk group to be tested. Then change
the entry in the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the form to
"y."

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

61446

FAIL

Battery feed test failed. A loop current fault was
detected. This is most probably an incoming CO-line
problem. This failure code is only reported by the
TN2139 Italian DID circuit pack.
1. Check the incoming CO-line for loop current. If none
is detected refer the problem to the CO.
2. If the CO-line checks out OK, the failure must be on
the DID port. Replace the circuit pack.

61456

FAIL

Battery feed test failed. An on-board problem was
detected. This port is out-of-service.
1. Replace circuit pack.

61472

FAIL

Battery feed test failed. A problem with the incoming
CO-line was detected.
1. Check the incoming CO-line for proper operation. If
warranted, refer the problem to the CO.
2. If the CO-line checks out OK, the failure must be on
the DID port. Replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-462

Table 10-126.
Error
Code

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Current flow was detected for this port.
1. User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
connections.
2. Refer problem to the CO.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Port Audit Update Test (#36)
This test sends updates of the DID port translation for all ports on the circuit pack
that have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against
possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No
response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation
updates. The port translation data includes: wink or immediate start trunk, dial
tone or rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, Network balance
R/RC, and disconnect timing.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-463

Table 10-127.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The port has been placed out of service, perhaps by
craft busyout. Use the display port PCSSpp command
to determine the trunk group/member number of the
port. Use the status trunk command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is out of service, then the port is unavailable
for certain tests. You must wait until the port is in service
and idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is in service and idle, then retry the
command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DID-TRK (DID Trunk)

Page 10-464

Table 10-127.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
This test passed. Translation information was
successfully updated on the circuit pack.
1. If signaling troubles are reported (Error Types 1,
257, or 513 in Error Log table), verify translation
information for this port.
2. Refer problem to the CO. If the trunk is busied out,
the test does not run, but returns PASS.
To verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is
in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action
is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue
to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-465

DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack)

MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DIG-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Digital Line Circuit Pack

DIG-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Digital Line Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also DIG-LINE (Digital Line) Maintenance
documentation for related line information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-466

DIG-LINE (Digital Line)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DIG-LINE

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Digital Line

DIG-LINE

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Digital Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port
number (for example, 01).

DIG-LINE maintenance monitors and tests ports on Digital Line circuit packs and
the hardware connected to those ports for lines administered as a digital station.
These include stations with just a digital voice terminal and stations with a digital
voice terminal and a linked data module. Stand-alone data modules, and data
adaptors in stand-alone mode, are covered by the PDMODULE and TDMODULE
maintenance objects. Circuit pack-level maintenance is covered by DIG-BD
whose strategy is described in the XXX-BD section of this chapter. The following
circuit packs support digital lines:
Digital Line Circuit Packs
Code

Ports

Type

Companding

TN413

8

4-wire DCP

A-law

TN754

8

4-wire DCP

mu-law

TN754B

8

4-wire DCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2181

16

2-wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2224

24

2-wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2136

8

2-Wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2177

16

2-wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2181

16

2-wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

TN2224

24

2-wire IDCP

A-law/mu-law

Endpoints
7400 series digital voice
terminals, attendant
consoles, 510D personal
terminals, MT515 BCTs, DCP
data modules

Data Adaptors (DA), Italtel
Digital Telephone Models 1
and 2 (IDT1/2).

G3r V1 systems support only TN754 and TN754B. TN413 and TN754 are found
only in upgraded cabinets.
Each digital line port supports two 64 kbps information channels (primary and
secondary) and one 8kbps signaling channel. Digital voice terminals always use
the primary information channel. Thus only one voice terminal can be connected
to each port. The secondary information channel can be used to connect a data

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-467

terminal via a Digital Terminal Data Module (DTDM) or a Data Adaptor (DA). All
other devices currently supported by Digital Line circuit packs communicate on
the primary information channel. Figure 10-26 shows examples of digital line
connectivity.
Only the TN754B or TN2136 should be used in out-of-building applications. For
important information pertaining to protection required for out-of-building digital
voice terminals, see DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3
Installation and Test, 555-230-104.
It should be noted that TN2181 and TN2224 supports both modes as shown in
Figure 10-26 and Figure 10-27.

Port

TN413, TN754/B
Digital Line
Circuit Pack

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Digital Line

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
..
Physical Connection
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
Port
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
... . ... .. .. ...
Control Channel (Signaling)
.
.
.
.
.
.
Digital
.
.
.
.
.
.
Voice
.
.
Port
..
.
Terminal
.
.
.
Primary Information Channel (Voice)
.
.
.
.
..
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
.
DTDM
.
Data
..
.
.
..
Terminal
.
..
.
.
Port
..
..
Secondary Information Channel (Data)
..
.
.
..
..
..
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..

Figure 10-26.

..

..

..

Digital Line Connectivity

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-468

TN2136
Digital Line
Circuit Pack
Digital Line

Port

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
.
..
.
..
Physical Connection
.
.
.
..
.
.
..
.
Data
Italtel
.
.
.
Port
.
.
Digital
Adaptor
.
.
..
Control
Channel
(Signaling)
.
IDCP
Telephone
.
(Linked
..
..............
..
.
Model 1/2
.
.
Mode)
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
Port
..
.
Primary Information Channel (Voice)
.
.
.
CCITT
.
.
..
.
.
Data
V24-V28
..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
..
Terminal
.
..
.
..
..
Port
Secondary Information Channel (Data)
..
..
..
.
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
.
..

.......................................................................................................
.
.
.
Physical Connection
..
.
..
Italtel
Port
Control
Channel (Signaling)
.
..
Digital
.
.
Telephone
.
..
Primary Information Channel (Voice)
.
Model 1/2
..
.
.
.
.
(Secondary Information Channel Unused)
..
.
..
.......................................................................................................
.
.
.
.

..
..
..

Figure 10-27.

..
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
..
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
..
..

Digital Line

Data Adaptors operating in stand-alone mode are treated as
PDMODULE Maintenance Objects.

Digital Line Connectivity

Only 2-wire Italtel Digital Telephone Models 1 and 2 (IDT1/2) or DAs can be
directly connected to a TN2136. AT&T DCP (4-wire) digital voice terminals and
data modules can be connected to these circuit packs via Italtel’s 2/4-wire
adapter. DAs can operate in either of two modes which are covered by different
maintenance objects:

DA Mode

Administered
as:

Endpoint

Maintenance Object

Stand-alone

PDM

Data endpoint only

PDMODULE

Linked

DTDM

IDT1/2 and optional
data terminal

DIG-LINE

Digital Line maintenance interacts with Digital Line circuit pack (DIG-BD)
maintenance, and results of DIG-LINE testing can be affected by the health of
the Digital Line circuit pack. Keep this in mind when investigating reported Digital
Line problems.
There are instances where the service state of a station is mentioned. It is helpful
to understand what os ment by the different service states that may exist. The

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-469

different service states which apply to digital line station are explained as
follows.:

Out-of-Service

The port, and thus the station, have been removed from
service. Busyouts put the port in the out-of-service state.

Ready-for-Service

The port on the circuit pack has been put into service, but
the voice terminal has not yet established signaling
communications with the port.

In-Service

The voice terminal has established signaling
communications with the port, and the system is ready to
process calls to and from that station. A terminal in the
ready-for-service state will progress to the in-service state
if it is functioning normally. It can also be forced into the
in-service state by going off-hook.

Downloading of Terminal Parameters
Programmable Terminals
The following information is presented as background information to help
understand how maintenance software interacts with terminal parameter
downloading.

Terminal Types:
The following terminals can be downloaded for Definity G3V3 and later versions:
a. 84xx multibutton digital voice terminals (8403D01A, 8410B, 8410D02A,
8434D01A) with optional expansion module.
b. 603A1 and 603D1 Callmaster terminals for telemarketing applications.
c. 302B1 attendant console.

Circuit Packs:
1. 8400x, 302B1 Terminals
a. TN754 (4-wire, Mu-law)
Minimum usable vintage for 8410D and 8434D terminals - V11
b. TN413 (4-wire, A-law)
c. TN754B (4-wire, A-law/Mu-law selectable)
d. TN2177 (2-wire, 16-port, A-law/Mu-law selectable)
e. TN2181 (2-wire, 16-port, A-law/Mu-law selectable)
f. TN2224 (2-wire, 24-port, A-law/mu-law selectable)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-470

2. 603A1/D1 Terminals
a. TN754 (4-wire, Mu-law),
b. TN413 (4-wire, A-law)
c. TN754B (4-wire, A-law/Mu-law selectable)

Downloadable Terminal Parameters
The following parameters are downloaded to programmable terminals:

DOWNLOADABLE PARAMETERS
Parameter

Scope

Terminal

International Flags
(A-law/Mu-law, Display Mode,
DLI Voltage level)

System level

84xx, 603x, 302B1

Primary Levels
(Transmission & Sidetone)

System level

84xx, 603x, 302B1

Adjunct Levels
(Transmission & Sidetone)

System level

84xx

Handset Expander Option

System level

84xx

Administrable Options
(Speakerphone & Mute Button)

Per-terminal

84xx

Administrable Softkeys

Per-terminal,
System level

8410D, 8434D

Nonvolatile Memory
Nonvolatile memory is used to store downloadable parameters in programmable
terminals. Therefore, once the terminal has been downloaded, it is not be
necessary to download it again, even if power is removed from the terminal.
If the nonvolatile memory fails with power still present, the terminal will revert to its
default factory settings except for its A-law/Mu-law companding settings which
are stored in RAM. If power is removed after the nonvolatile memory fails, the
terminal will revert to its factory default settings.
Mu-law companding is assigned as a default setting at the factory, so, for
domestic use, a programmable terminal can place calls even though it has not
been downloaded from the PBX.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-471

Download Actions
There are several different scenarios which will cause a terminal to be
downloaded. As described below, these can occur as part of background
maintenance activity or on demand from the System Access Terminal or from a
station.
For the background actions described below, the terminal will be downloaded
automatically if a download retry flag for the terminal is set in software. This flag is
set at the time translation is loaded at boot time, when translation which affects
the parameters of a terminal is changed as part of system administration actions,
and when a port is inserted in software as a result of board insertion or translation
change.

Automatic Download Actions
1. System Reboot/Restart
A global download action is started when periodic maintenance tests start
after a system reboot/restart regardless of whether the parameters have
been downloaded previously.
2. Periodic Tests
If the download flag is still set when periodic tests are run on a terminal, a
download action will occur. This operation is required in case a terminal
could not be downloaded previously because it was off-hook at the time
the system first booted or because the terminal was off-hook at the time
translation associated with downloadable parameters was changed.
Note that it may take more than an hour for periodic tests to reach the
terminal that needs to be downloaded.
3. Terminal Administration
A downloadable terminal is automatically downloaded when translation
changes associated with downloadable parameters are made as part of
system administration. As shown in Table 10-128, these changes can be
for a specified terminal or may be system-wide. If the change is for
system-level parameter, a background global update request is made to
download all programmable terminals.
This global update may take more than an hour for a system with several
thousand programmable terminals.
4. Port Insertion
Whenever maintenance software initiates a request to place a port into
service, a terminal download action is started on that terminal if that
terminal is programmable. This port insertion action occurs under the
following circumstances:
a. A digital line circuit pack that is physically inserted into the system
has ports currently administered for programmable terminals.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-472

If more than 20 port insertion requests are received within a few
seconds, a global download request is started up as a background
task. This action updates all programmable terminals instead of just
those being inserted. This is done to avoid system overload for
situations where there is massive board insertion. This could occur
when connectivity to an EPN is reestablished after that EPN was
down.
b. A station port is added to the system by a "add station" or "change
station" command.
c. A TTI port is activated.
5. Audits
As part of periodic maintenance, the hardware status audit test queries
programmable terminals to determine which levels and/or options are
being used. If the reported values are not equal to the administered
values, the system will initiate a terminal download action. This audit does
NOT check the parameters used for softkeys.
6. Activation of TTI
A terminal is downloaded automatically when it is activated using the
Terminal Translation Initialization feature. Therefore, no special user
actions are required for TTI.
NOTE:
Plugging the station cord into a terminal does not automatically
cause the terminal to be downloaded. If this terminal has factory
defaults or if the terminal has been previously downloaded with
parameters different than those desired, use one of the demand
download actions described below to download the terminal.

Demand Download Actions
1. Busyout/Release Command
A maintenance demand busyout/release request for a station will cause
the terminal to be downloaded regardless of its previous download status.
2. Feature Access Code
A Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code can be used to
request a terminal download action. When this code is followed by a "#",
the programmable parameters for the current terminal are downloaded
when the terminal goes on hook. When this code is followed by an
extension, the programmable parameters for the specified station are
downloaded.
This Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code is assigned on
the second page of the "feature-access-codes" screen.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-473

A confirmation is returned if the download request is accepted. A busy
tone is returned if the request is made from a different station when the
target station is off-hook.
The first three green call appearance LEDs on the 84xx 603x terminal will
be turned on for three seconds if the station was successfully downloaded
as a result of an entry of a Refresh Terminal Parameters Facility Access
Code. This is not true for the 302B1 terminal.
There is no visible display on a station for the other background or
demand download actions. As described below, the "status station" and
"status attendant" screens can be used to check the download status of a
specified terminal.

Status of Parameter Downloads
The "status station" and "status attendant" screens display the current download
status of individual 84xx, 603, and 301B1 terminals in the Download Status field.
The possible download states are:
Table 10-128.

Terminal Download Status

Status

Terminal Down Load State

Complete

Terminal successfully downloaded sometime in the past.

Pending

System waiting to download the terminal. This may
require the execution of a background periodic test
which could take more than an hour. A demand
download as described above may also be used to
initiate an immediate download.

Not Applicable

Not a programmable terminal.

Possible reasons for terminal being not downloaded include:
— Terminal is off-hook.
— Terminal detected a bad checksum.
— Terminal detected a bad or missing EEPROM (refer to hardware error log).
— Terminal is busy programming data from a previous PROGRAM message.
— Terminal is in the Programming Disabled state.
— Terminal is in the Local Program Options Mode.
— Terminal is disconnected or out of service (use status station command).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-474

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Digital Line Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

40987

None

WARNING

OFF

1 (b)

1 to 20

None

WARNING

OFF

18 (c)

0

busyout port
UUCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

rel port UUCSSpp

None

WARNING

ON

test port UUCSSpp sh

test port UUCSSpp sh r 6

130 (d)
257 (e)

40971

None

513

0

Station (Digital)
Audits Test (#17)

WARNING(o)

OFF

767 (f)

40964

None

WARNING

OFF

769 (g)

40963
40988

None

WARNING

OFF

NONE

WARNING

OFF

1026(o)

test port UUCSSpp sh r 1

test port UUCSSpp sh r 4

1281

Any

Station (Digital)
Audits Test (#17)

WARNING

OFF

1537 (h)

40968

None

WARNING

OFF

1793

Voice & Ctrl. Local
Loop Test (#13)

MINOR/
WARNING2

ON

test port UUCSSpp l r 3

2049

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#9)

MINOR/
WARNING3

ON

test port UUCSSpp l r 3

2304 (n)

None

2305 (i)

32770

None

2305 (h)

40967

None

3840 (k)

40965

None

3840 (l)

40989

None

3841 (m)

41029

None

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test
description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options
command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)
3.

Page 10-475

Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options
command.

Notes:
a. Could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem
detected by the port circuit. Check for defective wiring, a defective voice
terminal, or move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of
wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the
circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm will be
retired after a predetermined amount of time.
b. This Error Type and Aux Data will occur when at least 15 off-board
problems have been detected with the link to the terminal. When an error
with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented.
The user could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board
problem detected by the port circuit. Check for defective wiring, a
defective voice terminal, or move voice terminal closer to the switch (in
terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists,
replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm
will be retired after a predetermined amount of time.
c. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by
maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout via the
release port UUCSS pp/PCSSpp command.
d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
e. Problems transmitting to the voice terminal. This problem can be caused
by defective wiring. Defective wiring can cause varying degrees of
problems on different types of sets. Sets such as the 7410 appear to be
more susceptible to wiring problems than other sets. This is usually an
on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received.
f. This is an in-line event that produces this error type when a favorable
response is received from running the Digital Line Electronic Power Feed
Test (#11). No craft action is necessary. This alarm will be resolved with
the passing of time.
g. With Aux Data 40963, this error type is a result of an unfavorable response
to the Electronic Power Feed/ Positive Temperature Coefficient Test (#11).
With Aux Data 40988, this error type indicates that the EPF/PTC circuit has
been turned off due to an overcurrent condition.
For TN754 vintage 13 or earlier and TN413, the EPF circuit senses an
overcurrent condition at the voice terminal. Check for a short in the wiring,
a damaged jack, an incorrect type of voice terminal, or a defective voice
terminal.
For TN754 vintage 14 or later, TN754B and TN2136, the PTC will open if
there is a short on the power line for 1/2 second or longer. The voice
terminal is probably not operating properly. Unplug the voice terminal for

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-476

30 seconds and then plug it back in. If the voice terminal still does not
operate, then check for a short in the wiring, a damaged jack, an incorrect
type of voice terminal, or a defective voice terminal.
Once the problem has been resolved, it may take up to 1 hour for the
alarm to clear due to ‘‘leaky bucket’’ strategy. If the problem cannot be
resolved by one of the steps above, then replace the circuit pack.
h. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to
some problem with the link to the voice terminal. This can be ignored if no
user complaints are received. Otherwise, make sure the voice terminal is
connected, check for defective wiring, check for a defective voice
terminal, and move voice terminal to a jack that is closer to the switch (in
terms of feet of wiring between the jack and the switch). If the problem still
exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the
alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time.
i. This indicates that the station went off-hook while it was in the
ready-for-service state. Use the status station command to determine the
state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to
ready-for-service. No craft action is necessary.
j. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack
and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No craft action is necessary.
k. No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board. No maintenance action
is required.
l. An uplink message has been logged indicating that the Electric Power
Feed (EPF) is on with no load on it. No action is necessary.
m. The circuit pack’s message buffer is full. This may be caused by having
many display phones with heavy traffic connected to the circuit pack. No
action is necessary.
n. Internal system error. No action is necessary.
o. There is a problem with the voice terminal EEPROM. When the voice
terminal is repaired the alarm will be resolved with the passing of time.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-477

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test
(#1201)

X

D

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop
Around Test (#13)

X

ND

Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test
(#11)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test
(#16)

X

X

ND

Station (Digital) Audits Test (#17)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test
(#1201)
This test checks the integrity of the connection between the SPE and the
attached Digital Terminal and the ability of the terminal and the associated port to
send and receive data. This test is based, in principal, on procedure 622 used in
system 85 to help isolate digital terminal problems.
A request is presented to the terminal to go into loop back mode. Then data is
sent to the terminal and when received back, checked for consistency. This test
is run as a part of the craft command "test long" procedure. It is not included in
any error recovery strategy and generates no Error Log entries or alarms. To
begin the test, Maintenance will ask Call Processing to make the associated end
point and port “ Maintenance Busy”. This test will succeed if the endpoint is "idle".
If the reserve request fails then the test will abort. If the request succeeds then
the SPE sends a message to loop around both information channels for the
digital terminal. First the primary information (voice, Information Channel 1 or I1)
channel loop back test is run. The test is performed by sending a digital count
from the Tone/Clock circuit pack on the primary information channel time slot and
receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-478

If the primary information channel test is successful, the loop around test for the
secondary information (data, Information Channel 2 or I2) channel is then
performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around
test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered, which is also the case for a
linked DA.
Only one value (Pass. Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests run.
If any test fails aborts, the sequence is stopped. Upon completion of this test the
associated endpoint and port are moved back into the previous service state.
Table 10-129. TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote
Loop Around Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display portUUCSSpp/PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension or attendant number of
the port. Use status station or status attendant to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain test. (See Chapter 10,
"Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids"
for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait
until the port is idle before re-testing. Attendants are
always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and
the port is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-479

Table 10-129. TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1002

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance to diagnose
any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out of service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR-Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exist, retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-480

Table 10-129. TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1004

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display portUUCSSpp
command to determine the station extension or
attendant number of the port. Use status station or
status attendant to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain test. (See Chapter
10, "Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing
Aids", for a full description of all possible states.) You
must wait until the port is idle before resetting.
Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is
plugged in and the port is not busied out.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

The installed circuit pack does not support this
operation.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Make sure terminal is connected and repeat test.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.
3. If test fails replace terminal and repeat test.
4. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-481

Table 10-129. TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
14

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The primary channel (voice, Information Channel 1 or I1)
is not operating properly. User impact may range from
noticing nothing to not being able to use the port. Check
the results of "Voice and Control Channel Local Loop
Test (#13). If that test fails, suspect the Digital Line
circuit pack. If that test passes then replace the terminal.
If both test fail, and component replacement does not
change the results, then:
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator
circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack
using the test board UUCSS s command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit pack
are functioning properly, and the tests still fail,
escalate the problem. ((Continued)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-482

Table 10-129. TEST #1201 Digital Terminal Remote
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1015

ABORT

The system will not allow this test to be run because the
station is/has not been busied out. Busy out the station
with the /E3busyout station/E1 command.

16

FAIL

The secondary channel (data Information Channel 2 or
I2 is not operating properly. User impact may range
from noticing nothing to not being able to use this
terminal. Check the results of "Voice and Control
Channel Local Loop Test (#13). If that test fails, suspect
the Digital Line circuit pack. If that test passes then
replace the terminal. If both test fail, and component
replacement does not change the results, then:
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator
circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack
using the test board UUCSS s command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit pack
are functioning properly, and the tests still fail,
escalate the problem.

PASS

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All
channels are transmitting properly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem,
repeat this test up to a maximum of ten times to
make sure it continues to pass.
2. If complaints persist (noisy connections for voice.
corrupted data transfer for data), examine the
station, connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and
provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-483

complete. Crosstalk testing is performed on both the primary information channel
(voice) and the secondary information channel (data) associated with each
digital station port. If this test fails on either channel, the station and the DTDM
are taken out-of-service.
Table 10-130.
Error
Code
1

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
During testing of the primary information channel,
system resources may not have been available. Also,
the port may have been busy during the test.
1. Check the port status. Use the display port
UUCSSpp command to determine the station
extension of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port.
If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for this test. You will have
to wait until the port is idle.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command a
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2

ABORT

During testing of DTDM, system resources may not have
been available. Also, the port may have been busy
during the test.
1. Check if port is being used. If possible, disconnect
by toggling disconnect button on DTDM. Retry
command after 1 minute.

! WARNING:
This action will drop the call in progress.
2. If the test continues to abort after 5 attempts,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-130.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-484

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
display port UUCSSpp to determine the station
extension or attendant number of the port. Use status
station or status attendant to determine the service
state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook)
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance to diagnose
any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-130.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-485

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use display port UUCSSpp to
determine the station extension or attendant number of
the port. Use status station or status attendant to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10,
"Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids",
for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are
always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and
the port is not busied out.

1020

ABORT

Test disabled via background testing. Use status
station command to determine when station is available
for testing.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-130.
Error
Code
1
2

Page 10-486

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested
port was found to be transmitting in error. This will cause
noisy and unreliable connections. Failure code 1
indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary
channel. Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test
failed on the secondary channel.
1. Replace circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem,
repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make
sure it continues to pass.
2. If complaints persist, examine the station,
connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

Digital Line Electronic Power Feed/Positive
Temperature Coefficient/PPF Test(#11)
For TN413, and TN754 vintage 13 or earlier, this is an Electronic Power Feed
(EPF) restoral test. In this test, the processor requests that the EPF be turned on
for a given port, and an attempt is made to turn on the power supply to the
station. If no current is drawn, the station is probably not connected. If an
overcurrent condition is sensed, there may be a short in the loop. A message is
returned reporting that either the EPF was successfully turned on, or that an
overcurrent condition was sensed. This test is repeated again 5 seconds later.
For TN754 vintage 14 or later, TN754B and TN2136 this is a Positive Temperature
Coefficient (PTC) restoral test. In this test, the processor requests that the PTC be
turned on for a given port, and an attempt is made to turn on the power supply to
the station. If an overcurrent condition is sensed, there is probably a short on the
power line that causing the PTC to open and disconnect the voice terminal. Since
the PTC does not have self-restoral capability, the voice terminal must be
manually unplugged for 30 seconds and then plugged back in to restore the
PTC. A message is returned reporting that either the PTC was successfully
turned on successfully with no problem or an overcurrent condition was sensed.
This test is repeated again 5 seconds later.
TN2181 and TN2224 boards carry a Protected Power Feed (PPF) relays, one for
each port. Therefore this will be a Protected Power Feed restoral test. The test
procedure and its response is same as that of EPF. One of differences between

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-487

EFP and PPF is that, if the port goes into a overcurrent state, PPF does not report
this change of state because it is a transient state which will not last more than
50ms. If the over current persists the power will be shut off automatically and an
EPF_off_overcurrent message is sent uplink.
Table 10-131.
Error
Code

TEST #11 Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
display port UUCSSpp/PCSSpp to determine the station
extension or attendant number of the port. Use status
station or status attendant to determine the service
state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook)
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-131.
Error
Code

Page 10-488

TEST #11 Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Electronic Power Feed Test passed. The message to
turn on the power to the station was successfully sent to
the port.
1. Although this test will never actually return a FAIL
result except for the Internal System Error
described above, it will log an error indicating the
real results of the test. Check the Error Log for any
entries with Error Types 767 or 769 after the test
completes.
2. If Error Type 767 appears in the Error Log, this
should indicate that the test sensed no problems
with the power to the station. To verify that the station
is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the station,
if available, and check that all the feature buttons are
operating.
3. If Error Type 769 appears in the Error Log, this
indicates some problem with the power to the
station. Check for a short in the wiring, a damaged
jack, a defective voice terminal, or an incorrect type
of terminal.

Continued on next page

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13)
These tests check the information and control channels between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and the Digital Line port circuit. The SPE sends a
message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port.
First, the primary information (voice) channel loop back test is run. The test is
performed by sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the
primary information channel time slot and receiving the same digital count with a
general purpose Tone Detector.
While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel
Loop Around Test is performed. This test consists of sending four different
transparent patterns to the on-board microprocessor, receiving them back, and
comparing them.
The Loop Around Test for the secondary information (data) channel is then
performed. This test is the same as the primary information channel loop around
test and is performed only if a DTDM is administered.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Page 10-489

A Conference Test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is
the same as Conference Test #6.
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of four tests run. If
any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped.
Table 10-132.
Error
Code

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port
UUCSSpp/PCSSpp to determine the station extension or
attendant number of the port. Use status station or status
attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the
service state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description
of all possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the
handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-132.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-490

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have
time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling
heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The
system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors
present or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer
to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer
to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test
has been aborted. Use display port UUCSSpp/PCSSpp to
determine the station extension or attendant number of the
port. Use status station or status attendant to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates that
the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests.
(See Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full description of all possible
states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
Attendants are always in use (off-hook) if the handset is
plugged in and the port is not busied out.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-132.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-491

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run
this test.
1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-132.
Error
Code

Page 10-492

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

7

FAIL

Conference Test failed on primary channel. In some cases,
users may not notice disruption in service. In extreme cases,
conferencing feature may not work at all.

14

FAIL

The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User
impact may range from noticing nothing to not being able to
use this port.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and digital circuit
pack is not transmitting properly. User impact may range
from noticing nothing to not being able to use the port. Could
also be disruptive to other users.

16

FAIL

The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly.
User impact may range from noticing nothing to not being
able to use this port.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit
pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test
board UUCSS s/PCSS s command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs
are functioning properly, and the test still fails, replace
the Digital Line circuit pack.

PASS

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop test passed. All
channels are transmitting properly.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat
this test up to a maximum of 10 times to make sure it
continues to pass.
2. If complaints persist (noisy connections for voice,
corrupted data for data transfer), examine the station,
connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test (#16)
This test lights all lamps on the terminal as specified. The lamp updates will run
only if the station is in-service. The status of the station is checked and the lamp
updates are blocked from taking place if the station is not in the in-service state.
This test does not affect the status of the Message Waiting lamp.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-133.
Error
Code

Page 10-493

TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

ABORT

This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, then
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

ABORT

Station may be in ready-for-service or out-of-service
state.
1. Use status station command to verify state of
station.
2. Make sure the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-133.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-494

TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
display port UUCSSpp/PCSSpp to determine the
station extension or attendant number of the port. Use
status station or status attendant to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (See Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids", for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1392

ABORT

This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not
execute on it.
1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the
display port command (the display shows that the
port is a TTI port) or the list config command (the
display shows a t for the port).
2. If either list config or display port indicates that the
port is not a TTI port, escalate the problem. If both
commands indicate that the port is a TTI port, the
abort is correct, and no action is necessary.

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-133.
Error
Code

Page 10-495

TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The message to light all of the station lamps was sent
successfully to the port.
1. Observe the station lamps being lit when running the
test. If all lamps do not light successfully, the other
Digital Line test results may indicate related
problems that will not allow the lamps to light.
2. Investigate by using other Digital Line port tests, and
by examining the station, wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Digital Station Audits Test (#17)
This is a series of six tests which are classified as audits. The SPE sends
messages to the on-board microprocessor to perform the following tests. These
audits run only if the station is in-service.
■

■

■

■

■

■

Switchhook Inquiry Test — This is an update of the SPE records
according to the circuit pack’s records. This inquiry is sent all the way to
the voice terminal.
Bad Scan Inquiry Test — A message is sent uplink which contains a
count that is generated due to certain events relating to the link conditions.
This can be an indication of communications problems between the
Processor and Digital Port circuit pack.
EPF/PTC Inquiry Test — For a TN413 or a TN754 vintage 13 or earlier, the
status of the Electronic Power Feed (EPF) is sent uplink. Possible
conditions are: EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, and EPF-no-load. For TN754 vintage
14 or later, TN754B or TN2136, TN2181, TN2224, the status of the Positive
Temperature Coefficient (PTC) is sent uplink. Possible conditions are:
PTC-on-ok, PTC-off, and PTC-no-load.
ID Request Test — A request is made to the station for its status. The
station sends its configuration information and health information back.
This information is checked and a pass/fail result is provided.
Ringer Update Test — This updates the digital telephone ringer state
according to the processor records.
DTMF Administration Update Test — This is a message to the digital
station to refresh the default value which causes the station to send
touch-tones only in the primary information channel. This value is set
initially when the station is put in-service and every time the station’s state
changes from other states to in-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-134.
Error
Code

Page 10-496

TEST #17 Station (Digital) Audits Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1

ABORT

Switchhook audit timed out.

2

ABORT

ID request fails, health bit returned from voice terminal is
bad.
1. Make sure voice terminal is connected and repeat
test.
2. If test fails, replace voice terminal and repeat test.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

ABORT

The EPF/PTC has detected an overcurrent condition.
1. For a TN754 vintage 13 or earlier Digital Line circuit
pack, issue the test UUCSSpp/PCSSpp long
command. If Test #11 passes, then the EPF/PTC
condition has been cleared. Rerun the Short Test
Sequence. If Test #11 does not pass, follow the
repair procedures described for Test #11.
2. Look for Error Type 769 logged against DIG-LINE
and follow the procedures in the associated
footnote. If any additional problems are found after
completion of maintenance procedures, rerun the
test.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

4

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Resolve any outstanding circuit pack maintenance
problems.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

5

ABORT

Ringer update aborted due to station being in
ready-for-service or out-of-service state.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIG-LINE (Digital Line)

Table 10-134.
Error
Code
6

Page 10-497

TEST #17 Station (Digital) Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, the
release the port via the release station
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.

1392

ABORT

This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not
execute on it.
1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the
display port command (the display shows that the
port is a TTI port) or the list config command (the
display shows a t for the port).
2. If either list config or display port indicate that the
port is not a TTI port, escalate the problem. If both
commands indicate that the port is a TTI port, the
abort is correct, and no action is necessary.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Station Audits passed. This Digital Port circuit pack is
functioning properly.
1. If complaints persist, investigate by using other port
tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and
connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-498

DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears In
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System Technician
Command To Run

Full Name of
MO

DIOD-DS1

MAJOR1

test trunk group# member# l

DS1 DIOD
Trunk

DIOD-DS1

MINOR

test trunk group# member# l

DS1 DIOD
Trunk

DIOD-DS1

WARNING

test trunk group# member#

DS1 DIOD
Trunk

1.

A Major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by
the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group
are alarmed. For more information on the set options command, see Chapter 10,
"Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids".

NOTE:
Many trunk problems are caused by incorrect settings of parameters on the
trunk group administration form. Settings must be compatible with the local
environment and with parameter settings on the far-end. Refer to DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 3 V2 Implementation, 555-230-653, for
information on how to administer trunks. The Application Notes section of
that book shows the correct settings for administrable timers and other
parameters on a country-by-country basis.
A DS1 DIOD trunk provides a link for digitized voice or data communications
between the system and a central office switch. There are two types of DS1
interfaces:
■

24 DS0 channels on a 1.544 Mbps link

■

31 DS0 channels + 1 framing channel on a 2.048 Mbps link

■

32-channel mode is supported only on TN464 circuit packs and on G3r V2
systems.

The DS1-DIOD maintenance object monitors and maintains a DIOD trunk port on
a TN464 UDS1 Interface circuit pack. See UDS1-BD in this chapter for more
information about this circuit pack. The DS1 circuit pack supports low level CO
trunk signaling interfaces for both ground-start and loop-start trunks. This
maintenance strategy covers the in-line errors log, initialization tests, periodic
tests, scheduled tests, demand tests, and alarm resolution and escalation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-499

Three trunk service states are specified by DS1 DIOD trunk maintenance:
out-of-service

The trunk is in a deactivated state and
cannot be used for either incoming or
outgoing calls.

in-service

The trunk is in an activated state and can
be used for both incoming and outgoing
calls.

disconnect (ready-for-service)

The trunk is in an activated state but can
only be used for an incoming call.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
DS1 DIOD Trunk Error Log Entries
Error
Type
0

1

Aux
Data
0

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test trunk /

1(a)

57408

1(a)

57487
57476
57477
57485

15(b)

Any

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

18(c)

0

busyout trunk
/

WARNIN
G

OFF

release trunk
/

None

WARNIN
G

ON

test trunk /

130(d)
257(e)

57392

DS1 CO Dial Tone
Seizure Test (#314)

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

513(f)

57393

DS1 Tie Trunk
Seizure Test (#136)

MIN/MAJ2

OFF

769(g)

57484

1025(h)

51200
DS1 CO Dial Tone
Seizure Test (#314)

MIN/
WRN3

OFF

1025

test trunk /
r2

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-500

DS1 DIOD Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

Associated Test

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

1281

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk /
lr4

1537

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk /
lr3

1793(i)

test board PCSS l

2049(j)

57473
57474
57475

2305(k)

50944

2562(l)

16665

2817(m)

52992

3840(n)

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

Continued on next page
1.
2.

3.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field
set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group are out of
service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options
command.

Notes:
a. Error Type 1—Aux Data 57408—No tip ground is detected on an
outgoing call.
Aux Data 57476—Rotary Dial

before Wink.
Aux Data 57477—Rotary Dial pulse too early.
Aux Data 57485—Wink too short for a valid signal.
Aux Data 57487—PBX could not get ‘‘loop close’’ signal.

The DS1 Interface circuit pack detected a hardware fault. These errors will
cause the Dial Tone Test (#314) to run and are only considered a problem
if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1025 will also show
up). In this case, the trunk may be put in the ready-for-service state
(shown as ‘‘disconnected’’ by the status command), which allows only
incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow the procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-501

b. Error Type 15—This is a software audit error that does not indicate any
hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate
associated errors (if any).
c. Error Type 18—System Technician has busied out the trunk to the
out-of-service state. No calls can be made on this trunk except the Facility
Access Test Call. For details on this feature, refer to "Facility Test Calls"
section in Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".
d. Error Type 130—This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been
removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error,
reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
e. Error Type 257—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
Aux Data 57392 indicates no external release on PBX disconnect.
Escalate the problem.
f. Error Type 513—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
Aux Data 57393 indicates belated external release on PBX disconnect.
Escalate the problem.
g. Error Type 769—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault.
The Aux Data field contains the following error type:—57484, fault is
detected on tip/ring. Escalate the error.
h. The DS1Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault, and the Aux Data
field contains the following error type: 51200, port is unavailable. Run the
Dial Tone Test (#314) and follow procedures.
i. Error Type 1793—DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for
UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log if the port is on a TN464 UDS1
board. Refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details
j. Error Type 2049—With the following Aux Data:
Aux Data 57473—Rotary dial rate below 8 pulses per second.
Aux Data 57474—Rotary dial rate above 12 pulses per second.
Aux Data 57475—Rotary Dial interdigit time is too short.
The DS1 interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 DIOD
trunk. The trunk can not communicate with the far-end because it is
unable to interpret digits sent from the far-end switch. Check with the
far-end switch or Operating Company for proper trunk connection.
k. Error Type 2305—Recorder message, trunk could not be seized (Aux Data
50944). Run Test #314 and follow the outlined procedures.
l. Error Type 2562—Retry Failure error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error comes from call processing and is generated when a
second attempt (retry) to seize an outgoing trunk fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-502

m. Error Type 2817—Glare error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a two-way trunk
from both the near-end and the far-end. Attempt to place the call again. If
the error persists, execute the Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314) and follow
those procedures.
n. Error Type 3840—Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an
internal system error. Enter the status trunk command to verify the status
of the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter the release trunk
command to put it back into in-service. Retry the test command. If the test
continues to abort, then escalate the problem.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

DS1 Dial Tone Test (#314)

X

X

ND

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) resides on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464 UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE
chip instead of several NPE chips.) The NPE controls port connectivity and gain,
and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30
seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-135.
Error
Code

Page 10-503

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status station or status trunk command to determine
when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
The status health command can be used to determine
if the system is experiencing heavy traffic. Refer to the
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-135.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-504

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service. The list measurements tone-receiver
command will display information on the system’s tone
receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status trunk command to determine when the port
is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-135.
Error
Code
2053

Page 10-505

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack:
■

1281—Loss of signal

■

1793—Blue Alarm

■

2049—Red Alarm

■

2305—Yellow Alarm

■

1537—Hyperactivity

Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.
FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464 UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE
chip instead of several NPE chips). The NPE controls port connectivity and gain,
and provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit
Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform
the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to listen to several different
tones and conference the tones together. The resulting signal is then measured
by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a certain range, the test
passes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-136.
Error
Code

Page 10-506

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status station or status trunk command to determine
when the port is available for testing.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status station or status trunk command to
determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. This only applies to
analog stations.
1. To enable test, set the Test field on the station
administration screen for the particular analog
station being tested to ‘‘y.’’ Use the change station
extension command.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-136.
Error
Code
2053

Page 10-507

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack:
■

1281—Loss of signal

■

1793—Blue Alarm

■

2049—Red Alarm

■

2305—Yellow Alarm

■

1537—Hyperactivity

Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.
FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This will cause noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1
Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation
updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing
parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the
consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack
and in the switch software.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-137.
Error
Code

Page 10-508

TEST #36 Port Audit and Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

FAIL

Test failed due to internal system error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The
current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is
busied out, the test will not run but will return PASS. To
verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter the status trunk command to verify that the
trunk is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further
action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service,
continue to step 2.
2. Enter the release trunk command to put the trunk
back into in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

Continued on next page

DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test (#314)
DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test checks the trunk’s signaling capability provided
by the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance software initiates the test by
sending a ‘‘seizure’’ message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack and expects an
‘‘active’’ reply from the DS1 interface circuit pack. If the ‘‘active’’ message is
received, then the test passes. If no message is received and the timer expires,
the test is aborted. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack sends a ‘‘reorder’’ message
back to maintenance software, then the test fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Page 10-509

This test cannot be run on a trunk in any of the following conditions:
a. The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk.
b. The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call.
c. The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled.
Table 10-138.
Error
Code

TEST #314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status trunk command to determine when the port is
available for testing.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status trunk command to determine when the port
is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Test failed due to incompatible configuration
administered in trunk group form.
1. Look at the trunk group administration form and see
whether the trunk is incoming only, port 24 on a DS1
Interface with common control channel signaling, or
an automatic CO type such as FX. Under any of
these conditions this is a normal abort.

1018

ABORT

Test has been disabled via administration.
1. Verify that the ‘‘Maintenance Tests’’ field on the
Trunk Group Form is set to ‘‘n.’’ To enable the test,
issue the change trunk-group x command where
‘‘x’’ equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested. Then change the entry in the ‘‘Maintenance
Tests’’ field on the form to ‘‘y.’’
2. Repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-138.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-510

TEST #314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Look for UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log.
If present, refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT

At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack:
■

1281—Loss of signal

■

1793—Blue Alarm

■

2049—Red Alarm

■

2305—Yellow Alarm

■

1537—Hyperactivity

Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-DS1 (DS1 DIOD Trunk)

Table 10-138.
Error
Code

Page 10-511

TEST #314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call.
1. Verify that the Trunk Type field on the trunk
administration screen form matches the trunk type
administered on far end switch.
2. Look for UDS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to the UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Trunk
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
3. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of
5 times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD (DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-512

DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk), DIOD-BD
(DIOD Circuit Pack) [G1.2SE]
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log
DIOD-BD2

1.

2.

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1
test port PCSS s

Full Name of MO
DIOD Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN);
C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of
the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.)
Where 1 is Long, s is Short, and r is repeat. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port
Board) Maintenance Documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-513

DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DIOD-TRK

MAJOR2

test port PCSSpp l

DIOD Trunk

DIOD-TRK

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

DIOD Trunk

DIOD-TRK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l

DIOD Trunk

1.

2.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 for EPN, and 3 for the second EPN);
C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the
slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...etc.).
A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded
by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk
group are alarmed.

Direct Inward and Outward Dial (TN429 DIOD) trunks are 2-wire analog lines to
the CO which support the following services:
■

both incoming and outgoing CO calls

■

DID trunk

■

DID Trunk and 1-way Outgoing DIOD

The DIOD Trunk circuit pack provides eight ports for loop-start CO. The circuit
pack is an interface between the 2-wire analog line from the CO and the system’s
(4-wire) TDM Bus.

LOOP START OPERATION
Idle State - Tip = ground, Ring = CO Battery

A. Outgoing Call
1. PBX Off-Hook (Seize Message): Closes the Tip-Ring Loop
a. CO Response: DC loop current + Dial tone
2. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current
a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note)

B. Incoming Call
1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage
a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-514

2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop
a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current
3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current
a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note)

C. Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
1. CO Applies Ringing Voltage
a. PBX Response: Detect ringing current and close loop
b. CO Response: Send DTMF digits
c. PBX Response: Acknowledge of Number dialed and open loop
2. PBX Off-Hook (Answer Message): Close loop
a. CO Response: Trip ringing, provide loop current
3. PBX On-Hook (Drop Message): Open Tip-Ring loop, no loop current
a. CO Response: CO goes to idle state (see Note)
NOTE:
CO does not normally provide an On-Hook (Disconnect) signal.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-515

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
DIOD Trunk Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

Any

Any

test port
PCSSpp sh r
1

01

0

Any

15 (b)

any

Port Audit Update Test
(#36)

18

0

busyout trunk
/

769 (a)

57392

None

MAJ/MIN/
WRN 2

ON

1537

Dial Tone Test (#0)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN 2

ON

test port
PCSS l r 2

1793

Loop Around and
Conference Test (#33)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN 2

ON

test port
PCSS l r 3

2049

NPE Cross Talk Test (#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN 2

ON

test port
PCSS l r 3

2561 (a,d)

57345

None

2817 (a,e)

57393

None

3073 (a,c)

57376

None

3073 (a,c)

57424

None

3585 (a,c)

57424

None

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set-options values, the Minor
alarm is upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.

Notes:
a. These are in-line errors that have no specific test associated with them.
Refer to the following table for an explanation and appropriate action.
b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-516

c. Aux data 57376 - No loop current on incoming call
Aux data 57424 - No loop current on outgoing call
These errors cause the Dial Tone Test (#0) to run and are only considered
a problem if the Dial Tone Test fails (in which case Error Type 1537 also
shows up). In this case, the trunk may be put in "Ready-for-Service" state
(shown as "disconnected" by status command), which allows only
incoming calls. Run the Dial Tone Test (#0) and follow its outlined
procedures.
d. Single polarity ringing current - This error results from abnormal ringing
current, but does not prevent the incoming call from being accepted. This
error code is only logged as an informational event and causes no other
testing to occur.
e. Late CO Trunk release - This error indicates that the CO releases the trunk
at least four minutes after the PBX dropped the call. This error code is only
logged as an informational event and causes no other testing to occur.
Table 10-139.
Error
Type

DIOD Trunk Errors with NO Tests

Aux
Data

Description and System Action

System Technician Action

769

57392

CO not releasing after call is dropped
from PBX end (TN747B), or the loop is
not open after a disconnect (TN765).
After several occurrences, an off-board
(TN747B) or on-board (TN465) warning
alarm is generated.

Refer problem to CO.

2561

57345

Single polarity ringing current. This error
results from abnormal ringing current,
but does not prevent the incoming call
from being accepted. One cause could
be that the reverse current detector
associated with the port is failing. (Will
not be detected by any tests.) The other
cause could be that normal current is
not detected. In this case, neither
incoming nor outgoing calls can be
completed, and the dial tone test also
fails.

Check for other errors.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-139.

Page 10-517

DIOD Trunk Errors with NO Tests — Continued

Error
Type

Aux
Data

2817

57393

CO released the trunk at least four
minutes after the PBX dropped the call.
This error code is log only and causes
no other testing to occur. No alarm is
generated.

Check for other errors.

3073

57376

No loop current on incoming call. The
incoming destination has already
answered and no loop current has been
detected. If this is a hard fault, the dial
tone test and all outgoing calls should
also fail.

Check for other errors.

3585

57424

No loop current on outgoing call. This
error occurs on attempt to seize a loop
or ground-start trunk for an outgoing
call. An error occurs if loop current is
not detected or the caller hangs up
before it is detected.

See Note at end of table.

Description and System Action

System Technician Action

Continued on next page

NOTE:
At the administration terminal, busyout the affected port, and run a Long
test. If Dial Tone Test #0 passes, ignore this error. Release the port.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-518

For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Dial Tone Test (#0)

X

ND

Loop Around and Conference Test (#33)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Audit Update Test (#36)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Dial Tone Test (#0)
This test attempts to seize a port and checks for the return of a dial tone.
Table 10-140.
Error
Code

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the command display port PCSSpp to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-140.
Error
Code
1001

Page 10-519

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status trunk command to determine when the port
is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test has been disabled via administration.
1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the
Trunk Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test,
issue the change trunk-group x command where
"x" equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance
Tests?" field on the form to "y."

1005

ABORT

Trunk has been administered as incoming-only; or DID
trunk group type; dial tone can only be obtained on
outgoing trunks. This is a normal condition.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-140.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-520

TEST #0 Dial Tone Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Trunk was seized, but dial tone could not be detected.
1. Check for errors on TONE-BD or TONE-PT. Clear
any errors found and repeat test.
2. If error has still not cleared, refer problem to CO.

2002

FAIL

Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem.
Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk.
1. Check trunk wiring to ensure good connection;
repeat test if wiring correction made.
2. Locate another identical CO trunk and swap its
wiring with one under test. Repeat test on both
trunks and determine if problem follows trunk or
remains at original port. If problem follows trunk,
refer problem to CO. If problem remains at port,
replace circuit pack and repeat test.
3. If replacing circuit pack does not clear failure,
escalate the problem.

1009

PASS

Detected tone was not pure dial tone. No action
required.

PASS

Trunk was seized, and dial tone was detected.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
trunk or external wiring.

Continued on next page

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-521

other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s long test
sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-141.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-141.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-522

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM-Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-141.
Error
Code

Page 10-523

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the trunk group/member number
of the port. Use the status trunk command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by examining
trunk or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33)
This test checks the reflective loop and conference abilities of a CO port circuit.
The test uses 404 Hz, 1004 Hz, and 2804 Hz tones. Each tone is transmitted
separately through the loop and checked.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-524

Table 10-142. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Could not allocate system resources to run this test.

7

ABORT

Conference Circuit Test aborted.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display port
PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable
for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all possible
states.) You must wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
status trunk command to determine when the port is
available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum
of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use,
escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run
this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a maximum
of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Page 10-525

Table 10-142. TEST #33 Loop Around and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
7

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
1. Check for errors on TONE-BD or TONE-PT. If there are
errors, take the appropriate actions.
2. If the Reflective Loop Around Test fails for all ports on a
circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated. If a
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present,
check the circuit pack for a red LED. If the red LED is
on, then replace the appropriate power unit circuit
pack. If neither the TN736 nor the TN752 power unit
circuit pack is present, then the OLS631DB AC power
unit may be defective. The system may contain a
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack OR an
OLS631DB AC power unit, BUT NOT BOTH TYPES OF
POWER UNITS.
NOTE:
To investigate problems with an OLD631DB AC
power source, refer to CARR-POW Maintenance
documentation.
3. Rerun the test.
4. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

CO Trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is successful.
User-reported troubles on this port should be investigated
by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external
wiring.

Continued on next page

Port Audit Update Test (#36)
This test sends updates of the CO port translation for all ports on the circuit pack
which have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against
possible corruption of translation data contained on the circuit pack. No
response message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation
updates. The port translation data includes: ground or loop start trunk, tone or
rotary dialing trunk, rotary dialing inter-digit timing, network balance R/RC, and
disconnect timing.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE]

Table 10-143.
Error
Code

Page 10-526

TEST #36 Port Audit Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

This test passed. Translation information was
successfully updated on the circuit pack. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using
other port tests and by examining trunk or external
wiring. If the trunk is busied out, the test does not run,
but returns PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is
in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further action
is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service, continue
to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY)

Page 10-527

DLY-MTCE (MO-DAILY)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

DLY-MTCE

MINOR

NONE

DLY-MTCE

DLY-MTCE

MAJOR

NONE

DLY-MTCE

The DLY-MTCE maintenance object monitors daily translation saves. If a
translation save times out or fails to run, an error is logged against this
maintenance object. If the save fails three times in a row, a MINOR alarm is
raised; if the save fails for seven consecutive attempts, a MAJOR alarm is raised.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-528

DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Initial Command to
Run1

Alarm Level

Full Name of MO

DS1-BD

MAJOR

test board PCSS sh

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack

DS1-BD

MINOR

test board PCSS l

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack

DS1-BD

WARNING

test board PCSS sh

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack

1.

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 - 44 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B,
C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to 21).

The DS1 Interface circuit pack provides an interface to an external DS1 facility
and supports 24 DS0 channels carried on a 1.544 Mbps DS1 link. These DS0
channels can be administered as either trunks to other switches or lines to
off-premises stations. The TN464C and later suffix Universal DS1 Interface also
supports a 32-channel interface on a 2.048Mbps link. The functions and
maintenance strategy for the TN464 circuit packs are covered under a separate
maintenance object, UDS1-BD.
DS1-BD maintenance logs in-line errors reported by the DS1 Interface circuit
pack, runs tests for error diagnosis and recovery, and raises and clears alarms.
The following table shows the capabilities of each DS1 circuit pack. The TN722
and TN722B are not supported on G3r V1 or later systems.

Circuit Pack
Code

24
Channel

32
Channel

Tie Trunk
Signaling

CO Trunk
Signaling

DID
Trunk
Signaling

OPS Line
Signaling

TN722/B

x

x

TN767/B/C/D/E

x

x

x

x

x

TN464C/D/E/F

x

x

x

x

x
(24-chl only)

x

ISDN-PRI Trunk signaling (for example, Q.921, Q.931) requires a TN464D and is
handled by system software. The TN464 is covered in the "UDS1-BD (UDS1
Interface Circuit Pack)" section of Chapter 9.
Each trunk and line have their own maintenance strategies. However, they all
depend on the health of the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Refer to the following
sections for details: TIE-DS1, CO-DS1, DID-DS1, OPS-LINE, ISDN-TRK, and
ISDN-PLK. Signaling over the DS1 link must be synchronized between the
transmitting and receiving ends to ensure error-free communication. Refer to
"SYNC (Synchronization)" for details.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-529

The TN767E circuit pack combined with AT&T’s new 120A1 CSU Module forms
an Enhanced Integrated CSU. The new 120A1 CSU Module, when combined
with the functionality provided by the TN767E hardware and firmware, and new
switch software, provides functionality equivalent to an external stand-alone
AT&T ESF T1 CSU. The 120A1 CSU Module connects to the TN767E circuit pack
on the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier. The new CSU Module,
thus becomes an integrated part of the DEFINITY. system. Throughout the
document, the term 120A1 will mean a 120A1 or later suffix CSU Module.
The Enhanced Integrated CSU is for use in the United States of America with
1.544 Mbps DS1 service. For further details on the 120A1 CSU Module see
DEFINITY. Communications System Generic 1, Generic 2, and Generic 3 V1 and
V2 - Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation, 555-230-193.
The TN767E and 120A1 CSU Module support on-demand loopback tests that
assist in the detection of faults between the TN767E circuit pack and the CSU
Module, between the Integrated CSU and the optional Customer Premises
Loopback Jack, or between the Integrated CSU and remote CSU. These
loopback tests are explained in detail later in this DS1-BD section, but Figure
10-28 gives a high level overview of the loopback points.
The following list of acronym definitions are for Figure 10-28:
■

PLB = Payload Loopback

■

BLB = Board Loopback

■

ELB = Equipment Loopback

■

LLB = Line Loopback

■

RLB = Repeater Loopback

■

CLJ = Loopback Jack Loopback

■

R-LLB = Remote Line Loopback

■

SMRT = Smart Jack

■

LPBK = Loopback

For more information about DS1 interfaces, see the DEFINITY Communications
System DS1/CEPT1/ISDN-PRI Reference, 555-025-107.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-530

NETWORK ENVIRONMENT

DS1
BRD

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

NET
SMRT
JACK

NETWORK

NET
SMRT
JACK

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

DS1
BRD

Remote end

Local end
CSU module to CSU module

DS1
BOARD

PLB

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

BLB

ELB

LLB

RLB

NETWORK
SMRT
JACK

CLJ-LB

Local end loop backs

NETWORK
SMRT
JACK

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU*
MOD

DS1
BOARD

R-LLB

Remote end loop backs (* CSU or External CSU)

Figure 10-28.

High Level Overview Of Loopback Points

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values

Table 10-144.
Error
Type
1

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

0

Circuit pack removed or
SAKI Test (#53)

MIN/WRN‡

ON

18 (b)

0

busy-out board PCSS

WARNING

OFF

release board PCSS

23 (c)

0

WARNING

OFF

add ds1 PCSS

0

test board PCSS

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-144.
Error
Type

Page 10-531

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

12 5(d)

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

None

MINOR

ON

MINOR

ON

MINOR

ON

Test to Clear Value

257

65535

Control Channel Loop Test
(#52)

test board PCSS l r 20

257 (e)

Any

None

513 (f)

Any

769 (g)

4358

1025 (e)

4363

NPE Audit Test (#50)

1281

Any

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

1300 (h)

Any

Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

WARNING

OFF

test board PCSS

1301 (i)

Any

Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

WARNING

OFF

test board PCSS

1302 (j)

Any

Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

1303 (k)

Any

Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

ON

test board PCSS

1310 (l)

Any

Board Loopback Test
(#1209)

MINOR

ON

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests

1311 (m)

Any

Equipment Loopback Test
(#1210)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-test

1312 (n)

Any

Repeater Loopback Test
(#1211)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests

1313 (o)

Any

CPE Loopback Jack Test
(#1212)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test

1314 (p)

Any

Far CSU Loopback Test
(#1213)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test

1320

Any

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

1321

Any

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

1322

Any

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS

1323

Any

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-144.
Error
Type

Page 10-532

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

1324

Any

1538 (q)

Any

1793

Any

1794

Associated Test

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

WARNING

OFF

MINOR

ON

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN **

OFF

test board PCSS

Any

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN **

OFF

test board PCSS

1795

Any

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN **

OFF

test board PCSS

2049

Any

Red Alarm Inquiry Test
(#140)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

2305

Any

Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test
(#141)

MINOR

OFF

test board PCSS

2306

Any

Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test
(#141)

MINOR

OFF

test board PCSS

2561

Any

Major Alarm Inquiry Test
(#142)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

Minor Alarm Inquiry Test
(#143)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS

2817

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

Alarm
Level

test board PCSS

3073 to
3160 (r)

Any

Slip Alarm Inquiry Test
(#144)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS r 6

3329 to
3345 (s)

Any

Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test
(#145)

MIN/WRN†

OFF

test board PCSS r 6

3840(t)

Any

None

3900(u)

Any

CPE Loopback Jack Test
(#1212)

3901(v)

Any

Far CSU Loopback Test
(#1213)

3902(w)

Any

One-Way Span Test (#1214)

3999 (x)

Any

None

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-533

Notes:
a. This error indicates that the circuit pack has stopped functioning or is not
completely administered. The alarm is logged about 15 minutes after the
circuit pack has been removed or 11 minutes after the SAKI Test (#53)
fails.
To be completely administered, a DS1 circuit pack must meet all 3 of the
following conditions:
1. Have an entry in the circuit plan via the change circuit pack
command
2. Be administered via the add ds1 PCSS command
3. Be physically inserted in the appropriate slot
If the circuit pack has an entry in the circuit plan and either of the other two
conditions are not met, a MINOR alarm is logged. To resolve the error
either
1. Make sure all conditions for administration are met and that a
functioning DS1 circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot.
2. Completely remove the DS1-BD from the system using the following
steps:
a. Remove any administered DS1 trunks or access endpoints
associated with the circuit pack from their trunk groups.
b. Execute the remove ds1 PCSS and change circuit pack
PCSS commands.
If all the administration conditions are met for this circuit pack and the red
LED is still on, follow the instructions for LED Alarms with Error Type 1 in
Chapter 7.
b. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has been busied out by a busy-out board
PCSS command.
c. The DS1-BD circuit pack is not completely administered. A completely
administered DS1-BD circuit pack should have an entry in the circuit plan
via the change circuit pack command, should have been administered
via the add ds1 PCSS command, and should have been inserted into the
appropriate port slot.
d. The circuit pack in the slot does not match the type administered to that
position. Either replace the circuit pack with one of the type administered,
or use change circuit-pack to readminister the slot. This error may also
indicate that the 24/32-channel selection on the DS1 administration form
does not match the configuration of the circuit pack.
e. This error is associated with the Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance
Test. Refer to "XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)" for details.
f. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware problem
(for example, external RAM failure, internal RAM failure, internal ROM
failure, or instruction set failure). This error will disappear when no faults

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-534

are detected for 30 minutes. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the
type of hardware problem. However, when this error is reported with Aux
Data in the range of 4352 to 4358, it indicates the circuit pack has
reported a hardware failure such that the circuit pack should be replaced.
g. The DS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware logic
error (for example, program logic inconsistency). This error will disappear
when no faults are detected for 100 minutes. The value in Aux Data field
indicates the type of hardware problem.
h. CSU Module missing. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1
form has been administered as integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module
is not physically connected (or is improperly connected) to the TN767E
board on the back of the port carrier.
If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug (or replug) the CSU Module into the
TN767E circuit pack’s connector on the I/O connector panel on back of
the carrier. Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field using the
change ds1 form to other.
If this error remains after plugging the CSU Module into the board’s
connector, there could be a problem with the I/O connector panel.
i. CSU Module not expected. The 120A1 CSU Module is physically
connected to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier but the
Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not been
administered as integrated.
If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the change ds1 command to
change the Near-End CSU Type field to integrated. Otherwise,
physically remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the port
carrier.
j. DS1 configuration error. Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a
TN767E circuit pack that is configured for 32-channel (2.048 Mbps)
operation. The CSU Module only works with a DS1 board configured for
24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation in the United States of America.
k. DS1 circuit pack suffix incorrect for CSU Module. The Near-End CSU
Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated
but the DS1 circuit pack is not a TN767E or later suffix DS1 board.
If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, remove the circuit pack and
replace it with a TN767E or later suffix board. Otherwise, use the change
ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to other.
l. BLB failure. This error occurs when the DS1 Board Loopback (BLB)
demand test fails. Repeat the test using the following commands:
busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests,
release board PCSS. If the BLB test continues to fail, then the TN767E
circuit pack needs to be replaced.
m. ELB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module
Equipment Loopback (ELB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU
during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e., TN767E board physically inserted and

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-535

120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is
plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The ELB test is also
executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, and release board
PCSS. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the
CSU Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU
module (or any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate where
the failure is occurring by re-executing the test by replacing one piece of
hardware at a time.
n. RLB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module
Repeater Loopback (RLB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU
during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e., TN767E board physically inserted and
120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is
plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The RLB test is also
executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, and release board
PCSS. If the RLB test continues to fail, then the CSU Module needs to be
replaced.
o. CPE Loopback Jack deactivation error. This error occurs when the
TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE Loopback Jack
loopback.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, and release board
PCSS. If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack loopback
continues to fail, other steps must be taken to deactivate the loopback.
p. Far CSU Loopback deactivation error. This error occurs when the TN767E
circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end CSU loopback on
power-up/reset or upon software request.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, release board PCSS.
If the attempt to deactivate the Far CSU loopback continues to fail, then
escalate the problem.
q. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more
of the following symptoms:
1. The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #51 and/or Test
#220 are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning NO
BOARD.
3. A busy-out/release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-536

4. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and
ports are properly installed.
The circuit pack is isolated from the system and all trunks of this circuit
pack are placed into the out-of-service state. The system will try to restore
the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15
minutes, the DS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All
trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are then returned to the in-service
state. If the error recurs after 15 minutes, then replace the circuit pack.
r. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3073 will show that this
board is receiving Slips and the AUX data shows the last Slip count that
was reported.
s. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3329 will show that this
board is receiving misframes and the AUX data shows the last misframe
count that was reported.
t. This error is not service-affecting and can be ignored.
u. Error 3900 is used to give status information on a CPE Loopback Jack
Test. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback
test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated.
3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected.
4 — Test has been terminated.
v. Error 3901 is used to give status information on a Far CSU Loopback Test.
The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated.
3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected.
4 — Test has been terminated.
w. Error 3902 is used to give status information on a One-Way Span Test. The
value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the span test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test has failed because test could not be activated.
3 — Test pattern was not received from the far end.

4 — Test has been terminated.
x. Error type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-537

the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in Table 10-145. By
clearing error codes associated with the NPE Connection Audit Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence
Table 10-145.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Reset
Board
Sequence

test
ds1-loop
Command

D/ND1

NPE Connection Audit Test (#50)

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Test (#52)

X

ND

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test
(#138)

X

X

ND

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139)

X

X

ND

Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140)

X

X

ND

Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141)

X

X

ND

Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142)

X

X

ND

Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143)

X

X

ND

Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (#144)

X

X

ND

Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145)

X

X

ND

Translation Update Test (#146)

X

X

ND

ICSU Status LEDs Test (#1227)

X

X

ND

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)

X

D

Internal Looparound Test (#135)

X

D

DS1/CSU Loopback Tests

X

D

DS1 Board Loopback Test (#1209)

X

D

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-145.

Page 10-538

System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD — Continued
test
ds1-loop
Command

D/ND1

X

D

CSU Repeater Loopback Test
(#1211)

X

D

CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212)

X

D

Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213)

X

D

One-Way Span Test (#1214)

X

D

Inject Single Bit Error (#1215)

X

D

End Loopback/Span Test (#1216)

X

D

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Reset
Board
Sequence

CSU Equipment Loopback Test
(#1210)

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

NPE Connection Audit Test (#50):
The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the
network connectivity translation for all the Network Processing Elements (NPEs)
on the circuit pack.
Table 10-146.
Error
Code

TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

None
2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.

1019

ABORT

Test already in progress.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The circuit pack’s NPEs have been updated with their translation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-146.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-539

TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test — Continued

Test Result
NO BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an
incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is
shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. Issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Looparound Test (#52)
This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies
its records.
Table 10-147.
Error
Code
None
2100

TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-147.
Error
Code

Page 10-540

TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test — Continued

Test Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed because the circuit pack did not return the circuit pack code
or vintage.

NOTE:
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity. The
hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of the
following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as Test 138 and Test 139) are aborting with
error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test result.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system, and
all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state.
The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored
to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are
then returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the
associated facility. In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue
alarms) would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors
would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK
and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
1. Retry the command for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the problem continues, check for hyperactivity. Resolve the problem,
as appropriate.
3. If there is no longer hyperactivity, retry the command for a maximum of 5
times.
4. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack.
PASS

Communication with this circuit pack is successful.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-147.

Page 10-541

TEST #52 Control Channel Looparound Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test Result

0

NO BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
This test is destructive. This test resets the circuit pack.
Table 10-148.
Error
Code
None

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

Wrong circuit pack configuration to run this test. This error applies only to
DS1 Interface circuit packs. It means the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
providing timing for the system and, therefore, it cannot be reset without
major system disruptions.
1. If the circuit pack needs to be reset, then set synchronization to another
DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack and try
again. Refer to "SYNC (Synchronization)".

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-148.
Error
Code
1015

Page 10-542

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test — Continued

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Port is not out-of-service.
1. Busyout the circuit pack.
2. Execute the command again.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to reset.

2

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to restart.
1. Execute the command again.
2. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The circuit pack initializes correctly.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence.

0

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an
incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is
shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Internal Looparound Test (#135)
This test is destructive.
The Internal Looparound Test is run by looping the transmitted DS1 bit stream
back into the DS1’s board receiver. The loop occurs just before the DS1 facility

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-543

interface. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system
technician-demanded reset board PCSS command.
All trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system
technician busy-out board command before running the Internal Looparound
Test. When the Internal Looparound Test is initiated, maintenance software
sends appropriate messages to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test.
The test uses the Tone Generator and Tone Detector to exercise a bit pattern
consistency test for all ports. If the transmitted and received bit patterns on a
trunk are different, the test fails.
When the test is complete, the maintenance software sends a stop loop around
message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack to put the circuit pack back into the
normal operation mode. All trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are restored
to the in-service state after the release board command is entered
Table 10-149.
Error
Code
2012

TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to
TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic, repeat
test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may be
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors
may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

Received an incoming call on a port of the DS1 circuit pack during the test.
1. Enter the busy-out board PCSS command to put all trunks of DS1
Interface circuit pack to out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1015

ABORT

Ports on DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out.
1. Enter the busy-out board PCSS command to put all trunks of the DS1
Interface circuit pack into out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-149.
Error
Code
1039

Page 10-544

TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Therefore, it
cannot be reset without major system disruption.
1. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the
synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the
Tone-Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence:

2000

ABORT

■

Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.

■

Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.

■

Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

The test was aborted. Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the
error log indicates hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service
and one or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as Test 139 and Test 140) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of
service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in
the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged
against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error
occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-149.
Error
Code

Page 10-545

TEST #135 Internal Looparound Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
DS1 Interface circuit pack failed in the Internal Looparound Test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is TN767, enter the list measurement
ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement.
Otherwise, skip this step.
3. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the
same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
4. Check the physical connectivity of DS1 Interface circuit packs and cable.
5. If all of the above are OK, replace the local DS1 Interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
6. Contact T1 Network Service to diagnose remote DS1 endpoint.

0

PASS

All administered trunks of DS1 Interface circuit pack pass the Internal
Looparound Test. The bit pattern consistency test is executed successfully
over the path that covers a DS1 port, cable, and the external NCTE device.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138)
This test verifies the synchronization status and continuity of the DS1 link. The
Loss of Signal alarm indicates that the DS1 Interface circuit pack is unable to
derive the synchronization clock from the DS1 facility. When the DS1 Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-546

circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal alarm, it stops providing the synchronization
clock for the system if it is administered as a timing source and transmits a
Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint.
When the Loss of Signal alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all
trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The
inquiry test will run every 10 minutes until the loss of signal has been restored.
The DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Signal alarm after the signal has
been lost for about 1second. It will not retire the alarm until the signal has
returned for about 10 seconds.
This test is also used to maintain the new 120A CSU Module. This Module, when
combined with the functionality provided by the TN767E circuit pack, provides
functionality equivalent to an external standalone ESF T1 CSU.
If a TN767E circuit pack detects certain ICSU hardware errors, it will notify
maintenance. When the maintenance subsystem receives notification of the
I-CSU error, it will execute this Loss of Signal Inquiry test. The test, in addition to
querying for a Loss Of Signal alarm condition, will also query the TN767E board
to confirm the I-CSU error. A Minor or Warning alarm will be raised depending on
the severity of the ICSU error. The trunks on the board may be taken out of
service if the ICSU error is deemed serious.
If a Loss Of Signal alarm and an ICSU error co-exist, the Loss Of Signal alarm
condition will take priority and the board and all trunks on the board will be put in
the out-of-service state. Errors will be logged, however, for both.
When the maintenance subsystem receives notification that the ICSU hardware
error condition no longer exists, maintenance will restore the board and all trunks
to their previous service state if the alarm can be cleared (no other ICSU errors or
Loss Of Signal alarm exist)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-547

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of
service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
FAIL

DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal alarm. The physical link is
broken or the remote DS1 endpoint is down. All trunks or ports of this DS1
interface circuit pack are out-of-service. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
designated as the supplier of the system synchronization source, then the
system synchronization maintenance will adopt a source elsewhere. Refer to
"SYNC (Synchronization)" section for details.
1. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor
of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1
Interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system
technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
2. Check the physical connection of the DS1 Interface circuit pack and the
cable. If a 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to a TN767E board
on the back of the port carrier, check the physical connection of the CSU
Module and make sure the Network Interface cable is plugged into the
CSU Module’s NETWORK jack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code
1300

Page 10-548

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The CSU Module is missing. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1
form has been administered as integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module is not
physically connected to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier.
1. If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug the CSU Module into the TN767E
circuit pack’s connector on the I/O connector panel on back of the carrier.
Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field using the change ds1
form to other.
2. Run the test again.

1301

FAIL

The 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to the TN767E board on the
back of the port carrier but the Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form
has not been administered as integrated.
1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the change ds1 command to
change the Near-End CSU Type field to integrated. Otherwise, physically
remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the port carrier.
2. Run the test again.

1302

FAIL

Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a TN767E circuit pack that is
configured for 32-channel (2.048 Mbps) operation. The CSU Module only
works with a DS1 board configured for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation in
the United States of America.
1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, physically remove the TN767E
circuit pack and reconfigure for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation.
2. Reinsert the circuit pack and run the test again.

1303

FAIL

The DS1 circuit pack Suffix is incorrect for CSU Module administration. The
Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has been administered as
integrated but the DS1 circuit pack is not a TN767E or later suffix DS1 board.
1. If the CSU Module is to be used, and the Near-End CSU Type field is set
to integrated, to allow for CSU module administration, remove the circuit
pack and replace it with a TN767E or later suffix board. Otherwise use the
change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to other.

1310

FAIL

The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) demand test (#1209) failed.
1. Repeat the test using the test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests
command.
2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E circuit pack.
3. Run this test again.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code
1311

Page 10-549

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Equipment Loopback (ELB) test (#1210)
failed. This test is executed by the ICSU during ICSU power-up/reset (TN767E
board physically inserted and 120A CSU Module already installed) or when
the 120A CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The
ELB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the CSU
Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or
any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one
of these areas. Begin by replacing the CSU Module and running the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command again.
3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E board and run
test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests again.
4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be in the I/O cable
between the backplane and the CSU module.

1312

FAIL

The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Repeater Loopback (RLB) test (#1211)
failed. This test is executed by the ICSU during ICSU power-up/reset (TN767E
board physically inserted and 120A CSU Module already installed) or when
the 120A1 CSU Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The
RLB test is also executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
2. If the RLB test continues to fail, then replace the CSU Module.
3. Run this test again.

1313

FAIL

The TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE Loopback Jack
loopback.
1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test.
2. If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack is not successful,
check the cabling and investigate the problem at the CPE Loopback
Jack.
3. Run the test again.

1314

FAIL

The TN767E circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end CSU loopback.
1. Execute test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code
1320

Page 10-550

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
A 120A1 CSU module hardware failure or an ICSU serial interface audit failure
was detected by the TN767E DS1 circuit pack.
1. Replace the CSU module, and then run the test again.
2. If the test continues to fail with this error code, replace the TN767E and
run the test again.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the
I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module.

1321

FAIL

DTE LOS (loss of signal) was detected between the TN767E DS1 board and
the 120A1 CSU Module. Either the TN767E board, the 120A1 CSU Module, or
the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or any
combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one of these
areas.
1. Replace the CSU Module and run the test again.
2. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the TN767E
board and run the test again.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the
I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module.

1322

FAIL

No 5 volts power detected from the TN767E circuit pack to the 120A1 CSU
Module. Problem probably due to an open fuse on the DS1 board or a faulty
ICSU. NOTE Do not swap DS1 boards as this may open the fuse on the new
board.
1. Remove the TN767E from the system and reinsert.
2. Run the test again once the board has finished its reset.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the CSU
Module and run the test again.
4. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then replace the TN767E
board and run the test again.
5. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the problem could be in the
I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module.

1323

FAIL

A service affecting CSU Module audit failure was detected by the TN767E
DS1 circuit pack. All administered ports on the DS1 circuit pack are affected
and maintenance software will place the ports into the out-of-service state.
1. Replace the 120A1 CSU Module.

1324

FAIL

A non-service affecting CSU Module audit failure was detected by the TN767E
DS1 circuit pack. No ports should be affected. No immediate action is
required. These errors indicate that the CSU Module hardware may have a
problem, and that it should be replaced when practical to avoid further
deterioration.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-150.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-551

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

DS1 signal is present and the physical link is healthy. In addition, no
Integrated CSU errors are detected.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139)
The Blue Alarm is a signal sent by the remote DS1 endpoint when it is
out-of-service. The Blue Alarm Inquiry Test checks the blue alarm status of the
remote DS1 endpoint.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Blue Alarm signal from the remote
DS1 endpoint, the circuit pack will transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1
endpoint and send a BLUE ALARM message to the maintenance software. When
the Blue alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The inquiry test will be run
every 10 minutes until the Blue alarm is cleared.
The DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 2 seconds to recognize and report a Blue
alarm and 16 seconds to recognize and report the resolution of a Blue alarm.
When the Blue alarm is cleared, the DS1 Interface circuit pack stops transmitting
the Yellow alarm and places the trunks back into the service state before the Blue
alarm occurs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-552

Line Loopback Alarm
The Line Loopback (LLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the ICSU or
DS1 into a loopback mode. When the ICSU or DS1 Board is in the LLB mode, the
arriving bit pattern is regenerated and sent back. Line Loopback (LLB) Alarm is
activated when the in-band activate LLB bit pattern has been arriving
continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line. LLB is deactivated when the in-band
deactivate LLB bit pattern has been arriving continuously for 5 seconds on the
DS1 line.
Since LLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for
signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue
Alarm.

Payload Loopback Alarm
The Payload Loopback (PLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the
switch DS1 into a loopback mode. PLB Alarm is activated when a network
protocol activate bit pattern arrives over the 4-Kbps ESF data link on the DS1
line. PLB is deactivated when a network protocol deactivate bit pattern arrives
over the 4-Kbps ESF data link on the DS1 line.
Since PLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for
signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue
Alarm
Table 10-151.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-151.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-553

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
FAIL

The remote DS1 endpoint is out-of-service.
1. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote endpoint.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the
system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.

1794

FAIL

The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Line Loopback Alarm (LLB).
1. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the
system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a line-side terminating
device (for example, a PRI terminal adapter), call the vendor of the
terminating device to diagnose the equipment.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-151.
Error
Code
1795

0

Page 10-554

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

FAIL

The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Payload Loopback Alarm (PLB). If the
DS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a leased T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 Interface circuit
pack connects directly to another DS1 board, call the system technician of the
remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.

PASS

Remote DS1 endpoint is in-service. Neither a Blue alarm nor a Line Loopback
alarm nor a Payload Loopback alarm is detected in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140)
DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Red alarm when the framing pattern of the
incoming DS1 bit stream has been lost. The Red Alarm Inquiry Test checks the
framing status of a DS1 Interface circuit pack. DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 3
seconds to recognize and report a Red alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and
report the resolution of a Red alarm.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Red alarm, the circuit pack will
transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint and send a RED ALARM
message to the maintenance software. After the Red alarm is confirmed, the
maintenance software places all trunks of the circuit pack into the out-of-service
state. The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-555

When the Red alarm is cleared, the DS1 Interface circuit pack will stop
transmitting the Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint. The maintenance
software restores all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack to the service state
before the Red alarm occurs.
Loss of Multiframe Alarm: If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is administered using
DMI-BOS signaling, the DS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Multiframe
Alarm (LMA) when it cannot interpret the incoming signaling bits to synchronize
to the multiframe pattern received in the 24th channel. Once DS1 Interface circuit
pack detects an LMA, the circuit pack will transmit a Remote Multiframe Alarm
(RMA) to the remote DS1 endpoint. Maintenance software handles both Red
alarm and LMA alarm(s) using the same mechanism.
Table 10-152.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-152.
Error
Code

Page 10-556

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Red alarm. An out-of-frame condition
occurs on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. DS1 Interface circuit pack will
transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint until the Red alarm is
retired.
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify that any
intermediate CSU’s are administered correctly.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface
circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the
remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

1

FAIL

The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a loss of multiframe alarm (LMA). An
out of frame condition occurred on the DS1 interface circuit pack. The DS1
interface circuit pack will transmit a remote multiframe alarm (RMA) to the
remote DS1 endpoint until the LMA is retired.
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify that any
intermediate CSU’s are administered correctly.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface
circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the
remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

PASS

No Red alarm is detected on DS1 Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-152.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-557

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141)
Receiving a Yellow alarm from remote DS1 endpoint indicates that the remote
DS1 endpoint has an out-of-frame condition. The Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is
used to determine whether the remote DS1 endpoint is transmitting a Yellow
alarm. The DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 500 msec to recognize and report a
Yellow alarm and 500 msec to recognize and report that a Yellow alarm condition
is cleared.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Yellow alarm from the remote DS1
endpoint, it will send a YELLOW-ALARM uplink message to the maintenance
software. After the maintenance software receives the YELLOW-ALARM
message, the Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is run to confirm the Yellow alarm. Once
the Yellow alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks on the
circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The Inquiry Test will be run every 10
minutes until the Yellow alarm is cleared.
When the Yellow alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks
on the DS1 Interface circuit pack back to their previous service state before the
Yellow alarm is raised.
This Yellow Alarm corresponds to the yellow F2 state documented in CCITT
recommendation I.431.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-558

Remote Multiframe Alarm: Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA) indicates that the
remote DS1 endpoint is in a Loss of Multiframe Alarm condition while the DS1
Interface circuit pack is administered using the DMI-BOS common channel
signaling. The RMA is handled as a Yellow alarm.
Yellow F5 State Alarm: For 32-channel E1 operation with CRC4 on, the F5 fault
state is defined as a fault in the user-network interface, specifically in the
direction from the user (PBX) to the network. Refer to CCITT recommendation
I.431
Table 10-153.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more
of the following symptoms may appear.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with
error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the
system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the
out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack
within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the
DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in
service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility.
In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms)
would be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors
would be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is
OK and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-153.
Error
Code

Page 10-559

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

FAIL

The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a yellow alarm sent by the remote
DS1 endpoint. An out of frame condition occurred at the DS1 endpoint.

1

FAIL

The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Remote Multiframe Alarm sent by
the remote DS1 endpoint. An out-of-frame condition occurs on the remote
DS1 endpoint.

2

FAIL

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is reporting a yellow F5 State alarm. There is
a fault in the user-network interface from the user (PBX) to the network.
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the
same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding. Likewise, verify
that any intermediate CSUs are administered correctly.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor
of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1
interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system
technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
4. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

0

PASS

No Yellow alarm nor Remote Multiframe Alarm nor F5 State Alarm is
received from the remote DS1 endpoint.

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an
incorrect board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is
shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-560

Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142)
The Major alarm raised by a DS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the average
bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1000. The Major Alarm Inquiry
Test is used to determine that the received DS1 bit error rate is greater than
1/1000. When D4 framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes
16 seconds to recognize and report a Major alarm and 16 seconds to recognize
and report that a Major alarm condition is cleared. If ESF framing mode is
selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 10 seconds to recognize and
report a Major alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and report that a Major alarm
condition is cleared.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm, it will send a
MAJOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the maintenance
software receives a MAJOR-ALARM message, the Major Alarm Inquiry Test is
initiated to confirm the Major alarm on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The Inquiry
Test will be run every 10 minutes until the Major alarm is cleared. The
maintenance software places all trunks on the circuit pack in the out-of-service
state if the Major alarm persists for more than 20 minutes.
When the Major alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks on
the circuit pack to their previous service state before a Major alarm occurs.
Table 10-154.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-154.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-561

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
FAIL

The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm. The DS1 bit error rate is
greater than 1/1000.
1. The performance of DS1 link between DS1 Interface circuit pack and
remote DS1 endpoint is very poor. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
TN767, enter list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error
seconds measurement.
2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor of
the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1 interface
circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system technician of the
remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
4. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
5. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

PASS

No Major alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-154.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-562

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143)
The Minor alarm raised by a DS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the average
bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1,000,000, but less than 1/1000.
The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is used to determine that the received DS1 bit error
rate is greater than 1/1,000,000 and less than 1/1000. When D4 framing mode is
selected, the DS1 Interface circuit pack takes 41 minutes to recognize and report
a Minor alarm and 41 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm
condition is cleared. If ESF framing mode is selected, the DS1 Interface circuit
pack takes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10 minutes to
recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition is cleared.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition, it will send
a MINOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the maintenance
software receives a MINOR-ALARM message, the Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is
initiated to confirm the Minor alarm. All trunks on the circuit pack are kept in the
in-service state after the Minor alarm is confirmed. The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test
is run every 10 minutes until the Minor alarm is cleared.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-155.
Error
Code

2100

Page 10-563

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more
of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the
system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out
of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the
DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in
the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged
against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error
occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-155.
Error
Code

Page 10-564

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm. The DS1 bit error rate
is greater than 1/1,000,000 and less than 1/1000.
1. The performance of DS1 link between DS1 Interface circuit pack and
remote DS1 endpoint is poor. If DS1 Interface circuit pack is TN767,
enter list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to read the error
seconds measurement.
2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the
same signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
3. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor
of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the
DS1interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system
technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
4. Check the physical connection of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
5. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

0

PASS

No Minor alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack.

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (144)
Slips occur when transmitter and receiver are not running at precisely the same
clock rate. The DS1 Interface circuit pack can detect both positive and negative
slips on the DS1 facility. The Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is used to acquire the total
number of slips occurred on a DS1 link.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-565

When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a slip condition, the circuit pack will
increase the on-board slip counter by 1. A SLIP-COUNT message is
spontaneously sent to the system software after the counter reaches a threshold
(for example, 88). When the maintenance software receives the SLIP-COUNT
message, the Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to query the slip counters on DS1
Interface circuit pack and total the slip counts in the maintenance software.
If the count of slips is over the threshold, a Minor alarm is raised against the DS1
Interface circuit pack. All trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are still in the
in-service state. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply the system
synchronization source, the MINOR alarm will initiate a synchronization source
switch. See “TDM-BUS” and "SYNC (Synchronization)" for details.
Table 10-156.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more
of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the
system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the
out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack
within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the
DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in
service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility.
In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would
be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would
be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK
and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-156.
Error
Code
1 to
88

Page 10-566

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a slip alarm. The error code equals
the number of slips detected by the DS1 interface circuit pack since the last
slip alarm inquiry test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN767, enter the list measurement
ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that both endpoints and all intermediate equipment of the DS1 link
are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and
line coding.
4. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor
of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1
interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system
technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
5. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors
against the synchronization (SYNC). Follow the suggested repair
procedure for these errors.
6. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
7. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test.

0

PASS

No Slip alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack.

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is
shut down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-567

Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145)
Misframe Alarm indicates that framing bits observed on a DS1 Interface circuit
pack are in error. Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test queries the total number of
misframes that occurred on a DS1 Interface circuit pack since the last inquiry.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a misframe error, it will increase its
misframe counter by 1. If the counter reaches the threshold, a
MISFRAME-COUNT message is automatically sent to the switch maintenance
software. After the maintenance software receives the MISFRAME-COUNT
message, the Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to collect the misframe
counts from the DS1 Interface circuit pack.
When the threshold of misframes is reached, if the DS1 Interface circuit pack is
supplying the system synchronization source, then a switching synchronization
source message is sent to the TDM Bus Clock. See TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Maintenance documentation for details. A Minor alarm against the DS1 Interface
circuit pack is raised, but all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are still in the
in-service state.
Table 10-157.
Error
Code

2100

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-157.

Page 10-568

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test Result

2000

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more
of the following symptoms may appear.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the
system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the
out of service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack
within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the
DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in
service state. Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility.
In such a case, faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would
be entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware errors would
be logged against the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK
and the error occurs again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-157.

Page 10-569

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test Result

ANY

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed because the DS1 interface circuit pack detected errors in the
received framing bits pattern. The error code equals the number of
misframes detected by the DS1 interface circuit pack since the last misframe
alarm inquiry test. Major bit and minor bit error rate (error types 2561 and
2817) error logs often accompany misframe alarms. Clearing the cause of
these error logs may clear the misframes which are occurring.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN767, enter the list measurement
ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that both endpoints and all intermediate equipment of the DS1 link
are administered using the same signaling mode, framing mode, and
line coding.
4. If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility, call the vendor
of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint. If the DS1
interface circuit pack connects directly to a switch, call the system
technician of the remote switch to diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
5. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent alarms and errors
against the synchronization (SYNC). Follow the suggested repair
procedure for these errors.
6. Check the physical connection of the DS1 pack and of the cable.
7. Replace the local DS1 interface circuit pack, and repeat the test.

0

PASS

No Misframe alarm is detected on the DS1 Interface circuit pack.

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add
ds1 PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-570

Translation Update Test (#146)
The Translation Update Test sends the circuit-pack-level information specified by
System Administration to the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Translation includes the
following data administered for a DS1 Interface circuit pack (see output of
display ds1 PCSS command): DS1 Link Length between two DS1 endpoints,
Synchronization Source Control, All Zero Suppression, Framing Mode, Signaling
Mode, Time Slot Number of 697-Hz Tone, Time Slot Number of 700-Hz Tone, etc.
If a TN767E or later DS1 circuit pack is combined with a 120A CSU Module to
form and Integrated CSU Module, this test will also send the administration for
this Integrated CSU to the circuit pack to assure the board’s translations are
correct. The administration of the CSU Module is done using the DS1 circuit pack
administration form. Translation for the CSU Module includes the following data:
Transmit LBO, Receive ALBO, Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power?, and so forth.
Table 10-158.
Error
Code

TEST #146 Translation Update Test

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

Internal system software error.
1. Enter the display ds1 PCSS command to verify the DS1 Interface circuit
pack translation.

0

PASS

Translation data has been downloaded to the DS1 Interface circuit pack
successfully.

NO BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-571

DS1 Board Loopback Test (#1209)
This test is destructive.
The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) Test causes a loopback at the TN767E DS1
board edge and tests DS1 board internal circuitry.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the BLB Test.
When the BLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board will
set up the BLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit
pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is
entered
Table 10-159.
Error
Code

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

DS1 Board Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To
run this Test, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for
24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration
form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter busyout board PCSS to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface
circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-159.
Error
Code
1039

Page 10-572

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this
test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit
pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

1950

2100

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board
is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test,
Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board
is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration
loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test
is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-159.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-573

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
FAIL

DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the DS1 Board Loopback Test.
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the DS1 circuit pack.

PASS

The BLB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and
received successfully up to the TN767E DS1 board edge.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-159.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-574

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CSU Equipment Loopback Test (#1210)
This test is destructive.
The CSU Equipment Loopback (ELB) Test causes a loopback at the near-edge
of the local 120A CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN767E DS1
board to the CSU Module (DS1 board edge interconnecting cable, and CSU
Module edge). This test will only be performed if the 120A CSU Module is
present, administered, and connected to a 1.544Mbps TN767E DS1 circuit pack
on the back of the port carrier.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the ELB Test.
When the ELB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board
sets up the ELB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-575

In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is
running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the
loopback pattern.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit
pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is
entered.
Table 10-160.
Error
Code

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

CSU Equipment Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current
configuration. To run this test, the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit
pack administration form must be set to integrated and the "Bit Rate" field must
be set to "1.544" (24-channel operation).
1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the Near-End CSU Type field
on the DS1 circuit pack administration form to integrated, and/or change
the "Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in the 24-channel
configuration.
2. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

1039

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this
test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack
via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-160.
Error
Code

Page 10-576

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board
is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test,
Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board
is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration
loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test
is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test.

1951

ABORT

The CSU Equipment Loopback Test could not be executed because the 120A
CSU Module was not physically installed. Physically connect the 120A CSU
Module to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

2100

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-160.
Error
Code

Page 10-577

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Equipment Loopback Test.
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN767E board, the CSU
Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or
any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate the problem to one of
these areas. Replace the CSU Module and running test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests again.
3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the TN767E board and run test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests again.
4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be in the I/O cable
between the backplane and the CSU module.

0

PASS

The ELB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and
received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the
near-edge of the 120A1 CSU Module.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CSU Repeater Loopback Test (#1211)
This test is destructive.
The CSU Repeater Loopback (RLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-edge of
the local 120A CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN767E DS1
board to and including the CSU Module circuitry. This test will only be performed

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-578

if the 120A CSU Module is present, administered, and connected to a 1.544
Mbps TN767E DS1 circuit pack on the back of the port carrier.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the RLB Test.
When the RLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board will
set up the RLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.
In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is
running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the
loopback pattern.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit
pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command is
entered
Table 10-161.
Error
Code

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests at 1-minute intervals
a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

CSU Repeater Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current
configuration. To run this test, the Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1circuit
pack administration form must be set to integrated and the "Bit Rate" field on
the DS1 circuit pack administration form must be set to "1.544" (24-channel
configuration).
1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the Near-End CSU Type field
on the DS1 circuit pack administration form to integrated, and/or change
the "Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in 24-channel
configuration.
2. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-161.
Error
Code
1015

Page 10-579

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

1039

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing
this test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit
pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the
board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload
loopback). The hardware error log indicates whether a Customer Loopback
Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or
if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a
loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test
ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this
test.

1951

ABORT

The CSU Repeater Loopback Test could not be executed because the 120A
CSU Module was not physically installed. Physically connect the 120A1 CSU
Module to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-161.
Error
Code

2100

Page 10-580

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of
service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
FAIL

DS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Repeater Loopback Test.
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
2. If the RLB test continues to fail, and the CSU Equipment Loopback Test
(#1210) passed, then replace the CSU Module.

PASS

The RLB test executed successfully. The test pattern was transmitted and
received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the
far-edge of the 120A1 CSU Module.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-161.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-581

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212)
This test is destructive.
The CPE Loopback Jack (CLJ-LB) Test causes a loopback at the CPE Loopback
Jack and tests the building wiring connection between the TN767E DS1 board
and the CPE Loopback Jack.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin
[number-of-bits bit-pattern] command. The System technician has the choice
of entering a loopback activation code on the command line or using the default
code (0x47F).
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the CPE Loopback
Jack Test.
The CPE Loopback Jack Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit
a loopback activation code to the CPE Loopback Jack, waits up to 10 seconds
for return of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a
framed 3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test
pattern, and returns a PASS result to indicate that the pattern was successfully

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-582

sent. If the loopback is not established within the 10 seconds, the test returns
FAIL.
The status of the CPE Loopback Jack test will be available in the hardware error
log via error type 3900. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed
through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The
command will also display the type of loopback/span test executing (Test field),
the type of pattern generated for the loopback/span test (Pattern field), and
whether the pattern (3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized Field).
To terminate the test, enter test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test
command or the release board. Using the release board command restores all
trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state.
Table 10-162.
Error
Code

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

CPE Loopback Jack Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To
run this Test, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for
24-channel operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration
form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

1039

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this
test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit
pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-162.
Error
Code
1950

2100

Page 10-583

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board
is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test,
Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board
is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration
loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test
is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-162.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-584

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The CLJ-LB test failed because it was not set up properly. The DS1 interface
pack could not successfully put the CPE loopback jack into loopback mode.
1. Rerun the test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command.
2. If the test continues to fail, the problem could be with the TN767E board,
the CPE loopback jack equipment, or somewhere between. Run the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command to determine if the
loopback tests that are closer to the TN767E board are successful. If any of
these tests fail, follow the maintenance strategy that is associated with the
test that fails.

3

FAIL

The CPE Loopback Jack Test was not set up properly. The framed 3-in-24 test
pattern, generated by the DS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through
the CPE Loopback Jack, could not be detected properly by the DS1 circuit
pack.
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin.
2. If the CPE Loopback test continues to fail, the problem could be with the
TN767E board, the CPE Loopback Jack equipment, or somewhere in
between. Run test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests to see if the
loopback tests closer to the TN767E board are successful. If any of those
loopback tests fail, follow the maintenance strategy associated with those
loopbacks.

0

PASS

The CPE Loopback Jack test has successfully began executing. The test will
continue to run until the system technician enters the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command or the release board PCSS command.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-585

Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213)
This test is destructive.
The Far CSU Loopback (R-LLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-end CSU and
tests all circuitry and facilities from the local TN767E DS1 board to the far-end
CSU.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin command.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the Far CSU
Loopback Test.
If the far-end CSU is not a 120A CSU Module, and the DS1 is administered for
ami-zcs line coding, one’s density protection must be disabled on the CSU
during the test due to the large number of zero’s in the 3-in-24 test pattern.
The Far CSU Loopback Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit
a loopback activation code to the remote CSU, waits up to 15 seconds for return
of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a framed
3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern, and
returns a PASS result. If the loopback is not established within the 15 seconds,
the test fails.
The status of the Far CSU Loopback test will be available in the hardware error
log via error type 3901. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed
through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The
command will also display the type of loopback/span test executing (Test field),
the type of pattern generated for the loopback/span test (Pattern field), and
whether the pattern (i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized field).
To terminate the test, enter test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test or the
release board command. Using the release board command will restore all
trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the in-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-163.
Error
Code

Page 10-586

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

Far CSU Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run
this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must
be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

1039

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing this
test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit
pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

1950

2100

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board
is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test,
Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board
is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one long-duration
loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test
is already active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this test.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-163.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-587

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against the
associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-163.
Error
Code

Page 10-588

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2

FAIL

The far CSU Loopback Test was not set up properly. The DS1 Interface circuit
pack could not put the far-end CSU into loopback mode.

3

FAIL

The far CSU Loopback Test was not set up properly. The framed 3-in-24 test
pattern, generated by the DS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through
the far-end CSU, could not be detected by the DS1 circuit pack.
1. Retry test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin.
2. If the Far CSU Loopback test continues to fail with this error code, the
problem could be with the TN767E board, the far-end CSU equipment, or
somewhere in between. Run test ds1-loop PCSS
cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin to see if the CPE Loopback Jack test which
is closer to the TN767E board is successful. (If a CPE Loopback Jack
device is not being used, then run test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests to see if these even closer loopback tests
succeed). If the closer loopback test fails, follow the maintenance strategy
associated with that loopback

0

PASS

The Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began executing. The test will
continue to run until the system technician enters test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test or the release board PCSS.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

One-Way Span Test (#1214)
This test is destructive.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-589

The One-Way Span Test allows one-way span testing to and from remote test
equipment or another DEFINITY communications system. This will test all
circuitry and facilities from the local TN767E DS1 board to the remote test
equipment or other DEFINITY communications system.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS one-way-span-test-begin command.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the One-Way Span
Test.
The One-Way Span Test has the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a
framed 3-in-24 test pattern and attempt to receive and verify the pattern. If the
TN767E board receives a framed 3-in-24 test pattern sent from another DEFINITY
G3V3 or test equipment at the far-end of the DS1, it will begin counting bit errors
within the received pattern.
The status of the One-Way Span test will be available in the hardware error log
via error type 3902. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being sent
cleanly over the span from the far-end, the number of bit errors should be very
low. The Test Duration field will show 0 until the test pattern is received from the
far-end. Upon receiving the test pattern, the board will begin calculating the test
duration and number of bit errors. The command will also display the type of
loopback/span test executing (Test field), the type of pattern generated for the
loopback/span test (Pattern field), and whether the pattern (i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is
synchronized (Synchronized field).
To terminate the test, enter the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test
command or the release board command. Using the release board command
will restore all trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state.
Table 10-164.
Error
Code

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS one-way-span-test-begin command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-164.
Error
Code

Page 10-590

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1005

ABORT

One-Way Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To run
this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must
be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

1039

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system. Executing
this test could cause major system disruption.
If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested, set the synchronization
reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit
pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch command.

1950

2100

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the
board is in a network requested loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload
loopback). The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback
Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the One-Way Span Test is executing or
if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a given time. Thus, if a
loopback/span test is already active, that test must be terminated via the test
ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to execute this
test.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-164.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-591

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes.
When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface circuit
pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
PASS

The One-Way Span test has successfully began transmitting a framed 3-in-24
test pattern. The test will continue to run until the system technician enters the
test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command or the release board
PCSS command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-164.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-592

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Inject Single Bit Error Test (#1215)
This test is destructive.
The Inject Single Bit Error Test will cause a single bit error to be sent within an
active framed 3-in-24 test pattern.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error command. An attempt to
use this command will be rejected if none of the three long-duration DS1
loopback/span tests (CPE Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test,
One-Way Span Test) are active on a TN767E circuit pack.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the Inject Single Bit
Error Test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command displays the number of bit errors
detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). Injecting this single bit error
should increment the bit error count of the loopback/span test by one.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-165.
Error
Code

Page 10-593

TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

2100

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of
service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
PASS

A single bit error has been successfully injected into an active framed 3-in-24
test pattern.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-165.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-594

TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

End Loopback/Span Test (#1216)
This test is destructive.
The End Loopback/Span Test will terminate an active loopback or span test on a
TN767E DS1 circuit pack. Bit error counting against the received test pattern
stream is terminated and sending of the framed 3-in-24 test pattern is halted. If
either the CPE Loopback Jack or the far-end CSU is looped, the appropriate
loopback deactivate code is sent. If the loopback could not be deactivated, then
the test will FAIL and a MINOR alarm will be noted in the alarm log until the
loopback is cleared.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command. Since only
one of these three different long-duration loopback/span tests can be active at a
time, the TN767E circuit pack knows which loopback/span test to terminate.
All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running this End
Loopback/Span Test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-595

The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test ran (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span
Test Bit-Error Count field).
To restore the trunks or ports on the TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state, execute the release board command.
Table 10-166.
Error
Code

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

End Loopback/Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration. To
run this, the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack administration form must
be set to "1.544" for 24-channel operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack have not been busied out to
out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all trunks or ports of the
DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.

2100

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-166.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-596

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period. This
may be due to hyperactivity. Error type 1538 in the error log indicates
hyperactivity. The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or more of
the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The DS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139) are aborting with error
code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board
result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are
properly installed.

NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated from the system,
and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of
service state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15
minutes. When no faults are detected for 15 minutes, the DS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for the DS1
interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state.
Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be entered in the
error log. In addition, many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs
again after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
1313

FAIL

The TN767E DS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the loopback through the
Customer Loopback Jack.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

1314

FAIL

The TN767E DS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the loopback through the
far-end CSU.
1. Make sure that the far-end DS1 is installed if the far-end CSU is a 120A
CSU Module.
2. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command at
1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The active long-duration loopback or span test on the TN767E circuit pack
was successfully terminated.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-166.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-597

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the
busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the link between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

ICSU Status LEDs Test (#1227)
The TN767E DS1 circuit pack has four status LEDs on the faceplate in addition to
the three standard faceplate LEDs. These four status LEDs are associated with
the 120A1 Channel Service Unit (CSU) Module that can be connected to the
TN767E board via the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier.
This test is a visual test. It will light the four status LEDs red for 5 seconds, then
light them green for 5 seconds, then light them yellow for 5 seconds, then turn
the LEDs off and returns control of the status LEDs to the circuit pack.
This test will only be executed on TN767E or later suffix DS1 circuit packs
administered for 24-channel operation (1.544 bit rate).
If the 1201 CSU Module is not installed, the status LEDs are always off and this
test aborts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-167.
Error
Code

Page 10-598

TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

The ICSU Status LEDs test can not be executed for the current configuration.
The test applies only to TN767E or later DS1 circuit packs administered for
24-channel operation (1.544 bit rate).
1. If the circuit pack is a TN767E or later suffix DS1 circuit pack, then retry the
command.

1951

ABORT

The ICSU Status LEDs Test can not be executed because a 120A1 or later suffix
CSU Module is not physically installed. If using a 120A1 CSU Module,
physically connect it to the TN767E board on the back of the port carrier
otherwise, ignore this abort.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error.
1. Retry the command.

PASS

The ICSU Status LEDs test executed successfully. A PASS result, however,
does not necessarily mean that the status LEDs behaved properly. It only
means that the software successfully attempted to light the status LEDs. This is
a visual test. The service technician must visually exam the behavior of the
LEDs while the test is running. The LEDs are functioning properly if the four
status LEDs are lit red for 5 seconds, then lit green for 5 seconds, then lit yellow
for 5 seconds. If the LEDs behave differently, the board should be replaced at
the customer’s convenience.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-167.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-599

TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no board).
This could be due to incorrect translations, no board is inserted, an incorrect
board is inserted, or an insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are correct. Use the add ds1
PCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is not already
administered.
2. If board was already administered correctly, check the error log to
determine if the board is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1, issue the busyout
board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-600

DT-LN-BD (Data Line Circuit Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DT-LN-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Data Line Circuit Pack

DT-LN-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Data Line Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also DAT-LINE (Data Line Circuit Port) Maintenance
documentation for related line information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Page 10-601

DTMR-PT [Dual Tone
Multifrequency Port (TTR)]
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DTMR-PT

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Dual Tone Multifrequency
Receiver Port (TTR)

DTMR-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Dual Tone Multifrequency
Receiver Port (TTR)

DTMR-PT

WARNING

release port PCSSpp

Dual Tone Multifrequency
Receiver Port (TTR)

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example,
01).

The Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (DTMR), also known as the
Touch-Tone Receiver (TTR), resides on the Tone Detector circuit pack (TN748,
TN420) or the TN756 Tone-Clock circuit pack. There are four Dual Tone
Multifrequency Receiver (DTMR-PT) ports and two General Purpose Tone
Detector (GPTD-PT) ports on a Tone Detector circuit pack. The DTMR port is
used to detect touch-tone digits that are placed on the TDM bus. Examples of
touch-tone digits are digits 0 through 9, digit #, and digit *. The ability of the
DTMR port to detect touch-tone digits is essential for maintenance of other circuit
packs (for example, Tone-Clock circuit pack) and in placing a station-to-station
call. Calls originating from a hybrid station do not require a DTMR port.
The Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port maintenance object defines a set of
tests to verify that the DTMF digits detection capability of the DTMR port is
functioning properly. For all Tone Detector circuit pack level errors (DETR-BD),
refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Page 10-602

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

1 (b)

17664

Tone Detector
Audit/Update Test
(#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 2

18

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WARNING

ON

release port PCSSpp

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

130 (d)
257 (c)

17666

Tone Detector
Audit/Update Test
(#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

513

Any

Tone Detection
Verification Test (#42)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error: Major alarm and Minor
alarm. A Major alarm is raised if the total number of DTMR ports currently
in service is less than or equal to one half of the administered threshold
number. Otherwise, a Minor alarm is raised. In either case, run the Short
Test Sequence against the DTMR port and follow the error code
procedures for the individual tests.
The threshold number of DTMR ports for service is administered using the
change system-parameters maintenance command.
b. This error indicates the DTMR port is having problems detecting
touch-tone digits. If this error is being constantly logged, then the Tone
Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port should be
replaced.
c. The DTMR port lost its translation. Testing the DTMR port is sufficient to
reload its translation. If testing the DTMR port does not clear the error,
then the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port
should be replaced.
d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for at least 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace
the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Page 10-603

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone
Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)

X

X

ND

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)
This test verifies the "touch-tone digits detection" capability of the DTMR port is
functioning properly.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Table 10-168.
Error
Code

Page 10-604

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none

ABORT

The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test or there was an Internal System
Error.

1

ABORT

The system could not allocate all the resources needed
to test the DTMR port.

1001

ABORT

The system was unable to put the DTMR port in the
appropriate mode to test it.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test
connection. This could happen when the system is
heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then
test the TDM Bus via the test tdm [a|b] command. Refer
to the TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation for details.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone Generator for the
test connection. This could happen when the system is
heavily loaded or there is not a Tone-Clock circuit pack
in the port network when this test is being executed.
1. Make sure there is a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the
same port network.
2. If a Tone-Clock circuit pack is missing, install one in
the same port network.
3. Allow about one-minute for the Tone-Clock
maintenance to run on the newly inserted
Tone-Clock circuit pack.
4. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
5. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Table 10-168.
Error
Code

Page 10-605

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2006

ABORT

DTMF detection failed. This could be caused by the
administered companding mode of the system not
matching that of the Tone Detector circuit pack.
1. Make sure that companding mode of the system
matches that of the Tone Detector.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1-3

FAIL

DTMF digits were not correctly detected.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence: test port PCSSpp sh
r 1.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity will be reduced. In
order to restore the system performance to normal,
replace the Tone Detector circuit pack containing
the defective DTMR port.

PASS

The DTMR port is able to detect all the touch-tone digits.

Continued on next page

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43)
The DTMR port is refreshed with all time slot information and sanity audit is
performed on the DTMR port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)]

Table 10-169.
Error
Code

Page 10-606

TEST #43 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test.
1. Wait one minute and try again.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Hardware audit failed.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence: test port PCSSpp sh
r 1.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity is reduced. In order to
restore the system performance to normal, replace
the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the
defective DTMR port.

PASS

The DTMR port has been successfully refreshed with its
translation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-607

DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DUPINT

MAJOR

test duplication 1C

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack

DUPINT

WARNING

test duplication 1C

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack

1.

Alarms on Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier are always major alarms and alarms
on Duplication Interface circuit pack in the B carrier are always warning alarms. Determine the
carrier to test via the PORT field from the Alarm or Error Log.

In a High or Critical Reliability PPN system, there are two Duplication Interface
circuit packs: one in carrier A and one in carrier B. Together, Duplication
Interface circuit pack A and Duplication Interface circuit pack B provide memory
shadowing (see “SHDW-CIR” for a full description) and communication between
software on the Active and Standby SPEs. By itself, Duplication Interface circuit
pack A provides control of the duplicated Processor circuit pack, environmental
maintenance monitoring and control, and administration terminal connection.
Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls a lead that lets the Tone-Clock
circuit packs know which of them is supposed to be active and additional leads
that control which SPE is active. The system software can request that either the
SPE Select lead or Tone-Clock lead be changed.
Duplication Interface circuit pack A controls and monitors the same environment
leads that the Maintenance/Tape Processor does in a PPN a system without High
or Critical Reliability. Duplication Interface circuit pack A also supports the serial
channel to the PPN administration terminal in a high or critical reliability PPN. The
administration terminal connects to Duplication Interface circuit pack A via a
connector on the back of carrier A labeled DOT. At any time, the administration
terminal may be disconnected from Duplication Interface circuit pack A and
connected directly to the active Maintenance/Tape Processor by attaching the
administration terminal to the connector marked TERM on the active carrier. This
connection should only be made if the administration terminal fails to function
since a problem with the Duplication Interface circuit pack A may be present.
The Duplication Interface circuit packs communicate over the Inter-Carrier Cable
(ICC). The ICC connects the Duplication Interface circuit packs via pin fields on
the backplane. The ICC consists of two 25-pin connector cables known as ICC-A
and ICC-B. (Note: A single-carrier cabinet system has an ICC-C also.) The pin
fields where ICC-A and ICC-B connect are clearly labeled on the backplane near
the pin fields for the Duplication Interface circuit packs. The ICC carries several
important leads related to maintaining a high or critical reliability system.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-608

NOTE:
The ICC carries the following leads and their respective information:
Tone-Clock select lead that indicates which Tone-Clock circuit pack is
active; SPE Select Switch State leads which indicate the position of the SPE
Select Switch; Emergency Transfer leads which indicate whether
Emergency Transfer is on or off in the PPN cabinet; leads to tie INADS,
CDR, and Customer-Provided Alarming Device.
Without the ICC properly attached, the system cannot function as a high or
critical reliability system or as a standard system.
Figure 10-29 depicts the interconnection of the Duplication Interface circuit
packs with the rest of the system. The dotted lines show the logical serial channel
rather than actual physical implementation of the serial channel. For clarity, the
UARTs are not shown. The following abbreviations are used in the figure:
■

DUPINT for Duplication Interface circuit pack

■

PR MAINT for Maintenance/Tape Processor

■

PROCR for 80286 Processor circuit pack

■

MEM BD for Memory

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-609

TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD

SPE SELECT LEAD

D

P

M

N

U

R

E

E

P

O

M

T

I

C

O

C

R

R

O

Y

N

S

S

N

H

E

T

A

R

C

D

I

T

O

A

R

W

L

L

T
N
B CARRIER
C
L
K
P

TN772

TN773

TN770

TN777

I

MBUS

TDMBUS A
TN765

DUP-A TO

ICC-B

B

PACKET BUS*

(SCC ONLY)
DUP-DUP

TN765
MBUS

S

C

H

E

T

A

R

R

D

I

L

O

A

D

W

L

U

TN772

TN773

U

PKT CTRL

S

TDMBUS A

TN770

TN777

I

TN768 OR TN780*

1

P

P
I
N
T

R
DUP-A TO MTP-A

O
C
R

M

N

T

E

E

N

M

T

O

C

C

R

O

L

Y

N

K

M
SPE SELECT LEAD

R
1
TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD
* G1.2 ONLY.
MCC ONLY.
(IN A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE EITHER 0 or 1
PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK. IN A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION,
THERE CAN BE 0, 1, OR 2 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACKS.)

Figure 10-29.

TN778

P

S

G

M

PKT CTRL

ICC-C

T
D

TN778

MTP-B
ICC-A

TN768 OR TN780*

1

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Interactions

A CARRIER

B

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-610

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-170.
Error
Type
01

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data
0

1

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test dup 1C sh r 1

Sanity Circuit Test (#273)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C l r 1

108 (a)

Any

None

109 (a)

Any

None

257

SAT Loop Back Test (#274)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

513

SPE A Loop Back Test (#275)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

769

SPE B Loop Back Test (#276)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

1025

Sanity Maze Test (#277)

MAJOR
/WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

1281 (b)

Any

Dupint Status Query Test (#315)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 6

1537 (c)

Any

Background Test Query Test
(#271)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

1793 (d)

Any

MBUS Time-Out Query Test
(#285)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C l r 3

Inter-Dupint Loop Around Test
(#280)

MAJOR/
WRN

ON

test dup 1C sh r 3

2049

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates that an unexpected hardware reset has occurred on
the Duplication Interface circuit pack. Appropriate action has been taken
by the software to prevent malfunction. However, if this type error occurs
with regular frequency, the DUPINT circuit pack may need to be replaced.
b. There are several possible Aux Data fields for this error, including blank.
All indicate loss of contact with the indicated Duplication Interface circuit
packs. The following table summarizes the Aux Data fields.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Aux
Data

Page 10-611

Description

1 or
3

Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Duplication
Interface circuit pack B.

2

MTP lost handshaking with the Duplication Interface circuit pack.

221

Duplication Interface circuit pack reported the trouble.

65315
or
65503

Duplication Interface circuit pack A lost contact with Duplication
Interface circuit pack B.

Blank,
65313,
or
65501

If reported against Duplication Interface circuit pack A, Duplication
Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Maintenance/Tape
Processor A.
If reported against Duplication Interface circuit pack B, Duplication
Interface circuit pack A lost handshaking with Maintenance/Tape
Processor B.

c. An Aux value of blank or 65317 is valid. The 65317 aux value means the
Duplication Interface circuit pack reported the trouble, while the blank
means the software detected the trouble.
d. This could be caused by mismatched numbers of Processor Interface
(TN765) or Packet Control (TN778) circuit packs in the two SPEs or by a
defective Duplication Interface (TN772) Circuit Pack. If the Duplication
Interface Circuit Pack is defective and becomes part of the Standby SPE,
then memory shadowing does not work. Follow the procedures given for
the FAIL case of Common Shadow Circuit M-Bus Time-Out Query Test
(#285) in the SHDW-CIR section.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By
clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status
Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Order of Investigation
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315)
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test (#273)(a)

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

X

D

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-612
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test
(#275)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test
(#276)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal
Loop Back Test (#274)(a)

X

X

ND

Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test (#280)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query
Test (#271)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test
(#272)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-out Query Test (#285)
(b)
Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) (b)

X

X

ND

Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) (b)

X

X

ND

SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278) (c)

X

1.

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. When running the Long Test Sequence on Duplication Interface circuit
pack A, the results of Test #273 may overwrite the results of Test #274.
b. Refer to “SHDW-CIR” (Common Shadow Circuit) for a description of this
test.
c. Refer to “SPE-SELEC” (SPE Select Switch) for a description of this test.

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background
Test Query (#271)
This test queries the Duplication Interface circuit pack for the results of its
background tests. The response indicates the results of the last time the
following background tests were run:
■

ROM Checksum Test: This test verifies the correctness of the Duplication
Interface circuit pack firmware.

■

RAM Test: This tests verifies that the RAM on the Duplication Interface
circuit pack is functioning properly.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-613

Table 10-171. TEST #271 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Background Test Query Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2008
2009
2010

FAIL

One or both background tests failed on the Duplication Interface circuit
pack. Error Code 2008 means the ROM test failed. Error Code 2009 means
the RAM test failed. Error Code 2010 means both tests failed.
1. Follow the procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs and
replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to reply to handshaking
from either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of
Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or from Duplication Interface circuit
pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

Continued on next page

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid
Message Query Test (#272)
The Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query Test sets the
threshold for the number of bad checksum errors the Duplication Interface circuit
pack detects before reporting the problem to maintenance and queries the
Duplication Interface circuit pack for the number of checksum errors detected.
The error threshold is set to 10. The query causes Duplication Interface circuit
pack firmware to clear its bad checksum error counter. This test is run on both
circuit packs, but has little meaning on Duplication Interface circuit pack B and
should always pass.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-614

Table 10-172. TEST #272 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Invalid Message Query Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Duplication Interface circuit pack is receiving an abnormal number of
corrupted messages.
1. First investigate other Duplication Interface circuit pack tests that are
not passing.
2. If this is the only test that fails, investigate and resolve all alarms
against PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor).
3. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, follow the procedures for replacing
Common Control circuit packs and replace the Duplication Interface
circuit pack.
4. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has not received any bad messages
from either Maintenance/Tape Processor or the other Duplication Interface
circuit pack. All serial links are operating fine.

Continued on next page

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit
Test (#273)
This test is destructive.
This test checks the sanity hardware of a Duplication Interface circuit pack. The
Duplication Interface circuit pack processor is instructed to allow the on-board
circuit pack sanity timer to expire, which should cause the circuit pack to reset
itself. The software then allows the Duplication Interface circuit pack 15 seconds
to reset. After this time, the Duplication Interface circuit pack is queried for the
results of its background tests (see Test #271). If the Duplication Interface circuit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-615

pack responds to this query, then the reset passes. If performed on Duplication
Interface A, this test can cause an SPE interchange to the SPE in the B carrier if
the A carrier SPE was active when the test was executed. The B carrier
Tone-Clock circuit pack is also selected on Duplication Interface circuit pack A
processor reset. This test is run only when demanded by software and can be
performed on either Duplication Interface circuit pack. There is no
service-disruption when this test is run on Duplication Interface B.
Table 10-173. TEST #273 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Sanity Circuit Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1037

ABORT

The active Tone-Clock circuit pack is currently the one in the A carrier. If
the Duplication Interface circuit pack is allowed to be reset at this time, an
unscheduled tone/clock switch would take place resulting in a Cold 2
restart.
1. Check for alarms against TONE-BD in the B carrier and refer to
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) to resolve these alarms.
2. When there are no alarms against TONE-BD in the B carrier, force the
-one-Clock circuit pack to be active by issuing the set tone-clock b
command.
3. Verify the B carrier Tone-Clock circuit pack is active by using the
status system command.
4. Rerun the Duplication Interface circuit pack test.

1185

ABORT

Only occurs when attempting to reset Duplication Interface A when SPE A
is active and SPE A has not been selected by the SPE Select switch. In this
case, resetting Duplication Interface A causes a warm start
SPE-interchange to SPE B.
1. Issue the reset system interchange command to make SPE A the
Standby SPE.
2. Repeat the test.

2018

ABORT

Applicable only when testing Duplication Interface A. (1) Refer to
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of
this error.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-616

Table 10-173. TEST #273 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Sanity Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
2052

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Only occurs when attempting to reset Duplication Interface A. If SPE B is
not in Standby Mode, ready to take over, then this test aborts.
1. Resolve all “STBY-SPE” errors and alarms.
2. Use refresh spe command to place SPE B in Standby Mode.
3. Repeat the test.

2000

FAIL

The software timed out waiting for Duplication Interface circuit pack to
respond to the background test query.
1. Rerun the test.
2. If the test fails with a 2000 again, then deal with the Duplication
Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) results first.

FAIL

The sanity timer circuit on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is
defective. The Duplication Interface circuit pack should be replaced.
1. Follow the procedure for replacing Common Control circuit packs, and
replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The Duplication Interface circuit pack successfully reset. The Duplication
Interface circuit pack may still have problems related to any of the other
Duplication Interface circuit pack tests. Follow up on any other test failures.

Continued on next page

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Administration Terminal Loop Back Test (#274)
This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with
administration terminal. The data is generated by the Duplication Interface circuit
pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is done entirely on the
Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data sent matches the
data received. This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed
on the backplane or carried by the ICC.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-617

Table 10-174. TEST #274 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal Loop Back
Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective.
1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must
be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface circuit
pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system. However,
since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be used in the A
carrier, it should be replaced at some point.
2. Follow the procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs,
and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
3. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The administration terminal UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack
is good. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be
able to communicate with the administration terminal. This implies that
Duplication Interface circuit pack B has a good UART.
If there are problems bringing up the administration terminal, check the
following:
1. Verify the terminal is connected to the connector labeled DOT on the
back of carrier A and that the connector is securely fastened.
2. Verify the terminal is set up for 9600 baud.
3. If the terminal still does not work, replace the administration terminal.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-618

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop
Back Test (#275)
This test loops data back through the UART used to communicate with
Maintenance/Tape Processor A. The data is generated by the Duplication
Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is
done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data
sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial
channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC.
Table 10-175.
Error
Code

TEST #275 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective.
1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must
be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface
circuit pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system.
However, since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be
used in the A carrier, it should be replaced at some point.
2. Follow general procedures for replacing Common Control circuit
packs, and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
3. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The SPE A UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. This
implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be able to
communicate with SPE A. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit
pack B has a good UART.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-619

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop
Back Test (#276)
This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with
Maintenance/Tape Processor B. The data is generated by the Duplication
Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is
done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data
sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial
channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC.
Table 10-176.
Error
Code

TEST #276 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective.
1. If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A, then the circuit pack must
be replaced to restore duplication. If this is Duplication Interface circuit
pack B, then this failure has no real impact on the system. However,
since this Duplication Interface circuit pack can never be used in the A
carrier, it should be replaced at some point.
2. Replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
3. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The SPE B UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is good. This
implies that Duplication Interface circuit pack A should be able to
communicate with SPE B. This implies that Duplication Interface circuit
pack B has a good UART.

Continued on next page

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze
Test (#277)
This test tests the Duplication Interface circuit pack processor’s ability to write
through the maze circuit. The Sanity Maze is a piece of circuitry on the
Duplication Interface circuit pack that the Duplication Interface circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-620

Processor must write through to get access to leads controlled by the Duplication
Interface circuit pack (Tone-Clock Select Lead, 80286 Processor circuit pack
Select Leads, etc.). This maze circuitry ensures that the processor on the
Duplication Interface circuit pack is sane before any of these leads are changed.
The Duplication Interface processor is instructed to write bit patterns through the
maze circuit. The Duplication Interface processor examines the output of the
maze circuit and compares it with the input.
Table 10-177.
Error
Code

TEST #277 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Sanity Maze Circuit or the processor on the Duplication Interface circuit
pack is defective, which implies the Duplication Interface circuit pack can
no longer be relied upon to control and support a High or Critical Reliability
system. The Duplication Interface circuit pack needs to be replaced.
1. Follow general procedures for replacing Common Control circuit packs
and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The Duplication Interface circuit pack Sanity Maze is good. This implies
that Duplication Interface circuit pack can correctly control the SPE Select
and Tone-Clock Lead.

Continued on next page

Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop
Back Test (#280)
This test loops back data through the UART used to communicate with the other
Duplication Interface circuit pack. The data is generated by the Duplication
Interface circuit pack processor and is looped through the UART. The test is

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-621

done entirely on the Duplication Interface circuit pack. The test passes if the data
sent matches the data received. This test does not check the physical serial
channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC.
Table 10-178.
Error
Code

TEST #280 Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective.
1. Replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack B has failed to reply to handshaking
either from Duplication Interface circuit pack A.
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315).

PASS

The Inter-DUPINT UART on the tested Duplication Interface circuit pack is
good.

Continued on next page

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query
Test (#315)
This test is used to detect the presence of Duplication Interface circuit packs A
and B. To determine the status of Duplication Interface circuit pack B, a query is
sent to the Duplication Interface circuit pack A. To determine the status of
Duplication Interface circuit pack A, a query is sent to the Maintenance/Tape
Processor on the active carrier. The response to either query indicates the status
of the handshake to the appropriate Duplication Interface circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-622

Table 10-179. TEST #315 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Status Query Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

The software timed out waiting for the reply message.
1. Rerun the test.
2. If the message times out again, then continue to the next step. If the
query fails with a NO BOARD, then refer to NO BOARD on the next
page of this table.
3. No response is being received from the Duplication Interface circuit
pack or Maintenance/Tape Processor. If Duplication Interface circuit
pack A is under-test, then check for and resolve all alarms against the
active PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor). If Duplication
Interface circuit pack B is under test, then enter the test dup a system
technician command and resolve problems with Test #315 for
Duplication Interface circuit pack A first.
4. Rerun the test. If it still aborts, then a problem may exist with one of the
serial links. If carrier B is active or Duplication Interface circuit pack B
is under test, then the serial link to get to Duplication Interface circuit
pack B is being carried by the ICC. Check for damage to the ICC, and
verify that all four connectors for the ICC are plugged in. If the ICC has
to be replaced, the system must be powered down.
5. If the ICC is not the problem, then that portion of the serial link wired
into carrier A and/or carrier B may be defective, and the carrier pack
may need to be replaced.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-623

Table 10-179. TEST #315 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack
Status Query Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The handshake to one of the Duplication Interface circuit packs has
stopped. The circuit pack may be defective or communication to the circuit
pack is hampered.
1. Look in the Hardware Error Log for error types against TAPE. If TAPE
error types are present, resolve them since TAPE error types can
cause Test #315 to fail. Refer to TAPE Maintenance documentation for
recommended repair strategy.
2. After any TAPE error types are resolved, issue the test
duplication-interface command on the suspect Duplication Interface
circuit pack. If Test #315 fails on Duplication Interface A, Duplication
Interface A is defective. Replace the Duplication Interface A circuit
pack. If Test #315 fails on Duplication Interface B, Duplication
Interface circuit pack A or Duplication Interface circuit pack B may be
defective. In this case, it is necessary to determine which Duplication
Interface circuit pack (A or B) is the defective one. To do this, issue the
test duplication-interface A command. If Test #280 fails on
Duplication Interface A, (and Test #315 has just failed on Duplication
Interface B), Duplication Interface circuit pack A is defective and
should be replaced. If Test #280 passes on Duplication Interface A
(and Test #315 has just failed on Duplication Interface B), replace the
Duplication Interface circuit pack B.
3. Reissue the test duplication-interface command on the Duplication
Interface circuit pack that was replaced. If Test #315 still fails, check
for problems with the Inter-Carrier Cables (ICCs). If any of the ICCs is
defective, replace it.
4. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or with Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Follow the FAIL directions above.

PASS

The tested Duplication Interface circuit pack is present and sane enough
to handshake.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board)

Page 10-624

E-DIG-BD (Multi Application
Platform Board)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

DIG800-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

MO800DIG-BD

DIG800-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

MO800DIG-BD

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...).

The maintenance strategy for DIG800-BD is the same as the one described for
MO-COMBD (MO-XXX-BD). Maintenance testing of the common circuit pack is
handled by on-board firmware and SPE controlled tests. Maintenance software
queries the firmware for error and alarm information, status, and test results. The
firmware automatically reports error conditions that will result in SPE-controlled
testing.

Board Insertion
The switch makes an additional board query if any of the following circuit packs
are inserted:
Circuit Pack

Vintage

TN754

49

TN556

49,
80 or greater

TN800

any

For any of the above initial board up-links, the switch sends queries requesting
additional data from the board for administration purposes, while also telling the
board the switch software release and the system type.
For the native mode, the response to the board query downlink messages
consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code,
vintage, suffix, emulation type, and the number of reserved slots it needs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-BD (Multi Application Platform Board)

Page 10-625

Hyperactivity
The common circuit pack is considered "hyperactive" if the service dispatcher
receives 200 up-link messages from the circuit pack in a 10-second period.
Since MAPD has 32 ports, the hyperactivity limit is increased to 500 up-link
messages per 10seconds. An alarm is issued and the board taken out of service
when the limit reaches 400 or when it hits 500 up-link messages in 10 seconds.

LED Use
The LED Control message 038x requests the Angel to drive the Red, Yellow, and
Green LEDs on the face plate of typical port board on or off. On the MAPD, only
the Red LED is controlled by this message. Yellow and Green change requests
received from the switch by the MAPD drive LCD behavior rather than LED
behavior. The switch continues to send the same LED control messages to the
MAPD that it currently sends to all other port boards. The MAPD will handle
proper interpretation of these messages. You should note that the PC on the
MAPD, as well as the switch itself, can control the LEDs and the LCD on the
MAPD.

Port Administration
In administration without hardware, the switch allows administration of up to 32
MAPD ports of any port type. If the port type later reported by the board does not
match the existing type, the switch assumes the board is a MAPD board with a
different configuration and rejects the board. MAPD_DCP_STA and MAPD_
ASAI_STA are the only two types of terminals are allowed on a MAPD board.
Therefore, while administering ports on MAPD using add station form, it will
allow only the terminals mentioned above.
NOTE:
Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation
for circuit pack level errors. See also DIG-LINE maintenance
documentation for related line information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot)

E-DIG-RES (TN800 reserve slot)
See ASAI-RES.

Page 10-626

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

Page 10-627

E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Initial Command to
Run1

Alarm Level

Full Name of MO

E-DIG-STA

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Emulated Digital St.

E-DIG-STA

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Emulated Digital St.

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...).

There are 4 tests in the Emulated Digital Line station maintenance test sequence
and only one test path in the test sequence. Once the test sequence is started,
all tests in the test sequence are executed.
E-DIG-ST maintenance monitors and tests ports on the TN800 MAPD circuit pack
and the hardware connected to those ports for lines administered as a digital
station. These include stations with an emulated digital voice terminal and
stations with an emulated digital voice terminal and a linked data module.
Stand-alone data modules and data adaptors in stand-alone mode are not
supported by the TN800 circuit pack. Circuit pack maintenance is covered by
E-DIG-BD.

Hardware Error Log Entries and
Test to Clear Values
Table 10-180.
Error
Type

Digital Line Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

18 (a)

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WNG

OFF

rel port PCSSpp

130 (b)

None

WNG

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

1793 (c)

Voice and Control Local
Loop Test (#13)

MIN/
WNG2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2049 (d)

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

MIN/
WNG2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2305 (e)

32770

None

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
Table 10-180.

Page 10-628

Digital Line Error Log Entries — Continued

Error
Type

Aux
Data

3840 (f)

40965

None

3841 (g)

41029

None

2304 (h)

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

None

Continued on next page

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options
command.

Notes:
a. Maintenance personnel has busied out the port in question. Make sure
that the port is released from busyout by using the release port PCSSpp
command.
b. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21
minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
c. The local loop test failed. Each failure increments the counter by 1 when
the local loop test fails. The counter is decremented when the loop test
passes. When the counter reaches a threshold of 3, an on-board MINOR
alarm is raised. This is the code that is generated when the link between
the circuit pack and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No technician
action is necessary.
d. The NPE Cross talk test failed. The counter is incremented by 1 when the
NPE Cross talk test fails. The counter is decremented by 1 when the NPE
Cross talk test passes. When the counter reaches a threshold of 3, an
on-board MINOR alarm is raised and the board is taken out of service.
e. The station went off-hook while it was in the ready-for-service state. Use
the status station command to determine the state of the station. The
off-hook should have moved the station to ready-for-service. No
technician action is necessary.
f. No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board. No maintenance action
is required.
g. The circuit pack’s message buffer is full. This may be caused by having
many display phones with heavy traffic connected to the circuit pack. No
action is necessary.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

Page 10-629

h. Internal system error; no action is necessary. The error counters 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 do not have any significance for this
MO.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test (#13)

X

D

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Station Lamp Updates Test (#16)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

Short Test
Sequence

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and
provides conferencing functions on a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test
verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never
crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the NPE is not
working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be observed. This test is
part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to
complete. Crosstalk testing occurs on both the primary information channel
(voice) and the secondary information channel (data) associated with each
digital station port. If this test fails on either channel, the station and the DTDM
are taken out-of-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

Table 10-181.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-630

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/Recommendation
During testing of the primary information channel, system resources may
not have been available or the port was busy during the test.
1. Check the port status. Use the display port PCSSpp command to
determine the station extension of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for this test.
You will have to wait until the port is idle.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

2

ABORT

During testing of DTDM, system resources may not have been available or
he port was busy during the test.
1. Check if port is being used. If possible, disconnect by toggling the
disconnect button on DTDM. Retry the command after 1 minute.

! CAUTION:
This action drops the call in progress.
1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the
station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or
status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are
always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not
busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system is under
heavy traffic conditions or has time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS
errors. Refer to TDM-BUS to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
Table 10-181.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-631

TEST #9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system is
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone
Detectors are out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test.
1. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension or
attendant number of the port.
2. Use status station or status attendant to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the
port is unavailable for certain tests.
3. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use
(off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out.

1020

ABORT

Test disabled by background testing. Use the status station command to
determine when the station is available for testing.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times..

1
2

FAIL

The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested port is transmitting in
error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
Failure code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the primary
channel.
Failure code 2 indicates that the Crosstalk test failed on the secondary
channel.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To ensure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test a
maximum of 10 times.
2. If complaints persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

Page 10-632

Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test (#13)
These tests check the information and control channels between the Switch
Processing Element (SPE) and the Digital Line port circuit. The SPE sends a
message to loop around both the information and control channels for the port.
First, the primary information (voice) channel loopback test sends a digital count
from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the primary information channel time slot and
receives the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector.
While the primary information channel is still looped around, the Control Channel
Loop Around Test sends four different transparent patterns to the on-board
microprocessor, receives them back, and compares them.
The Loop Around Test for the secondary information (data) channel is the same
as the primary information channel loop around test and is performed only if a
DTDM is administered.
Next, a Conference Test checks the primary information channel. This test is the
same as Conference Test #6.
The four tests will generate only one resulting value (Pass, Fail, or Abort). If any
test fails or aborts, the test sequence stops.
Table 10-182.
Error
Code

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp to determine the
station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or
status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are
always in use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not
busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
Table 10-182.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-633

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system is under
heavy traffic conditions or it has time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS
errors. Refer to TDM-BUS to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system is
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone
Detectors are out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The test has been
aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or status
attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service state
indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use, escalate the
problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
Table 10-182.
Error
Code

Page 10-634

TEST #13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

7

FAIL

Conference Test failed on primary channel. In some cases, users may not
notice disruption in service. In extreme cases, conferencing feature may
not work at all.

14

FAIL

The primary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact may
range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and digital circuit pack is not
transmitting properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing to not
being able to use the port. This could disrupt other users.

16

FAIL

The secondary voice channel is not transmitting properly. User impact
may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and
the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp
command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit
pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning
properly and the test still fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack.

PASS

The test passed, and all channels are transmitting properly.
1. To ensure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test up to
10 times.
2. If noisy connections for voice or corrupted data for data transfer
persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

Station Lamp Updates Test (#16)
This test lights all lamps on the terminal as specified. The lamp updates will run
only if the station is in-service. The status of the station is checked and the lamp
updates are blocked from taking place if the station is not in the in-service state.
This test does not affect the status of the Message Waiting lamp.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)

Table 10-183.
Error
Code

Page 10-635

TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

ABORT

System technician may have busied out the port.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied out) for this port. If
this error type is present, then release the port with the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

3

ABORT

Station may be in ready-for-service or out-of-service state.
1. Use the status station command to verify state of station.
2. Make sure the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port is busy
with a valid call. Use display port PCSSpp/PCSSpp to determine the
station extension or attendant number of the port. Use status station or
status attendant to determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. Wait until the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use
(off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1392

ABORT

This is currently a TTI port, and the test cannot execute on it.
1. Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command
(the display shows that the port is a TTI port) or the list config
command (the display shows a t for the port).
2. If either list config or display port indicates that the port is not a TTI
port, escalate the problem. If both commands indicate that the port is a
TTI port, the abort is correct, and no action is necessary.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
E-DIG-STA (Emulated Digital Line)
Table 10-183.
Error
Code

Page 10-636

TEST #16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued
Test
Result

PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The message to light all of the station lamps was sent successfully to the
port.
1. Observe the station lamps being lit when running the test. If all lamps do
not light successfully, the other Digital Line test results may indicate
related problems that will not allow the lamps to light.
2. Investigate by using other Digital Line port tests and by examining the
station, wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EMG-XFER

Page 10-637

EMG-XFER
Emergency Transfer (SCC Cabinets)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

EMG-XFER

MAJOR

test environment P

Emergency Transfer

EMG-XFER

WARNING

test environment P

Emergency Transfer

1.

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

The system provides the ability to cut designated analog phones through to CO
trunks if the switch cannot provide even minimal phone service. This ability is
known as Emergency Transfer. Each port network PPN and EPN can have a
separate Emergency Transfer capability. The EMG-XFER MO tracks the control
of Emergency Transfer. There is one EMG-XFER MO for each port network.
Emergency Transfer can be controlled by the system or can be manually
controlled within each port network via the Emergency Transfer switch(es) which
is (are) located on the Processor circuit pack and the EPN Maintenance circuit
pack. If the Emergency Transfer switch or switches in a high or critical reliability
system on the Processor circuit pack or EPN Maintenance circuit pack are in a
manual position, the system cannot change the state of Emergency Transfer
within that port network. A manual ON position (to the right) generates a Major
alarm. A manual OFF position (to the left) generates a Warning alarm. Unless a
technician is currently working on the system, the switches should be left in the
auto position ().
On a high or critical reliability system, the switches on BOTH Processor circuit
packs must be in the ON position to manually invoke Emergency Transfer.
However, if EITHER switch is in the OFF position, Emergency Transfer cannot be
controlled by the system and is in the manual OFF state. The status system
system technician command displays the current state of the Emergency
Transfer switches in the system. Valid states for the switches are: manual ON,
manual OFF, auto ON (the switch is in the auto position and the system has
invoked Emergency Transfer), or (the switch is in the auto position and the
system has invoked Emergency Transfer), or auto OFF (the switch is in the auto
position and the system has not invoked Emergency Transfer).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EMG-XFER

Page 10-638

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-184.
Error
Type

Emergency Transfer Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1

Any

Emergency Transfer
Query (#124)

MAJOR

ON

test environment P r 3

257

0

Emergency Transfer
Query (#124)

WARNING

ON

test environment P r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables. By
clearing error codes associated with the Battery & Battery Charger Query Test,
for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence. For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Single Carrier System
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Power Query Test (#79) (a)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (b)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to “DC-POWER” for a description of this test.
b. Refer to “EXT-DEV” for a description of this test.
c. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EMG-XFER

Page 10-639

NOTE:
These tests only show up in the test sequence if there is a TN768
Tone-Clock Board in the port network being tested.

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124)
This test queries the hardware for the state of the Emergency Transfer switch (or
switches in a High or Critical Reliability system) and reports the result. If the
switch(es) is (are) in a position where the system software can control
Emergency Transfer, then the test passes. If the switch(es) is (are) in a position
where the system software cannot control Emergency Transfer, then the test fails.
In the PPN, the Maintenance/Tape Processor controls Emergency Transfer and,
in the EPN, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack controls Emergency Transfer. The
system software does not have control of Emergency Transfer within a cabinet if
the switch(es) is (are) in the manual ON or manual OFF state for that cabinet.
Table 10-185.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #124 Emergency Transfer Query Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000, check for system
powering problems with the A carrier (PPN or EPN). Resolve all
DC-POWER alarms. Then, repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error code, check for and
resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface) errors in a PPN for a high or
critical reliability system, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack)
errors in an EPN. Repeat the test.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

Emergency Transfer is manually turned OFF via the Emergency Transfer
switch(es).

2

FAIL

Emergency Transfer is manually turned ON via the Emergency Transfer
switch(es).
1. Place the switch (or switches in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability
system) in the AUTO position.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EMG-XFER
Table 10-185.
Error
Code

Page 10-640
TEST #124 Emergency Transfer Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The system software has control of Emergency Transfer within this port
network. If Emergency Transfer is invoked, then there can be a Major
alarm in the system that is invoking Emergency Transfer. The following
table lists the error types and MOs that may cause Emergency Transfer. If
any or all of these errors appear in the log, then refer to the appropriate
Maintenance documentation and resolve those problems first.
If none of these errors appear in the log, then check the Emergency
Transfer hardware. Specifically, on the EPN, if Emergency Transfer is
invoked while call processing is permitted, verify that the current limiter
card (982LS) is in the correct slot on the backplane. If the current limiter
card is not in the correct slot, move it to the correct location and rerun this
test.

Continued on next page

Table 10-186. Test #124 Error Log Entries That Cause
Emergency Transfer
MO Name

Error Type

Aux Data

SW-CTL

1

SW-CTL

2

TONE-BD

1

0

TONE-BD

2305

0

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit)

Page 10-641

EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
EPN-SNTY

Alarm
Level
None

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
None

Full Name of MO
EPN Sanity Audit

The EPN Sanity Audit feature enhances the system’s ability to recover from failure
conditions that disable an entire EPN. In such situations, not only is the affected
EPN unable to provide service to the system, but the system itself has not
detected the condition. The EPN Sanity Audit feature recognizes an EPN as
unable to provide service when the software cannot receive control messages
from EPN circuit packs. When such a failure is detected by the EPN Sanity Audit,
a sequence of recovery actions is triggered to restore the EPN to service.
For a Standard system, the recovery sequence is as follows:
1. TDM Bus Switch
2. EPN Reset
For a duplicated system, the recovery sequence is as follows:
1. TDM Bus Switch
2. Expansion Interface Link Switch
3. Tone/Clock Switch within the EPN
4. EPN Reset
The EPN Sanity Audit feature activates only when all existing maintenance
operations have failed to detect the EPN problem. Therefore, the EPN Sanity
Audit serves as a safety net for the EPN.
NOTE:
It is not clear why certain types of EPN problems activate this feature. Thus,
error log entries related to these problems do not specify which hardware
to replace. The error log entries only indicate that some drastic recovery
action occurred due to an unknown problem. However, clues as to the root
cause of the EPN outage may be present in the Error Logs and the Alarm
Logs of the following MOs: Switch Control (SW-CTL), TDM Bus (TDM-BUS),
Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF), and TDM Bus Clock (TDM-CLK).
Therefore, it is recommended that you refer to these maintenance sections
during trouble shooting operations.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EPN-SNTY (EPN Sanity Audit)

Page 10-642

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
EPN-SNTY Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

01

0

Any

8801 (a)

Any

None

8802 (b)

Any

None

8803 (c)

Any

None

8804 (d)

Any

None

9901 (e)

Any

None

9902 (f)

Any

None

9903 (g)

Any

None

1.

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value
None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages and the control channel of the TDM Bus in the EPN has been
switched as part of the recovery procedure.
b. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages and an EI link switch has been invoked as part of the recovery
procedure.
c. This error occurs each time whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link
control messages and the EPN Tone-Clock has been switched as part of
the recovery procedure.
d. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages and the EPN has been reset as part of the recovery procedure.
e. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages, but recovers after the control channels of the TDM Bus in the
EPN are switched.
f. This error occurs whenever EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages, but recovers after the Expansion Interface Links to the EPN are
switched.
g. This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up-link control
messages, but recovers after the active Tone-Clock in the EPN is
switched.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ERR-LOG (Error Log)

Page 10-643

ERR-LOG (Error Log)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log
ERR-LOG

Alarm Level
none

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
none

Full Name of MO
Error Log

Functional Description
The ERR-LOG MO is responsible for the sanity of the Alarm Log, the Hardware
Error Log, and the Software Error Log. If an inconsistency is detected in any one
of these logs, all logs are re-initialized and a hardware error is logged against
ERR-LOG indicating the time of inconsistency. There are no tests and no alarms
for the Error Log MO. This MO exists solely for the purpose of allowing errors to
be logged against it.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Error Log Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

Any

Any

Any

Any

none

510 (a)

Any

none

none

none

none

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to
the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates that an inconsistency was detected in either the Alarm
Log, the Hardware Error Log, or the Software Error Log. To recover from
this error, all of the logs were cleared and re-initialized. Any alarms that
were active at the time of this error have been cleared. There is no
associated test for this error. If the error persists, escalate the problem.
The Aux data value indicates when the inconsistency was found:
0

Found during a periodic audit of the Error Log

1

Found after an extended reboot

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ERR-LOG (Error Log)

Page 10-644

2

Found after a reboot

3

Found after a Reset System 3 (Cold_1)

4

Found after a Reset System 2 (Cold_2)

16
100

Found after a Warm Start
Found after an internal software audit

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Page 10-645

ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver
Port)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

ETR-PT(a)

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Enhanced Tone
Receiver Port

ETR-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Enhanced Tone
Receiver Port

ETR-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Enhanced Tone
Receiver Port

1.

P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 - 3 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation
(A, B, C, D, or E). SS is the number of the slot in which the circuit pack resides (01 to
21).

NOTE:
Replacing the tone/clock circuit pack requires a special procedure which is
described in the documentation for TONE-BD. That section also describes
the LED display for this board.
The TN2182 is a combined Tone Generator/Tone Detector board. It provides 8
Enhanced Tone receiver (ETR) ports. Each of these ports provides the functions
previously found individually on DTMR-PTs, GPTD-PTs and CLAS-PTs ports.
Thus each port on the TN2182 may be used for any tone detection function that
was previously done by TN748, TN420 or TN744 Tone detection boards.
The TN2182 provides Mu-law or A-law tone detection capability.
Since the TN2182 also provides Tone/Clock function only one (or two if your
system is duplicated) TN2182 circuit packs may be present in a port network.
Thus if more tone detection resources are needed, the additional resources must
be provided by TN748, TN420 or TN744 circuit packs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Page 10-646

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values

Error
Type
1

Aux
Data
any

18

Enhanced Tone Receiver Port (ETR-PT) Error Log Entries
Alarm
On/Off
Associated Test
Level
Board
Test to Clear Value
Tone Detector
Audit/Update Test
(#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 2

busyout port

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257 (b)

17666

Tone Detection Audit
Update Test (#43)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

513 (c)

any

Tone Detection
Verification Test (#42)

MAJOR/
MINOR (a)

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

Notes:
a. There are two possible alarm levels for this error type: major alarm and
minor alarm. These alarm levels are dependent on the administered
thresholds for TTR, CPTR and CCTR. Each ETR port is capable of
operating an any of these.
A major alarm is raised if the total number of ports capable of TTR, CPTR
or CCTR detection currently in-service is less than or equal to 1/2 of the
administered TTR, CPTR or CCTR threshold number.
Otherwise, a minor alarm is raised. In either case, run the short test
sequence against the port (ETR-PT) and follow the error code procedures
for the individual tests.
The threshold number of ports for service is administered using the
change system-parameters maintenance command. For details, refer to
‘‘Chapter 5, "Routine Maintenance Procedures".
b. The ETR-PT lost its translation. Testing the ETR-PT is sufficient to reload its
translation. If testing the ETR port does not clear the error, then the
TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR port should be replaced
at a time when it is convenient to remove a clock board from the system.
Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a
tone/clock circuit pack.
c. This error indicates the (ETR-PT) Enhanced Tone Receiver port is having
problems detecting touch tones, call progress or MFC tones. If this error
type is persistently logged, then the TN2182 circuit pack containing the
defective ETR-PT should be replaced at a time it is convenient to remove a
clock board from the system. Follow the procedures described in the
TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack.
d. The ETR-PT lost its translation. Testing the ETR-PT is sufficient to reload its
translation. If testing the ETR port does not clear the error, then the
TN2182 circuit pack containing the defective ETR port should be replaced

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Page 10-647

at a time when it is convenient to remove a clock board from the system.
Follow the procedures described in the TONE-BD section for replacing a
tone/clock circuit pack.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tone
Detection Verification Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Audit/Update Test (#43)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)
This test checks out a single ETR port in the touch-tone receiver mode MFC tone
detection/generation mode and general purpose tone detection mode. During
the first portion of the test, the touch-tone receiver mode is tested. Then general
purpose call progress and maintenance tones are tested and lastly MFC tones
are tested.
Table 10-187.
Error
Code

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none

ABORT

The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test OR there was an Internal System
Error.

1

ABORT

The system could not allocate all the resources needed
to test the tones.

1001

ABORT

The system was unable to put the ETR-PT in the
appropriate mode to test it.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Table 10-187.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-648

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test
connection. This situation could occur when the system
is heavily loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded,
then test the TDM-BUS via the test tdm command. Refer
to TDM-BUS for details.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone-Clock for the test
connection. This may be caused by a heavy load on the
system or by a faulted Tone-Clock.
1. Check to see if there are any alarms against the
Tone-Clock in the port network where the test
aborted. If so refer to the recommended procedures
for TONE-BD or TONE-PT.
2. If a new Tone-Clock has been inserted, allow about
1 minute for maintenance to run on the newly
inserted circuit pack.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Circuit Pack’s response to the test request was not
received within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Table 10-187.
Error
Code
2006

Page 10-649

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This abort code indicates that the active Tone-Clock
circuit pack or a Tone Detector circuit pack may not be
functioning properly. On G3r V2 systems, this abort can
also be caused by a mismatch between the
companding mode administered for the system and that
of the Tone Detector circuit pack.
1. [G3r V2] Make sure that the companding mode of
the system matches that of the Tone Detector:
mu-law for TN748; A-law for TN420.
2. Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port
network with the test tone-clock PC command and
refer to the TONE-BD section for failures.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1-122

FAIL

DTMF digits were not detected correctly.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but capacity will be reduced. To restore
performance to normal, replace the circuit pack
containing the defective ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone
Receiver Port). Follow the procedures described in
the TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock
circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Table 10-187.
Error
Code
102

Page 10-650

TEST #42 Tone Detection Verification Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
2225 Hz Modem Answer Tone was not detected
correctly. This will impact call-classification operation.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system can still operate
properly but capacity will be reduced. In order to
restore performance to normal, replace the circuit
pack containing the defective port. Follow the
procedures described in the TONE-BD section for
replacing a tone/clock circuit pack.

130

FAIL

Forward or Backward MFC signals were not correctly
generated or detected. This will impact MFC calls.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system can still operate
properly but capacity will be reduced. In order to
restore performance to normal, replace the TN2182
circuit pack containing the defective ETR-PT. Follow
the procedures described in the TONE-BD section
for replacing a tone/clock circuit pack.

PASS

Tone Detection Verification is successful. The ETR Port
is able to detect/generate all necessary tones.

Continued on next page

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43)
A Digital Signal Processor sanity audit is performed on the ETR-PT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port)

Table 10-188.
Error
Code
none

Page 10-651

TEST #43 Tone Detector Audit/Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test.
1. Wait 1 minute, and repeat the command a maximum
of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Hardware audit failed.
1. Run the short test sequence via the test port
PCSSpp sh r 1 command.
2. If the problem persists, the system is still operating
properly but system capacity will be reduced. In
order to restore system performance to normal,
replace the circuit pack containing the defective
ETR-PT. Follow the procedures described in the
TONE-BD section for replacing a tone/clock circuit
pack.

PASS

The ETR Port has passed the sanity inquiry.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-652

EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface
Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

EXP-INTF

MAJOR

test board PCSS sh

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack

EXP-INTF

MINOR

test board PCSS sh

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack

EXP-INTF

WARNING

test board PCSS sh

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number 1, 2, or 3, C is the carrier designation (for example, A, B, C,
or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example,
01, 02, ..., and so forth).

! CAUTION:
A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included
in Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction". This flowchart,
along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in
resolving problems relevant to the Packet Path of the TN570 Expansion
Interface. Whenever the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object
refer to Packet Bus and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to
reference Chapter 9, "Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" in addition
to the relevant MO documentation.
The TN570 or the TN776 Expansion Interface circuit pack is used to provide
connectivity between the Processor Port Network (PPN) and either Expansion
Port Network (EPN) (network 2 or 3) or between the two Expansion Port
Networks. The TN776 Expansion Interface is used in G1 systems to provide
connectivity between the Processor Port Network and the (single) Expansion Port
Network. This connectivity is provided via a 32 Mbps fiber optic cable. The
TN776 supports circuit-switched connections and the control channel to and
from the EPN. The TN570 also supports packet-switched connections for those
systems that use the Packet Bus. The TN776 and TN570 circuit packs must only
be used in matched pairs. A TN776 circuit pack does not function if connected
via fiber to a TN570 circuit pack and vice versa.
The EPN(s), if present, are always under the control of the TN777 Processor
circuit pack in the PPN. Therefore, if the Expansion Interface circuit packs to the
EPN are not functioning correctly, service may be unavailable in that EPN, but is
available in the PPN. If the Expansion Interface circuit packs between EPNs are
not functioning properly, there is service in all networks, but connectivity between
EPN and EPN is not available.
A system with EPN(s) may have one or two pairs of Expansion Interface circuit
packs connecting any two cabinets. If two pairs exist, one pair operates as the
Active pair and provides the required connectivity. The second pair acts as a hot

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-653

Standby. When a problem arises on the Active pair, the Standby pair may be
called upon to take over and provide continuous service with stable calls being
preserved. The Expansion Interface circuit packs must be inserted into fixed
slots. The valid slots for Expansion Interface circuit packs are: 1A01, 1A02, 1B01,
1B02, 2A01, 2A02, 2B02, 2B03, 3A01, 3A02, 3B02, or 3B03. It is also a
requirement that the fiber cables be connected according to the following table:
Table 10-189.

1.

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Connections

EXP-INTF
in slot

connected to
EXP-INTF in
slot

1A01

2A01

Network 1 to Network 2

1B01

2B02

Network 1 to Network 2 (Duplicated Link)

1A021

3A01

Network 1 to Network 3

1B021

3B02

Network 1 to Network 3 (Duplicated Link)

2A02

1

3A02

Network 2 to Network 3

2B03

1

3B03

Network 2 to Network 3 (Duplicated Link)

Description

G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only.

NOTE:
If Expansion Interface circuit packs are connected in any other way, they
do not function properly.
The Active Expansion Interface Link may be selected by system technician via
the set expansion-link PCSS command, where PCSS is the address of either
Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. System Technician may prevent the
system from switching Expansion Interface Links by using the busyout board
PCSS command, where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion
Interface circuit pack. These two commands are described later in greater detail
in the "Expansion Interface Link Switch Command" section (located at the end of
this EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation).
A G3MT terminal connected to an EPN [G3i] provides the same maintenance
and administrative capabilities as the local administration terminal, but at a
slower transmission speed. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack also provides
Emergency Transfer and environmental monitoring functions for the EPN.
The abbreviations have the following meanings:
■

PROC The TN773 Processor circuit pack (the Active TN773 Processor
circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system)

■

NETCON The SW-CTL portion of the Network Control circuit pack (the
Active Network Control circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-654

■

TDM BUS The Time Division Multiplex Bus that connects circuit packs
within a cabinet

■

EXP-INTF The Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit pack

■

FIBER The optical fiber used to connect Expansion Interface circuit packs

■

MAINT EPN Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack

■

PKT-BUS The Packet Bus used to carry ISDN-BRI signalling information

■

MGR 1 The local administration terminal

To determine which Expansion Interface Link is active and which is standby for
each Expansion Interface pair, the status system command can be used.
Alternately, visual inspection shows that the Active Expansion Interface circuit
packs have the yellow LED on solid or blink a pattern two seconds on, 200
milliseconds off. The Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs have the yellow
LEDs off.
Condition

LED on

LED off

Fiber Out-of-Frame (a)

0.1 second

0.1 second

In frame, No Neighbor (b)

0.5 second

0.5 second

Expansion Interface Active (c)

2 second

0.2 second

Expansion Interface Active (d)

solid on

never off

Expansion Interface Standby (e)

never on

solid off

Notes:
a. This flashing code corresponds to error codes 769 and 770 from the
Hardware Error Log and indicates a failure of Test #238. These error
codes are usually accompanied by error code 1281 (no Expansion
Interface detected on opposite end of fiber). This condition may be
caused by the absence of the opposite end Expansion Interface circuit
pack, a broken or missing fiber, or a missing lightwave transceiver on
either Expansion Interface circuit pack.
b. This flashing code corresponds to error code 1281 from the Hardware
Error Log and indicates a failure of Test #237. This condition is usually due
to a failed Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the
fiber.
c. This is the normal state for an EPN Active Expansion Interface circuit pack
that is also the bus master in the EPN.
d. This is the normal state for an Active Expansion Interface circuit pack that
is not the bus master. It is also the state of the TN776 Expansion Interface
circuit pack immediately after circuit pack initialization when the system
has not yet assigned a role to it (that is, Active or Standby). To distinguish
between these two situations, use the status system command. If the link

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-655

which contains this Expansion Interface circuit pack is in-service (up), the
Expansion Interface circuit pack is active; if it is out-of-service (down), the
Expansion Interface circuit pack is neither active nor standby.
e. This is the normal state for a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack. It is
also the state of the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack immediately
after circuit pack initialization when the system has not yet assigned a role
to it (that is, Active or Standby). To distinguish between these two
situations, use the status system command. If the link which contains this
Expansion Interface circuit pack is in-service (up), the Expansion Interface
circuit pack is standby; if it is out-of-service (down), the Expansion
Interface circuit pack is neither active nor standby.

When testing Expansion Interface circuit packs to investigate problems, tests
should always be run on both circuit packs of an Expansion Link. This provides a
better indication of where a problem is located. Hardware errors for all Expansion
Interface circuit packs (EXP-INTF) may be displayed by using the category "infc"
on the Display Errors form.
In the EPN, the EPN TN775 Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack monitors the sanity
of the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack
should cycle between sane and insane several times, the Maintenance circuit
pack holds the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. If a new Expansion
Interface circuit pack is installed in the EPN, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
should be removed because it may attempt to hold the new Expansion Interface
circuit pack reset. The Maintenance circuit pack may be reinstalled after the
Expansion Interface circuit pack has been inserted and the Expansion Interface
circuit pack’s red LED has gone off.
The Active Expansion Link is also involved in synchronization between the two
cabinets. The Expansion Interface circuit pack reports slip errors if the two
cabinets are not correctly synchronized. When diagnosing synchronization
problems, the Expansion Interface circuit packs should be examined as a
possible cause.

Relationship Between Expansion Interface and
Tone-Clock Circuit Packs
The Expansion Interface fiber link depends on the system clock that is provided
by the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack on each network. (See TDM-CLK and
TONE-BD Maintenance documentation.) Each Expansion Interface circuit pack
transmits over the fiber at a rate derived from the system clock on its network. If
the Active Tone-Clock is defective to the point where the system clock frequency
it produces is out of the specified range ("out of spec"), an Expansion Interface
Link might go down even though the Expansion Interface circuit packs are
healthy. In a High or Critical Reliability system, both links could go down if there
is a defective Active Tone-Clock.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-656

Whether or not a link goes down, depends on certain characteristics of the
Expansion Interface circuit packs. An Expansion Interface circuit pack should not
be replaced if the link on which it resides goes down because of a defective
Active Tone-Clock circuit pack. The defective Tone-Clock circuit pack should be
replaced instead. The Expansion Interface circuit packs are more sensitive to a
defective system clock than the rest of the components of the system. Therefore,
testing of the Tone-Clock circuit pack might not reveal a problem.
The symptoms of the problem in which an invalid system clock causes an
Expansion Link to go down are as follows:
1. If the Active PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing an invalid system
clock:
a. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks
quickly.
(Fiber Out-of-Frame condition).
If the EPN is up, Test #238 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit
pack.
b. The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks slowly.
(In-frame, No Neighbor condition).
Test #237 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack, but Test
#238 passes.
2. If the EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing an invalid system clock:
a. The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks quickly
(Fiber Out-of-Frame condition).
Test #238 fails on this Expansion Interface circuit pack.
b. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack yellow LED blinks slowly
(In-frame, No Neighbor condition).
If the EPN is in-service, Test #237 fails on this Expansion Interface
circuit pack, but Test #238 passes.
These symptoms can also be the result of other problems (for example, one half
of the fiber being unable to transmit data). If the system exhibits these symptoms,
execute the following procedure:
1. Verify that the EPN stays down for at least one minute.
If the Expansion Interface Link comes back in service after a short time,
without switching the Active Tone-Clock, the problem probably was the
on-line synchronization source became invalid (see SYNC Maintenance
documentation for more information).
However, if the Expansion Interface Link(s) has not come back into
service after one minute, the synchronization source is not the cause of
the problem. Proceed to Step 2.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-657

2. Check for errors via the display errors command with the Category field
set to "tone" and the Active alarms field set to "n." Some of the alarms on
EPN objects might have been resolved if the EPN went down. Refer to the
appropriate MO Maintenance documentation for descriptions of any of the
errors occurring at about the same time as the EXP-LINK errors. Resolve
any active alarms. Also, if Error Type 18 was logged against the SYNC MO
when the EPN went down, the problem was probably that the
synchronization on-line reference became invalid. Since reference
switching was disabled, the Tone-Clock did not switch from the invalid
reference. Therefore, the Tone-Clock circuit pack put out a system clock
that was "out of spec." Issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. If the EPN is down, reseat the Tone-Clock circuit packs on the
EPN. This action should restore the EPN to service.
Execute Steps 3 and 4 in the order most convenient to you and least
destructive to the customer.
3. Check if the fiber optic cable is transmitting properly via the following
procedure on one of the out-of-service links:
a. Carefully record the symptoms (yellow LED pattern and tests
failing) that were occurring on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit
pack and the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. Clearly
indicate which symptoms are occurring on which Expansion
Interface circuit pack.

!

WARNING:
Before proceeding, note which is the current transmit fiber and
which is the current receive fiber for proper reconnection.
b. Disconnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave
transceiver on the back of the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack
slot (see Figure 10-30 on page 10-657).
c. Connect what was formerly the transmit fiber to the receive jack.
d. Connect what was formerly the receive fiber to the transmit jack.
e. Perform Steps b, c, and d on the opposite end of the fiber and the
lightwave transceiver on the back of the EPN Expansion Interface
circuit pack slot.
NOTE:
If it is more convenient for you, execute Steps b, c, and d on
the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack first.
f. If the symptoms which were formerly occurring on the PPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack are now occurring on the EPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack and vice versa, the fiber is
defective and should be replaced.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-658

4. Determine if the problem is due to a defective Active Tone-Clock circuit
pack. Refer to the preceding list of symptoms to decide which network
contains the suspect Active Tone-Clock. See Warning.

!

WARNING:
If you remove the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack that is active
or that was active when the EPN was last in-service, then the 2A/3A
Tone-Clock circuit pack becomes the Active Tone-Clock. This
characteristic can be deceiving. Replacing or reseating the Active
EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack might restore the Expansion
Interface Links temporarily. However, if the 2B/3B Tone-Clock circuit
pack was really the source of the problem and not the Expansion
Interface circuit pack, then the Expansion Interface Link(s) goes
down again the next time a Tone-Clock switch to the 2B/3B
Tone-Clock is attempted (probably when the scheduled Tone-Clock
switch occurs).

!

WARNING:
If, after all the Expansion Interface Links are restored, you suspect
the problem might have been due to a defective Tone-Clock circuit
pack, switch to this Tone-Clock at an appropriate time. If the
Tone-Clock circuit pack was the cause of the problem and the same
Expansion Interface circuit packs are in place, the same Expansion
Interface Link(s) goes down again.
a. On a High or Critical Reliability system in which the network
containing the suspect Tone-Clock circuit pack is in-service:
Switch to the Standby Tone-Clock on this network. If the suspect
Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective, the Expansion Interface
Link(s) should be restored to service at this point. Switching back to
the defective Tone-Clock should make the same Expansion
Interface Link(s) go out-of-service. Such a Tone-Clock circuit pack
is defective and should be replaced as soon as possible. If
switching Tone-Clocks does not bring up the EPN, then this
Tone-Clock is not the source of the problem. Make sure to switch
back to the original Tone-Clock.

!

WARNING:
If the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack is left as the Standby
Tone-Clock, then a scheduled Tone-Clock switch causes the same
Expansion Link(s) to go out-of-service again.
b. On a system in which the EPN containing the suspect Tone-Clock
circuit pack is out-of-service:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-659

Replace the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack on this network. In a
High or Critical Reliability system, the Active Tone-Clock is the
Tone-Clock circuit pack whose yellow LED is: 1) blinking and 2)
blinking slower if both Tone-Clocks have blinking yellow LEDs. If
the Expansion Interface Link(s) comes up after replacing this
Tone-Clock circuit pack, then this Tone-Clock circuit pack should
be replaced as soon as possible. See Warning.

!

WARNING:
If the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack is left as the Standby
Tone-Clock, then a scheduled Tone-Clock switch causes the same
EPN to go out-of-service again.
If replacing the Active Tone-Clock did not bring up the Expansion
Interface Link(s), then this Tone-Clock circuit pack is not the source
of the problem.
c. On a standard system in which the PPN contains the suspect
Tone-Clock circuit pack:
Replace the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack at a time when bringing
down the system is most convenient to the customer.

!

WARNING:
Replacing the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack stops call processing on
that network and also brings down stable calls. This action
eventually causes a Reset System 2 (Cold 2 restart).
If replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack restores the Expansion
Interface Link(s), then the Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective and
should be replaced. Otherwise, the problem is not with the PPN
Tone-Clock circuit pack.

Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Procedure
This procedure is to be used when an Expansion Interface circuit pack cannot be
tested by software. This is usually when the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in
the EPN and the EPN is down. A spare length of fiber jumper cable is required for
this procedure.
If this procedure is run on both Expansion Interface circuit packs of a link, and
both check out fine, then the failure is most likely in the fiber itself if neither
Expansion Interface circuit pack is busied out, but the link remains inactive.
1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack using the busyout board
PCSS command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-660

2. Disconnect the transmit and receive fiber pair from the lightwave
transceiver on the back of the Expansion Interface circuit pack slot. Note
which is the transmit fiber and which is the receive fiber for proper
reconnection at the end of this procedure.
3. Using a spare fiber jumper cable, interconnect the transmit and receive
jacks of the lightwave transceiver as shown in Figure 10-30 on the
following page.
4. Go to the front of the cabinet and inspect the yellow LED.
■

If the yellow LED is on steady, this Expansion Interface circuit pack
and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly.

■

If the yellow LED is off, reseat the circuit pack. For the TN776, if the
yellow LED comes on steady after the red LED has gone off, the
Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are
functioning properly. For the TN570 [G1V5], if the yellow LED is off
steady after the red and green LEDs have gone off, the Expansion
Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are functioning
properly.

■

If the yellow LED flashes on at a rate of once per second, the
Expansion Interface circuit pack or transceiver should be replaced.

■

If the yellow LED flashes on at a rate of five times per second, the
Expansion Interface circuit pack or the lightwave transceiver may
need replacement. This condition may also be due to a faulty
system clock on the network containing this Expansion Interface
circuit pack. Refer to the procedure described in the preceding
"Relationship Between Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit
Packs" on page 10-651 section for further details.

5. Replace faulty component(s) and reconnect the original fiber. Be sure to
reconnect the fibers properly as noted in Step 3.
6. Release Expansion Interface circuit pack with the release board PCSS
command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-661

BACK SKIN OF CABINET

LIGHTWAVE
TRANSCEIVER

Tx

Rx

FIBER JUMPER

Figure 10-30.

Interconnection of Lightwave Transceiver Transmit/Receive
Jacks

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-190.
Error
Type
0

1

1

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test board PCSS

Any

Expansion Interface Local
TDM Loop Around Test
(#240)

MAJ

ON

test board PCSS r 2

Expansion Interface Local
TDM Loop Around Test
(#240)

MAJ

ON

test board PCSS r 2

busyout board PCSS

WNG

OFF

release board PCSS

2

18 (a)

Associated Test

0

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-190.
Error
Type
23 (b)

Page 10-662

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data
0

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

None

WNG

OFF

125 (c)

None

MIN

ON

131 (d)

None

MINOR/
WNG2

OFF

Test to Clear Value

257 (e)

Any

None

MINOR/
WNG2

OFF

513 (f)

5-7

None

MAJ

ON

769

113

Expansion Interface FOOF
Query Test (#238)

WRN

OFF

test board PCSS r 1

Expansion Interface FOOF
Query Test (#238

WRN

OFF

test board PCSS r 1

Expansion Interface Control
Channel Test (#316)

MAJ

ON

test board PCSS r 1

1281

Expansion Interface
Neighbor Query Test (#237)

MINOR/
WNG2

OFF

test board PCSS r 1

1537

Expansion Interface 2-way
Transmission Test (#241)

MAJ

OFF

test board PCSS r 4

1538 (g)

None

MIN

ON

1793

Expansion Interface
Lightwave Transceiver Loop
Around Test (#242)

MAJ

ON

test board PCSS l r 1

reset board PCSS r 1

770
1025

Any

2049 (h)

Any

Reset Test (#336)

MIN

ON

2305 (i)

118

None

WRN

OFF

25611 (j)

Any

None

MIN

ON

1

Any

None

MIN

ON

1

3073

Any

Expansion Interface Packet
Interface Test (#589)

MIN

OFF

test board PCSS rep 3

30741 (l)

2

Expansion Interface Packet
Interface Test (#589)

MINOR/
WRN2

OFF

test board PCSS rep 3

30751 (l)

1

Expansion Interface Packet
Interface Test (#589)

MINOR/
WRN2

OFF

test board PCSS rep 3

Expansion Interface Packet
Interface Test (#589)

MINOR/
WRN2

OFF

test board PCSS rep 3

None

WRN

ON

2817 (k)

30761
33301 (m)

Any

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-190.
Error
Type

Page 10-663

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

3585 (n)

0

None

WRN

OFF

3841 (o)

Any

None

MIN

OFF

(See Note q.)

3842 (p)

Any

None

MIN

OFF

(See Note q.)

10000 (r)

0

None

10001 (s)

0

None

10002 (t)

0

None

10003 (u)

0

None

10004 (v)

0

None

11000 (w)

0

None

11000 (x)

2

None

11000 (y)

3

None

11000 (z)

4

None

11000
(aa)

5

None

11000
(ab)

8

None

11001
(ac)

0

None

Continued on next page

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Notes:
a. Expansion Interface (EI) circuit pack has been busied out by system
technician.
b. EI circuit pack has been administered on the Circuit Pack form, but has
not been physically inserted into the system. Insert the circuit pack.
c. A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is
logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong
circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the
change circuit-pack command to re-administer this slot to match the
circuit pack inserted.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-664

d. This alarm is raised after an EI circuit pack has been removed from a slot
for 11 minutes. The alarm is resolved when the EI circuit pack is inserted
into this slot. Another way to resolve or prevent this alarm is to use the
change circuit pack command to remove the EI circuit pack
administrative entry for this slot after the EI circuit pack has been removed
from the slot. Or, if the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on,
then follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)" in the "Control and Port Circuit
Pack Status LEDs" section in Chapter 7, "LED Interpretation".
e. Error Type 257 with Aux Data 85 through 88 indicates that this EI circuit
pack is detecting incorrect data on the incoming fiber bit stream. The data
is originating at the opposite EI circuit pack. These errors could result from
a bad timing reference on the network which contains the EI circuit pack
on the opposite end of the fiber. For example, if the error is logged against
the 1B01 (PPN) EI circuit pack, then the bad timing reference is on the
EPN. Resolve any EXP-INTF errors 2305, 769, or 770. Resolve any
TONE-BD, TDM-CLK, or SYNC errors. Finally, if the errors continue to
occur, perform the following procedure:
1. If the EI circuit pack reporting the error is part of the Active link and
a Standby link exists, switch to the Standby link.
2. Reset the EI circuit pack at the opposite end of fiber.
3. Issue the test board PCSS repeat 10 command, where PCSS is
the address of the EXP-INTF circuit pack reporting the error. If
Tests #241 or #316 fail even once, follow the procedures
associated with the failures.
4. Wait 15 minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of
type 257 have been detected.
5. If errors are present, reset the EI circuit pack reporting the errors.
6. Wait five minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of
type 257 have been detected.
7. If errors are present, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver at the
opposite end of the fiber.
8. Wait 15 minutes. Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of
type 257 have been detected.
9. If errors are present or if this error occurs intermittently (over one
week’s time), replace the EI circuit packs or transceivers on this
link.
f. Error Type 513 with Aux Data 5 through 7 indicates an ON BOARD
hardware failure of the circuit packs RAM or ROM. Replace the EI circuit
pack or transceiver.
g. Error Type 1538 indicates a hyperactive EI circuit pack that is generating
an abnormal amount of control messages to the Processor circuit pack.
When this error was generated, the EI was automatically reset by the
system. If this system does not have duplicate EI Links, service to the EPN

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-665

is disrupted. If this system does have duplicate EI Links, the system
should have switched to the Standby EI Link. Reset the EI. If error 1538 is
detected again, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver.
h. Error Type 2049 indicates that the last time the EI circuit pack was reset,
its initialization tests failed. The number in the Aux Data field is the error
code with which Reset Test (#336) failed. Follow the procedure specified
in the Reset Test (#336) FAIL section for this error code.
i. Error Type 2305 with aux data 118 indicates that the EI circuit pack has
detected slips on the incoming fiber data stream. Thus, the EPN and PPN
are not synchronized. Examine the Error Log for any SYNC, TDM-CLK,
TONE-BD, and DS1-BD errors. If these errors exist, refer to the
appropriate MO for repair procedures. If the errors do not exist, refer to
“SYNC” for general information on diagnosing synchronization problems.
If there are no active EI circuit pack errors with Error Types 769 and 770,
Error Type 2305 resolves when fewer than nine slips are detected in a 5to 10-minute period (that is, Error Type 2305 resolves within 10 minutes of
the last slip.) If the Error Log has an active EI error with type 769 or 770,
then Error Type 2305 is resolved when Error Types 769 and 770 are
resolved.
NOTE:
These errors may be ignored if they occur during clock
interchanges.
j. Error Type 2561 indicates an on-board failure of EI circuitry related to
handling packet data from the fiber interface and from the Packet bus
interface. If this error has generated a minor alarm, replace the EI circuit
pack or transceiver.
k. Error Type 2817 indicates an on-board failure of EI circuitry related to
transmission of data to the fiber interface. If this error has generated a
minor alarm, replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver.
l. Error Type 3074 and 3075 indicates failures of EI circuit pack packet path
tests. These packet path tests do exercise circuitry on both EI circuit
packs of the expansion link. If Error Type 3075 is present without Error
Type 3074, the fault probably lies with the EI circuit pack that reported the
error. Replace the EI circuit pack or transceiver. If Error Type 3074 exists
with or without 3075, the fault is probably on the neighbor of the EI circuit
pack that reported this error. Replace the neighbor EI circuit pack or
transceiver.
NOTE:
Certain Packet Bus failures can cause this error. In that case the EI is
not defective. If PKT-BUS errors are also present, refer to Chapter 9,
"Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction" and the PKT-BUS section
for fault isolation procedures. If PKT-BUS errors are not present and
replacing the EI does not solve the problem this error can still be the
result of a Packet Bus failure.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-666

m. Error Type 3330 indicates a failure of a diagnostic component on the
Expansion Interface circuit pack. The failed component does not impair
service, but it may leave the EI circuit pack in a state where the EI circuit
pack cannot detect errors.
n. Error Type 3585 indicates that the EI circuit pack experienced a series of
very short out-of-frame conditions within several minutes. This may
indicate transmission difficulties over the fiber link. If this is a duplex
system, and if no other alarms exist, the system should have switched
away from the fiber link using this EI circuit pack. If this condition ceases,
the warning alarm should be resolved within 15 minutes. In the meantime,
make sure all lightwave transceivers are firmly secured to the back of the
cabinet. Thereafter, if the alarm is not resolved during the next four
15-minute segments, replace the following (the first after the first
15-minute segment, the second after the second 15-minute segment, and
so forth):
1. Lightwave transceiver attached to the EI reporting the alarm
2. Lightwave transceiver on the opposite end of the fiber
3. Expansion Interface board reporting the alarm
4. Expansion Interface board on the opposite end of the fiber
Since the counter is active only due to a transient condition, there is no
test that can be run to clear the counter. However, the counter
automatically decrements by one every five minutes. Once the condition
causing the transient Fibers Out-of-Frame (FOOFs) has been fixed, it will
take 15 minutes for the counter to be cleared if the alarm was raised.
o. Error Type 3841 indicates that the EI (TN570 only) has reported a loss of
lock with the backplane system clock.
p. Error Type 3842 indicates that the test that queries the EI (TN570 only) for
the state of the lock to the system clock has failed. This means that a loss
of lock condition is present. A link switch is then attempted, and the alarm
is raised. When both links report this error, the link switch is not attempted
because, in this case, the problem is more likely to occur with the
backplane clock than with the Expansion Interface circuit pack.
q. The counter associated with Error Types 3841 and 3842 is cleared when
the query for the state of the lock-to-system-clock passes. Once the alarm
is raised, this test is run every five minutes. However, the test is not part of
any sequence that can be run on demand.
r. Error Type 10000 is a report from the EI circuit pack that its internal data
has become corrupted. The EI circuit pack has lost track of control
messages destined for the EPN. When this error is detected, the system
automatically resets the EI circuit pack and brings the EPN down. Service
to the EPN is unavailable for several minutes after detection of this error.
No system technician action is required.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-667

s. Error Type 10001 is a report that the EI circuit pack dropped one control
message to the EPN. This condition may have been observed as a call
that did not complete correctly. No system technician action is required.
t. In response to Error Type 10002, the system denied all calling services for
up to 10 seconds.
If EI Error Type 257 is logged at the same time against an Expansion
Interface circuit pack on this link, first try to resolve this error. The error
associated with Error Type 257 could be the cause of this error.
If Error Type 257 is not logged at the same time as this error, then Error
Type 10002 indicates that heavy call traffic was encountered involving
EPN endpoints.
No system technician action is required; however, should this error recur
frequently, the system should be examined for traffic engineering. The
PPN and EPNs may not be equipped with sufficient trunks and Tone
Detectors for the number of stations in each cabinet.
u. Error Type 10003 indicates that heavy call traffic involving EPN endpoints
has returned to normal levels. This Error Type should always appear after
Error Type 10002 or 10004. No system technician action is required.
v. Error type 10004 indicates that an extreme backup of traffic was present
on the EI circuit pack. The EPN served by this link was most probably not
providing service when this error was logged. If this is a high or critical
reliability system, the system should have switched to the Standby
Expansion Link in order to restore service. Error type 11000 with an Aux
value of 5 should have been logged against EXP-INTF to indicate this
condition.
In a standard system, the system should have reset the EPN in order to
restore service. EXP-LINK Error Type 122 with an Aux value of 6 should
have been logged to indicate this condition.
w. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 0 appears when an EI Link switch
takes place. Data calls between the PPN and EPN may have experienced
some data loss or, in severe cases, the data calls may have dropped. The
link that became active is the link with the circuit pack address given in the
Error Log entry. The link switch may have occurred for several reasons:
1. System Technician demanded the Expansion Interface Link switch.
This can be verified by using the list history command.
2. The Expansion Interface Link switch may have been scheduled.
Check the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form.
3. An Expansion Interface circuit pack error may have been detected.
Examine the Error Log for other EI circuit pack errors with the same
approximate time as this error.
4. An EPN Maintenance circuit pack error may have been detected.
Examine the Error Log for MAINT errors with the same approximate
time as this error. MAINT Error Type 2561 indicates that the Active
Expansion Interface circuit pack on the EPN could not

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-668

communicate with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. MAINT Error
Type 3329 means the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot talk to
the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack in the A carrier. MAINT
Error Type 3585 means the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot
talk to the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack in the B carrier.
5. Synchronization (SYNC) maintenance may have detected an
inability of the Active Expansion Interface Link to provide
synchronization between cabinets. Examine Error Log for SYNC
Error Type 2305 with the same approximate time as this error.
x. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 2 appears when a system
technician-demanded Expansion Interface Link Switch is issued. No
further action is required.
y. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 3 appears when a scheduled EI
Link Switch has occurred. No further action is required.
z. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 4 appears when an Expansion
Interface Link Switch has occurred due to a Special EPN recovery
strategy. The software has forced an Expansion Interface switch because
the new Expansion Interface Link contains new features which support
EPN recovery in case of a bad tone/clock board. This error code appears
when there is a periodic/scheduled tone/clock switch.
aa. Error Type 11000 with an Aux value of 5 appears when the system has
detected an excessive backup of traffic on the Active Expansion Link. This
condition may have been due to communication difficulties on the
Expansion link. To restore normal service, the system switched Expansion
Links to the link identified in the Error Type 11000 with an Aux Data value
of 5. Error Type 10004 should be present against the Expansion Interface
circuit pack that reported the traffic congestion.
ab. Error type 11000 with an Aux value of 8 indicates that the EI link was
switched as part of the recovery action taken by EPN-SNTY. This error
should be accompanied by EPN-SNTY error 8802 0. If EPN-SNTY error
9902 0 is also present, this indicates that the switching of the EI link was
the recovery action that restored sanity to the EPN. In this case, the fault
was with the link that was switched away from. The relevant EIs and
connections should be tested and examined to determine the cause of the
problem. Look for EPN-SNTY errors in the error log, and refer to the EPN
Sanity Audit (EPN-SNTY) section for more details.
ac. Error Type 11001 occurs when an Expansion Link switch was attempted
but for unknown reasons could not be completed.

Expansion Interface LED Usage
The EI circuit pack has the standard red, green, and yellow LEDs. The red and
green LEDs have the traditional use, where red means some alarm condition and
green indicates maintenance testing in progress. The yellow LED is used to

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-669

provide useful visual status information. The state of the yellow LED is very
important when executing the EI Manual Loop Back Procedure previously
described.
Upon power-up, the TN776 red LED comes on and off, followed by the yellow
LED coming on solid. The TN570 red and green LEDs comes on and off. The
yellow LED remains off.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By
clearing error codes associated with the Expansion Interface Reset Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336)
Expansion Interface Fiber Out-of-Frame Query
Test (#238)

D/ND1
D

X

Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver
Interface Loop Around Test (#242)

X

ND

X

D

Expansion Interface Control Channel Test (#316)

X

X

ND

Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test (#237)

X

X

ND

Expansion Interface Local Loop Around Test
(#240)

X

X

ND

Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test
(#241)

X

X

ND

TN570 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
(#589)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test (#237)
The Expansion Interface Neighbor Query Test is a request to an EI circuit pack to
determine if it has established communication with the EI circuit pack on the
opposite end of the fiber.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-191.
Error
Code

Page 10-670

TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. Someone
may be doing something on this Port Network Interface.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

2027

FAIL

The EI circuit pack has contact with the opposite EI circuit pack, but
it is the incorrect EI circuit pack.
1. Check Expansion Interface circuit packs and lightwave
transceivers to verify that they are placed in the correct slots
described above.
2. If working with duplicate Expansion Interface Links, check for
crossed fiber pairs such as 1A01 connected to 2B02 or 1B01
connected to 2A01.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-191.
Error
Code

Page 10-671

TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The Expansion Interface circuit pack under test cannot make contact
with opposite end Expansion Interface circuit pack.
1. If Test #238 passes (yellow LED not blinking at a rate of five times
per second), the Expansion Interface circuit pack is detecting the
framing signal and an Expansion Interface circuit pack is at least
physically present on the opposite side.
a. Reset the OPPOSITE Expansion Interface circuit pack using
the reset board PCSS command where PCSS is the address
of the OPPOSITE Expansion Interface circuit pack.
b. If the reset command returns the message "EPN is
unavailable," use the change circuit-pack command to add a
TN776/TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack to the correct
EPN slot. Then, repeat the reset board command.
c. If the reset command returns the message "Board not
Assigned," the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be holding
the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset. First, try to reset the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack using the test maintenance
long command. Then, repeat the reset board command on
the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack.
d. If the reset does not pass, refer to the Expansion Interface
Reset Test (#336).
e. If the reset passes, execute the test board PCSS command
on the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack. Resolve all
problems on the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack
before proceeding.
f. If this test still does not pass, try replacing the Expansion
Interface circuit pack on which this test is failing.
2. If Test #238 fails (yellow LED is blinking at a rate of five times per
second), refer to the procedures for Test #238.

PASS

The Expansion Interface circuit pack has successfully established a
link with the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack.
1. If the status system command still indicates that this link is
down, it is possible that one or both of the Expansion Interface
circuit packs have been busied out.
2. If the link still does not come up, reset one or both Expansion
Interface circuit packs on the link.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-191.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-672

TEST #237 EI Neighbor Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/Recommendation
No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error
131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset
board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Fiber Out-of-Frame (FOOF)
Query Test (#238)
This test is a request to an Expansion Interface circuit pack to determine if it is
currently detecting the framing sequence on the incoming fiber data stream. If it
cannot detect this framing signal, the Expansion Interface circuit pack is not able
to establish a link with the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack.
Table 10-192.
Error
Code

TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2026

ABORT

Expansion Interface circuit pack responded with an unknown reply.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-192.
Error
Code

Page 10-673

TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
Expansion Interface circuit pack could not detect framing
sequence.
1. Check if the Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite
end of the fiber is present and if its cabinet has power.
2. Verify that the lightwave transceiver is connected to the correct
slot on the back of the cabinet and that the fiber is connected to
the lightwave transceiver. Verify this connection on both ends of
the fiber. Check that an Expansion Interface circuit pack
detects its lightwave transceiver by executing the reset board
PCSS command, where PCSS refers to the Expansion Interface
circuit pack. If the reset passes, the Expansion Interface circuit
pack detects a lightwave transceiver. Refer to the description of
the Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336) if the reset fails.
3. Verify that fiber transmit and receive ends have not been
crossed when connected to the lightwave transceiver.
4. The problem may be due to a synchronization timing loop. Use
the status sync command to determine which circuit pack is
the synchronization reference. If the reference is a DS1
Interface circuit pack, use the set sync command to make a
Tone-Clock circuit pack the reference. If this action causes the
Expansion Interface to go into frame, synchronization must be
examined for a possible timing loop. Refer to SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for repair
procedures. If the DS1 Interface circuit pack is not a reference,
and the Expansion Interface circuit pack that is failing Test #238
is in the PPN, run tests on Tone-Clock circuit pack in the PPN to
determine if clocks are present. If the Expansion Interface
circuit pack that is failing Test #238 is in the EPN, and the red
LEDs are ON on a large number of circuit packs, then reseat
any Tone-Clock circuit packs in the EPN.

More information follows.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-192.
Error
Code

Page 10-674

TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/Recommendation
5. Execute the test tone-clock PC command where P is the port
network which contains the Expansion Interface circuit pack’s
neighbor Expansion Interface on the OPPOSITE end of the fiber
and C refers to the carrier which contains the Active Tone-Clock
on port network P. Also, look for SYNC errors in the Error Log. If
there are any tests failing or errors found, resolve these
problems and then rerun Test #238. If the test still fails and the
system has a Standby Tone-Clock, switch the Active
Tone-Clock on this network (set tone-clock PC command,
where P is the port network containing the Expansion Interface
circuit pack on the OPPOSITE end of the fiber and C is the
carrier containing the Standby Tone-Clock). Also, if the EPN is
down, replace the EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack in carrier A of
the EPN.
6. Check for errors using the display errors command with the
Category field set to "tone" and the Active alarms field set to "n."
Some of the alarms on EPN objects might have been resolved if
the EPN went down. Refer to the documentation for descriptions
of any of the error types occurring at about same time as the
EXP-LINK error types. Resolve any active alarms. Also, if Error
Type 18 was logged against the SYNC MO when the EPN went
down, the problem was probably that the Synchronization
on-line reference became invalid. Since, reference switching
was disabled, the Tone-Clock did not switch away from the
invalid reference. Therefore, the Tone-Clock put out an
"out-of-spec" system clock. Execute the enable
synchronization-switch command. If the EPN is down, reseat
the Tone-Clock circuit packs on the EPN. This action should
restore the EPN to service.
7. Follow the procedure described in "Relationship Between
Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs" near the
beginning of this section if the symptoms match those
described there.

PASS

The Expansion Interface circuit pack has detected the valid framing
signal on the fiber.
1. Refer to errors from other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests
if the link is still not functioning.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-192.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-675

TEST #238 EI Fiber Out-of-Frame Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/Recommendation
No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board
(error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the
reset board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Local Loop Around Test
(#240)
This test is similar to the Lightwave Transceiver Loop Around Test described in
Test #242. A test tone from TDM Bus A is received by the Expansion Interface
circuit pack under test, but is not transmitted out to the lightwave transceiver
before being looped back onto TDM Bus A again. The test is then repeated using
TDM Bus B. Thus, this loop back test is performed on each TDM Bus on the
network containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify that the
Expansion Interface circuit pack is able to loop back data on each TDM Bus.
Since this loop back is internal to the circuit pack, this test does not interfere with
the normal fiber data stream.
Table 10-193.
Error
Code

TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-193.
Error
Code

Page 10-676

TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1

ABORT

Could not allocate time slot on TDM Bus A. Loop back passed on
TDM Bus B.

2

ABORT

Could not allocate time slot on TDM Bus B. Loop back passed on
TDM Bus A.
1. If there is no reason to doubt that the Expansion Interface circuit
pack can transfer data to or from a TDM Bus, then since the test
passed on one bus, assume that the test passes on the other bus
as well.
2. If EXP-INTF circuit pack Error Types 1, 2, 1537, or 1793 are
present in the Error Log and/or if Expansion Interface circuit pack
Tests #240, #241, or #242 have failed previously, there is reason
to doubt that the Expansion Interface circuit pack can transfer
data to or from a TDM Bus. To determine if the test can pass on
both TDM Buses, perform the following procedure: For Error Code
1, issue the set tdm PC command, where P is the network
containing the Expansion Interface circuit pack being tested and
C is the TDM Bus A. Execute the test board PCSS command
again. If this test passes or aborts with Error Code 2, this test is
considered to have passed. For Error Code 2, issue the set tdm
PC command, where P is the network containing the Expansion
Interface circuit pack being tested and C is the TDM Bus B.
Execute the test board PCSS again. If this test passes or aborts
with error code 1, this test is considered to have passed.
3. If this test continues aborting with the same error after setting the
TDM Bus as indicated in Step 2, rerun the test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times. Apply the passing criteria for Step
2 to each result.
4. If the test still does not pass on the other TDM Bus, follow the
procedure for abort error code 3.

3

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test on either TDM
Bus. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have
time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Enter display errors
and follow associated repair procedures for TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy
traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-193.

Page 10-677

TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

1002

ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test on either TDM
Bus. The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have
time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS
(TDM Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy
traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system
may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some
Tone Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If these errors are
present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation. Even if there are no TTR-LEV errors, there still
may not be a Tone Detector available on the network that contains
the circuit pack being tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone
Detector on this network. If not, this test always aborts for this
Expansion Interface circuit pack. This does not harm the system
in any way.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to
TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1031

ABORT

A query of the Expansion Interface circuit pack aborted. The purpose
of this query was to see if the Expansion Interface circuit pack could
detect the framing signal.
1. If Test #238 aborted, follow the procedure associated with this
abort code.
2. If Test #238 did not abort, rerun Test #240 at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.
3. If Test #240 continues to abort without Test #238 aborting,
escalate the problem.

1032

ABORT

The Expansion Interface circuit pack cannot detect the framing signal
and cannot run the test.
1. Refer to the errors for Test #238 to determine why the Expansion
Interface circuit pack is out-of-frame.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-193.

Page 10-678

TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

Description/Recommendation

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
1

FAIL

Loop back on TDM Bus A failed. Loop back on TDM Bus B passed.

2

FAIL

Loop back on TDM Bus B failed. Loop back on TDM Bus A passed.

3

FAIL

Loop back on both TDM Busses failed.

12

FAIL

Loop back on TDM Bus B failed. Loop back TDM Bus A aborted
because the system could not allocate time slots.

21

FAIL

Loop back on TDM Bus A failed. Loop back on TDM Bus B aborted
because the system could not allocate time slots.

FAIL

The test tone was not detected correctly after being looped through
the Expansion Interface circuit pack.
1. If error type 2305 has been logged against the Expansion
Interface circuit pack in the last 5 minutes, this test could have
failed due to the associated slips. If this is the case, first resolve
the 2305 error, and then repeat test.
2. Run the tests for the Active Tone-Clock on the Port Network that
contains the indicted Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify
that dial-tone is being supplied.
3. If the tone-clock is healthy, repeat the short test on the Expansion
Interface circuit pack.
4. If this test continues to fail, replace Expansion Interface circuit
pack.

PASS

Test tone was correctly detected after the internal Expansion
Interface loop back on both TDM Busses.
1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the
Expansion Interface Link is not functioning correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-193.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-679

TEST #240 EI Local Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/Recommendation
No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error
131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset
board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test
(#241)
This test is a basic connectivity test between the two cabinets. The test first
sends a test tone from the cabinet of the Expansion Interface circuit pack under
test through the opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack to a Tone Detector in
the opposite cabinet. The connections are then reversed and the tone is passed
in the opposite direction. This test should be run once from each Expansion
Interface circuit pack on the fiber.
Table 10-194.

Error
Code

TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may
be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots
out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS
errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy
traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-680

Table 10-194. TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test
— Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system
may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some
Tone Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to
TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation. Even if there
are no TTR-LEV errors, there still may not be a Tone Detector
available on the network that contains the circuit pack being
tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this
network. If there is not at least one Tone Detector, this test always
aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack. This does not
harm the system in any way.
NOTE:
G3 systems require that Tone Detector circuit packs (TN768)
must be of vintage "B" or newer. If older Tone Detector circuit
packs are installed in the system, this test well always abort
with this abort code.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1033

ABORT

The test cannot run because either one or both of the Expansion
Interface circuit packs on this link are busied out or an Expansion
Interface circuit pack is not present on the opposite end of the fiber.
1. If Expansion Interface is busied out, issue the release board
PCSS command.
2. Examine results of Tests #237 and #238.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 retries.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-681

Table 10-194. TEST #241 Expansion Interface 2-Way Transmission Test
— Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The test tone was not detected correctly in either direction.
1. Run the test for the Active Tone-Clocks on the Port Networks for
which the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test provides a
link. This will determine if the dial tone is being supplied.
2. Check for disconnected transmit or receive fiber on both ends of
the fiber. Make sure both endpoint circuit packs are inserted and
have no on-board alarms.

1 or 2

FAIL

The test tone was detected correctly in only one direction.
1. Run the test for the Active Tone-Clocks on the Port Networks for
which the defective Expansion Interface circuit pack provides a
link. This determines if the dial tone is being supplied.
2. Check for disconnected transmit or receive fibers on both ends of
the fiber.
3. If Test #238 is failing, refer to procedures for Test #238.
4. If Error Type 2305 has been logged against this Expansion
Interface circuit pack, or the Expansion Interface circuit pack on
the opposite end of its fiber, in the last five minutes, this test may
have failed due to the associated slips. If such errors exist, first
resolve them, and then repeat this test.
5. Execute the test board PCSS long command on both Expansion
Interface circuit packs and follow procedures for Test #242 to
determine if the problem lies with one of the Expansion Interface
circuit packs, the lightwave transceivers, or the fiber itself.

0

PASS

The tone was successfully transmitted in both directions. Both
Expansion Interface circuit packs and their lightwave transceivers
are functioning properly.

NO
BOARD

No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error
131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset
board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-682

Expansion Interface Lightwave Transceiver Loop
Around Test (#242)
This test is destructive and requires that the Expansion Interface circuit
pack first be busied out. Busying out an Expansion Interface circuit pack
denies service to the EPN if the Expansion Interface circuit pack supports a
PPN to EPN link and duplicate Expansion Interface Links are not in use. If
the Expansion Interface circuit pack is part of an EPN to EPN link, service
between the two EPNs are denied if duplicate Expansion Interface links are
not in use. This test is NOT DESTRUCTIVE if the Expansion Interface circuit
pack to be busied out is in Standby Mode.
This is a two part connectivity test. The first portion of the test applies to both
TN776 and TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs. In the first part of the test, a
test tone is transmitted from the cabinet of the Expansion Interface circuit pack
under test, through the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test, out to its
lightwave transceiver. The connection then loops back into the lightwave
transceiver through the same Expansion Interface circuit pack again and into the
originating cabinet. If the test tone is detected by a tone detector, the first part of
the test passes.
The second portion of the test applies only to the TN570 Expansion Interface
circuit pack. In this part of the test, a data packet is sent from the TN778 Packet
Control circuit pack to the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test; the packet
is then looped back through the lightwave transceiver and sent back to the
Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit pack receives the same
packet it transmitted, the second part of the test passes. If the entire test has
passed, the Expansion Interface circuit pack, its backplane wiring, and the
electrical portion of the lightwave transceiver are healthy.
NOTE:
When the Expansion Interface circuit pack under test is an EPN, the data
packet must also pass through the Active Expansion Interface circuit packs
of the Active link connecting the EPN to the PPN.
This test requires the Expansion Interface circuit pack to ignore incoming data
from its neighbor Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite end of the
fiber. Thus, this test disturbs any inter-cabinet connections that currently exist
and disrupts signaling between the two cabinets.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-683

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system
may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots
out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM
Bus) Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy
traffic, repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The
system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present
or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation.
Even if there are no TTR-LEV errors, there still may not be a
Tone Detector available on the network that contains the circuit
pack being tested. Verify that there is at least one Tone
Detector on this network. If there is not at least one Tone
Detector, this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface
circuit pack. This does not harm the system in any way.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1015

ABORT

The system does not allow this test to be run because the
Expansion Interface circuit pack has not been busied out.
1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat the test
board PCSS long command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-684

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1031

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in an EPN and is active
and is in slot A01 or B02, this test CANNOT be executed. If the
lightwave transceiver loop around is activated, it is impossible to
deactivate it.
1. If a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack pair exists, make
that pair active via the set expansion-link PCSS command,
where PCSS is the address of a Standby Expansion Interface
circuit pack.
2. If the Expansion Interface Link switch is successful, the
lightwave transceiver Loop Around Test may now be executed
on the original Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in an Expansion Port Network (Port Network 2 or 3)
has a major alarm against it. This test needs to use the alarmed
port network’s Packet Bus.
1. Resolve the Packet Bus alarm.
2. Retry the command.

1141

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out by
checking the Hardware Error Log to see if Error Type 18 has
been logged against PKT-CTRL. If Error Type 18 is present,
release the circuit pack via the release packet-control
command, and retry the command.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control circuit pack) Maintenance
documentation for the recommended repair procedure.

1144

ABORT

The Packet Bus in the Processor Port Network has a major alarm
active against it. This abort code only appears when the test is run
in an EPN.
1. Resolve the alarm in the PPN.
2. Retry the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-685

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2060

ABORT

The link on the Packet Bus being used to perform the test has
failed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the
Packet Control circuit pack (look for PKT-CTL errors).

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

The test did not detect the test tone through the loop around
connection.
NOTE:
If the circuit pack is a TN570, the packet portion of this test
was not run since the circuit portion failed.
1. Test the Active Tone-Clock on the Port Network that contains
the defective Expansion Interface circuit pack to verify that dial
tone is being supplied.
2. If the Tone-Clock is healthy, issue the test board PCSS long
command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack.
3. If this test continues to fail, replace the Expansion Interface
circuit pack or transceiver. Then, reissue the test board PCSS
long command on the new Expansion Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-686

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
2

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The test tone was transmitted and detected correctly, but the
correct data packet was not detected by the TN778 Packet Control
circuit pack. This error only applies to the TN570 Expansion
Interface circuit pack.
1. Test the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack to verify that it is
functioning properly. If any tests fail, investigate those tests and
repair the Packet Control circuit pack.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack checks out OK, issue the test
board PCSS long command on the Expansion Interface circuit
pack.
3. If Test #242 continues to fail, replace the Expansion Interface
circuit pack. Then, issue the test board PCSS long command
on the new Expansion Interface circuit pack.
4. If Test #242 continues to fail, replace the lightwave transceiver,
reset the circuit pack and issue the test board PCSS long
command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-687

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
NOTE:
If the Expansion Interface is a TN570 and the system does
not have the Packet Bus enabled field set to yes on the
Maintenance-related system parameters form, then this test
does not execute the packet bus portion of the loop around.
When this test (#242) and the Expansion Interface Local Loop
Around Test #240 pass, this indicates that the Expansion Interface
circuit pack is functioning properly, but it does not verify that the
optical portion of the lightwave transceiver is functioning properly.
Remove the Expansion Interface circuit pack from the busyout
state using the release board PCSS command.
1. If duplicate Expansion Interface Links are available, issue the
test board PCSS command on the Standby Expansion
Interface circuit packs on both ends of fiber. If this test passes
from both sides, but other tests fail, such as Test #241, this
condition indicates either a faulty lightwave transceiver or a
faulty fiber cable. To determine if either a lightwave transceiver
or the fiber itself has failed, execute the Expansion Interface
Manual Loop Back Procedure described in the section
preceding the "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values" table for this MO.
NOTE:
This test can only be run from both Expansion Interface
circuit packs if they are the Standby pair, and if the Active
pair is working properly.
2. If this Expansion Interface circuit pack is failing other tests, the
Expansion Interface Manual Loop Back Test should be
executed.
If problems still exist after the Expansion Interface
Manual Loop Back Procedure indicates that both
Expansion Interface circuit packs and both lightwave
transceivers are healthy, manually check out the
building fiber. Verify that each optical fiber is connected
to a transmitter at one end and a receiver at the other.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-688

Table 10-195. TEST #242 Expansion Interface Lightwave
Transceiver Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/Recommendation
No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board
(error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the
reset board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Control Channel Test (#316)
If an Expansion Interface circuit pack is a Standby Expansion Interface circuit
pack (yellow LED off) or if the Expansion Interface is active in the PPN (yellow
LED on), this test queries the Expansion Interface circuit pack for its circuit pack
type and vintage information. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is an Active
Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN (yellow LED on long, off short), the
Expansion Interface Control Channel Test checks to see if the Expansion
Interface circuit pack can communicate with other circuit packs in the EPN using
the EPNTDM Bus.
Table 10-196. TEST #316 Expansion Interface
Control Channel Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-689

Table 10-196. TEST #316 Expansion Interface
Control Channel Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Expansion Interface circuit pack responded incorrectly or, if it is
the EPN Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, it could not talk to
EPN circuit packs.
1. If the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN is failing
and a Standby link exists, switch to the Standby link using the set
expansion-link PCSS command.
2. Repeat the Short Test Sequence.
3. If test continues to fail, reset the Expansion Interface circuit pack
via the reset board PCSS command.
4. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN is failing, check
for EPN TDM-CLK, TONE-BD, or SYNC failures in the Hardware
Error Log. Clear any EPN clock-related failures and repeat the
Short Test Sequence.
5. If test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack or transceiver.

PASS

The Expansion Interface circuit pack did respond correctly to the test.
Communication from software to the Expansion Interface circuit pack
is functioning.
1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if Expansion
Interface Link is not functioning correctly.

0

NO
BOARD

No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error
131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset
board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Reset Test (#336)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-690

This test is potentially very destructive and requires the Expansion Interface
circuit pack to be busied out prior to execution of this test.
The Expansion Interface Reset Test, which is not a part of either the Short or the
Long Test Sequences, is executed via the reset board PCSS command where
PCSS is the address of the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be reset.
If the system only has one working Expansion Interface Link between a pair of
port networks and one of the Expansion Interface circuit packs must be reset, the
action of busying out the desired Expansion Interface circuit pack WILL
DISRUPT SERVICE TO THE EPN until the Expansion Interface circuit pack is
released from the busyout state. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is part of
a PPN to EPN link, the EPN WILL BE WITHOUT SERVICE. If the Expansion
Interface circuit pack is part of an EPN to EPN link CALLS BETWEEN THE TWO
EPNs WILL BE DENIED.
If the system has working duplicate Expansion Interface Links, and the
Expansion Interface circuit pack to be reset is part of the Active Expansion
Interface Link, the system does not allow the busyout and instructs system
technician to switch Expansion Interface Links via the set expansion-link PCSS
command where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion Interface
circuit pack on the Standby link. After executing the Expansion Interface Link
switch, it is possible to busyout and then reset the original Expansion Interface
circuit pack.
However, if the EPN Maintenance (MAINT) circuit pack determines that the
Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit pack is cycling between sane and insane
several times within several minutes, MAINT may inhibit operation of the
EXP-INTF by holding the Expansion Interface circuit pack in a reset state. This
condition may result in an unsuccessful reset of the Expansion Interface circuit
pack.
If the reset command returns with "EPN is unavailable," execute the following
steps:
1. Use the change circuit-pack P command where P is the port network
number of the EPN.
2. For the Expansion Interface circuit pack you wish to reset, add an entry to
the Circuit Pack form for the TN776 or TN570 Expansion Interface circuit
pack. Be sure to enter the appropriate carrier and slot (that is, A01 or
B02).
3. Enter the form.
4. Repeat the reset board command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.
Error
Code

Page 10-691

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

4

ABORT

Could not reset EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack over optical
fiber since PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack on opposite end of
fiber is not inserted.
1. Insert opposite Expansion Interface circuit pack and perform
reset again.

1015

ABORT

The system does not allow this test to be run because the
Expansion Interface circuit pack has not been busied out.
1. Busyout the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat the reset
board PCSS command.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

9999

ABORT

Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. Could not
perform initialization test results query because link to EPN is not
up.
1. Execute release board PCSS. Wait one minute. Issue the
display error command. If you see Error Type 2049 logged
against this Expansion Interface circuit pack, then the
Expansion Interface Reset Test has failed with an error code
equal to the aux data of this entry. Otherwise, the initialization
tests have passed.

12000

ABORT

Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. Response to
the initialization test results query was not received within the
allowable time period.

12100

ABORT

Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. System
resources required to run initialization test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.

Page 10-692

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

12026

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Expansion Interface circuit pack reset successfully. It responded
with an unknown reply to the query for the results of its initialization
tests.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack or
transceiver.

1

FAIL

The Expansion Interface did not successfully reset.
1. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, the EPN
Maintenance Board may be holding the Expansion Interface
circuit pack reset. Attempt to rectify this condition by executing
the test maint P long command on the maintenance board in
the same EPN.
2. If Step #1 was not successful in releasing the Expansion
Interface circuit pack, temporarily remove the EPN
maintenance circuit pack.
3. Repeat the reset board PCSS command.
4. If reset continues to fail, replace circuit pack.
5. Insert EPN maintenance circuit pack if it was removed.

2

FAIL

The Expansion Interface circuit pack was successfully reset, but it
did not begin running after the reset.
1. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, temporarily
remove the EPN maintenance circuit pack.
2. Repeat the reset board PCSS command.
3. Re-insert the EPN maintenance circuit pack if it was removed.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.
Error
Code
3

Page 10-693

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The reset over the optical fiber failed.
1. Execute the test board PCSS command on the PPN neighbor
Expansion Interface circuit pack located on the opposite end of
the fiber from this Expansion Interface circuit pack. If Test #238
does not pass, follow the maintenance procedure associated
with this test result. Then perform the reset again.
2. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack is in the EPN, temporarily
remove the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
3. Repeat the reset board PCSS command.
4. Reinsert EPN Maintenance circuit pack if it was removed.
5. Follow the procedure described in the "Relationship Between
Expansion Interface and Tone-Clock Circuit Packs" section if
the symptoms match those described there.
6. Check the Hardware Error Log for the EPN Tone-Clock errors
that were resolved about when the EPN went down. These EPN
Tone-Clock errors may have been resolved BECAUSE the EPN
went down. When there is no Tone-Clock generating the system
clock on an EPN, then an Expansion Interface circuit pack can
only be reset once. All subsequent reset attempts fail. It is also
possible that the system itself may have already tried to reset
the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Refer to the TONE-BD
(Tone-Clock) Maintenance documentation for recommended
maintenance strategy for Tone-Clock problems.
7. If the reset still fails, execute the Manual Loop Back Procedure
on the opposite PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. This
procedure is described in the section preceding the "Hardware
Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" table for this MO. If
the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave
transceiver are healthy, the problem must lie with the Expansion
Interface circuit pack and its lightwave transceiver on the EPN
end of the fiber or with the fiber itself. Test the EPN Expansion
Interface circuit pack with the manual loop back procedure and
investigate the test results.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.
Error
Code
5001

Page 10-694

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset
successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface
circuit pack could not synchronize itself during the self-test phase
of the hardware initialization.
1. Issue the reset board PCSS command. If the circuit pack is on
the Active link, this procedure can be very destructive. If a test
board PCSS shows all the tests passing, and there is no
Standby link to which you can switch, perform this reset at a
time when service is least disrupted by losing use of the EPN.
2. If the reset fails with the same error code, execute the test
tone-clock PC command where P is the network that contains
this Expansion Interface circuit pack and C is the carrier that
contains the Active Tone-Clock on network P. Also look for
SYNC and TONE-BD errors. Resolve any SYNC and TONE-BD
errors by following the Maintenance documentation for these
MOs. Then reissue the reset board PCSS command.
3. If the Expansion Interface circuit pack still fails to reset with the
same error code, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.
Error
Code
5002

Page 10-695

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset
successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface
circuit pack has determined that a lightwave transceiver was not
attached to the backplane connector when the Expansion Interface
circuit pack was last reset. If this system does not have duplicate
Expansion Interface Links, all users in the EPN will be without
service until this problem is resolved. If this system does have
duplicate links, the backup Expansion Interface Link will be
unavailable until this problem is resolved.
1. Attach lightwave transceiver to 25-pair backplane connector in
slot belonging to Expansion Interface circuit pack.
2. Reset the circuit pack again.
3. If the reset fails with an error code other than 5002, refer to the
appropriate Maintenance documentation.
4. If the reset fails again with Error Code 5002, replace the
lightwave transceiver, reset the circuit pack, and execute the
reset board PCSS command again.
5. If the reset fails again with Error Code 5002, the new lightwave
transceiver may be defective, or the Expansion Interface circuit
pack may need to be replaced.

5016
5017
5018
5019
5032
5033
5048
5064
5080
5096
5112

FAIL

Initialization failure: Expansion Interface circuit pack reset
successfully and restarted execution. But the Expansion Interface
circuit pack detected communication errors during the self-test
phase of the hardware initialization. The nature of the failure may
prevent the Expansion Interface circuit pack from communicating
with its neighbor Expansion Interface circuit pack on the opposite
end of the fiber. The fault itself may be either on the Expansion
Interface circuit pack or on the lightwave transceiver.
1. If all other tests on this Expansion Interface circuit pack are
passing and no other errors have been logged against this
circuit pack, replacement of the lightwave transceiver or the
circuit pack are recommended, but not critical.
2. If all other tests on this Expansion Interface circuit pack are not
passing or other errors have been logged against this circuit
pack, the lightwave transceiver and/or the Expansion Interface
circuit pack should be replaced.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-197.
Error
Code

Page 10-696

TEST #336 Expansion Interface Reset Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The Expansion Interface was successfully reset, and it did restart
execution. Also, it passed all its initialization tests and detected a
lightwave transceiver. Remove the Expansion Interface circuit pack
from the busyout state by using the release board PCSS
command.
1. Execute test board PCSS short command. Refer to errors for
each test.

0

NO
BOARD

No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board
(error 131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the
reset board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test (#589)
This test attempts to send a data packet from the TN778 Packet Control circuit
pack through any intervening Expansion Interface circuit packs and through the
Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested. The path the data packet takes is
dependent on the location of the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested
and whether the Expansion Interface circuit pack is par of the Active link or
Standby link.
If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is part of an Active link from
PPN to either EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-31 is used.
If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is on either EPN and is part of
a Standby link from PPN to either EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-32 is used.
The path in this figure is also used if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be
tested is on the PPN.
If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is part of a link from EPN to
EPN, the path shown in Figure 10-33 is used.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-697

Packet Bus (PPN)

Packet Bus (PN X)
ACTIVE LINK
EXP-INTF

PKTCTRL

EXP-INTF
LAPD
ENDPT

Figure 10-31.

(Active EXP-INTFs on EPNs Only)

Packet Bus (PPN)
EXP-INTF

Packet Bus (PN X)
EXP-INTF

PKTCTRL

Figure 10-32.

(Standby EXP-INTFs on EPNs or PPN EXP-INTFs Only)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Packet Bus ( PN X )

Packet Bus ( PPN )
PKTCTRL

Page 10-698

EXP-INTF

EXP-INTF

EXP-INTF

EXP-INTF
UNDER TEST

Packet Bus ( PN Y )
EXP-INTF

EXP-INTF

Figure 10-33.

Table 10-198.

Error
Code
1005

Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test—EPN to EPN

TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This test does not apply to the current system configuration. Either the
system is not administered to have the Packet Bus activated, the
Maintenance-Related System Parameters form has the Packet Bus
Enabled field set to "n," or the system is administered to have the
Packet Bus activated, but there exist TN776 Expansion Interface
circuit packs that prevent this test from running. The TN776
Expansion Interface circuit packs do not support Packet Bus
capabilities.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-699

Table 10-198. TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
— Continued
Error
Code
1033

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test cannot run because either one or both of the Expansion
Interface circuit packs on this link are busied out or an Expansion
Interface circuit pack is not present on the opposite end of the fiber.
1. If Expansion Interface is busied out, issue the release board
PCSS command.
2. Examine the results of Tests #237 and #238.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in an EPN (Port Network 2 or 3) has a major alarm
against it. This test needs to use the alarmed port network’s packet
bus.
1. Resolve the Packet Bus alarm.
2. Retry the command.

1140

ABORT

Not enough packet ports are available to complete this test.
1. If the port network being tested does not contain any packet
circuit packs, ignore the results of this test.
2. If the port network being tested does contain packet circuit
packs, determine if any or all of them are faulty by examining the
alarm and error logs.
3. If any faulty circuit packs are found, refer to the appropriate
Maintenance documentation for the recommended repair
procedures and try to resolve any problems. Then, retry the
command.
4. If no faulty boards are found, all of the ports are busy. Use the
busyout board PCSS command to busyout a packet circuit pack
or wait for one to become idle and retry the command.

1141

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out. (This is
indicated by an Error Type 18 logged against PKT-CTRL.) If it is,
release it via the release packet-control command, and retry the
command.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to
PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for the repair procedure
for the Packet Control circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-700

Table 10-198. TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
— Continued
Error
Code
1144

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Bus in the PPN has a major alarm active against it.
1. Resolve the alarm in the PPN.
2. Retry the command.

1195

ABORT

An EI link switched during this test.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

1421

ABORT

This abort code is valid and can appear only when the Expansion
Interface circuit pack addressed in the test command is one which
terminates the link between two the EPNs. It indicates that the test
failed, but that this test was run on the EPN EI circuit pack that:
a. is in the same EPN as the circuit pack under test,
b. is on the active link and
c. terminates the fiber from the PPN.
The EI tested is probably not at fault.
1. Enter display alarms and follow the EXP-INTF repair procedures
for the EPN EI that:
a. is in the same EPN as the circuit pack just tested here
b. is on the active link, and
c. terminates the fiber from the PPN.
2. If there are no alarms logged against that EI, run Test #589 on it
and follow procedures for this test.
3. Try this command again.

2060

ABORT

The link on the Packet Bus that is being used to perform the test has
failed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet
Control circuit pack (look for PKT-CTL errors).

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-701

Table 10-198. TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
— Continued
Error
Code
2500

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The transmitted data packet was not received correctly by the Packet
Control circuit pack. If there are any PKT-BUS errors in the Error Log,
attempt to resolve those errors before investigating these test failures.
PROCEDURE A
Use Procedure A if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested
is in an EPN and is part of an Active link from the PPN to the EPN.
1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack via the test packet-control
command. If the Packet Control circuit pack fails any tests, refer
to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended
maintenance procedures.
2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in
either the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack or the connected
Expansion Interface circuit pack under test or on the EPN Packet
Bus. If a duplicate Expansion link exists, make that the Active link,
using the set expansion-link PCSS command. Execute the test
board long command on the original Expansion Interface circuit
pack and the connected PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack
and follow the procedures for Test #242.
3. If a duplicate link does not exist, run the Long Test Sequence on
the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. If Test #242 fails, follow
the procedures for Test #242. If Test #242 passes, the fault is in
the EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack under test or on the EPN
Packet Bus.

More information follows.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-702

Table 10-198. TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
— Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
PROCEDURE B
Use Procedure B if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested
is in an EPN and is part of a Standby link from the PPN to the EPN or if
the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is in the PPN.
1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit
pack fails any tests, refer to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance
documentation for recommended maintenance procedures.
2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in
either the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack or the connected
EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the circuit pack being
tested is in the PPN and is part of an Active link from the PPN to
the EPN and if a duplicate Expansion link exists, make that the
Active link, using the set expansion-link PCSS command.
Execute the test board long command on the original PPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack and the connected EPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack and follow the procedures for
Test #242. Otherwise, if a duplicate link does not exist, run the
Long Test Sequence on the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack.
If Test #242 fails, follow the procedures for Test #242. If Test #242
passes, the fault is in the connected EPN Expansion Interface
circuit pack.
3. If the test was not run on an active PPN Expansion Interface
circuit pack, issue the test board PCSS long command on both
Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs and follow the
procedures for Test #242.

More information follows.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-703

Table 10-198. TEST #589 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test
— Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
PROCEDURE C
Use Procedure C if the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested
is part of any link from EPN to EPN.
1. Test the Packet Control circuit pack. If the Packet Control circuit
pack fails any tests, refer to the PKT-CTRL Maintenance
documentation for recommended maintenance procedures.
2. If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass, the failure may be in
the Expansion Interface circuit packs of the EPN to EPN link or on
the EPN Packet Bus.
3. Issue the test board PCSS long command on both EPN to EPN
Expansion Interface circuit packs and follow the procedures for
Test #242.

PASS

The data packet was received correctly.
1. Refer to other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the
Expansion link is not functioning correctly.

0

NO
BOARD

No board was detected by the test.
1. Check the error log for wrong board (error 125) or no board (error
131). Resolve either of these issues, if applicable.
2. Check that the board is properly translated and inserted. If so,
check for hyperactivity (error 1538). If hyperactive, use the reset
board PCSS command.
3. Run the test again. If it fails, the ID chip on board may be bad.
Replace the board and retest.

Continued on next page

Expansion Interface Link Switch Command
This action is potentially destructive.
The Expansion Interface switch command enables system technician to choose
which set of Expansion Interface Links should be the Active link when duplicate
Expansion Interface Links are available.
The command line entry is set expansion-link PCSS, where PCSS is the
Expansion Interface address of either Expansion Interface circuit pack on the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-704

Standby link. If the status system command indicates that the Standby link is
up, the set expansion-link command makes the Standby link the Active link.
This action is destructive because it must temporarily disable all connections
between PPN and EPN. This break in the connections is not detectable by
normal voice users.

! CAUTION:
Data connections lose a small amount of data. Depending on the data
transmission speed, the lost data is anywhere from zero to several bytes.
It is recommended that system technician switch links when it is necessary to run
the more destructive tests on Expansion Interface circuit packs. Most
significantly, Test #242 requires the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be
busied out and, therefore, the link with the Expansion Interface to be tested
should be made the Standby link.
To prevent the system from automatically switching Expansion Interface Links
during system technician-demanded tests, busyout one or both of the Standby
Expansion Interface circuit packs.

! CAUTION:
This introduces a small risk. If the remaining Active Expansion Link should
fail while the Standby Expansion Link is busied out, service to the EPN is
lost.
The set expansion-link command has no error codes to return. It displays one of
following messages upon completion:
1. Command completed successfully
Link switch was successful. This may be verified by visually inspecting the
new yellow LED states or by the status system command.
2. Command did not complete successfully
This indicates that the system attempted to switch links, but for unknown
reasons the software or hardware was unable to complete the action. The
system may have switched and determined that the new link could not
provide service and thus returned to the original link.
3. Standby EXP-INTF Link is unable to take over
Because the Expansion Interface circuit pack pair on the Standby link has
enough errors logged against it as to be unable to provide service, the
system did not attempt to switch links.
4. EXP-INTF is already on active link

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-705

The Expansion Interface circuit pack address given in the set
expansion-link command is an Active Expansion Interface. The address
must be a Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack in order to switch
links.
5. Address is not a valid Expansion Interface Board
The link switch could not be attempted because the address in the set
expansion-link command did not correspond to any known Expansion
Interface circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link)

Page 10-706

EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

EXP-LINK

1.

Initial Command
to Run
display errors1

MAJOR

Full Name of MO
Expansion Interface Link

Display errors for "infc" category and investigate EXP-INTF errors.

The EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link) Maintenance strategy is covered in the
EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-199.
Error
Type
0

Expansion Interface Circuit Pack Error Log Entries

Aux Data
0

122 (a)

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Any

Any

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

122 (b)

None, 1-10

None

MAJOR

ON

122 (c)

30-40

None

MAJOR

ON

122 (d)

6

None

MAJOR

ON

122 (e)

8

None

MAJOR

ON

Test to Clear Value
disp err

a. This alarm is used only to indicate that all Expansion Interface Links
between a pair of Port Networks (PNs) are down. This condition is
indicated by the EXP-LINK Error Type 122 in the Error Log. When this
condition occurs, examine all EXP-INTF errors to resolve the alarm.
The pair of PNs is specified in the port fields as follows: 1-2 (PPN to
EPN1), 1-3 (PPN to EPN2), and 2-3 (EPN1 to EPN2).
b. Aux Data values of blank and 1 through 10 mean that the link is down due
to a defective Expansion Interface Link. Look for and resolve Expansion
Interface circuit pack errors.
c. Aux Data values of 30 through 40 mean that the EPN was reset because of
a temporary loss of system timing reference on the EPN. Execute the
display errors command with the category "tone" to determine what
caused the loss or restoration of the clock.
d. The system detected an excessive backup of traffic on the Active
Expansion Link. This condition may have been due to communication
difficulties on the Expansion Link. To restore normal service, the system

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXP-LINK (Expansion Interface Link)

Page 10-707

had to reset the Expansion port network served by the Expansion Link.
Error type 10004 should have been logged against the Expansion
Interface circuit pack that reported the traffic congestion.
e. Aux Data value of 8 means that the link is down due to the recovery
feature of the EPN Sanity Audit. Look for EPN-SNTY errors in the error log,
and refer to the EPN-SNTY section for more details.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-708

EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device
Alarm)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

EXT-DEV

MAJOR

test environment UU

External Device Alarm

EXT-DEV

MINOR

test environment UU

External Device Alarm

1.

Full Name of MO

where UU is an appropriate cabinet number determined via the PORT field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

NOTE:
Use this Maintenance Object when the External Device Alarm Admin? field
on the change system-parameters customer-options form is set to (n).
In the Standard Reliability PPN the Maintenance Processor (TN786B or TN790) in
carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. In the High or Critical PPN, the
Duplication Interface (TN772) circuit pack in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV
alarm leads, and provides status to the Maintenance processor (TN786B or
TN790) in the active SPE. In the EPN the Maintenance Board (TN775) monitors
the EXT-DEV alarm leads. The system only recognizes pairs connected to the 1M
and 1m (ALARM MONITOR) leads. Pairs connected to the 2M, 2m, 3M, 3m, and
3w are not recognized by the system. Refer to the DEFINITY Communications
System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111, for more details.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-709

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-200.
Error
Type

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values

Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

Associated Test

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment UU r2
or 6

1 or 5

Any

External Device
Alarm Test (#120)

MAJOR
MINOR2

OFF

test environment UU r 2
or 6

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
One port generates a MAJOR alarm; the other port generates a MINOR alarm.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.
Multicarrier Cabinet Tests
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (b)

X

X

ND

OLS Query Test (Carrier E) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

OLS Query Test (Carrier D) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

OLS Query Test (Carrier A) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

OLS Query Test (Carrier B) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

OLS Query Test (Carrier C) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (d)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (e)

X

X

ND

External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR port) (#120)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-710

Multicarrier Cabinet Tests — Continued
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

External Device Alarm Test (MINOR port) (#120)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Continued on next page
1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) section for a description of
this test.
b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) section for a description of this test.
c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Supply) section for a description
of this test.
d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) section for a description of this
test.
e. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) section for a description of this test.
f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) section for a description of
this test.

Single Carrier Cabinet Tests
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

SCC Power Query Test (#79) (a)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (b)

X

X

ND

External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR port) (#120)

X

X

ND

External Device Alarm Test (MINOR port) (#120)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (c)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (c)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

a. Refer to DC-POWER (Single Carrier Cabinet Power) section for a
description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-711

b. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) section for a description of this
test.
c. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) section for a description of
this test.

External Device Alarm Test (#120)
The External Device Alarm Test requests the state of the External Device Alarm
from the Maintenance circuit pack and reports the results. The test has no effect
on the external device itself.
Table 10-201.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 time.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 time.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with error code 2000,
check for system powering problems with the A
carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all
AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier
cabinet or DC-POWER alarms in a single carrier
cabinet. Then, repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, check for and resolve all SYSAM errors in a
PPN or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit pack)
errors in an EPN. Then, repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, then escalate the problem.

2029
2319
2320
2500

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? N (External Device Alarm)

Table 10-201.
Error
Code
ANY

Page 10-712

TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The External Device Alarm has been activated by the
external device.
1. Clear the major alarm on the external device, and
rerun the test.
2. If the test still fails, then disconnect the External
Device Alarms from the Maintenance circuit pack
and rerun the test.
3. If the test still fails, then there is a problem with the
Maintenance circuit pack that is reporting the alarm.
This circuit pack should be replaced. There are
failures that can occur on Maintenance circuit
pack’s that will not be detected by their respective
maintenance, but which will cause many
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack should be
replaced and the test rerun.
4. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

PASS

If there is a problem with the external device, but the
Maintenance circuit pack connected to the device
reports no alarm, then the External Device may not be
properly reporting the problems or the External Device
may not be properly connected to the External Device.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-713

EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External
Device Alarm)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

EXT-DEV

MAJOR

test
eda-external-device-alrm
physical location

External Device Alarm

EXT-DEV

MINOR

test
eda-external-device-alrm
physical location

External Device Alarm

EXT-DEV

WARNING

test
eda-external-device-alrm
physical location

External Device Alarm

1.

where UU is an appropriate cabinet number determined via the PORT field from the Alarm or
Error Log.

NOTE:
Use this Maintenance Object when the External Device Alarm Admin? field
on the change system-parameters customer-options form is set to (y). You
must have INADS or INIT login permission to administer EXT-DEV Alarm.
Generic 3i Maintenance circuit packs each have alarm leads which can be
connected to external devices such as Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) or
adjuncts such as AUDIX. Certain conditions on the external device close the
contacts on the alarm leads to notify the switch which in turn originates an
EXT-DEV alarm.
The special locations UUmajor and UUminor are used to designate the major or
minor maintenance board alarm connection for cabinet UU. The major/minor
designation specifies the port, not the alarm level associated with the
connection; for example, the “major” port can be administered as a major, minor,
or warning alarm, and the “minor” port can be administered as a major, minor or
warning alarm. In addition Analog line ports can also be administered as external
device alarms.
NOTE:
An unadministered maintenance board external device alarm port, that is
sensing a contact closure will have an entry in the Error Log and in the
Alarm Log. INADS will not receive warning alarms.
In the Standard Reliability PPN the Maintenance Processor (TN786B or TN790) in
carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV alarm leads. In the High or Critical PPN, the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-714

Duplication Interface (TN772) circuit pack in carrier (A) monitors the EXT-DEV
alarm leads, and provides the status to the Maintenance processor (TN786B or
TN790) in the active SPE. In the EPN the Maintenance Board (TN775) monitors
the EXT-DEV alarm leads. The system only recognizes pairs connected to the 1M
and 1m (ALARM MONITOR) leads. Pairs connected to the 2M, 2m, 3M, 3m, and
3w are not recognized by the system. Refer to the DEFINITY Communications
System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111, for more details.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-202.
Error
Type

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

0

Any

Any

Any

test eda-external-device-alrm
physical location r 2 or 6

1 or 5

Any

External Device
Alarm Test (#120)

Any

OFF

test eda-external-device-alrm
physical location r 2 or 6

NOTE:
The loss of -48 volt power will prevent detection of an external device
alarm. AC-POWER, CARR-POW, and DC-POWER alarms could indicate the
loss of the external device alarm -48 volt power source. ALARM-PT alarms
may also indicate a loss of power. When analog line ports are administered
as analog line external device alarms loss of -48 volts will prevent detection
of an external device alarm.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

Page 10-715

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.
Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

External Device Alarm Test (MAJOR
port) (#120)

X

X

ND

External Device Alarm Test (MINOR
port) (#120)

X

X

ND

External Device Alarm Test (WARNING
port) (#120)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

External Device Alarm Test (#120)
The External Device Alarm Test requests the state of the External Device Alarm
from a Maintenance circuit pack and reports the results. The test has no effect on
the external device itself.
Table 10-203.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 time.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1035

ABORT

The Expansion Port Network containing this equipment
is not available
Look for and resolve all Expansion Port Network
problems with this cabinet.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

Table 10-203.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-716

TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 time.
2. (Maintenance Board) If the test continues to ABORT
with error code 2000, check for system powering
problems with the A carrier. Look for and resolve all
AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier
cabinet or DC-POWER alarms in a single carrier
cabinet. Then, repeat the test.
3. (Maintenance Board) If the test continues to ABORT
with a 2000 error code, check for and resolve all
maintenance circuit pack errors. Then, repeat the
test.
4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, then escalate the problem.

2029
2100
2319
2320
2500

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm)

Table 10-203.
Error
Code
ANY

Page 10-717

TEST #120 External Device Alarm Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The External Device Alarm has been activated by the
external device.
1. Clear the major alarm on the external device, and
rerun the test.
2. If the test still fails, then disconnect the External
Device Alarm Leads from the Maintenance circuit
pack and rerun the test.
3. If the test still fails, then there is a problem with the
analog external device alarm port or the
Maintenance circuit pack that is reporting the alarm.
This circuit pack should be replaced. There are
failures that can occur on the Maintenance circuit
pack that will not be detected by their respective
maintenance, but which will cause many
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack should be
replaced and the test rerun.
4. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

PASS

If there is a problem with the external device, but the
administered analog line external device alarm, or the
administered Maintenance circuit pack connected to the
device reports no alarm, then the External Device may
not be properly reporting the problems or the External
Device may not be properly connected to the External
Device Alarm Lead.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Page 10-718

FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

FL-DATA

MAJOR

test card-mem a|b l

Flash Data Consistency

FL-DATA

MINOR

test card-mem a|b l

Flash Data Consistency

FL-DATA

WARNING

test card-mem a|b l

Flash Data Consistency

In systems with high or critical reliability, the software and the hard patch update
files are stored in the on-board flash memory in both the Active SPE and Standby
SPE. The translations and announcements are stored in the memory cards in
both the Active SPE and Standby SPE. Flash Data Consistency flags problems
when files become mismatched by monitoring the translations, announcements,
update files, and software vintage number in a High or Critical Reliability PPN
system. If the software vintage numbers on both SPEs are mismatched, a
MAJOR alarm is raised. If the announcement files on both memory cards are
mismatched, a WARNING alarm is raised. For all other problems, a MINOR alarm
is raised. The software vintage can be displayed via the list configuration
software-vintage long command. The Flash Data Consistency Test is run on
system technician command and as part of daily Standby SPE maintenance.
NOTE:
Flash Data Consistency is not applicable to Standard systems.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-204.
Error
Type

Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test card-mem a/b l

8 or 16

8 or 16

Flash Data Consistency
Test (#421)

WNG

OFF

test card-mem a/b

1-3,
9-10,
17-18,
32-34,
40-42,

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-204.
Error
Type

Page 10-719

Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

48-50,
64-66,

8 or 16

Flash Data Consistency
Test (#421)

MINOR

OFF

test card-mem a/b l

8 or 16

Flash Data Consistency
Test (#421)

MAJOR

OFF

upgrade software

72-74,
80-82,
9-15,
17-86,
160,
192,
288,
320,
416, 448
4-6,
12-14,
20-22,
36-38,
44-46,
52-54,
68-70
76-78,
84-86,
132,
164,
196,
260,

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-204.
Error
Type

Page 10-720

Flash Data Consistency Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

292,
324,
388,
420,
452

Continued on next page
1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

a. The Aux Data field records which SPE was active at the time the Flash
Data Consistency Test failed. An "8" in the log refers to carrier A and a "16"
refers to carrier B.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Memory Card Insertion Test, for example, you
may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

12 Volt Power Supply Test (#701) (b)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Insertion Test (#695) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Format and Read Test (#696) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Match Test (#697) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Write-Protected Test (#698) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Directory Recovery Test (#699) (a)

X

X

ND

Memory Card Translation Data Integrity Test (#694) (a)

X

ND

Memory Card Erase/Write/Read Test (#693) (a)

X

ND

Flash Data Consistency Test (#421) (c)

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Page 10-721

Notes:
a. See “CARD-MEM” for this test description.
b. See “12V-PWR” for a description of this test.
c. The Flash Data Consistency Test does not run in a Standard system.

Flash Data Consistency Check Test (#421)
The software vintage number, translation time stamps, announcement time
stamps, and update file time stamps and identifiers are read off of both memory
cards or SPEs and then compared. If the comparison shows any discrepancy,
FL-DATA is alarmed. This test is only run in a High or Critical Reliability system.
The test is run as part of the test card-mem long and as part of the standby PE
scheduled maintenance.
Table 10-205.
Error
Code
0

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The test timed out without completing. This error can occur when the
system is heavily loaded and the test is not allocated sufficient time to
run.
1. Rerun the test when the system is less busy and is not running
standby maintenance.

1029
1030
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation
for a description of these error codes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code
9005

Page 10-722

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

35498

ABORT

Difficulty was encountered trying to send information between the
SPEs.

35512

ABORT

The Standby SPE cannot be put into maintenance mode.
1. Check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack), SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link), SHDW-CIR
(Common Shadow Circuit), and STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) alarms.
2. Retry the command.

35514

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

35534

ABORT

Could not allocate the (active or standby) memory card drive
because another memory card operation was in progress.
1. Wait 10 minutes, and retry the command.

35535

ABORT

Could not access the (active or standby) memory card.
1. The memory card may be damaged or missing. Resolve all
problems with all memory card tests in the Long Test Sequence
for both memory cards.
2. Repeat the test.

1

FAIL

The standby translations are out-of-date. The translations on the
Standby SPE (memory card) are older than those on the Active SPE
(memory card).

2

FAIL

The Active SPE translations are out-of-date.
1. Issue save translations command. If the translation save passes
on both SPEs, go to Step 2.
2. Run test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code
4

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Page 10-723

Description/Recommendation
The load vintages are different in both SPEs.
1. Determine the desired software release by issuing the list
configuration software long command. Obtain the memory
card of the same software release. Follow the upgrade software
procedure to upgrade the out-of-date SPE.
2. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms.

5

FAIL

The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4.

6

FAIL

The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4.
2. Issue the save translations command. If the translation save
passes on both SPEs, proceed to Step 3.
3. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms.

8

FAIL

The announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has
the most current announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save
announcements in both SPEs. If the announcement save passes
on both SPEs, go to Step 2.
2. Run the test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms.

9

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE is the most current.

10

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current translations, and the Active SPE
has the most current announcements.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations in
both SPEs.
2. Issue the save announcements command to save
announcements in both SPEs.
3. If both the translation save and announcement save pass on both
SPEs, run the test card-mem long command again to resolve the
alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code
12

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Page 10-724

Description/Recommendation
Load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Codes 4 and 8.

13

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and
announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Codes 4 and 10.

14

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in
both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations, and
the Active SPE has the most current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save
announcements command.

16

FAIL

Announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the
most current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 8.

17

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current translations and the Standby SPE
has the most current announcements.

18

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
standby SPE is the most current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 9.

20

FAIL

The load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs.
The Standby SPE has the most current announcements.

21

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and the
Standby SPE has the most current announcements.

22

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in
both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations and
announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save
announcements command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code
32

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Page 10-725

Description/Recommendation
The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the
Active SPE is most current.
1. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update
file copy passes, go to Step 2.
2. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms.

33

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current update file and translations.

34

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE
has the most current translations.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on
both SPEs.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the
update file from the Active to the Standby SPE.
3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms.

36

FAIL

The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current update file.

37

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
translations.

38

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the
Standby SPE has the most current translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check
for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under
the applicable error code.

40

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current update file and announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save
announcements on both SPEs.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the
update file from the Active to the Standby SPE.
3. Run the test card-mem long again to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-726

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

41

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file,
translations, and announcements.

42

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current
translations.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the
update file from the Active to the Standby SPE.
4. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms.

44

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
announcements.

45

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update
file, translations, and announcements.

46

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update
file and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current
translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load
vintage. Be sure to save the announcements. After running the
test card-mem long command, check for Error Codes 32 or 64.
Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code.

48

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE
has the most current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 40.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-727

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

49

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current
announcements.

50

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the
Standby SPE has the most current translations and announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 41.

52

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the
Standby SPE has the most current announcements.

53

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update
file, and translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current
announcements.

54

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update
file and the Standby SPE has the most current translations and
announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check
for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under
the applicable error code.

64

FAIL

The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the
Standby SPE is the most current.
1. If you are on site with the switch, replace the Active SPE memory
card with the Standby SPE memory card. If you are not on site
with the switch, issue the reset system interchange command.
This action causes the Standby SPE to become the Active SPE.
Refer to the "Reset Commands" section in Chapter 8,
"Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for
information on the side effects of a processor interchange.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update
file copy passes, go to Step 3.
3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-728

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

65

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file, and the Active SPE
has the most current translations.

66

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on
both SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64.

68

FAIL

The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file.

69

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, and the
Active SPE has the most current translations.

70

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and
translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check
for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under
the applicable error code.

72

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file and the Active SPE has
the most current announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save
announcements on both SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-729

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

73

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update
file.

74

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements,
and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and
translations.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64.

76

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements,
and the Standby SPE has the most current update file.

77

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current
translations and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most
current update file.

78

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update
file and translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check
for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under
the applicable error code.

80

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save
announcements on both SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-730

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

81

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations, and the
Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements.

82

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file,
translations, and announcements.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Follow the procedures for Error Code 64.

84

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in
both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and
announcements.

85

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current
translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file
and announcements.

86

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update
file, translations, and announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to correct the load
vintage. After running the test card-mem long command, check
for Error Codes 32 or 64. Follow the recovery procedure under
the applicable error code.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-731

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

128

ABORT

The Translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing.

132

FAIL

The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation
memory card is missing in the Active SPE.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to correct the software
vintage.
2. Insert the translation memory card in the Active SPE.
3. Run the test card-mem long command again to resolve alarms.

160

FAIL

The update file in the Active SPE is more current than the Standby
SPE and the translation memory card is missing in the Active SPE.
1. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update
file copy passes, proceed to Step 2.
2. Insert the translation memory card in the Active SPE.
3. Reissue the test card-mem long command to resolve the alarms.

164

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and
the translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing. The update
file in the Active SPE is more current.
1. Both load vintages and update files should not be mismatched.

192

FAIL

The update file in the Standby SPE is more current and the translation
memory card is missing in the Active SPE.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160.

196

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and
the translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing. The update
file in the Standby SPE is more current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-732

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

256

ABORT

Translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE.

260

FAIL

The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation
memory card is missing in the Standby SPE.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 132.

288

FAIL

The update file in the Active SPE is more current and the translation
memory card is missing in the Standby SPE.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160.

292

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and
the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE. The
update file in the Active SPE is more current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164.

320

FAIL

The update file in the Standby SPE is more current and the translation
memory card is missing in the Standby SPE.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160.

324

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs and
the translation memory card in the Standby SPE is missing.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
FL-DATA (Flash Data Consistency)

Table 10-205.
Error
Code

Page 10-733

TEST #421 Flash Data Consistency Check Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

384

ABORT

The translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs.

388

FAIL

The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation
memory cards are missing in both SPEs.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 132.

416

FAIL

The update file in the Active SPE is more current, and the translation
memory cards are missing in both SPEs.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160.

420

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and
the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. The update
file in the Active SPE is more current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164.

448

FAIL

The update file in the Standby SPE is more current, and the
translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 160.

452

FAIL

The load vintages and the update files are different in both SPEs, and
the translation memory cards are missing in both SPEs. The update
file in the Standby SPE is more current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 164.

PASS

The load vintages, translations, announcements, and update files are
the same.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR)]

Page 10-734

GPTD-PT [General Purpose Tone
Detector Port (CPTR)]
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

GPTD-PT

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp sh

General Purpose Tone Detector
Port (CPTR)

GPTD-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp sh

General Purpose Tone Detector
Port (CPTR)

GPTD-PT

WARNING

release port PCSSpp

General Purpose Tone Detector
Port (CPTR)

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for
example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located
(for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).

The General Purpose Tone Detector (GPTD) Port, also known as Call Progress
Tone Receiver (CPTR), resides on the Tone Detector circuit pack (TN748 [all
suffixes], TN420B [and greater suffixes], and TN756 combined tone detector and
tone clock [all suffixes]). There are two GPTD ports and four Dual Tone
Multifrequency Receiver (DTMR) ports on a Tone Detector circuit pack. The
GPTD port is used to perform level measurements of test tones and to detect call
progress tones. Examples of call progress tones are dial tone, ring back, busy,
alert, confirmation, and recall dial. The abilities of the GPTD port to perform level
measurements of test tones and to detect call progress tones are essential for
maintenance of other circuit packs (for example, Tone-Clock).
The GPTD maintenance feature defines a set of tests to ensure that the general
purpose tone detection capability of the GPTD port is functioning properly. For all
Tone Detector circuit pack level errors (DETR-BD), refer to the XXX-BD (Common
Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-735

HYB-BD (Hybrid Line Circuit Pack)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

HYB-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Hybrid Line Circuit Pack

HYB-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Hybrid Line Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) Maintenance
documentation for related line information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-736

HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

HYB-LINE

Minor

test port PCSSpp l

Hybrid Line

HYB-LINE

Warning

test port PCSSpp l

Hybrid Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit
port number (for example, 01).

Hybrid Line is the user-friendly name for Hybrid Line, which was previously used
to denote the Multifunction Analog Telephone. The Hybrid Line set is also known
as an SCS (Small Communications System).
The TN762B Hybrid Line circuit pack supports eight of these multifunction
analog telephone sets, as shown in the following figure. The Hybrid Line sets use
three pairs of wires: an analog voice pair, a transmit/receive pair, and a power
pair.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-737

HYBRID
LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK
(1)
PORT

VOICE
TERMINAL

PBX

(8)
PORT

VOICE
TERMINAL

HYBRID LINE

Figure 10-34.

Hybrid Station Interactions

This section refers only to the HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) maintenance that is
performed. Please note that the HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line) maintenance is closely
related to, and interacts with, the HYB-BD (Hybrid Line circuit pack) maintenance
in some instances. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the Hybrid Line
may be affected by the health of the Hybrid Line circuit pack. This interaction
should be kept in mind when investigating the cause of reported Hybrid Line
problems.
There are instances in this section where "service states" of a station are
mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service
states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows:
■

Out-of-Service–The port, and thus the station, have been removed from
service. A busyout of a port causes it to be out-of-service.

■

Ready-for-Service–Once a port on the circuit pack has been put into
service, the voice terminal must communicate that it is present. The time
between these two events is the time when the terminal is in the
ready-for-service state.

■

In-Service–Once the system has received a message from the voice
terminal communicating that it is present, the station is put into the
in-service state. The terminal can also be forced into the in-service state if
it goes off-hook while it is in the ready-for-service state.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-738

When the status station command has been run, and the status screen
appears, the status is reported as either out-of-service or in-service, which mean
exactly as stated in the above list, or disconnect, which means the station is in
the ready-for-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-739

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-206.

Hybrid Line Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

WARNING

OFF

15 (b)

Any

Hybrid Audits Test
(#61)

18 (c)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

2

OFF

130 (d)

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

257 (e)

40988

None

MIN/WRN

513 (f)

40965

Hybrid Line Audits
Test (#61)

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 4

769 (g)

Remote Dig Loop
Around Test (#59)

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

1025

Hybrid & Conf.
Circuits Test (#57)

MIN/WRN2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1281 (h)

Local Digital Loop
Around Test (#58)

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

None

WARNING

OFF

1537 (i)

40968

1793

TDMNPE Crosstalk
Test (#6)

2049 (j)

32770

None

2049 (k)

40967

None

1.
2.

MIN/WRN

2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. Indicates a defective data link. An off-board problem was detected by
port circuit. Verify that the Hybrid set is connected and that the EPF test
passes. If data transmission problems are experienced, check for
defective wiring or a defective voice terminal, or move terminal closer to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-740

the switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the
problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been
resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of time.
b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate associated errors
(if any).
c. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by
maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout via the
release port PCSSpp command.
d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
e. This indicates that the EPF has been turned off due to an overcurrent
condition at the voice terminal. Check for defective wiring or a damaged
jack, and make sure the voice terminal is a Hybrid set. Once the problem
has been resolved, the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of
time.
f. This indicates that the voice terminal has probably been disconnected or
that there is a problem in the wiring to the terminal. Make sure that the
voice terminal is connected or check for defective wiring to the voice
terminal.
g. Note that Error Types 769 and 1281 by themselves create Warning alarms
only, but if both are present, a Minor alarm is logged.
h. This indicates that there is something wrong with the data link to the voice
terminal. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board
warning. Ignore it if there are no complaints. Otherwise, make sure the
voice terminal is connected, check for defective wiring, check for a
defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the switch (in
terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists,
replace the circuit pack.
i. This indicates that the station went off-hook while in the disconnect state.
Use the status station command to determine the state of the station. The
off-hook should have moved the station to in-service. No system
technician action is necessary.
j. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack
and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No system technician action
is necessary.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-741

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Local Digital Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Local Digital Loop Around Test (#58)

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test (#56)

X

ND

Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit
Test (#57)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Remote Digital Loop Around Test (#59)

X

X

ND

Station Lamp Update Test (#60)

X

X

ND

Station Audits Test (#61)

X

X

ND

Ringer Update Test (#62)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence
and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-207.
Error
Code

Page 10-742

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-207.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-743

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension number of
the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook)
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-207.
Error
Code
1018

Page 10-744

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Test disabled via administration. This only applies to
analog stations.
The default for this field is ‘y,’ so you may want to
determine why it has been turned off for this station.
1. To enable test, set the Test field on the station
administration screen for the particular analog
station being tested to ‘y.’ Use the change station
 command.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-207.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-745

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems.
Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults,
TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone
detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems
before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a
TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board
connected to the backplane or bent pins on the
backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Retest the board when the faults from steps 1 and 2
are cleared.

0

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-746

Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test (#56)
In this test, the software requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port. An
attempt is made to turn on the power unit from the station. If no current is being
drawn, this probably indicates that the station is not connected. If an overcurrent
condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this may indicate a
short in the loop or a defective voice terminal. Depending on what condition is
sensed, a message is returned stating that either the EPF was turned on
successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent condition is sensed. This
test is repeated once more five seconds later. If either test is not successful, the
test aborts (see first ABORT entry in the table below).
Table 10-208.
Error
Code

TEST #56 Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-208.
Error
Code

Page 10-747

TEST #56 Hybrid Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
EPF test passed. The message to turn on the power to
the station was successfully sent to the port.
1. Although this test never returns a FAIL result, after
running this test, the Error Log should be checked
for any entries with Error Type 257 to examine the
real results of this test.
2. If Error Type 257 does not appear in the Error Log
within 10 seconds after completion of this test, it is
safe to assume that the test sensed no problems
with the power to the station. To verify that the station
is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the
station, if available, and check that all the feature
buttons are operating.
3. If Error Type 257 appears in the Error Log, this
indicates some problem with the power to the
station. The system technician should check for a
short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective
voice terminal, or an incorrect type of terminal.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-748

Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57)
This test checks the amount of reflection from the Hybrid loop around circuitry
and a Conference Test. Please be aware that if no station is connected to the
port being tested, the results of the test are not valid. The Tone-Clock circuit pack
places a 1004-Hz tone on a time slot that the port circuit is listening on. A GPTD
is connected to another time slot that the same port circuit is talking on. The
on-board microprocessor places the port in the loop around mode and the GPTD
measures the level of the reflected signal.
The Conference Test is performed after the Circuit Test. The Conference Circuit
Test verifies that the NPE is able to listen to several test tones and correctly
conference them together. The test is executed in two parts. The first half of the
test checks the operation of the NPE’s first three conference channels. The NPE
is put in the loop around mode and instructed to talk on a selected time slot and
listen to the 1004-Hz tone using the first three Conference Channels. The signal
level and noise level of the conferenced output are then measured using a GPTD
and checked to verify that they are within an acceptable range.
The second half of the Conference Test checks the operation of the NPE’s
remaining four Conference Channels and follows the same procedure as the
preceding paragraph.
Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-749

Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-750

Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension number of
the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook)
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-751

Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
7

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Conference Test failed. User may be able to use
conference circuit without difficulty in some cases. In
other extreme cases, conference calling will be totally
restricted.
The failure may be due to off-board circumstances, the
most common of which is an off-hook occurring during
the test. Also, check the error logs against the
GPTD-BD, the TONE-BD, and the TONE-PT.
1. This error can be caused by a disconnected
terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected
and the wiring is OK.
2. Then, issue the display port and the status station
commands to determine if the station is idle. If it is
idle, issue the test port command for this port.
3. If test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and
the release port commands, and then retest the
port.
4. It is possible that the port may still be functional from
a user’s point of view.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-752

Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
57

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Hybrid Circuit Test failed. This could result in noisy or
bad connections.
1. This error can be caused by a disconnected
terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected
and the wiring is OK.
2. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator
circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack
using the test board PCSS short command.
3. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
4. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails,
replace the Hybrid Line circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test
fails for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power
problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power
unit circuit pack is present, the 631DB AC power
unit may be defective. (The 631DB power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by an AC
source. The 645B power unit is used in a medium
cabinet powered by a DC power source.) The
system may contain either a TN736 or a TN752
power unit circuit pack OR a 631DB AC power
unit, but not both types of power units. To
investigate problems with a 631DB AC power unit,
refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for
AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance
documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B DC power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier
Port Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems)
Maintenance documentation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-753

Table 10-209. TEST #57 Hybrid Circuit and Conference
Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test passed. The
hybrid circuitry is transmitting properly.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and
connections.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test (#58)
This test checks the control channel between the SPE and the port’s digital
circuitry. The SPE sends transparent data to the on-board microprocessor and
compares the data echoed back. This test is repeated three times.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-754

Table 10-210. TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop
Around Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension number of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then the
port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use
(off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not
busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension number of
the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook)
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-755

Table 10-210. TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop
Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1,2,3

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and the port
is not transmitting properly. This port is not operable.
1. Retry the test.
2. If the failure still occurs, issue the busyout and the
release busy commands, and then retest.
3. If the failure is occurring on more than one port on
the board, suspect the board.
4. If the failure is occurring on several boards in the
same carrier, escalate the problem.
5. If the failure still occurs and appears to be isolated to
one port, check all wiring to the set and all set
connections.
6. Replace the circuit pack as a last resort.

PASS

Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop Around Test passed. The
control channel is transmitting properly.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
circuit pack tests, and by examining the station,
wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-756

Table 10-210. TEST #58 Hybrid Line Local Digital Loop
Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test
(#59)
This test checks the digital control pair from the port circuit to the terminal. The
on-board microprocessor sends a message to the terminal and checks for a
proper return message. This test is repeated three times, with two out of the three
attempts passing being sufficient for this test to pass. [G1] This test will run if the
station is in-service or out-of-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-757

Table 10-211. TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital
Loop Around Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

ABORT

A request for a remote station audit aborted even though
all internal resources were correctly allocated.
1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, release
the port via the release port UUCSSpp command or
the release station extension command, and then
run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the
display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in use
(off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is not
busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-758

Table 10-211. TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
2000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1,2,3

FAIL

No response was received within the allowable time
period on one of the transmissions to the terminal. This
indicates that something is wrong with the data link to
the voice terminal. This could be a sleeping set problem
or it may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective
set.
1. Check for errors in the error log, for example, error
1537.
2. Remotely issue the busyout and release busy
commands, and run the short test sequence on the
port to check for other errors associated with the port
or terminal.
3. Check the wiring to the set if it appears that the
terminal is not responding to any tests; otherwise,
replace the terminal and rerun the test.
4. If the test still fails, replace the circuit pack and
reconnect the original terminal.

PASS

Hybrid Line Remote Digital Loop Around Test passed.
The hybrid circuit pack is sending and receiving proper
messages to and from the voice terminal.
1. If problems still exist, investigate using other circuit
pack tests and by examining the station, wiring, and
connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Page 10-759

Table 10-211. TEST #59 Hybrid Line Remote Digital
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test (#60)
For this test, the software lights the lamps on the terminal based on the status
record contained in the processor. The lamp updates run only if the station is
in-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-212.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-760

TEST #60 Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
A request for a remote station lamp update aborted
even though all internal resources were correctly
allocated.
1. Look in the error log for error type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, release
the port via the release port UUCSSpp command or
the release station extension command, and then
run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

ABORT

The station is in a ready for service or an out of service
state. This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or
defective set.
1. Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is
correct.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-212.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-761

TEST #60 Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

Hybrid Line Lamp Updates completed successfully.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
circuit pack tests, and by examining the station,
wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-212.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-762

TEST #60 Hybrid Line Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Hybrid Line Audits Test (#61)
This is a series of three tests that are classified as audits. These audits abort if
attempted on an out-of-service station. The tests are as follows:
■

Switchhook Audit - This is an update of the SPE records according to the
circuit packs’ records.

■

Bad Scan Inquiry - A message is sent uplink that contains a count that is
generated due to certain events relating to the data link conditions. This is
an indication of data transmission problems between the Hybrid circuit
pack and the voice terminal.

■

EPF Inquiry - The status of the Electronic Power Feed is sent uplink.
Possible conditions are: EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, EPF-no-load, and
EPF-on-overcurrent.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-213.
Error
Code

Page 10-763

TEST #61 Hybrid Line Audits Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error

1

ABORT

The test was aborted due to an internal system error
during the switchhook audit.

2

ABORT

Internal System Error occurred during bad scan inquiry
audit.
1. Make sure that the station is not in an out of service
state.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

ABORT

This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, the
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-213.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-764

TEST #61 Hybrid Line Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp to determine the station
extension number of the port. Use the status station
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port
is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension number of
the port. Use the status station command to determine
the service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (Refer to the "Status Commands" section in
Chapter 10, "Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting. Attendants are always in use (off-hook),
if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied
out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-213.
Error
Code

Page 10-765

TEST #61 Hybrid Line Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

Hybrid Line Audits Test passed.
1. Although this test always return a PASS result, it may
enter Error Types 257 or 513 into the Error Log. To
determine if there are any problems that don’t show
up in the test result, look for these error types in the
Error Log.
2. If these errors appear in the Error Log, or if user
complaints still exist, investigate by using other
circuit pack tests, and by examining the station,
wiring, and connections.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test (#62)
In this update, a "ringer on" or a "ringer off" message is sent to the firmware to
start and stop the ringer on the set.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-214.
Error
Code
3

Page 10-766

TEST #62 Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this Error Type is present, the
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension number of the port. Use the status
station command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 10, "Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids" for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook), if the handset is plugged in and the port
is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

Hybrid Station Ringer Update passed
1. If complaints still exist, investigate using other circuit
pack tests on this circuit pack, and by examining the
terminal, wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line)

Table 10-214.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-767

TEST #62 Hybrid Line Ringer Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
INADS (INADS Link)

Page 10-768

INADS (INADS Link)
10

MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
INADS

Alarm
Level
none

Initial Command
to Run
test inads-link

Full Name of MO
INADS Link

The INADS Link MO represents the software and communications link required
by the switch to make a call to the Initialization and Administration System
(INADS). The purpose of the INADS Link MO is to check the communications link
between the DEFINITY Generic 1 and INADS and verify that the alarm notification
process works correctly. An INADS technician can test the process remotely to
verify that alarms are reported to INADS, or a system technician may want to test
the connection while on-site at installation time or during subsequent service
calls.
Although the INADS Link MO is never alarmed, the errors are logged. The errors
are only logged as a result of the test inads-link command being issued.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
The Hardware Error Log entries are described as part of the INADS Link Test
description.

Short and Long Test Sequences
The test inads-link command is different from other test commands. This
command does not have a long or short option, and the test on the INADS Link
does not have an associated test number. When the command is different from
other test commands. This command does not have a long or short option, and
the test on the INADS Link does not have an associated test number. When the
test inads-link command is issued, the user immediately sees either the
"Command successfully completed" or "Command failed" message command is
issued, the user immediately sees either the "Command successfully completed"
or "Command failed" message.

INADS Link Test (no test number)
The INADS Link Test attempts to place a call to INADS (in the background) to
verify the communications link to INADS. When the test inads-link command is
entered, the user immediately sees either "Command successfully completed" or
"Command failed." The "Command failed" message appears when a previously
run command is entered, the user immediately sees either "Command
successfully completed" or "Command failed" The "Command failed" message
appears when a previously run test inads-link command is in progress or the
system has active alarms which must be reported to INADS. The "Command
successfully completed" means the switch will start the attempt to call INADS in

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
INADS (INADS Link)

Page 10-769

two minutes (the test still runs even if Alarm Origination is disabled). The
two-minute delay allows a remote INADS technician time enough to hang up the
call and thus free up the INADS line so that the switch can call INADS back. As
error conditions are encountered, errors are logged against INADS. Error codes
1 through 9 can be logged if the test result was "Command successfully
completed" and Error Codes 10 and 11 can be logged if the test result was
"Command failed." An error is also logged against INADS if the call to INADS
finally succeeds. The INADS software (release 3.2 or later) recognizes this
special "test inads" type of alarm and automatically opens and then closes a
trouble ticket which indicates that the reason for the trouble ticket is a command
is in progress or the system has active alarms which must be reported to INADS.
The "Command successfully completed" means the switch will start the attempt
to call INADS in two minutes (the test still runs even if Alarm Origination is
disabled). The two-minute delay allows a remote INADS technician time enough
to hang up the call and thus free up the INADS line so that the switch can call
INADS back. As error conditions are encountered, errors are logged against
INADS. Error codes 1 through 9 can be logged if the test result was "Command
successfully completed" and Error Codes 10 and 11 can be logged if the test
result was "Command failed." An error is also logged against INADS if the call to
INADS finally succeeds. The INADS software (release 3.2 or later) recognizes
this special "test inads" type of alarm and automatically opens and then closes a
trouble ticket which indicates that the reason for the trouble ticket is a test
inads-link command. The trouble ticket alarm contains a TESTING INADS LINK
description field.
After entering the command, it may take as long a nine minutes for the switch to
place the call and for INADS to respond. The Error Log should be examined (use
the category inads) 10 minutes after successfully entering the command to
determine if the call was successful.
Use the following table to interpret the Error Log entries.
Table 10-215.
Error
Code

INADS Link Error Log Entries Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1

0

The call was successfully placed to INADS. No trouble found.

2

0

Informative error indicating that alarm origination was disabled at
the time of the test. The test runs even if alarm origination is
disabled.
1. If Alarm Origination is desired, then enable this feature via the
Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
2. Repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
INADS (INADS Link)

Table 10-215.
Error
Code
3

INADS Link Error Log Entries Test — Continued

Test
Result
0

Page 10-770

Description/ Recommendation
The INADS connection is currently in use.
1. Wait 10 minutes and retry this command.

4

0

INADS did not answer the alarm origination call.
1. Verify INADS is up and running.
2. Verify the INADS phone number and switch product id are
correct via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
3. Enable alarm origination via the Maintenance-Related System
Parameters Form and test the PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape
Processor) by issuing the test processor a|b command. If
PR-MAINT Tests #102 and #103 do not pass, then refer to
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation.
4. Retry the command.

5

0

No INADS phone number administered.
1. Administer the INADS phone number via the
Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
2. Retry the command.

6

0

INADS did not send the acknowledgment message to the "test
inads alarm" message.
1. Verify the INADS phone number and switch product id are
correct via the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
2. Verify INADS is up and running.
3. Retry the command.

7

0

INADS sent a negative acknowledgment to the "test inads alarm"
message.

8

0

Internal system error; system received an invalid return code.

9

0

Internal system error
1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
INADS (INADS Link)

Table 10-215.
Error
Code
10

INADS Link Error Log Entries Test — Continued

Test
Result
0

Page 10-771

Description/ Recommendation
There is already a test inads-link command in progress.
1. Wait 10 minutes for the present command to finish.
2. Review the results of the present command by viewing the
Error Log and selecting the category "inads-link."

11

0

The switch is trying to report alarms to INADS. The test cannot be
run at this time.
1. Wait 10 minutes and retry the command.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-772

ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link
Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ISDN-LNK2

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port

ISDN-LNK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port

1.
2.

Where ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces.
For additional repair information, see also DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) or UDS1-BD
(Universal DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.

NOTE:
Use this Maintenance Object (ISDN-LNK) for maintenance tests, alarms,
and hardware errors when the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option on the
system-parameters customer form is set to a “n”. When the ISDN PRI over
PACCON is set to “y” use Maintenance Object ISDN-PLK.
When the ISDN-PRI over PACCON option is set to “n”, the ISDN-PRI D-channel
call control messages are transmitted over the TDM bus to the Processor
Interface circuit pack and you must use this Maintenance Object for PRI Link
problems.
An ISDN-PRI Signaling Link is known as a D-channel. D-channels are used to
transmit call control signaling for B-channels. The call control signaling for the
B-channels is combined and carried over separate ISDN-PRI D-channels. User
information (for example, digitized voice, digital data) channels are known as
bearer channels (B-channels); DS1 ISDN Trunks are B-channels and they carry
the user traffic. PRI endpoint ports are also B-channels that can carry Wideband
traffic.
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK) and the associated DS1/UDS1
ISDN Trunk (ISDN-TRK) or PRI endpoint port (PE-BCHL) use ports on a TN767 or
TN464B or later DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack (the TN722 cannot be used for
this application). The TN767 is used for 24 channel 1.544 Mbps systems. The
TN464B is used for 32 channel 2.048 Mbps systems. The TN464C or later can be
used for either 24 or 32 channel systems. A description of these circuit packs
appears in “DS1-BD” or “UDS1-BD”.
In a 24 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels)
may use any of the first 23 ports. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the
24th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 24th port may be used as a
B-channel. Refer to “ISDN-PRI Signaling Group” for further details.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-773

In a 32 channel system, the DS1/UDS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port
(B-channels) may use any of the ports 1-15 or 17-31, but the ISDN-PRI Signaling
Link Port must be the 16th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 16th port
may be used as a B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR)
Maintenance documentation for further details.
ISDN-LNK handles maintenance and recovery for the D-channel port on the DS1
carrying the signaling link. A problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
(D-channel) has an effect on all of the associated DS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI
endpoint ports (B-channels) since no call control information can be conveyed to
the far-end switch without it. Stable calls may remain operational, but no new
calls can be made.
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port itself depends on two other entities: the
DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack it resides on, and the Processor Interface Link
that provides the link to the processor. If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI
Signaling Link Port, also investigate the DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack and the
Processor Interface Link.

(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)

FRAMING

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•

PROCESSOR
(TN773/TN786)

PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN765)

TDM
BUS

UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 15)
PRIMARY SIGNALING
LINK
(PORT 16)
VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-LNK

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 17)

•
•
•

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)

PI-LINK

Figure 10-35.

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (32-Channel)

ISDN-TRK

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-774

SIGNALING
ISDN-LNK
(PORT 24)
VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
TDM
PI
PROCESSOR

CIRCUIT

(TN773/TN786)

PACK

BUS

(PORT 23)
DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

(TN765)

VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
(PORT 2)
VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
(PORT 1)

PI-LINK

Figure 10-36.

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (24-Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-775

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-216.

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

1

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1 (c)

18

0

busyout port
PCSSpp (c)

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp (c)

130 (a)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh (c)

1537 (b)

NPE Crosstalk
Test #6

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3 (c)

0

1.

Associated
Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. Indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for
more than 11 minutes. To clear, reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
b. The actual alarming level depends on the options chosen via the set
options command on the Manager terminal. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
alarms are treated as Station alarms, and their default alarming option is to
downgrade all alarms to Warning. The value shown in the preceding table
indicates the normal, unfiltered case (option "y" on the Set Options form).
c. ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The command
line entry to test the ISDN-LNK MO is: test port PCSSxx (sh or l), where ‘xx’ is
‘24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ‘16’ for 32-channel interfaces.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
Signaling Link Board Check (#643)

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

X

ND

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

1.

Page 10-776

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If
the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be
observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes
about 20 to 30 seconds to complete. This test runs only if the Processor Interface
link corresponding to this ISDN-LNK MO is busied out by system technician. The
Processor Interface link number can be determined from the
Communication-Interface Links form.
Table 10-217.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources for this test are not available. The ISDN-PRI link
may be up and servicing calls. First obtain the ISDN-PRI link number
(lnk-no) from the Communication-Interface Links form by issuing the
display communication-interfaces links command. Then,
determine the status of the ISDN-PRI link via the status link lnk-no
command. If the link is in-service, this test aborts. Therefore, to run
this test, the link must be busied out. No new ISDN-PRI calls can be
made while the link is in the busied-out state.
1. If the test must be run, busyout the link.
2. Retry the command.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may
be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots
out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy
traffic, repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Table 10-217.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-777

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The
system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present
or some Tone Detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to
TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to
TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific
port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the
circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the DS1-BD Interface circuit pack.

PASS

The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus.

Continued on next page

Signaling Link Board Check (#643)
This ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel depends on the health of the DS1
Interface circuit pack. This test checks the state of the DS1 Interface circuit pack
transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Table 10-218.
Error
Code

Page 10-778

TEST #643 Signaling Link Board Check

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.

1700

ABORT

Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with
this D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a
normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To
complete test on this port, either:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test
command, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by
entering change ds1 PCSS and set the field "Alarm when PRI
Endpoint Detached?" to "y."

8

FAIL

The DS1 circuit pack is not in-service.
1. Check the Hardware Error Log for entries logged against
DS1-BD and consult the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation for repair procedures.

PASS

The DS1 Interface circuit pack transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling
Link Port is in-service.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-779

ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link
Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ISDN-PLK2

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port

ISDN-PLK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port

1.
2.

Where ’pp’ is ’24’ for 24-channel interfaces, and ’16’ for 32-channel interfaces.
For additional repair information, see also PKT-CTRL (Packet Control), DS1-BD (DS1 Interface
Circuit Pack) or UDS1-BD (Universal DS1 Interface Circuit Pack).

NOTE:
Use this Maintenance Object (ISDN-PLK) for maintenance tests, alarms,
and hardware errors when the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option on the
system-parameters customer form is set to a “y” When the ISDN PRI over
PACCON is set to “n” use Maintenance Object ISDN-LNK.
The ISDN-PRI over PACCON option allows the PRI Links to be carried over the
PACCON (Packet Controller TN778 circuit board), increasing the system
ISDN-PRI capacity to the possible number of D-channels. An ISDN-PRI Signaling
Link is known as a D-channel. The D-channel is used to transmit call-control
signaling for the B-channels. B-channels (User information channels) are known
as bearer channels (B-channels for example, transmit digitized voice, digital
data); DS1 ISDN Trunks are B-channels and they carry the user traffic. PRI
endpoint ports are also B-channels that can carry Wideband traffic. The call
control signaling for the B-channels is combined and carried over the separate
ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel.
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is the port on a TN464C or later UDS1 Interface
circuit pack that carries D-channel messages to the processor. The ISDN-PRI
interface uses out-of-band signaling as opposed to robbed-bit, in-band
signaling. For G3s, and G3i, this port can be used as an interface to the TDM bus
or to the Packet bus. This is controlled by the “ISDN-PRI over PACCON” option.
When the option is set to “y” the ISDN-PRI D-channel messages are transmitted
over the Packet bus to the Packet Control circuit pack. The associated
maintenance object name of the UDS1 port used to carry the D-channel over the
Packet Bus is ISDN-PLK.
The B-channels associated with a ISDN-PRI D-channel can use ports on the
same circuit pack or ports on other TN464C or later or TN767 DS1 Interface
circuit packs (the TN722 cannot be used for this application).
The TN767 DS1 interfaces is used for 24 channel 1.544 Mbps systems. The
TN464C or later can be used for either 24 or 32 channel systems. The 32-channel

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-780

(31 DS0 channels + 1 framing channel on a 2.048 Mbps link) are only supported
on TN464 series circuit packs. A description of these circuit packs appears in
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation.
In a 24 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels)
may use any of the first 23 ports. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port must be the
24th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 24th port may be used as a
B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) Maintenance
documentation for further details.
In a 32 channel system, the DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI endpoint port (B-channels)
may use any of the ports 1-15 or 17-31, but the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
must be the 16th port. In certain configurations (NFAS), the 16th port may be
used as a B-channel. Refer to the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR)
Maintenance documentation for further details.
ISDN-PLK handles maintenance and recovery for the D-channel port on the DS1
carrying the signaling link. A problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
(D-channel) has an effect on all of the associated DS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI
endpoint ports (B-channels) since no call control information can be conveyed to
the far-end switch or Terminal Adapter without it. Stable calls may remain
operational, but no new calls can be made.
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-PLK) itself depends on two other
entities: the UDS1 interface circuit pack (TN464) it resides on, and the Packet
bus which provides the link to the processor. If there are problems with the
ISDN-PLK, also investigate the TN464 UDS1 interface circuit pack (UDS1-BD)
and the packet bus (PKT-BUS).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-781

Packet Bus
(Port 0)

Processor
(TN786)

Packet
Control
Circuit
Pack
(TN778)

D-Channel

UDS1
Interface
Circuit
Pack
(TN464*)

B-Channels

Framing

Voice or Data
(Port 1)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 15)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Primary Signaling
Link
(Port 16)

ISDN-LNK
(D-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 17)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 31)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

TDM Bus
32-Channel
*TN464 C or later

Figure 10-37.

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Interactions (32-Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-782

Pa cke t B us

Processor
(TN 786 )

Packet
C on trol
C ircu it
Pack
(TN 77 8)

D -C h an nel

UDS1
Interface
C ircuit
Pack
(T N 46 4*)

B -C h ann els

Voice or D a ta
(Port 1)

IS D N -T R K
(B-C ha nne l)

Vo ice or D ata
(Po rt 2 )

IS D N -T R K
(B-C ha nne l)

Vo ice or D ata
(Po rt 2 3)

IS D N -T R K
(B-C ha nne l)

P rim ary Sig naling
Link
(Po rt 2 4)

IS D N -P LK
(D -C ha nne l)

T D M Bus
24 -C h ann el
Physica l conn ectio n
L ogical co nne ction
*TN 4 64 C o r later

Figure 10-38.

FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-783

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-219.
Error
Type
0

1

18(a)

ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp2

0

busyout port
PCSSpp*

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp2

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp2

WARNING

OFF

46210

test board PCSSpp21

1793 (d)
3585 (e)

46222

3841 (f)

46211

3842 (g)

46223

3843 (h)

1.
2.

Test to Clear Value

0

130 (b)
1537 (c)

Associated Test

MINOR

Signaling Port Packet
Bus (LAN) Loopback
test (#939)

ON

test port PCSSpp21

Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
pp is 24-channel interfaces and 16 for 32-channel interfaces.

Notes:
a. The D-channel is demand busied out. No calls can be made over this
D-channel.
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
c. “Link error” This error occurs when the port receives an invalid frame over
the D-channel. This error normally indicates an off-board problem usually
related to transmission errors on the DS1 facility. Execute the list
measurements ds1-log command for the UDS1 TN464 circuit pack on
which the D-channel resides. If the UDS1 is reporting some errors, then
the DS1 facility has experienced transmission problems which could have
caused the ISDN-PLK to report a Link Error. If the UDS1 is not reporting
errors, execute the long test sequence for the D-channel (ISDN-SGR).
Investigate any errors, if there are none execute a long test sequence for
the UDS1 circuit pack (UDS1-BD) and investigate any errors.
If no errors are reported, the Link Error is probably not affecting service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-784

d. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. Look for and resolve
UDS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log.
e. “Transmit FIFO Overflow error” This error indicates that the circuit pack is
having problems transmitting data to the Packet Bus, thus affecting the
conveyance of signaling information over the D-channel. Specifically, this
error occurs when the Packet Bus transmit buffers overflow. This condition
probably indicates a hardware problem.
The actual alarming level depends on the options chosen via the set
options command on the G3-MT terminal. ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
alarms are treated as Station alarms, and their default alarming option is to
downgrade all alarms to Warning. The value shown in the preceding table
indicates the normal, unfiltered case (option "y" on the Set Options form).
f. “Bad DLCI error” This error occurs when a LAPD frame is received across
the DS1 facility which contains a DLCI which does not have a valid entry in
the on-board translation memory. This error normally indicates an
off-board problem usually related to a broken endpoint or a state
mismatch between a remote endpoint and the local call processing
software. Maintenance will not start any testing or generate any alarms in
response to this error.
g. “Receive FIFO Overflow error” This error occurs when the circuit pack
detects an overflow of its receive buffers. If it occurs frequently, it may
indicate a LAPD parameter mismatch between the two end-points of a
packet switched connection. LAPD should be able to recover from this
problem, but it may degrade the performance of the Packet Bus.
Maintenance will not start any testing or generate any alarms in response
to this error.
h. This error occurs when the Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback Test
(#939) fails. Run the long test sequence and pay particular attention to the
results of Test #939.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. REMINDER: The command line entry to test the
ISDN-PLK MO is: test port PCSSpp (sh or l), where ‘pp’ is ‘24’ for 24-channel
interfaces, and ‘16’ for 32-channel interfaces.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Signaling Port Bus Loopback Test (#939)
Signaling Link Board Check (#643)

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

X

ND

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

1.

Page 10-785

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Signaling Link Board Check (#643)
This test checks the state of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack (TN464C or later)
transporting the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link.
Table 10-220.
Error
Code

TEST #643 Signaling Link Board Check

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1700

ABORT

Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this
D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal
abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete test
on this port, either:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test
command, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by
entering change ds1 PCCSS and set the field "Alarm when
PRI Endpoint Detached?" to "y."

8

FAIL

The UDS1 circuit pack (TN464C or later) is not in-service.
1. Check the Hardware Error Log for entries logged against
UDS1-BD and consult the UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation for repair procedures.

PASS

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack transporting the ISDN-PRI
Signaling Link Port is in-service.

Continued on next page

Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback Test (#939)
This test verifies the connectivity of an ISDN-PRI Signaling Port (D-channel)
across the Packet Bus, also known as the LAN bus. It will execute only if the port
is busied out. Failure of this test indicates a fault associated with the port
hardware on the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Page 10-786

Packet
Control
Circuit
Pack
(TN778)

Processor
(TN786)

UDS1
Interface
Circuit
Pack
(TN464*)

To far end
switch hardware

Packet Bus
*TN464 C or later

Figure 10-39.

Table 10-221.
Error
Code
1015

Signaling Port Packet Bus (LAN) Loopback

TEST #939 Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port is not in the out-of-service state. Use the busyout port
PCSSpp command to place it in the out-of-service state and repeat
this test

! CAUTION:
The busyout will prevent new call originations on all
B-channels in the signaling group until the port is released.
1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus in this port network is out of service.
1. Follow repair procedures for the Packet Bus
2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test
(939).

1141

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is out of service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for PKT-CTRL.
2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test
(939).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-PLK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)

Table 10-221.
Error
Code
1144

Page 10-787

TEST #939 Signaling Port Packet Bus Loopback — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Bus in the PPN is out of service.
1. Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus.
2. Enter test port PCSSpp long and check the results of this test
(939).

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Loopback test has failed.
1. If this test fails repeatedly wait until all of the ports on the board
are idle (not in use) and reset the circuit pack. To reset the
circuit pack enter the commands busyout board PCSS and
reset PCSS.
2. Repeat the test, and if the test continues to fail replace the
circuit pack.

PASS

1. Connectivity of the D-channel over the Packet Bus is
operational.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-788

ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling
Group)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

ISDN-SGR

MINOR

test sig-group 

ISDN-PRI Signaling Group

ISDN-SGR

WARNING

test sig-group 

ISDN-PRI Signaling Group

1.

Where  is a number 1-8 and the test sequence can be either s (short) or l (long).

An ISDN-PRI Signaling Group is a collection of DS1/UDS1 ISDN Trunks or PRI
endpoint ports (B-channels) for which a given ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port
(D-channel) carries signaling information. ISDN-PRI requires the use of one of the
following DS1 interface circuit packs:
TN767

24-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over PI-BD

TN464B

32-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over PI-BD

TN464C or later

24- or 32-channel with ISDN-PRI D-channel over
PI-BD or PKT-CTRL (PACCON)

See DS1-BD and UDS1-BD Maintenance documentation for a description of
these circuit packs. See DS1/CEPT1/ISDN-PRI Reference, 55-025-101, for more
information on ISDN.
NOTE:
If a ISDN-PRI over PACCON (Packet Control Circuit pack) is to be used
then only the TN464C or later may be used for the D-channel Signaling.
For 24 channel interfaces, the first 23 ports on the circuit pack are used as
B-channels. The 24th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel
depending on the type of Signaling Group used, as described below.
For 32 channel interfaces, ports 1-15 and 17-31 on the circuit pack are used as
B-channels. The 16th port may be used as a B-channel or as a D-channel
depending on the type of Signaling Group used, as described below.
There are two types of Signaling Groups:
■

Facility Associated Signaling (FAS) (supported by all country protocols)

■

Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS) (supported by country protocol
1 only)

The figures following this discussion illustrate each of the configurations.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-789

In an FAS Signaling Group, the 24th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 24
channel interfaces) or the 16th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 32
channel interfaces) is always the D-channel that carries signaling information for
the other ports (B-channels) on the circuit pack. If a Packet Control circuit pack is
used then only the TN464C or later circuit pack may be used.
In an NFAS Signaling Group, the 24th port of a DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 24
channel interfaces) or the 16th port of a DS1 Interface circuit pack (for 32
channel interfaces) is administered as a D-channel. The D-channel carries
signaling information for the other ports (B-channels) on that circuit pack. That
D-channel can also carry signaling information for any of the ports on other DS1
Interface circuit packs in the NFAS Signaling Group. As a result, the 24th port on
other 24-channel DS1 Interface circuit packs and the 16th port on other
32-channel DS1 Interface circuit packs can be used as B-channels. A D-channel
in an NFAS Group can signal for B-channels on a total of 20 DS1 Interface circuit
packs. This configuration is known as NFAS Simplex. If a Packet Control circuit
pack is used then only the TN464C or later circuit pack may be used to carry the
D-channel, however other DS1/UDS1 interface circuit packs may be used to
carry only B-channels.
In addition to NFAS Simplex, there is another type of NFAS Group called NFAS
Duplex. This provides the user with more reliability, which is desirable because
NFAS permits the D-channel to signal for so many B-channels. NFAS Duplex
allows the administration of a backup D-channel, which remains in a Standby
state until the Active D-channel goes down. If the Active D-channel does go
down, the backup D-channel takes over and provides signaling for all the
B-channels in the signaling group. In the case that a Packet Control circuit pack
is used then only the TN464C or later may be used to carry the D-channels.
B-channels may be carried by any DS1/UDS1 interfaces.
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Group itself depends on three other entities: the DS1
Interface circuit pack on which the D-channel(s) resides, the ISDN-PRI Signaling
Link Port(s), and the interface link that provides connectivity to the processor
(either the Processor Interface Link or the Packet Control circuit pack). If there
are any problems with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group, also investigate the
ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port(s), the DS1 Interface circuit pack(s), and either the
Processor Interface Link or the Packet Control circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-790

PI
VOICE OR

CIRCUIT
PACK

DATA

(TN765)

(PORT 1)

ISDN-TRK

D-CHANNEL
"DEFINITY"

DS1/UDS1

P

COMMUNICATIONS

INTERFACE

O

SYSTEM

R

GENERIC 1

T

CIRCUIT
TDM BUS

PACK

VOICE OR
DATA
(PORT 23)

ISDN-TRK

PRIMARY
SIGNALING
LINK
ISDN-LNK
(PORT 24)

LOGICAL CONNECTION
PHYSICAL CONNECTION

Figure 10-40.

FAS ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over Processor
Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-791

(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)

PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN765)

"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
GENERIC 1

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•
D-CHANNEL

P
O
R
T

FRAMING

TDM BUS

UDS1*
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 15)
PRIMARY SIGNALING
LINK
(PORT 16)
VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-LNK
ISDN-TRK

(PORT 17)

•
•
•
VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 31)

LOGICAL CONNECTION
PHYSICAL CONNECTION
* TN464C OR LATER

Figure 10-41.

FAS ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over Processor
Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-792

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE

PI

CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT

PACK

PACK

VOICE OR
DATA
(PORT 23)

ISDN-TRK

(TN765)
PRIMARY
D-CHANNEL
"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS

SIGNALING
LINK

P

SYSTEM

R

GENERIC 1

T

ISDN-LNK

(PORT 24)

O
TDM BUS

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 24)

LOGICAL CONNECTION
PHYSICAL CONNECTION

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 24)

Figure 10-42.

NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over
Processor Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-793

(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)

FRAMING
ISDN-TRK

•
•
•
UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 15)
PRIMARY SIGNALING
LINK
(PORT 16)

PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN765)

"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
GENERIC 1

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 17)

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)
TDM BUS
(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)
UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 31)
LOGICAL CONNECTION
(PORT 0)

PHYSICAL CONNECTION

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)
UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

ISDN-TRK

FRAMING
ISDN-TRK

•
•
•
VOICE OR DATA

ISDN-TRK

FRAMING
ISDN-TRK

•
•
•
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)

Figure 10-43.

ISDN-LNK

•
•
•

D-CHANNEL
P
O
R
T

ISDN-TRK

ISDN-TRK

NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over
Processor Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-794

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE

PI

CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT

PACK

PACK

VOICE OR
DATA
(PORT 23)

ISDN-TRK

(TN765)
PRIMARY
PORT
"DEFINITY"

D-CHANNEL

SIGNALING

TDM BUS

(PORT 24)

LINK

1

COMMUNICATIONS

ISDN-LNK

SYSTEM
GENERIC 1

PORT

D-CHANNEL

2

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 24)

LOGICAL CONNECTION
PHYSICAL CONNECTION

VOICE OR
DATA

ISDN-TRK

(PORT 1)

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

VOICE OR
DATA
(PORT 23)

ISDN-TRK

SECONDARY
SIGNALING
LINK

ISDN-LNK

(PORT 24)

Figure 10-44.

NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (24 Channel) over
Processor Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-795

(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)

FRAMING
ISDN-TRK

•
•
•

UDS1
VOICE OR DATA
INTERFACE
ISDN-TRK
(PORT 15)
CIRCUIT
PACK
PRIMARY SIGNALING
LINK
ISDN-LNK
(PORT 16)
PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN765)
"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
GENERIC 1

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 17)

ISDN-TRK

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•

PORT D-CHANNEL
1
TDM BUS
PORT D-CHANNEL
2

(PORT 0)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)
UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)

LOGICAL CONNECTION
(PORT 0)

PHYSICAL CONNECTION

FRAMING

ISDN-TRK

FRAMING

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 1)

ISDN-TRK

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 15)

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•

UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK

SECONDARY SIGNALING
LINK
ISDN-LNK
(PORT 16)
VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 17)

ISDN-TRK

VOICE OR DATA
(PORT 31)

ISDN-TRK

•
•
•

Figure 10-45.

NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (32 Channel) over
Processor Interface

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-796

Packet B us

P roce sso r
(T N78 6)

Packet
Co ntro l
C ircuit
Pack
(TN7 78 )

D-Ch an ne l

UD S 1
Inte rfa ce
Circu it
Pa ck
(T N46 4*)

B -Cha nn els

Vo ice or D ata
(Por t 1 )

IS D N-TRK
(B -Cha nn el)

Vo ice o r Da ta
(Po rt 2)

IS D N-TRK
(B -Cha nn el)

Vo ice o r Da ta
(Po rt 2 3)

IS D N-TRK
(B -Cha nn el)

P rim a ry Sign aling
L in k
(Port 24 )

IS D N-P LK
(D-Ch an ne l)

TDM B u s
2 4-Ch an ne l
P hysica l co nn ectio n
L ogical co nn ection
*TN4 64 C or later

Figure 10-46.

FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-797

Pa cke t B u s
(Po r t 0 )

P ro ce ss or
(TN 7 8 6 )

Pa cke t
C o n tro l
C ircu it
Pa ck
(TN 77 8 )

D -C h an n e l

UDS1
Inte rfa ce
C ircu it
Pa ck
(T N 4 6 4*)

B -C h a n n els

Vo ice o r D a ta
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
(B -C ha n n e l)

Vo ice o r D a ta
(Por t 1 5 )

IS D N -T R K
(B -C ha n n e l)

P rim a r y S ign a lin g
L in k
(Por t 1 6 )

IS D N -P LK
(D -C h a n ne l)

Vo ice o r D a ta
(Po r t 1 7 )

IS D N -T R K
(B -C ha n n e l)

Vo ice o r D a ta
(Po r t 3 1 )

IS D N -T R K
(B -C ha n n e l)

TD M B u s
32 -C h a nn e l
P hysica l co n ne ction
Lo g ica l c o nn e ctio n
*T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r

Figure 10-47.

Fra m in g

FAS ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-798

P a cke t B us

D -C h a n n e l

P ro c e s s o r
(T N 7 8 6 )

UDS1
In te r fa c e
C ir c u it
P a ck
(T N 4 6 4*)

P a ck et
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
P a ck
(T N 7 7 8 )
B -C h a n n e ls

V o ic e o r D a ta
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 2)

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 2 3 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

P r im a r y S ig n a lin g
L in k
(P o r t 2 4 )

IS D N -P L K
(D -C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P or t 2 4 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P or t 2 4 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

D S 1 /U D S 1
In te r fa c e
C ir c u it
P a ck
(T N 4 6 4*)

B -C h a n n e ls

TDM Bus

D S 1 /U D S 1
In te r fa c e
C ir c u it
P a ck
(T N 4 6 4*)

P h y s ic a l c o n n e c tio n
L o g i c a l c o n n e c tio n
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r
B -C h a n n e ls

Figure 10-48.

NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-799

Pa cket B u s
(P o rt 0 )

F r a m in g

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o rt 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

D -C h a n n e l

P ro c e s s o r
(T N 7 8 6 )

U DS1
I n te r fa c e
C ir c u i t
Pa ck
(T N 4 6 4 *)

P acke t
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 7 7 8 )

(P o rt 1 5 )
P r i m a r y S ig n a l i n g
L in k
(P o r t 1 6 )
V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 1 7 )

IS D N -P L K
( D - C h a n n e l)
IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

B - C h a n n e ls
V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 3 1 )
(P o r t 0 )

IS D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)
F r a m in g

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o rt 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 3 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

U DS1
I n te r fa c e
C ir c u i t
Pa ck
(T N 4 6 4 *)

B - C h a n n e ls

(P o r t 0 )

TD M B us

F r a m in g

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o rt 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 3 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

U DS1
I n te r fa c e
C ir c u i t
Pa ck
(T N 4 6 4 *)

P h y s i c a l c o n n e c t io n
L o g ic a l c o n n e c t i o n
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r
B - C h a n n e ls

Figure 10-49.

NFAS Simplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-800

Packet Bus

D-Channel

Processor
(TN786)

UDS1
Interface
Circuit
Pack
(TN464*)

Packet
Control
Circuit
Pack
(TN778)
B-Channels

Voice or Data
(Port 1)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 2)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 23)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Primary Signaling
Link
(Port 24)

ISDN-PLK
(D-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 1)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 24)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

DS1/UDS1
Interface
Circuit
Pack
(TN464*)

B-Channels

(Port 1)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

(Port 2)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

(Port 23)

ISDN-TRK
(B-Channel)

TDM Bus

B-Channels

Physical connection
Logical connection
*TN464 C or later

D-Channel
Packet Bus

Figure 10-50.

UDS1
Interface
Circuit
Pack
(TN464*)

Secondary Signaling
ISDN-PLK
Link
(D-Channel)
(Port 24)

NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (24
Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-801

Packet B us
(P o r t 0 )

F ra m in g

Vo ic e o r D a t a
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a t a

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

D -C h a n n e l

P ro ce ss o r
(T N 7 8 6 )

UDS1
I n t e r fa c e
C irc u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

Pa c ke t
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 7 7 8 )

(Po r t 1 5 )
P r im a r y S ig n a lin g
L in k
(Po r t 1 6 )
V o ic e o r D a t a
(Po r t 1 7 )

IS D N -P L K
( D -C h a n n e l)
IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

B -C h a n n e ls
V o ic e o r D a t a
(P o r t 3 1 )
(P o r t 0 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)
F ra m in g

V o ic e o r D a ta
(P o r t 1 )

I S D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

Vo ic e o r D a t a
(Po r t 3 1 )

I S D N -T R K
( B - C h a n n e l)

UDS1
I n t e r fa c e
C irc u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

B -C h a n n e ls

(P o r t 0 )

T D M Bus

B -C h a n n e ls

P h y s ic a l c o n n e c t io n
L o g ic a l c o n n e c t io n
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r

D -C h a n n e l
Packet B us

Figure 10-51.

UDS1
I n t e r fa c e
C irc u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

F ra m in g

Vo ic e o r D a t a
(Po r t 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

V o ic e o r D a t a
(Po r t 1 5 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

S e c o n d a r y S ig n a lin g
IS D N -P L K
L in k
( D -C h a n n e l)
(Po r t 1 6 )
V o ic e o r D a t a
IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)
(Po r t 1 7 )

V o ic e o r D a t a
(P o r t 3 1 )

IS D N -T R K
( B -C h a n n e l)

NFAS Duplex ISDN-PRI Over PACCON Signaling Group (32 Channel)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-802

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-222.
Error
Codes
1

ISDN-PRI Signaling Group Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

0

Any

1 (a)

Any

none

257 (b)

Any

none

test sig-group


513 (c)

Any

none

test sig-group


769

Any

Primary Signaling
Link Hardware
Check (#636)

test sig-group


1025

Any

Secondary
Signaling Link
Hardware Check
(#639)

test sig-group


1793 (d)

Any

Layer 2 Status
(Test #647)

WARNING

OFF

test sig-group


2049 (e)

Any

Layer 2 Status
(Test #647)

WARNING

OFF

test sig-group


2305 (f)

Any

Remote Layer 3
Query (Test #637)

MINOR

OFF

test sig-group


3585 (g)

port
number

none

38403928 (h)

port
number

0

1.

Any

Test to Clear Value
test sig-group


none
none

Run the Short or Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the
recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This switch sent a message to the far-end switch or terminal adapter, and
the far-end did not respond in the allotted time. Possible causes include
link failure and congestion or outage at the far-end. The Aux Data field
contains Layer 3 protocol information used by internal counters.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-803

If no other symptoms are not present, no action is required. If Layer 3
communication is down, there should be indications in the form of alarms
and errors for link components. Check out other errors against ISDN-SGR,
ISDN-TRK, and other hardware components on the link.
There is no test to clear these errors. The error counter is decremented by
1 every 15 minutes.
b. This error indicates that the primary signaling channel connection has
been lost for more than 90 seconds. If a secondary signaling channel
does not exist or is not in-service, the associated B-channels will be
placed in the ISDN Maintenance/Far-End state. The B-channels will not be
usable for outgoing calls, although incoming calls will still be accepted.
The switch will automatically attempt to recover the signaling link. Pay
particular attention to the results of Test #636 (Primary Signaling Link
Hardware Check) in the test sequence. When the link does recover, the
B-channels will be negotiated back to the In-Service state and their alarms
will be retired.
When this error occurs, the state of the Signaling Group is changed to
out-of-service (verify using the status sig-group command).
c. This error indicates that the secondary signaling channel connection has
been lost for more than 90 seconds. If the primary signaling channel is not
in-service, B-channels will be placed in the ISDN Maintenance/Far-End
state. The B-channels will not be usable for outgoing calls, although
incoming calls will still be accepted. The switch will automatically attempt
to recover the signaling link. Pay particular attention to the results of Test
#639 (Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check) in the test sequence.
When the link does recover, the B-channels will be negotiated back to the
In-Service state and their alarms will be retired.
When this error occurs, the state of the Signaling Group is changed to
out-of-service (verify using the status sig-group command).
d. This error indicates a failure of the Layer 2 Status Query Test for the
primary signaling channel
e. This error indicates a failure of the Layer 2 Status Query Test for the
secondary signaling channel.
f. A specific message was sent to the far-end switch, and it did not respond
within the allotted time. Investigate elements of the ISDN PRI D-channel(s)
(ISDN-LNK, ISDN-PLK, ISDN-SGRP, PI-LINK, PI-PT, PKT-CTRL) for both
this switch and the Far-end switch. If Test #637 fails twice in a row, the
B-channels will be alarmed and made unavailable for outgoing calls
(although incoming calls will still be accepted). When Test #637 succeeds
and the Far-end switch starts responding properly, the DS1 ISDN Trunk
(B-channels) will be placed back into normal operation and their alarms
will be retired.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-804

g. A SERV or SERV ACK ISDN D-channel message has been received by a
non-US-type interface (country option other than 1 on the DS1
administration form). However, these messages are used only for duplex
NFAS signaling which is supported only by country protocol 1.
Thus, there may be a mismatch in administration between the local and
far-end switches. Consult with the customer’s network provider to
determine whether the D-channel is set up correctly on the far-end switch.
h. These error codes are used to report certain error messages received by
the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group for one of its associated B-channels. The
aux data field shows for which B-channel (port number) the message was
received.
The error code generated equals 3840+x, where x is a Cause Value
defined by the ISDN PRI Specification. Note that there is no Test to Clear
Value for these error types; selected ISDN cause values are placed in the
log when they are received, but no direct action or alarming is performed
solely in response to receiving them. They provide added data that may
prove useful when tracking down obscure networking and routing
problems. The following table provides more information:
Table 10-223.
Error
Code
3842

Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928

Description
A request has been
made to use a transit
network or common
carrier that cannot be
accessed.

Recommendation
1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the
Aux Data field), determine the trunk group
against which the error was reported.
2. Check all routing patterns containing this trunk
group for validity of interexchange carriers
requested (IXC field).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-223.
Error
Code
3846

Page 10-805

Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 — Continued

Description

Recommendation

The far-end switch has
indicated that the
B-channel (trunk) is not
acceptable for use in the
call for which it was
requested.

This could indicate an administration problem (for
example, the local switch and the far-end switch
have different B-channels administered), or could
reflect the occurrence of a normal race condition
(for example, the local switch has requested use of
a B-channel which the far-end switch had just
reserved for use on another call).
1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the
Aux Data field), determine the trunk group
against which the error was reported.
2. Issue the status trunk command for the
indicated trunk.
3. Refer to the ‘‘DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States’’
and ‘‘ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States’’ sections of
ISDN-TRK for recovery suggestions.

3858

The switch sent an ISDN
message to the far-end
switch or terminal
adapter which did not
respond in the allotted
time.

Possible causes include link failure and congestion
or outage at the far-end.

3878

The far-end switch has
indicated that the
network is not
functioning correctly and
that the condition may
last a relatively long
period of time (for
example, immediately
re-attempting the call
may not be successful).

1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the
Aux Data field, determine the trunk group
against which the error was reported.
2. Consult with the network provider to determine
the nature and expected duration of the out of
service condition.
3. Consider modifying all routing patterns
containing this trunk group, to route calls around
the network which is out of service.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-223.
Error
Code
3890

Page 10-806

Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 — Continued

Description

Recommendation

A request to use a
network service (e.g.,
SDN) has been denied.
Administration
somewhere on the
network has indicated
that the requested
service has not been
subscribed to or
purchased for this trunk.

This could be a local administration problem only, or
a mismatch between the local administration and
that of the network provider.
1. From the circuit pack and port number (in the
Aux Data field), determine the trunk group
against which the error was reported.
2. Display the trunk group form: If the trunk group
is Call-by-Call (Service Type is ‘‘cbc’’), check all
routing pattern forms containing this trunk group
to see if the Service/Feature fields contain the
correct network services purchased for this
trunk. If the trunk group is not Call-by-Call,
check that the Service Type field contains the
single network service purchased for this trunk.
3. If local administration appears correct, consult
with the customer and/or the network provider to
determine the services that the customer has
subscribed to for this trunk group.

3892

Protocol detail; may offer
a clue if customer is
having ISDN calls
denied with an
unexpected intercept
tone.

If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept
tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints
and no other cause can be found, provide the next
tier with this Error Log information.

3894

Protocol detail; may offer
a clue if customer is
having ISDN calls
denied with an
unexpected intercept
tone.

First, eliminate any transitory state mismatch
problems by issuing the test port PCSSpp
command for the trunk port shown in the aux data
field. Test #256 (Service State Audit) is the important
test in the sequence. If this passes satisfactorily, yet
the customer continues to complain of unexpected
intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI
endpoints and no other cause can be found,
provide the next tier with this Error Log information.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-223.
Error
Code

Page 10-807

Descriptions of Error Codes 3840-3928 — Continued

Description

Recommendation

3905

Protocol detail; may offer
a clue if customer is
having ISDN calls
denied with an
unexpected intercept
tone.

If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept
tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints
and no other cause can be found, provide the next
tier with this Error Log information.

3906

Protocol detail; may offer
a clue if customer is
having ISDN calls
denied with an
unexpected intercept
tone.

If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept
tones when accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints
and no other cause can be found, provide the next
tier with this Error Log information.

3909

A request to use a
network service has
been made, but the
network has rejected
the request because the
requested service is not
implemented.

Follow the recommendations listed above for error
type 3890.

3928

A call was denied
because of a basic
incompatibility between
the type of call and
either the facilities
selected by the routing
pattern or the called
user itself.

This error might be helpful as a clue if the customer
complains of receiving unexpected intercept tone
after accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints.
Determine the trunk group from the circuit pack and
port number (in the aux data field) and then check
the BCC fields of the pertinent routing patterns.
Also, investigate whether or not the calling and
called endpoints are compatible (for example, some
ISDN switches may not allow a voice station to call a
data extension).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-808

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#636)

X

X

ND

Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#639)

X

X

ND

Layer 2 Query Test (#647)

X

X

ND

Remote Layer 3 Query Test (#637)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#636)
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port itself depends on the health of the DS1/UDS1
Interface circuit pack on which it resides. This test will fail if there are problems
with either the ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel port or the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack.
The ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel also depends on the health of either the
Processor Interface Link or the Processor Control circuit pack providing
connectivity to the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack.
If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link, also investigate the
DS1/UDS1 circuit pack (DS1-BD/UDS1-BD) and the Processor Interface Link or
Packet Control (PI-LINK/PACCON) dependent upon which is used

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-809

PI

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE

CIRCUIT
PACK

TDM

CIRCUIT

BUS

PACK

TO FAR-END
SWITCH HARDWARE

(TN765)

Figure 10-52.

Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check (Test #636)

Packet
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 7 7 8 )

To fa r e n d
s w it c h h a r d w a r e

UDS1
I n t e r fa c e
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

Packet B us
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r

Figure 10-53.

Table 10-224.
Error
Code

PRI over PACCON Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check
(Test #636)

TEST #636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-224.
Error
Code
1700

Page 10-810

TEST #636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this
D-channel port is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal
abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete test
on this port, either:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry test
command, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by
entering change ds1 PCSS and set the field "Alarm when PRI
Endpoint Detached?" to "y".

4

FAIL

There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link. No DS1 ISDN
Trunk (B-channel) or wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made
until the problem is resolved.
1. Display the Communication-Interface Links Form via the to
determine which link is down (find the one that matches the DS1
interface circuit pack this ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port is on)
and then consult the procedures for Processor Interface Link.

8

FAIL

There is a problem with the DS1/UDS1 Circuit Pack, or the
ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (D-channel). No DS1 ISDN Trunk
(B-channel) or wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the
problem is resolved.
1. Consult the procedures for DS1/UDS1 Circuit Pack and the
ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK).

PASS

The basic physical connectivity of the primary D-channel is intact
and functional. Try this test repeatedly to ensure the link is up and
to uncover any transitory problems.

Continued on next page

Remote Layer 3 Query (#637)
This test will query the far-end switch or terminal adapter to determine if the
signaling connection is functioning properly at Layer 3. It will select a B-channel
in the in-service or maintenance service state and send an ISDN Layer 3
SERVice message, which requires a response from the far end (similar to
performing Test #256 on an ISDN trunk. The test will not be performed if there are
no B-channels in an appropriate ISDN service state (as when none are
administered or they are all out of service).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-811

NOTE:
The service state can be displayed by using the status trunk  or status pri-endpoint command.
As is the case with Test #256 for an ISDN trunk, a PASS only indicates that a
message was composed and sent to the far-end switch or terminal adapter. The
ISDN PRI Specification allows up to 2 minutes for a response. Check the Error
Log for ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) errors of type 2305 for evidence
of a Remote Layer 3 Query failure.
Tests #639 and #636 check the health of the D-channels and DS1/UDS1
Interface Circuit Packs. As shown in the figures below, Test #637 goes one step
further by checking the communication path from the processor, through the
Processor Interface or Packet Control circuit pack over the TDM or Packet Bus
through the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack, and on to the far-end switch or
terminal adapter. A special ISDN message is sent to the far-end switch or
terminal adapter, which must respond within a specified amount of time. This test
is designed to ensure that the communication path between the switch and the
far-end is up and operational, and that the two endpoints can properly exchange
ISDN control messages.

PI
CIRCUIT
PROCESSOR

DS-1
TDM

INTERFACE

PACK

(TN786)

CIRCUIT
BUS

(TN765)

Figure 10-54.

Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637)

PACK

TO FAR-END
PROCESSOR

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-812

Packet
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 7 7 8 )

P ro c e s s o r
(T N 7 8 6 )

U D S 1
I n t e r fa c e
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

T o fa r e n d
s w itc h h a r d w a r e

P a cke t B u s
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r

Figure 10-55.

PRI Over PACON Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637)

Table 10-225.

TEST #637 Remote Layer 3 Query

Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1006

ABORT

This is a NORMAL ABORT. For country protocol 1 interfaces
(including the USA), either there are no B-channels administered in
this signaling group, or all B-channels in this signaling group are
either out-of-service or are in a "pending" state (PINS or PMTC,
indicating that a B-channel maintenance message for that
B-channel has been sent and not yet acknowledged).
1. Administer an ISDN Trunk or PRI Endpoint Port (B-channel) in
this signaling group, or use the status trunk TRK-GRP/TRK or
status pri-endpoint  command to check the state
of the ISDN Trunks or PRI Endpoint Ports associated with this
signaling group. Refer to ISDN-TRK or PE-BCHL for further
details regarding service state definitions and transitions. For
systems not using country protocol 1 interfaces, there are no
B-channels administered in this signaling group.

1019

ABORT

There is already a Remote Layer 3 Query in progress. This is a
normal ABORT.
1. Wait two minutes, then follow the procedures for when this test
passes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-225.
Error
Code
1113

Page 10-813

TEST #637 Remote Layer 3 Query — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The Signaling Link is down. Therefore no messages can be sent to
the Far-end switch.
1. Examine the results of Tests #636 and #639 and follow
recommendations provided there.
2. If either test passes, it may be because the signaling link was
disabled by system technician. Verify this by using the display
comm link command. Tests #636 and #639 pass if the
signaling link is not enabled.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2500

ABORT

Same as ABORT with no error code.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT with no error code.

2500

FAIL

Same as ABORT with no error code.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT with no error code.

PASS

A message was composed and sent to the Far-end switch. The
ISDN PRI specification allows up to two minutes for a reply.
1. Check the Error Log for ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)
for errors of type 2305 for evidence of a Remote Layer 3 Query
failure. If no new errors were logged since this test was run, then
this switch and the Far-end switch processor can exchange call
control messages.
2. If there is still a problem with a particular DS1 ISDN Trunk or PRI
Endpoint Port (B-channel), busyout the trunk or port and run the
long test sequence, paying particular attention to the results of
Test #258 (ISDN Test Call).

Continued on next page

Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check (#639)
The ISDN-PRI Signaling Group D-Channel port depends on the health of the
DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack on which it resides. This test will fail if there are
problems with either the ISDN-PRI Primary D-channel port or the DS1/ UDS1
circuit pack. If there are problems with the ISDN-PRI Secondary Signaling
Channel port (ISDN-LNK or ISDN-PLK), also investigate the DS1/UDS1 circuit
pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-814

PI

DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE

CIRCUIT
PACK

TDM

CIRCUIT

BUS

PACK

TO FAR-END
SWITCH HARDWARE

(TN765)

Figure 10-56.

Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check for PRI over PI (Test
#639)

Packet
C o n tro l
C ir c u it
Pack
(T N 7 7 8 )

P ro c e s s o r
(T N 7 8 6 )

U D S1
I n t e r fa c e
C i r c u it
Pack
(T N 4 6 4 *)

To fa r e n d
s w itc h h a r d w a r e

Packet B us
* T N 4 6 4 C o r la t e r

Figure 10-57.

Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check for PRI over PACCON (Test
#639)

Table 10-226.
Error
Code

TEST #639 Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1132

ABORT

The Secondary D-channel is not administered for this Signaling
Group. This is a NORMAL ABORT. Only a Primary D-channel must
be administered for a Signaling Group.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-226.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-815

TEST #639 Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Check — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link. No DS1 ISDN
Trunk (B-channel) or Wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made
until the problem is resolved.
1. Display the Communication-Interface Links Form via the
display communication-interface command to determine
which link is down (find the one that matches the DS1 Interface
circuit pack on which this ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port resides)
and then refer to the PI-LINK Processor Interface Link
Maintenance documentation.

8

FAIL

There is a problem with the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack or the
ISDN-PRI Secondary Signaling channel (D-channel). No ISDN
Trunk (B-channel) or Wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made
until the problem is resolved.
1. Refer to the DS1/UDS1 circuit pack and the ISDN-PRI Signaling
channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) Maintenance documentation.

PASS

The basic physical connectivity of the Signaling Group’s Secondary
D-channel is intact and functional. Try this test repeatedly to ensure
the link is up and to uncover any transitory problems.

Continued on next page

Layer 2 Status Test (#647)
The Layer 2 Status Test checks the layer 2 status of the ISDN-PRI Signaling
Channel (D-channel). This test will fail if there is a hardware failure or a facility
problem, or if the primary and secondary ISDN-PRI D-channels are not
administered correctly.
The Primary and Secondary Signaling Link Hardware tests (test 636 and 639)
and the Remote Layer 3 Query test (test 637) will detect most problems caused
by hardware failures or incorrect administration. However, the Layer 3 test (test
637) cannot detect end-to-end transmission problems with the Standby
D-channel since Layer 3 messages are not sent on the standby channel.
For G3r, the SYS-LINK Maintenance Object reports Layer 2 ISDN-PRI D-channel
problems and for G3i/s/vs, the PI-LINK Maintenance Object reports Layer 2
ISDN-PRI D-channel problems (if the D-channel is connected to the Processor
Interface circuit pack). However, the PI-LINK Maintenance Object does not
monitor the Layer 2 status of the ISDN-PRI D-channel when the D-channel is
connected to the Packet Control circuit pack for the ISDN-PRI over PACCON

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Page 10-816

feature. The Layer 2 Query test is provided to detect D-Channel Layer 2 failures
and generate an associated Warning alarm independent of the hardware
configuration used for the D-channels.
Table 10-227.
Error
Code
1132

TEST #647 Layer 2 Status Query Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
The port location for the primary ISDN-PRI D-channel is not known.
This condition should not be possible since an administered DS1
circuit pack must be specified when a Signaling Group is
administered:
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1134

ABORT

Internal system error
The associated DS1 circuit pack is not administered. This condition
should not be possible since an administered DS1 circuit pack
must be specified when a Signaling Group is administered.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

Layer 2 of the primary signaling channel is down:
1. Examine the results of the Primary Signaling Link Hardware Test
(#636) and follow recommendations provided there.
2. If test #636 passes, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the
Signaling Channel at the far end has not been administered
correctly or if it has been busied out. Verify that the Primary
Signaling Channel (D-channel) at the far end has been
administered correctly. Verify that the DS1 port used for the
Primary D-channel has not been busied out at the far end.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group)

Table 10-227.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-817

TEST #647 Layer 2 Status Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Layer 2 of the secondary signaling channel is down.
1. Examine the results of Secondary Signaling Link Hardware Test
(#639) and follow recommendations provided there.
2. If tests #639 passes, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the
Signaling Channel at the far end has not been administered
correctly or if the Signaling Channel has been busied out. Verify
that the Secondary Signaling Channel (D-channel) at the far
end has been administered correctly. Verify that the DS1 port
used for the Secondary D-channel has not been busied out at
the far end.

3

FAIL

Both the primary and secondary Channels are down.
1. Examine the results of the Primary and Secondary Signaling
Link Hardware Tests (#636 and #639) and follow
recommendations provided there.
2. If tests #636 and #639 pass, the Layer 2 Query test may still fail
if the Signaling Channels at the far end has not been
administered correctly or if the Signaling Channels have been
busied out. Verify that the Primary and Secondary Signaling
Channel (D-channels) at the far end have been administered
correctly. Verify that the DS1 ports used for the Primary and
Secondary D-channels have not been busied out at the far end.

PASS

The Primary Signaling Channel is up and, if administered the
Secondary Channel is up.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-818

ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

ISDN-TRK1

MAJOR

ISDN-TRK
ISDN-TRK

1.
2.

2

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

test port PCSSpp l

DS1 ISDN Trunk

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

DS1 ISDN Trunk

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

DS1 ISDN Trunk

For additional repair information, refer to the ‘‘DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)’’
maintenance object.
A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded
by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk
group are alarmed.

A DS1 ISDN Trunk is known as a B-channel. It is a 64 kbps Bearer channel that
can be used to transmit digital traffic, be it voice or data. These trunks use a
separate channel for signaling (for example, for call setup); this mode of
operation is known as out-of-band signaling, as opposed to in-band, robbed-bit
signaling, where the signaling traffic flows over the same channel as the voice or
data traffic. The separate signaling channel is called a D-channel in ISDN
terminology, and it carries all the call control signaling messages for the DS1
ISDN Trunk B-channels. The D-channel for these B-channels is an ISDN-PRI
(Primary Rate Interface) Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK).
On 24-channel interfaces, any of the first 23 ports on the DS1/UDS1 interface
circuit pack can be a B-channel. The 24th port may be used as a B-channel or as
a D-channel depending on the type of ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR) to
which it belongs. On 32 channel interfaces, any of ports 1-15 and 17-31 on the
DS1 interface circuit pack can be a B-channel. The 16th port may be used as a
B-channel or as a D-channel depending on the type of ISDN-PRI Signaling
Group (ISDN-SGR) to which it belongs. For more details, refer to the ISDN-SGR
and DS1-BD/UDS1-BD Maintenance documentation.
NOTE:
If a Packet Control circuit pack is used instead of a Processor Interface Link
as the interface of the PBX SPE to the D-channel, then the signaling link
port on the UDS1 circuit pack is referred to as ISDN-PLK and only the
TN464C or later may be used to carry D-channel Signaling. The B-channels
may be carried by any DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack. If a Processor
Interface is used for connectivity then the Signaling Link port is referred to
as a ISDN-LNK and the TN767 or TN464B or later DS1 interface circuit
pack may be used to carry D-channels Signaling.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-819

For interfaces using country protocol 1 on the DS1 Circuit Pack administration
form (including US), the signaling protocol used for the maintenance of the
B-channel is defined by the AT&T ISDN-PRI Specification.
For interfaces using country protocols other than 1, the signaling protocol used
for the maintenance of the B-channel is defined by the CCITT ISDN-PRI
Specification.
There are five possible SERVICE STATES for a B-channel. The service state is
negotiated with the far-end switch, changes over time, and may have a far-end or
near-end component. The service state is initialized to Out-Of-Service/Far-End
state and an attempt is made to negotiate it to In-Service.
NOTE:
The service state of a particular DS1 ISDN Trunk B-channel can be
displayed by issuing the status trunk 
system technician command.
If a call is present, the Specification defines the permissible CALL STATES as
well. There are tests in the Short and Long Test Sequences for DS1 ISDN Trunk
designed to audit these states and ensure agreement between both ends of the
PRI connection.

Alarming Based on Service States
A warning alarm is logged against a DS1 ISDN B-channel trunk when it is placed
in the Maintenance/Far-End or Out-Of-Service/Far-End states, during which the
trunk is unusable for outgoing calls. When a warning alarm is present, use status
trunk group#/member# command to determine the exact state. Other alarms
can be diagnosed by using the short and/or long test sequences. Note that an
ISDN B-channel trunk can be placed in a Far-End service state by either action
taken by the far-end switch or by failure of the far-end switch to respond. For
example, if the far-end does not respond to a Remote Layer 3 Query (Test #637
for ISDN-SGR), the associated DS1 ISDN trunk B-channels will be placed in the
Maintenance/Far-End service state.
As a port on a DS1 circuit pack (DS1-BD or UDS1-BD), and as part of a signaling
group dependent on a D-channel (ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) for signaling, operation
of the ISDN-TRK is dependent on the health of these other maintenance objects.
The ISDN D-channel in turn depends on the Packet Bus (PKT-BUS)/Processor
Interface Link (PI-LINK) (dependent on setup) for transmission through the
system. Keep this hierarchy of dependencies in mind when diagnosing
problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-820

SIGNALING
ISDN-LNK
(PORT 24)
VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
TDM
PI
PROCESSOR
(TN773)

CIRCUIT

BUS

(PORT 23)
DS1/UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT

PACK

PACK

(TN765)

VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
(PORT 2)
VOICE OR DATA
ISDN-TRK
(PORT 1)

PI-LINK

Figure 10-58.

DS1 ISDN Trunk Interactions (24-channel interface)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-821

Packet Bus

Packet
C ontrol
Circuit
Pack
(TN778)

Processor
(TN 786)

D-C hannel

U D S1
Interface
C ircuit
Pack
(TN 464*)

B-C hannels

Voice or D ata
(Por t 1)

ISD N-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 2)

ISD N-TRK
(B-Channel)

Voice or Data
(Port 23)

ISD N-TRK
(B-Channel)

Prim ary Signaling
Link
(Port 24)

ISD N-PLK
(D -C hannel)

TD M Bus
24-Channel
*TN 464 C or later

Figure 10-59.

PRI Over PACCON DS1 ISDN Trunk Interactions (24-channel interface)

DS1 ISDN Trunk Service States
This section defines the possible service states of a DS1 ISDN trunk, explains the
reason for each service state, and provides the recommended recovery
procedures (when required).

Service States
■

In-Service (INS)
The B-channel is in its normal operating state.

■

Out-of-Service/Far-end (OOS/FE)
A B-channel is initialized to this state when administered and it may also
be in this state if there is a failure on the B-channel attributed to a problem
on the far-end switch. The switch sends messages to the far-end to
negotiate the B-channel into service. If the far-end does not respond to the
messages within a certain time period, then the service state remains
out-of-service and maintenance will periodically resend the messages.
The trunk is unusable for outgoing calls. On US interfaces, the trunk is
unusable for incoming calls, but on non-US interfaces, incoming calls will
be accepted.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
■

Page 10-822

Out-of-Service/Near-end (OOS/NE)
This is the state of the trunk when a hardware failure exists on the link, the
NPE Crosstalk Test fails, or when the trunk is busied out by system
technician. In this state, the trunk is unusable for incoming or outgoing
calls. No messages are sent to the far-end until the signaling link comes
back into service or the trunk is released by system technician.

■

Maintenance/Far-end (MTC/FE)
This state is reached when the far-end does not respond to messages
sent over the signaling link for a particular trunk after a certain amount of
time. This state is different from OOS/FE since the signaling link must have
initially been up and the B-channels in-service. The switch will periodically
send messages to the far-end to try to negotiate the trunk (B-channel) into
service. The trunk is unusable for outgoing calls but will service incoming
call requests from the far-end. Note that transitions into MTC/FE do not
drop stable calls. Therefore, if the service state changes from in-service to
MTC/FE, then stable calls are unaffected.

■

Maintenance/Near-end (MTC/NE)
The trunk (B-channel) is in this state if the signaling link (PI-LINK) is busied
out by system technician. The trunk (B-channel) is also temporarily in this
state if system technician has issued a test trunk trunk_group/trunk_
member long command. This command will execute the ISDN-PRI test
call. This test will change the state of the trunk member to MTC/NE for the
duration of the test unless a call request comes in from the far-end. In that
case, the test would abort. Note that transitions into MTC/NE do not drop
stable calls. Therefore, a system technician- demanded busyout link
lnk-no command will not drop stable trunk calls. In this state, the
B-channel is not usable for new outgoing calls, but is available for
incoming calls and outgoing test calls.

■

Pending States
If the near-end is expecting a timed response from the far-end for a
request to change the service state of a trunk, then the state of the trunk
reflects a Pending State.
— Pending-in-service (PINS)
The near-end has sent a B-channel maintenance message to the
far-end, requesting that the B-channel service state be transitioned
to in-service. The far-end has a certain amount of time to respond to
the message. The service state will be PINS until either a response
is received or the timer expires.
— Pending-maintenance (PMTC)
This state is supported only by systems using country protocol 1
(including US). The near-end has sent a B-channel maintenance
message to the far-end, requesting that the B-channel service state

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-823

be transitioned to maintenance. The far-end has a certain amount
of time to respond to the message. The service state will be PMTC
until either a response is received or the timer expires.
— Call Activity States
In addition to the service and pending state, the state of a
B-channel also reflects its call activity. If a call is connected over
the B-channel, then the state of the trunk will reflect the "active" call
state, for example, "in-service/active." If there is no call on the
B-channel, then the trunk will reflect the "idle" call state, for
example, "OOS/FE-idle."
The following diagram of the DS1 ISDN Trunk service states shows the
common progression from one service state to another and the event that
caused the change of state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-824

Out-ofService
Near End

Craft release of
B-channel or
clearing of near-end
problem with
DS1-BD, PI-BD,
PI-LINK or port.

Administer
B-channel
as member
of a trunk
group.

Craft busyout of signaling link
busyout link LINK-NO or
transient state for demand
long test of the trunk.

Out-ofService
Far End

If D-channel controlling the B-channel is
up, send a message
requesting transition
to In-Service.

Received indication
from far end that
B-channel in/not
in service.

Failed to receive
reply from far
end. MTCE will
periodically try
to resend the
message.

Out-ofService
Far End
Pending
In-Service

Figure 10-60.

Maintenance
Near End
Craft busyout of B-channel
(TRK-GRP/MBR), or problem
with near en d PI-LINK, DS1-BD,
PI-BD, or port.

Received
acknowledgement
or other
indication from the
far end that
B-channel is in service.

In-Service

Craft release
of signaling
link, or craft
demanded test
completed.

D-channel has
been down for at
least 90 seconds,
or Remote Level 3
Query failed.

Maintenance
Far End

Failed to receive
reply from far end.
MTCE will periodically
try to resend the
message. [Country
protocol 1]

Failed to receive
reply from far end.
MTCE will periodically
try to resend the
message. [country
protocol other than 1]

Received
acknowledgement
or other indication
from the far end,
that B-channel is
inservice.

If D-channel
controlling the
B-channel is
up, send a
message
requesting
transition to
In-Service.

Maintenance
Far End
Pending
In-Service

Common Progressions in Service States

ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States
The following chart summarizes each of the different DS1 ISDN Trunk service
states that can result when the status trunk 
command is issued.
NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for a layered
approach to the processing of ISDN-PRI problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Table 10-228.

Page 10-825

ISDN-PRI Trunk Service States (Test #161 Loop Around Test)

Service State

Alarm*

Possible Cause

Possible Solution

Warning

Trunk is demand busied out.

Enter release trunk
grp#/mbr#.

Minor

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
failed.

Replace DS1/UDS1 circuit
pack.

None

DS1 or UDS1 circuit pack
lost its signal.

Is the DS1/UDS1 circuit
pack or cable removed? Is
the far-end switch
restarting? Check circuit
pack using procedures in
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD.

Warning

Unadministered far-end

Administer corresponding
trunk on far-end switch.

Warning

The far-end trunk is busied
out.

Check the status of the
far-end switch.

pending-in-service,
pending-maint

None

Maintenance message was
sent and the switch is
waiting up to 2 min. for a
reply from the far-end.

Wait 2 minutes and check
service state after the
pending state has cleared.

maint-NE

None

ISDN test call in progress
(test trunk long and test
isdn-testcall commands)

Wait several minutes for test
to finish and check status
again.

None

System link has been busied
out by command.

Check link status. Release
link with release link link#.

Warning

Signaling channel has been
down for over 90 sec.

Consult ISDN-SGR and/or
ISDN-LNK. Far-end
signaling channel may be
busied out, or the far-end
switch may currently be
restarting.

Warning

Repeated failure of far end
to respond to messages.

Maintenance software will
periodically try to resend
messages. You can speed
the process with test trunk
grp#/mbr# and/or test
signaling-gr #.

Warning

The far-end trunk is being
tested.

Check status of the far-end
switch. Wait for testing to
finish.

None

Normal operating state

out-of-service/NE

out-of-service/FE

maint-FE

in-service

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-826

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-229.
Error
Type

DS1 ISDN Trunk Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

01

0

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

15 (b)

Any

Audit and Update
Test (#36)

18

0

busyout trunk
/

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Any

Any

Test to Clear Value
test port PCSSpp sh r 1
test port PCSSpp sh r 1

release trunk
/

129 (c)

None

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp

130 (d)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp

257 (e)

Any

None

513 (f)

Any

None

769 (e)

Any

None

test port PCSSpp
WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp
test port PCSSpp

2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 4

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1281

Any

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MIN/ WRN

1537

Any

NPE Crosstalk
Test (#6)

MIN/WRN2

1793 (g)

Any

None

test port PCSSpp

3073 (h)

Any

Service State
Audit (#256)

test port PCSSpp

3585 (i)

Any

None

None

3841 (j)

Any

None

None

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command. If the Minor alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, then the
Minor alarm will be upgraded to a Major alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are
alarmed.

Notes:
a. These error types indicate a disagreement between this switch and the
switch at the other end of the trunk connection with regard to the ISDN call
state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk. This switch will automatically try to recover
by clearing the call, (that is, the call will be torn down). You can use the
status trunk  command to determine the
state of the trunk.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-827

When running the Short Test Sequence of tests, pay close attention to the
results of the Call State Audit Test (#257).
b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).
c. The far-end switch changed its ISDN service state to either out-of-service
or maintenance. This may be a temporary condition due to testing of that
trunk by the far-end or a hardware problem with the trunk. Outgoing calls
will not be allowed over the trunk. To investigate the status of the trunk,
issue the status trunk  command.
d. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
e. These error types indicate a disagreement between this switch and the
switch at the other end of the trunk connection with regard to the ISDN
service state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk. This switch will automatically try to
recover by performing a service state audit. You can use the status trunk
 command to determine the state of the
trunk.
When running the Short Test Sequence, pay close attention to the results
of the Service State Audit Test (#256).
f. This trunk is not recognized by the far-end switch. Investigate the trunk
administration for both switches and make changes as necessary.
g. This error indicates a failure of the DS1/UDS1 Interface circuit pack. When
running the Short Test Sequence, the results of the Signaling Link State
Check Test (#255) are important.
h. Two Service State Audit attempts have failed (see Test #256). The trunks
will not be usable for any outgoing calls (although incoming calls will be
accepted) until the test passes and the trunk state is changed to
in-service (use status trunk trunk_group/trunk_member to investigate
trunk status).
i. Error Type 3585 appears when the switch receives an ISDN RESTART
message for an ISDN trunk. Calls are cleared with the RESTART message.
Therefore, this error type may be associated with a dropped call report
from a user.
The following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the trunk’s
ISDN call state at the time the unexpected request to restart the channel
was received from the remote switch. This information can be useful if
dropped calls (cutoffs) are being reported by users of the ISDN-PRI
trunks. The meanings of the various Aux Data values are shown below.
Aux Data values of concern; any others can be ignored.
0

A idle trunk received a restart.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-828

Aux Data values of concern; any others can be ignored.
10

A call in a stable, talking state was cleared unexpectedly by
the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. This state is
called the "active" state.

4, 7, 8
260,
263

A call that has not reached the active state, but has at least
reached a ringing state, was cleared unexpectedly by the
far-end with an ISDN RESTART message.

1, 3, 6
9, 265

A call that has not yet reached a ringing state was cleared
unexpectedly by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART
message.

11, 12
19,
531,
267,
268

A call that was in the process of clearing anyway has been
cleared by the far-end with an ISDN RESTART message. If
this condition occurs frequently, it may mean that the far-end
is attempting to clear trunks that it thinks are in a "hung" state.
The RESTART message brings the trunk to an idle condition.

j. An ISDN trunk selected by the near-end has been rejected 10 times by the
far-end without a successful call. This may indicate a service state
mismatch between the near-end and far-end for this trunk that is effecting
the end user (that is, customer receives unexpected intercept tones when
accessing ISDN trunks). This may indicate that the ISDN trunk is not
administered on the far-end.
The Aux field contains the physical name of the ISDN trunk in decimal.
Then, verify that the far-end has this trunk administered. If problems
persist, then busy-out the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt group.
The Warning alarm will be retired automatically whenever an outgoing or
incoming call that uses this trunk is answered by the called endpoint. If
problems persist, then busy-out the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt
group.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Table 10-230.

Page 10-829

System Technician-Demanded Tests: ISDN-TRK
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

Signaling Link State Check Test (#255)

X

X

ND

Service State Audit Test (#256)

X

X

ND

Call State Audit Test (#257)

X

X

ND

X

ND

ISDN Test Call Test (#258)

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If
the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be
observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence and takes
about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
NOTE:
The TN464C or later UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead
of several NPE chips.
Table 10-231.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available. The port may be in
use on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk commands to
determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-231.
Error
Code
1001

Page 10-830

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due to
TDM-Bus errors. Refer to TDM-Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-Bus errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone
detectors may be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TTR-LEV
Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station or
status trunk commands to determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Maintenance is disable on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

1117

ABORT

A service state audit message is outstanding.
1. Wait two minutes and then try again.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a
more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack
and attempt to diagnose the already existing error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-231.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-831

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This will
cause noisy and unreliable connections. The ISDN-TRK is moved to
out-of-service/near-end state.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
The Conference Circuit test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being
tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to
listen to several different tones and conference the tones together. The resulting
signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is within a
certain range, the test passes.
NOTE:
The TN464C or later UDS1 circuit pack has one SCOTCH-NPE chip instead
of several NPE chips.
Table 10-232.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk commands to
determine when the port is available for testing.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status station or
status trunk to determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Maintenance is disabled on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-232.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-832

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to an already existing error on the specific port or a
more general circuit pack error.
Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack
and attempt to diagnose the already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This will
cause noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and
examining station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1
interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. The port
audit operation verifies the consistency of the current state of trunk kept in the
DS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Table 10-233.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test
Test
Result

1018

Page 10-833

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Maintenance is disabled on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times

FAIL

Test failed due to Internal system error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The current trunk states
kept in the DS1 interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent. If
the trunk is busied out, the test will not run, but will return PASS. To verify
that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status-command to verify that the trunk is in-service. If the trunk
is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the trunk is
out-of-service, continue to Step 2.
2. Enter release-trunk command to put trunk back into in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

Continued on next page

Signaling Link State Check Test (#255)
As noted in the general description for a DS1 ISDN Trunk, it depends on the
health of the DS1/UDS1 interface circuit pack and the ISDN-PRI D-channel
(ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK) trunk for proper operation. This test checks the status of
those critical elements.
Table 10-234.
Error
Code

TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-234.
Error
Code
1018

Page 10-834

TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Maintenance is disable on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

1114

ABORT

The signaling link is in a transitional state.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

4

FAIL

There is a problem with the Signaling Channel.
1. If the Packet Control circuit pack is used consult the procedures for
the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-SGR). Further information may
also be obtained by consulting the procedures for the ISDN-PRI
Signaling Channel (ISDN-PLK).
2. If the Processor Interface is used consult the procedures for
Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK).

8

FAIL

There is a problem with the DS1 interface circuit pack.
1. Consult the procedures for DS1 interface circuit pack
(DS1-BD/UDS1-BD).

PASS

The signaling link hardware is OK.

Continued on next page

Service State Audit (#256)
These trunks may be in one of several service states. This test performs a Service
State Audit with the far-end switch.
For interfaces using country protocol 1 (including US), the Service State Audit
executes in all trunk service states. A message is sent to the far-end switch to
ensure that both sides agree on the service state. A PASS for this test simply
means that the message has been successfully sent. Two minutes are allowed
for a reply. If no reply is received within that 2 minute window, the message is
sent out again. If that attempt fails, an error is logged (Error Type 3073) and the
switch then attempts another Service State Audit every 15 minutes. If the trunk
was initially INS (in-service), it is then placed in the MTC/FE (maintenance state,
far-end problem) state. No outgoing calls are placed over this trunk, but
incoming calls are accepted. If an incoming call is presented while in such a
state, a Service State Audit attempt is immediately attempted (that is, the switch
does not wait for the 15-minute cycle, but tries to recover immediately).
For interfaces not using country protocol 1, the Service State Audit executes only
if the trunk is in the OOF/FE state. A message is sent to the far-end switch to

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-835

attempt to bring the trunk back into the in-service state. A PASS for this test
simply means that the message has been successfully sent. Two minutes are
allowed for a reply. If no reply is received within that two minute window, the
message is sent out once again. If no response is received in the next two minute
window, then the trunk remains in the OOS/FE state. The switch will attempt
another Service State Audit in another hour.
To investigate the service state of the DS1 ISDN Trunk, issue the status trunk
trunk-group/trunk-member command.
Table 10-235.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #256 Service State Audit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be on a valid call. Use status station or status trunk to determine when
trunk is available for testing.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check).

1018

ABORT

Maintenance is disable on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

1113

ABORT

The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on
behalf of this trunk.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check).

1114

ABORT

The signaling link is in a transitional state.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1116

ABORT

The trunk is not in a service state which is appropriate for running the test.
This test is only performed in the OOS/FE state.

1117

ABORT

A service state audit message is outstanding.
1. Wait two minutes and then try again.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1113

FAIL

The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on
behalf of this trunk.
1. Consult the procedures for ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port)
and PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link).

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-235.
Error
Code

Page 10-836

TEST #256 Service State Audit Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Wait 4 minutes and then check the Error Log for any new errors of type
3073. If there are none, then both sides of the ISDN connection agree on
the service state; the negotiation succeeded. If there is a new 3073 error,
then the negotiation failed (the far-end switch twice failed to respond within
2 minutes). The switch will automatically retry every 15 minutes. If the trunk
was initially in-service, it is now placed in the maintenance/far-end state.
Incoming calls will be accepted, but no outgoing calls can be originated. If
an incoming call is presented, another Service State Audit will be
immediately performed in an attempt to put the DS1 ISDN Trunk in the
proper state.

Continued on next page

Call State Audit Test (#257)
If a call is active on the trunk, the switches on both sides of the connection should
agree on the ISDN state of the call, as defined in the ISDN Protocol Specification.
This test audits internal call state data by querying the far-end switch as to the
ISDN state of the call. It can be helpful when trying to clear a hung call. If the
internal call state data on the near-end switch is different than that of the far-end
switch, then the call will be torn down.
As with Test #256 (Service State Audit), a PASS simply means that an
appropriate message was composed and sent to the far-end switch. The ISDN
Specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. If a reply is not received within
the two minute window, a protocol time-out violation will be recorded in the error
log against the associated signaling channel (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port,
which is listed in the Error Log as ISDN-LNK/ISDN-PLK; the Error Type is 1).
Table 10-236.
Error
Code
1018

TEST #257 Call State Audit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Maintenance is disable on this trunk.
1. Enable maintenance by entering ‘‘y’’ in the ‘‘Maintenance Tests?’’ field
on page 2 of the change trunk-group form.

1019

ABORT

An audit is already in progress.
1. Wait two minutes and try again.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-236.
Error
Code
1113

Page 10-837

TEST #257 Call State Audit Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The signaling link has failed, so the system cannot send any messages on
behalf of this trunk.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check).

1114

ABORT

The signaling link is in a transitional state.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1116

ABORT

The trunk is in an out-of-service ISDN service state.
1. A call cannot be present if the trunk is in an ISDN out-of-service state,
so a call state audit would be inappropriate. No action necessary. (Use
the status trunk

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

This switch sent a call state auditing message to the far-end switch to verify
the state of the call active on this trunk. If a call state mismatch is found,
then the call will be torn down within two minutes. If no call was active, then
no message was sent.

Continued on next page

ISDN Test Call Test (#258)
This test performs a far-end loop around to a far-end switch over an ISDN trunk.
The trunk’s service state must be in-service, maint-NE, or out-of-service/NE, and
no call can be active on the trunk. The test call can be initiated as part of a long
test sequence, or as an individual test, as described below. This test is valid only
for systems using country protocol 1 (including US), or when the far end has
loop-around capability.
A test call connection is established to a far-end switch over the ISDN trunk to be
tested. The digital port on a TN711D Maintenance/Test circuit pack generates a
test-pattern bit stream which is sent to the far-end switch and echoed back. The
received pattern is then compared to the sent pattern and checked for errors that
indicate a loss of integrity on the communications path.
If a test call is running when scheduled maintenance starts, the green LED is
turned off. To determine if a test call is still running, use the list isdn-testcall and
status isdn-testcall commands. A lit yellow LED on the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack also indicates that a test call is running.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-838

There are two methods available to place an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call in
G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386.
In the first method, the test call connection is established over the TDM Bus of
the transmit and receive sides of the ISDN-PRI trunk to a data channel. This
method is selected when no Maintenance/Test circuit pack resides in the system.
In the second method, the test call connection is established over the TDM Bus
of the transmit and receive sides of the ISDN-PRI trunk to a digital trunk testing
port on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port
generates a pseudo bit stream. A pictorial description of the outgoing ISDN-PRI
test call connectivity is contained in the following figure.

PI (TN765)
or
PACCON
(TN778)

NETCON

SPE

B-channel
D-channel Setup

B-channel

TDM BUS

M/T

DS1/UDS1

TN7771B

Figure 10-61.

ISDN-PRI Outgoing Test Call

Synchronous Commands
You can demand a synchronous outgoing test call by using the following
maintenance commands:
■

test trunk trunk-group-no/member-no long [repeat number]

■

test board board-location long [repeat number]

■

test port port-location long [repeat number]

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)

Page 10-839

Whenever a circuit translates to an ISDN-PRI trunk during a Long Test Sequence,
an outgoing test call is invoked. If the B-channel is unrestricted (B8ZS or HDB3)
the default duration of the test call is 8.6 seconds. Otherwise, if the B-channel is
restricted (ZCS) the default duration of the test call is 9.4 seconds. Once the test
call completes, the bit error rate is retrieved from the Maintenance/Test Digital
Port. A bit error rate greater than zero is reported as a failure to the Manager I
terminal (MGRI). A failure indicates the need to run further diagnostics, such as
the test isdn-testcall command.
If no Maintenance/Test circuit pack exists, the outgoing ISDN-PRI test call is
established over a high speed data channel on the Network Control (NETCON)
circuit pack (DATA-BD).

Asynchronous Commands
You can start, query, and stop an outgoing test call by using the following
maintenance commands:
■

test isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no [ minutes ]
This command enables you to start an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call for a
maximum of two hours (120 minutes).

■

status isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no
This command displays the progress of the outgoing test call by reporting
the bit and block error rates of the tested B-channel specified by the "trunk
group no/member no" identifier.

■

clear isdn-testcall trunk-group-no/member-no
This command enables you to stop an outgoing test call already in
progress. The trunk-group-no/member-no identifier specifies the
B-channel used to stop the test call. The measurements are not cleared
until the next test call begins.
NOTE:
Only one trunk can be tested in a given port network, until the test call is
canceled or completes.

Table 10-237.
Error
Code
4

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link.
1. Refer to PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-237.
Error
Code
8

Page 10-840

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
There is a problem with the DS1 interface circuit pack.
1. Refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack).

1004

ABORT

B channel in use.
1. Determine if a call is active on this DS1 ISDN Trunk via the status
trunk
2. When the service state indicates in-service/idle, retry the test.

1005

ABORT

Bad Configuration (that is, no Maintenance/Test circuit pack)
Issue the test trunk  command and make
sure there is a DATA-CHL (NETCON channel) administered.

1018

ABORT

Test call is disabled.
1. Enable Maintenance on the Trunk Group form.

1019

ABORT

Another Test call is in progress.
1. Issue the list isdn-testcall command to locate the test call.
2. Issue the status isdn-testcall command to find out the duration and
start time of the test call.
3. Issue the clear isdn-testcall command to stop the test call from
running.

1020

ABORT

There is a problem with DS1 Interface Circuit Pack.
1. Refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk circuit pack).

1024

ABORT

Maintenance/Test Digital Port in use.
1. Wait until yellow and green LEDs are turned off on the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack.
2. Retry the test.

1113

ABORT

The signaling link has failed. Therefore, the system cannot send any
messages on behalf of this trunk.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check Test).

1114

ABORT

The signaling link is in a transitional state.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1116

ABORT

The switch could not appropriately change the ISDN service state.
1. Determine if a call is active on this DS1 ISDN Trunk (use the status
trunk
2. If not, check the Error and Alarm Logs for problems with this ISDN-TRK
(DS1 ISDN Trunk) MO.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-237.
Error
Code
1117

Page 10-841

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
ISDN B-channel maintenance message is already outstanding.
1. Wait two minutes. Then try again.

1118

ABORT

Far-end of ISDN trunk is not administered.
1. Check the administration of the far-end ISDN trunk.
2. Issue the status trunk
3. Try the test again.

1119

ABORT

The test call was aborted due to a normal call attempt on this trunk. The test
call is performed only if the trunk is idle.
1. Either wait for the normal call to terminate normally, or force it to be
dropped by using the busyout trunk

1120

ABORT

The DS1 ISDN Trunk is in the ISDN out-of-service/far-end state.
1. Try to change the service state via Test #256 (Service State Audit Test).
Then retry this test. However, the trunk may be in the
out-of-service/far-end state due to problems at the far-end switch.
If that is the case, no remedial action can be taken at this end.

1122

ABORT

There is no test line number for the far-end switch.
1. Check the Trunk Group Administration form.

1123

ABORT

There is no Feature Access Code administration for this Facility Test.
1. Check the Dial Plan and Feature Administration forms.

None
2012
2000

ABORT

2035

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources.
1. Wait 1 minute and try again.

2036
2037

ABORT

2038
2039

ABORT

2040

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendation for ABORT code 2012.
A problem occurred while trying to read the test data.
1. Wait 1 minute and then try again.
Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

2041

ABORT

The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-237.
Error
Code
2066

Page 10-842

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not establish test call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2067

ABORT

The call has timed out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035.

2074

ABORT

Bit and Block Error query failed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, there may be a serious internal problem
with Maintenance/Test Digital Port.

2075

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2104

ABORT

Call dropped or could not be originated.
1. Make sure service is provisioned by the network.
2. Check the administration of the far-end test line extension on the trunk
group administration form.
3. Check the administration of the test call BCC (Bearer Capability Class)
on the trunk group administration form.
4. Check the reason for termination with status isdn-testcall.
5. For further instructions see "Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Test Call
Problems" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
6. Try the test again.

2201
2202
2203
2204
2205

ABORT

2206

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100.

2208

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

2209
2210

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-237.
Error
Code
2211

Page 10-843

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

2212

ABORT

Call terminated by unexpected disconnect.
1. Wait 1 minute and then try again.

2213

ABORT

The call has timed-out, perhaps because of a lack of system resources.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035.

2214

ABORT

Call terminated by unexpected disconnect.
1. Wait 1 minute and then try again.

2215
2216
2217
2218
2219

ABORT

2220

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

Call terminated prematurely.
1. Wait 1 minute and try again.

2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226

ABORT

2227

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Follow recommendations for ABORT code 2012.

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2100.

2042

FAIL

This is the main purpose of the test. The comparison of the data sent
with the data received indicates a loss of integrity on the communications
path.
1. The trunk should be taken out-of-service and the quality of the DS1 line
should be investigated. The investigation should include an in-depth
analysis of the DS1 facility including the transmission facility and any
external equipment such as DACs, CSUs, etc. If the test isdn-testcall
command is invoked, then the investigation should include getting the
bit and block error rates by invoking the status isdn-testcall
command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk)
Table 10-237.
Error
Code

Page 10-844

TEST #258 ISDN TEST Call — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The call worked. A test pattern was sent and received properly; the
communications path is OK if the synchronous test call command was
issued. If the test isdn-testcall command was issued, a PASS indicates
that the test call was established. A status isdn-testcall command must be
invoked to query the bit and block error rates to determine if the test call
passed. An in-depth analysis of the DS1 facility including the transmission
facility and any external equipment such as DACs, CSUs, etc., should take
place if the bit and block error rates are not acceptable.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation)

Page 10-845

LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
LOG-SVN

1.

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run1

Full Name of MO

MAJOR

enable login 

Login Security Violation

Where  is the AT&T services login ID for which the security violation was
detected. The Alt Name field indicates the login ID associated with the security violation
and the major alarm.

The Security Violation Notification (SVN) feature provides notification when the
number of failed attempts to access the system administration/maintenance
interface meets or exceeds customer administered threshold parameters.
A major alarm is logged whenever a security violation is detected involving an
AT&T services login ID and that login ID has been disabled as a result of the
security violation. The capability to disable a login ID following detection of a
security violation involving that login ID is administrable on a per login ID basis.
Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Version 5 Implementation,
Issue 1 (555-230-656) for information on administration required for the Security
Violation Notification feature and the option to disable a login ID following
detection of a security violation involving the affected login ID.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-238.
Error
Type
1-15

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value

Aux
Data
None

Associated Test
None

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Major

OFF

Test to Clear Value
enable login 

General Information about log-svn Error Log
Entries
a. The number (1 - 15), that appears in the error type field, corresponds to
the location the login in the internal login data structure.
b. The Alt Name field on the alarm report indicates the login ID associated
with the security violation and major alarm.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation)

Page 10-846

c. These errors/alarms are associated with a number of failed attempts to
access the system management/maintenance interface using an AT&T
services login ID that meet or exceed the customer administered
threshold parameters. The associated alarm is immediately raised as a
major alarm.
d. The affected login ID will be disabled as a result of detection of the
security violation, unless it is the last enabled INADS type login on the
system. The provision to disable a login ID following detection of a security
violation involving that login ID is administrable on a login ID basis.
e. The enable login command is used to both enable a login that has been
disabled, and to retire any login security violation alarms associated with
the login ID.
f. Use of the enable login command to enable a login and/or retire alarms
must be executed using a login ID with greater service level hierarchy
permissions.
g. Access to the enable login command is controlled through the Administer
Permissions field on the Command Permission Categories form. This field
(Administer Permissions) must be set to "y" to access the enable login
command.
h. The Port alarm report field will set to the port where the final invalid login
attempt, involving the alarmed login ID, was detected. Valid port values for
G3i products include:
— MGR1 — Dedicated manager 1 or G3 management terminal
connection
— NET-n — Network controller dial up port
— INADS — INADS port
— EPN — EPN maintenance EIA port
— EIA — Other EIA port
Valid port value for G3r products include:
— SYSAM_LOC — Local administration port
— YSAM_RMT — Remote administration port
— SYS_PORT —
— MAINT — Maintenance port
i. The Svc State alarm report field will be set to OUT if the login ID is in the
disabled state as a result of detection of a security violation involving the
login ID. Once the login ID has been enabled, the field will be set to IN.
j. The source or reason of the failed login attempts should be identified and
the cause corrected prior to re-enabling a login ID and/or retiring any
alarms associated with the login ID. The cause may be something as

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
LOG-SVN (Login Security Violation)

Page 10-847

innocuous as the failure of AT&T services automatic login software, to
something as insidious as a hacker attempting to gain access to the
switch system management interface.
The login ID associated with that alarm is displayed in the Alt Name field of the
alarm report.
Prior to retiring an SVN alarm and enabling the associated login ID, the monitor
security-violations login command can be used to access information about the
invalid login attempts that caused the security violation. This information can be
useful in determining the source of the invalid attempts and analyzing why they
occurred.
The list logins command provides status information about logins on the system.
If a login has been disabled as a result of a security violation, the status will be
"svn-disabled."

Procedure to Retire an SVN Alarm
To retire a SVN alarm:
1. Enter the command enable login .
The login ID associated with that alarm is displayed in the Alt Name field of
the alarm report and the alarm is retired.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link)

Page 10-848

JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer Link)
MO Name (in Alarm
Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT

MINOR

test journal pms-log/wakeup-log

Journal Printer Link

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT

WARNING

test journal pms-log/wakeup-log

Journal Printer Link

NOTE:
Since the maintenance strategy for both the JNL-PRNT (Journal Printer
Link) and PMS-PRNT (PMS Printer Link) MO is the same, both of these MOs
are described in the PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT Maintenance documentation.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
LGATE-AJ

LGATE-AJ
See BRI-SET

LGATE-BD
See BRI-BD

LGATE-PT
See BRI-PT

Page 10-849

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-850

MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

MAINT

MINOR

test maintenance sh

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack

MAINT

MAJOR

test maintenance l

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack

The EPN Maintenance circuit pack monitors and supports environmental
maintenance for the EPNs. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack provides the
switch software, a mechanism to enable and disable Emergency Transfer in the
EPN (assuming the Emergency Transfer Switch is in the AUTO position). The
EPN Maintenance circuit pack invokes Emergency Transfer when the EPN loses
contact with the PPN or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack loses contact with all
Expansion Interface circuit packs. When AC power fails in the EPN cabinet, no
power holdover is available. If an Expansion Interface circuit pack goes insane
and is reset six times within 15 minutes, the EPN Maintenance circuit pack holds
the Expansion Links reset (which prevents the Expansion Interface circuit pack
from running).
The EPN Maintenance circuit pack provides system level alarm LEDs which
indicate the absence or presence of Major, Minor, and Warning alarms within the
entire system (PPN and EPN).
The EPN Maintenance circuit pack supports a G3MT terminal which runs at 9600
baud. However, the system software throttles the rate of data flow to the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack for display on the terminal to about 1200 baud. All
system commands can be executed via the EPN terminal. However, due to the
slow speed at which the software runs the terminal, it is recommended that the
EPN terminal’s primary use be for system maintenance rather than system
administration.
The PPN communicates with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack using the
following path (messages from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the PPN take
exactly the reverse path). From the PPN, TN773 Processor circuit pack, EPN
Maintenance circuit pack messages are passed to the Switch Control on the
Network Control circuit pack over the Memory Bus (MBUS) and then over the
TDM Bus to the Active PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. The Active PPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack passes the message across the fiber to the
Active EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack. The Active EPN Expansion
Interface circuit pack then passes the message over a serial link to the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack. Figure 10-62 illustrates this path.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-851

In Figure 10-62, PROCR means a TN790 for a RISC Processor circuit pack,
NETCON is the NEtwork Control circuit pack (TN777B) (the Active NETCON
circuit pack in a high or critical reliability system), and MB stands for the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack. Figure 10-62 shows the connectivity for a system with
duplicated Expansion Interface Links.

PPN

EPN

E
E

X

X
P

FIBER

P
I

I
P
R
O
C
R

N

N

E

T

T

TDM

C

BUS

N
F

F

O

E

E

N

X

X

P

Figure 10-62.

SERIAL LINK

T

FIBER

M

M

A

G

I

R

N
SERIAL LINK

1

T

P

I

I

N

N

T

T

F

F

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Message Flow

The EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be physically inserted into the
dedicated slot marked Maintenance in the A carrier of the EPN. The serial links
from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the Expansion Links physically
connect from this dedicated slot to slots 2A01 and 2B02 (2B02 is used only if
there are redundant Expansion Links). The serial link from slot 2A01 to the
maintenance slot is hard-wired into the backplane of carrier A, whereas the serial
link from slot 2B02 to the maintenance slot is a ribbon cable connecting the two
slots. The serial link from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to the terminal is also
a ribbon cable which plugs into a connector labeled TERM on the back of carrier
A.
The maintenance strategy for the EPN Maintenance circuit pack consists of
checking the integrity of the communications path to/from the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack, testing individual hardware components on the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack, and keeping the system level LEDs up-to-date. The individual
hardware components include the serial interfaces which handle the serial links
connected to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. There are three serial
interfaces, one for each possible Expansion Interface circuit pack and one for the
Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-852

Since the EPN Maintenance circuit pack supports environmental maintenance in
the EPN, trouble with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can cause environmental
maintenance to falsely detect problems. These environmental MOs include
DC-POWER, EMG-XFER, EXT-DEV, and CUST-ALM.
Since communication to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack flows through the
SW-CTL (Switch Control) and the EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface) circuit packs,
any problems with these MOs can prevent communication with the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack.
If a repair procedure calls for the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to be replaced,
and the EPN has redundant Expansion Links, use the following procedure to
prevent an Expansion Links switch when the new EPN Maintenance circuit pack
is plugged in.
1. Determine the Standby Expansion Links by using the status system
command.
2. Busyout the Standby Expansion Links by issuing the busyout board
PCSS command where PCSS is the 4-character circuit pack address of
the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN on the Standby link.
3. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
4. Release the Standby Expansion Links by issuing the release board PCSS
command, where PCSS is the 4-character circuit pack address of the
Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN on the Standby link.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-239.
Error
Type
1

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test maintenance sh r 1

1 (a)

0
1

EPN Maintenance Circuit
Pack Reset Test (#306)

MINOR

ON

test maintenance l

513 (a)

0
1

MGR I Channel Loop Test
(#228)

MINOR

ON

test maintenance sh r 3

769 (b)

Any

Sanity Handshake Test
(#106)

1537 (a)

0
1

Sanity Maze Test (#303)

MINOR

ON

test maintenance sh r 3

2561 (a)

0
1

Sanity Handshake Test
(#106)

MINOR

ON

test maintenance sh r 3

0

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Error Log Entries — Continued

Table 10-239.
Error
Type

Page 10-853

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

2817 (a)

0 (b)
1

Serial Channel Loop Test
(#229)

MINOR

ON

test maintenance sh r 3

3073 (a)

0
1

Network Control Circuit Pack
DPR Test (#104)

MAJOR/

OFF

test maintenance l

WARNI
NG2
3329 (c)

Any

Serial Link Test (#337)

MINOR/
WARNI
NG2

OFF

test maintenance sh r 3

3585 (d)

Any

Serial Link Test (#337)

MINOR/
WARNI
NG2

OFF

test maintenance sh r 3

Continued on next page

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used
in the set options command.

Notes:
a. A value of 0 indicates the Expansion Link in the A carrier was active when
this error occurred. A value of 1 indicates the Expansion Link in the B
carrier was active when this error occurred. To clear this problem, make
sure the Active Expansion Link is the same as that indicated by the Aux
Value.
b. Multiple values can appear in the Aux Data field. There are other errors in
the log if there is a real problem. Use these other errors to troubleshoot the
problem.
c. The serial link between the Expansion Link in the A carrier and the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack is defective.
d. The serial link between the Expansion Link in the B carrier and the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack is defective.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-854

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Sanity Handshake Test, for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test (#104) (a)

X

D

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test (#306)

X

D

X

ND

X

D

Order of Investigation
Sanity Handshake Test (#106)

Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test (#229)

X

MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test (#228)
EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#303)

X

X

ND

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test (#337)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Note:
a. If you are invoking the Long Test Sequence from the EPN terminal, Test
#104 causes the system technician terminal to be logged off, and Test
#306 is not run as part of the test sequence. Test #104, however, causes
Test #306 to run in an attempt to bring the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
back to a known state. After the test sequence runs, the Error Log should
be examined for MAINT errors of type 1 and 3073 to determine if the
Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test and EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack
Reset Test failed.
If you are invoking the Long Test Sequence from the PPN, all tests listed
are run and their results are displayed on the PPN terminal. The EPN
terminal is still logged off.

Network Control Circuit Pack Dual Port Ram
(DPR) Test (#104)
This test is destructive.
When executed, this test drops the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal login.
The login prompt reappears if the test passes successfully.
The Dual Port Ram (RAM), memory shared by the TN777 Processor circuit pack
and the Network Control circuit pack, is tested to ensure that it can be read from

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-855

and written to. EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance utilizes the DPR on
the Network Control circuit pack for placing messages that eventually get
passed along to the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN cabinet and
subsequently to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in the EPN cabinet.
Table 10-240.
Error
Code

TEST #104 Network Control Circuit Pack Dual Port Ram (DPR) Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.

1030

ABORT

Internal system error

2028

ABORT

Internal system error

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10401

ABORT

Test disabled using a software patch.

FAIL

The test failed.
1. Since a portion of the Network Control circuit pack (the Dual Port Ram)
is actually being tested here, run the Short Test Sequence against the
Network Control circuit pack (SW-CTL) and follow the maintenance
procedures for Test #325.

2000

FAIL

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The communication to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is good at least
up to the Network Control circuit pack. If there are still problems
communicating with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, then these
problems must be with either the EXP-LINK (Expansion Links), EXP-INTF
(Expansion Interface) circuit pack, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Sanity Handshake Test (#106)
This test checks the EPN Maintenance circuit pack’s ability to respond to
queries. A message is sent to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack which then
sends a message back. If the response message is received, then the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack is queried for the EPN cabinet type. The EPN
Maintenance circuit pack reads pins on the backplane of carrier A that identify
the type of cabinet and report this information. If a valid cabinet type is returned,
then the test passes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Table 10-241.
Error
Code

Page 10-856

TEST #106 Sanity Handshake Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to cabinet query was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2046

ABORT

The EPN Maintenance circuit pack reported an invalid cabinet type. Not
knowing the cabinet type of the EPN prevents all EPN environment
maintenance from running.
1. Retry the command.
2. If the test continues to abort with 2046, then either the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack is defective, or the EPN cabinet wiring is
defective. First, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
3. If the test continues to abort with 2046, then the EPN cabinet wiring is
defective in the A carrier and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot
read the backplane pins to determine the cabinet type.

10601

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

FAIL

EPN Maintenance circuit pack did not respond to Sanity Handshake and
the test timed out.
1. Verify that the carrier A power units are good. If the -5 volt unit is
defective in the A carrier, then communication with the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack is not possible.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-241.
Error
Code

Page 10-857

TEST #106 Sanity Handshake Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/Recommendation
2. If the -5 volt unit is good and this test continuously fails, background
maintenance automatically escalates to an EPN Maintenance circuit
pack Reset (Test #306). Otherwise, you can manually invoke an EPN
Maintenance circuit pack Reset by issuing the test maintenance long
command and evaluating any generated error codes from Test #306. If
Test #306 passes, this test should also PASS. Otherwise, use the
following steps to determine if the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, or the
serial link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, is defective:
■

Duplicated Expansion Links:
1. Determine which serial link is the standby by issuing the
status system system technician command.
2. Switch Expansion Links by entering set expansion-link
PCSS where PCSS is the 4-character Expansion Interface
circuit pack location for the Standby link.
3. Run the Short Test Sequence against the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack. If Test #106 still fails, replace the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack and retest. Otherwise, follow the
error routines for any errors that are logged by this Short Test.

■

Single Expansion Interface Link Switch:
1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and invoke the
Short Test Sequence.
2. If error persists, replace the EPN Expansion Interface circuit
pack, at a time when the EPN can go down with minimal
inconvenience.
3. If the error still persists, the problem is with the actual serial
link in A carrier backplane and not with the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack.

PASS

The communications path to and from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is
sane, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can read and report the
correct EPN cabinet type. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may still have
problems related to Tests #228, #229, #303, or #306.

Continued on next page

MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test (#228)
This test is destructive.
This test checks the on-board circuitry of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
associated with the serial link for the terminal connection. This test does not
cause the terminal to become disconnected. However, any data being displayed

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-858

on the terminal while the test is running is lost. Figure 10-63 shows the three
serial interfaces on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and is meant to clarify that
only the one dealing with the EPN terminal is being tested.

ACTIVE LINK

M
G
EXPANSION INTERFACE

R

CIRCUIT PACK
SERIAL INTERFACES

1

STANDBY LINK

MGR 1 SERIAL
INTERFACE

EPN MAINTENANCE CIRCUIT PACK

Figure 10-63.

Table 10-242.
Error
Code

EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT Connection

TEST #228 MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2034

ABORT

Background EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance is running the
MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test.
1. Wait 30 seconds and retry the test a maximum of 5 times.

22801

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-242.
Error
Code

Page 10-859

TEST #228 MGR I Channel Local Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
Test failed which means the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is not
usable.
1. Run the test three more times. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit
pack if the test continues to fail.

PASS

The serial interface circuitry on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack which
controls the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is functioning properly.
If there are still troubles with the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal, the
problem may be one of the following:
1. The EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal is not configured properly.
The connection between the EPN Manager I (G1) or G3MT and the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be set up at 9600 baud.
2. The serial link from the back of carrier A to the EPN management
terminal may be defective. The serial link consists of the connector on
the back of carrier A labeled TERM and the ribbon cable running to the
EPN terminal.
3. The EPN terminal may be defective. Try another terminal.
4. Since this test is not 100 percent accurate, there may still be problems
with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test (#229)
This test checks the on-board circuitry of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
associated with the serial links to the Expansion Interface circuit pack. Figure
10-64 shows the three serial interfaces on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and
is meant to clarify that the two dealing with the Expansion Links are being tested.
A request is sent to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack over the Active link via the
Active Expansion Interface circuit pack serial interface circuitry to test the serial
interface circuitry of the standby Expansion Interface circuit pack link. If a
response is received, then by definition the serial interface circuitry associated
with the Active link is good.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-860

ACTIVE LINK

M
G
EXPANSION INTERFACE

R

CIRCUIT PACK
SERIAL INTERFACES

1

STANDBY LINK

MGR 1 SERIAL
INTERFACE

EPN MAINTENANCE CIRCUIT PACK

Figure 10-64.

Table 10-243.
Error
Code

EPN Expansion Links Connections

TEST #229 Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2034

ABORT

Background EPN Maintenance circuit pack maintenance is running the Serial
Channel Local Loop Around Test.
1. Wait 30 seconds, and retry the test a maximum of 5 times.

22901

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-243.
Error
Code

Page 10-861

TEST #229 Serial Channel Local Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The on-board circuitry associated with the Standby serial link is defective.
Since the EPN Maintenance circuit pack reported this failure, the on-board
circuitry associated with the Active serial link is functional.
1. This test checks the circuitry on the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
associated with the Standby Expansion Interface link.

PASS

■

In a switch without duplicated Expansion Links, current service is not
affected because the circuitry failing is not being used. Nevertheless,
a Minor alarm remains in the Alarm Log against MAINT. Therefore, the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack must be replaced.

■

In a switch with duplicated Expansion Links, service is not affected as
long as you DO NOT SWITCH LINKS; otherwise, the connection to the
EPN Maintenance circuit pack is lost. Losing the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack connection means loss of the EPN Manager I (G1) or
G3MT and EPN Environment maintenance. If an Expansion Links
switch does occur, the software probably switches the links back,
based on the relative health of each link. The EPN Maintenance circuit
pack must be replaced to correct this problem.

The on-board circuitry associated with both Expansion Interface circuit pack
serial links is good. If there is still a problem communicating with the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack, check the following:
1. The cable comprising the serial link (B carrier Expansion Interface circuit
pack to EPN Maintenance circuit pack only) may be defective.
2. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may actually be defective.

NOTE:
This test may not be 100 percent accurate.
3. The Expansion Interface circuit pack on the Standby link may be
defective.

Continued on next page

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test
(#303)
The EPN Maintenance circuit pack processor has direct access to special
registers in the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. These registers are tied to such
things as the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset leads and Carrier Port Power
Unit reset leads (which enable the EPN Maintenance circuit pack to recycle
carriers). To prevent an insane EPN Maintenance circuit pack from inadvertently
controlling these external devices, a special interface called the Sanity Maze is
provided that must first be navigated by the EPN Maintenance circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-862

processor prior to any register access. There are two parts to the test. Part 1
involves navigating the Sanity Maze to toggle an unused lead. Part 2 attempts to
toggle an unused lead without first navigating the Sanity Maze. The Sanity Maze
test passes if Part 1 is successful and Part 2 fails.
Table 10-244.
Error
Code

TEST #303 EPN Maintenance CP Sanity Maze Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT
FAIL

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The Sanity Maze of the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective.
1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.

PASS

The Sanity Maze is working properly, and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack
can access the unused register. If recycle carrier commands (for EPN
carriers) do not work, the following problems may still exist:
1. The Carrier Port Power Unit or wiring to the Carrier Port Power Unit may
be defective. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit)
Maintenance documentation.
2. Since this test only tests the EPN, there is a very small probability that
the EPN Maintenance circuit pack cannot access those registers that
deal with EPN devices. The EPN Maintenance circuit pack may need to
be replaced.

Continued on next page

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset Test (#306)
This test is destructive.
The EPN management terminal is dropped and, if the Emergency Transfer switch
is in the AUTO position, Emergency Transfer is disabled for the duration of the
test.
The EPN Maintenance circuit pack is reset by the Active Expansion Interface
circuit pack. After the Expansion Interface circuit pack reports that the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack has reset, a handshake message is sent to the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack. If the EPN Maintenance circuit pack responds to the
handshake, the test passes. If not, it fails. If the test passes, the EPN Manager I
(G1) or G3MT is brought back up, and Emergency Transfer is restored to its
previous state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Table 10-245.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-863

TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

2000

ABORT

Response to the reset request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, look for and resolve all problems
associated with the Expansion Interface circuit pack (EXP-INTF).

2028

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2030

ABORT

EPN is down.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence against the Expansion Interface circuit
pack (test board PCSS) where PCSS is the 4-character address of
the active Expansion Interface circuit pack), and refer to the
maintenance procedures outlined for that circuit pack.

2031

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2032

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, replace the EPN Maintenance circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-245.
Error
Code

Page 10-864

TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
Expansion Interface circuit pack could not reset the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack.
For duplicated Expansion Links in the EPN:
1. The Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack may be defective and,
thereby, preventing the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack from
resetting the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. Unplug the Standby
Expansion Interface circuit pack, and attempt to reset the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack using the test maint long command. If Test
#306 passes, replace the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack,
and attempt the reset test again. If Test #306 fails, then replace the
Standby EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack.
2. The Active Expansion Interface circuit pack may be defective and
unable to reset the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. To determine which
is the Standby link, enter the status system command from the
Manager I (G1) or G3MT terminal. Switch links by entering the set
expansion-link command followed by the 4-character Expansion
Interface circuit pack location for the Standby link. Now reset the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack again by using the test maintenance long
command. If the test passes, the problem is with the known Standby
Expansion Interface circuit pack. Repeat Step 2 to determine if the
Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack should be replaced.
3. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, and run the test again. If
the test passes, the problem is with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
Switch Expansion Links, and run the test again. The test should pass
with both Expansion Interface circuit packs being active.
4. If the B carrier Expansion Interface circuit pack is active, the ribbon
cable connecting the Expansion Interface circuit pack and the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack may be defective. Check the ribbon cable to
make sure it is connected properly and is not damaged.
For single Expansion Links in the EPN:
1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack, and run the test again. If it
passes, the problem is with the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
2. If the test fails, replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack. If the
tests passes, the problem is with the Expansion Interface circuit pack.
3. If the test still fails, the problem is with the serial link wired into the
backplane of carrier A.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-245.
Error
Code
2005

Page 10-865

TEST #306 EPN Maintenance CP Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Reset passed, but the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack did not respond to subsequent handshake message. Retry
this command three more times. If it continues to fail, the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack, the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, or
the serial link is defective. To determine which is defective, follow the
appropriate procedures outlined below.
■

Duplicated Expansion Links:
1. Determine which serial link is the Standby by issuing the
status system system technician command.
2. Switch Expansion Links by entering set expansion-link
PCSS where PCSS is the 4-character Expansion Interface
circuit pack location for the Standby link.
3. Run the Short Test Sequence against the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack. If Test #306 still fails, replace the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack and retest. Otherwise, follow the
error routines for any errors that are logged by this Short Test
Sequence.

■

Single Expansion Interface Link Switch:
1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and invoke the
Short Test Sequence.
2. If the error persists, replace the EI circuit pack, at a time
when the EPN can go down with minimal inconvenience.
3. If the error still persists, the problem is with the actual serial
link in A carrier backplane and not with the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack.

PASS

The Active Expansion Interface circuit pack can reset the EPN
Maintenance circuit pack. This implies the EPN Maintenance circuit pack,
the Active Expansion Interface circuit pack, and Active serial link are sane.
There could still be a problem with the Standby Expansion Interface circuit
pack and Standby serial link in a High or Critical Reliability system.

Continued on next page

EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test
(#337)
This test is destructive.
This test checks the serial link from the Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack
to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack. If there is no Standby link, or the Standby
link is down at the time of the test, this test aborts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)

Page 10-866

NOTE:
The status of the link is changed to "down" when the Standby Expansion
Interface circuit pack begins initialization tests (for example, after being
reseated). The link status is then updated at the conclusion of these tests.
Table 10-246.
Error
Code
1030

TEST #337 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The active Expansion Link to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is not
running.
1. Follow up on the test results of the EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack
Sanity Handshake Test (#105).
2. When problems associated with this test are resolved, rerun Test
#337.

1035

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1036

ABORT

There is no Standby Expansion Link running. Either the system only has
one Expansion Link, the Standby Expansion Link is down due to
Expansion Link, or the Expansion Interface circuit pack problems.
1. Issue the status system command and determine if the Standby
Expansion Link is down or does not exist. If it does not exist, dashes
are shown. Otherwise, the link status is shown. If there is no Standby
link, this test always aborts.
2. If there is a Standby link and it is down, then refer to EXP-INTF
(Expansion Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and
resolve all alarms on the link.
3. Rerun the test.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MAINT (EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack)
Table 10-246.
Error
Code

Page 10-867

TEST #337 EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Serial Link Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The Serial Link between the current Standby Expansion Interface circuit
pack and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective. If the Standby
link is on the A carrier, errors of type 3329 are logged; however, if the
Standby link is on the B carrier, errors of type 3585 are logged.
1. Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test. If the test continues to fail, replace the Standby EPN
Expansion Interface circuit pack.
3. Rerun the test. If the test continues to fail and the Standby link is on
the B carrier, then replace the ribbon cable that carries the serial link
from Expansion Interface circuit pack B to the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack.
4. Rerun the test.

PASS

The serial link from the Standby Expansion Link to the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack is working.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Page 10-868

MEM-BD (Memory)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

MEM-BD

MAJOR

test memory l c

Memory

MEM-BD (a)

WARNING

test memory sh c

Memory

MEMORY (b)

MAJOR

test memory a/b sh c

Memory

NOTE:
For memory problems on systems with a TN790 RISC processor circuit
pack, see “PR-MEM.”
Notes:
a. Non-TN790 is on the processor circuit pack and not on a separate
memory circuit pack. The maintenance object is "MEMORY" and not
"MEM-BD." However, all references to MEM-BD in this section are
applicable to "MEMORY" as well.
The Memory contains the DEFINITY software and firmware. The Processor
circuit pack is the most critical component of all system operations.
b. Non-TN790 systems contain memory that is integrated with the processor.
For testing purposes, the circuit pack is logically separated into
PR-MAINT, PROCR, and MEMORY. This means that a memory problem on
386 systems requires that the Processor be replaced. 386 systems
contain two types of memory: Flash ROM and DRAM. Flash ROM is
permanent memory that contains the boot image, PI firmware, and
PACCON firmware. This type of memory is not erased during circuit pack
resets. It can be reprogrammed only via the upgrade software command.
DRAM is used for software data storage, and it changes constantly.
DRAM loses its value during circuit pack resets. Both types of memory are
present on the Processor circuit pack. The diagnostics run appropriate
tests on both memories.
For all system activity, the Processor must be able to access the Memory.
If the Processor cannot do this, the system goes into SPE-down mode. In
SPE-down mode, fatal Memory errors may show up as Processor errors.
This merely indicates that the Processor and the Memory are very closely
linked as a matter of course.
If the initialization diagnostics fail, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down
Mode" section in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’.
Memory faults usually indict the Processor circuit pack (TN790) or the
CPP1 circuit pack, however the problem may be on the TN786B.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Page 10-869

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-247.

Error Type
1

MEM-BD (Memory) Memory Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test memory a/b l r 1

1-256

Any

Read All Memory Test
(#85)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 5

257-512 (b)

Any

Read All Memory Test
(#85)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 1

513 (c)

0

Memory Detection/
Test (#87)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b r 3

769 (d)

Any

Text Checksum Test
(#86)

MAJOR

OFF/ON

test memory a/b l r 2

1025 (e)

Any

Memory Functional
Test (#332)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 1

0

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The "clear" option can replace the "repeat" option in a test memory
command. For a High or Critical Reliability system, the carrier (a or b)
must be specified. In all other systems, there is no need to specify the
carrier.
b. The Read All Memory Test (#85) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of this
test. The error is associated with MEM-BD 1.
c. The Memory Error Detection Test (#87) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of
this test. The error is associated with MEM-BD 1.
d. The Text Checksum Test (#86) failed. Refer to the FAIL section of this test.
The error is associated with MEM-BD 1 and is an ON board alarm.
e. There are Functional Test errors against both the Processor circuit pack
and Memory. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical
Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run
only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Page 10-870

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate errors in the order in which they are presented in Table
10-248. By clearing error codes associated with the Read All Memory Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.
Table 10-248.

MEM-BD (Memory) Order of Investigation
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) (a)

X

X

ND

Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) (a)

X

X

ND

X

D

Order of Investigation

Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) (a)
MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (b)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (b)

X

X

ND

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (b)

X

X

ND

MTPSAT Loop Around Test (#228) (b)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (b)

X

X

ND

MTP Reset Test (#101) (b)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (b)

X

D

Read All Memory Test (#85)

X

ND

X

ND

Text Checksum Test (#86)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (c)

X

D

X

ND

Memory Error Detection Test (#87)

Memory Board Check Test (#631)

X

X

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to PROCR (Processor) Maintenance documentation for a description
of these tests [386 systems only].
b. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests [386 systems only].

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Page 10-871

c. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability
system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a
reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.

Read All Memory Test (#85)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test reads every memory location in
memory and writes it back. A failure of this test indicates a failure in the
Processor or Memory circuit pack.
Table 10-249.
Error
Code

TEST #85 Read All Memory Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1

FAIL

If the system can still provide service, this indicates that the Processor
circuit pack or Memory has a problem, but can still function. The error code
"1" indicates that MEM-BD 1 is failing the test.
1. Replace the PROCR (Processor circuit pack).

! WARNING:
If the Processor circuit pack must be replaced, and if there is a blank
in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot
immediately to the right of the Processor circuit pack), remove the
blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack
and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion
Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged.
PASS

The Memory is healthy.

Continued on next page

Text Checksum Test (#86)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the
DEFINITY software text module, and it validates the operation of the flash ROM. A
failure of this test indicates corruption of the Text.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Table 10-250.
Error
Code
1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

Page 10-872

TEST #86 Text Checksum Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

FAIL

The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system may
fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the
Text.
2. For a 386 system, the flash ROM should be reprogrammed by
3. the upgrade software command. The memory card should contain the
same vintage software that is currently in the system. Refer to the
"Software Upgrade" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’.

2058

FAIL

(G3iV1.1-286 system only).

PASS

The checksum is correct.

Continued on next page

Memory Error Detection Test (#87)
This test is a nondestructive test. This test determines if the parity circuitry is
working. Accordingly, the test determines if parity errors can be detected. The
parity circuitry is used to detect DRAM memory failures.

Memory Functional Test (#332)
This test is destructive.
This test ensures that every DRAM memory location can be accessed and
changed independently. Running this test wipes out all data in DRAM memory.
This test is performed during a reset system 4 or reset system 5. If the test fails
during a reset system command, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode"
section of Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’, for the recommended
maintenance strategy.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEM-BD (Memory)

Table 10-251.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-873

TEST #332 Memory Functional Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of three times.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

FAIL

The Standby SPE Memory is defective.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. The Processor circuit pack should be replaced.

PASS

The Standby SPE Memory circuit pack(s) is healthy.

Continued on next page

Memory Board Check Test (#631)
This test always passes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MEMORY

Page 10-874

MEMORY
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
MEMORY

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to Run
test memory a/b l c

Full Name of MO
memory

Refer to MEM-BD (Memory Circuit Pack) for circuit pack level errors.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack)

Page 10-875

MET-BD (MET Line Circuit Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

MET-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

MET Line Circuit Pack

MET-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

MET Line Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also MET-LINE (MET Line) Maintenance
documentation for related line information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-876

MET-LINE (MET Line)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

MET-LINE

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

MET Line

MET-LINE

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

MET Line

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit
port number (for example, 01).

Electronic Station is the user-friendly term to denote the MET (Multibutton
Electronic Telephone) Station Set. The MET sets were originally introduced for
use in earlier PBX systems but can now be used in Generic 1 switches.
The TN735 MET Line circuit pack supports four of these Multifunctional
Electronic Sets. Each MET set uses three pairs of wires: an analog voice pair, a
transmit pair, and a receive pair. Power is sent over the transmit and receive
pairs. The MET Line circuit pack supports all 10-, 20-, and 30-button sets.
MET Line interactions are shown in Figure 10-65.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-877

MET
LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK
(1)
PORT

MET LINE
VOICE
TERMINAL

PBX

(4)
PORT

MET LINE
VOICE
TERMINAL

MET LINE

Figure 10-65.

MET Line Interactions

A change in the use of the Recall button on the MET set needs to be noted.
Instead of being used as it was in earlier PBX systems, the Recall button is used
in this system as a self-test button and, when pressed, lights all of the lamps on
the MET set and runs the ringer update.
This section refers only to the MET-LINE (MET Line) maintenance that is
performed. Note that MET-LINE (MET Line) maintenance is closely related to,
and interacts with, the MET-BD (MET Line circuit pack) maintenance in some
instances. Some of the results of maintenance testing of the MET Line may be
affected by the health of the MET Line circuit pack. This interaction should be
kept in mind when investigating the cause of reports of MET Line problems.
There are instances in this section where service states of a station are
mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service
states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows:
■

Out-of-Service—The port, and thus the station, have been removed from
service. A busyout of a port causes it to be out-of-service.

■

Ready-for-Service—Once a port on the circuit pack has been put into
service, the voice terminal must communicate that it is present. The time
between these two events is the time when the terminal is in the
ready-for-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)
■

Page 10-878

In Service—Once the system receives a message from the voice terminal
communicating that it is present, the station is put into the in-service state.
The terminal can also be forced into the in-service state if it goes off-hook
while it is in the ready-for-service state.

When the status station command has been run, and the status screen
appears, the status is reported as either out-of-service, in-service (as stated in
the preceding list), or disconnect (the station is in the ready-for-service state).

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
MET Line Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

1 (a)

40987

None

18 (b)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

130 (c)
257 (d)

40988

None

MIN/WRN 2

OFF

513 (e)

40965

Hybrid Line Station
Audits Test (#61)

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 4

769

Port Diagnostic
Test (#35)

MIN/WRN 2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1025

Hybrid & Conf.
Circuits Test (#57)

MIN/WRN 2

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

None

MIN/WRN 2

OFF

TDMNPE Crosstalk
Test (#6)

MIN/WRN 2

ON

1537 (f)

40968

1793
2049(g)

32770

2049(h)

40967

3840(i)

40989

1.
2.

test port PCSSpp l r 3

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the
set options command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-879

Notes:
a. Indicates a defective data link. An off-board problem detected by port
circuit. Make sure the MET set is connected, and that the EPF test passes.
If data transmission problems are experienced, check for defective wiring,
check for a defective voice terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the
switch (in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch). If problem still
exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the
alarm is retired due to the passing of time.
b. This error is logged when the port in question is busied out by
maintenance personnel. Make sure port is released from busyout.
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
d. This indicates that the EPF has been turned off due to the overcurrent
condition at the voice terminal. Check for defective wiring, check for a
damaged jack, and make sure the voice terminal is a MET set. Once the
problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired due to the passing of time.
e. The particular station audit that causes this error type to be produced is
the EPF inquiry audit. If the EPF inquiry receives an "epf-no-load" message
a certain number of times, this error occurs and, if the EPF inquiry receives
an "epf-on-ok" or an "epf-off-ok" message, it contributes to the resolution of
this alarm.
This indicates that the voice terminal has probably been disconnected or
that there is a problem in the wiring to the terminal. Make sure that the
voice terminal is connected or check for defective wiring to the voice
terminal.
f. This indicates that something is wrong with the link to the voice terminal.
An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board Minor alarm.
Ignore if there are no complaints. Otherwise, verify that the voice terminal
is connected, check for defective wiring, check for a defective voice
terminal, and move voice terminal closer to the switch (in terms of feet of
wire from the jack to the switch). If the problem still exists, replace the
circuit pack.
g. This indicates that the station went off-hook while it was in the
ready-for-service state. Use the status system command to determine
the state of the station. The off-hook should have moved the station to
ready-for-service. No action is necessary.
h. This is the code that is generated when the link between the circuit pack
and the voice terminal is successfully reset. No action is necessary.
i. An uplink message being logged that the EPF is one with no load on it. No
action is necessary.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-880

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Port
Diagnostic Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Port Diagnostic Test (#35)

X

ND

MFAT Electronic Power Feed Test (#56)

X

ND

Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit
Test (#57)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Station Lamp Update Test (#60)

X

X

ND

Station Audits Test (#61)

X

X

ND

Ringer Update Test (#62)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s Long Test Sequence
and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-881

Table 10-252.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-882

Table 10-252.
Error
Code
1002

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-883

Table 10-252.
Error
Code
1004

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. This only applies to
analog stations. The default for this field is ‘y,’ so you
may want to determine why it has been turned off on this
station.
1. To enable the test for the particular analog station
being tested, enter the change station extension
command and change the 'Test' field on the 'Station'
form from 'n' to 'y.'

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-884

Table 10-252.
Error
Code
2020

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

Any

FAIL

This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems.
Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults,
TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone
detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems
before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a
TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board
connected to the backplane or bent pins on the
backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD
Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3
are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-885

Table 10-252.
Error
Code
0

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Port Diagnostic Test (#35)
This test checks a port’s battery feed circuitry. The battery feed circuitry is tested
for proper battery voltage by testing the switchhook state. In response to the test
message, the on-board firmware terminates the line and checks for switch-hook
presence. The termination is then removed, and a check is made for no
switch-hook presence. The MET set must be on-hook for the test to execute.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-886

Table 10-253.
Error
Code

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-887

Table 10-253.
Error
Code
1004

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension of the port.
Use the status station command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. (See Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands
and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, for a full description of all
possible states.) You must wait until the port is idle
before retesting.
NOTE:
The battery feed circuitry is tested for proper
battery voltage by testing the switchhook state. In
response to the test message, the on-board
firmware terminates the line and checks for
switch-hook presence. The termination is then
removed, and a check is made for no switch-hook
presence. The MET set must be on-hook for the
test to execute.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.
1. Escalate to next tier level.

2000

ABORT

This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, then
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-888

Table 10-253.
Error
Code
2100

TEST #35 Port Diagnostic Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Battery Feed Test failed. This port is out-of-service.
1. Other ports on this circuit pack are not affected.
Place user on a different port, if available, until a
replacement circuit pack can be obtained.
2. Replace circuit pack when available.

PASS

Battery Feed Test passed. Current flow is properly
detected for this port.
1. If users are reporting problems, examine
connections to the port.
2. Escalate the problem.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-889

MET Electronic Power Feed (#56)
In this test, the software requests that the EPF be turned on for a given port. An
attempt is made to turn on the power unit to the station. If no current is being
drawn, this probably indicates that the station is not connected. If an overcurrent
condition is sensed (that is, too much current is being drawn), this may indicate a
short in the loop or a defective voice terminal. Depending on what condition is
sensed, a message is returned stating that either the EPF was turned on
successfully with no problems or that an overcurrent condition is sensed. This
test is repeated once more five seconds later. If either test is not successful, the
test aborts.
Although this test will never actually return a fail result (except for the internal
system error), an error type 257 entry will be made in the error log when the test
has completed if the overcurrent case is detected by the hardware.
Table 10-254.
Error
Code

TEST #56 MET Electronic Power Feed Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted due to an internal system error on
a software request to the board.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-890

Table 10-254.
Error
Code

TEST #56 MET Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed with an internal error while it was
attempting to turn on the EPF.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

EAF Test passed. The message to turn on the power to
the station was successfully sent to the port.
1. Although this test never returns a FAIL result, after
running this test, the Error Log should be checked
for any entries with Error Type 257 to examine the
real results of this test.
2. If Error Type 257 does not appear in the Error Log
within 10 seconds after completion of this test, it is
safe to assume that the test sensed no problems
with the power to the station. To verify that the station
is powered up correctly, run a self-test on the
station, if available, and check that all the feature
buttons are operating.
3. If Error Type 257 appears in the Error Log, this
indicates some problem with the power to the
station. The system technician should check for a
short in the wiring, a damaged jack, a defective
voice terminal, or an incorrect type of terminal.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-891

Table 10-254.
Error
Code
0

TEST #56 MET Electronic Power Feed Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test (#57)
The MET Circuit Test checks the amount of reflection from the MET loop around
circuitry and a Conference Test. The Tone-Clock circuit pack places a 1004-Hz
tone on a time slot that the port circuit is listening on. A General Purpose Tone
Detector (GPTD) is connected to another time slot that the same port circuit is
talking on. The on-board microprocessor places the port in the loop around
mode and the GPTD measures the level of the reflected signal.
The Conference Test is performed after the Circuit Test. The Conference Circuit
Test verifies that the NPE is able to listen to several test tones and correctly
conference them together, and the test is executed in two parts. The first half of
the test checks the operation of the NPE’s first three conference channels. The
NPE is put in the loop around mode and instructed to talk on a selected time slot
and to listen to the 1004-Hz tone using the first three conference channels. The
signal level and noise level of the conferenced output are then measured using a
GPTD and checked to verify that they are within an acceptable range.
The second half of the Conference Test checks the operation of the NPE’s
remaining four conference channels and follows the same procedure as above.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-892

Table 10-255.
Error
Code

TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until
the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port
is not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-893

Table 10-255. TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test —
Continued
Error
Test
Code
Result
Description/ Recommendation
1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-894

Table 10-255. TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test —
Continued
Error
Test
Code
Result
Description/ Recommendation
1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until
the port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port
is not busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2103

ABORT

The system could not make the conference connection
for the test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-895

Table 10-255. TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test —
Continued
Error
Test
Code
Result
Description/ Recommendation
7

FAIL

The conference circuit test failed. The conference circuit
test is performed only if the hybrid test passes. The
conference circuit test verifies that the network
processing element (NPE) is able to correctly
conference several test tones together. The test is
executed in two parts. The first half of the test verifies
the operation of the NPE’s first three conference
channels, while the second half verifies the NPE’s
remaining four conference channels. The test puts the
NPE in loop around mode and instructs it to talk on a
specified time slot while listening to a 1004 Hz tone,
using the conference channels. A GPTD then measures
the signal and noise levels of the conferenced output
and reports whether or not these are within an
acceptable range. The failure may be due to off-board
circumstances, the most common of which is an
off-hook occurring during the test. It is possible that the
port may still be functional from a user’s point of view.
Also, check the error logs against the GPTD-BD, the
TONE-BD, and the TONE-PT.
1. This error can be caused by a disconnected
terminal. First, ensure that the terminal is connected
and the wiring is OK.
2. Then, issue the display port and the station status
commands to determine if the station is idle. If it is
idle, issue the test port command for this port.
3. If test continues to fail, issue the busyout port and
the release port commands, and then retest the
port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-896

Table 10-255. TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test —
Continued
Error
Test
Code
Result
Description/ Recommendation
57

FAIL

Hybrid Circuit Test failed. This could result in noisy or
bad connections.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator
circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack,
using test board PCSS short command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit
pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still
fails, replace the MET Line circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test fails
for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power
problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power
unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC
power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be
defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a
medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The
645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by a DC power source.) The system may
contain either a TN736 or a TN752 power unit
circuit pack OR a 631DB AC power unit, but not
both types of power units. To investigate
problems with a 631DB power unit, refer to
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit for
AC-Powered Systems) Maintenance
documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B power unit, refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port
Power Unit for DC-Powered Systems)
Maintenance documentation.

PASS

Hybrid Circuit and Conference Circuit Test passed. The
hybrid circuitry is transmitting properly.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
port tests, and by examining the station, wiring, and
connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-897

Table 10-255. TEST #57 MET Circuit and Conference Circuit Test —
Continued
Error
Test
Code
Result
Description/ Recommendation
0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test (#60)
For this test, the software lights the lamps on the terminal based on the status
record contained in the processor. The lamp updates run only if the station is
in-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-898

Table 10-256.
Error
Code
1

TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, then
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

ABORT

Station is in ready-for-service or out-of-service state.
This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective
set.
1. Make sure terminal is connected and the wiring is
correct.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-899

Table 10-256.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

MET Line Station Lamp Updates completed
successfully.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
circuit pack tests, and by examining the station,
wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-900

Table 10-256.
Error
Code
0

TEST #60 MET Line Station Lamp Updates Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

MET Line Station Audits Test (#61)
This is a series of three tests that are classified as audits. These audits abort if
attempted on an out-of-service station. The tests are as follows:
■

Switchhook Audit—This is an update of the SPE records according to the
circuit packs’ records.

■

Bad Scan Inquiry—A message is sent uplink that contains a count that is
generated due to certain events relating to the link conditions. This is an
indication of data transmission problems between the MET Line circuit
pack and the voice terminal.

■

EPF Inquiry—The status of the EPF is sent uplink. Possible conditions are:
EPF-on-ok, EPF-off, EPF-no-load, and EPF-on-overcurrent.

Although this test will never actually return a fail result (except for the internal
system error), it is possible that it will enter error types 257 (over current) or 513
(open circuit) into the error log. To determine if there are any problems that do
not show up in the test result, look for these error types in the error log. If these
errors appear in the error log or if user complaints still exist, investigate by using
other circuit pack tests and by examining the station, the wiring, and the
connections.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-901

Table 10-257.
Error
Code

1

TEST #61 MET Line Station Audits Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error.

ABORT

The test was aborted due to an internal system error
during the switchhook audit.

2

The test was aborted due to an internal system error
during the bad scan inquiry.

3

The test was aborted due to an internal system error
during the EPF audit inquiry.
1. Make sure that the station is not in an out-of-service
state.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-902

Table 10-257.
Error
Code
1004

TEST #61 MET Line Station Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension, attendant
number, or trunk group/member number of the port. Use
the status station, status attendant, or status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The test failed due to an internal system error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-903

Table 10-257.
Error
Code

TEST #61 MET Line Station Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Hybrid Line Station Audits passed.
1. Although this test always returns a PASS result, it
may enter Error Types 257 or 513 into the Error Log.
To determine if there are any problems that don’t
show up in the test result, look for these error types
in the Error Log.
2. If these errors appear in the Error Log, or if user
complaints still exist, investigate by using other
circuit pack tests, and by examining the station,
wiring, and connections.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

MET Line Ringer Update Test (#62)
In this update, a "ringer on" or a "ringer off" message is sent to the firmware to
start and stop the ringer on the set.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-904

Table 10-258.
Error
Code
3

TEST #62 MET Line Ringer Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This port may have been busied out by system
technician.
1. Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 (port busied
out) for this port. If this error type is present, then
release the port via the release station
 command and run the test again.
2. Make sure that the terminal is connected.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
station extension, attendant number, or trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status
station, status attendant, or status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting. Attendants are always in
use (off-hook) if the handset is plugged in and the port is
not busied out.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MET-LINE (MET Line)

Page 10-905

Table 10-258.
Error
Code

TEST #62 MET Line Ringer Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Hybrid Station Ringer Update passed.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate using other circuit
pack tests, and by examining the terminal, wiring,
and connections.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to ensure that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MIS (Management Information System)

Page 10-906

MIS (Management Information
System)
MO Name (In
Alarm Log
MIS

Alarm
Level
WRN

Initial Command to
Run
release mis

Full Name of MO
Management Information System

The Management Information System (MIS)/Call Management System (CMS) MO
is used only for administering MIS translations, such as trunks and stations.
There are no hardware failures associated with this MO.
NOTE:
To diagnose MIS link hardware errors and alarms, see PI-LINK (Processor
Interface Link) and PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) maintenance
information.
The MIS/CMS is an adjunct processor that collects ACD data sent from the
system. To change MIS translations, a system administrator must first enter a
busyout mis command at the terminal. When the MIS is busied out, the system
stops sending ACD data to the MIS, and a Warning alarm is raised. When
finished, a release mis command should be entered at the terminal. This clears
the Warning alarm and allows the switch to send ACD data to the MIS.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-259.
Error
Type
0

1

18(a)

Management Information System Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

release mis

0

busyout mis

WARNING

ON

release mis

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Note:
a. When the busyout MIS command is issued, no data is sent to the
MIS/CMS regardless of the link state. To allow data to be sent to MIS/CMS,
a release mis command must be issued from the terminal.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit Pack)

Page 10-907

MODEM-BD (Modem Pool Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

MODEM-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Modem Pool Circuit Pack

MODEM-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Modem Pool Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port) Maintenance
documentation for related port information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-908

MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
MODEM-PT

1.

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

MINOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Full Name of MO
Modem Pool Port

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit
port number (for example, 01).

The Modem Pool Port provides an interface for digital and analog data
communication devices or ports connected to the PBX. It may be thought of as a
PBX data communications "conversion resource" because it converts analog
modem signals typically used in the telephone network into digital signals that
are compatible with the internal PBX network and vice versa.
There may be a number of these conversion resources available in the PBX,
each assigned to one of five available Modem Pool Groups. Only one conversion
resource is used per data connection. The PBX software usually adds the
conversion resource into a data connection if it determines that it is necessary for
the call. Typical connections that include Modem Pool conversion resources
include data calls from Analog Line or Central Office Trunk ports to any digital
port or Digital Line or Trunk ports to any analog port. An example of a Data
Module to Central Office Trunk connection using a Modem Pool conversion
resource is shown in Figure 10-66. When a local data call originates from an
analog port normally used for voice service only and terminates on a digital port,
a Data Origination access code must be dialed before the extension number for
the Modem Pool conversion resource to be included in the connection.
Refer to Figure 10-66 on page 10-910 while reading the following paragraph.
Each Modem Pool conversion resource contains two ports. One of these, an
Analog Line Port, is connected (via the PBX network) to the Analog Line or
Central Office Trunk Port that is the source of the modem signal. The second port
is referred to as the digital port and is connected (again through the PBX
network) to the Digital Line or Trunk port associated with the Data Module in the
connection. The analog modem signals enter the analog port of the conversion
resource in standard Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) format but are converted into
Data Communications Protocol (DCP) format before going to the Digital Line or
trunk in the connection.
There are two primary types of Modem Pool conversion resources available: an
Integrated Pooled Modem and a Combined Modem Pool. The integrated TN758
Pooled Modem circuit pack contains two independent 300 or 1200 baud
conversion resources. Each conversion resource contains two interfaces to the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-909

PBX digital network: an analog port and a digital port. The analog port is
connected through the PBX network to the analog line or trunk port containing
the analog modem signals. The digital port connects through the PBX network to
the digital line or trunk port in the call. Figure 10-66 shows a typical end-to-end
connection using a conversion resource on the integrated Pooled Modem circuit
pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-910

Terminal

Data Module

DCP

Digital
Line
(TN754)

Pooled
Modem
Conversion
Resource

DCP

Digital
Line
Port
Analog
Line
Port

DCP
PBX
Digital
Network
PCM

(TN758)
TIP/Ring

Telephone
Network

Analog

Central Office
Trunk
(TN747B)

PCM

Analog
Modem

Host
Computer

Figure 10-66.

Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Integrated
Pooled Modem

The Combined Modem Pool conversion resource is the second type available.
The function served by the Combined Modem Pool is similar to that of the
integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack, but the physical implementation is much

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-911

different. It has the advantage of supporting any speed the external modem can
support. The integrated Pooled Modem circuit pack can only support 300 or
1200 baud transmission rates. The Combined Modem Pool conversion resource
consists of a port on a TN742 or TN746 Analog Line circuit pack, an external
modem, a Data Module, and a port on a TN754 Digital Line circuit pack. The tip
and ring interface of the Analog Line is connected to the modem, the EIA 232C
interface of the modem connects to the Data Module, and the DCP interface on
the Data Module is connected to the Digital Line port.
The analog modem signals pass through the Analog Line port to the modem. The
modem converts these to EIA 232C signals which are passed on to the Data
Module. The Data Module further converts the signals to the DCP protocol for the
Digital Line port which passes the signals on to the PBX network. See Figure
10-67.
Certain customer-reported troubles may provide important information for
troubleshooting Modem Pool problems. For example, if the customer tries to
make a data call requiring a Modem Pool conversion resource, and the Modem
Pool and Data Module speeds or other options don’t match, they receive a
"CHECK OPTIONS" error message on the terminal. If this happens, the Modem
Pool administration and customer Data Module option settings should be
checked. In addition, if the Modem Pool is a Combined type, option settings
should be checked on the external Modem and Data Module making up the
Combined Modem Pool. The cabling and connections between the Digital Line
port, Data Module, Analog Line port, and Modem should be checked between
the Combined Modem Pool components.
There are three types of commands that can be used to test Modem Pool
circuits: test port, test modem-pool #, and test board. The test port command
is generally the first test to run after the Error Log is evaluated and an entry is
found for a Modem Pool port. The test modem-pool # command runs the same
tests as the test port short command performed on a Modem Pool port.
However, the test modem-pool # command can automatically test all ports in
the Modem Pool group number specified in #. The test board command
performs the same tests as test port and test modem-pool # plus additional
tests for circuits common to the entire circuit pack. Refer to the XXX-BD
(Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for information on
additional tests performed with test board (#50, #52, and #53).
If the Modem Pool port or group being tested with test modem-pool # contains
Combined Modem Pools, the ports on the associated TN742 or TN746 Analog
Line circuit pack and the TN754 Digital Line circuit pack are tested as a group.
Note, however, that Combined Modem Pools are not tested with the tests
described in this section and the repair information related to Tests # 96, 97, 98,
and 99 is not applicable. The Analog port of the Combined Modem port is tested
with Analog port tests (that is, Tests #6, #47, #35, #48 and #36), and the Digital
port of the Combined Modem port is tested with TDMODULE/PDMODULE tests
(that is, Tests #9, #13, #17 and #175). Therefore, use the repair procedures
outlined in the ANL-LINE, ANL-16-L, ANL-NE-L, and TDMODULE/PDMODULE

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-912

Maintenance documentation when interpreting the results of the execution of the
test modem-pool # command on Combined Modem Pools.

Terminal

Data Module

DCP

Data
Module
RS-232C

Digital
Line
(TN754)

Digital
Line
(TN754)

DCP

DCP
PBX
Digital
Network

Combined Modem Pool

Modem

Telephone
Network

TIP/Ring
Analog

Analog
Line
(TN742,TN746)

Central Office
Trunk
(TN747B)

PCM

PCM

Analog
Modem

Host
Computer

Figure 10-67.

Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Combined
Modem Pool

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-913

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Modem Pool Port Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

18

0

busyout PCSS

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

130 (a)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

257

Conversion
Resource Loop
Test (#98)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

513

Modem
Conference
Test(#97)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

769

Modem NPE
Crosstalk Test
(#96)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Note:
a. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 21 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Modem Pool Conference Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence. The tests in this section do not apply to
Combined Modem Pool conversion resources. The standard Digital Line and/or
Analog Line port tests are run on the ports associated with the Combined Modem
Pool. The test descriptions for those maintenance objects (MOs) should be
consulted when repairing Combined Modem Pool arrangements.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence. The tests in this section do not apply to Combined Modem Pool
conversion resources. The standard Digital Line and/or Analog Line port tests
are run on the ports associated with the Combined Modem Pool. The test

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-914

descriptions for those maintenance objects (MOs) should be consulted when
repairing Combined Modem Pool arrangements.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test (#96)

X

D

Modem Pool Conference Test (#97)

X

D

Order of Investigation

Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop
Around Test (#98)

X

X

ND

Modem Pool Audits Test (#99)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test (#96)
This test is destructive.
This NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that the NPE is connected only to the desired
time slot and is not crosstalking on other time slots. This test operates exactly like
Test #6 for other types of port circuits but is performed twice in order to test both
NPEs in the Modem Pool Port.
Table 10-260.
Error
Code

TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call.
Determine whether the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-260.
Error
Code
1001

Page 10-915

TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Hardware Error Log.
If present, refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator)
Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call.
Determine whether the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-260.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-916

TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or because of a more general circuit
pack error.
1. Examine the Hardware Error Log for existing errors
against this port or the circuit pack, and attempt to
diagnose the previously existing errors.

2000

ABORT

A response to the test request was not received within
the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-260.
Error
Code
6000

Page 10-917

TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources needed to complete the test could not
be allocated for the digital section of the Modem Pool
conversion resource. Ordinarily, this means the
conversion resource or other hardware used during the
test was in use.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion
resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a
busyout port PCSS command against the
conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS
command. The busyout and release of the port drop
any existing calls on that port.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the same error occurs while the conversion
resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem
Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled
Modem circuit pack containing the conversion
resource under test. This action drops any existing
calls on that circuit pack.
5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after
circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem.

6001

ABORT

System resources needed to complete the test could not
be allocated for the analog section of the Modem Pool
conversion resource.
1. Follow the test procedures for the previous error
code.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-260.
Error
Code
NONE

Page 10-918

TEST #96 Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed. This error is internal to the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and does not involve external
equipment or interfaces.
1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem
conversion resources on the circuit pack containing
the failing conversion resource.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate
the problem.

ANY

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This condition causes noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (that is,
yellow LED is off), attempt to reset the circuit pack.
Then repeat the test.
2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Modem Pool Conference Test (#97)
This test is destructive.
This test checks most of the switching and gain control functions provided by the
NPE circuit in the analog section of the conversion resource. This test
conferences a 1004-Hz tone through the NPE, looping it back so that it can be
verified with a Tone Detector circuit.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-261.
Error
Code

Page 10-919

TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call.
Determine whether the port is available for testing.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call.
Determine whether the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-261.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-920

TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or because of a more general circuit
pack error.
1. Examine the Hardware Error Log for existing errors
against this port or the circuit pack, and attempt to
diagnose the previously existing errors.

2000

ABORT

The response to the test request was not received within
the allowable time period.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.

2103

ABORT

The system could not make the conference connection
for the test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-261.
Error
Code
4000

Page 10-921

TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources needed to complete the test could not
be allocated. Ordinarily, this means the conversion
resource or other hardware used during the test was in
use.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion
resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a
busyout port PCSS command against the
conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS
command. The busyout and release of the port drop
any existing calls on that port.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the same error occurs while the conversion
resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem
Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled
Modem circuit pack containing the conversion
resource under the test. This action drops any
existing calls on that circuit pack.
5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after
circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem.

65515

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. Issue the test port long command on the port on
which the test aborted. If any test aborted or failed,
follow recommended maintenance strategy for the
appropriate port type (for example, ANL-LINE,
DIG-LINE).
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-261.
Error
Code
NONE

Page 10-922

TEST #97 Modem Pool Conference Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed. This error is internal to the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and does not involve external
equipment or interfaces.
1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem
conversion resources on the circuit pack containing
the failing conversion resource.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate
the problem.

ANY

FAIL

The Network Processing Element (NPE) of the tested
port did not conference the tones correctly. This causes
noisy and unreliable connections.
1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (that is,
yellow LED is off), attempt to reset the circuit pack.
Then repeat the test.
2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around
Test (#98)
The Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test is set up as follows:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-923

TN758 Pooled Modem Circuit Pack
TS-A
Data
Channel
TS-B

Network
Control
(TN727)

Digital
Portion

Analog
Portion

TS-C

Modem Pool Conversion Resource
(One of Two)
TS = Time Slot

Figure 10-68.

Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around Test Set-up

Test data patterns are transmitted from the Network Control Channels 1 or 3 over
network time slot A through the digital port, looped around through the analog
port via time slot C back to the Network Control Channel circuit via time slot B
where the patterns are checked for accuracy. Finally, the test forces a
disconnect by breaking the connection between the Data Channel and Modem
Pool Port (time slot A) and verifying that the Data Channel and Modem Pool Port
go on-hook within the proper time.
This test attempts to allocate a Network Control Channel, Modem Pool Port, and
other internal resources. If any of these allocation attempts fail, the test cannot be
completed and a specific abort error is reported.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-924

Table 10-262. TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around
Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

NONE

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Wait one-minute and try the test again.
2. If the error occurs again, escalate the problem.

5000

ABORT

System resources needed to complete the test could not
be allocated for the digital section of the Modem Pool
conversion resource. Ordinarily, this means the
conversion resource or other hardware used during the
test was in use.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion
resource, the call must be dropped by issuing a
busyout port PCSS command against the
conversion resource. Issue the release port PCSS
command. The busyout and release of the port drop
any existing calls on that port.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the same error occurs while the conversion
resource is idle, busyout and release both Modem
Pool conversion resources on the TN758 Pooled
Modem circuit pack containing the conversion
resource under test. This action drops any existing
calls on that circuit pack.
5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
6. If the test continues to abort with this error code after
circuit pack replacement, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-925

Table 10-262. TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around
Test — Continued
Error
Code
5001

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
A Network Control Channel could not be allocated for
this test. This error is more closely related to the Data
Channels (1 or 3 only) on the DATA-CHL circuit pack
used for this test than the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit
pack itself. Therefore, any hardware testing or
replacement activities focus on the DATA-CHL circuit
pack. However, the Data Channels on the DATA-CHL
circuit pack normally should not be busied out, tested
with the test data-module command, or reseated in the
carrier to clear this error, since this may drop other data
calls that may be active at the time. The administration
of Data Channels 1 and 3 should be checked if this error
occurs.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If the same error persists after five attempts at
one-minute intervals, escalate the problem.

5002

ABORT

The Network Control Channel allocated for this test
could not be set to "maintenance busy" status.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001.

5003

ABORT

The test was not able to establish a connection for the
digital portion of the Modem Pool Port.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000.

5004

ABORT

The test was not able to allocate the analog portion of
the Modem Pool Port.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000.

5005

ABORT

The test was not able to establish a connection for the
analog portion of the Modem Pool Port.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-926

Table 10-262. TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around
Test — Continued
Error
Code
5006

Test
Result
FIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Modem Pool Port did not respond to the
"maintenance activate" message. This error is internal to
the Modem Pool circuit pack and does not involve
external equipment or interfaces. The test failed. This
error is internal to the Pooled Modem circuit pack and
does not involve external equipment or interfaces.
1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem
conversion resources on the circuit pack containing
the failing conversion resource.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate
the problem.

5007

ABORT

The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did
not respond to the incoming call indication.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001.

5009

ABORT

The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did
not handshake correctly.
1. Attempt the test again.
2. If the same error occurs, test the DATA-CHL circuit
pack using the test data-module command (refer to
the DATA-CHL maintenance strategy).
3. If the DATA-CHL circuit pack tests pass, escalate
the trouble report.

5010

FAIL

The Data Loop Around Test failed, indicating a probable
problem with the TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack.
1. Follow the repair procedure for Error Code 5006.

5011

ABORT

The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did
not disconnect properly.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001.

5012

ABORT

The digital portion of the tested Modem Pool Port did not
disconnect properly.
1. Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5000.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Page 10-927

Table 10-262. TEST #98 Modem Pool Conversion Resource Loop Around
Test — Continued
Error
Code
5013

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Modem Pool Port did not respond with an on-hook
message when the connection to the Data Channel was
broken, indicating a likely problem with the TN758
Pooled Modem circuit pack.
1. Follow the repair procedure for Error Code 5006.

5014

ABORT

The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did
not respond correctly to the setup message sent to it
after the connection was established.
1. Attempt the test again.
2. If the same error occurs, test the DATA-CHL circuit
pack using the test data-module command (refer to
the DATA-CHL maintenance strategy).
3. If the DATA-CHL circuit pack tests pass, escalate
the problem.

5015

ABORT

Data Channels 1 and/or 3 have not been administered.
1. Administer the Data Channels and retest.

Continued on next page

Modem Pool Audit Test (#99)
This audit updates the Modem Pool conversion resource status contained in the
TN758 Pooled Modem circuit pack’s microprocessor. It does not actually test the
Pooled Modem circuit pack; therefore, there are no FAIL codes. The audit can
only be performed on idle conversion resources. If the conversion resource is in
use, the audit aborts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port)

Table 10-263.

Page 10-928

TEST #99 Modem Pool Audit Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

NONE

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system was not able to allocate all the necessary
resources to execute this test. An ABORT simply
indicates that the conversion resource was in use when
the audit was performed. No repair action is necessary
unless it was known that the conversion resource was
actually idle during the test (yellow in-use LED was off)
or was busied out before the test was run. If this is the
case, a TN758 failure condition may exist and the
following procedure should be used:
1. Busyout both of the TN758 Pooled Modem
conversion resources on the circuit pack containing
the failing conversion resource.
2. If the test continues to abort, replace the Pooled
Modem circuit pack and retest.
3. If the circuit pack fails after replacement, escalate
the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-929

MMI-BD
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
MMI-BD
MMI-BD
MMI-BD

1.

2.

2

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

MAJOR

test board PCSS l r#

Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack

MINOR

test board PCSS l r#

Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack

WARNING

test board PCSS s r#

Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack
is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth).
Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Board).

The Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack (TN787D or later) provides a number of
H.221 protocol terminations for bit streams received from the TDM bus. The
Multimedia Interface demultiplexes the H.221 bit stream (audio, video, data,
control, and indication signals) and transmits the bit streams onto the TDM bus
so that the appropriate circuit packs can process them.
The Multimedia Interface circuit pack is commonly referred to as the MMI pack
for H.221 protocol termination. It is also called the MMCH circuit pack. There are
32 ports (also called resources) on the circuit pack. See MMI-PT for maintenance
of these resources.
The MMI circuit pack contains 4 digital signal processors that manage the 32
resources.
NOTE:
Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5
for MMCH troubleshooting information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-930

Figure 10-69.

TN787 Multimedia Interface (MMI) Circuit Pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-931

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-264.
Error
Type
1

MMI-BD Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

MIN

ON

18 (b)

0

Busyout board PCSS

WNG

OFF

217 (c)

0

None

WNG

ON

257 (d)

65535

Control Channel Loop Test
(#52)

MIN

ON

513 (e)

4352
to
4357

Uplink error from pack

769 (f)

Any

MMI Synchronization
Status Test (#1123)

None

1281 (g)

Any

Circuit Pack Restart Test
(#594)

MAJ

ON

1538 (h)

Any

Software detected error

MIN

ON

1793 (i)

ANY

TSI XTalk (#6)

MIN

ON

test board PCSS l r 3

2049 (j)

Any

TSI Loop (#1108)

MAJ

ON

test board PCSS l r 3

0

1.

test board PCSS sh r 1

release board PCSS

test board PCSS r 3

Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The circuit pack stopped functioning or it was physically removed from the
system. The alarm logs approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack
has been removed and/or the SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is in the system and the red LED is on, follow the
instructions for a red alarm in ‘‘Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs’’
in Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’. Also, see “Handling Common Port
Circuit Packs.”
b. This circuit pack has been busied out using the busyout board PCSS
command.
c. There are more than four MMI circuit packs in the system. Remove the
circuit pack that generated the error in the error log by locating the slot
indicated by the error.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-932

d. Indicates transient communication problems between the switch and this
circuit pack. Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the
repair procedures for the Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) in the
XXX-BD section.
e. The circuit pack detected an Angel on-board hardware failure. The
reported aux data values correspond to the following detected errors:
4352 - External RAM error
4253 - Internal RAM error
4355 - ROM Checksum error
4357 - Instruction set error
Reset the circuit pack by using the busyout board PCSS, reset board
PCSS, and release board PCSS commands. When reset, the circuit pack
executes a set of tests to detect the presence of any of the above faults.
The detection of one these errors during initialization causes the circuit
pack to lock up and appear insane to the system. See the repair
procedures in note b for Error Type 1.
f. This MMI circuit pack reported a loss of MMI synchronization. Refer to
Test (#1123) for repair procedures.
g. A failure of the time slot interchanger has been detected. Reset the circuit
pack using the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, and release
board PCSS commands. If the reset passes, then the on-board circuitry is
healthy. Retire the alarm using the test board PCSS long clear command
followed by release board PCSS.
h. The circuit pack is hyperactive; that is, it is flooding the switch with
messages sent over the control channel. The circuit pack is taken out of
service when a threshold number of these errors is reported to the switch.
Clear the alarm using the following commands: busyout board PCSS,
reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long clear, release board PCSS. If
the error recurs within 10 minutes, replace the circuit pack.
i. The TSI Cross Talk Test (#6) failed. See the description of this test and
follow the repair procedures.
j. The TSI Looparound Test (#1108) failed. See the description of this test
and follow the repair procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Code
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the TSI
Crosstalk Test (#6), for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-933

Table 10-265.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: MMI-BD
Short Test
Sequence

Order of Investigation

Long Test
Sequence

Reset Board
Sequence

D/ND 1

TSI Crosstalk (#6)

X

ND

TSI Looparound Test (#1108)

X

ND

MMI SYNC Status Test (#1123)

X

MMI SYNC Status Test (#1122)
2

Control Channel Looparound Test (#52)
SAKI Sanity Test (#53)

X

ND
X

ND

X

ND

2

X

D

Continued on next page

1.
2.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive
Refer to the repair procedure described in XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) for a description
of this test.

TSI Crosstalk Test (#6)
This test is non-destructive.
The Time Slot Interchanger (TSI) chip controls connectivity to the TDM bus. The
TSI Cross Talk Test verifies that this TSI talks on the selected TDM bus time slot
and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If the TSI is
not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may occur. If the test
passes, then the TSI is able to communicate over the TDM bus. This test is part of
the circuit pack’s demand and scheduled long test sequence, and takes
approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-266.
Error
Code

TEST #6 TSI Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test, the traffic load on the
system is very high, or the time slots are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-934

Table 10-266.
Error
Code
1003

TEST #6 TSI Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system is
oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone detectors are
out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of
5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the MMI-BD circuit pack within the
allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack if the other
ports are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board
PCSS, reset board PCSS, followed by the release board PCSS
commands.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal
abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The TSI was found to be transmitting in error. This causes noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The TSI is correctly using its allocated time slots.

Continued on next page

TSI Looparound Test (#1108)
This test is non-destructive.
During this test, the MMI’s Time Slot Interchanger (TSI) is listens to a TDM
timeslot. A digital count tone loops back in the TSI and onto another TDM timeslot
without passing through any resource hardware. A tone detector port verifies the
looped data. If the digital count is correct, then the test passes. The test is done
for both TDM buses. Failures indicate that the TSI is unreliable.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-935

Table 10-267.
Error
Code

TEST #1108 TSI Looparound Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. Either the traffic load on the
system is very high or time slots is out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors. Refer
to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system may be
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors
may be out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors in the Error Log.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors in the Error Log.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of
5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the Tone Detector circuit pack
within the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the circuit pack (if the other
ports are not in use). Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board
PCSSpp and the reset board PCSSpp commands followed by the release
board PCSS command.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal
abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The TSI was found to be transmitting in error, causing noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The TSI is correctly using its allocated time slots.

Continued on next page

MMI Synchronization Status Test (#1122 and
1123)
This test is non-destructive.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-936

To support applications involving multiple MMI circuit packs, the appropriate
MMI circuit packs must be synchronized with one another. One such circuit pack
is designated as the master sync source, which provides the synchronization
signal onto the TDM bus. The other MMI circuit packs in the system listen to this
signal.
This test monitors this synchronization state. The test fails if the MMI circuit pack
is not in sync. The test passes with auxiliary code 1100 if the MMI circuit pack is
in sync and is providing the synchronization signal for the system. The test also
passes with an auxiliary code of 1101 if the MMI circuit pack is in sync and
listening to the sync signal. MMI circuit packs do not lose the synchronization
signal unless an MMI circuit pack is either pulled out of the system or reset by
using a technician command.
Test #1122 runs when the long option of the test board command is entered,
initiating the recovery of synchronization. Test #1123 runs when the short option
of the test board command is entered, giving the status of the synchronization.
You need not necessarily run the long option since synchronization signal
recovery should be taking place within software running in the background. Use
the long option only if synchronization is not established within 5 minutes of
investigating the problem.
Table 10-268.
Error
Code

TEST #1122/1123 MMI Synchronization Status Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error. This is an abnormal abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

A response to the test was not received from the MMI circuit pack within the
allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly and the MMI circuit pack is idle, reset the
circuit pack using busyout board PCSS, then reset board PCSS,
followed by release board PCSS.
2. Rerun the test; if the same result occurs again, replace the MMI circuit
pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. This is an abnormal
abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-BD

Page 10-937

Table 10-268.
Error
Code

TEST #1122/1123 MMI Synchronization Status Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The MMI circuit pack is out of MMI synchronization. Run the long option of the
test board command.
1. Wait up to 5 minutes, and then reset the circuit pack with these
commands: busyout board PCSS, then reset board PCSS, followed by
release board PCSS.
2. Rerun the test; if the same result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

1100

PASS

The MMI circuit pack is providing the synchronization correctly. This MMI
circuit pack is designated as the Master Sync source.

1101

PASS

The MMI circuit pack is listening to the synchronization signal correctly.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Looparound Test (#52)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack) maintenance documentation as Control Channel Looparound Test (#52).

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack) maintenance documentation as SAKI Sanity Test (#53).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level)

Page 10-938

MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface
Resource Level)

MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
MMI-LEV

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to Run
See ‘‘Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms’’
(below)

Full Name of MO
MMI-LEV

The Multimedia Interface Resource Level MO monitors MMI efficiency by
tracking the number of MMI ports that are in-service, and then comparing that
number with the value entered in the MMIs field on the System-Parameters
Maintenance form. This MMIs field is located under the Minimum Maintenance
Threshold section. The MMIs field contains the minimum number of MMI ports
needed for the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature to run efficiently and is
an administrable field. This field must contain a minimum threshold number for
MMI port capacity of between 0-128. The MMCH feature must be enabled on the
System-Parameters Customer-Options form before the MMIs field can be
changed to a number greater than zero. The algorithm for determining that a low
level of MMI resources exists uses the value entered in the MMIs field, and the
number of MMI ports that are in-service in the system.
Each MMI circuit pack contains a maximum of 32 ports. If the number of
in-service MMI ports falls below the minimum port capacity (value entered on the
System Parameters Maintenance form under the Minimum Maintenance
Threshold section and in the MMI field), a MMI-LEV error is logged. If this outage
continues for 15 minutes, a MAJOR alarm is raised.

Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms
MMI ports are a key part of the MMCH feature, and any loss in the number of
ports available for use degrades the MMCH customer-defined service level.
If a MMI circuit pack or port is busied out using the busyout board or busyout
port commands, these out-of-service ports are not included in the MMI level
calculation, thus allowing a technician to busy out a MMI circuit pack for
maintenance reasons without causing a MAJOR alarm to be raised. However, if
all of the ports on the MMI circuit pack are not made busy and the circuit pack is
removed, an alarm is raised.
NOTE:
When diagnosing a MMI-LEV problem, begin by resolving any alarms
raised against MMI-BD or MMI-PT maintenance objects. Clearing MMI-BD
or MMI-PT alarms may clear the MMI-LEV alarm.
The MMI circuit pack is maintained by the software like the Tone Detector circuit
pack, which can be removed and reinserted in any port board slot without

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level)

Page 10-939

administration. Similarly, if a MMI circuit pack is removed from service logically
by failing the Archangel sanity scan test or is removed from service physically by
removing the circuit pack from the carrier, no error/alarm is raised against either
the MMI-BD or the MMI-PT maintenance objects. Therefore, if a MMI-LEV
error/alarm exists, yet no alarms have been raised against MMI-BD or MMI-PT
maintenance objects, a MMI circuit pack may have been removed from service
causing the MMI-LEV error/alarm. To resolve a MMI-LEV MAJOR alarm, restore
the number of MMI ports available for service to be equal to or greater than the
calculated port capacity.
To determine how many MMI circuit packs are needed for the MMCH feature:
1. Using the display system-parameters maintenance command, locate
the number listed in the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds (MMIs)
field and record this number.
2. Use the list configuration command to verify the number of MMI ports.
3. Compare this number with the value listed in the MMI field on the
System-Parameters Maintenance form (number listed in step 1 a minimum
thresholds number for MMI ports of between 0-128). Each MMI circuit
pack contains a maximum of 32 ports. If the number in the MMIs field is
less than or equal to 32, one MMI circuit pack is needed. If this number is
64, then two MMI circuit pack are needed.
4. Use the list configuration command to verify that the number of MMI
circuit packs listed agrees with the required minimum port capacity (from
step 1). If the number of MMI circuit packs listed in the step 2 differs from
the calculated number, restore the number of MMI circuit packs to the
correct value, in order to resolve the MMI-LEV alarm.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-269.

1

1.

MMI-LEV Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

1

Any

Associated Test
None

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

OFF

The number of MMI resources in the system that are in service has fallen below the calculated
minimum value. If the number of in-service MMI ports falls below the MMCH port capacity
(value entered in the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds for MMIs field) on the
System-Parameters Maintenance form, a MMI-LEV error is logged. If this outage continues for
15 minutes, a MAJOR alarm is raised.
To resolve this alarm, correct the out-of-service problem by following these procedures:
1. See “MMI-PT” and “MMI-BD” and resolve any associated alarms.
2. If a MMI-LEV error/alarm exist and none has been raised against MMI-BD or
MMI-PT maintenance objects, an MMI circuit pack may have been removed from
service causing the MMI-LEV error/alarm. To resolve a MMI-LEV MAJOR alarm,

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-LEV (Multimedia Interface Resource Level)

Page 10-940

restore the number of MMI ports available for service to be equal to or more than
the calculated port capacity. See the ‘‘Resolving MMI-LEV Errors/Alarms’’ section
above for details.
3. If the error contines to alarm, escalate the problem.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Code
There are no System Technician-Demanded tests for MMI-LEV.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-941

MMI-PT
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

MMI-PT

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp l r#

Multimedia Interface Port

MMI-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l r#

Multimedia Interface Port

MMI-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l r#

Multimedia Interface Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack
is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth).

NOTE:
Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5
for MMCH troubleshooting information.
The Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack provides a number of H.221 protocol
terminations for bit streams received from the TDM bus. The Multimedia Interface
demultiplexes the H.221 bit stream (audio, video, data, control, and indication
signals) and transmits the bit streams onto the TDM bus to be processed by the
appropriate circuit packs.
Each Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack contains 32 separately maintained
“ports,” more commonly referred to as "resources." MMI-PT represents one of
these 32 resources. At system boot or when the circuit pack is inserted, 32
resources are inserted into the system.
The MMI circuit pack contains 4 Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) which manage
the 32 resources. These resources are directly mapped to DSPs:
Resource

Direct Map

1-8

DSP1

9-16

DSP2

17-24

DSP3

25-32

DSP4

All 8 resources that the circuit pack controls may be placed out of service by the
failure of one of these DSPs.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-942

Figure 10-70.

TN787 MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE (MMI) CIRCUIT PACK

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-943

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-270.
Error
Type
1

MMI-PT Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

0

Any

1 (a)

Any

Uplink error from pack

18 (b)

0

130 (c)

Alarm
Level

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

Busyout port PCSSpp

WNG

OFF

release port PCSSpp

Any

Software generated

WNG

ON

257 (d)

Any

None

MAJ/
MIN

ON

513 (e)

Any

Resource Loopback
Test (#1111)

MIN

ON

1025 (f)

Any

Uplink error from pack

3841 3844 (g)

Any

Uplink error from pack

0

1.

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The customer endpoint connected on a conference sent too many
messages to the VSP-MCU in a specified amount of time. Check the
“status conference” forms to correlate which customer had the problem.
This is a customer endpoint problem and not a VSP-MCU problem.
b. This port has been busied out by the busyout port PCSSpp command.
c. Indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for
more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, replace or reseat the circuit
pack.
d. This error occurs if the MMI circuit pack detects a DSP Error. Maintenance
software will reset the DSP when this error is received. This error is logged
for all 8 resources connected to this particular DSP. If this DSP continues
to fail sanity, a Minor alarm is raised. Replace the circuit pack.
e. This error occurs when the Resource Looparound Test (#1111) fails. Run
the Long Test Sequence and note the results of Test #1111.
f. This error occurs if either the MMI or Voice Conditioner (VC) circuit packs
reports a loss of framing on the service channel between these two circuit
packs. When a customer endpoint establishes a call to the VSP-MCU, a
channel is established between the MMI resource and the VC port. If this
channel is detected to go down by either circuit pack, an uplink message
is sent. This error is then forwarded to maintenance for both circuit packs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-944

Run the Long Test Sequence for this MMI resource, and if any of the tests
fail, follow the repair procedures for that test. If all tests pass, the cause of
the problem might be with the VC pack. See the “VC-DSPPT” repair
procedures.
g. These errors are not related to VSP-MCU. They could be caused by
network problems or from the customer endpoints. They are presented
here for logging purposes only:

Code

Description

3841

CRC4 Error (Frame checksum error)

3842

Correctable BAS (Control msg single or double bit error, but
correctable)

3843

Uncorrectable BAS (Control msg bit error -three or more bit,
uncorrectable)

3844

Protocol Error (H.221 Protocol error from endpoint detected)

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes

Order of Investigation
Resource Looparound Test (#1111)

1.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

D

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Resource Looparound Test (#1111)
This test is destructive.
This test checks the connectivity of the resource within MMI circuit pack and out
to the TDM bus. The object is to test the circuitry that an H.221 bit stream comes
in contact with when that stream is demultiplexed, pre-processed, written to the
TDM bus and then reread (looped in the TSI), post-processed, multiplexed, and
then written back to the TDM bus for verification. The video, audio, and data
components of the bit stream are tested separately. If any one of these tests fails,
then the resource is taken out of service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-945

Table 10-271.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #1111 Resource Looparound Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may be
busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. Use the status conference command to determine if there is an active
conference. If a call is active, the test cannot be run until the conference
call terminates.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The traffic load on the
system may be very high or time slots may be out-of-service due to TDM-Bus
errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone detector for the test. The system is
oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors are
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to “TTR-LEV.”
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present, refer to “TONE-PT”.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of
five times.

1004

ABORT

The resource has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status
conference command to verify that there is a conference call active.
1. If there are no conference calls, retry the command at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the Tone Detector circuit pack
within the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, reset the circuit pack, if the other ports are
not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board PCSSpp
and the reset board PCSSpp commands, followed by the release board
PCSS command.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test. Abnormal abort.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-PT

Page 10-946

Table 10-271.
Error
Code
0, 1, 2

TEST #1111 Resource Looparound Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
This resource cannot guarantee data integrity and is out-of-service.
The following error codes indicate failure of a particular media loop:
0 = video
1 = audio
2 = low-speed data
1. Replace the circuit pack

PASS

The resource is functioning normally.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-SYNC

Page 10-947

MMI-SYNC
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
MMI-SYNC

1.

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial Command to Run1
test board PCSS l r#

Full Name of MO
Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (for
example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is
located (for example, 01, 02, ..., and so forth).

NOTE:
Refer to ‘‘Troubleshooting Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH)’’ in Chapter 5
for MMCH troubleshooting information.
Each Port Network (PN) must have a TN787D or later MMI circuit pack assigned
as the Multimedia Interface (MMI) master synchronization source for that PN. If
one or more MMI circuit pack is administered in a PN, one MMI circuit pack is
designated as the master synchronization source for all MMI circuit packs within
that PN.
The MMI circuit pack generates a synchronization signal and puts that signal on
the TDM bus. Other MMI packs or any other circuit pack within a PN can listen to
this signal and “synchronize up” to it. The first MMI circuit pack inserted in a PN
is normally designated as the master. As subsequent MMI packs are inserted,
they are instructed to listen and synchronize to the time-slot of the master MMI. In
the unlikely case of an MMI losing this reference, an uplink message is sent from
the MMI circuit pack that lost the signal to maintenance, which also clears the
“event” counter on this MMI with a downlink message. This forces the MMI circuit
pack to return the current state of the synchronization signal. If the signal is still
lost, then the recovery algorithm is entered. Note that during this time, the MMI
circuit pack synchronizes to its internal clock, and there should be no service
disruption. A loss of synchronization is usually the result of a circuit pack failure.
The maintenance strategy is to switch the master source away from the bad pack
to another healthy MMI circuit pack within the PN.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
MMI-SYNC

Page 10-948

A synchronization switch takes place if half or more of the MMI circuit packs in a
PN report a loss of synchronization. For example, a PN with two MMIs reporting a
loss of sync source switches immediately, three and four MMIs switch if two
report the loss, and so forth. A healthy MMI circuit pack becomes the master
synchronization source providing the signal on a new timeslot. The other MMI
circuit packs within the PN are instructed to listen to this new signal, and the old
master stops providing the signal and now listens to the new master MMI. If an
MMI is physically removed from the system, then the remaining MMIs report the
loss of synchronization. The first MMI with no alarms present becomes the new
master of that PN. Once a synchronization switch has occurred, another switch is
not allowed for 15 minutes to avoid hyperactive switching. If all the MMIs have
alarms, then no switch is made.
If the MMI circuit pack that provides synchronization is craft busied out, it will not
affect the PN synchronization. The signal is still provided by the busied-out pack.
There is no affect on synchronization if the technician issues a release of the
busied-out MMI. Synchronization is not affected by a warm start of the system
(reset system 1). For all other restarts (reboot through cold 2), MMI
synchronization recovers during board insertion.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-272.
Error
Type

MMI-SYNC Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

1

Any

None

257

Any

None

1.
2.

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value
See note 1

MINOR

OFF

See note 2

An MMI synchronization switch was successful. Refer to MMI-BD errors for the reason for the
switch.
The requested MMI synchronization switch failed. Resolve all MMI-BD alarms.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
There are no system technician-demanded tests for MMI-SYNC.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-949

M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog
Port)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

M/T-ANL

Minor

test port PCSSpp l

Maintenance/Test
Analog Port

M/T-ANL

Warning

release port PCSSpp

Maintenance/Test
Analog Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the
carrier where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

The Maintenance/Test Analog Port is port number 1 on the TN771
Maintenance/Test circuit pack. This port is used by the Automatic Transmission
Measurement System (ATMS) as an Originating Test Line (OTL) or Terminating
Test Line (TTL) for test calls over analog trunks. Figure 10-71 shows a typical
ATMS configuration.
M/T-ANL maintenance ensures that the analog trunk’s testing function is
operating correctly. An alarm against M/T-ANL can reduce service, but it will not
block it. To accurately measure performance and health of analog trunks, the
TN771 should be replaced when a new circuit pack is available.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-950

PBX originating
the test call

PBX terminating
the test call

TN771

TN771

Originating
Test Line
(OTL)

Terminating
Test Line
(TTL)
Tie
Trunk
Facilities

TDM Bus

Tie Trunk
Circuit Pack

Figure 10-71.

ATMS Tie Trunk Test Call

TDM Bus

Tie Trunk
Circuit Pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-951

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
M/T-ANL Error Log Entries
Error
Type
01

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp

1 (b)

41018

none

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

18

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257

Any

NPE Crosstalk test (#9)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

513

Any

Analog Port Sanity Test
(#963)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSS01 r 2

769

Any

Analog Port Digital
Loop Around Test (#13)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

3840(c)

Any

Hook State Inquiry test
(#566)

1.

(a)

Aux
Data

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error code appears in the Error Log only if the MTB circuit pack has
been removed since the Error Log was last cleared. Verify that the circuit
pack has been reinserted.
b. This error indicates a hardware failure on the Analog Port circuitry.
Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by
the command above.
c. This error indicates that call processing records did not agree with
on-board records for the hook state (on-/off-hook) of the Maintenance/Test
Analog Port. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-952

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Analog Port Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Analog Port Sanity Test (#963)

X

X

ND

Digital Loop Around Test (#13)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
Hook State Inquiry (#566)
Clear Error Counters (#270)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-953

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections.
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPE) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE controls port connectivity, gain, and provides
conferencing functions on a per port basis. If the NPE is not working correctly,
one way and/or noisy connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s
long test sequence and takes approximately 10 to 20 seconds to complete
Table 10-273.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid ATMS trunk
test call.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors. A system is
considered under heavy traffic when the Call Processing
Occupancy is greater than 50% or when the System
Management and the Call Processing Occupancies
together exceed 65%. To view the system occupancy
measurements enter the command status system
health on the system technician terminal.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1 minute
intervals a maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Table 10-273.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-954

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute
intervals a maximum of 3 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a valid ATMS test call.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem.
To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS
Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the
assigned ATMS station number.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Table 10-273.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-955

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This will cause noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (yellow
LED is off), try to reset the circuit pack via the
busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, release
board PCSS command sequence. Then repeat the
test.
2. If the test fails again, replace circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by examining station, trunk, or external
wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-956

Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test (#13)
This test is a modification of the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test used
by Digital Station (DIG-LINE) maintenance. This test does not perform the control
channel and secondary information channel loop around tests as described for
DIG-LINE, as these data paths do not exist for the Maintenance/Test Analog Port.
The primary information channel is tested by first looping back the data channel
onto the TDM Bus, and then sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit
pack and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector.
A conference test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is the
same as Conference Test (#6).
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests. If
either fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped
Table 10-274.
Error
Code

TEST #13 Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The port is in use on a valid ATMS Test Call.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem.
To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS
Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the
assigned ATMS station number.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Table 10-274.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-957

TEST #13 Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors. A system is considered under heavy
traffic when the Call Processing Occupancy is greater
than 50% or when the System Management and the Call
Processing Occupancies together exceed 65%. To view
the system occupancy measurements enter the
command status system health on the system
technician terminal.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at 1 minute
intervals a maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at 1
minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid ATMS Test Call.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use on a valid ATMS Test Call, escalate the problem.
To determine whether the port is in use by an ATMS
Test Call enter status station ext where ext is the
assigned ATMS station number.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Table 10-274.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-958

TEST #13 Analog Port Digital Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

7

FAIL

Conference test failed on the primary information
channel.
1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone/Clock
(TONE-BD) circuit pack and the Tone Detector
circuit pack via the test board PCSS command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the
Tone/Clock (TONE-BD) circuit pack or Tone
Detector circuit pack. See the section on Tone
Generator circuit pack.
3. If the Tone/Clock and Tone Detector circuit packs
are functioning properly, and the test still fails,
replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.

14

FAIL

The primary information channel is not transmitting
properly. User may not notice any interruption in service
or may not be able to use this port.
1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone
Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit
pack using test board PCSS.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
See the section on Tone Generator circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails,
replace the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack.

PASS

The Maintenance/Test Analog Port analog trunk testing
capability is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-959

Clear Error Counters (#270)
The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests,
whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background
Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed
port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). Many circuit
packs have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that
Control Channel Message Set (CCMS) messages are not continuously sent
uplink. Using this method, the message will be sent once, when the counter
reaches some preset threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is
cleared. This test is used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail
during or after SPE-demanded testing, the Angel will send a message to indicate
that fact.
This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test
Circuit Pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail.
Table 10-275.
Error
Code

TEST #270 Clear Error Counters
Test
Result

PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures
has been sent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-960

Hook State Inquiry (#566)
This test ensures that the Maintenance/Test Analog Port maintenance software
and call processing agree on the on-/off-hook status of the Maintenance/Test
Analog Port.
Table 10-276.
Error
Code
1

TEST #566 Hook State Inquiry
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Switch hook audit timed out. No response was
received from the circuit pack for information about
the switch hook state.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a
maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit
pack and repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a
maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

Any

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a
maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to fail reset the circuit pack via
the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS,
release board PCSS command sequence.
3. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a
maximum of 3 times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Call processing and Maintenance/Test Analog Port
maintenance software agree on the Maintenance/Test
Analog Port hook state.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-ANL (Maintenance/Test Analog Port)

Page 10-961

Analog Port Sanity Test (#963)
This test verifies that the port circuitry involved in the analog trunk testing on the
Maintenance/Test Analog Port is functioning properly.
This test will abort if an ATMS Test Call is in progress on the Maintenance/Test
Analog Port when the test is requested.
Table 10-277.
Error
Code

TEST #963 Analog Port Sanity Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within
the allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be
completed.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a
maximum of 3 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

50

FAIL

The switch was unable to communicate with the port
circuitry used for analog trunk testing.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board
PCSS, reset board PCSS, release board PCSS
command sequence.
2. Test the port again via the test port PCSS01 l
command.
3. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The Maintenance/Test Analog Port analog trunk
testing capability is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack)

Page 10-962

M/T-BD (Maintenance/Test Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

M/T-BD

MIN

test board PCSS l

Maintenance Test Circuit Pack

M/T-BD

WRN

release board PCSS

Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

! CAUTION:
In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, a TN771D (or later vintage)
Maintenance/Test circuit pack must be used.
Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) and
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port) Maintenance documentation for
related digital port and Packet Bus port information, respectively.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Page 10-963

M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital
Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run1

Full Name of MO

M/T-DIG

Minor

test port PCSSpp l

Maintenance/Test Digital Port

M/T-DIG

Warning

release port PCSSpp

Maintenance/Test Digital Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2 or, 3 for EPN-1 and 3 for EPN-2); C is the
carrier designation (A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).

The Maintenance/Test Digital Port is a port on the TN771D (or later vintage)
Maintenance/Test circuit pack, which is required for G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386.
Ports 2 and 3 are Digital Ports. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port provides the
ability to perform digital (that is, ISDN-PRI) trunk testing via the TDM Bus. For an
ISDN-PRI test call, connections are set up in the system as shown in Figure
10-72.
When the Maintenance/Test Digital Port is participating in an ISDN-PRI test call,
the port sends a stream of pseudo-random data along the connected B-channel.
The far end loops back this data, and the Maintenance/Test Digital Port
compares the data to that which was sent. Errors are recorded on a bit and block
basis. Refer to ISDN-TRK (DS1ISDN Trunk) Maintenance documentation for more
information on ISDN-PRI test calls.
The Maintenance/Test Digital Port maintenance ensures that the digital trunk
testing function is operating correctly. The Maintenance/Test Digital Port is
alarmed if maintenance determines that the digital port is operating incorrectly.
NOTE:
An alarm on the Maintenance/Test Digital Port reduces service, but does
not block it since the ISDN-TRK has other means to determine the health of
the ISDN-PRI trunk facility. However, to accurately measure the error
performance and to ensure accuracy of the health of the ISDN-PRI trunk,
the Maintenance/Test circuit pack should be replaced when a new circuit
pack is available.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Page 10-964

PI
CIRCUIT PACK

SPE

(TN765)

D-CHANNEL
TDM BUS

DIGITAL

DS-1

PORT

INTERFACE
CIRCUIT

MAINT/TEST

PACK

CIRCUIT PACK

(TN767)

TN771B/C
ISDN-PRI

B-CHANNEL

FACILITY

FAR
END

Figure 10-72.

ISDN-PRI Outgoing Test Call

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Page 10-965

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
M/T-DIG Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp

1 (a)

41018

none

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

18 (b)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257 (c)

Any

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#9)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

513 (d)

Any

Digital Port Sanity
Test (#565)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSS02 r 2

769 (e)

Any

Digital Port Loop
Around Test (#13)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp r 3

3840 (f)

Any

Hook State Inquiry
Test (#566)

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates a hardware failure on the Digital Port circuitry. Replace
the Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by the
command above.
b. The port has been busied out via the busyout port PCSSpp command.
c. This error indicates that Maintenance/Test Digital Port is talking on more
than just its assigned time slot. Replace the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack.
d. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port has failed its
self-test. Since the Digital Port Sanity Test runs only on Port 2, but tests
both Ports 2 and 3, both ports are alarmed when the test fails. Note that
the command above indicates to test Port 2, even if the error is logged
against Port 3.
e. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port has been
unable to successfully loop data from a tone generator to a tone detector.
f. This error indicated that call processing records did not agree with
on-board records for the hook state (on-/off-hook) of the Maintenance/Test
Digital Port. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Page 10-966

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Digital Port Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Digital Port Sanity Test (#565)

X

X

ND

Digital Port Loop Around Test (#13)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
Hook State Inquiry (#566)
Clear Error Counters (#270)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
This test is a modified version of the Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test used by
DIG-LINE maintenance.
One or more NPE reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE
controls port connectivity, gain, and provides conferencing functions on a per
port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on
the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one way and/or noisy
connections may be observed. This test is part of a port’s long test sequence
and takes approximately 10 to 20 seconds to complete. This test is a modified
version of the Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test used by DIG-LINE maintenance.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-278.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-967

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid ISDN-PRI
test call. Use the list isdn-testcall command to
determine if the port is in use (if the port is listed in the
M/T Port column). If it is in use, either wait for the test call
to complete (as indicated in the Start Time and Duration
fields in the above display), or abort the test call with the
clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where tg/mem is
determined from the B-channel field of the above
display.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-278.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-968

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a valid ISDN-PRI test call.
Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine which
call is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either
wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start
Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort
the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem
command, where tg/mem is determined from the
B-channel field of the above display.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-278.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-969

TEST #9 NPE Cross Talk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. If the remaining ports are currently not in use (yellow
LED is off), try to reset the circuit pack. Then repeat
the test.
2. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Digital Port Loop Around Test (#13)
This test is a modification of the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test used
by Digital Station (DIG-LINE) maintenance. This test does not perform the control
channel and secondary information channel loop around tests as described for
DIG-LINE, as these data paths do not exist for the Maintenance/Test Digital Port.
The primary information channel is tested by first looping back the data channel
onto the TDM Bus, and then sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit
pack and receiving the same digital count with a general purpose tone detector.
A conference test is done next for the primary information channel. This test is the
same as Conference Test #6.
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of the two tests. If
either fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-279.
Error
Code

Page 10-970

TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

The port is in use on a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use the
list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is
using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for
the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time
and Duration fields in the above display), or abort the
test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command,
where tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of
the above display.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-279.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-971

TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present, or some tone detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use
the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call
is using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait
for the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start
Time and Duration fields of the above display), or abort
the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem
command, where tg/mem is determined from the
B-channel field of the above display.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of
five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-279.
Error
Code
7

Page 10-972

TEST #13 Digital Port Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Conference test failed on the primary information
channel. In most cases, the user may not notice a
disruption in service.
1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone
Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit
pack via the test board PCSS command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails,
replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.

14

FAIL

The primary information channel is not transmitting
properly. User impact may range from nothing to not
being able to use this port.
1. Run the circuit pack tests to check the Tone
Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit
pack using test board PCSS.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still fails,
replace the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack.

PASS

The Maintenance/Test Digital Port digital trunk testing
capability is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Clear Error Counters (#270)
This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. Many circuit packs
have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that Control
Channel Message Set (CCMS) messages are not continuously sent uplink. Using
this method, the message is sent once, when the counter reaches some preset
threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is cleared.
The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests,
whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background
Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Page 10-973

port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). This test is
used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail during or after
SPE-demanded testing, the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact.
This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test
Circuit Pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail.
Table 10-280.
Error
Code

TEST #270 Clear Error Counters

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

Any

ABORT

This test should never abort.

Any

FAIL

This test should never fail.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures
has been sent.

Continued on next page

Digital Port Sanity Test (#565)
This test verifies that the port circuitry involved in the digital trunk testing on the
Maintenance/Test Digital Port is functioning properly. This circuitry is common to
both Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.
Therefore, this test is only run for Port 2. The test aborts when run on Port 3, as
described in Table 10-281.
This test operates by connecting the two Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the
TDM Bus so that they talk and listen to each other. Then four self-tests are
attempted: (a) sending data from Port 2 to Port 3 in asynchronous mode; (b)
sending data from Port 3 to Port 2 in asynchronous mode; (c) sending data from
Port 2 to Port 3 in synchronous mode; and (d) sending data from Port 3 to Port 2
in synchronous mode. The test passes if all four of these self-tests are
successful. The test stops as soon as any one of these self-tests fails.
This test aborts if an ISDN Test Call is in progress on either Maintenance/Test
Digital Port when the test is requested, or if an ISDN Test Call is initiated while the
Digital Port Sanity Test is in progress.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-281.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-974

TEST #161 Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
One of the Maintenance/Test Digital Ports is busy with
background maintenance.
1. Either wait for the port to become idle, or busyout both
Maintenance/Test Digital Ports on the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack via the busyout port
PCSS02 and busyout port PCSS03 commands,
respectively.
2. Release the ports (if they were busied out) via the
release port PCSS02 and release port PCSS03
commands, respectively.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid ISDN-PRI Test Call. Use
the list isdn-testcall command to determine which call is
using the port (from the M/T Port column). Either wait for
the test call to complete (as indicated in the Start Time
and Duration fields of the above display), or abort the test
call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem command, where
tg/mem is determined from the B-channel field of the
above display.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-281.
Error
Code
1019

Page 10-975

TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
An ISDN Test Call is in progress using this
Maintenance/Test circuit pack. The Maintenance/Test
circuit pack cannot perform a self-test on one of its Digital
Ports while an ISDN Test Call is using either of the Digital
Ports. Use the list isdn-testcall command to determine
which call is using the port (form the M/T Port column).
Either wait for the test call to complete (as indicated in the
Start Time and Duration fields of the above display), or
abort the test call with the clear isdn-testcall tg/mem
command, where tg/mem is determined from the
B-channel field of the above display.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use,
escalate the problem.

1138

ABORT

This test does not run on Port 3 of the Maintenance/Test
circuit pack. This test runs only on Port 2. Look at the
results of the Digital Port Sanity Test for Port 2.
1. Run the command again for Port 2 via the test port
PCSS02 or test port PCSS02 l command.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be
completed.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-281.
Error
Code

Page 10-976

TEST #161 Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

50

FAIL

The switch was unable to communicate with the port
circuitry used for digital trunk testing.

100

FAIL

Data was not sent from Port 2 to Port 3 successfully in
asynchronous mode.

101

FAIL

Data was not sent from Port 3 to Port 2 successfully in
asynchronous mode.

102

FAIL

Data was not sent from Port 2 to Port 3 successfully in
synchronous mode.

103

FAIL

Data was not sent from Port 3 to Port 2 successfully in
synchronous mode.
1. Reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS,
reset board PCSS, release board PCSS command
sequence.
2. Test the port again via the test port PCSS02 l
command.
3. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The Maintenance/Test Digital Port digital trunk testing
capability is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Hook State Inquiry (#566)
This test ensures that the Maintenance/Test Digital Port maintenance software
and call processing agree on the on-/off-hook status of the Maintenance/Test
Digital Port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-DIG (Maintenance/Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386]

Table 10-282.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-977

TEST #161 Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Switch hook audit timed out. No response was received
from the circuit pack for information about the switch
hook state.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack
and repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

Internal System Error. This test should never return a
failure.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail reset the circuit pack via
the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS,
release board PCSS command sequence.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Call processing and Maintenance/Test Digital Port
maintenance software agree on the Maintenance/Test
Digital Port hook state.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)

Page 10-978

M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet
Bus Port)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

M/T-PKT

Minor

test port PCSSpp l

Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port

M/T-PKT

Warning

release port PCSSpp

Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation (A,
B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located (01, 02,
..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number (for example, 01).

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is a port (always Port #4) on the TN771D
(or later vintage) Maintenance/Test circuit pack, which is required for
G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. The Packet Bus port provides the following Packet
Bus maintenance functions:
■

Packet Bus fault detection - the ability to detect faults (for example, shorts,
open leads) on the Packet Bus autonomously (that is, without SPE
involvement).

■

Packet Bus reconfiguration - the ability to swap faulty leads with spare
leads autonomously so that the Packet Bus remains operational. This is
accomplished by sending messages to all Packet circuit packs [for
example, ISDN-BRI (TN556)] telling them which spare leads to use on the
Packet Bus.

Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance ensures that these maintenance
functions are operating correctly. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is
alarmed if maintenance determines that the port’s maintenance functions are
operating incorrectly.
When Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance determines that the
Packet Bus Port is defective, the Packet Bus fault detection and Packet Bus
reconfiguration functions provided by the port are turned off.
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port maintenance interacts with Packet Bus
maintenance. Therefore, there may be alarms on the Packet Bus when there is a
fault on the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port. Refer to PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
Maintenance documentation for further information.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)

Page 10-979

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
M/T-PKT Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp

1 (a)

41018

none

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

18 (b)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257 (c)

Any

none

MINOR

ON

513 (d)

Any

Packet Bus Port
Health Inquiry Test
(#567)

MINOR

ON

1.

test port PCSSpp r 3

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error indicates a hardware failure with the port circuitry which
provides the Packet Bus maintenance functions. Replace the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack if the alarm is not resolved by the test
command above.
b. The port has been busied out via the busyout port PCSSpp command.
c. This error indicates that the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has
reconfigured the Packet Bus (that is, swapped a bad lead to a spare).
Note that this error is sent up whenever the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus
Port is initialized (since the Packet Bus Port reconfigures the Packet Bus to
whatever state it determines the Packet Bus is in). This occurs if the circuit
pack is inserted, if the system is restarted, or if the port is released from a
busyout state. Therefore, it is normal for this error to be present in the error
log.
If the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port reconfigures the Packet Bus 12
times within 15 minutes, a Minor alarm is raised. When the Minor alarm is
raised, this is an indication that the Packet Bus maintenance functions are
not operating correctly, or that many changes are taking place on the
Packet Bus (that is, circuit pack insertion or removal). If the system has
been in a stable state for more than 15 minutes, try the following
procedures:
1. Reset the Maintenance/Test circuit pack from the Manager I
terminal, as follows:
■

Enter the busyout board PCSS command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)
■

Enter the reset board PCSS command.

■

Enter the release board PCSS command.

Page 10-980

2. Wait 15 minutes.
3. If the error recurs, replace the Maintenance/Test circuit pack.
When this alarm is active, the yellow LED is in one of three states:
■

If there is no activity on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack, the
yellow LED is off. It is OK to replace the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack.

■

If there is an indication of an uncorrectable fault on the Packet Bus,
the yellow LED will be blinking at a rate of 1 Hz. It is OK to replace
the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. Ignore the Packet Bus error
indication, since the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been
determined to be defective.

■

If there is other activity on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (that
is, ISDN Test Call), or if there is an indication of a correctable fault
on the Packet Bus, the yellow LED will be on steady. If there is an
ISDN Test Call in progress, it must be halted via the clear
isdn-testcall grp/member command prior to replacing the circuit
pack. Ignore the Packet Bus error indication, since the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been determined to be
defective.

d. This error indicates a failure of the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test.
Either the Packet Bus Port has reported a self-test failure, or the SPE is
able to communicate with the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack but not with
the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Packet Bus Port. Refer to the
description of the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test, and follow the
instructions indicated for the failure code that matches the Aux Data field.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)

Page 10-981

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

X

ND

Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test
(#567)
Clear Error Counters (#270)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Clear Error Counters (#270)
This test is not an actual test in the strict sense of the word. Many circuit packs
have counters in the Angel firmware. These counters are used so that CCMS
(Control Channel Message Set) messages are not continuously sent uplink.
Using this method, the message are sent once, when the counter reaches some
preset threshold, and then not sent again until the counter is cleared.
The ports on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack continually run self-tests,
whenever the port is idle. The Angel uses a counter so that the Background
Maintenance Failure message is only sent uplink once (this keeps a failed
port/circuit pack from flooding the SPE with a string of messages). This test is
used to clear the counter, so that if the port continues to fail during or after
SPE-demanded testing, the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact.
This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance/Test
circuit pack. Therefore, this test should never abort or fail.
Table 10-283.
Error
Code

TEST #270 Clear Error Counters

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

Any

ABORT

This test should never abort.

Any

FAIL

This test should never fail.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The message to clear the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack’s counter for Background Maintenance Failures
has been sent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
M/T-PKT (Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port)

Page 10-982

Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test (#567)
This test verifies that the Packet Bus fault detection maintenance function of the
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port is functioning properly. This is done by having
the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port perform a self-test. If this self-test passes,
then the Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test passes. If the self-test fails, or the
SPE cannot communicate with the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port, then the
test fails.
Table 10-284.
Error
Code

TEST #567 Packet Bus Port Health Inquiry Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources necessary to run this test are not
available.

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be
completed.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2059

FAIL

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has reported a
failure of the on-board self-test.

2060

FAIL

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port has reported an
invalid state for the Packet Bus.

2061

FAIL

The SPE cannot communicate with the
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port, but is able to
communicate with the Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack.
1. Retry the command.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack and retry the
command.
3. If the test continues to fail, refer to PKT-BUS
Maintenance documentation to determine if the
M/T-PKT failure is being caused by a Packet Bus
fault.

PASS

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus Port Packet Bus fault
detection capability is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Page 10-983

OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Alarm
Level

Full Name of MO

OPS-LINE

MINOR

test station  l

DS1OPS Line

OPS-LINE

WARNING

test station 

DS1OPS Line

An analog Off-Premises Station (OPS) can be connected to the system through a
DS1 link. A TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack supports up to 24 DS1OPSs. Since
the DS1OPS is an analog telephone set, a channel multiplexer is necessary as
the remote DS1 endpoint that converts the digital signal of a DS1 port to the OPS
Line and vice versa. See Figure 10-73 for details.
The DS1OPS Line Maintenance provides a strategy to maintain an OPS Line via a
port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The strategy covers initialization tests,
periodic tests, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm resolution and
escalation. Two service states are specified in a DS1OPS Line maintenance.
They are: out-of-service in which the line is in a deactivated state and cannot be
used for either incoming or outgoing calls; in-service in which the line is in an
activated state and can be used for both incoming and outgoing calls. If the DS1
Interface circuit pack is out-of-service, then all lines on the DS1 Interface circuit
pack are put into the out-of-service state, and a Warning alarm is raised.
For maintenance of the remote DS1 endpoint (for example, Channel Division
Multiplexer, D4 Channel Bank), refer to the maintenance documentation from its
vendor for details.

ANALOG
STATION

"DEFINITY"
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM

CHANNEL

DS1
DS1 LINK

MULTIPLEXER

ANALOG
STATION

Figure 10-73.

DS1 OPS Line Interactions

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Page 10-984

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
DS1 OPS Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

01

0

Any

15 (a)

Any

Audit and Update
Test (#36)

18 (b)

0

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test station  sh r 1

busyout station


WARNING

OFF

release station 

130 (c)

None

WARNING

ON

test station 

1281

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MINOR

ON

test station  l

1537

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MINOR

ON

test station  l

1793 (d)

1.

test circuit pack PCSS l

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).
b. The DS1OPS Line has been busied out by a busyout station 
command. No calls can be made on this line.
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
d. Error Type 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 Interface circuit pack.
Since there is no error against the OPS-LINE port, no alarm is raised
against the OPS-LINE port. However, there should be errors logged
against the DS1 Interface circuit pack. Look for DS1-BD errors in the
Hardware Error Log and follow procedures provided in the DS1-BD (DS1
Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Page 10-985

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test (#312)

X

X

ND

Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks
on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections
may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence
and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-285.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate system resources to run this test or
an internal system error (software) occurred.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-285.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-986

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use
status station or status trunk command to determine
when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-285.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-987

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted because the port was seized by a
user for a valid call. Use status station command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port
is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an an already existing error
on the specific port or due to a more general error on the
circuit pack.
1. Examine the error log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error. (Error code 1793 indicates a
problem with the DS1 interface board, and any
problems on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD
should be resolved first.)

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run
short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or
UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the
associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting
with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or
facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity
problem should be dealt with first.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-285.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-988

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed. This can be due to on-board or off-board
problems. Off-board problems of concern include
EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated
with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all
off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in
mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a
faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on
the backplane.
1. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD
Maintenance documentation and to the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
2. Retest when the faults from step 1 are cleared.

0

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Page 10-989

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for
the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is
instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together.
The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the
tone is within a certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-286.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status station or status trunk command to determine
when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The test was aborted because the system could not
allocate time slots for the test. The system might be
under heavy traffic conditions, or it might have time slots
out of service due to TDM-BUS errors. (The status
health command may be used to determine whether the
system is experiencing heavy traffic.) Refer to the
TDM-BUS (TDM bus) Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors, is not
handling heavy traffic, and the port status is idle,
retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-286.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-990

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors
may be out of service. Issue the list measurements
tone-receiver command to display basic information
about the system’s tone receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
status station or status trunk command to determine
when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

The test was disabled via translation.
1. You may want to determine why the test has been
disabled before you enable it.
2. To enable the test for the particular analog station
being tested, enter the ’change station extension’
command, and then change the ’Test’ field on the
’Station’ form from ’n’ to ’y.’

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-286.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-991

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or due to a more general error on the
circuit pack.
1. Examine the error log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error. (Error code 1793 indicates a
problem with the DS1 interface board, and any
problems on the associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD
should be resolved first.)

2000

ABORT

The test was aborted because response to the test was
not received within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run
short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or
UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the
associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting
with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or
facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity
problem should be dealt with first.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-286.
Error
Code

Page 10-992

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This can cause noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Enter the list configuration board PCSS command.
If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9,
replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later.
The error log may have error type 1281 entries.
2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one
fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an
incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during
the test). Retest the board.
3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see
note below).
4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD
or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the
appropriate action. When the TONE errors have
cleared, rerun the test.
5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported,
coordinate isolation with the far-end PBX. Make sure
that the near-end and far-end switches and any
NTCE equipment (the CSUs) have the correct
administration.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-286.
Error
Code

Page 10-993

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(con’t.)

Description/ Recommendation
6. Replace the circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a
circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated.
If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is
present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the
676B DC power unit may be defective. (The
631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC
power source.) The system may contain a TN736
or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit,
but not both types of power units. To investigate
problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance
documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW
(carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems)
Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on,
replace the pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-286.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-994

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1
Interface circuit pack to assure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation
updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing
parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the
consistency of the current state of the trunk as kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and in the switch software.
Table 10-287.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-287.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-995

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted because system resources
required to run this test were not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension of the port.
Use the status station command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The test was aborted because the station is out of
service. This condition may be accompanied by an error
type 18 entry in the error log. You may want to determine
why the station was taken out of service. (When stations
are taken out of service by maintenance software, the
problems that preceded that point must be cleared.)
1. Use the status station command to check the
service state of the port. If the port is indeed out of
service, enter the release station command to bring
the station back into service.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort and the service state
indicates that the station is in service and idle,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-287.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-996

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted because response to the test was
not received within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run
short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or
UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the
associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting
with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or
facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity
problem should be dealt with first.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

7 or 8

FAIL

Test failed due to internal system error. Do not replace
port board.
■

Error code 7: the failure occurred during station
translation download (to DS1 Interface circuit pack).

■

Error code 8: the failure occurred during station
ringer update.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.
PASS

Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The
current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and switch software are consistent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-287.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-997

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

DS1 OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test (#312)
This test initiates the Switchhook Audit Test. The test queries the switchhook state
of the Off-Premises-Station in switch software. If the state in switch software
disagrees with the state on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The state in the switch
software is updated to match the state on the DS1 Interface circuit pack.
Table 10-288.
Error
Code

TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-288.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-998

TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status station command to determine when the port
is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Test failed due to incompatible configuration
administered in station administration.
1. Verify the station administration is the station
assigned to Port 24 of the DS1 Interface circuit pack
while common channel signaling is specified.

1006

ABORT

The test was aborted because the station is out of
service. This condition may be accompanied by an error
type 18 entry in the error log. You may want to determine
why the station was taken out of service. (When stations
are taken out of service by maintenance software, the
problems that led up to that must be cleared.)
1. Use the status station command to check the state
of the port. If the port is indeed out of service, enter
the release station command to bring the station
back into service.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, and the station is in the
in-service/idle state, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Look for DS1-BD errors in Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-288.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-999

TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was aborted because response to the test was
not received within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test aborts with error code 2000 again, run
short test sequence on the associated DS1-BD or
UDS1-BD. If tests 138 through 145 on the
associated DS1-BD or UDS1-BD are also aborting
with error code 2000, hyperactivity on the board or
facility is indicated. In this case, the hyperactivity
problem should be dealt with first.
3. If the test continues to abort and the board is OK,
escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

The test was aborted due to a system error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Look for DS1-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation.
2. If a channel multiplexer is used as the remote DS1
endpoint to which the station connects, refer to the
multiplexer vendor’s maintenance document for
diagnosis.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The station hook states in both switch software and DS1
Interface circuit pack are consistent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line)

Table 10-288.
Error
Code
0
2012

Page 10-1000

TEST #312 DS1OPS Switchhook Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, dispatch to check to
ensure that there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1001

PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data
Module)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

PDMODULE2,3

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Processor Data Module

PDMODULE

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Processor Data Module

TDMODULE2,3

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Trunk Data Module

TDMODULE

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Trunk Data Module

1.

2.
3.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where
the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number
(for example, 01).
The DTDM is considered to be part of the DIG-LINE MO. Refer to the Digital Line testing
section for DTDM or linked Data Adapter (DA) failures.
Some of the alarms that are logged due to PDMODULE and TDMODULE test failures may
be related to circuit pack problems reported during the Common Port Circuit Pack testing
phase. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
information about testing the Digital Line circuit packs.

As illustrated in Figure 10-74, data modules provide an interface between the
system TN754, TN784, TN413 [G3iV2-386], or TN754 [G3iV2-386] Digital Line
circuit pack and data equipment such as terminals, host computers, and
modems. Data modules are used for both dial-up and permanent
circuit-switched data calls. DA data modules provide this interface when the
system uses a TN2136 [G3iV2-386] Digital Line circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1002

"DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
LOOP
TDM

(DIGITAL LINK

BUS

INFORMATION AND

MODULAR PROCESSOR
DATA MODULE

SIGNALING CHANNELS)
TERMINAL

DIGITAL
LINE
CIRCUIT

MPDM

PACK

MODULAR TRUNK
DATA MODULE
DIGITAL
LINE
CIRCUIT

MTDM

HOST
COMPUTER

PACK

Figure 10-74.

Typical Data Module Application

The MPDM provides an interface for Data Terminal Equipment (terminals), and
the MTDM (see Note) provides an interface for Data Communications Equipment
(transmission equipment such as modems).
NOTE:
Early versions of these data modules were referred to as PDMs and TDMs,
respectively. Later models are designed to provide various customer
interfaces through the use of interchangeable interface modules and,
therefore, are called modular data modules. Both versions are supported
by the tests described in this section.
The PBX loop or digital link between a data module and the Digital Line port
supports two logical information channels and one signaling channel. MPDMs
and MTDMs use the primary information channel for data communications and
the signaling channel for dialing and call supervision. The secondary information
channel can be used to support a second data module on a shared digital port.
Data modules are not only used for data calls between terminals, computers, and
data communications equipment, but are also used as interfaces to equipment
associated with system features such as System Administration, CDR, MCS,
ACD, DCS, and AUDIX. Maintenance tests for data modules associated with

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1003

those services are covered by tests other than those described here. (See
PI-LINK, PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT, and PMS-LINK Maintenance documentation.)
Maintenance of MPDMs and MTDMs is closely related to, and interacts with, the
Digital Line circuit pack maintenance in some instances and some of the results
of testing MPDMs and MTDMs may be affected by the health of the Digital Line
circuit pack. This interaction should be kept in mind when investigating the cause
of reported data module problems.
Data modules provide a variety of option switches to allow the customer to select
data rates, parity, keyboard dialing, local, and remote loop back, etc. An
incorrect setting of those switches does not affect error and alarm information or
test results described in this section, but it may result in an inoperable condition.
Refer to the Installation Manual provided with the data module for more
information about those options.
The DA data module provides an AT (Hayes) type interface that allows the
customer to select data rates, parity, local, interface mode (linked to digital
phone or stand-alone), and remote loop back, etc. An incorrect selection does
not affect error and alarm information or test results described in this section, but
it may result in an inoperable condition.
There are instances in this document where the service state of a data module is
mentioned. It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service
states that may exist. An explanation of these service states follows:
■

Out-of-Service—The port, and thus the data module, have been removed
from service. A busyout of a port or removal of the associated Digital Line
circuit pack causes the data module to be placed in the out-of-service
state. Failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test (Test #9) also takes a port
out-of-service.

■

Disconnected—The port is administered but the associated digital link
does not respond. An administered port is put in a disconnected state
after system booting or circuit pack insertion, until a "link reset pass"
message is received from firmware on the associated circuit pack.

■

In-Service—Once the PBX software has received a "link reset pass"
message from the Digital Line port, the port is placed in the in-service
state. In case the "link reset pass" message is missed, and an off-hook
message is received while the port is in the disconnected state,
maintenance software runs an ID request test and the port is put back in
service if a correct response is received.
If the link is disconnected, the port returns to the disconnect state. Note
that it takes a few minutes (less than five) for the state of a data module
port to change from in-service to disconnected after the data module is
disconnected from the local PBX loop.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1004

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
PDMODULE and TDMODULE Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

40987

None

WARNING

OFF

1 (b)

1 to 20

None

WARNING

OFF

15 (c)

Any

None

18 (d)

0

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257 (e)

40971

None

5132

0

Data Module Audits
Test (#17)

WARNING
(j)

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 6

769 (f)

40988

None

WARNING

OFF

1281

Any

Data Module Audits
Test (#17)

WARNING

OFF

1537 (g)

40968

None

WARNING

OFF

1793

Information
Channel and
Control Channel
Loop Around Test
(#13)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

2049

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#9)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

test port PCSSpp l r 5

2305 (h)

32770

None

2305 (i)

40967

None

2561

Data Module
Internal Loop
Around Test (#175)

WARNING

OFF

2817 (k)

Link GPP Loop
(183) Against Links

MAJOR

ON

3841 (l)

NONE

1.
2.

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

test port PCSSpp sh r 4

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1005

Notes:
a. Could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board problem
detected by the port circuit. Check for faulty wiring, check for a defective
data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data module
and the PBX (5000 feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge
wire; see Note). If the problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once
the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired automatically within 60
minutes.
The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range
is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge
wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or
by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface
(DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm,
wire) if in stand-alone mode.
NOTE:
Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and
Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111.
b. This error type and auxiliary data occur when at least 15 off-board
problems have been detected with the link to the data module. When an
error with the link is detected, an on-board counter is incremented.
The user could experience a noisy port or link. This is an off-board
problem detected by the port circuit. Check for faulty wiring, check for a
faulty data module, or reduce the cabling distance between the data
module and the PBX (5000 feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for
26-gauge wire; see the next Note). If the problem still exists, replace the
circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired
automatically within 60 minutes.
The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range
is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge
wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or
by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface
(DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm,
wire) if in stand-alone mode.
NOTE:
Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and
Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111.
c. This is an internal type error that occurs when an audit request fails.
d. This error type is logged when the port in question is busied out by
maintenance personnel. Make sure that the port is released from busyout.
e. There are problems with transmitting to the data module. This is usually an
on-board problem and can be ignored if no user complaints are received.
Otherwise, check for faulty wiring.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1006

f. This error indicates that EPF has been turned off due to the overcurrent
condition at the data module. Make sure that the data module is
connected. Look for faulty wiring or a defective data module, or reduce
the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000 feet for
24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire; see Note). If the problem
still exists, it may be due to the fact that the PTC is in the "tripped" position
due to a short on the power line. This can be corrected by removing the
short, unplugging the data module from the wall for about 30 seconds,
and plugging it back in. If the problem persists, replace the Digital Line
circuit pack. Once the problem has been resolved, the alarm is retired
after a predetermined period of time since this counter uses a "leaky
bucket" strategy.
The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range
is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge
wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or
by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface
(DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm,
wire) if in stand-alone mode.
NOTE:
Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and
Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111.
g. An in-line maintenance error has generated an off-board warning due to
some problem with the link to the data module. This can be ignored if no
user complaints are received. Otherwise, make sure the data module is
connected, check for faulty wiring, check for a defective data module, or
reduce the cabling distance between the data module and the PBX (5000
feet for 24-gauge wire and 4000 feet for 26-gauge wire, see Note). If the
problem still exists, replace the circuit pack. Once the problem has been
resolved, the alarm is retired automatically within 90 minutes.
The DA module is not phantom-powered from the port and hence its range
is limited by the Italtel digital phone’s limit (0.7 km, 2300 feet, on 26-gauge
wire or 1.8 km, 5900 feet, on 22-gauge, 0.6 mm, wire) if in linked mode, or
by the maximum length of loop allowed from the Digital Line Interface
(DLI) component (up to 3.5 km, about 2 miles, with 22-gauge, 0.6 mm,
wire) if in stand-alone mode.
NOTE:
Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and
Generic 3i Wiring, 555-204-111.
h. This indicates that the data equipment went off-hook while the associated
link was being initialized (in a disconnected state). Use the status
data-module command to determine the state of the data module. The
off-hook should have changed the service state to in-service. No system
technician action is necessary.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1007

i. This is the resulting code that is generated when the link between the
circuit pack and the data module is successfully reset. The link is normally
reset when the circuit pack associated with an administered port is first
plugged in (assuming that the data module is already in place and
connected to the associated port), when a port is first administered
(assuming the associated circuit pack is plugged in and that the data
module is connected to the associated port), or when a data module is
first connected to an administered port. No system technician action is
necessary.
j. This warning off-board alarm occurs only for G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386.
The alarm occurs when it appears to the system that a DCP endpoint has
been disconnected.
k. A DCP endpoint may have been disconnected.
l. This endpoint is part of processor link. Link initialization has failed (or
demand test for #183 for PI links has failed) and is indicating the
associated PDM as the cause. Check the PDM, the wiring to the PDM and
the link to the far end (i.e. AUDIX DCS, etc.) to resolve the problem.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Data
Module Internal Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Data Module Internal Loop Around
Test (#175)

X

ND

Network Processing Element
Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Information and Control Channel
Loop Around Test (#13)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Data Module Audits Test (#17)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Short Test
Sequence

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1008

NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. If a secondary data module is assigned, it is
tested after the primary data module. If either test fails, both data modules are
taken out of service This test usually runs only during the Long Test Sequence
and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-289.
Error
Code
1

TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
During testing of the primary information channel,
system resources may not have been available.
1. Check the port status. Use the display port
PCSSpp command to determine the station
extension of the port. Use the station status
command to determine the service state of the port.
If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for this test. You must
wait until the port is idle.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine the
extension of the data module port. Use the status
data-module command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in
use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer
to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’
for a full description of all possible states). You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Table 10-289.
Error
Code
1001

Page 10-1009

TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Table 10-289.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-1010

TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port may be busy with a valid call. Use the display
port PCSSpp command to determine the extension of
the data module port. Use the status data-module
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states). You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

Test disabled via background testing. Use status
data-module command to determine when the data
module is available for testing.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Table 10-289.
Error
Code
2500

Page 10-1011

TEST #9 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

1,2

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in Error Log. This causes noisy and unreliable
connections. Failure Code 1 indicates that the Crosstalk
Test failed on the primary channel. Failure Code 2
indicates that the Crosstalk Test failed on the secondary
channel.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem,
repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times and
verify that it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist, examine the data module,
connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

Information and Control Channel Local Loop
Test (#13)
This is a set of four tests that check the operation of the information and control
channels used between the SPE and the Digital Line port circuit.
NOTE:
This is an Internal Loop Around test only and does not check building
wiring. Use Test #175 for external loop around tests to the data module.
1. The SPE first sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to loop
around both the information and control channels for the port. Then, the
primary information channel loop back test is run. The test is performed by
sending a digital count from the Tone-Clock circuit pack on the primary
channel time slot and receiving the same digital count with a GPTD. The
digital count looks like transparent data to the on-board microprocessor.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1012

2. With the port still in loop around mode, the S channel Loop Around Test is
performed next. This test consists of sending four different transparent
patterns to the on-board microprocessor, receiving them back, and
comparing them.
3. The third test is a Loop Around Test for the secondary (alternate) channel.
It is not performed for data modules since this channel is not used by
MPDMs, MTDMs, and stand-alone DA’s [G3iV2-386].
4. A Conference Test is done next for the primary channel. This test is the
same as the Analog Line Terminal/Port Conference Test (#6).
Only one value (Pass, Fail, or Abort) is generated as a result of four tests run. If
any test fails or aborts, the sequence is stopped.
Table 10-290. TEST #13 Information and Control Channel
Local Loop Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run test are not available.
Port may be busy with a valid call. Use display port
PCSSpp command to determine the data module
extension. Then use status data module command with
the extension number to determine the service state of
the data module. If the service state indicates that the
data module is in use, then port is unavailable for certain
tests. Wait until port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1013

Table 10-290. TEST #13 Information and Control Channel
Local Loop Test — Continued
Error
Code
1002

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at
one-minute intervals for a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the data module extension.
Then use status data module command with the
extension number to determine the service state of the
data module. If the service state indicates that the data
module is in use, then the port is unavailable for certain
tests. You must wait until the port is idle before retesting.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1014

Table 10-290. TEST #13 Information and Control Channel
Local Loop Test — Continued
Error
Code
2001

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of
five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Rerun the test at one-minute intervals a maximum of
five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2500

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and Digital
Line circuit pack is not transmitting properly. This can
cause a wide range of effects. The user may notice
nothing or the port may be totally unusable. This could
also disrupt other users.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator
and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test
board UUCSS short command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit
pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still
fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1015

Table 10-290. TEST #13 Information and Control Channel
Local Loop Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

7

FAIL

Conference test failed on the primary information
channel. In some cases, user may not notice disruption
in service. In extreme cases, conferencing feature may
not work at all.

14

FAIL

The primary information channel is not transmitting
properly. User impact may range from noticing nothing
to not being able to use this port.

15

FAIL

The control channel between the processor and Digital
Line circuit pack is not transmitting properly. This can
cause a wide range of effects. The user may notice
nothing or the port may be totally unusable. This could
also disrupt other users.
1. Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator
and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test
board UUCSS short command.
2. Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone
Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit
pack.
3. If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit
packs are functioning properly, and the test still
fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack.

16

FAIL

The secondary information is not transmitting properly.
This can cause a wide range of effects. The user may
notice nothing or the port may be totally unusable.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem,
repeat this test up to a maximum of 10 times to
make sure it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still exist (poor data transmission),
examine the data module, connections, and wiring.

PASS

Information and Control Channel Local Loop Test
passed. All channels are transmitting properly.

Continued on next page

Data Module Audits Test (#17)
This is a series of six tests that are classified as hardware audits. The processor
sends messages to the on-board microprocessor to perform the following tests.
[G1] The audits run only if the station is in-service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)
■

Switchhook Inquiry — This is an update of the processor’s software
records based on the on-hook/off-hook status of the data module.

■

Bad Scan Inquiry — A message is sent uplink that contains a count
generated by certain events relating to the digital loop’s (link) conditions.
This could be an indication of communication problems between the
processor and digital port circuit pack.

■

EPF inquiry — The status of the EPF is sent uplink. EPF is not used for data
modules.

■

ID Request — A request is made to the data module for its status. The
data module sends its configuration information and health information
back. This information is checked and a pass/fail result is provided.

■

Ringer Update — This updates the data module’s ringer state according
to processor records.

■

Translation Update — This is a message normally used with digital
stations to refresh the default value that causes the station to send
touch-tones only in the primary information channel. This test is not used
with data modules.

Table 10-291.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-1016

TEST #17 Data Module Audits Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Switchhook audit timed out.
1. Verify the data module is connected to the PBX and
repeat the test.
2. If the test aborts, replace the data module and
repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to abort, replace the circuit pack
and repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2

ABORT

ID request fails, health bit is defective, or no response
from on-board microprocessor.
1. Verify that the correct data module type (PDM
versus TDM) is administered.
2. If the test aborts, replace the data module and
repeat the test.
3. If the test aborts, replace the circuit pack and repeat
the test.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Table 10-291.
Error
Code

Page 10-1017

TEST #17 Data Module Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

3

ABORT

No response from EPF audit.

4

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Resolve any outstanding circuit pack maintenance
problems.
2. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

5

ABORT

Ringer update aborted (data module not in the
in-service state).
1. Verify that the data module is powered (power LED
on).
2. Make sure data module is connected to the building
wiring, check for faulty wiring, check for faulty data
module.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. Replace the Data Module and repeat the test.
5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Digital Line
circuit pack and repeat the test.
6. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

6

ABORT

Data module translation update aborted.
1. Verify the data module is connected to the PBX.
2. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Table 10-291.
Error
Code

Page 10-1018

TEST #17 Data Module Audits Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Data Module Audits passed. This digital port circuit
pack is functioning properly.
1. If complaints still exist, investigate by using other
port tests, and by examining the data module
options, wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175)
This test verifies that a data message can be sent from the PBX, through the
building wiring, through an internal looparound path in the data module under
test, and back to the PBX. Figure 10-75 shows the hardware configuration used
for this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1019

"DEFINITY" COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
TDM
BUS

NETCON
CIRCUIT
PACK

DATA MODULE
(MPDM OR MTDM)
DIGITAL
LINE

DATA

CIRCUIT

EQUIPMENT

PACK

Figure 10-75.

Internal Loop Around Test

A signaling message is sent through the digital port circuit pack to the data
module under test to request it to enter loop around mode. A test pattern is then
sent from the SPE through the Network Control circuit pack (Netcon), over the
TDM Bus, through the digital port circuit pack, to the data module where the
message is looped around, and sent back through the digital port circuit pack,
the TDM Bus, the Network Control circuit pack, and to the SPE where it is
checked for consistency.
This test aborts if no terminal or communications equipment is connected to the
data module. It also aborts if a number of local PBX resources are not available.
These resources include a network control channel from the Network Control
circuit pack (there are a maximum of four channels administered as Netcon-type
data modules), two TDM time slots (one for each direction of the loop around
message), and an idle digital port circuit associated with the data module under
test. Failure to allocate any of these resources causes the test to abort with a
specific error code for that resource.
A "yes/no" parameter on each data module (MPDM, MTDM, or stand-alone DA
only) administration form is required to specify if the Data Module remote Loop
Around Test is supported by the data module endpoint. If the parameter is "n"
(no), the test does not run.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1020

Table 10-292. TEST #175 Data Module Internal
Loop Around Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not get translation information for port.
1. Verify that port circuit is administered.
2. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
3. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

This test is not applicable to the given hardware
configuration.
1. This abort message can be ignored.

1020

ABORT

Internal Software Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1030

ABORT

Internal software group identifier for data module not
valid.
1. Verify that port circuit is administered correctly.
2. If administration data correct, escalate the problem.

1031

ABORT

Extension number not valid.

1032

ABORT

Extension number not correct length.
1. Verify that the data module extension is administered
correctly.
2. If the administration data is correct, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1021

Table 10-292. TEST #175 Data Module Internal
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1071

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
No auxiliary port on Netcon circuit pack available to test
with.
1. Check that the Netcon data channels are
administered (the list data-modules command
should show at least one Netcon-type data module).
2. Test the Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack using
the test data-module command for the Netcon
circuit pack.
3. If administration data is correct, escalate the
problem.

2000

ABORT

Data module disconnected.
1. Verify that the data module is powered (power LED
on).
2. Make sure data module is connected to the building
wiring. Check for faulty wiring and faulty data
module.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
4. Replace the Data Module and repeat the test.
5. If the test continues to abort, replace the Digital Line
circuit pack and repeat the test.
6. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2500

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1022

Table 10-292. TEST #175 Data Module Internal
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
3004

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
1. This error could be caused by the switch setting of
the PDM. Verify that the switch on the PDM is set to
the "remote loop" position. When the remote loop
around test is completed, return the switch to the "off"
position.
2. This error could be caused by the Network Control
Data Channel. Look for DATA-CHL errors in the
Hardware Error Log.
3. This error could also result if no data equipment is
connected to the data module. Verify that (a) the
data equipment is properly connected to the data
module, (b) that power is available to the data
equipment, and that (c) the data equipment is
powered on.
4. This error could also occur if the baud rate of the
data module is set to 19.2 Kbps since the Network
Control circuit pack used by this test does not
support baud rates greater than 9600 bps. Verify that
the baud rate of the data module is set to 9600 bps
or less.

1040

FAIL

Data received from remote loop back does not match
data sent.
1. Check for faulty wiring.
2. Replace the data module and repeat the test.
3. If the test fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack
associated with the data module and repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

1070

FAIL

Internal software response.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If the same error persists after five attempts in
one-minute intervals, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1023

Table 10-292. TEST #175 Data Module Internal
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code
1072

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Poor response from auxiliary channel.
1. Test the Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack using
the test data-module command.
2. If the test fails, replace the Digital Line circuit pack.
3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

1073

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Wait one minute and attempt the test again.
2. If the same error persists after five attempts in
one-minute intervals, escalate the problem.

1074

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Make sure that the data equipment connected to the
data module is powered.
2. For an (M)PDM, verify that the Data Terminal "Ready"
LED is ON, or for an (M)TDM, verify that the Data Set
Ready LED is ON. If it is not on, check the cable from
the data equipment to the data module.
3. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

1075

FAIL

Unknown message received during test.
1. Attempt the test again.
2. If the same error occurs, test the Network Control
Data Channel using the test data-module command
and a known working data module.
3. Replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the
test.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module)

Page 10-1024

Table 10-292. TEST #175 Data Module Internal
Loop Around Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2040

FAIL

Internal System Error.

2095

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Repeat the test.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Data Module Loop Around Test passed. This digital port
circuit pack is functioning properly.
1. If problems persist, investigate by using other port
tests and by examining the data module options,
wiring, and connections.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1025

PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PE-BCHL1

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

PRI Endpoint Port

PE-BCHL

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

PRI Endpoint Port

1.

For additional repair information, see also UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
maintenance documentation and ‘‘Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems’’ in Chapter
5.

A PRI Endpoint provides ISDN-PRI (Primary Rate Interface) connections for
customers with application equipment or terminal adapters that terminate
ISDN-PRI. The equipment or terminal adapters are connected to the switch via
the UDS1 interface circuit pack. PRI Endpoint Port (PE-BCHL) maintenance
provides a strategy to maintain PRI Endpoint Port hardware circuitry on the UDS1
circuit pack. The maintenance strategy involves logging PRI Endpoint Port
hardware errors, running tests for port initialization, periodic and scheduled
maintenance, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm escalation and
resolution.

Wideband Switching
The Wideband Switching capability supports end-to-end connectivity between
customer endpoints at data rates from 128 to 1536 kbps over T1 facilities and to
1984 kbps over E1 facilities. DEFINITY switching capabilities are extended to
support wideband calls comprised of multiple DS0s that are switched end-to-end
as a single entity.
The Wideband Switching capability is designed for ISDN application equipment
(for example, ISDN video codecs), but it retains provisions for non-ISDN
application equipment by using PRI terminal adapters. In the same sense that a
DEFINITY data module acts as a DCP or BRI terminal adapter between endpoint
data (for example, V.35) and dialing (for example, RS-366) interfaces and a DCP
interface, a PRI terminal adapter acts as a wideband terminal adapter between
endpoint data and dialing interfaces and DEFINITY’s line-side ISDN PRI
interface.
The Wideband Switching Capability introduces PRI Endpoints on DEFINITY
line-side interfaces. A PRI Endpoint consists of one or more contiguous
B-channels on a line-side T1 or E1 ISDN PRI facility, and it has an extension
number. Endpoints initiate and receive calls using ISDN SETUP messages that
indicate the data rate and specific B-channels to be used, and they
communicate all other call status information via standard ISDN messages. Any

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1026

DEFINITY ISDN signaling set (for example, AT&T, CCITT, ECMA) may be used
for a line-side ISDNPRI facility.
Multiple PRI Endpoints on a one line-side facility are separate and distinct within
the facility. Non-overlapping contiguous sets of B-channels are associated with
each PRI Endpoint, and the endpoint equipment is expected to initiate calls
within these boundaries.
The endpoint application equipment must be able to do the following: use
standard ISDN-PRI signaling, adhere to the PRI Endpoint boundaries as
administered on DEFINITY when initiating calls, and handle incoming calls
appropriately based on the PRI Endpoint.

Signaling and B-channel States
These ports use a separate channel for signaling (for example, for call setup).
This mode of operation is known as out-of-band signaling. The separate
signaling channel is called a D-channel in ISDN terminology, and it carries all the
call control signaling messages for the PRI Endpoint Port B-channels. The
D-channel for these B-channels is an ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port (ISDN-LNK).
The signaling protocol used on the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel is
defined by one of the four selectable ISDN-PRI Specifications: AT&T, CCITT,
ECMA, and ANSI.
The ISDN-PRI Specification defines the possible SERVICE STATES for a
B-channel. The service state is negotiated with the far-end terminal adapter, and
it changes over time. Also, the service state may have a far-end or near-end
component, and it is initialized to the Out-Of-Service/Far-End state. An attempt is
made to negotiate the service state to In-Service.
NOTE:
The service state of a particular PRI Endpoint Port B-channel can be
displayed by issuing the status pri-endpoint  system
technician command.
If a call is present, the ISDN-PRI Specification defines the permissible CALL
STATES as well. There are tests in the short and long test sequences for PRI
Endpoint Port that are designed to audit these states and to ensure agreement
between both ends of the PRI wideband connection.

Alarming based on Service States:
A PRI Endpoint Port B-channel is alarmed with a WARNING if it is placed into a
Maintenance/Far-End or Out-Of-Service/Far-End state. While in such a state, the
port is unusable for calls to the terminal adapter. However, the user can still use
the other remaining ports in the PRI Endpoint to make calls to and from the
terminal adapter. When a WARNING alarm is raised, the status pri-endpoint
 command should be used to determine the exact state of the port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1027

Other alarms can be diagnosed by using the short and/or long test sequences.
Note that a PRI Endpoint Port B-channel can be placed into a Far-End Service
State either by direct action of the far-end terminal adapter or by inaction of the
far-end terminal adapter. For example, if they do not respond to a Remote Layer
3 Query (see Test #260 for ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port), the associated PRI
Endpoint Port B-channels are placed into the Maintenance/Far-End service state.
A PRI Endpoint Port is a port on a UDS1 interface circuit pack. Therefore, this
port depends on the health of the UDS1 interface circuit pack for proper
operation (see Figure 10-76). As noted earlier, a PRI Endpoint Port B-channel
also depends on an ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port D-channel (ISDN-LNK) to carry
the signaling traffic. If there is a problem with the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port,
the PRI Endpoint Port is affected. The ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port, in turn,
depends on the PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link). Processor Interface Link
problems affect the ISDN-PRI Signaling Link Port. Keep this hierarchy of
dependencies in mind when diagnosing problems.

ISDN-LNK

SIGNALING
(PORT 24)

UDS1
INTERFACE
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN464C)

TERMINAL
ADAPTER
DATA
PE-BCHL

(PORT 23)
..
..
..
..
.
..
.
.

PE-BCHL

PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
(TN765)

PROCESSOR
(TN773)

..
..
..
..
.
..
.
.

DATA
(PORT 1)

TDM
BUS

Figure 10-76.

PRI Endpoint Port Interactions [INTEL]

PRI Endpoint Port Service States
This section defines the possible service states of a PRI Endpoint Port, and it
explains the reason for each service state. This section also provides the
recommended recovery procedures (when required).

Service States
■

In-Service (INS)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1028

The B-channel is in its normal operating state.
■

Out-of-Service/Far-end (OOS/FE)
A B-channel is initialized to this state when administered. The switch
sends messages to the far-end terminal adapter to negotiate the
B-channel into service. If the far-end terminal adapter does not respond to
the messages within a certain time period, the service state remains
out-of-service, and maintenance periodically resends the messages. The
port is unusable for calls incoming to the switch and outgoing to the
terminal adapter (although other ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be
used for incoming and outgoing calls).

■

Out-of-Service/Near-end (OOS/NE)
This is the state of the port whenever one of the following is true: a
hardware failure exists on the signaling link, the NPE Crosstalk Test fails,
or the port is busied out by system technician. In this state, the port is
unusable for calls incoming to the switch or outgoing to the terminal
adapter (although other ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be used for
incoming and outgoing calls). No messages are sent to the far-end
terminal adapter until the signaling link comes back into service or until the
port is released by system technician.

■

Maintenance/Far-end (MTC/FE)
This state is reached when the far-end terminal adapter does not respond
to messages sent over the signaling link for a particular port after a certain
amount of time. This state is different from OOS/FE inasmuch as the
signaling link must be up initially and the B-channels must be in-service.
The switch periodically sends messages to the far-end terminal adapter in
an attempt to negotiate the port (B-channel) into service. The port is
unusable for calls outgoing to the terminal adapter. However, the port
services incoming call requests from the far-end (although other ports of
the PRI Endpoint can still be used to answer calls incoming to the switch
or to place outgoing calls to the terminal adapter). Note that transitions
into MTC/FE do not drop stable calls. Therefore, if the service state
changes from in-service to MTC/FE, stable calls are unaffected.

■

Maintenance/Near-end (MTC/NE)
The port (B-channel) is in this state if the signaling link (PI-LINK) is busied
out by system technician. The port (B-channel) is also temporarily in this
state if the system technician has issued a test port PCSSpp l or a test
pri-endpoint  l command. Note that transitions into MTC/NE
do not drop stable calls. Therefore, a system technician-demanded
busyout link lnk-no command does not drop stable wideband calls. In
this state, the B-channel is not usable either for new calls incoming to the
switch or for new calls outgoing to the terminal adapter.

■

Pending States (PEND)
If the near-end is expecting a timed response from the far-end for a
request to change the service state of a port, the state of the port reflects a
Pending state. For example, if the port is out-of-service/far-end and if an

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1029

in-service message is sent to the far-end, the service state of the port is
OOS/FE-PEND/INS (that is, out-of-service/far-end-Pending/in-service).
The far-end has a certain amount of time to respond to the message. The
service state reflects this pending state until the timer expires.
The following diagram of the PRI Endpoint Port service states shows the common
progression from one service state to another and the event that caused the
change of state.

OUT-OFSERVICE
NEAR END

CRAFT RELEASE OF
A B-CHANNEL OR
NEAR-END LINK
PROBLEM (PI-LINK OR
SYS-LINK) CLEARS UP

ADMINISTER
B-CHANNEL AS
MEMBER OF A
PRI ENDPOINT

MAINTENANCE
NEAR END

CRAFT BUSYOUT OF B-CHANNEL
BUSYOUT PORT/PRI-ENDPOINT,
LINK PROBLEM AT NEAR END
(PI-LINK OR SYS-LINK),
DS1 BOARD NOT INSERTED,
OR DS1 BOARD FAILURE.
CRAFT BUSYOUT OF
SIGNALING LINK
"BUSYOUT LINK LINK-NO",
OR TRANSIENT STATE FOR
CRAFT-DEMANDED LONG
TEST OF THE PORT.

CRAFT RELEASE
OF SIGNALING LINK

D-CHANNEL HAS BEEN
DOWN FOR AT LEAST
90 SECONDS.
OUT-OFSERVICE
FAR END

IN-SERVICE

FAILED TO
RECEIVE REPLY
FROM FAR END.
MTCE WILL
PERIODICALLY
TRY TO RESEND
THE MESSAGE
IF D-CHANNEL
CONTROLLING THE
B-CHANNEL IS UP,
SEND A MESSAGE
REQUESTING
TRANSITION
TO IN-SERVICE

RECEIVED
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
FROM THE FAR END

MAINTENANCE
FAR END

FAILED TO
RECEIVE REPLY
FROM FAR END.
MTCE WILL
PERIODICALLY
TRY TO RESEND
THE MESSAGE

RECEIVED
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
FROM THE FAR END

OUT-OFSERVICE
FAR END
PENDING
IN-SERVICE

Figure 10-77.

IF D-CHANNEL
CONTROLLING THE
B-CHANNEL IS UP,
SEND A MESSAGE
REQUESTING
TRANSITION
TO IN-SERVICE

MAINTENANCE
FAR END
PENDING
IN-SERVICE

Common Progressions in Service States

PRI Endpoint Port Service States
The following table summarizes each of the different PRI Endpoint Port service
states that can result when the status pri-endpoint  command is
issued. From the results of the status command, match the service state to the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1030

corresponding column. Proceed down the column until an "X" is found. The left
column indicates possible reasons why the port is in this state, and the right
column suggests possible recovery mechanisms. If an alarm against PE-BCHL is
present, it is indicated below the "X."
NOTE:
Refer to "Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’ for a layered approach to the processing of PRI
Endpoint problems.
Table 10-293.

INS

maint-FE Pend- ins

maint- FE

maint-NE

O/S- FE Pend- ins

O/S-FE

O/S-NE

Possible
Problem
Source

PRI Endpoint Port Service States

Possible Recovery
Route
X

ISDN
wideband
calls being
completed.

Normal Operation.

Port busied
out by
system
technician?

X
Warn
Alarm

Release port by the
release pri-endpoint
extension or release
port PCSSpp.

NPE
Crosstalk
Test failed?

X
Minor
Alarm

Replace UDS1
Interface CP.

DS1 circuit
pack lost
signal?

X

UDS1 Interface CP
removed?
DS1 cable
disconnected?
Terminal adapter
problems?
Far-end terminal
adapter restarting?
Faulty UDS1 Interface
CP?

Check
UDS1-BD.

Refer to UDS1-BD for
repair procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-293.

X
Warn
Alarm

INS

maint-FE Pend- ins

maint- FE

maint-NE

Processor
Interface
Link busied
out by
system
technician?
Check link
status.
[MIPS only].

O/S- FE Pend- ins

Service
Message
sent,
waiting for
reply from
far-end
terminal
adapter (2
minutes).

O/S-FE

Far-end
problems?

PRI Endpoint Port Service States — Continued

O/S-NE

Possible
Problem
Source

Page 10-1031

Possible Recovery
Route
Check administration
and the status of the
corresponding port
on the far-end terminal
adapter.

X

X

X

Wait a couple minutes
until Pending State not
present, check service
state.

Release link by the
release link lnk-no.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-293.

PRI Endpoint Port Service States — Continued

INS

maint-FE Pend- ins

maint- FE

maint-NE

O/S- FE Pend- ins

O/S-FE

O/S-NE

Possible
Problem
Source

Page 10-1032

Possible Recovery
Route

Signaling
link has
been down
for over 90
seconds?

X
Warn
Alarm

See ISDN-SGRP,
ISDN-LNK, PI-LINK
and/or SYS-LINK and
follow repair
procedures.
Is far-end terminal
adapter currently
restarting?

Repeated
failure of
far-end to
respond to
messaging?

X
Warn
Alarm

Periodically
Maintenance will try to
resend messages. To
speed process, run
system
technician-demanded
test test port PCSSpp
(Test #256).

X
Warn
Alarm

Check status of
far-end terminal
adapter.

Far-end
port busied
out
(OOS/FE).
Far-end
port being
tested
(MTCE/FE).

X
Warn
Alarm

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1033

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-294.

PRI Endpoint Port Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

1

0

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

15 (b)

Any

Audit and Update
Test (#36)

18 (c)

0

busyout pri-endpoint
 busyout
port 

WARNING

OFF

release pri-endpoint
 release port


129 (d)

None

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

130 (e)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

0

Associated Test

Alarm
Level
Any

On/Off
Board
Any

Test to Clear Value
test port PCSSpp sh r 1
test port PCSSpp sh r 1

257 (f)

Any

None

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

513 (g)

Any

None

76 9 (f)

Any

None

1281 (h)

Any

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 4

1537 (i)

Any

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1793 (j)

Any

None

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

3073 (k)

Any

Service State Audit
(#256)

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

3585 (l)

Any

None

None

WARNING

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r 1
test port PCSSpp sh r 1

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error type indicates a disagreement between the switch and the
terminal adapter at the other end of the connection with regard to the
ISDN call state of the PRI Endpoint Port. This switch automatically tries to
recover by clearing the call (that is, the call is torn down). The status
pri-endpoint  command can be used to determine the state
of the port.
When running the Short Test Sequence of tests, pay close attention to the
results of the Call State Audit Test (#257).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1034

b. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate the associated
errors (if any).
c. The PRI Endpoint Port has been busied out by a busyout pri-endpoint
 command or by a busyout port  command. No
wideband calls can be made to this port (although wideband calls can still
be made to other ports within this PRI Endpoint if others ports are in
service).
d. The far-end terminal adapter changed its ISDN service state to either
"out-of-service" or "maintenance." This may be a temporary condition due
to the testing of this port by the far-end terminal adapter or by a hardware
problem with the port. Outgoing calls to the terminal adapter are not
allowed over the port (although calls can still be made to other ports that
are in service within the same PRI Endpoint). To investigate the status of
the port, issue the status pri-endpoint  command.
e. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
f. This error type indicates a disagreement between this switch and the
terminal adapter at the other end of the connection with regard to the
ISDN service state of the PRI Endpoint Port. This switch tries to recover by
performing a service state audit. The status pri-endpoint 
command can be used to determine the state of the port.
When running the Short Test Sequence, pay close attention to the results
of the Service State Audit Test (#256).
g. This port is not recognized by the far-end terminal adapter. Investigate the
PRI Endpoint administration for both the switch and the terminal adapter
and make changes as necessary.
h. The Conference Circuit Test (#7) failed on this port. See Test #7 for the
repair procedures.
i. The NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) failed on this port. See Test #6 for the repair
procedures.
j. This error indicates a failure of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. When
running the Short Test Sequence, the results of the Signaling Link State
Check Test (#255) are important.
k. Two Service State Audit attempts have failed (see Test #256). The port is
not usable for any outgoing calls to the terminal adapter (although
incoming calls from the terminal adapter are accepted over this port, other
ports in the PRI Endpoint can still be used for both incoming and outgoing
calls to and from the terminal adapter) until the test passes and the port
state is changed to in-service (use the status pri-endpoint 
command to investigate the port status).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1035

l. This error type appears when the switch receives an ISDN RESTART
message for an ISDN port that is not idle. Usually, calls are not cleared via
the RESTART message. Therefore, this error type may be associated with
a dropped call report from a user.
The following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the port’s
ISDN call state at the time that the unexpected request to restart the
channel is received from the remote terminal adapter. This information can
be useful if dropped calls (cutoffs) are being reported by users of the PRI
Endpoint.
The following list contains important Aux values. Any other such values
can be ignored.
10

A call in a stable, talking state was cleared unexpectedly
by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART
message. This state is called the "active" state.

4,
7,
8,
260,
263

A call that did not reach the active state but at least
reached a ringing state was cleared unexpectedly by the
far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message.

1,
3,
6,
9,
265

A call that has not yet reached a ringing state was cleared
unexpectedly by the far-end terminal adapter with an ISDN
RESTART message.

11,
12,
19,
531,
267,
268

A call that was in the process of clearing has been
nonetheless cleared by the far-end terminal adapter with
an ISDN RESTART message. If this condition occurs
frequently, it may mean that the far-end terminal adapter is
attempting to clear ports that it thinks are in a "hung" state.
The RESTART message brings the port to an idle
condition.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Table 10-295.

Page 10-1036

System Technician-Demanded Tests: DS1-BD
Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

Signaling Link State Check Test (#255)

X

X

ND

Service State Audit Test (#256)

X

X

ND

Call State Audit Test (#257)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots that are reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections
may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s long test sequence,
and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-296.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use status pri-endpoint 
commands to determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-296.
Error
Code
1002

Page 10-1037

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM Bus errors. The status health command can be used to determine
if the system is experiencing heavy traffic. Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance
to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors.
1. If system has no TDM Bus errors, and if it is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test. The system may
be oversized for the number of tone detectors present, or some tone
detectors may be out-of-service. The list measurements tone-receiver
command displays information on the system’s tone receiver.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If errors are present, refer to
TTR-LEV.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If errors are present, refer to
TONE-PT.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a
maximum of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use status
pri-endpoint  commands to determine when the port is
available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1117

ABORT

A service state audit message is outstanding.
1. Wait 2 minutes and then try again.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2020

ABORT

The test did not run due either to an already existing error on the specific
port or to a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit
pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-296.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Test
Result

Any

Page 10-1038

FAIL

Description/Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections. The PE-BCHL is moved to the
out-of-service/near-end state.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is able to communicate over the TDM Bus.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464C UDS1 circuit pack has one
SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips.) The NPE controls port
connectivity and gain, and it provides conferencing functions on a per port basis.
The Conference Circuit test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being
tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is instructed to
listen to several different tones and to conference the tones together. The
resulting signal is then measured by a tone detector port. If the level of the tone is
within a certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-297.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be in use on a valid call. Use the status pri-endpoint 
command to determine when the port is available for testing.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status
pri-endpoint  command to determine when the port is
available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due either to an already existing error on the specific
port or to a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or against the
circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the already existing error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-297.
Error
Code

Page 10-1039

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly. This
causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack. Even though wideband calls do not use the
conferencing feature on the NPE, this failure indicates problems with
the circuit pack hardware.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections. User-reported
troubles on this port should be investigated by using the other port tests
and by examining the terminal adapter or the external wiring.

Continued on next page

Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from the switch processor to the UDS1
interface circuit pack to ensure that the port’s translation is correct. The port audit
operation verifies the consistency of the current state of the port that is kept in the
UDS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software.
Table 10-298.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The test failed due to Internal system error.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-298.
Error
Code

Page 10-1040

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The port translation has been updated successfully. The current port
states kept in the UDS1 interface circuit pack and in the switch software
are consistent. If the port is busied out, the test does not run, but returns
PASS. To verify that the port is in-service:
1. Enter status pri-endpoint  to verify that the port is
in-service. If the port is in-service, no further action is necessary. If the
port is out-of-service, go to Step 2.
2. Enter the release pri-endpoint  command or the release
port  command to put the port back into in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

Continued on next page

Signaling Link State Check Test (#255)
As is noted in the general description for a PRI Endpoint Port, the operation of the
PRI Endpoint Port depends on the health of the UDS1 interface circuit pack and
of the TN765 Processor Interface Link. This test checks the status of those critical
elements.
Table 10-299.
Error
Code

TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1700

ABORT

Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI
endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort
when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete the test on this
port, do one of the following:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the
change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI
Endpoint Detached?" to "y."

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)
Table 10-299.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-1041

TEST #255 Signaling Link State Check Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
There is a problem with the Signaling Channel and/or with the Processor
Interface Link.
1. Consult the procedure for the ISDN-PRI Signaling Group (ISDN-GRP)
and/or the procedures for Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK). Further
information may also be obtained by consulting the procedures for the
ISDN-PRI Signaling Channel (ISDN-LNK).

8

FAIL

There is a problem with the UDS1 interface circuit pack.
1. Consult the procedures for UDS1 interface circuit pack (UDS1-BD).

PASS

The signaling link hardware is okay.

Continued on next page

Service State Audit (#256)
As is noted in the general description for PRI Endpoint Port, these ports may be
in one of several service states as defined by the ISDN-PRI Specification. This
test performs a service state audit with the far-end terminal adapter to ensure
that both sides agree on the service state.
A PASS for this test simply means that an audit message was successfully
composed and sent out to the far-end terminal adapter. The ISDN Specification
allows up to two minutes for a reply. If no reply is received within that two minute
window, this switch automatically tries once again. If that attempt fails, an error is
logged (Error Type 3073), and the switch attempts a recovery by automatically
retrying approximately every 15 minutes. If the port was initially in the INS
(in-service) state, it is now placed into the MTC/FE (maintenance state, far-end
problem) state. Until a Service State Audit attempt is successful, no outgoing
calls are placed over this port, but incoming calls are be accepted. The service
state of this port does not affect the service state of other ports in the PRI
Endpoint. If an incoming call that uses this port is presented while in such a state,
a Service State Audit attempt is immediately attempted (that is, the switch does
not wait for the 15 minute cycle, but instead tries to recover immediately). To
investigate the status of this PRI Endpoint Port, issue the status pri-endpoint
 command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Table 10-300.
Error
Code
1113

Page 10-1042

TEST #256 Service State Audit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The signaling link has failed. As a result, the system cannot send any
messages on behalf of this port.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check).

1117

ABORT

A service state audit message is outstanding.
1. Wait two minutes and try again.

1700

ABORT

Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI
endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal abort
when the rollabout video feature is enabled. To complete the test on this
port, do one of the following:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the
change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI
Endpoint Detached?" to "y."

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

Wait 4 minutes and then check the Error Log for any new occurrences of
Errors Type 3073.
If there are no occurrences of this error, both sides of the ISDN connection
agree on the service state, and the negotiation succeeded. If there is a new
occurrence of Error Type 3073, the negotiation failed (that is, the far-end
terminal adapter twice failed to respond within the mandatory two minute
window). This switch automatically retries approximately every 15 minutes.
If the port was initially in the INS (in-service) state, it is now be placed into
the MTC/FE (maintenance, far-end problem) state (refer to the "Service
States" section, which precedes the PE-BCHL "Hardware Error Log Entries
and Test to Clear Values" table). Incoming calls are accepted, but no
outgoing calls are originated from this port. If an incoming call is presented,
another Service State Audit is immediately performed in an attempt to bring
the PRI Endpoint Port to the proper state.

Continued on next page

Call State Audit Test (#257)
If a call is active on the port, the switches on both sides of the connection should
agree on the ISDN state of the call as defined in the ISDN Protocol Specification.
This test audits internal call state data by querying the far-end terminal adapter

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PE-BCHL (PRI Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1043

about the ISDN state of the call. It can be helpful when trying to clear a hung call.
If the internal call state data on the near-end switch is different than that of the
far-end terminal adapter, the call is torn down.
As with Test #256 (Service State Audit), a PASS simply means that an
appropriate message was composed and sent to the far-end terminal adapter.
The ISDN Specification allows up to two minutes for a reply. If a reply is not
received within the two minute window, a protocol time-out violation is recorded
in the error log against the associated signaling channel (ISDN-PRI Signaling
Link Port, which is listed in the Error Log as ISDN-LNK; the Error Type is 1).
Table 10-301.
Error
Code
1019

TEST #257 Call State Audit Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
An audit is already in progress.
1. Wait two minutes and try again.

1113

ABORT

The signaling link has failed. As a result, the system cannot send any
messages on behalf of this port.
1. Check the results of Test #255 (Signaling Link State Check).

1116

ABORT

The port is in an out-of-service ISDN service state.
1. A call cannot be present if the port is in an ISDN out-of-service state.
As a result, a call state audit would be inappropriate, and no action is
necessary. (Use the status pri-endpoint  command to
investigate the ISDN state of the port).

1700

ABORT

Rollabout video abort. The PRI terminal adapter associated with this PRI
endpoint extension is detached from the circuit pack. This is a normal
abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled.
To complete the test on this port, do one of the following:
1. Re-attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter, or
2. Disable the rollabout video feature on this circuit pack by entering the
change ds1 PCSS command, and set the field "Alarm when PRI
Endpoint Detached?" to "y."

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

This switch sent a call state auditing message to the far-end terminal
adapter to verify the state of the call active on this port. If a call state
mismatch is found, the call is torn down within two minutes. If no call was
active, no message was sent.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1044

PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

1.

Alarm Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

PI-BD

MINOR

test interface PCS sh

Processor Interface Circuit Pack

PI-BD

WARNING

test interface PCS sh

Processor Interface Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A
or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where the
circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for either the first or second Processor Interface circuit
packs).

The TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit pack provides a front-end processor
to the TN777 Processor circuit pack. The PI circuit pack implements the packet
layer and link layer of the X.25 protocol (DCS, AUDIX, CMS, OCM links) as well
as the link layer of the ISDN-PRI protocol (ISDN links). A system without high or
critical reliability supports up to two circuit packs. A high or critical reliability
system supports up to four Processor Interface circuit packs, two in each carrier.
Only one pair of the circuit packs on a single carrier can be active at a given
time. The other two are in Standby mode. The TN765 is a downloadable circuit
pack. This means that at reboot, system power-up, or via system technician
command, Processor Interface firmware is downloaded to the circuit pack. For
other restarts, a Checksum Test is performed on the firmware. If the Checksum
Test fails, then the firmware is downloaded again. The firmware can be
automatically downloaded at any time using the reset interface PCS system
technician command.
On the Active SPE complex or in an unduplicated system, Processor Interface
maintenance is used for alarming the circuit pack. If System Communication
Interface (PI-SCI) finds an error or alarm condition that can be associated with an
on-board problem with the Processor Interface (PI-BD) circuit pack, then it
alarms both the System Communication Interface and the Processor Interface
circuit pack. Processor Interface circuit pack maintenance is also used to test the
common circuit pack functions on the circuit pack. If these tests fail, a circuit
pack level alarm is raised on the Processor Interface circuit pack (PI-BD). Port
level alarms are raised against PI-PT. See PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)
Maintenance documentation for details.
On the Standby SPE complex, the testing of the Processor Interface circuit pack
is different. The Standby Processor Interface circuit pack is tested daily via
scheduled maintenance or on system technician demand. These tests are to
check the Standby PIs hardware and firmware so that if an SPE interchange
takes place, the Processor Interface communication links (DCS, ISDN, or AUDIX,
for example) recover on the new Active Processor Interface circuit pack in a

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1045

short time. If the firmware checksum fails during scheduled maintenance, then
the circuit pack can be downloaded again at this time instead of during the SPE
interchange. The Processor Interface firmware can be unconditionally
downloaded to the Standby SPE circuit pack via the reset interface PCS
command, where PCS is the carrier/slot of a Standby PI. The command executes
the Standby Processor Interface Board Test (#423), but with a download option.
The Active Processor Interface circuit pack is tested in the PI-SCI (System
Communication Interface) Maintenance documentation. Refer to that section for
details. The test command is test interface PCS where PCS is the port network
number, carrier, and slot of one of the Standby Processor Interface circuit packs.
If the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack is tested, the test sequence for
the Standby Processor Interface is followed. If the Active Processor Interface
circuit pack’s PCS is given, then tests in the Active Processor Interface test
sequence are run. On the Active PI, if there are no enabled Processor Interface
links on the Communication-Interface Links Form, only the XXX-BD (Common
Port Circuit Pack) tests execute.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-302 indicates entries that may be found in the Error Log for Processor
Interface circuit packs. Since the Processor Interface circuit pack has common
port board functionalities, then cross reference XXX-BD (common port board)
maintenance information for more information. Test #423 is the only test
described in this section. XXX-BD maintenance describes the other tests
mentioned in the following table.
Table 10-302.
Error
Code
1

PI-BD Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

0

Circuit pack removed
or SAKI Test (#53)

MINOR

ON

23 (b)

0

None

WARNI
NG

OFF

54 (c)

0

None

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS l

124 (d)

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS l

None

MINOR

ON

MINOR

ON

0

125 (e)
257

65535

Control Channel Test
(#52)

257 (f)

Any

None

513 (g)

Any

None

test interface PCS sh r 1

test interface PCS

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-302.
Error
Code

Page 10-1046

PI-BD Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

769 (h)

4358

None

1025 (i)

4363

NPE Audit Test (#50)

1538 (j)

Any

None

MINOR

ON

3585 (d)

Any

None Test (#423)

MAJOR

ON

reset interface PCS l

3840 (i)

Any

None

3841

Any

Standby PI Circuit
Pack Test (#423)

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS sh

3999(k)

Any

None

test interface PCS sh

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

! WARNING:
The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and cause all ISDN-PRI
and BX.25 links to come down.
Notes:
a. Indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was physically
removed from the system.
NOTE:
The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been
removed and/or SAKI Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same
slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in
the system and the red LED is on, then replace the circuit pack.

! CAUTION:
Reseating the circuit pack may cause a system restart if the circuit
pack is located on an Active SPE complex.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1047

If this is a Duplicated Option system, verify that there is an equal number
of Processor Interface circuit packs in each SPE complex. If there is not an
equal number of Processor Interface circuit packs, this condition could
cause alarms on the STBY-SPE, DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, as well as the
PI-BD.
b. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically
installed. If this alarm remains active for more than 30 minutes, follow
normal escalation procedures. DO NOT PHYSICALLY RESEAT THE
CIRCUIT PACK! The alarm is cleared when the circuit pack is installed
and initialization maintenance runs on it. The Standby Processor
Interfaces alarm is cleared when Standby maintenance runs on it.
c. Processor Interface-SCI detected an error while trying to reset the TN765
PI circuit pack. This error indicates a loss of communication with the circuit
pack. If this error continues, then replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on
how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack. See PI-SCI Maintenance
documentation for additional errors.
d. PI-SCI logged errors that resulted in an error being logged and an alarm
being raised against PI-BD. Refer to the PI-SCI Maintenance
documentation and resolve all alarms against PI-SCI. If this alarm resulted
in an SPE-interchange, issue the test interface PCS sh command to try to
resolve the PI-BD alarm.
e. A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is
logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong
circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the
change circuit-pack command to re-administer this slot to match the
circuit pack inserted.
f. This error indicates transient communication problems with this circuit
pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
g. This error, when reported with Aux Data in the range of 4352 to 4358,
indicates the circuit pack has reported a hardware failure on the circuit
pack. The circuit pack should be replaced. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE
complex circuit pack.
h. This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this circuit pack.
i. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
j. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more
of the following symptoms:
1. The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #51 and/or Test
#220 are aborting with Error Code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a
NO-BOARD.
3. A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and
ports are properly installed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1048

The system tries to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. If the error
recurs after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. (Refer to the "Handling
Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’.)
k. Error type 3999 Indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test, for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test (#423)

X

X

ND

Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404) (a)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Test (#52)

X

X

ND

NPE Audit Test (#50)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Note:
a. This test is repeated up to four times since there are four ports on the
circuit pack. Cross-reference PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)
Maintenance documentation for information about these tests.

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1049

NPE Audit Test (#50)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation as NPE Audit Test (#50).

Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test
(#423)
This test is run only in a High or Critical Reliability system. This test is run on
Processor Interface circuit packs that are currently in Standby Mode and thus no
active calls are up on these circuit packs. It is very important to periodically test
the Standby Processor Interface circuit packs to ensure their health in case of an
SPE-interchange. This test is run either by system technician demand (test
interface PCS or reset interface PCS) or during scheduled maintenance. The
test resets the circuit pack. The main purpose of this test is to perform a
Checksum Test on the downloadable firmware or to download new Processor
Interface firmware if the reset interface PCS command is used. If the checksum
fails, then the firmware is downloaded again from the tape.
Table 10-303.
Error
Code
9,10

TEST #423 Standby PI Board Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1029
1030
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

1124

ABORT

There are currently no enabled Processor Interface links in the system.
1. Wait and run this test when links are enabled and the PI-SCI (System
Communication Interface) has been started up.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack)
Table 10-303.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-1050

TEST #423 Standby PI Board Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
Could not reset the Processor Interface circuit pack.
1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the command.
2. If this test continues to fail, replace TN765 Processor Interface (PI) circuit
pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for
instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack.

16
80
94
102

FAIL

23
199

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If problem still exists, redownload firmware using the reset interface
command.
Download of Processor Interface firmware failed.
1. Wait 1 minute and retry. A tape access problem could be present. Check
that tape is in tape drive.
2. If the problem persists and Standby TAPE is idle when command is
entered, then a problem could exist in either the Standby TAPE or the
Processor Interface circuit pack. Replace the tape with a new tape that
contains Processor Interface firmware. Retry the command.
3. If the problem still exists, then refer to the TAPE Maintenance
documentation for possible TAPE errors. If there are no TAPE errors,
repeat the test command up to five times. If problem still exists, replace
the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A
Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex
circuit pack.
4. If problem still exists with new TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack,
replace TAPE drive.

9000s

FAIL

Processor Interface Download failed.
1. Refer to TABLE A, Tape Unit Data Table, and follow the repair
recommendations.

PASS

TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack initialized correctly. Processor
Interface links (X.25 and ISDN) should recover now. See “PI-LINK” for more
information if links do not recover.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1051

PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to
Run

Full Name of MO

PI-LINK

MINOR

test link lnk-no l

Processor Interface Link

PI-LINK

WARNING

test link lnk-no l

Processor Interface Link

NOTE:
Reference lnk-no using the display communication-interface links
command.
The Processor Interface (PI) Communication Link is the physical link that
connects DEFINITY to an adjunct such as AUDIX, another node in a DCS
network, or an ISDN-PRI connection. These links are either X.25 (DCS, AUDIX, or
MIS) or ISDN (ISDN-PRI). The system supports up to four of these links per
TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. PI-LINK maintenance actually monitors
several hardware devices: Processor Interface ports, TN754 or TN784 Digital
Line ports, PDMs, TDMs, MTDMs, MPDMs, and DS1 facilities. Henceforth, "data
module" refers to either PDM, TDM, MPDM, or MTDM. In much of the following
link documentation, the repair procedures described mention various
hardware configurations. Choose the procedure appropriate to your
configuration.
The Processor Interface circuit pack provides an EIA connection. This
connection can be administered only on Link 1 in a system without High or
Critical Reliability. The EIA port is used when an adjunct (AUDIX, for example) is
near (less than 25 feet) or further if a modem is used. The EIA port can also be
used to connect two PBXs together via DCS. The EIA port cannot be used in a
High or Critical Reliability system.
The Processor Interface Link can be in three different states. These states can be
seen using the status link lnk-no system technician command. If the link is in a
maintenance busy state, then the system technician had instructed the
Processor Interface to be in maintenance busy by entering the busyout link
lnk-no command or the Processor Interface Link is not established and
maintenance is trying to bring it up. This probably means that an error condition
is occurring somewhere on the link that keeps the link from being logically
connected and carrying data. If the link is busied out, then it can be put back into
service by issuing a release link lnk-no command. This restarts the link. If the
link is for DCS, then it may speed the recovery of the link if busyout link lnk-no
and release link lnk-no are executed on the switch that is establishing the
connection (see the Communication-Interface Links form). The link can be in a
disconnected state if the link cannot be started up. In this case, maintenance
tries to establish the link periodically. If the link is up and data is being sent
successfully, then the link is in the in-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1052

NOTE:
When an ISDN-PRI link is busied out via a system technician command, the
associated B-channels (ISDN-TRK) are moved to the maintenance and/or
far-end state. As a result, stable calls are NOT dropped, but the trunks are
removed from the trunk hunt group to prevent them from being selected for
outgoing calls. See ISDN-TRK Maintenance documentation.
Up to two Processor Interface circuit packs can be active on the same carrier in
the system. Thus, there can be a maximum of eight Processor Interface links in
service at any one time. If an error or alarm is detected by PI-LINK that can be
associated with a physical port on the Processor Interface circuit pack, then the
Processor Interface Port MO is alarmed, which indicates a defective port on the
circuit pack. Refer to the PI-PT (Processor Interface Port) Maintenance
documentation for details.
It is useful to use the status processor-channel channel-no command when
troubleshooting the PI-LINK. A processor channel corresponds to a processor
application (also called a session) and more than one may be using the same
physical link (only for X.25 links). The relevant field of the status screen is the
"channel status:" which can be in 1 of 7 different states (see the following table).
State 6 is normal state for the processor channel for X.25 links and state 10 is
normal state for ISDN links. States 9 and 10 are only applicable to ISDN links.
States

Description

1

Incorrect translations or channel not assigned.

3

Attempting to reset the channel but no response from the other
end. Getting stuck in this state may be caused by hardware
problems, a DS1 synchronization problem or a DCE/DTE conflict
in the Communication-Interface Link Form (one end of the link
must be DCE and the other must be DTE).

4

The other end acknowledged the channel reset (the two ends
are physically connected) but a processor channel connection
has not occurred yet. Getting stuck in this state may indicate that
translations are incorrect, such as remote processor channel
mismatch. To recover from this situation, execute the busyout
link lnk-no and release link lnk-no commands. If this is
unsuccessful, then use the reset interface command (note that
this is a destructive command that tears down all four links).
This problem may also be caused by a noisy link or DS1
synchronization problems.

6

This is the normal state of the channel. The link is in the data
transfer state which means that the application is able to send
data over the link.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1053

States

Description

7

One or more unexpected messages have arrived; software is
attempting to resynchronize the two ends. Usually it takes up to
five minutes for the software to recover once it is in this state.

9

ISDN-PRI link is currently down. It is periodically restarted or can
be forced to restart via busyout/release link lnk-no.

10

ISDN-PRI link is up. This is the normal state of the channel. The
link is in data transfer state, which means that ISDN data can be
sent over the link.

Continued on next page

Figure 10-78 shows the Processor Interface Communications Link (PI-LINK)
Interactions.

TO
EIA
PORT
X.25
LINK

PROCESSOR
TN773

MEM.
BUS

X.25
LINK

PI
CIRCUIT
PACK
TN765

X.25/
ISDN
LINK

DIGITAL
LINE
CIRCUIT
PACK
TN754
OR
TN754B

TN767
OR
TN722
DS-1
PORT

TDM
BUS

Figure 10-78.

Processor Interface Link Interactions

PDM
TDM

TO AN
ADJUNCT
(AUDIX, MIS,
OCM)
OR
DCS TO
ANOTHER
PBX

DCS SIGNALING
TO REMOTE PBX

TO REMOTE
PBX VIA
ISDN-PRI
OR
DCS

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1054

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-304.
Error
Code
1

PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test link  sh

1 (a)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

18

0

busyout link lnk-no

WARNING

OFF

release link lnk-no

257 (b)

Any

none

MINOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

263 (c)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

513 (d)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

769

Any

PI Loop Around Test
(#182)

WARNING

ON

test link lnk-no l r 2

1025

Any

TDM Loop Around
Test (#183)

WARNING

OFF

test link lnk-no l r 2

1281 (n)

Any

none

WARNING/
MAJOR3

OFF

test link lnk-no sh r 2

1537 (e)

Any

none

WARNING/
MAJOR3

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

1793 (f)

Any

none

WARNING

OFF

busyout/release link link
no.

2049 (g)

Any

none

WARNING/
MAJOR3

OFF

test link lnk-no sh r 9

2305 (h)

Any

none

WARNING

OFF

test link lnk-no sh r 9

2561 (i)

Any

none

WARNING

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

2817 (j)

Any

none

NONE

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

3073 (k)

Any

none

WARNING

OFF

test link lnk-no sh r 9

0

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Table 10-304.
Error
Code

Page 10-1055

PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

3585 (l)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

3841 (m)

Any

none

MINOR/
WARNING2

OFF

busyout/release link
lnk-no

Continued on next page

1.
2.
3.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major and Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used
in the set options command.
This error type initially raises a warning alarm. If this error type persists, and alarms are not
downgraded on this MO due to the values of set options, then, after a period of time, a Major alarm
is raised.

Notes:
a. A permanent switched call was dropped. Check the "Link Recovery"
section.
b. The TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack detected an error on a
specific link via background maintenance. If the link is down, busyout and
then release the link. If this fails, check all connections. If the error
reappears consistently, see "Link Recovery" section.
c. Processor Interface software or firmware detected an error condition on
this link. Internal software should initiate the recovery for the link. If the link
is still down, see the "Link Recovery" section.
Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored.
0

Processor Interface circuit pack indicates that the ISDN-PRI link is
down.

1

An internal software audit indicates that this link has been in
overload for at least 20 seconds and is hung.

2

No internal software buffers are available to process a link
transition (that is, down to up, or up to down). The transition is lost.

17

The allocation of a new software write buffer to the Processor
Interface circuit pack failed.

d. Translation Error—check all administration for the link. Possibly the
destination DS1-BD or DIG-BD is not inserted. Busyout and then release
the link to restart it. This is not a Processor Interface hardware problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1056

Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored.
2

Link translation error. If the communication-processor link
form indicates this link’s destination is a tac+extension,
then bring up the dial plan form. If an extension exists with
the same first digit as the tac, then this PI link will not
establish. To alleviate this problem, either remove the
extension on the dial plan form, or change the destination
field on the communication-processor link form to use a
UDP extension to dial the far-end.

8

Port not administered in software.

e. This error occurs when the Processor Interface link fails to be established.
Check all connections and administration. This could also occur as a
result of another error, the failure of Test #182, for example. If the other
error on the link can be cleared, then this error may also clear. See the
"Link Recovery" section.
1, 2

System error.

7

System error. If this error is occurring on all administered
links with the same Aux Data and all links are alarmed, then
execute the reset interface command to restore all the
links.

12

One of the two Loop Around Tests failed (#182 or #183).
See the "Link Recovery" section.

13

Hardware problem with DS1 facility is affecting ISDN links.
Refer to DS1-BD Maintenance documentation.

19

A transient state associated with the D-channel backup
protocol. The link is being held in the busy state until call
control can be moved to the new active link. No action
needs to be taken.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1057

32771
32772

The remote endpoint indicates that the call is up and the
local PBX cannot complete the call. Check trunk status (on
the remote end and local end) if a DS1 trunk is used, or
check the status of the data module if a data module is
used in the link. The commands are status trunk trk-grp/
member or status data-module . If the destination is
in-service/active, then the commands are busyout trunk
trk-grp/member and release trunk trk-grp/member (on
both sides of the link if this is a DCS link). If a data module
is used in the link, then use a busyout data-module 
command followed by a release data-module 
command. Busy out the Processor Interface Link prior to
busying the trunk or data module. Release the Processor
Interface Link via release link lnk-no command and the
Processor Interface Link re-starts. If this fails, check the
status of the TN765 port using status data  where
 is the extension of the port from the interface
extension in the Display Communication Link form; if the
state is "in-service/idle" then manually call the TN765 port
and transfer the call to appropriate destination, either a
DS1 Trunk Access Code or the data module extension.
See "Link Recovery" if error still occurs. See "Link
Recovery" if error still occurs and link does not establish.

32779
32782
32801

Administration problem; check that the Processor Interface
data module extension exists via the status data-module
 command. Verify that the destination extension
exists and that the correct routing pattern is used. In
addition, check that the Processor Interface data module
and the destination extension are administered on the COS
and/or COR forms.

32813

Administration problem; check all administration.

32815

The off-premise call timed-out. Check the "Off-Premises
Tone Detect Timeout Interval" on the Feature-Related
System Parameters Form. The time-out is administered
between 6 and 25 seconds. No response was received
from the remote destination. Check the status of the remote
destination. This might also indicate possible
synchronization problems. Network synchronization
sources should be checked on all networked switches.
Also see the SYNC Maintenance documentation.

32814

Call was answered but not by a remote data module.
Check the remote destination extension and verify that this
is a data module.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1058

32841

Call went over the trunk and received ring back but did not
receive modem answer tone. Check the remote destination
for automatic answering.

65528

Administration problem; check all administration.

65532

Call setup timed out; retry, and check destination. If the
destination is an adjunct (CMS, AUDIX, etc.), then check if
the terminal ready light is lighted on the PDM. If not, then
the adjunct is down. If the destination is another PBX, then
the PBX might be restarting. Retry.

65535

Link specified is out-of-range (1 through 8).

Continued on next page
f. This error message indicates that the TN765 Processor Interface circuit
pack could not transmit the message the software sent to it. See the "Link
Recovery" section if the error continues. This is a normal error during "hot
start" SPE-interchanges.
g. Excessive resets on the link. Usually indicates that the remote end is down
or the physical connection is broken. A warning alarm is raised initially,
followed by a Major alarm if the problem is not cleared. See the "Link
Recovery" section.
h. Excessive I-frame retransmission. Could indicate a noisy link. Recover as
in previous note. Aux values indicate the retransmission rate per minute.
See the "Link Recovery" section.
i. If the Aux Data value is 9, then the destination circuit pack (DIG-BD or
DS1-BD) is not inserted. Otherwise, DS1 maintenance detected a
hardware failure. (DS1 cable disconnected, loss of signal, DS1-BD
problems.) Not a Processor Interface Link problem. Check DS1-BD
maintenance. Only applicable to ISDN links. Aux value useless. Once the
DS1 signal is restored, maintenance automatically restarts the Processor
Interface Link. To hasten this process, test the appropriate DS1 Interface
circuit pack via test board PCS command. When Test #138 (loss of
signal) passes, the Processor Interface Link recovers shortly.
In addition to an indication that the link failed to establish the PI-LINK 2561
AUX_Data, the hardware error log is also updated. This error may indicate
two possible conditions:
1. A failure to detect the DTR from the peripheral.
When the DTR is not detected by the data module the AUX_Data is
set to 40. This indicates that the problem is most likely with the
peripheral or the connection to the peripheral.
2. A time-out on the EIA interface query request to the data module.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1059

When the data module fails to respond to the EIA interface (query
request) the AUX_Data is set to 41. This may indicate problems
with the data module or connection to the data module. Other
errors specific to the data module may also be logged if this is the
case.
j. TN765 PI-BD determined that the ISDN link went down. Check
connectivity with the other end. Busyout and then release the link to
recover. Occurs if DS1 maintenance detected a problem or the remote
end is busied out or is down. This also occurs if the ISDN link is unstable
or if there is excessive noise on the line. See the "Link Recovery" section.
k. Excessive LAPD (link-access procedure on the D-channel) invalid frame
errors. Could be a noisy line or problems with the TN765 Processor
Interface circuit pack. Also check DS1-BD Maintenance documentation.
See the "Link Recovery" section.
l. Occurs 90 seconds after a 2817 Error Code if link does not recover. At this
time, all ISDN trunks associated with this link are put into a maintenance
far-end state (see ISDN-TRK for details). See the "Link Recovery" section.
m. The application level process associated with the link has failed to
establish a data connection with the far end. This problem prevents data
from being processed. The condition may exist even if the link is in a data
transfer state. Busyout, and release the link to restart it. This is not a
Processor Interface hardware problem.
Aux values of concern; any others can be ignored.
433

OCM application did not start correctly. Reboot the
OCM adjunct.

435

Application level process could not connect to session
layer process.

n. Excessive (over threshold) HDLC transmit or receive error rates were
reported. Aux Data is the HDLC error rate reported. See the Link Recovery
section for troubleshooting this problem

Link Recovery
This section describes the general procedure to take to recover from link errors
and alarms. Refer to the "Troubleshooting ISDN-PRI Problems" section in Chapter
5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’, before proceeding with this "Link
Recovery" strategy.
1. Determine the link status using the status link command. If the link status
is "in-service" and (for X.25 links) all the pairs of processor channels are
complete under "LOCAL/REMOTE PROCESSOR CHANNELS" (that is,
every "/" is followed by a processor channel number, not a blank), then the
link is operating correctly and no further action should be taken. If the link

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1060

status is not "in-service," then go to Step 2. If the link status is "in-service"
and (for X.25) some of the processor channel pairs are incomplete
(remote channel not specified, meaning that the processor channels are
not connected), then look at the status of "status processor-channel" for
the local processor channels that are not connected.
2. Look for active PI-SCI alarms and follow the procedure for those alarms if
there are any. If there are no PI-SCI problems, go on to the next step.
3. If the link is still down, restart the link via the busyout link lnk-no system
technician command followed by the release link lnk-no command. This
sequence tears down the call and then tries to bring it back up. If the link
is for DCS, it may speed the recovery of the link if busyout link lnk-no
and release link lnk-no commands are executed on the switch that is
establishing the connection (see Communication Link form). If the link
does not recover, go on to the next step.
4. Check the status of the remote endpoint.
a. If the link is busied out, release it.
b. Is the switch down or restarting?
5. If link was never brought up:
a. Using DEFINITY Communications System, Generic 1 and System
75 Administration and Measurement Reports, 555-200-500 and
DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4
Administrationand Feature Descriptions, for instructions as needed,
verify that the administration is correct as follows:
— Enter the display ds1 PCSS command. Check the
compatibility of the DS1 parameters with the far-end and the
CSU.
— Enter display communication-interface links command.
— Enter the display communication-interface
processor-channels command. Enter the display
communication-interface hop-channels command (if
hop-channels are being used).
— Enter the display trunk / command (if DS1 is
being used for DCS).
— Enter the status sync command (if DS1 is being used)—
make sure the primary synchronization is administered.
6. If link is an EIA link:
— Verify via the Communication-Interface Links form that the
information for the EIA connection is correct on the local and
remote PBXs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Page 10-1061

7. Try to isolate the problem in the link if hardware is at fault. Test the link via
the test link lnk-no long system technician command.
a. If Test #182 fails three times, replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer
to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
b. If Test #182 passes and Test #183 fails, replace the TN754 or
TN784 Digital Line or the TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit
pack, whichever is used in the link. If Test #183 still fails, replace
the TN765 PI-BD. Refer to Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation
and Correction’’.
8. If the preceding tests pass:
Check the physical transmission link:
a. Are all the circuit packs physically installed?
b. Are the cables still connected throughout?
c. Check DS1-BD error section for possible connectivity problems if
DS1-BD is used in link connection.
d. Check CSU options.
9. Finally, restart the Processor Interface circuit pack via reset interface
PCS. This resets the circuit pack and restarts ALL the links on it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the PI
Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence. REMINDER: The command line entry to test the
PI-LINK MO is: test link lnk-no (s or l).

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Processor Interface Loop Around Test (#182)

X

D

TDM Loop Around Test (#183)

X

D

ISDN Hardware Test (#234)

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test (#9)

X

ND

Port Circuit Information Channel and Control Channel
Loop Around Test (#13)2

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Link Quality Test (#233)

Short Test
Sequence

X

Data Module Internal Loop Around Test (#175)2
2

Data Module Audits Test (#17)2

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

1.
2.

Page 10-1062

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive
If the PI-LINK under test is BX.25 and if there is an MPDM or an MTDM as part of the link, then
the PI-LINK test sequence is expanded to include the tests on the data module. These tests are
run via the PDMODULE or TDMODULE maintenance object. Refer to the PDMODULE
TDMODULE (Data Module) Maintenance documentation for descriptions and details of these
tests.

Processor Interface Loop Around Test (#182)
This test is destructive.
The Processor Interface Loop Around Test is an on-board Loop Around Test. The
test requires that the system technician issue a busyout link lnk-no command
before this test is run. This means that the DCS, AUDIX, or ISDN link, for
example, is torn down. It does not access the TDM Bus at all. When the circuit
pack is put into local loop around mode, frames are looped internally on the
circuit pack. If the test fails, the Processor Interface circuit pack reports the
failure. It is a good check of most of the working hardware on the Processor
Interface circuit pack.
Table 10-305.
Error
Code
1

TEST #182 Processor Interface Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Link was not busied out via system technician.
1. Busyout the link via the busyout link lnk-no command.
2. Retry the test command.

2
4
9

ABORT

16
80
84
85
93
94
102

ABORT

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Internal system error or possible TN765 PI-BD failure.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, then reset the PI-BD via the test interface
PCS long system technician command.
3. If problem still exists, replace the TN765 PI-BD.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Table 10-305.
Error
Code
12

Page 10-1063

TEST #182 Processor Interface Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/Recommendation
PI-BD reported that Loop Around Test failed.
1. Retry the test.
2. If it continues to fail, try resetting the circuit pack by the test interface
PCS long command. This TEARS down all other links on this circuit
pack (DCS, AUDIX, ISDN, etc.).
3. If the problem still exists, replace the TN765 circuit pack.

13

PASS

The on-board Loop Around Test on the TN765 circuit pack passed. Most of
the hardware on the circuit pack was tested except for the TDM Bus
buffers. If problem is isolated to TN765 and this test passes, then replace
TN765 circuit pack since TDM Bus buffers could be at fault.

ABORT

The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all
BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no
command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the
test interface PCS long command.
3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual.
4. Retry the test link lnk-no command.
5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links
are in-service and an error code is still present, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

TDM Loop Around Test (#183)
This test is destructive.
This test requires that you enter the busyout link lnk-no command before
running the test. This means that the DCS, AUDIX, or ISDN link, for example, are
torn down. This test checks the health of the TN754 or TN784 DIG-LINE or the
TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack. This depends on which circuit pack
is used on the link. The TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or DS1 Interface circuit pack
is put into loop around mode while the PI-BD is instructed to go into remote loop
around. If this test fails, and the previous Test #182 passes, then the TN754 or
TN784 Digital Line or the DS1 Interface circuit pack should be replaced. It is not
run on ports administered as EIA.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)

Table 10-306.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-1064

TEST #183 TDM Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Link was not busied out via system technician.
1. Busyout the link via the busyout link lnk-no command.
2. Retry the test command.

2
4
8

ABORT

6

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The system may be
under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out-of-service due
to TDM-BUS errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

9

ABORT

TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface circuit pack
is not installed.
1. Install circuit pack and retry the test.

13

ABORT

The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all
BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no
command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the
test interface PCS long command.
3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual.
4. Else, retry the test link lnk-no command.
5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links
are in-service and a error code is still present, escalate the problem.

16
80
84
85
93
94
102

ABORT

1005

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, then reset the PI-BD via the test interface
PCS long command.
3. If problem still exists, replace the TN765 circuit pack.
The test is not applicable if the EIA port is being used as part of the link.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Table 10-306.
Error
Code

TEST #183 TDM Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result

12

Page 10-1065

FAIL

Description/Recommendation
PI-BD reported that Loop Around Test failed.
1. Retry the test.
2. If Test #182 fails, see section for Test #182 first.
3. If Test #182 passes and Test #183 continues to fail, replace either the
TN754 or TN784 Digital Line or the TN722 or TN767 DS1 Interface
circuit pack.
4. If Test #183 still fails, replace the TN765 PI-BD.

PASS

The loop around from the TN765 PI-BD to the Digital Line or DS1 Interface
circuit pack and then back to the PI-BD passed.

Continued on next page

Link Quality Test (#233)
This test queries the TN765 circuit pack for the latest error rates (number/minute)
for certain counters that are kept by the TN765. The test passes if all the error
rates are below a certain threshold. The counters that are queried are the Level 2
Reset SABM(E) [Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode (Extended)] counter, the
Level 2 I-frame Retransmission counter, and the invalid LAPD frame counter.
Table 10-307.
Error
Code
3
11
24

TEST #233 Link Quality Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Table 10-307.
Error
Code
13

Page 10-1066

TEST #233 Link Quality Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to abort with error code 13, then check status of all
BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI links on this TN765 via the status link lnk-no
command. If all links are not in-service, then reset the TN765 using the
test interface PCS long command.
3. If the TN765 fails to reset, refer to the PI-SCI section of this manual.
4. Else, retry the test link lnk-no command.
5. If the test still aborts with error code 13 or from step 2, and some links
are in-service and a error code is still present, escalate the problem.

4
16385

FAIL

16386

Excessive Level 2 resets (SABM) on link.
Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmission. Possible noisy link.
1. See “PI-LINK”.

16388

FAIL

Excessive LAPD invalid frame errors. Could be a noisy link or problems
with the near-end Processor Interface circuit pack or with the far-end.
1. See “DS1-BD” for DS1 Interface circuit pack problems.
2. See “PI-LINK”.

16387

FAIL

Excessive Level 2 resets and excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmission.

16389

FAIL

Excessive Level 2 resets and excessive LAPD invalid frame errors.

16390

FAIL

Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmissions and excessive LAPD invalid
frame errors.

16391

FAIL

Excessive Level 2 I-frame retransmissions, excessive LAPD invalid frame
errors, and excessive Level 2 resets.
1. See PI-LINK ( Processor Interface Link) Maintenance documentation
for this maintenance object.

16392

FAIL

HDLC receive rate exceeded the threshold.

16400

FAIL

HDLC transmit rate exceeded the threshold.

1639316425

FAIL

Other combinations of above individual failures can be calculated as
follows:
16384 = 0X4000
16385 = 0X4001
16386 = 0X4002
16388 = 0X4004
16316 = 0X4010

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Table 10-307.
Error
Code

Page 10-1067

TEST #233 Link Quality Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
PI-LINK currently does not have any of the above errors.

Continued on next page

ISDN Hardware Check Test (#234)
This test checks the status of the ISDN hardware which is the DS1 Interface
circuit pack and cabling. Status of the DS1 port is kept by the system. The state
of the port can be in-service or out-of-service. This state is updated by DS1
Interface circuit pack maintenance. If DS1 maintenance detects a problem with
the physical medium near-end or far-end, the Processor Interface Link
maintenance is instructed to restart the link. Therefore, if this test fails, the port is
considered out-of-service and the link cannot be brought up until DS1
maintenance changes the state to in-service. This is more of a status inquiry than
a test. Thus, the only recovery procedure is to refer to DS1-BD (DS1 Trunk Circuit
Pack) Maintenance documentation.
Table 10-308.
Error
Code

TEST #234 ISDN Hardware Check Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

This test only runs for ISDN-PRI links. This link is a BX.25 link and, thus,
aborts.

FAIL

Indicates that there is a physical problem with the DS1 facility link.
1. Cross-reference DS1 Interface circuit pack errors for possible reason.
Refer to “DS1-BD”.
2. Retry the test. It continues to fail until the DS1 problem is cleared up.

PASS

DS1 facility is functioning correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)

Page 10-1068

PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

PI-PT

MAJOR

test interface PCS sh

Processor Interface Port

PI-PT

WARNING

release data-module 

Processor Interface Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A
or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where
the circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for either the first or second Processor Interface
circuit packs).

PI-PT is the physical port on the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. If the
Processor Interface Link (PI LINK) MO raises an alarm that can be correlated to
an on-board port problem, then PI-PT is alarmed. In a system without High or
Critical Reliability, there are no tests that run directly on Processor Interface port.
The PI-LINK MO is responsible for the testing of the TN765 ports along with DCS
links, AUDIX links, ISDN links, etc. Refer to the PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link)
Maintenance documentation for details. In a High or Critical Reliability system,
Processor Interface port is used to test the ports on the Standby Processor
Interface circuit packs. If the test fails, a Major alarm is raised. More importantly,
if a software requested SPE-interchange takes place and an alarm is raised on
the Processor Interface port, then the interchange may abort due to alarm
severities.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-309.
Error
Type
0

1

Processor Interface Port PI-PT Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

0

1

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test interface PCS sh r 1

Standby PI Port Test
(#404)

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS sh

18

0

busyout data-module


WARNING

OFF

release data-module


123 (a)

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

test link lnk-no

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)
Table 10-309.
Error
Type

Processor Interface Port PI-PT Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

130 (b)
257 (a)

Page 10-1069

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

None
Any

None

MAJOR

ON

test link lnk-no l

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. PI-LINK raised this alarm against PI-PT. The Processor Interface Loop
Around test failed on one of the ports. Refer to PI-LINK Maintenance
documentation for details on resolving this alarm. If this error resulted in an
SPE-interchange, then issue the test interface PCS sh command on the
Standby Processor Interface to try to resolve the alarm.
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
PI-PT can be tested by issuing the test interface PCS command on the Standby
Processor Interface circuit pack. If the Active TN765 Processor Interface circuit
pack is tested, then the active test sequence is run (which is DESTRUCTIVE).
[Refer to PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) Maintenance documentation
for details on these tests]. Only the Standby Processor Interface test sequence
runs tests directly on PI-PT.
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Standby Processor Interface Port Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)

Table 10-310.

Page 10-1070

System Technician-Demanded Tests: PI-PT Standby Processor Interface
Short Test
Sequence

Order of Investigation

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

NPE Audit Test (#50) (a)
Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test (#423) (b)

X

X

ND

Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Notes:
a. Refer to “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)” for information about these
tests.
b. Refer to “PI-BD” for information about this test.

Table 10-311.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: PI-PT Active Processor
Interface

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SCI Start (#176) (a)
SCI Self Test (#231) (a)

X

NPE Audit Test (#50) (b)
Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (b)

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND 1

X

D

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Notes:
a. Refer to the “PI-SCI” for information about these tests.
b. Refer to “XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)” for information about these
tests.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)

Page 10-1071

Standby Processor Interface Port Test (#404)
This test is the same as Test #182 in the Processor Interface Link (PI-LINK)
Maintenance documentation. However, this test only runs on the Standby
Processor Interface circuit pack. It is an on-board loop around test. This test
checks the health of physical port on the circuit pack. If the test fails, then a Major
alarm is raised on the circuit pack. When the circuit pack is put into local loop
around mode, frames are looped internally on the circuit pack. If the test fails, the
Processor Interface circuit pack reports the failure. It is a good check of most of
the working hardware on the Processor Interface circuit pack.
Table 10-312.
Error
Code

TEST #404 Standby Processor Interface Port Test
Test
Result

2
9
16
80
84
85
93
94
102

ABORT

1124

ABORT

Description/Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

The PI link for this port is currently disabled. This test does not run on
disabled PI links.
1. Retry this test if the PI link is re-enabled. Enter the display
communication-interface link command to verify that this link has
been disabled.

1125

ABORT

The Processor Interface Loop Around Test on this port could not be
executed since the Processor Interface circuit pack is not in the correct
state.
1. Check PI-BD for possible errors and resolve them first.
2. Rerun the test interface PCS sh command.
3. If the test continues to abort while the PI-BD Test (#423) passes,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-PT (Processor Interface Port)
Table 10-312.
Error
Code

Page 10-1072

TEST #404 Standby Processor Interface Port Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

1029
1030
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

12

FAIL

Processor Interface circuit pack reported that the Loop Around Test failed.
1. Retry the test. If the test continues to fail, try resetting the circuit pack
via the reset interface PCS command.
2. If test continues to fail, replace the TN765 circuit pack. Refer to
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on
how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack.

PASS

TN765 Processor Interface Circuit Pack Loop Around Test passed. The
hardware associated with this port is functioning properly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1073

PI-SCI (System Communication
Interface)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
2

PI-SCI

1.

2.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to
Run1
test interface PCS

Full Name of MO
System Communication Interface

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN only); C is the carrier designation (for example, A
or B for processor complex circuit packs); and S is the address of the slot in the carrier where the
circuit pack is located (for example, 1 or 2 for Processor Interface circuit packs 1 or 2).
For additional repair information, see also PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation.

! WARNING:
The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all
ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down.
The PI-SCI (System Communication Interface) MO is used to put the TN765
Processor Interface circuit pack into a state such that BX.25 (DCS, AUDIX, etc.)
and ISDN links can be established. The TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack
has downloadable firmware. It is the responsibility of PI-SCI to download the
firmware to the TN765 circuit pack during initialization. Failures while
communicating with the TN765 circuit pack are logged against the PI-SCI MO.
There can be up to two SCIs. There is a one-to-one correlation of PI-SCI to
Processor Interface circuit packs. In a High or Critical Reliability system, there
can be four Processor Interface circuit packs, but only two on the same carrier
are active at any one time. If errors against the SCI can be related to the
Processor Interface circuit pack, then the circuit pack MO is alarmed (PI-BD).
See also PI-LINK (Processor Interface Link) and PI-BD (Processor Interface
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
When investigating BX.25 (DCS, AUDIX, etc.) and ISDN link problems, resolve
PI-SCI errors initially, since they might clear up the Processor Interface link
problems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1074

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-313.
Error
Type

PI-SCI System Communication Interface Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test interface PCS sh r 1

1 (a)

2055
2056
2057
2058

none

none

none

none

257 (b)

Any

none

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS l2

769 (c)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

1025 (d)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

1281 (e)

Any

Sci Start Test (#176)

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

1793 (f)

Any

none

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS l2

2049 (g)

90xx

Sci Start Test (#176)

MAJOR

ON

test interface PCS l2

2305 (f)

Any

Sci Self Test (#231)

MAJOR

ON

test interface
PCS sh r 2

2561 (h)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

2817 (i)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

2818 (j)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

3073 (f)

Any

none

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

test interface PCS l2

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
See WARNING below.

! WARNING:
3.

The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all ISDN-PRI and
BX.25 links to come down.
Major alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set options
command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1075

Notes:
a. An error occurred during a hot start processor element interchange that
caused the associated Processor Interface links (BX.25 and/or ISDN-PRI)
to go down temporarily. If these errors reoccur and there are no other
errors against PI-BD or PI-SCI, resolve the other alarm first.
2055

The checksum of the PI memory was not able to be retrieved.

2056

The PI was not able to be put into a stable state such that the
switch to the new active PI failed to keep the existing PI links
up.

2057

The active PI was unable to copy the image of its memory to
the standby PI.

2058

System software error.

b. This error indicates a possible hardware failure on the TN765 Processor
Interface circuit pack. If the error persists, and the SCI is unstable (resets
often), type in test interface PCS long command. The Processor
Interface firmware is redownloaded if the checksum fails. If the problem
still exists, automatically redownload the Processor Interface firmware by
typing reset interface PCS. If this doesn’t work, then replace the TN765
Processor Interface circuit pack. These errors also raise alarms against
the PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack).
NOTE:
To replace an SPE complex circuit pack in a Duplication Option System
follow the procedures in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid’’. For a Non-Duplication Option System follow procedures in Chapter 5,
‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for instructions on how to replace the
Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790).
Use the following steps for G3i-386 and later systems where the Processor
Interface firmware resides in the flash ROM memory in the Processor
circuit pack (i.e. TN786 or TN790) instead of Tape as in G3i-286. If the
firmware can't be successfully downloaded into the Processor Interface
circuit pack after entering the "reset interface PCS" command, then use
the following steps:
1. Replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack:
2. After the new TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack has been
inserted successfully, enter "test interface PCS long" command to
verify the results of tests.
If the error still indicates the failure for downloading the firmware
into Processor Interface circuit pack, then it's possible that the
firmware stored in the Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790) is
corrupted.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1076

3. Follow the Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ Software
Upgrade procedure to load the system software from the Memory
Card with the correct software release number.
After the system software is successfully loaded into Processor
circuit pack, boot the system up with the customer translation
memory card in slot.
If the failure for downloading the firmware into Processor Interface
circuit pack persists after the system reboot, it's possible that the
flash ROM chips in Processor circuit pack (TN786 or TN790) may
be defective.
4. Replace the Processor circuit pack and repeat the step (3) to load
the system software into the Processor circuit pack. Boot the
system up again.
If the failure for downloading the firmware into Processor Interface
circuit pack persists after the system reboot, it's possible that the
M-BUS at the backplane of control carrier may be defective.
Replace the control carrier.
c. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. The software lost
handshake with the Processor Interface circuit pack. See Note (b) for
recovery.
d. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. See Note (b) for
recovery. This error can also be caused by line problems. Investigate
possible transmission errors or noise on the associated line.
e. An Aux Data value of 23 indicates that the software failed to open the tape
in order to download the Processor Interface firmware. Check if the tape is
currently in use (that is, if it is spinning or if the yellow LED is on). When the
tape is idle, reissue the test interface PCS long command. If the test still
fails or if the Aux Data value was other than 23, then refer to Test #176 (Sci
Start Test) for details on recovery. For all other Aux Data values, reissue
the test interface PCS long command, and refer to Test #176 (SCI Start
Test) for details on recovery.
NOTE:
For G3i-386 and later, see Note (b) for recovery.
f. Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack. See Note (b) for
recovery. These errors also raise alarms against the PI-BD (Processor
Interface Circuit Pack).
g. Download of Processor Interface firmware failed. If this error persists, then
replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. This error also raises
an alarm against PI-BD if the threshold is reached.
h. An audit of the firmware failed. If BX.25 and ISDN links are still up, no
action is needed. If Processor Interface circuit pack is reset continuously,
recover as in Note (b).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1077

i. Error while communicating with TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack.
See Note (b) for recovery. System software problem internal to the
process that monitors Processor Interface link activity. Escalate the
problem if error causes the Processor Interface to be reset (loss of service
is noticed).
j. This error indicates that the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack did not
clear up the overload condition within one minute of logging the initial
2817 error (overload detected). The circuit pack was reset and all
Processor Interface links on that circuit pack were also reset.

Short and Long Test Sequences
The SCI and Processor Interface circuit pack are both tested via the same
system technician command. The system technician command is test interface
PCS l or sh where PCS is an active Processor Interface circuit pack.

! WARNING:
The "test interface long" command resets the PI-BD and causes all
ISDN-PRI and BX.25 links to come down.
For information about testing the Standby Processor Interface circuit pack, see
PI-BD Maintenance documentation. If the Active Processor Interface has no
enabled links (see Communication-Interface Links Form in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’, only XXX-BD (Common
Port Circuit Pack) tests execute.

System Technician Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the SCI
Start Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SCI Start Test (#176)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

SCI Self Test (#231)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

NPE Audit Test (#50) (a)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Page 10-1078

a. For information about these tests, refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation. These tests are run on the
PI-BD (Processor Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance object.

SCI Start Test (#176)
This test is destructive.
This test restarts the System Communication Interface. This implies all BX.25
(DCS, AUDIX, mis, etc.) and ISDN links are restarted. The checksum of the
downloadable firmware is tested. If the checksum fails, the firmware is
redownloaded from tape. If it passes, SCI Start completes and the associated
BX.25 and ISDN Links are started up. If a circuit pack needs to be replaced, refer
to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on
replacing an SPE circuit pack.
The Processor Interface circuit pack firmware is downloaded from the flash ROM
memory of Processor circuit pack. If the checksum test fails, then the firmware is
re-downloaded again from Processor circuit pack. If it passes, SCI Start
completes and the associated BX.25 and ISDN links are started up. If the
checksum failure persists, refer the footnote (b) of Hardware Error Table for
repair procedure.
Table 10-314.
Error
Code

TEST #176 SCI Start Test
Test
Result

9
10

ABORT

1

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Could not reset the Processor Interface circuit pack.
1. Wait one minute, and retry the command.
2. If test continues to fail, replace TN765 Processor Interface circuit
pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for
instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit pack.

16
80
94
102

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If problem still exists, redownload firmware using the reset interface
command.
3. See note (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)
Table 10-314.
Error
Code
200

Page 10-1079

TEST #176 SCI Start Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Checksum of Processor Interface failed.
1. Wait 1 minute and retry.
2. If the test continues to fail with a checksum failure, there could be
corruption on the tape. Replace the tape with a new tape that contains
Processor Interface firmware. Retry the command. For G3i-386 and
later, see note (b) of Hardware Error Table for repair procedure.
3. In G3i-286 if the problem continues to exist after replacing the tape,
then replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions
about replacing an SPE complex circuit pack. Retry the command.

23
199
9000s

FAIL

Processor Interface Download failed. Refer to TABLE A Tape Unit Aux Data
Table and follow the repair recommendations.
1. Wait one minute and retry. See note (b) of Hardware Error Table for
repair procedure
2. If problem persists and TAPE is idle when command is entered, then a
problem may exist in either the TAPE or the Processor Interface circuit
pack. Replace the tape with a new tape that contains Processor
Interface firmware. Retry the command.

PASS

TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack initialized correctly. Processor
Interface links (BX.25 and ISDN) should recover now. See PI-LINK for more
information if links do not recover.

Continued on next page

SCI SELF TEST Test (#231)
This is an on-board test which checks the basic functionality of the TN765 circuit
pack. This test runs in the background periodically, or it can be invoked via the
test interface PCS command. If this test continuously fails, then replace the
TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems:
A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE complex circuit
pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PI-SCI (System Communication Interface)

Table 10-315.
Error
Code
11

Page 10-1080

TEST #231 SCI Self Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

13

ABORT

The TN765 PI circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort with error code 13, then reset the TN765 via
"test interface PCS long".

! CAUTION:
Resetting the TN765 will cause all BX.25 (Audix, cms, etc.) and
ISDN-PRI links to be briefly torn down.
3. If TN765 fails to be reset, refer to test 176 section description.
4xxx

FAIL

Hardware on the TN765 Processor Interface failed.
1. 4000 - Assigned data link hardware failure.
2. 4001 - Unassigned data link hardware failure.
3. 4002 - CPU function test failed - hardware failure.
4. 4003 - Local Processor Interface RAM memory test failed - hardware
failure.
5. 4004 - Local EPROM memory test failed - hardware failure.
6. For all of the above errors, retry the test. If it fails again, the
Communication Interface should be restarted. Type in a reset interface
command. If the reset is successful, retry the test interface command.
If Test #231 still fails with error codes other than 4001, then replace
TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. Refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace an SPE
complex circuit pack. If test fails with Error Code 4001, then an
on-board failure is associated with a non-used port on Processor
Interface circuit pack. TN765 circuit pack should be replaced if this port
will be used in the future.

PASS

TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack passed self-test. On-board
hardware is functioning correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1081

PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

PKT-BUS

MAJOR

test pkt P l r 2

Packet Bus

PKT-BUS

MINOR

test pkt P l

Packet Bus

PKT-BUS

WARNING

test pkt P l

Packet Bus

1.

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined from the PORT field on the Alarm
or Error Log.

The Packet Bus consists of a single bus, and one such bus appears in each port
network. The Packet Bus in each port network is physically independent.
Therefore, there is one instance of the Packet Bus maintenance object for each
port network.
In DEFINITY, the Packet Bus is used to carry ISDN-BRI and ASAI signaling
information. The SPE interface to the Packet Bus is in the TN778 Packet Control
circuit pack (PKT-CTRL). Packet Bus maintenance is performed only when the
Packet Bus is enabled on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters form.
Packet Bus testing is dependent on the Packet Bus port of the TN771
Maintenance/Test circuit pack, the TN778 Packet Control Circuit Pack
(PKT-CTRL), the TN570 Expansion Interface circuit pack (EXP-INTF), and on the
ISDN-BRI circuit packs (BRI-BD). Packet Bus tests may abort if some of this
hardware is not present in the system. Also, these tests may yield inconsistent
results if some of this hardware is defective.
The interactions between the Packet Bus and the circuit packs that use the bus
are complex. For this reason, the Packet Bus can be alarmed due to a circuit
pack failure and, conversely, circuit packs can be alarmed due to a Packet Bus
failure. Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’ describes Packet
Bus maintenance and also the interactions of the bus with the Packet circuit
packs. The chapter discusses fault isolation and correction procedures, and it
should be referenced for all procedures and required decisions. The "Packet Bus
Fault Isolation Flowchart" section of Chapter 9 is the normal starting point in the
chapter for experienced technicians. However, technicians who are unfamiliar
with the Packet Bus and its use should refer to the introductory material. This
section on PKT-BUS is limited to a description of the Error and Alarm Log entries
for the Packet Bus maintenance object and to a description of the Packet Bus
test sequence.
A failure of one or more circuit packs that use the Packet Bus can cause a Packet
Bus alarm. In addition, a Packet Bus failure can cause loss of service to one or
more such circuit packs, as well as to the ports and endpoints associated with
the ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT, BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, and

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1082

ASAI-ADJ). These interactions are discussed in the "Circuit Packs That Use the
Packet Bus" section of Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’.
The following list summarizes some of the important points to consider when
working with the Packet Bus.
■

The Maintenance/Test circuit pack (TN771) is a critical tool for isolating
Packet Bus faults. This circuit pack is present in each port network of a
high or critical reliability system that is using the Packet Bus. In a standard
system, the circuit pack may be included as a customer option. If a TN771
is not present, one must be taken to the customer site to allow for
proper fault isolation. (A determination as to whether a TN771 circuit pack
is in the system is made by entering the list configuration command.)
Use of the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port facilities is described under
"The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack (TN771)" in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus
Fault Isolation and Correction’’. Also, in the same chapter, the section
entitled "Special Precaution Concerning the TN771" describes other
circumstances when a TN771 must be taken to the customer site.

■

Certain catastrophic Packet Bus failures have an effect on Packet circuit
pack, port, and endpoint maintenance. The following list summarizes the
impact of such failures in this regard.
■

ISDN-BRI circuit pack (BRI-BD) in-line errors indicating possible
Packet Bus failures are placed into the error log, but are not acted
upon.

■

ISDN-BRI port (BRI-PORT, ABRI-PORT) in-line errors indicating
possible Packet Bus failures are neither placed into the error log
nor acted upon.

■

ISDN-BRI endpoint (BRI-SET, BRI-DAT, ASAI-ADJ) in-line errors
are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon.

■

Circuit pack and port in-line errors that are not relevant to the
Packet Bus or that indicated a circuit pack failure are acted upon in
the normal fashion.

■

Normal background maintenance (periodic and scheduled) is not
affected.

■

Foreground maintenance (for example, commands executed on
the Manager I terminal) are not affected.

The actions in the previous list serve to reduce the system load, which
could become excessive if too many maintenance objects are affected by
a Packet Bus failure. However, such an excessive load should in no way
impede the isolation and the correction of the faults.
When the actions in the list are implemented, Error Type 3329 is logged
against PKT-BUS, and a Warning alarm is raised (although other Packet
Bus errors in many cases raise more severe alarms, thereby overriding the
Warning alarm).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1083

A Packet Bus failure in the Processor Port Network (PPN) causes Packet
traffic (ISDN-BRI, ASAI) in the Expansion Port Networks (EPNs) to fail,
even though there is no Packet Bus failure in the EPN. This is true because
all Packet traffic requires communication with the Packet Control
(PKT-CTRL) circuit pack in the PPN. Due to this requirement, a PPN
Packet Bus failure must be investigated first whenever Packet Bus failures
occur in multiple port networks.

■

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-316.
Error
Type

PKT-BUS Error Log Entries

Aux Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test pkt

1 (a)

1-2

Packet Circuit Pack
Audit Test (#570)

MAJOR

ON

test pkt P l r 2

257 (b)

Any

Packet Control Bus
Loop Around Test
(#571)

MAJOR

ON

test pkt P l r 2

513 (c)

1-24

Maintenance/Test
Circuit Pack Query Test
(#572)

MAJOR

ON

test pkt P l r 2

1793 (d)

Any

none

2049 (e)

1-3

Maintenance/Test
Circuit Pack Query Test
(#572)

MINOR

ON

test pkt P l r 2

2305 (f)

1-24

Maintenance/Test
Circuit Pack Query Test
(#572)

3329 (g)

1-7 or
1000-1007

none

WARNING

ON

test pkt P l

3585 (h)

Any

none

MINOR

ON

test pkt P l

3841 (i)

Any

none

MINOR

OFF

1.

test pkt P l

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

NOTE:
For PKT-BUS, an ON-BOARD alarm indicates a problem with the Packet
Bus itself.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1084

Notes:
a. Within the last minute, packet circuit packs have reported errors that
indicate a possible Packet Bus failure. The Aux Data value is 1 or 2,
indicating that only one or more than one Packet circuit pack
(respectively) have reported a possible Packet Bus failure.
b. Packet Bus maintenance has been unable to perform loop around tests
from the TN778 Packet Control circuit pack (PKT-CTRL) to itself. This
could indicate faults on the Packet Control circuit pack rather than on the
Packet Bus. Examine the Error and Alarm Logs for any such errors.
c. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port for this port network has
determined that there are more Packet Bus faults than the port can
correct. The Aux Data value indicates the number of faulty leads.
d. Packet circuit packs have detected possible Packet Bus failures via in-line
error or background test failure. Examine the Error and Alarm logs for
more specific PKT-BUS errors.
e. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has caused Packet Bus leads to
be swapped to spare leads. This error appears only in a High or Critical
Reliability system. The Aux Data value indicates the number of faulty
leads. If this is the only active error against the Packet Bus, the Packet
Bus is still in service. Therefore, due to the disruptive nature of the
Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction procedures, repairs should be
deferred until a time when these procedures cause the least interruption in
service. This matter is resolved via consultation with the customer.
However, be sure not to delay repairs for too long, since the switch is not
able to recover from another Packet Bus failure until the existing one is
resolved. The procedure described in the section entitled "Special
Precaution Concerning the TN771" in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault
Isolation and Correction’’ is used to ensure that the Maintenance/Test is
giving correct information. This procedure may require that a new TN771
be taken to the customer site.
f. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has detected open leads on the
Packet Bus. The Aux Data value indicates the number of open leads.
g. Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance has been disabled
due to a Packet Bus failure. The Aux Data value indicates which sources
have reported errors that have caused maintenance to be disabled. These
sources include the following:
■

In-line errors from Packet circuit packs.

■

Packet Bus Uncorrectable report from the Maintenance/Test Packet
Bus port.

■

Packet Bus Interface Failure report from the Packet Control.

■

In an EPN, packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance will
be disabled if a Packet Bus failure occurs in the PPN.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1085

The Aux Data values that indicate these sources are identified in the
following table:

Aux Data
1/1001

Packet Circuit
Pack

X
X

X

4/1004
5/1005

X
X

6/1006
7/1007

Packet
Control

X

2/1002
3/1003

Maint/Test
Circuit Pack

X

X
X

X

X

X

If the Aux Data value is in the range 1000-1007, then Packet circuit pack,
port, and endpoint maintenance has been disabled in the EPN due to a
PPN Packet Bus failure. If the value is greater than 1000, then there is also
a failure of the packet Bus in this EPN and the source of the other
information can be determined from the table above.
NOTE:
It is important to remember that problems reported by Packet circuit
packs may be caused by any circuit pack. However, only Packet
circuit packs can detect such problems (inasmuch as TDM-only
circuit packs are not affected by these problems).
h. Include Packet circuit pack, port, and endpoint maintenance has been
disabled due to more than one circuit pack reporting in-line errors. If this
occurs more than three times in 15 minutes (that is, if maintenance is
disabled due to errors and then re-enabled because no more errors are
reported), a Minor alarm is raised against the Packet Bus. Note that this
error may still be present in the error log even if the "Circuit Pack Audit
Test" reports that only one circuit pack has indicated a problem. This
occurs if more than one circuit pack reported errors with in any one minute
interval since the Packet Bus fault occurred.
NOTE:
Because alarms against a Maintenance Object are not resolved until
all alarming has been cleared, an alarm due to a missing
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus must be cleared by installing a
Maintenance/Test circuit pack before it can be determined if other
Packet Bus alarms have been resolved.
i. The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port for this port network is not in
service. This error appears only in a High or Critical Reliability system, and
it can occur in the following cases:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Page 10-1086

■

The Packet Bus port has been busied out (indicated by an Error
Type 18), and a Warning alarm is active in the same port network.
Release the port by entering the release port PCSS04 command.

■

The Packet Bus port has failed. Resolve any alarms.

■

The Maintenance/Test circuit pack was not recognized by the
system at the last system restart. Replace the Maintenance/Test
circuit pack. There is no Maintenance/Test circuit pack installed in
this port network. One must be installed.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when you
are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test (#573)

X

X

ND

Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572)

X

X

ND

Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test (#571)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test (#571)
This test uses circuitry on the Packet Control circuit pack (TN778) to look for
faults on the Packet Bus. If the Packet Control circuit pack has detected parity
errors on the Packet Bus, or if it is unable to loop back data to itself, the test fails.
The test passes if no parity errors are detected and if data is successfully looped
back.
This test provides information only for the PPN of a standard system. If the test is
run in an EPN or in the PPN of a High or Critical Reliability system, the test aborts.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)

Table 10-317.
Error
Code
1022

Page 10-1087

Test #571 Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
No Packet Control circuit pack exists in this port network.
1. This test gives information only for the PPN. Ignore results from this test
whenever it is run in other port networks.

1024

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is in use by Packet Control maintenance at
this time. The test cannot be completed until the Packet Control circuit pack
becomes available.
1. Wait for Packet Control maintenance to finish using the Packet Control
circuit pack. (The green LED goes out.)
2. Re-enter the command.

1141

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is out-of-service.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack is busied out (this is
indicated by an Error Type 18 logged against PKT-CTRL). If the pack is
busied out, release the pack by entering the release packet-control
command. Then re-enter the command.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack is NOT busied out, refer to PKT-CTRL
Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures.

1143

ABORT

This test is run only in high or critical reliability systems.
1. Ignore results from this test when it is run in a high or critical reliability
system.

2000

ABORT

The test timed-out while waiting for the packet to be returned from the loop
around.
1. Re-enter the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control
(look for PKT-CTRL errors in the Error and Alarm Logs).

2076

ABORT

The parity error check circuitry on the Packet Control circuit pack is not
functioning correctly.
1. Run the test again.
2. If the same abort occurs again, refer to PKT-CTRL to attempt to correct
the fault.

2060

ABORT

The link on the Packet Bus that is being used to perform the test has failed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the Packet Control
(look for PKT-CTRL error in the Error and Alarm Logs).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
Table 10-317.
Error
Code

Page 10-1088

Test #571 Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2100

ABORT

Maintenance could not allocate all of the necessary system resources to
perform this test.

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

The Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test failed (parity errors were detected
from the test packet).

2

FAIL

The Packet Control Bus Loop Around Test failed (the Packet Control circuit
pack could not bring up a loop around link on the Packet Bus).
1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to
determine the cause of the test failures.

PASS

No faults have been detected on the Packet Bus by the Packet Control circuit
pack. This indicates that the Packet Bus is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test (#572)
This test queries the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port about the state of health
of the Packet Bus. If the Maintenance/Test circuit pack indicates that the Packet
Bus has faults, the test fails. The corresponding failure code describes the
severity, type, and number of faults. The test passes if the Packet Bus is
fault-free.
NOTE:
A Maintenance/Test circuit pack is usually not present in a Standard
system unless the customer has purchased this circuit pack to use for
ISDN-PRI test calls, or to enhance the system’s ability to quickly recognize
a Packet Bus failure.
Table 10-318.

Error
Code
1006

TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Bus port of the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is out of service.
1. Determine if the port is busied out. If so, release the port by entering the
release port PCSS04 command. Re-enter the test command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
Table 10-318.

Error
Code
1142

Page 10-1089

TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
No Maintenance/Test circuit pack Packet Bus port is in service in this port
network.
1. If this system has High or Critical Reliability, either (a) the
Maintenance/Test circuit pack for this port network has failed, and should
be replaced, (b) the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has been busied out,
and should be released, or (c) there is no Maintenance/Test circuit pack
in this port network, and one must be installed.
2. In a system without High or Critical Reliability, the Maintenance/Test
Packet Bus Port may not be present. If the port is present, and if it is
busied out or has failed, release or replace the circuit pack. If there is no
Maintenance/Test circuit pack, ignore the results of this test for this port
network.

2000

ABORT

The test timed-out while waiting for an uplink CCMS response from the
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, check for problems with the
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port .

2059

ABORT

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has reported a hardware failure.
1. Re-enter the test command.

2077

ABORT

The Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query located more than one
Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port in the port network.

NOTE:
The software should not allow this to occur. This is an Internal system
error. Attempt the following work-around steps.
1. Remove all Maintenance/Test circuit packs from the port network.
2. Insert one Maintenance/Test circuit pack (there should not be more than
one in a port network).
3. Re-enter the test command.
2100

ABORT

Maintenance could not allocate all of the necessary system resources to
perform this test.

2500

ABORT

An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

XYZZ

FAIL

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has detected faults on the Packet Bus.
The error code is encoded as follows:

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
Table 10-318.

Error
Code

Page 10-1090

TEST #572 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack Query Test
— Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1xxx

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port has reconfigured the Packet Bus
around the faulty leads. This occurs only in high or critical reliability systems.

2xxx

The Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port is unable to correct all of the Packet
Bus faults it has detected.

x0xx

None of the Packet Bus faults are open faults.

x1xx

At least some of the Packet Bus faults are open faults. Look for Error Type
2305 in the Error Log. The Aux Data value indicates the number of open
leads.

xxZZ

The last 2 digits of the error code indicate the total number of faulty Packet
Bus leads detected by the Maintenance/Test Packet Bus port.
1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to
determine the cause of the failures.
PASS

No faults have been detected on the Packet Bus by the Maintenance/Test
circuit pack. This indicates that the Packet Bus is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test (#573)
This test determines whether Packet circuit packs have reported Packet
Bus-related in-line errors within the last minute. If so, the failure code indicates
whether one or more circuit packs have reported failures within the last minute.
Due to the one minute time constraint included as part of this test, the test is
designed to delay 15 seconds before returning a result in cases where the test
has failed within the last five minutes. This procedure helps ensure that a
repeated sequence of the test does not always yield the same result. If no failure
has occurred in the last five minutes, a PASS is returned immediately.
Table 10-319.
Error
Code
2500

Test #573 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
An internal operation failed; the test could not be completed.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-BUS (Packet Bus)
Table 10-319.
Error
Code

Page 10-1091

Test #573 Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1

FAIL

One Packet circuit pack has reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors within
the last minute.

2

FAIL

More than one Packet circuit pack has reported Packet Bus-related in-line
errors within that last minute.
1. Refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9
to determine the cause of the error reports.

PASS

No Packet circuit packs have reported Packet Bus-related in-line errors
within the last minute. This indicates that the Packet Bus is healthy, or that a
Packet Bus fault is transient or is being caused by a faulty Packet circuit
pack. If this test passes while there are other signs of a Packet Bus failure
(as indicated, for example, in the Error/Alarm Logs or by other test failures),
refer to the "Packet Bus Fault Isolation Flowchart" section in Chapter 9 to
isolate the problem.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1092

PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run
C1

Full Name of MO

PKT-CTRL

MAJOR

reset packet-control

PKT-CTRL

MINOR

test packet-control C2

Packet Control Circuit Pack

PKT-CTRL

WARNING

release packet-control C

Packet Control Circuit Pack

1.

2.

Packet Control Circuit Pack

If the specified Packet Control circuit pack is in the active SPE, it must first be busied-out via the
busyout packet-control C command. After testing has completed, the Packet Control circuit
pack should be released from the busyout state via the release packet-control C command.
Where C is the carrier designation (A or B) and should be specified only in a High or Critical
Reliability system.

! CAUTION:
A detailed flowchart for isolating and resolving Packet Bus faults is included
in Chapter 9, ‘‘Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction’’. This flowchart,
along with the other information presented in the chapter, can help in
resolving problems that are not isolated to the Packet Control. Whenever
the repair procedures for this Maintenance Object refer to Packet Bus
and/or Packet Control maintenance, be sure to reference Chapter 9 in
addition to the MO documentation for Packet Bus.
The TN778 Packet Control circuit pack is the hardware component that serves as
the interface between the SPE and the Packet Bus. It terminates the Link Access
Procedure D (LAPD) protocol and provides support for thousands of signaling
links. As shown in Figure 10-79, a Packet Control link generally terminates on the
Packet Control circuit pack and a packet endpoint which is connected to a
Packet circuit pack. An ASAI adjunct is an example of a packet endpoint, and a
TN556 is an example of a Packet circuit pack. In G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386, the
following Packet circuit packs (packs that can connect to the Packet Bus) are
available:
■

TN556 ISDN-BRI Line Circuit Pack

■

TN570 Expansion Interface Circuit Pack

■

TN771 Maintenance/Test Circuit Pack

■

TN778 Packet Control Circuit Pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1093

Packet
Bus

Endpoint 1
Packet

Packet

Circuit

Control

Pack
Endpoint N

Figure 10-79.

Hardware Configuration

The Packet Control circuit pack is not administered in the normal manner; there is
no add or remove command associated with it. However the "Packet Bus
Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form indicates
if the Packet Control circuit pack is "administered." If the "Packet Bus Activated?"
field is set to "yes," a Packet Control circuit pack should be installed in the
system, since the Packet Control circuit pack is required in systems which use
the Packet Bus. If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed, and the "Packet
Bus Activated?" field is set to "yes," a major on-board alarm is raised against the
PKT-CTRL MO. This alarm indicates that the Packet Control circuit pack is
"missing." Refer to the "Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form" section in
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’ for more information on the
"Packet Bus Activated?" field.
Note that the Packet Control circuit pack is listed by the list configuration all or
list configuration control commands only if the Packet Control circuit pack is
physically inserted into its slot and the Packet Bus is activated by setting the
"Packet Bus Activated?" field to "yes" on the Maintenance-Related System
Parameters Form. If the Packet Control circuit pack is physically inserted into its
slot but the Packet Bus is not activated, then the Packet Control circuit pack will
not appear in the output of the list configuration all or list configuration
control commands.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1094

The status packet-control C command provides useful information about the
Packet Control circuit pack. This command displays the service state of the
circuit pack and various link-related information. The service state "out" indicates
that service is not being provided and users are being disrupted. Maintenance
takes the Packet Control circuit pack out-of-service due to certain faults, or as a
result of the busyout packet-control C command being run. Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance Commands and
Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for more information on the status packet-control
command.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-320.
Error
Type

Packet Control Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

1(a)

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

reset packet-control C (k)

18

0

busyout
packet-control C

WARNING

OFF

release packet-control C

257 (b)

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

reset packet-control C (k)

513 (c)

0

None

769 (d)

Any

Loop Around Test
(#585)

1025 (e)

1

Parity Circuitry Test
(#584)

MINOR

ON

test packet-control C l

1281 (f)

0

None

1537 (g)

0

None

1793 (h)

0

None

2049 (i)

0

None

2305 (j)

Any

Download Test
(#581)

MAJOR

OFF

reset packet-control C

Notes:
a. This error occurs when maintenance software resets the Packet Control
circuit pack due to an in-line error or certain test failures. Once a threshold
number of these errors occur, maintenance places the Packet Control
circuit pack into an out-of-service state, and a major on-board alarm is
raised on the Packet Control circuit pack.
b. This error occurs due to certain in-line errors and test failures. This error is
very serious, and when it occurs maintenance software immediately
escalates testing to the destructive reset test (#586).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1095

c. This error indicates that a loss of communication was detected between
the SPE software and the Packet Control circuit pack. No alarm is raised.
However, if this error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the
Reset Test (#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can
be determined.
d. This error occurs when the Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585) fails
because a link cannot be established or because the Packet Control
circuit pack cannot send and receive data correctly. No alarm is raised.
However, if this error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the
Reset Test (#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can
be determined.
e. This error occurs when the Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584) fails,
thus indicating a possible fault with the parity circuitry in detecting Packet
Bus parity errors. If this error occurs a number of times exceeding a
defined threshold, a minor on-board alarm is raised.
f. This error occurs when a certain circuit pack-level diagnostic test fails,
thus indicating a transient fault (which has been recovered) existed on the
Packet Control/Packet Bus interface. No alarm is raised because the error
does not isolate the fault to the Packet Control circuit pack. However, if the
error occurs repeatedly, software testing escalates to the Reset Test
(#586) so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can be
determined.
g. This error occurs when a certain circuit pack-level diagnostic test fails,
indicating there is a fault on the Packet Control/Packet Bus interface. No
alarm is raised because the Packet Bus may be the source of problem.
When this error occurs, Packet Bus maintenance is notified, thereby
causing appropriate tests to run.
h. This error occurs when a parity error is detected by the Packet Control
circuit pack, indicating some data sent over the Packet Bus is corrupted.
No alarm is raised against the Packet Control circuit pack because the
problem may be associated with the Packet Bus. When this error occurs,
Packet Bus maintenance is notified, thereby causing appropriate tests to
run.
i. This error occurs when the Packet Control circuit pack receives a
threshold number of frames with invalid address. No alarm is raised
because there is no direct indication of a Packet Control fault. The frames
may be corrupted by the sending side or by the Packet Bus. No
maintenance activity is triggered by this error. No action is required.
j. This error occurs when the Packet Control Download Test (#581) fails.
Once a threshold number of these errors occur, a major off-board alarm is
raised. Maintenance software retries the download test repeatedly until it
passes. Since the reset packet-control C command causes the firmware
to be downloaded and provides additional diagnostics on this error type,
this command should be used when a download failure has occurred.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1096

k. If the specified Packet Control circuit pack is in the active SPE, it must first
be busied-out via the busyout packet-control C command. After testing
has been completed, the Packet Control circuit pack should be released
from the busyout state via the release packet-control C command.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
When inspecting errors in the system and deciding which ones to address,
always investigate errors in the order they are presented in the tables below. By
clearing error codes associated with the Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.
Table 10-321.

Active PKT-CTRL

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Packet Control Reset Test (#586)

D

Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584)
Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585)

X

Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test (#583)

1.

D/ND1

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Table 10-322.

Standby PKT-CTRL
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Packet Control Reset Test (#586)

X

X

ND

Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585)

X

X

ND

Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test (#583)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Packet Control Error Counter Read and Clear Test
(#583)
This test involves reading and clearing the error counters on the Packet Control
circuit pack. The test is performed by sending multiple maintenance requests to
the Packet Control circuit pack and waiting for the response to each of the "read
and clear" commands from the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Table 10-323.
Error
Code

Page 10-1097

TEST #583 Packet Control Error Counter Read/Clear Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1141

FAIL

The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational. A busied-out Packet
Control circuit pack can still be operational.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm
(via the display alarm command). If it does, follow the recommended
repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is retired, the
original command can be retried.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm,
wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code
1141 is again observed, go to the next step.
3. If the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE and is not
currently busied-out, issue the busyout packet-control C command.
Issue the reset packet-control C command. If the reset command
fails, follow the recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the
reset command passes, issue the release packet-control C
command (if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and
reissue the original command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-323.
Error
Code

TEST #583 Packet Control Error Counter Read/Clear Test — Continued
Test
Result

1

Page 10-1098

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Software was unable to read and clear the Packet Control circuit pack
error counters.
1. Retry the command.
2. If the same error code is observed, and the Packet Control circuit pack
is on the active SPE and is not currently busied-out, issue the busyout
packet-control C command. Issue the reset packet-control C
command. If the reset command fails, follow the recommended repair
procedures for Test #586. If the reset command passes, issue the
release packet-control C command (if the Packet Control circuit pack
is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original command.

PASS

The Packet Control circuit pack succeeded in servicing the read and clear
error counter requests.

Continued on next page

Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test (#584)
This test checks the error detection capability of the Packet Control circuit pack’s
circuitry by verifying that it correctly identifies frames on the Packet Bus with
parity errors.
NOTE:
This test aborts in a High or Critical Reliability system, or in a system with an
alarmed PPN Packet Bus.
Table 10-324.
Error
Code
1024

TEST #584 Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Control circuit pack’s parity circuitry is currently being used by
another maintenance test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1139

ABORT

The PPN Packet Bus is alarmed.
1. Try to retire the alarm associated with the PKT-BUS (Packet Bus).
Refer to the Alarm log via the display alarm command.
2. Retry the command when the alarm associated with the Packet Bus
circuit pack is retired.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-324.
Error
Code
1141

Page 10-1099

TEST #584 Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational.

NOTE:
A busied-out Packet Control circuit pack can still be operational.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm
(via the display alarm command). If it does, then follow the
recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is
retired, the original command can be retried.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm,
then wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code
1141 is observed again, go to the next step.
3. If the Packet Control is not currently busied-out and is on the active
SPE, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the reset
packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the
recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command
passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet
Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original
command.
1143

ABORT

The test should not be run in a High or Critical Reliability system.
1. No action is required since the parity circuitry is not used to monitor
the Packet Bus in a High or Critical Reliability system.

2100

ABORT

Was unable to allocate necessary resources.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

The Packet Control parity circuitry is malfunctioning.
1. Issue test packet-control C long command to retry the test.
2. This could be caused by a Packet Bus fault. Refer to Chapter 9 for the
procedures to be followed.
3. The Packet Control circuit pack needs to be replaced. However, it is
likely that the Packet Control is providing service, and only its ability to
maintain the Packet Bus is affected by the fault. If the Packet Control
appears to be providing service (packet endpoints are functioning
and/or the status packet-control C command indicates that links are
established), it is not critical to replace the circuit pack immediately,
and a time may be chosen to minimize customer down-time.

PASS

The Packet Control parity circuitry is functioning properly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1100

Packet Control Loop Around Test (#585)
This test checks whether the Packet Control circuit pack can send and receive
data correctly. The test performs the following major functions:
1. Establishes an LAPD link from the Packet Control circuit pack to itself.
(See Figure 10-80.)
2. Transmits and receives test data over the testing link.

Packet
Bus

Packet
Control

Figure 10-80.

Test Configuration

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Table 10-325.
Error
Code

Page 10-1101

TEST #585 Packet Control Loop Around Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1139

ABORT

The Packet Bus is alarmed.
1. Try to retire the alarm associated with the Packet Bus. Refer to the Alarm
Log via the display alarm command.
2. Retry the command when the alarm associated with the Packet Bus
circuit pack is retired.

1141

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is not operational.

NOTE:
A busied-out Packet Control circuit pack can be operational.
1. Determine if the Packet Control circuit pack has an active major alarm
(via the display alarm command). If it does, follow the recommended
repair procedures to retire the alarm. Once the alarm is retired, the
original command can be retried.
2. If the Packet Control circuit pack does not have an active major alarm,
wait one minute and retry the original command. If the Error Code 1141 is
again observed, go to the next step.
3. If the Packet Control circuit pack is not currently busied-out and is on the
active SPE, issue the busyout packet-control C command. Issue the
reset packet-control C command. If the reset command fails, follow the
recommended repair procedures for Test #586. If the reset command
passes, issue the release packet-control C command (if the Packet
Control circuit pack is on the active SPE), and then reissue the original
command.
2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-325.
Error
Code
1-3

Page 10-1102

TEST #585 Packet Control Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Maintenance was unable to establish a loop around link from the Packet
Control circuit pack back to itself, or was unable to receive the data that was
sent out over one side of the loop around link.
1. Issue test packet-control C short command to retry the test.
2. If the same error code is observed, maintenance software automatically
escalates the testing. No specific action is required.

PASS

The Packet Control circuit pack can send and receive data correctly.

Continued on next page

Packet Control Reset Test (#586)
This test resets the Packet Control circuit pack, downloads Packet Control circuit
pack firmware form tape, and then causes the Packet Control circuit pack to
begin operation.

! WARNING:
This test is destructive and disrupts service when run on the Packet Control
circuit pack in the Active SPE. This test is not destructive when run on the
Packet Control circuit pack in the Standby SPE of a High or Critical
Reliability system. When this test is run on the Packet Control circuit pack
on the Active SPE, the "busyout packet-control C" command must be
executed first. Once testing has been completed, a busied-out Packet
Control should be released via the release packet-control C command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)

Table 10-326.
Error
Code

Page 10-1103

TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1015

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack is not busied out.
1. Retry the command after running the busyout packet-control C
command.

1152

ABORT

The Packet Control circuit pack hardware was successfully reset and the
circuit pack was successfully put back into service. However, a new image
of Packet Control circuit pack firmware was not able to be downloaded from
the tape, because the tape was unavailable. Nonetheless, the existing
firmware on the circuit pack is valid, and there is no need to repeat this test.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1-3

FAIL

The reset test failed.
1. Retry the command.
2. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the Packet Control
circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-326.
Error
Code
5

Page 10-1104

TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The SPE could not communicate with the Packet Control circuit pack. This
indicates that either the Packet Control circuit pack is not installed or that it
has failed.
1. Examine the appropriate carrier to determine if there is a Packet Control
circuit pack in the correct slot. If there is, go to the next step. If there
isn’t, the problem is that the Packet Control circuit pack is administered
(that is, the "Packet Bus Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related
System Parameters Form is set to "y") but the circuit pack isn’t installed.
If the system is supposed to have a Packet Control circuit pack, the
system must be upgraded appropriately (see upgrade documentation).
If the system is not supposed to have a Packet Control circuit pack, then
the Packet Control circuit pack should be unadministered by setting the
"Packet Bus Activated?" field on the Maintenance-Related System
Parameters Form to "n." Refer to the "Maintenance-Related System
Parameters Form" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’ for more information on the "Packet Bus Activated?" field.
2. Retry the command.
3. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the Packet Control
circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-326.
Error
Code
1150
1188
1189
1190

Page 10-1105

TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Packet Control circuit pack was not successfully downloaded, and the
Packet Control circuit pack currently does not contain valid downloadable
firmware. The error codes have the following meanings:
1150- Generic tape error (not any of the following three errors)
1188- Internal system error
1189- Tape currently in use
1190- No tape cartridge in tape drive
1. Verify that there is a tape cartridge in the tape unit.
2. If the tape unit is in use (the yellow LED on the tape drive is on and there
is tape cartridge motion), wait until the first request is complete. If there
does not appear to be tape motion and/or the yellow LED on the
tape drive is not on, then go to the next step.
3. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of three times.
4. Verify that the tape unit is not alarmed. Use the display alarm command
and refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation for recommended
repair procedures to retire the alarm, if one exists; otherwise go to the
next step.
5. If the test has failed consistently with the 1150 error code, then escalate
the problem. If the test has failed consistently with the 1188 error code,
replace the tape cartridge and then retry the reset command. If the test
failed consistently with the 1189 error code, escalate the problem. If the
test failed consistently with the 1190 error code, then replace both the
tape cartridge and the tape drive.

2064

FAIL

The downloaded firmware cannot be executed with this hardware vintage of
the Packet Control circuit pack.
1. Retry the command.
2. If it fails again with the same error code, replace the tape cartridge and
retry the reset command.

2065

FAIL

The tape does not contain valid Packet Control circuit pack firmware.
1. Retry the command. If the same error code is returned, replace the tape
and then retry the command.

2073

FAIL

After being downloaded from the tape, the Packet Control circuit pack does
not contain valid downloadable firmware in its memory.
1. Retry the command.
2. If the tests fails again with the same error code, then the tape may
contain corrupted Packet Control circuit pack firmware. Replace the
tape and retry the command. If the test still fails with this error code,
then replace the Packet Control circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PKT-CTRL (Packet Control Circuit Pack)
Table 10-326.
Error
Code
2102

Page 10-1106

TEST #586 Packet Control Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
As the Packet Control circuit pack firmware was being downloaded from
system tape, a block of data could not be read from the tape. This indicates
a problem with the tape unit, and not with the Packet Control circuit pack.
1. Test the TAPE with the long option and with a repeat option of 3. If any of
the tests fail, or if there are any tape alarms, refer to the TAPE
Maintenance documentation and follow the recommended repair
procedures. If a tape problem is detected and then fixed, then retry the
reset command.
2. If no tape problem was detected in the previous step, then there may be
a problem with the area on the tape where the Packet Control circuit
pack firmware resides. Replace the tape cartridge and then retry the
reset command.

2500

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The reset command passed and the Packet Control circuit pack is
operational. If the Packet Control circuit pack was busied-out, it needs to be
released (via the release packet-control C command) before it can be
considered in service.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1107

PMS-LINK (Property Management
System Link)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PMS-LINK

MINOR

test pms l

PMS Link

PMS-LINK

WARNING

test pms

PMS Link

Property Management System (PMS) is a stand-alone computer system that a
hotel/motel-type and a hospital-type environment use for services such as
reservations, registration, messaging, housekeeping, night audit, billing, and
inventory. The PMS Link provides a communications channel between DEFINITY
Generic 1 or Generic 3iV2 and a customer-owned PMSs so that the PMS can
interrogate the system about the information related to the following features:
■

Message Waiting Notification

■

Controlled Restriction

■

Housekeeping Status

■

Check-in/Check-out

■

Room Change/Room Swap

Refer to DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Feature Description,
555-230-204 for details on the PMS feature. The PMS Link is administered to a
data extension that provides a standard EIA 232C interface to the PMS. A PMS
can be connected through a data module (PDM, MPDM, DTDM) and a port on
the TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, or through an ADU and a port on
the TN726 Digital Line circuit pack.
PMS Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between
DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2 and a PMS device. The strategy includes
a set of tests for periodic diagnosis, detection of errors during normal operation,
actions for troubleshooting, and raising alarms for serious problems. PMS Link
Maintenance uses a "try-and-wait" mechanism for maintaining the PMS Link. If a
PMS Link is torn down due to an error, PMS Link Maintenance attempts to bring
up the link immediately. If the trial of "Link Setup" fails, PMS Link Maintenance
waits for five minutes before the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the
value of a threshold (12), a Minor alarm is raised for service attention.
PMS Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements
composing the PMS physical link [the external PMS device, Data Module
(PDM/MPDM/DTDM), and Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line
circuit pack, ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Link circuit pack, and Data
Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack]. If PMS Link Maintenance
cannot restore the PMS Link, then the maintenance tests of these individual

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1108

components of the PMS Link must be executed to diagnose faults. If system
technician-demanded test pms-link command fails, no alarm is generated.

Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link
1. Determine the status of the PMS Link.
Enter status pms command and make sure that the PMS Link is not
busied out for maintenance. If the link is "down," then continue with the
next step.
2. Where does the PMS Link connect?
Enter display system hospitality and find out the destinations of the PMS
Link.
3. Determine the status of the data extension.
Enter status data  command and verify whether the data
extension is in in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT available,
then look for the extension number in Alt Name field of Hardware Error
Log. Refer to the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for resolutions.
4. Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in in-service/idle state?
Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data
channels on Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data 
command and make sure that at least one data channel is in
in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, then look for
DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to the DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation; if not present, escalate the error.
5. Is the external PMS device available?
Make sure that the PMS device is ON-LINE and ready for service. Check
the physical connectivity between Data Module and the PMS device.
It is recommended that you busy out the PMS Link before executing maintenance
tests over objects composing the PMS Link. If the PMS Link is busied out, then all
PMS Link maintenance actions are deactivated. The interference to tests of other
MO is off.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1109

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
PMS Link Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test pms sh r 1

18 (a)

0

busyout pms-link

WARNING

OFF

release pms-link

257 (b)

0-6,
99,
255

Link Retry Test
(#215)

MINOR/
WARNING2

OFF

test pms-link l

513 (c)

0-6,255

None

769 (d)

0-6,255

None

1025 (e)

4x3

None

1281 (f)

1x3

None

1537 (g)

Nx3

None

1793 (h)

0-6,255

None

2049 (i)

0-6,255

None

2305 (j)

5x3

None

release pms-link or
test pms-link

2561 (k)

0-6,255

None

test pms-link

2817 (l)

10x3

None

test pms-link

test pms-link

20x3
30x3
3073 (m)

7x3

None

3841 (n)

2x3

None

1.
2.
3.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.
Is any integer.

Notes:
a. The PMS Link has been busied out for system technician-demanded
maintenance via the busyout pms-link command. The link is torn down.
Enter the release pms-link command to restore the link.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1110

b. The Link Retry Test (#215) fails. The Aux Data field contains either the
Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for
Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04) or an
Error Type of 99 indicating no data channels are available for setting up
the link, or an Error Type of 255 for the internal system error generated
upon initialization or power-up. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the
PMS Link’’ section for resolution.
c. The PMS physical link is down due to the following causes: cable to the
PMS device is disconnected; the PMS device is powered off; or the data
extension to which the PMS device connects has been busied out. The
Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network
Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for
Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04) or an Error Type of 255 for the internal
system error generated upon initialization or power-up. Check the
connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket, data module, and the
PMS device. Enter status data  and verify that the data
extension of the PMS device is in in-service/idle state. If the data extension
is not available, then refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’
section for recommended repair strategy.
d. No communication between DEFINITY Generic 1 or Generic 3iV2 and
PMS for a period of time (the time is specified in "system hospitality"
administration). The PMS Link is torn down. To clear this error, refer to the
‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link’’ section.
e. The link was taken down because the switch could not receive an
incoming message from the PMS. The message from the PMS repeatedly
had corrupted data or the switch received requests for acknowledgment
but never received a message to be processed. If this error type recurs
frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to
call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS
Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware
Error Log.
f. The link was taken down because the switch could not send an outgoing
message. The message, which was sent but not acknowledged, was
flushed. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a
month), then advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check
out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this
error disappears from the Hardware Error Log.
g. The PMS has been busied out for maintenance at the request of the PMS.
The PMS Link is torn down. The reason code (N), if present, is that
supplied by the PMS in the request message. If this error type recurs
frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise the customer to
call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS
Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware
Error Log. No alarm is raised against this error.
h. PBX buffer overflows due to either heavy call traffic or PMS protocol
message rate being faster than the PMS/PBX protocol specifications
allow. The PMS Link is torn down. PMS Link maintenance software waits

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1111

for five minutes before attempting to set up the link again. If this error type
recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), advise the customer to
call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device. Once the PMS
Link is successfully established, this error disappears from the Hardware
Error Log (see Note).
NOTE:
The PMS should be checked for adherence to message rate defined
in the PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No alarm is raised against
this error.
i. The attempt to swap the database between PBX and PMS failed three
times consecutively due to excessive PMS/PBX protocol violations, buffer
overflows, or PMS Link outages. The PMS Link is NOT torn down. If this
error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then advise
the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device.
Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error disappears from
the Hardware Error Log. No alarm is raised against this error.
j. The PMS Link has been busied out for system technician-demanded
maintenance via the busyout pms-link command or has been brought
down via the test pms-link long command. The PMS Link is torn down,
and PMS Link maintenance stops attempting to reestablish the link in the
case where the busyout pms-link command has been used. When the
test pms-link long command has been used, PMS Link maintenance
continues to try to reset the link. To restore the PMS Link after use of the
busyout pms-link command, issue the release pms-link command. To
restore the PMS Link after use of the test pms-link long command, issue
the test pms-link command.
k. The PMS Link is physically established, but the protocol has not been
started by the PMS before the protocol timer expires. The PMS Link is NOT
torn down. If this error type recurs frequently (that is, more than once a
month), advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to check out the
PMS device. Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error
disappears from the Hardware Error Log.
NOTE:
The PMS should be checked to make sure that it attempts to start the
protocol according to the PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No
alarm is raised against this error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1112

l. Error Type 2817:
Aux values of concern:
10x

The PMS violated the application protocol. The first
message after a request to initiate a database exchange
was not the start of a database exchange. The message
is processed. If this error type with this aux data value
recurs frequently (that is, more than once a month), then
advise the customer to call the vendor of the PMS to
check out the PMS device. Once the PMS Link is
successfully established, this error disappears from the
Hardware Error Log. See Note.

20x

The PMS violated the application protocol. The start of a
database exchange was received in a state in which it
was not expected. The message is ignored. If this error
type with this Aux data value recurs frequently (that is,
more than once a month), then advise the customer to
call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device.
Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error
disappears from the Hardware Error Log. See the next
Note.

30x

The PMS violated the application protocol. The end of a
database exchange was received when no exchange
was in progress. The message is ignored. If this error
type with this Aux Data value recurs frequently (that is,
more than once a month), then advise the customer to
call the vendor of the PMS to check out the PMS device.
Once the PMS Link is successfully established, this error
disappears from the Hardware Error Log.
NOTE:
The PMS should be assessed for adherence to the
PMS/PBX protocol specifications. No alarm is
raised against this error.

m. The link was taken down by the switch because the threshold for
application protocol violations has been exceeded by the PMS. The
protocol never started and messages were received and/or messages
were received in a state in which they were not expected. (Refer to Error
Type 2817 for recommended strategy.)
n. Link was taken down by the switch because the threshold for link protocol
violations has been exceeded by the PMS. PMS is sending "garbage" to
the switch.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Page 10-1113

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link
Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

X

ND

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
Link Retry Test (#215)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
This test is destructive.
This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external PMS
device. If the link has been disconnected already, then this test just returns
"PASS." All resources allocated for a PMS Link are released after this test.
Table 10-327.
Error
Code
40
50

TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1010

ABORT

The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the
out-of-service state.
1. Enter release pms-link command to release the
PMS Link from busyout state.
2. Retry test pms long command to execute the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Table 10-327.
Error
Code

Page 10-1114

TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

The PMS Link is torn down.

Continued on next page

Link Retry Test (#215)
This test sends a message to the PMS software process to make a data call to
the extension where the PMS device connects. If the PMS Link is already up, then
this test passes without making any data call.
Table 10-328.
Error
Code
10
20

TEST #215 Link Retry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

30

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Refer back to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS
Link’’ section for resolution.

1010

ABORT

The PMS Link has been busied out and placed in the
out-of-service state.
1. Enter release pms-link command to release the
PMS Link from busyout state.
2. Retry test pms command to execute the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-LINK (Property Management System Link)

Table 10-328.
Error
Code

Page 10-1115

TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The PMS Link CANNOT be established.
1. Refer back to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS
Link’’ section for restoring the PMS Link.

PASS

The PMS Link is up.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)

Page 10-1116

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer
Link)
MO Name (in Alarm
Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT

MINOR

test journal
pms-log/wakeup-log l

PMS Printer/ Journal Printer

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT

WARNING

test journal
pms-log/wakeup-log

PMS Printer/ Journal Printer

NOTE:
PMS-PRNT stands for the pms-log printer. JNL-PRNT stands for the
wakeup-log printer. Since the maintenance strategy for the both the
JNL-PRNT and PMS-PRNT MOs is the same, both of these MOs are
described in this section.
In DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2, there are up to two journal printers.
They are identified as the wakeup-log printer which is shared between the
Automatic Wakeup feature and the Emergency Access to Attendant feature to
print scheduled reports and log of events, and the pms-log printer which is used
as a backup of the PMS output device to print the audit trail data of all PMS
transactions executed by the system and the PMS Housekeeping Status Change
events while the PMS Printer Link is not available. The journal printer link is
administered to a data extension that provides a standard EIA 232C interface to
the printer. The printer can be connected through a data module (PDM, MPDM,
DTDM) and a port on the TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, or through
an ADU and a port on the TN726 Data Line circuit pack.
PMS Printer Link Maintenance provides a strategy in the system for maintaining
the link between the system and a PMS device (an external Journal Printer
device). The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis, detection of
errors during normal operation, actions for troubleshooting, and raising alarms
for serious problems. PMS Printer Link Maintenance uses a try-and-wait
mechanism for maintaining the PMS Printer Link. If a PMS Printer Link is torn
down due to an error, PMS Printer Link Maintenance intends to bring the link up
immediately. If the trial of Link Setup fails, PMS Link Maintenance waits for five
minutes before the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the value of a
threshold (15), a Minor alarm is raised for service attention.
PMS Printer Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements
composing the journal printer physical link, for instance, the external printer
device, Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and Digital Line Port of TN754 or
TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Line
circuit pack, and Data Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack. If PMS
Printer Link Maintenance cannot restore the PMS Printer Link, then the
maintenance tests of these individual components of the PMS Link must be
executed to diagnose faults.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)

Page 10-1117

Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link
1. Determine the status of the PMS Printer Link.
Enter status journal-printer wakeup-log|pms-log command and make
sure that the journal printer link is not busied out for maintenance. If the
link is down, then continue to the next step.
2. Where does the journal printer link connect?
Enter display system hospitality and find out the destinations of the PMS
Printer Link.
3. Determine the status of the data extension.
Enter status data extension command and verify whether the data
extension is in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT
available, then look for the extension number in Alt Name field of
Hardware Error Log. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation for resolutions.
4. Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in the in-service/idle
state?
Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data
channels on Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data extension
command and make sure that at least one data channel is in the
in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, look for
DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Error Log. If present, refer
to “DATA-BD”.
5. Is the external printer device available?
Make sure that the printer device is ON-LINE and ready for service. Check
the physical connectivity between Data Module and the printer device.
It is recommended that you busyout the PMS Printer Link before executing
maintenance tests over objects composing the PMS Printer Link. If the PMS
Printer Link is busied out, then all PMS Printer Link maintenance actions are
deactivated. The interference to tests of other MOs is off.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)

Page 10-1118

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-329.

PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT Link Maintenance Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test journal
wakeup-log|pms-log sh

18 (a)

0

busyout journal
wakeup-log/
pms-log

WARNING

OFF

release journal
wakeup-log|pms-log

257 (b)

0,
3 to 6
255

Link Retry Test
(#215)

MINOR/
WARNING 2

OFF

test journal
wakeup-log|pms-log 1

513 (c)

0,
3 to 6
255

test journal
wakeup-log|pms-log

769 (d)

1.

2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Both PMS Printer and Journal Printer are administered to the same extension, and the printer is not
connected. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for resolution.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Notes:
a. System Technician busied out the Journal Printer Link. The link is torn
down. Enter release command to restore the link.
b. Link Retry Test (#215) fails. Physical link cannot be set up, usually
because of hardware problems such as power off or cable disconnect.
The Aux Data field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network
Control circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for
Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04), an Error Code 255 for the Internal system
error, or 0 which indicates that the data module connected to the PMS
Printer Link is out-of-service. Refer to ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS
Printer Link’’ section for resolution.
c. Physical link cannot be set up, usually because of hardware problems
such as power off or cable disconnect. The PMS Printer Link physical link
is down due to the following causes: cable to the printer device is
disconnected, the printer device is powered off, or the data extension
where the printer device connects to has been busied out. The Aux Data
field contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on Network Control circuit
pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for
Channel 04). Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall jacket,

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)

Page 10-1119

data module, and the printer device. Enter status data  and
verify that the data extension of the printer device is in the in-service/idle
state. If the data extension is not available, then refer to the ‘‘Procedures
for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for resolution.
d. Link idle timer; link comes down. This error indicates that the printer
device is in an off-line state, for example, paper jam or paper out for a
printer device. Check the printer device and act promptly to put it back to
on-line state. Enter test journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to set up
the printer link.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link
Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
Link Retry Test (#215)

1.

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
This test is destructive.
This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external
printer device. If the link has been disconnected already, this test just returns
PASS. All resources allocated for a PMS Printer Link are released after this test.
Table 10-330.
Error
Code

TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

40

ABORT

Internal system error

50

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)
Table 10-330.
Error
Code

TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test — Continued
Test
Result

1010

Page 10-1120

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The link has been busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter release journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to release the
link from busyout state.
2. Retry test journal wakeup-log|pms-log l command to execute the
test.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The link is torn down.

Continued on next page

Link Retry Test (#215)
This test sends a message to the journal printer management software process
to make a data call to the extension where the printer device connects to. If the
journal printer link is already up, this test passes without making any data call.
Table 10-331.
Error
Code

TEST #215 Link Retry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

10

ABORT

Internal system error

20

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

30

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for
instructions.

1010

ABORT

The PMS Printer Link has been busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter release journal wakeup-log|pms-log command to release the
link from busyout state.
2. Retry test journal wakeup-log|pms-log l command to execute the
test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PMS-PRNT/JNL-PRNT (PMS Printer Link)
Table 10-331.
Error
Code

Page 10-1121

TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The link CANNOT be established.
1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link’’ section for
instructions.

PASS

The link is up.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1122

POWER (Battery & Battery Charger)
for AC-Powered Systems
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
POWER

1.

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1
test environment P

Full Name of MO
Battery & Battery Charger

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the PORT field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

Generic 1 and Generic 3iV2 offer two basic cabinet type configurations: (1) the
multicarrier cabinet system and (2) the single-carrier cabinet system. Both
cabinet system configuration may be powered by either an external AC or DC
power source.
NOTE:
For environment maintenance, PPN or EPN cabinet configuration aspects
for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant.
The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Therefore, refer to the following list to find
the appropriate section(s).
■

For a single-carrier cabinet system, refer to the DC-POWER
(Single-Carrier Cabinet Power) Maintenance documentation for
environment maintenance strategy.

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external AC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
AC-POWER (AC Power) for AC-Powered Systems, CARR-POW (Carrier
Port Power Unit) for AC-Powered Systems, or POWER (Battery & Battery
Charger) for AC-Powered Systems.

■

For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source, refer
to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections:
AC-POWER (AC Power) for DC-Powered Systems, CARR-POW (Carrier
Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems, or POWER (Battery & Battery
Charger) for DC-Powered Systems.

The G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386 multicarrier cabinet is equipped with
rechargeable batteries that can span short AC power outages. In a multicarrier
PPN system with High or Critical Reliability, the cabinet can be powered for 10
seconds from the batteries. After this time, all port carrier power is shed and the
control carrier is powered for another 10 minutes. In a High or Critical Reliability
PPN system, these times are cut to five seconds and five minutes, respectively.
In an EPN multicarrier cabinet, the entire cabinet can be powered for 15 seconds
from the batteries, after which time the entire cabinet is powered down.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1123

In a multicarrier cabinet system, the POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) MO
represents the battery charger and the battery which are located in the lower left
corner of the cabinet. Should anything go wrong with the battery or charger, they
must be replaced using the procedure described in ‘‘Replacing the Battery and
Battery Charger’’ below. The system detects one of the following three problems
with the batteries or charger:
1. Reserve Fault—The charger has detected a problem within itself or the
batteries and has notified the system.
2. High Charge Rate—The batteries are charging at a high charge rate. This
means that batteries with a low charge are being recharged or that a
problem may exist with the batteries or the charger.
3. Prepare to Disconnect (Low Battery)—The batteries are in danger of being
drained to a point where the batteries would be damaged. This warning
often occurs after multiple power failures.
The batteries take 30 hours to fully charge after being drained. A fully
charged battery pack should bridge two power failures without causing a
low battery warning to occur.

Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger
Use the procedure below to replace the Battery and Battery Charger:
1. Move the power switch on the battery charger to OFF.

!

WARNING:
Always turn off the battery charger before replacing the batteries.
Failure to do so results in damage to the 397B battery charger.

2. Disconnect the cord from the outlet on the front of the battery charger.
3. Remove the screw at the top left of the cover and open the cover to
access the charger.
4. Check the battery voltages at the test points. The test points on the CE
Distribution Unit check all 3 batteries wired in series (the voltages should
read 144 volts, 3X48 volts = 144 volts) .
NOTE:
An ordinary voltmeter can be used to check battery voltages at the
test points, but it may not produce valid results. If the battery voltage
readings are below 48 volts (the voltages at test points should read
144 volts, 3X48 volts = 144 volts), the battery is probably defective.
However, a normal voltage reading does not necessarily mean the
battery is good; under load, a defective battery with a normal
reading on the voltmeter may discharge rapidly.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1124

5. Check the battery dates and replace the batteries if they are more than
four years old or if a POWER alarm is present.
NOTE:
If any defective batteries are found, replace all of them. Batteries are
ordered in sets of three and should be replaced as such.
6. If no defective batteries are found, replace the entire charger.
7. Close the cover and secure it with the screw.
8. Reconnect the cord and move the power switch to ON.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Battery & Battery Charger Error Log Entries
Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1

Any

Battery & Battery
Charger Query Test
(#5) (Error Code 8)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 1

257

Any

Battery & Battery
Charger Query Test
(#5) (Error Code 4)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 1

769

Any

Battery & Battery
Charger Query Test
(#5) (Error Code 2)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 1

3840

1005
or
1028

Battery & Battery
Charger Query Test
(#5)

ON

test environment P sh r 1

0

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

a. Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port
field from the Alarm or Error Log.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1125

generated from other tests in the testing sequence. During this test, the status
LED on the battery charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery
charger is reported as normal. This event is a result of checking that the battery
charger is connected.

Short Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (a)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier E) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier D) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier A) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier B) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (carrier C) (#127) (b)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (d)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test
(#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118)
(f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
b. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) Maintenance
documentation for a description of this test
c. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
d. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
e. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
f. Refer to RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1126

NOTE:
This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a Tone-Clock
circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a multicarrier cabinet PPN
system without High or Critical Reliability, the Duplication Interface circuit pack in
a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit
pack in an EPN for the status of the battery pack and battery charger, and
reports the result. During this test, the status LED battery charger is lit and
extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as normal. This event
is a result of checking that the battery charger is connected.
Table 10-332.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Battery Charger is not connected.
1. If the system has a UPS supplying the power, ignore
this error since the UPS supplies the power, not the
battery and battery charger.
2. The batteries probably need charging and may be
drained if there were power outages. Reconnect the
battery charger to allow the batteries to recharge. If
Test #5 is run before the batteries are completely
charged, the test fails.
3. Wait 24 hours and rerun the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1127

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000,
check for system powering problems with the A
carrier (PPN or EPN). Look for and resolve all
AC-POWER and CARR-POW alarms in a multicarrier
cabinet system or DC-POWER alarms in a
single-carrier cabinet system. Repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, check for and resolve all DUPINT (Duplication
Interface) errors in a Duplicated Option PPN,
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) errors in a
standard PPN, or MAINT (EPN Maintenance circuit
pack) errors in an EPN. Repeat the test.
4. If the test continues to ABORT with a 2000 error
code, escalate the problem.

2028

ABORT

Internal System Error prevented the extinguishing of the
Battery Charger status LED.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2029

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1128

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The system is in nominal power holdover, and the
battery is currently so low that the system disconnects
power very shortly.
1. If power returns, the port carriers in the PPN should
power up again. All the circuit packs should be
reinserted, and the system should continue to
operate normally. There will probably be a Minor
alarm against Battery & Battery Charger because
the batteries are recharging.
2. If power does not return, the system shuts down to
prevent damage to the batteries. If power is
restored, the system reboots. No manual
intervention is required.
3. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, the PR-MAINT
(Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a multicarrier
cabinet PPN system without High or Critical
Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit
pack in a PPN for a system with High or Critical
Reliability, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit
pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition
incorrectly. Resolve all alarms on these MOs and
rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on
the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication
Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that
ARE NOT be detected by the respective
maintenance, but that cause many, if not all,
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on
the system configuration, should be replaced and
the test rerun. If the test still fails, follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
4

Page 10-1129

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The battery is currently being charged at the high
charge rate.
1. After 30 hours, the battery should be fully charged,
and this error should disappear.
2. If after 30 hours the battery is still in the high charge
rate, an alarm is raised. Display the Error Log with
the display errors command and select the
category "environ" to display only
environment-related errors. Look for POWER errors
of type 257. The FIRST OCCURRENCE of this error
indicates the time when the battery started charging.
Use this time as the starting point to determine if the
battery has been charging for 30 hours. If the battery
has been charging for 30 hours, then replace the
battery.

! CAUTION:
Read the section, ‘‘Replacing the Battery and
Battery Charger’’ before proceeding.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
4

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

6

Page 10-1130

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
3. If the batteries were replaced, it can take up to 24
hours for the new batteries to be charged (new
batteries are shipped uncharged). If Test #5 is run
again before the batteries are completely charged,
the test fails. If the charger was replaced, some time
must be allowed for the new charger to recharge the
batteries. Therefore, in either case, wait at least 24
hours and rerun the test. If the test still fails, the
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a
multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or
Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication)
Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a system with
High or Critical Reliability, or the EPN MAINT
(Maintenance) circuit pack in an EPN could be
reporting this condition incorrectly. There are failures
that can occur on the Maintenance/Tape Processor,
Duplication Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit
pack that ARE NOT be detected by the respective
maintenance, but that cause many, if not all,
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on
the system configuration, should be replaced and
the test rerun. Resolve all alarms on these MOs, and
rerun the test. If the test still fails, escalate the
problem.
This indicates that Error Codes 2 and 4 have occurred.
Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description
for Error Code 14 for this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
8

Page 10-1131

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
NOTE:
For a Global AC MCC (J58890CH) use the
procedures outlined in step 3.
There is a reserve power fault. A problem exists with the
battery charger (more probable) or the battery (less
probable).
1. Replace the battery charger or the battery. The fault
should disappear. However, the test fails with Error
Code 4 if the battery is charging.

! WARNING:
Always turn off the battery charger before
replacing the batteries.
2. Rerun the test. If the test still fails with an error code
other than 4 (that is, there is something wrong
besides the battery needing charging), the
PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) in a
multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or
Critical Reliability, the DUPINT (Duplication
Interface) circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical
Reliability, or the EPN MAINT (Maintenance) circuit
pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition
incorrectly. Resolve all alarms on these MOs and
rerun the test. There are failures that can occur on
the Maintenance/Tape Processor, Duplication
Interface, and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that
ARE NOT be detected by the respective
maintenance, but that cause many, if not all,
environment tests to fail. If many environment tests
are failing, the suspect circuit pack, depending on
the system configuration, should be replaced and
the test rerun. If the test still fails, then follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code
8 (cont’d.)

Page 10-1132

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. Procedures for a Global MCC (J58890CH):
a. Look to see if any “red” LEDs are “on” on any of
the rectifier modules or the BIU (Battery Interface
Unit) located in the Power Distribution Unit
(J58890CH).
b. If the BTW (Battery Temp Warning) LED on the
BIU is “on” check the batteries for a over temp
condition(a) if temp is normal(a) replace the BIU, If
the test still fails replace the battery in a small
battery system. For a large battery system
escalate the problem.
c. If the BIF (Battery Interface Unit) LED is “on”
replace the battery interface unit.
d. If the BNA (Battery Not Available) LED is “on”
check the battery connections including
connector J20.
e. If you have an alarm and all LEDs are ok (PWR
OK and BOK) on the rectifier modules, and the
BIU (Battery Interface Unit), make sure the BIU
and the RM0850 rectifiers are seated properly
(plugged in). If the BOK LED on the BIU is ok use
the following information to check the number of
rectifiers serving this cabinet:
Number of carriers
Number of rectifiers
per cabinet
per cabinet
----------------------------|--------------------------------1
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
5
4
If the number of rectifiers is correct replace the
maintenance circuit pack in the EPN or PPN.
4. If the test still fails, then follow normal escalation
procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) for AC-Powered Systems

Table 10-332.
Error
Code

Page 10-1133

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

10

FAIL

This indicates that Error Codes 2 and 8 have occurred.
Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description
for Error Code 14 for this test.

12

FAIL

This indicates that Error Codes 4 and 8 have occurred.
Refer to these descriptions. Also, refer to the description
for Error Code 14 for this test.

14

FAIL

This indicates that Error Codes 2, 4, and 8 have
occurred. Refer to these descriptions.
NOTE:
This could also indicate that the detection logic on
the DUPINT (Duplication Interface), PR-MAINT
(Maintenance/Tape Processor), or EPN MAINT
(Maintenance) circuit pack is defective. Such an
error will not be detected by the respective
maintenance. If many environment tests are
failing, replace the suspect circuit pack
(depending on system configuration).

PASS

The Maintenance/Tape Processor in a multicarrier
cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability,
the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High
or Critical Reliability system, or the EPN Maintenance
circuit pack in an EPN have reported that the status of
Battery & Battery Charger is good.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1134

POWER (Battery & Battery Charger
for DC-Powered Systems
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
POWER

1.

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial Command to
Run1
test environment P

Full Name of MO
Battery & Battery Charger

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm
or Error Log.

NOTE:
For environment maintenance, the PPN or EPN cabinet configuration
aspects for a High or Critical Reliability system are irrelevant.
The environment maintenance strategy to be used depends on both the cabinet
configuration and the type of powering. Refer to the DC-POWER (DC Power)
Maintenance documentation for environment maintenance strategy.
In a DC-powered cabinet, the POWER MO still exists, but serves no functional
purpose. Because the system cannot determine the type of powering provided,
all POWER tests should always pass or abort. Since the tests should never fail,
POWER alarms should not be raised.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-333.
Error
Type
1

Power Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test environment P sh r 1

1

Any

Battery & Battery Charger
Query Test (#5) (Error Code 8)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 1

257

Any

Battery & Battery Charger
Query Test (#5) (Error Code 4)

MINOR

ON

test environment P sh r 1

0

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems
Table 10-333.
Error
Type

Page 10-1135

Power Error Log Entries — Continued

Aux
Data

Associated Test

769

Any

Battery & Battery Charger
Query Test (#5) (Error Code 2)

3840
(a)

1005
or
1028

Assoc. Test Battery & Battery
Charger Query Test (#5)

Alarm
Level
MINOR

On/Off
Board
ON

Test to Clear Value
test environment P sh r 1

ON

Continued on next page

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Note:
a. This error occurs only in a multi-carrier cabinet and can be ignored but not
cleared for DC-powered systems.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Battery & Battery Charger Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Test (#5)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (a)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (c)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (d)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (e)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117) (f)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118) (f)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation
Battery & Battery Charger Query

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems

Page 10-1136

Notes:
a. Refer to “AC-POWER” (AC Power) for a description of this test.
b. Refer to “EMG-XFER” (Emergency Transfer) for a description of this test.
c. Refer to “CABINET” (Cabinet Sensors) for a description of this test.
d. Refer to “EXT-DEV” (External Alarm) for a description of this test.
e. Refer to “RING-GEN” for a description of this test.
NOTE:
This test shows up in the test sequence only if there is a TN768 or
TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested.

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5)
This test queries the Maintenance/Tape Processor in a standard PPN, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability
system, or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN for the status of the
battery pack and battery charger, and reports the result. In a DC-powered
system, this test should never fail. During this test, the status LED on the battery
charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as
normal. This event is a result of checking that the battery charger is connected.
Table 10-334.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1005

ABORT

Battery charger is not connected since the system uses DC power and the
battery charger and battery are for AC-powered systems.
1. Ignore this error in DC-powered systems.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2028

ABORT

Internal system error prevented the extinguishing of the Battery Charger
status LED.
1. Although this test is not relevant for DC-powered systems, this error
should trigger close monitoring of the system as this error means that
internal system problems exist.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
POWER (Battery & Battery Charger for DC-Powered Systems
Table 10-334.
Error
Code
any

Page 10-1137

TEST #5 Battery & Battery Charger Query Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a high or critical
reliability system is incorrectly reporting a problem with power. If this test
fails, the problem is with the circuit pack and not with POWER.
1. The suspect circuit pack, depending on the system configuration,
should be replaced and the test rerun.

PASS

All that can be inferred is that the DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit
pack in a PPN for a high or critical reliability system is working properly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1138

PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor
[TN790 RISC Systems])
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

MIN1

PR-MAINT

1.

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run
test processor a/b sh/l

Full Name of MO
Maintenance Processor

Alarms on the PROCR and PR-MAINT maintenance objects are indicated by the red
LED on the Processor circuit pack.

The TN790 Processor circuit pack is comprised of the RISC Processor (PROCR),
the Maintenance Processor (PR-MAINT), and the Memory (PR-MEM). PR-MAINT
is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the RISC Processor.
PR-MAINT contains the hardware required for controlling the environmental
conditions. The Maintenance/Tape Processor provides the serial interfaces for
the administration terminal and DCE port. The Maintenance Processor also
provides the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote
maintenance capability. INADS connectivity is through the internal or external
modem. The external modem is connected to the DCE port. When the external
modem is the administered modem option the internal modem is disabled.
The TN790 has a higher speed 9600 baud internal modem or can support an
external modem connected to the DCE port.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-335.
Error
Type

PR-MAINT Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value1

02

0

Any

Any

Any

test processor a/b sh r 1

1(a)

Any

MTP Reset Test (#101)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b l r 3

257(b)

Any

MTP Sanity Handshake
Test (#106)

513(c)

Any

MTP Analog Loop Around
Test (#103)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 8

769(d)

Any

MTP Dual Port Ram Test
(#104)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b l r 3

test processor a/b r 2

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-335.
Error
Type

Page 10-1139

PR-MAINT Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value1

1025(e)

Any

MTP Outpulse Relay Test
(#102)

MIN

OFF

test processor a/b r 5

1537(f)

Any

MTP SAT Loop Around Test
(#228)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 3

1793(g)

Any

MTP Aux Loop Around Test
(#229)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 3

2049(h)

Any

External Modem Present
Test (#230)

MIN

OFF

test processor a/b r 2

Continued on next page

1.

2.

The MTP Reset Test (#101) logs you off. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) can also log you off.
Manually repeat the command with the ‘‘long’’ option for the designated number of times when
testing from the PPN SAT.
Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The MTP Reset Test (#101) has failed.
b. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) has failed.
c. The MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) has failed.
d. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) has failed. An error of 769 with an aux
data of 5 indicates a hardware problem and testing cannot clear it.
Replace the circuit pack.
e. The MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) has failed.
f. The MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) has failed.
g. The MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) has failed.
h. The External Modem Present Test (#230) has failed.
NOTE:
Refer to the FAIL section of each test that fails for further instructions.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1140

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the MTP Reset Test, for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence. The following table is
for the TN790 [RISC] System.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Processor Cache Test (#895)(a)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Processor Cache Audit (#896)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)(a)

X

X

ND

Memory Burst Read Test (#908)(a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)(a)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (b)(c)

X

D

Read All Memory Test (#85)(a)
Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)(a)

X

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102)(d)

X

X

ND

External Modem Present Test (#230)(d)(e)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103)(d)

X

X

ND

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106)

X

X

ND

MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229)

X

X

ND

MTP Reset Test (#101)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104)(d)

X

D

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor) for a description of these tests.
b. Refer to PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory) for a description of these tests.
c. This test is run only on the standby SPE in a high or critical reliability
system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a
reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1141

d. This test only runs on the active SPE.
e. This test aborts if an external modem is not administered.

MTP Reset Test (#101)
This test is destructive.
The test resets the Maintenance Processor. The destructive nature of this test
causes the following:

Table 10-336.
Error
Code
100

■

System Access Terminal to log off

■

DCE port to terminate data transmission

■

Any current memory card access to terminate and also to tear down any
remote access INADS connection

TEST #101 MTP Reset Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The requested test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1196

FAIL

The MTP did not respond to being reset.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-336.
Error
Code
1197

Page 10-1142

TEST #101 MTP Reset Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Maintenance Processor was reset, but it responded with a NOT PASS
status, indicating that it did not pass initialization correctly. The MTP is not
functioning correctly. The system continues to function. Environmental
monitoring is lost, as is communication with the Standby Processor.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The Maintenance Processor was reset, and it passed initialization correctly.
The other MTP tests should be examined to verify that the MTP is functioning
correctly.
1. Enter test processor a/b and verify that the MTP is functioning correctly.

Continued on next page

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102)
This test is a nondestructive test.When the internal modem is administered, the
test validates the correct operation of the remote access CO trunk used by
INADS. The MTP first goes off-hook, then on-hook on this trunk. If the loop current
is detected, the test passes. If the external modem is administered the MTP
sends an AT command sequence that will cause the external modem to go
OFF-HOOK and wait for dial-tone. If the modem detects dial-tone, the test
passes. This test is not allowed if the remote access line is in use.
Table 10-337.
Error
Code
100

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters
maintenance command, and set the test remote access port field to
‘‘y.’’ (If you have an INADS line, set the field to ‘‘y.’’
2. Rerun the test.

1030

ABORT

This test is not run on the Standby SPE.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-337.
Error
Code
1131

Page 10-1143

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued

Test Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or
because INADS is dialed into the system.
1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is working.
There is no need to run this test.
2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is
terminated) and then re-enter the command.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1050

ABORT

System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is
administered.
1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command. Verify
that the ‘‘Test Remote Access Port?’’ field is set to ‘‘y.’’
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2500

Internal system error

2033

Could not send MTP message.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

MTP did not respond to the test request.
1. Repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long
command in order to reset MTP and to examine the results of the MTP
Reset Test (#101).
3. Replace the Processor circuit pack.
4. If only the MTP outpulse relay test is aborting, escalate problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-337.
Error
Code

Page 10-1144

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued

Test Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
MTP reported test failure. No loop current detected. The following steps
apply to either an internal or external modem ( Some additional steps
apply to an external modem only).
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. For an external modem, if the test continues to fail:
a. If Test #230 failed, use the external modem recommendations
listed in Test #230.
b. If Test #230 passes, the MTP most likely received a NO DIAL TONE
response to the ATD command sent from the MTP. This problem is
between the modem and the INADS trunk.
3. Examine the INADS trunk for connectivity, and manually check for loop
current.
4. If there is no INADS trunk, this test should be disabled. To disable the
test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command,
and change the Test Remote Access Port field to ‘‘n.’’
5. If the INADS trunk checks out okay, but the test still fails, check the
backplane connector wiring.
6. If the backplane wiring checks out okay, replace the Processor circuit
pack.

PASS

MTP detected a loop current on the remote access port.
1. If the system cannot call INADS, or INADS cannot contact the system,
check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk,
and verify that the INADS number is correct. Approved external
modems with factory default settings are expected to work if
administered correctly using the change system-parameters
command.

Continued on next page

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test does a loop around by using the MTP
INADS channel. Test data is sent through the modem out toward the INADS
trunk. The data is looped around before the actual trunk, and it comes back into
the on-board modem. The data is then verified for integrity. The internal modem
is tested when the internal modem is selected. The external modem is tested
when the external modem is selected.
When an external modem is administered in place of the internal modem, the test
loops data in the MTP DUART ahead of the connection to the external modem.
This test also causes the MTP DUART to verify that Clear-To-Send (CTS) is
being supplied by the modem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1145

NOTE:
The test does not send any data onto the INADS trunk. However, to pass,
the test does require the trunk to be present
Table 10-338.
Error
Code
100

TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters
maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field to
‘‘y.’’
2. Rerun the test.

1030

ABORT

This test is not run on the Standby SPE.

1050

ABORT

System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is
administered.
1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance command, and
verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field.
2. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1131

ABORT

INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or
because INADS is dialed into the system.
1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is working.
There is no need to run this test.
2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is
terminated) and then re-enter the command.

1000

ABORT

2033

System software resources required to run this test are not available.
Internal system error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

MTP did not respond to the test request.
Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
If only the MTP Analog Loop Around Test is aborting, escalate the
problem.
If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long
command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP Reset
Test (#101).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-338.
Error
Code
2500

Page 10-1146

TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact INADS
with alarm data. However, the system continues to provide good service.
1. For an internal modem:
a. If MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) is also failing, check for the
presence of the INADS trunk, and resolve any INADS trunk
problems.
b. If Test #102 passes, the fault is on the Processor circuit pack. The
circuit pack should be replaced.
2. For an external modem:
a. Check the power to the modem.
b. Check the RS-232 cable connections from the DCE terminal on the
switch to the DTE connector on the modem. Transmit, Receive,
RTS, and CTS signals must be communicating between the MTP
DUART hardware and the modem hardware
c. The MTP DUART or related circuitry on the processor circuit pack
may have failed. The circuit pack should be changed at your
convenience.

PASS

For an internal modem—MTP detected correct data through the loop back
connection.
For an external modem—The test detected correct data through the loop
back in the MTP DUART hardware ahead of the RS232 connection to the
modem, and received a CTS signal from the external modem.
1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the
system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the
INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct.

Continued on next page

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104)
This test is destructive.
The test terminates any PPN SAT session, and it is a coordinated test of the MTP
dual port ram (DPR). The DPR is a section of memory that is shared by the MTP
and by the RISC Processor circuit pack. Control messages and data are passed
through the DPR. The test forces both sides to read and write the DPR
simultaneously in alternate locations.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1147

The DPR test causes the PPN SAT to log off before the test result is displayed.
The test result is determined according to the terminal from which the test is run.
If the test is run from the PPN SAT, system technician should log back in and
examine the Error Log for an error against PR-MAINT, with Error Type 769, no
Aux Data. This error entry indicates that the MTP DPR Test failed and that the
Processor circuit pack should be replaced.
NOTE:
If the test is being run from a terminal other than the PPN SAT (for example,
EPN SAT, remote access, etc.), the test results are displayed on the
screen.
NOTE:
A dial-up (through the INADS port) does not display the results discussed
in the previous paragraph. However, a dial-up through data channels does
display these results.

Table 10-339.
Error
Code
100

TEST #104 MTP Dual Port Ram Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1030

ABORT

This test in not run on the Standby SPE.

2000

ABORT

The response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2028

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Communication between
the processor and MTP is lost. The system is not able to report
environmental alarms, communicate with the Standby SPE, or reboot from
tape, if necessary.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

Dual port RAM is functioning. Communication exists between the
Processor circuit pack and the MTP.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1148

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106)
This test is a nondestructive test. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test is simply a
query from a maintenance process to the MTP. The MTP must reply for the test to
pass.
Table 10-340.

Error Code
100

TEST #106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1029 2014
2015 2016
2017 2018
2020 2022
2024 2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

2000

ABORT

The response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The MTP did not respond to the Sanity Handshake Query.
1. Re-enter command with the ‘‘long’’ option.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The MTP responded to the Sanity Handshake Query.

Continued on next page

MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the SAT channel of the MTP into
a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. Although the
test is nondestructive, it causes loss of keyboard input from the PPN SAT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Table 10-341.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1149

TEST #228 MTP SAT Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

2000

ABORT

The response to the test request was not received within the allowable
time period.

2033
2034

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The SAT channel failed the Loop Back Test. The SAT is probably unusable
for administration or maintenance. The EPN SAT, if available, or remote
access can still be used.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The SAT channel passed the Loop Back Test.
1. If the PPN SAT is not usable, check the SAT itself, along with the
cabling.

Continued on next page

MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test (#229)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the Auxiliary channel of the MTP
into a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. The
Auxiliary channel is used as the CDR output port

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Table 10-342.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1150

TEST #229 MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1000

ABORT

The system software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration. The change
system-parameters cdr command needs to administer CDR. (Refer to the
Implementation Manual for more information on administering this port.)

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period

2033

Internal system error

2034

Port busy
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2500

ABORT

The system software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1048

ABORT

An External Modem is administered to this port.

FAIL

The Auxiliary channel failed the Loop Back Test. The AUX port may not be
sending any auxiliary data to the auxiliary collection device.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The Auxiliary channel passed the Loop Back Test. The auxiliary port is
functioning correctly.
1. If no auxiliary data is being recorded, check the auxiliary collection
device, and verify that it has been set up and connected correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])

Page 10-1151

MTP External Modem Present Test (#230)
This test is a nondestructive test on the remote access line, and will run only if the
channel is idle. The test validates the presence of an external modem with a
firmware invoked AT command. The test will pass if the modem responds with
“OK” to the AT command.

Table 10-343.

Error Code
100

TEST #230 External Modem Present Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters
maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field
to ‘‘y.’’
2. Rerun the test.

1030

ABORT

This test is not run on the Standby SPE.

1131

ABORT

INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or
because INADS is dialed into the system.
1. If INADS is communicating with the switch the INADS trunk is
working. There is no need to run this test.
2. Or if required. Wait about ten minutes (until the INADS session is
terminated) and then re-enter the command.

1000

ABORT

2033

System software resources required for this test are not available.
Internal system error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1049

ABORT

External Modem is not administered.

1050

ABORT

System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is
administered.
1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command, and
verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field.
2. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

MTP did not respond to the test request.
1. Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long
command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP
Reset Test (#101).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor [TN790 RISC Systems])
Table 10-343.

Error Code
2500

Page 10-1152

TEST #230 External Modem Present Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System software Error
1. Retry at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact
INADS with alarm data. However, the system continues to provide good
service. The MTP did not receive an OK response after sending the AT
command to the modem.
1. If test #103 failed, follow the external modem recommendations for
that test failure.
2. If Test #103 passes:
a. Check the RS-232 connections from the DCE terminal on the
switch to the DTE terminal on the modem. RTS and CTS signals
are being communicated between the MTP DUART hardware
and the modem hardware. Transmit and receive signals may not
be communicated correctly.
b. Check the modem administration using the change
system-parameters maintenance command, especially
changes from default parameters.
c. Check the modem settings, especially changes from factory
defaults.

! CAUTION:
The fault may be on the Processor circuit pack. The circuit pack
should be replaced.
PASS

MTP detected correct data from the external modem. The MTP received
an OK response after sending the AT command to the modem.
1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the
system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the
INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct. If an
external modem is being used instead of the internal MTP modem,
modem settings may be wrong. Approved external modems with
factory default settings are expected to work if administered
correctly using the change system-parameters maintenance
command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1153

PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
PR-MAINT

1.

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

MIN

test processor a/b sh/l

Full Name of MO
Maintenance/Tape Processor1

The full Name of the MO in a 386 system is Maintenance Processor.

NOTE:
For systems with a TN790 Processor Circuit Pack use maintenance object
PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor TN790 RISC Systems).
The 80386 Processor, Memory, and MainTenance Processor comprise the
TN786B Processor circuit pack [386 systems].
The TN786B Processor circuit pack is comprised of the 80386 Processor
(PROCR), the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT), and the Memory (MEMORY).
On the TN786B circuit pack, PR-MAINT is responsible for monitoring the sanity of
the 80386 Processor.
The major difference between the two circuit packs is that on the TN786B circuit
pack, there is no tape for PR-MAINT to control and Memory is on the circuit pack.
The rest of the functionality is the same. On both circuit packs, PR-MAINT
contains the hardware required for controlling the environmental conditions. The
Maintenance/Tape Processor provides the serial interfaces for the administration
terminal and CDR ports. The Maintenance/Tape Processor also provides the
communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote maintenance
capability.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1154

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-344.
Error
Type

Maintenance/Tape Processor Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value1

02

0

Any

Any

Any

test processor a/b sh r 1

1 (a)

Any

MTP Reset Test (#101)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b l r 3

257 (b)

Any

MTP Sanity Handshake Test
(#106)

513 (c)

Any

MTP Analog Loop Around
Test (#103)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 8

769 (d)

Any

MTP Dual Port Ram Test
(#104)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b l r 3

1025 (e)

Any

MTP Outpulse Relay Test
(#102)

MIN

OFF

test processor a/b r 5

1537 (f)

Any

MTP Manager I Loop Around
Test (#228)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 3

1793 (g)

Any

MTP Aux Loop Around Test
(#229)

MIN

ON

test processor a/b r 3

1.

2.

test processor a/b r 2

You must manually repeat the command with the "long" option the designated number of times from
the administration terminal or from a remote administration terminal because the Sanity Timer Test
(#83) logs you off.
Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The MTP Reset Test (#101) has failed.
b. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) has failed.
c. The MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) has failed.
d. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) has failed. An error of 769 with an aux
data of 5 indicates a hardware problem and testing will not clear it. The
circuit pack should be replaced.
e. The MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) has failed.
f. The MTP Manager I Loop Around Test (#228) has failed.
g. The MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) has failed.
NOTE:
Refer to the FAIL section of each test that fails for further instructions.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1155

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the MTP Reset Test, for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) (a)

X

X

ND

Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80) (a)

X

X

ND

Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) (a)

X

X

ND

Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) (a)

X

D

MTP Reset Test (#101)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104)

X

D

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106)

X

X

ND

MAP Manager I Loop Around Test (#228)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103)

X

X

ND

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Text Checksum Test (#86)(b)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (b)

X

D

X

ND

Read All Memory Test (#85)(b)
Memory Error Detection Test (#87)(b)

Memory Board Check Test (#631) (b)

1.

X

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to PROCR for a description of these tests.
b. Refer to MEMORY [386 systems only] for a description of these tests.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1156

MTP Reset Test (#101)
This test is destructive. The test resets the Maintenance/Tape Processor. The
destructive nature of this test causes the following:

Table 10-345.
Error
Code

■

Administration terminal to log off

■

CDR port to terminate data transmission

■

Any current tape access to terminate and also to tear down any remote
access INADS connection

TEST #101 MTP Reset Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

10102

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.

10104

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10105

FAIL

The MTP did not respond to being reset.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

10106

FAIL

The Maintenance/Tape Processor was reset, but it responded with a NOT
PASS status, indicating that it did not pass initialization correctly. The MTP
is not functioning correctly. The system should continue to function, but it
will not have the ability to save translation to tape, or to read tape if the
system needs to be rebooted. Environmental monitoring is lost, as is
communication with the Standby Processor.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
Table 10-345.
Error
Code

Page 10-1157

TEST #101 MTP Reset Test — Continued
Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The Maintenance/Tape Processor was reset, and it passed initialization
correctly. The other MTP tests should be examined to verify that the MTP is
functioning correctly.
1. Enter test processor a/b and verify that the MTP is functioning
correctly.

Continued on next page

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test validates the correct operation of the
remote access CO trunk used by INADS. The MTP first goes off-hook, then
on-hook on this trunk. If the loop current is detected, the test passes. This test is
not allowed if the remote access line is in use.
Table 10-346.
Error
Code

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters
maintenance command, and set the test remote access port field to "y."
(If you have an INADS line, set the field to "y." If you are testing the
Standby PR-MAINT, a refresh spe-standby command must be
successfully executed before you proceed to Step 2.
2. Rerun the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
Table 10-346.
Error
Code
1131

Page 10-1158

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS, or
because INADS is dialed into the system.
1. Wait about ten minutes and then re-enter the command.

10201

ABORT

System software resources required to run this test are not available.

10202

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10203

ABORT

MTP did not respond to the test request.
1. Repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long
command in order to reset MTP and to examine the results of the MTP
Reset Test (#101).
3. Replace the Processor circuit pack.
4. If only the MTP outpulse relay test is aborting, escalate the problem.

10204

FAIL

MTP reported test failure. No loop current detected.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, examine the INADS trunk for connectivity,
and manually check for loop current.
3. If there is no INADS trunk, this test should be disabled. To disable the
test, issue the change system-parameters maintenance command,
and change the Test Remote Access Port field to "n." If this test is failing
on the Standby SPE, issue the refresh spe-standby command, and
rerun the test.
4. If the INADS trunk checks out okay, but the test still fails, check the
backplane connector wiring.
5. If the backplane wiring checks out okay, replace the Processor circuit
pack at your earliest convenience.

PASS

MTP detected a loop current on the remote access port.
1. If the system cannot call INADS, or INADS cannot contact the system,
check with the local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk,
and verify that the INADS number is correct.

10205

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retryt the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
Table 10-346.

Page 10-1159

TEST #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

10206

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is administered.
1. Enter the change system-parameters maintenance command. Verify
that the "Test Remote Access Port?" field is set to "y."
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10208

ABORT

The remote access port is busy. INADS is probably dialed into the switch.
1. If INADS is dialed in, the INADS trunk is working. There is no need to run
the test.

Continued on next page

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test does an on-board loop around by
using the MTPINADS channel. Test data is sent through the on-board modem out
toward the INADS trunk. The data is looped around before the actual trunk, and it
comes back into the on-board modem. The data is then verified for integrity.
NOTE:
The test does not send any data onto the INADS trunk. However, in order to
pass, the test does require the trunk to be present.
Table 10-347.
Error
Code
1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
(Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
Table 10-347.
Error
Code
1018

Page 10-1160

TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test has been disabled via administration.
1. To enable the test, issue the change system-parameters
maintenance command, and set the Test Remote Access Port field to
"y". If you are testing the Standby PR-MAINT, a refresh spe-standby
command must be successfully executed before you can proceed to
Step 2.
2. Rerun the test.

1131

ABORT

The INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS,
or because INADS is dialed into the system.
1. Wait about 10 minutes and then re-enter the command.

10301

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.

10302
10309

ABORT

Internal system error

10303
10310

ABORT

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
MTP did not respond to the test request.
1. Repeat test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If only the MTP Analog Loop Around Test is aborting, escalate the
problem.
3. If all MTP tests are aborting, execute the test processor a/b long
command in order to reset MTP, and examine the results of the MTP
Reset Test (#101).

10305

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10306

ABORT

System could not determine if the testing of the INADS port is
administered.
1. Enter change system-parameters maintenance command, and
verify the entry for the Test Remote Access Port field.
2. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

10308

ABORT

The remote access port is busy. INADS is probably dialed into the switch.
1. Wait until INADS session is terminated and then re-enter the
command.

10311

ABORT

Test #102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test failed.
1. Refer to Error Code 10204 of the MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) for
directions.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)
Table 10-347.
Error
Code
10304

Page 10-1161

TEST #103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
MTP reported test failure. The system is not able to reliably contact INADS
with alarm data. The system continues to provide good service.
1. If MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) is also failing, check for the
presence of the INADS trunk, and resolve any INADS trunk problems.
2. If Test #102 passes, the fault is on the Processor circuit pack. The
circuit pack should be replaced at your convenience.

PASS

MTP detected correct data through the loop back connection.
1. If the system cannot call INADS, or if INADS cannot contact the
system, check with the local Central Office for problems with the
INADS trunk, and verify that the INADS number is correct.

Continued on next page

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104)
This test is destructive.
The test terminates any PPN Manager I session, and it is a coordinated test of the
MTP dual port ram (DPR). The DPR is a section of memory that is shared by the
MTP and by the 80286/386 Processor circuit pack. Control messages and data
are passed through the DPR. The test forces both sides to read and write the
DPR simultaneously in alternate locations.
The DPR test causes the PPN Manager I to log off before the test result is
displayed. The test result is determined according to the terminal from which the
test is run. If the test is run from the PPN Manager I terminal, system technician
should log back in and examine the Error Log for an error against PR-MAINT,
with Error Type 769, no Aux Data. This error entry indicates that the MTPDPR Test
failed and that the Processor circuit pack should be replaced.

! WARNING:
If the TN786B circuit pack must be replaced, and if there is a blank in the
Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the slot immediately to the
right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the blank before removing the
circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are
used to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might
become damaged.
If the test is being run from a terminal other than the PPN Manager I (for example,
EPN Manager I, remote access, and so forth), the test results are displayed on
the screen.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1162

NOTE:
A dial-up (through the INADS port) does not display the results discussed
in the previous paragraph. However, a dial-up through data channels does
display these results.
Table 10-348.
Error
Code

TEST #104 MTP Dual Port Ram Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

(Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.)

1000

ABORT

System software resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1030

ABORT

The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This
test may be run on this component only when it resides on the Active SPE.
1. For a recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error
Code 1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2028

ABORT

System software resources required for this test are not available.

2029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The dual port RAM is not functioning correctly. Communication between
the processor and MTP is lost. The system is not able to report
environmental alarms, communicate with the Standby SPE, or reboot from
tape, if necessary.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

Dual port RAM is functioning. Communication exists between the
80286/386 Processor circuit pack and the MTP.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Page 10-1163

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106)
This test is a nondestructive test. The MTP Sanity Handshake Test is simply a
query from a maintenance process to the MTP. The MTP must reply for the test to
pass.
Table 10-349.
Error
Code

TEST #106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1000

ABORT

System software resources required to run this test are not available.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The MTP did not respond to the Sanity Handshake Query.
1. Re-enter command with the "long" option.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The MTP responded to the Sanity Handshake Query.

Continued on next page

MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test (#229)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test places the Auxiliary channel of the MTP
into a loop around mode, and it verifies the data integrity of the channel. The
Auxiliary channel is used as the CDR output port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MAINT (Maintenance Processor)

Table 10-350.
Error
Code

Page 10-1164

TEST #229 MTP Auxiliary Loop Around Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1000

ABORT

The system software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration. The change
system-parameters cdr command needs to administer CDR.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033
2034

ABORT

Internal system error

22902

ABORT

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The system software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

22903
FAIL

The Auxiliary channel failed the Loop Back Test. The AUX port is probably not
sending any auxiliary data to the auxiliary collection device.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The Auxiliary channel passed the Loop Back Test. The auxiliary port is
functioning correctly.
1. If no auxiliary data is being recorded, check the auxiliary collection
device, and verify that it has been set up and connected correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Page 10-1165

PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PR-MEM 1

MAJOR

test memory a/b lo c

TN790 RISC Memory

PR-MEM 1

MINOR

test memory a/b sh c

TN790 RISC Memory

1.

The MO is ‘‘PR-MEM’’ because all of the Memory used by the Processor is on the TN790
Processor circuit pack.

The TN790 RISC Memory contains the DEFINITY software and firmware. The
Processor circuit pack is the most critical component in the system.
For testing purposes, the circuit pack is logically separated into PR-MAINT,
PROCR, and PR-MEM. This means that a memory problem requires that the
Processor be replaced. These systems contain two types of memory: Flash ROM
and DRAM. Flash ROM is memory that contains the boot image, part of the
low-level maintenance firmware, PI firmware, and PACCON firmware. This type of
memory is not erased during circuit pack resets. It can be reprogrammed via the
upgrade software command or a Reset System 4/5 using a software memory
card.
One section of the Flash ROM (BOOTPROM) containing the system initialization
functions and the low-level diagnostic programs is programmed at the factory
and is not reprogrammed by the upgrade software command. DRAM is used for
software data storage, and it changes constantly. Both types of memory are
present on the Processor circuit pack. The diagnostics run appropriate tests on
both memories.
DRAM is replaceable and installed in 3 Single In-line Memory Module (SIMM)
sockets on this circuit pack. Replacement of these SIMMs is described in "Install
the SIMM on the TN790 Processor Circuit Pack" in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’.
For all system activity, the Processor must be able to access the Memory. If the
Processor cannot do this, the system goes into SPE-down mode. In SPE-down
mode, fatal Memory errors may show up as Processor errors. This merely
indicates that the Processor and the Memory are very closely linked as a matter
of course.
If the initialization diagnostics fail, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode"
section in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Page 10-1166

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-351.
Error
Type
1

Memory Error Log Entries

Aux Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test memory a/b l r 1

1

Any

Flash Memory
Checksum Test (#86)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 5

3(a)

Any

Flash Memory
Checksum Test (#86)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 5

1025

Any

Memory Parity Error
Detection Test (#87)

MINOR

ON

test memory a/b r 3

1281

Any

Memory Burst Read
Test (#908)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 2

1793

Any (b)(c)

Read All Memory (#85)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 1

2049(d)

Any (b)(c)

Memory Functional
Test (#332)

MAJOR

ON

test memory a/b l r 1

0

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error (3) indicates that a software patch has been applied and either
the software patch is bad or was installed incorrectly.
1.Back out the software patch and run the test memory UUCS long
command to verify that the problem has been cleared.
2.If the PBX system is equipped with High Reliability or Critical Reliability
option (i.e. with duplicated SPEs), and this error occurs, a SPE
interchange will occur if the health of the standby SPE permits the
interchange.
b. The following Aux Data indicate SIMM Failures
1.SIMM A
2.SIMM B
3.SIMM A & SIMM B
4.SIMM C
5.SIMM A & SIMM C
6.SIMM B & SIMM C
7.SIMM A, SIMM B, & SIMM C

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Page 10-1167

c. Aux Data of 100 is an LMM Flash Checksum initialization failure.
d. There are Functional Memory Test errors against the Processor circuit
pack. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical
Reliability system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run
only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate errors in the order in which they are presented in the table that
follows when you are inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes
associated with the Read All Memory Test, for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Processor Cache Test (#895)(a)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Processor Cache Audit (#896)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#897)(a)

X

X

ND

Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)(a)

X

X

ND

Memory Burst Read Test (#908)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (b)

X

D

Read All Memory Test (#85)
Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)

X

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP External Modem Present Test (#230) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Reset Test (#101) (c)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (c)

X

D

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Page 10-1168

Notes:
a. Refer to PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor) Maintenance documentation for
a description of these tests.
b. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability
system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a
reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.
c. Refer to PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests.

Read All Memory Test (#85)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test reads every memory location in
memory. A failure of this test indicates a DRAM failure in the Processor
circuit pack. DRAM is replaceable and installed in 3 Single Inline Memory
Module (SIMM) sockets on this circuit pack. Replacement of these SIMMs
is described in the "Circuit Pack Replacement Procedure" section.
Table 10-352.

Error Code
100

TEST #85 Read All Memory Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The requested test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029 2014
2015 2016
2017 2018
2020 2022
2024 2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)
Table 10-352.

Error Code
1-7

Page 10-1169

TEST #85 Read All Memory Test — Continued
Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
If the system can still provide service, this indicates that the
Processor circuit pack has a problem with memory or the RISC
processor, but can still function.
At the customers convenience run the destructive “reset system 4”
command to boot the system and write to all of the memory locations.
This will clear transient parity errors and test for permanent parity
errors. This complete memory testing during initialization will cause
“SPE DOWN” if a parity error is detected and the PROCR circuit pack
should be replaced.
If parity errors reoccur within several weeks, record the error code
information indicating which memory modules failed, together with
the extended interval between failures. After recording the
information and at the customers convenience replace the PROCR
circuit pack.

PASS

The Memory is healthy.

Continued on next page

Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the
DEFINITY Generic 3 software and firmware loaded from the Software Memory
Card (SOFTWARE MEM-CARD). A failure of this test indicates corruption of the
Flash Memory. However, this failure does NOT always indicate a hardware
problem. DO NOT REPLACE the Processor circuit pack when this is the only
error. A system restart via the reset system 4 command starting with inserting
the Software Memory Card for this system followed by re-inserting the Translation
Memory Card memory card should be implemented at the customer’s earliest
convenience.
In a High or Critical Reliability system, an upgrade software command can be
used with the Software Memory Card for the system followed by re-inserting the
Translation Memory Cards as directed by this upgrade procedure. This
command performs the same operation as the reset system 4 command but is
much less service-disruptive.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Table 10-353.

Error Code
100

Page 10-1170

TEST #86 Text Checksum Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029 2014
2015 2016
2017 2018
2020 2022
2024 2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

1-7

FAIL

The system may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system
may fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area
of the Text.
1. The Flash ROM should be reprogrammed via the upgrade
software command. The memory card should contain the same
vintage software that is currently in the system. Refer to the
"Software Upgrade" section in this manual.
2. If the test continues to fail, replace the TN790 Processor circuit
pack and repeat step 1.

PASS

The checksum is correct.

Continued on next page

Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test is run on a few reserved locations in
memory. A failure of this test indicates a failure on the Processor circuit pack.
This test determines if the parity circuitry is working. Accordingly, the test
determines if parity errors can be detected. The parity circuitry is used to detect
DRAM memory failures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Table 10-354.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1171

TEST #87 Memory Parity Error Detection Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

1-7

FAIL

The parity detection circuitry is not working correctly. If the system can
still provide service, this indicates that the Processor circuit pack has a
problem but can still function.
1. The TN790 Processor circuit pack should be replaced. The failure is
identifying the PROCR as being bad and only the PROCR circuit
pack needs to be replaced.

PASS

The parity detection circuitry is working.

Memory Functional Test (#332)
This test is destructive.
This test ensures that every DRAM memory location can be accessed and
changed independently. Running this test wipes out all data in DRAM memory.
This test is performed during a reset system 4 or reset system 5. If the test fails
during a reset system command, refer to the "Procedure for SPE-Down Mode" in
the Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’ for the recommended maintenance
strategy. This test can be run as a long demand test on the standby SPE.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Table 10-355.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1172

TEST #332 Memory Functional Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 3 times.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1-7

FAIL

The Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is defective.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test still shows a failure, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is healthy.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PR-MEM (TN790 RISC Memory)

Page 10-1173

Memory Burst Read Test (#908)
This test verifies that the Memory Burst Read function works properly on the
Processor circuit pack.
Table 10-356.
Error
Code
100

TEST #908 Memory Burst Read Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1022
1335
2500

ABORT

Internal system error

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

1-7

FAIL

The Burst Read circuit is not functioning properly.

1. Retry the command.

1. If the test fails, replace the Processor and retry the test.
PASS

The Burst Read portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating
correctly.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

Page 10-1174

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR

MINOR

test cdr-link primary/secondary l

CDR Link

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR

WARNING

test cdr-link primary/secondary

CDR Link

The CDR feature records detailed call information on all incoming and outgoing
calls on specified trunk groups and sends this information to an CDR output
device. The two physical links can be administered for connecting external CDR
output devices to the system. They are identified as the primary CDR (PRI-CDR)
link and the secondary CDR (SEC-CDR) link. The CDR link can be administered
to a data extension or the EIA port on the system TN773 Processor circuit pack
which provides a standard EIA-232C interface. The external CDR output devices
are:
■

94A Local Storage Unit (LSU)

■

TELESEER CDR Unit

■

Call Accounting System (CAS)

■

Call Detail Recording Unit (CDRU)

■

Printer

■

Host computer

■

Personal computer (PC)

■

Customer-provided equipment

Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5.4 Administration
and Feature Description, for details of the CDR feature.
CDR Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the
system and an external CDR output device. The strategy includes a set of tests
for periodic diagnosis, detection of errors during normal operation, actions for
troubleshooting, and raising alarms for serious problems. CDR Link Maintenance
uses a try-and-wait mechanism for maintaining the CDR link. If the CDR link is
torn down due to an error, CDR Link Maintenance intends to bring the CDR link
up. If the Link Setup trial fails, CDR Link Maintenance waits 30 seconds before
the next retry. If the number of retries reaches the value of a threshold (two), a
Minor alarm is raised for service attention.
The following physical configurations are supported for the CDR link:
■

From the EIA port of Processor circuit pack to an CDR output device
through the standard EIA-232C interface.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)
■

Page 10-1175

From a data channel on TN777 Network Control circuit pack to a data
extension where the CDR output device connects via the standard EIA
232C interface.
The data extension can be a PDM, MPDM, DTDM, or ADU. The PDM,
MPDM, and DTDM connect to a Digital Line Port of TN754 or TN754B
Digital Line circuit pack; ADU connects to a Data Line Port of TN726 Data
Link circuit pack.
NOTE:
In duplicated systems it is possible for a failure on one of the processor
circuit packs to bring down the CDR link even if it is the standby processor.
This problem can not be resolved by interchanging processors because
the CDR ports on each of the processor circuit packs are connected via
WIRE-OR.

CDR Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements
composing the CDR physical link, which are as follows:
■

External CDR output device

■

EIA port on Processor circuit pack

■

Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and Digital Line Port of TN754 or
TN754B Digital Line circuit pack

■

ADU and Data Line Port of TN726 Data Link circuit pack

■

Data Channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack

If CDR Link Maintenance cannot restore the CDR link, then the maintenance tests
of these individual components of the CDR link must be executed to diagnose
faults.

Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link
1. Get the status of CDR links.
Enter status cdr-link command and make sure that the CDR links are not
busied out for maintenance. If the link is down, then continue to the next
step.
2. Where does the CDR link connect to?
Enter display system feature and find out the destinations of CDR links.
Continue to the next step.
3. Is the destination an extension or the EIA port?
If the destination is an extension number, then enter the status data
extension command and verify whether the data extension is in the
in-service/idle state. If the data extension is NOT available, then look for

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

Page 10-1176

the extension number in Alt Name field of Hardware Error Log and refer to
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
resolutions.
If the destination is "eia," then look for PR-MAINT errors in the Hardware
Error Log. If present, refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor)
Maintenance documentation.
4. Is a data channel on TN777 Network Control circuit pack in the
in-service/idle state?
Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data
channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack. Enter status data
extension command and make sure that at least one data channel is in
the in-service/idle state. If no data channel is available, then look for
DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
present, refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack).
5. Is the external CDR output device available?
Make sure that the CDR output device is on-line and ready for service.
Check the physical connectivity between Data Module and the CDR
output device or between the EIA port on backplane of the switch and the
CDR output device.
It is recommended to busy out the CDR link before executing maintenance tests
over the CDR link. If the CDR link is busied out, then all CDR link maintenance
actions are deactivated. The interference to tests of other MO is off.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

Page 10-1177

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-357.
Error
Type

CDR Link Maintenance Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test cdr-link
primary|secondary sh

18 (a)

0

busy out cdr

WARNING

OFF

release cdr-link
primary|secondary

MINOR/
WARNING 2

OFF

test cdr-link
primary|secondary l

primary|secondary
25 (b)

0
3 to 6
9
99
255

513 (c)

0
3 to 6
9

Link Retry Test (#215)

test cdr-link
primary|secondary

1025 (d)
1281 (e)

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. System Technician has busied out the CDR link to out-of-service state.
The CDR link is torn down.
b. Link Retry Test (#215) fails. The Aux Data field contains either the Channel
ID of Data Channels on the TN777 circuit pack (that is, 3 for Channel 01, 4
for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04, and 9 for EIA port) or
an Error Code of 99 indicating that no data channels are available for
setting up the link, or an Error Type of 255 indicating an internal system
error. Refer to the preceding ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for
resolution.
c. The CDR physical link is down due to the following causes: cable to the
CDR output device is disconnected; CDR output device is powered off,
the data extension where the CDR output device connects to has been
busied out or there is a scheduled daily interchange. The Aux Data field
contains the Channel ID of Data Channels on the TN777 circuit pack (that
is, 3 for Channel 01, 4 for Channel 02, 5 for Channel 03, 6 for Channel 04,
and 9 for EIA port). Check the connectivity of wire and cable among wall
jacket, data module, and the CDR output device. Enter status data

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

Page 10-1178

extension and verify that the data extension of the CDR output device is
in the in-service/idle state. If the data extension is not available, then refer
to the preceding ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for resolution.
Issue the display system-parameters-maintenance command to see the
start time of daily maintenance. If the error occurs and is resolved during
the interval of daily maintenance, then the error can be ignored.
d. This error indicates that the CDR output device is in an off-line state, for
example, paper jam or paper out for a printer device. The CDR link is torn
down. Check the CDR output device and act promptly to put it back to
on-line state. Enter test cdr-link primary|secondary command to set up
the CDR link.
e. Software detects an overflow of CDR records generated in the switch due
to the heavy trunk traffic and low speed CDR output device. If both
primary and secondary links are ON, the secondary link is torn down
temporarily for two minutes to speed up the output process to the primary
link. No action is necessary for this error type.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Link
Retry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
Link Retry Test (#215)

1.

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND 1

X

D

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
This test is destructive.
This test disconnects the existing link between the system and the external CDR
output device. If the link has been disconnected already, this test just returns
PASS. All resources allocated for an CDR link are released after this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)

Table 10-358.
Error
Code

Page 10-1179

TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

40

ABORT

Internal system error

50

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1010

ABORT

The CDR link has been busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the release cdr-link primary|secondary command to release
the CDR link from busyout state.
2. Retry the test cdr-link primary|secondary long command to execute
the test.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The CDR link is torn down.

Continued on next page

Link Retry Test (#215)
This test sends a message to the CDR software process to make a data call to
the extension where the CDR output device connects to or opens the EIA port to
the CDR output device. If the CDR link is already up, this test is passed without
making any data call or opening the EIA port.
Table 10-359.
Error
Code

TEST #215 Link Retry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

10

ABORT

Internal system error

20

ABORT

Internal system error. Internal error in Maintenance Action Process (MAP).
MAP returns an error back to maintenance script (HMM). Timer expires
while waiting for the reply from MAP.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

30

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Refer to ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link)
Table 10-359.
Error
Code
1010

Page 10-1180

TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The CDR link has been busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter release cdr-link primary|secondary command to release the
CDR link from busyout state.
2. Retry test cdr-link primary|secondary long command to execute the
test.

FAIL

The CDR link CANNOT be established.
1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link’’ for instructions.

PASS

The CDR link is up.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits)

Page 10-1181

PROC-SAN (Process Sanity Audits)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
PROC-SAN

Alarm
Level
none

Initial Command to Run
none

Full Name of MO
Process Sanity Audits

The Process Sanity Audits MO is responsible for monitoring the sanity of software
processes in the system. If the Process Sanity Audits MO detects that a process
has gone insane (does not respond to a sanity message within an allotted time
period), the process is restarted. If the Process Sanity Audits MO detects that
multiple processes (or a single key process) do not respond to sanity messages
within an allotted time period, a system recovery action is initiated.
The Process Sanity Audits MO has no alarms and no tests. Certain errors are
logged to the Hardware Error Log for information purposes only.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-360.
Error
Type

Process Sanity Audits Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

none

10 (a)

0

none

none

none

none

204 (a)

any

none

none

none

none

1.

Look for other errors of the same type and deal with them accordingly.

Notes:
a. These errors indicate that a system recovery action has been taken
because one or more software processes failed to respond to a sanity
audit in a timely fashion. As a result of the recovery action, the system may
have temporarily suspended service for a period of time surrounding the
error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1182

PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
PROCR

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to Run
test processor a/b sh r/c

Full Name of MO
Processor Circuit Pack

NOTE:
For systems with a TN790 RISC Processor circuit pack see maintenance
object ‘‘PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)’’.
NOTE:
Alarms on the MEM-BD [386 systems only], PROCR and PR-MAINT
maintenance objects (MOs) are indicated by the red LED on the Processor
circuit pack.
The TN786B has an 80386 processor that uses on-board flash ROM and DRAM
memory. The TN786B Processor circuit pack is comprised of the 80386
Processor (PROCR), the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT) and Memory
(MEM-BD).
The TN786B Processor circuit pack is responsible for the execution of the
DEFINITY software. This includes all of the call processing, maintenance, and
administration functions. The Processor circuit pack is the most critical
component to proper operation of the system.
The PR-MAINT is responsible for monitoring the sanity of the Processor circuit
pack as well as the environmental conditions. The PR-MAINT provides the serial
interfaces for the administration terminal and for the Call Detail Recording (CDR)
ports. The PR-MAINT also provides the communications interface to INADS for
alarm reporting and remote maintenance capability.
In High and Critical Reliability systems, the PR-MAINT is part of the
communications path between the Active Processor Element and the Standby
Processor Element.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1183

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-361.
Error
Type

80286/386 Processor Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value1

02

0

Any

Any

Any

test processor a/b r 1

1 (a)

0

Software Initiated
Interrupt Test (#77)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 3

769 (b)

0

ROM Checksum Test
(#80)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 5

1025 (c)

0

Processor
Non-maskable
Interrupt Test (#82)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 2

1281 (d)

0

Processor Sanity
Timer Test (#83)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b l r 2

1.

2.

Software does not accept the repeat option on the TN773 circuit pack [G3iV1.1-286]. The repeat
option is valid only on the TN786B circuit pack. You must manually repeat the command with the
long option the designated number of times from the administration terminal and from a remote SAT
because the Sanity Timer Test (#83) logs you off. In G3iV1.1-286, if the test processor long System
Technician command is executed six times back-to-back, the system goes into SPE-DOWN mode.
Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77) failed. Refer to the FAIL
condition of this test for further action.
b. The ROM Checksum Test (#80) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of this
test for further action.
c. The Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82) failed. Refer to the FAIL
condition of this test for further action.
d. The Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition of
this test for further action.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1184

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when you are
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82)

X

X

ND

Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80)

X

X

ND

Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77)

X

X

ND

X

D

Order of Investigation

Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83)
MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (a)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (a)

X

X

ND

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (a)

X

X

ND

MTPSAT Loop Around Test (#228) (a)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (a)

X

X

ND

MTP Reset Test (#101) (a)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (a)

X

D

Read All Memory Test (#85)(b)

X

ND

X

ND

Text Checksum Test (#86)(b)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (c)(b)

X

D

X

ND

Memory Error Detection Test (#87)(b)

Memory Board Check Test (#631) (b)

1.

X

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests.
b. Refer to MEMORY [386 systems only] Maintenance documentation for a
description of these tests.

Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (#77)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test verifies if the 80286/386 Processor can
exercise the three types of software-initiated interrupts:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Table 10-362.
Error
Code
1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

Page 10-1185

■

Divide by zero

■

Single step

■

One byte interrupt instruction.

TEST #77 Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

FAIL

The processor did not detect the software interrupt condition. As a result, the
processor executed the incorrect interrupt vector. The system may or may
not continue to operate correctly.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be
replaced.

! WARNING:
If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced, and if
there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in the
slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove the
blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack
and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion
Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged.
PASS

The processor detected the software interrupt condition, and it executed the
correct interrupt vector. The system continues to operate correctly.

Continued on next page

Processor ROM Checksum Test (#80)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test computes the checksum of the
processor’s bootstrap ROM, and it compares this checksum to a predetermined
value stored within the ROM. A failure of this test indicates corruption of the ROM.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Table 10-363.
Error
Code
1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

Page 10-1186

TEST #80 Processor ROM Checksum Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

FAIL

The computed checksum did not match the ROM checksum. The system
may or may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail later
when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the bootstrap
ROM.
1. The Processor circuit pack should be replaced.

! WARNING:
If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced,
and if there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot
(that is, in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit
pack), remove the blank before removing the circuit pack.
Otherwise, the circuit pack and/or the two connectors that are used
to connect the Expansion Memory circuit pack (if available) might
become damaged.
PASS

The computed checksum matched the ROM checksum. The system
continues to operate normally.

Continued on next page

Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test (#82)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test is used to verify that the 80286/386
Processor can detect and respond to non-maskable interrupts. For example, the
processor intentionally causes a BUS TIMEOUT EXCEPTION (BTE) and then
verifies if it vectors to the correct interrupt routine. This is basically a test of the
internal operation of the 80286/386 CPU chip.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Table 10-364.
Error
Code
1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

Page 10-1187

TEST #82 Processor Non-maskable Interrupt Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

FAIL

The interrupt was not detected or acted upon.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be
replaced.

! WARNING:
If the TN786B circuit pack [386 systems only] must be replaced, and if
there is a blank in the Expansion Memory circuit pack slot (that is, in
the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack), remove
the blank before removing the circuit pack. Otherwise, the circuit pack
and/or the two connectors that are used to connect the Expansion
Memory circuit pack (if available) might become damaged.
3. If replacement of the Processor circuit pack still results in test failure, the
following circuit packs should be replaced, one at a time in the order
provided: TN770 Memory [G3iV1.1-286 only] Expansion Memory
[G3iV2-386 only] TN765 Processor Interface, TN777B Network Control,
TN778 Packet Control, and TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs.
The test should then be repeated.
4. If the test still fails after you replace all the circuit packs discussed in the
previous step, the problem must be in the control carrier, and the carrier
should be replaced.
PASS

The interrupt was correctly detected. The 80286/386 CPU chip is functioning
correctly.

Continued on next page

Processor Sanity Timer Test (#83)
This test is destructive.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1188

This test causes service to be disrupted for about seven seconds on the TN773
and for about one second on the TN786B. During this time, the system does not
respond to any user action.
This test checks to see if the 80286/386 processor watch-dog sanity timer is
functioning correctly. The processor intentionally allows the sanity timer to time
out. If the processor detects itself being reset, the test passes, and the processor
continues to execute normally. If the processor does not detect a reset, the test
has failed. If this test continues to fail, the processor pack should be replaced as
soon as possible. The sanity timer is not critical to system operation, but it is
needed for processor recovery if the processor stops functioning.
Table 10-365.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #83 Processor Sanity Timer Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System software resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

FAIL

The sanity timer did not time out as expected. The system continues to
function normally. If the processor gets into an infinite loop, the reset
CANNOT be detected, and the system DOES NOT reboot itself to clear the
problem.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be replaced
as soon as possible.

PASS

The sanity timer went off as expected. The system continues to function
normally. If the processor gets into an infinite loop, the reset IS detected,
and the system reboots itself to clear the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1189

PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit
Pack)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PROCR

MAJOR

test processor a/b lo r/c

TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack

PROCR

MINOR

test processor a/b sh r/c

TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack

NOTE:
For systems with the TN786B Processor circuit pack, see maintenance
object, ‘‘PROCR (Processor Circuit Pack)’’.
NOTE:
Alarms on the PR-MEM, PROCR and PR-MAINT maintenance objects
(MOs) are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack.
This section applies to the TN790. The TN790 has a RISC processor (PROCR)
that uses on-board Flash ROM and DRAM memory (PR-MEM). This circuit pack
also contains the MainTenance Processor (PR-MAINT).
The RISC Processor circuit pack portion is responsible for the execution of the
DEFINITY Generic 3 software package. This includes all of the call processing,
maintenance, and administration functions. The RISC Processor circuit pack is
the most critical component to the correct operation of the system.
The PR-MAINT (MainTenance Processor for RISC systems) is responsible for
monitoring the sanity of the RISC Processor circuit pack and the environmental
conditions. The PR-MAINT provides the serial interfaces for the SAT and for the
Digital Communications Equipment (DCE) ports. The PR-MAINT also provides
the communications interface to INADS for alarm reporting and remote
maintenance capability.
In High and Critical Reliability systems, the PR-MAINT is part of the
communications path between the Active Processor Element and the Standby
Processor Element.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1190

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-366.

Error Type

RISC Processor Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Of
f Board

Test to Clear Value1

02

0

Any

Any

Any

test processor a/b r 1

1(a)

Any

BOOTPROM Checksum Test
(#80)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 5

Processor Write Buffer Test
(#900)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 1

513
1025(b)

Any

Processor Cache Audit
(#896)

MINOR

ON

test processor a/b r 2

1281

Any

Processor Cache Test(#895)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 1

Processor Bus Time-out
Exception Test (#82)

MAJOR

ON

test processor a/b r 2

1793(c)
2049(d)(e)

Any

Processor Sanity Timer Test

MINOR

ON

test processor a/b l c

2305(d)(f)

Any

Address Matcher Test

none

ON

test processor a/b l c

1.
2.

The MTP Reset Test (#101) logs you off. The MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) can also log you off.
Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition
of this test for further action.
b. A parity error was detected in the processor’s data cache or instruction
cache. Aux Data indicates the difference in the number of parity errors
since the last report.
c. The Processor Bus Time-out Test (#82) failed. Refer to the FAIL condition
of this test for further action.
d. Aux Data of 100 is an LMM initialization failure.
e. The Processor Sanity Timer Test failed during a reset level 4 or 5
initialization. reset system 4 at the customers convenience and if the alarm
occurs again, replace the processor circuit pack. The system runs with
this failure, but it is not protected if the system software has a sanity
problem. The test processor a/b long clear command clears this alarm,
but the sanity timer is only tested during initialization so the alarm occurs
again and the system is not protected against insane software.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1191

f. The Address Matcher Test failed during a reset level 4 or 5 initialization.
This is not alarmed because the address matcher is only used for high
level debugging. Replace the processor circuit pack if the Address
Matcher is needed for troubleshooting.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test, for
example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Processor Cache Test (#895)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Processor Cache Audit (#896)

X

X

ND

Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)

X

X

ND

Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80)

X

X

ND

Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)

X

X

ND

Memory Burst Read Test (#908)(a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Flash Memory Checksum Test (#86)(a)

X

ND

Memory Functional Test (#332) (a) (b)

X

D

Read All Memory Test (#85)(a)
Memory Parity Error Detection Test (#87)(a)

X

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (#102) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP External Modem Present Test (#230) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (#103) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (#106) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP SAT Loop Around Test (#228) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Aux Loop Around Test (#229) (c)

X

X

ND

MTP Reset Test (#101) (c)

X

D

MTP Dual Port Ram Test (#104) (c)

X

D

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1192

Notes:
a. Refer to “PR-MEM” for a description of these tests.
b. There are Functional Memory Test errors against the Processor circuit
pack. This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a high or critical reliability
system. On other systems or on the Active SPE, the test is run only via a
reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command.
c. Refer to “PR-MAINT” for a description of these tests.

Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test (#80)
This test is a nondestructive test. This test computes the checksum of the
Processor’s bootstrap BOOTPROM. A failure indicates the BOOTPROM is
corrupt.
Table 10-367.
Error
Code
100

Test #80 Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

FAIL

The computed checksum did not match the BOOTPROM checksum. The
system may not continue to operate correctly. The system may fail at some
future date when the corrupted area the bootstrap BOOTPROM is
accessed.
1. Replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The computed checksum matched the BOOTPROM checksum. This part
of the Processor will continue to operate normally.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1193

Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test (#82)
This test is a nondestructive test. The test is used to verify that the RISC
Processor can intentionally cause a BUS TIMEOUT EXCEPTION (BTE) and then
verifies if it vectors to the correct interrupt routine. This is basically a test of the
internal operation of the RISC Processor chip and the bus time-out circuitry.
Table 10-368.
Error
Code
100

Test #82 Processor Bus Time-out Exception Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

FAIL

The interrupt was not detected or acted upon.
1. Repeat the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail, the Processor circuit pack should be
replaced. The replacement must have enough memory for this system.
3. If replacement of the Processor circuit pack still results in test failure, the
following circuit packs should be replaced, one at a time in the order
provided: TN765 Processor Interface, TN777B Network Control, TN778
Packet Control, and TN772 Duplication Interface circuit packs. The test
should then be repeated.

PASS

The interrupt was correctly detected. The RISC Processor is functioning
correctly.

Continued on next page

Processor Cache Test (#895)
This test is a nondestructive test. This test overwrites the contents in the
Instruction and Data Caches, requiring them to be refilled during normal
execution.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1194

This test verifies that the Processor Instruction and Data Caches are functional.
Some errors in the caches will simply reduce performance by forcing instructions
or data to be read from memory more often than would normally be necessary. In
any case, cache problems are serious and the Processor circuit pack must be
replaced as soon as possible if they are detected.
Table 10-369.
Error
Code
100

Test #895 Processor Cache Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

FAIL

The Processor cache is not functioning correctly.
1. Replace the Processor circuit pack immediately.

PASS

The cache portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Processor Cache Audit (#896)
This nondestructive audit checks the state of the Cache Parity bit maintained by
the RISC CPU. If this bit is set, there may be problems with either the CPU, the
Instruction, or Data Cache. An indication of bad cache parity won’t itself mean
that the system won’t operate, but minor to severe performance degradation may
be present. For example, a single bad bit in either cache could cause this bit to
be set. If the faulty word is seldom accessed, the impact will be small. If the bit is
accessed frequently, there could be serious problems with much, or all, of the
cache (stuck data bit) with the only direct indication again being the cache parity
error or cache test error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Table 10-370.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1195

Test #896 Processor Cache Audit
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

FAIL

The Cache Parity Error bit is set, there may be problems with either the
CPU or the Instruction or Data Cache.
1. Retry the command.
2. If the test continues to fail, run test processor a|b long.
3. If the Processor Cache test (#895) or the Processor Cache Audit
(#896) fails, replace the Processor circuit pack.

PASS

The Processor has not detected any parity errors in the Instruction and
Data Caches since the last time this audit was run.

Continued on next page

Processor Write Buffer Test (#900)
This test is a nondestructive test. This test verifies that the Write Buffer operates
properly on the Processor circuit pack. Failure of this test is serious. The
Processor circuit pack must be replaced as soon as possible.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
PROCR (TN790 RISC Processor Circuit Pack)

Table 10-371.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1196

Test #900 Processor Write Buffer Test
Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not complete within the allowable time period.
1. Retry the command.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command.

FAIL

The Processor Write Buffer is not operating correctly.
1. Replace the Processor circuit pack immediately.

PASS

The Write Buffer portion of the Processor circuit pack is operating
correctly.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Page 10-1197

RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
RING-GEN

1.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial System Technician
Command to Run1
test environment P

Full Name of MO
Analog Ring Generator

Where P is an appropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the
Alarm or Error Log.

All analog phones in DEFINITY Generic 1 cabinets must be provided with a
voltage that allows them to ring. The Analog Ring Generator MO represents the
device that provides the ringing voltage for analog phones in a multicarrier or
single carrier cabinet system. In a multicarrier cabinet system, the Analog Ring
Generator resides in the PDU. Figure 10-81 shows the position of the PDU and
illustrates that fuse F9 is used for the Analog Ring Generator. Figure 10-82 shows
the position of the fuses on the PDU and describes how to replace a fuse. In a
single carrier cabinet system, the Analog Ring Generator is part of the WP-91153
power unit, and each carrier in the single carrier cabinet contains its own Analog
Ring Generator. A ringing voltage generator failure means that no ringing will
occur on analog phones; however, ringing on digital and hybrid phones will still
occur.
The ringing voltage is monitored by the Tone-Clock circuit pack. In a port
network with duplicated Tone-Clocks, it is the active Tone-Clock that performs
this function. In an EPN made up of single-carrier cabinets, the Tone-Clock
monitors only the ringing voltage in the carrier that contains the tone clock.
Also, if the TN2182 Tone-Clock is installed in the Processor Interface slot, the
ringing voltage is not monitored.
The TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack provides easy access for testing the
various voltages on the backplane pins.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

S2

Page 10-1198

S3

S1
A

AC

631

CARRIER C

DA

I

631

R

DB

AC
F2

F3
F
L
CARRIER B

631
DA

631
F1

O

631

W

DB

631

CARRIER A

DB

DA

AC
FILTER
A
H

S4

S4

FANS -3 FRONT
3 BACK

D
1
FILTER

AC

631

CARRIER D

DA

A

631

I

DB

R

F5

AC
F4

F
631

CARRIER E

DA

L

631

O

DB

W
DC
FUSE F1-F7
F7

BATTERY &
BATTERY

DC

CHARGER

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

Figure 10-81.

AC

RING

ON BACK OF

GENERATOR

PDU, FUSE

F6

F9 ON FRONT

DIST.
S3

OF PDU

F9

Multicarrier Cabinet Environment Components

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Page 10-1199

F9
F4

F1
2A
20A

20A

AC

AC

F5

AC

F2

20A

20A

AC

AC
MAIN AC
F3

F6

20A

20A

DC

AC

CIRCUIT BREAKER

F7

20A
DC

BACK OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FRONT OF POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

FUSE F8 (5A AC) IS LOCATED ON THE
BACK OF THE PDU ABOVE THE
CONVENIENCE OUTLET AND IS NOT SHOWN

FUSE
TIP

FUSES F1-F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT.
WHEN REPLACING ONE OF THESE FUSES, CARE
MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP
FIRST.
FUSES F8-F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE
FUSE

INSERTED EITHER WAY.

RETAINER

Figure 10-82.

Multicarrier Cabinet Fuse Location and Replacement

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Page 10-1200

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Error
Type
0

1

0

1

1.

Analog Ring Generator Error Log Entries
Alarm
On/Off
Associated Test
Level
Board

Aux
Data

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test environment UU

Analog Ring Generator Query
Test (#118)

MAJOR

ON

test environment UU r 3

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Multicarrier Cabinet
Short Test
Order of Investigation
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118)

X

X

ND

Battery & Battery Charger Query Test (#5) (a)

X

X

ND

AC Power Query Test (#78) (b)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (Carrier E) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (Carrier D) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (Carrier A) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (Carrier B) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Power Unit Query Test (Carrier C) (#127) (c)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (d)

X

X

ND

Cabinet Sensors Query Test (#122) (e)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (f)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Page 10-1201

Notes
a. Refer to POWER (Battery & Battery Charger) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
b. Refer to AC-POWER (AC Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for AC- and DC-Powered
Systems Maintenance documentation for a description of this test.
d. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
e. Refer to CABINET (Cabinet Sensors) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
f. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.

Single-Carrier Cabinet
Short
Test
Order of Investigation
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117)

X

X

ND

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118)

X

X

ND

Single-Carrier Power Query Test (#79) (a)

X

X

ND

Emergency Transfer Query Test (#124) (b)

X

X

ND

External Alarm Lead Query Test (#120) (c)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to DC-POWER (Power) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.
b. Refer to EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) Maintenance documentation
for a description of this test.
c. Refer to EXT-DEV (External Alarm) Maintenance documentation for a
description of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Page 10-1202

Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test (#117)
The TN768, or TN780 will report an error to the system software if the ringing
voltage falls to low (only if system software has made a request to the TN768, or
TN780 to monitor the voltage). The Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test
sends a request to the TN768, or TN780. If there are redundant tone/clock circuit
packs in the port network, then the request is sent only to the active tone/clock.
Table 10-372.
Error
Code
1
1000
1001
1003
1115
2012
2100

TEST #117 Analog Ring Generator Initialization Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system software is unable to determine the active
tone/clock circuit pack, unable to allocated the
resources necessary to run the test, or unable to send a
down link message.
1. Wait for the green LED on the active tone/clock to go
out; use the status port-network command to
determine the active Tone/Clock circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test. If the test aborts again, refer to
TDM-CLK Maintenance documentation.

2000

ABORT

Response to the request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Look for TDM-CLK errors and alarms. Resolve all
other Tone/Clock problems first.
2. Rerun the test.

1005

ABORT

The tone/clock is unable to read the analog ringing
voltage level when the tone/clock is in the Processor
Interface slot. This test is not available for the Processor
Port Network in this configuration.

PASS

The active Tone/Clock has successfully been enabled to
monitor the ringing voltage level.

Continued on next page

Analog Ring Generator Query Test (#118)
This test requests the Active Tone-Clock circuit pack to check the ringing
voltage. The tone/clock circuit pack replies with PASS if the ringing voltage is
adequate to ring the analog phones. If not, the active tone/clock circuit pack
replies with a FAIL. The Analog Ring Generator Query Test then reports the
result.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Table 10-373.
Error
Code
1
1000
1001
1003
1115
2012
2100

Page 10-1203

TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not seize the resources to run the test. Other
maintenance is running on the active tone/clock circuit
pack.
1. Wait for the green LED on the active tone/clock
circuit pack to go out; (use the status port-network
command to determine the Active tone/clock circuit
pack).
2. Rerun the test. If the test aborts again, refer to
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance
documentation.

2000

ABORT

Response to the request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Look for TDM-CLK errors and alarms. Resolve all
other tone/clock problems first.
2. Rerun the test.

1005

ABORT

The tone/clock is unable to read the analog ringing
voltage level when the tone/clock is in the Processor
Interface slot. This test is not available for the Processor
Port Network in this configuration.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Table 10-373.
Error
Code

Page 10-1204

TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Ringing voltage is below acceptable levels.
PROCEDURE FOR A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET
SYSTEM.
1. If this is a High or Critical Reliability system,
determine the active Tone-Clock circuit pack by
issuing a status port network command. Make the
Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set
tone-clock PC command and rerun the test.
a. If the test passes, the trouble is with the new
Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to the
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details on replacing the
Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. After the circuit
pack is replaced, make this Tone-Clock active
again by issuing the set tone-clock PC
command and rerun the test.
b. If the test fails, then proceed with Step 2.
2. Look for and resolve CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power
Supply Unit) alarms first, and then rerun the test.
3. Check fuse F9 on the Power Distribution Unit.
Replace F9 if it is blown, and rerun the test. If the test
still fails, then an Analog Line circuit pack could be
defective and causing the Analog Ring Generator
and/or fuse F9 to fail.
4. Unseat all Analog circuit packs in the affected
cabinet, and replace fuse F9 again if needed. Rerun
the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Table 10-373.
Error
Code

Page 10-1205

TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
5. If the test passes, then the Analog Ring Generator is
healthy, and one of the Analog circuit packs is
defective. Replace the Analog circuit packs one at a
time, and rerun the test to determine which circuit
pack is causing the problem. When the defective
Analog circuit pack is found, replace it. Rerun the
test. If the test still fails, proceed with Step 6.
6. Since the test still fails, the Analog Ring Generator is
defective. Replace the Analog Ring Generator as
follows:
a. Open the PDU compartment door. The door is
hinged on the right and has a magnetic latch on
the left.
b. If the reset button on the Analog Ring Generator is
out, press it in.
c. Originate calls to several analog stations on
different port circuit packs in different carriers in
the affected port network.
d. If called stations ring, the fault is cleared. Proceed
to Step f. If no stations ring, replace the Analog
Ring Generator. To replace the Analog Ring
Generator, first disconnect the output (P6) and
input (P7) connectors from the Analog Ring
Generator and then remove the two screws at the
base of the Analog Ring Generator.
e. Replace the Analog Ring Generator, secure it with
the two screws at the base, and replace the P6
and P7 connectors (P6 goes on top).
f. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, proceed to Step
7.
7. The active tone/clock may be faulty and incorrectly
reporting the level of the ringing voltage. Replace
the Active tone/clock and rerun the test. Refer to
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details on replacing the
tone/clock. Rerun the test. If the test still fails,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Table 10-373.
Error
Code

Page 10-1206

TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
PROCEDURE FOR A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET
SYSTEM.
This failure indicates that there is no ringing voltage in
the carrier where the active tone/clock circuit pack
resides. Other carriers may or may not have ringing
voltage.
1. If this is a Duplicated Option system, then determine
the active Tone-Clock circuit pack by issuing a
status port-network command. Make the Standby
Tone-Clock circuit pack active via the set
tone-clock PC command and rerun the test.
a. If the test passes, then the trouble is with the
"new" Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details on replacing the
Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. After the circuit
pack is replaced, make this Tone-Clock active
again by issuing the set tone-clock PC
command and rerun the test.
b. If the test fails, then proceed with Step 2.
2. Unseat all analog circuit packs in the cabinet that
contains the Active Tone/Clock circuit pack and
rerun the test.
3. If the test passes, then the Analog Ring Generator is
healthy and one of the analog circuit packs is
defective. Replace the analog circuit packs one at a
time, and rerun the test to determine which circuit
pack is causing the problem. When the defective
analog circuit pack is found, replace it. Rerun the
test. If the test still fails, go to Step 4.
4. Replace the WP-91153 power unit for the affected
carrier, and rerun the test. If the test still fails, go to
Step 5.
5. The active tone/clock may be faulty and incorrectly
reporting the level of the ringing voltage. Replace
the active tone/clock and rerun the test. Refer to
TONE-BD Maintenance documentation for details on
replacing the active tone/clock circuit pack. Rerun
the test. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator)

Table 10-373.
Error
Code

Page 10-1207

TEST #118 Analog Ring Generator Query Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
FOR A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM.
The analog ringing voltage level is acceptable.
FOR A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM.
For a single-carrier cabinet stack, ringing voltage is
acceptable in the cabinet containing the active
tone/clock circuit pack.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1208

S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

S-SYN-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack

S-SYN-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit
pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)
Maintenance documentation for related port information.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Page 10-1209

S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

S-SYN-PT

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp sh

Speech Synthesis Port

S-SYN-PT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Speech Synthesis Port

S-SYN-PT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Speech Synthesis Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the
circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

The TN725 Speech Synthesis circuit pack provides four independent Speech
Synthesis Ports which may be connected to any of the voice time slots on the
TDM Bus. Each Speech Synthesis Port consists of a speech synthesizer device
(SSD) and is managed by a custom-coded programmable speech synthesizer
(PSS) controller. The PSS controller is, in turn, controlled by the on-board
microprocessor via a command interface specifically designed for this
application. The PSS controller’s main function is the orderly transfer of encoded
speech from the speech vocabulary read-only memory (ROM) to the SSDs. The
SSDs decode it and produce 64 kb/s 5-255 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
speech. The encoded speech is stored in up to 512K bytes of on-board
read-only memory (ROM). In addition, each Speech Synthesis Port has an
associated dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) receiver to receive touch-tone digits
from a station set connected to the port via a voice time slot. The station set may
be connected to the Speech Synthesis Port through either a line or trunk circuit.
When there is an incoming call to a port, the "listen" network time slot is
connected to the DTMF receiver input and the "talk" network time slot is
connected to the SSD output. This enables the Speech Synthesis Port to support
speech synthesis features or touch-tone input with voice response features.
Some of the features that use the Speech Synthesis Port’s capabilities include
Leave Word Calling, Automatic Circuit Assurance, Automatic Wakeup
(hotel-motel), and do Not Disturb (hotel-motel).
The Speech Synthesis circuit pack should not be confused with the
Announcement circuit pack as different voice features are supported by each
circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Page 10-1210

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Speech Synthesis Port Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

01

0

Any

1(a)

17672

None

18

0

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

busyout port
PCSSpp

WARNING

OFF

release port PCsspp

130(b)

None

WARNING

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

257

Speech Synthesis
PSS Handshake
Test (#168)

MAJOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

513

17922

Speech Synthesis
Memory Test
(#166)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

769

17664

Speech Synthesis
DTMF Receiver
Inquiry Test (#164)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

1025

17670

Speech Synthesis
SSD Inquiry Test
(#167)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

1281

Speech Synthesis
DSP Tone Test
(#165)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

1537

Speech Synthesis
Memory Test
(#166)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 2

1793

Speech Synthesis
DTMF Receiver
Test (#163)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

2049(c)

Conference Circuit
Test (#7)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

2305

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MINOR

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 2

3840(d)

1.

Any

None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Page 10-1211

Notes:
a. An in-line failure of the on-board microprocessor/PSS handshake has
occurred. Refer to Test #168 for repair procedures.
b. This error type indicates that the circuit pack been removed or has been
insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the
circuit pack.
c. A transient error that does not cause an alarm can occasionally occur
during a SPE, TDM BUS, or Tone Clock interchange. Test the port and
follow the instructions for conference Test (#7).
d. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.
For example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing
sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test
(#163)

X

ND

Order of Investigation
Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test
(#168)

Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166)

X

X

ND

Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test (#165)

X

X

ND

Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test
(#167)

X

X

ND

Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver
Inquiry Test (#164)

X

X

ND

Speech Synthesis Parameter Update
Test (#169)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Page 10-1212

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may occur. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test
Sequence and takes about 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-374.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) Maintenance
documentation to diagnose any Active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-374.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-1213

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test and
the test has been aborted. You must wait until the port is
idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-374.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-1214

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining the
Error Log.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for
the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is
instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together.
The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the
tone is within a certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-375.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-375.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-1215

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test and
the test has been aborted. You must wait until the port is
idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or a more general circuit pack error.
1. Examine Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Retry the test.
2. If the Test continues to fail then replace the circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-375.
Error
Code

Page 10-1216

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining the
Error Log.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Test (#163)
A series of DTMF tones are conferenced from the TDM Bus into the port’s DTMF
receiver and checked to see if the correct tones have been detected during the
correct intervals. If all the DTMF tones were detected correctly, the test passes. If
any of the tones were not detected correctly, the test fails.
Table 10-376.
Error
Code

TEST #163 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-376.
Error
Code

Page 10-1217

TEST #163 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

DTMF tones were not detected. This type of failure may
cause features using touch-tone input to the Speech
Synthesis Port to malfunction.
1. Verify that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is functioning
correctly by checking the Error Log and using the
test tone-clock long command.
2. If the test fails again, replace the Speech Synthesis
circuit pack.

PASS

The port has detected all DTMF tones correctly.
User-reported troubles should be investigated using
other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack
are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test
(#164)
This test determines the sanity of the port’s DTMF receiver. The on-board
microprocessor tests the port’s DTMF receiver and determines if it is in a sane
(test passes) or insane (test fails) condition.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-377.
Error
Code

Page 10-1218

TEST #164 Speech Synthesis DTMF Receiver Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The DTMF receiver for this port is insane.
1. If the test fails again, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The DTMF receiver for this port is sane. User-reported
troubles should be investigated using other tests and
verifying other ports on this circuit pack are working
correctly.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test (#165)
The digital signal processor (DSP) associated with each port can generate a
440-Hz tone whose presence can be detected by TN748 General Purpose Tone
Detector circuit packs. A 440-Hz tone is generated for 500 msec on a specified
time slot which is being listened to by the detector circuit. If the detector
determines the tone is present on the time slot, the test passes; otherwise, it fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-378.
Error
Code

Page 10-1219

TEST #165 Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001
1002
1003

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1021

ABORT

The 440-Hz tone was not detected by the Tone Detector
circuit and inter-digit time-out has occurred on the Tone
Detector circuit.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, verify all Tone Detector
circuit packs in the system are functioning correctly
by checking the Error Log and using the test board
PCSS long command. Replace any faulty Tone
Detector circuit packs and repeat the test.
3. If the test continues to abort, replace the Speech
Synthesis circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-378.
Error
Code

Page 10-1220

TEST #165 Speech Synthesis DSP Tone Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The 440-Hz tone was not detected by the Tone Detector
circuits.
1. If the test fails again, verify all Tone Detector circuit
packs in the system are functioning correctly by
checking the Error Log and using the test board
PCSS long command. Replace any faulty Tone
Detector circuit packs and repeat the test.
2. If the test fails again, replace the Speech Synthesis
circuit pack.

PASS

The 440-Hz tone has been detected correctly.
User-reported troubles should be investigated using
other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack
are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis Memory Test (#166)
The encoded speech for the Speech Synthesis circuit pack is stored in on-board
read-only memory. A checksum is computed for each 32K speech memory block
and compared against a known checksum value. If all computed checksum
values are successfully compared against the stored checksum values, the test
passes. If, while testing the speech complex memory, the on-board
microprocessor finds a memory error, the test is terminated and a failure is
reported. This type of failure may affect other ports on the Speech Synthesis
circuit pack, resulting in errors or alarms on each port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-379.
Error
Code

Page 10-1221

TEST #166 Speech Synthesis Memory Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1019

ABORT

Test is already running on a different port, possibly due
to background maintenance activity. Only one of these
tests may be active on a circuit pack at a time.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-379.
Error
Code
Any

Page 10-1222

TEST #166 Speech Synthesis Memory Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The computed checksum from the speech vocabulary
read-only memory did not compare correctly with the
stored checksum. This type of failure may cause
features using the Speech Synthesis Port’s speech
services to malfunction and result in degradation of
synthesized speech quality ranging from insignificant to
major.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The computed checksum values were successfully
compared against the stored checksum values.
User-reported troubles should be investigated using
other tests and verifying other ports on this circuit pack
are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test (#167)
This test determines the sanity of the specified port’s Speech Synthesis Device
(SSD). The on-board microprocessor tests the port’s SSD and determines if it is
in a sane (test passes) or insane (test fails) condition. Other ports on the Speech
Synthesis circuit pack continue to function correctly during this type of failure.
Table 10-380.
Error
Code

TEST #167 Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-380.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-1223

TEST #167 Speech Synthesis SSD Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The SSD is insane.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The SSD is sane. User-reported troubles should be
investigated using other tests and verifying other ports
on this circuit pack are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test (#168)
This test verifies control functionality between the on-board microprocessor and
PSS controller. A failure occurs if either of the following events occur:
■

The on-board microprocessor times out while waiting for the PSS
controller to respond.

■

An invalid command is received by the on-board microprocessor from the
PSS controller.

This type of failure affects all four ports on the Speech Synthesis circuit pack,
resulting in errors or alarms on each port.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Table 10-381.
Error
Code

Page 10-1224

TEST #168 Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

The on-board microprocessor has timed out while
waiting for the PSS controller to respond or an invalid
command has been received by the on-board
microprocessor from the PSS controller. This type of
failure may cause features using the Speech Synthesis
Port’s speech services to malfunction.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The on-board microprocessor/PSS handshake is
working correctly. User-reported troubles should be
investigated using other tests and verifying other ports
on this circuit pack are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port)

Page 10-1225

Speech Synthesis Parameter Update Test (#169)
This test updates the DTMF interdigit time-out parameter used by the Speech
Synthesis circuit pack to be consistent with that specified by the switch
processing element (SPE).
Table 10-382.
Error
Code

TEST #169 Speech Synthesis Parameter Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call and
therefore unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle (yellow LED if off) before retesting.
1. If the port is idle, retry the command at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

An internal system error has occurred.
1. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The DTMF interdigit time-out parameter has been
updated.
1. User-reported troubles should be investigated using
other tests and by verifying that other ports on this
circuit pack are working correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link Maintenance)

Page 10-1226

SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link
Maintenance)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR

MINOR

test cdr-link primary/secondary l

CDR Link

PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR

WARNING

test cdr-link primary/secondary

CDR Link

The SEC-CDR (SEC-CDR Link) maintenance strategy is covered in the
PRI-CDR/SEC-CDR (PRI-CDR Link) Maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1227

SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow
Circuit)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
SHDW-CIR1

1.

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to
Run
test duplication 1C sh

Full Name of MO
Common Shadow Circuit

Determine the carrier to test via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log.

The Common Shadow Circuit is that portion of the Duplication Interface circuit
pack that is responsible for memory shadowing in a High or Critical Reliability
system. All memory writes on the active SPE are detected by the Common
Shadow Circuit on the active Duplication Interface circuit pack via the Memory
Bus (M-BUS—bus used by control complex circuit packs to write/read memory
and to communicate with one another). The write information is then passed to
the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby Duplication Interface circuit pack
via the ICC which then executes the write into the Standby Memory circuit pack
via the Standby M-BUS. In this way, the Standby SPE is kept up-to-date with the
Active SPE and, as a result, is always ready to take over for the Active SPE.
Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for a detailed description of SPE-to-SPE connectivity and
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a description of how
the Standby SPE is maintained.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1228

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-383.
Error
Type
01

Common Shadow Circuit Error Log Entries

Aux
Data
0

1

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test duplication 1C sh r 1

Common Shadow
Circuit Loop Back Test
(#283)

MAJOR

ON

test duplication 1C r 3

257

Any

Common Shadow
Circuit Time-Out Query
Test (#285)

MAJOR

OFF

test duplication 1C l r 3

513

1,2

Common Shadow
Circuit Address
Decoder Test (#284)

MAJOR

ON

test duplication 1C r 3

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below. By
clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status
Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test
(#315) (a)

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

X

D

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test
(#273) (a)
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test
(#277) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test
(#275) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test
(#276) (a)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1229
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Manager I Loop Back
Test (#274) (a)

X

X

ND

Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test
(#280) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test
Query Test (#271)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message
Query Test (#272) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query Test
(#285)
Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283)

X

X

ND

Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284)

X

X

ND

SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278) (b)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for description of this test.
b. Refer to SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch) Maintenance documentation for
description of this test.

Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283)
This test allows maintenance to loop data through the common shadow circuit
and examine the results. The test is designed to test the shadow data and
shadow address portions of the common shadow circuit. The test is done entirely
on the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
The Common Shadow Circuit is put into Maintenance Mode before the test is run.
Maintenance software writes data into an address in the maintenance address
space. This data is routed through the common shadow circuit and put into the
FIFO bank of the common shadow circuit. Maintenance reads the contents of the
FIFO bank and compares them with the value written to the maintenance address
space. The test is repeated with another address in the maintenance address
space.
This test does not disable the common shadow circuit and can be run with no
disruption in service. The test must be executed from control carrier B to test the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1230

Duplication Interface B Common Shadow Circuit and from control carrier A to test
the Duplication Interface A Common Shadow Circuit.
Table 10-384.

Error Code

TEST #283 Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029 1030
2011 2012
2013 2014
2015 2016
2017 2018
2019 2020
2021 2022
2023 2024
2025 2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

1022

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Common Shadow Circuit portion of the Duplication Interface circuit
pack is defective and the Duplication Interface circuit pack must be
replaced.
1. Follow the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability"
section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with
either the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of
Duplication Interface circuit pack A) or from Duplication Interface circuit
pack A (in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT.

PASS

Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly; however,
Tests #284 and #285 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on
this Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane.

Continued on next page

Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test
(#284)
This test verifies the operation of the shadow address decoder portion of the
common shadow circuit. Software writes data into memory locations that should
not be shadowed. The maintenance register of the common shadow circuit is
examined to determine if the shadow address decoder permitted the write to be
shadowed. The test fails if the writes were shadowed. This test is run only when

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1231

demanded by maintenance software and can be run on both Duplication
Interface circuit pack A and Duplication Interface circuit pack B. The same
addresses used in the Common Shadow Circuit Circuit Loop Back Test (#283)
are used.
Table 10-385. TEST #284 Common Shadow Circuit
Address Decoder Test

Error Code
1029
2011
2013
2015
2017
2019
2021
2023
2025

1022

1030
2012
2014
2016
2018
2020
2022
2024
2051

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

ABORT

Internal system error

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The Common Shadow Circuit portion of the Duplication Interface circuit
pack is defective and the Duplication Interface circuit pack must be
replaced.
1. Follow the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability" in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and replace the
Duplication Interface circuit pack.
2. Rerun the test.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit
Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT Maintenance
documentation.

PASS

Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly; however, Tests
#283 and #285 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on this
Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1232

Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out
Query Test (#285)
An M-BUS time-out occurs when the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby
SPE attempts a memory write to the Memory circuit pack via the M-BUS and the
write fails. The Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-Out Query first tries to
refresh the Standby SPE memory and then queries the Common Shadow Circuit
on the Standby Duplication Interface circuit pack for the number of M-BUS
time-outs. If there were any M-BUS time-outs, the test fails.
Table 10-386. TEST #285 Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS
Time-Out Query Test

Error Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1029 1030
2011 2012
2014 2015
2016 2017
2018 2019
2020 2021
2022 2023
2024 2025
2051 2054

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of
these error codes.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2013

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)

Page 10-1233

Table 10-386. TEST #285 Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS
Time-Out Query Test — Continued

Error Code

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The tested Common Shadow Circuit is experiencing time-outs while trying
to write to the Memory circuit pack over the M-BUS.
1. Verify that there are the same number of PI (Processor Interface)
circuit packs in each carrier.
2. Verify that there are the same number of PKT-CTRL (Packet Control)
circuit packs in each carrier.
3. Resolve all other DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack),
SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit), and PR-MAINT
(Maintenance/Tape Processor) alarms before addressing this
problem.
4. Rerun the test. If the test still fails, then the Memory circuit pack on
the tested carrier is defective or the M-BUS is defective on the
Standby carrier. Refer to the "Repair Procedures for High and Critical
Reliability" section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid’’ and replace the Memory circuit pack.
5. Rerun the test.
6. Test the Standby SPE with the test standby-pe short command, and
address all Duplication Interface circuit pack, Common Shadow
Circuit, and Maintenance/Tape Processor tests that do not pass.

NO
BOARD

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has failed to handshake with either
the active Maintenance/Tape Processor (in the case of Duplication
Interface circuit pack A) or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A (in the
case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B).
1. Refer to NO BOARD for a description of the Duplication Interface
Circuit Pack Status Query Test (#315) in DUPINT Maintenance
documentation.

PASS

Part of the Common Shadow Circuit is operating properly. However, Tests
#283 and #284 must pass before the Common Shadow Circuit on this
Duplication Interface circuit pack is considered sane.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1234

SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing
Link)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
SHDW-LNK

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to
Run
test shadow-link

Full Name of MO
Memory Shadowing Link

A High or Critical Reliability system contains two SPEs. One is known as the
Active SPE and is the SPE that is currently responsible for all call processing,
administration, and maintenance activities being performed by the system. The
other SPE is known as the Standby SPE. The role of the Standby SPE is to be
ready to take over as the Active SPE in the event that the current Active SPE fails.
The Standby SPE is usually in a mode known as Standby Mode in which it is
ready to assume the role of the Active SPE. To do this, Standby SPE Memory
(MEM-BD) must be an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory. This is
accomplished via the memory shadowing mechanism described below.
The SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) on the Active SPE Duplication
Interface circuit pack (DUPINT, TN772) detects all memory writes that the Active
SPE Processor (PROCR) makes to Active SPE Memory. The Active SPE Common
Shadow Circuit sends this information to the Common Shadow Circuit on the
Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack via the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC).
The Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit
pack then writes the data to Standby SPE Memory. This logical connection
between Active SPE Memory and Standby SPE Memory is known as the
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link).
Although most of the components comprising the Memory Shadowing Link (that
is, Active SPE Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuit, and Standby SPE
Memory) may be tested individually, it is useful to test the integrity of the entire
logical connection to verify that the shadowing mechanism is functional and that
Standby SPE Memory is the same as Active SPE Memory. Therefore, this testing
is done under the guise of the Memory Shadowing Link.
The logical connection between the Memory circuit packs of the two SPEs of a
High or Critical Reliability system is shown in Figure 10-83. This connection
includes the A carrier memory bus, the A carrier TN772 Duplication Interface
circuit pack, the shadow extension in the ICC, the B carrier TN772 Duplication
Interface circuit pack, and the B carrier memory bus. The dotted lines in Figure
10-83 represent important logical connections between components. The
following abbreviations are used in Figure 10-83:
■

DUPINT for Duplication Interface Circuit Pack

■

PR MAINT for Maintenance/Tape Processor

■

PROCR for 80386 Processor Circuit Pack

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
■

NETCON for Network Control Circuit Pack

■

PACKET BUS for Packet Control Pack

■

TN CLK for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

■

TDM-BUS for Time Division Multiplexing Bus

■

M-BUS for Memory Bus

■

ICC for Inter-Carrier Cable

Page 10-1235

Please refer to the DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, MEM-BD, PROCR, PR-MAINT, and
STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for more detailed descriptions of these
components.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1236

TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD

SPE SELECT LEAD

D

P

M

N

U

R

E

E

P

O

M

T

I

C

O

C

R

R

O

Y

N

S

S

N

H

E

T

A

R

C

D

I

T

O

A

R

W

L

L

T
N
B CARRIER
C
L
K
P

TN772

TN773

TN770

TN777

I

MBUS

TDMBUS A
TN765

DUP-A TO

ICC-B

M

PKT CTRL

ICC-C

B

PACKET BUS*

(SCC ONLY)
DUP-DUP

TN765
MBUS

TN778

U

PKT CTRL

S

TDMBUS A
P

S

S

C

H

E

T

A

R

R

D

I

L

O

A

D

W

L

U

TN772

TN773

TN770

TN777

I

TN768 OR TN780*

1

P

P
I
N
T

R
DUP-A TO MTP-A

O
C
R

M

N

T

E

E

N

M

T

O

C

C

R

O

L

Y

N

K

A CARRIER

M
G

SPE SELECT LEAD

R
1
TONE/CLOCK SELECT LEAD
* G1.2 ONLY.
MCC ONLY.
(IN A SINGLE-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION, THERE CAN BE EITHER 0 or 1
PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACK. IN A MULTI-CARRIER CABINET CONFIGURATION,
THERE CAN BE 0, 1, OR 2 PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUIT PACKS.)

Figure 10-83.

T
D

TN778

MTP-B
ICC-A

TN768 OR TN780*

1

SHDW-LNK Interactions for a High or Critical Reliability
System

B

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1237

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-387.
Error
Type
01

Standby SPE Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

Any

test shadow-link

2047

Shadow Link Test (#318)

MAJOR

OFF

test shadow-link

2048

Shadow Link Test (#318)

MAJOR

OFF

test shadow-link

2049

Shadow Link Test (#318)

MAJOR

OFF

test shadow-link

2050

Shadow Link Test (#318)

MAJOR

OFF

test shadow-link

1.

0

Alarm
Level

Associated Test

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below . By clearing
error codes associated with the Shadow Link Test, for example, you may also
clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.
The Short and Long Test Sequences for Memory Shadowing Link are identical.
Only one test (Test #318) tests the Memory Shadowing Link.

Order of Investigation
Shadow Link Test (#318)

1.

Short Test
Sequence
X

Long Test
Sequence
X

D/ND1
ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Shadow Link Test (#318)
Interactions
One interaction with the Standby SPE that results when testing the Memory
Shadowing Link is as follows:
If the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode because a previous test command
on a Standby SPE component was issued within the last three minutes, the Active
SPE takes the Standby SPE out of Maintenance Mode and puts it in Standby
Mode when the Shadow Link Test is run. Therefore, issuing another test

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1238

command on a Standby SPE component requires that the Standby SPE be put
into Maintenance Mode again before the test is run. Thus, the user notices a 1- to
20-minute delay when running another Standby SPE test after executing the
Shadow Link Test.
NOTE:
In most cases, the delay lasts only one to two minutes. However, a
20-minute delay is possible.
Another interaction that the Memory Shadowing Link has with the Standby SPE is
that if the Shadow Link Test fails, an error of type 67 is logged, and an alarm is
raised against the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE). This is because the failure of the
Shadow Link Test implies that Standby SPE Memory may not be an up-to-date
reflection of Active SPE Memory and, therefore, that the Standby SPE may not be
ready to take over as the Active SPE. Refer to "Hardware Error Log Entries and
Test to Clear Values" section of STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for more details.

Test Description
Because of the number and nature of steps that it performs, the Shadow Link
Test takes from 1 to 5 minutes to run, depending on the load that the system is
experiencing at the time. The Shadow Link Test performs the following activities
to verify the integrity of the Memory Shadowing Link:
For a 286 based system:
■

Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory (MEM-BD) to Standby SPE
Memory.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor (PR-MAINT) to
release the Standby SPE processor (PROCR) for the Standby SPE
Processor to clear Standby SPE Memory (zero all memory locations).

■

Waits for Standby SPE Processor to report that Standby SPE Memory was
successfully cleared.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the
Standby SPE processor reset.

■

Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and
causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a
refresh operation).

■

Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to release the
Standby SPE Processor for the Standby SPE Processor to perform a RAM
checksum test on Standby SPE Memory (just updated by the refresh
operation).

■

Waits for Standby SPE Processor to report the results of the RAM
checksum test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1239

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the
Standby SPE Processor reset.

■

Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and
causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a
refresh operation).

For a flash-based system:
■

Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory (MEM-BD) to Standby SPE
Memory.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor (PR-MAINT) to
release the Standby SPE processor (PROCR) for the Standby SPE
Processor to clear a magic area in Standby SPE Memory.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the
Standby SPE processor reset.

■

Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and
causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a
refresh operation).

■

Disables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory.

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to release the
Standby SPE Processor for the Standby SPE Processor to perform a
verification on the magic area in Standby SPE Memory (just updated by
the refresh operation).

■

Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor to hold the
Standby SPE Processor reset.

■

Enables shadowing from Active SPE Memory to Standby SPE Memory and
causes all of Active SPE Memory to be written to Standby SPE Memory (a
refresh operation).
NOTE:
The shadowing verification method used for 80386 systems does not do a
complete RAM checksum. It only clears a special magic area in the
Standby SPE’s memory and then updates that area by shadowing. It then
verifies the value in that magic area based on the Active SPE’s value. Thus,
the test is not as comprehensive in terms of testing the memory aspect of
shadowing as is the 80286 method. The reason for this is the inability to
shadow flash memory.

Management Terminal Message Line Errors
In addition to Shadow Link Test (#318) Error Codes, the following Manager I (G1)
or G3MT message line errors may be displayed when attempting to run this test.
They are:
■

"Standby SPE not available; for information use status system"

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)

Page 10-1240

This message line error corresponds to Error Code 2020. It is displayed if
the Shadow Link Test is attempted within the first five minutes of a restart
of the Active SPE (that is, prior to the Active SPE holding the Standby SPE
reset and refreshing it).
■

"Standby SPE busy with another task; for information use status system"
This message line error corresponds to Error Code 2018. It is displayed if
the Shadow Link Test is attempted while the Active SPE is performing
some Maintenance Mode activity on the Standby SPE other than system
technician-demanded maintenance.

■

"Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please
try later"
This message line error is displayed when test shadow-link has been
issued and subsequently canceled and then refresh spe-standby is
issued while maintenance software is in the process of performing the
Shadow Link Test. Allow up to three minutes for the Shadow Link Test to
complete before issuing the refresh spe-standby command again.

In either case, the following actions should be taken:
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more.
2. Repeat the command.
3. Issue the test spe-standby long command.
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
1029
2011
2012
2013
2014
2018
2020
2024
2051

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these
error codes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2047

Page 10-1241

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE
processor with a request to clear Standby SPE Memory; Standby SPE
Memory was not successfully cleared.
1. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR
(80286 Processor Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow
the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed
procedures.
3. If all problems found in Steps 1 and 2 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 5. If no problems were found in Steps 1 and 2,
proceed with Step 4.
4. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no
error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the
Standby SPE Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE Memory circuit
pack.
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet,
replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed
with Steps 5, 6, and 7. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has
been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on,
replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7.

■

If neither red LED is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the
problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7.

■

If neither red LED is on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the
problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has
already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5, 6, and 7.

■

If neither red LED is on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the
problem (the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory
circuit packs have been replaced), escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2047

Page 10-1242

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
5. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If
the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times
without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status
system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the
command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not
successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or
"Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.
6. Repeat the test.
7. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all
Standby SPE components.

2048

FAIL

The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE
Processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby
SPE Memory and the RAM checksum was determined to be incorrect.
This indicates that a problem exists with one or more components that
make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE Memory was
not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory.
1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit
errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)
Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed
procedures.
3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. If so,
follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable
described in Chapter 6.
4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, or 3 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 9. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, or 3,
proceed with Step 5.
5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A
Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2048
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1243

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B
Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.
7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
85 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby
SPE Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.
8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no
error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the
Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, or the Standby SPE Memory
circuit pack, or the carrier B Duplication-Interface circuit pack, or the
carrier A Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet,
replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. If the red LED on
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE
Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE
Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on,
replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack
is on, replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

9. If the red LED on the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is
on, replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2048
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1244

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the
Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the first attempt to
clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack
as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the second attempt
to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit
pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory
circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9,
10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the third attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby
SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace
the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the fourth attempt
to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby
SPE Memory, and Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit packs
have already been replaced), replace the Active SPE Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.

NOTE:
The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the
Standby SPE before it can be replaced.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2048
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1245

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to Chapter 6 to understand how to correctly replace the
Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If none of the four red LEDs are on AND if this is the fifth attempt to
clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE
Memory, and both Duplication Interface circuit packs have been
replaced), escalate the problem.

10. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If
the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times
without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status
system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the
command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not
successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or
"Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.
11. Repeat the test.
12. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all
Standby SPE components.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2049

Page 10-1246

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE
processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby
SPE Memory. The RAM checksum was correct; however, a significant
discrepancy was detected between two special Standby SPE Memory
locations that should contain the same time stamp value as the one
shadowed over from the Active SPE. This indicates that a problem exists
with one or more components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link
such that Active SPE Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby
SPE Memory.
1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit
errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit)
Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory) Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed
procedures.
3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. Also
if intermittent problems are occurring inspect the Inter-Carrier Cable for
cuts or broken leads. If so, follow the repair procedures for
reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6.
4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, or 3 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 9. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, or 3,
proceed with Step 5.
5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
80 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A
Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.
6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
82 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B
Duplication Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.
7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
85 is logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby
SPE Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code

Page 10-1247

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

2049

FAIL

(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type
58 is logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if no
error types are logged against STBY-SPE, the problem is either the
Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, or the Standby SPE Memory
circuit pack, or the carrier B Duplication-Interface circuit pack, or the
carrier A Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet,
replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11. If the red LED on
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE
Processor circuit pack has been replaced, replace the Standby SPE
Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is lit,
replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack
is lit, replace the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If the red LED on the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack is
lit, replace the Active SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

NOTE:
The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the
Standby SPE before it can be replaced.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2049
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1248

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to the "Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6 to
understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the first attempt to
clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack
as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the second attempt
to clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit
pack has already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory
circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9,
10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the third attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby
SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace
the Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9, 10, and 11.

■

If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the fourth attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE
Memory, and Standby SPE Duplication Interface circuit packs have
already been replaced), replace the Active SPE Duplication
Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with
Steps 9, 10, and 11.

NOTE:
The Duplication Interface circuit pack must be made to reside in the
Standby SPE before it can be replaced.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code
2049

Page 10-1249

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to the "Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6 to
understand how to correctly replace the Duplication-Interface circuit pack.
■

If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the fifth attempt to
clear the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE
Memory, and both Duplication Interface circuit packs have been
replaced), escalate the problem.

9. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If
the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times
without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status
system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the
command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not
successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or
"Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.
10. Repeat the test.
11. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all
Standby SPE components.
2050

FAIL

The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor released the Standby SPE
Processor with a request to perform the RAM Checksum Test on Standby
SPE Memory. The RAM checksum was correct and the two special Standby
SPE Memory locations contain the same time stamp value as the one
shadowed over from the Active SPE; however, that time stamp value is
significantly different from the value of the Standby SPE’s Time-of-Day
clock. This indicates that either the Active SPE Time-of-Day clock has never
been set (for example, at system installation time) or that the Active SPE
Time-of-Day clock was set (with a significant change) while shadowing to
the Standby SPE was disabled.
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If
the refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times
without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status
system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the
command completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not
successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or
"Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.
2. Issue the set time command and set the Time-of-Day clock.
3. Repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link)
Table 10-388.
Error
Code

Page 10-1250

TEST #318 Shadow Link Test — Continued
Test
Result

PASS

Description/ Recommendation
When the Shadow Link Test passes, the integrity of the Memory Shadowing
Link has been verified and as long as memory shadowing is enabled,
Standby SPE Memory is an up-to-date reflection of Active SPE Memory.
This test also provides a positive indication of the functionality of Active SPE
Memory, both sets of Common Shadow Circuit, and Standby SPE Memory.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)

Page 10-1251

SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

SPE-SELEC

MAJOR

test duplication-interface 1C sh

SPE Select Switch

SPE-SELEC

WARNING

test duplication-interface 1C sh

SPE Select Switch

1.

Where C is the carrier determined by the Port field in the error or alarm log.

The SPE Select Switch MO tracks the state of the SPE Select Switches in a High
or Critical Reliability system. The switches are located on the Duplication
Interface circuit pack and can be used to hard-select the active processor in a
High or Critical Reliability system. Each switch has three positions: SPE-A (the left
position), AUTO (the middle position), and SPE-B (the right position). To
hard-select SPE-A, both switches must be in the SPE-A position. To hard-select
SPE-B, both switches must be in the SPE-B position. Any other combination of
SPE Select Switches leaves control of the active SPE to the software. Whenever a
switch is out of the AUTO position, a Warning alarm is raised. If both switches are
out of the AUTO position for six hours, a Major alarm is raised. Duplication
Interface circuit pack B reports the state of the SPE-SELEC Switch B to
Duplication Interface circuit pack A which, in turn, reports the state of
SPE-SELEC Switch A directly to the system software.
NOTE:
Each switch is a separate MO. If both switches are out of the AUTO
position, then both switches are alarmed.
It is also possible to get an "init cause" of the SPE-SELEC Switch if SPE B is active
and power to carrier B is lost. In this case, an SPE switch to SPE A occurs, and
the "init cause" shows either "SPE-Select Switch" or "SPE-Down."

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)

Page 10-1252

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-389.

SPE Select Switch Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test duplication-interface 1C
sh r 1

1

Any

SPE Select Query
Test (#278)

WARNING/
MAJOR2

OFF

test duplication-interface 1C
sh r

257

any

SPE Select Query
Test (#278)

WARNING/
MAJOR2

OFF

test duplication-interface 1C
sh r 2

1.
2.

Test to Clear Value

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
This error type initially raises a Warning alarm. If this error type persists and alarms are not
downgraded on this MO due to the values of set options, then, after a period of time, a Major alarm
is raised.

Notes:
a. The Warning alarm is upgraded to Major if the error is not resolved in six
hours.
b. Determine the carrier (a or b) by the Port field in the Error or Alarm Log.
For SPE-SELEC, the Port field is 1A (test duplication interface a) or 1B
(test duplication interface b).

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query
Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the
testing sequence.

Order of Investigation
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test
(#315) (a)
Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test
(#273) (a)

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

X

D

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)

Page 10-1253
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test (#277)
(a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test
(#275) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test
(#276) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Manager I Loop Back
Test (#274) (a)

X

X

ND

Inter-Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test
(#280)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Background Test Query
Test (#271) (a)

X

X

ND

Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Invalid Message Query
Test (#272) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Common Shadow Circuit M-BUS Time-out Query Test
(#285) (b)
Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (#283) (b)

X

X

ND

Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test (#284) (b)

X

X

ND

SPE Select Switch Query Test (#278)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to the DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for description of this test.
b. Refer to the SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) Maintenance
documentation for description of this test.

SPE Select Query Test (#278)
This test queries the Duplication Interface circuit pack for the state of SPE Select
Switch. The test passes if the switch is in the AUTO position. The test fails if the
switch is not in the AUTO position or if the Duplication Interface circuit pack is not
present.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SPE-SELEC (SPE Select Switch)

Table 10-390.
Error
Code

Page 10-1254

TEST #278 SPE Select Query Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2033

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1

FAIL

The switch currently selects SPE-A active.

2

FAIL

The switch currently selects SPE-B active.
1. Move the switch to the AUTO position.
2. Rerun the test.

3

FAIL

The Duplication Interface circuit pack is not present or not functioning.
1. Resolve all alarms logged against the Duplication Interface circuit pack
(DUPINT).
2. Rerun the test.

PASS

The Duplication Interface circuit pack has reported that the SPE Select Switch
is in the AUTO position.
1. If a visual inspection shows the SPE Select Switch is not in the AUTO
position, then resolve all alarms logged against Duplication Interface
circuit pack (DUPINT).
2. Repeat the test.
3. If Duplication Interface circuit pack B is being tested and a visual
inspection shows that the switch is not in the normal position, Duplication
Interface circuit pack A may be incorrectly reporting the state of
SPE-Select Switch B. Replace Duplication Interface circuit pack A, and
rerun the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1255

STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

STBY-SPE

WARNING

status system 1

Standby SPE

STBY-SPE

MAJOR

test spe-standby

Standby SPE

A high or critical reliability system contains two switch processing elements
(SPEs). The first such element is known as the Active SPE. The Active SPE is
currently responsible for all call processing, administration, and maintenance
activities that are being performed by the system. The other SPE is known as the
Standby SPE. The Standby SPE becomes the Active SPE whenever the current
Active SPE fails. The Standby SPE does not perform call processing or
administration activities. However, it does perform maintenance activities, but
these activities are carried out completely under the direction of the Active SPE in
order to monitor and maintain the health of the Standby SPE.
NOTE:
Verify that the Standby SPE is functional (no duplication alarms exist and
the SPE has returned to the Standby Mode) by running the status
system 1 command. If the standby SPE is in the maint/idle mode with no
standby alarms, use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE
into the standby mode. Verify the results by using the status system 1
command.
The Standby SPE is always in one of three modes: Standby, Maintenance, or
Down. Usually, the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode. In this mode,
1. The Switch Control (SW-CTL) on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit
pack is isolated from the TDM Bus so that it does not interfere with
attempts by the Switch Control on the Active SPE Network Control circuit
pack to control the TDM Bus
2. The Standby SPE (PKT-CTRL) Packet Control circuit pack is isolated from
the Packet Bus to prevent interference with the activity on the Active SPE
Packet Control circuit pack
3. The Standby SPE (PROCR) Processor is held in a reset state so that it
does not run software
4. The 12 volt power supply on the Standby SPE Network Control circuit pack
(TN777B) can not be turned on when the Standby SPE Processor is held
in the reset state
5. Standby SPE Memory (MEMORY in a 386) is shadowed from Active SPE
Memory. This means that Standby SPE Memory is updated to reflect every
change in Active SPE Memory (for example, calls and administration
changes).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1256

In certain circumstances, the Standby SPE is put into Maintenance Mode by the
Active SPE. In this mode, the SW-CTL and PKT-CTRL on the Standby SPE are still
isolated from the TDM Bus and Packet Bus, memory shadowing is disabled, and
its processor is no longer held in a reset state. Data Channels on the standby
SPE Network Control circuit pack can access the TDM bus, and the maintenance
testing can be executed in this maintenance mode. The 12 volt power supply on
the standby SPE Network Control circuit pack can also be turned on for Memory
Card maintenance testing. In Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE accepts
maintenance activity requests from the Active SPE to perform testing on Standby
SPE components. For many of the requested activities, maintenance software on
the Standby SPE is restarted in order to conduct the activity. Translation saves
and announcement saves may be performed on the Standby SPE when it is in
Maintenance Mode. While in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE is not as
readily available to assume the role of the Active SPE, but it may do so
depending upon the severity of the Active SPE fault(s).
Whenever the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode from Maintenance
Mode, its DRAM Memory is refreshed. This means that the Active SPE DRAM
Memory is shadowed over to Standby SPE DRAM Memory. The flash ROM
memory in the Standby SPE is not refreshed, and the shadowing circuit cannot
write data into the flash ROM memory. The refresh is necessary because, while in
Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing to the Standby SPE is disabled and
Standby SPE Memory is not updated to reflect changes in Active SPE Memory.
After the refresh, Standby SPE Memory once again is an up-to-date reflection of
Active SPE Memory.
The Standby SPE goes into Down Mode whenever certain error conditions are
detected. These error conditions are described in detail in the "Hardware Error
Log Entries and Test to Clear Values" section. Once the error condition(s) that
cause(s) the Standby SPE to go into Down Mode are corrected, the Standby SPE
is first put into Maintenance Mode to conduct testing on Standby SPE
components. It is then returned to Standby Mode.
The current mode of the Standby SPE can be determined by issuing the status
system command.

Components in Standby SPE Complex
The Standby SPE maintenance object is actually a composite of all the circuit
packs in the Standby SPE.
The TN778 Packet Control circuit pack, the TN765 Processor Interface circuit
pack(s), and the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack are used.

! WARNING:
Verify that there is an identical set of SPE complex circuit packs in each
SPE. For example, there should be the same number of Memory circuit
pack(s) in each SPE. If there are Processor Interface circuit pack(s) (one or

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1257

two) in the Active SPE, the same number of PI circuit packs must be
present in the Standby SPE. If one SPE has a Packet Control Circuit Pack,
the other SPE must also have one. If the set of circuit packs in each SPE is
not identical, alarms could result against the STBY-SPE, DUPINT,
SHDW-CIR, PI-BD, PKT-CTRL, PROCR, MEM-BD and MEMORY
maintenance objects.
The accessing and testing of the Standby SPE may be affected by the health of
the circuit packs through which the Active SPE communicates with the Standby
SPE. These circuit packs include the Active SPE Processor circuit pack, the
Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier, and the Standby SPE
Processor circuit pack. Additionally, the Inter-Carrier Cable (ICC) and the
backplane affect the ability of the Active SPE to communicate with the Standby
SPE. The ability to shadow Active SPE memory into Standby SPE memory is
affected by the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier, the Duplication
Interface circuit pack in the B carrier, and the Memory circuit pack(s) in the
Standby SPE. Additionally, the Active SPE Memory Bus, the ICC, backplane, and
the Standby SPE Memory Bus affect the ability to correctly shadow Active SPE
memory into Standby SPE memory.
These dependencies can be seen in Figure 10-84 for the TN790. These figures
depict the interconnection between the two SPEs of a high or critical reliability
system. The following abbreviations are used in the figures:
■

DUPINT for Duplication Interface circuit pack

■

PROCR/MEM for TN786B or TN790 Processor Circuit Packs with Memory

■

PROCR for Processor Circuit Pack

■

MEMORY for Memory Circuit Pack(s)

■

MTP for Maintenance Processor in Processor Circuit Pack

■

NETCON for Network Control Circuit Pack

■

MEM CARD for Memory Card Plugged in the Network Control Circuit Pack

■

PI for Processor Interface Circuit Pack(s)

■

PKT CTRL for Packet Control Circuit Pack

■

TN CLK for Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

■

TDM BUS for Time Division Multiplex Bus

■

PACKET BUS for Packet Bus

■

M-BUS for Memory Bus

■

ICC for Inter-Carrier Cable

■

SCC for Single-Carrier Cabinet

The dashed lines in the figure represent important logical connections between
components.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1258

Refer to the DUPINT, SHDW-CIR, MEM-BD, MEMORY, PROCR, PR-MAINT,
TDM-BUS, PKT-BUS, TDM-CLK, PI-BD, PI-SCI, PKT-CTRL, SW-CTL, DATA-CHL,
12V-PWR, CARD-MEM and STBY-SPE for descriptions of the individual
components.

...............................................................................................
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tone/Clock Select Lead
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TN768
.
.
SPE
Select
Lead
.
.
or
.
.
.
.
TN772
TN786 CPP1(*) TN777B TN765 TN778 TN780
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
P
.
.
D
P
M
N
P
T
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
U
R
E
E
A
N
.
.
.
.
P
O
M
T
C
.
.
.
.
I
C
O
C
C
C
.
.
.
.
.
.
N
R
R
O M
L
O
.
.
E
.
.
T
/
Y
N
N
K
.
.
Shadow/
M
.
.
.
.
Serial/
M
*
.
.
.
.
Control
C
E
.
.
.
.
A
.
.
M
.
.
R
.
.
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
M-BUS
.
.
.
.
...............................................................................................

B
C
A
R
R
I
E
R

DUP-A
to
MTP-B TDM-BUS A
ICC-A ICC-B ICC-C DUP-A
(SCC-only) to
TDM-BUS B
DUP-B

PACKET-BUS
...............................................................................................
.
.
.
.
.
.
M-BUS
..
..
.
.
..
..
Shadow/
.
.
Serial/
..
..
Control
.
.
.
.
P
D
P
M
N
P
T
.
.
.
I
DUP ..
.
U
R
E
E
A
N
.
..
TERM .
P
O
M
T
C
.
.
..
..
I
C
O
C M
C
C
.
.
.
.
N
R
R
O
O
L
.
.
E
.
.
.
.
T DUP-A /
Y
N M
N
K
..
..
to
M
*
.
.
.
.
MTP-A
C
E
..
..
A
.
.
M
..
..
R
.
.
.
.
D
.
.
.
.
TN772
TN786 CPP1(*) TN777B TN765 TN778 TN768
.
.
..
..
or
.
.
SPE Select Lead
TN780
..
..
.
.
..
..
.
.
Tone/Clock
Select
Lead
.
.
.
.
...............................................................................................

A
C
A
R
R
I
E
R

M
G
R
I

(*) G3iV2-386 System Only

Figure 10-84.

STBY-SPE Interactions for a Duplex 386 System

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1259

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-391.
Error
Type
1

Standby SPE Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test spe-standby l
See note (n).

0
2014
2016
2017
2022
2024
2025

Inability to Do Standby
SPE Maintenance
Activity

MAJOR

ON

test spe-standby sh

18

any

Standby SPE busied
out

WNG

58 (b)

Any

Standby SPE in Down
Mode

test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See
note (n).

67 (c)

Any

Memory Shadowing
Link Failure Detected

test shadow-link
See note (n).

80 (d)

Any

Handshake Loss With
Carrier A Dupint

test duplication-interface a sh
test duplication-interface b sh
See note (n).

81 (e)

Any

Handshake Loss With
Standby SPE Processor

test duplication-interface a sh
test duplication-interface b sh
See note (n).

8 (f)

Any

Handshake Loss
Between Dupints

test duplication-interface a sh
test duplication-interface b sh
See note (n).

85 (g)

Any

Timeouts Detected
While Shadowing

test duplication-interface a l test
duplication-interface b l See note
(n).

98 (h)

Any

Active SPEMTP DPR
Failure Detected

test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See
note (n).

99 (i)

Any

Active SPEMTP Insanity
Detected

test processor [[0]1] a | b sh See
note (n).

106 (j)

Any

Standby SPE Memory
Failure Detected

test memory [[0]1] a | b l
See note (n).

139

Any

See note (k).

See note (k).

149 (l)

any

See note (l).

refresh spe-standby
See note (n)

0

1(a)

See note (n).

OFF

release spe-standby

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-391.
Error
Type

Page 10-1260

Standby SPE Error Log Entries — Continued

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

ON

Test to Clear Value

0
2014
2015
2017
2021
2024
2048
2049
2050
2051
2054

Standby SPE Not Put
Into Standby Mode

801 (o)

any

No response from
Standby SPE after
upgrade

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

802 (p)

any

Checksum on Standby
SPE failed after
upgrade

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

803 (q)

any

No translation
card-mem inserted
after Standby SPE
upgrade

MAJOR

OFF

upgrade software

804 (r)

any

Lost communication
with Standby SPE
during reboot following
upgrade

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

805 (s)

any

No software mem-card
inserted in active SPE

MAJOR

OFF

upgrade software

806 (t)

any

Checksum on new
Standby SPE failed

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

807 (u)

any

No translation
mem-card inserted in
new Standby SPE

MAJOR

OFF

808 (v)

any

Lost communication
with new Standby SPE

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

809 (w)

any

Failed to perform
SPE-interchange

MAJOR

OFF

upgrade software

810 (x)

any

Bad checksum on
software mem-card

MAJOR

OFF

upgrade software

257 (n)

MAJOR

On/Off
Board

refresh spe-standby
(See note (n).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-391.
Error
Type

Page 10-1261

Standby SPE Error Log Entries — Continued

Aux
Data

Associated Test

812 (y)

any

SPE interchanged
forced with
health-override option:

822(z)

any

A non-hot interchange
to the standby SPE
occurred.

826
(aa)

any

Standby software
mismatch

Alarm
Level
WARNIN
G

On/Off
Board
OFF

Test to Clear Value
See note (y).

See note (z).

MAJOR

ON

upgrade software

Continued on next page

1.

Run the short test sequence first. If all the tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

NOTE:
When more than one of the above error types exists at the same time, the
alarm against the Standby SPE is cleared only when (1) any problems
described by the Aux Data values for Error Types 1 and 257 are resolved
and (2) all problems described in (b) through (o) are resolved.
Notes:
a. Aux Data value 0 is equivalent to Aux Data value 2017. All Aux Data values
listed for Error Type 1 are described in "System Technician-Demanded
Tests: Test Result Error Codes". These values are shared between
Standby SPE maintenance activity results and the test results for the
System Technician commands on Standby SPE components because the
values represent the common set of problems that can be encountered
when attempting to conduct any form of maintenance activity on the
Standby SPE.
b. Error Type 58 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the
A carrier reports that the Standby SPE has gone into Down Mode. This
implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE.
The ability to communicate with the Standby SPE should be checked by
issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates
the carrier that contains the Standby SPE. If all of the tests execute such
that no test returns an Aux Data value of 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2022,
2024, or 2025, the Standby SPE was successfully put into Maintenance
Mode. This indicates that the communication path between the Active SPE
and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1262

functionality of the communication path, look for the presence of Error
Types 80, 81, and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear
these errors.
c. Error Type 67 is logged when the Shadow Link Test (#318) fails. This
implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning.
The functionality of the Memory Shadowing Link should be checked by
issuing the test shadow-link command. If the test passes, the memory
shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the
memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 82, 85, and 106
and use the recommended commands to clear these errors.
d. Error Type 80 is logged when the Active SPE Maintenance/Tape
Processor reports that the handshake that is maintained between the
processor and the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier has
been lost. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE.
The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test
duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands.
These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the
handshake between Dupint-A and Active-MTP is operational.
If the handshake between Dupint-A and Active-MTP is operational, the
communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may
be functional. However, to restore the communication path, look for the
presence of Error Types 58, 81, 82, 98, 99, and 106 and use the
recommended commands to clear these errors.
e. Error Type 81 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the
A carrier reports that the handshake that is maintained between the circuit
pack and the Maintenance/Tape Processor on the Standby SPE has been
lost. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE.
The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test
duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands.
These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the
handshake between Dupint-A and Standby-MTP is operational.
If the handshake between Dupint-A and Standby-MTP is operational, the
communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may
be functional. However, to restore the communication path, look for the
presence of Error Types 58, 80, 82, 98, 99, and 106 and use the
recommended commands to clear these errors.
f. Error Type 82 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the
A carrier reports that the handshake that is maintained between the circuit
pack and the Duplication Interface circuit pack in carrier B has been lost.
This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning.
The status of the handshakes should be checked by issuing the test
duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface b commands.
These commands initiate background tests that verify whether the
handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is operational. If the
handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is operational, the memory

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1263

shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the
memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types 67, 85, and 106
and use the recommended commands to clear these errors.
NOTE:
Because the handshake between Dupint-A and Dupint-B is tested in
the background, the test results from executing the test
duplication-interface a command do not indicate their current
status. However, if the background testing determines that all three
handshakes (that is, Dupint-A to Dupint-B, Dupint-A to Active-MTP,
and Dupint-A to Standby-MTP) have become operational, and if
there are no other current STBY-SPE errors, Error Types 80, 81, and
82 and the associated STBY-SPE alarm will be cleared in about 30
minutes.
g. Error Type 85 is logged when the Duplication Interface circuit pack
detects that writes made to the Standby SPE Memory are not being
acknowledged. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not
functioning.
The presence of time-outs when shadowing to the Standby SPE Memory
should be checked by issuing the test duplication-interface a long
command. This command runs a test that forces memory writes to the
Standby SPE Memory and detects time-outs waiting for
acknowledgments. If time-outs are not detected, memory shadowing may
be functional. However, to restore the functionality of memory shadowing,
look for the presence of Error Types 67, 82, and 106 and use the
recommended commands to clear these errors.
h. Error Type 98 is logged when the Active SPEMTP Dual Port RAM Test
(#104) fails. This implies an inability to communicate with the Active MTP.
The ability to communicate with the Active MTP should be checked by
issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates
the carrier that contains the Active SPE.
i. Error Type 99 is logged when the Active SPE detects that the handshake
that is maintained between the Active SPE Processor and the Active SPE
Maintenance/Tape Processor has been lost. This implies an inability to
communicate with the Active MTP.
The ability to communicate with the Active MTP should be checked by
issuing the test processor a | b short command, where "a | b" indicates
the carrier that contains the Active SPE.
j. Error Type 106 is logged when the Standby SPE Memory Functional Test
(#332) fails. This implies an inability to communicate with the Standby SPE
and also that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning.
The functionality of the Standby SPE Memory should be checked by
issuing the test memory a | b long command, where "a | b" indicates the
carrier that contains the Standby SPE. This command runs the Memory
Functional Test. If the test passes, the communication path between the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1264

Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional. However, to restore
the functionality of the communication path, look for the presence of Error
Types 58, 80, 81, 98, and 99 and use the recommended commands to
resolve these errors.
Additionally, if the Memory Functional Test passes, the memory
shadowing mechanism may be functional. However, to restore the
functionality of memory shadowing, look for the presence of Error Types
67, 82, and 85 and use the recommended commands to resolve these
errors.
k. If Error Type 139 is present, this error type takes precedence over all other
error types until it is resolved. This error type indicates an incompatibility
between the two Processor circuit packs in a High or Critical Reliability
system. For a High or Critical Reliability system to work, the two Processor
circuit packs must function together so that the circuit packs can perform
interchanges between themselves.
Use the following procedure to resolve this error:
1. Set the SPE-Select switches one at a time to select the Active SPE.
This also forces the Tone-Clock in this SPE to become active.
2. If the active SPE is the B carrier, issue the test
duplication-interface a long command.
3. Execute the test spe-standby long command.
4. Use the display error command with the "dup-spe" category to see
if the Error Code 139 recurred. If the error did not recur, and if all
STBY-SPE tests have passed, the system is functioning normally.
5. Restore the SPE-Select switches to normal.
6. If Error Code 139 still exists (and if the STBY-SPE tests have failed),
one of the Processor circuit packs must be replaced. The system
will function normally, but it will not be able to interchange properly
to the Standby SPE without service disruption. Replacing the
Standby processor is the best solution to this problem. However,
the processor must be replaced with one of a vintage that is
compatible with the current Active Processor.
However, if it is found that the Active processor must be replaced (for
example, the Standby processor is of a newer vintage), the repair strategy
is more complex. Use the following procedure to replace the Active
Processor circuit pack:
NOTE:
Replacing the Active Processor circuit pack will disrupt service.
Schedule this procedure at the customer’s convenience.
1. Set the SPE-Select switches one at a time to select the Standby
SPE. An SPE-interchange with a reset level of 3 or 4 results.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1265

2. Replace the new Standby (and former Active) SPE Processor
circuit pack with a circuit pack of the appropriate vintage.
3. Issue the test spe-standby long command. Use the display error
command with the "dup-spe" category to verify that all tests pass
and that Error Type 139 does not recur.
4. Restore the SPE-Select switches to their normal position.
l. Error Type 149 occurs when the Standby SPE goes into down mode
during system technician demanded testing. Wait three minutes, then look
for other STBY-SPE errors and follow the procedures described for these
errors.
m. Aux Data value 0 is equivalent to Aux Data value 2017. Aux Data values
2014, 2015, 2017, 2021, 2024, and 2051 for Error Type 257 are described
in the "System Technician-Demanded Tests: Test Result Error Codes". The
Aux Data values 2048, 2049, and 2050 for Error Type 257 are described in
SHDW-LNK (Memory Shadowing Link) Maintenance documentation.
These values are shared between Standby SPE maintenance activity
results and the test results for System Technician commands on Standby
SPE components because the values represent the common set of
problems that can be encountered when attempting to conduct any form
of maintenance activity on the Standby SPE.
Error Type 257 with an Aux Data value of 2051 and a Major alarm results
when, in attempting to refresh the Standby SPE, it is determined that
software cannot communicate with the Duplication Interface circuit pack
in the A carrier. This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not
functioning. This error type is accompanied by Error Type 80.
Error Type 257 with an Aux Data value of 2051 and no alarm results when,
in attempting to refresh the Standby SPE, it is determined that software
cannot communicate with the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the B
carrier. This does not necessarily imply that the shadowing mechanism is
not functioning, but it is possible that it is not functioning. This error type is
accompanied by Error Type 82. However, Error Type 82 may not be
logged until sometime later.
n. After issuing the specified command(s) to clear this alarm, perform the
following procedure to clear the STBY-SPE alarm:
1. If all the tests pass or abort, issue a refresh spe-standby
command. If the refresh is successful, wait 1 minute and then
check for alarms against STBY-SPE. If the refresh was not
successful, or if there are still alarms against STBY-SPE, continue
attempts to resolve other STBY-SPE error types. The busyout
spe-standby and release spe-standby commands may also be
used to clear out STBY-SPE alarms. After entering the busyout
spe-standby command followed by the release spe-standby
command, all STBY-SPE alarms are retired and, 1 minute later, the
equivalent of scheduled maintenance is run on the standby SPE.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1266

Note that the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby
commands do not affect alarms on other Maintenance Objects in
the standby processor complex.
2. If some of the tests fail, refer to the appropriate MO section and
follow the procedures described there.
The following table summarizes the error types that may affect the
functionalities of the Communication Path to the Standby SPE and of
Memory Shadowing. To restore the function, all error types that may affect
the function must be investigated and resolved by following the
recommended commands or procedures.
Function Affected

Error Types

Communication Path To
Standby SPE

58, 80, 81, 98, 99, 106, 1 with Aux Data
values 2016, 2017, 2022, 2024, or 2025; 139
with Aux Data value 2015.

Memory Shadowing

67, 82, 85, 106, 257 with Aux Data values
2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2048, 2049, 2050,
or 2051.

o. Error Type 801 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the loss of communication with the Standby SPE during the
upgrade. This implies that the software reprogramming of the Standby
SPE never completed.
The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If it fails again,
the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced.
p. Error Type 802 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the bad flash checksum on the Standby SPE after the completion of
the upgrade. This implies that the on-board flash memory may not be
functional. The Standby SPE is running the new software while the Active
SPE is still running the old software. However, due to the bad flash
checksum, the behavior of the Standby SPE may be unpredictable.
The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If the command
fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced.
q. Error Type 803 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the failure to insert the translation card-mem into the Standby SPE
in time during the reboot immediately following a successful upgrade. This
implies that the Standby SPE is running the new software while the Active
SPE is still running the old software.
The translation card-mem should be inserted into the Standby SPE at the
appropriate time so as to allow the upgrade software command to be
re-executed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1267

r. Error Type 804 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to a loss of communication with the Standby SPE during the reboot
immediately following a successful software upgrade. This implies that the
communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may
not be functional.
Issue the test duplication-interface a and the test duplication-interface
b commands. If the tests pass, re-execute the upgrade software
command.
s. Error Type 805 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the failure to insert the software card-mem in the Active SPE in time.
The software card-mem should be inserted into the Active SPE at the
appropriate time so as to allow the upgrade software command to be
re-executed.
t. Error Type 806 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to a bad flash checksum on the new Standby SPE after an upgrade of
the old Standby SPE and SPE-Interchange. This implies that the on-board
flash memory may not be functional. The behavior of the Standby SPE may
unpredictable.
The upgrade software command should be re-executed. If the command
fails again, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack should be replaced.
u. Error Type 807 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the failure to insert the translation card-mem into the new Standby
SPE after an upgrade of the old standby SPE and SPE-Interchange.
The translation card-mem should be inserted into the Standby SPE.
v. Error Type 808 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the loss of communication with the new Standby SPE during an
upgrade following the upgrade of the old standby SPE and
SPE-Interchange. This implies that the programming of the Standby SPE
never completed.
Use the "Special Upgrade Procedure" to re-execute an upgrade on the
Standby SPE only. If the upgrade fails again, the Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack should be replaced.
w. Error Type 809 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to the failure to perform an SPE-Interchange immediately after the
successful upgrade of the Standby SPE. This implies possible problems
with the Dupint circuit packs.
Issue the test duplication-interface a and test duplication-interface b
commands. If the tests pass, re-execute the upgrade software
command.
x. Error Type 810 is logged when the upgrade software command failed
due to a bad checksum on the software card-mem during the upgrade of
the new Standby SPE following the successful upgrade of the old Standby
SPE and of SPE-Interchange.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1268

The software card-mem should be replaced by one that has a good
checksum. The upgrade software command should be re-executed.
y. Whenever an SPE interchange is forced by using the health-override
option as part of the reset system interchange command, a WARNING
OFF circuit pack STBY-SPE alarm is raised, and the Fault Severity Level
(FSL) of the new standby SPE is raised to its highest possible value to
prevent an SPE interchange back to the original active SPE. This artificial
FSL lasts one hour or until a busyout spe-standby command is executed,
followed by a release spe-standby command. After this time, the FSL of
the two SPEs are recomputed, and the healthiest SPE becomes or
remains active.
z. The system interchanged from the active SPE to the standby SPE with a
restart that is more disruptive to service than the normal system hot start.
The switches were not used to force this interchange. The level of restart
can be observed by using the display initcauses command. Look for
other alarms on the standby SPE that possibly caused this interchange.
Also see "Reset System Interchange (High or Critical Reliability Systems
Only)" in Chapter 4, ‘‘Initialization and Recovery’’.
aa. The software vintage in the Standby SPE does not match the software
vintage in the active SPE.
The upgrade software command should be executed for the standby
SPE as described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.

System Technician-Demanded Tests
The following commands can be used to test and manipulate part or all of the
standby SPE:
■

busyout spe-standby
The busyout spe-standby command is used to stop all standby
maintenance activity, disable shadowing, and hold the standby processor
reset. A warning off circuit pack alarm is also raised against STBY-SPE
MO. This command is more powerful than the refresh spe-standby
command because it preempts the standby and enters maintenance
mode, where as the refresh spe-standby does not do this.

■

release spe-standby
The release spe-standby command is used to remove the busyout
condition, restore memory shadowing, and force a refresh. 1 minute after
the command is executed, the equivalent of standby scheduled
maintenance is run.

■

refresh spe-standby
The refresh spe-standby command is used to put the Standby SPE
immediately into Standby Mode. The command conducts the same
activities regardless of whether the Standby SPE is already in Standby

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1269

Mode or whether it is in Maintenance Mode. Whenever this command is
issued, any Standby SPE maintenance activity currently in progress
(except for entering maintenance mode) is preempted, the Standby SPE
Processor is held reset, and the Standby SPE’s memory is refreshed.
Recall that the refresh is necessary because, while the Standby SPE is in
Maintenance Mode, memory shadowing is disabled. When the Standby
SPE is returned to Standby Mode, its memory must be brought up-to-date
with Active SPE memory.
Because they can preempt Standby SPE maintenance activities, the
refresh spe-standby and busyout spe-standby commands should be
used judiciously. If the Standby SPE is in Maintenance Mode when one of
these commands is issued, the current maintenance activity being
conducted by the Standby SPE is immediately terminated with the
following potential side-effects:
■

Testing of the Standby SPE components that are the target of the
maintenance activity may not have completed. Depending on the
maintenance activity and the point at which such activity is
terminated, tests that detect faults and/or lack of faults on those
Standby SPE components may not have had the opportunity to run.
Accordingly, alarms will not be raised or retired on the components.

■

If the maintenance activity is Scheduled Maintenance, and if the
refresh spe-standby or busyout spe-standby command is issued
before a scheduled translation save is performed, the translation
save is not completed, and the translation data on both the Active
SPE and Standby SPE and on the memory cards do not reflect the
changes made since the last translation save.

In general, after a refresh spe-standby has been used, and after the user
has finished working with the system, the test spe-standby long
command should be issued in the event that the refresh spe-standby
command preempted a Standby SPE maintenance activity. Testing the
standby SPE allows standby maintenance to re-determine the health of the
standby SPE and to compare this health to that of the active SPE. This
testing could result in an SPE interchange to a healthier SPE.
If the busyout spe-standby command has been used, the release
spe-standby command should also be used. The latter command fully
tests the standby SPE 1 minute later.
Also, if the refresh spe-standby or busyout spe-standby command was
used within the time frame that scheduled maintenance with a translation
save was to have been conducted, the save translation command should
be issued to ensure that the current translation data has been written to
the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes.
When using the refresh spe-standby to preempt Standby SPE
maintenance activities, it may be necessary to issue the refresh
spe-standby command multiple times in order to preempt all Standby
SPE maintenance activity. If the refresh spe-standby command
successfully completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1270

labeled "standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does
not include cases where the command completes with the terminal
message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check
for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering
maintenance mode; please try later". Issue the refresh spe-standby
command once more. If the Standby SPE is not labeled "standby" on the
status system form after this attempt, use the busyout spe-standby
command.
■

reset spe-standby 
Normally, when the standby is brought into maintenance mode, it is done
so with a Warm Restart. The reset spe-standby command can be used to
bring the standby SPE from standby mode into maintenance mode with
the requested restart level.

■

reset system-interchange 
If the health-override option is NOT specified, and if the standby Fault
Severity Level (FSL) is less than or equal to that of the active SPE, and if
the standby SPE is in standby mode, the interchange is allowed. Actually,
if the standby FSL is less than that of the active FSL, the system does its
own interchange in due time. If the FSL of the standby SPE is higher than
that of the active SPE, but the alarmed standby maintenance objects do
not affect the ability of the standby SPE to be put into standby mode, the
command is rejected. This indicates that the health-override option can be
used. If there are problems that would prevent the standby SPE from
running system software, the command is rejected outright.
If the health-override option is specified, and if the standby SPE is in
standby mode, a Hot interchange is performed, regardless of the FSL
level of the two SPEs. Once the interchange is performed, if the new active
FSL is higher than the standby FSL, a STBY-SPE warning alarm is raised
against the new standby SPE. This indicates that the system was forced to
switch SPEs and is currently being held on the active SPE artificially. This
prevents a SPE interchange back to the original active SPE. This
STBY-SPE warning alarm lasts for one hour. After this time passes, system
switches to the SPE with the lowest FSL.
The STBY-SPE alarm is also retired if there is some indication of system
technician testing of the standby SPE before the one hour expires. The
assumption here is that a system technician person is present because
the health-override option was used. Therefore, if there is some indication
that repair work is going on, the alarm generated by the health-override
should be retired. The following are indications of system technician
testing being done: the standby SPE is busied out and then released, the
active SPE is hard selected via the switches, or a test spe-standby long
command is performed.

■

test processor [1] a|b [short | long]
Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer
to the PROCR-BD and PR-MAINT sections for a complete list of the tests
that are run.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
■

Page 10-1271

test memory [1] a|b [short | long]
For this command, there is one additional test for the Standby SPE
Memory circuit pack: the Memory Functional Test #332. Refer to the
MEM-BD section for a complete list of the tests that are run.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
■

Page 10-1272

test data-module 
Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer
to the DATA-CHL section for a complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test network-control [[0]1] a|b [short | long]
Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer
to the SW-CTL, DATA-BD, DATA-CHL, and CARD-MEM sections for a
complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test card-mem [[0]1] a|b [short | long]
Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer
to the CARD-MEM section for a complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test packet-control [[0]1] a|b [short | long]
For test packet-control, the most significant difference between testing
the Active Packet Control versus the Standby Packet Control is that the
Reset Test (#586) runs on the Standby SPE Packet Control circuit pack.
Also, the short and long options cause the identical set of tests to run.
Refer to the PKT-CTRL section for a complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test interface [[0]1] a1 | a2 | b1 | b2 [short | long]
For this command, there is a single test for the Standby SPE Processor
Interface circuit pack(s) and a single test for each Processor Interface Port
on a Processor Interface circuit pack. These tests are different from the
tests that are run for the corresponding Active SPE Processor Interface
circuit pack(s) and Processor Interface Port(s). Refer to the PI-PT section
for a complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test duplication-interface [0[1] a|b [short | long]
Runs the same set of tests on the standby SPE as on the Active SPE. Refer
to the DUPINT section for a complete list of the tests that are run.

■

test spe-standby [short | long]
The test spe-standby [short | long] command results in the execution of
all tests that would be run if each of the previous commands in this list was
executed individually. Because of the number of tests that it runs, test
spe-standby [short | long] takes from 10 to 30 minutes to complete.
The Short and Long Test Sequences for test spe-standby are listed on
the following pages. Refer to the appropriate maintenance section for a
complete description of each of the tests.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1273

Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command
Test
Number

Name of Test and Associated MO

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

332

Memory Functional Test

X

318

Shadow Link Test (SHDW-LNK)

X

285

Common Shadow Circuit MBUS Time-out Query
(SHDW-CIR)

X

283

Common Shadow Circuit Loop Back Test (SHDW-CIR)

X

X

284

Common Shadow Circuit Address Decoder Test
(SHDW-CIR)

X

X

278

SPE Select Switch Query (SPE-SELEC)

X

X

315

Duplication Interface Status Query (DUPINT)

X

X

275

Duplication Interface SPE A Loop Back Test (DUPINT)

X

X

276

Duplication Interface SPE B Loop Back Test (DUPINT)

X

X

280

Inter-Duplication Interface Loop Back Test (DUPINT)

X

X

271

Duplication Interface Background Test Query (DUPINT)

X

X

277

Duplication Interface Sanity Maze Test (DUPINT)

X

X

272

Duplication Interface Invalid Message Query (DUPINT)

X

X

274

Duplication Interface Manager I Loop Back Test
(DUPINT)

X

X

273

Duplication Interface Sanity Circuit Test (DUPINT)

X

85

Read All Memory Test

X

86

RAM Checksum Test

X

87

Memory Parity Test

X

52

Control Channel Test (DATA-BD)

X

50

NPE Audit (DATA-BD)

X
X

For each administered Network Control Data Channel in the Standby SPE, the following
DATA-CHL tests are run:
107

Data Channel Reset (DATA-CHL)

X

108

Data Channel DPR Test (DATA-CHL)

X

109

Data Channel Maintenance Loop Around Test
(DATA-CHL)

X

X

110

Data Channel Crosstalk Test (DATA-CHL)

X

X

111

Data Channel Loop Back Test (DATA-CHL)

X

X

93

Switch Control Reset Test (SW-CTL)

X

325

Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test
(SW-CTL)

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1274

Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command
Test
Number

Name of Test and Associated MO

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

95

Time-of-Day Clock Test (SW-CTL)

X

X

92

Control Channel Interface Test (SW-CTL)

X

X

94

Control Channel Transmission Test (SW-CTL)

X

X

324

EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (SW-CTL)

X

X

77

Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test (PROCR)

X

X

80

Processor ROM Checksum Test (PROCR)

X

X

82

Processor Non-Maskable Interrupt Test (PROCR)

X

X

83

Processor Sanity Timer Test (PROCR)

102

MTP Outpulse Relay Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

103

MTP Analog Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

106

MTP Sanity Handshake Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

228

MTP Manager I Channel Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

229

MTP Auxiliary Channel Loop Around Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

101

MTP Reset Test (PR-MAINT)

X

104

MTP Dual Port RAM Test (PR-MAINT)

X

X

The following Memory Card and 12 Volt Power Supply tests are executed:
701

12 Volt Power Supply Test (12V-PWR)

X

X

695

Cartridge Insertion Test (CARD-MEM)

X

X

696

Cartridge Format and Read Test (CARD-MEM)

X

X

697

Cartridge Match Test (CARD-MEM)

X

X

698

Cartridge Write-Protected Test (CARD-MEM)

X

X

699

Cartridge Directory Sanity Check and Recovery Test
(CARD-MEM)

X

X

694

Cartridge Translation Data Integrity Test (CARD-MEM)

X

693

Cartridge Erase/Write/Read Test (CARD-MEM)

X

703

Flash Data Consistency Test (FL-DATA)

X

For each Processor Interface circuit pack in the Standby SPE, the following PI-BD tests are
run:
52

Control Channel Test (PI-BD)

50

NPE Audit (PI-BD)

423

Standby PI Board Test (PI-BD)

X

X
X

X

X

For each administered Processor Interface Port, the following test is run:
404

Standby PI Port Test (PI-PT)

X

X

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1275

Test Sequence of Test SPE-Standby Command
Test
Number

Name of Test and Associated MO

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

For a Packet Control circuit packet in the Standby SPE, the following three tests are run:
586

Packet Control System Technician Reset Test
(PKT-CTRL)

X

X

583

Packet Control Read and Clear Error Counter Test
(PKT-CTRL)

X

X

585

Packet Control Loop Around Test (PKT-CTRL)

X

X

Running Tests on the Standby SPE
Although this subsection is not about the individual test commands listed
previously, several useful facts about executing these commands for Standby
SPE components are mentioned here. These facts also apply to the test
spe-standby [short | long] command.
1. If the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode, execution of the listed test
commands results in the Active SPE putting the Standby SPE into
Maintenance Mode. Up to a two minute delay may be observed before the
first test in the sequence is run and its test results are displayed on the
terminal. Each subsequent test in the sequence takes from 10 to 60
seconds to run, except for the CARD-MEM Erase/Write/Read test #693,
which takes one to five minutes to run.
2. The test memory [[0]1] a | b long command is an exception to the first
item. The first test in the sequence is the Memory Functional Test (#332)
which takes from 30 seconds to two minutes. After the Memory Functional
Test (#332) is run, the same delays described in Item 1 of this list are
relevant.
3. The test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long command is also an
exception to the first item. The first test in the sequence is the MBUS
Time-out Query (#285) which takes from 30 seconds to 2 minutes to run.
After the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) is run, the same delays described
in Item 1 of this list are relevant.
4. The test spe-standby long command is also an exception to the first item.
The first test in the sequence is, the Memory Functional Test (#332), takes
from 30 seconds to two minutes to run. After the Memory Functional Test
(#332) is run, the next test in the sequence, the Shadow Link Test (#318),
takes from one to five minutes to run. After the Shadow Link Test (#318) is
run, the next test in the sequence, the MBUS Time-out Query (#285), takes
from 30 seconds to two minutes to run. After the MBUS Time-out Query
(#285) is run, the same delays described in Item 1 of this list are relevant.
5. If one of listed test commands is executed so that the Active SPE puts the
Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode, the Active SPE leaves the Standby
SPE in Maintenance Mode for three minutes after the completion of the
command. If an additional test command (with the exception of those

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1276

described in Items 6, 7, and 8) is executed within three minutes, the one to
20-minute delay prior to the first test will not be observed. Each test in the
sequence, including the first test, takes from 10 to 60 seconds to run.
Furthermore, the Active SPE leaves the Standby SPE in Maintenance
Mode for three minutes after the completion of the additional command.
This is true for each additional test command issued on a Standby SPE
component.
6. The test memory [[0]1] a | b long command is an exception to Item 5.
Because of the nature of the Memory Functional Test (#332) the same
delays as described in Item 2 are always observed for test memory [[0]1]
a | b long.
7. The test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long command is also an
exception to Item 5. Because of the nature of the MBUS Time-out Query
(#285) the same delays as described in Item 3 are always observed for
test duplication-interface [[0]1] a | b long.
8. The test spe-standby long command is also an exception to Item 5.
Because of the nature of the Memory Functional Test (#285), the Shadow
Link Test (#318), and the MBUS Time-out Query (#285) the same delays
as described in Item 4 are always observed for test spe-standby long.
9. For test commands whose sequence spans multiple terminal screens (for
example, test spe-standby [short | long]) the same 3-minute window that
was described in Item 4 applies to pressing the "page" key to proceed to
the next screen of test results. If the "page" key is not pressed within three
minutes of the completion of the last test on the current screen, the one to
20 minute delay is observed before the first test on the next screen is run
and its test results are displayed on the terminal. Each subsequent test on
that screen takes from 10 to 60 seconds to run. If the "page" key is
pressed within three minutes of the completion of the last test on the
current screen, the one to 20 minute delay will not be observed.

Test Result Error Codes and Text Strings
The text string messages and error codes documented in the Error Codes tables
at the end of this section may result from any of the system technician commands
described earlier in this section.
In general, these error codes result from an inability of the Active SPE to
successfully conduct a maintenance activity request on the Standby SPE and not
from a problem detected by the test itself. In fact, all error codes except for 2015,
2021, 2047, 2048, 2049, and 2050 indicate that the test was not actually run.
If an error code returned from a test does not appear in the Error Code table, the
Active SPE successfully conducted the maintenance activity request on the
Standby SPE, and the test was actually run (in most cases). For details on this
error code, refer to the documentation describing the specific object you now
suspect as possibly being defective. In the Short and Long Test Sequences

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1277

listed earlier in this section, the name of the object tested appears directly after
each test number and name.
Several of the conditions corresponding to the error codes documented here
may be detected as soon as the test  [[0]1] a | b [short | long]
command is issued. The net result is that none of the tests in the sequence for
the component will be attempted and a message will appear on the terminal
message line describing why the command was rejected.
The following is a list of these text strings.
■

Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later
This message line error is displayed when a refresh spe-standby
command is issued while maintenance software is in the process of
putting the Standby SPE into Maintenance mode when any of the Error
Types listed in "Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Value" have
occurred and have not been resolved. It is also displayed when a system
technician-demanded test has been issued and subsequently canceled
because maintenance software is performing the Memory Functional Test,
Shadow Link Test, or M-BUS Time-out Query. Another cause may be that
maintenance software is in the process of putting the Standby SPE into
Maintenance Mode to run any other system technician-demanded test
that must be conducted on the Standby SPE in Maintenance Mode. Allow
up to 10 minutes for the maintenance software to complete its attempt to
put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode before issuing the refresh
spe-standby command.

■

Cannot perform SPE interchange; for information use status system
This message is displayed in response to the reset system interchange
command and because there are outstanding STBY-SPE errors. Display
the error log using the "dup-spe" category, and following the procedures
for all STBY-SPE errors.

■

Cannot reset standby SPE at this time; use the ‘status system’
command
This message is displayed when the standby SPE memory is not
refreshed. Issue the refresh spe-standby command and try the reset
again.

■

Could only hold Standby SPE reset because Active SPE is locked via
SPE select switches
This message is displayed when the refresh spe-standby command is
issued when the active SPE is selected via the SPE select switches.
Because the select switches disable shadowing, the refresh command
can not refresh the memory on the standby SPE. The only effect the
refresh command has is to hold the standby SPE reset.

■

Refresh not successful; use the ‘display errors’ and the ‘dup-spe’
category to check for standby SPE errors

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1278

This message line error, which corresponds to Error Codes 2012, 2013,
2014, 2015, 2021, 2024, 2048, 2049, 2050, or 2051, is displayed when a
refresh spe-standby command fails.
■

Standby SPE busy with another task; for information use status
system
This message line error, which corresponds to Error Code 2018, is
displayed if a test command on a Standby SPE component is attempted
while the Active SPE is performing some Maintenance Mode activity on
the Standby SPE other than system technician-demanded maintenance.
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE
into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple
times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully
completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled
"standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not
include cases where the command completes with the terminal
message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to
check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while
entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh
spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not
labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use
the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to
put the standby into standby mode.
2. Repeat the command.
3. Issue the test spe-standby long command.

■

Standby SPE failed to reset with requested restart level; check for
STBY-SPE errors

■

Standby SPE memory not refreshed; use the ‘refresh spe-standby’
command
When a command that requires the standby SPE to be brought into
maintenance mode is entered, but the standby SPE memory is not
refreshed, this message is displayed. Issue the refresh spe-standby
command and retry the command.

■

Standby SPE not available; for information use status system
This message line error, which corresponds to Error Code 2020, is
displayed if a test command on a Standby SPE component is attempted
within the first five minutes of a restart of the Active SPE (that is, prior to the
Active SPE holding the Standby SPE reset and refreshing it).
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE
into Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple
times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully
completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled
"standby" on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not
include cases where the command completes with the terminal
message line errors "Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Page 10-1279

check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while
entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the refresh
spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not
labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use
the busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to
put the standby into standby mode.
2. Repeat the command.
3. Issue the test spe-standby long command.
■

Unable to interchange because the active SPE is locked active
An SPE interchange cannot be performed when the active SPE is locked
via the SPE select switches. Move the select switches back to the auto
position and retry the reset system interchange command.

■

Unable to interchange because the standby SPE is busied out
An SPE interchange can not be performed when the standby SPE is
busied out. Release the standby SPE by entering the release
spe-standby command and retry the command.

■

Unable to interchange due to alarms on the standby SPE; Use the
‘health-override’ option
When components in the standby SPE complex are alarmed, and if these
Standby alarms are more severe than the alarms in the active SPE
complex, the reset system-interchange command returns this message.
Using the reset system-interchange health-override command forces
the interchange. See the Reset System command page for more details.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)

Table 10-392.

Error
Code
4

Page 10-1280

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Active SPE was unable to disable or enable shadowing from Active SPE
memory to Standby SPE memory. The communication path between the Active
SPE and the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack may have failed, or the
carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack may have failed.
1. Check for Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms.
Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms.
Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
3. If the B carrier contains the Active SPE, check the Inter-Carrier Cable to
see if it is loose or disconnected. If so, follow the repair procedures for
connecting the Inter-Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, and 3 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 7. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, and 3,
proceed with Step 5.
5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 7, 8, and 9.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
4

Page 10-1281

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
6. If no error type is logged, the problem may be the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack.
■

If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on,
replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 7, 8, and 9.

■

If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is not
on AND if this is the first attempt to clear the problem, replace the
carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 7, 8,
and 9.

■

If the LED is not on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the
problem (that is, the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack has
been replaced), escalate the problem.

7. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not
labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the
busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the
standby into standby mode.
8. Repeat the command.
9. Issue the test spe-standby long command.
1029

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
1030

Page 10-1282

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This
test may only be run on this component when it resides on the Active SPE. If it
is absolutely necessary to conduct this test on the Standby SPE component,
implement the following steps to make it become an Active SPE component.
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to return the Standby SPE to
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more.
2. Issue the reset system interchange command in order to cause an SPE
switch. At this point, the component resides on the Active SPE.

1030

ABORT

(cont’d.)

3. Move the SPE Select switches to make the SPE with the problem the
current Active SPE. This action prevents software from switching to the
other SPE since the current SPE has the error against it.
4. Repeat the test.
5. If the test passes and the alarm is resolved, return the SPE Select switches
to the AUTO position.
6. If the test fails and the defective circuit pack is identified, the circuit pack
needs to be replaced. However, the circuit pack now resides on the
current Active SPE. Return the SPE Select switches to the AUTO position.
Issue the refresh spe-standby command and then execute a reset
system interchange command to cause an SPE switch.
7. The system is now on the healthy SPE. Replace the defective circuit pack
on the Standby SPE as previously identified in Step 4. Refer to the
"Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
8. Repeat the procedure, beginning with Step 1.

2011
2012
2013

ABORT

2015

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor did not reply to an Active SPE
request to hold the Standby SPE Processor reset. The communication path
between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor
may have failed, or the Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor may have
failed. Follow the procedures described for Error Code 2024 in the STBY-SPE
section.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code

Page 10-1283

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2016
2017

ABORT

The Active SPE attempted to put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode, but
did not receive notification from the Standby SPE Maintenance software that it
successfully entered Maintenance Mode OR, once in Maintenance Mode, the
Standby SPE sent a request to the Active SPE to have the Active SPE conduct
a portion of a test in the Standby SPE’s behalf, but the Standby SPE did not
receive a response to its request. In either case, the communication path
between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE may have failed. Follow the
procedures described for Error Code 2024 in the STBY-SPE section.

2018

ABORT

The test requires that a maintenance activity request be made to the Standby
SPE; however, the request cannot be made because the Standby SPE is busy
processing a previous maintenance activity request.
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE to
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 30 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more.
2. Repeat the test.
3. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby
SPE components.

2019

ABORT

A translation save on the Standby SPE was not carried out because the
Shadow Link Test failed. (The Shadow Link Test was done to verify the integrity
of the translation data on the Standby SPE.)
1. Check for Memory Shadowing Link errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-LNK
(Memory Shadowing Link) Maintenance documentation and follow the
prescribed procedures.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2020

Page 10-1284

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test requires that a maintenance activity request be made to the Standby
SPE; however, the request cannot be made because the Active SPE was
restarted within the last five minutes and has not yet initialized the Standby
SPE. Therefore, the Standby SPE is not available to handle maintenance
activity requests.
1. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to force the Standby SPE to
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more.
2. Repeat the test.
3. If the Active SPE was restarted with a Cold 1 or a reboot, issue the test
spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby SPE
components.

2021

ABORT

An attempt to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory
encountered a problem. In this case, the refresh from Active SPE Memory to
Standby SPE Memory probably succeeded. However, the following steps
should be followed just to verify that there are no problems.
1. Check for Active SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory circuit pack) Maintenance and follow the prescribed
maintenance procedures.
2. Issue the refresh spe-standby command. This command may have to be
issued multiple times. If the refresh spe-standby command successfully
completes five times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby"
on the status system form, wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases
where the command completes with the terminal message line errors
"Refresh not successful; use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors"
or "Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode;
please try later." Issue the refresh spe-standby command once more.

2022

ABORT

The Active SPE successfully put the Standby SPE into Maintenance Mode but
received an incorrect response to a maintenance activity request that it made
to the Standby SPE OR, once in Maintenance Mode, the Standby SPE sent a
request to the Active SPE to have the Active SPE conduct a portion of a test in
the Standby SPE’s behalf, but the Standby SPE received an incorrect response
to its request. The communication path between the Active SPE and the
Standby SPE may have failed. Follow the procedures described for Error Code
2024 in the STBY-SPE section.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code

Page 10-1285

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2023

ABORT

Internal system error.

2024

ABORT

The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor did not respond to an Active
SPE request to release the Standby SPE Processor to perform a function; OR
the Standby SPE Processor was released but did not carry out the requested
function and/or did not reply to the request; OR the Standby SPE Processor
was released but cannot run because the Standby SPE Memory is defective.
The communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE
Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed, or the Standby SPE
Maintenance/Tape Processor may have failed, or the Standby SPE Processor
may have failed.
1. Check for Active SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms.
Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms.
Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
3. Check for Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor errors and alarms.
Refer to PR-MAINT (Maintenance/Tape Processor) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
4. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR
(80286 Processor Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and follow
the prescribed procedures.
5. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory circuit pack) Maintenance documentation and follow the
prescribed procedures.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2024
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1286

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
6. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if it is loose or disconnected. If so,
follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Cabinet Cable
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
7. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 11. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and
6, proceed with Step 8.
8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 80 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.
9. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 81 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the Standby SPE
Processor circuit pack. Replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack
as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2024

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

(cont’d.)

2024

Page 10-1287

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
10. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 58 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If an Error Type 58 is logged OR if none of the
three error types are logged, the problem is either the Standby SPE
Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack or the
carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack.
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the
Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet,
replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 11, 12, and 13. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack is on, and if the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has
been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace
the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11,
12, and 13.

■

If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on,
replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear
the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the second attempt to
clear the problem, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the third attempt to
clear the problem, replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fourth attempt to
clear the problem, replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three LEDs is on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the
problem, escalate the problem.

(cont’d.)

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2024

Page 10-1288

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
11. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not
labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the
busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the
standby into standby mode.
12. Repeat the command.
13. Issue the test spe-standby long command.

2025

ABORT

The Standby SPE Maintenance/Tape Processor successfully released the
Standby SPE processor, but the Standby SPE processor did not successfully
carry out the requested function. Either there is a problem with one or more
components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE
Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory OR there is a
problem with the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack or the Standby SPE
Memory circuit pack.
1. Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE Common Shadow Circuit
errors and alarms. Refer to SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit) and
follow the procedures.
2. Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms. Refer to MEM-BD
(Memory circuit pack) and follow the procedures.
3. Check for Standby SPE Processor errors and alarms. Refer to PROCR and
follow the procedures.
4. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if the cable is loose or disconnected.
If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
5. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 10. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, 3, and 4,
proceed with Step 6.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2025
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1289

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 80 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12.
7. Issue the display errors command and check to see if an Error Type 82 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12.
8. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 85 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem may be the Standby SPE
Memory circuit pack. Replace the Memory circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 10, 11, and 12.
9. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 58 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If Error Type 58 is logged OR if no error type is
logged, the problem is either the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack, the
Standby SPE Memory circuit pack, or the carrier A Duplication Interface
circuit pack.
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the
Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet,
replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 11, 12, and 13. If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor
circuit pack is on, and if the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has
been replaced, replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 11, 12, and 13.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2025

Page 10-1290

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
■

If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on, replace
the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10,
11, and 12.

■

If the red LED on the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack is on,
replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with
Steps 11, 12, and 13.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the first attempt to clear
the problem, replace the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack as
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and
proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the second attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has
already been replaced), replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack
as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 10, 11, and 12.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the third attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor and Standby
SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced), replace the
carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ and proceed with Steps 10,
11, and 12.

(cont’d.)

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2025

Page 10-1291

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fourth attempt to
clear the problem (that is, the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE
Memory, and carrier A Duplication Interface circuit packs have already
been replaced), proceed with Step 10.

■

If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear
the problem (the Standby SPE Processor, Standby SPE Memory, and
carrier A Duplication Interface circuit packs have been replaced and
the test has been repeated once), escalate the problem.

(cont’d.)

10. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE into
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more. If the Standby SPE is not
labeled "standby" on the status system form after this attempt, use the
busyout spe-standby and release spe-standby command to put the
standby into standby mode.
11. Repeat the command.
12. Issue the test spe-standby long command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code
2051

Page 10-1292

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
When attempting to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory,
the Active SPE could not determine the status of one of the Duplication
Interface circuit packs, or it determined that one of the Duplication Interface
circuit packs was defective.
1. Check for carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms.
Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation and follow the prescribed procedures.
2. Check for carrier B Duplication Interface circuit pack errors and alarms.
Refer to DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance and
follow the prescribed procedures.
3. Check the Inter-Carrier Cable to see if the cable is loose or disconnected.
If so, follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter-Carrier Cable
described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
4. If all problems found in Steps 1, 2, and 3 have now been repaired,
proceed with Step 8. If no problems were found in Steps 1, 2, and 3,
proceed with Step 5.
5. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 80 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier A Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 8, 9, and 10.
6. Issue the display errors command and check to see if Error Type 82 is
logged against STBY-SPE. If so, the problem is the carrier B Duplication
Interface circuit pack. Replace the carrier B Duplication Interface circuit
pack as described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’
and proceed with Steps 8, 9, and 10.
7. If Error Type 80 or 82 is not logged, escalate the problem.

2051
(cont’d.)

ABORT

8. Issue the refresh spe-standby command to put the Standby SPE in
Standby Mode. This command may have to be issued multiple times. If the
refresh spe-standby command successfully completes five times without
the Standby SPE becoming labeled "standby" on the status system form,
wait 20 minutes. This does not include cases where the command
completes with the terminal message line errors "Refresh not successful;
use ‘display errors’ to check for STBY-SPE errors" or "Cannot interrupt
Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode; please try later." Issue the
refresh spe-standby command once more.
9. Repeat the test.
10. Issue the test spe-standby long command to thoroughly test all Standby
SPE components.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE)
Table 10-392.

Error
Code

Page 10-1293

Test Result Error Codes Associated with the Standby SPE
— Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2054

ABORT

This indicates an incompatibility between the two Processor circuit packs in a
Duplication Option system. Follow the repair steps for STBY-SPE error 139 note
(k).

2068

ABORT

When attempting to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory, a
problem was encountered when refreshing Packet Control circuit pack
memory.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

other

ABORT

Any ABORT with an error code other than the ones listed previously indicates a
problem that prevented the test from running. See Test Result of each
maintenance object under test for details.

other

FAIL

Any FAIL indicates that the test was actually run on the associated Standby
SPE component. However, the test did not succeed and returned FAIL with the
reason for the failure. See Test Result of each maintenance object under test
for details.

PASS

The test was actually successfully run on the associated Standby SPE
component and returned PASS. See Test Result of each maintenance object
under test for details.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1294

STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]
10

MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

STRAT-3

MAJOR

test synchronization

Stratum 3 Clock

STRAT-3

MINOR

test synchronization

Stratum 3 Clock

STRAT-3

WARNING

test synchronization

Stratum 3 Clock

The Digital Synchronization Network Plan (PUB 60110) specifies a hierarchy of
synchronization nodes consisting of strata 1 to 4, where the sole Stratum 1 clock
in the network is the most accurate. DEFINITY supports both Stratum 3 and
Stratum 4 operations. Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance
documentation for details on Stratum 4 operation.
A Stratum 3 clock derives its timing from two DS1 references that are connected
to a Stratum 3 or better (that is, lower stratum) source. The Stratum 3 clock
provides a holdover of at least 24 hours should both DS1 references fail. (After 24
hours, the Stratum 3 clock still provides service but its accuracy may be
degraded). The Digital Synchronization Network Plan (PUB 60110) requires that
the Stratum 3 clock have duplicated components.
The recognition of the Stratum 3 clock itself as well as its alarm signals, is
supported only by the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. The TN780 Tone-Clock
circuit pack is also backwards-compatible with the TN768 Tone-Clock circuit
pack.
The Stratum 3 clock may be connected to either the PPN or an EPN if the TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack(s) is present in that port network. However, for reliability,
it is recommended that the clock be connected to the PPN. Refer to DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 3 Implementation , 555-230-653 for details on
how to move the Stratum 3 clock between port networks.
The only operation that software can perform is a query of the alarm leads. The
only recovery action that can be performed on a catastrophic failure of the
Stratum 3 clock is the utilization of the local oscillator on the Active TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack. Neither software nor the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack
can request additional information about the health of the Stratum 3 clock other
than the information provided by the alarm leads. Furthermore, neither the
software nor the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack can request that the external
clock switch references, change configuration, disable/enable, initialize, etc.
In G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386, the Stratum 3 clock has been implemented as an
external that follows the specification in PUB 60110 for Stratum 3. Figure 10-85
shows how the Stratum 3 hardware configuration provides clock and alarm
signals to the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack(s). The reference DS1 facilities are

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1295

connected directly to the Stratum 3 clock for timing purposes, but the DS1 data
may be routed into the switch by using a Y connector.

DEFINITY
TN767

TN767
or

or

TN722

TN722
TN780

TN780

Timing output

Timing output

Alarms
TOC

TOC
PAI
A

B

ST3

ST3

A

B

CI

CI

A

B

DS1

DS1

Ref B

Ref A
-48V

Figure 10-85.

-48V

Stratum 3 Clock Hardware Configuration

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1296

NOTE:
When looking in the Stratum 3 cabinet, "A" card is on the left and "B" card is
on the right.

Stratum 3 Clock LED Strategy
Red and green LEDs are provided on the components of the Stratum 3 clock for
status and alarm indications.

! WARNING:
The normal LED scheme is not followed for this device. Green LEDs do not
indicate maintenance activity. There are no yellow LEDs, and there are
more than three LEDs per circuit pack.
The Stratum 3 clock has the following components:
■

2 Clock Input cards (CI)
Provides the logic to select the better DS1 reference or Clock Input card.
The red FAIL LED on this card indicates a failure with the card or the DS1
reference connected to it.

■

2 Stratum 3 Cards (ST3)
Provides 24-hour holdover. The red FAIL LED on this card indicates a
failure with the card. Replace the card.

■

2 Timing Output Cards (TOC)
Provides cable length compensation, multiple output ports, selection of
the ST3, and CI outputs. This type of card has two red failure LEDs: one
indicates a failure of the card; the other indicates a failure in one or more
output ports. In either case, replace the card.

■

1 PBX Alarm Interface (PAI)
Filters power supplied to the clock, provides fuse protection, and provides
alarm indications based on inputs supplied by other cards. The six LEDs
on this card provide indications for the six alarm or status conditions as
follows:
1.Loss of DS1 reference A.
2.Loss of DS1 reference B.
3.Loss of one clock unit.
4.Loss of both clock units.
5.Loss of one power supply.
6.Loss of both power supplies.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1297

NOTE:
Removal of a card in the Stratum 3 clock may cause alarm(s) to be resolved
and the query test to pass. However, the removed cards should still be
replaced to restore the Stratum 3 clock to full service.
The output of the CI and PAI cards go directly to the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit
pack via two 25-pair amp-terminated cables. All of the cards have red and/or
green LEDs for providing status or alarm indications. The following table shows
the Stratum 3 Clock LED indications.
NOTE:
The abbreviations used in the table were defined previously with the
exception of SRC (source) and PLL (Phase Locked Loop).
Table 10-393.
Card
PAI

CI

ST3

TOC

Stratum 3 Clock LED Indications

Name

Color

Indication

REF A

Red

Loss of input reference A or CI A failed

REF B

Red

Loss of input reference B or CI A failed

ST A

Red

Failed Stratum 3 clock A

ST B

Red

Failed Stratum 3 clock B

PWR A

Green

-48VDC A present

PWR B

Green

-48VDC B present

FAIL

Red

Card failure

DS1

Green

DS1 source present

CC

Green

Composite clock source1 present

SRC ACTIVE

Green

Card is currently on-line

FAIL

Red

Card failure

LOCK

Red

PLL lost sync with reference or holdover mode

REF A

Red

Timing Reference from CI A

REF B

Red

Timing Reference from CI B

FAIL

Red

Card failure

PORT ALM

Red

Output port alarm (one or more)

ST

Green

Reference present from ST clock

INPUT

Green

Reference present from CI

500’

Green

500 feet phase advance

1000’

Green

1000 feet phase advance

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

1.

Page 10-1298

Composite Clock source refers to the protocol used to electrically transfer timing from
the Stratum 3 clock to the PBX switch. The Composite Clock source is not relevant to
Definity Generic 1.1.

NOTE:
When looking in the Stratum 3 cabinet, "A" card is on the left and "B" card is
on the right.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Stratum 3 Clock Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test synchronization r 4

1 (d)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR

OFF

test synchronization r 4

257 (e)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR

OFF

test synchronization r 4

None

WARNING

ON

0

1

257 (c)
513 (f)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR

ON

test synchronization r 4

769 (g)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR

ON

test synchronization r 4

1025 (h)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR/ MAJOR(a)

ON

test synchronization r 4

1281 (i)

Any

Stratum 3 Clock
Alarm Query (#649)

MINOR/ MAJOR(a)

ON

test synchronization r 4

none

MINOR/ MAJOR(a)

ON

1537 (b)

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. In the context of the Stratum 3 clock, an OFF-BOARD alarm occurs when
there is a DS1 facility problem; otherwise, the alarm is ON-BOARD
indicating that there is a fault in the Stratum 3 clock or in the connection
between the Stratum 3 clock and the PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
switch. If the Stratum 3 clock cannot be referenced, and therefore the

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1299

local oscillator on the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack must serve as the
reference instead, a Major alarm is raised. Otherwise, a Minor alarm is
raised.
b. This error can be caused by one of the following conditions:
1.One or both TOCs (Timing Output Cards) may have failed,
2.the connection between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone-Clock
circuit pack may be faulty, or
3.the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be defective.
A Minor alarm results if the Stratum 3 clock can still provide timing to the
PBX; otherwise, a Major alarm is raised because the Stratum 3 clock is not
providing timing and the PBX is referencing the local oscillator on the
TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack. If only the Active TN780 Tone-Clock
circuit pack were faulty, the Standby TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack
would become active and still synchronize to the Stratum 3 clock. When
the system switches to the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack, the alarm is
resolved, and it raises a TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) alarm to indicate that
the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may be defective.
If the alarm is minor:
Look for a red LED on either or both TOC cards. If there is a red
LED, then replace the card. If there is no red LED, then, using the
Stratum 3 Wiring Guide, check that the wiring installation is correct.
After replacing the card or correctly rewiring the installation, clear
the alarm by first issuing the disable synchronization-switch
command followed by the enable synchronization-switch
command. Wait two minutes and then execute the status
synchronization command. If Maintenance Name on the status
screen shows "STRAT-3," then the problem is resolved. If not, then
escalate the problem.
If the alarm is major:
Check connections between the Stratum 3 clock and the PBX. If
there are no loose connections, using the Stratum 3 Wiring Guide,
check that the wiring installation is correct. After reconnecting the
loose connection or correctly rewiring it, clear the alarm by first
issuing the disable synchronization-switch command followed by
the enable synchronization-switch command. Wait one minute,
and then execute the status synchronization command. If
Maintenance Name on the status screen shows "STRAT-3," then the
problem is resolved. If not, then escalate the problem.
If the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack become active:
Check connection between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack from which the system has just switched. If
there are no loose connections, then, replace the TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack. Refer to the "How to Replace a Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack" section in the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1300

Maintenance documentation. Before switching back to the new
TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack, use the test tone-clock PC long
command to check that the Tone-Clock is receiving a signal from
the Stratum 3 clock. The notation "PC" denotes a port network
number and carrier. If all tests pass, switch to the new Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the set tone-clock PC override command. If Test
#651 fails, then the original TN780 Tone-Clock should be
reinserted, and the cable between the Stratum 3 clock and the
TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack should be replaced. If Test #651
continues to fail, then escalate the problem.
c. This error indicates that the Tone/Clock circuit pack in the master port
network is not a TN780 Tone/Clock circuit pack when a Stratum 3 clock is
administered. Verify that the Tone/Clock in the master port network is
TN780.
d. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has either reference A or CI
card A failed. Please refer to the error code 1 in the test description of the
Test #649 for the repair procedure.
e. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has one power supply failed.
Please refer to the error code 2 in the test description of the Test #649 for
the repair procedure.
f. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has one clock unit failed.
Please refer to the error code 4 in the test description of the Test #649 for
the repair procedure.
g. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has either reference B or CI
card B failed. Please refer to the error code 8 in the test description of the
Test #649 for the repair procedure.
h. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has all power supplies failed.
Please refer to the error code 16 in the test description of the Test #649 for
the repair procedure.
i. This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has all clock units failed.
Please refer to the error code 32 in the test description of the Test #649 for
the repair procedure.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Page 10-1301

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following table when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query (#649)
The Stratum 3 clock provides the system with the following six alarm indications
via the TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack:
1. Reference A failed or CI card A failed.
2. Reference B failed or CI card B failed.
3. One power supply failed.
4. All power supplies failed.
5. One clock unit failed.
6. All clock unit(s) failed.
This test queries the Stratum 3 clock for its alarm status (through the TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack) and reports the results of the query.

! WARNING:
The removal of a card in the Stratum 3 clock may cause alarm(s) to be
resolved and the query test to pass. However, the removed cards should
still be replaced to restore the Stratum 3 clock to full service.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1302

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query

Error
Code

Test
Result

1001

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate the necessary resources
to run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

This test aborts when it is run on a Stratum 4 system. Do
not change synchronization to Stratum 3 without
consulting the synchronization plan administrator for this
switch.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1303

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

1

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Either Reference A failed or CI card A failed. This
condition usually indicates a failure of the DS1
reference; however, there may also be a failure of the CI
card to which the reference is connected. System
Technician dispatched to investigate this problem
should take a spare CI card in case the CI card caused
the failure.
If you are NOT ON-SITE, use the following procedure:
1. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors
using the display error command. Refer to the
DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for
recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD
errors found.
2. If there are no DS1-BD errors OR after resolving all
DS1-BD errors, issue the test synchronization r 4
command to determine if the alarm is still present. If
all repetitions of the tests pass, then the alarm no
longer exists. Otherwise, system technician should
be dispatched with a spare CI card to use the
following instructions on-site.
If you are ON-SITE, use the following procedure:
1. Look for a red LED on CI card A (that is, the left CI
card). If there is a red LED, then replace the CI card,
if a spare is available. If no spare CI is available
on-site, proceed to Step 3. If after replacing the CI
card, the red LED on the new CI card lights also,
then proceed to Step 3.
2. If a spare CI card is available, replace the suspect
CI card. Otherwise, issue the test synchronization
r 4 command to clear the alarm. If any test
repetitions fail, follow the procedure for those
failures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1304

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

1

FAIL

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors
using the display error command. Refer to the
DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for
recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD
errors found. If there are no DS1-BD errors, proceed
to Step 5.
4. After all DS1-BD errors have been resolved,
determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for
those failures.
5. Check the DS1 reference A connections to the
Stratum 3 clock.
6. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for
those failures. If the problem persists after you have
performed this procedure three times, follow normal
escalation procedures.

2

FAIL

One power supply failed. This error only occurs when
the Stratum 3 clock has two power supplies, and one of
them has failed. However, the clock can function with
one power supply.
1. Locate the failed power supply by looking for a
power supply with a red LED and replace it.
2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, then follow the procedures
for those test failures. If the problem persists after
you have performed this procedure three times, then
follow normal escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1305

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

4

FAIL

One clock unit failed.
1. Look at the Stratum 3 cabinet for a red LED on a
circuit card marked "ST3." Replace the card.
2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 to clear the alarm. If any test
repetitions fail, follow the procedures for those
failures. If the problem persists after you have
performed this procedure three times, follow normal
escalation procedures.

8

FAIL

Reference B failed or CI card B failed. This condition
usually indicates a failure of the DS1 reference;
however, there may also be a failure of the CI card to
which the reference is connected. System Technician
dispatched to investigate this problem should take a
spare CI card in case the CI card caused the failure.
If you are NOT ON-SITE, use the following procedure:
1. If there are no DS1-BD errors OR after resolving all
DS1-BD errors, issue the test synchronization r 4
command to determine if the alarm is still present. If
all repetitions of the tests pass, the alarm no longer
exists. Otherwise, system technician should be
dispatched with a spare CI card to use the following
instructions on-site.
If you are ON-SITE, use the following procedure:
1. Look for a red LED on a CI card B (the right CI card).
If there is a red LED, replace the CI card, if a spare
is available. If no spare CI is available on-site,
proceed to Step 3. If after replacing the CI card, the
red LED on the new CI card lights also, proceed to
Step 3.
2. Otherwise, issue the test synchronization r 4
command to clear the alarm. If any test repetitions
fail, follow the procedure for those failures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1306

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

8

FAIL

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. Look for DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) errors
using the display error command. Refer to the
DS1-BD Maintenance documentation for
recommended strategy to resolve any DS1-BD
errors found. If there are no DS1-BD errors, proceed
to Step 5.
4. After all DS1-BD errors have been resolved,
determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for
those failures.
5. Check the DS1 reference A connections to the
Stratum 3 clock.
6. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for
those failures. If the problem persists after you have
performed this procedure three times, follow normal
escalation procedures.

16

FAIL

All power supplies failed.
1. Replace the failed power supplies.
2. If battery backup for the Stratum 3 clock is not
supplied or if the battery backup holdover time has
been exceeded, the system references the local
oscillator on the Active TN780 Tone-Clock circuit
pack until software detects one or both power
supplies has(have) been restored (approximately 40
minutes). To speed up this restoration, issue the test
synchronization r 4 command. All tests should
pass. If any repetitions should fail, follow the
procedures for those failures. If the problem persists
after you have performed this procedure three times,
follow normal escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)]

Table 10-394.

Page 10-1307

TEST #649 Stratum 3 Clock Alarm Query — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

32

FAIL

All clock unit(s) failed.
1. Look at the Stratum 3 cabinet for red LEDs on circuit
cards marked "ST3." Replace the card(s).
2. Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test
synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm. If
any test repetitions fail, follow the procedure for
those failures. If the problem persists after you have
performed this procedure three times, follow normal
escalation procedures.

2101

FAIL

The TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack detects loss of
signal. Refer to Note (b) of the STRAT-3 Hardware Error
Log Entries table in the STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)
Maintenance documentation for replacement
procedures.

PASS

The Stratum 3 clock has reported that it has no alarm
conditions. If synchronization problems have been
reported, look for SYNC errors and refer to SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for
recommended strategy for those errors.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SVC-SLOT (Service Slot)

Page 10-1308

SVC-SLOT (Service Slot)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log
SVC-SLOT

Alarm
Level
MINOR

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
none

Full Name of MO
Service Slot

The Service Slot maintenance object is used to detect when an invalid circuit
pack is inserted into a SERVICE slot. The SERVICE slot is the leftmost slot in the
J58890BB Port Carrier. It is identified as circuit pack slot location "00" in all
commands, field entries, and displays used by the system administrator and the
service technician.
This slot does not provide tip and ring connectivity to the wall field. Therefore,
only the following circuit pack types are allowed in the slot:
■

Call Classifier (TN744)

■

Integrated Announcement (TN750)

■

Maintenance/Test (TN771C)

■

Speech Synthesizer (TN725B)

■

Tone Detector (TN748C)

A MINOR alarm is generated against the Service Slot maintenance object when a
circuit pack of a type other than that included in the previous list is inserted into a
SERVICE slot.
The Service Slot maintenance object name is used instead of the maintenance
object name for the illegal circuit pack to prevent any attempt to assign a port to
an illegal circuit pack that is physically inserted into the SERVICE slot.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Service Slot Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

600 (a)

Associated Test
None

Alarm
Level
MINOR

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

ON

Notes:
a. This error type indicates that a circuit pack type other than one of the
following types was inserted into slot 00 (SERVICE slot) of the J58890BB
port carrier.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SVC-SLOT (Service Slot)
■

Call Classifier (TN744)

■

Integrated Announcement (TN750)

■

Maintenance/Test (TN771C)

■

Speech Synthesizer (TN725B)

■

Tone Detector (TN748C)

Page 10-1309

The code of the invalid circuit pack can be displayed by using the list
configuration board UUCSS command, where "UU" is the universal
cabinet number, "C" is the carrier number, and "SS" is the slot number
(always 00) of the alarmed circuit pack.
Remove the invalid circuit pack to retire the alarm.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1310

SW-CTL (Switch Control)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

SW-CTL

MINOR

test network-control a/b sh

Switch Control

SW-CTL

MAJOR

test network-control a/b sh

Switch Control

The Switch Control resides on the TN777 Network Control (Netcon) circuit pack.
The data channels (DATA-BD and DATA-CHL) also reside on the Netcon circuit
pack. Standard systems have a single Netcon circuit pack and High and Critical
Reliability systems have a Netcon circuit pack in each SPE complex. The Netcon
in a standard system cannot be replaced without bringing the system down. The
Netcon in the standby SPE of a High or Critical Reliability system can be
changed without affecting normal system operation.
The Switch Control is used to send control information between port circuit packs
and the processor (see Figure 10-86). This control information is sent via the PPN
cabinet’s Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus. The portion of the TDM Bus used to
transmit control messages is called the control channel. The control channel can
be on either TDM Bus A or TDM Bus B, but only one bus is used for the control
channel at any given time.
The Switch Control is critical in the setup and take down of all calls but is not
involved in the voice or data transmission that takes place during established
calls. It is the Switch Control that detects when port circuit packs are plugged
into or removed from the PPN cabinet. This information is then sent to the
processor. The Switch Control monitors the health of the control channel on the
PPN cabinet TDM Bus and informs the processor when errors occur.
The Switch Control contains the hardware Time of Day (TIME-DAY) clock that the
system uses for all its date and time information. In addition, the Switch Control
also contains hardware to monitor critical system timing signals and informs the
processor when these signals fail. For example, if the timing signals from a
Tone-Clock circuit pack in the PPN cabinet fail, the Switch Control informs the
processor, and the processor can switch in a spare Tone-Clock circuit pack, if
one is available (High or Critical Reliability system).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1311

TDM BUS

PORT CIRCUIT
PACK

PROCESSOR

NETWORK
CONTROL

PORT CIRCUIT
PACK

PORT CIRCUIT
PACK

Figure 10-86.

Switch Control Connectivity

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1312

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-395.
Error
Type

Switch Control Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test network-control a/b sh r 1

1

Any

Control Channel Test
(#94)

MAJOR

ON

test network-control a/b r 3

Control Channel Test
(#94)

MAJOR

ON

test network control a/b r 3

MINOR

ON

test network-control a/b l r 3

MAJOR

ON

test network-control a/b r 3

MAJOR

ON

test network-control a/b l r 2

2 (a)
257 (b)

0 or 1

None

513

(c)

Time of Day Clock
Test (#95)

769 (d)

Any

None

1025
1281 (e)

Switch Control Loop
Around Test (#92)
Any

1537
1793 (f)

None
Switch Control
Reset Test #93

Any

None

2817

MCD Loop Around
Test (#324)

MAJOR

ON

test network-control a/b r 2

3073

MCD Memory Test
(#325)

MAJOR

ON

test network-control a/b r 3

3329 (g)

None

MAJOR

ON

(g)

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. This error may not cause a Switch Control alarm if Error Type 769 is also
present since this error may actually be caused by the loss of clock
signals and not by a Switch Control failure.
b. The 257 errors are reported to the processor by the Switch Control and
indicate possible hardware problems on the Network Control circuit pack.
The receipt of these errors causes Switch Control maintenance to run
specific Switch Control tests. If there really is a problem, the Switch
Control tests usually causes other errors to be logged. In the rare case
where no other errors are logged but 257 errors are occurring at a high
rate (more than 10 in the last hour), the Network Control circuit pack
should be replaced at the customer’s convenience.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1313

c. If the Aux Data is less than 100, the test may have been interrupted by
LMM operations. Wait 1 minute, then test again. Retry the test a maximum
of three times. If the Aux Data is more than 100 or fails two out of three
times with Aux Data less than 100, the Netcon circuit pack needs to be
replaced.
d. A 769 error occurs when the Switch Control reports a loss of timing signals
to the processor. When this error is present, the Switch Control is usually
not alarmed since any Switch Control test failures are really the result of
faulty signals from the PPN cabinet Tone-Clock circuit pack. See
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation for the
procedures needed to diagnose Tone-Clock circuit pack troubles.
e. This error indicates a loss of handshake between SW-CTL and the system
software. Look for and resolve all other SW-CTL errors. In the rare case
where no other errors are logged, but Error Type 1281 is occurring at a
high rate (more than 10 in the previous hour), escalate the problem.
For G3s, a loss of handshake between Switch Control in Network Control
circuit pack (TN777B) and Processor circuit pack (TN786B or TN790) can
be caused by the following components: Network Control circuit pack
(TN777B), Processor circuit pack (TN786), Processor Interface circuit
pack (TN765), Packet Control circuit pack (TN778), and M-BUS.
Follow these repair steps:
1.Look for and resolve all other SW-CTL errors.
2.Look for and resolve all other PI-SCI, PI-BD, and PKT-CTRL errors.
3.If the error indicates a failure in the Network Control circuit pack,
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions
to replace the Network Control circuit pack. Boot the system up
after the Network Control circuit pack has been inserted
successfully into the control carrier.
4.If the error of loss of handshake persists after the replacement of the
Network Control circuit pack, then refer to Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions to replace the
Processor circuit pack.
Refer to the "Software Upgrade" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’, to load the system software from the
Memory Card (J58890TG-1 List 3) with the correct software release
into the Processor circuit pack. Boot the system up after the system
software is successfully loaded into the Processor circuit pack.
5.If the error of loss of handshake persists after the replacement of the
Processor circuit pack, consider the replacement of the control
carrier. It’s possible that the M-bus on the backplane of the control
carrier may be defective.
Recommended Repair Kits: Network Control circuit pack
(TN777B), Processor circuit pack (TN786B or TN790), and Memory
Card (J58890TG-1 List 3) with correct software release.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1314

f. The Aux Data for this error is not meaningful. The 1793 errors are in-line
errors that indicate a possible problem with the interface between the
Switch Control and the processor. The receipt of these errors causes
Switch Control maintenance to run specific Switch Control tests. If there
really is a problem, the Switch Control tests usually causes other errors to
be logged. In the rare case where no other errors are logged but 1793
errors are occurring at a high rate (more than 10 in the last hour), the
Network Control circuit pack should be replaced at the customer’s
convenience.
g. This error indicates bad clock detection circuitry on the Netcon circuit
pack. Replace the Netcon circuit pack according to the control carrier
circuit pack replacement procedures.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Switch Control Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Switch Control Reset Test (#93)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Control Channel Interface Test (#92)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Transmission Test (#94)

X

X

ND

X

D

Destructive EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#325)
EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test (#324)

X

X

ND

Time of Day Clock Test (#95)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test (DATA-BD) (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

NPE Audit Test (DATA-BD) (#50) (a)

X

ND

Data Channel Reset Test (DATA-CHL) (#107) (b)

X

D

Data Channel Interface Test (DATA-CHL) (#108) (b)

X

D

Maintenance Loop Around Test (DATA-CHL) (#109) (b)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Crosstalk Test (DATA-CHL) (#110) (b)

X

X

ND

Data Channel Local Loop Back Test (DATA-CHL) (#111) (b)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1315

Notes:
a. Refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests.
b. Refer to DATA-CHL (Network Control Channel) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these tests.

Control Channel Interface Test (#92)
Loop back messages are sent to the Switch Control via the interface used for
control channel messages. The messages are returned to the SPE for verification
via the same interface.
Table 10-396.
Error
Code

TEST #92 Control Channel Interface Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2013
2100
none

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)
Table 10-396.
Error
Code
other

Page 10-1316

TEST #92 Control Channel Interface Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Messages could not be looped back through the control channel interface.
If this is a standard system, the customer probably cannot make or receive
calls.
1. This failure could be due to either a Netcon circuit pack failure or the
loss of system timing signals. If the Switch Control is alarmed, then
suspect a Netcon circuit pack failure. If the Switch Control is not
alarmed, investigate the possible loss of system timing signals before
replacing the Netcon circuit pack. Test #94 also fails if the system
timing signals are lost. If Test #94 passes, do not suspect the loss of
timing signals.
2. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure that this
failure is occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset
the Switch Control. Sometimes running the Long Test Sequence may
clear the problem. If the test is still failing, proceed to Step 3 or 4.
3. If the system can process calls, replace the Netcon board.
4. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon board immediately.
5. The procedure for replacing the Network Control circuit pack
(DATA-BD) in a High or Critical Reliability system is described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure
for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is
described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.

PASS

The control channel interface between the processor and the Switch
Control is working correctly.

Continued on next page

Switch Control Reset Test (#93)
This test is destructive.
This test resets the Switch Control and determines if it can successfully go
through its initialization sequence. The test is destructive since there is the
possibility of losing some control messages to or from port circuit packs.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1317

Table 10-397. TEST #93 Switch Control Reset Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2013
2100
none

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to Standby SPE for a description of these error codes.

2000 or
None

FAIL

The Switch Control could not be successfully reset. If this is a standard
system, the customer probably cannot make or receive calls.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1. This failure could be due to either a Network Control circuit pack
failure or the loss of system timing signals. If the Switch Control is
alarmed, then suspect a Network Control circuit pack failure. If the
Switch Control is not alarmed, investigate the possible loss of system
timing signals. See “TDM Bus Clock”. If many port circuit pack LEDs
are lit, suspect a TDM Bus Clock problem. If only the Network Control
circuit pack LED is lit, suspect the Network Control circuit pack. If the
Network Control circuit pack is determined to be at fault, proceed to
Step 2.
2. If the system can process calls, replace the Netcon board.
3. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon board.
4. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack in a High or
Critical Reliability system is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in
systems without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5,
‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
PASS

The Switch Control has initialized correctly. Look at results of the other
tests to see if it is operating correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1318

Control Channel Transmission Test (#94)
Control channel messages are sent from the SPE to selected port circuit packs
and the response from the port circuit packs is checked. This tests the ability of
the Switch Control to send and receive messages on the control channel of the
TDM Bus.
This test cannot run on the Standby SPE Switch Control. Therefore, it is possible
to have defective hardware on the Standby Network Control circuit pack that is
not detectable.
Table 10-398.
Error
Code
0

TEST #94 Control Channel Transmission Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port circuit packs necessary for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test keeps aborting for this reason, then the Network Control
circuit pack should be replaced.

1030

ABORT

The Switch Control on the Standby SPE is being tested.
1. For recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error Code
1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2013
2100
none

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)
Table 10-398.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1319

TEST #94 Control Channel Transmission Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Switch Control cannot communicate on the TDM Bus control channel.
The customer probably cannot make or receive calls.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure this failure is
occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch
Control. Sometimes, running the Long Test Sequence may clear the
problem. Remember that the Long Test Sequence is destructive.
Placing and receiving calls is affected for several seconds.
2. If there are no TDM Bus alarms against the Standby TDM Bus, switch
the control channel from its current bus to the Standby bus. If this test
passes on the new bus, investigate the possibility of TDM Bus failures.
If the test fails even after the control channel is switched to the standby
TDM Bus, proceed to Step 3 or 4.
3. If the system is still able to process calls, replace the Netcon circuit
pack at the customer’s convenience (Standard system) or right away
(High or Critical Reliability system).
4. If calls cannot be made, replace the Netcon circuit pack immediately.
5. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack in a High or Critical
Reliability system is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A
Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems
without High or Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’.

PASS

The Switch Control can communicate with the port circuit packs over the
TDM Bus.

Continued on next page

Time of Day Clock Test (#95)
The short term accuracy of the Time of Day (TIME-DAY) clock is tested. The test
reads the clock once, waits a short time, and reads the clock again. The second
reading of the clock must be within certain limits relative to the first reading for
the test to pass. The display time command can be used to display the current
setting of the TIME-DAY clock.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1320

Table 10-399. TEST #95 Time of Day Clock Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test was interrupted by a higher priority task.
1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test aborts five times, wait until the system is less heavily used and
rerun the test at that time.

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to STBY-SPE for a description of these error codes.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2013

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2001

FAIL

The Time of Day clock could not be read.
1. Run the set time command and set the time to the current time.
2. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to determine if setting the
time corrected the error. Proceed to Step 3 if the error is still occurring.
3. Replace the Netcon circuit pack at the customer’s convenience
(Standard system) or right away (High or Critical Reliability system).

other

FAIL

The accuracy of Time of Day clock is not within limits.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is
occurring consistently.
2. Replace the Network Control (DATA-BD) circuit pack at the customer’s
convenience (unduplicated system) or right away (High or Critical
Reliability system).
3. The procedure for replacing the Network Control (DATA-BD) circuit
pack is described in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance
Aid’’. The procedure for doing the same in systems without High or
Critical Reliability is described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’.

PASS

The Time of Day clock on the Switch Control circuit pack is operating
correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1321

Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface
Test (#324)
Loop back messages are sent to the Switch Control via the interface used for
EPN maintenance circuit pack messages. The messages are returned to the SPE
for verification via the same interface.
Table 10-400.
Error
Code

TEST #324 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1005

ABORT

The system does not contain an EPN, so this test is not executed.

1030

ABORT

The component on which the test was to be run is on the Standby SPE. This
test may only be run on this component when it resides on the Active SPE.
1. For recommended maintenance procedure, refer to ABORT Error
Code 1030 in STBY-SPE Maintenance documentation.

32400

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

2012
32413
32416
32423
32425

ABORT

Internal system error

2013
32411
32421

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test.

32414
32417
32424
32427

ABORT

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “Standby SPE” for a description of these error codes.

ABORT

Refer to “STBY-SPE” for a description of these error codes.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
The messages failed to return (timed out) and were not verified.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of five retries.
2. If the test continues to abort and SW-CTL Test #325 passes, there is
not a problem, but if SW-CTL Test #325 fails, follow the
recommendations for SW-CTL Test #325.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)
Table 10-400.
Error
Code
any

Page 10-1322

TEST #324 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This failure indicates that communications with the Maintenance circuit
pack in the EPN is probably not possible. The EPN Manager I may not be
usable.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is
occurring consistently, run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch
Control. Sometimes running the Long Test Sequence may clear the
problem. Remember the Long Test Sequence is destructive. Placing
and receiving calls is affected for several seconds.
2. Replace the Netcon circuit pack whenever it is convenient for the
customer (unduplicated system) or right away (High or Critical
Reliability system).
3. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack is described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure
for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is
described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.

PASS

The EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface between the processor and
the Switch Control is working correctly. Test #325 is a more thorough test of
this interface but it is destructive.

Continued on next page

Switch Control Destructive EPN Maintenance
Board Interface Test (#325)
This test is destructive.
This test writes test patterns into the EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface and
verifies that it can read back these test patterns successfully. Messages to or
from the EPN Maintenance circuit pack can be lost when this test is run.
Table 10-401. TEST #325 Switch Control Destructive EPN
Maintenance Board Interface Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1005

ABORT

The system does not contain an EPN so this test is not executed.

32500

ABORT

Test disabled via software patch.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SW-CTL (Switch Control)

Page 10-1323

Table 10-401. TEST #325 Switch Control Destructive EPN
Maintenance Board Interface Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2013
32511

ABORT

Could not allocate the system resources to run for this test.

2012
32513
32514

ABORT

Internal system error

1029
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2020
2022
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to “Standby SPE” for a description of these error codes.

32515

FAIL

This failure indicates that communications with the Maintenance circuit
pack in the EPN is probably not possible. The EPN management terminal
may not be usable.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1. Run the Long Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is
occurring consistently. Remember the Long Test Sequence is
destructive. Placing and receiving calls is affected for several
seconds.
2. Replace the Netcon circuit pack.
3. The procedure for replacing the Netcon circuit pack is described in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’. The procedure
for doing the same in systems without High or Critical Reliability is
described in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.
PASS

The EPN Maintenance circuit pack interface between the processor and
the Switch Control is working correctly.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1324

SYNC (Synchronization)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to
Run

Full Name of MO

SYNC

MAJOR

display errors

Synchronization Maintenance

SYNC

MINOR

display errors

Synchronization Maintenance

SYNC

WARNING

test synchronization

Synchronization Maintenance

The Synchronization Maintenance is composed of both hardware and software
components and its purpose is to provide a common reference frequency for
reliable digital communication between systems and other PBXs, COs or CPE.
Synchronization is achieved via the use of several system components which
include the Tone-Clock, the DS1 Interface, and the Expansion Interface circuit
packs. Synchronization is achieved between the PPN and the EPNs via the
Expansion Interface Link (EXP-LINK) between the networks.
Depending on the network synchronization plan and the status of
synchronization sources, the system timing reference may be a Tone-Clock
circuit pack, DS1 interface circuit packs or an external Stratum 3 clock. Stratum 4
synchronization extracts timing information directly from a DS1 reference or from
a Tone-Clock. Stratum 3 synchronization requires the use of a Stratum 3 clock
which provides a timing signal, derived from DS1 references, to the TN780
Tone-Clock circuit pack. The external Stratum 3 clock is a more stable timing
source than the Stratum 4 clock and provides 24-hour holdover in case of
reference failures. The Stratum 3 clock has redundant components.

Stratum 4 Synchronization
The system can be configured with primary and secondary synchronization
references (DS1 interface circuit packs) when using Stratum 4 synchronization.
Both references are optional (since the local oscillator can be used), and the
secondary reference is optional if a primary is provided. If this system is the
master for the network, then its local oscillator would be used and no DS1s would
be used as references.
If the primary synchronization reference is not providing a valid timing signal, the
system automatically switches to the secondary synchronization reference. If the
secondary reference does not provide a valid timing signal or is not administered
as a synchronization reference, a Tone-Clock circuit pack provides the system
timing source. The system does not revert to the primary if the current reference
is the secondary and is failing; however the system switches from the local
oscillator to another reference when the new reference becomes available. The
following diagram should assist in understanding Stratum 4 Synchronization
Maintenance components within the system. This diagram depicts a possible
Generic 1.2 configuration; DEFINITY Generic 1 does not support two EPNs, but

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1325

the operation and maintenance described below is the same except for the
references to multiple EPNs.

PRIMARY

SECONDARY

REFERENCE

REFERENCE

DS-1

TONE/

DS-1

INTF

CLOCK

INTF

PPN
TIMING

TIMING

INFO

INFO

EI LINK

EI LINK

EPN

EPN
EXPANSION INTERFACE (EI) LINK*

* EPN-TO-EPN LINKS ARE NOT USED TO CARRY TIMING

Figure 10-87.

Typical Stratum 4 Synchronization Configuration

If the primary synchronization reference in the previous diagram is providing a
valid timing signal, then the flow of system synchronization would travel from the
DS1 interface circuit pack in the PPN across the active Expansion Interface fiber
link to the two EPNs. The PPNDS1 interface circuit pack provides a timing signal
for the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack and the PPN Tone-Clock circuit pack
provides timing for all circuit packs in the PPN. The PPN Expansion Interface
circuit pack uses the timing generated by the Tone-Clock circuit pack to
generate a data stream which is sent across the Expansion Interface link to the
Expansion Interface circuit packs in the two EPNs. The EPN Expansion Interface
circuit pack uses the received data stream to generate a timing signal. The
Tone-Clock circuit pack in the EPNs uses this signal to generate timing for all the
circuit packs in their respective EPNs. The PPN, in the above mentioned

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1326

scenario, is designated the master port network and the EPNs are called slave
port networks. The master port network is defined as the port network that
contains the system synchronization source. If the primary synchronization
reference does not provide a valid timing signal, Synchronization Maintenance
switches to the secondary reference. Both the primary and secondary
references must reside in the same port network, but there is no restriction
as to in which port network both must reside (that is, both references may
be in an EPN). The recommended placement of the references is in the PPN.
There are two kinds of Stratum 4 synchronization that are supported: Type I and
Type II. Stratum 4 type I is more stable than Type II and provides some switching
capability at the hardware level. Stratum 4 Type II operation is the only
synchronization strata provided by Generic 1. It is important to note that Stratum
4 Type I operation is not possible when one or both of the DS1 interface circuit
packs providing the reference sources is a TN722. Both must be the TN767 or
TN464 (suffix C or higher).

Stratum 3 Synchronization
The following diagram may help you to understand the synchronization
components needed for Stratum 3 synchronization.
NOTE:
This is only one possible configuration.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1327

EXTERNAL
STRATUM 3

DS1 REFERENCES

CLOCK

TONE/CLOCK
TN780
PPN
TIMING

TIMING

INFO

INFO

EI LINK

EI LINK

EPN

EPN
EXPANSION INTERFACE (EI) LINK*

* EPN-TO-EPN LINKS ARE NOT USED TO CARRY TIMING

Figure 10-88.

Example Stratum 3 Synchronization Configuration

For Stratum 3 synchronization, an external clock provides a timing signal to a
TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack, and the TN780 provides timing to all circuit
packs in the port network in which the TN780 resides (that is, the PPN in the
previous diagram). The PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack uses the timing
generated by the TN780 to generate a data stream which is sent across the two
Expansion Interface Links to the two EPNs to the EPN Expansion Interface circuit
packs. The EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs use the received data stream
to generate a timing signal which is used by the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the
EPNs to provide timing for all circuit packs in both EPNs. (The Tone-Clock circuit
pack is not necessarily a TN780; only the Tone-Clock circuit pack connected to
the external Stratum 3 clock must be a TN780.) The PPN, in the above mentioned
scenario, is designated the master port network and the EPNs are called slave

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1328

port networks. The master port network is defined as the port network whose
Tone-Clock is connected to the Stratum 3 clock.
NOTE:
The Stratum 4 equipment (usually a PBX) should never provide timing to a
Stratum 3 PBX.
NOTE:
The external Stratum 3 clock may be connected to the TN780 Tone-Clock in
any port network. However, it is recommended that it be connected to the
PPN.

Synchronization Troubleshooting
For both Stratum 3 and 4 operation, major and minor alarms indicate that there is
a problem with the system synchronization references. These alarms are
resolved when the alarmed synchronization reference is restored.
The status synchronization and display synchronization commands are used
to determine the current system synchronization reference and the primary and
secondary references that are administered respectively.
Other commands associated with Synchronization Maintenance are disable
synchronization-switch and enable synchronization-switch. These
commands are used to disable the ability of Synchronization Maintenance to
switch between synchronization references and to enable this switching ability,
respectively. The set synchronization command is executed only after
synchronization has been disabled and is used to manually switch to a specific
synchronization reference. This command is useful to diagnose synchronization
problems by forcing a specific reference (DS1 or Tone-Clock) to be the system
synchronization reference to determine if a specific reference is providing a valid
timing signal. For Stratum 3 operation, only a TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack may
be specified. To switch synchronization to the Stratum 3 clock, use the enable
synchronization-switch command after verifying that the Stratum 3 clock is
wired correctly.
The system synchronization planner must avoid creating a timing loop when
administering the primary and secondary synchronization references in a
system. A timing loop exists whenever a system receives timing from another
system whose timing reference is directly or indirectly derived from itself. Timing
loops can lead to loss of digital data between systems that are exchanging data
with any system within the loop. An invalid timing signal is also generated by any
system within the loop, thus propagating the invalid timing signal to any
system(s) using a system within the loop as a synchronization reference. Figure
10-89 shows a timing loop and a correct distribution of timing between the
systems.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1329

"DEFINITY"

"DEFINITY"

COMMUNICATONS

COMMUNICATONS

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

GENERIC 2

GENERIC 2

"DEFINITY"

"DEFINITY"

COMMUNICATONS

COMMUNICATONS

"DEFINITY"

"DEFINITY"

COMMUNICATONS

COMMUNICATONS

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM

GENERIC 1

GENERIC 1

GENERIC 1

GENERIC 1

TIMING LOOP

CORRECT TIMING
DISTRIBUTION

NOTE:
SYNCHRONIZATION REFERENCE
(PRIMARY OR SECONDARY)

Figure 10-89.

Synchronization Timing Loop

A correctly designed network has no loops and each piece of equipment in the
network is supplied by a clock of equal or lower stratum (that is, the inputs to a
Stratum 3 clock should NEVER be from a Stratum 4 device). It is strongly
recommended that the network administrator be consulted before
administering any synchronization changes.
The yellow LEDs of the TN768 and 780 Tone-Clock circuit packs flash in a
specific pattern to indicate the status of the circuit pack. These flashing LED
patterns are used to indicate if a Tone-Clock circuit pack is deriving timing from
an external source or whether the Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing the timing
signal for the port network. The yellow LED patterns for the TN768 and 780
Tone-Clock circuit packs are as follows:
1. Yellow LED is on 2.7 seconds and off 0.3 seconds—This light pattern
indicates that an external timing source is being used as a
synchronization reference and the circuit pack is in Active mode.
2. Yellow LED is on 0.3 seconds and off 2.7 seconds—This light pattern
indicates that the local oscillator on the Tone-Clock circuit pack is being
used as a synchronization reference and the circuit pack is in Active
mode.
3. Yellow LED stays on—This light pattern indicates that the circuit pack has
been reset but no translation has been downloaded. This pattern indicates
the circuit pack is providing clocks and is in Active mode.
4. Yellow LED off is an indication that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is in
Standby mode (neither generating tones nor supplying clocks).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1330

5. The following two patterns may occur when the circuit pack is either in
Active or Standby mode. The best approach to determine the mode of the
circuit pack is to use the status system system technician command.
■

Maintenance running on the Standby circuit pack is indicated by
the following pattern (yellow and green LEDs flashing): LED on 0.1
seconds, off for 0.2 seconds, on for 0.1 seconds, off for 0.4
seconds, on for 0.4 seconds, off for 0.4 seconds.

■

Green flashing and yellow flashing in a pattern different than the
previously mentioned pattern indicates that maintenance is running
on the Active circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1331

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-402.

Synchronization Error Log Entries

Error
Type
0

1
1

1 (a)

18 (b)

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test synchronization

Any

None

WARNING/
MINOR(j)2

OFF

None

0

disable sync

WARNING

OFF

enable sync

1

Any

None

WARNING/
MINOR(j)2

OFF

None

513 (d)1

Any

None

WARNING/
MAJOR(j)2

OFF

None

None

MAJOR/
WARNING3

OFF

None

257 (c)

769 (e)
1793 (f)4

0-50

None

MAJOR/
WARNING

OFF

enable sync

2049 (g)
(i)4

0

None

WARNING

OFF

None

2305 (h)
(i)4

0

None

WARNING

OFF

None

Continued on next page

1.
2.
3.
4.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
This error type initially raises a Warning alarm. If this error type persists and alarms are not downgraded
on this MO due to the value of set options, then, after a period of time, a Minor or Major alarm is raised.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.
It may take up to one hour for these SYNC alarms to clear due to "leaky bucket" strategy.

Notes:
a. This error indicates a problem with the primary DS1 reference. It is cleared
when the primary reference is restored. The following steps should give an
indication of the source of the problem:
1.Check if the primary DS1 interface circuit pack is inserted in the carrier
via the list configuration board PCSS command.
2.Check the connection of the cable supplying the external timing source
to the primary DS1 interface circuit pack.
3.Test the primary DS1 interface circuit pack via the test board PCSS
long command. Check the Error Log for DS1-BD errors and refer to
the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1332

documentation to resolve any errors associated with the primary
DS1 interface circuit pack. If no errors are listed in the Error Log for
the primary DS1 interface circuit pack, continue with the following
steps.
4.Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the master port network via the
test tone/clock PC long command. Check the Error Log for
TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Test #148 passes
successfully. If Test #148 fails with an Error Code 2 through 32,
refer to “TDM-CLK” to resolve the problem. If not, continue with the
following steps.
5.Execute the disable synchronization-switch and the enable
synchronization-switch commands. These two commands (when
executed together) switch the system synchronization reference to
the primary DS1 interface circuit pack. Check the Error Log and
execute the status synchronization command to verify that the
primary DS1 interface circuit pack is still the system
synchronization reference. If the primary DS1 interface circuit pack
is not the system synchronization reference, and this is not a High
or Critical Reliability system, continue with the following step.
6.High or Critical Reliability system:
Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs on the master port network via the
set tone/clock PC command, and repeat the disable/enable
commands described in the previous step.
b. This error indicates that Synchronization Maintenance has been disabled
via the disable synchronization-switch command. Execute the enable
synchronization-switch command to enable Synchronization
Maintenance reference switching and to resolve this alarm.
c. This error indicates a problem with the secondary DS1 reference. It is
cleared when the secondary reference is restored. Refer to note (a) to
resolve this error substituting secondary for primary in the preceding
resolution steps.
d. This error indicates that the Tone-Clock circuit pack is providing the timing
source for the system. The primary and secondary (if administered) are
not providing a valid timing signal. Investigate errors 1 and 257 to resolve
this error.
e. This error indicates that the external Stratum 3 Clock fails to provide the
system timing reference. Refer to Stratum 3 Clock Maintenance document
to resolve the defective synchronization reference.
This error indicates excessive switching of system synchronization
references has occurred. When this error occurs, synchronization is
disabled and the Tone-Clock circuit pack (in the master port network)
becomes the synchronization reference for the system. Execute the
following steps to resolve this error:
1.Check for timing loops and resolve any loops that exist.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1333

2.Test the active Tone-Clock circuit pack in the master port network via the
test tone/clock PC long command. Check the Error Log for
TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM Bus Clock Test #148 passes
successfully. If Test #148 fails with an Error Code 2 through 32,
refer to the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance
documentation to resolve the problem. If not, continue with the
following steps.
3.High or Critical Reliability system: Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs on
the master port network via the set tone/clock PC command.
Standard system: Replace the primary and secondary (if
administered) DS1 Interface circuit packs.
4.Check for an error logged against the primary or secondary DS1 board.
If there is an error, follow the DS1 section to resolve the errors. If
there is not, enter enable sync, and wait for two to five minutes for
the primary sync source to come on-line.
In Release 5si + memory: This error indicates that some reference
switches have occurred. If there is not a major SYNC alarm, then
investigate other SYNC errors. If there is an active major SYNC
alarm, and if this is not a Stratum 3 system, then follow the steps
above.
f. This error indicates that the Expansion Interface Link is experiencing
timing slips. The two port networks are not synchronized. This error
increases the bit error rates for data transmission between port networks.
Verify that all the TDM/LAN Bus cables on the backplane are AT&T Parts
number AT&T SK00199-001 rather than flat ribbon cables. Also, check
that the bus terminators are the ZAHF V1 TDM/LAN Bus Terminator type.
Refer to note (i) for error resolution steps.
This error is cleared by a leaky bucket strategy and takes one hour to
clear (leak away) the error counter once it is alarmed. Therefore, it may
take up to one hour to clear the alarm after the problem is cleared.
g. This error indicates that the slave Tone-Clock circuit pack is experiencing
loss of signal. Refer to note (i) for error resolution steps.
h. The following steps should be executed to resolve error 2049 and 2305:
1.Check for timing loops, and resolve any loops that exist.
2.Check the Error Log for any active as well as resolved Expansion
Interface circuit pack errors and refer to EXP-INTF (Expansion
Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation to resolve any
errors found.
3.High or Critical Reliability system:
■

Switch Tone-Clock circuit packs in the slave port network via
the set tone/clock PC system technician command. The
error count for this particular error should start decrementing
once the problem is solved—if the count does not decrease
in 15 minutes the problem still persists.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1334
■

If the problem still persists, switch the Tone-Clock in the
slave port network back to the previous configuration. Then,
switch Expansion Interface Links via the set expansion-link
PCSS command.

■

If the problem still persists, switch the Expansion Interface
Links back to the previous configuration via the set
expansion-link PCSS. Then, switch the Tone-Clock circuit
packs in the master port network.

■

If the problem still persists, switch the Tone-Clock circuit
packs in the master port network back to the previous
configuration. If the system synchronization reference is a
Tone-Clock circuit pack, follow normal escalation
procedures. If the system synchronization reference is a DS1
interface circuit pack, administer a different DS1 interface
circuit pack as the primary synchronization reference.

4.Standard system:—Error 2049:
■

Test the Tone-Clock circuit packs in the master and slave
port networks via the test tone/clock PC long command.
Check the Error Log for TDM-CLK errors and verify that TDM
Bus Clock Test #148 passes successfully. If Test #148 fails
with an Error Code 2 through 32, refer to “TDM-CLK” to
resolve the problem. If not, continue with the following steps.

■

If the master and slave Tone-Clock circuit packs do not fail
TDM Bus Clock Test #150 (PPM Inquiry), replace the
Expansion Interface circuit packs in the system.

■

If the system synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock
circuit pack and the master Tone-Clock circuit pack fails
TDM Bus Clock Test #150, follow the steps listed in
“TDM-CLK” to replace the master Tone-Clock circuit pack.

■

If the system synchronization reference is a DS1 interface
circuit pack and the master Tone-Clock circuit pack fails
TDM Bus Clock Test #150, the primary or secondary (if
administered) synchronization references are not providing
valid timing signals for the system. Check the system
synchronization references administered, and follow the
steps outlined in note (a) if the primary synchronization
reference is providing timing for the system or note (c) if the
secondary synchronization reference is providing timing for
the system.

■

If the slave Tone-Clock circuit pack fails the TDM Bus Clock
Test #150 but the master Tone-Clock does not fail this test,
the master Tone-Clock circuit pack must be replaced. Follow
the Tone-Clock replacement steps listed in the “TDM-CLK”.
If SLIP errors remain follow SLIP ANALYSIS.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)

Page 10-1335

5.Standard system:—Error 2305:
■

Replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack in this port
network and the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the PPN
that is connected to this port network.

■

If the problem persists, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack
in the slave port network. Follow the steps listed in
“TDM-CLK” to replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack.

i. Noise on the DS1 line can cause transient alarms on synchronization.
Therefore, when a synchronization problem occurs causing error types 1,
257, or 513, a WARNING alarm is first raised for 15 to 20 minutes before
the alarm is upgraded to a MAJOR or MINOR alarm.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Test Synchronization Test, for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Order of Investigation
Test Synchronization Test (#417)

1.

X

Long Test
Sequence
X

D/ND1
ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Test Synchronization Test (#417)
This test updates all the Synchronization Maintenance component circuit packs
with the correct information regarding their role in providing synchronization for
the system. All the Tone-Clock, Expansion Interface, and DS1 Interface circuit
packs in the system are updated via this test. This test will either pass or abort.
Table 10-403.
Error
Code

TEST #417 Test Synchronization Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYNC (Synchronization)
Table 10-403.
Error
Code

Page 10-1336

TEST #417 Test Synchronization Test — Continued
Test
Result

PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The Synchronization Maintenance component circuit pack parameters have
been successfully updated. The system should be synchronized after
successful execution of this test. If synchronization problems still exist, refer
to the Error Log to obtain information regarding the source of the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

Page 10-1337

SYS-PRNT (System Printer)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

SYS-PRNT

MINOR

test sp-link l

System Printer

SYS-PRNT

WARNING

release sp-link

System Printer

The Report Scheduler feature provides the capability to schedule selected
administration commands to be printed by an asynchronous System Printer
(SYS-PRNT) or sent to a Personal Computer (PC). The System Printer Link to this
external device can be administered either as a data extension or to the EIA port
on the switch Processor (PROCR) circuit pack which provides a standard EIA
232C interface.
System Printer Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link
between the system and an external SYS-PRNT output device. The strategy
includes a set of tests for detection of errors during normal operation,
troubleshooting actions, and alarms for serious problems. System Printer Link
Maintenance uses a try-and-wait mechanism for maintaining the SYS-PRNT link.
If the link set-up fails, a minor alarm is raised for service attention. A warning
alarm is raised when the SPE has been busied out. A maximum of two link retry
attempts is made. After the second attempt, set-up attempts are only made by
the application software (that is, the 15-minute timer fires and jobs are printed
unless an immediate job was entered.) After two unsuccessful attempts to
establish the link, a MINOR alarm is raised for service attention. If the System
Printer Link is torn down due to an error, System Printer Link Maintenance raises
a MINOR alarm but does not attempt to bring up the System Printer Link.
In DEFINITY Generic 1, the following physical configurations are supported for
the System Printer Link:
a. from the EIA port on the Processor circuit pack to a SYS-PRNT output
device via the standard EIA 232C interface
b. from a data channel (DATA-CHL) on the Network Control circuit pack
(DATA-BD) to a data extension where the SYS-PRNT output device
connects via the standard EIA 232C interface
The data extension can be a(n) PDM, MPDM, DTDM, or ADU. The PDM, MPDM,
or DTDM connects to a Digital Line (DIG-LINE) on the TN754 or TN754B Digital
Line circuit pack (DIG-BD); the ADU connects to a Data Line (DAT-LINE) of the
TN726 Data Line circuit pack (DT-LN-BD).
System Printer Link Maintenance does not cover the elements comprising the
SYS-PRNT physical link; that is, the external SYS-PRNT output device, the EIA
port on the Processor circuit pack, the Data Module (PDM/MPDM/DTDM) and the
Digital Line of TN754 or TN754B Digital Line circuit pack, the ADU and the Data
Line of TN726 Data Line circuit pack, and the data channels on the TN777

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

Page 10-1338

Network Control circuit pack. If System Printer Link Maintenance cannot restore
the System Printer Link, the maintenance tests of these individual components of
the System Printer Link must be executed to diagnose faults.

Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link
The following procedures should be followed to restore the System Printer Link:
1. Determine the status of the System Printer Link via the status sp-link
command. Verify that the System Printer Link is not busied out for
maintenance. On the System Printer Link Status Form, this is indicated by
a "no" in the "Maintenance Busy?" field. If the System Printer Link has been
busied out, issue the release sp-link command. If the link is "down,"
proceed to Step 2.
2. Issue the display system feature command to determine the destination
of the System Printer Link.
If the destination is an extension number, enter the status data-module
 command and verify that the data extension is
in-service/idle. If the data extension is NOT available, refer to the
"Port/Channel Number" field on the "Data-Module Status" Form. Look for
errors and/or alarms on the circuit pack with which this extension is
associated. Refer to the appropriate MO documentation for recommended
repair strategy. Continue with Step 3.
If the destination is eia, look for PR-MAINT errors in the Hardware Error
Log. If errors are present, refer to Maintenance/Tape Processor
Maintenance documentation, and continue with Step 5.
3. Determine if a data channel on the Network Control circuit pack is
in-service/idle as follows:
a. Use the list data-module command to find out the extension
numbers of the data channels on the Network Control circuit pack.
(There is a maximum of 4. They are listed as "netcon" on the Active
SPE. Ignore the Standby data channels.)
b. Enter the status data-module  command to verify that
at least one Active data channel is in-service/idle.
4. If four data channels are administered and none are available, then look
for DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD errors in the Hardware Error Log. If
errors are present, refer to these MO sections for recommended
maintenance strategy. When problems (if any) with
DATA-CHL/DATA-CON/DATA-BD have been resolved, continue with Step
5.
If fewer than four data channels are administered, then use the add
data-module command to add a network control data module to the
system.
5. Verify the availability of the external SYS-PRNT output device as follows:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

Page 10-1339

Make sure that the SYS-PRNT output device is on-line and
ready-for-service. Check the physical connectivity between the Data
Module and the SYS-PRNT output device or between the EIA port on the
backplane of the switch and the SYS-PRNT output device.
6. Verify that there are less than three active logins to the system. If this
condition exists, a login session must be terminated before the System
Printer Link can be established.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the System Printer Link be busied out before
executing maintenance tests over objects which compose the System
Printer Link. If the System Printer Link is busied out, then all System Printer
Link maintenance actions are deactivated.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-404.

SYS-PRNT Maintenance Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test sp-link

18 (a)

0

busyout sp-link

WARNING

OFF

release sp-link

257 (b)

1 to 6

Link Retry Test
(#215)

MINOR/
WARNING2

OFF

test sp-link l

513 (c)

0

None

MINOR

OFF

test sp-link

1.
2.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. System Technician has busied out the System Printer Link.
b. A failure was encountered while attempting to set up the System Printer
Link. This attempt could have been initiated by either the Report
Scheduler software or link maintenance [automatic link retry or the as the
result of a Link Retry Test (#215) request]. The Aux Data field contains the
following diagnostic information to aid in the correction of the failure:
1.unavailability of system resources (too many active logins to the
system).
2.no data channels (DATA-CHLs) available on the Network Control circuit
pack (DATA-BD).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

Page 10-1340

3.4- time-out during setup attempt. Most likely due to problem with
physical link or printer status.
4.internal system error. Most likely temporary/sporadic failure.
5.the data module the printer is trying to use is busy with another call. Use
the Status data module command to determine when the port is
available for testing.
Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link’’ section for
recommended maintenance strategy.
c. The SYS-PRNT was interrupted because of one of the following reasons:
1.the cable to the SYS-PRNT output device is disconnected;
2.the SYS-PRNT output device is powered off;
3.the data extension to which the SYS-PRNT output device connects has
been busied out;
4.internal software error.
Check the connectivity of the wires and cables among the wall jacket,
data module, and SYS-PRNT output device. Follow the instructions
provided in the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link’’
section.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
When inspecting errors in the system and deciding which ones to address,
always investigate errors in the order they are presented in the table below. By
clearing error codes associated with the Link Retry Test, for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Link Tear Down Test (#213)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Link Retry Test (#215)

X

X

ND

Link Tear Down Test (#213)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Link Tear Down Test (#213)
This test is destructive.
The Link Tear Down Test disconnects the existing link between DEFINITY
Generic 1 and the external SYS-PRNT output device. If the link has been

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)

Page 10-1341

disconnected already, this test just returns PASS. All resources allocated for a
System Printer Link are released after this test.
Table 10-405. TEST #213 Link Tear Down Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

40, 50

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 2 times.

1010

ABORT

The System Printer Link has been busied out.
1. Enter the release sp-link command to release the System Printer Link
from the busyout state.
2. Reissue the test sp-link long command to execute the test.

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 2 times.

PASS

The System Printer Link is torn down or a Short Test Sequence was
executed and the link was not torn down.

Continued on next page

Link Retry Test (#215)
The Link Retry Test sends a message to the SYS-PRNT software process either
(1) to make a data call to the extension to which the SYS-PRNT output device
connects OR (2) to open the EIA port to the SYS-PRNT output device. If the
System Printer Link is already up, this test passes without making a data call or
opening the EIA port.
Table 10-406.
Error
Code
10, 20

TEST #215 Link Retry Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 2 times.

30

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link’’ section
for recommended maintenance strategy.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYS-PRNT (System Printer)
Table 10-406.
Error
Code
1010

Page 10-1342

TEST #215 Link Retry Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The System Printer Link has been busied out.
1. Enter the release sp-link command to release the System Printer Link
from the busyout state.
2. Reissue the test sp-link long command to execute the test.

FAIL

The System Printer Link CANNOT be established.
1. Refer to the ‘‘Procedures for Restoring the System Printer Link’’ section
for recommended maintenance strategy.

PASS

The System Printer Link is up.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYSTEM (System)

Page 10-1343

SYSTEM (System)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
SYSTEM

1.

Alarm Level
None

Initial Command to Run1
None

Full Name of MO
SYSTEM

SYSTEM only has errors associated with it and thus only appears in the Error Log and not
in the Alarm Log. There are no tests that can be run with SYSTEM.

SYSTEM is generally used when software encounters a problem with either
hardware or itself and requests a restart to clear the problem. For example, if
there is a loss of clock in a system with high or critical reliability, the system asks
for a Reset 2 to switch to the other clock. SYSTEM also logs errors that cannot be
associated with any single process. This is not a problem. The initcauses log
should also confirm that a software-requested restart was performed.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
The Aux Data field may be 0 or the return code from a bad software call, and the
following examples in no way exhaust the possibilities. Often, two errors are
logged at the same time for each problem.
Table 10-407.
Error
Type
1

System Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

0

Any

8 (a)

0

None

9 (b)

Any

None

10 (c)

Any

None

0

21 (d)
Any

None

356 (f)

Any

None

601 (g)

None

602 (h)

None

603 (i)

None

1.

Any

On/Off
Board
Any

Test to Clear Value
None

None

355 (e)

9012 (j)

Alarm
Level

Any

None

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
SYSTEM (System)

Page 10-1344

Notes:
a. A System Restart Level 3 was requested.
b. A System Restart Level 2 was requested. This can happen due to a loss of
tones (due to a faulty Tone-Clock circuit pack).
c. A System Restart Level 1 was requested.
d. A process trapped.
e. A Restart Level 2 occurred due to a power loss.
f. A Restart Level 2 occurred due to a tone clock loss.
g. An error occurred during initialization.
h. An error occurred while loading translations and the system requested a
Restart Level 3.
i. A process was reset.
j. In a Generic 1 system configured with High or Critical Reliability, a
scheduled SPE-interchange was blocked because a tape operation was
in progress.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1345

TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

TAPE

MAJOR

test tape long1

Tape Unit

TAPE

MINOR

test tape long

Tape Unit

TAPE

WARNING

test tape long

Tape Unit

1.

This alarm occurs only at power-up time or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5 when
the system cannot load all translations from tape. Refer to the footnote
associated with Error Type 3329 in the "Hardware Error Log Entries and "Test to
Clear Values" section.

NOTE:
Alarms on the TAPE, PROCR, and PR-MAINT MOs are indicated by the red
LED on the Processor circuit pack.
The Tape Unit consists of a Wangtek FAD3500 series tape drive mounted on the
TN774 Tape Drive circuit pack, which is controlled by the TN773 Processor
circuit pack. For tape controller functions, the processor uses memory on the
TN770 Memory circuit pack.
The Tape Unit is used to:
■

Boot the system

■

Save or load translations and announcements

■

Save the Error Logs

■

Save core dumps

There are two versions of the test tape system technician command that can be
used to initiate maintenance tests on the Tape Unit: one for Standard systems
and one for High and Critical Reliability systems. In a Standard system, the
command line entry to test the TAPE (Tape) MO is test tape [short/long] [repeat
n/clear]. In a High or Critical Reliability Option system, the command line entry to
test the TAPE (Tape) MO is test tape [short/long] [a/b] [repeat n/clear].
In a High or Critical Reliability system, if an alarm is raised against the Tape Unit,
the alarm also indicates the carrier (either 1A or 1B), depending on which SPE
has the problem.
NOTE:
CLEANING THE TAPE DRIVE HEAD IS VERY IMPORTANT because a tape
drive head with abrasive particles can permanently damage a new tape. In

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1346

addition, a worn tape may leave abrasive particles in the tape drive head.
Before implementing any of the following repair procedures, the tape head
of all the tape drive units in the system should be cleaned. Follow the
directions given in the ‘‘Tape Drive Head Cleaning Procedure’’ section.

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Tape Unit Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

0 (a)

0

Any

Any

Any

test tape

1 (b)

Any

Tape Status Test
(#69)

MINOR

OFF

test tape r 2

257 (c)

Any

Tape Status Test
(#69)

WARNING

OFF

test tape r 2

513

Any

Tape Reset Test
(#67)

MINOR

OFF

test tape l r 2

1025

Any

Tape Diagnostic
Test (#66)

MINOR

OFF

test tape r 2

1281

Any

Tape Diagnostic
Test (#66)

MINOR

OFF

test tape r 3

1537

Any

Tape Diagnostic
Test (#66)

MINOR

OFF

test tape r 3

1793 (d)

Any

None

MINOR

OFF

see (d)

1828 (e)

Any

None

MINOR

OFF

see (e)

2049 (f)

Any

None

WARNING

OFF

see (f)

2051 (o)

Any

Tape Read/Write
Test (#65)

WARNING

OFF

see (o)

2084 (g)

Any

None

WARNING

OFF

see (g)

2561

Any

Tape DMA Latch
Test (#230)

MINOR

ON

test tape r 3

2817 (h)

Any

Tape Read/Write
Test (#65)

MINOR

OFF

test tape l r 2

3329 (i)

Any

Save the
Translations

MINOR

OFF

see (i)

3841 (j)

Any

Save the
Translations

MINOR

OFF

save translation

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1347

Tape Unit Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear
Value

3842 (k)

Any

Save the
Translations

MINOR

OFF

save translation

3843 (l)

Any

Save the
Translations

MINOR

OFF

save translation

3984(m)

Any

Save Translations

MINOR

OFF

save translation

10498
(n)

0

Save the
Translations

10508
(o)

0

Save the
Translations

Associated Test

Notes:
a. Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test
Sequence. Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the
recommended procedures.
b. Error 1 indicates that the tape unit does not recognize that a cartridge is
inserted into the tape drive. If, in fact, there is no cartridge in the drive, the
problem can be corrected by simply inserting a cartridge. Follow the
directions given in "Error Type #1 - Repair Procedure."
If there is a tape cartridge inserted into the tape drive, the problem is that
certain tape or tape drive failures may cause the tape drive to erroneously
report "missing tape" errors (tape Error Type #1 OR Aux Data value 9024).
Since this error may be the result of a problem with either the tape or the
tape drive unit, the tape cartridge should be replaced first. If the problem
persists, the tape unit should be replaced. When this error is first
detected, follow "Error Type #1 - Repair Procedure."
Error Type #1 - Repair Procedure:
1.Replace the tape cartridge (if one exists) in the tape unit associated with
this error with a new tape cartridge.
2.Issue the test tape [a/b] repeat 2 command for the tape drive unit that
has the error.
3.If all the tests pass, assume that the problem has been resolved.
If some of the tests fail, resolve the corresponding errors, and
repeat step #2.
4.If translations have not already been saved onto the new tape, issue the
save translations command.
5.If the system contains recorded announcements, issue the save
announcements command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1348

If Error Type #1 reappears and becomes a chronic problem, the fault may
be with the tape drive unit, and it could be intermittent in nature. In this
case, replace the tape drive unit with a new tape drive unit and repeat
"Error 1 - Repair Procedure." Refer to Step 5 of the ‘‘Tape Maintenance
and Repair Procedures’’ section for directions on how to replace the tape
drive unit.
c. Error Type #257 indicates that the tape cartridge is write-protected. To
disable the tape write-protect feature, move the sliding write-protect
switch (which is labeled RECORD) on the tape cartridge away from the
RECORD position. The RECORD position is indicated by an arrow pointing
to the left. Error Type #257 can then be cleared by issuing the test tape
[a/b] repeat 2 command for the tape drive unit that has the error.
d. Error Type #1793 is reported whenever the system software detects an
uncorrectable tape block error during a read or write operation on the
tape.
An uncorrectable tape error is one in which a block error persists during
a read or write operation to the tape. Errors of this type were unable to be
corrected by several attempts at rereading or rewriting the block on the
tape. This type of error is most likely the result of one or more hard errors
on the tape (for example, a scratch or a hole in the tape that spans
multiple sectors).
The auxiliary data field indicates the file on the tape in which the error was
detected. Refer to Table C for a list of possible auxiliary data field values
and the corresponding tape file.
Since this error may be the result of a problem with either the tape or the
tape drive unit, the tape cartridge should be changed first. If the problem
persists, the tape unit should be changed. When this error is first
detected, follow "Error Type #1793 - Repair Procedure."
Error Type #1793 - Repair Procedure:
1.Replace the tape cartridge in the tape unit on which the error occurred
with a new tape cartridge.
2.[G1.2, G3iV1.1-286] Issue the test tape [a/b] long clear command for
the associated tape drive unit.
[G1.1] Issue the test tape [a/b] long repeat 3 command for the
associated tape drive unit. If the system release is earlier than
G1.1, refer to Note (o) also.
3.If all tests pass, assume that the problem has been resolved.
If some tests fail, resolve those errors and repeat Step #2.
4.If translations have not already been saved onto the new tape, issue the
save translations command.
5.If the system contains recorded announcements, issue the save
announcements command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1349

If this error reappears and becomes a chronic problem, the fault may be
with the tape drive unit, and it could be intermittent in nature. In this case,
replace the tape drive unit with a new tape drive unit and repeat "Error
Type #1793 - Repair Procedure." Refer to Step 5 of the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’ section for directions on how to
replace the tape drive unit.
e. Error Type #1828 is reported under the following conditions;
■

[G3iV1, EDI 7.0 and earlier] This error is never reported.

■

[G3iV1, EDI 6.0 and earlier] Whenever Test #692 (Tape Block Error
Test) fails due to an uncorrectable tape block error.

■

[G1.1] Whenever any maintenance test fails due to an
uncorrectable tape block error.

To clear Error Type #1828, follow the procedures given in the footnotes for
Error Type #1793.
f. Error Type #2049 is reported under the following conditions;
■

[G3iV1 EDI 7.0 and later] This error is never reported.

■

[G1.1, G3iV1 EDI 6.0 and earlier] Error Type #2049 is reported
whenever the software detects a correctable tape block error
during a read or write operation on the tape.
A correctable tape error is one in which a block error is detected
but corrected during a read or write to the tape. This type of error
may be caused by either a soft tape error (for example, the tape
head is jiggled while reading or writing data), or by a hard tape
error (for example, a scratch or a hole in the tape that affects only a
single sector of the tape).
The auxiliary data field indicates the file on the tape in which the
error was detected. Refer to Table C for a list of possible auxiliary
data field values and the corresponding tape file.
With this error, the tape is fully functional but is in danger of
developing an uncorrectable tape error. The tape cartridge should
be changed when it is convenient to do so.
To clear Error Type #2049, follow the procedures given in the
footnotes for Error Type #1793.

g. Error Type #2084 is reported under the following conditions;
■

[G3iV1 EDI 7.0 and later] This error is never reported.

■

[G3iV1 EDI 6.0 and earlier] Whenever Test #692 (Tape Block Error
Test) fails due to a correctable tape block error.

■

[G1.1] Whenever any maintenance test fails due to an correctable
tape block error.

To clear Error Type #2084, follow the procedures given in the footnotes for
Error Type #1793.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1350

h. [G1.1, G3iV1 EDI 6.0 and earlier] Error Type #2817 is reported whenever
the tape read/write test fails. The auxiliary data field indicates the cause of
the test failure as follows:

9032 –

Significant portion of the scratch area on
the tape cannot be read.

9033 –

Significant portion of the scratch area on
tape cannot be written.

9034 –

Significant portion of the scratch area on
the tape cannot be read or written.

i. Error Type #3329 indicates that an error occurred while loading
translations. This error and the corresponding alarm occurs at power-up
or on a Reset System 3, 4, or 5 if the system cannot load translations. This
error results in a MAJOR alarm if translations are not already loaded and in
a MINOR alarm otherwise. If the system does not contain valid
translations, this alarm will invoke Emergency Transfer.
Standard System
NOTE:
The following repair procedure assumes that no major alarms exist
on the PROCR (Processor) or MEM-BD (Memory) circuit packs. If
any of these alarms exists, resolve them before trying to resolve this
alarm.
Error Type #3329—Repair Procedure (Standard System):
1.Look in the Hardware Error Log for Error Type #1793. If this error exists,
replace the tape cartridge with a backup cartridge that has valid
system translations.
2.[G1.2, G3iV1.1-286] Issue the test tape long clear command.
3.[G1.1] Issue the test tape long repeat 3 command.
4.If all tests except for Test #505 pass, assume that the problem has been
resolved. Test #505 will fail if a successful load translations has not
occurred.
If some other tests besides Test #505 fail, resolve those errors, and
repeat Step #2.
5.Issue the reset system 3 command.
6.Issue the list configuration software command.
7.If the tape resident translations date is "none," insert a backup tape
cartridge and go back to Step #2 (try up to 2 backup tapes).
8.If the problem is not resolved, follow normal escalation procedures.
High and Critical Reliability Systems

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1351

NOTE:
In a High or Critical Reliability system, the following repair procedure
assumes that no major alarms exist on the PROCR (Processor),
MEM-BD (Memory), or DUPINT (Duplication Interface) circuit packs
or on the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) MO. If any of these alarms exists,
resolve them before trying to resolve this alarm.
Both Active and Standby SPE Tapes alarmed
This situation arises whenever translations cannot be loaded on either
SPE. If the system was powered up, both tapes were alarmed at almost
the same time as a result of this error. It is very possible that no
SPE-Interchange occurred. However, if the system was restarted as a
result of a reset system [3 | 4 | 5] command, and when an alarm was
raised against the Active SPE as a result of Error Type #3329, a Level 3
SPE-Interchange automatically occurred, and the "new" Active SPE
attempted to load translations. When this SPE failed to load translations,
its tape was alarmed as well.
Error Type #3329 - Repair Procedure #1 (High or Critical Reliability
System):
1.Issue the status system command to determine which SPE
(A or B), is the Active SPE. It is labeled as "active."
2.Use "Error Type #3329—Repair Procedure (Standard System)" to ensure
that the tape and tape unit in the Active SPE are functioning
properly and to read in translations.
3.Log into the Manager I terminal again and issue the display alarms
command to see if any alarms were raised against the Active SPE
tape.
a. If a major alarm against the Active SPE tape now exists,
escalate the problem.
b. If minor alarms against the Active SPE tape now exist,
resolve those alarms before continuing with Step #5.
c. If no alarm exists against the Active SPE tape, continue with
Step #4.
4.Replace the tape in the Standby SPE. If a new tape is used, translations
must have been successfully saved in order to clear Error Type
#3329.
5.Issue the refresh spe-standby command. It may be necessary to issue
this command multiple times. However, if you have issued the
refresh spe-standby command five times, and if the Standby SPE
is still not labeled "Standby" on the Status System Form, escalate
the problem.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1352

6.The Standby SPE must be in Standby Mode before issuing the test tape
[a|b] long command. If the Standby SPE is not in Standby Mode,
the additional tests needed to clear Error Type #3329 are not run.
These additional tests also cause the test tape [a|b] long
command to take longer to execute.
7.Test the Standby tape by issuing the test tape [a|b] long command.
Issuing this command whenever the SPE contains an active Error
Type #3329 causes the SPE to undergo a COLD 1 restart. This
restart attempts to load translations and, if successful, it clears the
error.
8.If the problem is not resolved, follow normal escalation procedures.
Only one SPE Tape alarmed
A typical scenario that results in a single minor TAPE alarm follows: The
system boots up on an SPE and cannot read in translations. As a result, a
major alarm against TAPE is raised. The system performs a Level 3
SPE-interchange and then reads in translations from the tape on the "new"
Active SPE. At this point, the major TAPE alarm is downgraded to a minor
TAPE alarm.
Error Type #3329 - Repair Procedure #2 (High or Critical Reliability
System):
1.The tape against which Error Type #3329 has been logged should
reside in the Standby SPE. Issue the status system command to
determine which SPE is active.
If Error Type #3329 is logged against the Active SPE, follow Steps 1
through 3 of "Error Type #3329—Repair Procedure #1 (High and
Critical Reliability Systems)."
If Error Type #3329 is logged against the Standby SPE, follow Steps
4 through 7 of "Error Type 3329 - Repair Procedure #1 (High and
Critical Reliability Systems)."
2.Error while saving translations. Resolve other tape errors, and reissue
the save translations command.
j. Error Type #3841 indicates that a save translations operation failed
because the tape was in use. Wait two minutes, then issue the save
translations command. Try this a maximum of five times.
k. Error Type #3842 indicates a save translation failure due to a tape-related
problem. The following procedure is recommended to clear this error.
Error Type 3842 - Repair Procedure:
1.Look in the Hardware Error Log for Error Type #1793. If this error exists,
replace the tape cartridge in the tape unit on which the error
occurred with a new cartridge.
2.[G1.2 and later] Issue the test tape [a/b] long clear command for the
associated tape drive unit.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1353

[G1.1 and earlier] Issue the test tape [a/b] long repeat 3 command
for the associated tape drive unit.
3.If all tests up to Test #505 pass, assume that the problem has been
resolved. Test #505 will fail if a successful save translations has not
occurred since the original failure.
If any tests other than Test #505 fail, resolve those errors and
repeat Step #3.
4.Issue the save translations command.
5.If the system contains recorded announcements, issue the save
announcements command.
l. Error Type #3843 indicates that during daily scheduled maintenance, the
automatic save translation failed. The failure occurred most likely as a
result of a hardware problem rather than a tape problem.
To clear Error Type #3843, follow the procedures given in the footnotes for
Error Type #3842.
m. [G1.1 and earlier] Translations were not saved on the tape(s)
corresponding to the port field(s) indicated. In this case, the port field
points to the Standby SPE at the time the error occurred. Resolve other
tape errors, and then issue the test tape long and save translations
commands, respectively.
n. [G1.1 and earlier] If these errors occur in conjunction with Error Type
#3329, a major alarm is logged against the error type. To resolve this
alarm, follow the instructions for Error Type #3329.
o. [G1.1 and earlier] "Leaky Bucket" strategy for Error Types #1793, #1828,
#2049, #2051, and #2084 on the Active SPE. Whenever any of these
errors appear in the Error Log, they will be automatically resolved within 48
hours if the errors do not recur within that period. In G1.0, this is the only
way these errors can be cleared (without resetting the system).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1354

System Technician Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tape
DMA Latch Test for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short
Test
Sequence

Tape Reset Test (#67)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Tape DMA Latch Test (#230)

X

X

ND

Tape Diagnostic Test (#66)

X

X

ND

Tape Read/Write Test (#65) (a)

X

ND

Tape Block Error Test (#692) (b)

X

ND

X

ND

Tape Translation Status Test (#505)

X

ND

TAPE-DAT Tape Consistency Test (#421) (c)

X

ND

Tape Status Test (#69)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. The Tape Read/Write Test only runs in the following software releases;
■

G1

■

G3iV1, EDI 6.0 and earlier.

b. The Tape Block Error Test runs only in software release G3iV1, EDI 15.0
and earlier.
c. Refer to TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency) Maintenance documentation for
the description of this test.

Tape Read/Write Test (#65)
The purpose of this test is to exercise the hardware read/write circuitry and the
basic functionality of the tape cartridge. This test is done by reading 22 blocks of
data and by then writing 22 blocks of data into reserved space on the tape
cartridge.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1355

NOTE:
This test does not check for tape cartridge data consistency, nor does it
check the integrity of every block on tape.
Table 10-408.

TEST #65 Tape Read/Write Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
1030
and
2011 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

9000’s

ABORT
or FAIL

Refer to Table A in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

Any
Others

ABORT
or FAIL

Refer to Table B in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

PASS

All tape hardware is in good working order. Passing this
test does not guarantee that every single data block on
the tape cartridge can be read or written to.

Description/ Recommendation

Continued on next page

Tape Diagnostic Test (#66)
This test activates the diagnostic tests built into the Maintenance/Tape Processor
(MTP) firmware on the TN773 Processor circuit pack. The test verifies the basic
read/write capability of the tape drive and tape cartridge. Also, the test performs
controller/MTP hardware diagnostics.
The test reads from the tape and performs write verification testing by writing
data into a maintenance block and reading it back. It also performs a tape drive
head step check by advancing the tape drive head through all even streams on
the tape (streams 0 through 18) to make sure the head is operational.
The test does not test every data block on the tape.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-409.

Page 10-1356

TEST #66 Tape Diagnostic Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

9000’s

ABORT
or FAIL

Refer to Table A in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

Any
Others

ABORT
or FAIL

Refer to Table B in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

PASS

This is a comprehensive test of the Tape Unit. The test
verifies that the tape drive is in good working order.

Description/ Recommendation

Continued on next page

Tape Reset Test (#67)
This test resets the tape portion of the Processor on the Maintenance/Tape
Processor (PR-MAINT), and it resets the shared RAM on the Processor circuit
pack (TN770). The test can pass when no drive is present because it never
accesses the tape drive.
Table 10-410.

TEST #67 Tape Reset Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

9000’s

FAIL

Refer to Table A in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

Any
Others

FAIL

Refer to Table B in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

PASS

Communication with the tape processor is possible at a
very basic level.

Description/ Recommendation

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1357

Status Request Test (#69)
This test requests the Maintenance/Tape Processor (MTP) firmware on the TN773
Processor circuit pack for the current Tape Unit status and displays the results.
Table 10-411.

TEST #69 Status Request Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

9000’s

ABORT

Refer to Table A in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

Any
Others

FAIL

Refer to Table B in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

PASS

This test verifies the basic communication between the
Processor and the Tape Drive circuit pack.

Description/ Recommendation

Continued on next page

Tape DMA Latch Test (#230)
Also known as the Tape Interface Test, this test checks the shared RAM on the
TN770 Memory circuit pack. The test also checks the communication paths on
the TN773 Processor circuit pack.
Table 10-412.

TEST #230 DMA Latch Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

23001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

Description/ Recommendation

1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-412.
Error
Code

Page 10-1358

TEST #230 DMA Latch Test — Continued

Test
Result

23002
to
23005

FAIL

23006

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Hardware not responding.
1. Follow the instructions provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’ section.
Could not send a test message to MTP.
1. Repeat the same test again.
2. Look for PROCR and MEM-BD errors in the Error
Log. If such errors are present, refer to PROCR
(80286 Processor circuit pack) and MEM-BD
(Memory) Maintenance documentation.
3. If no tests on the Memory circuit pack or Processor
circuit pack fail, escalate the problem.

23007

FAIL

Operation timed out.
1. Do the steps below following the directions in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. Issue the test tape long command.
3. If the test fails, make sure tape is fully inserted.
4. If the test continues to fail, clean the tape head and
retest.
5. If fail, swap tape and retest.
6. If the test still fails, swap tape unit, use original tape
and retest.
7. If the problem still exists, escalate the problem.

23008

FAIL

MTP indicates a test failure.
1. Follow the instructions provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists, escalate the problem.

23009
to
23017

FAIL

Hardware problem. Problem accessing test Memory
locations #1, #2, and #3.
1. Follow the procedures provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-412.

Page 10-1359

TEST #230 DMA Latch Test — Continued

Error
Code

Test
Result

9000’s

ABORT

Refer to Table A, ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
the specific error code.

Any
Others

ABORT

Refer to Table B, ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
the specific error code.

PASS

If this test passes, the TN770 Memory and the TN773
Processor circuit packs are in good working order. This
is not a test of the tape cartridge or of the TN774 Tape
Drive circuit pack.

Description/ Recommendation

Continued on next page

Tape Translation Status Test (#505)
This test checks whether the TAPE is currently alarmed due to the failure of a
load translation or save translation attempt on the TAPE.
Table 10-413.

TEST #505 Tape Save Translation Status Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
1030
and
2011,
2013
to
2051

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-413.
Error
Code
2012

Page 10-1360

TEST #505 Tape Save Translation Status Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
1. Do the steps below following the directions in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. Issue the test tape long command. If the test
passes, issue the save translations command to
verify condition is clear.
3. If the test fails, make sure tape is fully inserted.
4. If the test continues to fail, clean the tape head and
retest.
5. If fail, swap tape and retest.
6. If the test still fails, swap tape unit, use original tape
and retest.
7. If the problem still exists, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The tape is currently alarmed because a save
translation or a load translation attempt failed on this
tape. Look for Errors Types #3329, #3841, #3842, and
#3843 in the Hardware Error Log and resolve these
errors by following the procedures provided in the
"Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values"
section.

PASS

The last load translation and (if any) save translation
attempts were successful on this tape.

Continued on next page

Tape Block Error Test (#692)
This test is performed by rereading the list of tape blocks that have been
reported by the software to contain correctable (Error Type #2049) or
uncorrectable (Error Type #1793) block errors.
A correctable tape error is one in which a block error is detected but corrected
during a read or write to the tape. This type of error may be caused by either a
soft tape error (for example, the tape head is jiggled while reading or writing
data) or by a hard tape error (for example, a scratch or a hole in the tape that
affects only a single sector of the tape).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1361

An uncorrectable tape error is one in which a block error persists during a read
or write operation to the tape. Errors of this type are unable to be corrected by
several attempts at rereading or rewriting the block on the tape. This type of error
is most likely the result of one or more hard errors on the tape (for example, a
scratch or a hole in the tape that spans multiple sectors).
This test passes only if no block errors of any type are detected after the test
completes. Otherwise, the test fails and returns an error code of the form "x0y,"
where:
x indicates the number of uncorrectable block errors detected by the test
[0-5]
y indicates the number of correctable block errors detected by the test
[0-5]
The software stores the block location for at most five errors of each type.
Table 10-414.

TEST #692 Tape Block Error Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1029 to
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance
documentation for a description of these error codes.

9000’s

ABORT

Refer to Table A in ‘‘Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes
Tables’’ and follow the recommended repair strategy for
specific Aux Data.

x0y

FAIL

“x” indicates the number of uncorrectable block errors
detected by the test [0-5]. “y” indicates the number of
correctable block errors detected by the test [0-5]. Look
for Error Types #1793, #1828, #2049, and #2084 in the
Hardware Error Log and resolve these errors by
following the procedures provided in the “Hardware
Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values” section.

Description/ Recommendation

NOTE:
If the value of “x” is “0,” only the value of “y” is
displayed.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-414.
Error
Code
100

Page 10-1362

TEST #692 Tape Block Error Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
1. Do the steps below following the directions in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. Issue the test tape long command.
3. If the test fails, make sure tape is fully inserted.
4. If the test continues to fail, clean the tape head and
retest.
5. If fail, swap tape and retest.
6. If the test still fails, swap tape unit, use original tape
and retest.
7. If the problem still exists, escalate the problem.

PASS

No block errors are detected.

Continued on next page

Tape Unit Aux Data/Error Codes Tables
Table 10-415.
Aux Data/
Error Codes

Table A: Tape Unit Aux Data Table

Explanation

9002

Internal system error.

9003

Hardware not responding.

Strategy
Escalate the problem.
1. Follow the instructions provided in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9004 9005

Internal system error.

Escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-415.
Aux Data/
Error Codes
9009

Page 10-1363

Table A: Tape Unit Aux Data Table — Continued

Explanation
Operation timed out.

Strategy
1. Follow the instructions provided in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9010

Hardware not responding.

9011

Internal system error.

9012

Tape already in use.

Escalate the problem.
1. If the Tape Unit is in use (that is, the
yellow LED on the tape drive is on and
there is tape cartridge motion), wait
until the first request is complete. If
there does not appear to be tape
motion and/or the yellow LED on the
tape drive is not on, go to next step.
2. Retry the test tape command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five
times. If the command continues to
abort, escalate the problem.

9013

Tape drive self-test failed.

1. Follow the instructions provided in the
‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9015

Test detected hardware
failure.

9017

Could NOT reset the tape
drive.

9020

! WARNING:
The tape cartridge is
starting to wear, but it
is still functional.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-415.
Aux Data/
Error Codes
9023

Page 10-1364

Table A: Tape Unit Aux Data Table — Continued

Explanation
Write-protected tape.

Strategy
1. Disable the write-protect switch on the
tape cartridge.
2. Check the power by performing Step 1
of the ‘‘Tape Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
3. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9024

No tape cartridge in tape
drive.

1. Do the steps below following the
directions in the ‘‘Tape Maintenance
and Repair Procedures’’ section.
2. Issue the test tape long command.
3. If the test fails, make sure tape is fully
inserted.
4. If the test continues to fail, clean the
tape head and retest.
5. If fail, swap tape and retest.
6. If the test still fails, swap tape unit, use
original tape and retest.
7. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9025

Tape cartridge is worn, and
it is NOT functional.

1. Do the steps below following the
directions in the ‘‘Tape Maintenance
and Repair Procedures’’ section.
2. Clean the tape head.
3. If still fail, check tape insertion, swap
tape if necessary, and retest.
4. Replace tape unit as a last resort.
5. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-415.
Aux Data/
Error Codes
9026

Page 10-1365

Table A: Tape Unit Aux Data Table — Continued

Explanation
Hardware error detected.

Strategy
1. Do the steps below following the
directions in the ‘‘Tape Maintenance
and Repair Procedures’’ section.
2. Issue the test tape long
commnd.dispatch with tape unit.
3. If the test fails, make sure tape is fully
inserted.
4. If the test continues to fail, clean the
tape head. Use original tape and
retest.
5. If the test still fails, swap tape unit, use
original tape and retest.
NOTE:
It is very important that hardware
problems are resolved before using
backup tape.
6. If fails again, swap tape and restest.
7. If the problem still exists, escalate the
problem.

9027

The test failed because the
software could not access
the tape hardware.

9030

Internal system error.

1. Follow the steps provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. If problem still exists then escalate.

9032

Inability to read a
significant portion of the
scratch area on the tape.

1. Follow the steps provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. If problem still exists then escalate.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Table 10-415.
Aux Data/
Error Codes
9033

Page 10-1366

Table A: Tape Unit Aux Data Table — Continued

Explanation
Inability to write a
significant portion of the
scratch area on the tape.

Strategy
1. Follow the steps provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. If problem still exists then escalate.

9034

Inability to both read and
write a significant portion
of the scratch area on the
tape.

1. Follow the steps provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair Procedures’’
section.
2. If problem still exists then escalate.

Continued on next page

How to Use Table B to Determine Aux Data
Values
In this table, the numbers can have one to five digits. If the first or leftmost digit is
"1," the number has five digits. If the first digit or leftmost digit is "2," the number
has four digits. If the first or leftmost digit is "3," the number has three digits. If the
first or leftmost digit is "4," the number has two digits. If the first or leftmost digit is

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1367

"5," the number has one digit. For example, if the number is "2300," "2" indicates
that the tape cartridge should be replaced soon. "3" indicates that the Tape Drive
could not read or write at least one block of data from the tape.
Table 10-416.

Table B. Tape Unit Aux Data Table

Digit

Aux Data/
Error Code (a)

0

0

Explanation
Exact cause of error is not
determined.

Strategy
1. Follow the instructions
provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
2. If the tape alarm still exists,
escalate the problem. If this
is the only error and there is
no alarm, ignore this error.

1

2

1xxxx

2xxx

If the aux data is "10000,"
the error is non-fatal.

Ignore the "10000" case.

Each of the last four digits
of the Aux Data "1xxxx" is a
non-zero value.

Follow the steps in the
appropriate aux data section.

The tape cartridge should
be replaced soon.

1. Follow the instructions
provided in the ‘‘Tape
Maintenance and Repair
Procedures’’ section.
2. If the problem still exists,
escalate the problem.

3

3xx

Cannot read or write at least
one block of data from the
tape.

4

4x

A problem was found
reading the Shared
Memory.

5

5

Tape drive self-test failed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1368

Aux Data Values Indicating the Tape File Type
This table translates Aux Data values to the corresponding tape file type.

Table 10-417.

Table C. Tape File Types

Aux Data Value

File Type

0

Primary Translation File

1

Backup Translation File

2

Core Dump File

3

Program Update File

4

Boot Image File

6

Error Log File (not including scratch area)

12

Stored Announcement File

16

Processor Interface Firmware File

17

Header Block

19

Packet Control Firmware File

20

NIPM File

21

X25 File

22

Primary Directory File

23

Backup Directory File

Tape Drive Head Cleaning Procedure
The tape drive head (also called the tape head) should be cleaned at least once
a year. However, as part of the preventive maintenance strategy, it is
recommended that you inspect the tape head during each maintenance visit
and that you clean the tape head several times a year. In addition, a dated
label should be placed on the tape drive unit after the tape head is cleaned. You
should also complete the "AT&T Preventive Maintenance Log" sheet. (Refer to
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.)
New tapes leave more abrasive particles on the tape head. Therefore, if a new
tape is used, issue the test tape long repeat 3 command, and then clean the
tape head.
The tape head can be accessed for cleaning from the front of the drive by
opening the tape access door with your finger. See Figure 10-90.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1369

YELLOW LED

TAPE DRIVE HEAD

CLEANING MOTION

CAPSTAN

PUSH BACK
THE TAPE
ACCESS DOOR

Figure 10-90.

Front View of the Tape Drive

To position the tape drive head properly for cleaning, do the following:
1. Install a tape cartridge into the drive with the power on.
2. Wait 10 seconds or until the spinning of the tape stops.
3. Remove the tape cartridge.

! CAUTION:
The tape drive head should be cleaned by using only Freon TF and
polyurethane swabs. These products are usually available in VCR
head cleaning kits sold in video stores.
4. Wet the swab with the Freon TF solution.
5. Using a "side-to-side" motion, wipe the tape drive head.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

!

Page 10-1370

WARNING:
DO NOT GET TAPE HEAD CLEANING SOLUTION ON THE
CAPSTAN.

6. With a dry swab, wipe away any remaining residue from the tape head.

Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures
This section contains commonly used procedures to resolve tape alarms. The
following equipment may be needed to complete these procedures:
■

Tape Cartridges (3)

■

TN774 Tape Drive Circuit Pack (1)

■

TN773 Processor Circuit Pack (1)

■

TN770 Memory Circuit Pack (1)
NOTE:
In the following repair procedures, the term "main tape(s)" is used to refer to
the tape(s) that were physically present in the tape drive(s) at the time the
problem occurred. The "main tape(s)" should not be confused with the term
"backup tape(s)" Backup tapes are physically stored outside of the tape
drive(s). The term "new tape(s)" refers to the three new tapes that you
should bring with you to the customer’s site; these tapes may be needed to
complete the tape maintenance procedures. The new tapes should not
have been used previously in the customer’s system. It is very important
to keep track of these tapes.

1. Check the Error Log for power-related problems and refer to the POWER,
DC-POWER, and CARR-POW Maintenance documentation sections. If no
power errors exist, check the tape drive for power as follows:
■

If there is a problem with the 12V supplied to the tape drive, its
yellow LED will be in a blinking mode. The 12V is supplied by the
631DB or 676B power unit in a multicarrier cabinet system and by a
WP91153 in the single-carrier cabinet system. This problem can
also be caused by a failure in the 984D DC power converter on
TN774 Tape Drive circuit pack.

■

If there is a problem with the five volts supplied to the tape drive,
there is no visible way to determine this except by using the
TN2036 Voltage Range circuit pack (see the "Troubleshooting
Backplane Voltage Problems" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine
Maintenance Procedures’’ or by using the following procedure:
Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. There should be a
spinning noise indicating that the tape drive is doing a short
retension pass. If there is no noise, the power may be
disconnected.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1371

2. Check for a dirty tape drive head.
■

Clean the tape drive head (refer to the ‘‘Tape Drive Head Cleaning
Procedure’’ section, which immediately precedes this section).

■

Reinsert the main tape cartridge (for example, the tape that was in
the tape drive). Make sure the tape is not write-protected.

■

Issue the test tape long repeat 3 or, for a High or Critical Reliability
system, the test tape [a|b] long repeat 3 command.

If all tests pass:
The alarm should be cleared ([G1 Only] unless Error Type #1793, #1828,
#2049, or #2084 is present, in which case 48 hours must elapse). The
problem was a dirty tape drive head.
If any of the tests failed, proceed to Step 3.
3. Check the health of the main tape cartridge.
■

Clean the tape drive head again since the main tape may have left
abrasive particles on the tape drive head during the execution of
the test tape commands.

■

Insert the backup tape cartridge. Make sure it is not
write-protected.

■

Issue the test tape long repeat 3 command or, for a High or
Critical Reliability system, the test tape [a|b] long repeat 3
command.

If all tests pass:
The alarm should be cleared ([G1 Only] unless Error Type #1793, #1828,
#2049, or #2084 is present, in which case 48 hours must elapse). The
problem was a defective main tape. Mark the defective tape and follow the
standard disposal procedures.
If any of the tests failed, proceed to Step 4.
4. Check for the health of the backup tape.
■

Clean the tape drive head again since the backup tape may have
left abrasive particles on the tape drive head during the execution
of the test tape commands.

■

Insert a new tape cartridge.

! CAUTION:
Make sure that the tape is not write-protected and that the
new tape contains the same or newer vintage of software
compared to the vintage currently in the system.
■

Issue the test tape long repeat 3 command or, for a High or
Critical Reliability system, the test tape [a|b] long repeat 3
command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1372

If all tests pass:
The alarm should be cleared ([G1 Only] unless Error Type #1793, #1828,
#2049, or #2084 is present, in which case 48 hours must elapse). The
problem was that both the main tape and backup tape became defective.
Mark the defective tape and follow the standard disposal procedures.
Use the following procedure to save translations and announcements on
the new tape:
■

On a High or Critical Reliability system, issue the refresh
spe-standby command. It may be necessary to issue this
command multiple times. However, if you have issued the refresh
spe-standby command five times and the Standby SPE is still not
labeled "Standby" on the Status System Form, escalate the
problem.

■

Issue the save translations command. If there is a TN750
Announcement circuit pack in the system, issue the save
announcements command. Saving announcements may take
longer than 30 minutes to complete.

■

If this is a High or Critical Reliability system, run the Tape
Consistency Test (#421) by issuing the test tape [a|b] long
command. Refer to the TAPE-DAT Maintenance documentation to
resolve any errors.

■

Clean the tape head since new tapes leave more abrasive particles
on the tape head (refer to the ‘‘Tape Drive Head Cleaning
Procedure’’ section).
If any of the tests fail, proceed to Step 5.

5. Check the health of the tape drive.

!

WARNING:
Vintage 6 and Vintage 8 of the TN773 Processor circuit pack in a
Medium Cabinet use 12V DC power supplied from the Tape Drive
circuit pack and thus may cause severe service disruption when the
Tape Drive circuit pack is unseated from its slot. Therefore, when
repairing a High or Critical Reliability system with this configuration,
make the carrier with tape errors/alarms the Standby carrier before
proceeding. For a Standard system with this configuration, arrange
to do the work in off-hours before proceeding.
■

Replace the tape drive. DO NOT TURN OFF THE POWER.

■

Clean the tape drive head of the new tape drive.

■

Insert the main tape cartridge.

■

Issue the test tape long repeat 3 command, or, for a High or
Critical Reliability system, the test tape [a|b] long repeat 3
command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1373

If all tests pass:
The alarm should be cleared ([G1 Only] unless Error Type #1793,
#1828, #2049, or #2084 is present, in which case 48 hours must
elapse). The problem was that the original tape drive was defective.
(To see the hardware errors against the TAPE MO, issue the
display errors command. Enter "a" in the Interval field and "tape" in
the Category field.)
If any of the tests fail, proceed to Step 6.
6. Determine if the defective tape drive has damaged the tapes.
■

Clean the tape drive head again since the main tape may have left
abrasive particles on the tape drive head during the execution of
the test tape commands.

■

Insert a new tape (not the one used in Step 4).

! CAUTION:
Make sure that the tape is not write-protected and that the
new tape contains the same or newer vintage of software
compared to the vintage currently in the system.
■

Issue the test tape long repeat 3 command, or for a High or
Critical Reliability system, the test tape [a|b] long repeat 3
command.

If all tests pass:
The alarm should be cleared ([G1 Only] unless Error Type #1793, #1828, #2049,
or #2084 is present, in which case 48 hours must elapse). The problem was that
the original drive is defective and that it damages any tape you put in it. (To see
the hardware errors against the TAPE MO, issue the display errors command.
Enter "a" in the Interval field and "tape" in the Category field.)
If the alarm persists, the cause of the problem is either the Maintenance/Tape
Processor (MTP) residing on the TN773 Processor circuit pack or the Shared
Memory (SRAM) on the TN770 Memory circuit pack. Replacement of either of
these two circuit packs in a Standard system requires powering down of the
control carrier. Therefore, use the following procedures to determine that there
is a good (bootable) tape with the customer’s translations (since the main and
backup tapes may have been corrupted and, as a result, would then prevent the
successful reading in of translations during power-up).
NOTE:
Follow Steps 7 through 10 for Standard systems and Steps 11 through 13
for High or Critical Reliability systems.
For Standard Systems

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1374

NOTE:
Before performing the following repair procedures, refer to the "Handling
Control Circuit Packs" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’ for instructions on how to replace a circuit pack in a Standard
system.
7. Make sure that there is a good tape drive and a good tape with the
customer’s translations before powering down the system.
■

Insert a new tape cartridge. Recall that a "new tape" is a tape
that has not been used previously in the customer’s system.

! CAUTION:
Make sure that the tape is not write-protected and that the
new tape contains the same or newer vintage of software
compared to the vintage currently in the system.
■

Try to make a tape with the customer’s translations by issuing the
save translations command. If successful, proceed to Step 8. If
the translations were not saved successfully, request that the TSC
remotely make a copy of the customer’s tape by saving the
translations and announcements. When you receive this tape from
the TSC, continue with Step 8.

8. With the tape that has the customer’s translations set aside, replace the
TN770 Memory circuit pack.

! CAUTION:
Make sure that you are using the customer’s existing tape drive and
tape and not the tape made in Step 7.
■

Power down the system.

■

Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack.

■

Power up the system.

■

If the existing tape cannot bring up the system with the customer’s
translations, replace the tape drive and tape with a new tape drive
and the tape made in Step 7. Reboot the system again.

■

If the tape made in Step 7 cannot bring up the system with the
customer’s translations, proceed to Step 9.

■

If the system comes up with the customer’s translations, enter the
test tape long repeat 3 command.

If all tests pass:
The problem was a defective Memory circuit pack. If the tape was
replaced, the Memory circuit pack and the tape may be defective.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1375

If any test failed, proceed to Step 9.
9. Replace the TN773 Processor circuit pack.
■

Power down the system.

■

Reinsert the original TN770 Memory circuit pack.

■

Replace the TN773 Processor circuit pack.

■

Power up the system.

■

If the system boots up with the customer’s translations, enter the
test tape long repeat 3 command.

If all tests pass:
The problem was a defective TN773 Processor circuit pack. The TN770
Memory circuit pack is working fine.
If any test failed or if the system cannot be brought back into service
successfully, proceed to Step 10.
10. Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack. Use both the new Memory circuit
pack and the new Processor circuit pack.
■

Power down the system.

■

Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack.

■

Power up the system.

■

If the system comes up with the customer’s translations, issue the
test tape long repeat 3 command.

If all tests pass:
The problem was a defective Memory circuit pack and a defective
Processor circuit pack.
If any test still fails, escalate the problem.
For High or Critical Reliability Systems
NOTE:
Before performing the following repair procedures, refer to the ‘‘Circuit
Pack Replacement Procedure’’ section in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A
Maintenance Aid’’ for instructions on how to replace a circuit pack in a High
or Critical Reliability System.
Make sure that the SPE that has the alarmed tape/tape drive is the Standby
SPE before replacing the Processor circuit pack or the Memory circuit pack.
11. Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack on the STANDBY control carrier.
■

Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack (see the previous Note).

■

Test the tape in the Standby control carrier by issuing the test tape
[a|b] long repeat 3 command, where "[a|b]" is the Standby control
carrier.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE (Tape Unit) [G3iV1.1-286]

Page 10-1376

If all tests pass:
The problem was a defective Memory circuit pack.
If any test failed, proceed to Step 12.
12. Replace the TN773 Processor circuit pack on the STANDBY control
carrier.
■

Reinsert the original TN770 Memory circuit pack.

■

Replace the TN773 Processor circuit pack (see the previous Note).

■

Test the tape in the Standby Control Carrier by issuing the test tape
[a|b] long repeat 3 command, where "[a|b]" is the Standby control
carrier.

If all tests pass:
The problem was with the TN773 Processor circuit pack.
If any test failed, proceed to Step 13.
13. Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack on the STANDBY control carrier.
Use both the new Memory circuit pack and the new Processor circuit
pack.
■

Replace the Memory circuit pack (see the previous Note).

■

Test the tape in the Standby Control Carrier by issuing the test tape
[a|b] long repeat 3 command, where "[a|b]" is the Standby control
carrier.

If all tests pass:
The problem was a defective Memory circuit pack and a defective
Processor circuit pack.
If any test still fails, the problem could be with other control carrier circuit
packs. Replace each circuit pack, one at a time, until all the tape tests
pass. If the problem persists, escalate the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)

Page 10-1377

TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
TAPE-DAT

Initial Command
to Run

Alarm Level
MINOR

test tape a|b l

Full Name of MO
Tape Consistency

In High and Critical Reliability systems, the system software translations, as well
as other information, can be stored on two tapes: one in the Active SPE and one
in the Standby SPE. In order to flag a problem when these tapes become
mismatched, Tape Consistency monitors the translations, announcements,
update files, and software vintage number on both tapes in a High or Critical
Reliability PPN system. If the translation time stamp, announcement time stamp,
and update file time stamp and identifiers on the two tapes are not the same
and/or if the software vintage numbers do not match, an alarm is raised. The
software vintage can be displayed via the list configuration software-vintage
command. The Tape Consistency Test is run on system technician command
and once a week as part of daily Standby SPE maintenance. Tape Consistency
does not apply and does not exist in Standard systems.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-418.

Tape Consistency Error Log Entries

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test tape a/b l

8 or 16

8 or 16

Tape Consistency
Test (#421)

WARNING

OFF

test tape a/b l

8 or 16

Tape Consistency
Test (#421)

MINOR

OFF

test tape a/b l

1-7,
9-15,
17-86

1.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. An "8" in the log refers to carrier A and a "16" refers to carrier B. The Aux
Data field records which SPE was active at the time the Tape Consistency
Test failed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)

Page 10-1378

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Tape
Diagnostic Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Tape Reset Test (#67) (a)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Tape DMA Latch Test (#230) (a)

X

X

ND

Tape Diagnostic Test (#66) (a)

X

X

ND

Tape Read/Write Test (#65) (a) (b)

X

ND

Tape Block Error Test (#692) (a) (b)

X

ND

X

ND

Tape Translation Status Test (#505) (a)

X

ND

TAPE-DAT Tape Consistency Test (#421) (c)

X

ND

Tape Status Test (#69) (a)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. See TAPE (Tape Unit) Maintenance documentation for this test
description.
b. This test does not run in release G3iV1 EDI 7.0 or later.
c. The Tape Consistency Test does not run in a Standard system.

Tape Data Consistency Check Test (#421)
The software vintage number, translation time stamps, announcement time
stamps, and update file time stamps and identifiers are read off both tapes and
compared. If the comparison shows any discrepancy, TAPE-DAT is alarmed.
This test is run in a High or Critical Reliability Option system. The test is run as
part of the test tape long and as part of weekly TAPE maintenance.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)

Table 10-419.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1379

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test timed out without completing. This error can occur when the
system is heavily loaded and the test is not allocated sufficient time to run.
1. Rerun the test when the system is less busy and is not running standby
maintenance.

1029
1030
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2051

ABORT

Refer to the STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) Maintenance documentation for a
description of these error codes.

9005

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

35498

ABORT

Difficulty was encountered trying to send information between the SPEs.

35512

ABORT

The Standby SPE cannot be put into maintenance mode.
1. Resolve all DUPINT (Duplication Interface Circuit Pack), SHDW-LNK
(Memory Shadowing Link), SHDW-CIR (Common Shadow Circuit), and
STBY-SPE (Standby SPE) alarms.
2. Retry the command.

35514

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

35534

ABORT

Could not allocate the tape drive (could be active or standby) because
another tape operation was in progress.
1. Wait 10 minutes, and retry the command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code
35535

Page 10-1380

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not access the tape (could be active or standby).
1. The tape may be damaged or missing. Resolve all problems with all
tape tests in the Long Test Sequence for both tapes.
2. Repeat the test.

1

FAIL

The standby translations are out-of-date. The translations on the Standby
SPE (tape) are older than those on the Active SPE (tape).

2

FAIL

The Active SPE translations are out-of-date.
1. Issue the save translations command. If the translation save passes
on both SPEs, proceed to Step 2.
2. Run test tape long again to resolve the alarms.

3

FAIL

The load vintages are different in both SPEs.

4

FAIL

The load vintages are different in both SPEs.

5

FAIL

The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current translations.

6

FAIL

The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby
SPE has the most current translations.
1. Determine which tape contains the desired software release by issuing
a list configuration software long command. Obtain another tape of
the same software release. Install both tapes, and issue the save
translations command. If there is a TN750 Announcement circuit pack
in the system, issue the save announcements command. If the
translation (and announcement) save passes on both SPEs, proceed
to Step 2.
2. Run test tape long again to resolve the alarms.

8

FAIL

The announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the
most current announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements in
both SPEs. If the announcement save passes on both SPEs, proceed
to Step 2.
2. Issue the test tape long command again to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1381

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

9

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE is the most current.

10

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current translations, and the Active SPE has the
most current announcements.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations in both
SPEs.
2. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements in
both SPEs.
3. If both the translation save and announcement save pass on both
SPEs, issue the test tape long command again to resolve the alarms.

12

FAIL

Load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current announcements.

13

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and
announcements.

14

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations, and the Active
SPE has the most current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save
announcements command.

16

FAIL

Announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most
current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 8.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1382

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

17

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current translations and the Standby SPE has the most
current announcements.

18

FAIL

The translations and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
standby SPE is the most current.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 9.

20

FAIL

Load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Standby
SPE has the most current announcements.

21

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and the Standby
SPE has the most current announcements.

22

FAIL

The translations, announcements, and load vintages are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current translations and
announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4. Be sure to issue the save
announcements command.

32

FAIL

The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the Active
SPE is the more current one.
1. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update file
copy passes, proceed to Step 2.
2. Reissue the test tape long command to resolve the alarms.

33

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE
has the most current update file and translations.

34

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Active SPE
has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most current
translations.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on both
SPEs.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update
file from the Active SPE to the Standby SPE.
3. Reissue the test tape long command to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1383

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

36

FAIL

The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current update file.

37

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs.
The Active SPE has the most current update file and translations.

38

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs.
The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE had
the most current translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage.
After running the test tape long command, check for Error Code #32
or #64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code.

40

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current update file and announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on
both SPEs.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update
file from the Active to the Standby SPE.
3. Issue the test tape long command again to resolve the alarms.

41

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, translations, and
announcements.

42

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command to copy the update
file from the Active to the Standby SPE.
4. Reissue the test tape long command to resolve the alarms.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1384

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

44

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
announcements.

45

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file,
translations, and announcements.

46

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage.
Be sure to save announcements. After running the test tape long
command, check for Error Code #32 or #64. Follow the recovery
procedure under the applicable error code.

48

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The Active
SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby SPE has the most
current announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 40.

49

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and translations,
and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements.

50

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby
SPE has the most current translations and announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code #41.

52

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and the Standby
SPE has the most current announcements.

53

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file, and
translations, and the Standby SPE has the most current announcements.

54

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current update file and
the Standby SPE has the most current translations and announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 to get the correct load vintage.
After running the test tape long command, check for Error Code #32
or #64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code
64

Page 10-1385

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The update files are different in both SPEs. The update file on the standby
SPE is most current.
1. If you are on site with the switch, interchange the Active SPE tape with
the Standby SPE tape. If you are not on site with the switch, issue the
reset system interchange command. This action causes the Standby
SPE to become the Active SPE. Refer to the "Reset Commands" section
in Chapter 8 for information on the side effects of a processor
interchange.
2. Have INADS issue the copy update-file command. If the update file
copy passes, proceed to Step 3.
3. Reissue the test tape long command to resolve the alarms.

65

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby
SPE has the most current update file, and the Active SPE has the most
current translations.

66

FAIL

The update files and translations are different in both SPEs. The Standby
SPE has the most current update file and translations.
1. Issue the save translations command to save translations on both
SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code #64.

68

FAIL

The update files and load vintages are different in both SPEs. The Standby
SPE has the most current update file.

69

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs.
The Standby SPE has the most current update file, and the Active SPE has
the most current translations.

70

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and translations are different in both SPEs.
The Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code #4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test tape long command, check for Error
Code #32 or #64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable
error code.

72

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file and the Active SPE has the
most current announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on
both SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code #64.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1386

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

73

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations and
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file.

74

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements, and the
Standby SPE has the most current update file and translations.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Follow the procedures for Error Code #64.

76

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current announcements, and the
Standby SPE has the most current update file.

77

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations
and announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update
file.

78

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current
announcements, and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and
translations.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code #4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test tape long command, check for Error
Code #32 or #64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable
error code.

80

FAIL

The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs. The
Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements.
1. Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on
both SPEs.
2. Follow the procedures for Error Code #64.

81

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations, and the Standby
SPE has the most current update file and announcements.

82

FAIL

The update files, translations, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file, translations, and
announcements.
1. Issue the save translations command.
2. Issue the save announcements command.
3. Follow the procedures for Error Code #64.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TAPE-DAT (Tape Consistency)
Table 10-419.
Error
Code

Page 10-1387

TEST #421 Tape Data Consistency Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

84

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, and announcements are different in both
SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file and
announcements.

85

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Active SPE has the most current translations,
and the Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements.

86

FAIL

The update files, load vintages, translations, and announcements are
different in both SPEs. The Standby SPE has the most current update file,
translations, and announcements.
1. Follow the procedures for Error Code #4 to get the correct load
vintage. After running the test tape long command, check for Error
Code #32 or #64. Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable
error code.

PASS

The load vintages, translations, announcements, and update files are the
same.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDMODULE (Trunk Data Module)

Page 10-1388

TDMODULE (Trunk Data Module)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command to Run

Full Name of MO

TDMODULE1

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Trunk Data Module

TDMODULE (a)

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l

Trunk Data Module

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where
the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...,etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port number
(for example, 01).

The TDMODULE (Trunk Data Module) Maintenance documentation is covered in
the PDMODULE (Processor Data Module) Maintenance documentation.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1389

TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

TDM-BUS

MAJOR

test tdm P

TDM Bus

TDM-BUS

MINOR

test tdm P

TDM Bus

TDM-BUS

WARNING

test tdm P

TDM Bus

The TDM Bus consists of a duplicated TDM Bus on each port network (PPN and
EPN): TDM Bus A and TDM Bus B. Each TDM Bus consists of 256 time slots. The
first five time slots on each bus are called the Control Channel. The Control
Channel is active on only one bus at a time in each Port Network. The next 17
time slots are reserved for dedicated tones (that is, dial tone). These time slots
are called the dedicated tone time slots and only one bus at a time carries the
dedicated tones. The rest of the time slots on each bus are for general system
use (that is, phone call).
On system initialization, the Control Channel is on TDM Bus A and the dedicated
tones on TDM Bus B in each Port Network.
Systems with High or Critical Reliability have the ability to set the Control Channel
and Tone Bus to a specific TDM Bus via the set tdm PC command, where P
stands for the Port Network Number and C stands for the TDM Bus A or B (A for
TDM Bus A or B for TDM Bus B). Throughout this document, PC is used to refer
to a TDM Bus.
Terminology:
■

Control Channel Bus - The TDM Bus control channel is on.

■

Non-Control Channel Bus - The TDM Bus control channel is NOT on.

■

Tone Bus - The TDM Bus dedicated tone time slots are on.

■

Non-Tone Bus - The TDM Bus dedicated tone time slots are NOT on.

TDM Bus Fault Detection and Isolation
Procedure
TDM Bus faults are most likely caused by a defective circuit pack connected to
the backplane or bent pins on the backplane. It is possible that a circuit pack
can cause a TDM Bus fault but still exhibit trouble-free operation. For example,
the insertion of an MBUS (Memory Bus) only circuit pack can bend the TDM Bus
pins on the backplane and short two leads together. The four circuit packs that
may cause this problem are the TN770 Memory circuit pack, the TN777 80286
Processor circuit pack, the TN772 Duplication Interface circuit pack, and the
TN777 Network Control circuit pack. The latter exists only on High and Critical
Reliability systems. Since the TDM Bus is a shared resource, automatic

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1390

identification of the cause of a TDM Bus fault is difficult. If a TDM Bus problem is
suspected, the system technician should run the test tdm P system technician
command. If any of the resulting tests fail, then the system technician must
manually perform a TDM Bus isolation procedure to identify the cause of the
problem.

! WARNING:
Since the TDM Bus fault isolation procedure involves removing circuit
packs and possibly disconnecting entire carriers, the procedure is
extremely destructive to the port network that contains the TDM Bus being
tested. If possible, this procedure should be used after hours or during
hours with minimum system use.
As circuit packs are removed or entire carriers are disconnected, any active calls
terminating on those circuit packs or carriers are dropped. If the system
technician has any hints about a particular circuit pack that may be causing the
TDM Bus problem (for example, a new circuit pack was inserted into the Port
Network just before the TDM Bus problem appeared), then those hints should be
investigated before performing this procedure.
For this procedure, make sure at least one Tone Detector circuit pack is in the
same Port Network in which the TDM Bus fault is being isolated. The Tone
Detector circuit pack is needed by maintenance to test the TDM Bus.

Procedure 1
This procedure is an attempt to isolate the TDM Bus fault to circuit packs that are
essential to the system operation. For each of the following circuit packs, perform
Procedure 1.
Circuit Pack

Error Log Names

Tone-Clock

TONE-BD, TONE-PT, and TDM-CLK

Network Control

SW-CTL

Tone Detector

DETR-BD, GPTD-PT, and DTMR-PT

Processor Interface

PI-BD and PI-PT

Duplication Interface—only for systems
with High or Critical Reliability

DUPINT

Expansion Interface

EXP-INTF

1. Display the Hardware Error and Alarm Logs for the circuit pack via the
display errors and display alarms commands.
2. If there are errors for the circuit pack, refer to its Maintenance
documentation and try to resolve the errors.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1391

3. Whether or not all the errors can be cleared, test the TDM Bus again via
the test tdm P command.
4. If some TDM Bus tests fail, continue with the next circuit pack.
5. If there are no more circuit packs in the list, go to Procedure 2.
6. If all the TDM Bus tests pass, the problem has been fixed.

Procedure 2
This procedure removes and re-inserts port circuit packs (purple slot); one or
several at a time.
If all of the TDM Bus tests pass when the circuit pack is removed, but some of the
tests fail when the circuit pack is inserted, the circuit pack is the cause of the
problem and should be replaced. If some of the tests fail regardless of whether
the circuit pack is inserted or removed, the circuit pack is not the cause of the
problem (see Note). Repeat this procedure for each purple slot circuit pack in
the Port Network.
NOTE:
Of course, in a multiple failure situation, the circuit pack may be one cause
of the TDM Bus problem and there may be other failures that are causing
TDM Bus faults. Also, the circuit pack itself may not be the cause of the
problem, but the backplane pins may have been bent when the circuit pack
was inserted.
1. Remove port circuit packs which have failed the NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
first. To find which circuit packs failed this test, display the Hardware Error
Log via the display errors command. Refer to the Maintenance
documentation of each port circuit pack that has port errors to check if
any error indicates the failure of the NPE Crosstalk Test.
2. If no circuit pack failed the NPE Crosstalk Test (#6), remove one or several
purple slot circuit packs.
3. Run the test tdm P command.
4. If any of the TDM Bus tests fail:
■

Check if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot
appear to be bent.

■

If the backplane pins are bent, straighten or replace the pins,
re-insert the circuit pack, and do this procedure again for the same
circuit pack.

■

If the backplane pins are not bent, re-insert the circuit pack and do
this procedure for the next set of circuit packs.

5. If none of the TDM Bus tests fail:
■

Re-insert the circuit pack.

■

Run the test tdm system technician command.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1392

■

If any of the TDM Bus tests fail, the re-inserted circuit pack is faulty.
Replace the circuit pack and do this procedure again for the new
circuit pack.

■

If none of the TDM Bus tests fail, then the problem has been fixed.

Procedure 3
This procedure removes and re-inserts control carrier circuit packs one at a time.
The Network Control circuit pack and the Processor Interface circuit pack are the
only processor complex circuit packs that communicate on the TDM Bus, and
thus are the only processor complex circuit packs likely to cause a TDM Bus
problem in a stable system. This procedure should be performed for the
Processor Interface circuit pack before it is attempted for any other processor
complex circuit packs.

In a System Without High or Critical Reliability
To perform this procedure for the Network Control circuit pack, this circuit pack
must be replaced. The system cannot operate without the Network Control circuit
pack.
1. Power down the control carrier.
2. Remove the suspected circuit pack.
3. Check if the backplane pins in the removed circuit pack’s slot appear to
be bent.
4. If the backplane pins are bent:
■

Straighten or replace the pins.

■

Insert the same circuit pack.

■

Repeat from Step 2 with the same circuit pack.

5. If the backplane pins are not bent, insert or replace the circuit pack.
6. Turn the power back on to reboot the system.
7. Run the test tdm P command.
8. If any of the TDM Bus tests fail:
■

If the circuit pack in Step 5 was inserted, do this step again
replacing the circuit pack.

■

If the circuit pack in Step 5 was replaced, do this step again with
the next circuit pack.

9. If none of the TDM Bus tests fail, the problem has been fixed.
10. If this step fails to identify the cause of the problem, go to Procedure 4.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1393

In a High or Critical Reliability System
A less destructive procedure for processor complex circuit packs can be used
rather than the one described for standard systems. Perform the procedure on
the Processor Interface circuit pack and Network Control circuit pack before it is
attempted for any other processor complex circuit packs.
Pulling out processor complex circuit packs from the Standby SPE does not
require powering down the carrier and does not require starting the system
again. See Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for more details.
1. Perform Procedure 2 for the suspected processor complex circuit pack in
the Standby SPE to determine if it is causing the TDM Bus problem. The
status system command indicates which SPE is in standby mode. If the
suspected circuit pack is the Tone-Clock circuit pack, make sure it is in
standby mode via the status system command or its LED state. The
SYSTEM CLOCKS and SYSTEM TONES fields of the status system form
should read "standby" or the yellow LED on the circuit pack is off.
NOTE:
When doing Procedure 2 as a request of Procedure 3, pull out
processor circuit packs instead of purple slot port circuit packs.
2. If it fails to identify the processor complex circuit pack as the cause of the
problem, perform an SPE switch via the reset system i command (see
Note).
NOTE:
Make sure that the current Standby SPE is in the standby mode via
the status system command before performing the SPE switch.
3. Perform Procedure 2 for the suspected processor complex circuit pack in
the new Standby SPE to determine if it is causing the TDM Bus problem.
4. If it fails again to identify the processor complex circuit pack as the cause
of the problem, perform Procedure 2 for the remaining processor complex
circuit packs.
5. If this procedure fails to identify the cause of the problem, go to Procedure
4.

Procedure 4
Procedure 4 attempts to isolate the failure to a particular set of carriers, and then
checks only the circuit packs in those carriers. This procedure involves
terminating the TDM Bus so that certain carriers are disconnected from the TDM
Bus. This is done by moving the TDM Bus terminators (AHF1) on the carrier
backplane. To terminate a TDM Bus at the end of a particular carrier, the TDM
Bus cable that connects the carrier to the next carrier should be unplugged and
replaced with the TDM Bus terminator. The TDM Bus terminators can be taken
from one carrier to the other. To get to the TDM Bus cables, remove the back

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1394

cover of the cabinet. When the length of the TDM Bus is modified via this
procedure, the circuit packs that are essential to system operation and TDM Bus
maintenance (for example, Network Control circuit pack, Tone-Clock circuit
pack, Tone Detector circuit pack) must still be connected to the new shortened
TDM Bus.

For the Processor Port Network (PPN)
1. Terminate the TDM Bus so that it extends within the active control carrier.
2. Run the test tdm system technician command. If any of the TDM Bus tests
fail, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in
those carriers connected to the shortened TDM Bus. Procedure 2 is
performed for port circuit packs (purple slots) and Procedure 3 for control
carrier circuit packs.
3. If none of the TDM Bus tests fail, extend the TDM Bus to another carrier
and repeat this procedure. When a carrier is added that causes some of
the TDM Bus tests to fail, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only
the circuit packs in that carrier.

For the Expansion Port Network (EPN)
1. Terminate the TDM Bus so that it only extends within the carrier containing
the active Expansion Interface (EXP-INTF) circuit pack.
2. Run the test tdm system technician command. If any of the TDM Bus tests
fail, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in
those carriers connected to the shortened TDM Bus.
3. If none of the TDM Bus tests fail, extend the TDM Bus to another carrier
and repeat this procedure. When a carrier is added that causes some of
the TDM Bus tests to fail, perform Procedure 2 and/or Procedure 3 for only
the circuit packs in that carrier.
If the above steps fail to identify a particular circuit pack or slot, the problem may
be caused by a TDM Bus common component such as the termination resistors
on the ends of the bus.

Restarting Nonfunctioning Port Circuit Packs
A defective TDM Bus Control Channel or system timing reference on one of the
networks can result in port circuit packs (that is non-control carrier circuit packs)
on this defective network entering the reset state. When this situation occurs, the
circuit pack stops functioning and its red LED lights. The system does not detect
the presence of a circuit pack when the circuit pack is in the reset state. Hence,
executing the list config board PCSS command indicates that the circuit pack is
not present.
If a circuit pack enters the reset state when the control channel is on TDM Bus PT
(where network P contains the circuit pack), this circuit pack stops functioning

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1395

until it receives a restart message when the control channel is on the same TDM
Bus PT or when this circuit pack is powered up again.
To force the system to send a restart message to all circuit packs on a network,
try one of the following methods depending on the circumstances:
NOTE:
A circuit pack functioning normally (that is, not in the reset state) ignores
the restart message.

Procedure 1 (Nondestructive)
Execute the Idle Time Slot Test (#294) by issuing the command test tdm P when
the control channel is on the same TDM Bus as it was when the circuit pack
entered the reset state. If using this method is not feasible, try the other
procedures in this section.

Procedure 2 (Non-Destructive)
if you are at the site: Reseat the circuit pack. This action causes the circuit pack
that was in the reset state to begin functioning on the current Control Channel
bus.

Procedure 2 (Nondestructive)
Execute the Idle Time Slot Test (#294) by issuing the command test tdm P when
the control channel is on the same TDM Bus as it was when the circuit pack
entered the reset state. If using this method is not feasible, try the other
procedures in the section.

Procedure 3 (Destructive)
Reset the port network that contains the circuit pack that is in the reset state.
When a network is reset, two restart messages, one on the control channel of
each TDM Bus, are sent to each circuit pack on the network. Executing the reset
system L command (where L=2, 3, 4, or 5) resets all networks in the system. To
reset an EPN only, busyout all links to the EPN via the busyout board PCSS
command and then release them via the release board PCSS command.

! WARNING:
The reset system command disrupts all calls in the system. Resetting the
EPN only disrupts all calls going to and originating from the EPN.

Procedure 4 (Destructive)
Execute the recycle carrier PC command where P is the Port Network Number
of the network containing the circuit pack and C is the designation of the carrier
containing the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1396

! WARNING:
This command removes power and returns power to the designated
Medium cabinet port carrier. Thus, any other circuit packs on this carrier is
also temporarily taken out-of-service.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-420.

TDM Bus Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Error Type
1

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test tdm

1

0

Control Channel Test
(#296)

MINOR

ON

test tdm P r 3

18 (a)

0

busyout tdm PC

WARNING

ON

release tdm PC

35 (b)

0-1

TDM Bus Corruption

MINOR

ON

set tdm PC

257 (c)

0

none

MAJOR

ON

513 (d)

Any

Idle Time Slot Test (#294)

MINOR

ON

test tdm P r 3

769 (e)

Any

Idle Time Slot Test (#294)

WARNING

ON

test tdm P r 3

769 (f)

Any

Idle Time Slot Test (#294)

1025

Any

3872 (g)

Any

none

3873 (g)

Any

none

3874 (g)

Any

none

3877 (g)

Any

none

0

1.

(see Notes)

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

NOTE:
For TDM-BUS, an ON-BOARD alarm refers to a problem with the TDM-BUS
itself.
Notes:
a. The TDM Bus has been busied out by the technician. The error retires
when the technician releases the TDM Bus.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1397

b. This error indicates the TDM Bus is corrupted. If the corruption was on the
Control Channel bus and this system has High or Critical Reliability, TDM
Bus maintenance automatically switches the control channel and/or tones
to the other bus. The same strategy applies if the corruption was on the
bus carrying the tones.
An aux data value of 0 indicates the last reported TDM Bus corruption was
on the Control channel bus.
An aux data value of 1 indicates the last reported TDM Bus corruption was
on the Non-Control channel bus.
If this error is logged on both TDM Buses (A and B) on the PPN within two
or three minutes, the red LED of several circuit packs may or may not be lit
and there could be Switch Control errors. Under these circumstances do
the following:
■

Display the Hardware Error Log via the display errors command
and look for SW-CTL (Switch Control) errors.

■

If there are any errors logged against the Switch Control, try to
resolve them.

■

Test the TDM Bus via the test tdm P command.

■

If all the TDM Bus tests pass, the problem has been fixed.

■

If some of the TDM Bus tests fail, replace the Duplication Interface
circuit pack in the A carrier (see Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A
Maintenance Aid’’ for details). None of the Duplication Interface
circuit pack tests detect this particular type of failure. Therefore, all
its tests may still pass.

■

Test the TDM Bus via the test tdm P command.

■

If all the TDM Bus tests pass, the problem has been fixed.

c. This error indicates the TDM Bus was switched to the other bus due to
TDM Bus corruption. The aux data value is not meaningful and no action is
required.
d. This error indicates that some time slots are corrupted in the specified
TDM Bus. The Minor alarm is raised when there are more than 50 bad time
slots in the bus. The aux data indicates the number of bad time slots found
by the test.
e. This error indicates that some time slots are corrupted in the specified
TDM Bus. The Warning alarm is raised when there are more than 10 bad
time slots but less than or up to 50 bad ones in the bus. The aux data
value indicates the number of bad time slots found by the test.
f. This error indicates the idle time slot test found less than 10 bad time slots
in the TDM Bus. The aux data value indicates the number of bad time slots
found by the test. There is no alarm associated with this error.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1398

g. These errors indicate communication problems. On a High or Critical
Reliability system, TDM Bus maintenance may switch the Control Channel
bus and/or Tone bus to the other bus. Test the TDM Bus via the test tdm P
command and follow the procedures according to the error codes
reported from the test.
The aux data value shows the Angel ID number for which a downlink
message was lost.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Control Channel Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

Channel Bus (#297)

X

X

ND

Idle Time Slot Test on TDM Bus A (#294)

X

X

ND

Order of Investigation
Control Channel Test on the Control
Channel Bus (#296)
Digit Detection Test on the Non-Control

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Idle Time Slot Test on TDM Bus A or B (#294)
The Idle Time Slot Test detects noisy time slots on the bus and takes them
out-of-service. The Tone Detector circuit pack is told to listen to idle time slots
and if it detects any noise on a time slot, it returns a failure. At the end of the test,
any out-of-service time slots are retested to see if they are still noisy and restored
to service if they are idle. After all the time slots have been tested, maintenance
counts the number of bad time slots and reports the number to the technician in
the error code field. No more than 220 time slots are taken out-of-service on one
bus, and no more than 300 are taken out-of-service on both buses at one time.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1399

Table 10-421. TEST #294 or #295 Idle Time Slot Test on TDM Bus A or TDM Bus B
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test. For
example, maintenance could be running on the Tone Detector circuit pack
and it is using the CPTRs.

1115

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

number

FAIL

The error code indicates the number of bad time slots that were detected.
The cause of this failure is most likely due to a bad port circuit pack and
not the TDM Bus itself.
1. Execute the command again.
2. If the error persists, check the Error and Alarm Logs for alarms on port
circuit packs from the NPE Crosstalk Test.
3. Refer to the appropriate circuit pack’s documentation to clear the
circuit pack’s problem.
4. Test the TDM Bus again. If the error continues, refer to the ‘‘TDM Bus
Fault Detection and Isolation Procedure’’ described earlier.

PASS

The success of this test indicates all the idle time slots that are supposed
to be idle are indeed idle. There is no noise on any of the idle time slots.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Test (#296)
This test tests the integrity of the Control Channel bus. It ensures that
communication through the TDM Bus is operational.
Table 10-422.
Error
Code

TEST #296 Control Channel Test
Test
Result

any code
other
than 1005

ABORT

1005

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
Since this test is valid only on the control channel bus, it aborts execution
when run on the non-control channel bus. This is a valid response. Use the
status system command to verify which bus is the control channel bus.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Table 10-422.
Error
Code
none

Page 10-1400

TEST #296 Control Channel Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Communication through the Control Channel is not working. The problem is
not necessarily the TDM Bus itself.
1. Display the hardware error and alarm log for the Tone-Clock circuit
pack. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Resolve the errors for the Tone-Clock circuit pack.
3. Display the hardware error and alarm log for the Network Control
circuit pack. Refer to DATA-BD (Network Control Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
4. If this error is on the EPN, display the hardware error and alarm log for
the Expansion Interface. Refer to EXP-INTF (Expansion Interface
Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation and resolve its errors.
5. Execute the test tdm P command again.
6. If the test still fails, refer to the ‘‘TDM Bus Fault Detection and Isolation
Procedure’’ described earlier.

PASS

Communication through the TDM Bus is operational.

Continued on next page

Digit Detection Test (#297)
This test is executed on the Non-Control Channel bus. The Tone-Clock circuit
pack is told to put a tone on the Non-Control Channel bus and the Tone Detector
circuit pack is told to listen to it. The test passes if the tone is successfully
transmitted on the Non-Control Channel bus.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Table 10-423.
Error
Code

Page 10-1401

TEST #297 Digit Detection Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none,
1001
2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

1005

ABORT

Since this test is valid only on the non-control channel bus, it aborts
execution when run on the control channel bus. This is a valid response.
Use the status system command to verify which bus is the control channel
bus.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

none

FAIL

This failure indicates that communication on the Non-Control Channel is not
reliable.
1. Execute the command again.
2. If the problem persists, test the Tone-Clock circuit pack and Tone
Detector circuit pack to make sure they are healthy. Refer to TONE-BD
(Tone-Clock Circuit Pack), TONE-PT (Tone Generator), GPTD-PT
(General Purpose Tone Detector Port), and DTMR-PT (Dual Tone
Multifrequency Port).
3. Execute the command again.
4. If the problems persists, refer to the ‘‘TDM Bus Fault Detection and
Isolation Procedure’’ described earlier.

PASS

The non-control channel bus is operational.

Continued on next page

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Use the list configuration control command to find the Tone-Clock circuit pack
code of the system, and then proceed to look for the Short and Long Test
Sequences according to the Tone-Clock circuit pack code.
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the SAKI
Reset Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1402

For a system with a TN756 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

SAKI Reset Test (#53) (a)
Clock Health Test (#46) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) (c)

X

X

ND

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) (c)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90) (d)
Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40) (d)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update Test (#41) (d)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) (DTMR-PT) or
General Purpose Tone Detector Port (CPTR) (GPTD-PT) Maintenance
documentation for descriptions of this test.
d. Refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) documentation for descriptions of
these tests.

For a system with a TN768,TN780 or TN2182 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:
Table 10-424.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: TDM-BUS

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SAKI Reset Test (#53) (a)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Clock Health Test (#46) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90) (c)

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Table 10-424.

Page 10-1403

System Technician-Demanded Tests: TDM-BUS — Continued
Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40) (c)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update Test (#41) (c)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test (#148)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test (#149) (e)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test (#150)

X

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

TDM Clock Board Type (#574)
TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test (#151)
Standby Reference Health Check Test (#651) (d)

X

Continued on next page

1.

D = Destructive, ND = Non-destructive

Notes:
a. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) documentation for a
description of this test.
c. Refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) documentation for descriptions of
these tests.
d. This test only runs on the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack in a Port
Network with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack (High or Critical
Reliability Option). The circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware
revision 2 or above or be a TN2182.
e. Test #149 is not run on a TN2182.

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test (#149)
This test evaluates the quality of the synchronization source for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack. This test does not apply to the TN2182.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1404

Table 10-425. TEST #149 TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test
Error
Code

1001

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.
1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

ANY

FAIL

This error represents the number of timing slips detected on the incoming
synchronization source since the last slip inquiry was sent to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack. The incoming synchronization source can be from one of three
sources: (1) a DS1 Interface circuit pack, (2) an EXP-INTF circuit pack if the
port network on which the test was executed does not contain the current
system synchronization reference; (3) a local oscillator on an Active
Tone-Clock circuit pack. The error code is a variable amount ranging from 1
to 255.
1. If there are errors against synchronization (SYNC), refer to the
Synchronization Maintenance documentation to change the system
synchronization reference.
2. If there are errors against DS1 Interface circuit pack (DS1-BD), refer to
the DS1 Interface circuit pack Maintenance documentation to resolve
the errors.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1405

Table 10-425. TEST #149 TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test — Continued
Error
Code
ANY

Test
Result
FAIL

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
3. If there are no SYNC or DS1-BD errors and
a. this error was logged against the Tone-Clock circuit pack that was
the current system synchronization reference at the time (use the
command status synchronization to determine this), replace this
Tone-Clock circuit pack.

NOTE:
Disruption may occur when executing the following procedures.
b. the Tone-Clock circuit pack you are testing is in Active mode but
does not contain the current system synchronization reference,
switch the synchronization reference to the Tone-Clock circuit pack
under test via the set synchronization PC command. Retry the
command. If the error is still present, replace this Tone-Clock circuit
pack.
c. the Tone-Clock circuit pack under test is in Standby mode, make it
active via the set tone-clock PC command and switch the
synchronization reference to it. Reissue the command. If the error is
still present, replace this Tone-Clock circuit pack.
PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack does not detect any timing slips. This indicates
that the external synchronization timing source is valid or that the system
synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack. The status
synchronization command should be used to verify that the desired
synchronization reference is providing timing for the system.

Continued on next page

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test (#150)
This test evaluates the quality of the synchronization source for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Table 10-426.
Error
Code

1001

Page 10-1406

TEST #150 TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.
1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

255

ABORT

The test was not executed because the Tone-Clock circuit pack was using
its local oscillator rather than synchronizing to an external source.
1. Verify that this Tone-Clock circuit pack is expected to be the
synchronization source. If not, correct the synchronization information
and re-execute the test.

ANY

FAIL

This error represents the number of PPM errors detected on the external
synchronization source since the last PPM inquiry was sent to the
Tone-Clock circuit pack. A failure of this test indicates that we are outside
of Stratum 4 or Stratum 3 timing specifications on the external timing
source. This error produces an invalid timing signal for any system that
uses this source for a synchronization reference. The error code is a
variable amount ranging from 1 to 254.
1. If there are errors against SYNC (Synchronization), refer to SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation to change the system
synchronization reference, OR
2. If there are errors against STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock), refer to the
STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock) Maintenance documentation to resolve the
errors, OR
3. If there are errors against DS1-BD (DS1 Interface circuit pack), refer to
the DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
to resolve the errors, OR

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)
Table 10-426.
Error
Code
ANY
(cont’d.)

Page 10-1407

TEST #150 TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
4. If there are no other errors besides Error Type 1537 against TDM-CLK
and if this error was logged against the Tone-Clock circuit pack that
provided the current system synchronization reference (use the status
synchronization command to determine this), replace the defective
Tone-Clock circuit pack.

! WARNING:
Since service may be disrupted when the following procedures are
carried out, try to perform the following steps when it is convenient for
the customer.
5. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack under test is in the Active mode but is not
providing the current system synchronization reference, switch the
synchronization reference to the Tone-Clock circuit pack under test
using the set synchronization PC command. Rerun the test. If the test
still fails, replace the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack.
6. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack under test is in the Standby mode place
it in the Active mode via the command set tone-clock PC. Switch the
synchronization reference to the Tone-Clock circuit pack under test
using the set synchronization PC command. Rerun the test. If the test
still fails, replace the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack.
PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack does not detect timing any PPM errors. This
indicates that the external synchronization timing source is valid or that the
system synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack. The status
synchronization command should be used to verify that the desired
synchronization reference is providing timing for the system.

Continued on next page

TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test (#151)
This action updates the Tone-Clock internal circuit pack parameters. Tone-Clock
circuit pack:
■

Disable in-line duplication status messages.

■

Disable in-line subrate frame maintenance messages (TN768, TN780
only).

■

Set the PPM threshold at 60 PPM for TN768 and TN780. Set the PPM
threshold at 85 PPM for TN2182.

■

Enable PPM threshold switching

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1408

■

Set the number of slips to trigger loss of signal - currently 30 per 5
millisecond period

■

Enable the on-board synchronization switching algorithm (see above)

■

Enable holdover operation (TN2182 only).

This is not a test and will always pass without identifying or reporting any
Tone-Clock circuit pack errors.
Table 10-427. TEST #151 TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal system error

FAIL

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack parameters have been successfully updated.

Continued on next page

TDM-Clock Circuit Pack Type Test (#574)
The purpose of this query is to check if the required type of Tone-Clock circuit
pack (TN780) is present when the Stratum 3 clock is administered.
Table 10-428.
Error
Code

TEST #574 TDM Clock Circuit Pack Type Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.
1. Wait 1 minute and retry the test.

FAIL

The Tone-Clock circuit pack in the system is not a TN780. The Stratum 3
clock requires a TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack.
1. Replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack with a TN780. The old circuit pack
may still be good, and need not be discarded.

PASS

The required TN780 circuit pack is present.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Page 10-1409

Standby Reference Health Check Test (#651)
This test evaluates the quality of the external synchronization timing source for
the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack.
Table 10-429.
Error
Code

TEST #651 Standby Reference Health Check Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This test may already be running due to a tone-clock installation, scheduled
maintenance, alarm activity, or a technician-demand test from another
terminal. This abort can also occur due to an internal system error.
1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to five times.

1184

ABORT

This test requires an external synchronization source to be administered
(DS1 primary, DS1 primary and secondary, or Stratum 3 Clock).
1. Administer the external synchronization source and retry the test.

2500

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.

0

FAIL

If the Tone-Clock circuit pack is in the PPN, the external synchronization
timing source for side A of the Stratum 3 clock, or for the Primary DS1
reference is either absent or invalid. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack is in
an EPN, the synchronization reference from the active EI circuit pack is
either absent or invalid.

1

FAIL

If the Tone-Clock circuit pack is in the PPN, both external
synchronization timing sources are either absent or invalid. If the
Tone-Clock circuit pack is in an EPN, the synchronization references
from both EI circuit packs are either absent or invalid.
1. Correct the synchronization source problem. Refer to the
Synchronization (SYNC) maintenance section of this manual.
2. If the error still exists, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack reported in
the error log.

PASS

The external synchronization timing source is valid.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1410

TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm Level

Initial Command To Run1

Full Name of MO

TDM-CLK

MAJOR

test tone-clock UUC short

TDM Bus Clock

TDM-CLK

MINOR

test tone-clock UUC short

TDM Bus Clock

TDM-CLK

WARNING

release tone-clock UUC

TDM Bus Clock

1.

UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN, 2 -44 for EPNs). C is the carrier
designation (A, B, C, D, or E).

NOTE:
Replacing the tone/clock circuit pack requires a special procedure
described in the documentation for TONE-BD. That section also describes
the LED displays for this board.
The Time Division Multiplex (TDM) Bus Clock resides on the Tone-Clock circuit
pack, providing clocking signals both for the TDM Bus and the LAN Bus. The
Tone-Clock circuit pack is a critical component in the system and is necessary to
ensure the operation of all port circuit packs in the system. The TDM buses of the
PPN and any EPNs are synchronized together. The system timing reference can
be derived internally from the Tone-Clock circuit pack in any PN, or from an
external (off-board) timing reference. Currently, the TDM Bus Clock supports
synchronizing the TDM Bus with interface rates from Digital Signal 1 (DS1)
facilities as primary or primary and secondary references, and from Stratum 3
Clock (STRAT-3) facilities. Only the TN780 tone-clock supports a Stratum 3
clock.
Moreover, the Tone-Clock circuit pack aids in monitoring and selecting
synchronization references. The Tone-Clock circuit pack, after detecting that the
external source of timing is not valid, will automatically begin its escalation
procedure, according to the facilities administered.
NOTE:
Switching back to a DS1 source is handled by synchronization
maintenance, once any problems with it have been corrected and tested.
However, once synchronization has been switched to the internal timing
source of the master Tone-Clock circuit pack, switching back to a Stratum 3
Clock must be initiated by a technician after the external reference has
been repaired.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Tone-Clock
Role

Page 10-1411

Initial External
Synchronization
Source

Synchronization
Facilities

MASTER

SLAVE

Backup External
Synchronization
Source

Stratum 3 Clock

Source "A"

Source "B"

DS1 Primary and
Secondary

DS1 Primary

DS1 Secondary

DS1 Primary Only

DS1 Primary

None

No External Source

None

None

PNC Duplication

Active EI

Standby EI

No PNC
Duplication

Active EI

None

Internal
Source

Local
oscillator

See ‘‘SYNC (Synchronization)’’ for more details of the escalation plan. There
exists a strong interdependency among the DS1 Interface circuit pack
Maintenance, Synchronization Maintenance, and TDM Bus Clock Maintenance
MOs.
See the section on “TONE-BD” for a discussion of the relationship of Tone-Clock
circuit packs with the various Reliability Options.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-430.
Error
Type

TDM Bus Clock Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board1

Test to Clear Value
test tone-clock UUC sh r 1

02

0

Any

Any

Any

1(a)

0

None

MINOR

OFF

18(b)

0

busyout tone-clock
UUC

WARNING

OFF

WARNING

OFF

130(c)

None

257(d)

None

release tone-clock UUC

3

OFF

test tone-clock UUC

ON

test tone-clock UUC sh r 10

513(e)

Any

Clock Circuit Status
Inquiry (#148)

MINOR

769(f)

Any

Clock Circuit Status
Inquiry (#148)

MAJOR‡

1025(g)

Any

Clock Slip
Inquiry(#149)

test tone-clock UUC sh

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)
TDM Bus Clock Error Log Entries — Continued

Table 10-430.
Error
Type

Page 10-1412

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level
MINOR

On/Off
Board1

1281(h)
1282(h)

Any

None

1537

Any

Clock PPM
Inquiry(#150)

2049(i)

Any

Standby
Reference Health
Check Test(#651)

MAJOR3

ON

2305(j)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

Test to Clear Value

OFF
test tone-clock UUC sh
test tone-clock UUC

Continued on next page

1.

2.
3.

As a general rule, any on board errors against the TDM Bus Clock should be resolved before
pursuing any other errors against SPE or PNC components. Off board clock errors may be caused
by other board errors, and should usually be addressed once any on board errors have been
resolved.
Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Major or Minor alarms on this MO may have been downgraded to Warning alarms based on the
values used in the set options command.

Notes:
a. The Tone-Clock circuit pack may have a clock at the edge of its specified
frequency. This can cause Expansion Interface circuit packs and SNI
circuit packs to go out-of-frame or report no-neighbor conditions. This can
is turn cause EPNs, Expansion Archangel Links (EALs), Remote Neighbor
Links (RNLs), and/or Local Neighbor Links LNLs) to go down. When this
error is alarmed, Clock Health Inquiry Test (#46) will fail with an error code
of 1.
1.Replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack identified in the error log. See How
to Replace the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section.
b. The indicated Tone-Clock circuit pack has been made unavailable via the
busyout tone-clock UUC command. It only applies to systems which
have the High or Critical Reliability Option administered, because only a
standby Tone-Clock circuit pack may be made busy by that command. To
resolve this error, execute the release tone-clock UUC command for the
alarmed circuit pack.
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1413

d. The Tone-Clock circuit pack in the PPN is not a TN780 while a Stratum 3
synchronization is administered. Replace the Tone-Clock in the PPN with a
TN780, or change synchronization administration to Stratum 4 if a Stratum
3 clock is not being used.
e. The tone-clock has reported an out-of-lock condition. A aux value of 1
indicates this error is an out-of-lock with the primary reference. A aux
value of 2 indicates this error is an out-of-lock with the secondary
reference. It could not lock onto the frequency of that synchronization
reference. This will lead to a change in the synchronization reference if the
condition continues.
f. The Tone-Clock circuit pack may be defective.
1.If this error was logged against an Active Tone-Clock circuit pack,
then test that circuit pack via the test tone-clock UUC. If there are
error codes from any tests, follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for the error code(s) to resolve the problem(s). If all
tests pass, consider the 769 error type to have been a transient
problem, and clear the error log entry with test tone-clock UUC
long clear.
2.If this error was logged against the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack,
and if the Aux Data value was 18369, Synchronization maintenance
acts on this error. No corrective action is required. For all the other
Aux Data values, replace the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack.
Refer to the TONE-BD section on ‘‘How to Replace the Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack’’.
g. Tone-Clock circuit pack on-board maintenance has detected one or more
clock slips, timing differences between its internal reference source and
the synchronization signal provided by the master Tone-Clock. Although
no clock slip errors are expected during normal operation, both manual
and automatic interchanges of Tone-Clock circuit packs, synchronization
references, and PNCs, may result in clock slip counts.
If error 1281 also is logged for the same Tone-Clock circuit pack, it is
related to this problem, and should be corrected first. Otherwise, continue
with the procedure below.
1.Use test tone-clock UUC, and examine the results of test #149 to see if
slip errors are still occurring. If no new slip errors are reported, and
if these errors are not causing a TDM-CLK alarm, they may be
ignored. Use test tone-clock UUC long clear to clear the errors.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1414

2.Otherwise, enter the display errors command, and follow corrective
procedures for any other TDM-CLK, TONE-BD, SYNC, DS1C-BD,
EXP-INTF, SNC-BD, and SNI-BD errors logged, except for those in
the following table.
Error Log Entries for Slip Errors
Circuit Pack Name

Error Log
Name

Error Log Entry
for Slips

DS1 Interface

DS1-BD

3073 to 3160

Expansion Interface

EXP-INTF

2305

Switch Node Interface

SNI-BD

1537

Tone-Clock

TDM-CLK

1025

UDS1 Interface

UDS1-BD

3073 to 3160

DS1C Circuit Pack

DS1C-BD

3329

3.If 1025 errors persist, refer to SYNC Maintenance in this manual and
follow the procedures in the "Approach to Troubleshooting" section.
h. Error Type 1281This error is an indication that the Tone-Clock circuit
pack has detected a loss of timing signal from the system synchronization
reference. The Tone-Clock circuit pack has switched synchronization
references.
1.Resolve any errors logged against the SYNC or STRAT-13 maintenance
objects.
2.Refer to SYNC maintenance, in the “Approach to Troubleshooting”
section, if the error is not resolved by step 1
Error Type 1282Indicates that the TN2182 tone-clock was synchronized
to a DS1 facility and that the reference frequency provided by the DS1
drifted beyond a range that could be tracked by the TN2182. Therefore
the TN2182 is no longer synchronized to that DS1 reference. If a second
DS1 is available, the tone-clock may be synchronized to that reference. If
no secondary DS1 reference is available, the tone-clock will run off of its
internal clock. This may result in slips being reported by the tone-clock
and all DS1 facilities.
i. The tone-clock circuit pack in the master port network was unable to
detect the incoming synchronization signal, but the other tone-clock was
able to detect the references. If the aux data is 0, the problem is with the
signal on the primary. If the aux data is 1, the problem is with the signal on
the secondary. The system should switch clocks in this situation.
1.If this error is against a PPN clock board and the system is using a
Stratum 3 clock, check the cabling that brings the stratum 3 signal
to this clock board.
2.Replace the current standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. See How to
Replace the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1415

j. The indicated active Tone-Clock circuit pack, which is on a port network
that does not contain the system synchronization reference (a slave
Tone-Clock), has detected a loss of timing signal from its EXP-INTF
synchronization source.
1.Enter display errors and display alarms, and follow the associated
repair procedures for EXP-INTF, TDM-CLK, and TONE-BD error log
entries that have on-board alarms.
2.If the 2305 errors persist, follow the repair procedures for EXP-INTF error
log entries 257, 769, or 770, or any errors logged agains SNI-BD,
SNC-BD, or FIBER-LK.
3.If the 2305 errors persist:
a. For Port Networks with more than one Tone-Clock circuit
pack, execute the command test synchronization r 10, and
check to see if new 2305 errors against TDM-CLK were
reported. If not, execute reset PNC interchange and then
test synchronization r 10 again, and recheck for new 2305
errors against TDM-CLK
b. For Port Networks with a single Tone-Clock circuit pack,
execute the command test synchronization r 10, and check
to see if new 2305 errors were reported.
If no new instances of the 2305 errors were logged for either test,
then enter test tone-clock UUC long clear to clear the TDM-CLK
errors and the procedure is complete.
4.For Port Networks with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack,
interchange Tone-Clocks with the set tone-clock UUC, then run
test synchronization r 10, and check to see if new 2305 errors are
reported against the new active Tone-Clock circuit pack. If not,
replace the standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. See How to Replace
the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section. If this clears
the error, the problem has been resolved.
5.Replace the EI circuit pack for the active PNC. In the direct-connect
case, use the list fibers command to identify which active EI
connects with the PPN.
6.If the problem is still not cleared, and the Tone-Clock circuit pack
reported in the error log has not been replaced up to now, replace
it. See How to Replace the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD
section.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1416

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the SAKI Reset Test for example, you may also clear
errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SAKI Reset Test (#53) (a)

Long Test
Sequence

Reset Board
Sequence

D/ND 1

X

D

Clock Health Test (#46) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Looparound Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90) (c)
Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40) (c)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update Test (#41) (c)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test
(#148)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test (#149)(e)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test (#150)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test
(#151)

X

X

ND

Board Type Check Test (#574)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Standby Reference Health Check Test
(#651) (d)

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to “XXX-BD” for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to “TONE-BD” for a description of this test.
c. Refer to “TONE-PT” for descriptions of these tests.
d. This test only runs on the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack in a Port
Network with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack (High or Critical
Reliability Option). The circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware
revision 2 or above, or be a TN2182.
e. Test #149 is not run on the TN2182.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1417

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test (#148)
The TDM Bus Clock circuitry is checked for sanity. Any problems that are found
are reported via error codes
Table 10-431.
Error
Code

TEST #148 TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

None
1001

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.

1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the test.

1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
1

FAIL

This error means the Tone-Clock circuit pack framing verification firmware
reports an error in the clock synchronization signal coming into this Port
Network.
1. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack reporting the problem is a master clock,
then the system synchronization reference is providing a bad timing
source. Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) or STRAT-3 (Stratum 3 Clock)
Maintenance documentation to change the system synchronization
reference.
2. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack is a slave clock, then the EI to which it is
listening is providing a bad timing source. Follow the diagnostic
procedures specified for TDM-CLK Error Code 2305.
3. If no problem can be found with the incoming synchronization signal,
replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack. See How to Replace the
Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section.

2

FAIL

This error indicates that Tone-Clock circuit pack has inaccurately detected
loss of signal on the incoming synchronization timing source.

4
or
8

FAIL

The local oscillator on the Tone-Clock circuit pack has failed.

16
or
32

FAIL

The circuitry on the Tone-Clock circuit pack used to detect synchronization
timing errors has failed.
1. Errors 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32 indicate that there is poor synchronization
between port networks and external facilities. It may be noticeable to
the customer in the form of errors in data communications. The
Tone-Clock circuit pack is defective. See How to Replace the
Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)
Table 10-431.
Error
Code
64

Page 10-1418

TEST #148 TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test — Continued
Test
Result

FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This message is only sent when an uplink message has reported the loss of
valid synchronization timing information coming into this Port Network. It
has been reported in TDM-CLK Error Log entries; one or more of 1025,
1281, 1537, 2049 and 2305.
1. Resolve the errors indicated. No separate corrective action is required.

65

FAIL

The tone-clock is currently not able to lock on to the current synchronization
reference. If this tone-clock is in the master port networK:
1. Examine the error log for any DS1-BD, SYNC or other TDM-CLK errors
and resolve as applicable.
2. Run this test again via the test tone-clock UUC command.
3. Examine the DS1 measurements to determine if the facility is healthy.
4. Adminsiter a new synchronization reference.
5. Replace the DS1 board currently supplying the reference.
If this tone-clock is in the slave port networK:
1. Examine the error log for any SYNC, EXP-INTF or other TDM-CLK
errors.
2. Run this test again via the test tone-clock UUC command.

66

FAIL

There is an on-board failure of TDM clock hardware.
1. Replace this faulty tone-clock circuit pack.

PASS

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status is sane. There are no clock-detection circuit
problems on the Tone-Clock circuit pack.

Continued on next page

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test (#149)
This test evaluates the quality of the synchronization source for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack.
NOTE:
This test does not apply to the TN2182

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Table 10-432.
Error
Code

1001

Page 10-1419

TEST #149 TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.
1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The error code represents the number of timing slips detected on the
incoming synchronization source since the last slip inquiry was sent to the
Tone-Clock circuit pack. The incoming synchronization signal can be from
one of four sources:
1. A Stratum 3 Clock, if that option is administered and the circuit pack
tested was the active Tone-Clock in the PPN.
2. A DS1 Interface circuit pack, if DS1 Synchronization is administered,
and associated with the circuit pack tested.
3. The local oscillator on the master Tone-Clock circuit pack, if it is
providing the system clocking signals.
4. An EXP-INTF circuit pack, if the port network on which the test was
executed does not contain the current system synchronization
reference.
The error code is a variable amount ranging from 1 to 255.
1. Small numbers of slips should not result in service degradation. If the
error code is small (1 or 2), rerun the test. If the error only occurs
infrequently, it may be ignored.
2. Otherwise, refer to the “Approach to Troubleshooting” section in the
Synchronization (SYNC) Maintenance section of this manual.

PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack does not detect any timing slips. This indicates
that the incoming synchronization timing source is valid or that the system
synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack. The status
synchronization command should be used to verify that the desired
synchronization reference is providing timing for the system.

Continued on next page

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test (#150)
This test evaluates the quality of the synchronization source for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Table 10-433.
Error
Code

1001

Page 10-1420

TEST #150 TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.

ABORT

The system could not allocate the necessary resources for the test.
1. Wait 1 minute, and retry the test.

255

ABORT

The Tone-Clock circuit pack was using its local oscillator rather than
synchronizing to an external source.
1. Verify that this Tone-Clock circuit pack is expected to be the
synchronization source. If not, correct the synchronization information
and re-execute the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time
period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Any

FAIL

The error code represents the rate (in Parts Per Million, or PPM) at which
clock slip errors have been detected on the incoming synchronization
source since the last PPM inquiry was sent to the Tone-Clock circuit pack. A
failure of this test indicates that we are outside of Stratum 4 or Stratum 3
timing specifications on the incoming timing source.
The error code is a variable amount ranging from 1 to 254.
1. If error 1537 is entered in the hardware error log against TDM-CLK,
then the board has switched timing sources. Follow the procedures
associated with hardware log error code 1537.
2. Otherwise, refer to "Approach to Troubleshooting" in the
Synchronization (SYNC) Maintenance section of this manual.

PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack does not detect timing any PPM errors. This
indicates that the external synchronization timing source is valid or that the
system synchronization reference is a Tone-Clock circuit pack. The status
synchronization command should be used to verify that the desired
synchronization reference is providing timing for the system.

Continued on next page

TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test (#151)
This test updates the following internal parameters on the Tone-Clock circuit
pack:
■

Disable in-line duplication status messages.

■

Disable in-line subrate frame maintenance messages (TN768, TN780
only).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1421

■

Set the PPM threshold at 60 PPM for TN768 and TN780. Set the PPM
threshold at 85 PPM for TN2182.

■

Enable PPM threshold switching

■

Set the number of slips to trigger loss of signal - currently 30 per 5
millisecond period

■

Enable the on-board synchronization switching algorithm (see above)

■

Enable holdover operation (TN2182 only).

This is not a test and will always pass without identifying or reporting any
Tone-Clock circuit pack errors
Table 10-434.

TEST #151 TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

PASS

The Tone-Clock circuit pack parameters have been successfully updated.

Continued on next page

Board Type Check Test (#574)
This test verifies that a Tone-Clock circuit pack administered with a Stratum 3
Clock source has code TN780
Table 10-435.
Error
Code
2012

TEST #574 Board Type Check Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

ANY

FAIL

Stratum 3 Clock Synchronization is administered for the carrier in which this
Tone-Clock circuit pack resides, but the Tone-Clock does not have code
TN780.
1. If the Stratum 3 Clock option is incorrectly administered, remove it.
2. Otherwise, replace the circuit pack. See How to Replace the
Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the TONE-BD section.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)

Page 10-1422

TEST #574 Board Type Check Test — Continued

Table 10-435.
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
The proper (TN780) Tone-Clock circuit pack code is present for Stratum 3
Clock synchronization.

Continued on next page

Standby Reference Health Check Test (#651)
This test evaluates the quality of the external synchronization timing source for a
standby Tone-Clock circuit pack. All administered synchronization timing
sources must be valid for this test to pass. If the tone-clock circuit pack and the
synchronization timing sources are in different port networks, the EI circuit packs
transport the timing sources to the tone-clock.
Table 10-436.
Error
Code

TEST #651 Standby Reference Health Check Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This test may already be running due to a tone-clock installation, scheduled
maintenance, alarm activity, or a technician-demand test from another
terminal. This abort can also occur due to an internal system error.
1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to five times.

1184

ABORT

This test requires an external synchronization source to be administered
(DS1 primary, DS1 primary and secondary, or Stratum 3 Clock).
1. Administer the external synchronization source and retry the test.

2500

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock)
Table 10-436.
Error
Code

Page 10-1423

TEST #651 Standby Reference Health Check Test — Continued
Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

0

FAIL

The external synchronization timing source for side A of the Stratum 3
clock, or for the primary DS1 reference is either absent or invalid. The
external synchronization timing source for side B of the Stratum 3 clock, or
for the secondary DS1 reference is not yet tested.

1

FAIL

The external synchronization timing source for side B of the Stratum 3
clock, or for the secondary DS1 reference is either absent or invalid.
1. Correct the synchronization source problem. Refer to the
Synchronization (SYNC) maintenance section of this manual.
2. If the error still exists, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack reported in
the error log. See How to Replace the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack in the
TONE-BD section.

PASS

The external synchronization timing source is valid.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-BD (Tie Trunk Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1424

TIE-BD (Tie Trunk Circuit Pack)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

TIE-BD

MIN

test board PCSS sh

Tie Trunk Circuit Pack

TIE-BD

WRN

test board PCSS sh

Tie Trunk Circuit Pack

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.).

Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation for
circuit pack level errors. See also TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk).

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1425

TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run

Full Name of MO

TIE-DS11

MAJOR2

test trunk  l

DS1 Tie Trunk

TIE-DS1

MINOR

test trunk  l

DS1 Tie Trunk

TIE-DS1

WARNING

test trunk 

DS1 Tie Trunk

1.
2.

For additional repair information, see also DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.
A MAJOR alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded
by the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk
group are alarmed.

The DS1 tie trunk provides both voice and data inter-PBX communication. A 24
channel DS1 Interface circuit pack can support up to 24 digital tie trunks through
a 1.544 Mbps DS1 link. A 32 channel DS1 Interface circuit pack can support up
to 30 digital tie trunks through a 2.048 Mbps DS1 link. DS1 Interface circuit packs
are described in DS1-BD. DS1 Tie Trunks are used widely in the DCS and
Central Attendant Service (CAS) features of the system.
A DS1 tie trunk can also be used as an access endpoint which is a non-signaling
channel with a bandwidth of voice-grade-data, 56K-data or 64K-data.
DS1 tie trunk maintenance provides a strategy to maintain a DS1 tie trunk via a
port on the DS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance strategy covers logging
DS1 tie trunk hardware errors, running tests for trunk initialization, periodic and
scheduled maintenance, system technician-demanded tests, and alarm
escalation and resolution. Three different trunk service states are specified in the
DS1 tie trunk maintenance. They are: out-of-service in which the trunk is in a
deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or outgoing calls;
in-service in which the trunk is in an activated state and can be used for both
incoming and outgoing calls; disconnect (ready-for-service) in which the trunk is
in an activated state but can only be used for an incoming call. If the DS1
Interface circuit pack is out-of-service, all trunks on the DS1 Interface circuit pack
are placed into out-of-service state, and a Warning alarm is raised.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1426

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
DS1 Tie Trunk Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

01

0

1 (a)

57476

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Any

Any

test trunk
/ sh r 1>

57477
57485
57487
15 (b)

Any

Port Audit and
Update Test (#36)

18 (c)

0

busyout trunk
/

WARNING

OFF

release trunk
/

None

WARNING

ON

test trunk
/

130 (d)
257 (e)

57473
57474

513(f)

57392

DS1 Tie Trunk
Seizure Test (#136)

MIN/MAJ2

769(g)

57393

DS1 Tie Trunk
Seizure Test (#136)

MIN/MAJ2

1025

DS1 Tie Trunk
Seizure (Test #136)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

OFF

test trunk
/ r 2

1281

Conference Circuit
(Test #7)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk
/ l r 4

1537

NPE Crosstalk
Test (#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN3

ON

test trunk
/ l r 3

1793 (h)
2305(i)

test board PCSS long
50944

DS1 Tie Trunk
Seizure Test (#136)

MIN/MAJ3

OFF

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1427

DS1 Tie Trunk Maintenance Error Log Entries
2562(j)

16665

2817(k)

52992

3840 (j)

Any

Port Audit and
Update (Test #36)

Continued on next page
1.
2.

3.

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
This alarm will only be raised when the System-Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator
field set to 4 (Italy). This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75% or more trunks in this trunk group
are out of service, then the alarm will be upgraded to a MAJOR alarm.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set
options command. If the MINOR alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the MINOR
alarm is upgraded to a MAJOR alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.

a. Error Type 1—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on
the DS1 tie trunk. This error can be caused by incompatible translations.
Make sure the parameters administered on the DS1 circuit pack form
match those administered on the far-end switch. See DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 3 V2 Implementation, 555-230-653, and
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2.2 and Generic 3 V2
DS1/CEPT/ISDN-PRI Reference, 555-025-107, for details.
The Aux Data field indicates the following hardware error types:
57476

On-hook before wink

57477

On-hook before ready to receive digits

57485

Wink too short for valid signal

57487

The timer expired while waiting for an off-hook
signal from the far end as a response at end of
digits dialing. Check the far-end switch for related
problems.

If all administration errors between the switch and the far-end match, and
these errors continue to recur, follow normal escalation procedures.
b. Error Type 15—This is a software audit error that does not indicate any
hardware malfunction. Run Short Test Sequence and investigate
associated errors (if any).
c. Error Type 18—The DS1 tie trunk has been busied out by a busyout trunk
grp/mbr command. No calls can be made on this trunk except for the
Facility Access Test Call. Facility Access Test Calls are described in
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Feature Description,
555-230-204.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1428

d. Error Type 130—This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been
removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error,
reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
e. Error Type 257—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error
on the DS1 tie trunk. The trunk cannot communicate with the far end
because it is unable to interpret digits sent from the far-end switch. The
Aux Data field indicates the following:
57473

The rotary dial rate is below 8 pulses per second.

57474

The rotary dial rate is above 12 pulses per second.

Check with the far-end switch or operating company for proper trunk
connection.
f. Error Type 513—DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on
the DS1 tie trunk. The trunk is in-service/active and waiting for an
‘‘on-hook’’ from the far-end switch. No calls can be routed over the trunk
while it is in this state. Aux Data 57392 indicates no external release on
PBX disconnect. Check with the far-end switch or operating company for
proper trunk connection.
g. Error Type 769—The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware error
on the DS1 tie trunk. This error usually occurs after one or more
occurrences of error type 513. The trunk has received the belated
‘‘on-hook’’ that it has been waiting for from the far-end switch. The trunk is
restored to in-service/idle and can be used for calls. Aux Data 57393
indicates delayed external release on PBX disconnect. This error can be
ignored.
h. Error Type 1793—The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out-of-service. See the
appropriate DS1-BD/UDS1-BD (DS1/UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation for details.
i. Error Type 2305—Reorder message. The trunk could not be seized. This
error will cause the Trunk Seizure Test (#136) to run and is only
considered a problem if the Seizure Test fails (in which case Error Type
1025 will also show up). In this case, the trunk may be put in
‘‘Ready-for-Service’’ state (shown as ‘‘disconnected’’ by the status
command), which allows only incoming calls. Run the Trunk Seizure Test
(#136) and follow its outlined procedures.
j. Error Type 2562—Retry Failure error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error comes from call processing and is generated when a
second attempt (retry) to seize an outgoing trunk fails.
k. Error Type 2817—Glare error. This error is logged only. It is not a
hardware failure and hence does not start any testing or generate any
alarms. This error is the result of a simultaneous seizure of a two-way trunk
from both the near-end and the far-end. Attempt to place the call again. If
the error persists, execute the DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#136) and
follow its outlined procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1429

l. Error Type 3840—Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an
internal system error. Enter status trunk command and verify the status of
the trunk. If the trunk is out-of-service, then enter release trunk command
to put it back to in-service. Retry the test command. If the test continues to
abort, then escalate the problem.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the

NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other
tests in the testing sequence.

Short
Test
Sequence

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#136)

X

X

ND

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel
talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy
connections may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test
Sequence and takes on the order of 20 to 30 seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-437.
Error
Code

Page 10-1430

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to the TDM-BUS (TDM bus) Maintenance
Documentation to diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle,
retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-437.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-1431

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors
may be out of service. Issue the list measurements
tone-receiver command to display basic information
about the system’s tone receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run because of a previously existing
error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack
error.
1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-437.
Error
Code
2053

Page 10-1432

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm,
2049—Red Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—
Hyperactivity.
Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.

FAIL

This can be due to on-board or off-board problems.
Off-board problems of concern include EXP-PN and
EXP-INTF faults, TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated
with the tone detectors/tone generators. Clear all
off-board problems before replacing the board. Keep in
mind that a TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a
faulty board connected to the backplane or bent pins on
the backplane.
1. Look for EXP-PN and/or EXP-INTF errors in the error
log. If present, refer to the EXP-PN Maintenance
documentation and the EXP-INTF Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD
Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Retest when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3 are
cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-437.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1433

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The
NPE controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on
a per-port basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for
the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is
instructed to listen to several different tones and conference the tones together.
The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the level of the
tone is within a certain range, the test passes.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code

Page 10-1434

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots out of service due to TDM-BUS errors.
The status health command can be used to determine
if the system is experiencing heavy traffic. Refer to the
TDM-BUS (TDM bus) Maintenance Documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic and the port status is idle,
retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-1435

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
tone detectors present or some of the tone detectors
may be out of service. Issue the list measurements
tone-receiver command to display basic information
about the system’s tone receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1 minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a user for a valid call. Use the
display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration. This only applies to
analog stations.
1. To enable test, set the Test field on the station
administration screen for the particular analog
station being tested to "y." Use the change station
 command.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due to a previously existing error on
the specific port or because of a more general circuit
pack error.
1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this
port or circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code

Page 10-1436

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT

At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1
circuit pack: 1281—Loss of signal, 1793—Blue Alarm,
2049—Red Alarm, 2305—Yellow Alarm, 1537—
Hyperactivity.
Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error Log
and follow the procedures given in the appropriate
DS1-BD or UDS1-BD maintenance documentation for
the listed error types.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code

Page 10-1437

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This can cause noisy and unreliable
connections.
1. Enter the list configuration board UUCSS
command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8
or 9, replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or
later. The error log may have error type 1281 entries.
2. Test all administered trunks on the board. If one
fails, this could be an off-board problem (such as an
incoming seizure or an off-hook port seizure during
the test). Retest the board.
3. If all of the ports fail, check the CARR-POW (see
note below).
4. If several ports fail, check the error log for TONE-BD
or TONE-PT errors. If there are such errors, take the
appropriate action. When the TONE errors have
cleared, rerun the test.
5. If the retry passes and troubles have been reported,
coordinate isolation with the far-end PBX. Make sure
that the near-end and far-end switches and any
NTCE equipment (the CSU’s) have the correct
administration.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code

Page 10-1438

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(con’t.)

Description/ Recommendation
6. Replace the circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the conference circuit test fails for all ports on a
circuit pack, a -5 volt power problem is indicated.
If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is
present, either the 631DB AC power unit or the
676B DC power unit may be defective. (The
631DB power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by an AC source. The 645B power unit is
used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC
power source.) The system may contain a TN736
or TN752 power unit or a 631DB AC power unit,
but not both types of power units. To investigate
problems with a 631DB AC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
AC-powered systems) Maintenance
documentation. To investigate problems with a
645B DC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW
(carrier port power unit for DC-powered systems)
Maintenance documentation. If a red LED on
TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on,
replace the pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and by examining
station, trunk, or external wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-438.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1439

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the DS1
Interface circuit pack to ensure that the trunk’s translation is correct. Translation
updates include the following data: trunk type (in/out), dial type, timing
parameters, and signaling bits enabled. The port audit operation verifies the
consistency of the current state of the trunk kept by the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and the switch software.
Table 10-439.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-439.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-1440

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The test was aborted because the trunk is out of service.
1. Use the status trunk command to verify that the
trunk is out of service.
2. If the trunk is out of service, determine why.
3. If it is OK to put the trunk back in service, issue the
release trunk command to put the trunk back in
service, and then retry the test.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-439.
Error
Code

Page 10-1441

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
Trunk translation has been updated successfully. The
current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit
pack and switch software are consistent. If the trunk is
busied out, the test does not run, but it does return
PASS. To verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status trunk command to verify that the trunk
is in-service. If the trunk is in-service, no further
action is necessary. If the trunk is out-of-service,
continue to Step 2.
2. Enter release trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page

DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#136)
The DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test is run to verify the trunk’s signaling capability.
The test is composed of two parts. The first part queries the circuit pack for the
following errors: Loss of Signal, Red Alarm, Blue Alarm, Yellow Alarm, and
Hyperactivity Alarm. The second part of the test is performed by sending a
seizure message to the DS1 Interface circuit pack and expecting an active reply
by the DS1 Interface circuit pack. If maintenance software does not receive any

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1442

reply and the timer expires, the test is aborted. Once the active message is
received, a dial pause message is sent to the DS1 Interface circuit pack. If the
DS1 Interface circuit pack replies with a dial pulse tone message when the far
end responds to the seizure, then the DS1 tie trunk Seizure Test passes. If the far
end does not respond to the seizure and the timer expires, and the DS1 Interface
circuit pack sends a reorder message back to the maintenance software, then
the test fails.
This second part of this test CANNOT be run on a trunk if one of the following
cases is true:
1. The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk.
2. The trunk is the 24th port on a DS1 Interface circuit pack which is
administered using 24th Common Channel Signaling.
3. The trunk has been seized by a normal trunk call.
4. The trunk is administered with maintenance test disabled.
5. The outgoing signal type of the trunk is either automatic or
immediate-start.
Table 10-440.
Error
Code

1000

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

Internal System Error.

ABORT

System resources required to run this test were not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
then the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must
wait until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the error log for error type 1025
(see the error log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-440.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-1443

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Far end is seizing the trunk while the test is ongoing. A
glare situation is detected. Current test is designed to
be aborted. Use the display port UUCSSpp command
to determine the trunk group/member number of the
port. Use the status trunk command to determine the
service state of the port. If the service state indicates
that the port is in use, then the port is unavailable for
certain tests. You must wait until the port is idle before
retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Test failed due to incompatible configuration
administered in trunk group form.
1. Verify the following fields on the trunk group
administration screen:
a. Is trunk direction incoming only?
b. Is trunk outgoing type either automatic or
immediate-start?
c. Is trunk the 24th port of the DS1 Interface circuit
pack while common control channel signaling is
specified?
2. If the trunk has been administered using the above
information, then this test should abort.

1018

ABORT

The test was disabled via translation. You may want to
determine why the test has been disabled before you
enable it.
1. Verify that the ’Maintenance Test’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration’ screen is set to ’n.’ To enable the
test, change the trunk administration and enter ’y’
into the ’Maintenance Test’ field.
2. Repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-440.
Error
Code
1020

Page 10-1444

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The test did not run due to an already existing error on
the specific port or due to a more general circuit pack
error.
1. Examine the error log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.
2. Retry the test.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1040

ABORT

This test is not performed for trunk ports administered as
access endpoints.
1. Verify this port is an access endpoint by using the
display port command.
2. If the port has been administered as an access
endpoint, this test should abort.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT/
FAIL(1)

At least one of the following errors is found on the circuit
pack: 1281: Loss of Signal, 1793: Blue Alarm, 2049: Red
Alarm, 2305: Yellow Alarm, 1537: Hyperactivity.
1. Look for the above error types in the Hardware Error
Log and follow the procedures given in the DS1-BD
tests for the listed error types.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-440.
Error
Code

Page 10-1445

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The far-end trunk did not respond to the seizure of the
near-end trunk within the allowable time period. This test
could have associated in-line errors in the error log.
1. 1) Enter the list configuration board UUCSS
command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8
or 9, a failure of test 136 causes a subsequent failure
of test 7 due to a firmware bug. Eventually, the board
and all of its ports will be taken out of service and
extraneous on-board alarms will be generated.
Replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later.
2. Verify that the ’Trunk Type’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration’ screen matches the trunk type
administered on far-end switch.
3. Look for DS1-BD or UDS1-BD errors in the hardware
error log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 trunk
circuit pack) Maintenance documentation or to the
UDS1-BD (UDS1 trunk circuit pack) Maintenance
documentation.
4. Retry the test at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of
5 times.
5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-440.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1446

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the seizure message was not received
within the allowable time period.
1. Enter the list configuration board UUCSS
command. If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8
or 9, a failure of test 136 causes a subsequent failure
of test 7 due to a firmware bug. Eventually, the board
and all of its ports will be taken out of service and
extraneous on-board alarms will be generated.
Replace the circuit pack with a TN767C V3 or later.
2. Verify that the ’Trunk Type’ field on the ’Trunk
Administration’ screen matches the trunk type
administered on far-end switch.
3. Look for DS1-BD or UDS1-BD errors in the hardware
error log. If present, refer to the DS1-BD (DS1 trunk
circuit pack) Maintenance documentation or to the
UDS1-BD (UDS1 trunk circuit pack) Maintenance
documentation.
4. Retry the test at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of
5 times.
5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-DS1 (DS1 Tie Trunk)

Table 10-440.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1447

TEST #136 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Use the list config command, and resolve
any problems that are found.
2. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board long command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port. If this is not the case, check to see that
there is a valid board inserted.

Continued on next page
(1) Earlier G1 Software Versions reported Error Code 2053 as a FAIL

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1448

TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

TIE-TRK2

MAJOR3

test port PCSSpp l

Tie Trunk

TIE-TRK

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l

Tie Trunk

TIE-TRK

WARNING

test port PCSSpp sh

Tie Trunk

1.

2.
3.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ..., etc.); and pp is the 2-digit port
number (for example, 01).
Not relevant to the TN497 circuit pack.
A Major alarm on a trunk indicates that alarms on these trunks are not downgraded by
the set options command and that at least 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group
are alarmed. (This is not relevant to the TN497 circuit pack.

NOTE:
If ATMS testing is enabled, check the error log for ATMS Errors #3840 and
#3841. If the error log indicates that measurements exceeded acceptable
thresholds, and if no other trouble is found with the test trunk command,
run the ATMS test call with the test analog-testcall port PCCSSpp full
command.
The following circuit packs are covered by this section of TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk):
■

TN760 series

■

TN437 [G3iV2-386]

■

TN439 [G3iV2-386]

■

TN458 [G3iV2-386]

■

TN497 [G3iV2-386]

■

TN2140 [G3iV2-386]

The Tie Trunk circuit pack fits into a port slot and contains four trunk circuits (see
Figure 10-91). Each of these circuits interface a digital PBX to an analog tie trunk
going to another PBX across one-way dedicated circuits (except for the TN497
circuit pack) or across two-way dedicated circuits. Except for the TN439 and
TN497 circuit packs, each tie trunk has a 4-wire audio connection and may have
two signaling leads (E and M). Each tie trunk for the TN439 and TN497 circuit
packs has 2-wire audio connection/signal leads (A and B).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1449

In G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386, a tie trunk port can also be administered as an
access endpoint, which is a non-signaling channel with a voice-grade data
bandwidth.

PBX

TIE

TIE

TRUNK

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT

PACK

PACK

PBX

PORT

PORT

TIE TRUNK

Figure 10-91.

Tie Trunk Interactions

The number of tests to be implemented for Tie Trunk maintenance depends upon
the TIE-TRK circuit packs involved. The test are as follows:
1. NPE Crosstalk Test—Verifies the switch connection operation of the circuit
pack. It verifies that the trunk circuitry talks only on the selected time slot
on the TDM Bus and that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for
other connections.
2. Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test—Verifies the transmission
operation of the circuit pack. It verifies that signals are transmitted to and
from each port (Loop Around within the port), and it tests the conference
capabilities of all ports.
This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines.
Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power
company. To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this
test, the test may be disabled from trunk administration test field.
3. Several seizure tests, including the following:
— Tie Trunk Seizure Test (not relevant to the TN439 and TN497 circuit
packs)—Verifies the seizure capabilities of the circuit pack. For
wink start and delay dial outgoing trunks only, (and, for the TN2140

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1450

[G3iV2-386] circuit pack, also for continuous-seize-ack and
discontinuous-seize-ack), this test activates the M lead and checks
for a response from the distant end within 10 seconds. For
G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386, this test ABORTS on trunk ports
administered as access endpoints.
— Seizure Test (for TN497 circuit packs only)—Verifies the seizure
capabilities of the circuit pack. This test seizes the trunk and
outpulses a "pause." The port reports the result of the seizure
attempt uplink. The test can be disabled via Trunk Group
Administration.
— Tie Trunk Dial Test (for TN439 circuit packs only)—Verifies the
seizure and dialing capabilities of the circuit pack. This test
ABORTS on trunk ports administered as access endpoints.
4. EPF, M, and E Lead Test [G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only]—ABORTS on
trunk ports administered as access endpoints. This test consists of two
parts:
■

E lead test—Checks for the proper activation and deactivation of
the port’s E lead.

■

M lead test—Checks the M lead EPF current flow. The results of this
test allow for distinguishing between circuit pack and external
facility failures.

5. Port Audit Update Test (Audit & Update Test for the TN497 circuit pack)—
Sends non-disruptive administrative updates to the circuit pack with no
expected response. The test updates the translation information on
individual ports of the Tie Trunk. Except for the TN497 circuit pack, these
updates include:
■

Immediate, automatic, wink start, or delay dial and for the TN2140
[G3iV2-386], continuous-seize-ack

■

For the TN2140 [G3iV2-386], continuous or discontinuous.

■

Rotary or DTMF senderization in or out

■

Disconnect timing

■

DMTF time slot

Additional in-line testing is performed while a call is in progress. Thus, many
in-line errors may occur during operation. See the Error Log table for a
description of these errors. These errors may be reproduced by using the trunk
(making a call), and checking their occurrence in the Hardware Error Log.
Before a maintenance test can be run on a port, the port is required to be idle.
Except for a TN497 circuit pack, if an incoming call seizes the port which is being
tested by maintenance, the test is aborted, and the incoming call proceeds.
Non-TN497 circuit packs can be configured for back-to-back testing (also known
as connectivity testing) by making translation and cross-connect changes. This

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1451

testing configuration allows for the connection of Tie Trunks back-to-back in the
same switch to verify the operation of Tie Trunk ports. The tests can be
performed in either the E&M or simplex modes. For details, refer to the "Analog
Tie Trunk Back-to-Back Testing" section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance
Procedures’’

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-441.
Error
Type
0

1

TIE Trunk Error Log Entries

Aux Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)2

163842

None2

WARNING2

OFF2

1 (b)2

574762

None2

WARNING2

OFF2

1 (c)2

574772

None2

WARNING2

OFF2

1 (d)3

574833

None3

WARNING3

OFF3

1 (e)2

574852

None2

WARNING2

OFF2

15 (f)

Any

Port Audit Update
(#36); Audit and
Update (#36)

18 (g)

0

busyout trunk


WARNING

OFF

release trunk


None2

WARNING4

ON4

test trunk
/4

130 (h)2

test port PCSSpp s r 1

257 (i)

57473

None

WARNING

OFF

257 (j)

57474

None

WARNING

OFF

257 (k)

57475

None

WARNING

OFF

EPF M and E Lead
(#74)4

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,4

OFF4

test port PCSSpp sh r
34
test port PCSSpp sh r
34

513

4

Any

4

7694

574814

EPF M and E Lead
(#74)4

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,4

ON4

1025 (l)

Any2
573925

None

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,2
MINOR5

OFF

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

TIE Trunk Error Log Entries — Continued

Table 10-441.
Error
Type
1281

4

Page 10-1452

Aux Data
Any

4

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board
4

Test to Clear Value

EPF M and E Lead
(#74)4

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,4

ON

1537

Loop Around and
Conference (#33)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,4;
MINOR6

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 3

1793

Tie Trunk Seizure
(#73)4; Seizure
(#73)5; Tie Trunk
Dial (#747)3

MAJ/MIN/
WRN4,6;
MINOR

OFF

test port PCSSpp sh r
24; test port PCSSpp s r
26

2049

NPE Crosstalk (#6)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN1,4;
MINOR6

ON

test port PCSSpp l r 32

2305 (m)

50944

None4; Seizure
(#73)5; Tie Trunk
Dial (#747)3

2305
(m)3

574243

Tie Trunk Dial
(#747)3

25615

05

None5v

WARNING5

OFF5

28175

05

None5

MINOR5

OFF5

30735

05

None5

3840 (n)

8000

Analog
Transmission
(#844-848)

3841 (n)

Analog
Transmission
(#844-848)

test port PCSSpp sh r
34

OFF

MINOR

OFF

test analog testcall
PCSS pp r 2

Continued on next page
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the values used in the set options
command. If the MINOR alarm is not downgraded by the set options values, the MINOR alarm is upgraded to
a MAJOR alarm if 75 percent of the trunks in this trunk group are alarmed.
Non-TN497 circuit packs only.
TN439 circuit packs only.
Non-TN439 and non-TN497 circuit packs only
TN497 circuit packs only.
TN439 and TN497 circuit packs only.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1453

Notes:
a. Digit time-out. This occurs when the far-end PBX begins transmitting digits
too late (10 seconds) after receiving the signal indicating ready to receive
digits (if any). This can occur on an incoming immediate, wink, or delay
dial line. Check the far-end PBX to ensure a translation match at both
ends.
b. Rotary dial before wink. This occurs when the far-end PBX starts dialing
before the PBX sends the wink on a wink-start or (for non-TN439 circuit
packs) on a delay-dial line. Check the far-end PBX to ensure a translation
match at both ends.
c. Rotary dial too early. This occurs when the far-end PBX starts dialing too
soon (about 50ms) after seizure on a wink start or (for non-TN439 circuit
packs) on a delay-dial line. Check the far-end PBX to ensure a translation
match at both ends.
d. On hook before wink. This occurs when the far end goes on hook before a
wink. Check the far-end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends.
e. On an outgoing wink-start or delay-dial trunk, the wink time was too short
(less than 80ms) for a valid signal. Check the far-end PBX to ensure a
translation match at both ends.
f. This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardware
malfunction. Run the Short Test Sequence and investigate associated
errors (if any).
g. This indicates that the trunk in question has been busied-out by
maintenance personnel.
h. This indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has been insane
for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit
pack.
i. The rotary dial rate was too slow (less than eight pulses per second.)
Check the far-end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends.
j. The rotary dial rate was too fast (more than 12 pulses per second.) Check
the far-end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends.
k. The time between digits was too short (less than 300ms). Check the
far-end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends.
l. This indicates that the trunk is still seized with an incoming call. The
far-end PBX is not releasing the trunk after the call is dropped. A Minor
alarm is generated every four minutes until the far-end PBX releases the
trunk. Check the far-end PBX for problems.
Once the trunk is released from the call, the severity of this problem is
decreased. If Error Type 1025 does not appear again, this means that the
problem has been corrected. Verify that Error Type 1025 does not
reappear in the Error Log.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1454

m. Reorder message. Trunk could not be seized. This error causes the Tie
Trunk Seizure Test (#73) to run, and it is considered a problem only if the
Seizure Test fails (in which case Error Type 1793 also shows up). In this
case, the trunk may be placed in the "Ready-for-Service" state (shown as
"disconnected" by the status command), which allows only incoming calls.
Run the Tie Trunk Seizure Test and follow its outlined procedures.
n. Test calls made by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System
(ATMS) returned measurements that were outside the acceptable limits.
Use the list testcall detail command to examine specific transmission
parameters that are out of spec, and investigate the trunk for that kind of
noise. If the noise is acceptable, the limits administered on the "change
trunk" screen should be changed.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the Loop
Around and Conference Circuit Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Loop Around and Conference Circuit
Test (#33)

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#73)(2), Tie
Trunk Dial Test (#747)(3), Seizure Test
(#73)(4)

X

X

ND

Tie Trunk EPF Test (#74)(5)

X

X

ND

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)( ),
Audit and Update Test (#36)(4)

X

X

ND

Analog Transmission Test (#844-848)

(a)

(a)

6

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive
Non-TN439 and non-TN497 circuit packs only
TN439 circuit pack only
TN497 circuit pack only
G3iV1.1-286 and G3iV2-386 only
Non-TN497 circuit packs only

Notes:

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1455

a. ATMS test are not part of either sequence. They are run either on demand
with the test analog-testcall command or via the ATMS schedule.

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more NPE reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface. The NPE
controls port connectivity and gain, and provides conferencing functions on a
per port basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks
on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections
may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence
and takes 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-442.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The trunk may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display trunk xx command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active, but the port is not in use
(no connected ports), check the Error Log for Error
Type 1025 (see Error Log table for description of this
error and required actions). The port may be locked
up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1456

Table 10-442.
Error
Code
1001

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. This could be due to a failure to seize the port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

(Non-TN497 circuit packs only) The port was seized by
a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted.
Use the display trunk xx command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1457

Table 10-442.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Any

FAIL

This test can fail due to on-board or off-board problems.
Off-board problems of concern include EXP-INTF faults,
TDM-BUS faults, and faults associated with the tone
detectors/tone generators. Clear all off-board problems
before replacing the board. Keep in mind that a
TDM-BUS problem is usually the result of a faulty board
connected to the backplane or bent pins on the
backplane.
1. Look for EXP-INTF errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the EXP-INTF Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TDM-BUS errors in the error log. If present,
refer to the TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation.
3. Look for TONE-BD and/or TONE-PT errors in the
error log. If present, refer to the TONE-BD
Maintenance documentation and the TONE-PT
Maintenance documentation.
4. Test the board when the faults from steps 1, 2, and 3
are cleared. Replace the board only if the test fails.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1458

Table 10-442.
Error
Code

0

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated using other port tests and examining
station, trunk or external wiring.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Loop Around and Conference Circuit Test (#33)
This test checks the reflective loop around, and conference capabilities of a tie
trunk port circuit. The test uses 404-Hz, 1004-Hz, and 2804-Hz tones. This is an
on-board test only, and each tone is transmitted through the loop and checked
upon return.
This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines.
Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company.
To temporarily alleviate the alarm caused by the failure of this test, the test may
be disabled from the trunk administration Test field.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1459

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test
Error
Code

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

7

ABORT

The conference circuit test was aborted.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

129

ABORT

The 404-Hz reflective loop around test aborted.
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

131

The 1004-Hz reflective loop around test aborted.
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

133

The 2804-Hz reflective loop around test aborted.
Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1460

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The trunk may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display trunk xx command to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active, but the port is not in use
(no calls), check the Error Log for Error Type 1025
(see Error Log table for a description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
2. If the port status is idle, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at one-minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1461

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
1003

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors may
be out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT Maintenance documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

(Non-TN497 circuit packs only.) The port was seized by
a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted.
Use the display trunk xx command to determine the
trunk group/member number of the port. Use the status
trunk command to determine the service state of the
port. If the service state indicates that the port is in use,
the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.

1018

ABORT

The test has been disabled via administration.
Verify that the 'Maintenance Test' field on the 'Trunk
Group' form is set to 'n'. To enable the test, issue the
'change trunk-group x' command (x equals the number
of the trunk group to be tested). Then, change the entry
in the 'Maintenance Test' field on the form to 'y'.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1462

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

7,

FAIL

The conference capabilities of the port failed (Error
Code 7).

129,

The reflective 404-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission
was detected to or from the port (Error Code 129).

131, or

The reflective 1004-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission
was detected to or from the port (Error Code 131).

133

The reflective 2804-Hz Tone Test failed. No transmission
was detected to or from the port (Error Code 133).
FAULT ISOLATION: Proceed as follows unless power or
tone problems are suspected (see notes on the next
page).
1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect
the port from the CO and retry the test. Coordinate
this with the CO, or do it after busy hours; otherwise,
the CO may put the connection out of service.
2. If the retry fails, replace the circuit pack.
3. If the retry passes and no troubles have been
reported, disable the test. If the retry passes and
troubles have been reported, refer the problem to
the CO.

More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1463

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
7,
129,
131, or
133

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
NOTE:
If the loop around and conference circuit test fails
for all ports on a circuit pack, a -5 volt power
problem is indicated. If a TN736 or TN752 power
unit circuit pack is present, either the 631DB AC
power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be
defective. (The 631DB power unit is used in a
medium cabinet powered by an AC source. The
645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet
powered by a DC power source.) The system may
contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack
or a 631DB AC power unit, but not both types of
power units. To investigate problems with a 631DB
AC power unit, refer to the CARR-POW (carrier
port power unit for AC-powered systems)
Maintenance documentation. To investigate
problems with a 645B DC power unit, refer to the
CARR-POW (carrier port power unit for
DC-powered systems) Maintenance
documentation. If a red LED on TN736 or TN752
power unit circuit pack is on, replace the pack.
If the test fails on more than 1 port, check for
errors on the TONE-BD or the TONE-PT. If errors,
take appropriate actions. When the tone errors are
cleared, rerun the test. If the test fails again, see
FAULT ISOLATION above.

PASS

Tie trunk Loop Around and Conference Test is
successful. This port is functioning properly.
1. If users are reporting troubles, examine loop
connections to the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1464

Table 10-443. TEST #33 Loop Around and
Conference Circuit Test — Continued
Error
Code
0

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Audit Update Test (#36)
This test sends updates of the Tie Trunk port translation for all ports on the circuit
pack that have been translated. The update is non-disruptive and guards against
possible corruption of translation data contained on the board. No response
message is expected from the circuit pack once it receives translation updates.
The port translation data for non-TN439 and non-TN497 circuit packs includes
the following: Immediate, automatic, wink-start or delay dial trunk, rotary or DTMF
senderization in or out, disconnect timing from 10 to 2550ms in 10ms increments,
and DMTF time slot. (Continuous-seize-ack is also included for the TN2140
[G3iV2-386] circuit pack.) The port translation data for the TN439 circuit pack
includes the following: Immediate or wink-start trunk, rotary or DTMF
senderization in or out, disconnect timing from 10 to 2550ms in 10ms increments,
and DMTF time slot.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1465

Table 10-444.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

(TN439 and TN497 circuit packs only.) The port is in the
out-of-service state. The test cannot be run.
1. Retry the command once the port is in service.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1466

Table 10-444.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit Update Test — Continued

Test
Result
PASS

Description/ Recommendation
This test passed. Translation information was
successfully updated on the circuit pack.
1. If signaling troubles are reported, verify translation
information for this port.
(Non-TN439 and non-TN497 circuit packs only.) If the
trunk is busied out, the test does not run, but it does
return PASS.
To verify that the trunk is in-service:
1. Enter status trunk command to verify that the trunk
is in-service.
If the trunk is in-service, no further action is necessary. If
the trunk is out-of-service, continue to Step 2.
2. Enter release trunk command to put trunk back into
in-service.
3. Retry the test command.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Tie Trunk Seizure Test (#73), Tie Trunk Dial Test
(#747). Seizure Test(#73)
The Tie Trunk Seizure Test activates the M lead and checks for a response from
the external end within 10 seconds. This test is applicable only to wink start and
delay dial outgoing trunks. (For the TN2140 [G3iV2-386] circuit pack, the trunk
must also be continuous-seize-ack and discontinuous-seize-ack).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1467

The Tie Trunk Dial Test seizes the trunk and outpulses a pause digit.
For a port administered as TGU or a TGE, the Seizure Test internally seizes the
trunk and outpulses a "pause." The report reports the result of the seizure attempt
uplink.
Table 10-445.
Error
Code

Seizure Tests (#73, #747, #73)

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The trunk may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display trunk xx to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port is unavailable for certain tests. You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active, but the port is not in use
(no calls), then check the Error Log for Error Type
1025 (see Error Log table for description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
The far-end PBX may not be releasing.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1468

Table 10-445.
Error
Code
1004

Seizure Tests (#73, #747, #73) — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
(Non-TN497 circuit packs only.) The port was seized by
a valid call during the test. The test has been aborted.
Use the display trunk xx to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the status trunk
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, the port
is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

(Non-TN439 circuit packs only.) This test is not valid for
this trunk translation. For this test to run, a delay dial
trunk (or, for non-TN497 circuit packs, a wink-start trunk)
must be in effect, and the trunk must be outgoing or
two-way. Also, for the TN2140 [G3iV2-386], the trunk
must be continuous-seize-ack or
discontinuous-seize-ack.
1. Check trunk translation. If it is not a wink-start or
delay dial trunk, this abort message should be
ignored. (For the TN2140 [G3iV2-386], disregard
this abort on a trunk that is not continuous-seize-ack
or discontinuous-seize-ack.)

1018

ABORT

Test disabled via administration.
1. Verify that the "Maintenance Tests?" field on the
Trunk Group Form is set to "n." To enable the test,
issue the change trunk-group x command where
"x" equals the number of the trunk group to be
tested. Then change the entry in the "Maintenance
Tests?" field on the form to "y."

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1469

Table 10-445.
Error
Code
1040

Seizure Tests (#73, #747, #73) — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
(Non-TN497 circuit packs only.) This test is not
performed for trunk ports administered as access
endpoints.
1. Verify this port is an access endpoint by using the
display port command.
2. If the port has been administered as an access
endpoint, this test should abort.

2000

ABORT

Seizure message is not received back within 10
seconds.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, check the far-end PBX to
ensure a translation match at both ends.
3. Check the facility.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

3

FAIL

(TN439 circuit packs only.) No dial tone detected from
the other end.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, check the far-end PBX to
ensure a translation match at both ends.
3. Check the facility.

PASS

The relevant seizure test passes. This port is functioning
properly.
1. If users are reporting troubles, examine loop
connections to the port, wiring, and stations.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1470

Table 10-445.
Error
Code
0

Seizure Tests (#73, #747, #73) — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Tie Trunk EPF Test (#74)
This test consists of an E lead and M lead test. The E lead test checks for the
proper activation and deactivation of the port’s E lead. The M lead test checks
the M lead EPF current flow. The processor sends an M lead test request to the
circuit pack and receives the results. The returned results are measured to see if
a port or external tie trunk line fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1471

Table 10-446.
Error
Code

TEST #74 Tie Trunk EPF Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The trunk may be busy with a valid call. Use
the display trunk xx to determine trunk group/member
number of the port. Use the status trunk command to
determine the service state of the port. If the service
state indicates that the port is in use, then the port is
unavailable for certain tests. You must wait until the port
is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is active, but the port is not in use
(no calls), then check the Error Log for Error Type
1025 (see Error Log table for description of this error
and required actions). The port may be locked up.
The far-end PBX may not be releasing.
2. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1472

Table 10-446.
Error
Code
1004

TEST #74 Tie Trunk EPF Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display trunk xx to
determine the trunk group/member number of the port.
Use the status trunk command to determine the service
state of the port. If the service state indicates that the
port is in use, the port is unavailable for certain tests.
(Refer to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’
for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

This test is not valid for this trunk translation. Must be a
Type-1 standard trunk for this test to run.
1. Check trunk configuration. If it is not a Type-1
standard trunk, this abort message should be
ignored.

1014

ABORT

The test was aborted because the circuit pack has not
been inserted into the system.
1. Use the list configuration board command to make
sure the circuit pack is inserted in the carrier.
2. If the board is not inserted, make sure the circuit
pack is inserted in the carrier and fully seated.
3. If the test continues to fail, escalate problem.

1040

ABORT

This test is not performed for trunk ports administered as
"access endpoints."
1. Verify this port is an access endpoint by using the
display port command.
2. If the port has been administered as an access
endpoint, this test should abort.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1473

Table 10-446.
Error
Code

TEST #74 Tie Trunk EPF Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run the test. This could be due to a failure to seize the
port.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

FAIL

The E lead test failed due to an on-board port problem.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

2

FAIL

The M lead test failed. The EPF has experienced an
overcurrent condition, perhaps due to the external M
lead.
1. To make sure the problem is on-board, disconnect
the facility from the pack and retry the test.
2. If the test fails, replace the circuit pack. Otherwise,
check the external wiring toward the far-end PBX.

PASS

Tie Trunk EPF test is successful. This port is functioning
properly.
1. If users are reporting troubles, examine loop
connections to the port.

0

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board).
1. Check to ensure that the board translations are
correct. Translate the board, if necessary.
2. Issue the busyout board command.
3. Issue the reset board command.
4. Issue the release busy board command.
5. Issue the test board command. This should
re-establish the linkage between the internal ID and
the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1474

Transmission Test (#844-848)
This test is non-destructive.
NOTE:
Tests #844-848 are not supported on a International switch.
These tests are run by the Automatic Transmission Measurement System
(ATMS). They are not part of the long or short trunk test sequences. Instead, they
are run on demand with the test analog-testcall command or as part of ATMS
scheduled testing.
The test call is run from an analog port on a TN771 Maintenance/Test circuit
pack. It attempts to seize a port and make a call to a terminating test line (TTL) on
the trunk’s far end. Transmission performance measurements are made and
compared to administered thresholds. Errors are generated when results fall
outside of ‘‘marginal’’ or ‘‘unacceptable’’ thresholds. Detail and summary
measurement reports are obtainable via the list testcalls command.
Table 10-447.
Error
Code
1000

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be busy with a valid call. Use
display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk
group/member number of the port. Use the "status trunk"
command to determine the service state of the port. If
the service state indicates that the port is in use, then
the port unavailable for this test. (Refer to the "Status
Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. If the port status is idle, then retry the command at 1
minute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1475

Table 10-447.
Error
Code
1002

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate timeslots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have timeslots out of service due to TDM bus errors.
Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active
TDM bus errors.
1. If system has no TDM bus errors and is not handling
heavy traffic, repeat test at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
status trunk to determine when the port is available for
testing.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Trunk has been administered as incoming-only;
transmission tests can only be run on outgoing trunks.

1115

ABORT

The near end test line on the TN771 circuit pack could
not be allocated.
1. Verify that the TN771 circuit pack is in service and
that port 1 is administered and in service with the
status port command.
2. retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
3. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1900

ABORT

The test completion message was not received from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1476

Table 10-447.
Error
Code
1901

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
This error occurs when the TN771 circuit pack uplinks a
message that is not the proper response for this test.
The anticipated uplink messages are seize, ring or
answer.
1. Verify that the Trunk is administered properly.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1905

ABORT

Intercept tone detected from far end.
1. Get the test line data from theand verify it with the far
end. Dial the test number manually to see if the TTL
is reached. If it is not, then either the number is
wrong, or the far end is administered incorrectly.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1906

ABORT

Reorder tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1907

ABORT

Other unexpected tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1913

ABORT

Audible Ring detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1914

ABORT

Unidentified interrupted tone detected from far end.
1. See actions for error code 1905

1915

ABORT

Busy tone detected from far end.
1. Since the test line at the far end was busy. Try the
test again.
2. If the test continues to abort, the problem is with the
far end system.

1918

ABORT

Test progress tone not removed from far end (type 105
test line only).
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1477

Table 10-447.
Error
Code
1919

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Unexpected far end release
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1920

ABORT

No response from far end.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1921

ABORT

No data returned from far end.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

1922

ABORT

Steady, unidentifiable tone from far end
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1923

ABORT

Broadband energy detected from far end (such as voice
or announcement).
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1924

ABORT

No test tone from far end
1. See actions for error code 1905.

1938

ABORT

Near-end self test failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1939

ABORT

Loss self check at 0dBm at 1004 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1940

ABORT

Far end noise self check failed.
1. The problem is with the far end system; a technician
at the far end should test the test line (TN771 or
ADFTC).

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1478

Table 10-447.
Error
Code
1941

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
High frequency singing return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1942

ABORT

Echo return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1943

ABORT

Singing return loss self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1944

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 1004 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1945

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 404 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1946

ABORT

Loss self check at -16 dBm at 2804 Hz failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

1947

ABORT

Noise with tone self check failed.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

The test timed out while waiting for a response from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk)

Page 10-1479

Table 10-447.
Error
Code
2012

TEST #844-848 Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
An internal software error occurred.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2053

ABORT

The test call could not be established, but no information
on why is available.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 retries.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

2056

ABORT

An error occurred while trying to obtain results from the
TN771 circuit pack.
1. Test the TN771 circuit packs.
2. If the test continues to abort escalate the problem.

8000

FAIL

Measured transmission performance was in the
unacceptable range as administered on the trunk group
form. Retrieve a measurement report via the list
testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS thresholds
are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group form.
Besides the facility, test failures can be caused by faulty
test lines or switch paths. If the measurements point to a
facility problem, report the results to the trunk vendor.

FAIL

Measured transmission performance was in the
marginal range as administered on the trunk group form.
This generally means that the trunk is usable but has an
undesirable amount of noise or loss. If the user does not
report unacceptable effects, it may not be necessary to
take any action. Retrieve a measurement report via the
list testcalls command. Make sure that ATMS
thresholds are set properly on page 4 of the trunk group
form.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1480

TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)
MO Name
As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician Command
to Run1

Full Name of MO

MAJOR

test tone-clock PC

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

TONE-BD

MINOR

test tone-clock PC

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

TONE-BD

WARNING

release tone-clock PC

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

1.

P is the port network number (1 for PPN, 2-3 for EPNs). C is the carrier designation (A, B,
C, D, or E).

The Tone-Clock circuit pack functionality is provided by two independent objects
in the same circuit pack. The tone generator provides all the tones needed by the
system and the clock generates the system clocks for the Time Division Multiplex
(TDM) Bus and aids in monitoring and selecting internal synchronization
references.
When resolving errors/alarms on the Tone-Clock circuit pack, the following
should be used also:
■

TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance documentation.

■

TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) Maintenance documentation.

■

SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance documentation.

The TN2182 is a combined Tone-Clock-Detector circuit pack which contains a
third independent function not available on the TN768 or TN780. The TN2182
contains 8 ports used for all-purpose tone detection. These ports are called
Enhanced Tone Receiver ports (ETR-PT) and are described in the
documentation for ETR-PT.

Tone-Clock Circuit Packs and System Reliability
Options
The following sections describe the relationship between the various System
Reliability Options and Tone-Clock circuit pack configurations.

Standard Reliability Option
Systems with the Standard Reliability Option (no duplication options) have one
Tone-Clock circuit pack in each port network (PPN and EPN). For the PPN or the
EPN this is in the A carrier. This Tone-Clock circuit pack generates clocks and
provides system tones for all carriers of the port network it resides on.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1481

High Reliability Option
Systems with the High Reliability Option (duplicated SPE, simplex PNC) have one
Tone-Clock circuit pack in each PPN control carrier, A and B. One Tone-Clock
circuit pack will be actively generating system clock signals for PPN
components, while the other will be in standby mode, ready to take over in the
event of a Tone-Clock interchange. Similarly, one Tone-Clock circuit pack will be
actively providing system tones for the PPN, while the other will be in standby
mode. Normally, the same Tone-Clock circuit pack will be active for both tones
and clock signals, but these responsibilities may be divided if neither circuit pack
is able to perform both functions. The status port-network command will
indicate which Tone-Clock circuit pack is actively performing each function.
For systems using the TN2182 Tone-Clock-Detector circuit pack, tone generation
and clock generation behaves the same as other clock boards with one being
active and one being standby. But the tone detector ports (ETR-PTs) of the
TN2182 are always considered available and in-service regardless of the
active/standby state of the tones or clock for a specific circuit pack.
EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack configuration is the same as for the Standard
Reliability Option. Each EPN Tone-Clock circuit pack will be active for both tones
and clock signals for its port network.

Critical Reliability Option
Systems with the Critical Reliability Option (SPE duplication and PNC duplication)
have two Tone-Clock circuit packs associated with the PPN, as in the High
Reliability Option case, and two more Tone-Clock circuit packs for each EPN. For
the EPN, these are in carriers A and B. As in the previous case, one Tone-Clock
in each Port Network is active, supplying system clocks and tones, and the other
is in standby mode.

Tone-Clock Interchange Strategy
The Tone-Clock circuit pack interchanges are controlled both by manual
intervention and by maintenance software strategies.
The manual interchange strategy for Tone-Clock circuit packs differs slightly
between the PPN and any EPNs on a system.

Manual PPN Tone-Clock Interchange
In a PPN with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack, the intention is to assure
that the one considered most healthy is active at any given time. This is
independent of the SPE Duplication strategy, in the sense that the active
Tone-Clock circuit pack need not change with an interchange of SPE carriers.
Rather, except for the effect of the manual intervention discussed earlier,

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1482

Tone-Clock interchanges occur only as a result of changes in the health of
Tone-Clock circuit packs, as perceived by maintenance software. When both
Tone-Clock circuit packs are equally healthy, no preference is given to one over
the other, regardless of which SPE carrier is active.
It is possible to manually control Tone-Clock interchanges in three ways.
1. The standby Tone-Clock circuit pack may be made unavailable for most
purposes by using the busyout tone-clock PC command. Such a
Tone-Clock may not be selected with console commands, nor with normal
maintenance software activities, until it has been made available again
with the restore tone-clock PC command.
NOTE:
busyout tone-clock is not allowed for active Tone-Clock circuit
packs.
2. The SPE processor lock switches may be used to force a particular SPE to
be active. This method overrides all other Tone-Clock interchange
controls. If there is a Tone-Clock circuit pack in the same carrier as the
active SPE, it will become active, regardless of its health. If the Tone-Clock
circuit pack in the selected SPE was in the busyout state (see item 1
above), it will automatically be released and made active. While the lock
switches are set for a particular carrier, no manual intervention or software
error detection will cause an interchange of Tone-Clocks; the Tone-Clock
circuit pack in the standby SPE carrier can never become active. If there
is no Tone-Clock circuit pack in the selected SPE at the time the switches
are set, but one is later installed, the system will interchange to it
regardless of its health. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack is removed from an
SPE while the switches are set, no interchange will occur; the system will
have no active tone-clock. When the lock switches are restored to the
neutral position, a tone clock interchange will occur only if the standby
Tone-Clock circuit pack is healthier than the active one.
3. A particular Tone-Clock circuit pack can be made active by issuing the
set tone-clock PC [override] command. If the Tone-Clock to be made
active is less healthy than the currently active one, no interchange will
occur unless the override option is specified; without it a message will
inform the user that it is required.
Once a Tone-Clock circuit pack is made active by the set tone-clock PC
command, it will stay active until either the set tone-clock PC command is
issued again to make the other circuit pack active, or until a fault occurs in
the active Tone-Clock circuit pack, which causes the system to
interchange Tone-Clocks.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1483

Manual EPN Tone-Clock Interchange
In an EPN with duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs, one circuit pack is always
preferred over the other. This is the Tone-Clock circuit pack in carrier A. The
intention is that the preferred circuit pack be active whenever it is healthy. Once
a failing preferred Tone-Clock circuit pack has been replaced or repaired, the
system will make it active as soon as possible.
Control over interchanges for an EPN is accomplished in essentially the same
ways as items 1 and 3 in the PPN case above. In addition, when the
non-preferred Tone-Clock circuit pack in an EPN is active, and the preferred
circuit pack is repaired and proven capable of filling its roles, the system will
automatically interchange back to it as soon as possible.

Software Maintenance Interchange
Interchanges may be instigated by software Tone-Clock maintenance in two
ways.
1. A scheduled Tone-Clock circuit pack interchange occurs according to the
parameters set by the change system-parameters maintenance
command. This can be disabled or set to run weekly, but the standard
(default) situation is for it to occur daily, at the time specified in the
system-parameters list for scheduled maintenance to begin. This
interchange will be blocked if the lock switches are set, if the
non-preferred Tone-Clock circuit pack in an EPN has been selected with
the set tone-clock command, if the standby Tone-Clock has been set to
the busyout state, or if the clock generation capability of the standby
Tone-Clock circuit pack is known to be impaired. When this scheduled
interchange occurs, the standby Tone-Clock circuit pack becomes active
for a period of 20 seconds to test its ability to generate clock signals, and
then is returned to standby mode.
2. Unscheduled interchanges occur when on-board Tone-Clock circuit pack
maintenance, or ongoing switch maintenance tests of TONE-BD,
TONE-PT, or TDM-CLK uncover failures serious enough to raise any
MAJOR or MINOR alarm against the active Tone-Clock circuit pack.

International Settings [G3i V2]
The TN780 Tone-Clock circuit pack uses three firmware configuration
parameters for international support [G3i V2]. The following two are automatically
set by the software load for the targeted country:
■

The circuit pack’s country-code (USA, ITALY, AUSTRALIA, etc.)

■

The circuit pack’s companding mode (mu-Law or A-Law)

The third configuration parameter is used only for Italy (country code: ITALY),
and selects whether new versus old ISPT (Istituto Superiore Poste Telegrafi)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1484

tones will be used for dial and confirmation tones. Values for dial confirmation
tone can be set independently on the change system-parameters
miscellaneous form. Whenever such changes are made, the effects are
immediately enforced on all TN780 Tone-Clock circuit packs without disrupting
tone or timing services.

Italian Tone Settings (New ISPT Value)

Tone

Default

Old ISPT Value

Dial

Continuous

Cadenced

Confirmation

Cadenced

Continuous

In addition the TN780 allows customization of up to six system tones in order to
meet specific country needs. These changes are made via the change
system-parameters country-options form.
The TN2182 allows the same International changes as the TN780 but allows the
customization of up to 24 system tones in order to meet specific country needs.
These changes are made via the change system-parameters country-options
form.

How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack is a service-disrupting procedure on Port
Networks with a single Tone-Clock, because the Tone-Clock circuit pack is
always needed to generate clocks for its network. For EPN Tone-Clock
replacement where no second Tone-Clock circuit pack exists, only that EPN is
affected. When the circuit pack is removed, all calls are dropped immediately,
the EPN enters emergency transfer within one minute, and no calls can be set up
from or to that EPN. However, if the PPN Tone-Clock is removed for replacement
in a Standard Reliability Option system, the System Emergency Transfer feature
is activated within milliseconds, and the entire system is disrupted; no calls can
be placed, and existing calls are dropped.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1485

When replacing the Tone-Clock circuit pack, always replace it with a comparable
Tone-Clock circuit pack for the system. See the following table:

System Type

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Code

One-port network single-carrier cabinet
system without High or Critical Reliability.

TN756, TN768, TN780 TN2182
[G3iV4-386]

One-port network system without High or
Critical Reliability (multicarrier cabinet).

TN768, TN780

Two-port network single-carrier cabinet
system without High or Critical Reliability.

TN768, TN780 TN2182
[G3iV4-386]

One- or two-port network without High or
Critical Reliability.

TN768, TN780 TN2182
[G3iV4-386]

■

■

■

TN768—This is the general purpose Tone-Clock circuit pack for port
networks on a G3i switch. It can be used in every situation except as the
Master Tone-Clock circuit pack when a Stratum 3 Clock is administered.
TN780—The Stratum 3 Clock feature requires the use of this circuit pack
code for the PPN (in both carriers of High and Critical Reliability systems).
The Stratum 3 Clock will operate only with this code as the Master
Tone-Clock circuit pack. The TN780 circuit pack is upward compatible
with the TN768 code, and can be used in any place a TN768 would be
allowed. The TN780 is used in many countries outside the U.S. where the
TN768 does not provide local tones.
TN2182—This Tone-Clock-Detector may be used anywhere a TN768 or
TN780 is used with the exception of configurations requiring Stratum 3
Clock. The TN2182 may be used in all country configurations.

Port Networks with a Single Tone-Clock Circuit
Pack
This procedure is destructive.
1. Pull out the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack. This will remove the clocks
and cause the system to activate emergency measures:
■

For the PPN Tone-Clock, the system will immediately go into the
Emergency Transfer state.

■

For an EPN Tone-Clock, all calls to and from the EPN will drop and
the EPN will activate Emergency Transfer within about one minute,
but the rest of the system should operate normally.

2. Insert a new Tone-Clock circuit pack. The system will detect the return of
the clocks and will automatically recover as follows:
■

If the Tone-Clock circuit pack being replaced is in the Processor
Port Network, the system will perform a reset system 2 (system
cold 2 restart) automatically. First, all red LEDs of the PPN will

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1486

come on and off wi thin 30 seconds. Then, all red LEDs of any
Expansion Port Networks will come on and go off within the next 30
seconds.
■

If the Tone-Clock circuit pack being replaced is in an Expansion
Port Network, the system will reset the EPN (EPN cold restart) and
all the red LEDs of the EPN will come on and go off within 30
seconds.

3. If the red LEDs come on but do not go off within 30 seconds, pull the
circuit pack out and reseat it. If the LEDs perform as expected this time,
continue with step 6. Otherwise, there may be a problem with the TDM
Bus; possibly a bent pin in the Tone-Clock circuit pack slot. Follow the
directions in the TDM-BUS maintenance section.
4. If the red LEDs did light, as explained above, then go to Step 6. If the red
LEDs do NOT light, as explained above, then go on to Step 5.
5. Restart the affected Port Network:
■

In the PPN, restart the system via the reset system 2 command.

■

In an EPN, restart the EPN by resetting its Expansion Interface
circuit pack via the reset board command, using the board
address 1a01 for EPN1 and 1a02 for EPN2.

If this step should fail, follow normal escalation procedures.
6. Test the new Tone-Clock circuit pack to verify that it is functioning
properly, using the test tone-clock PC long command, and verify that the
system is operational by placing several phone calls. Where possible, try
calls into, out from, and within the affected Port Network.
If the system is not operating properly, follow normal escalation
procedures.

Port Networks with Two Tone-Clock Circuit
Packs:
1. If both Tone-Clock circuit packs in a Port Network need to be replaced,
first replace and test the one that is in standby mode. Make sure that it is
healthy and active before replacing the second one. Make sure the
Tone-Clock circuit pack to be replaced is in Standby Mode by displaying
its status via the status port-network command or making sure its yellow
LED is off.
The active/standby state of a Tone-Clock circuit pack may also be
determined by looking at its LED. A continuously lit red LED on the
Tone-Clock circuit pack indicates a reported fault on one or more of the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1487

maintenance objects on the circuit pack. Flashing patterns of the yellow
and green LEDs correspond to the following service states: Tone-Clock
LED Flashing Codes

Condition

Tone-Clock
Circuit State

Explanation

"flashing yellow" 2.7
seconds on, .3 seconds
off

active

An external timing source is
being used as a synchronization
reference.1

"flashing yellow" .3
seconds on, 2.7 seconds
off

active

The local oscillator on the
Tone-Clock circuit pack is being
used as a synchronization
reference.

"yellow" on continuously

active

The circuit pack has been reset
but has not been told which
synchronization source to use.

"yellow" LED off

standby

The circuit pack is in standby
mode, (neither generating tones
nor supplying clocks).

"jingle bells" green and
yellow .1 sec on, .2 sec
off, .1 sec on, .4 sec off, .4
sec on, .4 sec off

standby

Maintenance software is testing
the standby circuit pack (the
standby Tone-Clock is providing
tones).

"double blink yellow" .3
sec on, .3 sec off, .3 sec
on, 2.4 sec off

active

TN2182 has lost all external
references and is in holdover
mode.

"other green and yellow
patterns"

active

Maintenance software is testing
the active circuit pack.

random yellow

standby

If the circuit pack is a TN2182,
the yellow LED may come on and
off intermittently as ETR-PTs on
the board are used for tone
detection services.

1.

For a Tone-Clock in the master port network, the external source is the primary or
secondary DS1 source, or a Stratum 3 clock. For a Tone-Clzteock in a slave port
network, the external source is the Expansion Interface circuit pack.

2. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack to be replaced is active, then switch to the
other Tone-Clock circuit pack by doing the following:
■

set tone-clock PC —where PC is the Standby Tone-Clock circuit
pack. Since the system is designed to operate primarily on the
preferred tone clock, the set tone-clock PC command should be

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1488

used to make the preferred tone board active when maintenance
activity is completed. There is no preferred tone clock for the PPN,
but carrier A is preferred for EPNs.
■

■

status system—verify the Tone-Clock circuit pack switched to the
other Tone-Clock circuit pack or check the LEDs. The yellow LED of
the new Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack should be off (provided
maintenance is not running on it) and the yellow LED of the active
Tone-Clock circuit pack should be blinking.
If the interchange was not successful, the standby Tone-Clock
circuit pack may be defective. In particular, if the error message
"must use override" is displayed, fix the standby Tone-Clock circuit
pack before attempting to replace the active one.

3. If the Tone-Clock circuit pack to be replaced is in the PPN, it is
recommended, but not required, that the SPE carrier containing it be
locked in standby mode by executing an interchange if necessary, and
locking the SPE-Select switches. This protects you from disrupting service
in case of inadvertent errors in replacing the circuit pack.
NOTE:
If the SPE-Select switches are locked, be sure to release them at the
conclusion of the replacement procedure.
4. Pull out the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack. No calls should be
affected. If this is a TN2182 circuit pack, some ETR-PTs may be in use and
removal of the pack will affect some individual users. It may be less
disruptive to busyout the standby TN2182 before removing it.
5. Insert a new Tone-Clock circuit pack of the appropriate code in the same
slot where the defective Tone-Clock circuit pack was removed.
6. Test the new Tone-Clock circuit pack via the test tone-clock PC
command to make sure it is functioning properly. If the Tone-Clock circuit
pack is being replaced due to loss of clocks, the Clock Health Inquiry
(#46) will still report a failure, proceed with the next step.
7. To verify that the new Tone-Clock circuit pack is able to generate clocks
for the system, switch to the new Tone-Clock circuit pack via the set
tone-clock PC override command, and execute test tone-clock PC. (In
a PPN, the SPE-Select switches must be in the auto position.)

! CAUTION:
If the new Tone-Clock circuit pack is not able to generate system
clocks, this procedure becomes destructive. The system will detect
a loss of clock and recover accordingly.
In this case if the Tone-Clock circuit pack being replaced is in the PPN the
system will perform a reset system 2 (cold 2 restart) automatically. If the
Tone-Clock circuit pack being replaced is in an EPN, the system will reset
the EPN (EPN cold restart). After either type of restart, the faulty

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1489

Tone-Clock circuit pack will be in standby mode. Since the replacement
procedure was not successful, follow normal escalation procedures. If the
new Tone-Clock circuit pack is able to generate system clocks, there
will be no system disruption.
8. Place several phone calls.
9. After replacing a Tone-Clock circuit pack in an SPE, if the SPE lock
switches were set during the procedure, they should be released.
Additionally, after repairs in an EPN, the set tone-clock PC command
should be used if required to make the preferred Tone-Clock circuit pack
active.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1490

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values

Error
Type

Aux
Data

Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Error Log Entries
On/Off
Associated Test
Alarm Level
Board

1

0

Any

Any

Any

1(a)

0

Circuit pack
removed or SAKI
Sanity Test (#53)

MINOR

ON

18(b)

0

busyout tone-clock
PC

WARNING

OFF

23(c)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

125(d)

None

MINOR

ON

126(e)

None

MINOR

ON

MINOR

ON

0

Test to Clear Value
test tone-clock PC sh

release tone-clock PC

257

65535

Control Channel
Test (#52)

257(f)

Any

None

513(g)

Any

None

769(h)

4358

None

1025(i)

4363

NPE Audit Test (50)

1538(j)

Any

None

MINOR

ON

2049(k)

0

Clock Health Inquiry
Test (#46)

MAJOR

ON

set tone-clock PC
override

2305(k)

0

Clock Health Inquiry
Test (#46)

MAJOR

ON

set tone-clock PC
override

2561(l)

Any

None

MAJOR

ON

3329(m)

0

None

MINOR/
WARNING2

OFF

3840(n)

Any

None

3848(o)

0

Clock Health Inquiry
Test (#46)

set tone-clock PC
override

3872(p)

0

None

set tone-clock PC
override

3999 (q)

Any

None

1.
2.

test tone-clock PC r 20

test tone-clock PC sh

set tone-clock PC

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the value used in the set
options command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1491

Notes:
a. Error Type 1This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped
functioning or it was physically removed from the system.
NOTE:
The alarm is logged approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack
is removed/SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is not present in the system, insert a circuit pack in the
slot indicated by the error to resolve the error.
If the circuit pack is present in the system, it is faulty and must be
replaced. See the preceding section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack’’.
If the faulty circuit pack is in standby mode, a MINOR alarm is raised, but
no other system action is taken. If the circuit pack is the active
Tone-Clock, further effects of this error depend on the Reliability Option for
the switch.
Table 10-448.
Pack

Effect of Error Type 1 on an Active Tone-Clock Circuit

Location of Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Reliability
Option

PPN

EPN

Standard

System Emergency Transfer
(entire system affected)

Emergency Transfer in the
affected EPN

High

Interchange to standby
Tone-Clock in the PPN

Emergency Transfer in the
affected EPN

Critical

Interchange to standby
Tone-Clock in the PPN

Interchange to standby
Tone-Clock in the affected
EPN

If an interchange is attempted and the system is unable to activate the
standby Tone-Clock, Emergency Transfer is activated. If the problem is in
the PPN the entire system is affected. Otherwise only the EPN in question
is affected. When this happens, both circuit packs are faulty and must be
replaced. See the preceding section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack’’.
If a successful interchange occurs in response to a failure of the active
Tone-Clock, or if a standby Tone-Clock fails, the faulty Tone-Clock should
be replaced.
b. Error Type 18The indicated Tone-Clock circuit pack has been made
unavailable via the busyout tone-clock PC command. This error applies
only to High or Critical Reliability systems (an active Tone-Clock may not
be busied out). To resolve this error, execute release tone-clock PC.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1492

c. Error Type 23The circuit pack has been logically administered but not
physically installed. Installing the circuit pack will resolve the alarm.
d. Error Type 125A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this
circuit pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either
remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit
pack OR use the change circuit-pack command to readminister this slot
to match the circuit pack inserted.
e. Error Type 126The port network specified in the PORT field of the error
log entry booted up without a Tone-Clock circuit pack, or with a one that
cannot communicate at all with the system. The error is logged five
minutes after the port network is restarted. If no circuit pack is present,
install one of the proper code. If there is a circuit pack present, replace it.
See the preceding section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’.
If replacement does not solve the problem, follow normal escalation
procedures.
f. Error Type 257Τhis error indicates transient communication problems
with this circuit pack . This error is not service-affecting and no action is
required.
g. Error Type 513This circuit pack has an on-board hardware failure.
Replace the circuit pack using the procedure described in preceding
section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’.
h. Error Type 769This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this
circuit pack.
i. Error Type 1025This error is not service-affecting and no action is
required.
j. Error Type 1538The circuit pack was taken out of service because of an
excessive rate of uplink messages. Use test tone-clock PC long to reset
the circuit pack and put it back into service. If the command is not
successful, replace the circuit pack using the procedure described in the
preceding section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’. If the
alarmed circuit pack is the active Tone-Clock of a duplicated pair, first
interchange Tone-Clocks via the set tone-clock PC command to avoid a
service outage. If the error occurs again within 15 minutes, follow normal
escalation procedures.
k. Error Type 2049 or 2305These errors indicate the loss of one or more
clock signals from the reported Tone-Clock circuit pack, which was active
at the time of the error. The effect of any of these errors is described in the
table for error type 1. Diagnosis of the problem is the same for all four error
types, with the exception noted below.
1.Examine the Hardware Error Log for errors reported against circuit
packs in the same Port Network, especially TDM-CLK, TONE-BD,
DUPINT, SW-CTL, and EXP-INTF. Follow the repair or replacement
procedures indicated for any such errors found.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1493

2.If the error is not corrected by resolving errors found in step 1, the
Tone-Clock circuit pack should be replaced. See the preceding
section, ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’.
NOTE:
Replacing the circuit pack and retesting it with the test
tone-clock command is not adequate to retire this alarm and
return the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack to full service; the Clock
Health Inquiry test (#46) will continue to fail. Because the
ability to generate clocks was considered lost, once any
repairs have been made it is necessary to execute the set
tone-clock PC override command, forcing the circuit pack to
become active. If the problem has not actually been
corrected, this action may cause a disruption in service for
active digital facilities users.
3.If error 2305 or 3848 persists, all clock signals from the indicated board
were lost. If the reported Tone-Clock circuit pack is in a Port
Network with duplicated Tone-Clocks, the problem may lie with the
circuit pack responsible for selecting the active Tone-Clock circuit
pack (the t/c selector).
■

For a PPN, the t/c selector is the DUPINT circuit pack on
carrier A.

■

For an EPN, the t/c selector is the active EXP-INTF circuit
pack that is connected to the PPN. This is EXP-INTF 2A01 or
2B02 for EPN1 and 3A01 or 3B02 for EPN2.

The t/c selector circuit pack of interest is the one which was active
at the time the error was logged. This is the currently active t/c
selector unless there has been an SPE interchange for PPN
problem, or an EXP-INTF link switch for EPN problem, In order to
determine whether an interchange has occurred since the
TONE-BD error, examine the display initcauses log for SPE
interchanges, and EXP-LNK entries in the hardware error log for
expansion link interchanges.
If the t/c selector circuit pack was not replaced as part of the
previous step, replace it now. Follow procedures described in
‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ in Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability
Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for the DUPINT circuit pack, or in the
EXP-INTF section of this chapter for the Expansion Interface.
4.If the error has not been corrected at this point, there is a problem with
the TDM Bus within the Port Network containing the reported
Tone-Clock circuit pack. This may include TDM Bus intercarrier
cables, Bus terminators, bent pins on the backplane, and errors on
any circuit pack plugged into the same Port Network. Refer to the
TDM-BUS section.
5.If the problem persists, follow normal escalation procedures.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1494

l. Error Type 2561This error indicates that a Tone-Clock circuit pack, with
a different circuit pack code as required for this system, has been inserted
in the port slot as shown in the Hardware Error Log. To resolve this error,
refer to the ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’ section for an
appropriate circuit pack code and replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack
according to the procedures indicated for this system. The meanings of
the aux data values are as follows:
1001

A TN756 Tone-Clock circuit pack is in the PPN of a one port
network system without High or Critical Reliability
(Multicarrier Cabinet).

1002

A TN756 Tone-Clock circuit pack is in the EPN of a one port
network system without High or Critical Reliability
(Multicarrier Cabinet).

1003

Either a TN741 or TN714 Tone-Clock circuit pack (instead of
a TN768, TN780 or TN2182) is in a one port network system
without High or Critical Reliability (Multicarrier Cabinet).

1004

Either a TN741 or TN714 Tone-Clock circuit pack (instead of
a TN768, TN780 or TN2182) is in a High or Critical Reliability
system.

1005

Same as for aux value 1004.

m. Error Type 3329The system attempted but failed to interchange
Tone-Clock circuit packs. (This error occurs only in Port Networks with
duplicated Tone-Clocks.) The fault may lie in the standby Tone-Clock or in
the circuit pack that controls selection of the active Tone-Clock (the t/c
selector). The goal of the following procedure is to ensure that both
Tone-Clocks can be interchanged into while either t/c-selector circuit pack
is active.
1.Examine the Error Log for errors reported against circuit packs in the
same Port Network, paying special attention to TDM-CLK,
TONE-BD, DUPINT, SW-CTL, and EXP-INTF. Follow the procedures
indicated for any such errors found. After eliminating the above
potential problem sources, proceed with the following steps.
2.Determine which circuit pack was controlling the choice of Tone-Clock
at the time the error occurred.
■

For a PPN, the t/c selector is the DUPINT circuit pack on the
A-carrier.

■

For an EPN, the t/c selector is the active EXP-INTF circuit
pack that is connected to the PPN. This is EXP-INTF 2A01 or
2B02 for EPN1 and 3A01 or 3B02 for EPN2.

The t/c-selector circuit pack of interest is the one which was active
at the time the error was logged. An EXP-LNK interchange since
the time of the error may have made that circuit pack the current
standby. Determine whether an interchange affecting the t/c

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1495

selector has occurred since the TONE-BD error. When investigation
an EPN Tone-Clock, look for EXP-LNK entries in the hardware error
log for PNC interchanges, which would affect the EXP-INTF.
3.If the t/c selector has not undergone an interchange since the error
occurred, go to the next step. If such an interchange has taken
place, interchange back to the formerly active t/c selector. Use the
set expansion-interface command when investigating an EPN
Tone-Clock.) If the interchange attempt fails due to other errors,
resolve those problems first.
4.Interchange the Tone-Clock circuit packs using the set tone-clock PC
command. If the command succeeds, the interchange which
previously failed has been accomplished and the problem has
been satisfactorily resolved. If it fails, proceed to the next step. (You
may want to proceed in any case to definitively test all relevant
components.)
5.Interchange the t/c selector using set expansion-interface if
investigating an EPN. If errors prevent this interchange, resolve
them first.
6.Attempt again to interchange Tone-Clocks with the set tone-clock PC
command.
— If the Tone-Clock interchange failed for both t/c selectors:
Replace the standby Tone-Clock circuit pack which could
not be interchanged into and return to this step. (See ‘‘How
to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’.) Test the new circuit
pack as follows:
a. Execute the set tone-clock PC command.
b. Execute a set expansion-interface, if this is an EPN
Tone-Clock.
c. Execute the set tone-clock PC command again.
If these commands successfully complete, the problem has
been resolved.
— If these commands successfully complete, the problem has
been resolved.
— If the Tone-Clock circuit packs successfully interchange
when one EXP-INTF is active, but not when the other one is:
The t/c-selector circuit pack on the failing side is suspect.
a. Replace the A carrier DUPINT or EXP-INTF board that is
active when the Tone-Clock interchange fails. (Follow
procedures in ‘‘Replacing Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ in
Chapter 6, ‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’ for the
DUPINT circuit pack; for the Expansion Interface, see
EXP-INTF.)

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1496

b. Make sure the new t/c selector is active and execute the set
tone-clock PC command.
— If both Tone-Clocks can be interchanged into, and
interchanges succeed when either t/c selector is active, the
problem has been resolved. If the problem persists after
following the above steps, follow normal escalation
procedures.
n. Error Type 3840This error is not service-affecting and can be ignored. It
indicates that the circuit pack has received a bad control message from
the switch.
o. Error Type 3848 This error indicates that the Tone/Clock circuit pack
had a loss of clock. If error 2305 is also logged, see note (j).
p. Error Type 3872These errors indicate this Tone/Clock circuit pack had
a loss of Data Clocks. This error will impact mainly users on station
connected to Digital circuit packs. These users could be with out service.
If error 2049 is also logged see note (i).
q. Error type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the SAKI
Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.
Use the list configuration control command to find the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Code of the system. Look for the Short and Long Test Sequences according to
the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Code.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1497

For a system with a TN756 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:

Order of Investigation

Short
Test
Sequence

SAKI Sanity Test (#53) (a)

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Clock Health Inquiry Test (#46)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test
(#52) (a)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42)
(b)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Audit/Update Test
(#43) (b)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90) (b)
Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40)
(b)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update (#41) (b)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

a. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) documentation for
descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) documentation for descriptions of
these tests.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1498

For a system with a TN768, TN780 or TN2182 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SAKI Reset Test (#53) (a)

Long
Test
Sequence
X

Clock Health Inquiry Test (#46)

X

X

Control Channel Loop Around Test
(#52) (a)

X

X

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90) (b)

X

Tone Generator Transmission Test
(#40) (b)

X

X

Tone Generator Audit/Update (#41) (b)

X

X

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry
Test (#148) (c)

X

X

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry (#149) (c)
(e)

X

X

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test
(#150) (c)

X

X

TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test
(#151) (c)

X

X

Board Type Check Test (#574) (c)

X

X

Standby Reference Health Check Test
(#651) (c,d)

1.

D/ND1

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to XXX-BD for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-PT for descriptions of these tests.
c. Refer to TDM-CLK for descriptions of these tests.
d. This test runs only on the standby Tone-Clock circuit pack in a Port
Network with duplicated Tone-Clocks (High or Critical Reliability systems).
The circuit pack must be a TN780 with firmware version 2 or above or a
TN2182.

Clock Health Inquiry Test (#46)
This inquiry reads special data stored in memory to determine if this Tone-Clock
circuit pack had a loss of any of three clock types:
■

SYSCLK

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)
■

SYSFM

■

SYSDCLK

Page 10-1499

If this data indicates this Tone-Clock circuit pack had a loss of any of these
clocks, the inquiry reports FAIL. In addition, if TDM-CLK error 1 is at threshold,
this test will FAIL. TDM-CLK error 1 indicates a suspect clock is at the edge of its
specified frequency. If the circuit pack did not have a loss of clock or TDM-CLK
error 1 at threshold, the inquiry reports PASS.
This is not really a test, in the sense that it simply reports status held by the
system, and does not generate new information or raise alarms. If this test fails
with no error code, there is at least one Major alarm against a Tone-Clock circuit
pack. If this test fails with an error code of 1, there is at least one Minor off-board
alarm against a TDM-CLK.
Table 10-449.
Error
Code

TEST #46 Clock Health Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at 11-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack)

Table 10-449.
Error
Code
none

Page 10-1500

TEST #46 Clock Health Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
This Tone-Clock circuit pack had an apparent loss of
clock. One or more of error types 2049, 2305, 3834, and
3872 will appear in the error log. Correct the problem
according to the appropriate error log entries. Once this
test fails, the only way to make it pass, and to retire the
associated alarm, is to repair the problem and to
execute the set tone-clock PC override command
against the indicated Tone-Clock circuit pack.
NOTE:
If power is removed from a carrier in a duplicated
system, and that SPE has the active TONE-CLK, a
MAJOR alarm is raised for the TONE-BD. The
TONE-BD will be out of service and when running
Test 46 (Clock Health Test) it will fail, indicating a
loss of any of these three clocks, SYSCLK, SYSFM,
and SYSDCLK.
To restore the TONE-BD to service you must
execute the set tone spe health-override
command.

1

FAIL

This Tone-Clock circuit pack is suspect of having a
clock at the edge of its specified frequency. A
Tone-Clock circuit pack with this problem can cause
Expansion Interface circuit packs to go out-of-frame or
report no neighbor conditions, thus causing EPNs to go
down
1. Replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack identified in the
error log. Refer to the ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack’’ section.
2. If the error persists, follow normal escalation
procedures.

PASS

This Tone-Clock circuit pack has not reported a loss of
clock.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1501

TONE-PT (Tone Generator)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of
MO

TONE-PT

MAJOR

test tone-clock PC sh

Tone Generator

TONE-PT

MINOR

test tone-clock PC sh

Tone Generator

TONE-PT

WARNING

release tone-clock PC sh

Tone Generator

NOTE:
Replacing the tone/clock circuit pack requires a special procedure which is
described in the documentation for TONE-BD. That section also describes
the LED display for this board.
The tone generator resides on the Tone/Clock circuit pack and provides all
system tones such as dial tone, busy tone, and so on. If an active tone generator
fails, its port network may not have tones (see the Tone Generator Transmission
Test #40). For instance, a user may go off-hook and hear no dial tone. This
problem will affect only users on the same port network in which the faulty
Tone-Clock circuit pack resides. The system will be able to process certain type
of calls (that is, internal calls will succeed while outgoing calls will not).
The Tone-Clock circuit pack also provides the clocks for the system and can
serve as the synchronization reference. Therefore, when resolving alarms on the
Tone-Clock circuit pack, the TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) and SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation should be utilized as well as the
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
See the section on TONE-BD Maintenance in this manual for a discussion of the
relationship of Tone-Clock circuit packs with the various Reliability Options.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1502

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Tone Generator Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test tone-clock PC r 1

1(a)

17664

Tone Generator Audit/
Update Test (#41)

MAJOR/
MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC r 2

18(b)

0

busyout tone-clock PC

WARNING

OFF

release tone-clock PC

None

MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC Sh

130(c)
257(d,f)

17667

None

MINOR

ON

513(e,f)

17666

Tone Generator Audit/
Update Test (#41)

MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC r 3

769

Any

Transmission Test (#40)

MAJOR/
MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC r 3

Crosstalk Test (#90)

MAJOR/
MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC l r 2

Tone Generator Audit/
Update Test (#41)

MINOR

ON

test tone-clock PC r 3

1025
1281(g)

1.

Any

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. A failure in the tone generation facility on the indicated circuit pack has
been detected. Replace the circuit pack. See ‘‘How to Replace a
Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’ in the TONE-BD section.
b. The indicated Tone-Clock circuit pack has been made unavailable via the
busyout tone-clock PC command. It only applies to systems which have
the High or Critical Reliability Option administered, because only a
standby Tone-Clock circuit pack may be made busy by that command. To
resolve this error, execute the release tone-clock PC command for the
alarmed circuit pack.
c. This error type indicates that the circuit pack has been removed or has
been insane for more than 11 minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or
replace the circuit pack.
d. The tone generation facility is having problems verifying that tones have
been connected as requested.
e. The tone generation facility may or may not be able to generate tones.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1503

f. Infrequent errors, at a rate which does not bring up an alarm, probably do
not affect service, unless there are customer complaints of no tones, or
incorrect tones which can not be explained in any other way. However, if
an alarm is raised because this error is being repeatedly logged, then the
circuit pack should be replaced. See ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock
Circuit Pack’’ in the TONE-BD section.
g. The system-parameters country-options administration are setup such
that a TN780 or TN2182 are required and the existing tone-clock circuit
pack will not provide the needed functionality. The Base Tone Generation
Set on page 1 or the custom tones beginning on page 2 of the
system-parameters country options form may have values not supported
by the existing tone-clock.
This error (1281) indicates that the system parameters country-options
form has custom tones translated and that the alarmed tone board does
not support the customized tones. TN768 tone boards do not support any
customized tones. TN780 tone boards support up to 6 customized tones
using the following frequencies/levels only:
Silence
350Hz at 17.25 dB
425Hz at 4.0 dB
425Hz at 11.0 dB
425Hz at 17.25 dB
440Hz at 17.25 dB
350Hz+425Hz at 4.0 dB
350Hz+440Hz at 13.75 dB
480Hz at 17.25 dB
620Hz at 17.25 dB
440Hz+480Hz at 19.0 dB
404Hz at 11.0 dB
404Hz at 16.0 dB
480Hz+620Hz at 24.0 dB
404Hz+425Hz at 11.0 dB
375Hz+425Hz at 15.0 dB
404Hz+450Hz at 11.0 dB
1000Hz at 0.0 dB
1000Hz at +3.0 dB
525Hz at 11.0 dB
1400Hz at 11.0 dB

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1504

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the SAKI
Sanity Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in
the testing sequence.
Use the list configuration control command to find the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack
Code of the system. Then look for the Short and Long Test Sequences according
to the Tone-Clock Circuit Pack Code.

For a system with a TN756 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SAKI Sanity Test (#53) (a)

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Clock Health Inquiry Test (#46) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52) (a)

X

X

ND

Tone Detection Verification Test (#42) (c)

X

X

ND

Tone Detector Audit/Update Test (#43) (c)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90)
Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update Test (#41)

X

X

ND

1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
for descriptions of these tests.
c. Refer to Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port (TTR) (DTMR-PT) or
General Purpose Tone Detector (CPTR) (GPTD-PT) Maintenance
documentation for descriptions of this test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1505

For a system with a TN768, TN780 or TN2182 Tone-Clock Circuit Pack:

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

SAKI Reset Test (#53) (a)

Long
Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

D

Clock Health Test (#46) (b)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop Around Test
(#52) (a)

X

X

ND

X

ND

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90)
Tone Generator Transmission Test
(#40)

X

X

ND

Tone Generator Audit/Update Test
(#41)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry
Test (#148) (c)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test
(#149)(e)(c)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test
(#150) (c)

X

X

ND

TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test
(#151) (c)

X

X

Board Type Check Test (#574) (c)

X

X

Standby Reference Health Check Test
(#651) (c,d)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Notes:
a. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation
for descriptions of these tests.
b. Refer to TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack) section for descriptions of
these tests.
c. Refer to TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) section for descriptions of these tests.
d. This test only runs on the Standby Tone-Clock circuit pack in a Port
Network with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack (High or Critical
Reliability Option). The circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware
revision 2 or above, or a TN2182.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1506

Tone Generator Transmission Test (#40)
The purpose of this test is to verify that the tone generation hardware on the
tone-clock circuit pack is capable of generating a subset of system tones and a
set of test tones. This test does not verify all system tones the tone generator
produces during normal system operation.
The test is performed in two parts. For the first part, the Tone Generator is told to
generate the touch-tone digits. The digits are received and checked by a Tone
Detector touch-tone detector. If any of the digits fail, the test is repeated using a
touch-tone detector in another Tone Detector circuit pack.
For the second part, the Tone Generator is told to generate call progress tones
that are detected and identified by a tone detector. These tones are:
■

440 Hz

■

2225 Hz

■

Digital Count

The tone generator is then told to generate a sequence of test tones whose
output levels are measured by a tone detector. These tones are:
■

404 Hz at 0 dB

■

1004 Hz at -16 dB

■

1004 Hz at 0 dB

■

2804 Hz at 0 dB

A Tone Detector general purpose tone detector listens for the tones and
measures the quality of the tone. If any of the measured values are not within
limits, the test is repeated using a general purpose tone detector in a different
Tone Detector circuit pack. If the values are still out of the limits, the test will fail.
For all the failure cases of Test #40, do the following:
1. Check that all Tone Detector circuit packs have the same companding
mode as that administered for the system. Correct the situation if there is a
mismatch.
2. Run the long test sequence: test tone-clock PC long repeat 1.
3. If the problem persists, replace the Tone-Clock circuit pack by following
the steps outlined in the ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’
section.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-450.
Error
Code

Page 10-1507

TEST #40 Tone Generator Transmission Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

None

ABORT

The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test or there was an Internal System
Error.

1

ABORT

The system could not allocate all the resources needed
to test the DTMF tones.

1001

ABORT

The system was not able to put the tone generation
facility in the appropriate mode to test it.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test
connection. This can happen when the system is heavily
loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then test the
TDM Bus via the test tdm port-network PN# command.
Refer to TDM-BUS section for details.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test
connection. This can happen when the system is heavily
loaded or there is not a Tone Detector circuit pack in the
port network where this test is being executed.
1. Make sure there is a Tone Detector circuit pack in
the same port network.
2. If a Tone Detector circuit pack is missing, install one
in the same port network.
3. Allow approximately 1 minute for Tone Detector
maintenance to run on the newly inserted Tone
Detector circuit pack.
4. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
5. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-450.
Error
Code
1022

Page 10-1508

TEST #40 Tone Generator Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
[G3r V2] Tone detection for the system is administered
as wide broadband (tone detection mode 5), and the
Tone Detector used for this test was not a TN420C or
TN2182 (the only circuit packs with this capability).
GPTD ports on other types of Tone Detector circuit
packs are taken out of service since they cannot provide
the administered function.
1. Change the tone-detection mode administered on
the system-parameters country-options form (see
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 V2
Implementation, 555-230-653,
Or
2. Remove all non-TN420C and non-TN2182 circuit
packs from the system.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period. System resources required for
this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

1 (a)

FAIL

DTMF generation failed for the active tone generator.

105 (a)

FAIL

Generation of 440-Hz failed.

109 (a)

FAIL

Generation of 2225-Hz failed.

110 (b)

FAIL

Generation of 404-Hz level invalid.

111 (b)

FAIL

Generation of 1004-Hz low level invalid.

112 (b)

FAIL

Generation of 1004-Hz high level invalid.

113 (b)

FAIL

Generation of 2804-Hz level invalid.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-450.
Error
Code

Page 10-1509

TEST #40 Tone Generator Transmission Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

115
(b,c)

FAIL

Generation of digital count sequence invalid.

120 (a)

FAIL

Generation of quiet tone failed.

1044 (a)

FAIL

DTMF generation failed to generate Digit 1 for the
standby tone generator.

1045 (a)

FAIL

DTMF generation failed to generate Digit 5 for the
standby tone generator.

1046 (a)

FAIL

DTMF generation failed to generate Digit 9 for the
standby tone generator.

1047 (a)

FAIL

DTMF generation failed to generate Digit D for the
standby tone generator.

PASS

The tone generation facility is able to generate and
transmit all the tones.

Continued on next page

Notes:
Except in Port Networks containing more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack,
replacing the circuit pack is a service disrupting procedure. The test should be
run several times with more than one failure before the replacement policy
specified in the following notes is executed. Use the procedure described in
‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit Pack’’ in the TONE-BD section.
a. All the failure error codes marked with (a) may affect users if the failure is
on the active tone generator. When this type failure is detected, the
system will attempt to move the tone generation function to the alternate
Tone-Clock circuit pack, if one is present in the affected Port Network.
When the tone generation facility fails in this way, especially in a Port
Network without duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs, the faulty
Tone-Clock should be replaced promptly.
b. All the failure error codes marked with (b) are almost transparent to the
user. Again, when this type failure is detected, the system will attempt to
move the tone generation function to the alternate Tone-Clock circuit
pack, if one is present in the affected Port Network. Users may or may not
hear any noisy tones. This type of failure affects maintenance on other
objects. Maintenance may not be able to run on other objects which use
the tone generation facility (that is, Tone Detector Circuit Pack
maintenance). In this case, the Tone-Clock circuit pack can be replaced
as suitable to the customer.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Page 10-1510

c. Error code 115 may also be caused by TDM Bus corruption. This normally
means a physical problem with bent backplane pins, TDM/LAN Bus
cabling, or TDM/LAN Bus terminators. Such physical problems should
especially be suspected if board replacement or other physical activity
has occurred just before this error is observed.
Use display errors to look for errors on other circuit packs in the carriers
of the same Port Network as the indicated Tone-Clock. If any are found,
they should be resolved if possible, and the Tone-Clock circuit pack
retested. If this does not clear the problem, the Tone-Clock circuit pack
should be replaced and the new one tested. If the problem persists, follow
instructions for TDM Bus maintenance in this manual.

Tone Generator Update/Audit Test (#41)
The active tone generation facility is refreshed with all the time slot tone
information. This test also triggers in-line error messages the Tone-Clock circuit
pack generates when it detects problems by itself.
A check is also made between the type of tone-clock being tested and the type
of tone-clock needed based on system administration. The administration on the
system-parameters country-options form may imply that a TN780 or TN2182 is
required.
Table 10-451.
Error
Code

TEST #41 Tone Generator Update/Audit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

none

ABORT

The system was not able to allocate all the resources
needed for this test.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.

1

FAIL

The system requires a TN780 TN2182 tone-clocks to
support the currently administered country-options tone
generation parameters.
1. Check the administration on the system-parameters
country-option form. Specifically, the Base Tone
Generation Set on page 1 and any custom tone
administration beginning on page 2.
2. Replace existing tone-clock circuit packs with a
TN780 or TN2182.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-451.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1511

TEST #41 Tone Generator Update/Audit Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The system requires TN2182 tone-clocks to support the
currently administered country-options tone generation
parameters.
1. Check the administration on the system-parameters
country-option form. Specifically, the Base Tone
Generation Set on page 1 and any custom tone
administration beginning on page 2.
2. Replace existing tone-clock circuit packs with
TN2182s.

PASS

The tone generation facility has been successfully
refreshed with its time-slot translation and system
administration is consistent with this type of tone-clock.
1. Display the Hardware Error Log via the display
errors command to make sure this circuit pack did
not generate new errors.
2. If errors persist, follow normal escalation
procedures.

Continued on next page

Tone Generator Crosstalk Test (#90)
This test checks the ability of the Tone Generator to talk on a specific time slot.
The tone generator is told to talk on a specific time slot. The other idle time slots
are checked to make sure the Tone Generator put the tone on only the specified
time slot.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-452.
Error
Code
None

Page 10-1512

TEST #90 Tone Generator Crosstalk Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

1001

ABORT

The system was not able to put the tone generation
facility in the appropriate mode to test it.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test
connection. This can happen when the system is heavily
loaded. If the system is not heavily loaded, then test the
TDM-BUS via the test tdm port-network PN#
command. Refer to TDM-BUS section for details.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TONE-PT (Tone Generator)

Table 10-452.
Error
Code

Page 10-1513

TEST #90 Tone Generator Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Tone Generator could be defective. In a Port
Network with more than one Tone-Clock circuit pack, the
system will attempt to move the tone generation function
to the alternate one.
1. Test the Tone-Clock circuit pack again via the test
tone-clock PC command
2. If the test fails again, look at the Hardware Error Log
for Tone Detector circuit pack errors.
3. If there are Tone Detector circuit pack errors, refer to
Tone Detector Maintenance documentation
(DTMR-PT, GPTD-PT, CLAS-PT, ETR-PT) to resolve
these errors first.
4. If there are no Tone Detector circuit pack errors,
then the Tone-Clock circuit pack should be
replaced. See ‘‘How to Replace a Tone-Clock Circuit
Pack’’ in the TONE-BD section.

PASS

The tone generation facility is able to put tones out.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Page 10-1514

TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary
Signaling Connections)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

TSC-ADM

none

none

Administered Temporary
Signaling Connections

TSC-ADM

none

none

Administered Temporary
Signaling Connections

No alarms are generated for the TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling
Connections) MO. Due to the unusual length of the full name of this MO (that is,
Administered Temporary Signaling Connections), the abbreviation Administered
TSC is used often in this Maintenance documentation.
In general, administered temporary signaling connections provide a path
through ISDN-PRI switches for supplementary D-channel messages. ISDN-PRI
applications [that is, Distributed Communications System (DCS)] use temporary
signaling connections to exchange user information across an ISDN-PRI
network. What makes Administered Temporary Signaling Connection unique is
that these particular Temporary Signaling Connections stay active for an
extended period time (that is, similar to a permanent data connection). These
ADM Temporary Signaling Connections are used for DCS features that require a
NCATSC, and the ADM TSC serves as the logical channel function in a DCS
network.
A Non-Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connection (NCATSC) is a virtual
connection established within a D-channel. The NCATSC connection provides
user to user service by exchanging USER INFORMATION messages through the
virtual connection in a D-channel without associating any B-channel connections.
An Administered TSC is a special NCA Administered TSC defined for the DCS
over the ISDN-PRI D-channel application of G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. The
Administered TSC connection is a special type of NCATSC that has an
administratively defined endpoint and is established for an extended period of
time.
There are two types of ADMTSCs:
■

Permanent
TSCs are established by the originating PBX (that is Near-end ADM TSC)
or by the terminating PBX (that is, Far-end ADM TSC). Once these
ADMTSCs are established, they remain active.

■

As-Needed

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Page 10-1515

TSCs are established on an as-needed basis. In this case, the ADMTSC is
established whenever it is needed, and not before.
ADMTSC maintenance provides a strategy to verify that a far-end can respond to
an ISDN-PRI USER INFORMATION TSC heartbeat message, thereby indicating
that user to user signaling is functioning. In addition, maintenance can retrieve
the status of the ADMTSC’s connection state.
Since ADMTSCs are administered on a per signaling group basis, the health of
an ADMTSC also depends on the state of the D-channel or D-channel pair
administered per signaling group. Refer to ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling
Group) Maintenance documentation for details on ISDN-PRI NFAS and
D-channel Backup maintenance. The two administration commands for
ADMTSCs are as follows:
■

add signaling group #

■

change signaling group #

The two maintenance commands for ADMTSCs are as follows:
■

test tsc-administered signaling group #[/tsc index]

■

status tsc-administered signaling group #/tsc index

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
ADM TSC Error Log Entries
Error Type

Aux Data

Associated Test

3840-3967(a)

tsc index #

test tsc-administered

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

Notes:
a. There is no Test to Clear Value for error types 3840-3967. The error types
provides the following additional data that may prove useful when tracking
down problems.
This error indicates that a TSC Heartbeat Inquiry Test was run on an Active
far-end Administered TSC from the switch. Upon receiving the heartbeat
message, the network communicated to the switch that the call reference
value is not currently in use on the ISDN interface. As a result, the error
was logged. Check the signaling group status of the D-channel or
D-channel pair via the status signaling-group  command for the
Administered TSC. Check the status of the Administered TSC via the
status tsc-administered command. Also check the administration of the
Administered TSC on the switch.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Page 10-1516

This error may only be affecting service for some DCS customers. Upon
receipt of this error condition, the switch tears down and re-establishes
the ADMTSC within 20 minutes.
b. The port field in the error log contains the signaling group number for
TSC-ADM errors.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the following tables when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the TSC
Heartbeat Inquiry Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated
from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation
TSC Heartbeat Inquiry Test (#604)

1.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1
ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

TSC Heartbeat Inquiry Test(#604)
This test can be invoked by system technician personnel for any ADMTSC
administered in the switch. The following table indicates the possible error
conditions that might be encountered when the test is invoked. Most of the error
conditions do not log an error, but switched services may take some type of
recovery action in certain instances.
This test sends a USER INFORMATION TSC heartbeat message inquiry across
an Administered TSC to determine if the far-end can respond to a USER
INFORMATION TSC heartbeat message.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Table 10-453.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-1517

TEST #604 TSC Hartbeat Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Reissue the test tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

The Administered TSC does not exist.
1. Display the administration for the Administered TSC.
2. If an Administered TSC is exists, reissue the test
tsc-administered command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate problem.

1113

ABORT

The D-channel is out-of-service.
1. Refer to the ISDN-LNK (ISDN-PRI Signaling Link
Port) Maintenance documentation.

1145

ABORT

There is congestion in the network.
1. Issue the status tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the congestion does not clear, disable and enable
the Administered TSC via the change sig-group
 command. To disable the Administered
TSC, display the (administration) Signaling Group
Form via the change sig-group  command
where  refers to the number of the signaling
group under which the suspect TSC is administered.
Change the Enable field to "n." To enable the
ADMTSC, change the "Enable" field to "y."
3. If the congestion still does not clear, check other
nodes in the network. If congestion persists, then
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Table 10-453.
Error
Code
1146

Page 10-1518

TEST #604 TSC Hartbeat Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The congestion just occurred in the network.
1. Issue the status tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of three times.
2. If congestion does not clear, disable and enable the
Administered TSC via the change sig-group
 command. To disable the Administered
TSC, display the (administration) Signaling Group
Form via the change sig-group  command
where  refers to the number of the signaling
group under which the suspect TSC is administered.
Change the Enable field to "n." To enable the
ADMTSC, change the "Enable" field to "y."
3. If congestion still does not clear, check the other
nodes in the network. If the congestion persists,
escalate the problem.

1147

ABORT

The ADMTSC is being torn down.
1. Issue the status tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of three times.
2. If ADMTSC is still down, disable and enable the
ADM TSC via the change sig-group 
command. NOTE: To disable the ADMTSC, display
the (administration) Signaling Group Form via the
change sig-group  command where
 refers to the number of the signaling group
under which the suspect TSC is administered.
Change the Enable field to "n." To enable the
ADMTSC, change the "Enable" field to "y."
3. If the ADMTSC is still down, check the other nodes in
the network. If the ADMTSC is still down, escalate
the problem.

1148

ABORT

The ADMTSC is enabled, but inactive (near-end).
1. Disable and enable the ADMTSC.
2. Reissue the test tsc-administered command.
3. If the ADMTSC is still inactive, check the other nodes
in the network.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Table 10-453.
Error
Code
1149

Page 10-1519

TEST #604 TSC Hartbeat Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The ADMTSC is disabled.
1. Enable the TSC, and see if the status indicates
"active."
2. Reissue the test tsc-administered command.
3. If the TSC still disabled, remove the ADMTSC from
the system.

1181

ABORT

Ran out of ADMTSC resources.
1. Reissue the test tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of three times.
2. If test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1182

ABORT

The BX.25 link is down at the gateway.
1. Disable the ADMTSC.
2. Check the status of the gateway link via the status
link link-no command.
3. Once the gateway link indicates an "in-service" state,
enable the Administered TSC.
4. Reissue the test tsc-administered command.
5. If the test still aborts, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Table 10-453.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1520

TEST #604 TSC Hartbeat Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The Administered TSC is not responding to a TSC
heartbeat inquiry.
1. Retry the test tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of three times.
2. If the problem continues to fail, obtain the status of
the D-channel or D-channel pair associated with the
ADMTSC via the status sig-group 
command. If the D-channel is INS (that is, in-service)
and the status of the ADMTSC appears to be active,
disable and enable the ADMTSC through
administration. NOTE: To disable the ADMTSC,
display the (administration) Signaling Group Form
via the change sig-group  command
where  refers to the number of the signaling
group under which the suspect TSC is administered.
Change the "Enable" field to "n." To enable the
ADMTSC, change the "Enable" field to "y."
3. Reissue the test tsc-administered command.
4. If the test fails, check the ADMTSC node on the other
side of the network to verify that the ADM TSC is
indeed active.
5. Escalate the problem.

2012

ABORT

Internal System Error.
1. Reissue the test tsc-administered command at
one-minute intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

FAIL

The Administered TSC is not active (far-end).
1. Reissue the test tsc-administered command.
2. Verify that the Administered TSC node on the other
side of the network is active.
3. Disable and enable the Administered TSC.
4. Retry the test tsc-administered command.
5. If test fails, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections)

Table 10-453.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1521

TEST #604 TSC Hartbeat Inquiry Test

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
Facility IE (Information Element) reject.
1. Check all other nodes in the network, and make sure
Administered TSC is active.
2. Escalate the problem.

PASS

The Administered TSC responded to a heartbeat.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

Page 10-1522

TTR-LEV (TTR Level)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm Level

TTR-LEV

WARNING

1.

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run
See Note1

Full Name of MO
TTR Level

See the "Repair Procedure for the TTR Level Maintenance Object" section.

A TN748 Tone Detector circuit pack and the TN744 Call Classifier circuit pack
provides touch tone receivers (TTRs or DTMR-PTs)) which are devices used to
interpret touch tone calling signals and to translate the dual tones into the
following valid digits: 0 through 9, *, and #. A Tone Detector circuit pack is a
resource shared by all PBX users. The term "touch tone" formerly bore an AT&T
trademark while the term "dual tone multifrequency receiver" has been the
generic term used for this kind of device. A Tone Detector circuit pack also has
general purpose tone detector ports (GPTD-PTs) to detect call progress tones,
modem answer tones, and transmission test tones. In G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386,
Call Classifier Ports (CLSFY-PTs) have also been added to detect voice or
network intercept tones. A Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT) can function as either a
DTMR-PT or as a GPTD-PT.
When a user places a call from a digital or analog voice terminal on the switch, a
TTR is needed to interpret the dual tone multifrequency signals sent from the
voice terminal. The TTR is in use until the total number of digits needed is
collected or until a time-out occurs. Dial tone is supplied to a user after receipt of
an off-hook signal which signifies that a TTR is connected and ready to receive
digits. For example, if there are 20 TTRs in the system being used simultaneously
by 20 users at a given time, then the 21st user would not receive dial tone until a
TTR becomes available. It is for this reason that it is necessary to have sufficient
tone detectors in the system to prevent delay in receiving dial tone. The TTR-LEV
errors can be used to determine a shortage of tone detectors. Use the list
measurements tone-receiver command to determine tone detector usage. For
more information on this command, refer to the DEFINITY. Communications
System Generic 1—Administration and Measurement Reports, 555-200-500. The
minimum threshold values assigned on the Maintenance-Related System
Parameters Form for TTRs (DTMR-PTs), CPTRs (GPTD-PTs), and CCRs
(CLSFY-PTs) should match the number of touch tone receivers (TTR) and tone
detectors (GPTD-PT) in the system. The numbers are four TTRs and two GPTDs
for each Tone Detector circuit pack [TN748, TN748B, and TN748C, and (the
TN756 Combined Tone Detector/Tone-Clock in a single-carrier cabinet system)]
used in the switch and 8 CCRs for each Call Classifier Port (TN744) circuit pack.
The threshold values are administered via the change system-parameters
maintenance command on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters Form.
The desired numbers are entered in the "TTR" (DTMR-PT), "CPTR" (GPTD-PT),
and "Call Classifier" (CLSFY-PT) fields, respectively.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

Page 10-1523

The TTR Level (Touch Tone Receiver Level) MO is used to represent the
following possible events:
1. The total number of General Purpose Tone Detector Ports (GPTD-PTs),
[also known as Call Progress Tone Receivers (CPTRs)], currently in
service is less than the administered threshold number.
2. The total number of Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Ports (DTMR-PTs)
[(also known as Touch Tone Receiver (TTRs)], currently in service is less
than the administered threshold number.
The TTR Level maintenance performs a monitoring function. When one of the
above events occurs, the switch reports it. At this point, the system is still
operating properly, but the system capacity is reduced.
The above events can occur if:
1. The threshold number of General Purpose Tone Detector Ports
(GPTD-PTs) for service or the threshold number of Dual Tone
Multifrequency Receiver Ports (DTMR-PTs) for service is administered
incorrectly on a Tone Detector circuit pack.
2. Too many General Purpose Tone Detector Ports (GPTD-PTs) or Dual Tone
Multifrequency Receiver Ports (DTMR-PTs) have been taken
out-of-service for a Tone Detector circuit pack (that is, the ports have been
either busied-out by system technician or maintenance has taken them
out-of-service).
3. Too many ports have been taken out-of-service for a Call Classifier circuit
pack (that is, the ports have been busied-out by system technician or
maintenance has taken them out-of-service).
4. There is an insufficient number of General Purpose Tone Detector Ports
(GPTD-PTs) or Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Ports (DTMR-PTs) in
the system for a Tone Detector circuit pack. Or there is an insufficient
number of ports in the system for a Call Classifier circuit pack.

Repair Procedure for the TTR Level Maintenance
Object
The following is a step-by-step approach to resolve the TTR Level maintenance
alarm.
1. Execute the display error command. Determine if the TTR-LEV warning
alarm is raised against the GPTD-PT level, the DTMR-PT level, or the
CLSFY-PT level. In the Hardware Error Log Table, the error type field of the
TTR-LEV MO has a value of 2 for DTMR-PT level, a value of 4 for GPTD-PT
level, or a value of 6 for CLSFY-PT level.
Perform the actions described in Step 2 for the DTMR-PT, the GPTD-PT, or
the CLSFY-PT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

Page 10-1524

2. Issue the change system-parameters maintenance command. Check
the administered value(s) for TTRs and CPTRs for service on the Tone
Detector circuit packs or for CCRs on the Call Classifier Port (CLSFY-PT)
circuit pack. If a threshold value is set too high, change it to a lower value
via the change system-parameters maintenance command and wait
one minute for the alarm to clear.
To determine the correct TTR, CPTR, and Call Classifier port values,
check the total number of Tone Detector and Tone-Clock circuit pack and
Call Classifier circuit packs (TN744) currently in the system. A Tone
Detector circuit pack has two GPTD ports and four DTMR ports. A Call
Classifier circuit pack has eight ports. Verify that the total number of
GPTD-PTs, DTMR-PTs, and/or CLSFY-PTs in the system is greater than or
equal to their respective administered threshold values. If not, then you
must either (1) add more Tone Detector circuit packs and/or Call Classifier
circuit packs to the system as required or (2) reduce the threshold to
match the number in the system. If after (1) adding more Tone Detector
circuit packs and/or Call Classifier circuit packs or (2) reducing the
threshold, the TTR Level alarm is still present, then proceed to Step 3.
3. Execute the display error command. Look for a GPTD-PT, DTMR-PT, or
CLSFY-PT that has been busied out. A port that has been busied out has a
value of 18 in the error type field of the Hardware Error Log.
For each of the busied-out ports, use the following procedure:
■

Determine why the port was busied out.

■

If the port can be placed back into service, test the port via the test
port PCSSpp command.

■

If all the tests pass, release the port via the release port PCSSpp
command. Then wait one minute for the TTR Level alarm to clear.

If this does not clear the TTR Level alarm, proceed to Step 4.
4. Execute the display alarm command. Determine the address of the Tone
Detector circuit pack which contains the defective (alarmed) GPTD-PT or
DTMR-PT.
Execute the test board PCSS long rep 3 command where PCSS is the
address (that is, port network number, carrier designation, and slot
address) of the Tone Detector circuit pack or Call Classifier circuit pack
containing the defective (alarmed) GPTD-PT or DTMR-PT.
If this does not clear the TTR Level alarm, proceed to Step 5.
5. At this point, the only way to clear the alarm is to replace the Tone
Detector circuit pack or Call Classifier circuit pack containing the
defective (alarmed) GPTD-PT, DTMR-PT or CLSFY-PT.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

Page 10-1525

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
TTR Level Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

1 (a)

1

2 (b)

2

3 (c)

3

4 (d)

4

5 (e)

5

6 (f)

Associated Test

Alarm Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

None
WARNING (See
the WARNING
message below)

OFF

WARNING

OFF

6

WARNING

OFF

7 (g)

7

MAJOR

OFF

8 (h)

8

MINOR

OFF

9 (i)

9

MINOR

OFF

None

None

! WARNING:
The Alarm is upgraded to MAJOR if the Base Tone Generator is set to 12
(France).
Notes:
a. Error code 1 does not indicate a current error condition. It indicates that
the number of DTMR ports in service was below the administered
threshold, but is now equal to or greater than the threshold. These errors
are typically generated during boot time or other transitional states when
the ports are being brought into service.
b. The total number of DTMR ports currently in service is below the
administered threshold. To clear the alarm, refer to the repair procedure
described above.
c. Error code 3 does not indicate a current error condition. It indicates that
the number of GPTD ports in service was below the administered
threshold, but is now equal to or greater than the threshold. These errors
are typically generated during boot time or other transitional states when
the ports are being brought into service.
d. The total number of GPTD ports currently in service is below the
administered threshold. To clear the alarm, refer to the repair procedure
describe above.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
TTR-LEV (TTR Level)

Page 10-1526

e. Error code 5 does not indicate a current error condition. It indicates that
the number of Call Classifier ports (CLSFY-PT) in service was below the
administered threshold, but is now equal to or greater than the threshold.
These errors are typically generated during boot time or other transitional
states when the ports are being brought into service.
f. The total number of Call Classifier ports currently in service is below the
administered threshold. To clear the alarm, refer to the repair procedure
described above.
g. There are currently no DTMR ports in service. To clear the alarm, refer to
the repair procedure described above.
h. There are currently no GPTD ports in service. To clear the alarm, refer to
the repair procedure described above.
i. There are currently no Call Classifier ports in service. To clear the alarm,
refer to the repair procedure described above.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1527

UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit
Pack)
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

UDS1-BD

MAJOR

test board PCSSpp sh

UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack

UDS1-BD

MINOR

test board PCSSpp l

UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack

UDS1-BD

WARNING

test board PCSSpp sh

UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack provides an interface to the DS1 facility. UDS1
Interface circuit packs include the TN464B circuit pack and the TN464C circuit
pack.
The TN464B circuit pack is designed to support 32 DS0 channels on a 2.048
Mbps DS1 link, and the TN464C (or greater vintage) circuit pack is designed to
support either 24 DS0 channels on a 1.544 Mbps DS1 link or 32 DS0 channels on
a 2.048 Mbps DS1 link. The TN464C (or greater vintage) circuit pack is optioned
via a removable strap on the circuit pack. The 2 strap positions are labeled
"24CHNL" or "32CHNL."
The DS0 channels can be administered either as trunks to other switches, lines to
off-premises stations, ports to line-side PRI terminating devices, or as ports to
other line-side non-PRI terminating devices.
NOTE:
DS0 channels on the TN464B circuit pack can be administered only as
trunks to other switches.
UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation provides a strategy for
maintaining the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. The maintenance strategy deals
with logging the in-line errors reported by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack,
running tests for error diagnosis and recovery, and raising or clearing
maintenance alarms.
The TN464B and TN464C circuit packs support Tie trunks, CO trunks, DID
trunks, OPS lines, narrowband access endpoint ports, the ISDN-PRI signaling
channel (D-channel), and ISDN-PRI trunks (B-channels). The TN464C circuit
pack can also support wideband access endpoint ports and PRI endpoint ports
(B-channels).
The signaling (that is, the call setup) for the Tie trunks, CO trunks, DID trunks and
OPS lines is done on the circuit pack by the UDS1 firmware. Signaling for the
B-channels (ISDN-PRI trunks and PRI endpoint ports) is routed over the
D-channel. ISDN-PRI Trunk and PRI endpoint port signaling (Q.921, Q.931),
however, is not provided by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. For the MIPS
version of D92, the system software generates and/or receives the actual

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1528

ISDN-PRI signaling messages (Q.931). The system software sends and/or
receives these ISDN-PRI messages via the TN1655 Packet Interface circuit pack.
The Packet Interface circuit pack, in turn, communicates with the UDS1 circuit
pack’s D-channel via the Packet Bus. For the INTEL version of D92, the system
software generates and/or receives the actual ISDN-PRI signaling messages
(Q.931). The system software sends and/or receives these ISDN-PRI messages
via the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack. The Processor Interface circuit
pack, in turn, communicates with the UDS1 circuit pack’s D-channel via the TDM
Bus.
The signaling over the DS1 link must be synchronized between the transmitting
end and the receiving end to ensure error-free communication. Refer to SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for details.
Each trunk, line, and port has its own maintenance strategy. However, each
trunk, line, or port is dependent upon the health of the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack. Refer to the following sections for details: TIE-DS1 documentation for a
DS1 Tie Trunk, CO-DS1 documentation for a DS1 CO Trunk, DID-DS1
documentation for a DS1 DID Trunk, OPS-LINE documentation for a DS1 OPS
Line, WAE-PORT documentation for a Wideband Access Endpoint, ISDN-TRK
documentation for a DS1 ISDN Trunk, PE-BCHL documentation for a PRI
Endpoint Port, and ISDN-LNK documentation for an ISDN-PRI Signaling Link
Port.
The maintenance strategy for the TN464 UDS1 Interface circuit pack (UDS1-BD)
is very similar to the maintenance strategy for the TN767 DS1 Interface circuit
pack (DS1-BD). The same commands are used for administering and testing the
boards. The differences in maintenance strategy between the boards are due to
the UDS1 circuit pack’s direct interface to the Packet Bus which is used for
ISDN-PRI signaling (ISDN-LNK). While both the TN464 and TN767 can support
ISDN-PRI B-channels, ISDN-PRI D-channel signaling applications require a
TN464 UDS1 circuit pack.
The TN464F (or later suffix) circuit pack combined with AT&T’s new 120A1 CSU
Module forms an Enhanced Integrated CSU. The new 120A1 CSU Module, when
combined with the functionality provided by the TN464F hardware and firmware,
and new switch software, provides functionality equivalent to an external
stand-alone AT&T ESF T1 CSU. The 120A1 CSU Module connects to the TN464F
circuit pack on the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier. The new
CSU Module, thus becomes an integrated part of the DEFINITY. system.
Throughout the document, the term 120A1 will mean a 120A1 or later suffix CSU
Module.
The Enhanced Integrated CSU is for use in the United States of America with
1.544 Mbps DS1 service. For further details on the 120A1 CSU Module see
DEFINITY. Communications System Generic 1, Generic 2, and Generic 3 V1 and
V2 - Integrated CSU Module Installation and Operation, 555-230-193, Issue 1,
December 1993.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1529

The TN464F and 120A1 CSU Module support on-demand loopback tests that
assist in the detection of faults between the TN464F circuit pack and the CSU
Module, between the Integrated CSU and the optional Customer Premises
Loopback Jack, or between the Integrated CSU and remote CSU. These
loopback tests are explained in detail later in this UDS1-BD section, but Figure
10-92 gives a high level overview of the loopback points.

NETWORK ENVIRONMENT

DS1
BRD

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

NET
SMRT
JACK

NETWORK

NET
SMRT
JACK

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

DS1
BRD

Remote end

Local end
CSU module to CSU module

DS1
BOARD

PLB

BLB

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU
MOD

ELB LLB

RLB

NETWORK
SMRT
JACK

CLJ-LB

Local end loop backs

NETWORK
SMRT
JACK

CPE
LPBK
JACK

CSU*
MOD
R-LLB

Remote end loop backs (* CSU or External CSU)

Figure 10-92.

High Level Overview Of Loopback Points

DS1
BOARD

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1530

Circuit Pack Administration and Options
The DS1 configuration for each circuit pack is administered on the DS1 Circuit
Pack form. Bit Rate is set to 1.544 Mbps for 24-channel systems, and 2.048
Mbps for 32-channel systems. Country Protocol is used to drive layer 3 protocol
decisions based on PRI specifications specific to a given country (not those
related to specific features). This Country Protocol is independent of the Country
parameter administered on the country-options system-parameters form.
Different UDS1 circuit packs may be administered with different Country
Protocols, allowing the switch to act as a gateway between two incompatible
ISDN-PRI implementations (for example, between two different countries). US
systems use country protocol 1. Near-End CSU Type is set to other for no CSU
installed, or for an external CSU such as an AT&T ESF T1 CSU, or integrated for
the 120A1 CSU Module. Answering integrated will cause additional fields to be
displayed for administering the Enhanced Integrated CSU Module. In addition to
the above there are numerous other fields defining such parameters as framing
modes, line coding companding mode and so on. For details, see DEFINITY
Communications System Generic 3 V2 Implementation, 555-230-653, and
DEFINITY Communications System Generic 2.2 and Generic 3 V2
DS1/CEPT/ISDN-PRI Reference, 555-025-107.
Figure 10-93 through Figure 10-95 show how to configure the circuit pack for
24-channel or 32-channel DS1. The channel selection must match the
parameters administered on the corresponding DS1 Circuit Pack Form. (US
applications use 24 Channels.)
The channel selection must match the parameters administered on the
corresponding DS1 Circuit Pack Form. (US applications use 24 Channels.)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1531

Top

TN464C/D

24/32 Channel Selector

75/120 Ohm Selector

Bottom
Backplane Connectors

Figure 10-93.

Faceplate

TN464C/D DS1 Option Jumpers

24 CHNL

32 CHNL

120 OHM

Insert the jumpers into the blocks
so as to join the center row of
pins and the row designating the
desired options.

75 OHM

Figure 10-94.

TN464C/D DS1 Option Jumpers

The option switch located on the component side of the TN464E/F circuit pack
must be set correctly. Figure 10-95 shows how to configure the circuit pack for
24-channel or 32-channel DS1. The channel selection must match the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1532

parameters administered on the corresponding DS1 Circuit Pack Form. (US
applications use 24 Channels.)

Ω

Figure 10-95.

Ω

TN464E/F DS1 Option switches

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Table 10-454.
Error
Type
01

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

0

Associated Test
Any

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Any

Any
2

Test to Clear Value
test board PCSS

1(a)

0

Circuit pack
removed or
SAKI Test (#53)

MIN/ WRN

18(b)

0

busyout board
PCSS

WARNING

OFF

release board PCSS

23(c)

0

WARNING

OFF

add ds1 PCSS

ON

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-454.
Error
Type

Page 10-1533

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

125(d)

none

None

MIN/ WRN

257

65535

Control Channel
Loop Test (#52)

MINOR

257(e)

Any

None

513(f)

Any

On/Off
Board
3

Test to Clear Value

ON
ON

MIN/ WRN3

ON

3

ON

test board PCSS l r 20

514(g)

46086

MIN/ WRN

769(h)

46085

MIN/ WRN3

ON

770(i)

46096

3

ON

1025(e)

4363

NPE Audit Test
(#50)

1281

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN /WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

1300(j)

Any

Loss Of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

WARNING

OFF

test board PCSS

1301(k)

Any

Loss Of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

WARNING

OFF

test board PCSS

1302(l)

Any

Loss Of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

1303(m)

Any

Loss Of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/ WRN3

ON

test board PCSS

1310(n)

Any

Board Loopback
Test (#1209)

MINOR

ON

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests

1311(o)

Any

Equipment
Loopback Test
(#1210)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests

1312(p)

Any

Repeater
Loopback Test
(#1211)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests

MIN/ WRN

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-454.
Error
Type

Page 10-1534

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

3

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test

1313(q)

Any

CPE Loopback
Jack Test
(#1212)

MIN/ WRN

1314(r)

Any

Far CSU
Loopback Test
(#1213)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-

1320

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

1321

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

1322

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MINOR

ON

test board PCSS

1323

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

1324

Any

Loss of Signal
Alarm Inquiry
Test (#138)

WARNING

OFF

test board PCSS

1537(s)

46082

MIN/ WRN3

ON

3

ON

1538(t)

Any

MIN/ WRN

1793

Any

Blue Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN4

OFF

test board PCSS

1794

Any

Blue Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN4

OFF

test board PCSS

1795

Any

Blue Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#139)

MAJ/MIN/
WRN4

OFF

test board PCSS

2049

Any

Red Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#140)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-454.
Error
Type

Page 10-1535

DS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

3

OFF

test board PCSS

2305

Any

Yellow Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#141)

MIN/ WRN

2306 (u)

Any

Yellow Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#141)

MIN /WRN3

OFF

test Board PCSS

2561

Any

Major Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#142)

MIN /WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

Minor Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#143)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS

Slip Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#144)

MIN/ WRN3

OFF

test board PCSS r 6

MIN/ WRN3

ON

2817

3073 to
3160 (v)

Any

3330(w)

46083

3585 to
3601 (x)

Any

Misframe Alarm
Inquiry Test
(#145)

3840(y)

Any

None

3841(z)

4358

3842(aa)

46097

3843(ab)

46081

3900(ac)

Any

CPE Loopback
Jack Test
(#1212)

3901(ad)

Any

Far CSU
Loopback Test
(#1213)

3902(ae)

Any

One-Way Span
Test (#1214)

3999(af)

Any

None

MIN/ WRN

3

OFF

test board PCSS r 6

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

1.
2.

3.
4.

Page 10-1536

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.
If ports are assigned to the circuit pack, then a minor alarm is raised. If no ports are assigned to the
circuit pack, then a warning alarm is raised. The alarm is raised after the circuit pack has been missing
for a period of 15 minutes. Warning alarms are also raised against any ports administered on the
circuit pack.
Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to warning alarms based on values set in the set
options command.
Major alarms on this MO may be downgraded to minor or warning alarms based on values set in the
set options command.

Notes:
a. Error 1 indicates that the circuit pack has totally stopped functioning or is
not fully administered. The alarm is logged about 15 minutes after the
circuit pack has been removed or 11 minutes after the SAKI Test (#53)
fails.
To be fully administered, a UDS1 circuit pack must meet all of these 3
conditions:
1.Have an entry in the circuit plan via the change circuit pack command
2.Be administered via the add ds1 PCSS command
3.Be physically inserted into the correct slot
If the circuit pack has an entry in the circuit plan and either of the other two
conditions are not met, a MINOR alarm is logged. To resolve the error
either
1.Make sure all conditions for administration are met and that a
functioning UDS1 circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot, or
2.Completely remove the UDS1-BD from the system using the following
steps:
a. Remove any administered DS1 trunks, access endpoints or
PRI endpoints associated with the circuit pack from their
trunk groups.
b. Execute the remove ds1 PCSS and change circuit pack
PCSS commands.
If all the administration conditions are met for this circuit pack and the red
LED is still on, follow the instructions for LED Alarms with Error Type 1 in
Chapter 7, ‘‘LED Interpretation’’.
b. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack has been busied out by a busyout board
PCSS command.
c. The UDS1-BD circuit pack is not completely administered. To be fully
administered, the UDS1 circuit pack must:
1.Have an entry in the circuit plan via the change circuit pack command,

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1537

2.Be administered via the add ds1 PCSS command, and
3.Be physically inserted into the correct slot.
A DS1 (UDS1-BD and DS1-BD) differs from most circuit packs in that
inserting the circuit pack into the switch is not enough to make the board
usable. It must also be administered with the add ds1 command.
d. No Aux Data: A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit
pack is logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the
wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR
use the change circuit-pack command to readminister this slot to match
the circuit pack inserted.
Aux Data 3: The 24/32-channel option jumper setting on the circuit pack
does not match the option set on the DS1 circuit pack administration form.
The circuit pack must be physically removed to see the setting of the
jumper.
e. This error is associated with the Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance
Test. Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance
documentation for details.
f. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware
problem. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the type of hardware
problem.
4352

External RAM failure

4353

Internal RAM failure

4355

Internal ROM failure

If the UDS1 board detects only one of these hardware problems, then the
error will disappear when none of these faults are detected for 10 minutes.
If the same Aux Data value is logged more than once in a 24 hour period,
the circuit pack should be replaced.
g. LAN External RAM Error. This error occurs when there is a hardware fault
in the PPE external RAM. The RAM is used for message buffering to and
from the Packet Bus. This error should not occur regularly. If this error is
seen quite frequently (10 times within 30 minutes), the circuit pack should
be replaced.
h. Transmit FIFO Underflow Error. This error occurs when the circuit pack
cannot find the "end of frame" bit when transmitting a frame to Packet Bus.
An alarm will be raised if this error occurs three times within 10 minutes.
Clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board PCSS, reset
board PCSS, test board PCSS long, release board PCSS. If the error
recurs within 10 minutes, then replace the circuit pack.
i. Unable to Write LAN Translation RAM Error. This error occurs when a call
is aborted because there are no available translation RAM locations for
the call connection attempt. An alarm will be raised if this error occurs two
times within 10 minutes. Clear the alarm via the following commands:

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1538

busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long,
release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10 minutes, then replace
the circuit pack.
j. CSU Module missing. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form
has been administered as integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module is not
physically connected (or is improperly connected) to the TN464F board
on the back of the port carrier.
If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug (or replug) the CSU Module into the
TN464F circuit pack’s connector on the I/O connector panel on back of
the carrier. Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field using the
change ds1 form to other.
If this error remains after plugging the CSU Module into the board’s
connector, there could be a problem with the I/O connector panel.
k. CSU Module not expected. The 120A1 CSU Module is physically
connected to the TN464F board on the back of the port carrier but the
Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not been administered
as integrated.
If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the change ds1 command to
change the Near-End CSU Type field to integrated. Otherwise, physically
remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the port carrier.
l. DS1 configuration error. Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a
TN464F circuit pack that is configured for 32-channel (2.048 Mbps)
operation. The CSU Module only works with a DS1 board configured for
24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation in the United States of America.
m. DS1 circuit pack suffix incorrect for CSU Module. The Near-End CSU Type
field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the
DS1 circuit pack is not a TN464F or later suffix UDS1 board.
If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, remove the circuit pack and
replace it with a TN464F or later suffix board. Otherwise, use the change
ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU Type field to other.
n. BLB failure. This error occurs when the DS1 Board Loopback (BLB)
demand test fails. Repeat the test using the following commands:
busyout board PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests,
release board PCSS. If the BLB test continues to fail, then the TN464F
circuit pack needs to be replaced.
o. ELB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module
Equipment Loopback (ELB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU
during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e.- TN464F board physically inserted and
120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is
plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The ELB test is also
executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1539

Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, release board PCSS.
If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the TN464F board, the CSU
Module, or the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or
any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate where the failure is
occurring by reexecuting the test by replacing one piece of hardware at a
time.
p. RLB failure. This error occurs when the Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module
Repeater Loopback (RLB) test fails. This test is executed by the I-CSU
during I-CSU power-up/reset (i.e.- TN464F board physically inserted and
120A1 CSU Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU Module is
plugged on to an already initialized DS1 board. The RLB test is also
executed as part of the command test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests, release board PCSS.
If the RLB test continues to fail, then the CSU Module needs to be
replaced.
q. CPE Loopback Jack deactivation error. This error occurs when the
TN464F circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE Loopback Jack loopback
on power-up/reset or upon software request.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, release board PCSS.
If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack loopback continues to
fail, other steps must be taken to deactivate the loopback.
r. Far CSU Loopback deactivation error. This error occurs when the TN464F
circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end CSU loopback on
power-up/reset or upon software request.
Attempt to clear the alarm via the following commands: busyout board
PCSS, test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test, release board PCSS.
If the attempt to deactivate the Far CSU loopback continues to fail, then
escalate the problem.
s. LAN Bus Timeout Error. This error occurs when the circuit pack transmits
too many bytes on the LAN bus for a single frame. This condition may be
caused by an on-board fault or by faulty data received on one of the
circuit pack’s external ports. If any of the ports on this circuit pack are
alarmed, refer to the repair procedures for those maintenance objects.
If the error occurs three times within 10 minutes, the board will be isolated
from the Packet Bus and the board will be alarmed. To clear the alarm and
restore the board to the Packet Bus, use the following commands:
busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS long,
release board PCSS.
If the problem persists, and there are no PKT-BUS alarms or port alarms,
then replace the circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1540

t. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more
of the following symptoms:
1.The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #50 and/or Test #52
are aborting with error code 2000.
2.The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a
NO-BOARD.
3.A busyout/release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results.
4.A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are
properly installed.
The circuit pack is isolated from the system and all trunks or ports on this
circuit pack are placed into the out-of-service state. The system will try to
restore the circuit pack within 20-30 minutes. When no faults are detected
for 20-30 minutes, the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is restored to normal
operation. All trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in-service state. If the board is not restored to normal
operation, or the error recurs after the board was restored to normal
operation, escalate the problem.
u. LAN Critical Error. A critical failure has been detected in the Packet Bus
interface of the circuit pack. This failure may be due to an on-board fault or
a Packet Bus fault. If the Packet Bus is alarmed, refer to the PKT-BUS
Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures.
This error will isolate the board from the Packet Bus and raise an alarm. If
the Packet Bus is not alarmed, enter the following commands: busyout
board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board PCSS, release board
PCSS. This should clear the alarm and restore the board to the Packet
Bus.
If the problem persists, and there are no PKT-BUS alarms, then replace
the circuit pack.
v. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3073 will show that this
board is receiving slips and the AUX data shows the last slip count that
was reported.
w. These errors are not service-affecting. No action is required. These errors
are reported by the circuit pack when it receives a bad control channel
message from the switch. The auxiliary data identifies the following error
events:

4096

Bad major heading

4097

Bad port number

4098

Bad data

4099

Bad sub-qualifier

4100

State inconsistency

4101

Bad logical link

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1541

x. For later releases of G3V4 and beyond, only error 3585 will show that this
board is receiving misframes and the AUX data shows the last misframe
count that was reported.
y. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack has detected a transient hardware logic
error (for example, program logic inconsistency). This error will disappear
when no faults are detected for 100 minutes. The value in Aux Data field
indicates the type of hardware problem.
z. Bad Translation RAM Location Found Error. This error is not
service-affecting. No action is required. A Bad Translation RAM is
detected, but the call continues by using another translation location.
aa. LAN Receive Parity Error. This error occurs when the circuit pack detects
an error in a received frame from the Packet Bus. These errors are most
likely caused by a Packet Bus problem, but may be due to a circuit pack
fault.
Refer to the PKT-BUS Maintenance documentation to determine if the
problem is isolated to this circuit pack or if the problem is caused by
Packet Bus faults.
ab. Error 3900 is used to give status information on a CPE Loopback Jack
Test. The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback
test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated.
3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected.
4 — Test has been terminated.
ac. Error 3901 is used to give status information on a Far CSU Loopback Test.
The value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the loopback test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test failed because loopback could not be activated.
3 — Test failed because test pattern could not be detected.
4 — Test has been terminated.
ad. Error 3902 is used to give status information on a One-Way Span Test. The
value in the Aux Data field indicates the status of the span test.

1 — Test is currently running.
2 — Test has failed because test could not be activated.
3 — Test pattern was not received from the far end.
4 — Test has been terminated.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1542

ae. Error type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may
be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Connection Audit Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from
other tests in the testing sequence.
Table 10-455.

System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes

Order of Investigation

Short
Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

Reset Board
Sequence

test ds1-loop
Command

D/ND1

NPE Connection Audit
Test (#50)

X

ND

Control Channel Loop
Test (#52)

X

ND

Loss of Signal Alarm
Inquiry Test (#138)

X

X

ND

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test
(#139)

X

X

ND

Red Alarm Inquiry Test
(#140)

X

X

ND

Yellow Alarm Inquiry
Test (#141)

X

X

ND

Major Alarm Inquiry
Test (#142)

X

X

ND

Minor Alarm Inquiry
Test (#143)

X

X

ND

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1543

Table 10-455. System Technician-Demanded Tests: Descriptions and Error Codes —
Continued
Short
Test
Long Test
Reset Board
test ds1-loop
Order of Investigation
Sequence
Sequence
Sequence
Command
D/ND1
Slip Alarm Inquiry Test
(#144)

X

X

ND

Misframe Alarm Inquiry
Test (#145)

X

X

ND

Translation Update Test
(#146)

X

X

ND

ICSU Status LEDs Test
(#1227)

X

X

ND

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)

X

D

Internal Loop Around
Test (#135)

X

D

DS1/CSU Loopback
Tests
DS1 Board Loopback
Test (#1209)

X

D

CSU Equipment
Loopback Test (#1210)

X

D

CSU Repeater
Loopback Test (#1211)

X

D

CPE Loopback Jack
Test (#1212)

X

D

Far CSU Loopback Test
(#1213)

X

D

One-Way Span Test
(#1214)

X

D

Inject Single Bit Error
(#1215)

X

D

End Loopback/Span
Test (#1216)

X

D

Continued on next page
1.

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1544

NPE Connection Audit Test (#50)
The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the
network connectivity translation for the SCOTCH-NPE chip on the circuit pack.
Table 10-456.
Error
Code
None
2100

TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1019

ABORT

The test aborted because a test was already running on
the port.
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort/fail, escalate the
problem.

PASS

The circuit pack’s SCOTCH-NPE chip have been
updated with its translation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-456.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1545

TEST #50 NPE Connection Audit Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies
its records.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-457.
Error
Code
None
2100

Page 10-1546

TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to return the circuit pack code or
vintage.
1. Retry the command a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the problem continues, and if the circuit pack is
one of the Port circuit packs, replace the circuit
pack. Otherwise, if the circuit pack is part of the
SPE, use the procedure described in ‘‘Replacing
Defective SPE Circuit Packs’’ in Chapter 6,
‘‘Reliability Systems: A Maintenance Aid’’.
3. Retry the command a few times a maximum of 5
times.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Communication with this circuit pack is successful.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-457.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1547

TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
This test is destructive.
This test resets the circuit pack. The test is highly destructive and can only be
initiated by a system technician-demanded reset board PCSS command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-458.
Error
Code
None

Page 10-1548

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Wrong circuit pack configuration to run this test. This
error applies only to DS1 Interface circuit packs. It
means the DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing
for the system and, therefore, it cannot be reset without
major system disruptions.
1. If the circuit pack needs to be reset, then set
synchronization to another DS1 Interface circuit
pack or to the Tone-Clock circuit pack and try again.
Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance
documentation.

1015

ABORT

Port is not out-of-service.
1. Busyout the circuit pack.
2. Execute the reset board command again.
3. If the test aborts with this error code again, escalate
the problem.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to reset.

2

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to restart.
1. Execute the reset board command again.
2. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The circuit pack initializes correctly.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-458.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1549

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Internal Loop Around Test (#135)
This test is destructive.
The Internal Loop Around Test is run by looping the transmitted DS1 bit stream
back into the UDS1’s board receiver. The loop occurs just before the DS1 facility
interface. The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system
technician-demanded reset board PCSS command.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the Internal Loop
Around Test. When the Internal Loop Around Test is initiated, maintenance
software sends appropriate messages to the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to start
the test. The test uses the Tone Generator and Tone Detector to exercise a bit
pattern consistency test for all ports. If the transmitted and received bit patterns
on a trunk or port are different, the test fails.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1550

When the test is complete, the maintenance software sends a stop loop around
message to the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to put the circuit pack back into the
normal operation mode. All trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack are
restored to the in-service state after the release board command is entered.
Table 10-459.
Error
Code
2012

TEST #135 Internal Loop Around Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may
have time slots out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat test at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be
out-of-service.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TTR-LEV (TTR Level) Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If present,
refer to TONE-PT (Tone Generator) Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the reset board
command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-459.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-1551

TEST #135 Internal Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Received an incoming call on a port of the UDS1 circuit
pack during the test.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to
out-of-service state.
2. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the reset board command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1039

ABORT

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS
command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period. If Error Type 1538 is present in
the Error Log, follow the maintenance strategy
recommended for this error type.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-459.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-1552

TEST #135 Internal Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack failed in the Internal
Loop Around Test.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or another
switch:
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
4. Check the physical connectivity of DS1 Interface
circuit packs and cable.
5. Replace the local UDS1 Interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
6. Contact T1 Network Service to diagnose the remote
DS1 endpoint.
7. If the test still fails, then escalate the problem.

More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-459.
Error
Code

Page 10-1553

TEST #135 Internal Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
such as a PRI terminal adapter:
1. Retry the reset board command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
4. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Obtain the error seconds
measurement on the terminating device (if possible).
Refer to the line-side terminating device operating
manual for information.
5. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
Interface circuit pack to the terminating device.
Check premise distribution system (or intra-premise
wiring) for physical connection failures. If the error
seconds measurement is severe, investigate
premise distribution system wiring for noise and
distance limitation.
6. Replace the local UDS1 Interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
7. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
8. If the test still fails, then escalate the problem.

PASS

All administered trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface
circuit pack pass the Internal Loop Around Test. The bit
pattern consistency test is executed successfully over
the path that covers a DS1 port, cable, and the external
NCTE device.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-459.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1554

TEST #135 Internal Loop Around Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test (#138)
This test verifies the synchronization status and continuity of the DS1 link. The
Loss of Signal alarm indicates that the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is unable to
derive the synchronization clock from the DS1 facility. When the UDS1 Interface
circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal alarm, it stops providing the synchronization
clock for the system if it is administered as a timing source and transmits a
Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint.
When the Loss of Signal alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state.
The inquiry test will run every 10 minutes until the loss of signal has been
restored.
The UDS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Signal alarm after the signal has
been lost for about 3 seconds. It will not retire the alarm until the signal has
returned for about 10 seconds.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1555

This test is also used to maintain the new AT&T 120A1 CSU Module. This CSU
Module, when combined with the functionality provided by the TN464F circuit
pack, provides functionality equivalent to an external stand-alone AT&T ESF T1
CSU. The combination of the TN464F and 120A1 CSU Module is known as an
Enhanced Integrated CSU (I-CSU).
If a TN464F circuit pack detects certain I-CSU hardware errors, it will notify
maintenance. When the maintenance subsystem receives notification of the
I-CSU error, it will execute this Loss of Signal Inquiry test. The test, in addition to
querying for a Loss Of Signal alarm condition, will also query the TN464F board
to confirm the I-CSU error. A Minor or Warning alarm will be raised depending on
the severity of the I-CSU error. The trunks on the board may be taken out of
service if the I-CSU error is deemed serious.
If a Loss Of Signal alarm and an I-CSU error co-exist, the Loss Of Signal alarm
condition will take priority and the board and all trunks on the board will be put in
the out-of-service state. Errors will be logged, however, for both.
When the maintenance subsystem receives notification that the I-CSU hardware
error condition no longer exists, maintenance will restore the board and all trunks
to their previous service state if the alarm can be cleared (no other I-CSU errors
or Loss Of Signal alarm exist).
Table 10-460.
Error
Code

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1556

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code

Page 10-1557

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Loss of Signal
alarm. The physical link is broken or the remote DS1
endpoint is down. All trunks or ports of this UDS1
interface circuit pack are out-of-service. If the UDS1
Interface circuit pack is designated as the supplier of
the system synchronization source, then the system
synchronization maintenance will adopt a source
elsewhere. Refer to the SYNC section in this chapter for
details. If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility:
1. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
Interface circuit pack and the cable. If a 120A1 CSU
Module is physically connected to a TN464F board
on the back of the port carrier, check the physical
connection of the CSU Module and make sure the
Network Interface cable is plugged into the CSU
Module’s NETWORK jack.
2. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a T1
facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose
the remote DS1 endpoint.
If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects directly to a
switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to
diagnose the DS1 endpoint. If the UDS1 connects to a
line-side terminating device such as a PRI terminal
adapter:
1. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
Interface circuit pack to the terminating device.
Check premise distribution system (or intra-premise
wiring) for physical connection failures. If a 120A1
CSU Module is physically connected to a TN464F
board on the back of the port carrier, check the
physical connection of the CSU Module and make
sure the Network Interface cable is plugged into the
CSU Module’s NETWORK jack.
2. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code

Page 10-1558

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation
The CSU Module is missing. The Near-End CSU Type
field on the add ds1 form has been administered as
integrated but the 120A1 CSU Module is not physically
connected to the TN464F board on the back of the port
carrier.

1300

1. If using the 120A1 CSU Module, plug the CSU
Module into the TN464F circuit pack’s connector on
the I/O connector panel on back of the carrier.
Otherwise, change the Near-End CSU Type field
using the change ds1 form to other.
2. Run the test again.
1301

FAIL

The 120A1 CSU Module is physically connected to the
TN464F board on the back of the port carrier but the
Near-End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has not
been administered as integrated.
1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, use the
change ds1 command to change the Near-End CSU
Type field to integrated. Otherwise, physically
remove the 120A1 CSU Module from the back of the
port carrier.
2. Run the test again.

1302

FAIL

Attempting to use the 120A1 CSU Module with a TN464F
circuit pack that is configured for 32-channel (2.048
Mbps) operation. The CSU Module only works with a
DS1 board configured for 24-channel (1.544 Mbps)
operation in the United States of America.
1. If the 120A1 CSU Module is to be used, physically
remove the TN464F circuit pack and reconfigure for
24-channel (1.544 Mbps) operation.
2. Reinsert the circuit pack and run the test again.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
1303

Page 10-1559

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The DS1 circuit pack Suffix is incorrect for CSU Module
administration. The Near-End CSU Type field on the add
ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the
DS1 circuit pack is not a TN464F or later suffix UDS1
board.
1. If the CSU Module is to be used, and the Near-End
CSU type field is set to intergrated to allow for CSU
Module administration, remove the circuit pack and
replace with a TN464F or later suffix board.
Otherwise, use the change ds1 command to
change the Near-End CSU Type field to other.

1310

FAIL

The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) demand test (#1209)
failed.
1. Repeat the test using the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the
TN464F circuit pack. 3) Run this test again.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
1311

Page 10-1560

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Equipment
Loopback (ELB) test (#1210) failed. This test is
executed by the I-CSU during I-CSU power-up/reset
(i.e.- TN464F board physically inserted and 120A1 CSU
Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU
Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1
board. The ELB test is also executed as part of the
command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
1. Execute the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the
TN464F board, the CSU Module, or the I/O cable
between the backplane and the CSU module (or any
combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate
the problem to one of these areas. Begin by
replacing the CSU Module and running the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command
again.
3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the
TN464F board and run the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command again.
4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be
in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU
module.

1312

FAIL

The Integrated CSU (I-CSU) Module Repeater
Loopback (RLB) test (#1211) failed. This test is
executed by the I-CSU during I-CSU power-up/reset
(i.e.- TN464F board physically inserted and 120A1 CSU
Module already installed) or when the 120A1 CSU
Module is plugged on to an already initialized DS1
board. The RLB test is also executed as part of the
command test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests.
1. Execute the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the RLB test continues to fail, then replace the
CSU Module.
3. Run this test again.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
1313

Page 10-1561

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The TN464F circuit pack could not deactivate a CPE
Loopback Jack loopback.
1. Execute the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command.
2. If the attempt to deactivate the CPE Loopback Jack
loopback is not successful, check the cabling and
investigate the problem at the CPE Loopback Jack.
3. Run the test again.

1314

FAIL

The TN464F circuit pack could not deactivate a far-end
CSU loopback.
1. Execute the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command.
2. If the attempt to deactivate the far-end CSU
loopback continues to fail, then escalate the
problem.

1320

FAIL

A 120A1 CSU module hardware failure or an ICSU serial
interface audit failure was detected by the TN464F
UDS1 circuit pack.
1. Replace the CSU module, and then run the test
again.
2. If the test continues to fail with this error code,
replace the TN464F and run the test again.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then
the problem could be in the I/O cable between the
backplane and the CSU module.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
1321

Page 10-1562

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
DTE LOS (loss of signal) was detected between the
TN464F UDS1 board and the 120A1 CSU Module. Either
the TN464F board, the 120A1 CSU Module, or the I/O
cable between the backplane and the CSU module (or
any combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate
the problem to one of these areas.
1. Replace the CSU Module and run the test again.
2. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then
replace the TN464F board and run the test again.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the
problem could be in the I/O cable between the
backplane and the CSU module.

1322

FAIL

No 5 volts power detected from the TN464F circuit pack
to the 120A1 CSU Module. Problem probably due to an
open fuse on the DS1 board or a faulty ICSU.
NOTE:
Do not immediately swap DS1 boards as this may
blow the fuse on the new board.
1. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then
replace the CSU Module and run the test again.
2. Remove the TN464F from the system and reinsert.
3. Run the test again once the board has finished its
reset.
4. If the test continues to fail with this error code, then
replace the TN464F board and run the test again.
5. If the test continues to fail with this error code, the
problem could be in the I/O cable between the
backplane and the CSU module.

1323

FAIL

A service affecting CSU Module audit failure was
detected by the TN464F UDS1 circuit pack. All
administered ports on the UDS1 circuit pack are
affected and maintenance software will place the ports
into the out-of-service state.
1. Replace the 120A1 CSU Module.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-460.
Error
Code
1324

0

Page 10-1563

TEST #138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

FAIL

A non-service affecting CSU Module audit failure was
detected by the TN464F UDS1 circuit pack. No ports
should be affected. No immediate action is required.
These errors indicate that the CSU Module hardware
may have a problem, and that it should be replaced
when practical to avoid further deterioration.

PASS

DS1 signal is present and the physical link is healthy. In
addition, no Integrated CSU errors are detected.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Blue Alarm Inquiry Test (#139)
The Blue Alarm is a signal sent by the remote DS1 endpoint when it is
out-of-service. The Blue Alarm Inquiry Test checks the blue alarm status of the
remote DS1 endpoint.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Blue Alarm signal from the
remote DS1 endpoint, the circuit pack will transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1564

DS1 endpoint and send a BLUE ALARM message to the maintenance software.
When the Blue alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software places all trunks or
ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The inquiry
test will be run every 10 minutes until the Blue alarm is cleared.
The UDS1 Interface circuit pack takes 3 seconds to recognize and report a Blue
alarm and 16 seconds to recognize and report the resolution of a Blue alarm.
When the Blue alarm is cleared, the UDS1 Interface circuit pack stops
transmitting the Yellow alarm and places the trunks or ports back into the service
state before the Blue alarm occurs.

Line Loopback Alarm
The Line Loopback (LLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the switch
DS1 into a loopback mode. When the switch DS1 is in the LLB mode, the arriving
bit pattern is regenerated and sent back. Line Loopback (LLB) Alarm is activated
when the in-band activate LLB bit pattern has been arriving continuously for 5
seconds on the DS1 line. LLB is deactivated when the in-band deactivate LLB bit
pattern has been arriving continuously for 5 seconds on the DS1 line.
Since LLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for
signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue
Alarm.

Payload Loopback Alarm
The Payload Loopback (PLB) is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the
switch DS1 into a loopback mode. PLB Alarm is activated when a network
protocol activate bit pattern arrives over the 4Kbps ESF data link on the DS1 line.
PLB is deactivated when a network protocol deactivate bit pattern arrives over
the 4Kbps ESF data link on the DS1 line.
Since PLB is a maintenance condition rendering all DS0 channels unavailable for
signaling or bearer traffic, maintenance software treats this the same as a Blue
Alarm.
Table 10-461.
Error
Code

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-461.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1565

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The remote DS1 endpoint is out-of-service.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-461.
Error
Code
1
1794

Page 10-1566

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Line
Loopback Alarm (LLB).
If the UDS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1
facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the
remote DS1 endpoint.
If the UDS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a
switch, call the system technician of the remote switch to
diagnose the DS1 endpoint.
If the UDS1 interface circuit pack connects directly to a
line-side terminating device (for example, a PRI terminal
adapter), call the vendor of the terminating device to
diagnose the equipment.

1795

FAIL

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Payload
Loopback Alarm (PLB).
If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a leased
T1 facility, call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose
the remote DS1 endpoint. If the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack connects directly to another DS1 board, call the
system technician of the remote switch to diagnose the
DS1 endpoint.
If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects directly to a
line-side terminating device such as a PRI terminal
adapter contact the vendor of the terminating device to
diagnose the equipment.

PASS

Remote DS1 endpoint is in-service. Neither a Blue alarm
nor a Line Loopback alarm nor a Payload Loopback
alarm is detected by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-461.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1567

TEST #139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Red Alarm Inquiry Test (#140)
A UDS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Red alarm when the framing pattern of the
incoming DS1 bit stream has been lost. The Red Alarm Inquiry Test checks the
framing status of a UDS1 Interface circuit pack. A UDS1 Interface circuit pack
takes 3 seconds to recognize and report a Red alarm and 10 seconds to
recognize and report the resolution of a Red alarm.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Red alarm, the circuit pack will
transmit a Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint and send a RED ALARM
message to the maintenance software. After the Red alarm is confirmed, the
maintenance software places all trunks or ports of the circuit pack into the
out-of-service state. The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Red
alarm is cleared.
When the Red alarm is cleared, the UDS1 Interface circuit pack will stop
transmitting the Yellow alarm to the remote DS1 endpoint. The maintenance

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1568

software restores all trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the
service state before the Red alarm occurs.

Loss of Multiframe Alarm
If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is administered using DMI-BOS signaling, the
UDS1 Interface circuit pack raises a Loss of Multiframe Alarm (LMA) when it
cannot interpret the incoming signaling bits to synchronize to the multiframe
pattern received in the 24th channel. Once the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
detects an LMA, the circuit pack will transmit a Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA)
to the remote DS1 endpoint. Maintenance software handles both Red alarm and
LMA alarm(s) using the same mechanism.
Table 10-462.
Error
Code

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-462.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1569

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A ’busyout’ or a ’release’ command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A ’list config’ command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
NOTE:
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is
isolated from the system, and all of the trunks for
this circuit pack are placed into the out of service
state. The system will try to restore the circuit pack
within 15 minutes. When no faults are detected for
15 minutes, the UDS1 interface circuit pack is
restored to normal operation. All of the trunks for
the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then returned
to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case,
faults (such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms)
would be entered in the error log. In addition,
many hardware errors would be logged against
the associated trunk circuits. If the facility is OK
and the error occurs again after 15 minutes,
replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-462.
Error
Code

Page 10-1570

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 interface circuit pack detected a red alarm.
An out of frame condition occurred on the UDS1
interface circuit pack. The UDS1 interface circuit pack
will transmit a yellow alarm to the remote UDS1 endpoint
until the red alarm is retired.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following.
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
2. Contact T1 Network Service or a technician at the
far-end switch to diagnose the remote DS1
endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1 packs
and of the cable.
4. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following.
1. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
2. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
3. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-462.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-1571

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 interface circuit pack detected a loss of
multiframe alarm (LMA). An out of frame condition
occurred on the UDS1 interface circuit pack. The UDS1
interface circuit pack will transmit a remote multiframe
alarm (RMA) to the remote UDS1 endpoint until the LMA
is retired.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
2. Contact T1 Network Service or a technician at the
far-end switch to diagnose the remote DS1
endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1 packs
and of the cable.
4. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following.
1. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
2. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
3. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-462.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-1572

TEST #140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

No Red alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test (#141)
Receiving a Yellow alarm from remote DS1 endpoint indicates that the remote
DS1 endpoint has an out-of-frame condition. The Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is
used to determine whether the remote DS1 endpoint is transmitting a Yellow
alarm. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack takes 500 msec to recognize and report a
Yellow alarm and 500 msec to recognize and report that a Yellow alarm condition
is cleared.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Yellow alarm from the remote
DS1 endpoint, it will send a YELLOW-ALARM uplink message to the
maintenance software. After the maintenance software receives the
YELLOW-ALARM message, the Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test is run to confirm the
Yellow alarm. Once the Yellow alarm is confirmed, the maintenance software

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1573

places all trunks or ports on the circuit pack into the out-of-service state. The
Inquiry Test will be run every 10 minutes until the Yellow alarm is cleared.
When the Yellow alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks or
ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack back to their previous service state
before the Yellow alarm was raised.
This Yellow alarm corresponds to the yellow F2 state documented in CCITT
Recommendation I.431.

Remote Multiframe Alarm
Remote Multiframe Alarm (RMA) indicates that the remote DS1 endpoint is in a
Loss of Multiframe Alarm condition while the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is
administered using the DMI-BOS common channel signaling. The RMA is
handled as a Yellow alarm.

Yellow F5 Fault Alarm
For 32-channel E1 operation with CRC4 on, the F5 fault state is defined as a fault
in the user-network interface, specifically in the direction from the user (PBX) to
the network. Refer to CCITT recommendation I.431.
Table 10-463.
Error
Code

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-463.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1574

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A ’busyout’ or a ’release’ command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A ’list config’ command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-463.
Error
Code

Page 10-1575

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 interface circuit pack detected a yellow alarm
sent by the remote DS1 endpoint. An out of frame
condition occurred at the DS1 endpoint. If the UDS1
connects to a T1 network facility or to another switch, do
the following:
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
2. Contact T1 Network Service or a technician at the
far-end switch to diagnose the remote DS1
endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1 packs
and of the cable..
4. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
5. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following:
1. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
2. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
3. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
6. f the test still fails, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-463.
Error
Code
1

Page 10-1576

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 interface circuit pack detected a remote
multiframe alarm (RMA) sent by the remote DS1
endpoint. An out of frame condition occurred at the DS1
endpoint.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
2. Contact T1 Network Service or a technician at the
far-end switch to diagnose the remote DS1
endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1 packs
and of the cable.
4. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
5. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following:
1. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
2. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
3. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
6. If the test still fails, escalate the problem..

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-463.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1577

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 interface circuit pack is reporting a Yellow F5
fault alarm. There is a fault in the User-Network interface
from the user (PBX) to the network. An out-of-frame
condition occurs on the remote DS1 endpoint.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility:
1. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
2. Contact T1 Network Service to diagnose the remote
DS1 endpoint.
3. Check the physical connectivity of the DS1 Interface
circuit packs and cable.
4. Replace the local UDS1 Interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
5. If the test still fails, then escalate the problem.
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
such as a PRI terminal adapter:
1. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
2. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
3. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
Interface circuit pack to the terminating device.
Check premise distribution system (or intra-premise
wiring) for physical connection failures.
5. Replace the local UDS1 Interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
6. If the test still fails, then escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-463.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-1578

TEST #141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

Neither a Yellow alarm nor a Remote Multiframe Alarm
nor a F5 state alarm is being received from the remote
DS1 endpoint.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Major Alarm Inquiry Test (#142)
The Major alarm raised by a UDS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the
average bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1000. The Major Alarm
Inquiry Test is used to determine that the received DS1 bit error rate is greater
than 1/1000. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack takes 10 seconds to recognize and
report a Major alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and report that a Major alarm
condition is cleared.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm, it will send a
MAJOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. (32-channel interfaces
send a YELLOW alarm to the far end). After the maintenance software receives a
MAJOR-ALARM message, the Major Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to confirm the

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1579

Major alarm on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. The Inquiry Test will be run every
10 minutes until the Major alarm is cleared. The maintenance software places all
trunks or ports on the circuit pack in the out-of-service state if the Major alarm
persists for more than 20 minutes.
When the Major alarm is cleared, the maintenance software restores all trunks or
ports on the circuit pack to their previous service state before a Major alarm
occurs.
Table 10-464.
Error
Code

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-464.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1580

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-464.
Error
Code

Page 10-1581

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1
interface circuit pack and the remote DS1 endpoint is
very poor.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
3. Contact T1 Network Service or the technician at the
remote switch to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1
interface circuit packs and the cable.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
6. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

Information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-464.
Error
Code

Page 10-1582

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following:
1. The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1
interface circuit pack and the line-side terminating
device is very poor. Enter the list measurement
ds1-log PCSS command to read the error seconds
measurement.
2. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
3. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
4. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
5. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
6. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
7. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

PASS

No Major alarm is detected in the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-464.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1583

TEST #142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Minor Alarm Inquiry Test (#143)
The Minor alarm raised by a UDS1 Interface circuit pack indicates that the
average bit error rate on the DS1 facility is greater than 1/1,000,000, but less than
1/1000. The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test is used to determine that the received DS1
bit error rate is greater than 1/1,000,000 and less than 1/1000. When D4 framing
mode is selected, the UDS1 Interface circuit pack takes 41 minutes to recognize
and report a Minor alarm and 41 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor
alarm condition has cleared. If ESF framing mode is selected, the UDS1 Interface
circuit pack takes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10
minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition has cleared.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition, it will
send a MINOR-ALARM message to the maintenance software. After the
maintenance software receives a MINOR-ALARM message, the Minor Alarm
Inquiry Test is initiated to confirm the Minor alarm. All trunks or ports on the circuit

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1584

pack are kept in the in-service state after the Minor alarm is confirmed. The Minor
Alarm Inquiry Test is run every 10 minutes until the Minor alarm is cleared.
Table 10-465.
Error
Code

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-465.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-1585

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1
interface circuit pack and the remote DS1 endpoint
is poor. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
2. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
3. Contact T1 Network Service or the technician at the
remote switch to diagnose the equipment.
4. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1
interface circuit packs and the cable.
5. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.
6. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

Information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-465.
Error
Code

Page 10-1586

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following:
1. The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1
interface circuit pack and the line-side terminating
device is poor. Enter the list measurement ds1-log
PCSS command to read the error seconds
measurement.
2. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
3. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Obtain the error seconds
measurement on the terminating device (if possible).
Refer to the ’Line-Side Terminating Device
Operating Manual’ for information.
4. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
5. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
6. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.
7. If the test still fails, escalate the problem.

PASS

No Minor alarm is detected in the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-465.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1587

TEST #143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Slip Alarm Inquiry Test (#144)
Slips occur when transmitter and receiver are not running at precisely the same
clock rate. The UDS1 Interface circuit pack can detect both positive and
negative slips on the DS1 facility. The Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is used to acquire
the total number of slips that have occurred on a DS1 link.
When the UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a slip condition, the circuit pack
will increase the on-board slip counter by 1. A SLIP-COUNT message is
spontaneously sent to the system software after the counter reaches a threshold
(for example, 88). When the maintenance software receives the SLIP-COUNT
message, the Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to query the slip counters on a
UDS1 Interface circuit pack and total the slip counts in the maintenance
software.
If the count of slips is over the threshold, a Minor alarm is raised against the
UDS1 Interface circuit pack. All trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1588

remain in the in-service state. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply
the system synchronization source, the MINOR alarm will initiate a
synchronization source switch. See TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) and SYNC
(Synchronization) Maintenance documentation for details.
Table 10-466.
Error
Code

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-466.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-1589

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1 to 88

FAIL

The test failed because the UDS1 interface circuit pack
and the remote DS1 endpoint are not synchronized to
the same clock rate. The UDS1 interface circuit pack
detected a slip alarm. The error code equals the number
of slips detected by the UDS1 interface circuit pack
since the last slip alarm inquiry test.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN464C, enter
the list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to
read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
4. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent
alarms and errors against the synchronization
(SYNC). Follow the suggested repair procedure for
these errors.
5. Contact T1 Network Service or the technician at the
remote switch to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint.
6. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1
interface circuit packs and the cable.
7. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.

Information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-466.
Error
Code

Page 10-1590

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

1 to 88

FAIL

(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
(for example, a PRI terminal adapter), do the following:
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
4. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
5. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
6. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
7) Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.

PASS

No Slip alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-466.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1591

TEST #144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test (#145)
Misframe Alarm indicates that framing bits observed on a UDS1 Interface circuit
pack are in error. The Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test queries the total number of
misframes that have occurred on a DS1 Interface circuit pack since the last
inquiry.
When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a misframe error, it will increase its
misframe counter by 1. If the counter reaches a specified threshold (i.e.- 17), a
MISFRAME-COUNT message is automatically sent to the switch maintenance
software. After the maintenance software receives the MISFRAME-COUNT
message, the Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to collect the misframe
counts from the UDS1 Interface circuit pack.
When the threshold of misframes is reached, if the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is
supplying the system synchronization source, then a switching synchronization
source message is sent to the TDM Bus Clock. See TDM-BUS (TDM Bus)

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1592

Maintenance documentation for details. A Minor alarm against the UDS1
Interface circuit pack is raised, but all trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit
pack remain in the in-service state.
Table 10-467.
Error
Code

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-467.
Error
Code
2100

Page 10-1593

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1 to 17

FAIL

The test failed because the UDS1 interface circuit pack
detected errors in the received framing bits pattern. The
error code equals the number of misframes detected by
the UDS1 interface circuit pack since the last misframe
alarm inquiry test. Major bit and minor bit error rate
(error types 2561 and 2817) error logs often accompany
misframe alarms. Clearing the cause of these error logs
may clear the misframes which are occurring.
If the UDS1 connects to a T1 network facility or to
another switch, do the following:
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN464C, enter
the list measurement ds1-log PCSS command to
read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are
administered using the same signaling mode,
framing mode, and line coding.
4. Check the active alarm and error logs for recent
alarms and errors against the synchronization
(SYNC). Follow the suggested repair procedure for
these errors.
5. Contact T1 Network Service or the technician at the
remote switch to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint.
6. Check the physical connectivity of the UDS1
interface circuit packs and the cable.
7. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack, and
repeat the test.

More information continues on the next page.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-467.
Error
Code

Page 10-1594

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result

1 to 17

FAIL

(cont’d.)

(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
If the UDS1 connects to a line-side terminating device
such as a PRI terminal adapter:
1. Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. Enter the list measurement ds1-log PCSS
command to read the error seconds measurement.
3. Verify that the switch DS1 and the line-side
terminating device are administered using the same
signaling mode, framing mode, and line coding.
4. Investigate the maintenance status of the line-side
terminating device. Refer to the ’Line-Side
Terminating Device Operating Manual’ for
information.
5. Contact the vendor of the line-side terminating
device to diagnose the equipment.
6. Check the physical connection of the UDS1
interface circuit pack to the terminating device, and
check the premise distribution system (or the
intra-premise wiring) for physical connection
failures.
7. Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and
repeat the test.

PASS

No Misframe alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface
circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-467.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1595

TEST #145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Translation Update Test (#146)
The Translation Update Test sends the circuit-pack-level information specified by
System Administration to the UDS1 Interface circuit pack. Translation includes
the following data administered for a UDS1 Interface circuit pack (see output of
display ds1 PCSS command): DS1 Link Length between two DS1 endpoints,
Synchronization Source Control, All Zero Suppression, Framing Mode, Signaling
Mode, Time Slot Number of 697-Hz Tone, Time Slot Number of 700-Hz Tone, etc.
In G3V3, if a TN464F or later UDS1 circuit pack is combined with an AT&T 120A1
CSU Module to form and Integrated CSU Module, this test will also send the
administration for this Integrated CSU to the circuit pack to assure the board’s
translations are correct. The administration of the CSU Module is done using the
DS1 circuit pack administration form. Translation for the CSU Module includes
the following data: Transmit LBO, Receive ALBO, Supply CPE Loopback Jack
Power?, etc.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-468.
Error
Code

Page 10-1596

TEST #146 Translation Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal system software error.
1. Enter the display ds1 PCSS command to verify the
UDS1 Interface circuit pack translation.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

0

PASS

Translation data has been downloaded to the UDS1
Interface circuit pack successfully.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

DS1 Board Loopback Test (#1209)
This test is destructive.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1597

The DS1 Board Loopback (BLB) Test causes a loopback at the TN464F DS1
board edge and tests DS1 board internal circuitry.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the BLB Test.
When the BLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board
will set up the BLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface
circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command
is entered.
Table 10-469.
Error
Code

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

DS1 Board Loopback Test cannot be executed in the
current configuration. To run this, the TN464F or later
suffix UDS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel
operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-469.
Error
Code
1039

Page 10-1598

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS
command.
3. Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 boardor the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-469.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1599

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-469.
Error
Code

Page 10-1600

TEST #1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
UDS1 Interface circuit pack failed the DS1 Board
Loopback Test.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the BLB test continues to fail, then replace the
UDS1 circuit pack.

0

PASS

The BLB test executed successfully. The test pattern
was transmitted and received successfully up to the
TN464F DS1 board edge.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CSU Equipment Loopback Test (#1210)
This test is destructive.
The CSU Equipment Loopback (ELB) Test causes a loopback at the near-edge
of the local AT&T 120A1 CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN464F

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1601

DS1 board to the CSU Module (DS1 board edge, connection, and CSU Module
edge). This test will only be performed if the AT&T 120A1 CSU Module is present,
administered, and connected to a 1.544 Mbps TN464F DS1 circuit pack on the
back of the port carrier.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the ELB Test.
When the ELB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board
will set up the ELB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.
In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is
running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the
loopback pattern itself.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface
circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command
is entered.
Table 10-470.
Error
Code

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-470.
Error
Code
1005

Page 10-1602

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
CSU Equipment Loopback Test cannot be executed in
the current configuration. To run this test, the Near-End
CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration
form must be set to integrated and the "Bit Rate" field
must be set to "1.544" (24-channel operation).
1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the
Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form to integrated, and/or change the
"Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in
24-channel configuration.
2. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-470.
Error
Code
1039

Page 10-1603

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption.
1. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be
tested, set the synchronization reference to another
DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
■

Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.

■

Next, issue the set synchronization PCSS
command.

■

Lastly, issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test.

2. If the test aborts again, a different ABORT error code
will be generated. Follow the recommended
maintenance procedures for that error code.
1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 boardor the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span tests can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

1951

ABORT

The CSU Equipment Loopback Test could not be
executed because the 120A1 CSU Module was not
physically installed. Physically connect the 120A1 CSU
Module to the TN464F board on the back of the port
carrier.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-470.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1604

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-470.
Error
Code

Page 10-1605

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
UDS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Equipment
Loopback Test.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the ELB test continues to fail, then either the
TN464F board, the CSU Module, or the I/O cable
between the backplane and the CSU module (or any
combination thereof) has failed. Attempt to isolate
the problem to one of these areas. Begin by
replacing the CSU Module and running the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command
again.
3. If the ELB test continues to fail, then replace the
TN464F board and run the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command again.
4. If the ELB test continues to fail, the problem could be
in the I/O cable between the backplane and the CSU
module.

PASS

The ELB test executed successfully. The test pattern
was transmitted and received successfully over the
connection from the TN464F DS1 board to the
near-edge of the 120A1 CSU Module.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-470.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1606

TEST #1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CSU Repeater Loopback Test (#1211)
This test is destructive.
The CSU Repeater Loopback (RLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-edge of
the local AT&T 120A1 CSU Module and tests the connection from the TN464F
DS1 board to and including the CSU Module circuitry. This test will only be
performed if the AT&T 120A1 CSU Module is present, administered, and
connected to a 1.544 Mbps TN464F DS1 circuit pack on the back of the port
carrier.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the RLB Test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1607

When the RLB Test is initiated, maintenance software sends an appropriate
message to the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to start the test. The board
will set up the RLB loopback, transmit a test pattern, and verify that the pattern is
received unaltered through the loopback. If the transmitted and received pattern
is different, the test fails.
In addition, the DS1 circuit pack hardware applies a DC current while the test is
running in order to detect any broken wires which may not be detected by the
loopback pattern itself.
When the test is complete, all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface
circuit pack are restored to the in-service state after the release board command
is entered.
Table 10-471.
Error
Code

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

CSU Repeater Loopback Test cannot be executed in
the current configuration. To run this test, the Near-End
CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack administration
form must be set to integrated, and the "Bit Rate" field
must be set to "1.544" (24-channel operation).
1. Use the change ds1 PCSS command to set the
Near-End CSU Type field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form to integrated, and/or change the
"Bit Rate" field to "1.544" if the board is to be used in
24-channel configuration.
2. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command. 3) If the test
continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-471.
Error
Code
1015

Page 10-1608

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command. 3) If the test continues to abort,
escalate the problem.

1039

ABORT

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 boardor the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-471.
Error
Code

Page 10-1609

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1951

ABORT

The CSU Repeater Loopback Test could not be
executed because the 120A1 CSU Module was not
physically installed. Physically connect the 120A1 CSU
Module to the TN464F board on the back of the port
carrier.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-471.
Error
Code

Page 10-1610

TEST #1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
UDS1 Interface circuit pack failed the CSU Repeater
Loopback Test.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command.
2. If the RLB test continues to fail, and the CSU
Equipment Loopback Test (#1210) passed, then
replace the CSU Module.

0

PASS

The RLB test executed successfully. The test pattern
was transmitted and received successfully over the
connection from the TN464F DS1 board to the far-edge
of the 120A1 CSU Module.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

CPE Loopback Jack Test (#1212)
This test is destructive.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1611

The CPE Loopback Jack (CLJ-LB) Test causes a loopback at the CPE Loopback
Jack and tests the building wiring connection between the TN464F DS1 board
and the CPE Loopback Jack.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin
[number-of-bits bit-pattern] command. The system technician has the choice of
entering a loopback activation code on the command line or using the default
code (0x47F).
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the CSJ Loopback
Test.
The CPE Loopback Test has the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a
loopback activation code to the CPE Loopback Jack, waits up to 10 seconds for
return of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a
framed 3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test
pattern, and returns a PASS result to indicate that the pattern was successfully
sent. If the loopback is not established within the 10 seconds, the test returns
FAIL.
The status of the CPE Loopback test will be available in the hardware error log
via error type 3900. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed
through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The
command will also display the type of Loopback/Span test executing (Test field),
the type of pattern generated for the Loopback/Span test (Pattern field),and
whether the pattern(i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized field).
To terminate the test, enter the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test
command or the release board command. Using the release board command
will restore all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-472.
Error
Code

Page 10-1612

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command at
1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

CPE Loopback Jack Test cannot be executed in the
current configuration. To run this test, the TN464F or
later suffix UDS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel
operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1039

ABORT

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-472.
Error
Code
1950

Page 10-1613

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 boardor the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-472.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1614

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-472.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1615

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The CLJ-LB test failed because it was not set up
properly. The UDS1 interface pack could not
successfully put the CPE loopback jack into loopback
mode.
1. Rerun the test ds1-loop PCSS
cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command.
2. If the test continues to fail, the problem could be with
the TN464F board, the CPE loopback jack
equipment, or somewhere between. Run the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command
to determine if the loopback tests that are closer to
the TN464F board are successful. If any of these
tests fail, follow the maintenance strategy that is
associated with the test that fails; otherwise,
escalate the problem.

3

FAIL

The CPE Loopback Jack Test was not set up properly.
The framed 3-in-24 test pattern, generated by the UDS1
Interface circuit pack and looped back through the CPE
Loopback Jack, could not be detected properly by the
UDS1 circuit pack.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command.
2. If the CPE Loopback test continues to fail, the
problem could be with the TN464F board, the CPE
Loopback Jack equipment, or somewhere in
between. Run the test ds1-loop PCSS
ds1/csu-loopback-tests command to see if the
loopback tests closer to the TN464F board are
successful. If any of those loopback tests fail, follow
the maintenance strategy associated with those
loopbacks. Otherwise, escalate the problem.

PASS

The CSJ Loopback test has successfully began
executing. The test will continue to run until the system
technician enters the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command or the release board
PCSS command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-472.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1616

TEST #1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Far CSU Loopback Test (#1213)
This test is destructive.
The Far CSU Loopback (R-LLB) Test causes a loopback at the far-end CSU and
tests all circuitry and facilities from the local TN464F DS1 board to the far-end
CSU.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS far-csu-loopback-test-begin command.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the Far CSU
Loopback Test.
If the far-end CSU is not an AT&T 120A1 CSU Module, and the UDS1 is
administered for ami-zcs line coding, one’s density protection must be disabled

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1617

on the CSU during the test due to the large number of zero’s in the 3-in-24 test
pattern.
The Far CSU Loopback Test has the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack
transmit a loopback activation code to the remote CSU, waits up to 15 seconds
for return of the code to verify the loopback has been established, transmits a
framed 3-in-24 test pattern, begins counting bit errors in the received test
pattern, and returns a PASS result. If the loopback is not established within the 15
seconds, the test fails.
The status of the Far CSU Loopback test will be available in the hardware error
log via error type 3901. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being passed
through the loopback cleanly, the number of bit errors should be very low. The
command will also display the type of Loopback/Span test executing (Test field),
the type of pattern generated for the Loopback/Span test (Pattern field),and
whether the pattern(i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern) is synchronized (Synchronized field).
To terminate the test, enter the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test
command or the release board command. Using the release board command
will restore all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state.
Table 10-473.
Error
Code

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
far-csu-loopback-test-begin command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Far CSU Loopback Test cannot be executed in the
current configuration. To run this, the TN464F or later
suffix UDS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel
operation.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-473.
Error
Code
1015

Page 10-1618

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1039

ABORT

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

1950

ABORT

Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 boardor the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-473.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1619

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-473.
Error
Code
2

Page 10-1620

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed because it was not set up properly. The
UDS1 pack could not successfully put the far-end CSU
into loopback mode.
1. Rerun the test ds1-loop PCSS
far-csu-loopback-test-begin command.
2. If the test continues to fail, the problem could be with
the TN464F board, the CPE loopback jack
equipment, or somewhere between. Run the test
ds1-loop PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin
command to determine if the CPE loopback jack
loopback test is successful. If a CPE loopback jack
device is not being used, issue the test ds1-loop
PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command instead.
If the closer loopback test fails, follow the
maintenance strategy that is associated with that
test; otherwise, escalate the problem.

3

FAIL

The Far CSU Loopback Test was not set up properly.
The framed 3-in-24 test pattern, generated by the UDS1
Interface circuit pack and looped back through the
far-end CSU, could not be detected properly by the
UDS1 circuit pack.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
far-csu-loopback-test-begin command.
2. If the Far CSU Loopback test continues to fail with
this error code, the problem could be with the
TN464F board, the far-end CSU equipment, or
somewhere in between. Run the test ds1-loop
PCSS cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin command to
see if the CPE Loopback Jack test which is closer to
the TN464F board is successful. (If a CPE Loopback
Jack device is not being used, then run the test
ds1-loop PCSS ds1/csu-loopback-tests command
to see if these even closer loopback tests succeed).
If the closer loopback test fails, follow the
maintenance strategy associated with that
loopback. Otherwise, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-473.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-1621

TEST #1213 Far CSU Loopback Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

The Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began
executing. The test will continue to run until the system
technician enters the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command or the release board
PCSS command.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

One-Way Span Test (#1214)
This test is destructive.
The One-Way Span Test allows one-way span testing to and from remote test
equipment or another DEFINITY communications system. This will test all
circuitry and facilities from the local TN464F DS1 board to the remote test
equipment or other DEFINITY communications system.
The test is destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS one-way-span-test-begin command.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1622

All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the One-Way Span
Test.
The One-Way Span Test has the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack transmit a
framed 3-in-24 test pattern and attempt to receive and verify the pattern. If the
TN464F board receives a framed 3-in-24 test pattern sent from another DEFINITY
G3V3 or test equipment at the far-end of the DS1, it will begin counting bit errors
within the received pattern.
The status of the One-Way Span test will be available in the hardware error log
via error type 3902. Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user
information of the status of the test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test has been running (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected
(Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). If the test pattern is being sent
cleanly over the span from the far-end, the number of bit errors should be very
low. The Test Duration field will show 0 until the test pattern is received from the
far-end. Upon receiving the test pattern, the board will begin calculating the test
duration and number of bit errors. The command will also display the type of
Loopback/Span test executing (Test Field), the type of pattern generated for the
Loopback/Span test (Pattern Field),and whether the pattern(i.e. 3-in-24 Pattern)
is synchronized (Synchronized Field).
To terminate the test, enter the test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test
command or the release board command. Using the release board command
will restore all trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state.
Table 10-474.
Error
Code

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
one-way-span-test-begin command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-474.
Error
Code

Page 10-1623

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

1005

ABORT

One-Way Span Test cannot be executed in the current
configuration. To run this, the TN464F or later suffix
UDS1 must be administered for 24-channel operation.
The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel
operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1039

ABORT

The UDS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for
the system. Executing this test could cause major
system disruption. If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
needs to be tested, set the synchronization reference to
another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone-Clock
circuit pack via the following command sequence:
1. Issue the disable synchronization-switch
command.
2. Issue the set synchronization PCSS command.
3. Issue the enable synchronization-switch
command. Then rerun the test. If the test aborts
again, a different ABORT error code will be
generated. Follow the recommended maintenance
procedures for that error code.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-474.
Error
Code
1950

Page 10-1624

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Another loopback/span test is already executing on the
DS1 board or the board is in a network requested
loopback mode (Line loopback or Payload loopback).
The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer
Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test, or the
One-Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line
loopback or payload loopback mode. Only one
long-duration loopback/span test can be active at a
given time. Thus, if a loopback/span test is already
active, that test must be terminated via the test ds1-loop
PCSS end-loopback/span-test command in order to
execute this test.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-474.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1625

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

The One-Way Span test has successfully began
transmitting a framed 3-in-24 test pattern. The test will
continue to run until the system technician enters the
test ds1-loop PCSS end-loopback/span-test command
or the release board PCSS command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-474.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1626

TEST #1214 One-Way Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Inject Single Bit Error Test (#1215)
This test is destructive.
The Inject Single Bit Error Test will cause a single bit error to be sent within an
active framed 3-in-24 test pattern.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error command. An attempt to
use this command will be rejected if none of the three long-duration DS1
loopback/span tests (CPE Loopback Jack Test, Far CSU Loopback Test,
One-Way Span Test) are active on a TN464F circuit pack.
All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running the Inject Single Bit
Error Test.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1627

The list measurements ds1 summary command displays the number of bit errors
detected (Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count field). Injecting this single bit error
should increment the bit error count of the loopback/span test by one.
Table 10-475.
Error
Code

TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS inject-single-bit-error
command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5
times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-475.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1628

TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

PASS

A single bit error has been successfully injected into an
active framed 3-in-24 test pattern.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-475.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1629

TEST #1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

End Loopback/Span Test (#1216)
This test is destructive.
The End Loopback/Span Test will terminate an active loopback or span test on a
TN464F UDS1 circuit pack. Bit error counting against the received test pattern
stream is terminated and sending of the framed 3-in-24 test pattern is halted. If
either the CPE Loopback Jack or the far-end CSU is looped, the appropriate
loopback deactivate code is sent. If the loopback could not be deactivated, then
the test will FAIL and a MINOR alarm will be noted in the alarm log until the
loopback is cleared.
The test is highly destructive and can only be initiated by a system technician
demanded Since only one of these three different long-duration loopback/span
tests can be active at a time, the TN464F circuit pack knows which
loopback/span test to terminate.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1630

All trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the
system technician busyout board command before running this End
Loopback/Span Test.
The list measurements ds1 summary command will display the length of time the
test ran (Test Duration field) and number of bit errors detected (Loopback/Span
Test Bit-Error Count field).
To restore the trunks or ports on the TN464F UDS1 Interface circuit pack to the
in-service state, execute the release board command
Table 10-476.
Error
Code

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute
intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

End Loopback/Span Test cannot be executed in the
current configuration. To run this, the TN464F or later
suffix UDS1 must be administered for 24-channel
operation. The "Bit Rate" field on the DS1 circuit pack
administration form must be set to "1.544" for 24-channel
operation.

1015

ABORT

Ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack have not been
busied out to out-of-service.
1. Enter the busyout board PCSS command to put all
trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack
into the out-of-service state.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-476.
Error
Code
2000

Page 10-1631

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Response to the test was not received within the
allowable time period. This may be due to hyperactivity.
Error type 1538 in the error log indicates hyperactivity.
The hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and one or
more of the following symptoms may be exhibited.
1. The UDS1-BD tests (such as test 138 and test 139)
are aborting with error code 2000.
2. The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are
returning a no board result.
3. A busyout or a release command has no affect on
the test results.
4. A list config command shows that the circuit pack
and the ports are properly installed.
When hyperactivity occurs, the circuit pack is isolated
from the system, and all of the trunks for this circuit pack
are placed into the out of service state. The system will
try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes. When no
faults are detected for 15 minutes, the UDS1 interface
circuit pack is restored to normal operation. All of the
trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then
returned to the in service state. Hyperactivity is often
caused by the associated facility. In such a case, faults
(such as slips, misframes, or blue alarms) would be
entered in the error log. In addition, many hardware
errors would be logged against the associated trunk
circuits. If the facility is OK and the error occurs again
after 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-476.
Error
Code
1313

Page 10-1632

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The TN464F UDS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the
loopback through the Customer Loopback Jack.
1. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to fail with this error code,
escalate the problem.

1314

FAIL

The TN464F UDS1 circuit pack could not deactivate the
loopback through the far-end CSU.
1. Make sure that the far-end DS1 is installed if the
far-end CSU is a 120A AT&T CSU Module.
2. Retry the test ds1-loop PCSS
end-loopback/span-test command at 1-minute
intervals for a maximum of 5 times.
3. If the test continues to fail with this error code,
escalate the problem.

PASS

The active long-duration loopback or span test on the
TN464F circuit pack was successfully terminated.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-476.
Error
Code
0

Page 10-1633

TEST #1216 End Loopback/Span Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

ICSU Status LEDs Test (#1227)
The TN464F UDS1 circuit pack has four status LEDs on the faceplate in addition
to the three standard faceplate LEDs. These four status LEDs are associated with
the 120A1 Channel Service Unit (CSU) Module that can be connected to the
TN464F board via the I/O connector panel on the back of the port carrier. The
TN464F circuit pack combined with AT&T’s new 120A1 CSU Module forms an
Integrated CSU (ICSU).
This test is a visual test. It will light the four status LEDs red for 5 seconds, then
light them green for 5 seconds, then light them yellow for 5 seconds, then turn
the LEDs off and returns control of the status LEDs to the circuit pack.
This test will only be executed on a TN464F or later suffix UDS1 circuit packs
administered for 24-channel operation (1.544 bit rate).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1634

If the 120A1 CSU Module is not physically installed, the status LEDs are always
off and this test will abort.
Table 10-477.
Error
Code

TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

The ICSU Status LEDs test can not be executed for the
current configuration. The test applies only to TN464F or
later UDS1 circuit packs administered for 24-channel
operation (1.544 bit rate).
1. If the circuit pack is a TN464F or later suffix UDS1
circuit pack, then retry the command.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1951

ABORT

The ICSU Status LEDs Test can not be executed
because a 120A1 or later suffix CSU Module is not
physically installed. If using a 120A1 CSU Module,
physically connect it to the TN464F board on the back of
the port carrier. Otherwise, ignore this abort.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals for a
maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

2500

ABORT

Internal System Error
1. Retry the command.
2. If the test continues to abort, follow normal
escalation procedures.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)

Table 10-477.
Error
Code

0

Page 10-1635

TEST #1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

The ICSU Status LEDs test executed successfully. A
PASS result, however, does not necessarily mean that
the status LEDs behaved properly. It only means that the
software successfully attempted to light the status LEDs.
This is a visual test. The service technician must visually
exam the behavior of the LEDs while the test is running.
The LEDs are functioning properly if the four status LEDs
are lit red for 5 seconds, then lit green for 5 seconds,
then lit yellow for 5 seconds. If the LEDs behave
differently, the board should be replaced at the
customer’s convenience.

NO
BOARD

The test could not relate the internal ID to the port (no
board). This could be due to incorrect translations, no
board is inserted, an incorrect board is inserted, or an
insane board is inserted.
1. Ensure that the board translations are correct.
Execute the add ds1 PCSS command to administer
the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered.
2. If the board was already administered correctly,
check the error log to determine whether the board
is hyperactive. If this is the case, the board is shut
down. Reseating the board will re-initialize the
board.
3. If the board was found to be correctly inserted in
step 1, then issue the busyout board command.
4. Issue the reset board command.
5. Issue the release busy board command.
6. Issue the test board long command.
This should re-establish the linkage between the internal
ID and the port.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-BD

Page 10-1636

VC-BD

MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

VC-BD

MAJOR

VC-BD

MINOR

VC-BD

1.

WARNING

2

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

test board PCSS l r#

Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack

test board PCSS l r#

Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack

test board PCSS s r#

Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...).
Refer to XXX-BD (Common Port Board) Maintenance documentation.

2.

! CAUTION:
If the TN788 Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) is not Vintage 2 or
later, it must be replaced.
The TN788 Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) is a service circuit pack that
provides conditioning for the audio signals from multimedia equipment based on
the CCITT H.221 standard. The TN788 transcodes, gain adjusts, and bridges the
audio bit streams demultiplexed by the TN787 (MMI) circuit pack and transmits
encoded, exclusive audio conference sums onto the TDM bus so that the MMI
can multiplex the audio, video, and data streams for the H.221 endpoints.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-478.

VC-BD Error Log Entries

Error
Type
1

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

1 (a)

Any

None

MIN

ON

18 (b)

0

busyout board PCSS

WNG

OFF

release board PCSS

257 (c)

Any

Control Channel Loop
Test (#52)

MIN

ON

test board PCSS r 20

513 (d)

4352 to
4357

0

test board PCSS sh r 1

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-BD

Page 10-1637

Table 10-478.
Error
Type

VC-BD Error Log Entries — Continued
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

769 (e)

4358

1025 (f)

4363

NPE Audit Test (#50)

1281 (g)

Any

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)

MAJ

ON

1293 to
1294 (h)

46088
to
46096

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)

MIN

ON

1538 (i)

46082

MIN

ON

Test to Clear Value

See note (g)

Continued on next page

1.

Run the short test sequence first. If all tests pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The circuit pack stopped functioning or it was removed from the system.
This alarm is logged approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack is
removed and/or the SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails.
To resolve this error, insert a circuit pack in the same slot as the error
indicates, if the circuit pack is not already in the system. Or, if the circuit
pack is in the system and the red LED is on, then follow instructions for
Red alarms.

! CAUTION:
If the TN788 Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) is not Vintage 2
or later, it must be replaced.
b. This circuit pack is busied out by the busyout board PCSS command.
c. Transient communication problems exist between the switch and this
circuit pack. Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the
repair procedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52).
d. The circuit pack detected an on-board hardware failure. The reported aux
data values correspond to the following detected errors:
Error
4352

Description
External RAM error

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-BD

Page 10-1638

4353

Internal RAM error

4355

ROM Checksum error

4357

Instruction set error

Reset the circuit pack by executing the busyout board PCSS, reset
board PCSS, and release board PCSS commands. When it is reset, the
circuit pack executes a set of tests to detect the presence of any of the
above faults. The detection of one these errors during initialization causes
the circuit pack to lock-up and appear insane to the system. See the
repair procedures in footnote (a) for error type 1.
e. The circuit pack detects a program logic error. While no action is required,
this error may lead to errors of other types being reported against this
circuit pack.
f. The circuit pack cannot update NPE memory and read it back. This error
type can be ignored, but it may lead to other error types being reported
against this circuit pack.
g. A critical hardware failure has been detected on the circuit pack. Use
busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, followed by release board
PCSS. If test #53 passes, the on-board circuitry is healthy. Use test board
PCSS long clear to retire the alarm. If test #53 fails, replace the circuit
pack.
h. The circuit pack detected a critical hardware failure. Reset the circuit pack
by issuing the busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, and release
board PCSS commands. If the Circuit Pack Restart Test (#594) passes,
then the on-board circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm by issuing the test
board PCSS long clear command. If the Circuit Pack Restart Rest (#594)
fails, replace the circuit pack.
The reported error types correspond to the following detected errors:
Error

Description

1293

On-board auxiliary processor insane

1294

Internal memory access error

i. The circuit pack is hyperactive — it is flooding the switch with messages
sent over the control channel. The circuit pack is taken out of service when
a threshold number of these errors is reported to the switch. Clear the
alarm by using busyout board PCSS, reset board PCSS, test board
PCSS long clear, and release board PCSS. If the error recurs within 10
minutes, then replace the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-BD

Page 10-1639

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Code

Order of Investigation
Control Channel Loop-Around Test (#52) (a)

1.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

X

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

! CAUTION:
If the TN788 Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) is not Vintage 2 or
later, it must be replaced.
Note:
a. Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port
Circuit Pack) maintenance documentation for a description of this test.

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit
Pack) maintenance documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52).

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1640

VC-DSPPT
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

VC-DSPPT

MAJOR

test port PCSSpp l r#

Voice Conditioner DSP Port

VC-DSPPT

MINOR

test port PCSSpp l r#

Voice Conditioner DSP Port

VC-DSPPT

WARNING

test port PCSSpp l r#

Voice Conditioner DSP Port

1.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier designation
(for example, A, B, C, or D); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack
is located (for example, 01, 02, ...).

Each Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) provides two types of resources:
1. Transcoder Resources used for encoding and decoding audio formats
2. Summer Resources used for summing audio from different sources
The eight Voice Conditioner DSP ports are the transcoder resources on the
VC-BD.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-479.
Error
Type
1

VC-DSPPT Error Log Entries
Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

18 (a)

0

busyout port PCSSpp

WNG

OFF

release port PCSSpp

257 (b)

Any

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

MIN

ON

test port PCSSpp 1 r 3

513 (c)

Any

VC DSP Port Local TDM
Loopback Test (#1104)

MIN

ON

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

778 to
781 (d)

Any

VC Port Reset DSP Test
(#1106)

MAJ

ON

See note (d)

WNG

ON

MIN

ON

0

1025 (e)
1281 (f)

Any

VC DSP Port DSP
Loopback Test #(1105)

test port PCSSpp sh r 3

3840 (g)

1.

Run the short test sequence first. If all test pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the
appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1641

Notes:
a. This port has been busied out by the busyout port PCSSpp command.
b. The VC DSP Port NPE Crosstalk Test(#1103) failed.
c. The VC DSP Port Local TDM Loopback Test(#1104) failed. Run the Long
Test Sequence.
d. A critical hardware failure has been detected on the circuit pack. Reset
the port by the busyout port PCSSpp and reset port PCSSpp
commands. If the VC Reset DSP Test (#1106) passes, then the on-board
circuitry is healthy. Retire the alarm with the test port PCSSpp long clear
command.
e. The VC DSP port reported loss of framing on the Service Channel between
the VC and MMI circuit packs.
f. The VC DSP Port DSP Loopback Test (#1105) failed.
g. The DSP corresponding to this port on the VC circuit pack reported a
firmware error. No action is required.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the DSP NPE Crosstalk Test, for example, you may
also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

DSP NPE Crosstalk Test (#1103)

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND*

X

D

TDM Loopback Test (#1104)

X

X

D

DSP Loopback Test (#1105)

X

X

D

* D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

VC DSP Port NPE Crosstalk Test (#1103)
This test is destructive.
The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing
functions. The NPE Crosstalk test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the
selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections
may be observed. This test is part of the port’s long test sequence and takes
approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Table 10-480.
Error
Code
1000
1001

Page 10-1642

TEST #1103 VC DSP Port NPE Crosstalk Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

0-3

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was transmitting in error. This causes noisy and
unreliable connections.
1. Replace circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test a
maximum of 10 times to make sure that it continues to pass.
2. If complaints still persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

VC DSP Port Local TDM Loopback Test (#1104)
This test is destructive.
This test verifies the connectivity of a VC DSP Port across the TDM bus. It aborts
if calls associated with the port are in progress. Failure of this test indicates an
on-board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack. The
Loopback Test runs the following tests:
1. A Looparound test across the TDM bus.
2. A conference Circuit Test.
The tests are run in the above order; if one test fails, an error code is returned
and the remaining tests in the sequence are not executed.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Figure 10-96.

Page 10-1643

VC Circuit Pack DSP Port Local TDM Loopback Test

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1644

Table 10-481. TEST #1104 VC DSPPT Local
TDM Loopback Test
Error
Code
1000
1001

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available, or the port is
busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The traffic load on the
system is very high, or time slots may be out-of-service due to TDM-BUS
errors. Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone Detector for the test. The system is
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone
Detectors are out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals.

1004

ABORT

The port is seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station
command for the station associated with this port and determine if the port
is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the VC-BD circuit pack within
the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, attempt to reset the port by using the
busyout port PCSSpp and reset port PCSSpp commands.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2103

ABORT

The system could not make the conference connection for the test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

0-3

FAIL

The TDM Loop Around Test failed.
1. Replace circuit pack.

4-7

FAIL

The Conference Circuit Test failed.
1. Replace circuit pack.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1645

Table 10-481. TEST #1104 VC DSPPT Local
TDM Loopback Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result
PASS

Description/Recommendation
The VC DSP Port Local TDM Loop Around Test passed.

Continued on next page

VC-DSP Port DSP Loopback Test (#1105)
This test is destructive.
This test verifies the connectivity of a VC-DSPPT across the TDM bus. It aborts if
calls associated with the port are in progress. Failure of this test indicates an
on-board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Figure 10-97.

Page 10-1646

VC Circuit pack DSP Port DSP Looparound Test

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1647

Table 10-482. TEST #1105 VC-DSP Port DSP Loopback Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available, or the port is
busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test, the traffic load on the
system is very high, or time slots are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to “TDM-BUS” to diagnose TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone Detector for the test, the system is
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone
Detectors are out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station
command for the station associated with this port and determine if the port
is available for testing
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received from the VC-BD circuit pack
within the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, reset the circuit pack if the other ports
are not in use by using the busyout port PCSSpp and reset port
PCSSpp commands.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.
1. Rerun the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

0, 1

FAIL

The VC-DSPPT DSP Loopback Test failed.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The VC DSPPT DSP Loopback Test passed

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-DSPPT

Page 10-1648

VC Port Reset DSP Test (#1106)
This test is destructive.
This test resets the VC-DSPPT and the DSP associated with it. As part of the reset
procedure, the VC-DSPPT will execute a series of self- tests on the hardware. If
these self- tests fail, the test will fail; otherwise the test will pass.
Before executing the test, the VC-DSPPT must be busied out by executing the
busy port PCSSpp command. After the completion of the test, the VC-DSPPT
must be released by executing the release port PCSSpp command.
Table 10-483. TEST #1106 VC Port Reset DSP Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available, or the port may
be busy with a call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1015

ABORT

The VC-DSPPT is not busied out.
1. Busy out the VC-DSPPT by executing the busy port PCSSpp command
and then retry the test.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test was not received from the VC-DSPPT within the
allowable time period.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources for this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The reset of the VC-DSPPT was unsuccessful.
1. Replace circuit pack.

PASS

The VC-DSPPT was successfully reset.
1. Release the VC-DSPPT by executing the reset port PCSSpp
command.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner DSP Port Level)

Page 10-1649

VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner
DSP Port Level)

MO Name (in
Alarm Log)
VC-LEV

Alarm
Level
MAJOR

Initial Command to Run
See ‘‘Resolving VC-LEV Errors/Alarms’’

Full Name of MO
VC-LEV

Enable the MMCH feature on the System-Parameters Customer-Options form
before changing the fields.
The Voice Conditioner (VC) Port Level MO monitors VC efficiency by tracking the
number of VC ports that are in-service, and then comparing that number with the
value entered in the VC field on the System-Parameters Maintenance form. This
VCs field is located under the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds section. The
VCs field contains the minimum number of VC ports needed for the Multimedia
Call Handling (MMCH) feature, and is an administrable field. The VCs field must
contain a number between 0 and 126, and is entered by the system
administrator. The MMCH feature must be enabled on the System-Parameters
Customer-Options form before the VCs field can be changed to a number
greater than 0. For example, administering 8 in that field means 1 circuit pack.
The algorithm for determining that a low level of VC resources exists uses the
number entered in the VCs field, and the number of VCs that are in-service in the
system.
Each VC circuit pack contains 16 physical ports: 8 ports are reserved for
VC-DSPPT ports, and the remaining 8 ports are designated as VC-SUMPT ports.
The 8 DSP ports are made up of 4 encoder and 4 decoder resources that
encode and decode audio formats. Thus, one VC circuit pack is required for
every 8 ports of MMCH port capacity. If the number of in-service VC ports falls
below the MMCH port capacity (value entered on the System-Parameters
Maintenance form under the Minimum Maintenance Thresholds section and in
the VCs field), a VEC-LEV error is logged. If this outage continues for 15 minutes
a MAJOR alarm is raised.

Resolving VC-LEV Errors/Alarms
VC ports are a key part of the MMCH feature, any loss in the number of ports
available for use degrades the MMCH customer defined service level.
If a VC circuit pack or port is busied out using the busyout board or busyout
port command, these out-of-service ports are not included in the VC level
calculation, thus allowing a technician to busy out a VC circuit pack for
maintenance reasons without causing a MAJOR alarm to be raised.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner DSP Port Level)

Page 10-1650

NOTE:
When diagnosing a VC-LEV problem, resolve any alarms raised against
VC-BD or VC-DSPPT maintenance objects. Clearing VC-BD or VC-DSPPT
alarms may clear the VC-LEV alarm.
The VC circuit pack is maintained by the software similarly to the Tone Detector
circuit pack. Tone Detector circuit packs may be removed and reinserted in any
port board slot without administration. The same rule applies to VC circuit packs.
If a VC circuit pack is removed from service logically (by failing the Archangel
sanity scan test) or is removed from service physically (by physically removing
the circuit pack from the carrier), no error/alarm is raised against VC-BD or
VC-DSPPT maintenance objects. Therefore, if a VC-LEV error/alarm exists, and
none has been raised against VC-BD or VC-DSPPT maintenance objects, a VC
circuit pack may have been removed from service causing the VC-LEV
error/alarm. To resolve a VC-LEV MAJOR alarm, restore the number of VC ports
available for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port capacity
(value entered in the VCs field).
To determine how many VC circuit packs are needed for the MMCH feature:
1. Display the System-Parameters Maintenance form by executing the
command display system-parameters maintenance.
2. Locate the number listed in the Minimum Maintenance Threshold (VCs)
field. The MMCH feature requires one VC circuit pack for each four ports
listed in the Minimum Maintenance Threshold (VCs) field.
3. Divide the Minimum Maintenance Threshold value by 8 to determine the
number of VC circuit packs needed. For example, a port capacity of 12
listed in the Minimum Maintenance Threshold (VCs) field would require 2
VC circuit packs.
4. Use the list configuration command to verify that the number of VC
circuit packs listed agrees with the required number of VC circuit packs
(determined in step 3). If the number of VC circuit packs listed in the step
3 differs from the calculated number, restore the number of VC circuit
packs to the correct value, in order to resolve the VC-LEV alarm.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-LEV (Voice Conditioner DSP Port Level)

Page 10-1651

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-484.
Error
Type
1 (a)

VC-LEV Error Log Entries
Aux
Data
Any

Associated Test
None

Alarm Level
MAJOR

On/ Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

OFF

Notes:
a. The number of VC resources in the system that are in service has fallen
below the calculated minimum value. If the number of in-service VC ports
falls below the MMCH port capacity (value entered in the Minimum
Maintenance Threshold VCs field on the system parameters maintenance
form), a VEC-LEV error is logged. If this outage continues for 15 minutes a
MAJOR alarm is raised. To resolve this alarm, correct the out-of-service
problem by following the procedures below:
1.See “VC-DSPPT” and “VC-BD” and resolve any associated alarms.
2.If a VC-LEV error/alarm exist and none has been raised against VC-BD
or VC-DSPPT maintenance objects, a VC circuit pack may have
been removed from service causing the VC-LEV error/alarm. To
resolve a VC-LEV MAJOR alarm, restore the number of VC ports
available for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port
capacity. See “Resolving VC-LEV ERRORS/ALARMS” for details.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Code
There are no System Technician-Demanded test for VC-LEV.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-SUMPT

Page 10-1652

VC-SUMPT
MO Name (in
Alarm Log)

Alarm
Level

Initial Command to
Run1

Full Name of MO

VC-SUMPT

MAJ

test port PCSS l r#

Voice Conditioner Summer Port

VC-SUMPT

MIN

test port PCSS l r#

Voice Conditioner Summer Port

VC-SUMPT

WNG

test port PCSS s r#

Voice Conditioner Summer Port

1.

Where UU is the universal cabinet number (1 for PPN and 2-44 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where
the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02, ...); and pp is the two digit port number (01,
02, 03, ...).

Each Voice Conditioner Circuit Pack (VC-BD) provides two types of resources:
1. Transcoder Resources that are used for encoding and decoding audio
formats
2. Summer Resources that are used for summing audio formats from
different sources.
The Voice Conditioner Summer ports (VC-SUMPT) are the summer resources on
the VC-BD. There are 8 such ports on a VC-BD.

Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values
Table 10-485.
Error
Type
0

1

18 (a)

VC-SUMPT Error Log Entries

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

0

Any

Any

Any

test port PCSSpp sh r 1

0

busyout port PCSS

WNG

OFF

release port PCSSpp

WNG

ON

test port PCSSpp sh

130 (b)
257 (c)

Any

Control Channel Loop
Test (#52)

MIN

ON

test board PCSSpp 1 r 3

513 (d)

Any

VC Summer Port Local
Loopback Test #(1100)

MIN

ON

test board PCSSpp sh r 3

1.

Run the short test sequence first. If all test pass, run the long test sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-SUMPT

Page 10-1653

Notes:
a. This port has been busied out with the busyout port PCSSpp command.
b. The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11
minutes. To clear the error, replace or reinsert the circuit pack.
c. The NPE Crosstalk Test(#1103) failed.
d. The VC Summer Port Local TDM Loopback Test(#1100) failed.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below. By clearing
error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around
Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the
testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) (a)
TDM Loopback Test (#1100)

1.

X

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND 1

X

D

X

D

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
This test is destructive.
The NPE Crosstalk test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the selected
time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections. If
the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections may be
observed. This test is part of the port’s long test sequence and takes
approximately 20 to 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-486. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available. The port may
be busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-SUMPT

Page 10-1654

Table 10-486. TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued
Error
Code

Test
Result

Description/Recommendation

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary resources to run this test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port was transmitting in error, causing noisy and
unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. To be sure that this is not an intermittent problem, repeat this test a
maximum of 10 times.
2. If complaints still persist, examine the station, connections, and wiring.

Continued on next page

VC Summer Port Local TDM Loopback
Test (#1100)
This test is destructive.
This test verifies the connectivity of a VC Summer Port across the TDM bus. It
aborts if calls associated with the port are in progress. Failure of this test
indicates an on-board fault associated with the port hardware on the circuit pack.
The Loopback Test runs the following tests:
■

A Looparound test across the TDM bus.

■

A conference circuit test.

The tests are run in the above order. If the first test fails, the switch returns an
error code, and the second test is not executed.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-SUMPT

Figure 10-98.

Page 10-1655

VC Circuit Pack Summer Port Loopback Test

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
VC-SUMPT

Page 10-1656

Table 10-487. TEST #1100 VC Summer Port
Local TDM Loopback Test
Error
Code
1000

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not available, or the port may
be busy with a valid call.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The traffic load on the
system is very high or time slots are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS errors.
Refer to TDM-BUS maintenance documentation to diagnose any active
TDM Bus errors.
1. If the system has no TDM-BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic,
repeat the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

1003

ABORT

The system could not allocate a Tone Detector for the test, the system is
oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present, or some Tone
Detectors are out-of-service.
1. Resolve any “TTR-LEV” errors.
2. Resolve any “TONE-PT” errors.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at 1-minute intervals a maximum
of 5 times.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use the status station
command for the station associated with this port to determine whether the
port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received from the VC-BD circuit pack
within the allowable time period.
1. If this result occurs repeatedly, reset the circuit pack if the other ports
are not in use. Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board
PCSS and the reset board PCSS commands.
2. If this result occurs again, replace the circuit pack.

2012

ABORT

Internal system error

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test.

2103

ABORT

The system could not make the conference connection for the test.
1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals a maximum of 5 times.

0

FAIL

The TDM Loop Around Test failed.

1

FAIL

The Conference Circuit Test failed.
1. Replace circuit pack.

PASS

The VC Summer Port Local TDM Loopback Test passed.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1657

WAE-PORT (Wideband Access
Endpoint Port)
MO Name As It
Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run

Full Name of MO

WAE-PORT1

MINOR

test access-endpoint
 l

Wideband Access
Endpoint Port

WAE-PORT

WARNING

test access-endpoint


Wideband Access
Endpoint Port

1.

For additional repair information, see also UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack)
Maintenance documentation.

The Wideband Switching capability supports end-to-end connectivity between
customer endpoints at data rates from 128 to 1536 kbps over T1 facilities and to
1984 kbps over E1 facilities. DEFINITY switching capabilities are extended to
support wideband calls comprised of multiple DS0s that are switched end-to-end
as a single entity.
The Wideband Switching capability extends the DEFINITY G3 Administered
Connections feature to include non-signaling Wideband Access Endpoints.
Endpoint application equipment with direct T1 or E1 interfaces may connect
directly to the switch’s line-side facilities. Application equipment without T1 or E1
interfaces requires a Terminal Adapter, such as a DSU/CSU. The terminal
adapter or endpoint application equipment is connected to the Universal DS1
circuit pack (TN464C). These endpoints are administered as Access Endpoints,
and they have no signaling interface to the switch. Instead, they simply transmit
and receive data. (Some applications detect and respond to the presence or
absence of data.) Calls are initiated from these endpoints using the Administered
Connections feature.
Multiple Access Endpoints on one line-side UDS1 circuit pack (TN464C) facility
are separate and distinct within the facility, and the endpoint application
equipment must be administered to send and receive the correct data rate over
the correct DS0s. All Administered Connections originating from Access
Endpoints use the entire bandwidth administered for the Access Endpoint. An
incoming call of a different data rate then that administered for the Access
Endpoint cannot be routed to the Access Endpoint.
Although Wideband Access Endpoints are used primarily for line-side facilities,
these endpoints can also be administered on network DS1 facilities to connect
DEFINITY to non-switched network services, such as the AT&T fractional T-1
service. An example of this is the AT&T Static Integrated Network Access, where
a trunk group to AT&T 4Ess Switched Services shares an access T-1 facility with
a Wideband Access Endpoint. In this case, the Wideband Access Endpoint is

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1658

connected to the AT&T fractional T-1 service, and it does not terminate on local
endpoint equipment but is connected to a far-end CPE (for example, another
DEFINITY PBX) via the dedicated fractional T-1. All Wideband Access Endpoint
functionality and operation is identical on both line-side and network facilities.
However, because maintenance capabilities are limited to the Wideband Access
Endpoint interface, and because faults can occur end-to-end, troubleshooting
procedures based on an end-to-end view of the network is required.
Wideband Access Endpoint Port maintenance provides a strategy for
maintaining a Wideband Access Endpoint Port via a port on the Universal DS1
interface circuit pack hardware. The maintenance strategy involves logging
Wideband Access Endpoint Port hardware errors, running tests for port
initialization, periodic and scheduled maintenance, system
technician-demanded tests, and alarm escalation and resolution. Two different
port service states are specified in the Wideband Access Endpoint Port
maintenance. These states include out-of-service, where the port is in a
deactivated state and cannot be used for calls, and in-service, where the port is
in an activated state and can be used for calls. If the Universal DS1 Interface
circuit pack (TN464C) is out-of-service, all ports on the Universal DS1 Interface
circuit pack (TN464C) are placed into the out-of-service state.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1659

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Wideband Access Endpoint Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

Test to Clear Value

01

0

Any

Any

Any

test access-endpoint
 sh r 1

18 (a)

0

busyout
access-endpoint

WARNING

OFF

release access-endpoint


130 (b)

None

WARNING

ON

test access-endpoint


1281 (c)

Conference Circuit
(Test #7)

MINOR

ON

test access-endpoint
 l r 4

1537 (d)

NPE Crosstalk Test
(#6)

MINOR

ON

test access-endpoint
 l r 3

1793 (e)

None

3840 (f)

1.

Any

test board PCSS long

Port Audit and
Update (Test #36)

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.

Notes:
a. The wideband access endpoint has been busied out by a busyout
access-endpoint  command. No calls can be made to this
extension.
b. The circuit pack has been removed, or it has been insane for more than 11
minutes. To clear the error, reinsert or replace the circuit pack.
c. The Conference Circuit Test (#7) failed on this port. See Test #7 for repair
procedures.
d. The NPE Crosstalk Test (#6) failed on this port. See Test #6 for repair
procedures.
e. There was a failure of the TN464C UDS1 Interface circuit pack. See
UDS1-BD Maintenance documentation for details.
f. The Port Audit and Update Test (#36) failed due to an internal system
error. Enter the status access-endpoint  command and
verify the status of the port. If the wideband access endpoint is
out-of-service, enter the release access-endpoint 
command to put it back to in-service. Retry the test command. If the test
continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1660

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the NPE
Crosstalk Test, for example, you may also clear errors generated from other tests
in the testing sequence.

Short Test
Sequence

Long Test
Sequence

D/ND1

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)

X

ND

Conference Circuit Test (#7)

X

ND

X

ND

Order of Investigation

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)

1.

X

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

NPE Crosstalk Test (#6)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464C UDS1 circuit pack has one
SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips). The NPE controls port
connectivity and gain, and it provides conferencing functions on a per-port
basis. The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port’s NPE channel talks on the
selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other
connections. If the NPE is not working correctly, one-way and noisy connections
may be observed. This test is usually only part of a port’s Long Test Sequence,
and it takes between 20 and 30 seconds to complete.
Table 10-488.
Error
Code

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Table 10-488.
Error
Code
1000

Page 10-1661

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status access-endpoint  command to
determine when the port is available for testing.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and if the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1001

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1002

ABORT

The system could not allocate time slots for the test. The
system may be under heavy traffic conditions, or it may
have time slots that are out-of-service due to TDM-BUS
errors. The status health command can be used to
determine if the system is experiencing heavy traffic.
Refer to TDM-BUS Maintenance documentation to
diagnose any active TDM-BUS errors.
1. If system has no TDM-BUS errors, and if it is not
handling heavy traffic, repeat the test at one minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Table 10-488.
Error
Code
1003

Page 10-1662

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the
test. The system may be oversized for the number of
Tone Detectors present, or some Tone Detectors may
be out-of-service. The list measurement tone-receiver
command displays information on the system’s tone
receivers.
1. Look for TTR-LEV errors in the Error Log. If errors are
present, refer to TTR-LEV Maintenance
documentation.
2. Look for TONE-PT errors in the Error Log. If errors
are present, refer to TONE-PT Maintenance
documentation.
3. If neither condition exists, retry the test at one minute
intervals a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1004

ABORT

The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status access-endpoint  command to
determine when the port is available for testing. The port
is available when it is in the in-service/idle state.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and if the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due either to a previously existing
error on the specific port or to a more general circuit
pack error.
1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this
port or the circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the
already existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Table 10-488.
Error
Code

Page 10-1663

TEST #6 NPE Crosstalk Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting
in error. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port is correctly using its allocated time slots.
1. User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by
examining the terminal adapter or the external
wiring.

Continued on next page

Conference Circuit Test (#7)
One or more Network Processing Elements (NPEs) reside on each circuit pack
with a TDM Bus interface. (The TN464C UDS1 circuit pack has one
SCOTCH-NPE chip instead of several NPE chips). The NPE controls port
connectivity and gain, and it provides conferencing functions on a per-port
basis. The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port
being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function. The NPE is
instructed to listen to several different tones and to conference the tones
together. The resulting signal is then measured by a Tone Detector port. If the
level of the tone is within a certain range, the test passes.
Table 10-489.
Error
Code

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1000

ABORT

System resources required to run this test are not
available. The port may be in use on a valid call. Use the
status access-endpoint  command to
determine when the port is available for testing.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Table 10-489.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-1664

TEST #7 Conference Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port has been seized by a user for a valid call. Use
the status access-endpoint  command to
determine when the port is available for testing. The port
is available when it is in the in-service/idle state.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, and if the port is not in
use, escalate the problem.

1020

ABORT

The test did not run due either to a previously existing
error on the specific port or to a more general circuit
pack error.
1. Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this
port or circuit pack, and attempt to diagnose the
previously existing error.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones
correctly. This causes noisy and unreliable connections.
Although wideband calls do not use the conferencing
feature on the NPE, this failure indicates problems with
the circuit pack hardware.
1. Replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The port can correctly conference multiple connections.
1. User-reported troubles on this port should be
investigated by using other port tests and by
examining the terminal adapter or the external
wiring.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
WAE-PORT (Wideband Access Endpoint Port)

Page 10-1665

Port Audit and Update Test (#36)
This test sends port level translation data from switch processor to the UDS1
Interface circuit pack to ensure that the wideband access endpoint port’s
translation is correct.
Table 10-490.
Error
Code

TEST #36 Audit and Update Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1006

ABORT

The port is out-of-service. If the port is busied out:
1. Issue release access-endpoint 
command to put the port back into in-service.
2. Retry the test command.
If the port is not busied out:
1. Check the error and alarm logs for WAE-PORT and
UDS1-BD errors and alarms. Follow the
recommended repair procedures.

2000

ABORT

Response to the test request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

Internal system error.
1. Retry the command at one minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

PASS

Port translation has been updated successfully.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1666

XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)
The Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance is a set of common tests used by all
the circuit packs with the generic hardware that interfaces with the TDM bus.
Circuit packs included in this category are listed on the following pages.
MO Name As
It Appears in
Alarm Log

Alarm
Level

Initial System
Technician
Command to Run1

Full Name of MO

XXX-BD2

MAJOR

test board PCSS

Common Port Circuit
Pack Maintenance

XXX-BD2

MINOR

test board PCSS

Common Port Circuit
Pack Maintenance

XXX-BD2

WARNING

test board PCSS

Common Port Circuit
Pack Maintenance

1.

2.

Where P is the port network number (1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN); C is the carrier
designation (for example, A, B, C, D, or E); and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier
where the circuit pack is located (for example, 01, 02,...etc.)
Refer to the appropriate circuit pack documentation to get the correct MO name
displayed in this field. It usually ends with BD.

Notes:
a. All circuit pack suffixes (B,C, D, etc.) are also supported by the XXX-BD
(Common Port Circuit Pack) Maintenance documentation.
b. The XXX-BD designation is also used in the SAT display in the case where
a reset board command is issued to a circuit pack type which is in
conflict to the actual circuit pack type administered for that slot or when a
reset board command is issued to an empty circuit pack slot.

When any of the Common Port Circuit Packs (except the TN754 Digital Line and
TN758 Pooled Modem circuit packs) are physically removed from the backplane,
no alarm is logged for approximately 11 minutes. In the case of the Digital Line
and Pooled Modem circuit packs, approximately 21 minutes elapse before an
alarm is logged. When a circuit pack that has been removed is alarmed, the
alarm type is minor and is classified as an on-board alarm. The time delay
permits maintenance activity to be performed without triggering an additional
alarm. An alarm is logged only against a Common Port Circuit Pack on
which ports have been administered. See the next Note.
NOTE:
In a heavily loaded system, the interval between the removal of a Common
Port Circuit Pack and the logging of the alarm may be several minutes
longer.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1667

XXX-BD Common Circuit Packs
The following list of circuit packs are listed by apparatus code, including circuit
packs used in non-United States installations. .
Table 491.

XXX-BD Common Circuit Packs

Apparatus Code

Name

Type

(TN566)
(TN567)

DEFINITY AUDIX R3 System

Port Assembly

(TN2208)

Call Visor ASAI over the DEFINITY (LAN) Gateway R1

Port Assembly

TN417

Auxiliary Trunk

Port

TN419B

Tone-Clock

Control

TN420B/C

Tone Detector

Service

TN429

Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) Trunk

Port

TN433

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN436B

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN437

Tie Trunk

Port

TN438B

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN439

Tie Trunk

Port

TN447

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN457

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN458

Tie Trunk

Port

TN459B

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN464C/ D/E/ F

DS1/E1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel - E1, 32 Channel

Port

TN465/B/C

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN467

Analog Line

Port

TN468B

Analog Line

Port

TN479

Analog Line

Port

TN497

Tie Trunk

Port

TN553

Packet Data Line

Port

TN556/B

ISDN-BRI 4-Wire S/T-NT Line (A-Law)

Port

TN570/B/C

Expansion Interface

Port

TN572

Switch Node Clock

Control

TN573/B

Switch Node Interface

Control

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)
Table 491.

Page 10-1668

XXX-BD Common Circuit Packs — Continued

Apparatus Code

Name

Type

TN574

DS1C - T1, 24 Channel

Port

TN577

Packet Gateway - G3r Only

Port

TN722B

Digital Signal Level 1 Tie Trunk

Port

TN725B

Speech Synthesizer

Service

TN726/B

Data Line

Port

TN735

MET Line

Port

TN742

Analog Line

Port

TN744

Call Classifier

Service

TN744/B/C

Call Classifier - Detector

Service

TN744D

Call Classifier - Detector - Multi-Country

Service

TN746/B

Analog Line

Port

TN747B

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN748/B/C/D

Tone Detector

Service

TN750/B

Announcement

Service

TN750C

Announcement

Service

TN753

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN754/B

Digital Line 4-Wire DCP

Port

TN755B

Neon Power Unit

Power

TN756

Tone Detector

Service

TN758

Pooled Modem

Port

TN760B/C/D

Tie Trunk

Port

TN762B

Hybrid Line

Port

TN763B/C/D

Auxiliary Trunk

Port

TN765

Processor Interface

Control

TN767B/C/D/E

DS1 Interface - T1, 24 Channel

Port

TN768

Tone-Clock

Control

TN769

Analog Line

Port

TN771D

Maintenance/Test

Service

TN772

Duplication Interface

Control

TN775/B

Maintenance

Service

TN776

Expansion Interface

Port

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)
Table 491.

Page 10-1669

XXX-BD Common Circuit Packs — Continued

Apparatus Code

Name

Type

TN777/B

Network Control

Control

TN778

Packet Control

Control

TN780

Tone-Clock

Control

TN786

Processor

Control

TN786B

Processor

Control

TN789

Radio Controller

Control

TN790

Processor

Control

TN791

Guest Line (16-Port Analog Line )

Port

TNCCSC-1

CCSC-1 PRI to DASS Converter

Port

TNCCSC-2

CCSC-2 ISDN PRI to DPNSS Converter

Port

TNPRI/BRI

PRI to BRI Converter

Port

TN2135

Analog Line

Port

TN2136

Digital Line 2-Wire DCP

Port

TN2138

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2139

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN2140/B

Tie Trunk

Port

TN2144

Analog Line

Port

TN2146

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk

Port

TN2147/C

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2149

Analog Line

Port

TN2180

Analog Line

Port

TN2181

Digital Line 2-wire DCP

Port

TN2182/B

Tone-Clock - Tone Detector and Call Classifier

Control

TN2183

Analog Line

Port

TN2184

DIOD Trunk

Port

TN2198

ISDN-BRI 2-Wire U Interface

Port

TN2199

Central Office Trunk

Port

TN2224

Digital Line, 24-Port, 2-Wire DCP

Control

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1670

Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear
Values
Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance Error Log Entries
Error
Type

Aux
Data

Associated Test

Alarm
Level

On/Off
Board

01

0

Any

Any

Any

1(a)

0

Circuit pack
removed or SAKI
Sanity Test (#53)

MINOR

ON

18(b)

0

busyout board
PCSS

WARNING

OFF

23(c)

0

None

WARNING

OFF

36 (d)

4368

none
None

MINOR

ON

0

None

WARNING

ON

257

65535

Control Channel
Test (#52)

MINOR

ON

257 (g)

Any

None

267 (f)

0

None

WARNING

ON

513 (h)

Any

None

MINOR

ON

769 (i)

4358

None

1025 (j)

4363

NPE Audit Test
(#50)

125 (e)
217 2

(f)

1281 (k)
1538 (l)

Any

1793 (m)

MINOR

ON

None

WARNING/
MINOR

ON

Neon Test (#220)

MINOR

ON

Any

None

3999 (o)

Any

None

1.
2.

test board PCSS sh r 1

release board PCSS

test board PCSS sh r 20

test board PCSS sh

test board PCSS l r 20

Ringing Application
Test (#51)

3840 (n)

Test to Clear Value

test board PCSS r 2

test board PCSS r 2

Run the Short Test Sequence first. If all tests pass, run the Long Test Sequence. Refer to the appropriate
test description and follow the recommended procedures.
G3iV1-1.286 or G3iV2-386 only

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1671

Notes:
a. This error indicates the circuit pack totally stopped functioning or it was
physically removed from the system. This error type is not applicable to
ANN-BD, DETR-BD, S-SYN-BD, M/T-BD, or CLSFY-BD.
NOTE:
The alarm is logged approximately 11 minutes after the circuit pack
has been removed and/or SAKI Sanity Test (#53) fails.
If the circuit pack is not in the system, insert a circuit pack (in the same
slot as the error indicates) to resolve this error. Or, if the circuit pack is in
the system and the red LED is on, follow the instructions for "Red (alarm)"
in the ‘‘Control and Port Circuit Pack Status LEDs’’ section in Chapter 7,
‘‘LED Interpretation’’ (See also the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’
section in Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’)
b. This error indicates the circuit pack has been busied out. Release the
circuit pack via release board PCSS.
c. The circuit pack has been logically administered but not physically
installed. The alarm should clear when the circuit pact is installed.
If the circuit pack is already installed:
1.Run test board PCSS long and look at any test failures or error codes
generated.
2.If the test does not clear error 23, then execute reset board PCSS and
run the long test again.
3.If the reset/test does not clear error 23, replace the circuit pack.
d. This error applies only to the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (TN771B or
TN771C). The error indicates that the hardware associated with the
Analog Trunk Testing port of the circuit pack failed to initialize. This port is
not used in G3iV1.1-286 or G3iV2-386. Note, however, that when this error
occurs, the Maintenance/Test circuit pack may report an invalid vintage.
Although this error is not service-affecting, the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack should be replaced.
e. A wrong circuit pack is inserted in the slot where this circuit pack is
logically administered. To resolve this problem, either remove the wrong
circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the
change circuit-pack command to readminister this slot to match the
circuit pack inserted.
f. This error applies to the Maintenance/Test circuit pack (TN771D), Tone
Detector (TN748B, TN748C, or TN748D), and Call Classifier (TN748)
circuit packs. For the Maintenance/Test circuit pack, the error indicates
that there is more than one Maintenance/Test circuit pack in the port
network. For the Tone Detector or Call Classifier packs, the error indicates
that there are more than 10 circuit packs in the system. Remove the circuit
pack against which the error is logged.

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1672

g. This error indicates transient communication problems with this circuit
pack. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
h. This error, when reported with Aux data in the range of 4352 to 4358,
indicates that the circuit pack has reported an on-board hardware failure.
The circuit pack continuously tests the hardware and report the results
approximately every 10 minutes. If the hardware problem is resolved, the
"leaky bucket" strategy should clear the alarm in approximately 30
minutes. However, if the alarm does NOT clear in 30 minutes, the circuit
pack should be replaced.
i. This error can be ignored, but look for other errors on this circuit pack.
j. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
k. This error indicates that no ringing current is detected. Run Test #51,
Ringing Application Test, and follow the procedures for Test #51. This
error is only applicable to Analog Line circuit packs.
l. The hyperactive circuit pack is out-of-service and may exhibit one or more
of the following symptoms:
1.The common circuit pack level tests such as Test #51 and/or Test #220
are aborting with error code 2000.
2.The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning with a
NO-BOARD.
3.A busyout/release of the circuit pack has no affect on test results.
4.A list configuration command shows that the circuit pack and ports are
properly installed.
If the XXX-BD is not a TN754 Digital Line Circuit Pack (DIG-BD), and if this
error happens again within 15 minutes, replace the circuit pack. If the
XXX-BD is a TN754 Digital Line Circuit Pack (DIG-BD), check the alarm
level. If the alarm level is a WARNING, this indicates that users are
probably causing the hyperactivity by playing with their digital stations. If
the circuit pack is really hyperactive, this alarm is upgraded to a MINOR
alarm within one hour. If the alarm level is a MINOR alarm, replace the
circuit pack. (Refer to the ‘‘Handling Control Circuit Packs’’ section in
Chapter 5, ‘‘Routine Maintenance Procedures’’.)
m. This error indicates that no neon current is detected. Run Test #220, Neon
Test, and follow the procedures for Test #220. This error is applicable only
to TN769 and TN746 Analog Line circuit packs.
n. This error is not service-affecting and no action is required.
o. Error type 3999 indicates that the circuit pack sent a large number of
control channel messages to the switch within a short period of time. If
error type 1538 is also present, then the circuit pack was taken
out-of-service due to hyperactivity. If error type 1538 is not present, then
the circuit pack has not been taken out-of-service, but it has generated
50% of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive. This may

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1673

be completely normal during heavy traffic periods. However, if this error
type is logged when the circuit pack is being lightly used, it may indicate a
problem with the circuit pack or the equipment attached to it.

System Technician-Demanded Tests:
Descriptions and Error Codes
Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when
inspecting errors in the system. By clearing error codes associated with the
Control Channel Loop Around Test, for example, you may also clear errors
generated from other tests in the testing sequence.

Order of Investigation

Short Test
Sequence

NPE Audit Test (#50)

Long Test
Sequence

Reset Board
Sequence

D/ND1

X

ND

Ringing Application Test
(#51) (a)

X

X

ND

Control Channel Loop
Around Test (#52)

X

X

ND

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
Neon Test (#220) (b)

1.

X
X

D

X

ND

D = Destructive; ND = Nondestructive

a. Only applicable to Analog Line circuit packs.
b. Only applicable to TN746 and TN769 Analog Line circuit packs.

NPE Audit Test (#50)
The system sends a message to the on-board microprocessor to update the
network connectivity translation for all the Network Processing Elements (NPEs)
on the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-492.
Error
Code

Page 10-1674

TEST #50 NPE Audit Test

Test Result

Description/ Recommendation

none or
2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not
available.

1019

ABORT

Test already in progress.

FAIL

Internal System Error.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

any

PASS

The circuit pack’s NPEs have been updated with
their translation.

EXTRA BD

Certain circuit packs have limitations on how
many circuit packs can be in the system or port
network such as the Maintenance/Test circuit
pack (TN771B or TN771C), the Tone Detector
circuit pack (TN748B, TN748C or TN748D) and
the Call Classifier (TN744). The Maintenance/Test
circuit pack allows only one circuit pack per port
network. The Tone Detector and Call Classifier
allow only 10 circuit packs in each system. All
additional circuit packs return EXTRA-BD and
should be removed.

NO BOARD

This is normal if the test is being done when (a)
the circuit pack is not physically in the system or
(b) the system is booting up. Otherwise, there is
some inconsistency between the physical
configuration and the data kept in the system.
1. Verify that the circuit pack is physically in the
system.
2. Verify that the system is not in a stage of
booting up.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for
a maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to return NO BOARD,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1675

Ringing Application Test (#51)
This test checks the ringing application circuitry common to all ports on an
Analog Line circuit pack.
Table 10-493.

TEST #51 Ringing Application Circuit Test

Error
Code

Test
Result

1000 or
2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run test.

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run test. The circuit pack is not installed. Internal System
Error.

ABORT

There was no response from the board.

2000

Description/ Recommendation

1. If error type 1538 (hyperactivity) is present in the
error log, follow the maintenance strategy that is
recommended for this error type.
2. Run the busyout board, reset board, and release
busy board commands,and then retest.
3. If the test still aborts, dispatch with the circuit pack.
4. Check the off-board wiring and the terminal, and, if
there are no problems found, replace the circuit
pack.
1004

ABORT

The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension. Use the
status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in
use, the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer to the
"Status Commands" section in Chapter 8, ‘‘Maintenance
Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’ for a full
description of all possible states.) You must wait until the
port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort and the port is idle,
escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-493.
Error
Code
1008

Page 10-1676

TEST #51 Ringing Application Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
Could not allocate a ringing circuit for one of the
following reasons: all the ringing circuits are in use; the
ringing generator is defective; ringing generator is not
wired correctly.
1. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN
error in Error Log.
a. If there are RING-GEN errors, refer to RING-GEN
Maintenance documentation and try to resolve
any problem(s). Go to Step 2.
b. If there are no RING-GEN errors, and the test
continues to abort, issue the test board PCSS
command on other TN742, TN769, or TN746
Analog circuit packs. If an ABORT with error code
1008 occurs for this test on other circuit packs as
well, the ringing generator may be defective or
may not be wired properly. Refer to RING-GEN
Maintenance documentation for details. If an
ABORT with error code 1008 does NOT occur on
the other ports, then all four ring generators are in
use. Exit from this documentation.
2. Retry the command.
3. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

FAIL

No ringing current is detected. The ringing application
circuitry on this circuit pack probably is not healthy.
1. Retry the command again.
2. If the test continues to fail, look for RING-GEN error
in Error Log.
a. If there are RING-GEN errors, refer to the
RING-GEN Maintenance documentation and try
to resolve any problem(s).
b. If there are no RING-GEN errors, replace the
circuit pack.
3. Retry the command again.
4. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-493.
Error
Code

any

Page 10-1677

TEST #51 Ringing Application Circuit Test — Continued

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

PASS

Ringing current is detected or this vintage of the Analog
Line circuit pack does not support the Ringing
Application Circuit Test. Analog Line circuit packs that
DO NOT support Test #51 include TN712 Vintage 13
and earlier and TN742 Vintage 3 and earlier.

NO
BOARD

This is normal if the test is being done when (a) the
circuit pack is not physically in the system or (b) the
system is booting up. Otherwise, there is some
inconsistency between the physical configuration and
the data kept in the system.
1. Verify that the circuit pack is physically in the
system. Verify that the system is not in a stage of
booting up. Retry the command at one-minute
intervals for a maximum of five times. If the test
continues to return NO BOARD, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Control Channel Loop Around Test (#52)
This test queries the circuit pack for its circuit pack code and vintage and verifies
its records.
Table 10-494.
Error
Code
none or
2100

TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test
Test
Result

ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

TEST #52 Control Channel Loop Around Test — Continued

Table 10-494.
Error
Code

Page 10-1678

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed because the circuit pack failed to return
the circuit pack code or vintage.
1. Retry the command for a maximum of 5 times.
2. If the test still fails, issue the busyout board, reset
board, and release busy board commands, and
then retest.
3. If the problem continues, replace the circuit pack.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

any

PASS

Communication with this circuit pack is successful.

EXTRA BD

This result should only appear for the TN771B or
TN771C Maintenance/Test circuit pack. More than one
circuit pack has been installed in this port network.
Remove this circuit pack.

NO
BOARD

This is normal if the test is being done when (a) the
circuit pack is not physically in the system or (b) the
system is booting up. Otherwise, there is some
inconsistency between the physical configuration and
the data kept in the system.
1. Verify that the circuit pack is physically in the
system.
2. Verify that the system is not in a stage of booting up.
3. ) Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to return NO BOARD, escalate
the problem.

Continued on next page

SAKI Sanity Test (#53)
This test is destructive.
This test resets the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Page 10-1679

This test is executed as part of the long test sequence only for the Tone-Clock
circuit pack and DS1 interface circuit packs. All other common circuit packs can
be reset via the reset board PCSS command. The reset command executes this
test.
Table 10-495.
Error
Code
none

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test

Test
Result

Description/ Recommendation

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1005

ABORT

Wrong circuit pack configuration to run this test. This
error applies only to DS1 interface circuit packs. It
means the DS1 interface circuit pack is providing timing
for the system and, therefore, it cannot be reset without
major system disruptions.
1. If the circuit pack needs to be reset, set
synchronization to another DS1 interface circuit
pack or the Tone-Clock circuit pack and try again.
Refer to SYNC (Synchronization) Maintenance
documentation.

1015

ABORT

Port is not out-of-service.
1. Busy out the circuit pack.
2. Execute command again.

2100

ABORT

System resources required for this test are not available.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to reset.

2

FAIL

The circuit pack failed to restart.
1. Execute command again.
2. If the problem persists, replace the circuit pack.

PASS

The circuit pack initializes correctly.
1. Run the Short Test Sequence.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-495.
Error
Code
any

Page 10-1680

TEST #53 SAKI Sanity Test — Continued

Test
Result
NO
BOARD

Description/ Recommendation
This is normal if the test is being done when (a) the
circuit pack is not physically in the system or (b) the
system is booting up. Otherwise, there is some
inconsistency between the physical configuration and
the data kept in the system.
1. Verify that the circuit pack is physically in the
system.
2. Verify that the system is not in a stage of booting up.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to return NO BOARD, escalate
the problem.

Continued on next page

Neon Test (#220)
This test checks the voltage required to light the neon lamp on an analog
terminal. A relay connects a 150V DC source from the backplane of the circuit
pack onto the voltage bus, and another relay connects a 2K shunt from the bus
to ground. Current in the line is then monitored to determine if the voltage is
present.
The neon test runs only for TN746 and TN769 Analog circuit packs. If the circuit
pack is not a TN746 or TN769, the test returns PASS, but there is no testing done
to the circuit pack.

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-496.
Error
Code
1004

Page 10-1681

TEST #220 Neon Test

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
The port was seized by a valid call during the test. The
test has been aborted. Use the display port PCSSpp
command to determine the station extension. Use the
status station command to determine the service state
of the port. If the service state indicates that the port is in
use, then the port is unavailable for certain tests. (Refer
to the "Status Commands" section in Chapter 8,
‘‘Maintenance Commands and Trouble-Clearing Aids’’
for a full description of all possible states.) You must wait
until the port is idle before retesting.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, escalate the problem.

1008

ABORT

Could not allocate a ringing circuit. Either all the ringing
circuits are in use, or the ringing generator is defective
or is not wired correctly.
1. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
2. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN
errors in the Error Log. If an ABORT 1008 occurs for
this test on other circuit packs as well, then the
ringing generator may be defective or is not wired
correctly (see errors for RING-GEN). If it doesn’t
occur on port test 48 for ANL-16-L, then all four ring
phases are in use.
3. If the test to continues to abort, escalate the
problem.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-496.
Error
Code
1018

Page 10-1682

TEST #220 Neon Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT

Description/ Recommendation
There are not any translated ports on the circuit pack, or
if there are ports, then none are administered to have
"neon."
1. Verify that there are ports administered on the circuit
pack. If no ports are administered, no further action
is required.
2. Make sure a TN755 or TN752 power unit circuit pack
is installed.
3. Verify that you have neon sets connected (AT&T sets
that may be neon sets are 500 and 2500 series, also
some non-AT&T may also be neon sets). If no neon
sets are connected to the circuit pack, the test
continues to abort, but no further action is required.
4. If there are no neon sets connected to the circuit
pack, at least one port needs to be translated with
neon. To check if a port is translated with neon, use
the display port PCSSpp command to determine
the station extension of any station on this circuit
pack. Use the display station  to
determine if the port is administered with neon. The
field "Message Waiting Indicator:" must be set to
"neon" for at least one of the administered ports. If
this field is not administered to "neon" the test
continues to abort. This is acceptable because not
all stations have neon lamps on their analog
terminals. If none of the terminals have neon lamps,
the the test continues to abort, but no further action
is required.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-496.
Error
Code
1018

Page 10-1683

TEST #220 Neon Test — Continued

Test
Result
ABORT
(cont’d.)

Description/ Recommendation
5. Retry the command again.
6. If the test continues to abort with neon translated
ports, escalate the problem.
7. Retry the command at one-minute intervals a
maximum of five times.
8. If the test continues to abort, look for RING-GEN
errors in the Error Log. If an ABORT 1008 occurs for
this test on other circuit packs as well, then the
ringing generator may be defective or is not wired
correctly (see errors for RING-GEN). If it doesn’t
occur on port test 48 for ANL-16-L, all four ring
phases are in use.
9. If the test to continues to abort, escalate the
problem.
10. Retry the command again.
11. If the test continues to abort with neon translated
ports, escalate the problem.

2000

ABORT

Response to the request was not received within the
allowable time period.

2100

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test.

ABORT

Could not allocate the necessary system resources to
run this test. Internal System Error.
1. If Error Type 1538 is present in the Error Log, follow
the recommended maintenance strategy.

Continued on next page

Issue 1
April 1997

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack)

Table 10-496.
Error
Code

Page 10-1684

TEST #220 Neon Test — Continued

Test
Result
FAIL

Description/ Recommendation
The test failed because no neon current was detected.
1. Determine if there is a TN755 or TN752 power unit
circuit pack installed in the same carrier as the
TN746 or TN769 analog line circuit pack that failed
the test. Look for the failure of test 220 on other
TN746 or TN769 circuit packs in the carrier. If test
220 fails on the other circuit packs, replace the
TN755 or TN752 power unit circuit pack.
2. Retry the command again.
3. If the test continues to fail, replace the circuit pack.
4. Retry the command again.
5. If the test continues to fail, escalate the problem.

any

PASS

This circuit pack is a TN746 or TN769 Analog Line
circuit pack and the neon current is detected. This test
also returns PASS for circuit packs that are not TN746 or
TN769 circuit packs, but the test is not run on the circuit
pack and the results of this test can be ignored.

NO
BOARD

This is normal if the test is being done when (a) the
circuit pack is not physically in the system or (b) the
system is booting up. Otherwise, there is some
inconsistency between the physical configuration and
the data kept in the system.
1. Verify that the circuit pack is physically in the
system.
2. Verify that the system is not in a stage of booting up.
3. Retry the command at one-minute intervals for a
maximum of five times.
4. If the test continues to return NO BOARD, escalate
the problem.

Continued on next page

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si 555-230-123

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-1

Index
Numerics

IN

120A ICSU, 5-74
2900/715 BCS, 3-1
715 BCS, 3-1

A
ACA, see Automatic Circuit Assurance
administration
logins, 3-3, 3-10
terminals, 3-1
air filters, 5-36
alarm logs, 1-1, 10-1
alarm origination
disable procedure, 5-22, 5-29
Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers, 8-60
alarms
classifications, 1-2
error reporting, 1-2
logs, 1-1, 3-2, 10-1
major, 1-2
minor, 1-2
off-board, 1-2
on-board, 1-2
warning, 1-2
American National Standards Institute, see ANSI
analog
carrier signal, 1-7
analog port
insertion loss, 1-15
Analog Tie Trunk Back-to-Back testing, 5-47
analog transmission by a modem, 1-7
analog-to-analog
echo path delay, 1-17
frequency response, 1-14
intermodulation distortion, 1-15
peak noise level, 1-17
quantization distortion loss, 1-16
analog-to-digital
coder/decoder, 1-7
frequency response, 1-14
intermodulation distortion, 1-15
peak noise level, 1-17
quantization distortion loss, 1-16
announcements, recorded, 5-15
ANSI, 1-13
application protocols, 1-11 to 1-17
Asynchronous Data Unit
proprietary signal, 1-7
attendant consoles, LEDs, 7-5
AUDIX circuit pack (ADXDP-BD), 10-20
AUDIX digital port (ADXDP-PT), 10-21
Automatic Circuit Assurance (ACA), 5-38

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-2

B
background tests, 1-3
fixed interval, 1-3
scheduled, 1-3
batteries, 5-36
Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks, 5-39

C
cabinets
configurations, 2-6
capabilities, system, 1-3 to 1-17
carrier lead appearances
110 cross-connect field, 5-50
carrier power units, LEDs, 7-5
CEPT1, 1-7
character code
8-bit, 1-7
characteristics, transmission, 1-13 to 1-17
circuit packs
duplication, 7-3
duplication interface indicators, 7-4
failures on the packet bus, 9-6
Generic 3r, 2-1
maintenance, 7-2
packet bus, 9-1
processor, 7-1
status LEDs, 7-7
TN2036 voltage range, 5-62
TN464, 10-528
TN722, 10-528
TN767, 10-528
TN768, 10-1410
TN780, 10-1410
universal DS1 (UDS1) interface, 10-528
clocks, system, 10-1410
CODEC, 1-7
coder/decoder, analog-to-digital, see CODEC
codes
service, 1-17
cold starts
with translations loading, 4-3
without translations loading, 4-2
command lines, 3-24
Command Permissions Categories form, 3-12
commands
categories, 3-3
companding, 10-1483
Conference, Transfer, and Call-Forwarding Denial, 1-11
configurations
cabinets, 2-6
hardware, 2-1, 8-173
list command, 8-173
connectivity
rules, 1-9
connectivity, packet bus, 9-4
control and port circuit pack status LEDs, 7-5

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-3
control carrier power units, 5-9
control circuit packs
expansion port networks (EPNs), 5-3
PPN, 5-1
replacing, 5-2
reseating, 5-2
unseating, 5-2
CO-trunk-to-digital interface frequency response, 1-14
country codes, 10-1483
cursor keys, 3-2

D
data
service unit, 1-6
Data Communications Equipment, see DCE
data terminal equipment, 1-3
data-link layer, OSI, 1-4
DCE, 1-3
D-channel
protocol, 1-3
DCP, 1-6
DEC VT220 terminals, 3-28
DEFINITY LAN Gateway
restart procedure, 5-25
shut down procedure, 5-23
delay, echo path, 1-17
demand tests, 1-3
diagnostic tests, 4-2
Digital Multiplexed Interface, 1-7
digital port
insertion loss, 1-15
Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1), 1-7
digital-to-analog
peak noise level, 1-17
quantization distortion loss, 1-16
digital-to-digital
echo path delay, 1-17
Disconnect Supervision, 1-10
display alarms command, 4-8
distortion
intermodulation, 1-15
quantization loss, 1-16
DS1
CO trunk (CO-DS1), 10-498
interface circuit packs, 10-528
option jumpers, 10-1530
signaling, 10-528
DS1 Circuit Pack form, 10-1530
DS1 loopback, 5-69
DS1 span, 5-70, 5-71
DS1 span test, 5-71
DS1 span, T1, 5-69
DSO frequency response, 1-14
DSU, see Data Service Unit
DTE, see data terminal equipment
duplication circuit packs, 7-3
duplication interface, 4-11
duplication interface circuit packs

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-4
indicators, 7-4
LEDs, 7-3

E
E&M mode tests, 5-47
echo path delay, 1-17
Echo-Return Loss, 1-17
editing keys, 3-2
EIA, 1-13
electromagnetic compatibility standards, xxii
Electronic Industries Association, see EIA
ERL, see Echo-Return Loss
error
control, 1-4
error logs, 1-1
error reporting, 1-2
errors
logs, 1-1
reporting, 1-2
European conference of postal and telecommunications rate 1, see CEPT1
European Union Standards, xxiii
expansion interface circuit packs
expansion port networks (EPNs), 5-4
expansion port networks (EPNs)
control circuit packs, 5-3
expansion interface circuit packs, 5-4

F
Facility Interface Code, 1-18
Facility Test Calls, 5-39
system access tones, 5-44
System Tone Test Call, 5-44
Time Slot Test Call, 5-41
Touch-Tone (DTMF) Receiver Test Call, 5-41
Trunk Test Call, 5-40
fan sub-assembly, 5-13
fans, 5-13
FCC, 1-17
feature capacities, 1-3 to 1-17
Federal Communications Commission, see FCC
FIC, see Facility Interface Code
First OSS Telephone Number, 8-60, 8-142
flow control, 1-4
Forced Password Aging, 3-3
frequency response
analog-to-analog, 1-14
analog-to-digital, 1-14

G
Global AC MCC (J58890CH), 10-1131

H
hardware

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-5
configurations, 2-1
power, 2-1
holdover battery, 2-7

I
ID, xx
impedances
loop in, 1-17
termination, 1-17
INADS
register system, 5-27, 5-35
insertion loss, 1-15
interface
physical, 1-6
intermodulation distortion, 1-15
intervening switching systems, 1-9
ISDN
BRI definition, 1-6
D-channel treatment, 1-3
PRI definition, 1-6
ISDN-PLK, 10-779
ISDN-PRI
troubleshooting, 5-54
troubleshooting test call problems, 5-58

J
jacks, network, 1-19

K
keyboards, 3-2
keys
cursor, 3-2
DEC VT220 terminals, 3-28
editing, 3-2
transaction, 3-2

L
LAN Gateway, see DEFINITY LAN Gateway
layers, protocol, 1-6
LEDs
alarms, 7-1
attendant consoles, 7-5
carrier power units, 7-5
control and port circuit pack status, 7-5
definition, 7-1
duplication interface circuit pack, 7-3
indicators on maintenance/processor circuit packs, 7-1
maintenance circuit pack, 7-1
power distribution units, 7-5
processor circuit pack, 7-1
LGATE-BD, 10-148
logging in, 3-3
Login Administration screen, 3-10

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-6
login IDs, 3-3
login procedure, 3-3
Login Prompt form, 3-22
logins
administering command permissions, 3-12
administration, 3-10
changing attributes, 3-11
removing, 3-7
security, 3-3
testing, 3-7
logoff screen, 3-6, 8-231
loop input impedances, 1-17
loopback jack, 5-69
loss
echo return, 1-17
insertion, 1-15
quantization distortion, 1-16
single-frequency, 1-17

M
maintenance
architecture, 1-1
background testing, 1-3
circuit packs, 7-2
interfaces, 3-1
on-site, 9-2
packet bus, 9-7
packet bus software, 9-8
preventative logs, 5-36
preventative procedures, 5-36
procedures, 5-1
remote, 9-2
subsystem, 1-1
system’s overall functions, 1-1
testing, 1-2
maintenance object repair procedures
ANL-16-L (16-Port Neon Analog Line), 10-45
ANL-BD (Analog Line Circuit Pack), 10-64
ANL-LINE (8-Port Analog Line), ANL-NE-L (8-Port Neon Analog Line), 10-65
ANN-BD (Announcement Circuit Pack), 10-86
ANNOUNCE (Announce), 10-122
ANN-PT (Announcement Port), 10-107
BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port), ABRI-PORT (ASAI ISDN-BRI Port), 10-158
BRI-SET, ASAI-ADJ, BRI-DAT, 10-186
CABINET (Cabinet Sensors), 10-224
CARR-POW (Carrier Port Power Unit) for DC-Powered Systems, 10-281
CLSFY-BD (Call Classifier Circuit Pack), 10-298
CLSFY-PT (Call Classifier Port), 10-299
CO-BD (Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack), 10-306
CO-DS1 (DS1 CO Trunk), 10-307
CONFIG (System Configuration), 10-361
DID-BD (Direct Inward Dial Trunk Circuit Pack), 10-427
DID-DS1 (DS1 DID Trunk), 10-428
DID-TRK (DID Trunk), 10-443
DIG-BD (Digital Line Circuit Pack), 10-465
DIG-LINE (Digital Line), 10-466
DIOD-TRK (DIOD Trunk) [G1.2SE], 10-513
DTMR-PT [Dual Tone Multifrequency Port (TTR)], 10-601

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-7
ERR-LOG (Error Log), 10-643
ETR-PT (Enhanced Tone Receiver Port), 10-645
EXT-DEV ADMIN? Y (External Device Alarm), 10-713
HYB-LINE (Hybrid Line), 10-736
M/T-BD (Maintenance-Test Circuit Pack) [G3iV1.1-286, G3iV2-386], 10-962
M/T-DIG (Maintenance-Test Digital Port) [G3iV1-1.286, G3iV2-386], 10-963
M/T-PKT (Maintenance-Test Packet Bus Port) [G3iV1.1-286, G3iV2-386], 10-978
MET-LINE (MET Line), 10-876
MODEM-PT (Modem Pool Port), 10-908
OPS-LINE (DS1 OPS Line), 10-983
PDMODULE, TDMODULE (Data Module), 10-1001
RING-GEN (Analog Ring Generator), 10-1197
S-SYN-BD (Speech Synthesis Circuit Pack), 10-1208
S-SYN-PT (Speech Synthesis Port), 10-1209
SVC-SLOT (Service Slot), 10-1308
TIE-TRK (Tie Trunk), 10-1448
TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack), 10-1480
TONE-PT (Tone Generator), 10-1501
TSC-ADM (Administered Temporary Signaling Connections) [G3iV1.1-286, G3iV2-386], 10-1514
TTR-LEV (TTR Level), 10-1522
UDS1-BD (UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack), 10-1527
XXX-BD (Common Port Circuit Pack), 10-1666
maintenance objects (MOs)
definition, 1-1
maintenance/test analog port (M/T-ANL), 10-949
management terminals, 3-1
Manager G3MT terminals, 3-1
Manager I terminals, 3-1
measurements
security, 3-3
memory cards
errors, 5-17
failures, 5-17
mismatch of signals, 1-9
Modem Connection, 8-67, 8-148

N
network
jacks, 1-19
network control circuit packs, 5-3
network interface, 5-74
noise
peak level, 1-17

O
on-site maintenance, 9-2
Open System Interconnect model, 1-4
data-link layer, 1-4
physical layer, 1-4
option jumpers
TN464, 10-1530
universal DS1 (UDS1) circuit packs, 10-1530
OSI, see Open System Interconnect model
OSS Numbers field, 8-59

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-8

P
Packet bus, 10-780
packet bus
circuit pack failures, 9-6
circuit packs, 9-1, 9-5
connectivity, 9-4
fault correction procedures, 9-9
fault Isolation/correction, 9-1
fault isolation/correction tools, 9-3
maintenance, 9-7
maintenance objects (MOs), 9-5
maintenance software, 9-8
TDM bus, 9-7
Password Expiration screen, 3-5
passwords
security, 3-3
PBX standard RS-464A, 1-13
PCM-encoded analog signal, 1-7, 1-10
peak noise level, 1-17
performance, 1-3 to 1-17
echo-return loss, 1-17
single-frequency return loss, 1-17
physical
layer, OSI, 1-4
PKT-BUS, 10-780
port-to-port insertion loss, 1-15
power
controls, 2-6
options available, 2-6
removing, 5-4
restoring, 5-6
service interruptions, 2-7
supplies, 5-13
power distribution units
LEDs, 7-5
power supply sub assemblies, 5-10
preventative maintenance
logs, 5-36
procedures, 5-36
Preventive Maintenance log, 5-36
PRI, 1-6
PRI endpoint problems
troubleshooting, 5-56
private line service codes, 1-17
procedures
restart
DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 5-25
shut down DEFINITY LAN Gateway, 5-23
protocols
8-bit character code, 1-7
ADU, 1-7
analog, 1-7
BRI, 1-6
CEPT1
DCP, 1-6
Digital Multiplexed Interface, 1-7
for applications, 1-11 to 1-17
layers, 1-6

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-9
PRI, 1-6
summary of states, 1-8
system, 1-3
voice-grade data, 1-7

Q
quantization distortion loss, 1-16

R
rear panel connector, 1-19
reboots, 4-1
recorded announcements, saving, 5-15
registering system with INADS, 5-27, 5-35
Release 5vs units
replacing components, 5-10
reliability systems, 6-1
remote maintenance, 9-2
REN, see ringer equivalency numbers
reset system 1, 4-2
reset system 2, 4-2
reset system 3, 4-3
reset system 4, 4-4
reset system 5, 4-5
ringer equivalency numbers, 1-19
RS-232
interface, 1-6
RS-449
physical interface, 1-6
RS-464A, 1-13
rules, connectivity, 1-9

S
safety precautions, xx
Save Announcements screen, 5-17
Save Translation screen, 5-16
screen forms, 3-24
Second OSS Telephone Number, 8-60, 8-142
security
logins, 3-3
measurements, 3-3
passwords, 3-3
service
codes, 1-17
SFRL, see single-frequency return loss, 1-17
signals
mismatch, 1-9
PCM-encoded analog, 1-10
simplex mode tests, 5-52
single-frequency return loss, 1-17
software upgrades
G3MT output, duplex systems, 5-28
standard reliability (simplex) systems, 5-19
systems with high or critical reliability, duplex, 5-27
systems without high or critical reliability, 5-19
specifications, 1-3 to 1-17

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-10
SPE-down mode, 4-8
SPE-interchange, 4-7
standard reliability systems, 3-1
standby SPE, 4-7
station-to-CO trunk frequency response, 1-14
station-to-digital interface frequency response, 1-14
station-to-station frequency response, 1-14
summary of protocol states, 1-8
switch
transmission characteristics, 1-13 to 1-17
Switch-Based Bulletin Board, 3-25
synchronization, 1-4
system
insertion loss, 1-15
protocols, 1-3
quantization distortion loss, 1-16
specifications, 1-3 to 1-17
system access tones
Facility Test Calls, 5-44
system features
troubleshooting system resources, 5-37
system reboots, 4-4, 4-5
system resets
reasons for, 4-1
System Tone Test Call, 5-44

T
T1 DS1 span, 5-69
tape drive heads, 5-36
TDM bus
clocks, 10-1410
packet bus, 9-7
TDM bus clock (TDM-CLK), 10-1410
technical specifications, 1-3 to 1-17
terminal
equipment port wiring, 1-17
terminals
2900/715 BCS, 3-1
715 BCS, 3-1
administration, 3-1
DEC VT220, 3-28
keyboards, 3-2
management, 3-1
Manager G3MT, 3-1
Manager I, 3-1
Terminating Trunk Transmission (TTT)
tests, 5-54
termination impedances, 1-17
testing
background, 1-3
demand, 1-3
maintenance, 1-2
tests
analog tie trunk back-to-back, 5-47
E&M mode, 5-47
logins, 3-7
simplex mode, 5-52
Terminating Trunk Transmission (TTT), 5-54

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-11
tests and audits
#11 Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test, 10-487
#1201 Digital Terminal Remote Loop Around Test, 10-478
#1209 Board Loopback Test, 10-571
#1209 DS1 Board Loopback Test, 10-571
#1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test, 10-574, 10-575
#1211 CSU Repeater Loopback Test, 10-577, 10-578
#1212 CPE Loopback Jack Test, 10-582
#1213 Far CSU Loopback Test, 10-586
#1214 One-Way Span Test, 10-589
#1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test, 10-593
#1216 End Loopback/Span Test, 10-595
#122 Cabinet Temperature Query Test [Non-Variable Speed Fans], 10-233
#1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test, 10-598
#126 Power Unit Recycle Test, 10-274, 10-292
#127 Power Unit Query Test, 10-276, 10-294
#13 Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test, 10-489, 10-632
#135 Internal Loop Around Test, 10-543, 10-1549
#138 Loss of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-545, 10-546, 10-1554
#139 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-552
#139 Red Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-555
#140 Red Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-554
#140AY Loop Around Test, 10-99
#141 Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-557, 10-558
#142 Major Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-560, 10-1578
#143 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-563, 10-1583
#144 Slip Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-565
#145 Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test, 10-567
#146 Translation Update Test, 10-570
#148 TDM Bus Clock Circuit Status Inquiry Test, 10-1417
#149 TDM Bus Clock Slip Inquiry Test, 10-1418
#150 TDM Bus Clock PPM Inquiry Test, 10-1419
#151 TDM Bus Clock Parameter Update Test, 10-1421
#16 DIG-LINE Station Lamp Updates Test, 10-493, 10-635
#161 Loop Around Test, 10-60, 10-166
#17 Station (Digital) Audits Test, 10-496
#205 Channel Administration Memory Array (CAMA) Test, 10-112
#206 Playback Speech Memory Array (PSMA) Test, 10-115
#208 Angel-Speech Processor (SP) Handshake Test, 10-95
#209 Announcement Checksum Test, 10-96
#211 Super Frame Match Inquiry Test, 10-103
#212 Clock Match Inquiry Test, 10-104
#222 140AY Channel Sanity Inquiry Test, 10-120
#270 Clear Error Counters, 10-146, 10-185
#314 DS1 CO Dial Tone Seizure Test, 10-509
#314 DS1CO Dial Tone Seizure Test, 10-323
#35 Battery Feed Test, 10-53, 10-72
#36 Port Audit and Update Test, 10-320, 10-508
#36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test, 10-74
#36 Station Status and Translation Audits and Updates Test (#36), 10-55
#40 Tone Generator Transmission Test, 10-1506
#42 Tone Detection Verification Test, 10-301
#46 Clock Health Inquiry Test, 10-1498
#47 Loop Around and Conference Test, 10-77
#48 Station Present Test, 10-56, 10-82
#50 NPE Connection Audit Test, 10-538, 10-1544
#52 Control Channel Loop Around Test, 10-539
#53 SAKI Sanity Test, 10-541, 10-1547
#574 Board Type Check Test, 10-1421
#595 LANBIC Receive Parity Error Counter Test, 10-155

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-12
#6 NPE Crosstalk Test, 10-48, 10-68, 10-311, 10-503
#618 BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around, 10-141, 10-169
#619 BRI Port Local TDM Loop Around, 10-172
#620 Electronic Power Feed Restoral, 10-175
#621 Level 1 Status Inquiry, 10-143, 10-177
#622 Electronic Power Feed Inquiry, 10-181
#624 Layer 1 Transmission Error Counter Test, 10-144, 10-145, 10-183
#625 Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test, 10-184
#626 Signaling Link Status Test, 10-136, 10-201
#627 BRI Remote Loop Back, 10-205
#628 BRI XID, 10-210
#629 BRI Layer 3 Query, 10-214
#630 BRI Set Audits, 10-218
#651 Standby Reference Health Check Test, 10-1422
#7 Conference Circuit Test, 10-50, 10-315, 10-506
#844-848 Transmission Test, 10-355, 10-1474
#9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test, 10-483, 10-630
Time Slot Test Call, 5-41
TN2036 circuit packs, 5-62
TN2182 circuit packs
international settings, 10-1483
time division multiplex (TDM) bus clocks, 10-1410
TN464 circuit packs
DS1 interface, 10-528
option jumpers, 10-1530
TN722 circuit packs, 10-528
TN767 circuit packs, 10-528
TN768 circuit packs
international settings, 10-1483
time division multiplex (TDM) bus clocks, 10-1410
TN780 circuit packs
international settings, 10-1483
time division multiplex (TDM) bus clocks, 10-1410
TN790, 4-4, 6-19, 6-24
tone-clock circuit packs
international settings, 10-1483
time division multiplex (TDM) bus clocks, 10-1410
tones
Italian, 10-1483
Touch-Tone (DTMF) Receiver Test Call, 5-41
transaction keys, 3-2
Transfer on Ringing, 1-11
transmission
characteristics, 1-13 to 1-17
errors, 1-4
stream, 1-4
trouble-clearing, 10-1
troubleshooting
backplane voltage problems, 5-62
control carrier power units, 5-9
ISDN-PRI problems, 5-54
ISDN-PRI test call problems, 5-58
PRI endpoint problems, 5-56
Trunk Group Busy/Warning Indicators to Attendant, 5-39
Trunk Group form , 5-48
Trunk Identification by Attendant, 5-39
trunk speed, 1-10
Trunk Test Call, 5-40
trunking facilities, 1-9
TTI

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-13
enable procedure, 5-26, 5-35
TTT, see Terminating Trunk Transmission (TTT)

U
universal DS1 (UDS1) circuit packs
option jumpers, 10-1530
universal DS1 (UDS1) interface circuit packs, 10-528

V
V.35, 1-6
voice-grade
data, 1-7
voltages, 5-62

W
warm starts, 4-2
wiring
premises, 1-17
terminal equipment ports, 1-17

DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5
Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

Issue 1
April 1997

Index

Page IN-14

Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 1 of 2)

(continued). Processing of Packet Bus Problems (Page 2 of 2)



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 2643
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Keywords                        : 
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Subject                         : 
Producer                        : 
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:07 07:10:39-06:00
Creation Date                   : 0-01-01T00:00:00Z
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:07 07:10:39-06:00
Create Date                     : 0-01-01T00:00:00Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:07 07:10:39-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
Description                     : 
Title                           : DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 5 Maintenance and Test for R5vs/si

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools